Today's Hours: 8:00am - 6:00pm

Books

all 1444 "M" titles
  • Digital/Print
    Tamás Röszer.
    Summary: Macrophages are core components of the innate immune system. Once activated, they may have either pro- or anti-inflammatory effects that include pathogen killing, safe disposal of apoptotic cells or tissue renewal. The activation state of macrophages is conceptualized by the so-called M1/M2 model of polarization. M2 macrophages are not simply antagonists of M1 macrophages; rather, they represent a network of tissue resident macrophages with roles in tissue development and organ homeostasis. M2 macrophages govern functions at the interfaces of immunity, tissue development and turnover, metabolism, and endocrine signaling. Dysfunction in M2 macrophages can ruin the healthy interplay between the immune system and metabolic processes, and lead to diseases such as insulin resistance, metabolic syndrome, and type 1 and 2 diabetes mellitus. Furthermore, M2 macrophages are essential for healthy tissue development and immunological self-tolerance. Worryingly, these functions of M2 macrophages can also be disrupted, resulting in tumor growth and autoimmunity. This book comprehensively discusses the biology of M2 macrophages, summarizes the current state of knowledge, and highlights key questions that remain unanswered.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction. What is an M2 macrophage? Historical overview of the macrophage polarization model. The Th1/Th2 and M1/M2 paradigms, the arginine fork
    Chapter 2. Evolutionary origin of the M2 macrophage activation: invertebrates
    Chapter 3. Evolution of M2 macrophage functions in chordates
    Chapter 4. Signal mechanisms of M2 macrophage activation
    Chapter 5. Mechanisms which control the size of M2 macrophage-dominated tissue macrophage niches
    Chapter 6.Immune functions of the M2 macrophages: host defense, self-tolerance and autoimmunity
    Chapter 7. M2 macrophages in the integument and in the musculoskeletal system
    Chapter 8. M2 macrophages in the circulatory-, respiratory and excretory organs
    Chapter 9. M2 macrophages in the metabolic organs and in the neuroendocrine system
    Chapter 10. Practical approaches in M2 macrophage biology: analysis, pharmacology and didactical interpretation of M2 macrophage functions.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QR185.8.M3 R67 2020
    1
  • Digital/Print
    [editors] O. John Ma, James R. Mateer, Robert F. Reardon, Scott A. Joing.
    Contents:
    Training and program development / Timothy Jang, Michael J. Lambert
    Equipment / William Scruggs, J. Christian Fox
    Physics and image artifacts / Corky Hecht, William Manson
    Ultrasound in prehospital and austere environments / William Heegaard
    Trauma / O. John Ma, James R. Mateer, Andrew W. Kirkpatrick
    Cardiac / Robert F. Reardon, Scott A. Joing
    Pulmonary / Lisa Mills, Fernando Silva
    Critical care / Robert Reardon, Gavin Budhram, and David Plummer
    Abdominal aortic aneurysm / Robert F. Reardon, Dave Plummer, Thomas Cook
    Hepatobiliary / Daniel Theodoro, Resa Lewiss
    General surgery / Masaaki Ogata
    Renal / Stuart Swadron, Dina Seif
    Testicular / Srikar Adhikari
    First trimester pregnancy / Robert F. Reardon, Scott A. Joing
    Second and third trimester pregnancy / Barry Knapp, Don Byars
    Gynecologic concepts / Michael J. Lambert, J. Christian Fox
    Deep venous thrombosis / Tom Constantino, Harry Goett, Michael Peterson
    Soft tissue / Andreas Dewitz
    Ocular / Matt Lyon, Dietrich Jehle
    Pediatric applications / Jason Fischer, Adam Sivitz, and Alyssa Abo
    Vascular access / John S. Rose, Aaron E. Bair, Aman K. Parikh
    Additional ultrasound-guided procedures / Andreas Dewitz ... [et al.].
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC78.7.U4 M32 2014
    1
  • Digital
    [editors], O. John Ma, James R. Mateer, Robert F. Reardon, Donald V. Byars, Barry J. Knapp, Andrew P. Laudenbach.
  • Digital
    Daniel Pedro Cardinali.
    Contents:
    1. Brief history of the stone of madness
    2. The prescientific stage of the pineal gland
    3. The beginnings of the pineal scientific era: from the late nineteenth century of melatonin's discovery
    4. Sleep/wake cycle: history and facts
    5. When this chronicler enters the story: the 1960s
    6. The stone of madness as a neuroendocrine organ and model: the 1970s
    7. Peripheral innervation of neuroendocrine-immune system: the challenges to change of physiological paradigm
    8. Melatonin as a potential therapeutic agent: the 1980s
    9. Melatonin as a chronobiotic that opens the "gates of sleep": the 1990s
    10. Melatonin and the "diseases of the soul": the stone of madness returns
    11. Twenty-first century: the 24/7 society as an environmental mutation
    12. Melatonin as a medicament for the 24/7 society: metabolic syndrome
    13. Melatonin as a medicament for the 24/7 society: normal and pathological aging
    14. Melatonin as a medicament for the 24/7 society: cancer
    15. Melatonin as a nutraceutical
    Epilogue
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    editors, Jayashree Ramasethu, Suna Seo
    Contents:
    Sect. II: Preparation and suport
    Sect. II: Physiologic monitoring
    Sect. III: Blood sampling
    Sect. IV: Miscellaneous sampling
    Sect. V: Vascular access
    Sect. VI: Respiratory care
    Sect. VII: Tube placement and care
    Sect. VIII: Transfusions
    Sect. IX: Miscellaneous procedures
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    Issam El Naqa, Martin J. Murphy, editors.
    Summary: This book, now in an extensively revised and updated second edition, provides a comprehensive overview of both machine learning and deep learning and their role in oncology, medical physics, and radiology. Readers will find thorough coverage of basic theory, methods, and demonstrative applications in these fields. An introductory section explains machine and deep learning, reviews learning methods, discusses performance evaluation, and examines software tools and data protection. Detailed individual sections are then devoted to the use of machine and deep learning for medical image analysis, treatment planning and delivery, and outcomes modeling and decision support. Resources for varying applications are provided in each chapter, and software code is embedded as appropriate for illustrative purposes. The book will be invaluable for students and residents in medical physics, radiology, and oncology and will also appeal to more experienced practitioners and researchers and members of applied machine learning communities. .

    Contents:
    Part I. Introduction
    1. What are Machine and Deep Learning?
    2. Computational Learning Basics
    3. Overview of Conventional Machine Learning Methods
    4. Overview of Deep Machine Learning Methods
    5. Quantum Computing for Machine Learning
    6. Performance Evaluation
    7. Software Tools for Machine and Deep learning
    8. Data sharing, protection and bioethics
    Part II. Machine Learning for Medical Image Analysis
    9. Detection of Cancer Lesions from Imaging
    10. Diagnosis of Malignant and Benign Tumours
    11. Auto-contouring for image-guidance and treatment planning
    Part III. Machine Learning for Treatment planning & Delivery
    12. Quality Assurance and error prediction
    13. Knowledge-based treatment planning
    14. Intelligent respiratory motion management
    Part IV. Machine Learning for Outcomes Modeling and Decision Support
    15. Prediction of oncology treatment outcomes
    16. Radiomics and radiogenomics
    17. Modelling of Radiotherapy Response (TCP/NTCP)
    18. Smart adaptive treatment strategies
    19. Machine learning in clinical trials.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Grant R.W. Humphries, Dawn R. Magness, Falk Huettmann, editors.
    Summary: Ecologists and natural resource managers are charged with making complex management decisions in the face of a rapidly changing environment resulting from climate change, energy development, urban sprawl, invasive species and globalization. Advances in Geographic Information System (GIS) technology, digitization, online data availability, historic legacy datasets, remote sensors and the ability to collect data on animal movements via satellite and GPS have given rise to large, highly complex datasets. These datasets could be utilized for making critical management decisions, but are often "messy" and difficult to interpret. Basic artificial intelligence algorithms (i.e., machine learning) are powerful tools that are shaping the world and must be taken advantage of in the life sciences. In ecology, machine learning algorithms are critical to helping resource managers synthesize information to better understand complex ecological systems. Machine Learning has a wide variety of powerful applications, with three general uses that are of particular interest to ecologists: (1) data exploration to gain system knowledge and generate new hypotheses, (2) predicting ecological patterns in space and time, and (3) pattern recognition for ecological sampling. Machine learning can be used to make predictive assessments even when relationships between variables are poorly understood. When traditional techniques fail to capture the relationship between variables, effective use of machine learning can unearth and capture previously unattainable insights into an ecosystem's complexity. Currently, many ecologists do not utilize machine learning as a part of the scientific process. This volume highlights how machine learning techniques can complement the traditional methodologies currently applied in this field.

    Contents:
    1: Introduction to Machine Learning A. Data-intensive science B. Data Issues and Availability
    2: Data-mining in Ecological and Wildlife Research A. Multiple Methods in the Scientific Process B. Data-mining in Ecological and Wildlife Research C. Applications in Ecological Research a. Predicting Patterns in Space and Time b. Data Exploration and Hypothesis Generation c. Pattern Recognition for Sampling D. Bringing It All Together: Leveraging Multiple Methods to Increase Knowledge for Resource Management
    3: Machine Learning and Resource Management A. Web-based Machine Learning Applications for Wildlife Management B. Linking Machine Learning in Management Applications C. Machine Learning and the Cloud for Natural Resource Applications D. The Global View: Hopes and Disappointments E. The Future of Machine Learning.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Mohd Azraai Mohd Razman, Anwar P.P. Abdul Majeed, Rabiu Muazu Musa, Zahari Taha, Gian-Antonio Susto, Yukinori Mukai.
    Summary: This book highlights the fundamental association between aquaculture and engineering in classifying fish hunger behaviour by means of machine learning techniques. Understanding the underlying factors that affect fish growth is essential, since they have implications for higher productivity in fish farms. Computer vision and machine learning techniques make it possible to quantify the subjective perception of hunger behaviour and so allow food to be provided as necessary. The book analyses the conceptual framework of motion tracking, feeding schedule and prediction classifiers in order to classify the hunger state, and proposes a system comprising an automated feeder system, image-processing module, as well as machine learning classifiers. Furthermore, the system substitutes conventional, complex modelling techniques with a robust, artificial intelligence approach. The findings presented are of interest to researchers, fish farmers, and aquaculture technologist wanting to gain insights into the productivity of fish and fish behaviour.

    Contents:
    1 Introduction
    2 Monitoring and feeding integration of demand feeder systems
    3 Image processing features extraction on fish behaviour
    4 Time-series identification of fish feeding behaviour.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Victor E. Staartjes, Luca Regli, Carlo Serra, editors.
    Summary: This book bridges the gap between data scientists and clinicians by introducing all relevant aspects of machine learning in an accessible way, and will certainly foster new and serendipitous applications of machine learning in the clinical neurosciences. Building from the ground up by communicating the foundational knowledge and intuitions first before progressing to more advanced and specific topics, the book is well-suited even for clinicians without prior machine learning experience. Authored by a wide array of experienced global machine learning groups, the book is aimed at clinicians who are interested in mastering the basics of machine learning and who wish to get started with their own machine learning research. The volume is structured in two major parts: The first uniquely introduces all major concepts in clinical machine learning from the ground up, and includes step-by-step instructions on how to correctly develop and validate clinical prediction models. It also includes methodological and conceptual foundations of other applications of machine learning in clinical neuroscience, such as applications of machine learning to neuroimaging, natural language processing, and time series analysis. The second part provides an overview of some state-of-the-art applications of these methodologies. The Machine Intelligence in Clinical Neuroscience (MICN) Laboratory at the Department of Neurosurgery of the University Hospital Zurich studies clinical applications of machine intelligence to improve patient care in clinical neuroscience. The group focuses on diagnostic, prognostic and predictive analytics that aid in decision-making by increasing objectivity and transparency to patients. Other major interests of our group members are in medical imaging, and intraoperative applications of machine vision.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Foundations of machine learning-based clinical prediction modeling
    Part I: Introduction and general principles
    Foundations of machine learning-based clinical prediction modeling
    Part II: Generalization and Overfitting
    Foundations of machine learning-based clinical prediction modeling
    Part III: Evaluation and other points of significance
    Foundations of machine learning-based clinical prediction modeling
    Part IV: A practical approach to binary classification problems
    Foundations of machine learning-based clinical prediction modeling
    Part V: A practical approach to regression problems
    Supervised and unsupervised learning / clustering
    Introduction to Bayesian Modeling
    Introduction to Deep Learning
    Overview of algorithms for machine-learning based clinical prediction modelling
    Foundations of feature selection in clinical prediction modelling
    Dimensionality reduction: Foundations and applications in clinical neuroscience
    Machine learning-based survival modeling: Foundations and Applications
    Making clinical prediction models available: A brief introduction
    Machine Learning-based Clustering Analysis: Foundational Concepts, Methods, and Applications
    Introduction to Machine Learning in Neuroimaging
    Overview of machine learning algorithms in imaging
    Foundations of classification modeling based on neuroimaging
    Foundations of lesion-symptom mapping using machine learning
    Foundations of Machine Learning-Based Segmentation in Cranial Imaging
    Foundations of lesion detection using machine learning in clinical neuroimaging
    Foundations of multiparametric brain tumor imaging characterization
    Radiomics in clinical neuroscience
    Overview
    Radiomic feature extraction: Methodological Foundations
    Complexity and interpretability in machine vision
    Foundations of intraoperative anatomical recognition using machine vision
    Machine Vision Foundations
    Natural Language Processing: Foundations and Applications in Clinical Neuroscience
    Foundations of Time Series Analysis
    Overview of algorithms for natural language processing and time series analysis
    History of machine learning in neurosurgery
    The AI doctor
    considerations for AI-based medicine
    Ethics of Machine Learning-Based Predictive Analytics
    Predictive analytics in clinical practice: Pro and contra
    Review of machine vision applications in neuroophtalmology
    Prediction Model
    Prediction Model
    Prediction Model
    Topical Review of machine learning in intracranial aneurysm surgery
    Review of applications of machine learning in neuroimaging
    Prediction Model
    An overview of machine learning applications in the Neurointensive Care Unit
    Prediction Model
    Review of natural language processing in the clinical neurosciences
    Review of big data applications in the clinical neurosciences
    Radiomic features associated with extent of resection in glioma surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Ching-Chang Ko, Dinggang Shen, Li Wang, editors.
    Summary: This book reviews all aspects of the use of machine learning in contemporary dentistry, clearly explaining its significance for dental imaging, oral diagnosis and treatment, dental designs, and dental research. Machine learning is an emerging field of artificial intelligence research and practice in which computer agents are employed to improve perception, cognition, and action based on their ability to learn for example through use of big data techniques. Its application within dentistry is designed to promote personalized and precision patient care, with enhancement of diagnosis and treatment planning. In this book, readers will find up-to-date information on different machine learning tools and their applicability in various dental specialties. The selected examples amply illustrate the opportunities to employ a machine learning approach within dentistry while also serving to highlight the associated challenges. Machine Learning in Dentistry will be of value for all dental practitioners and researchers who wish to learn more about the potential benefits of using machine learning techniques in their work.

    Contents:
    Machine Learning for Dental Imaging: Machine Learning for CBCT Segmentation of Craniofacial 3D Image
    Machine Learning for Automatic Landmark Detection of 3D Imaging
    Machine Learning for Generating Dental CT from Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI)
    Machine Learning for 2D Dynamic Facial Photographs. Machine Learning for Oral Diagnosis and Treatment: Machine Learning for Orthodontic Diagnosis and Treatment Planning
    Machine Learning for Diagnosis of Periodontal Diseases
    Machine Learning for Oral Microbiome
    Machine Learning for Characterization of Craniofacial Anomaly
    Machine Learning for Orthognathic Surgery
    Machine Learning for Bone Tissue Engineering. Machine Learning and Dental Designs: Machine Learning for Orthodontic CAD/CAM Technologies
    Machine Learning for Design of Dental Implants
    Machine Learning for Optimization of Dental Material Processing. Machine Learning Supporting Dental Research: Machine Learning for Data Mining in Teledentistry
    Machine Learning for Evidence-Based Literature Search
    Machine Learning in Genetics and Genomics
    Machine Learning and Finite Element Modeling.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Ton J. Cleophas, Aeilko H. Zwinderman.
    Summary: Adequate health and health care is no longer possible without proper data supervision from modern machine learning methodologies like cluster models, neural networks, and other data mining methodologies. The current book is the first publication of a complete overview of machine learning methodologies for the medical and health sector, and it was written as a training companion, and as a must-read, not only for physicians and students, but also for any one involved in the process and progress of health and health care. In this second edition the authors have removed the textual errors from the first edition. Also, the improved tables from the first edition, have been replaced with the original tables from the software programs as applied. This is, because, unlike the former, the latter were without error, and readers were better familiar with them. The main purpose of the first edition was, to provide stepwise analyses of the novel methods from data examples, but background information and clinical relevance information may have been somewhat lacking. Therefore, each chapter now contains a section entitled "Background Information". Machine learning may be more informative, and may provide better sensitivity of testing than traditional analytic methods may do. In the second edition a place has been given for the use of machine learning not only to the analysis of observational clinical data, but also to that of controlled clinical trials. Unlike the first edition, the second edition has drawings in full color providing a helpful extra dimension to the data analysis. Several machine learning methodologies not yet covered in the first edition, but increasingly important today, have been included in this updated edition, for example, negative binomial and Poisson regressions, sparse canonical analysis, Firth's bias adjusted logistic analysis, omics research, eigenvalues and eigenvectors. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Section I Cluster and Classification Models
    Hierarchical Clustering and K-means Clustering to Identify Subgroups in Surveys (50 Patients)
    Density-based Clustering to Identify Outlier Groups in Otherwise Homogeneous Data (50 Patients)
    Two Step Clustering to Identify Subgroups and Predict Subgroup Memberships in Individual Future Patients (120 Patients)
    Nearest Neighbors for Classifying New Medicines (2 New and 25 Old Opioids)
    Predicting High-Risk-Bin Memberships (1445 Families)
    Predicting Outlier Memberships (2000 Patients)
    Data Mining for Visualization of Health Processes (150 Patients)
    Trained Decision Trees for a More Meaningful Accuracy (150 Patients)
    Typology of Medical Data (51 Patients)
    Predictions from Nominal Clinical Data (450 Patients)
    Predictions from Ordinal Clinical Data (450 Patients)
    Assessing Relative Health Risks (3000 Subjects)
    Measurement Agreements (30 Patients)
    ^Column Proportions for Testing Differences between Outcome Scores (450 Patients)
    Pivoting Trays and Tables for Improved Analysis of Multidimensional Data (450 Patients)
    Online Analytical Procedure Cubes for a More Rapid Approach to Analyzing Frequencies (450 Patients)
    Restructure Data Wizard for Data Classified the Wrong Way (20 Patients)
    Control Charts for Quality Control of Medicines (164 Tablet Desintegration Times)
    Section II (Log) Linear Models
    Linear, Logistic, and Cox Regression for Outcome Prediction with Unpaired Data (20, 55, and 60 Patients)
    Generalized Linear Models for Outcome Prediction with Paired Data (100 Patients and 139 Physicians)
    Generalized Linear Models for Predicting Event-Rates (50 Patients)
    Factor Analysis and Partial Least Squares (PLS) for Complex-Data Reduction (250 Patients)
    Optimal Scaling of High-sensitivity Analysis of Health Predictors (250 Patients)
    ^Discriminant Analysis for Making a Diagnosis from Multiple Outcomes (45 Patients)
    Weighted Least Squares for Adjusting Efficacy Data with Inconsistent Spread (78 Patients)
    Partial Correlations for Removing Interaction Effects from Efficacy Data (64 Patients)
    Canonical Regression for Overall Statistics of Multivariate Data (250 Patients)
    Multinomial Regression for Outcome Categories (55 Patients)
    Various Methods for Analyzing Predictor Categories (60 and 30 Patients)
    Random Intercept Models for Both Outcome and Predictor Categories (55 Patients)
    Automatic Regression for Maximizing Linear Relationships (55 Patients)
    Simulation Models for Varying Predictors (9000 Patients)
    Generalized Linear Mixed Models for Outcome Prediction from Mixed Data (20 Patients)
    Two Stage Least Squares for Linear Models with Problematic Predictors (35 Patients)
    Autoregressive Models for Longitudinal Data (120 Monthly Population Records)
    ^Variance Components for Assessing the Magnitude of Random Effects (40 Patients)
    Ordinal Scaling for Clinical Scores with Inconsistent Intervals (900 Patients)
    Loglinear Models for Assessing Incident Rates with Varying Incident Risks (12 Populations)
    Loglinear Models for Outcome Categories (445 Patients)
    More on Polytomous Outcome Regressions (450 Patients)
    Heterogeneity in Clinical Research: Mechanisms Responsible (20 Studies)
    Performance Evaluation of Novel Diagnostic Tests (650 and 588 Patients)
    Quantile
    Quantile Plots, a Good Start for Looking at Your Medical Data (50 Cholesterol Measurements and 52 Patients)
    Rate Analysis of Medical Data Better than Risk Analysis (52 Patients)
    Trend Tests Will Be Statistically Significant if Traditional Tests Are not (30 and 106 Patients)
    Doubly Multivariate Analysis of Variance for Multiple Observations from Multiple Outcome Variables (16 Patients)
    ^Probit Models for Estimating Effective Pharmacological Treatment Dosages (14 Tests)
    Interval Censored Data Analysis for Assessing Mean Time to Cancer Relapse (51 Patients)
    Structural Equation Modeling with SPSS Analysis of Moment Structures (Amos) for Cause Effect Relationships I (35 Patients)
    Structural Equation Modeling with SPSS Analysis of Moment Structures (Amos) for Cause Effect Relationships II (35 Patients)
    Firth's Bias-adjusted Estimates for Biased Logistic Data Models (23 Challenger launchings)
    Omics Research (125 Patients, 24 Predictor Variables)
    Sparse Canonical Correlation Analysis (12209 Genes in 45 Glioblastoma Carriers)
    Eigenvalues, Eigenvectors and Eigenfunctions (45 and 250 Patients)
    Section III Rules Models
    Neural Networks for Assessing Relationships that are Typically Nonlinear (90 Patients)
    Complex Samples Methodologies for Unbiased Sampling (9,678 Persons)
    ^Correspondence Analysis for Identifying the Best of Multiple Treatments in Multiple Groups (217 Patients)
    Decision Trees for Decision Analysis (1004 and 953 Patients)
    Multidimensional Scaling for Visualizing Experienced Drug Efficacies (14 Pain-killers and 42 Patients)
    Stochastic Processes for Long Term Predictions from Short Term Observations
    Optimal Binning for Finding High Risk Cut-offs (1445 Families)
    Conjoint Analysis for Determining the Most Appreciated Properties of Medicines to Be Developed (15 Physicians)
    Item Response Modeling for Analyzing Quality of Life with Better Precision (1000 Patients)
    Survival Studies with Varying Risks of Dying (50 and 60 Patients)
    Fuzzy Logic for Improved Precision of Pharmacological Data Analysis (9 Induction Dosages)
    Automatic Data Mining for the Best Treatment of a Disease (90 Patients)
    Pareto Charts for Identifying the Main Factors of Multifactorial Outcomes (2000 Admissions to Hospital)
    ^Radial Basis Neural Networks for Multidimensional Gaussian Data (90 persons)
    Automatic Modeling for Drug Efficacy Prediction (250 Patients)
    Automatic Modeling for Clinical Event Prediction (200 Patients)
    Automatic Newton Modeling in Clinical Pharmacology (15 Alfentanil dosages, 15 Quinidine time-concentration relationships)
    Spectral Plots for High Sensitivity Assessment of Periodicity (6 Years' Monthly C Reactive Protein Levels)
    Runs Test for Identifying Best Analysis Models (21 Estimates of Quantity and Quality of Patient Care)
    Evolutionary Operations for Health Process Improvement (8 Operation Room Settings)
    Bayesian Networks for Cause Effect Modeling (600 Patients)
    Support Vector Machines for Imperfect Nonlinear Data (200 Patients)
    Multiple Response Sets for Visualizing Clinical Data Trends (811 Patient Visits)
    Protein and DNA Sequence Mining
    Iteration Methods for Crossvalidation (150 Patients)
    ^Testing Parallel-groups with Different Sample Sizes and Variances (5 Parallel-group Studies)
    Association Rules between Exposure and Outcome (50 and 60 Patients)
    Confidence Intervals for Proportions and Differences in Proportions (100 and 75 Patients)
    Ratio Statistics for Efficacy Analysis of New Drugs 50 Patients)
    Fifth Order Polynomes of Circadian Rhythms (1 Patient)
    Gamma Distribution for Estimating the Predictors of Medical Outcomes (110 Patients)
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Issam El Naqa, Ruijiang Li, Martin J. Murphy, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a complete overview of the role of machine learning in radiation oncology and medical physics, covering basic theory, methods, and a variety of applications in medical physics and radiotherapy. An introductory section explains machine learning, reviews supervised and unsupervised learning methods, discusses performance evaluation, and summarizes potential applications in radiation oncology. Detailed individual sections are then devoted to the use of machine learning in quality assurance; computer-aided detection, including treatment planning and contouring; image-guided radiotherapy; respiratory motion management; and treatment response modeling and outcome prediction. The book will be invaluable for students and residents in medical physics and radiation oncology and will also appeal to more experienced practitioners and researchers and members of applied machine learning communities.

    Contents:
    Introduction: What is Machine Learning
    Computational Learning Theory
    Overview of Supervised Learning Methods
    Overview of Unsupervised Learning Methods
    Performance Evaluation
    Variety of Applications in Radiation Oncology
    Machine Learning for Quality Assurance: Quality Assurance as a Learning Problem
    Detection of Radiotherapy Errors Using Unsupervised Learning
    Prediction of Radiotherapy Errors Using Supervised Learning
    Machine Learning for Computer-Aided Detection: Detection of Cancer Lesions from Imaging
    Classification of Malignant and Benign Tumours
    Machine Learning for Treatment Planning and Delivery
    Image-guided Radiotherapy with Machine Learning: IMRT Optimization Using Machine Learning
    Treatment Assessment Tools
    Machine Learning for Motion Management: Prediction of Respiratory Motion
    Motion-Correction Using Learning Methods
    Machine Learning Application in 4D-CT
    Machine Learning Application in Dynamic Delivery
    Machine Learning for Outcomes Modeling: Bioinformatics of Treatment Response
    Modelling of Norma Tissue Complication Probabilities (NTCP)
    Modelling of Tumour Control Probability (TCP).
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Anna R. Dover, J. Alastair Innes, Karen Fairhurst.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2024
  • Digital
    Regine Klinger, Monika Hasenbring, Michael Pfingsten.
    Summary: This book offers a diagnostic tool for physicians and psychologists who want to systematically document pain within a multimodal structure. MACPainP (multiaxial classification of pain-psychosocial dimension) is a systematic, comprehensive and clinically oriented diagnostic instrument for evaluating pain-related disorders, and includes differentiated descriptions to enable syndromes to be systematized and diagnoses compared. MACPainP can be used as a professional add-on for the International Classification of Diseases ICD-10 as well as the upcoming pain classification ICD-11, released by WHO. This clearly structured book provides an easy introduction to the biopsychological aspects of pain disorders, to allow a nuanced approach to the psychological diagnosis of pain patients. It discusses possible comorbidities (e.g. depressive disorders, anxiety disorders) as well as concrete behavior-related steps for pain-related psychological and medical treatments. An essential reference for physicians and psychologists in the field of pain therapy, it is part of the learning European Pain Federation Curriculum (EFIC) of pain therapists.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Preface; Contents; About the Authors; 1: Introduction; 1.1 Describing Current Approaches in the Classification of Chronic Pain; 1.1.1 Diagnostic Options Within the Internationally Recognized Diagnostic Codification System ICD (c.f.
    Chapter V (F)) and DSM; 1.1.1.1 ICD-10; 1.1.1.2 DSM 5; 1.1.2 IASP Taxonomy; 1.1.3 Headache Classification of the IHS (ICHD-3); 2: The Multiaxial Classification of Pain: Psychosocial Dimension (MACPainP); 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 MACPainP: Overall Structure and Structure of the Axes; 2.3 MACPainP: Theoretical Background 2.3.1 Behavioral Theory in MACPainP2.3.2 Psychodynamic Psychology in MACPainP; 2.3.3 Systemic Theories in MACPainP; 2.4 General Guidelines; 2.4.1 Distinguishing MACPainP Codes from Psychopathological Disorders of the ICD/DSM; 2.4.2 Operationalization and Administration of Codes; 2.4.3 Axis Supplementary Code; 2.4.4 Time Supplementary Code; 2.4.5 MACPainP: Rating Sheet; 2.4.6 Diagnostic Axis 11: MACPainP Diagnosis; 2.4.7 Training Applications for Specific Pain Therapy; 2.4.8 Deriving Therapeutic Indications; 2.5 Combining MACPainP with ICD and DSM/Application Examples 3: MACPainP Operationalization3.1 Axis 1: Motor-Behavioral Pain Processing; 3.1.1 Distinct Nonverbal Pain Behavior; 3.1.2 Distinct Verbal Pain Behavior; 3.1.3 Discrepancies Between Verbal and Nonverbal Pain Behavior; 3.1.4 Deficits in Asking for Social Support; 3.1.5 Distinct Avoidance of Physical Activities; 3.1.6 Distinct Avoidance of Social Activities; 3.1.7 Distinct Endurance Behavior; 3.1.8 Non-compliance with Health-Promoting Behavior; 3.2 Axis 2: Emotional Pain Processing; 3.2.1 Depressed Mood; 3.2.2 Irritated Mood; 3.2.3 Anxious Mood; 3.2.4 Easy Internal Excitability 3.2.5 Restricted Emotional Experience3.2.6 Restricted Emotional Expression; 3.2.7 Excessive Expression of Positive Emotions; 3.3 Axis 3: Cognitive Pain Processing; 3.3.1 Helplessness/Catastrophizing; 3.3.2 Resignation/Despair; 3.3.3 Suicidal Ideations; 3.3.4 Low Awareness of Physical Processes; 3.3.5 Distinct Trivialization of Physical Processes; 3.3.6 Hypervigilance of Physical Processes; 3.3.7 Distinct Pain Thought Suppression; 3.4 Axis 4: Illness-Related Metacognitions; 3.4.1 Distinct Somatic Model of Disease; 3.4.2 Distinct Stable Causal Attribution 3.4.3 Distinct External Locus of Control3.4.4 Distinct Internal Locus of Control; 3.4.5 Attribution of Blame; 3.4.6 Distinct Fear-Avoidance Beliefs; 3.4.7 Distinct Endurance Beliefs; 3.5 Axis 5: Current Stressors; 3.5.1 Physical Stress at Work; 3.5.2 Psychosocial Stress at Work; 3.5.3 Unclear Occupational Status; 3.5.4 Considerable Financial Stress; 3.5.5 Problems Within the Family and/or Circle of Friends; 3.5.6 Marriage/Relationship Problems; 3.5.7 Stress Because of Additional Health Problems; 3.5.8 Critical Life Events; 3.5.9 Stress During Leisure Time
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Gregor Anderluh, Robert Gilbert, editors.
    Summary: Introduction: brief historical overview -- Distribution of MACPF/CDC proteins -- Evolution of the complement system -- Structural features of cholesterol dependent cytolysins and comparison to other MACPF-domain containing proteins -- Perfringolysin O structure and mechanism of pore formation as a paradigm for cholesterol-dependent cytolysins -- Structural biology of the membrane attack complex -- Membrane interactions and cellular effects of MACPF/CDC proteins -- The biology of pneumolysin -- Multifaceted activity of listeriolysin O, the cholesterol -dependent cytolysin of Listeria monocytogenes -- Perforin: a key pore-forming protein for immune control of viruses and cancer -- Perforin and human diseases -- The role of MACPF proteins in the biology of malaria and other apicomplexan parasites -- Chlamydial MACPF protien CT153 -- Fungal MACPF-like proteins and aegerolysins: bi-component pore-forming proteins? -- Fluorescence imaging of MACPF/CDC proteins: new techniques and their application.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Mahendra Rai, Anatoly Reshetilov, Yulia Plekhanova, Avinash P. Ingle, editors.
    Summary: This book includes an international group of researchers who present the latest achievements in the field of enzyme, immune system, and microbial and nano-biosensors. It highlights the experimental evidence for formation of biological fuel cells (BFCs)-which has a dual purpose - as a device that produces electricity and the systems which produce it simultaneously cleaning up the environment from polluting organic compounds. Considering the work in the field of macro, micro and nano-biosensors, considerable attention is paid to the use of nanomaterials for the modification of working electrodes. Nanomaterials in some cases can significantly improve the parameters of analytical systems. Readers will be interested in the projection of the presented theoretical and experimental materials in the field of practical application of modern analytical developments. The presented results in many cases imply the possibility of using the created models of macro, micro and nano-biosensors, and biofuel elements in the field of health, and protection/restoration of the environment. It includes information about all existing types of transducers of signals in biosensors - electrochemical, optical and quantum-optics, thermoelectric, data of atomic force microscopy, piezoelectric, and more. On the basis of these principles, descriptions are given about the functioning of macro, micro and nano- biosensors for the detection of compounds used in medicine, detection of compounds that clog the environment, and thus affect human health, for compounds that are potentially the basis for the production of drugs, for the selection of compounds that have medicinal activity, for immunodetection, and to assess the quality of food. These questions form the basis of research carried out in the field of biosensors in the world. Since the described models of biosensors have high sensitivity, high measurement speed and selectivity, the described results attract the attention of both the ordinary reader and business class specialists who create and implement analytical technologies. This book is very useful for researchers in life sciences, chemical sciences, physics, and engineering. In addition, it will be useful for the persons working in industry. Advanced technologies specialists will be attracted by the novelty of the proposed solutions and their relevance and ease of implementation. Since the studies contain sections describing the parameters of different biosensors, BFCs, they are easily navigated into assessing the effectiveness of the practical use of the proposed device. The relevant sections indicate such characteristics as detection ranges, life span, type of biological material used, the method of formation of the bio-receptor part. These parameters are of interest to both developers of new models of biosensors and BFC, and their manufacturers.

    Contents:
    Macro-, micro- and nanosensors based on biological / chemical materials
    Bactericidal, fungicidal and immunomodulating activity of nano-surfaces
    Enzymatic Tissue Biotests (MAO and AChE biotests) and Bioindicators
    Is it possible to detect less than one bacterial cell?
    SERS for bacterial, virus and protein bio-sensing
    Biosensors for virus detection
    Specific immobilization of rotaviruses for atomic force microscopy with using Langmuir antibody films based on amphiphilic polyelectrolytes
    Fluorimetric and SERS sensor systems for diagnostics and monitoring of catecholamines-dependent diseases
    Enhanced sensitivity rapid tests for the detection of sepsis marker procalcitonin
    Analytical capabilities of some biosensors for the determination of drugs
    Electrochemical DNA sensors based on nanostructured polymeric materials for determination of antitumor drugs
    Variants of amperometric biosensors in the determination of some micotoxins: analytical capabilities
    New class of diagnostic systems based on polyelectrolyte microcapsules for urea detection
    Bioluminescent nano- and micro-biosensing elements for detection of organophosphorous compounds
    Nano- and microelectrochemical biosensors for determining blood glucose
    Micro-Electrochemical SMBG Biosensor Chip Design Development for Sustainable Mass Production based on the Strategic Platform Patent Map
    Biological Fuel Cells: Applications in Health Service and Ecology
    Recent Trends in Fabrication and Applications of Wearable Bioelectronics for Early-Stage Disease Monitoring and Diagnosis
    Self-powered biosensors in medicine and ecology
    Self-powered implantable biosensors - a review of recent advancements and future perspectives.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Xue-Long Sun.
    Contents:
    Synthesis of chain-end functionalized glycopolymers via cyanoxyl-mediated free radical polymerization (CMFRP) / Valentinas Gruzdys ... [et al.]
    Protecting-group-free synthesis of well-defined glycopolymers featuring negatively charged oligosaccharides / Luca Albertin
    Glycopolymers prepared by ring-opening metathesis polymerization followed by glycoconjugation using a triazole-forming "click" reaction / Ronald Okoth and Amit Basu
    Protecting-group-free synthesis of glycopolymers and their binding assay with lectin and influenza virus / Tomonari Tanaka, Tadanobu Takahashi, and Takashi Suzuki
    Carbohydrate-based initiators for the cationic ring-opening polymerization of 2-Ethyl-2-Oxazoline / Christine Weber ... [et al.]
    Heterofunctional glycopolypeptides by combination of Thiol-Ene chemistry and NCA polymerization / Kai-Steffen Krannig and Helmut Schlaad
    Preparation of proteoglycan mimetic graft copolymers / Matt J. Kipper and Laura W. Place
    Galactosylated polymer nano-objects by polymerization-induced self-assembly, potential drug nanocarriers / Mona Semsarilar, Irene Canton, and Vincent Ladmiral
    Synthetic approach to biotinylated glyco-functionalized quantum dots : a new fluorescent probes for biomedical applications / Christian K. Adokoh, James Darkwa, and Ravin Narain
    Surface modification of polydivinylbenzene microspheres with a fluorinated glycopolymer using Thiol-Halogen click chemistry / Wentao Song and Anthony M. Granville
    Glycopolymer-grafted polymer particles for lectin recognition / Michinari Kohri, Tatsuo Taniguchi, and Keiki Kishikawa
    Synthesis of non-spherical glycopolymer-decorated nanoparticles : combing Thiol-ene with catecholic chemistry / Xiao Li, Weidong Zhang, and Gaojian Chen
    Synthetic approach to glycopolymer base nanoparticle gold(I) conjugate : a new generation of therapeutic agents / Christian K. Adokoh, James Darkwa, and Ravin Narain
    Multivalent glycopolymer-coated gold nanoparticles / Sarah-Jane Richards ... [et al.]
    Modulation of multivalent protein binding on surfaces by glycopolymer brush chemistry / Kai Yu ... [et al.]
    Oriented immobilized sialyloligo-macroligand microarray / Satya Nandana Narla and Xue-Long Sun
    Glycocalyx remodeling with glycopolymer-based proteoglycan mimetics / Mia L. Huang ... [et al.].
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    J. Robin Harris, Jon Marles-Wright, editors.
    Contents:
    Structure and function of the stressosome signalling hub / Jan Pané-Farré, Maureen B. Quin, Richard J. Lewis, Jon Marles-Wright
    The canonical inflammasome: a macromolecular complex driving inflammation / Tom P. Monie
    The Ferritin Superfamily / Alejandro Yévenes
    Antibody recognition of immunodominant vaccinia virus envelope proteins / Dirk M. Zajonc
    The peroxiredoxin family: an unfolding story / Zhenbo Cao, John Gordon Lindsay
    [alpha]2-Macroglobulins: structure and function / Irene Garcia-Ferrer, Aniebrys Marrero, F. Xavier Gomis-Rüth, Theodoros Goulas
    The Structure and Function of the PRMT5:MEP50 complex / Stephen Antonysamy
    Symmetry-directed design of protein cages and protein lattices and their applications / Aaron Sciore, E. Neil G. Marsh
    Structure and function of RNA polymerases and the transcription machineries / Joachim Griesenbeck, Herbert Tschochner, Dina Grohmann
    Dihydrodipicolinate synthase: structure, dynamics, function, and evolution / F. Grant Pearce, André O. Hudson, Kerry Loomes, Renwick C. J. Dobson
    Pyruvate carboxylase, structure and function / Mikel Valle
    Cullin-RING E3 ubiquitin ligases: bridges to destruction / Henry C. Nguyen, Wei Wang, Yong Xiong
    The Ccr4-Not complex: architecture and structural insights / Martine A. Collart, Olesya O. Panasenko
    Higher-order structure in bacterial VapBC toxin-antitoxin complexes / Kirstine L. Bendtsen, Ditlev E. Brodersen
    D-glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase structure and function / Michael R. White, Elsa D. Garcin
    Protein complexes in the nucleus: the control of chromosome segregation / Victor M. Bolanos-Garcia
    GroEL and the GroEL-GroES complex / Noriyuki Ishii
    The aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase complex / Marc Mirande
    The pyruvate dehydrogenase complex and related assemblies in health and disease / Olwyn Byron, John Gordon Lindsay
    Structure and assembly of clathrin cages / Mary Halebian, Kyle Morris, Corinne Smith.
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    J. Robin Harris, Jon Marles-Wright, editors.
    Summary: This book follows on from Volume 83 in the SCBI series ("Macromolecular Protein Complexes"), and addresses several important topics (such as the Proteasome, Anaphase Promoting Complex, Ribosome and Apoptosome) that were not previously included, together with a number of additional exciting topics in this rapidly expanding field of study. Although the first SCBI Protein Complex book focused on soluble protein complexes, the second (Vol. 87)addressed Membrane Complexes, and the third (Vol. 88) put the spotlight on Viral Protein and Nucleoprotein Complexes, a number of membrane, virus and even fibrillar protein complexes have been be considered for inclusion in the present book. A further book is also under preparation that follows the same pattern, in an attempt to provide a thorough coverage of the subject. Chapter "Structure and Function of Roundabout Receptors" is available open access under a CC BY 4.0 license via link.springer.com.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction: Protein Oligomerization and the Formation of Macromolecular Assemblies,- Chapter 2. Antibody complexes
    Chapter 3. Unravelling ribosome function through structural studies
    Chapter 4. Competence Functions and mechanisms of the human ribosome-translocon complex
    Chapter 5. The Structures of Eukaryotic Transcription Pre-Initiation Complexes and Their Functional Implications
    Chapter 6. Regulation of Antiviral Innate Immunity Through APOBEC Ribonucleoprotein Complexes
    Chapter 7. Structure and Function of the AAA+ ATPase p97, a Key Player in Protein Homeostasis
    Chapter 8. Penicillin-Binding Proteins (PBPs) and bacterial cell wall elongation complexes
    Chapter 9. Structure and function of Roundabout receptors
    Chapter 10. Structure and function of molecular chaperones that govern immune peptide loading
    Chapter 11. Biology and Biochemistry of Bacterial Proteasomes
    Chapter 12. The Kai-protein clock
    keeping track of cyanobacteria's daily life
    Chapter 13. Frataxin Structure and Function
    Chapter 14. Crystallins and their complexes
    Chapter 15. Structure and Function of the TREX-2 Complex
    Chapter 16. Amyloid Oligomers, Protofibrils and Fibrils
    Chapter 17. CAD, a multienzymatic protein at the head of de novo pyrimidine biosynthesis
    Chapter 18. The Anaphase Promoting Complex/Cyclosome (APC/C): a versatile E3 ubiquitin ligase
    Chapter 19. TRiC/CCT Chaperonin: Structure and Function.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    J. Robin Harris, Jon Marles-Wright (editors).
    Summary: This book covers important topics such as the dynamic structure and function of the 26S proteasome, the DNA replication machine: structure and dynamic function and the structural organization and protein-protein interactions in the human adenovirus capsid, to mention but a few. The 18 chapters included here, written by experts in their specific field, are at the forefront of scientific knowledge. The impressive integration of structural data from X-ray crystallography with that from cryo-electron microscopy is apparent throughout the book. In addition, functional aspects are also given a high priority. Chapter 1 is available open access under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License vialink.springer.com.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Structure, Dynamics and Function of the 26S Proteasome
    Chapter 2. Factor VIII and Factor V Membrane Bound Complexes
    Chapter 3. An Overview of DPS: Dual Acting Nanovehicles in Prokaryotes with DNA Binding and Ferroxidation Properties
    Chapter 4. Structure and Function of the Separase-Securin Complex
    Chapter 5. The DNA Replication Machine: Structure and Dynamic Function
    Chapter 6. Recent Progress in Structural Studies on the GT-C Superfamily of Protein Glycosyltransferases
    Chapter 7. How Structures of Complement Complexes Guide Therapeutic Design
    Chapter 8. Architecture and Assembly of the Bacterial Flagellar Motor Complex
    Chapter 9. Cellulosomes: Highly Efficient Cellulolytic Complexes
    Chapter 10. Leucine Dehydrogenase: Structure and Thermostability
    Chapter 11. Structure, Function and Physiology of 5-Hydroxytryptamine Receptors Subtype 3
    Chapter 12. The SF3b Complex Is an Integral Component of the Spliceosome and Targeted by Natural Product-based Inhibitors
    Chapter 13. Interaction Networks of Ribosomal Expansion Segments in Kinetoplastids
    Chapter 14. Hepatitis B Core Protein Capsids
    Chapter 15. Fibrinogen and Fibrin
    Chapter 16. Structural Organization and Protein-protein Interactions in Human Adenovirus Capsid
    Chapter 17. A Structural Perspective on Gene Repression by Polycomb Repressive Complex 2
    Chapter 18. Assembly and Function of the Anthrax Toxin Protein Translocation Complex.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    Malgorzata Kloc, editor.
    Contents:
    Evolutionary Aspects of Macrophages Polarization / Eva-Stina Edholm, Kun Hyoe Rhoo, and Jacques Robert
    Development and Functional Differentiation of Tissue-Resident Versus Monocyte-Derived Macrophages in Inflammatory Reactions Paola Italiani and Diana Boraschi
    Hofbauer Cells: Placental Macrophages of Fetal Origin / Leticia Reyes, Bryce Wolfe, and Thaddeus Golos
    Mesenchymal Stem Cells Direct the Immunological Fate of Macrophages / Patricia Luz-Crawford, Christian Jorgensen, and Farida Djouad
    Monocyte/Macrophage: NK Cell Cooperation--Old Tools for New Functions / Elżbieta Wałajtys-Rode and Jolanta M. Dzik
    Macrophages in Invertebrates: From Insects and Crustaceans to Marine Bivalves / Prasad Abnave, Xavier Muracciole, and Eric Ghigo
    F4/80 as a Major Macrophage Marker: The Case of the Peritoneum and Spleen / Alexandra dos Anjos Cassado
    Immunobiology of Nitric Oxide and Regulation of Inducible Nitric Oxide Synthase / Martin Lee [and others]
    Role for Mechanotransduction in Macrophage and Dendritic Cell Immunobiology / Svenja F. B. Mennens, Koen van den Dries, and Alessandra Cambi
    Macrophages' Role in Tissue Disease and Regeneration / Lewis Gaffney [and others]
    Macrophages and Their Contribution to the Development of Atherosclerosis / Yuri V. Bobryshev [and others]
    Macrophage Dysfunction in Respiratory Disease / Kylie B. R. Belchamber and Louise E. Donnelly
    Activation of Macrophages in Response to Biomaterials / Jamie E. Rayahin and Richard A. Gemeinhart
    Macrophage Differentiation in Normal and Accelerated Wound Healing / Girish J. Kotwal and Sufan Chien
    Macrophages and RhoA Pathway in Transplanted Organs / Yianzhu Liu [and others].
  • Digital
    [edited by] Alastair D. Burt, Linda D. Ferrell, Stefan G. Hübscher.
    Contents:
    Structure, function, and responses to injury / James Crawford, Prodromos Hytiroglou, and Paulette Bioulac-Sage
    Cellular and molecular techniques / Pierre Bedossa, Valerie Paradis, and Jessica Zucman Rossi
    Developmental and inherited liver disease / Alberto Quaglia, Eve A. Roberts, and Michael Torbenson
    Disorders of iron overload / Antonello Pietrangelo and Michael Torbenson
    Fatty liver disease / Dina G. Tiniakos, Alastair Burt, and Quentin M. Anstee
    Viral hepatitis / Henry Charles Bodenheimer Jr., Maria Guido, and Neil D. Theise
    Other viral and infectious diseases / Sherif Zaki, Venancio Alves, and Gillian Leigh Hale
    Autoimmune hepatitis / Kay Washington and Michael P. Manns
    Bile duct diseases / Yoh Zen, Stefan Hubscher, and Yasuni Nakanuma
    Diseases of the gallbladder / Brian C. Quigley and N. Volkan Adsay
    Vascular disorders / Pierre Bedossa, Prodromos Hytiroglou, and Matthew M. Yeh
    Drugs and toxins / David Kleiner
    Tumours and tumourlike lesions / Linda D. Ferrell, Sanjay Kakar, Aileen Wee, and Luigi M. Terracciano
    Transplantation pathology / Stefan Hübscher, Andrew Clouston, and Anthony J. Demetris
    Liver in systemic disease / Alastair Burt and Chris Bellamy.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    [edited by] Alastair D. Burt, Linda D. Ferrell, Stefan G. Hübscher.
    Summary: Written and edited by an international team of renowned authorities, MacSween's Pathology of the Liver, 8th Edition, remains the field's definitive reference on liver pathology. This must-have text is ideal for surgical pathologists in practice and in training who examine liver specimens on a day-to-day basis. It provides invaluable assistance in recognizing the huge variety of appearances of the liver that result from infections, tumors, and tumor-like lesions, as well as organ damage caused by drugs and toxins. With expert, comprehensive coverage of all malignant and benign hepatobiliary disorders, MacSween's is a convenient, one-stop resource for use in the reporting room as well as in personal study. Shares the knowledge and experience of a "who's who" list of experts in the field of hepatobiliary pathology, led by editors Alastair D. Burt, Linda D. Ferrell, and Stefan G. Hübscher. Features more than 1,000 high-quality, full color illustrations, providing a complete visual guide to each tumor or tumor-like lesion. Discusses advances in molecular diagnostic testing, its capabilities, and its limitations, including targeted/personalized medicine. Incorporates the latest TNM staging and WHO classification systems, as well as new diagnostic biomarkers and their utility in differential diagnosis, newly described variants, and new histologic entities. Includes relevant data from ancillary techniques (immunohistochemistry, cytogenetics, and molecular genetics), giving you the necessary tools required to master the latest breakthroughs in diagnostic technology. Provides you with all of the necessary diagnostic tools to make a complete and accurate pathologic report, including clinicopathologic background throughout. Directs you to the most recent and authoritative sources for further reading with a comprehensive reference list that highlights key articles and up-to-date citations. An eBook version is included with purchase. The eBook allows you to access all of the text, figures and references, with the ability to search, customize your content, make notes and highlights, and have content read aloud.

    Contents:
    Structure, Function and Responses to Injury
    Cellular and Molecular Techniques
    Developmental and Inherited Liver Disease
    Disorders of Iron Overload
    Fatty Liver Disease
    Hepatitis Due to Hepatotropic Viruses
    Non-Hepatotropic Viral, Bacterial and Parasitic Infections of the Liver
    Autoimmune Hepatitis
    Bile Duct Diseases
    Diseases of the Gallbladder
    Vascular Disorders
    Hepatic Injury due to Drugs, Dietary and Herbal Supplements, Chemicals and Toxins
    Tumours and Tumour-Like Lesions
    Transplantation Pathology
    Liver in Systemic Disease.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2024
  • Digital
    Ivana K. Kim, editor.
    Summary: This atlas presents chapters on common and rare macular diseases including variants of age-related macular degeneration (dry, neovascular, polypoidal choroidal vasculopathy), cystoid macular edema, macular telangiectasia, central serous retinopathy and pachychoroid disease, photic retinopathy, presumed ocular histoplasmosis syndrome, myopic degeneration, angioid streaks, and a recently described entity: perifoveal exudative vascular anomalous complex. It provides a wealth of representative images, using various modalities to help the reader recognize the respective conditions. Importantly, it also includes images acquired using techniques more recently adopted in clinical practice such as autofluoresence, optical coherence tomography (OCT), and OCT angiography. The concise text reviews the basic concepts of etiology, diagnosis, and management in a highly accessible format. In contributions prepared by internationally respected experts, the atlas provides a cutting-edge analysis of each condition, as well as excellent summaries of recent work in the field. Macular Disorders is one of nine volumes in the series Retina Atlas. The series offers a global perspective on vitreoretinal diseases, covering imaging basics, retinal vascular disease, ocular inflammatory disease, retinal degeneration, surgical retina, macular disorders, ocular oncology, pediatric retina and trauma. In nine volumes and over 100 chapters, Retina Atlas offers comprehensive and validated information on retinal disorders.

    Contents:
    Dry age-related macular degeneration (AMD)
    Neovascular age-related macular degeneration
    Polypoidal choroidal vasculopathy
    Angioid streaks
    Ocular histoplasmosis
    Central serous chorioretinopathy/pachychoroid eye diseases
    Postsurgical cytoid macular edema
    Myopic macular degeneration and choroidal neovascularization
    Photic retinopathy
    Macular telangiectasis
    Perifoveal exudative vascular anomalous complex (PEVAC).
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Giuseppe Querques, Eric H. Souied, editors.
    Contents:
    Stargardt's disease (STGD)
    Macular Abnormalities in Panretinal Dystrophies
    Best Disease
    Pattern Dystrophy.- Autosomal Dominant Drusen
    North Carolina Makular Dystrophy (NCMD, MCDR1) and NCMD-like Disorders
    Sorsby Fundus Dystrophy
    Central Areolar Choroidal Dystrophy
    Maternally Inherited Diabetes and Deafness (MIDD)
    X-linked Retinoschisis (XLRS)
    Miscellaneous Very Rare Macular Dystrophies
    Management and Interventions.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    volume editor, Gabriel Coscas ; co-editors, Anat Loewenstein, José Cunha-Vaz, Gisèle Soubrane.
    Contents:
    Macular edema : definition and basic concepts / Coscas, Gabriel; Cunha-Vaz, José; Soubrane, Gisèle
    Mechanisms of retinal fluid accumulation and blood-retinal barrier breakdown / Cunha-Vaz, José
    Intracellular edema / Narayanan, Raja; Kuppermann, Baruch D
    Central serous chorioretinopathy / Daruich, Alejandra; Matet, Alexandre; Behar-Cohen, Francine
    Diagnosis and detection / Staurenghi, Giovanni; Pellegrini, Marco; Invernizzi, Alessandro; Preziosa, Chiara
    Optical coherence tomography angiography in macular edema / Lupidi, Marco; Coscas, Florence; Cagini, Carlo; Coscas, Gabriel
    Macular edema : rationale for therapy / Wolfensberger, Thomas J
    Drug delivery to the posterior segment of the eye / Moisseiev, Elad; Loewenstein, Anat
    Diabetic macular edema / Bandello, Francesco; Battaglia Parodi, Maurizio; Lanzetta, Paolo; Loewenstein, Anat; Massin, Pascale; Menchini, Francesca; Veritti, Daniele Retinal Vein Occlusions / Jonas, Jost; Monés, Jordi; Glacet-Bernard, Agnès; Coscas, Gabriel
    Insights into the physiopathology of inflammatory macular edema / de Smet, Marc D.
    Postsurgical cystoid macular edema / Zur, Dinah; Loewenstein, Anat
    Retinitis pigmentosa and other dystrophies / Mrejen, Sarah; Audo, Isabelle; Bonnel, Sébastien; Sahel, José-Alain
    Macular edema of choroidal origin / Soubrane, Gisèle
    Miscellaneous / Creuzot-Garcher, Catherine.
    Digital Access Karger 2017
  • Digital
    Andrew Chang, William F. Mieler, Masahito Ohji, editors.
    Summary: Recent technological advances in the diagnosis of macular disorders have enhanced our understanding of these diseases. At the same time, advances in small-gauge vitrectomy instrumentation and techniques have improved the safety and efficiency of surgery, allowing macular conditions that would have otherwise resulted in blindness to be treated effectively, preserving patients' sight. Macular surgery continues to evolve rapidly, thanks to exciting future technology trends. This book provides a detailed and up-to-date overview of the field. It begins with essential information on macular anatomy and pathophysiology, examination techniques, and surgical instrumentation. In turn, it discusses a broad range of disease processes, including macular holes, epiretinal membrane, vitreomacular traction and myopic maculopathy. The role and benefits of advanced vitrectomy techniques including submacular surgery, prosthetic vision, robotic surgery, and stem cell and gene therapy are addressed in detail. A review of perioperative care and potential complications rounds out the coverage.

    Contents:
    Anatomy
    Pathophysiology of macula
    Techniques for examination of the macula
    Surgical instrumentation and forceps
    Disease processes
    Follow-up of patients undergoing macula surgery
    New advances in vitrectomy
    Postoperative care of the patient undergoing macular surgery
    Submacular surgery
    Macular translocation
    Combined cataract surgery and vitrectomy for maculopathy
    Complications of macula surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Stephen J. Divers, Scott J. Stahl.
    Contents:
    Section 1: Practice Management & Development. 1. Reptile Practice Management 2. Reference Resources for the Reptile Clinician 3. Understanding the Human-Reptile Relationship 4. Veterinary Specialization 5. The Importance of Herpetological Publication by Clinicians and Academics 6. Statistics for the Clinician
    Section 2: Biology (Taxonomy, Anatomy, Physiology and Behavior). 7. Taxonomy, Anatomy and Physiology of Tortoises, Turtles and Terrapins 8. Taxonomy, Anatomy and Physiology of Snakes 9. Taxonomy, Anatomy and Physiology of Lizards 10. Taxonomy, Anatomy and Physiology or Crocodilians 11. Taxonomy, Anatomy and Physiology of Tuataras 12. Taxonomy, Anatomy and Physiology of Amphibians 13. Natural Behaviors 14. Conditioning and Behavioral Training 15. Stress and Welfare of Reptiles and Amphibians
    Section 3: Husbandry and Management. 16. General Husbandry and Management of Reptiles 17. Environmental Lighting 18. Disinfection 19. Quarantine 20. Snakes 21. Lizards 22. Management of Venomous Species 23. Tortoises, Freshwater Aquatic Turtles and Terrapins 24. Sea Turtles 25. Crocodilians 26. Tuatara 27. Nutrition 28. General Husbandry and Management of Amphibians
    Section 4: Infectious Diseases and Laboratory Sciences. 29. Bacteriology 30. Virology 31. Mycology 32. Parasitology Including Hemoparasites 33. Hematology 34. Clinical Chemistry 35. Hematology and Biochemistry Tables 36. Molecular Diagnostics 37. Immunopathology 38. Cytology 39. Biopsy 40. Necropsy 41. Commercial and Analytical Labs
    Section 5: Techniques and Procedures. 42. Handling and Physical Examination 43. Diagnostic Techniques and Sample Collection 44. Catheter Placement 45. Esophogastric Feeding Tube Placement 46. Hospitilization 47. Euthanasia
    Section 6: Anesthesia. 48. Sedation 49. General Anestheisa 50. Analgesia 51. Regional Anesthesia and Analgesia 52. Amphibian Anesthesia
    Section 7: Diagnostic Imaging. 53. Radiography
    General Principles 54. Radiography
    Lizards 55. Radiography
    Snakes 56. Radiography
    Chelonians 57. Radiography
    Crocodilians 58. Ultrasonography 59. Computed Tomography 60. Magnetic Resonance Imaging 61. Scintigraphy
    Section 8: Endoscopy. 62. Diagnostic and Surgical Endoscopy Equipment 63. Endoscopy practice management and marketing 64. Diagnostic Endoscopy 65. Endoscope-Assisted and Endoscopic Surgery
    Section 9: Medicine. 66. Urology 67. Hepatology 68. Cardiology 69. Dermatology I (Skin) 70. Dermatology II (Shell) 71. Ophthalmology 72. Otorhinolaryngology 73. Gastroenterology I (Oral cavity, esophagus, stomach) 74. Gastroenterology II (Small and large intestines) 75. Gastroenterology III (Cloaca) 76. Pulmonology 77. Neurology 78. Oncology 79. Endocrinology 80. Theriogenology 81. Musculoskeletal 82. Vascular, Hematopoietic Immunology 83. Clinical Behavioral Medicine 84. Nutritional Diseases 85. Perinatology 86. Geriatrics 87. Emergency and Critical Care 88. Toxicology 89. Amphibian Medicine Overview
    Section 10: Surgery. 90. Surgical Equipment, Instrumentation and General Principles 91. Eye 92. Ear 93. Rhinarium 94. Oral Cavity 95. Venemoid surgery 96. Integument
    Skin 97. Coeliotomy
    Snake 98. Coeliotomy
    Lizard 99. Prefemoral Coeliotomy
    Chelonian 100. Transplastron Coeliotomy
    Chelonian 101. Coeliotomy
    Crocodilian 102. Respiratory Tract 103. Gastro-Intestinal Surgery 104. Urinary Tract 105. Reproductive Tract 106. Cloacal Surgery 107. Amphibian Soft Tissue Surgery 108. External Coaptation 109. Fracture Fixation 110. Spinal Surgery 111. Limb Amputation 112. Tail Amputation 113. Shell Surgery and Repair
    Section 11: Therapy. 114. Therapeutic Overview and General Approach 115. Routes of Administration 116. Antibiotic Therapy 117. Antifungal Therapy 118. Antiviral Therapy 119. Anti-Inflammatory Therapy 120. Anti-Parasitic Therapy 121. Mental Health Treatment 122. Nutritional Therapy 123. Chemotherapy 124. Radiation Therapy 125. Miscellaneous Drug Therapy 126. Allometric Scaling 127. Reptile Formulary 128. Amphibian Formulary 129. Low Level LASER Therapy 130. Wound Management 131. Rehabilitation and Physical Therapy 132. Alternative and Complimentary Therapies
    Section 12: Differential Diagnosis by Clinical Signs. 133. Snakes 134. Lizards 135. Chelonians 136. Crocodilians 137. Amphibians
    Section 13: Specific Disease/ Case Summary. 138. Abscesses 139. Acariasis 140. Regurgitiation and Vomiting 141. Aural Abscess 142. Bites and Prey-Induced Trauma 143. Cloacal Prolapse 144. Cryptosporidiosis (Lizards) 145. Cryptosporidiosis (Snakes) 146. Urolithiasis (cystic calculi, cloacal uroliths) 147. Diarrhea 148. Digit Abnormalities 149. Dysecdysis 150. Dystocia 151. Gout 152. Hemoparasites 153. Hepatic Lipidosis 154. Herpesviruses of Tortoises 155. Hyperglycemia 156. Hyper and Hypovitaminosis A 157. Inclusion Body Disease 158. Secondary Nutritional Hyperparathyroidism 159. Neurologic Disorders 160. Paramyxoviruses 161. Periodontal Disease 162. Pneumonia 163. Pseudogout 164. Renal Disease 165. Shell Damage 166. Salmonellosis 167. Spinal Osteopathy 168. Tail Damage 169. Thermal Burns 170. Stomatitis 171. Scent Gland Adenitis 172. Mycoplasmosis and Upper Respiratory Tract Disease 173. Chytridiomycosis
    Section 14: Population and Public Health. 174. Zoonoses and Public Health 175. Working With Free-Ranging Reptiles 176. Medical Management and Rehabilitation of Sea Turtles 177. Commercial Reptile Farming 178. Large Zoo and Private Collection Management 179. Breeders, Wholesale and Retail 180. Laboratory Reptile and Amphibian Management 181. Conservation Issues 182. Herpetofauna and Ecosystem Health
    Section 15: Legal Topics. 183. International Legislation 184. European Legislation 185. US Federal Legislation 186. Forensics 187. Jurisprudence, Expert Reports, Testimony and Court Appearance.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2019
  • Print
    Stanley B. Prusiner.
    Contents:
    Growing up
    The beginning of an odyssey
    A plethora of theories
    The scrapie race
    Dr. America and the trembling cannibals
    The battle for tenure
    What's in a name?
    Lost in the Pacific fog
    The amyloid story
    Finding the gene
    Jousting with the press
    Deciphering human prion diseases
    What's in a shape?
    Turf battles
    Mad cow and other prion strains
    Stockholm
    The third judgment of Paris
    Epilogue : the quest for therapeutics.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: History - LC Classification (Downstairs)
    R690 .P78 2014
    1
  • Digital
    Kamel A. Abd-Elsalam, Mohamed A. Mohamed, Ram Prasad, editors.
    Summary: Recently, magnetic nanostructures have gained a remarkable interest for basic research and applied studies. Because of their low cost and ease of manufacture and modification, they have great potential for agricultural and environmental applications. The use of magnetic nanostructures has been proven in a wide range of fields including catalysis, biotechnology, biomedicine, magnetic resonance imaging, agriculture, biosensors, and removal of environmental pollutants, among others. This book includes 16 chapters of collected knowledge, discoveries, and applications in agriculture, soil remediation, and water treatment. It describes the role of nano-agriculture with regard to food security and discusses environmental and agricultural protection concerns. It further offers potential applications of magnetic nanomaterials in the agriculture and food sectors, such as the development of sensors, environment monitoring for wastewater treatment and the remediation of contaminated soils. Increasing crop yield through the use of nanopesticides or nanofertilizers and biosecurity using sensors for detecting pathogens along the entire food chain are discussed as well. This book also brings together various sources of expertise on different aspects magnetic nanostructure application in the agri-food sector and environment remediation. Magnetic nanostructures also have great potential in biotechnological processes, as they can be utilized as a carrier for enzymes during different biocatalytic transformations. Novel magnetic nanomaterials can be used for detection and separation of pesticides from environmental and biological samples. The excellent adsorption capacity of the modified magnetic nanoadsorbents together with other advantages such as reusability, easy separation, environmentally friendly composition, and freedom of interferences of alkaline earth metal ions make them suitable adsorbents for removal of heavy metal ions from environmental and industrial wastes. One of the most important environmental applications of magnetic nanostructures has been in the treatment of water, whether in the remediation of groundwater or through the magnetic separation and/or sensing of contaminants present in various aqueous systems. The integrated combination of these 16 chapters, written by experts with considerable experience in their area of research, provides a comprehensive overview on the synthesis, characterization, application, environmental processing, and agriculture of engineered magnetic nanostructures. Its comprehensive coverage discusses how nanostructure materials interact in plants as well as their potential and useful applications.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Nanoparticles: Magnetism and applications
    Bio-based synthesis of magnetic nanoparticles and their applications
    Plant mediated synthesis, applications and challenges of magnetic nanostructures
    Microbially synthesized biomagnetic nanomaterials
    Nanotechnology and Nano-biotechnology for Environmental Remediation
    Magnetic nanoparticles: a unique gene delivery system in plant science
    Magnetic Nanoparticles: Eco-friendly Application in Biofuel Production
    An overview of magnetic material: preparation and adsorption removal of heavy metals from waste water
    Water Purification using Magnetic Nanomaterials: An Overview
    Metal ferrites and their graphene-based nanocomposites: Synthesis, characterization and applications in wastewater treatment
    Magnetic Nanostructures: Environmental and Agricultural Applications
    Magnetic nanoparticles in plant protection: Promises and Risks
    Application of magnetic nanoparticles for removal of pesticides from environmental samples prior to instrumental analysis
    Iron-based nanomaterials: Effect on soil microbes and soil health
    Magnetic nanoparticle interface and the antimicrobial propensity
    Antimicrobial activity of magnetic nanoparticles
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Sudhakar K. Venkatesh, Richard L. Ehman, editors.
    Summary: This innovative book presents the development and clinical applications of magnetic resonance elastography (MRE), a new MRI-based imaging technology for quantitatively assessing the mechanical properties of tissue. Many disease processes cause profound changes in mechanical characteristics of tissue, but these changes can be completely invisible in examinations with conventional imaging technologies. MRE provides unique tissue information and powerful new diagnostic capabilities. The book begins with an accessible overview of the basic technology underlying MRE. Successive chapters provide coverage of the use of MRE to assess organ systems, including liver, skeletal muscle, brain, lungs, heart, breast, spleen, and kidney. The book is edited by Sudhakar Venkatesh, MD, a leader in the clinical use of this technology, and Richard Ehman, MD, the inventor of MRE. Magnetic Resonance Elastography is a valuable resource for radiologists, residents, fellows, technologists, hepatologists and scientists.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Robert W. Brown, Yu-Chung N. Cheng, E. Mark Haacke, Michael R. Thompson, Ramesh Venkatesan.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital/Print
    Print Access
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    16
    Periodicals (Downstairs)
    31
  • Digital
    Alexandre Boutet, Andres M. Lozano, editors.
    Summary: This book describes the roles magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) can play in deep brain stimulation (DBS). DBS therapeutically modulates aberrant neural circuits implicated in a broad range of neurological disorders. Following surgical insertion, an electrode placed into the desired brain target generates constant electricity, analogous to a cardiac pacemaker. Most commonly employed in movement disorders such as Parkinsons disease, dystonia, and tremor, DBS is also being investigated for use in psychiatric and cognitive disorders, including depression and Alzheimers disease. It is estimated that 200,000 patients have undergone DBS surgery worldwide. Imaging techniques, specifically MRI, have played key roles in the preoperative and postoperative aspects of DBS. This book focuses on the established as well as the innovative roles of MRI in DBS. MRI and DBS are first introduced from an historical perspective and a review of the clinical aspects of DBS is performed. Then, the preoperative and postoperative applications of MRI in DBS are covered. The crucial aspect of MRI safety in these patients is also discussed. Finally, possible upcoming MRI applications for patients with DBS are discussed in a future directions chapter. Chapters are written by experts from the University of Toronto, a world leader in the field of DBS, alongside international co-authors to ensure a thorough review of the topics. This is an ideal guide for both clinicians (neurosurgeons, neurologists, psychiatrists, and neuroradiologists) and researchers as well as trainees interested in neuroimaging for DBS.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Mrignayani Kotecha, Richard L. Magin, and Jeremy J. Mao.
    Contents:
    1. Stem cell tissue engineering and regeneratvie medicine: role of imaging
    2. Principles and applications of quantitative parametric MRI in tissue engineeering
    3. High field sodium MRS/MRI: application to cartilage tissue engineering
    4. SPIO-labeled cellular MRI in tissue engineering: a case study in growing valvular tissues
    5. Magnetic resonance elastography applications in tissue engineering
    6. Finite-element method in MR elastography: application in tissue engineering
    7. In vivo EPR oxygen imaging: a case for tissue engineering
    8. Tissue-engineered grafts for bone and meniscus regeneration and their assessment using MRI
    9. MRI assessment of engineered cartilage tissue growth
    10. Emerging techniques for tendon and ligament MRI
    11. MRI of engineered dental and crandiofacial tissues
    12. Osteochondral tissue engineering: noninvasive assessment of tissue regeneration
    13. Advanced liver tissue engineering approaches and their measure of success using NMR/MRI
    14. MRI of vascularized tissue-engineered organs
    15. MRI tools for assessment of cardiovascular tissue engineering
    16. Peripheral nerve tissue engineering and regeneration ovserved using MRI.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Scott W. Atlas.
    Contents:
    Instrumentation : magnets, coils, and hardware
    From image formation to image contrast : understanding contrast mechanisms, acquisition strategies, and artifacts
    Contrast agents and relaxation effects
    Disorders of brain development
    Central nervous system manifestations of the phakomatoses
    White matter diseases and inherited metabolic disorders
    Epilepsy
    Adult brain tumors
    Pediatric brain tumors
    Intracranial hemorrhage
    Intracranial vascular malformations and aneurysms
    Cerebral ischemia and infarction
    Head trauma
    Intracranial infection
    Normal aging, dementia, and neurodegenerative disease
    Skull base
    The sella turcica and parasellar region
    Eye and orbit
    Congenital anomalies of the spine and spinal cord : embryology and malformations
    Degenerative disease of the spine
    Neoplastic disease of the spine and spinal cord
    MRI of spinal trauma
    Vascular disorders of the spine and spinal cord
    Spinal infection and inflammatory disorders
    MR angiography : techniques and clinical applications
    MR of fetal brain and spine
    Diffusion and diffusion tensor MR imaging : fundamentals
    Perfusion magnetic resonance imaging
    Psychiatric disorders
    MR spectroscopy and the biochemical basis of neurologic disease
    Functional MRI.
    Digital Access Ovid 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Marc-André Weber.
    Contents:
    Part 1: Role of MRI in imaging the skeletal musculature: Value of Magnetic Resonance Imaging of the Skeletal Musculature from a clinical point of view
    Correlation of skeletal muscle anatomical to MRI and US findings
    Imaging the skeletal muscle {u2013} when to use MRI and when to use ultrasound
    Part 2: Modern MRI techniques for assessment of the skeletal musculature: Whole-body MRI for evaluation of the entire skeletal system
    Diffusion-weighted and diffusion-tensor imaging: Applications in skeletal muscles
    Assessment of skeletal muscle perfusion using MRI (DCE, ASL, BOLD)
    Skeletal muscle MR imaging beyond protons
    MR spectroscopy and spectroscopic imaging for evaluation of skeletal muscle metabolism: Basics and applications in metabolic myopathies
    Part 3: MRI in the diagnostic work-up of the skeletal musculature: MRI of muscle injuries, such as muscle strains
    MRI in neurogenic myopathies and muscle denervation
    MRI in muscle dystrophies and other myogenic myopathies
    MRI in inflammatory myopathies and autoimmune-mediated myositis
    MRI in muscular channelopathies and myotonias
    MRI in muscle tumours and tumours of the muscle sheaths.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Michel Gagner, editor.
    Summary: The book encompasses the different concepts and designs using magnets for surgical purposes. It provides a concise yet comprehensive summary of the current status of the field that will help guide patient management and stimulate investigative efforts. The text reviews new data about interventions in all medical and surgical fields. Written by experts in their fields, topics focus on endoluminal and laparoscopic operations, techniques from vascular and GI anastomosis. The book demonstrates the use of magnets to treat a variety of diseases such as reflux, back pain, and fecal incontinence. The reader will learn how to retract and gain exposure, dissect tissue planes, achieve hemostasis, and create anastomosis in a totally different way. Physical properties of external surface and internal magnets are discussed. The authors emphasize the importance of partnering with industry leaders to develop novel surgical tools. By harnessing the power of attraction, the energy and might of magnets, Magnetic Surgery serves as a valuable resource for clinicians, surgeons and researchers in biomedical engineering interested in this form of energy and physical metal properties. In utilizing these properties, the book seeks to improve surgical outcomes of patients worldwide.

    Contents:
    Introduction : Ideas and People Leading to Successful Products for Patient Care Leading to Magnetic Surgery- Physical Properties, Toxicity, and Physiological Effects of Magnets
    History of Magnets Used in Surgery
    Magnetic Interventions for Gastro-Esophageal Reflux
    Use of Magnets for Double-J Ureteral Stents
    Magnets for Colorectal Anastomosis
    Magnets for Fecal Incontinence
    Magnets for Urinary Incontinence
    The Use of Magnets in the Treatment of Congenital Disorders
    Use of Magnets in Flexible Endoscopy
    Magnetic Retraction for Laparoscopic Cholecystectomy and Other General Surgical Interventions
    Magnetic Retraction for Laparoscopic Sleeve Gastrectomy and Other Bariatric Procedures
    Magnetic Vascular Anastomosis
    Laparoendoscopic Magnetic Gastrointestinal Anastomosis
    Endoscopic Magnetic Bowel Anastomosis
    Magnetic Compression Anastomosis and Magnetic Compression Revision for Stenosis
    Use of Magnetically Controlled Growing Rod Implants for the Spine
    Magnetic Anal Sphincter for Fecal Incontinence
    Magnetic Satiety System: The Use of Magnets to Assist in Combating Obesity
    Future / Research in Magnetic Surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Selma Supek, Cheryl J. Aine, editors.
    Summary: This book surveys MEG basics and covers the latest methodological, empirical and clinical research. Includes tutorials on instrumentation, measurement, modeling and experimental design, discussion of open issues, future developments and new applications.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    [editors] Michael J. Zinner, Stanley W. Ashley, O. Joe Hines.
    Digital Access AccessSurgery 2019
  • Digital
    Yong-Ku Kim, editor.
    Summary: This book reviews all aspects of major depressive disorder (MDD), casting light on its neurobiological underpinnings and describing the most recent advances in management. The book is divided into four sections, the first of which discusses MDD from a network science perspective, highlighting the alterations in functional and structural connectivity and presenting insights achieved through resting state functional MRI and the development of neuroimaging-based biomarkers. The second section examines important diagnostic and neurobiological issues, while the third considers the currently available specific treatments for MDD, including biofeedback, neurofeedback, cognitive behavioral therapy, acceptance and commitment therapy, neuromodulation therapy, psychodynamic therapy, and complementary and alternative medicine. A concluding section is devoted to promising emerging treatments, from novel psychopharmacological therapies through to virtual reality treatment, immunotherapy, biomarker-guided tailored therapy, and more. Written by leading experts from across the world, the book will be an excellent source of information for both researchers and practitioners.

    Contents:
    Section I. Re-thinking depression from a network perspective
    Chapter 1. Phenotype network and brain structural covariance network of major depression
    Chapter 2. Task MRI-based functional brain network of major depression
    Chapter 3. White matter-based structural brain network of major depression
    Chapter 4. The application of a machine learning-based brain MRI approach in major depression
    Chapter 5. Resting state functional MRI in major depression
    Chapter 6. Development of neuroimaging-based biomarkers in depressive disorder
    Section II. Current diagnostic and neurobiological issues
    Chapter 7. Challenges and strategies for current classifications of depressive disorders: proposal for future diagnostic standards
    Chapter 8. Epigenetics: a missing link between early life stress and depression
    Chapter 9. Glia- neuron communications and gut-brain axis in depression
    Chapter 10. Apoptosis and proliferation markers in major depression
    Chapter 11. A load to find clinically useful biomarkers for depression
    Chapter 12. Pharmacogenomic tests for diagnosis and treatment prediction in depression
    Section III. Current specific treatments for depression
    Chapter 13. Biofeedback and neurofeedback for depression: a critical review
    Chapter 14. Cognitive behavioral therapy and mindfulness based cognitive therapy for depressive disorders
    Chapter 15. Acceptance Commitment Therapy (ACT) for major depressive disorder
    Chapter 16. Neurostimulation therapies in depressive disorders
    Chapter 17. Ketamine in major depression : New rapid antidepressant
    Chapter 18. Psychodynamic therapy in depressive disorders
    Chapter 19. Well-being therapy in depressive disorders
    Chapter 20. Complementary and alternative medicine in the treatments of depressive disorders
    Chapter 21. Current psychopharmacology algorithm for major depressive disorder
    Section IV. Promising future treatments for depression
    Chapter 22. Novel psychopharmacology for depressive disorders
    Chapter 23. Cannabinoid agents for depressive disorders
    Chapter 24. Virtual Reality for the treatment of depressive disorders
    Chapter 25. Epigenetic Therapy in depressive disorders
    Chapter 26. Induced pluripotent stem (iPS) cells technology: potential therapeutic targets for depression
    Chapter 27. Vaccination and immunotherapy for major depression
    Chapter 28. Psychedelic Medicines in major depression: progress and future challenges
    Chapter 29. Precision Psychiatry: Biomarker guided Tailored Therapy for Effective Treatment and Prevention in major depression. .
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    M.S. Swaminathan, S.L. Kochhar ; assisted by Monica Manchanda.
    Summary: This comprehensive text on flowering trees of tropical gardens discusses some new species of trees, including Adansonia digitata, Monodora myristica, Flacourtia montana, Balanites aegyptiaca, Bursera serrata, Commiphora wightii and Semecarpus anacardium. The text covers more than 200 of the most striking and widespread trees alongside closely related genera and species (both native and exotic) commonly encountered in the tropical climate. It includes more than 700 high resolution coloured photographs, depicting different facets including growth habit, morphological details of stem, leaves, flowers and fruits. The different tree species are organized according to Bentham and Hooker's system of classification of seed plants. The book discusses many aspects of trees including common and botanical names together with synonyms, taxonomic families, etymology (how trees have derived their names), phenology, their native place, geographical distribution, mythological notes, religious significance and economic importance. The text is useful for graduate students and academic researchers in the field of life sciences.

    Contents:
    Introduction; Western Himalayas; Eastern Himalayas; North West Dry Zone; Indo-Gangetic Plains; West Coast or Malabar Zone; Central Indian Region; Deccan Plateau; North Eastern Hills; Andaman and Nicobar Islands; Magnolia, Laurel Magnolia, Southern Magnolia, Bull Bay, Lily Tree; Golden Champa, Yellow Champa, Orange Champak, Fragrant Champak, Golden Champa; Sugar Apple, True Custard Apple, Sweet Sop; Climbing Ylang-Ylang, Tail Grape, Hari Champa; Indian Fir, Mast Tree, Cemetery TreeCham-Khirni; Calabash Nutmeg, Jamaican Nutmeg, African Nutmeg; Elephant Apple, Indian Dillenia, Chalta; Annatto Tree, Lipstick Tree or Urucu, Arnotto Tree; Yellow Silk Cotton Tree, Torchwood Tree, Buttercup Tree; The Sacred Barna, Garlic Pear, Caper Tree, Bengal Quince; Mountain Sweet Thorn; Sal Tree, Sakhua, Shala Tree; Changeable Rose, Changeable Hibiscus, Cotton Rose, Chinese Rose, Confederate Rose; Coast Cotton Tree, Yellow Mallow Tree, Corkwood, Lime Tree-leaved Hibiscus, Mahoe, Sea Hibiscus; Pula, Roxburgh's Kydia Portia Tree, Indian Tulip Tree, Umbrella Tree, Bhendi Tree or Paras PipalPhalsa; Jamaica Cherry, Singapore Cherry, West Indian Cherry, Capulin, Calabur Tree, Panama Cherry, Strawberry Cherry; Lignum-Vitae, Tree of Life, Gum Guaiacum, Poke Wood Tree; Alexandrian Laurel, Balltree, Beauty Leaf, Borneo-Mahogany, Mast Wood, Indian Laurel, Tamanu, Delo Oil Tree, Oil-nut-tree, Beach Touriga; Iron-wood Tree, Ceylon Ironwood, Indian Rose Chestnut; Baobab, Monkey-Bread Tree, Upside-Down Tree, African Calabash Tree; Red Silk Cotton Tree, Red Kapok; True Kapok, White Silk Cotton Tree, Silk Cotton Tree; Mexican Silk Cotton Tree, Floss-Silk TreeUtrasum Bead Tree, Rudraksh Tree, Blue Quandong, Blue Fig, Silver Quandong; Devil's Cotton; Bastard Cedar, Honey-Fruit Tree, Musket Tree, Pigeon-Wood, West Indian Elm; East Indian Screw Tree or Nut-leaved Screw Tree; Tree Antigonan, Guest Tree, Timanga Tree; Bonfire Tree, The Coloured Sterculia; Maple Twist, Muchkunda, Kanak Champa, Dinnerplate Tree; Buddha's Coconut, Narikel; Wild Almond, Poon Tree, Foetid Sterculia, Hill Coconut, Dung Tree; Indian Tragacanth, Gum Karaya, Indian Gum Tragacanth, Kateera Gum Hairy Sterculia, Elephant Rope Tree, Woolly Ordure TreeBael Tree, Golden Apple, Bilpatre or Vilva, Bengal Quince; Wood-Apple, Elephant-Apple; Orange Jasmine, Chinese Box, Satin Wood, Sumatra Box; Indian Frankincense Tree, Indian Olibanum or Salai Guggul, Frankincense Tree; Garuga, Grey Downy Balsam; Tree of Heaven, Maharuk, Mahanimb, Ullu; Desert Date, Egyptian Myrobalan, Soapberry Tree, Egyptian Balsam, Thorn Tree, Heglig Berries; Bitterwood, Surinam Bitterwood, Amargo, Bitter-ash; Bird's Eye Bush, Golden Champak; Neem Tree or Margosa Tree
    Digital Access Cambridge 2019
  • Digital
    Yoshiaki Toyama, Atsushi Miyawaki, Masaya Nakamura, Masahiro Jinzaki, editors.
    Summary: This open access book describes marked advances in imaging technology that have enabled the visualization of phenomena in ways formerly believed to be completely impossible. These technologies have made major contributions to the elucidation of the pathology of diseases as well as to their diagnosis and therapy. The volume presents various studies from molecular imaging to clinical imaging. It also focuses on innovative, creative, advanced research that gives full play to imaging technology in the broad sense, while exploring cross-disciplinary areas in which individual research fields interact and pursuing the development of new techniques where they fuse together. The book is separated into three parts, the first of which addresses the topic of visualizing and controlling molecules for life. The second part is devoted to imaging of disease mechanisms, while the final part comprises studies on the application of imaging technologies to diagnosis and therapy. The book contains the proceedings of the 12th Uehara International Symposium 2017, "Make Life Visible" sponsored by the Uehara Memorial Foundation and held from June 12 to 14, 2017. It is written by leading scientists in the field and is an open access publication under a CC BY 4.0 license.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Visualizing and Controlling Molecules for Life
    Chapter 1. Photoacoustic Tomography: Deep Tissue Imaging by Ultrasonically Beating Optical Diffusion
    Chapter 2. Regulatory Mechanism of Neural Stem Cells Revealed by Optical Manipulation of Gene Expressions
    Chapter 3. Eavesdropping on Biological Processes with Multi-Dimensional Molecular Imaging
    Chapter 4. Apical microtubules define the function of epithelial cell sheets consisting of non-ciliated or multi-ciliated cells
    Chapter 5. Illuminating the brain
    Chapter 6. Optogenetic assemblies of cortical force-generating complexes during mitosis
    Chapter 7. In vivo Imaging Probes with Tunable Chemical Switches
    Chapter 8. Circuit-dependent striatal PKA and ERK signaling underlying action selection
    Chapter 9. Electrophysiology, Unplugged: New Chemical Tools to Image Voltage
    Chapter 10. Molecular dynamics revealed by single-molecule FRET measurement
    Chapter 11. Comprehensive approaches using luminescence to studies of cellular functions
    Part II: Imaging Disease Mechanisms
    Chapter 12. Make Chronic Pain Visible
    Chapter 13. Cortical plasticity after spinal cord injury using resting-state functional magnetic resonance imaging
    Chapter 14. Multimodal Label-free imaging to assess compositional and morphological changes in cells during immune activation
    Chapter 15. Investigating in vivo myocardial and coronary molecular pathophysiology in mice with X-ray radiation imaging approaches
    Chapter 16. Visualizing the Immune Response to Infections
    Chapter 17. Imaging Sleep and Wakefulness
    Chapter 18. Abnormal local translation in dendrites impairs cognitive functions in neuropsychiatric disorders
    Chapter 19. Imaging synapse formation and remodeling in vitro and in vivo
    Part III: Imaging-based Diagnosis and Therapy
    Chapter 20. How MRI makes the Brain Visible
    Chapter 21. Intravital multiphoton imaging revealing cellular dynamics in vivo
    Chapter 22. Theranostic Near Infrared Photoimmunotherapy for Cancer
    Chapter 23. Novel and integrated imaging on Chronic Fatigue
    Chapter 24. Novel fluorescent probes for rapid tumor imaging and fast glutathione dynamics
    Chapter 25. Coronary Heart Disease Diagnosis: Engineering Triumphs, Economic Barriers
    Chapter 26. Live imaging of the skin immune responses
    Chapter 27. Development of a horizontal CT and its application to musculoskeletal disease
    Chapter 28. The Future of Precision Health & Integrated Diagnostics
    Chapter 29. Imaging and therapy against hypoxic tumors with 64Cu-ATSM.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    [edited by] Maureen Mackintosh, Geoffrey Banda, Paula Tibandebage, Watu Wamae.
    Contents:
    Making medicines in Africa : an historical political economy overview / Geoffrey Banda, Samuel Wangwe, Maureen Mackintosh
    Pharmaceuticals in Kenya : the evolution of technological capabilities / Roberto Simonetti, Norman Clark
    Pharmaceutical manufacturing decline in Tanzania : how possible is a turnaround to growth? / Paula Tibandebage, Samuel Wangwe, Maureen Mackintosh
    Bringing industrial and health policies closer : reviving pharmaceutical production in Ethiopia / Tsige Gebre-Mariam, Kedir Tahir, Solomon Gebre-Amanuel
    South-south collaboration in pharmaceuticals : manufacturing antiretroviral medicines in Mozambique / Giuliano Russo, Lâicia de Oliveira
    Can foreign firms promote local production of pharmaceuticals in Africa? / Sudip Chaudhuri
    Raising the technological level : the scope for API, excipients, additives and biologicals manufacture in Africa / Joseph Fortunak, Skhumbuzo Ngozwana, Tsige Gebre-Mariam, Tiffany Ellison, Paul Watts
    Health systems as industrial policy : building collaborative capabilities in the Tanzanian and Kenyan health sectors and their local suppliers / Maureen Mackintosh, Paula Tibandebage, Joan Kariuki Kungu, Mercy Karimi Njeru, Caroline Israel
    The dissemination of local health innovations : political economy issues in Brazil / Erika Aragäao, Jane Mary Guimaräaes, Sebastiäao Loureiro
    Healthy industries and unhealthy populations : lessons from Indian problem-solving / Smita Srinivas
    Policies to control medicines prices : does the South African experience have lessons for other African countries? / Skhumbuzo Ngozwana
    African pharmaceutical standards : the road to improvement and their role in technological capability upgrading / Geoffrey Banda, Julius Mugwagwa, Dinar Kale, Margareth Ndomondo-Sigonda
    Innovative procurement for health and industrial development / Joanna Chataway, Geoffrey Banda, Gavin Cochrane and Catriona Manville
    Industry associations and the changing politics of making medicines in South Africa / Theo Papaioannou, Andrew Watkins, Julius Mugwagwa, Dinar Kale
    Finance and incentives to support the development of national pharmaceutical industries / Alastair West, Geoffrey Banda.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Print
    by Evan R. Ragland.
    Summary: "How did medical students become Galenic physicians in the early modern era? Making Physicians guides the reader through the ancient sources, textbooks, lecture halls, gardens, dissecting rooms, and patient bedsides in the early decades of an important medical school. Standard pedagogy combined book learning and hands-on experience. Professors and students embraced Galen's models for integrating reason and experience, and cultivated humanist scholarship and argumentation, which shaped their study of chymistry, medical botany, and clinical practice at patients' bedsides, in private homes and in the city hospital. Following Galen's emphasis on finding and treating the sick parts, professors correlated symptoms and the evidence from post-mortems to produce new pathological knowledge"-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    edited by Ian J. Dempsey and Mark D. Miller.
    Summary: "This book covers key areas of orthopedic surgery having multiple anatomic sections like: the knee, hip, elbow, hand and wrist, foot and ankle, the pediatric patient, and the spine. Each section is subdivided into specific pathologic conditions eg, the knee section is divided into the major pathologies: the anterior cruciate ligament injuries, posterior cruciate ligament injuries, posterolateral corner injuries, medial-sided injuries, meniscal injuries, patellar instability and osteochondral injuries. As one dissects the anatomy of each topic in a bullet-formatted presentation the classic history, appropriate physical examination tests and pertinent imaging studies are presented, along with evaluation flowcharts, appropriate images (physical examination, radiographic, MRI, CT, and intraoperative findings). For those less familiar with musculoskeletal medicine, we have included algorithms, key references and original videos in each chapter to help the clinician focus on the appropriate areas. Finally, we have outlined what imaging should be obtained, how and when to order it, and how to interpret the results. Our goal was to create a stand-alone reference for all providers from the beginning medical student, technician, physician assistant, or resident to the most senior orthopedic surgeon who may need a quick refresher on the particulars of an examination that he does not routinely perform. We hope that it will be used to solve arguments in clinic and conference regarding the exact maneuvers involved for a particular examination and most importantly, we hope it improves the care that we offer our patients, leading to their correct diagnoses and, ultimately, their best treatment and outcome"--Provided by publisher
    Digital Access Ovid 2020
  • Print
    Vignes, Henri.
    Contents:
    Contents
    1. Affections du tube digestif, avec la collaboration de G. Lauret et P. Olivier-Pallud
    2. Affections du foie, du pancréas, maladies de la nutrition, parois abdominales, péritoine, avec la collaboration de G. Lauret, Jean Olivier et P. Olivier-Pallud
    3. Affections de la peau, avec la collaboration de F. Hanoun et G. Vail
    4. Afections des muqueuses génitales
    5. Coeur, par H. Vignes et J. Dugas
    6. Maladies des vaisseaux, avec la collaboration de J. Dugas
    [7.] Eclampsie et eclampsime.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    O171 .V68 1942
    2
  • Digital
    editors, Giampietro Corradin, Howard Engers.
    Contents:
    Malaria vaccine development : over 40 years of trials and tribulations / Giampietro Corradin & Howard Engers
    Malaria vaccines : reflections on 40 years of basic research and translation applications / Giampietro Corradin
    Challenges for the stakeholders / Howard Engers
    Plasmodium vivax vaccine surrogate markers of protection : dawning of a new era / Mary R. Galinski, Rabindra M. Tirouvanziam & Alberto Moreno
    Plasmodium vivax vaccine development in Colombia : advances and challenges / Myriam Arevalo-Herrera & Sócrates Herrera-Valencia
    Progress towards development of a vaccine for Plasmodium vivax malaria / Ahmad Rushdi Shakri & Chetan E. Chitnis
    Correlates of protection for Plasmodium falciparum malaria vaccine development : current knowledge and future research / James G. Beeson, Freya J.I. Fowkes, Linda Reiling, Faith H. Osier, Damien R. Drew & Graham V. Brown
    Plasmodium falciparum RTS,S vaccines and future development / Tom Egwang
    Plasmodium falciparum pre-erythrocytic vaccines : previous experience and the challenge of selecting new candidates / Thomas L. Richie & Joanne M. Lumsden
    Plasmodium falciparum whole-parasite malaria vaccines / Else M. Bijker & Robert W. Sauerwein
    Index.
    Digital Access Future Med 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Haroun N. Shah, Saheer E. Gharbia.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Douglas S. Steinbrech
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
  • Digital
    Ralph M. Trüeb, Woo-Soo Lee.
    Summary: This monograph provides specialists and primary care physicians who are interested in hair with the practical know-how needed to achieve successful management of male alopecia. Guidance is first provided on the examination of hair loss in men, covering such aspects as clinical examination, the role of trichoscopy and the trichogram, laboratory work-up, and scalp biopsy. Diagnosis and treatment are then described in depth for a diverse range of conditions involving alopecia. Expert opinion is combined with the results of evidence-based medicine to provide the best current advice, highlighting the synergistic action of combination regimens and adjuvant treatments and explaining the concept of multitargeted treatment. All aspects of follow-up are covered, including compliance issues and expectation management. The role of hair care and cosmetics is also considered, with identification of potential adverse effects as well as benefits.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Examining Hair Loss in Men
    Diagnosis and Treatment
    Follow-Up
    Patient Expectation Management
    Hair Care and Cosmetics
    Epilogue: Male Hair in the Bible.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Print
    edited by R. John Aitken, David Mortimer, Gabor T. Kovacs.
    Summary: "This chapter describes techniques for the preparation of human spermatozoa for assisted conception. Traditional swim-up techniques depend on the intrinsic motility of human spermatozoa and have been used as the basis for new microfluidics devices that exploit the capacity of these cells for chemotaxis, rheotaxis or thermotaxis. Unfortunately, such self-migration strategies tend to lose effectiveness with pathological samples exhibiting poor levels of motility and/or diminished counts. With such compromised starting material, active selection of spermatozoa can be achieved by exploiting differences between sperm populations in their density or charge. Density gradient centrifugation selects spermatozoa with minimal residual cytoplasm that are highly motile and have good morphology, even though the induction of sperm DNA damage in certain patients may be problematical. Alternatively, methodologies based on differences in sperm charge, appear to hold promise for the rapid, efficient isolation of highly motile human spermatozoa that consistently exhibit low levels of DNA damage"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Sperm Selection for ART Success Sperm Selection for ART Success / R. John Aitken
    New Horizons in Male Subfertility and Infertility / Brett Nixon and Elizabeth G. Bromfield
    Chromosome Abnormalities and the Infertile Male / Csilla Krausz and Viktoria Rosta
    The Effect of Endocrine Disruptors and Environmental and Lifestyle Factors on the Sperm Epigenome / Viviane Santana, Albert Salas-Huetos, Emma R. James and Douglas T. Carrel
    Lifestyle Factors and Sperm Quality / Ciara Wright
    The Effect of Age on Male Fertility and the Health of Offspring / Allan Pacey and Sarah Martins da Silva
    The Assessment and Role of Anti-Sperm Antibodies / Gary N. Clarke
    FSH Treatment in Male Infertility / Csilla Krausz, Viktoria Rosta and Alberto Ferlin
    Antioxidants to Improve Sperm Quality / Elena Martínez Holguín, Enrique Lledó García, Ángel Rebollo Román, Javier González
    García, José Jara Rascón and Carlos Hernández Fernández
    The History of Utilization of IVF For Male Factor Subfertility / Gabor T. Kovacs
    The Case Against Intracytoplasmic Sperm Injection For All / David Mortimer and Sharon T. Mortimer
    Perinatal Outcomes From IVF and ICSI / Michael Davies
    Artificial Insemination With Partner's Sperm, For Male Subfertility / Willem Ombelet
    Obstructive Azoospermia : Is There a Place For Microsurgical Testicular Sperm surgical Testicular Sperm Extraction / Ahmad Aboukhshaba, Russell P. Hayden and Peter N. Schlegel
    Should Varicocele Be Operated On Before IVF? / Shannon H.K. Kim and Victoria Nisenblat
    Donor Insemination -Past, Present and Future Perspectives / Christopher LR Barratt, Rachel Agnew and Eleanor Heighton
    DNA Damage in Spermatozoa / Russell P. Hayden, Ahmad Aboukhshaba and Peter N. Schlegel
    Prevention of Male Infertility : From Childhood to Adulthood / Alberto Ferlin.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    Ian Fentiman.
    Summary: This book provides an up-to-date review of the risk factors and genetics influencing the development of this rare disease. This volume presents clinical features and recent advances in histopathology and molecular profiling are analysed, providing a valuable aid to clinicians in tailoring treatment to both the patient and the tumour. Readers will find important insights into the most effective strategies for making or negating a diagnosis of male breast cancer. Within this timely volume, consideration is also given to the psychological needs of men with breast cancer alongside a discussion of the most effective support methods. The surgical management of the disease is examined, together with algorithms for local and systemic therapy. Owing to the problem of late diagnosis in male breast cancer, many men have advanced or disseminated disease at diagnosis and, as such, the evidence-based management of these cases is reviewed. This book will be of interest to breast surgeons, oncologists, breast radiologists, breast histopathologists and breast care nurses worldwide.

    Contents:
    Risk factors
    Genetics
    Clinical features
    Histopathology
    Molecular profile
    Diagnosis
    Psychosocial
    Surgical treatment
    Adjuvant treatment
    Treatment of advanced disease
    Prognosis
    The future.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Stephen J. Winters, Ilpo T. Huhtaniemi, editors.
    Summary: Now in a revised second edition, this comprehensive text covers all aspects of male hypogonadism from the basic science to clinical management, comprehensively explaining and applying new insights to the treatment of hypogonadal men. Chapters covering neuroendocrine control of testicular function, Leydig cell function, spermatogenesis, and normal and delayed puberty open the book. The focus then turns to the pathophysiology and treatment of hypogonadism and other forms of testicular dysfunction, such as Klinefelter syndrome, cryptorchidism, and disorders of the pituitary, as well as reproductive and endocrine consequences of cancer treatment, environmental factors, obesity and aging. Next are chapters that describe the available options for androgen replacement therapy, and the outcomes when men with hypogonadism of various causes are treated with testosterone, as well as a chapter devoted to current approaches to stimulating spermatogenesis in gonadotropin-deficient men. < Highly practical and updated with the latest available data, this second edition of Male Hypogonadism: Basic, Clinical and Therapeutic Principles cogently presents a large body of scientific information on male reproductive endocrinology to provide a thorough understanding of the pathophysiology, clinical characteristics, and treatments for disorders that adversely affect testicular function.

    Contents:
    Neuroendocrine Control of Human Testicular Function
    The Human Leydig Cell
    Human Spermatogenesis and its Regulation
    Normal and Delayed Puberty
    Congenital Hypogonadotropic Hypogonadism in Males: Clinical Features and Pathophysiology
    Male Hypogonadism Resulting From Mutations in the Genes for the Gonadotropin Subunits and their Receptors
    Hypogonadism in Males with Congenital Adrenal Hyperplasia
    Male Hypogonadism Due to Disorders of the Pituitary and Suprasellar Region
    Klinefelter Syndrome and Other Forms of Primary Testicular Failure
    The Undescended Testis
    Male Hypogonadism and Liver Disease
    Male Hypogonadism Due to Cancer and Cancer Treatments
    Exercise and Male Hypogonadism: Testosterone, the Hypothalamic-Pituitary- Testicular Axis, and Exercise Training
    Environmental Causes of Testicular Dysfunction
    Sex Hormone-binding Globulin and the Metabolic Syndrome
    An Ensemble Perspective of Aging-Related Hypoandrogenemia in Men
    Obesity and Aging in Late-onset Hypogonadism
    Androgen Replacement Therapy in Hypogonadal Men
    Androgen Therapy for Hypogonadism in Men with Chronic Illnesses
    Stimulation of Spermatogenesis in Hypogonadotropic Men.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Karthik Gunasekaran, N Pandiyan, editors.
    Summary: The book aims to bring into focus the current understanding of male reproduction and the pathological basis of failure to reproduce in men. Infertility in men is a common disorder. However, attempts at scientific study of male infertility are of very recent origin. Many questions about the physiology and pathophysiology of male reproduction are still not clear. The chapters are written by authorities in the field with great clinical experience. The primary focus would be on clinical perspective; however emphasis would also be placed on basic research and molecular biology. .

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Anatomy
    Physiology and endocrinology
    Development
    Clinical approach to male infertility
    Semen analysis
    Abnormal semen analysis
    Sperm preparation techniques
    Sperm freezing
    Medical management of male infertility
    Surgical management of male infertility
    Counseling for male infertility
    Ethics of treating infertility in men
    Sexual dysfunction and male infertility
    Genetics of male infertility
    Sperm retrieval techniques
    Male infertility and ART
    Imaging in male infertility.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Stefan S. du Plessis, Ashok Agarwal, Edmund S. Sabanegh, Jr, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Sijo J. Parekattil, Sandro C. Esteves, Ashok Agarwal, editors.
    Summary: A groundbreaking contribution to the literature now in its revised and expanded second edition, this textbook offers a comprehensive review of diagnostic and treatment techniques for male infertility. This state-of-the-art, evidence-based textbook incorporates new multidisciplinary and complementary medicine approaches to create a first-of-its-kind guide to treatment strategies for male infertility and beyond. While this new edition is primarily designed as a reference for students and residents in reproductive medicine and andrology, it will be equally useful as well for professionals in urology, reproductive endocrinology, embryology, and research fields who are interested in the role that antioxidants play in male infertility. World-renowned experts in these areas have been selected to participate in this work. Careful selection of the highest quality content will span the whole range of topics in the area of male infertility, providing a complete review of well-established and current diagnostic and treatment techniques for male infertility. The incorporation of 20 new chapters will enhance the books appeal by including the most recent advances brought to the male infertility arena. Additionally, this edition incorporates new features, including bulleted key points, review criteria and select video clips demonstrating some of the most fascinating male infertility treatment modalities. A dedicated new section on current guidelines on male infertility will enlighten readers on how to most optimally manage male infertility clinical scenarios. Covering all aspects of diagnosis and management, ART, lifestyle factors and associated conditions for male infertility, Male Infertility: Contemporary Clinical Approaches, Andrology, ART and Antioxidants will be a readily accessible, high quality reference for medical students and residents, and will be of significant value to professionals working in the various fields treating this condition as well.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    About the Editors
    Contents
    Contributors
    Part I: Male Infertility Diagnosis and Management
    1: Causes of Male Infertility
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Causes of Male Infertility
    1.2.1 Pre-testicular
    1.2.1.1 Hypogonadotropic Hypogonadism
    1.2.1.2 Elevated Prolactin
    1.2.1.3 Pharmacologic
    1.2.1.4 Idiopathic Hypogonadotropic Hypogonadism and Kallmann Syndrome
    1.2.1.5 Testicular
    Varicocele
    Cryptorchidism
    Testicular Cancer
    1.2.1.6 Ionizing Radiation
    1.2.1.7 Chemotherapy
    1.2.1.8 Genetic Azoospermia/Oligospermia 1.2.1.9 Lifestyle Factors
    1.2.1.10 Testicular Injury
    1.2.1.11 Primary Ciliary Dyskinesia
    1.2.1.12 Antisperm Antibodies
    1.2.2 Post-testicular
    1.2.2.1 Absence of the Vas Deferens
    1.2.2.2 Young's Syndrome
    1.2.2.3 EjDO/Seminal Vesicle Dysfunction
    1.2.2.4 Nerve Injury
    1.2.2.5 Medications
    1.2.2.6 Coital
    1.3 Conclusion
    1.4 Review Criteria
    References
    Notable Suggested Readings from the Last 5 Years
    2: Epidemiologic Considerations in Male Infertility
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Epidemiology of Infertility 2.2.1 Incidence and Prevalence of Infertility in Developed Countries
    2.2.2 Infertility in the Developing World
    2.2.3 Reproduction-a Matter of Chance: The Natural History of Infertility
    2.3 Diagnostic Accuracy and Utility of Semen Studies
    2.3.1 Relationship Between Semen Parameters and Male Infertility
    2.3.2 Do Semen Parameters Prospectively Predict Fertility and Assisted Reproductive Technique Outcomes?
    2.3.3 Novel Assays for Diagnosis of Male Infertility
    2.4 Are Sperm Counts Declining?
    2.5 Health-Care Resource Utilization for Male Infertility 2.5.1 Office Visits and Ambulatory Surgery Cases
    2.5.2 Assisted Reproductive Technology
    2.5.3 Cost of Treatment for Male Infertility
    2.6 Cost Analysis Models for Management of Male Infertility
    2.7 Conclusion
    2.8 Review Criteria
    References
    3: Laboratory Evidence for Male Infertility
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 WHO Guidelines for Assessment of Semen Specimen
    3.3 Laboratory Evaluation of Male Factor Infertility
    3.3.1 Basic Semen Analysis
    3.3.1.1 Collection
    3.3.1.2 Volume
    3.3.1.3 Liquefaction and Viscosity
    3.3.1.4 pH [normal > 7.2] 3.3.1.5 Concentration
    3.3.1.6 Motility
    3.3.1.7 Morphology
    3.3.1.8 Agglutination
    3.3.1.9 Leukocytospermia
    3.4 Retrograde or Post-Ejaculatory Urinalysis (PEUA)
    3.5 Reactive Oxygen Species (ROS) Testing
    3.6 Acrosome Reaction Testing
    3.7 Antisperm Antibody (ASA) Testing
    3.8 Sperm Viability Testing
    3.9 Advanced Semen Testing
    3.9.1 Sperm DNA Fragmentation (SDF)
    3.9.2 Sperm Chromatin Structure Assay (SCSA)
    3.9.3 Terminal Deoxynucleotidyl Transferase dUTP Nick End Labeling (TUNEL)
    3.9.4 Single-Cell Gel Electrophoresis Assay (Comet)
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Steven A. Kaplan, Kevin T. McVary.
    Contents:
    Etiology and pathogenesis / Robert H. Getzenberg and Prakash Kulkarni
    Lower urinary tract symptoms and benign prostatic hyperplasia : epidemiology, correlates, and risk factors / Raymond C. Rosen and Benjamin N. Breyer
    Clinical assessment and diagnosis of lower urinary tract dysfunction (LUTD) : United States / Christopher P. Filson and John T. Wei
    Clinical assessment and diagnosis of LUTS/BPH : Europe / Stavros Gravas and Jean J.M.C.H. de la Rosette
    Clinical assessment and diagnosis of LUTS/BPH : primary care / Matt T. Rosenberg, John Riley, and Marty M. Miner
    Watchful waiting / Reginald Bruskewitz
    Alpha-adrenergic antagonists for lower urinary symptoms secondary to benign prostatic hyperplasia / Nathaly Francois, Raunak D. Patel, Kevin T. McVary
    5-Alpha reductase inhibitors (5-ARIs) / Claudius, Füllhase, and Roberto Soler
    Anti-muscarinics / Nadir I. Osman and Christopher R. Chapple
    The use of PDE-5 inhibitors in the treatment of lower urinary tract symptoms due to benign prostatic hyperplasia / Casey Lythgoe and Kevin T. McVary
    Combination medical therapy for male LUTS / Claus G. Roehrborn
    Complementary therapy / Aaron E Katz and Anne Darves-Bornoz
    Open simple prostatectomy / Annika Herlemann, Matthias Oelke, and Christian Gratzke
    Minimally invasive therapies / Mauro Gacci, Matteo Salvi, and Arcangelo Sebastianelli
    Holmium laser therapy / Peter Gilling
    Greenlight laser therapy / Alexis E. Te and Bilal Chughtai
    Monopolar and bipolar transurethral resection of the prostate / Aaron M. Bernie and Richard Lee.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    Christopher R. Chapple, Andrea Tubaro, editors.
    Summary: Male LUTS/BPH Made Easy is an up-to-date comprehensive reference on the management of Lower Urinary Tract Symptoms (LUTS) due to Benign Prostatic Enlargement (BPE), which incorporates all of the key issues in the field of management of male lower urinary tract symptoms and benign prostatic disease. Male LUTS/BPH Made Easy aims to update the reader on the most current treatments and assist in clinical decision making based on the latest evidence.

    Contents:
    1. History of LUTS/BPO and Evolution of Concepts and Terminology
    2. Epidemiology and Pathophysiology of LUTS/BPO
    3. Assessing LUTS/BPO: What Is The Evidence?
    4. Treatment Algorithms: When to Treat and Whom?
    5.?Medical Treatment of LUTS/BPH
    6. Open Prostatectomy and Standard Endosurgery
    7. Surgical Treatment: Lasers and Techniques
    8. Emerging Treatments of BPH
    9. Managing the Complex/Difficult Cases.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Alberto Ferlin, Silvia Migliaccio, editors.
    Summary: This book represents a comprehensive, clinically oriented text covering all aspects of male osteoporosis, from the basic concepts of bone physiology and regulation of bone remodeling in men, the causes and pathophysiological mechanisms responsible for the most frequent causes of osteoporosis, to diagnostic and screening protocols, as well as prevention and treatment approaches. It offers a broad overview of male osteoporosis by specialists involved in research and clinical practice and discusses the practical issues encountered. Filling a gap in the literature, this volume is a valuable resource for general practitioners, clinical endocrinologists, geriatricians and experts in osteoporosis. .

    Contents:
    Preface
    Introduction
    Introductory remarks: Gender differences in osteoporosis: from research to treatment
    Anatomy and histology of male skeletal tissue: gender differences
    Physiology of bone mass acquisition and pathophysiology of bone mass loss: gender differences Epidemiology of male osteoporosis and fractures
    Economic and social impact of male osteoporosis and fractures
    Diagnosis of osteoporosis and fracture risk assessment: gender differences (anamnesis, algorithms, blood tests, DXA)
    Male osteoporosis and imaging (QUS, CT, RM, xray)
    Causes and pathophysiology of osteoporosis in men: Introduction: causes and risk factors for male osteoporosis
    Genetics of osteoporosis: gender differences
    Aging and bone loss
    Androgens and bone
    Estrogens and male osteoporosis
    Vitamin D and male osteoporosis
    Testicular function and skeletal alterations
    Endocrinological causes of male osteoporosis
    Osteoporosis in Klinefelter syndrome
    Nutritional disturbances and osteoporosis during puberty (anorexia, bulimia)
    Lifestyle and osteoporosis risk in men (physical activity, diet, alcohol abuse)
    Drug induced male osteoporosis
    Obesity and male osteoporosis: protective factor?
    HIV and osteoporosis
    Cardiovascular risk and osteoporosis: is there a link?
    Osteoporosis and hormonal therapy in prostate cancer
    Doping and skeletal alterations
    Sarcopenia-osteoporosis: the fragile man
    Prevention, screening and treatment: Prevention of male osteoporosis in the different ages
    Screening foroporosis in men: critical summary of international guidelines
    Androgen therapy
    Vitamin D supplementation
    Pharmacological therapy
    Femur fragility fracture in men and surgical therapy risks
    Rehabilitation therapy after surgery in osteoporotic patients
    Future research and clinical issues.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital/Print
    Richard Bronson editor.
    Summary: Novel topics compiled in this one-of-a-kind volume provide tantalizing hints for clinical application through future translational research. Only recently have we come to ask what role the male might play in pregnancy loss and embryo implantation failure, beyond contributing an abnormal set of paternal chromosomes at fertilization. This volume explores the recent evidence that these conditions might also be related to the transmission of previously unrecognized chromosomal micro-deletions and duplications, or via the epigenetic dysregulation of early embryonic gene function by spermatozoal microRNAs or alterations in sperm DNA methylation patterning, or by DNA damage secondary to either reactive oxygen species or environmental toxicants. In addition, the composition of seminal plasma has been found to be highly complex, containing many factors that play important roles in altering the uterine environment and the female immune system permissive of embryo implantation and trophectoderm outgrowth leading to successful pregnancy. Coverage includes an examination of both spermatozoa and seminal fluid component factors.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Meiotic Non-disjunction
    Insights into the Origin and Significance of Aneuploidy in Human Spermatozoa
    Damage to Sperm DNA Mediated by Reactive Oxygen Species: Its Impact on Human Reproduction and the Health Trajectory of Offspring
    Small RNAs: Their Possible Roles in Reproductive Failure
    The Sperm Epigenome, Male Aging and Potential Effects on the Embryo
    The Role of Uterine NK Cells in Normal Reproduction and Reproductive Disorders
    Seminal fluid Signaling in the Female Reproductive Tract: Implications for Reproductive Success and Offspring Health
    Role of Seminal Plasma in Human Female Reproductive Failure: Immunomodulation, Inflammation and Infections
    Human Leukocyte Antigen-G Within the Male Reproductive System
    Implications for Reproduction
    Prostasomes
    Their Characterization: Implications for Human Reproduction
    The Paternal Contribution to Fetal Tolerance
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Suks Minhas, John Mulhall.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Giulio Del Popolo, Donatella Pistolesi, Vincenzo Li Marzi, editors.
    Summary: This book aims to offer a comprehensive and up-to-date overview of male stress urinary incontinence that will serve as a useful tool and reference for urologists, andrologists, physiotherapists, general practitioners, and nurses. Detailed information is provided on diagnostic workup, including clinical assessment and the role of urodynamic evaluations and other instrumental examinations, and on the full range of potential treatments, from conservative and pharmacological interventions to surgical options. In addition to careful descriptions of the surgical procedures themselves, clear advice is given on the management of iatrogenic complications of incontinence surgery. Helpful treatment algorithms and recommendations offer further practical support. Relevant background knowledge is provided in expert reviews of topics such as the functional anatomy of the male pelvis and the pathophysiology, epidemiology, and classification of male urinary incontinence.

    Contents:
    Morphological and functional anatomy of male pelvis
    Continence physiology and male stress incontinence pathophysiology.- Incontinence definition and classification
    From many type of surgical damage (open/endoscopic/laparoscopic/robot assisted surgery) to different treatments
    Diagnostic workup
    Treatment algorithm and recommendations
    Rehabilitative and pharmacological treatment
    Surgical treatment
    Surgery complications and their management.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Vinayak K. Prasad.
    Summary: "In this critical study of current cancer therapies, Dr. Prasad, an oncologist and hematologist, examines oncology practice and policy in the United States. His book is organized into four sections: (1) an overview of cancer drugs, (2) forces that distort cancer medicine and practice, (3) details about cancer research and practice, (4) recommended solutions on multiple levels (policy, practitioners, medical education, and pharmacology)"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The Basics of Cancer Drugs : Cost, Benefit, Value
    Surrogate Endpoints in Cancer : What Are They and Where Are They Used?
    Use and Misuse of Surrogates for Drug Approvals
    How High Prices Harm Patients and Society
    Hype, Spin, and the Unbridled Enthusiasm That Distorts Cancer Medicine
    Financial Conflict of Interest
    The Harms of Financial Conflicts and How to Rehabilitate Medicine
    Will Precision Oncology Save Us?
    Study Design
    Principles of Oncology Practice
    Important Trials in Oncology
    Global Oncology
    How Should Cancer Drug Development Proceed?
    What Can the US Food and Drug Administration and the Centers for Medicare and
    Medicaid Services Do Tomorrow?
    What Can People with Cancer Do?
    What Can Students, Residents, and Fellows Do?
  • Digital
    Jennifer Moliterno Gunel, Joseph M Piepmeier, Joachim M. Baehring, editors.
    Summary: This text addresses all aspects of patient evaluation and care. This includes new findings in imaging that provide a better understanding of the extent of the lesion as well as its relationship with critical neuroanatomic function. The evolution of intraoperative imaging, functional brain mapping,and technology to identify tumor from brain is covered. This has significantly improved the ability of surgeons to more safely and aggressively remove tumors.More importantly, a better understanding of tumor biology and genomics has created an opportunity to significantly revise tumor classification and better select optimal therapy for individual patients. The text covers novel and innovative treatment options including immunotherapy, tumor vaccines, antiangiogenic agents,and personalized cancer treatment. In addition, novel agent delivery techniques are covered to offer the potential for increasing the effectiveness of treatment by delivering active agents directly where they are needed most. Malignant Brain Tumors: State-of-the-Art Treatment provides a comprehensive overview of treatment for malignant gliomas, and will prove useful by updating physicians on new therapeutic paradigms and what is on the horizon for the near future. This text will be informative for surgeons, oncologists, neurologists, residents and students who treat these patients,as well as those who are training for a career in managing patients with these challenging tumors. .
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Mikhail V. Kiselevskiy, Amir G. Abdulaev, Mikhail M. Davydov, editors.
    Summary: This book covers different aspects of the rare neoplasms - malignant mesothelioma and pseudomyxoma peritonei. The monograph includes up-to-date information on etiology, pathogenesis and diagnostics of malignant mesothelioma and pseudomyxoma peritonei, as well as detailed description of surgical and combined treatment of patients with these diseases. The book comprises a large illustrative material presented by schemes and original micrographs that represent pathological and immunohistochemical specific features of these malignancies, demonstrate the stages of surgical operations and hyperthermic intraperitoneal chemotherapy, and show the results of experimental studies. The book includes validated discussion on etiology and pathogenesis of malignant mesothelioma and pseudomyxoma peritonei, differential diagnosis and treatment of these diseases. The scope is really extensive and involves, for instance, a description of the technique of cytoreductive surgeries and regimens of intraperitoneal hyperthermic chemoperfusion, whereas a particular section discusses experimental ground for optimal regimens of hyperthermia, local chemotherapy and adoptive immunotherapy by cytokine induced killers. The final section presents the most recent data about perspective approaches for immunotherapy of malignant mesothelioma and pseudomyxoma peritonei with cell based technologies and target drugs including inhibitors of immune checkpoints. The co-authors of the book are leading specialists in this area, surgeons and scientists who present the results of their research along with the analysis of the state-of-the-art of this problem. The book is designed for a wide audience of students and professors of medical universities and schools, specialists of research and diagnostic centers, practical oncologists and immunologists, as well as doctors of different medical areas. .

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Contents; Contributors;
    Chapter 1: Mesothelioma and Pseudomyxoma peritonei: Incidence, Etiology, Diagnosis; 1.1 Pseudomyxoma peritonei; 1.1.1 Immuno-pathologic and Molecular-Genetic Diagnosis of Pseudomyxoma peritonei; 1.2 Malignant Peritoneal Mesothelioma; 1.2.1 Etiology and Pathogenesis of Peritoneal Mesothelioma; 1.2.2 Immuno-pathologic and Molecular-Genetic Diagnostics of Peritoneal Mesothelioma; 1.2.3 Differential Diagnosis of Peritoneal Mesothelioma by Molecular Methods; 1.3 Conclusion; References
    Chapter 2: Pathology of Selected Primary and Metastatic Tumors of Peritoneum2.1 Primary Mesothelial Lesions of the Peritoneum; 2.1.1 Pathobiology of Mesothelial Tumor and Tumor-Like Lesions of the Peritoneum; 2.1.1.1 Adenomatoid Tumor; 2.1.1.2 Well-Differentiated Papillary Mesothelioma; 2.1.1.3 Diffuse Malignant Mesothelioma; 2.1.1.4 Prognostic Parameters of Malignant Peritoneal Mesothelioma.; 2.2 Non-neoplastic Mesothelial Lesions; 2.2.1 Reactive Mesothelial Hyperplasia; 2.2.2 Multicystic Mesothelioma; 2.3 Selected Metastatic Peritoneal Lesions; 2.3.1 Peritoneal Pseudomyxoma; References
    Chapter 3: Up to Date Approaches to Treatment of Patients with Pseudomyxoma Peritonei and Peritoneal Mesothelioma3.1 Patient Examination; 3.1.1 Assessment of Functional Status; 3.2 Intraperitoneal Chemotherapy; 3.3 Cytoreductive Surgery; 3.3.1 Complications of Surgical Treatment; 3.4 Intraperitoneal Chemotherapy; 3.4.1 Parameters of HIPEC; 3.4.2 Chemotherapy Drugs for Intraperitoneal Infusion; 3.5 Combined Treatment of Patients with Pseudomixoma Peritonei; 3.6 Combined Treatment of Patients with Peritoneal Mesothelioma; 3.7 Prognostic Factors for Peritoneal Pseudomyxoma and Mesothelioma 3.8 Complications of Combined Treatment - Cytoreductive Surgery, Intraperitoneal Chemotherapy3.9 Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 4: Standardizing of Mesothelioma and Pseudomyxoma Care; 4.1 Introduction; 4.1.1 Histological Aspects; 4.1.2 Patient Selection; 4.1.3 Perioperative Oncological Management; 4.1.4 Technical Aspects; 4.1.5 Right Colectomy During CRS-HIPEC Procedures; 4.1.6 Perforated Mucocele: What to Do?; 4.1.7 Mesothelioma Peritoneal; 4.1.7.1 General Aspects; 4.1.7.2 Treatment; 4.1.8 Intraperitoneal Chemotherapy Schedules for DMPM and PMP; 4.2 Conclusions; References
    Chapter 5: Experimental Basis for Optimal Regimnes of Hyperthermic Peritoneal Chemotherapy5.1 Impact of Hyperthermia on Physiological Activity of Tumor and Non-Transformed Cells In Vitro; 5.2 Impact of Hyperthermia on Proliferative Activity of Tumor Cells In Vivo; 5.3 Effects of Anticancer Drugs and Their Combination with Hyperthermia on the Viability of Tumor Cells In Vitro; 5.4 Effect of Hyperthermia on the Effectors of Antitumor Immunity; 5.5 Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 6: Immunotherapy of Malignant Peritoneal Mesothelioma and Pseudomyxoma Peritonei; 6.1 Adoptive Immunotherapy
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Timothy P. Cripe, Nicholas D. Yeager, editors.
    Contents:
    Signs and symptoms
    Diagnostic Studies of Pediatric Bone Tumors: Pathology and Imaging
    Basic Principles of Biopsy
    The evaluation of lung nodules in pediatric bone tumors
    Fertility Preservation and Reproductive Health in Pediatric Bone Tumor Patients
    Chemotherapy Regimens for Patients with Newly Diagnosed Malignant Bone Tumors
    Radiation Management
    Histologic Response and Biologic Markers
    Surgical Approach: Limb Salvage Versus Amputation
    Rehabilitation following Orthopaedic Surgery in Children with Bone Tumors
    Patient Navigation of the Pediatric Bone Tumor Patient Across the Continuum of Care
    Psychosocial Effects of Pediatric Bone Tumors and Recommendations for Supportive Care
    Post-therapy surveillance of bone tumors
    Recurrent Bone Tumors
    Novel Therapies on the Horizon
    Survivorship.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Takashi Nakano, Takashi Kijim, editors.
    Summary: This book provides essential information on recent advances in molecular genetics, epidemiology, translational research, and the latest results of clinical trials on mesothelioma. Significant progress has been made in understanding mesothelioma biology, and in developing new therapies for this refractory tumor, malignant pleural mesothelioma (MPM). Not only does this volume summarize the latest research-based data on the disease; it also shares insights into future research directions. The book consists of 5 themed sections on: epidemiology, pathogenesis, screening and early detection, molecular genetics, and clinical aspects and management. Several chapters focus on new trends in the field, e.g. immune therapy and identification of biomarkers, molecular oncogenesis including genetic susceptibility, and molecular diagnostic pathology. The book also highlights new cancer treatment approaches, such as immunotherapy based on immune checkpoint inhibitors, which has meant a paradigm shift in other types of cancer, and given some hope to MPM patients. In turn, it discusses recent molecular pathological studies on mesothelioma, which claim to offer more accurate classifications than traditional morphology and immunohistochemistry-based approaches. All of these cutting-edge analyses provide the basis for a closing discussion on future developments and research directions. Malignant Pleural Mesothelioma -- Advances in Pathogenesis, Diagnosis, and Treatments has been edited and authored by respected researchers and will be of interest to medical, surgical and radiation oncologists; pulmonologists; pathologists and basic researchers alike. Since the disease represents a significant diagnostic and therapeutic challenge, scientists and clinicians from learners to experts, as well as fellows in training in these subspecialties, will value this book.

    Contents:
    Part I Epidemiology
    1. Recent Trends in the Global Incidence of Mesothelioma: What is the Relationship with an Asbestos Ban?
    Part II Pathogenesis
    2. Asbestos and mesothelioma: What is recent advance in research on asbestos-induced molecular carcinogenesis?
    3. Asbestos fiber and immunological effects: Do immunological effects play any role in asbestos-related diseases?
    4. Biomolecular pathways in mesothelioma: What is new perspective on biomolecular research for mesothelioma?
    Part III Screening and early detection
    5. Biomarkers for mesothelioma screening: How can we identify subjects developing mesothelioma in asbestos-exposed high-risk group?
    6. Pleural Plaques as a predictive imaging marker for cancer screening in asbestos-exposed subjects: Can pleural plaques be a tool beyond estimating past asbestos inhalation?
    Part IV Pathology
    7. Anatomical structure of the pleura and mesothelial cells: What are the characteristic features?
    8. Histologic classification of tumors of the pleura: Advances after WHO 2015 classification
    9. Pathology of mesothelioma, subtypes and rare variants: What is the role of immunohistochemical markers in differential diagnosis?
    10. Cytopathologic diagnosis of mesothelioma: Can we diagnose mesothelioma based on fluid cytological materials without biopsy?
    11. Circulating tumor cells in malignant pleural mesothelioma: What is the role of liquid biopsy in clinical practice of malignant pleural mesothelioma?
    Part V Molecular Genetics
    12. Recent advances on the pathogenesis of mesothelioma in genetics and genomics: What are novel insights into mesothelioma biology?
    13. Genetic predisposition to mesothelioma: What are the biological mechanisms and what are the clinical characteristics of these mesotheliomas?
    14. Frequent NF2 inactivation in mesothelioma: How can we treat mesothelioma with targeted therapies for molecular aberrations?
    Part VI Clinical Features and Management
    15. Use of Tunneled Catheters versus Pleurodesis for Mesothelioma: When should we use one or the other, or both?
    16. Advanced minimally invasive approach with medical thoracoscopy for mesothelioma: What are the roles in diagnosis?
    17. Imaging evaluation of local tumor growth in malignant pleural mesothelioma: What is the role of imaging modalities in curative intent surgery for mesothelioma?
    18. 18F-Fluorodeoxyglucose positron emission tomography/computed tomography in malignant pleural mesothelioma: What is the role in mesothelioma detection and treatment response assessment?
    19. Palliation in malignant pleural mesothelioma: How to manage clinical symptoms in mesothelioma
    20. Supportive care for advanced mesothelioma: What is the role of mesothelioma nurses in clinical practice?
    Part VII Treatment; Current standard and future perspective
    21. Antiangiogenic therapies for mesothelioma: What is the role in mesothelioma treatment?
    22. Systemic chemotherapy for unresectable pleural mesothelioma from frontline to salvage treatment : How can we treat the patients failed to PD-1/PD-L1 inhibitors?
    23. Biomarkers for Immune checkpoint inhibitors in mesothelioma: What are the roles of biomarkers for optimal immune therapy?
    24. Promising investigational new drugs for mesothelioma: What is the next stage of the treatment for advanced mesothelioma?
    25. Viral immune therapy and other virotherapies for advanced mesothelioma: Are we ready for clinical trials of viral immune therapy?
    Part VIII Radiotherapy
    26. Impact of Radiation Therapy on Malignant Mesothelioma: Are we ready for use in clinical practice, combined with surgery or alone?
    Part IX. Surgical Intervention; Current status and future perspectives
    27. TNM classification and the role of curative intent surgery for mesothelioma: Is the debate on extra-pleural pneumonectomy versus lung-sparing macroscopic resection over?
    28. Surgery and adjuvant or neoadjuvant setting of radiotherapy: What is the role of radiotherapy in combination with lung-sparing surgery?
    29. Loco-regional treatment with surgical intervention in mesothelioma: What is the role of enhancing local control approaches?.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Gerald Young.
    Summary: This book is a comprehensive analysis of the definitions, concepts, and recent research on malingering, feigning, and other response biases in psychological injury/ forensic disability populations. It presents a new model of malingering and related biases, and develops a "diagnostic" system based on it that is applicable to PTSD, chronic pain, and TBI. Included are suggestions for effective practice and future research based on the literature reviews and the new systems, which are useful also because they can be used readily by psychiatrists as much as psychologists.

    Contents:
    Monograph Part A: Psychological Injury, Malingering, Law, Assessment
    Section I: Psychological Injury, Malingering, Definitions, Gold Standards, Models
    1. Introduction: Psychological Injury, Malingering, Ethics, and Law
    2. Malingering: Definitional and Conceptual Ambiguities and Prevalence or Base Rates
    3. Toward a Gold Standard in Malingering and Related Determinations
    4. The MMPI-2-RF Personality Inventory in Psychological Injury Cases
    5. New Models of Malingering and Related Biases, Presentations, and Performances
    6. Diagnostic System for Malingered PTSD and Related Response Biases: Details in Tabular Format
    Section II: Malingering Detection, Law, Causality
    7. Deconstructing Favorable and Unfavorable Malingering-Attribution Perspectives
    8. Other Contrasting Approaches to Malingering Detection
    9. Posttraumatic Stress Disorder: Controversies, Diagnosis, and Malingering
    10. Psychological Injury: Law and Causality
    11. Leading the Field in Understanding and Testing Malingering and Related Response Styles: The Work of Richard Rogers
    Section III: Psychological Injury, Assessment, Most Recent Literature
    12. Assessing Psychological Injuries and Malingering: Evaluator Considerations
    13. Assessing Psychological and Malingering: PTSD and Evaluee Considerations
    14. Assessing Psychological Injuries and Malingering: Disability and Report Writing
    15. Slick-Sherman?s 2012-2013 Revision of the 1999 Slick et al. MND System
    16. Symptom Validity Assessment, MTBI, and Malingering in Carone and Bush (2013)
    17. Most Recent Journal Article Review
    Monograph Part B: Psychological Injury, Malingering, Ethics, Therapy
    Section IV: Psychological Injuries, Therapy, Ethics
    18. MTBI and Pain
    19. An Instrument to Detect Pain Feigning: The Pain Feigning Detection Test (PFDT)
    20. Confusions and Confounds in Conversion Disorder
    21. Therapy in Psychological Injury
    22. Ethics in Psychological Injury and Law
    23. A Transdiagnostic Therapeutic Module on Free Will and Change
    24. A Model of Ethical Thought and Ethical Decision-Making
    Section V: Supplements :Testing, Systems
    25. Selected Tests and Testing in Psychological Injury Evaluations I
    26. Selected Tests and Testing in Psychological Injury Evaluations II
    27. Table 1. Diagnostic System for Malingered PTSD Disability/ Dysfunction and Related Negative Response Biases: User Version and Worksheet
    28. Table 2. Diagnostic System for Malingered Neurocognitive Disability/ Dysfunction and Related Negative Response Biases
    29. Table 3. Diagnostic System for Malingered Pain Disability/ Dysfunction and Related Negative Response Biases
    Section VI: Terms, Education, Study
    30. Glossary and Discussion of Terms
    31. Education
    32. Study Guide Questions, Teaching Objectives, and Learning Outcomes
    33. PTSD and Malingering: Tests, Diagnostics, Cut-Scores, Cautions
    34. Book Conclusions.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Peter Ash, Richard L. Frierson, Susan Hatters Friedman, editors.
    Summary: This book comprehensively educates psychiatrists about malpractice and other liability. It is written to also specifically assist psychiatrists who are sued or are involved in other complaints. The first two sections discuss malpractice law and the litigation process; the litigation section mainly addresses some of the more emotionally charged issues, including do's and don'ts, how an attorney will be looking at the case, the defendant doctor's testifying at deposition and trial, and the stress of being sued. The subsequent three sections address specific topics that give rise to liability, with each section taking a different perspective such as risks in particular clinical, by practice site, and special issues, including practice in special situations such as the current pandemic. The final section discusses other forms of liability, such as complaints to medical boards or professional association ethics committees. An exceptional work, Malpractice and Liability in Psychiatry, functions as both a go-to handbook and all-encompassing read on the aforementioned topics.

    Contents:
    Section I: Malpractice Law
    Principles of Malpractice Law in Psychiatry
    History of Malpractice
    Liability of the Acts of Others
    Professional Liability Insurance
    Section II: Litigation
    Risk Management after an Adverse Event
    The Litigation Process
    Do's and Dont's if You Are Sued
    The Plaintiff Attorney's Perspective
    The Defense Attorney's Perspective
    Expert Witness
    The Defendant Psychiatrist as Witness
    The Stress of Being Sued
    Section III: Malpractice Allegations
    Suicide
    Patient Violence
    Boundary Violations
    Breach of Confidentiality
    Negligent Psychopharmacology
    Abandonment and Unnecessary Commitment
    Negligent Psychotherapy
    Section VI: Practice Areas
    Inpatient General Psychiatry
    Outpatient General Psychiatry
    Child and Adolescent Psychiatry
    Consult Liaison Psychiatry
    Emergency Room Psychiatry
    Reproductive Psychiatry
    Addition Psychiatry
    Geriatric Psychiatry
    Correctional Psychiatry
    Forensic Psychiatry
    Psychiatric Research
    Section V: Special Topics
    Telepsychiatry
    Malpractice and the Internet
    Patients and Guns
    Practicing During a Pandemic or Disaster
    Section VI: Complaints
    Medical Board Complaints
    Ethics Complaints
    Granting Agencies
    Negative Reviews on the Internet
    Impaired Psychiatrists.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Animesh Agarwal.
    Summary: Providing a comprehensive presentation of the diagnosis, evaluation and management of malunions, this generously illustrated text details the current principles, surgical techniques and approaches with these challenging clinical situations. Since each malunion can be fairly specific, the treatment regimens provide guidelines to effectively approach such problems. Opening with a brief overview of the principles of malunions, the remainder of the book is divided by anatomical area and provides evidence-based recommendations, case examples, and preferred treatment/algorithms for both the upper and lower extremities, including the clavicle, proximal and distal humerus, hand and wrist, proximal and distal femur, and tibia and ankle, as well as the pelvis and acetabulum. Specialized circumstances are also discussed, including periprosthetics and joint replacement. Although not every single treatment option is described for every single anatomical area and type of injury, Malunions is an excellent resource for orthopedic trauma surgeons, residents and students, not only for managing these common yet complex problems but also in preventing malunions from occurring by avoiding surgical causes and mitigating patient risk factors.

    Contents:
    Malunions: Introduction and Brief Overview
    Malunions of the Clavicle. Malunions of the Proximal Humerus. Malunions of the Humeral Shaft. Malunions of the Distal Humerus. Malunions of the Forearm. Malunions of the Hand and Wrist. Malunions of the Acetabulum and Pelvis. Malunions of the Proximal Femur. Malunions of the Femoral Shaft
    Malunions of the Distal Femur
    Malunions of the Proximal Tibia and Tibial Plateau
    Malunions of the Tibial Shaft
    Malunions of the Distal Tibia and Ankle.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Bernd Nilius, Veit Flockerzi, editors.
    Contents:
    v. 1. TRPs: truly remarkable proteins
    The TRCP subfamily
    TRPC1
    TRPC2
    TRPC3: a multifunctional signaling molecule
    TRPC4 and TRPC4-containing channels
    TRPC5
    TRPC6: physiological function and pathophysiological relevance
    Transient receptor potential canonical 7 (TRPC7)
    The TRPV subfamily
    TRPV1
    TRPV2
    TRPV3
    The TRPV4 channel
    TRPV5, a Ca2+ channel for the fine tuning of Ca2+ reabsorption
    TRPV6 channels
    The TRPM subfamily
    TRPM1
    TRPM2
    TRPM3
    TRPM4
    TRPM5
    TRPM6
    TRPM7
    TRPM8
    The TRPA1, TRPML and TRPP subfamily
    TRPA1
    TRPML1: an ion channel in the lysosome
    TRPML2 and mucolipin evolution
    TRPML3
    TRPP subfamily and polycystin-1 proteins
    v. 2. TRPs as special cell sensors
    Temperature sensing with TRPs
    TRPs in mechano-sensing and volume regulation
    TRPs as chemosensors (ROS, RNS, RCS, gasotransmitters)
    Photosensitive TRPs
    TRPs in taste and chemesthesis
    TRPs and Pain
    TRPs in hearing
    TRPs in olfaction
    General topics
    Evolutionary conserved, multitasking TRP channels-lessons from worms and flies
    Structural biology of TRP channels
    High-resolution views of TRPV1 and their implications for the TRP channel superfamily
    Physiological functions and regulation of TRPC channels
    The TRPCs-STIM1-orai interaction
    The TRPC family of TRP channels: roles inferred (mostly) from knockout mice and relationship to ORAI proteins
    TRPs: modulation by drug-like compounds
    TRP channels in reproductive (neuro)endocrinology
    Modulation of TRP ion channels by venomous toxins
    Phosphoinositide regulation of TRP channels
    TRP modulation by natural compounds
    What do we really know and what do we need to know: some controversies, perspectives, and surprises.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Springer
    Springer
  • Digital/Print
    by Maria Böhmer.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    The man who crucified himself
    The storia della crocifissione as an epistemic genre
    Making the case travel, translation, media, reading
    Professional readings: religion
    Professional readings: madness
    Professional readings: suicide
    Popular readings: moral education through literary
    Epilogue.
    Digital Access 2019
  • Digital
    Sanjay Patole, editor.
    Summary: "This book contains a series of chapters on various aspects of management and leadership in a health care organisation, written by some of the most experienced authors from around the world. It provides an understanding of basic management and leadership skills that are essential for clinical as well as non-clinical staff in a health care organisation, in a simple and clear fashion. The topics covered in this book range from preparing for an interview, the art of negotiation and handling difficult behaviour, to clinical leadership, evidence based management, mentorship, and conflict resolution. With its simple and reader friendly approach this unique and concise book will be useful for all staff working in a health care organisation irrespective of their faculty, position, and stage in career in becoming successful consultants, managers, supervisors, and leaders."--From the publisher.

    Contents:
    Succeeding in Your Consultant Interview / Matt Green
    Clinical Leadership and Engagement: No Longer an Optional Extra / John Clark
    Art of Negotiation, Handling Difficult Behaviour, and Facing the Media / Lucky Jain, Sanjay Patole and Sarah Sloan
    Handling Complaints, Meetings, and Presentations / Haribalakrishna Balasubramanian and Sanjay Patole
    Performance Appraisal and Assessment / Paul Craven
    Quality Improvement / Brendan Paul Murphy
    Risk Management / Bronwyn Shumack
    Root Cause Analysis / Aarti Raghavan
    Occupational Health and Safety / Paul Rothmore and Rose Boucaut
    Coping with Stress at Work / Christopher Griffin
    The Nature of Conflict in Health-Care / Catherine Campbell and Corinne Reid
    Evidence Based Management / Ravi Madhavan and Ajay Niranjan
    Clinical Handovers / Sachin Amin
    Educational Role of Senior Hospital Staff / Fiona Lake
    Mentoring / Deepika Wagh and Sanjay Patole
    Expert or Impostor: Understanding the Role of the Expert Witness / Denise Bowen
    How to Dress at Work / Rajkishore Nayak, Rajiv Padhye and Lijing Wang
    Managing Ethically Complex Issues in Critically Ill Patients: A Neonatal Perspective / Paul Byrne and Brendan Leier
    Communicating Bad News in the Health Care Organization / Olachi J. Mezu-Ndubuisi
    Managing Grief and its Consequences at the Workplace / Robert Anderson and Marie-Louise Collins.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Linda Roussel, PhD, RN, NEA-BC, CNL, Professor, University of Alabama, Birmingham, Birmingham, Alabama, James Harris, PhD, RN, NEA-BC, ACNS-BC, CNL, FACHE, Vice President of Clinical Quality & Transformation, Chief Nursing Officer, Trinity Home Health Services, Livonia, Michigan, and Tricia Thomas, PhD, APRN-BC, MBA, CNL, FAAN, Professor, University of South Alabama, Mobile, Alabama.
    Summary: Management and Leadership for Nurse Administrators, Seventh Edition provides professional administrators and nursing students with a comprehensive overview of management concepts and theories. This text provides a foundation for nurse managers and executives as well as nursing students with a focus on management and administration. This current edition includes 15 chapters, framed around the Scope and Standards for Nurse Administrators, American Organization of Nurse Executive competencies, and current trends in healthcare management. The American Nurses Credentialing Center.s focus on magnetism is also integrated into this edition, specifically on transformational leadership, structural empowerment, exemplary professional practice, innovation and improvement, and quality. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Forces influencing nursing leadership
    Leadership theory and application for nurse leaders
    Professional practice : a prototype linking nursing in interprofessional teams
    Professional development: an imperative for leadership in nursing and healthcare organizations
    Transformational leadership in an era of healthcare reform
    Organizational structure and accountability
    Strategic planning and change leadership : foundations for organizational
    Effectiveness
    Procuring and sustaining resources
    Maximizing human capital
    Managing performance
    Information management and knowledge development as action for leaders
    Laws, regulation, and health policy shaping administrative practice
    Anticipating and managing risk in a culture of quality, safety, and value
    Leaders achieving sustainable outcomes
    Messaging and disseminating excellence in leadership.
    Digital Access R2Library 2016
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    edited by Linda Roussel, Patricia L. Thomas, James L. Harris.
    Summary: "Management and Leadership for Nurse Administrators, Eighth Edition provides professional administrators and nursing students with a comprehensive overview of management concepts and theories. This text serves as a solid foundation for nurse managers, executives and students focused on management and administration. The Eighth Edition will address a number of new topics such as financial management as it relates to reimbursement as well as updates to the Affordable Care Act as they become known. In addition, the text will also include new content on population health, the IHI quadruple aim, and translational science. Other topic areas that will be addressed in-depth include: strategic planning, communication, relationship-building, work force diversity, team building and joy in the workplace. New to the Eighth Edition New content on management strategies for mentoring and coaching a diverse nursing staff Coverage of conflict resolution, risk mitigation and leadership skill developmentDiscussion of the business of health care, resource procurement and financial viabilityEthics as it relates to patient care delivery, research and quality improvement Retention strategies Updated chapter references Crosswalks for major content areas and competencies from AONE, ACHE and other professional organizationsInstructor Resources: Test bankPowerPoint Slides Discussion questionsSyllabusTransition guideCase ExemplarsCase Studies"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Forces influencing nursing leadership
    Leadership theory and application for nurse leaders
    Professional practice : a prototype linking nursing in interpersonal teams
    Executive coaching as a lever for professional development and leadership in healthcare organizations
    Leading in an era of change and uncertainty : driving excellence in practice while developing leaders of the future
    Organizational structure and accountability in healthcare systems
    Strategic practices in achieving organizational effectiveness
    Procuring and sustaining resources : the budgeting process
    Maximizing human capital
    Managing performance
    Information management and knowledge development as actions for leaders
    Laws, regulations, and healthcare policy shaping administrative practice
    Risk anticipation and management : creating a culture of quality, safety, and value
    Leaders achieving sustainable outcomes
    Messaging and disseminating excellence in leadership and ethical implications
    Leading implementation for sustainable improvement
    Polarity thinking : a lens for embracing wicked problems, conflict, and resistance in healthcare
    Future considerations : leading and managing population health.
    Digital Access R2Library 2020
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Anthony J. Viera, Rob Kramer, editors.
    Summary: Recognizing that medical faculty face different questions or issues in different stages of their careers, this handy, practical title offers a comprehensive roadmap and range of solutions to common challenges in the complex and changing Academic Medical Center (AMC). With critical insights and strategies for both aspiring and seasoned academicians, this handbook offers a concise guide for personal career development, executive skill acquisition, and leadership principles, providing actionable, targeted advice for faculty seeking help on a myriad of new issues and situations. Pressures in today's Academic Medical Center include significant changes to the healthcare system, competition for research funding, transformation of medical education, and recruitment and retention of the ever-evolving workforce. This dynamic environment calls for razor-sharp leadership and management effectiveness to stay competitive. AMC faculty aspire to formal leadership roles for a variety of reasons: to set a new vision, to create change, or to affect policy and resource decisions. For others, weariness of past leadership styles or mistakes may catalyze wanting a chance to set a different tone. Management and Leadership Skills for Medical Faculty: A Practical Handbook is a must-have resource for faculty in AMCs and anyone with a role in healthcare leadership. .

    Contents:
    Section I Tools of the Trade
    Developing Yourself
    Communicating Effectively
    Giving and Receiving Feedback
    Navigating Conflict
    Managing Your Time
    Developing Resilience
    Section II Management
    Principles of Management
    Running Effective Meetings
    Conducting Faculty Retreats
    Changing the Faces of AMC Leadership: Gender and Ethnicity
    Managing Managers
    Promoting Professionalism and Professional Accountability
    Medical-Legal Challenges
    Section III Leadership
    The Leadership Stance
    Coaching and Mentoring
    Leading Up
    Political Savvy
    Moral Courage
    Leading Change
    Thinking Strategically
    Section IV Advancing Your Career
    Growing in Your Current Role
    Promotion in Academic Medicine
    Executive Physician Development
    Moving Out to Move Up
    Afterword: The Changing Healthcare Landscape.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Hyun-Yoon Ko.
    Summary: This comprehensive, up-to-date guide to the rehabilitation care of persons with spinal cord injuries and disorders draws on the ever-expanding scientific and clinical evidence base to provide clinicians with all the knowledge needed in order to make optimal management decisions during the acute, subacute, and chronic phases. A wealth of information is presented on the diverse medical consequences and complications encountered in these patients and on the appropriate rehabilitative measures in each circumstance. The coverage encompasses all forms of spinal cord injury and all affected organ systems. Readers will also find chapters on the basics of functional anatomy, neurological classification and evaluation, injuries specifically in children and the elderly, and psychological issues. The book will be an invaluable aid to assessment and medical care for physicians and other professional personnel in multiple specialties, including physiatrists, neurosurgeons, orthopedic surgeons, internists, critical care physicians, urologists, neurologists, psychologists, and social workers.

    Contents:
    1. Development and functional anatomy of spine and spinal cord
    2. Neurological classification and evaluation of spinal cord injury
    3. Epidemiology of spinal cord injury
    4. Spinal shock
    5. Acute management of spinal cord injury
    6. Incomplete spinal cord injuries: syndromes
    7. Nontraumatic spinal cord injuries
    8. Syringomyelia
    9. Cauda equina injury
    10. Autonomic dysfunction
    11. Cardiovascular dysfunction
    12. Respiratory dysfunction
    13. Orthostatic hypotension
    14. Autonomic dysreflexia
    15. Electrolytes and metabolic dysfunction
    16. Deep vein thrombosis
    17. Dysfunction in thermal regulation
    18. Neurogenic bladder dysfunction
    19. Neurogenic bowel dysfunction
    20 Sexual dysfunction
    21. Pressure ulcer
    22. Heterotopic ossification
    23. Spasticity
    24. Pain dysfunction
    25. Spinal cord injury in children
    26. Spinal cord injury in elderly
    27. Neurological deterioration after spinal cord injury
    28. Associated brain injury in spinal cord injury
    29. Function evaluation and functional goals
    30. Upper extremity in tetraplegic
    31. Psychological responses.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Hyun-Yoon Ko.
    Summary: This comprehensive, up-to-date guide to the rehabilitation care of persons with spinal cord injuries and disorders draws on the ever-expanding scientific and clinical evidence base to provide clinicians with the knowledge needed in order to make optimal management decisions during the acute, subacute, and chronic phases. The second edition re-organized contents as more clinically practical use, consisting of 48 chapters. Also, new chapters such as kinesiology and kinematics of functional anatomy of the extremities are added as well. Readers will also find chapters on the basics of functional anatomy, neurological classification and evaluation, injuries specifically in children and the elderly, and psychological issues. The book will be an invaluable aid to assessment and medical care for physicians and other professional personnel in multiple specialties, including physiatrists, neurosurgeons, orthopedic surgeons, internists, critical care physicians, urologists, neurologists, psychologists, and social workers.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Development and functional anatomy of the spinal cord
    3. Kinesiology and kinematics of extremities for functional retraining
    4. Functional goals according to the level of injury
    5. Biomechanics of the spinal cord
    6. Fractures of the spine
    7. Imaging of spinal cord injuries
    8. Pharmacotherapy in spinal cord medicine
    9. Physical and neurolgocial examination of spinal cord injuries
    10. Epidemiology of spinal cord injuries
    11. Standards for neurological classification of spinal cord injuries
    12. Spinal shock and its clinical implications. 13. Acute phase management of spinal cord injuries
    14. Nontraumatic spinal cord injuries
    15. Incomplete syndromes
    16. Cauda equina and conus medullaris injuries
    17. Posttraumatic syringomyelia
    18. Automonic nervous system in spinal cord injuries
    19. Cardiovascular dysfunctions
    20. Respiratory dysfunction and care
    21. Autonomic dysreflexia
    22. Orthostatic hypotension and supine hypertension
    23. Venous thromboembolism: prevention and treatment
    24. Electrolyte disorder
    25. Metabolic syndrome
    26. Voiding dysfunction and genitourinary complications
    27. Bowel dysfunction and gastrointestinal complications
    28. Sexuality changes
    29. Pressure injuries
    30. Thermoregulatory dysfunction
    31. Spasticity
    32. Heterotopic ossification
    33. Pain types and taxonomy
    34. Child spinal cord injuries/lesions
    35. Elderly spinal cord injuries
    36. Dual injury
    37. Sleep disorders
    38. Neurodeterioration
    39. Psychological intervention
    40. Upper extremity intervention
    41. Walking dysfunction
    42. Wheelchairs and wheelchair mobility
    43. Follow-up care of spinal cord injuries.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Antonio Malvasi, Andrea Tinelli, Gian Carlo Di Renzo, editors.
    Contents:
    1. A brief history of obstetric complications
    2. Spontaneous abortion complications
    3. Pathological diagnosis of abortions
    4. Tubal pregnancy
    5. Non-tubal ectopic pregnancies: diagnosis and management
    6. Adnexal pathology in pregnancy
    7. Fibroid complications in pregnancy
    8. Cervical pregnancy
    9. Molar and trophoblastic disease
    10. Assisted reproductive technique complications in pregnancy
    11. Spontaneous uterine rupture prior to twenty weeks of gestation
    12. Cervicoisthmic incompetence
    13. Thrombophilia and pregnancy
    14. Diabetes in pregnancy
    15. Hypertensive disorders of pregnancy
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Antonio Malvasi, Andrea Tinelli, Gian Carlo Di Renzo, editors.
    Summary: This book draws on recently acquired knowledge to provide the reader with comprehensive, up-to-date information on the full range of obstetric complications that may be encountered during the third trimester of pregnancy and puerperium. For each complication, risk factors and clinical presentation are described and detailed guidance is provided on the appropriate treatment. The lucid text is complemented by a wealth of images, diagrams, flow charts, and drawings. The volume has been compiled in collaboration with a large group of gynecologists, obstetricians and internationally renowned scientists to provide an essential guide. Accordingly, the book is of interest to practitioners across the world, enabling them to deepen their knowledge and to refine their approach to complications in daily clinical practice. .

    Contents:
    The Placenta as the Mirror of the Fetu
    Placental Vascular Pathology
    Abruptio Placenta
    Twin Pregnancies
    Fetal Distress And Labor Management
    Preterm Delivery
    Eclampsia
    Cord Disease And Fetal Asphyxia
    Operative Vaginal Delivery
    Shoulder Distocia
    Placenta Previa
    Placenta Accreta
    Cesarean Section
    Post-Partum Hemorrage (Pph)
    Anesthesiological And Analgesic Complications During Labor And Post-Delivery
    Puerperal Complications.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Karl A. LeBlanc, Andrew Kingsnorth, David L. Sanders, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Electron Kebebew, editor.
    Summary: This book is designed to present a comprehensive and state-of the-art approach to the management of adrenal neoplasms that provides a resource to the broad group of providers that will encounter such a patient. Sections address issues that are faced by providers who encounter a patient with an adrenal neoplasm. These areas include an overview of the genetic basis and familial cancer syndrome-associated with adrenal neoplasms, pathobiology, advanced and tumor specific imaging approaches and technologies, biochemical analysis, standard medical and surgical therapies, and emerging technology and treatment approaches to benign and malignant adrenal neoplasms. Written by experts in the field, each of these sections address level of clinical evidence and provide recommendations and treatment algorithms. Extensive illustrations make this an interactive text. Management of Adrenal Masses in Children and Adults will serve as a very useful resource for all providers dealing with, and interested in this common but challenging tumor. It will provide a concise yet comprehensive summary of the current status of the field that will help guide patient management and stimulate investigative efforts.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology of Adrenal Neoplasms
    The Pathology of Adrenal Masses
    Genetics of Benign Adrenocortical Tumors
    Genetics of Adrenocortical Cancers
    Genetics of Pheochromocytoma and Paraganglioma
    Imaging Modalities for Adrenocortical Tumors
    Imaging Modalities for Pheochromocytoma and Paraganglioma
    Primary Hyperaldosteronism
    Cushing Syndrome: Presentation, Diagnosis, and Treatment, Including Subclinical Cushing Syndrome
    Management of Pheochromocytoma and Paraganglioma
    Congenital Adrenal Hyperplasia
    Adrenocortical Carcinoma
    Operative Techniques for Adrenal Neoplasms
    Therapies for Locally Advanced and Metastatic Adrenocortical Carcinoma
    .
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Choung Soo Kim, editor.
    Summary: This textbook summarizes the state of the art in the management of locally advanced and metastatic prostate cancer with the aim of providing the knowledge required for optimal treatment decision making in individual cases. Readers will find comprehensive coverage of the latest developments in surgery, radiotherapy, androgen deprivation therapy (ADT), chemotherapy, and immunotherapy. The role of the hormonal therapies abiraterone and enzalutamide and docetaxel-based chemotherapy in castration-resistant prostate cancer and hormone-sensitive metastatic disease is carefully evaluated. Among the other therapies discussed are LHRH agonists and antagonists, cabazitaxel, radium-223, and various novel agents still under clinical trials. The section on surgical approaches addresses, among other topics, the use of robot-assisted radical prostatectomy, pelvic lymphadenectomy, and the benefits of adjuvant and neoadjuvant therapy. The current role of external beam radiotherapy, alone or in combination with ADT and brachytherapy, for locally advanced disease is reviewed. Management of Advanced Prostate Cancer will be a valuable resource for practitioners at all levels of expertise.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Part I: Surgery for Advanced Prostate Cancer; 1: Natural History of High-Risk Prostate Cancer; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 The Definition of High-Risk Prostate Cancer; 1.3 Risk Factors for High-Risk Prostate Cancer; 1.4 Natural History of High-Risk Prostate Cancer; 1.4.1 Localized or Locally Advanced High-Risk Prostate Cancer; 1.4.2 Hormone-Naïve Metastatic Prostate Cancer; 1.4.3 Castration-Resistant Prostate Cancer; 1.5 Summary; References; 2: Identifying the Best Candidate for Radical Prostatectomy in High-Risk Prostate Cancer; 2.1 Introduction 2.2 RP for High-Grade Cancer2.3 RP for T3/4 N0 M0 Disease; 2.4 RP for Node-Positive Disease; 2.5 The Efficacy of RP over External Beam Radiation Therapy (EBRT) with or Without ADT (Androgen Deprivation Therapy); 2.6 Safety of RP Compare to EBRT (with or Without ADT); 2.7 RP in Elderly Patients; 2.8 Recent Efforts for Identifying the Better Candidate for RP Among Patients with High-­Risk Prostate Cancer; 2.9 Summary; References; 3: Neoadjuvant Therapy Prior to Radical Prostatectomy; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Neoadjuvant Hormonal Therapy; 3.3 Neoadjuvant Chemotherapy with or Without ADT 3.4 Neoadjuvant Therapy Using Novel Medicines3.5 Summary; References; 4: Robot-Assisted Radical Prostatectomy for High-Risk Prostate Cancer; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 What Is High-Risk PCa?; 4.3 RARP for High-Risk PCa; 4.3.1 Nerve Sparing in High-Risk PCa During RARP; 4.3.2 Lymph Node Dis
    section in High-Risk PCa During RARP; 4.3.3 Perioperative Morbidity During RARP; 4.4 Outcomes of RARP for High-­Risk PCa; 4.4.1 Oncologic Outcomes of RARP for High-Risk PCa; 4.4.2 Functional Outcomes of RARP for High-Risk PCa; References; 5: Pelvic Lymphadenectomy for High-Risk Prostate Cancer 5.1 Current Indication of Pelvic Lymphadenectomy in High-­Risk Prostate Cancer5.2 Extent of Pelvic Lymphadenectomy (Limited Vs. Extended); 5.3 Robotic Surgery and Pelvic Lymphadenectomy; 5.4 Clinical Outcome of Pelvic Lymphadenectomy; 5.5 Complication of Pelvic Lymphadenectomy; 5.6 Summary; References; 6: Adjuvant Therapy in Locally Advanced Prostate Cancer; 6.1 Introduction; 6.2 Definition; 6.3 General Guidelines by NCCN; 6.4 RP for Locally Advanced PCa; 6.5 RT in Locally Advanced PCa; 6.6 Multimodality Treatment in Locally Advanced PCa; 6.7 Adjuvant Postoperative RT 6.8 Adjuvant HT6.9 Adjuvant Chemotherapy; 6.10 Summary; References; 7: Role of Radical Prostatectomy in the Management of Metastatic Prostate Cancer; 7.1 Classic Role of Radical Prostatectomy for Palliative Local Symptom Control; 7.2 Feasibility of Radical Prostatectomy in Metastatic Prostate Cancer; 7.3 Possible Rationale for Cytoreductive Radical Prostatectomy in Metastatic Prostate Cancer; 7.4 Indirect Evidence Supporting the Effectiveness of Cytoreductive Radical Prostatectomy
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Robert Provenzano, Edgar V. Lerma, Lynda Szczech, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Erica A. Fortson, Steven R. Feldman, Lindsay C. Strowd, editors.
    Summary: This book is designed to provide a foundation of knowledge regarding the epidemiology, pathogenesis, and clinical presentation of atopic dermatitis in both pediatric and adult patients. It provides an overview of the mechanism and presentation of atopic dermatitis and focuses on the management methods experienced dermatologists have used to successfully manage atopic dermatitis. This book provides physicians with insights into the management of atopic dermatitis, such as alternative treatments for pruritus, psychosocial impact on patients and families, assessing patient compliance, and patient resources. This book also: Provides proven strategies for treating atopic dermatitis Helps providers create a treatment plan for their atopic patients Aids physicians in developing techniques for assessing patient compliance Thoroughly addresses the significant economic and psychosocial impact of atopic dermatitis.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Atopic dermatitis: disease background and risk factors
    3. Atopic dermatitis: pathophysiology
    4. Clinical presentation of atopic dermatitis
    5. Atopic dermatitis disease complications
    6. The psychosocial impact of atopic dermatitis
    7. Stressors in atopic dermatitis
    8. The economics burden of atopic dermatitis
    9. Defining and measuring the scope of atopic dermatitis
    10. Prescription treatment options
    11. Non-prescription treatment options
    12. Adherence in atopic dermatitis
    13. Atopic dermatitis: managing the itch
    14. Atopic dermatitis disease education
    15. The future of atopic dermatitis treatment.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Elijah Dixon, Charles M. Vollmer Jr., Gary R. May, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Biliary system anatomy, physiology, and embryology
    2. Primary sclerosing cholangitis
    3. Commentary: primary sclerosing cholangitis
    4. Biliary manifestations of chronic pancreatitis
    5. Commentary: biliary manifestations of chronic pancreatitis, critical uncertainties, controversies, and future considerations
    6. Autoimmune pancreatitis
    7. Counterpoint: biliary manifestations in autoimmune pancreatitis
    8. Recurrent pyogenic cholangitis
    9. Commentary: recurrent pyogenic cholangitis
    10. Proximal biliary stricutres mimicking hilar cholangiocarcinoma
    11. Counterpoint: proximal biliary strictures mimicking hilar cholangiocarcinoma
    12. Traumatic biliary stricutres
    13. Commentary: traumatic biliary strictures, comprehensive management of benign biliary stenosis and injury
    14. Perceptual errors leading to bile duct injury during laparoscopic cholecystectomy
    15. Commentary: perceptual errors leading to bile duct injury during laparoscopic cholecystectomy
    16. The heuristics and psychology of bile duct injuries
    17. Commentary: the heuristics and psychology of bile duct injuries
    18. The classification and injury patterns of iatrogenic bile duct injury during laparoscopic cholecystectomy
    19. Commentary: the classification and injury patterns of iatrogenic bile duct injury during laparoscopic cholecystectomy
    20. Bile duct injuries and the law
    21. Commentary: bile duct injuries and the law
    22. Intraoperative management of bile duct injuries by the non-biliary surgeon
    23. commentary: intraoperative management of bile duct injuries by non-biliary surgeon
    24. Management of bile duct injuries within the first forty-eight hours
    25. Commentary :Management of bile duct injuries within the first forty-eight hours
    26. Endoscopic management of bile duct injury during laparoscopic cholecystectomy
    27. Role of intervational radiology in managing bile duct injuries
    28. Operative repair of common bile duct injury
    29. Commentary: Operative repair of common bile duct injury
    30. Management of isolated sectoral duct injury
    31. Commentary: Management of isolated sectoral duct injury
    32. Liver resection for bile duct injury
    33. Commentary: Liver resection for bile duct injury
    34. Liver transplantation for common bile duct injury
    35. Commentary: Liver transplantation for common bile duct injury
    36. Biliary stricutres from liver transplantation
    37. Commentary: Biliary strictures from liver transplantation
    38. Recurrent biliary strictures after initial biliary reconstruction.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Anthony A. Romeo, Brandon J. Erickson, Justin W. Griffin, editors.
    Summary: The biceps tendon is one of the most challenging anatomic structures to completely understand. Its precise role for shoulder function has yet to be completely defined, and pathologic conditions exist at both its proximal and distal ends. In recent years, the biceps labral complex has been recognized as a common cause of shoulder pain among patients. Accurate diagnosis, utilizing both physical examination and imaging, is crucial to decision-making regarding the most effective treatment. Many controversies exist surrounding the management of biceps pathology with a myriad of potential solutions to consider. This practical text breaks down the biceps into succinct, digestible portions with expert tips and tricks to help manage bicipital problems in a wide array of patients. Sensibly divided into three thematic sections, it encompasses all aspects of the biceps tendon, including relevant anatomy, diagnosis, imaging, and non-operative management (including rehabilitation and biologic treatments). Surgical management strategies as they pertain to both proximal and distal biceps tendon pathologies will be covered, including both arthroscopic and open tenodesis, transfer, and inlay and onlay fixation methods. A review of associated complications and how to avoid them is likewise described in detail, along with post-surgical rehabilitation techniques to maximize return to play. Ideal for orthopedic surgeons and sports medicine specialists at all levels, The Management of Biceps Pathology will be a unique resource for all clinicians facing challenges treating the active patient with shoulder and elbow pain.

    Contents:
    Anatomy, Imaging and Function of the Biceps Tendon
    Proximal Biceps Tendon Conditions
    Distal Biceps Tendon Conditions.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Badrinath R. Konety, Sam S. Chang, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a single, comprehensive reference source that incorporates the epidemiology, natural history, and the latest genetic and molecular biological findings of bladder cancer. This book discusses the diagnostic and staging evaluation of both non-muscle invasive and invasive bladder cancer and incorporates the new findings on markers for the diagnosis of bladder cancer. Risk stratified treatment of non-muscle invasive bladder cancer including various approaches to intravesical therapy are reviewed. Current guideline-based approaches to management and new data regarding diagnosis and prognostication of muscle invasive bladder cancer is analyzed and summarized. This book covers the application of chemotherapy for muscle invasive and advanced disease. The evidence-based application of multimodality therapy is highlighted. Gaps in current knowledge and important areas for clinical research are highlighted. Authored by experts in their respective fields, Management of Bladder Cancer: A Comprehensive Text with Clinical Scenarios serves as an easy and complete reference source for clinicians, researchers, individuals in training, allied health professionals and medical students in the fields of Urology, Medical Oncology, Radiation Oncology, Basic and Translational Science and Epidemiology.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology and natural history
    Screening for Bladder Cancer
    Pathology and Staging: Histopathology and Cytopathology
    Pathology and Staging: Genetics and Molecular Biology
    Imaging in Localized and Advanced Bladder Cancer
    New Imaging Techniques in Staging of Urothelial Carcinoma of the Bladder
    Socioeconomic issues and improved quality of care
    Quality of life measures
    Prognostication and risk assessment
    Clinical trials and emerging therapeutic strategies in bladder cancer
    Improved diagnostic techniques
    Clinical scenario: Microscopic hematuria and atypical cytology in a 68 year old man with normal upper tract imaging
    Localized surgical therapy and surveillance
    Clinical Scenario: Initial high grade Ta tumor
    Clinical Scenario: Recurrent Ta tumor
    Clinical Scenario: Rapidly growing, high volume, low grade Ta tumor
    Clinical Scenario: Low grade T1 tumor
    Intravesical therapy
    Clinical Scenario: Initial CIS
    Management of BCG Recurrent Bladder Cancer
    Clinical Scenario: Persistent CIS and HIGH Grade Ta Bladder Cancer after BCG
    Maurizio Brausi
    Clinical Scenario: Presentation and Management of Significant Side Effects from Bacillus Calmette-Guérin Bladder Instillation
    Guideline-based management of non-muscle invasive bladder cancer: comparison of the AUA, EAU, ICUD and NCCN guidelines
    Open Radical Cystectomy
    Robotic cystectomy
    Clinical Scenario: T2 bladder tumor
    Urinary Diversion: Open and robotic techniques
    Chemoradiotherapy
    Clinical Scenario: 53 year-old man with a solitary, 2 cm, high-grade T2 tumor and focal CIS in the bladder dome who wants bladder preservation
    Management of Bladder Cancer, role of chemotherapy and controversies surrounding its application
    Clinical Scenario: Large volume, non metastatic T2 bladder tumor
    The role of pelvic lymphadenectomy at the time of radical cystectomy for bladder cancer
    Clinical Scenario: Unexpected positive nodes at radical cystectomy
    Surveillance and monitoring
    Clinical Scenario: The Role of Perioperative Chemotherapy
    Management of Bladder Cancer with Pelvic Nodal Metastases After Complete Response to Chemotherapy
    Guideline based management muscle-invasive bladder cancer: NCCN, ICUD and EAU.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Jun Teruya, editor.
    Summary: This latest edition provides a comprehensive, state-of-the-art overview of the major issues specific to managing bleeding patients. Like the previous edition, the sections of this new edition have been structured to review the overall scope of issues, among them bleeding associated with disease condition, bleeding from specific organs, bleeding associated with medication, and bleeding associated with procedures. In addition to thoroughly revised and updated chapters from the previous edition, the latest edition features new chapters on such topics as the basics of hemostasis, bleeding due to rare coagulation factor deficiencies, bleeding associated with connective tissue disorders, massive transfusion protocol, bleeding associated with ventricular assist device, and evaluation of bleeding risk prior to invasive procedures. The volume also includes brief etiology and a practical reference guide regarding type of blood components, medication, dose, and duration. Written by authors from a variety of integrated disciplines, Management of Bleeding Patients, Second Edition is a valuable resource for clinicians working in the area of bleeding management.

    Contents:
    Hemostasis Basics: Figures and Facts
    Screening Coagulation Assays, FXIII and D-dimer
    Platelets
    Von Willebrand Disease Laboratory Workup
    Hyperfibrinolysis
    Whole Blood Assay: Thromboelastometry
    Basics
    Whole Blood Assay: Thromboelastometry
    Bleeding Management Algorithms
    Known Bleeding Disorders for Surgery
    Hemophilia A, Hemophilia B, Congenital von Willebrand Disease, and Acquired von Willebrand Syndrome
    Bleeding Associated with Coagulation Factor Inhibitors
    Bleeding Due to Rare Coagulation Factor Deficiencies
    Pregnancy-Associated Bleeding
    Bleeding Associated with Thrombocytopenia
    Bleeding in Acute and Chronic Liver Disease
    Bleeding and Hyperfibrinolysis
    Bleeding of Unknown Etiology
    Bleeding Associated with Disseminated Intravascular Coagulation
    Bleeding and Vitamin K Deficiency
    Bleeding in Uremia
    Bleeding Associated with Connective Tissue Disorder
    Bleeding Associated with Trauma
    Massive Transfusion Protocol
    Lupus Anticoagulant Hypoprothrombinemia Syndrome (LAHPS)
    BLEEDING FROM SPECIFIC ORGANS
    Intracerebral Hemorrhage: An Overview of Etiology, Pathophysiology, Clinical Presentation, and Advanced Treatment Strategies
    Epistaxis
    Bleeding Disorders Related to Lung Disease
    Heavy Menstrual Bleeding
    Gross Hematuria
    Upper Gastrointestinal Bleeding
    BLEEDING ASSOCIATED WITH MEDICATION
    Antiplatelet and Anticoagulant Agents
    Thrombolytic Therapy: tPA-Induced Bleeding
    Bleeding Associated with ECMO
    Management of Bleeding Associated with Durable Mechanical Circulatory Support
    Bleeding Related to Cardiac Surgery
    Bleeding Related to Liver Transplant
    Percutaneous Image-Guided Interventions Including Solid Organ Biopsies
    Dental Extractions in Patients with Congenital and Acquired Bleeding Disorders
    Neonatal Thrombocytopenia
    Bleeding in the Neonate
    Evaluation of Bleeding Risk Prior to Pediatric Invasive Procedures
    Evaluation of Bleeding Risk Prior to Invasive Procedures
    Hemostatic Agents and Blood Components Used to Stop Bleeding
    Blood Components.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Elena Zamagni, editor.
    Springer Nature eBook.
    Summary: This pocket guide provides a concise yet comprehensive overview of the two most prominent clinical features of multiple myeloma (MM), bone disease and renal failure. The first half of the text reviews critical aspects of bone disease in MM, including pathophysiology, the use of imaging modalities and drugs in treatment, and the role of orthopedic surgery in MM. The latter half of the book reviews major components of kidney disease in MM, from pathophysiology to treatment. Written by experts in the field, Management of Bone Disease and Kidney Failure in Multiple Myeloma: A Pocket Guide is a valuable resource for clinicians and practitioners who manage patients afflicted with multiple myeloma.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction: Management of Bone Disease and Kidney Failure in Multiple Myeloma
    2. The Pathophysiology of Myeloma Bone Disease: Bone Remodelling and the Role of Osteoclasts
    3. The Pathophysiology of Myeloma Bone Disease: Role of Osteoblasts and Osteocytes
    4. Imaging Techniques in Staging and Early Phases
    5. Imaging Techniques for Response Assessment and Follow-up
    6. New Perspectives in Imaging Techniques
    7. Therapy of Myeloma Bone Disease
    8. Orthopedic Management in Multiple Myeloma: What is the Role and When?
    9. The Pathophysiology of Kidney Involvement in Multiple Myeloma and Monoclonal-Related Disorders
    10. Treatment of Multiple Myeloma with Kidney Involvement.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Malcolm Reed, Riccardo A. Audisio, editors.
    Summary: This book offers evidence-based clinical knowledge of older patients suffering from breast cancer. It details the full armament of therapeutic options as well as the epidemiology of the disease and specific psychosocial considerations for elderly patients.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Springer
    Springer
    Springer
    Springer
  • Print
    Gan-Xin Yan, Peter R. Kowey, Charles Antzelevitch, editors.
    Summary: A significantly expanded third edition, this book provides a comprehensive and concise overview of cardiac arrhythmias and their ECG/telemetry manifestations, including the principles of cardiac electrophysiology, current concepts of pharmacology, clinical features, diagnoses, and state-of-the-art treatments. Additionally, the book emphasizes decision-making strategies in approaching each individual patient and the application of technical innovations in specific clinical situations. Organized into eight parts, beginning chapters introduce the concepts and principles of cardiac electrophysiology, unique rhythms, and ECG waves/signs. These chapters are designed to integrate emerging knowledge in basic science and clinical medicine. Subsequent chapters focus on the diagnosis of a variety of cardiac arrhythmias using non-invasive methodology. Throughout the book, chapters continue to analyze pharmacological and other approaches to therapy of specific arrhythmias, including supraventricular tachycardias, atrial fibrillation and flutter, ventricular arrhythmias, and bradyarrhythmias. Finally, the book closes with coverage on inherited cardiac arrhythmia syndromes including the long, short QT, and J-wave syndromes, catecholaminergic polymorphic ventricular tachycardia, and arrhythmogenic right ventricular cardiomyopathy. The third edition of Management of Cardiac Arrhythmias, is an essential resource for physicians, residents, fellows, and medical students in cardiology, cardiac surgery, vascular surgery, cardiac electrophysiology, and cardiac radiology.

    Contents:
    Part I. Basic Principals of Cardiac Electrophysiology and Pharmacology
    1. Basic Principles of Cardiac Electrophysiology
    2. Mechanisms Underlying the Development of Cardiac Arrhythmias
    3. Genetic and Molecular Basis of Cardiac Arrhythmias
    4. Unique Rhythm Phenomena and Mechanisms (Ashman, gap phenomenon, phase 3 and phase 4 block, supernormal conduction, concealed conduction, Wedensky phenomenon, linking phenomenon)
    5. ECG Waves and Signs: Ionic and Cellular Basis (QRS/Axis, J wave, ST, T/U waves, epsilon wave and cardiac memory etc)
    6. Mechanisms of Action of Antiarrhythmic Drugs
    Part II. Diagnosis of Cardiac Arrhythmias Using Surface ECG
    7. Narrow Complex Tachycardia
    8. Wide Complex Tachycardia
    9. Bradyarrhythmias
    10. Pacemaker-mediated Arrhythmias
    Part III. Diagnosis of Cardiac Arrhythmias: Intracardiac Approaches
    11. Electroanatomical Mapping of Cardiac Arrhythmias: Basic Principles and Technology
    12. Electrophysiological Maneuvers in Arrhythmia Analysis
    Part IV. Specific Arrhythmias
    13. Atrioventricular Nodal Reentry Tachycardia
    14. Atrioventricular Reentry Tachycardia
    15. Atrial Tachycardia and Flutter
    16. Atrial Fibrillation: Pharmacologic Therapy
    17. Atrial Fibrillation: Catheter Ablation and a Hybrid Approach
    18. Ventricular Tachycardia and Fibrillation: Pharmacologic Therapy
    19. Ventricular Tachycardia: Catheter Ablation
    20. Acquired Long QT syndrome and Torsade de Pointes
    21. Indications for Implantable Cardioverter Defibrillators
    22. Indications for Temporary and Permanent Pacemakers
    23. Syncope
    Part V. Arrhythmias and Cardiomyopathy
    23. Premature Ventricular Complex-induced Cardiomyopathy: Pathophysiology and Treatment
    24. Cardiac Resynchronization Therapy
    Part VI. Arrhythmias in Specific Populations
    27. Arrhythmias in Athletes
    28. Arrhythmias during Pregnancy and Postpartum
    29. Arrhythmias in Children
    Part VII. Inherited Cardiac Arrhythmia Syndromes
    30. J wave Syndromes: Early Repolarization and Brugada Syndromes
    31. Catecholaminergic Polymorphic Ventricular Tachycardia
    32. Arrhythmogenic Right Ventricular Cardiomyopathy
    33. Congenital Long QT Syndrome
    34. Short QT Syndrome.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Hanna Z. Mieszczanska, Gladys P. Velarde.
    Summary: "This book summarizes the great progress in the treatment of cardiovascular disease (CVD). Due to improved therapies, preventive strategies and increased public awareness, CVD mortality has been on the decline for both genders. Unfortunately, the decline has been less prominent for women, and CVD remains the leading cause of mortality for women in the United States and is responsible for a third of all deaths of women worldwide. Management of Cardiovascular Disease in Women provides a comprehensive overview of differences in cardiac problems in women including the challenges and limitations of the available literature. Unique aspects to women's heart health such as pregnancy, the impact of emotional stress and other psychosocial issues are discussed by leading experts in the field. They therefore provide important insight to cardiovascular care in women, making this book an essential resource for a wide range of practitioners including cardiologists, primary care providers, internists, and reproductive healthcare professionals."--Publisher's website.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Fred Saad, Mario A. Eisenberger, editors.
    Summary: This volume provides new data about the molecular biology of CRPC and a review of the definition, staging and prognostic factors that define CRPC. The book features an in-depth review of proven therapeutic options, including bone-targeted therapies, immunotherapy, chemotherapy and hormonal based therapies. Combination therapy as well as novel targeted approaches presently under investigation are also reviewed. The text provides up-to-date guidelines and algorithms for the management of CRPC based on international guidelines presently available as well as evidence-based medicine. As a concise yet comprehensive summary of the current status of the field, Management of Castration Resistant Prostate Cancer serves as a very useful resource for physicians and researchers dealing with this challenging malignancy.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Castration Resistant Prostate Cancer: A Rapidly Expanding Clinical State and a Model for New Therapeutic Opportunities
    Evolution of Clinical States and the Castration Resistant Clinical Paradigm
    Molecular Mechanisms of Prostate Cancer Progression after Castration
    New Imaging Modalities
    Androgen Receptor Biology in Castration Resistant Prostate Cancer
    The Androgen Receptor as a Therapeutic Target for Castration-Resistant Prostate Cancer
    Approaches Targeting Androgen Synthesis (CYP 17 inhibitors)
    Cytotoxic Chemotherapy (Taxanes and Taxane Combinations)
    The Emerging Role of Immunotherapy in Castrate Resistant Prostate Cancer
    Bone Targeted Therapy: Rationale and Current Status
    Radium-223 and Other Radiopharmaceuticals in Prostate Cancer
    Introduction
    Phase I/II targeted treatments
    Defining Clinical Endpoints in Castration-resistant Prostate Cancer
    Angiogenesis Inhibition in Castration Resistant Prostate Cancer
    Co-targeting Adaptive Survival Pathways
    Targeting the PI3K/AKT/mTOR Pathway in Prostate Cancer
    PARP Inhibitors
    Targeting C-Met/VEGF in Castration Resistant Prostate Cancer
    Epigenetics in Castration Resistant Prostate Cancer
    Undifferentiated Prostate Cancer and the Neuroendocrine Phenotype
    Strategies Addressing Quality of Life: Patient Reported Outcome and Symptoms Management
    Evidence-Based Therapeutic Approaches for mCRPC patients: Rational Sequence of Standard Treatment Options and Design for Future Drug Development.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Alejandro M. Spiotta, Raymond D. Turner, M. Imran Chaudry, Aquilla S. Turk, editors.
    Summary: This important title brings together a distinguished panel of thought-leaders, known for their insights into the development and application of minimally-invasive surgical and endovascular techniques, to provide a comprehensive and discerning compendium of our most current knowledge and state-of-the-art procedures in the management of cerebral vascular diseases. Written in a style that is accessible to students and experienced practitioners alike, the book covers all the important recent advances that have reshaped the field in dramatic ways. Emphasizing how surgical and endovascular techniques are complementary, the volume includes illuminating chapters on the nexus of endovascular and conventional "open" cerebrovascular surgery, including patient assessment and practice in a hybrid operating environment, utilizing the best methods to achieve optimal outcomes. A major addition to the clinical literature, Management of Cerebrovascular Disorders: A Comprehensive, Multidisciplinary Approach will be of significant interest to neurosurgeons, neurologists, neuroradiologists, neurointensivists, students, residents, fellows, and specialized attending physicians.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Rudolph M. Navari, editor.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. The physiology and pharmacology of nausea and vomiting induced by anticancer chemotherapy in humans
    3. First-generation 5-HT3 receptor antagonists
    4. Palonosetron
    5. The role of neurokinin-1 receptor antagonists in CINV
    6. Olanzapine for the prevention of chemotherapy-induced nausea and vomiting
    7. Gabapentin for the prevention of CINV
    8. Prevention of CINV in patients receiving high-dose multiple-day chemotherapy
    9. Clinical management of CINV
    10. Treatment of chemotherapy-induced nausea
    11. Conclusions
    12. Future directions.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Adam M. Shiroff, Mark J. Seamon, Lewis J. Kaplan, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive, state-of-the-art overview of chest trauma. The text reviews all aspects of chest wall, intra-thoracic organ, and great vessel injury management, with each section of the book structured anatomically to explore specific treatment options. Since injury care alone is insufficient in guiding the totality of care, the text features a robust section on inpatient critical care, which includes cutting edge evidence on resuscitation, advanced monitoring, and organ system support. The book also contains a section on disaster and mass casualty events, focusing on specifics of treatment, ethics of resource allocation, and the role of specialized centers. Written by experts in the field, Management of Chest Trauma: A Practical Guide is a valuable resource for clinicians and practitioners who treat patients afflicted with injuries to the chest.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Pierre Huard.
    Contents:
    The Challenge of Chronic Diseases
    Some Alternative Schemes for the Management of Chronic Diseases
    Difficulties in Implementing Effective Management
    Redefining Conditions for the Effective Management of Chronic Diseases
    Activities Specific to an Effective Management of Chronic Diseases
    Dynamic Processes for the Provision of Efficient Care
    Lump Sum Funding, Efficiency and Development
    An Illustration
    From Processes to Organizational Structures
    Contractual Relationship Configurations
    Implementation Strategy
    IS in Health System Restructuring.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Mustafa Arici, editor.
    Summary: This book presents a comprehensive and instructive management plan for physicians who care for CKD patients. Basic aspects of CKD, clinical assessment, evaluation and management of risk factors, cardiovascular disease in the context of CKD, assessment and management of CKD complications, special circumstances in CKD patients, and the path to renal replacement therapy are all thoroughly covered. Diagnostic and therapeutic approaches are presented according to the latest staging system for CKD, with patient care being discussed separately for each disease stage. The proposed management plan is both 'best available evidence based' and 'practice based'. The book also recognizes the needs of busy clinicians by including helpful boxes summarizing the evidence on diagnostic and therapeutic issues and practice pearls based on guidelines. The authors are recognized experts from across the world, ensuring global coverage of the problem, and most have participated in writing guidelines on CKD.

    Contents:
    What Is Chronic Kidney Disease?
    Clinical Assessment of a Patient with Chronic Kidney Disease
    Imaging in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Diabetes and Chronic Kidney Disease
    Hypertension and Chronic Kidney Disease
    Dyslipidemia and Chronic Kidney Disease
    Metabolic Acidosis and Chronic Kidney Disease
    Acute Kidney Injury in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Preventing Progression of Chronic Kidney Disease: Diet and Lifestyle
    Preventing Progression of Chronic Kidney Disease: Renin-Angiotensin-Aldosterone System Blockade Beyond Blood Pressure
    Chronic Kidney Disease and the Cardiovascular Connection
    Screening and Diagnosing Cardiovascular Disease in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Management of Cardiovascular Disease in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Cerebrovascular Disease and Chronic Kidney Disease
    Anemia and Disorders of Hemostasis in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Mineral and Bone Disorders in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Protein-Energy Wasting and Nutritional Interventions in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Infectious Complications and Vaccination in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Endocrine Disorders in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Liver and Gastrointestinal Tract Problems in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Pruritus and Other Dermatological Problems in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Pain Management in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Depression and Other Psychological Issues in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Sexual Dysfunction in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Sleep Disorders in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Neuropathy and Other Neurological Problems in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Drug Prescription in Chronic Kidney Disease
    Pregnancy and Chronic Kidney Disease
    Surgery and Chronic Kidney Disease
    Chronic Kidney Disease in the Elderly
    Chronic Kidney Disease and Cancer
    Chronic Kidney Disease in the Intensive Care Unit
    Chronic Kidney Disease Management Programmes and Patient Education
    Conservative/Palliative Treatment and End-of-Life Care in Chronic Kidney Disease
    How to Prepare a Chronic Kidney Disease Patient for Transplantation
    How to Prepare a Chronic Kidney Disease Patient for Dialysis
    Quality of Life in Chronic Kidney Disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Maggie Watson, David W. Kissane.
    Contents:
    Distress, adjustment and anxiety disorders / Daniel McFarland and Jimmie Holland
    Depression in cancer care / Daisuke Fujisawa and Yosuke Uchitomi
    Diagnosis and treatment of demoralization / David W. Kissane
    Recognizing and managing suicide risk / Maggie Watson and Luigi Grassi
    Psychopharmacologic management of anxiety and depression / Madeline Li, Joshua Rosenblat, and Gary Rodin.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Thach Nguyen, Dayi Hu, Shao Liang Chen, Moo-Hyun Kim, Cindy Grines ; associate editor, Faisal Latiff.
    Contents:
    Hyperlipidemia / Vien T. Truong [and 5 others]
    Hypertension / Udho Thadani, Nguyen Duc Cong
    Stable coronary artery disease / Mohammed Haris Umer Usman [and 5 others]
    Acute coronary syndrome / Udho Thadani, Quang Tuan Nguyen, Han Yaling
    ST segment elevation myocardial infarction / Runlin Gao [and 7 others]
    Heart failure / Dan D. Le [and 5 others]
    Decompensated heart failure / Patrick Campbell [and 5 others]
    Atrial fibrillation / Mihail Chelu [and 7 others]
    Ventricular tachycardia / Sorin Lazar [and 5 others]
    Syncope / Rajasekhar Nekkanti [and 5 others]
    Aortic stenosis / Rajiv Goswami, Phillip Tran, Nguyen Lan Hieu, Aravinda Nanjundappa, Neal Kleiman
    Mitral regurgitation / Raj Nekkanti [and 6 others]
    Cardiovascular problems in the older patients / Daniel Forman, Nanette Wenger
    Cardiovascular problems in women / Kahroba Jahan, Nisa Arshad, Nguyen Phuc Nguyen, Ainol Shareha Sahar, Amsa Arshad, Kwan Lee.
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Dr. Michael A. Cummings, Dr. Stephen M. Stahl.
    Summary: "In community settings, the most common barriers to independent living, employment, and stable interpersonal relationships for patients suffering from schizophrenia-spectrum disorders or other psychotic disorders are negative symptoms and cognitive deficits. In contrast, severely mentally ill individuals, often incarcerated or chronically institutionalized, more frequently experience substantial barriers related to positive psychotic symptoms leading to problematic behaviors such as aggression or violence. This is not to say that among the chronically institutionalized severely mentally ill population that positive psychotic symptoms are the only, or even majority, source of problematic behaviors. A survey conducted within the California Department of State Hospitals, a circa 7000-bed system dedicated to the treatment of conserved and forensically committed patients, reviewed 839 episodes of aggression or violence by 88 persistently aggressive inpatients and found that 54% of such episodes were impulsive, 39% were predatory or instrumental, and 17% were psychotically driven. Nevertheless, amelioration or control of positive psychotic symptoms commonly forms the initial treatment focus among the severely mentally ill."-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2021
  • Digital
    Jorge L. Alio, Dimitri T. Azar, editors.
    Summary: The diversity of procedures that characterize modern refractive surgery makes it, both for the beginner and the experienced surgeon, necessary to have well established guidelines to face refractive complications. This lavishly illustrated guide is written by international opinion leaders with extensive experience in the practice of refractive surgery. It offers the reader practical pearls to the solution and prevention of the different complications of corneal and refractive surgery. This book provides ophthalmic surgeons with appropriate solutions for the most frequent problems they would face in their daily practice. Surgical complications are described and illustrated from their pathogenesis to various treatment modalities. Complications covered include: Intraoperative complications (e.g. those encountered during femtosecond laser, SMILE and LASIK, corneal refractive surgery, refractive lens exchange, and intraocular refractive procedures); early post-operative complications and late post-operative complications. This illustrated guide is written by international opinion leaders with extensive experience in the practice of refractive surgery. Devoted to refractive complications, it provides ophthalmic surgeons with the most adequate solutions for the most frequent problems.

    Contents:
    Section I: Overview
    Chapter 1: Refractive Surgery Outcomes and Frequency of Complications
    Chapter 2: Influence of Refractive Surgery on Quality of Life
    Section II: LASIK Intraoperative Complications
    Chapter 3: Thin, Irregular, Buttonhole Flaps
    Chapter 4: Intraoperative flap complications in LASIK: prevention and management of free flaps
    Chapter 5: Management of the Distorted Flap
    Section III: LASIK
    Chapter 6: Scarring
    Chapter 7: Infections after Refractive Surgery
    Chapter 8: Diffuse Lamellar Keratitis
    Chapter 9: Pressure-Induced Interlamellar Stromal Keratitis and PED Masquerade Syndrome
    Chapter 10: Prevention and Management of Flap Striae after LASIK
    Chapter 11: Marginal Sterile Corneal Infiltrates after LASIK and Corneal Procedures
    Chapter 12: Melting
    Chapter 13: Dry Eye
    Chapter 14: Corneal Dysesthesia following LASIK
    Chapter 15: Epithelial Ingrowth
    Chapter 16: Corneal Ectasia
    Chapter 17: Ptosis
    Section IV: Refractive Miscalculation
    Chapter 18: Refractive Miscalculation with Refractive Surprise: Sphere
    Chapter 19: Refractive Miscalculation with Refractive Surprise: Cylinder
    Section V: Optical Aberrations and Corneal Irregularities
    Chapter 20. Causes of Higher Order Aberrations Induction in Excimer Laser Surgery
    Chapter 21: Night Vision Disturbances Following Refractive Surgery: Causes, Prevention and Treatment
    Chapter 22: Decentration
    Chapter 23: Corneal Irregularity Following Refractive Surgery: Causes and Therapeutic Approaches
    Section VI: Optic nerve, Retinal and Binocular Vision
    Chapter 24: Optic Neuropathy and Retinal Complications after Refractive Surgery
    Chapter 25: Effect of Refractive Surgery on Strabismus and Binocular Vision
    Chapter 26: Small Incision Lenticule Extraction (SMILE) Complications
    Chapter 27: Complications and Management with the Femtosecond Laser
    Section VII: Surface Ablation: Complications.- Chapter 28: Complications of Laser Epithelial Keratomileusis (LASEK)
    Chapter 29: Corneal Haze after Keratorefractive Surgery
    Section VIII: Phakic Intraocular Lens Complication
    Chapter 30: Complications of Anterior Chamber Angle Supported Phakic Intraocular Lenses-Prevention and Treatment
    Chapter 31: Complications of Iris Supported Phakic IOLs
    Chapter 32: Complications of Posterior Chamber Phakic IOLs
    Chapter 33: Retinal Detachment
    Chapter 34: Refractive Lens Exchange and Choroidal
    Chapter 35: Complications of Multifocal Intraocular Lenses
    Chapter 36: Refractive Surprise after Cataract following Corneal Refractive Surgery
    Section IX: Other Refractive Surgical Procedures
    Chapter 37: Complications of Refractive Keratotomy
    Chapter 38: Management of Complications of Intracorneal Ring Segment Implantation
    Chapter 39: Corneal Inlays: Complications
    Chapter 40: Complications of Corneal Collagen Cross-linking
    Chapter 41: CXL for post-LASIK ectasia
    Section X: The Patient
    Chapter 42: Predicting the Unhappy Patient and Patient Expectations.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Falk Schwendicke, editor.
    Summary: This book describes the challenges that deep carious lesions pose for dental practitioners, including the risk of endodontic complications and the difficulty of restorative treatment, and identifies options for overcoming these challenges on the basis of the best available evidence. The opening chapter sets the scene by discussing pathophysiology, histopathology, clinical symptomatology, and treatment thresholds. The various treatment options are then systematically presented and reviewed, covering non-selective, stepwise, and selective carious tissue removal and restoration, sealing of lesions using resin sealants or crowns, and non-restorative management approaches. In each case the current evidence with respect to the treatment is carefully evaluated. Advantages and disadvantages are explained and recommendations made on when to use the treatment in question. Illustrative clinical cases and treatment pathways for clinicians are included. This book will be of value for all practitioners who treat dental caries and carious lesions, whether in the permanent or the primary dentition. It will also be of interest to under- and postgraduate students in cariology and restorative, operative, preventive, and pediatric dentistry.

    Contents:
    Managing dental caries
    Stepwise excavation
    Caries sealing using resins
    ART
    Caries sealing using PMCs
    Inactivating carious lesions: NRCT
    Summary and recommendations, clinical pathways.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Clifford P. Shearman, editor.
    Summary: This book explores the challenges of treating foot complications associated with diabetes,℗ℓ a major challenge for societies the world over. Authors include experienced podiatrists, nurses and doctors,℗ℓ all of whom℗ℓ work in the field of diabetes foot care. The book is divided into prevention and early management, management of major complications, prevention of recurrence and how to structure a team.℗ℓ In each area, the authors describe their practical experiences and discuss how they have addressed clinical challenges. Management of Diabetic Foot Complications provides useful information for anyone responsible for the care of people with diabetes who may be at risk of developing foot complications.

    Contents:
    1. Epidemiology
    Numbers, outcomes, change in demographics, cost
    2. Athophysiology of foot in diabetes ? Neuropathy, effects on circulation, infections
    3. Underlying causes of foot complications of diabetes
    4. Infection and antibiotics
    5. Early recognition of the foot at risk and prevention
    6. Foot wear, orthotics and prosthetics
    7. Diabetic Foot Protection Teams: the role of multidisciplinary team
    8. Treatment of foot complications both in the community and secondary care
    9. Principles of Emergency treatment
    10. Management of arterial disease and re-vascularisation in diabetes
    11. Management of neuropathy and Charcots neuroarthropathy
    12. Wound treatment
    13. The role of foot surgery
    14. Amputation
    when and how
    15. Rehabilitation and treatment to avoid further problems.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    volume editors, Francesco Bandello, Marco A. Zarbin, Rosangela Lattanzio, Ilaria Zucchiatti.
    Contents:
    The burden of diabetes : emerging data / Maffi, P., Secchi, A.
    The eye as a window to the microvascular complications of diabetes / Zerbini, G., Maestroni, S., Turco, V., Secchi, A.
    Emerging insights into pathogenesis / Midena, E., Pilotto, E.
    Emerging issues for optical coherence tomography / Pierro, L., Rabiolo, A.
    Optical coherence tomography angiography in diabetic maculopathy / Coscas, G., Lupidi, M., Coscas, F.
    Emerging issues for ultra-wide field angiography / Rabiolo, A. [and 6 others]
    Emerging simplified retinal imaging / Sharma, A.
    Intravitreal ranibizumab in diabetic macular edema : long-term outcomes / Zucchiatti, I., Bandello, F.
    Intravitreal aflibercept in diabetic macular edema : long-term outcomes / Introini, U., Casalino, G.
    Intravitreal steroids in diabetic macular edema / Lattanzio, R., Cicinelli, M.V., Bandello, F.
    Practical lessons from protocol I for the management of diabetic macular edema / Mukkamala, L., Bhagat, N., Zarbin, M.A.
    Practical lessons from protocol T for the management of diabetic macular edema / Mukkamala, L., Bhagat, N., Zarbin, M.A.
    Is laser still important in diabetic macular edema as primary or deferral therapy? / Battaglia Parodi, M., Bandello, F.
    Anti-vascular endothelial growth factor injections : the new standard of care in proliferative diabetic retinopathy? / Li, X., Zarbin, M.A., Bhagat, N.
    Surgical management and techniques / Codenotti, M., Iuliano, L., Maestranzi, G.
    Enzymatic vitreolysis for vitreomacular traction in diabetic retinopathy / Rizzo, S., Bacherini, D.
    Diabetic macular edema : emerging strategies and treatment algorithms / Moisseiev, E., Loewenstein, A.
    Application of clinical trial results to clinical practice / Zarbin, M.A., Bhagat, N., Mukkamala, L.
    Digital Access Karger 2017
  • Digital
    Anne T. Mancino, Lawrence T. Kim, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Jonathan H. Phillips, editor in chief ; Daniel J. Hedequist, Suken A. Shah, Burt Yaszay, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Cosimo Mazzotta, Frederik Raiskup, Stefano Baiocchi, Giuliano Scarcelli, Marc D. Friedman, Claudio Traversi.
    Summary: This book provides a rapid overview of crosslinking protocols and the therapeutic guidelines to optimize the application according to patients age and ectasia staging. This book is unique in the field of crosslinking therapy, as it gives the readers a complete guide for their daily practice to understand the modern accelerated crosslinking protocols, indications and customized treatment strategies. Ophthalmic specialists, opticians, optometrists and doctors working in ophthalmic settings, will find this book to be a 'go-to' guide for furthering clinical knowledge of this specialized treatment for early progressive corneal ectasia.

    Contents:
    Principles of accelerated corneal collagen cross-linking
    Crosslinking results and literature overview
    Crosslinking evidences in-vitro and in-vivo
    Accelerated crosslinking protocols
    Refractive crosslinking : ACXL plus
    ACXL beyond keratoconus : post-LASIK ectasia, post-RK ectasia and pellucid marginal degeneration
    Keratoconus classifcation, ACXL indications and therapy flowchart.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Beena Kunheri, D. K. Vijaykumar.
    Summary: Breast cancer, its causes, early detection and treatment have received considerable attention, since this widespread disease is one of the most important health concerns for women. This book provides a comprehensive overview of the diagnostic and therapeutic aspects of the management of early-stage breast cancer, including essential information on basic topics like pathology, and radiology, as well as the latest developments. Further, it discusses all aspects of surgical care, chemotherapy and radiation therapy, together with the controversies and current management guidelines. Helping readers acquire a deep, holistic understanding of the topic, the book is a valuable resource for practitioners and postgraduate students in the field of gynecologic oncology. Moreover, it is a useful aid to decision-making in day-to-day practice for oncologists, residents, fellows and experienced practitioners.

    Contents:
    Breast cancer: current trends across the world
    Role of screening in early stage breast cancer: Guidelines and recommendations
    Basics and controversies in breast cancer imaging
    Pathology of early stage breast cancer
    Molecular classification of early stage breast cancer and its relevance
    Surgical management of early stage breast cancer
    Sentinel lymph node in early stage breast cancer: Evidence, techniques and controversies
    Oncoplasty in early breast cancer
    Risk stratification for adjuvant treatment in early breast cancer
    Role of chemotherapy In early breast cancer
    Role of Anti-human epidermal growth receptor (HER) in early breast cancer
    Adjuvant hormones in early breast cancer:Current status
    Ductal carcinoma in situ: Current consensus in its management
    General guidelines of radiation in early breast cancer
    Techniques of radiation in early stage breast cancer
    Current controversies and guidelines in early breast cancer 1-3 node
    Accelerated partial breast irradiation: Current evidence and techniques in early breast cancer
    Role of regional nodal irradiation in early breast cancer
    Hypofractionation in early breast cancer: Evidence, rationale and practice
    Psychological impact of breast cancer diagnosis and treatment. .
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Mansoor R. MIrza, editor.
    Summary: This practical reference book provides up-to-date, evidence-based multidisciplinary guidelines on the epidemiology, biology, diagnosis, and treatment of endometrial cancer. Individual chapters focus on topics such as hormonal interactions, cancer prevention, genetic classification and its clinical applications. Recent advances in diagnostic methods are described. The treatment-oriented chapters include coverage of the roles of lymphadenectomy and sentinel node dissection, surgical complications, radiation techniques, and chemotherapy in early-stage disease. Treatment options in advanced disease, including hormonal therapy and targeted therapy, are considered separately, as is the management of rare tumor types. The authors are international key opinion leaders. Summaries of the ESMO/ESGO/ESTRO guidelines on management are included. Each clinical chapter ends with a summary of recommendations with the level of evidence.

    Contents:
    FIGO classification of endometrial cancer
    Epidemiology, risk factors and need for cancer registry
    Hormonal interactions in endometrial cancer
    Endometrial cancer prevention
    Controversies in pathology.- Hereditary cancers.- Genetic classification & it's clinical applications.- Advances in endometrial cancer diagnosis.- Need for level-one evidence in the management of endometrial cancer.- Summery of ESMO-ESGO-ESTRO consensus guidelines for the management of endometrial cancer.- Summery of SGO-NCCN management guidelines.- Risk factors in the early stage endometrial cancer
    Surgical principles
    Radiation therapy in endometrial cancer
    Role of chemotherapy
    Endocrine therapy of endometrial cancer
    Targeted therapy
    Management of rare tumours
    Quality of life.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Victor-Vlad Costan, editor.
    Contents:
    Anatomical Borders of the Parotid Region
    Extended Parotid Tumors with Origin in the Parotid Tissue
    Extended Parotid Tumors with Origin in the Parotid Lymph Nodes
    Extended Parotid Tumors with Origin in the Skin of the Head and Neck
    Parotid Tumors with Skin Extension
    Parotid Tumors with Muscle Extension
    Parotid Tumors Extended in the Facial Bones
    Parotid Tumors Extended in the Base of Skull
    Pathological Variety of Extended Parotid Tumors
    Clinical Diagnosis of Extended Parotid Tumors
    The Diagnostic Imaging of Extended Parotid Tumors
    Extended Parotidectomy
    Issues on General Anesthesia
    Arising Problems in Extended Parotidectomy
    Closing Postoperative Defects by Direct Suture
    The Use of Local Muscular Flaps
    The Use of Musculo-Cutaneous Platysma Flaps
    The Use of Muscular or Musculo-Cutaneous Pectoralis Major Flap
    The Use of Musculo-Cutaneous Latissimus Dorsi Free Flap
    The Use of Fascial-Cutaneous Radial Flap
    Attitude Toward the Facial Nerve in Extended Parotidectomy.-The Management of Lagophthalmos in Facial Nerve Paralysis
    The Value of Lipostructure in Extended Parotidectomy
    Issues on Radiotherapy
    Chemotherapy in Extended Parotidectomy.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Giuseppe Milano, Andrea Grasso, Angel Calvo, Roman Brzóska.
    Summary: In this book, leading European shoulder experts review the current status in the management of failures of surgical treatment of different pathological conditions around the shoulder, such as instability of the glenohumeral joint and the acromioclavicular joint, rotator cuff disease and pathology of the long head of the biceps tendon, and glenohumeral osteoarthritis. The aim is to equip readers with clear guidance on how to manage such failures in everyday practice. There is a particular focus on all aspects of the management response to failure of shoulder arthroplasty. Information is provided on the reasons for failure of the various procedures, and key points on controversial topics are highlighted. Furthermore, case examples are used to present challenging scenarios and their possible solutions. The numerous high-quality illustrations aid comprehension, and readers will also have access to supplementary online videos. The book, published in cooperation with ESSKA, will be invaluable for orthopaedic surgeons and highly relevant for other medical and health practitioners such as sports medicine doctors, physical medicine doctors, and physical therapists.

    Contents:
    Shoulder instability repair: Why it fails
    How to manage failed anterior arthroscopic repair
    How to manage failed anterior open repair
    How to manage failed posterior and MDI repair
    Failed Arthroscopic Anterior Instability Repair: Case Example
    Failed Posterior Instability Repair: Case Example
    Failed Open Anterior Instability Repair: Case Example
    The disabled throwing shoulder: when and how to operate
    How to manage failed SLAP repair
    Biceps disorders: when and how to operate
    Acromioclavicular joint instability: when and how to operate
    Failed SLAP Repair: Case Example
    Failed Biceps Treatment: Case Example
    Failed AC Joint Treatment: Case Example
    Anatomical shoulder arthroplasty: How it works / Why it fails / How to manage failure / Future directions to prevent failure
    Failed Total Shoulder Arthroplasty: Case Example
    Reverse shoulder arthroplasty: How it works / Why it fails / How to manage failure / Future directions to prevent failure
    Failed Reverse Shoulder Arthroplasty: Case Example
    Rotator cuff repair: Why it fails
    How to manage failed rotator cuff repair: Arthroscopic revision surgery / Biologic augmentation / Latissimus dorsi transfer
    Failed Cuff Repair: Case Example.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Massimo Mongardini, Manuel Giofrè, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Anatomy
    2. Physiology and Pathophysiology
    3. Diagnosis and Imaging
    4. Endoanal Ultrasound
    5. MR
    6. Anorectal Manometry
    7. Electromyography
    8. Pelvic Floor Rehabilitation
    9. Radiofrequency (SECCA procedure)
    10. Sacral Nerve Stimulation
    11. Bulking agent and perspectives
    12. Artificial Bowel Sphincter
    13. Anal Sphincter Reconstructions and Replacements
    14. Stoma
    15. Stem Cells.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    David R. Fleisher.
    Summary: Management of Functional Gastrointestinal Disorders in Children presents biopsychosocial theory with respect to six groups of functional disorders: disorders of elimination, vomiting disorders, abdominal pain, infant colic, chronic non-specific diarrhea of infants and toddlers, and failure to thrive. It illustrates, through numerous clinical examples, concepts of management developed during 45 years of practice. A satisfactory clinical outcome for pediatric gastrointestinal disorders often depends on the clinician's ability to discern not only the biological factors in illness, but also the unique cognitive and emotional needs that patients bring to the task of healing. This book provides guidelines for integrating the biopsychosocial model, an approach that has been under-emphasized in the literature until now. It includes naturalistic descriptions of functional gastrointestinal disorders, clinical goals, and the theoretical bases for management techniques. Offering numerous real-world examples and tips, this book serves as a valuable resource for pediatricians, family practitioners, pediatric mental health practitioners, pediatric nurse practitioners, as well as pediatric gastroenterologists.

    Contents:
    An introduction to biopsychosocial concepts
    Functional disorders of elimination
    Functional vomiting disorders
    The recurrent abdominal pain syndrome
    Infant colic syndrome
    Chronic non-specific diarrhea of infants and toddlers
    Failure to thrive.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Bhim Pratap Singh, Garima Singh, Krishna Kumar, S. Chandra Nayak, N. Srinivasa, editors.
    Summary: Pulses have played a major role in human diet and are considered a rich source of proteins. But, the major constraints in achieving the yield of pulses are the occurrences of various diseases and pests. Hence, there is a need to understand major fungal pathogens and their management strategies for sustainable agriculture. The major pulse crops in India and other Asian countries are bengal gram, pigeon pea, black gram, green gram, lentil and peas, which are attacked by several pathogens that cause considerable crop damage. Bengal gram is affected mainly by wilt (Fusarium oxysporum f. sp. ciceri), blight (Mycosphaerella pinodes) and rust (Uromyces ciceris-arietini). The main diseases of pigeon pea are wilt (Fusarium oxysporum) and Phytophtora stem blight (Phytophthora drechsleri f. sp. cajani). Powdery mildew (Erysiphe polygoni) and rust (Uromyces vicia-fabae) are the most important diseases affecting the production of pea. This volume offers details like symptoms, distribution, pathogens associated, predisposing factors and epidemiology, sources of resistance and holistic management of diseases with particular reference to those of economic importance. Several minor diseases of lentil, green gram and of black gram are discussed with their detailed and updated information. This volume provides pooled information regarding the management of major fungal phytopathogens affecting pulses.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    Chapter 1: Plant Growth-Promoting Rhizobacteria in Management of Soil-Borne Fungal Pathogens
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Biology of Soil-Borne Pathogen
    1.3 Diseases Caused by Soil-Borne Pathogen
    1.4 Management of Soil-Borne Disease
    1.4.1 Soil-Borne Fungal Pathogens and PGPR
    1.4.2 Factors Influencing on Pathogen-PGPR Interactions
    1.4.3 Induced Resistance
    1.4.4 Other Control Methods
    1.4.4.1 Cultural Method
    1.4.4.2 Crop Rotation
    1.4.4.3 Tillage Practices
    1.4.4.4 Soil Amendments
    1.4.4.5 Soil Solarization 1.4.4.6 Chemical Control
    1.4.4.7 Resistance of Host Plant
    1.4.4.8 Aerial Photography
    1.5 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 2: Exploration of Secondary Metabolites for Management of Chickpea Diseases
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Role of Endophytic Bacteria in the Management of Plant Diseases
    2.3 Secondary Metabolite Production
    2.3.1 Secondary Metabolites Associated with Rhizobacteria in the Management of Plant Diseases
    2.4 Production of Secondary Metabolites by Pseudomonas fluorescens
    2.5 Mode of Action of Secondary Metabolites Produced by Pseudomonads 2.6 Role of Biocontrol Agents in Induced Systemic Resistance (ISR) and Systemic Acquired Resistance (SAR)
    2.7 Future Perspective
    References
    Chapter 3: Integrated Fungal Foliar Diseases of Arid Legumes: Challenges and Strategies of Their Management in Rain-Fed Areas
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Chickpea
    3.2.1 Ascochyta Blight (Ascochyta rabiei)
    3.2.1.1 Diagnosis and Epidemiology
    3.2.1.2 Control
    3.2.2 Botrytis Gray (Botrytis cinerea)
    3.2.2.1 Diagnosis and Epidemiology
    3.2.2.2 Control
    3.3 Lentil
    3.3.1 Rust (Uromyces viciae-fabae Pers.) 3.3.1.1 Diagnosis and Epidemiology
    3.3.1.2 Control
    3.3.2 Ascochyta Blight (Ascochyta lentis)
    3.3.2.1 Diagnosis and Epidemiology
    3.3.2.2 Control
    3.4 Cowpea
    3.4.1 Anthracnose (Colletotrichum lindemuthianum Sacc. & Magn)
    3.4.1.1 Diagnosis and Epidemiology
    3.4.1.2 Control
    3.4.2 Cercospora Leaf Spot (Cercospora canescens Fellis & Martin and Cercospora cruenta Sacc)
    3.4.2.1 Diagnosis and Epidemiology
    3.4.2.2 Control
    3.5 Faba Bean
    3.5.1 Chocolate Leaf Spot (Botrytis fabae and Botrytis cinerea)
    3.5.1.1 Diagnosis and Epidemiology
    3.5.1.2 Control
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Santiago Horgan, Karl-Hermann Fuchs, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive state-of-the-art overview on the established knowledge in the field of gastroesophageal reflux disease (GERD) as well as a current insight into new algorithms involving new diagnostic tools and new endoscopic and surgical techniques. The integration of these new findings in updated therapeutic decision making is demonstrated. The book reviews the latest literature on new diagnostic findings to better discriminate between different benign disorders of the esophagus and stomach. It describes the decision making to establish indications for the variety of established and new therapeutic options in the management of the disease. It also describes in detail new therapeutic techniques, which provides excellent back-up information for every clinician in daily practice. Management of Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease is a valuable resource for clinicians, surgeons, nurses, technicians, students and researchers with an interest in esophageal and upper GI- disease.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Contents
    Contributors
    1: Definition and Pathophysiology of Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease
    Introduction and Definition
    The Anatomy of the Esophagus and Stomach
    Pathophysiology of GERD
    The Incompetence of the LES
    The Transient Lower Esophageal Sphincter Relaxations (TLESRs)
    Histopathologic Considerations
    Pathophysiologic Overview and Summary
    References
    2: Symptom Spectrum in Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease
    Introduction
    Diagnostic Workup for Patients with Symptoms Indicative of GERD
    The Variety of Symptoms in Patients with GERD Symptom Profile of Esophageal Motility Disorders
    GERD Symptoms and Somatoform Disorders
    Conclusion
    References
    3: Diagnostic Investigations in GERD
    Introduction
    Diagnostic Investigations
    Endoscopy
    Radiographic Investigations
    Impedance-pH Monitoring
    High-Resolution Manometry (HRM)
    Conclusion
    References
    4: Medical Therapy of GERD
    Introduction
    Lifestyle Intervention in GERD
    Medical Therapy
    Safety of PPI Therapy
    Problems with PPI Therapy
    References
    5: Indications for Interventional and Surgical Therapy in GERD Basic Considerations for Alternative Options to Medical Therapy
    Indication for Antireflux Surgery
    Indications for Antireflux Surgery in Special Circumstances
    Indication for Surgery in the Elderly
    Indication for Antireflux Surgery in Patients with NERD (Nonerosive Reflux Disease)
    Indication for Antireflux Surgery in Patients with Extra-Esophageal Symptoms
    Indication for Antireflux Surgery in Patients with Delayed Gastric Emptying
    References
    6: Endoscopic Therapy for GERD
    Introduction
    Indications and Contraindications
    Technical Aspects of Currently Available EART Endoscopic Full-Thickness Plication
    Radiofrequency Ablation
    Endoscopic Mucosa Resection
    Clinical Evidence for EART
    Endoscopic Fundoplication
    Radiofrequency Ablation
    Endoscopic Mucosa Resection
    Complications
    Summary
    References
    7: Surgical Management of Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease
    Indications
    Preoperative Evaluation
    Operative Procedures
    Nissen Fundoplication
    Partial Fundoplication
    Belsey Mark IV Fundoplication
    Magnetic Sphincter Augmentation
    Endoscopic Methods
    Gastric Bypass
    Comparative Outcomes
    Conclusion
    References 8: The Nissen Fundoplication
    Introduction
    The Principle of Action of a Nissen Fundoplication
    Operative Technique
    Special Issues
    Results of Laparoscopic Nissen Fundoplication
    Conclusion
    References
    9: The Posterior Partial Toupet Hemifundoplication
    Introduction
    Operative Technique
    Special Issues About the Partial Fundoplication
    Results of Partial Toupet Hemifundoplication
    Conclusion
    References
    10: Controversies Regarding Mesh Implantation for Hiatal Reinforcement in GERD and Hiatal Hernia Surgery
    Introduction
    Basic Pathophysiology of Hiatal Hernias
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Carlo Trombetta, Giovanni Liguori, Michele Bertolotto, editors.
    Summary: This book is especially focused on the surgical aspect on Gender Dysphoria. Male to female surgery is widely discussed as well as the female to male conversion. Full information on hormone administration and surgical procedures are provided. Mental health issues are also described, as well as ethics, the law and psychosocial issues. The text is extensively referenced and includes numerous photos, tables and figures to clearly illustrate information. Based on collaboration between international experts in transgender health, this book is an essential guide for health care professionals, educators, students, patients and patients? families concerning the psychological, hormonal, surgical and social support of transgender individuals.

    Contents:
    Part I General Aspects: Sexual Ambiguity: Development Of Judgement And Evaluation Criteria Over The Centuries
    Gender dysphoria: definition and evolution through the years
    The DSM Diagnostic Criteria For Gender Dysphoria
    Epidemiologic Considerations On Transsexualism
    Etiopathogenetic Hypotheses Of Transsexualism
    Imaging: Examination Technique
    Clinical Management Of Gender Dysphoria In Adolescents
    Part II Management of Male to Female: Psychological Characteristics And Sexuality Of Natal Males With Gender Dysphoria
    Endocrine Treatment Of Transsexual Male To Female Persons
    Surgical Therapy: My Personal Technique
    Surgical Therapy: Vaginoplasty In Male Transsexuals Using Penile Skin And Urethral Flap
    Surgical Therapy: Construction Of The Neovagina Using The Pelvic Peritoneum
    Surgical Therapy: Technical Suggestions For Better And Lasting Functional And Aesthetic Outcomes In Manufacturing The Neoclitoris
    Surgical Therapy: Feminization Laryngoplasty
    Surgical Therapy: Mastoplasty
    Complications Of Male To Female Vaginoplasty
    Surgery In Complications: Colon Vaginoplasty
    Surgery In Complications: Ileal Vaginoplasty
    Surgery In Complications: Management Of Prolapse
    Evaluation Of Lower Urinary Tract Function After Surgery
    Follow Up Of Patients After Male To Female (Mtf) Sex Reassignment Surgery (Srs)
    Quality Of Life After Sexual Reassignment Surgery
    Imaging
    Part III Management Of Female To Male: The Hot Questions In Prepubertal Gender Dysphoria In Girls
    The Female-To-Male Medical Treatment
    Surgical Therapy: Pedicle Anterolateral Thigh Flap
    Surgical Therapy: Free Forearm Flap
    Surgical Therapy: Metoidioplasty Technique And Results
    Surgical Therapy: Phalloplasthy With Suprapubic Flap-Pryor?s Technique
    Surgical Therapy: Total Phalloplasty Using Latissimus Dorsi Flap
    Surgical Therapy: Chest Wall Contouring For Female-To-Male Transsexuals
    Surgical Therapy: Possible One Step Solutions
    Surgical Therapy: Scrotal Reconstruction In Female-To-Male Transsexuals
    Complications
    Penile Prosthesis Implantation In Phalloplasty In Female To Male Transsexuals
    Imaging
    Part IV Legislative, Ethical And Health Policy Aspects: Ethical Issues For The Practitioner Work In The Transgender Care
    Transgender Identity And Sexually Transmitted Diseases Including HIV
    Answers To Fertility Request.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Sanjiv C. Nair, Srinivasa R. Chandra, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a simple, step-by-step guide to the identification and sequential management of vascular lesions in the body. Since most vascular lesions occur in the head and neck area, the surgical interventions present challenges with regard to facial growth, airway management and reconstruction options. This book explores the treatment of head and neck vascular malformations and tumors from the perspectives of various specialties, such as otolaryngology, and pediatric, maxillofacial and plastic surgery. It covers surgical anatomy, pathophysiology, molecular basis, medical treatment, current embolization guidelines and surgical resection and reconstruction options for each type of tumor. It also discusses interventional and diagnostic radiological techniques. Written by leading international specialists, the book is a valuable resource for craniofacial, pediatric, maxillofacial, head and neck, and plastic surgeons as well as pediatricians and otolaryngologists.

    Contents:
    Terminology and classifications of head and neck vascular lesions
    Pathophysiology and molecular diagnosis of head and neck vascular lesions
    History, presentation, evaluation, evolution and findings of head and neck vascular lesions
    Congenital lesions and syndromes associated with vascular lesions
    Radiological techniques for evaluation, diagnosis and management of head and neck vascular lesions
    Medical management of head and neck vascular lesions
    Pre-surgical interventions in head and neck vascular lesions
    Anatomical and surgical considerations in head and neck vascular lesions
    Vascular tumor management cases
    Surgical management of head and neck vascular lesions
    Reconstruction of head and neck vascular lesions
    Lasers and nonsurgical modalities for head and neck vascular lesions.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Baliga, R. R.; Haas, Garrie J.; Raman, Jai.
    Summary: This book is a comprehensive review for practitioners of all persuasions involved in the management of patients with heart failure. Heart failure is a problem of epidemic proportions in all parts of the world. State of the art treatment may not be accessible to all, but simply creating an awareness of simple methods of diagnosis and treatment would assist in promoting a better global response to this epidemic. This revised edition, written by a panel of world-renown cardiology experts, focuses on the medical management of heart failure and outlines the causes, etiopathology and mechanisms in such a way that most health care professionals can grasp the concepts. The book details the common investigations, clinical profiles and therapeutic paths required of all clinicians with these patients under their care. Management of Heart Failure - Volume 1: Medical will be essential reading for all specialists dealing with patients with or who are at risk of heart failure, including but not limited to cardiologists, emergency medicine physicians, critical care physicians, interventionalists, physician assistants, nurse practitioners, advanced practice nurses and cardiac surgeons. Volume 2: Surgical will be essential reading for all specialists dealing with patients with or who are at risk of heart failure, including but not limited to cardiologists, emergency medicine physicians, critical care physicians, anesthesiologists, interventionalists and cardiothoracic surgeons.

    Contents:
    v. 1. Medical / edited by Ragavendra R. Baliga, Garrie J Jaas
    v. 2 Surgical / edited by Jai Raman.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Springer
    Springer
  • Digital
    Ulrich Wedding, Riccardo A. Audisio, editors.
    Summary: This book focuses on the management of hematological cancer and provides guidance on the management issues specific to older patients, spanning background and epidemiology, special considerations in the management of older people, therapeutics and psychosocial considerations. Management of Hematological Cancers in Older People aims to provide an up-to-date review of the literature in each of the major areas relating to the management of older hematological cancer patients, and makes recommendations for best practice and future research. The authors come from a broad geographic spread including the UK, mainland Europe and North America to ensure a worldwide relevance. Management of Hematological Cancers in Older People will appeal to surgical oncologists, medical oncologists and other members of the multidisciplinary team.

    Contents:
    1. Haematological Malignancies in the Elderly: The epidemiological Perspective
    2. Anemia, Fatigue & Aging
    3. Myelodysplastic Syndromes in Older Patients
    4. Acute Myeloid Leukemia
    5. Chronic myelogeneous leukemia
    6. Myeloproliferative Neoplasms
    7. Chronic Lymphocytic Leukemia
    8. Indolent Lymphomas in Older Patients
    9. Mantel Cell Lymphoma
    10. Hodgkin Lymphoma in the Elderly
    11. Diffuse large B-Cell Non-Hodgkin ́s lymphoma (DLBCL- NHL)
    12. Multiple Myeloma
    13. Geriatric Assessment
    14. Nursing Issues
    15. General considerations on treatment in older patients with haematological malignancies
    16. General Consideration on Radiotherapy in older patients with haematological malignancies
    17. Supportive Care in older patients with haematological malignancies
    18. Patients reported outcome / Quality of life
    19. Palliative care issues.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Jose G. Guillem, Garrett Friedman.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive review of the clinical management of hereditary colorectal cancer. The text focuses on six distinct patient groups: patients with elderly age-of-onset colorectal cancer and adenomas, patients with hamartomatous colorectal polyps, patients afflicted with familial adenomatous polyposis (FAP), patients with attenuated familial adenomatous polyposis (AFAP), patients with MYH associated polyposis (MAP), and patients afflicted with lynch syndrome (LS). Each chapter illustrates how clinicians utilize current technologies in genetic testing, pathological review, and endoscopic, surgical, and chemotherapeutic/immunotherapeutic approaches to manage these patient groups. Topics such as the timing of genetic testing, endoscopic screening and surveillance, prophylactic surgical options and chemo-preventive interventions are also discussed in concise yet precise detail. Written by experts in their fields, Management of Hereditary Colorectal Cancer: A Multidisciplinary Approach is a valuable and timely resource for gastroenterologists, surgeons, genetic counselors, medical oncologists, psychologists, and any health caregivers involved with the management of patients and families afflicted with a hereditary form of colorectal cancer. .

    Contents:
    Early Age-of-Onset Colorectal Carcinoma: An Emerging Public Health Issue
    Management of Hamartomatous Polyps
    Familial Adenomatous Polyposis: Prophylactic Management of the Colon and Rectum
    Familial Adenomatous Polyposis Surveillance Post IPAA or IRA
    Familial Adenomatous Polyposis: Management of Upper Gastrointestinal Polyps
    Desmoids in Familial Adenomatous Polyposis
    Hepatoblastoma in Infants Born to Parents with Familial Adenomatous Polyposis
    MYH-Associated Polyposis: Manifestations, Management and Surveillance of the Colorectum
    Lynch Syndrome: Management of the Colon- What Operation?
    Lynch Syndrome: Management of Rectum- What Operation?.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Kshipra Misra, Priyanka Sharma, Anuja Bhardwaj.
    Summary: Management of High Altitude Pathophysiology presents a comprehensive overview on the various therapeutic practices and ongoing research relating to the development of more potent and novel formulations for managing high altitude pathophysiology. It provides a detailed application of both herbal and non-herbal therapeutic agents, including their nanoformulations. This important reference provides benefits to the medical and herbal scientific communities, doctors treating patients with high altitude complications, individuals travelling to high altitudes for recreation or work, and scientists working on future drug development.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Brahm H. Segal, editor.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive, state-of-the-art review of the concepts vital to a modern treatment of common and opportunistic infections in the immunocompromised host. Chapters are written by experts in the field, and include their views on gaps in the field and future directions of research. This book begins with an overview of the normally functioning immune system followed by a detailed discussion of the major primary immunodeficiencies. Specific chapters are dedicated to providing practical knowledge in the prevention and treatment of infections in specific immunocompromised patients, including those with cancer, transplant recipients, HIV infection, and autoimmune disorders. Emphasis is placed on diagnostic evaluation, antimicrobial selection that includes consideration of the threat of antimicrobial-resistant pathogens, and immunotherapy tailored to specific patients. Finally, dedicated chapters on stem cell transplantation for patients with primary immunodeficiencies, adoptive cellular immunotherapy, and gene therapy will provide readers with insight into these rapidly evolving and cutting edge therapies. Management of Infections in the Immunocompromised Host is a valuable resource for infectious diseases specialists, immunologists, oncologists, hematologists, general physicians, students, researchers, and all other working with immunocompromised patients.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Bertrand Richert, Nilton Di Chiacchio, Marie Caucanas, Nilton Gioia Di Chiacchio.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Joseph D. Feuerstein, Adam S. Cheifetz, editors.
    Summary: This handbook provides a concise, state-of-the-art overview on the management of inflammatory bowel disease (IBD) in the hospitalized patient. The book reviews epidemiology and risk factors for hospitalization in patients with ulcerative colitis (UC) and Crohns disease, as well as medical and surgical management strategies for patients hospitalized with UC or Crohn's disease. The book also highlights complex disease management cases involving co-infection from clostridium difficile and/or CMV. The volume also spotlights nutrition management, quality of care, and management of pediatric and pregnant patients hospitalized with IBD flares.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology and risk factors for hospitalization in patients with ulcerative colitis and Crohns disease
    Routine management of hospitalized patients with ulcerative colitis
    Management of hospitalized patients with ulcerative colitis refractory to corticosteroids
    Surgical management of hospitalized patients with ulcerative colitis
    Management of hospitalized patients with inflammatory and structuring Crohns disease
    Management of hospitalized patients with Crohns related abscess
    Surgical management of hospitalized patients with Crohns disease
    Management of hospitalized patients with inflammatory bowel disease and CMV infection or Clostridium Difficile infection
    Nutrition management in patients hospitalized with inflammatory bowel disease
    Quality of care in the management of hospitalized patients with inflammatory bowel disease
    Management of pediatric patients hospitalized with ulcerative colitis
    Management of pediatric patients hospitalized with Crohns disease
    Management of pregnant women hospitalized with a flare of inflammatory bowel disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    David A. Parker, editor.
    Summary: This book is a rich source of practical guidance on the management of relatively young patients with osteoarthritis of the knee that will assist physicians and allied health professionals in enabling patients to remain active and sustain their quality of life. It provides up-to-date knowledge on the available treatment options, describes the evidence base for each option, and identifies the appropriate timing and indications. The book opens by considering the basic science behind osteoarthritis, which is critical to management. The many nonsurgical treatment modalities are then discussed, with particular focus on the importance of a multidisciplinary approach. Subsequent chapters address the role of surgical management, covering both techniques that attempt to preserve and possibly restore the native knee joint, such as meniscal and chondral surgery, arthroscopic debridement, and osteotomy for realignment of the joint, and those that involve joint replacement. The arthroplasty component of the text encompasses all areas of prosthetic resurfacing, including localized resurfacing, unicompartmental replacement, and total knee replacement. The book has been produced in cooperation with ISAKOS and the authors constitute an international faculty who provide a truly global perspective on the subject.

    Contents:
    Introduction, and Nonoperative Management: Osteoarthritis
    Definition, Aetiology & Natural History
    Nonsurgical Management of Osteoarthritis. Surgical Management: Meniscus Surgery
    Arthroscopic Debridement in the Presence of Osteoarthritis
    Cartilage Preservation & Restoration
    Osteotomy around the knee
    Unicompartmental Knee Arthroplasty
    Total Knee Arthroplasty
    New and Evolving Surgical Techniques
    Conclusions and Future Directions.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Susan Tsai, Paul S. Ritch, Beth A. Erickson, Douglas B. Evans, editors.
    Summary: This book is designed to present a comprehensive understanding for the rationale of neoadjuvant treatment sequencing for localized pancreatic cancer and to focus on accurate clinical staging and stage-specific treatment sequencing. Sections address important aspects of clinical management of localized pancreatic cancer from diagnosis to surgery. These areas include initial radiographic staging, management of obstructive jaundice, role of chemotherapy and chemoradiation in neoadjuvant therapy, assessment of treatment response, and operative considerations for complex vascular resections. A brief review of suggested readings addressing the particular topic follows in each section, as well as a summary of clinical "pearls". Management of Localized Pancreatic Cancer: Current Treatment and Challenges provides a comprehensive resource which clearly defines the principles of neoadjuvant therapy as well as a clinical framework for successful therapy. It serves as a valuable guide to physicians of multiple disciplines who are interested in utilizing neoadjuvant therapy for localized pancreatic cancer.

    Contents:
    The Future of Multidisciplinary Care in Pancreatic Cancer
    Clinical Staging of Pancreatic Adenocarcinoma with MDCT and MRI
    Coordination of Endoscopic Ultrasound-Guided FNA and Biliary Drainage in Pancreatic Cancer
    Importance of Carbohydrate Antigen 19-9 Monitoring in the Management of Pancreatic Cancer
    Treatment Sequencing for Resectable Disease
    Treatment Sequencing for Borderline Resectable Pancreatic Cancer
    Delivery of Neoadjuvant versus Adjuvant Therapy in Localized Pancreatic Cancer
    Neoadjuvant Therapy for Pancreatic Adenocarcinoma
    New Classification of Locally Advanced Pancreatic Cancer
    Treatment Sequencing for Locally Advanced Pancreatic Cancer
    Role of Radiation for Locally Advanced Pancreatic Cancer
    Molecular Profiling in Pancreatic Ductal Adenocarcinoma
    Genetic Counseling for Pancreatic Cancer
    Medical Nutrition Therapy throughout the Continuum of Care for Localized Pancreatic Cancer
    Role of 18F-fluorodeoxyglucose Positron Emission Tomography (FDG-PET) in the Management of Pancreatic Cancer
    The New Bench for the Academic Surgeon: Precision Medicine.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    editors, Jasmine Zain, Larry W Kwak ; contributors Michelle Afkhami [and 16 others].
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Lars-Olof Hattenbach, editor.
    Summary: Sub- or preretinal hemorrhage involving the macula is a typical complication in a variety of ocular diseases, including age-related macular degeneration, arterial macroaneurysm, Valsalva retinopathy, and trauma. However, there is currently no consensus regarding the ideal treatment for macular hemorrhage. The purpose of this book on macular hemorrhage is twofold: it aims both to impart valuable information on pathophysiology, risk factors, diagnostic aspects, and prognostic criteria under different conditions and to provide a systematic overview of therapeutic approaches that cover the most important situations a vitreoretinal surgeon might encounter when treating patients with this disorder. Case presentations, clinical photographs, and an extensive review of the literature supplement the important information on clinical decision making, surgical techniques, and typical pitfalls and invite the reader to explore the advantages and disadvantages of various approaches to the management of macular hemorrhage.

    Contents:
    Types of Macular Hemorrhages and Clinical Appearance
    Macular Hemorrhage: Natural Course and Risk Factors
    Classification of Subretinal Hemorrhage
    The Pathophysiology of Subretinal Hemorrhage
    Anti-VEGF and Fibrinolytic Agents for the Management of Subretinal Hemorrhage
    Minimally Invasive Surgical Approaches to the Management of Macular Hemorrhages
    Surgical Treatment of Massive Subretinal Hemorrhage
    Macular Translocation in Submacular Hemorrhage Secondary to Age-Related Macular Degeneration
    Retinal Pigment Epithelium and Choroid Translocation in Massive Submacular Hemorrhage.-Surgical and Nonsurgical Treatment of Pre-Retinal Hemorrhages
    Management of Trauma Associated Macular Hemorrhages.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Eric J. Strauss, Laith M. Jazrawi, editors.
    Springer Nature eBook.
    Summary: While the management of meniscal pathology is addressed in many large sports medicine textbooks, this dedicated book on the topic is a major addition to the information currently available for orthopedic surgeons and sports medicine specialists, residents and fellows. As symptomatic meniscal tears remain among the most common musculoskeletal problems that are seen and treated, this up-to-date book on the evaluation and management of meniscal pathology, focused on current techniques and available evidence in the literature, is therefore extremely useful. To that end, The Management of Meniscal Pathology: From Meniscectomy to Repair and Transplantation is a comprehensive resource reviewing all aspects of managing symptomatic meniscal pathology. It is structured to proceed logically through an understanding of the anatomy and biomechanical importance of the meniscus in normal knee kinematics to the evaluation and treatment of meniscal tears and meniscal insufficiency. The chapters dedicated to the surgical management of meniscal pathology - including partial meniscectomy, meniscus repair, meniscal root repair and meniscal allograft transplantation - include step-by-step descriptions of various operative techniques, including pearls and pitfalls for the reader in addition to classic case examples. Non-operative approaches, as well as novel and emerging strategies and materials, are also highlighted, providing a well-rounded presentation of available techniques and outcomes.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Contributors
    1: Anatomy and Function
    Introduction
    History in Surgery
    Structure and Histology
    Embryology
    Gross Anatomy
    Tibial Insertion Ligaments
    Intermeniscal Ligament
    Meniscofemoral Ligaments
    Vasculature
    Function
    Summary
    References
    2: Epidemiology and Classification
    Epidemiology
    Classification
    Traumatic Tears
    Longitudinal Tear
    Radial Tear
    Root Tear
    Bucket Handle Tear
    Degenerative Tears
    Horizontal Tear
    Complex Tears
    Oblique
    Displaced
    Pediatric Tears
    Discoid
    Conclusion Vertical/Longitudinal Tears
    Radial Tears
    Horizontal Tears
    Complex Tears
    Meniscal Root Tears
    Displaced Meniscal Fragments/Flap Tears
    Bucket-Handle Tear
    Parameniscal Cyst
    Meniscal Extrusion
    Meniscocapsular Separation
    References
    4: Nonoperative Treatment of Meniscus Tears
    Introduction
    Function
    Mechanism of Meniscal Tears
    Nonoperative Treatment and Outcomes
    Summary of RCT Studies
    Corticosteroid Injections
    Orthobiologics
    Conclusion
    References
    5: Management of Meniscal Injuries: Resection to Repair
    Background Anatomy, Function, and Diagnosis
    Treatment
    Conservative Management
    Arthroscopic Partial Meniscectomy (APM)
    Technique
    Rehabilitation Following APM
    Return to Activity
    Indications and Outcomes of APM
    Age/Preoperative OA
    Total Versus Partial Meniscectomy
    Laterality
    Body Mass Index
    Degenerative Versus Nondegenerative Tears
    Radiographic Progression of OA
    Discussion
    Summary
    References
    6: Meniscus Repair
    Indications for Meniscal Repair
    Meniscus Repair Techniques
    Outcomes of Meniscal Repair
    Biologic Augmentation of Repair Rehab After Meniscal Repair
    Conclusions
    References
    7: Meniscal Root Repair
    Introduction
    Anatomy
    Medial Meniscus
    Lateral Meniscus
    Biomechanics
    Mechanism of Injury
    History and Physical Exam
    Imaging
    Classification
    Management Options
    Nonoperative Management
    Operative Management
    Medial Meniscus Root Repair Surgical Technique
    Lateral Meniscus Root Repair
    Postoperative Protocol
    Summary
    References
    8: Understanding and Treating the Discoid Meniscus
    Introduction
    Epidemiology
    Pathoanatomy and Histopathology
    Classification
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Sanchia S. Goonewardene, Karen Ventii, Amit Bahl, Raj Persad, Hanif Motiwala, David Albala.
    Summary: This book provides a systematic review of the management and treatment of this disease. The concise and highly structured chapters feature essential background knowledge and commentary on recent advances within each step of a range of patient pathways. Management of Muscle Invasive Bladder Cancer provides a framework for patients' care based on the research, as well as practically and clinically oriented guidelines. This book is relevant to trainees and practicing urologists and oncologists, in addition to medical professionals involved in the treatment of bladder cancer.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction to muscle invasive bladder cancer
    2. Epidemiology and risk factors in muscle invasive bladder cancer
    3. The molecular basis of muscle invasive bladder cancer
    4. Histological variants in MIBC
    squamous cell and squamous differentiation
    5. Histological variants in muscle invasive bladder cancer - adenocarcinoma
    6. Histological variants in muscle invasive bladder Cancer
    sarcomatoid cancer
    7. MIBC Carcinosarcoma
    8. Muscle invasive bladder cancer- small cell
    9. MIBC plasmacytoid
    10. MIBC and micropapillary bladder cancer
    11. MIBC bladder cancer assessment and diagnosis
    12. A systematic review on blue light cystoscopy in bladder cancer diagnostics
    13. A systematic review on the staging conundrum in bladder cancer
    14. Current state of investigations and limitations in muscle invasive bladder cancer
    15. Risk stratification in bladder cancer
    16. Preventative measures for those with high risk MIBC
    17. Bladder cancer risk post pelvic irradiation
    18. A systematic review on bladder preservation strategies and MIBC
    19. Partial cystectomy
    20. Muscle invasive bladder cancer and neoadjuvant chemotherapy
    21. Controversies in clinical effectiveness of neoadjuvant chemotherapy
    22. Trimodal therapy in bladder cancer
    23. Systematic review on trimodal therapy in bladder cancer
    24. Trimodal therapy
    a systematic review
    25. Reviews related to trimodal therapy for MIBC
    26. Radical cystectomy lap open robotic
    27. Prostate sparing cystectomy
    a systematic review
    28. A systematic review on nerve sparing cystoprostatectomy
    29. MIBC
    orthotopic vs ileal conduit
    30. MIBC
    a systematic review on orthotopic neobladder vs. ileal conduit
    31. MIBC and radical cystectomy in the elderly
    32. MIBC radical radiotherapy
    33. MIBC
    quality of life with urinary diversion
    34. Neoadjuvant chemotherapy for muscle invasive bladder cancer
    35. Muscle invasive bladder cancer and the staging conundrum
    36. Radical cystectomy outcomes
    37. Muscle Invasive bladder cancer and neoadjuvant chemotherapy
    38. Muscle invasive bladder cancer and the staging conundrum
    39. Physical pre-habilitation prior to radical cystectomy
    40. Exercise therapy pre surgery
    41. Patient fitness for surgery
    42. CPEX testing prior to major urological surgery
    43. Cardio-pulmonary exercise testing and major urological surgery
    44. Robotic radical cystectomy and enhanced recovery
    45. The robotic approach to redo surgery
    46. Robotic cystectomy and intracorporeal neobladder formation
    47. Secondary pelvic malignancies and bladder cancer
    48. Organ sparing cystectomy
    49. Robotic radical cystectomy
    50. Robotic cystectomy and intracorporeal stoma formation
    51. Orthotopic neobladders vs. ileal conduits
    52. The role of enhanced recovery in robotic cystectomy
    53. Robotic radical cystectomy and lymph node dissection
    54. Robotic cystectomy and sentinel node mapping
    55. Robotic radical cystectomy and intracorporeal stoma formation
    56. Lap vs open vs robotic cystectomy
    57. A systematic review on obesity in bladder cancer
    58. Systematic review results on obesity in bladder cancer
    59. Reviews on BMI and bladder cancer
    60. Survivorship Issues in muscle invasive bladder cancer
    61. Muscle invasive bladder cancer and health related quality of life
    62. Body image in bladder cancer
    63. The rationale for neoadjuvant chemotherapy
    64. Support for partners in bladder cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Wade R. Smith, Philip F. Stahel, editors.
    Summary: Management of Musculoskeletal Injuries in the Trauma Patient summarizes the most current concepts and clinical practices for the management of the patient with musculoskeletal traumatic injuries. The text covers optimal time frames for stabilization of orthopedic injuries and strategies to mitigate systemic injury while minimizing damage due to pelvic, spine and long bone trauma. The volume covers the gamut of traumatic axial and extremity injuries, including cervico-lumbar-thoracic spine injuries, spinal cord injuries, long bone fractures with special emphasis on the femoral shaft, pelvic and acetabular injuries, open fractures, mangled extremities, upper extremity injuries, combination and severe soft tissues injuries and periarticular fractures. These are discussed in the context of isolated injury and combined with orthopedic injuries of the brain, abdomen, chest and other musculoskeletal injuries. Written by internationally recognized experts, Management of Musculoskeletal Injuries in the Trauma Patient is a valuable resource for orthopedic surgeons.

    Contents:
    Musculoskeletal Injury
    Perioperative Management
    The Pediatric Patient
    Management of Injuries in the Geriatric Trauma Patient
    The Multiply Injured Patient
    Femur Fractures
    Pelvic Fractures
    Spine Fractures
    Open Fractures and Limb Salvage
    Compartment Syndrome
    Closed Fractures and Dislocations
    Shock and Coagulopathy
    Closed Head Injury
    Chest Trauma and Lung Contusions
    Abdominal Compartment Syndrome and the Open Abdomen
    Epilogue.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Eric Raymond, Sandrine Faivre, Philippe Ruszniewski editors.
    Summary: This book pursues a multidisciplinary approach, presenting chapters with updated information on various aspects of treatment for patients with neuroendocrine tumors. Authors have been selected from expert centers in Europe and the United States. The goal of this book is to comprehensively summarize recent data and provide inspiring ideas to optimize the care of patients with neuroendocrine tumors. Neuroendocrine tumors are fascinating multifaceted diseases that can primarily localize in many organs with various presentations. These tumors are rare but their increasing incidence renders likely that physicians caring for cancers may have either already faced or may be certainly exposed to diagnose and/or treat a patient with neuroendocrine tumors. Over the last years, novel therapeutic options have emerged for neuroendocrine tumors, profoundly challenging practices that had previously been the standards for decades. These include - but are not limited to - somatostatin analogues, targeted therapies such as tyrosine kinase and mTOR inhibitors, antiangiogenic compounds, but also peptide-receptor targeted therapy or radioembolization. This changing field has generated novel treatment algorithms to guide medical decisions. To better understand and handle the multidisciplinary approaches that are required for optimizing the care of neuroendocrine tumor patients, physicians are now looking for references from experts and comprehensive reviews summarizing current knowledge on treatments for patients with neuroendocrine tumors.

    Contents:
    Scintigraphy in Endocrine Tumors of the Gut
    Profiling the PI3K/Akt/Mtor Intracellular Pathway in Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Relevance of Angiogenesis in Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Advances with Somatostatin Analogues in Neuroendocrine Tumors: The Promise of Radionuclides in Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Streptozotocin-Based Chemotherapy is not History in Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Place of Surgical Resection in the Treatment Strategy in Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Endoscopic Resection of Gastrointestinal Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Liver-Targeting Therapies in Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Inhibition of Mtor in Neuroendocrine Tumors of the Digestive Tract
    Sunitinib in Pancreatic Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Clinical Management of Targeted Therapies in Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Imaging Tumor Response to Angiogenesis Inhibitors in Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Resistance to Targeted Therapies in Neuroendocrine Tumors
    New Anticancer Agents in Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Management of Symptoms and Patient Related Outcome Optimization in Neuroendocrine Tumors of the Digestive Tract
    Clinical Approaches of Emergencies in NET.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Sanchia S. Goonewardene, Raj Persad, Hanif Motiwala, David Albala.
    Summary: This book covers the latest advances in non-muscle invasive bladder cancer care. It provides a review of the available evidence base for the efficacy of a range of therapeutic techniques, diagnostic procedures and risk factors. Management of Non-Muscle Invasive Bladder Cancer features detailed guidance in uniformly formatted chapters on how to properly apply a range of available therapeutic treatments relevant for patient care. It is a valuable resource for all trainee and practising medical professionals who treat these patients.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Acknowledgements; Contents; About the Authors; Part I Background and Pathology on Bladder Cancer; 1 Background on Bladder Cancer; References; 2 Introduction to Bladder Cancer Type and Therapy; References; Part II Histological Variants in Bladder Cancer; 3 Histological Variants in Bladder Cancer-Sqaumous Cell Carcinoma and Squamous Differentiation; References; 4 Histological Variants in Bladder Cancer-Adenocarcinoma; 4.1 Histopathology of Bladder Adenocarcinoma; 4.2 Survival Outcomes in Adenocarcinoma of the Urinary Bladder 4.3 Surgical Management of Adenocarcinoma of the Bladder4.4 Urachal Adenocarcinoma-Surgical Management; 4.5 Chemotherapy in Metastatic Adenocarcinoma of the Bladder; References; 5 Histological Variants in Bladder Cancer-Sarcomatoid Differentiation; 5.1 Histopathology of Sarcomatoid Bladder Tumours; 5.2 Management in Paediatric Cases; 5.3 Clinical Presentation, Biphasic, Monophasic Components of Sarcomatoid Bladder Cancer; 5.4 Surgical Management of Sarcomatoid Differentiation of Bladder Cancer; 5.5 Survival Outcomes in Sarcomatoid Differentiation of Bladder Cancer; References 6 Histological Variants in Bladder Cancer-Carcinosarcoma6.1 Histopathology of Carcinosarcoma of the Bladder; 6.2 Clinical Presentation of Carcinosarcoma of the Bladder; 6.3 Surgical Management of Carcinoma of the Bladder; 6.4 Survival Outcomes and Prognosis in Carcinosarcoma of the Bladder; References; 7 Histological Variants in Bladder Cancer-Small Cell Carcinoma; 7.1 Variant Histology in Bladder Cancer-Small Cell Incidence and Histopathology; 7.2 Histological Variants in Bladder Cancer-Small Cell Treatment; 7.3 Bladder Sparing in Small Cell Carcinoma 7.4 Histological Variants in Bladder Cancer-Small Cell Survival Outcomes7.5 Histological Variants in Small Cell Carcinoma of the Urinary Bladder-Radiotherapy; 7.6 Cranial Irradiation in Small Cell Bladder Cancer; References; 8 Histological Variants-Plasmacytoid Bladder Cancer; 8.1 Diagnostics in Plasmacytoid Bladder Cancer; 8.2 Histological Variants-Clinical Presentation of Plasmacytoid Bladder Cancer; 8.3 Histological Variants-Histopathology of Plasmacytoid Bladder Cancer; 8.4 Histological Variants-Surgical Management of Plasmacytoid Bladder Cancer 8.5 Metastatic Spread of Plasmacytoid Bladder Cancer8.6 Surgical and Adjuvant Management in Plasmacytoid Bladder Cancer; 8.7 Prognosis in Plasmacytoid Bladder Cancer; 8.8 Metastatic Pattern of Spread-Plasmacytoid Bladder Cancer; 8.9 Systematic Chemotherapy in Plasmacytoid Bladder Cancer; References; Part III Epidemiology and Risk Factors in Bladder Cancer; 9 Introduction to Epidemiology of Bladder Cancer; 9.1 Smoking; 9.2 Occupational Exposure; 9.3 Age and Gender Related Disease; References; 10 Epidemiology, Risk Factors and Occupational Hazards-A Systematic Review; References
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Aparna Govil Bhasker, Nimisha Kantharia, Sarfaraz Baig, Pallawi Priya, Mariam Lakdawala, Miloni Shah Sanchet, editors.
    Summary: This book covers the management of various metabolic, nutritional and hormonal complications that arise after bariatric surgery. Until now bariatric surgeons have focused on mastering the surgical technique and reducing surgical complications. A number of metabolic and nutritional complications in the post-surgical phase can remain undiagnosed or unreported with a potential for irreversible morbidity. The book is edited by a team of experienced surgeons and bariatric nutritionists to provide a balanced perspective on the subject. It includes chapters on the prevention and subsequent diagnosis and management of these complications early in the course and explaining each complication with one or more suitable case reports. This book is relevant for practicing as well as aspiring bariatric surgeons, nutritionists/dieticians and bariatric physicians.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Foreword
    Preface
    Contents
    1: The Disease That Is Obesity
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 The Epidemiology of Obesity in 2019
    1.3 Causes of Obesity
    1.4 Consequences of Obesity
    1.5 Discussion
    1.6 Conclusion
    References
    2: Associated Co-morbid Conditions of Clinically Severe Obesity
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Impaired Glucose Tolerance and Diabetes Mellitus
    2.3 Hypertension
    2.4 Heart Disease
    2.5 Dyslipidemia
    2.6 Cerebrovascular Disease
    2.7 Metabolic Syndrome
    2.8 Pulmonary Diseases
    2.9 Gastrointestinal Diseases 2.10 Reproductive Disease
    2.11 Psychosocial and Psychiatric Problems
    2.12 Osteoarthritis
    2.13 Cancer
    2.14 Conclusions
    References
    3: Pre-existing Nutritional Deficiencies Associated with Obesity
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Obesity: A State of Malnutrition
    3.3 Causes of Nutritional Deficiencies in Individuals Suffering from Obesity
    3.4 An Overview on Physiology of Various Nutrients in the Body
    3.4.1 Iron
    3.5 Calcium and Vitamin D
    3.6 Water Soluble: B-Vitamins
    3.7 Fat-Soluble Vitamins: Vitamin A, E and K
    3.8 Zinc 3.9 Management of Pre-operative Nutritional Deficiencies
    3.10 Conclusion
    References
    4: Bariatric Procedures: Anatomical and Physiological Changes
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Anatomical Changes of Procedures Without Small Bowel Diversion
    4.2.1 Laparoscopic Adjustable Gastric Band
    4.2.2 Laparoscopic Sleeve Gastrectomy
    4.3 Anatomical Changes in Procedures with Small Bowel Diversion
    4.3.1 Roux-en-Y Gastric Bypass
    4.3.2 One-Anastomosis Gastric Bypass
    4.3.3 Biliopancreatic Diversion with Duodenal Switch 4.4 Physiological Changes on GI Tract After Bariatric Procedures
    4.5 Food Intake
    4.6 Gastric Emptying: Digestive Motility
    4.7 Digestion and Absorption
    4.8 Micronutrient Deficiencies
    4.9 Macronutrient Deficiencies
    4.10 Enterohormones
    4.11 Gut Microbiota
    4.12 Conclusion
    References
    5: Nutritional Deficiencies After Bariatric Surgery
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Mechanism of Deficiency
    5.3 Macronutrients
    5.4 Micronutrients
    5.5 Clinical Manifestation
    5.6 Lab Tests
    5.7 Supplementation
    5.8 Case Reports
    5.8.1 Case 1
    5.8.2 Case 2 7.7 Steatorrhoea and Pancreatic Exocrine Insufficiency.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Ki Beom Kim, Reza Movahed, Raman K. Malhotra, Jeffrey J. Stanley, editors.
    Springer Nature eBook.
    Summary: This book provides comprehensive information on the etiology, pathophysiology, medical implications, diagnosis, and surgical and nonsurgical treatment of obstructive sleep apnea (OSA). Divided into five parts, the book begins with principles and fundamentals of OSA and its diagnostic considerations. Subsequent parts then address non-surgical management, surgical management, and maxillomandibular advancements for OSA. Chapters seek to approach this common disorder from the viewpoint of multiple specialties, thereby promoting the development of a broad strategy for the evaluation and management of OSA patients that draws on each of them. An invaluable reference, Management of Obstructive Sleep Apnea: An Evidence-Based, Multidisciplinary Textbook meets the needs of advanced dental and medical students, orthodontic, maxillofacial, ENT, neurology, and plastic surgery residents, and sleep medicine and pulmonary physicians.

    Contents:
    Principles and Fundamentals: Introduction
    Anatomical Aspects of Airway
    Classification of Sleep-Related Breathing Disorders
    Pathophysiology of OSA
    Pediatric Sleep-Related Breathing Disorders
    Health Consequences of OSA
    Psychological Effect of OSA. Diagnostic Considerations: Clinical Evaluation of OSA Patients
    Temporomandibular Evaluation
    Obesity and OSA
    Diagnostic Testing (Polysomnography And Home Sleep Apnea Testing)
    Airway Imaging
    Craniofacial Morphology Related to OSA
    Craniofacial Syndromes And Sleep-Related Breathing Disorders
    Biomarkers Associated with OSA
    Orthodontic Considerations for OSA Patients. Non-Surgical Management of the OSA Patient: Conservative Options for Management for OSA
    Positive Airway Therapy (CPAP, APAP And BPAP)
    Oral Appliance Therapy
    Emerging Therapies. Surgical Management of the OSA Patient: Surgical Considerations for OSA Patients
    Tonsillectomy and Adenoidectomy
    Nasal Surgery for OSA Patients
    Uvulopalatopharyngoplasty and Laser-Assisted Uvulopalatoplasty
    Transpalatal Advancement Pharyngoplasty
    Radiofrequency Ablation
    Tongue and Hyoid Procedures
    Hypoglossal Nerve Stimulation
    Maxillomandibular Advancement
    Computational Fluid Dynamics in OSA
    Orthognathic Surgical Considerations in OSA Patients
    Individualized Orthodontic Treatment and Surgical Plan for Patients with OSA.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Micheal Tadros, George Y. Wu, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a concise, state-of-the-art overview of occult GI bleeding. The text reviews the epidemiology, screening and detection methods for localization, and prominent treatment strategies for occult GI bleeding. It also features a dedicated section on special patient populations including children, premenopausal women, older adults, and patients with other predisposing, and complicating medical conditions. This volume is supplemented with numerous color illustrations, photographs, and table, and is one of the few dedicated resources on occult GI bleeding. Written by experts in the field, Management of Occult GI Bleeding: A Clinical Guide is a valuable resource for clinicians, practitioners, and students who are involved in the treatment of patients with occult GI bleeding.

    Contents:
    An Introduction to the Clinical Approach and Management of Occult Gastrointestinal Bleeding
    Non-Invasive Office Screening Methods
    Endoscopic Detection
    Radiologic Detection
    Esophagus
    Etiologies of Occult Gastroduodenum Bleeding
    Occult Small Bowel Bleeding
    Occult Lower GI Bleeding
    Occult GI Bleeding: The Biliary-Pancreatic System
    Bipolar and Monopolar Cautery, Clips, Bands, Spray, Injections, Embolization, and Minimally Invasive Surgery
    Pediatrics
    Premenopausal Women
    Occult GI Bleeding: Considerations in Older Adults
    Gastrointestinal Bleeding in Native Cardiovascular Disease and Implantable Cardiac Devices
    NSAIDs/Anticoagulation
    Genetic Causes of Occult Gastrointestinal Bleeding.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Seanna Grob, Carolyn Kloek, editors.
    Summary: This book uses a unique case-based approach to review the intra-operative and peri-operative management of patients with severe ocular trauma and open globe injuries. The case- based structure of this text allows readers to easily reference the type of injury they are treating in order to assist with management of their patients and to recognize indications to involve other ophthalmic and surgical specialties in the management of patients with open globe injuries. Management of Open Globe Injuries will be an indispensable resource for ophthalmologists who are called upon to care for patients who have suffered open globe trauma.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Sudhir Bahadur, Subramania Iyer, editors.
    Summary: Tumor biology varies at different subsites in the oral cavity, and therefore carcinoma of the gingivo-buccal sulcus (also known as Indian cancer) behaves differently from carcinoma of the tongue. Oral cancer is very often diagnosed at an advanced stage with neck metastasis, and most cases have a guarded prognosis. Loco-regional recurrences are frequent and morbidity following treatment is considerable. However, results have improved in recent years, particularly in early and certain advanced stages, due to better imaging and case selection, improved surgical techniques, including those for reconstructive surgery, a multidisciplinary team approach and a better understanding of tumor biology and prognostic factors. This book comprehensively and systematically reviews all these aspects of diagnostic and therapeutic advances in oral cancer, particularly discussing early detection, epidemiology, chemoprevention and current research. Written by specialists who are active leaders in basic sciences or clinical fields, the chapters address individual and collective issues in managing patients with oral cancer, and provide insights into various treatment approaches. The authors share their knowledge and experience and provide extensive literature sources to encourage clinicians to be flexible, innovative and help them make the best, educated decisions for individual patients.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology of oral cancers
    Molecular biology of oral cancers
    Pathology, histology and precancerous oral lesions
    Surgical anatomy, mandible and tumor spread in oral cancers
    Tumors of oral cavity: Diagnosis, assessment and staging/treatment guidelines
    Tumors of gingivo-buccal sulcus
    Tumors of the tongue
    Management of neck metastasis in oral cancers
    Residual/Recurrent oral tumors
    Complications of surgery in oral cancers
    Reconstruction of soft tissue defects in oral cancers
    Reconstruction of mandible after oral cancer surgery
    Principles of radiotherapy in oral cancers
    Quality of life issues in oral cancers.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Hisham Marwan, Yoh Sawatari, Michael Peleg.
    Summary: This excellently illustrated book provides a thorough overview of the management of orbito-zygomaticomaxillary fractures, which can be complex since both function and facial form may be affected. Practical guidance is offered on all aspects, including clinical examination, CT assessment, surgical planning, surgical access and techniques, soft tissue management, intra- and postoperative assessment, and management of complications. In addition, important technological advancements in planning and treatment are described, including the use of navigation systems and 3D printing. Finally, the authors discuss strategies involving delayed surgical intervention and revision surgery for the malpositioned zygomatic maxillary complex. Management of Orbito-zygomaticomaxillary Fractures will be of value for oral and maxillofacial/craniomaxillofacial surgeons at all levels of experience.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    1: Zygomaticomaxillary Complex Anatomy
    2: Preoperative Assessment before Orbital-Zygomaticomaxillary Surgery
    2.1 Clinical Examination
    2.1.1 Assessment for Function
    2.1.2 Assessment for Facial Deformity
    2.1.2.1 Orbit and Ocular Structures
    2.1.2.2 Malar Area
    2.1.2.3 Zygomatic Arch
    2.2 Radiographic Examination
    2.2.1 Defining the OZM
    2.2.2 Displacement (Degree and Direction)
    2.2.3 Comminution
    2.2.4 Orbit
    3: Preoperative Surgical Planning
    3.1 Does the Patient Require Surgical Intervention? 3.2 Which Fractures Must Be Addressed?
    3.3 Does the Orbit Require Reconstruction?
    3.4 Which Access Type Will Be Necessary?
    3.5 Surgical Sequence
    4: Surgical Access to Orbital-Zygomaticomaxillary Fractures
    4.1 Intraoral Approach
    4.2 Periorbital Approaches
    4.2.1 Approaches to the ZF Suture
    4.2.1.1 Lateral Eyebrow
    4.2.1.2 Upper Blepharoplasty
    4.2.2 Approaches to the Floor/Inferior Orbital Rim
    4.2.2.1 Subciliary
    4.2.2.2 Midtarsal Approach (Subtarsal)
    4.2.2.3 Infraorbital Approach
    4.2.2.4 Transconjunctival Approach
    4.3 Preauricular Approach 4.4 Coronal Approach
    4.5 Gillies Approach
    Suggested Readings
    5: Fixation Techniques for Stabilizing Orbital-Zygomaticomaxillary Fracture
    6: Soft Tissue Management in Orbital-Zygomaticomaxillary Surgery
    6.1 Type of Soft Tissue Injuries
    6.2 Timing of Repair
    6.3 Management of Primary Periorbital Injuries
    6.4 Management of Primary Cheek Injuries
    6.5 Soft Tissue Management during the Surgical Approach
    6.5.1 Coronal Approach
    6.5.2 Lower Eyelid Approach
    Suggested Reading
    7: Intraoperative Evaluation during Orbital-Zygomaticomaxillary Surgery 8: Postoperative Assessment After Orbital-Zygomaticomaxillary Surgery
    8.1 Assessment
    8.1.1 Linear Measurements
    8.1.2 Angle Measurements
    8.1.3 Surface Area
    8.1.4 Volume
    8.1.5 Comparison of Preoperative and Postoperative 3D Reconstruction
    9: Complications Associated with Orbital-Zygomaticomaxillary Surgery
    9.1 The Failure to Achieve the Desired Outcome
    9.2 Iatrogenic Complications: Access-Related Complication
    9.3 Fixation Plate Exposure/Sensitivity
    9.4 Neurosensory Disturbances
    9.5 Alopecia from Coronal Incision
    9.6 Eyelid Malposition 10: New Advances in the Planning and Management of Orbital Zygomaticomaxillary Fractures
    10.1 In-House 3D Printing
    10.2 Intraoperative Computed Tomography
    Suggested Reading
    11: Management of Post-Traumatic Orbital Zygomaticomaxillary Deformities and Secondary Reconstruction
    11.1 Surgical Planning
    11.2 Osteotomy and Fixation Technique
    Suggested Reading
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Antonia Chen, MD, MBA, Director of research in Arthroplasty, Department of Orthopaedic Surgery, Brigham and Women's Hospital; Associate Professor of Orthopaedic Surgery Harvard Medical School, Boston, Massachusetts, USA.
    Summary: "Orthopaedic infections represent common, potentially devastating, and sometimes fatal complications that can occur after any surgery. Infections associated with orthopaedic trauma are especially prevalent, and there is an increasing incidence of bone infections linked to a greater number of joint arthroplasties being performed annually. Management of Orthopaedic Infections: A Practical Guide by renowned orthopaedic surgeon and researcher Antonia Chen is a practical clinical reference to assist clinicians in the diagnosis and treatment of challenging infections spanning the entire orthopaedic specialty"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Detection of Microbes in Orthopaedic Infections / Michael Henry, Andy O. Miller, and Barry D. Brause
    Antibiotics for Orthopaedic Infections / Alaina S. Ritter and Sandra B. Nelson
    Irrigation Solutions for Orthopaedic Infections / Michael Yayac, Samuel J. Clarkson, Craig Della Valle, and Javad Parvizi
    Surgical Wound Dressings after Treating Orthopaedic Infections / Patrick Moody and Bryan Springer
    Osteomyelitis / Martin McNally
    Treatment of the Septic Native Joint / Timothy L. Tan and Sommer Hammoud
    Management of Periprosthetic Joint Infection / Malcolm E. Dombrowski and Brian A. Klatt
    Infection after Fracture Fixation and Infected Nonunions / Arvind von Keudell and Michael J. Weaver
    Spine Infections / Caleb M. Yeung and Melvin C. Makhni
    Graft Infections / Robert Tisherman, Itamar Neto, Orr Limpisvasti, and Carola F. van Eck.
    Digital Access Thieme-Connect 2021
  • Digital
    Hiroyuki Isayama, Yousuke Nakai, Takashi Sasaki, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive book presents the latest evidence-based data on pancreatobiliary malignancies, including the epidemiology, examination, treatment and endoscopic management. It explores a range of topics, such as risk factors, detection strategies, and novel treatment approaches like precision medicine and immunotherapy. Although there have been rapid improvements in the management of these diseases, the survival period has not yet reached a satisfactory level. This book will help those doctors needing to share the latest information with the patients and their families. It provides a wealth of practical information to help surgeons, endoscopists and oncologists as well as physicians, basic researchers and professionals at medical device and pharmaceutical companies broaden their understanding of the current treatment and management strategies for pancreatobiliary malignancies.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Part I: Current Topics in Epidemiology and Examinations of Pancreatic Cancer and Cholangiocarcinoma
    1: Risk Factors for Pancreatic Cancer and Cholangiocarcinoma
    1.1 Risk Factors for Pancreatic Cancer
    1.1.1 Introduction
    1.1.2 Genetic Factors
    1.1.3 Pancreatic Disorders (Cystic Lesions and Chronic Pancreatitis)
    1.1.4 Epidemiological Factors
    1.1.5 Microbiome
    1.1.6 Discussion
    1.2 Risk Factors for Cholangiocarcinoma
    1.2.1 Introduction
    1.2.2 Microbiome (Infectious Diseases)
    1.2.3 Genetic Factors 1.2.4 Pancreatobiliary and Inflammatory Disorders
    1.2.5 Epidemiological Factors
    1.2.6 Discussion
    References
    2: Detection Strategies and Examination of Early Pancreatic Cancer
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Clinical Features and Image Findings of Early-Stage PC
    2.3 Cytological Diagnosis of Early-Stage PC
    2.4 Pathological Features of Early-Stage PC
    2.5 Statements and Detection Strategies of Early-Stage PC in Japan
    2.6 Collaborations Between Specialists and General Practitioners for Early-Stage PC in Japan
    References 3: Biomarkers for Pancreatic Cancer and Cholangiocarcinoma
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Currently Used Biomarkers for PDAC and CCA
    3.3 Other Protein Markers for PDAC and CCA
    3.4 Circulating Tumor Cells
    3.5 Extracellular Vesicles
    3.6 Biomarker-Based Selection of Targeted Therapies
    3.7 Conclusion and Future Perspectives
    References
    4: Recent Advances of Precision Medicine in Pancreatic Cancer and Cholangiocarcinoma
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Features of Two Reimbursed CGP Tests
    4.3 Required Tissue Samples
    4.4 Liquid Biopsy 4.5 Eligible Patients for CGP Test and Optimal Timing of Its Application
    4.6 Clinical Benefit of CGP Tests in Pancreatic Cancer
    4.7 Clinical Benefit of CGP Tests in Biliary Tract Cancer
    References
    Part II: Anti-cancer Treatments for Pancreatic Cancer
    5: Chemotherapy for Locally Advanced and Metastatic Pancreatic Cancer
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Metastatic Pancreatic Cancer
    5.2.1 FOLFIRINOX
    5.2.2 Gemcitabine Plus Nab-Paclitaxel
    5.2.3 Selection Between FOLFIRINOX and Gemcitabine Plus Nab-Paclitaxel 5.2.4 Intraperitoneal Chemotherapy in Patients with Peritoneal Dissemination
    5.3 Locally Advanced Pancreatic Cancer
    5.4 The Role of Monotherapy
    5.5 Second-Line Chemotherapy
    5.6 Future Perspective
    References
    6: Neoadjuvant Therapy for Resectable and Borderline Resectable Pancreatic Cancer
    6.1 Introduction
    6.2 Preoperative Estimation for Surgical Resectability
    6.3 Potentially Resectable Tumors
    6.4 Prospective Studies for NAT and Adjuvant Therapy
    6.5 Optimal Agent or Regimens for NAT for Potentially Resectable PA 6.6 Optimal Regimens for NAT: Chemotherapy or CRT?
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Joseph R. Pisegna, editor.
    Summary: This book provides the reader with a multidisciplinary approach that is state of the art and reflects input from the European Neuroendocrine Tumor Society and the North American Neuroendocrine Tumor Society. In particular, the text focuses on the pathophysiology of neuroendocrine tumors and includes a comprehensive review of the most recent developments in understanding the complex hormone and receptor signaling that is important for the future development of potent pharmacological treatments. The volume reviews the pathological grading and staging systems providing useful clinical information for the treating clinician as well as a useful reference for pathologists. The clinical management of neuroendocrine tumors is reviewed enabling the treating physician to understand the diagnostic approaches to differentiating the various types of neuroendocrine tumors. In addition, the treatments are reviewed in great detail and include novel radiological, surgical, and chemotherapeutic approaches. The reader will utilize this book as both a comprehensive and quick reference guide through the use of diagnostic and treatment algorithms. Written by international experts in their particular field of study, Management of Pancreatic Neuroendocrine Tumors will be of great value to medical oncologists, endocrinologists, gastroenterologists, pathologists, surgeons, and diagnostic and interventional radiologists.

    Contents:
    Pathology of Pancreatic Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Inherited and Somatic Genetics of Pancreatic Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Laboratory Assessment of NETS
    Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome: Diagnosis and Management
    Clinical Manifestations of Multiple Endocrine Neoplasia, Type 1
    Gastric Carcinoids: Classification and Diagnosis
    Endoscopic Approaches for Diagnosis of Pancreatic Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Endoscopic Approaches to Treatment of Pancreatic Neuroendocrine Neoplasms
    Surgical Approaches to Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Radiotherapy and Radiopharmaceuticals for the Treatment of Pancreatic Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Nuclear Medicine Approaches to Treatment of Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Novel Targets for Future Medical Treatments.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Kristian Steen Frederiksen, Gunhild Waldemar, editors.
    Summary: This book provides an overall introduction to the medical management of dementia with chapters dedicated to specific topics such as pain, epilepsy, vascular risk factors in dementia and review of medication, which are often not addressed in books on the subject, and thereby filling a gap in the field. Chapters are supplemented with cases to highlight key concepts and treatment approaches, and to provide the reader with the possibility to reflect on management options and the readers own current practice. This book is aimed at clinicians of different specialties (mainly neurology, psychiatry, geriatric medicine and general practice/family medicine) who manage patients with dementia on a regular basis, and thus provides useful guidance to be used in the clinic.

    Contents:
    Management of patients with dementia an introduction
    Diagnosis and support of patients with dementia a patient perspective on current goals and practice
    Diagnostic evaluation of dementia
    Disclosure of diagnosis in MCI and dementia
    Anti-dementia medication
    Review of medication in patients with dementia
    Management approaches for behavioural and psychological symptoms of dementia
    Management of vascular risk factors in dementia
    Assessment and management of pain in patients with dementia
    Management of Motor Symptoms in Dementia Disorders
    Management of sleep disorders in patients with dementia
    Seizures and Epilepsy in Dementia: Diagnosis and Management
    Physical and cognitive exercise for patients with dementia
    Promoting functional independence in dementia
    Patients with Dementia in Hospital
    Long-term care for patients with dementia
    End-Of-Life Care In Patients with Advanced Dementia
    Systematic medical follow-up of patients with dementia.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Michael T. McDermott, editor.
    Summary: Comprised of illustrative clinical cases, this unique pocket guide presents descriptions of patients who have symptoms, physical signs or laboratory abnormalities that they believe are due to disorders of the endocrine system (hormone secreting glands and overall metabolism) but which are not, or probably are not, due to an endocrine disorder. These are common situations in the clinical practice of endocrinology. Each chapter includes clinical cases illustrating differing presentations and outcomes, and each individual case description is followed by a discussion that includes the differential diagnosis of these symptoms, signs and/or lab abnormalities and why they are not likely due to endocrine disease or, alternatively, why and how a deeper exploration for endocrine disorders might be needed. In all cases, an emphasis is placed on listening to the patient and providing a respectful and compassionate response and approach to evaluation and management of the proposed disorder. Discussions are referenced whenever reference material is available, and evidence-based clinical practice guidelines are presented whenever applicable. Topics discussed include chronic and adrenal fatigue, obesity, anxiety and depression, sweating and flushing, alcohol- and opioid-induced symptoms, low testosterone, pseudo-hypoglycemia and pseudo-Cushing's syndrome, among others. Clinical endocrinologists, primary care physicians and related allied medical professionals will find Management of Patients with Pseudo-Endocrine Disorders a valuable resource in their clinical practice with these common but often challenging patients.

    Contents:
    Pseudo-Endocrine Disorders: Definitions, Examples and Considerations
    Pseudo-Endocrine Disorders: My General Approach to Management of the Patient
    Rogue Practitioners and Practices
    Influence of the Internet in Endocrinology Practice
    Debunking Internet Myths: What Is the Best Approach?- Bewildered by Biotin
    Help, My Metabolism Is Low!- Idiopathic Postprandial Syndrome
    Pseudo-Hypoglycemia
    Chronic Fatigue
    Adrenal Fatigue
    Adrenal Insufficiency, "Relative Adrenal Insufficiency" or None of the Above?- Pseudo-Cushings Syndrome: A Diagnostic Dilemma
    Pseudo-Cushings Syndrome: Alcohol Abuse, Obesity and Psychiatric Disorders
    Pseudo-Pheochromocytoma
    Holistic Hypercalcemia
    Low Testosterone: Determine and Treat the Underlying Disorder
    Inappropriate Use of Mifepristone to Treat Diabetes Mellitus
    Insulin-like Growth Factor Deficiency
    Non-Thyroidal Hypothyroidism
    Wilsons Syndrome (Low T3 Syndrome)
    Reverse T3 Dilemma
    Persistent Hypothyroid Symptoms Despite Adequate Thyroid Hormone Replacement
    Low Dose Naltrexone for Treatment of Hashimotos Thyroiditis
    Hashimoto Encephalopathy
    Non-Thyroidal Illness Syndrome (Euthyroid Sick Syndrome).
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Vincenzo Li Marzi, Maurizio Serati, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive and up-to-date overview of the surgical treatment of pelvic organ prolapse, focusing especially on issues that continue to arouse controversy. In the first section, leading experts present detailed information on the surgical anatomy, pathophysiology, and epidemiology of prolapse and also the impact of concomitant functional disorders. The second section focuses on diagnostic work-up and the third is dedicated to the various treatment options aimed at resolution of the condition. The closing chapters discuss outcome measures and analyze the effects of prolapse surgery on urinary, bowel, and sexual symptoms. In 1966 Richard TeLinde stated that, "Every honest surgeon of extensive and long experience will have to admit that he is not entirely and absolutely satisfied with his long-term results of all his operations for prolapse and allied conditions." Although many uncertainties in the field have since been resolved, some major issues still require clarification. Often it can be difficult to find the right balance between treatment effectiveness in the long term and risk reduction, including with respect to complications. This book will help trainees and less experienced surgeons to make appropriate treatment choices and achieve optimal outcomes.

    Contents:
    Part 1: General Remarks
    1. Surgical Anatomy for the Reconstructive Pelvic Surgeon
    2. Pelvic Organ Prolapse: Pathophysiology and Epidemiology
    3. Concomitant Functional Disorders in Genito-Urinary Prolapse
    Part 2: Diagnostic Work-up
    4. Clinical Evaluation and Diagnostic Tools in Women with Prolapse
    5. Urodynamic Prolapse Assessment: When and Why
    Part 3: Treatment Options
    6. Pelvic Floor Muscle Training and Prolapse: Prevention or Treatment?
    7. Pessary: A Rediscovered Tool
    8. Fascial Surgery Repair for Prolapse
    9. Sacrocolpopexy: Conventional Laparoscopic Versus Robot-assisted Approach
    10. Transvaginal Mesh Repair for Pelvic Organ Prolapse: Toward a New Era
    11. Posterior Prolapse Repair: Traditional, Transanal, and Employing Mesh-graft
    12. The Role of Hysterectomy in Genito-Urinary Prolapse
    Part 4: Outcome and Follow-up
    13. Prolapse Surgery and Outcome Measures
    14. Urinary, Bowel and Sexual Symptoms after POP surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Daniel J. Culkin, editor.
    Summary: Management of Penile Cancer provides a comprehensive and state-of-the-art overview of the major issues specific to the field of penile cancer. The sections of the book are structured to review the overall scope of issues of penile cancer, including diagnosis and staging, surgical approaches, and the treatment of advanced disease. As multidisciplinary care is an integral part of the treatment of penile cancer, this book is unique in the inclusion of collaborating authors from a variety of integrated disciplines, including urology, radiation oncology, medical oncology, and reconstructive surgery. Written by recognized experts in their field, Management of Penile Cancer is a unique and valuable resource in the field of penile cancer, both for those currently in training and for those already in clinical or research practice.

    Contents:
    Introduction to the Management of Penile Cancer
    Epidemiology and Natural History
    Pathology, Risk Factors and HPV in Penile Squamous Cell Carcinoma
    Pathology and Genetics
    Prognostic Factors
    Imaging and Clinical Staging for Penile Cancer
    Diagnosis and Management of Pre-Malignant Penile Lesions
    Penile-Sparing Surgery
    Analysis of Contemporary Treatment of Penis Cancer at the Netherlands Cancer Institute
    Surgical Management of the Clinically Negative and Locally Advanced Inguinal Region in Patients with Squamous Penile Cancer
    Primary and Adjuvant Radiation Therapy in the Management of Penile Cancer
    Chemotherapy in Penile Cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Eyal Herzog, editor.
    Summary: The clinical aspects of pericardial disease encompass acute and recurrent pericarditis, pericardial effusion and pericardial tamponade, constrictive pericarditis, and effusive-constrictive pericarditis. These disorders differ not only in clinical presentation but also in the timeline of development, thus management of pericardial disease can be challenging for many clinicians. To assist medical professionals with this often complex area, this book provides an extensive review of pericardial disease evaluation and management in a unified, stepwise pathway-based approach. Management of Pericardial Disease contains a selection of defining clinical images to guide in identification and management of pericardial disease. Fellows, residents, cardiologists, thoracic medicine physicians, cardiothoracic surgeons, radiologists, and intensive care and emergency medicine physicians alike will find this book to be an essential resource for developing the skills and knowledge applicable to managing pericardial disease in patients.

    Contents:
    Anatomy and Physiology of the Pericardium
    Etiologies of Pericardial Diseases
    History and Physical Examination of a Patient with Pericardial Disease
    EKG in Pericardial Disease
    Echocardiography in Pericardial Disease
    Cardiac Catheterization Evaluation of a Patient with Pericardial Disease
    Multimodality Imaging (X-Ray, CT, and MRI) in Pericardial Disease
    Acute and Recurrent Pericarditis
    Constrictive Pericardial Heart Disease
    Pericardial Effusion and Tamponade
    Echocardiography-Guided Pericardial Drainage
    Surgical Management of Pericardial Disease
    Pathway for the Management of Pericardial Disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Rizwan Ali Ansari, Rose Rizvi, Irshad Mahmood, editors.
    Summary: This book illustrates the currently available strategies for managing phytonematodes. It discusses the latest findings on plant-pathogen-microbiome interactions and their impacts on ecosystems, and provides extensive information on the application of microorganisms in the sustainable management of phytonematodes. This is followed by an in-depth discussion of the application of potential strains of biocontrol fungi, endophytes and actinomycetes to enhance plants ability to fend off phytonematode attacks, leading to improved plant health. In conclusion, the book addresses new aspects like the biofabrication of nanoparticles and their application in plant disease management, and presents an extensive list for further reading.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Nanobiotechnology driven management of Phytonematodes
    Chapter 2. Bioprospecting compost for long-term control of plant parasitic nematodes
    Chapter 3. Plant Growth Promoting Rhizobacteria (PGPR) based sustainable management of phytoparasitic nematodes: Current understandings and future challenges
    Chapter 4. Organic additives and their role in the phytoparasitic nematodes management
    Chapter 5. Metagenomics insights into interactions between plant nematodes and endophytic microbiome
    Chapter 6. Nanoparticles Synthesis and their application in the management of phytonematodes: An Overview
    Chapter 7. Integrated management of phytopathogenic nematodes infesting mushroom
    Chapter 8. Plant-parasitic nematodes and their biocontrol agents: Current status and future vistas
    Chapter 9. Importance of biopesticides in the sustainable management of plant parasitic nematodes
    Chapter 10. Efficacy of microbial biocontrol agents in integration with other managing methods against phytoparasitic nematodes
    Chapter 11. Role of Trichoderma spp. in the management of plant parasitic nematodes
    Chapter 12. Role of organic additives in the sustainable management of phytoparasitic nematodes
    Chapter 13. Plant-parasitic nematode control: Current progress and challenges
    Chapter 14. Utilization of beneficial microorganisms in sustainable control of phytonematodes
    Chapter 15. Current management strategies for phytoparasitic nematodes
    Chapter 16. Sustainable management of plant-parasitic nematodes: An overview from conventional practices to modern techniques.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Babak Azizzadeh, Charles Nduka.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Ajay Bhalla, Jonathan Birns, editors.
    Summary: This book highlights the underlying importance of post-stroke complications during recovery, allowing healthcare professionals managing stroke patients to understand their frequency and identify which patients are at risk of developing such complications. Complications are categorised into neurological and non-neurological, and the time-frame for these complications both in the short-term and long-term are discussed. The common practices in managing post-stroke complications and the skills required in their prevention are described, as is the evidence base from clinical trials around their management. The book concludes with a discussion of new developments and research priorities for the future. Management of Post-Stroke Complications is aimed at members of the multidisciplinary stroke team, stroke physicians, neurologists, general practitioners, stroke specialists in training, and medical students.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Early Neurological Deterioration
    Post-Stroke Cardiac Complications
    Post-Stroke Seizures
    Infections After Stroke
    Venous Thromboembolism
    Swallowing and Nutritional Complications
    Urinary and Bowel Complications
    Positioning and Pressure Care
    Management of Spasticity
    Falls and Osteoporosis Post-Stroke
    Post-Stroke Cognitive Impairment
    Post-Stroke Pain
    Post-Stroke Fatigue: Common But Poorly Understood
    Mental Consequences Of Stroke
    Future Developments.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Merlin G. Butler, Phillip D. K. Lee, Barbara Y. Whitman, editors.
    Summary: Now in a fully revised and updated fourth edition, this book remains the most comprehensive resource on Prader-Willi syndrome (PWS) available on the market. There have been significant changes in the diagnosis, clinical care and treatment of PWS since the previous edition was published in 2006, and more thorough information on understanding the cause and diagnosis of the condition, along with clinical presentation and findings with natural history data now available. The book is divided into three thematic sections. Part One discusses the genetics, diagnosis, research and overview of PWS, including current laboratory testing. The medical physiology and treatment of PWS comprise Part Two, covering the GI system, obesity as well as the use of growth hormone. Part Three, the largest section, presents a wide-ranging, multidisciplinary management approach to PWS, attending to the many manifestations of the condition. Topics here include neurodevelopmental aspects, speech and language disorders, motor issues, psychological and behavioral management, educational and transitional considerations, vocational training and residential care, and advocacy for both school discipline and sexuality. Syndrome-specific growth charts, benefits eligibility information and additional resources are included in helpful appendices. Timely and well-crafted, this latest edition of Management of Prader-Willi Syndrome remains the gold standard for clinicians and health care providers working with patients diagnosed with this rare obesity-related genetic disorder.

    Contents:
    Part I: Diagnosis and Genetics of Prader-Willi Syndrome
    Clinical Findings and Natural History of Prader-Willi Syndrome
    Diagnostic Criteria for Prader-Willi Syndrome
    Molecular Genetic Findings in Prader-Willi Syndrome
    Laboratory Testing for Prader-Willi Syndrome
    Part II: Medical Physiology and Treatment of Prader-Willi Syndrome
    Medical Considerations in Prader-Willi Syndrome
    Gastrointestinal System, Obesity, and Body Composition
    Growth Hormone and Prader-Willi Syndrome
    Part III: Multidisciplinary Management of Prader-Willi Syndrome
    Neurodevelopmental and Neuropsychological Aspects of Prader-Willi Syndrome
    Speech and Language Disorders Associated with Prader-Willi Syndrome
    Motor and Developmental Interventions for Prader-Willi Syndrome
    Educational Considerations for Children with Prader-Willi Syndrome
    Tools for Psychological and Behavioral Management with Prader-Willi Syndrome
    Educational and Social Issues for Adolescents with Prader-Willi Syndrome
    Transition from Adolescence to Young Adulthood: The Special Case of Prader-Willi Syndrome
    Vocational Training for People with Prader-Willi Syndrome
    Residential Care for Adults with Prader-Willi Syndrome
    Inpatient Crisis Intervention for Persons with Prader-Willi Syndrome
    Social Work Interventions: Advocacy and Support for Families with Prader-Willi Syndrome
    A National Approach to Crisis Intervention and Advocacy with Prader-Willi Syndrome
    Advocacy Issues with Prader-Willi Syndrome: School Discipline and Expulsion
    Advocacy Issues with Prader-Willi Syndrome: Sexuality.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Michel Bolla, Hendrik van Poppel, editors.
    Summary: This exhaustive review of prostate cancer management covers epidemiology, biology, chemoprevention, screening and diagnosis, therapies including surgery, radiation, high-intensity ultrasound, cryotherapy, and more. Includes up-to-date clinical trial data.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology of prostate cancer in Europe: patterns, trends and determinants
    Chemoprevention
    Individual and population-based screening
    Anatomo-pathology
    Biomarkers for prostate cancer
    The clinical genomics of prostate cancer
    Prostate cancer imaging: an ongoing change of paradigm
    Nuclear Medecine (Bone scan, Choline and PSMA PET/CT)
    Diagnosis, clinical workup, and TNM classification
    Active surveillance for low risk prostate cancer
    Open Radical Prostatectomy
    The robotic laparoscopic radical prostatectomy
    Permanent and high dose rate Brachytherapy (technique, indications, results, morbidity)
    IMRT, hypofractionated radiotherapy and stereotactic radiotherapy: technique, indications, and results
    Combination of androgen deprivation therapy and radiation therapy for locally advanced and localized prostate cancer
    Postoperative irradiation: immediate or early delayed?
    High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound (HIFU) for prostate cancer
    Prostate Cryotherapy
    Salvage prostate brachytherapy for postradiation local failure
    Follow-up after radical treatments and relapse
    First-line hormonal manipulation: surgical and medical castration with LHRH agonists and antagonists, steroids, and pure antiandrogens
    Chemotherapy and androgen receptor-directed treatment of castration resistant metastatic prostate cancer
    Bone-targeted therapies in prostate cancer
    Immunotherapy and targeted therapies in advanced castration resistant prostate cancer
    How to interpret numeric results in publications?
    Management of prostate cancer: EAU guidelines on screening, diagnosis and local primary treatment
    The millenium patients' perspective.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Peter J. Snyder, Linda C. Mayes, William E. Smith.
    Summary: The Management of Scientific Integrity within Academic Medical Centers discusses the impact scientific misconduct has in eight complex case studies. Authors look at multifaceted mixtures of improper behavior, poor communication, cultural issues, adverse medical/health issues, interpersonal problems and misunderstandings to illustrate the challenge of identifying and managing what went wrong and how current policies have led to the establishment of quasi legal processes within academic institutions. The book reviews the current global regulations and concludes with a section authored by a US federal court judge who provides his perspective on the adequacy of current regulations and policies.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2015
  • Digital
    Terje Sundstrøm [and more], editors.
    Summary: This book provides sound clinical guidance on the treatment of adults and children with severe head injuries, from the time of initial contact through to the rehabilitation center. Offers recommended diagnostic and therapeutic measures, and useful flow charts.

    Contents:
    Rotrauma research
    Index monitoring
    Monitoring microdialysis
    Jugular bulb measurements (SJVO2)
    Cerebral blood flow (CBF) and cerebral metabolic rate (CMR)
    Transcranial Doppler (TCD)
    Near infrared spectroscopy (NIRS) or cerebral oximetry
    Clinical Neurophysiology: Evoked Potentials
    Clinical Neurophysiology: Continous EEG Monitoring
    Imaging of severe traumatic brain injury in the neurointensive care unit
    Serum protein biomarkers in the management of severe traumatic brain injury
    Cardiopulmonary aspects
    Renal aspects
    Neuroendocrine aspects
    Part VIII Treatment in neurointensive care
    Guidelines for treatment of patients with severe traumatic brain injury
    The Lund therapy: a physiological approach
    Pharmacological neuroprotection
    Subacute surgery in neurointensive care
    Management of extracranial injuries
    CSF Drainage
    Hyperventilation
    Osmotherapy
    Barbiturates for ICP management
    Management of fluid and electrolyte disturbances
    Sedation: including pain treatment and withdrawal symptoms
    Nutrition
    Management of CNS-related infection
    Management of extracranial infections
    Temperature management
    Seizures
    Paroxysmal sympathetic hyperactivity
    Prophylaxis against venous thromboembolism
    Coagulopathy (bleeding tendency)
    Corticosteroids
    Management of acute psychiatric problems
    Part IX Rehabilitation and follow-up
    Rehabilitation after severe TBI
    Long-term follow-up
    Part X Outcome and prognosis
    General overview
    Somatic consequences
    Neuropsychiatric consequences
    Neuropsychological perspectives
    Neurosurgical challenges
    Minimally conscious and vegetative state
    Specific peadiatric concerns
    Socioeconomic consequences
    Subacute MR Imaging: Traumatic axonal injury, brain stem lesions and prognostic factors
    Neurodegeneration and dementia
    Part XI Research in severe TBI
    The neurointensive care unit as a platform for advanced clinical research
    Current state-of-the-art in neu.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Antje Welge-Lüssen, Thomas Hummel with contributions by Nasreddin Abolmaali [and 36 others].
    Summary: "Recent breakthroughs in the diagnosis and treatment of smell and taste disorders have dramatically altered clinical outcomes for these patients. In this important book, readers will get a full overview of the topic today, including functional anatomy, pathophysiology, diagnostic and clinical work-up, assessment techniques, medical and surgical options, and more. Focused and to-the-point, the book is especially designed for physicians treating patients in the everyday practice setting. Special Features: Written by the fields foremost leaders, who chair international working committees and run annual courses on olfaction and gustation, Covers the most important advances in diagnostic and treatment techniques, Provides a clear methodology for examining, testing, classifying, diagnosing, and treating a wide range of idiopathic, congenital, and acquired smell and taste disorders, Explores the use of MRI for improved visualization of central olfactory areas, including the lesions and other disturbances that cause olfactory disorders, Offers new information on the interaction between the chemical senses, especially important in medicolegal cases, Includes more than 130 full-color diagrams, clinical pathways, tables, photographs, and anatomic illustrations that clarify all concepts. Complete with expert foundational chapters on the anatomy and structure of the olfactory and gustatory systems, as well as compelling information on quality-of-life issues, this book makes a major contribution to the field. It is essential for otolaryngologists, neurologists, internists, residents, and other specialists treating patients with smell and taste disorders in a modern clinical setting"--Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    D.S. Deenadayal, Vyshanavi Bommakanti.
    Summary: There are many books describing in detail the evaluation, diagnosis and management of OSA, but this is a first practical guide which comprehensively describes this condition. The incidence of snoring and obstructive sleep apnea is on rise and this practical guide will help not just specialists but also residents and fellows in treating their patients with Obstructive sleep apnea. Essential information is summarized in the form of charts and surgical steps are summarized in the form of diagrammatic illustration making it easy for the learners. This book additionally would help the medical practitioners to get a practical insight in the management of patients. This book will describe each entity of sleep disordered breathing, evidence based protocols , diagnostic tools required for identifying , medical therapies that will help in appropriate patients, Devices that can be used for its management . This book will also describe on how to select patients for surgery and how tailor the surgery as per the anatomy of the patient.

    Contents:
    1. History of snoring and obstructive sleep apnea
    2. Relevant anatomy and pathophysiology
    3. History and clinical examination in patients with OSAHS
    4. Investigations
    5. Conservative Management
    6. Medical therapies
    7. Oral appliances
    8. Myofunctional therapy
    9. Surgery for OSA
    10. Perioperative management
    11. Postoperative management and follow up
    12. Results : definition of success
    13. Medicolegal aspects and Consent in OSA surgeries
    14. Newer technological tools in the management of OSA
    15. Recent advances
    16. Interesting cases: Management.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Print
    Murray F. Brennan, Cristina R. Antonescu, Kaled M. Alektiar, Robert G. Maki.
    Contents:
    PART I. Introduction
    1. General description
    2. Natural history: importance of size, site, histopathology
    3. General statement as to efficacy of surgery, chemotherapy, radiation therapy and immunotherapy
    PART II. Management By Histopathology
    4. Gastrointestinal stromal tumors
    5. Liposarcoma
    6. Leiomyosarcoma
    7. Undifferentiated pleomorphic sarcoma (UPS) (malignant fibrous histiocytoma (MFH) and myxofibrosarcoma)
    8. Synovial sarcoma
    9. Malignant peripheral nerve sheath tumor (MPNST) and triton tumor
    10. Desmoid tumor/deep-seated fibromatosis (desmoid-type fibromatosis)
    11. Soitary fibrous tumor/hemangiopericytoma
    12. Fibrosarcoma and its variants
    13. Vascular sarcomas
    14. Epithelioid sarcoma
    15. Sarcomas more common in children
    16. Radiation-induced sarcoma
    17. Alveolar soft part sarcoma
    18. Clear cell sarcoma/melanoma of soft parts
    19. Desmoplastic small round cell tumor
    20. Extraskeletal myxoid chondrosarcoma
    21. Other uterine sarcomas
    22. Extraskeletal osteogenic sarcoma
    23. Sustentacular tumors of lymph tissue
    24. Uncommon/unique sites
    PART III. Benign And Less Aggressive Lesions
    25. Mostly benign/rarely metastasizing
    26. Selected benign tumors
    27. Reactive lesions
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Adel E. Ahmed Ganaw, Nissar Shaikh, Nabil A. Shallik, Marco Abraham E. Marcus, editors.
    Summary: This book focuses on subarachnoid hemorrhage (SAH), describing in detail the neurophysiology, anatomy, epidemiology, grading, anesthesia management, coiling and interventional treatment of this dangerous disease. Written by leading international experts, it highlights the state-of-the-art techniques for the diagnosis and treatment (non-surgical and surgical) of SAH and the clinical variations. It also examines the reliability of the new techniques versus the standard clinical methods to predict problems related to SAH and its recent diagnosis and management. The book starts with a brief discussion of the epidemiology of SAH, cerebral circulation, anatomy of brain blood vessels and neurophysiology related to this fatal disease. Then, in the following chapters it covers grading of subarachnoid hemorrhage, anesthesia management of SAH, treatment, subarachnoid hemorrhage coiling and radiological intervention. Lastly, it explores surgical treatment of intracranial aneurysms in more detail, and addresses complications, critical care management and headache in SAH, traumatic SAH and prognosis. Featuring numerous images, tables, schema, illustrations and videos, the book is intended for junior and senior anesthesiologists, neuroscientists, intervention radiologists, intensivists and neurosurgeons.

    Contents:
    Preface
    1. Aneurysmal subarachnoid haemorrhage: Epidemiology, etiology and pathophysiology
    2. Cerebral circulation and its clinical impact
    3. Central Nervous System Neurophysiology
    4. Neuroprotection in Subarachnoid Hemorrhage
    5. Systemic Approach For Diagnosis Of Aneurysmal Subarachnoid Hemorrhage
    6. Grading of Subarachnoid Hemorrhage
    7. Anesthetic Management of aneurysmal Subarachnoid Hemorrhage (aSAH)
    8. Sub-Arachnoid hemorrhage coiling and intervention
    9. Surgical Management of Aneurysmal Subarachnoid Hemorrhage
    10. Complications and Critical Care Management Of Aneurysmal Subarachnoid Hemorrhage
    11. Headache in Subarachnoid Hemorrhage
    12. Traumatic Subarachnoid Hemorrhage
    13. Prognosis of aneurysmal subarachnoid hemmorrhage: Facts and figures
    14. Brain death
    Abbreviation
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Atilla Soran, Faina Nakhlis, editors.
    Summary: Over the last several decades breast cancer management has made great strides in the improvement of oncologic treatment outcomes, particularly so in patients with early stage disease. While wide-spread access to screening resulting in early detection is undoubtedly to be credited for this trend, at the same time, the management of breast cancer has evolved to be an intricate multidisciplinary collaboration between breast imagers, surgeons, medical oncologists and radiation oncologist. As a result, with better mutual understanding of multidisplinary goals and challenges, the treatment strategies have become more individualized, with a great emphasis being placed on the intrinsic disease biology. Furthermore, the indications for neoadjuvant systemic therapy have significantly broadened, with a substantial number of patients with early stage breast cancer being able to take advantage of this strategy to decrease the extent of breast surgery they would undergo at its completion. As such, the management of the axilla in these patients has presented with new challenges as well as with new opportunities to scale down on the extent of local therapy and, consequently, its toxicity. This text will provide a comprehensive, state-of-the art review of this field, and will serve as a valuable resource for clinicians (surgeons, medical oncologists, radiation oncologists) and researchers with an interest in breast cancer. The book will review novel and evoling strategies in neoadjuvant systemic therapy forn early stage breast cancer, provide new perspectives about appropriate axillary imaging in anticipation of neoadjuvant systemic therapy, and describe new data on innovative surgical techniques and Radiation Oncology concepts designed to deescalate the extent and toxicity of local therapy while insuring oncologic safety. Several landmark clinical trials have been published in the last few years and will be placed in context with respect to current management. Integration of novel diagnostic and interventional breast imaging, local therapy (surgery and radiation) with contemporary systemic therapy will also be discussed. This text will serve as a very useful resource for physicians and researchers dealing with, and interested in, this challenging field. It will provide a concise yet comprehensive summary of the current status of the field that will help guide patient management and stimulate investigative efforts. All chapters will be written by experts in their fields and will include the most up to date scientific and clinical information.

    Contents:
    Evolution of the indications for neoadjuvant systemic therapy
    Defining response
    Imaging of the breast
    Imaging of the axilla and approach to node-negative vs. node-positive disease at presentation
    Guidelines for imaging during neoadjuvant systemic therapy
    Neoadjuvant systemic therapy based on the underlying tumor biology
    Adjuvant vs. neoadjuvant systemic therapy
    Molecular testing and personalized neoadjuvant treatment
    Pre-and post-neoadjuvant systemic therapy imaging assessment
    Surgical management of the axilla in node-negative and node-positive disease at diagnosis
    Surgical considerations and expectations in patients receiving neoadjuvant hormonal therapy and neoadjuvant chemotherapy
    Postmastectomy radiation considerations in patients receiving neoadjuvant chemotherapy
    Pathologic evaluation in neoadjuvant systemic therapy setting
    Guidelines for Neoadjuvant systemic therapy
    Ongoing Clinical studies and future direction.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Narasimhan Jagannathan, John Fiadjoe.
    Summary: Complications during airway management occur frequently when treating children. Although tracheal intubation is a routine procedure, there are no pediatric texts dedicated to this essential practice. The lack of specific resources and knowledge makes treating children with complex airways even more challenging. This landmark book is dedicated to the successful management of the complex pediatric airway. It explores and evaluates current research and covers novel topics such as airway ultrasonography and apneic oxygenation. It delineates the risks associated with intubating children, and their preventative measures. Aimed at clinicians involved in airway management in any form, this book covers the basics of airway management and how to perform a variety of essential techniques. Both occasional and exclusive pediatric clinicians will find this a valuable resource to support best practice. The book is supplemented by additional videos online, enhancing the demonstration of devices and techniques discussed in the text.

    Contents:
    Developmental anatomy of the airway / Rebecca S. Isserman and Ronald S. Litman
    The difficult pediatric airway : predictors, incidence, and complications / Nicholas Burjek
    Universal algorithms and approaches to airway management / Thomas Engelhardt and Andreas Machotta
    Direct laryngoscopy equipment and techniques / Maria Matuszczak and Cheryl K. Gooden
    Supraglottic airways equipment and techniques / Andrea S. Huang, Lisa E. Sohn, Suman Rao, and Narasimhan Jagannathan
    Oxygenation techniques for children with difficult airways / Paul A. Baker
    Video laryngoscopy equipment and techniques / Agnes I. Hunyady, James Peyton, Sarah Lee and Raymond Park
    Flexible bronchoscopy techniques: nasal and oral approaches with evidence base / Paul Stricker and Pete Kovatsis
    Optical stylet and light guided equipment and techniques / Rajeev Subramanyam and Mohamed Mahmoud
    Rigid bronchoscopy equipment and techniques / Jessica M. Van Beek-King and Jeffrey C. Rastatter
    Hybrid approaches to the difficult pediatric airway / Patrick N. Olomu, Grace Hsu and Justin L. Lockman
    Muscle relaxants / Annery Garcia-Marcinkiewicz
    Management of can't intubate and can't oxygenate scenario in children and infants / Vivian Man-ying Yuen, Stefano Sabato, and Birgitta Wong
    Ultrasonography for airway management / Michael S. Kristensen, Wendy H. Teoh and Thomas Engelhardt
    Difficult airway cart for management of the difficult pediatric airway / Alyson Walker and Britta S von Ungern Sternberg
    Extubation in children with difficult airway / Luis Sequera-Ramos, Alec Zhu, Benjamin Kiesel, and Narasimhan Jagannathan
    Airway management in the child with an airway injury / Somaletha T. Bhattacharya
    Airway management outside of the operating room : the emergency department / Aaron Donoghue
    Airway management of the neonate and infant : the difficult and critical airway in the icu setting / Janet Lioy
    Airway management in EXIT procedures / Debnath Chatterjee and Timothy M. Crombleholme
    One lung ventilation in pediatric patients / T. Wesley Templeton.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    K. Alok Pathak, Richard W. Nason, Janice L. Pasieka, editors.
    Contents:
    Molecular risk stratification of well-differentiated thyroid cancer
    The significance of cervical lymph nodes in well-differentiated thyroid cancer
    Management of the central compartment in well-differentiated thyroid carcinoma
    Management of the lateral neck in well-differentiated thyroid cancer
    The management of recurrent/persistent well-differentiated thyroid cancer in the central compartment
    Management of distant metastases in differentiated thyroid cancer
    Risk-adjusted strategies in post-treatment surveillance of well-differentiated thyroid carcinoma
    Medullary thyroid cancer
    Anaplastic thyroid cancer: Current concepts
    External beam radiotherapy for thyroid cancer
    Targeted therapies in thyroid cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Sanziana A. Roman, Julie Ann Sosa, Carmen C. Solórzano, editors.
    Contents:
    Incidence and Epidemiology
    The Clinically Detected and Palpable Thyroid Nodule
    Ultrasound of the Thyroid and Soft Tissues of the Neck
    Thyroid Nodule Biopsy
    The Bethesda System of Reporting Cytopathology (BSRTC)
    Utility of Non-Ultrasound Imaging for the Evaluation of Thyroid Nodules and Cancer
    Surveillance of Benign Thyroid Nodules
    Role of Medical Management
    Role of Surgery
    Surgical Intervention for Indeterminate Nodules
    Staging
    Importance of Surgeon Experience in the Surgical Management of Thyroid Cancer
    The pediatric thyroid nodule and Papillary Thyroid Cancer Management
    Microcarcinoma
    Surgical Management of Low Risk Papillary Thyroid Cancer
    Management of the Central Neck Lymph Nodes: Prophylactic Central Lymph Node Dissection vs. Therapeutic
    Management of the Persistent and Recurrent PTC Lymph Node Metastases
    Management of Thyroid Nodules and Cancer in the Pregnant Patient
    Perioperative Management of the Voice and Calcium
    Initial Treatment/Ablation Based on Risk Stratification
    Treatment of Recurrent/Metastatic Thyroid Cancer with RAI
    Surveillance of Treated Thyroid Cancer Patients and Thyroid Hormone Replacement and Suppression
    Holistic and Integrative Approaches to Patients Undergoing Thyroid Surgery
    Follicular and Hurthle Cell Carcinoma
    Locally Advanced Differentiated Thyroid Cancer: What Are the Surgical Treatment Options?
    External Beam Radiation for Locally Advanced and Metastatic Differentiated Thyroid Cancer
    Systemic Therapy for Advanced Metastatic Thyroid Cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Gian Luigi Canata, Pieter D'Hooghe, Kenneth J. Hunt, Gino M. M. J. Kerkhoffs, Umile Giuseppe Longo, editors.
    Summary: This volume offers a comprehensive guide to the prevention, management of injury, risk factor mitigation, and rehabilitation in track and field athletes. It serves as a valuable resource for the sports medicine community, including surgeons, sports medicine physicians, physical therapists, and athletic trainers. In addition to addressing current management techniques for injuries, the book discusses various special considerations, e.g. biologics, the aging athlete, rehabilitation, nutrition, and gender. Published in collaboration with ISAKOS, this book offers an updated information authored by experts in the field, and a valuable contribution to the field of orthopedics and sports medicine.

    Contents:
    1 The Burden and Epidemiology of Injury in Track and Field
    I Anatomy, Physiology and Biomechanics
    2 The sprinters muscle - Anatomy and pathomechanics of muscle
    3 Tendons and jumping - Anatomy and pathomechanics of tendon injury
    4 Ligament function and pathoanatomy of ligament injury and healing
    5 Anatomy and function of articular cartilage
    6 Bone structure and function in the distance runner
    7 Imaging considerations in track and field injuries
    II Upper Extremity
    8 Shoulder Instability in the throwing athlete
    9 Rotator Cuff injuries in throwing athletes
    10 Elbow injuries in throwing athletes
    11 Wrist injuries in throwers
    III Spine
    12 Back strains and sprains
    13 Spinal overuse injuries
    14 Spinal injuries and spondylolisthesis
    IV Hip Injuries
    15 Groin strain, Adductor and rectus injuries
    16 Stress fractures and AVN of the femoral head
    17 Femoro-acetabular Impingement and Labral injuries
    18 Gluteal muscle/tendon injuries and Pyriformis syndrome
    19 Trochanteric bursitis and IT band friction syndrome
    V Muscle injuries
    20 Hamstring and overuse muscle injuries
    21 Regenerative medicine (biologics) therapies for muscle strains and tears
    22 Shin splints and Compartment Syndrome
    VI Common Knee Injuries
    23 Knee meniscal and chondral injuries
    24 Patellofemoral overuse injuries and anterior knee pain (Fat pad syndrome included)
    25 Knee ligament injuries in track and field athletes
    VI Common Foot and Ankle Injuries
    26 Achilles Tendon and calf injuries
    27 Peroneal tendon injuries
    28 Bunions, Hallux rigidus and sesamoiditis in the running athlete
    29 Ankle impingement syndromes and FHL tendinopathy
    30 Ankle sprains and instability
    31 Heel spurs and Plantar fasciitis and metatrsalgia in runners
    32 Nerve injuries in the foot and ankle: Neuromas, entrapment and tarsal tunnel syndrome
    33 Stress fractures of the foot, ankle and tibia
    VIII Special considerations
    34 Gender considerations - the female athlete triad
    35 The aging athlete - influence of age on injury risk and rehabilitation
    36 The developing athlete - considerations for athletes age 10-18
    37 Psychological aspects of sport and injury
    38 Nutrition and Environmental factors
    39 Optimizing training and performance
    40 Rehabilitation and Return to sport after injury - Protocols and outcomes.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Mark P. Schoenberg and Kara L. Watts.
    Summary: Managing urologic cancer by preserving, as opposed to removing, affected tissue, is rapidly becoming the favoured choice for urologists and oncologists. Discover all available options and how to achieve the best possible patient management with this expert guide to the area. The editor, Mark Schoenberg, is an internationally-renown expert in this exciting new area and has recruited an outstanding team featuring some of the leading urologists/oncologists in North America and Europe to assist him.

    Contents:
    Cancer genetics, cancer biology, and tumor growth and metastasis : the interaction of cancer and its host environment / Mark C. Markowski and Kenneth J. Pienta
    Pathological basis of tumor characterization: cytopathology, surgical pathology, and how histo-morphology informs treatment decision making / Oleksandr N. Kryvenko and Fadi Brimo
    The immunobiology of tumor ablation / Rafi Kabarriti and Chandan Guha
    Computed tomography of urologic malignancies : the role of mdct in renal cell carcinoma and transitional cell carcinoma / Siva P. Raman and Elliot K. Fishman
    Mri and metabolic imaging / Louise Dickinson, Francesco Fraioli, Athar Haroon, and Clare Allen
    Biopsy strategies in the analysis of urologic neoplasia / Nabeel A. Shakir, Soroush Rais-Bahrami, and Peter A. Pinto
    Active surveillance for low-risk prostate cancer / Laurence Klotz
    Tissue-preserving surgical approaches in urologic oncology : the therapeutic mechanism for tumor ablation / Ganesh Kartha and J. Stephen Jones
    Prostate cancer : an evidence-based approach to tissue-preserving strategies / Kara L. Watts, Yaalini Shanmugabavan, Mark Emberton, and Hashim Uddin Ahmed
    The modern basis for nephron-sparing surgery in patients with renal cancer : biologic heterogeneity, the significance of tumor biopsy, and the changing roles of partial nephrectomy and tumor ablation / Jeffrey J. Tomaszewski, Robert G. Uzzo, and David Y.T. Chen
    Bladder-preserving strategies in the treatment of urothelial cancer : the disease spectrum and the dawn of molecular surgical guidance / Stephan Kruck and Arnulf Stenzl
    Image-guided thermal ablation of adrenal malignancies / Kyungmouk Steve Lee, Bradley B. Pua, and Stephen B. Solomon / Chapter 13
    Managing penile cancer : integrating tissue preservation, energy-based therapeutics, and surgical reconstruction / Arthur L. Burnett
    Testis cancer : testis-sparing cancer surgery / Nilay M. Gandhi and Pravin K. Rao
    Nanotechnology : an evolution in tissue preservation and focal-targeted oncologic therapy / Kara L. Watts and Joshua M. Stern
    Trial design issues in the study of focal therapy in prostate and kidney cancer / John b. Eifler and David F. Penson.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Ja Hyeon Ku, editor.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive overview of contemporary evidence-based management of urothelial carcinoma. The first part of the book is devoted to urothelial carcinoma of the bladder and includes detailed description of the diagnosis and treatment of non-muscle-invasive, muscle-invasive, and advanced or metastatic disease. Attention then turns to upper tract urothelial carcinoma (UTUC), with individual chapters on diagnosis, nephron-sparing surgery, nephroureterectomy, and treatment of advanced or metastatic UTUC. The text is supported by many illustrations, photos, and tables that clarify management, and surgical video clips are also available to readers. The book will be a welcome addition to the literature as progress continues to be made in understanding the exact pathophysiology of urothelial carcinoma and in developing more effective diagnostic and therapeutic modalities. It will be useful both to researchers in the field of urothelial carcinoma and to clinicians, including especially residents and fellows.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Michael L. Schilsky, editor.
    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Contributors;
    Chapter 1: Introduction to Copper Metabolism and Wilson Disease; Introduction; Cellular Mechanisms of Copper Transport; Wilson Disease; Abnormal Copper Metabolism and Injury in Wilson Disease; Ceruloplasmin: A Marker of Wilson Disease and Copper Status; When Copper Is in Excess; Summary and Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 2: Diagnosis Confirmation and Screening of Wilson Disease; Introduction; Patients to Test for Wilson Disease; Liver Disease and Extrahepatic Involvement in Wilson Disease The Neuropsychiatric Manifestations of Wilson Disease: More than Meets the EyeTremor; The Cranial Nerves; The Cerebellum; Psychiatric Symptoms; Other Organs Involved in Wilson Disease; Confirming the Diagnosis; Slit-Lamp Examination for Kayser-Fleischer (KF) Rings; Serum Ceruloplasmin; Free (Unbound) Serum Copper; Twenty-Four-Hour Urinary Copper; Genetic Analysis: Testing for ATP7B Mutations; Liver Biopsy: Histology and Hepatic Copper Concentration; Hemolysis (Breakdown of Red Blood Cells); Imaging Tests; Acute Liver Failure Secondary to Wilson Disease; Family Screening; Conclusion Dietary Modifications in Wilson DiseaseFood; Water; Cooking Methods; Nutritional Supplements; Special Considerations; Liver Disease; Neurological Involvement; Dysphagia; Nutrition Support; Resources; One-on-One RD Assistance; USDA Food/Nutrient Database; Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 5: Treating Other Symptoms of Wilson Disease: The Liver; Introduction; Asymptomatic or Mild Symptoms; Portal Hypertension; Varices (Esophageal and Gastric); Management of Variceal Bleed; Ascites; Treatment of Resistant Ascites; Spontaneous Bacterial Peritonitis; Sepsis; Hepatic Encephalopathy; Malignancy Acute Liver FailureBibliography;
    Chapter 6: Treatment of Neurological Symptoms in Wilson Disease; Introduction; Neurological Manifestations of WD; Tremor; Medications for Action Tremor; Dystonia; Treatment Options for Dystonia; Botulinum Toxin Injections; Oral Medications; Parkinsonism; Cerebellar Ataxia; Dysphagia; Neurological Manifestations in Children; Clinical Scales Used for Neurological Evaluation of WD; Neuroimaging in WD; Conclusion; Bibliography;
    Chapter 7: Psychiatric Aspects of Wilson Disease; Introduction; Evaluation of Psychiatric Symptoms in WD
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Hua Yan, editor.
    Summary: This book is aimed at illustrating the common complicated ocular trauma with typical signs, examinations, surgical procedures and conservative management to clinical practitioners including the nurses, medical students, residents, fellows and ophthalmologists, and help them make the most appropriate decision on the diagnosis and management of such patients. There are 23 chapters introduced in the book, which covers all types of complicated ocular trauma with brief case reports combined with the most comprehensive pictures. For each disease, a brief introduction, explanation as well as management are offered to the readers. With the illustrative figures and explanations, the goal of making the right diagnose, offering the best advice or treatment to the patients, and understanding surgical procedures would be easily achieved. This book is useful for readers to be fully prepared for the challenge of complicated ocular traumatic cases. This is the fifth volume of the book series Ocular Trauma.

    Contents:
    Complicated Corneal and Scleral Rupture
    Traumatic Cyclodialysis
    Traumatic Aniridia
    Traumatic Dislocation of Lens
    Intraocular hemorrhage
    Open Globe Injury with Choroidal and Retinal Detachment
    Choroidal and Retinal Detachment combined with Cyclodialysis In Open Globe Injury
    Repairment of Traumatic Choroidal Tear
    Complicated Ocular Trauma with Corneal Opacity
    Traumatic Giant Macular Hole
    Posterior Polar Ocular Perforating Injury
    Giant Intraocular Foreign Body
    Orbital Foreign Body
    Traumatic Glaucoma
    Traumatic Endoophthalmitis
    Permanent silicon oil tamponade
    Contusion of optic nerve and Fracture of optic canal
    Severe Orbital Fracture
    Traumatic Globe Luxation
    Complicated Blepharal trauma
    Severe Ocular Chemical Injury
    Ocular Laser Burns
    Pediatric Ocular Trauma.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Mary Margaret Gleason, Allison Boothe Trigg
    Summary: This quick-reference guide is designed for those who work with young children in child care and school settings. Topics cover social-emotional development, biting, napping difficulties, PTSD, gender development, self-stimulation behaviors, and more. In addition to behavioral issues commonly seen in small children, the editors touch on epigenetics, medications, toxic stress, ACEs (adverse childhood experiences), and how to help children who have undergone traumatic experiences

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    About This Book
    1. Managing Behavioral Issues in Child Care and Schools: Introduction and Overview
    Introduction
    Overview
    Summary
    2. The Social and Emotional Development of Young Children
    Introduction
    Emotional Development
    The Effect of Temperament
    Caregiver-Child Attachment Considerations
    Social Development
    Typical Concerns of Early Childhood
    Responding to Challenging Behaviors
    Additional Resources
    3. Contributors to Social-Emotional Development
    What Influences Young Children's Social-Emotional Development? Genetics and Epigenetics
    Medical Conditions
    Environmental Factors (Relationships)
    Community Factors
    Adverse Childhood Experiences
    Protecting Children
    Summary
    References
    4. Promoting Well-being in Early Care and Education Settings
    Center-Level Well-being
    Family-Level Well-being
    Classroom-Level Well-being
    Child-Level Well-being
    5. Addressing Challenging or Disruptive Behaviors
    The ABCs of Behavior
    Step 1: Identify the Behaviors to Target
    Step 2: Consider Contextual Influences Step 3: Observe What Occurs Immediately Before Challenging Behaviors (the Antecedent)
    Step 4: Understand the Consequences
    Step 5: Understand the Meaning of Behaviors
    Step 6: Respond to Children's Needs, Prevent Challenging Behaviors, and Teach New Behaviors
    Step 7: Determine New Responses
    Crisis Responses
    Concerns Specific to Infants
    Consider Infant and Early Childhood Mental Health Consultants
    Implicit Bias and Its Role in Behavioral Expectations
    Untitled
    6. Children With Special Needs
    Children With Developmental Delays
    Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder Children With Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder
    Children Exposed to Trauma and Adversity
    Recognizing Abuse and Neglect
    Children With Chronic Medical Conditions
    Children Taking Medications That Influence Social-Emotional Functioning
    Medications for Mental Health Problems
    Medications for Other Concerns
    Summary
    References
    7. When the Usual Approaches Are Not Working
    Partnering With Parents
    Anticipating Challenges
    Mental Health Consultation
    Community Resources
    Clinical/Professional Partners
    Evidence-based Treatments
    Suspensions and Expulsions
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2020
  • Digital
    by Francoise Simon, Professor Emerita, Columbia University and Senior Faculty, Mount Sinai School of Medicine, New York, NY, Glen Giovannetti, EY Global Biotechnology Leader.
    Summary: Featuring numerous case studies and state-of-the-art marketing models, this thorough resource provides a comprehensive overview of the new business context and marketing models for biotech companies. -- Edited summary from book.

    Contents:
    Foreword / by Philip Kotler
    New models for networked innovation
    Biotechnology as an innovation driver
    Biotechnology financing strategies
    Success through collaboration
    New business and marketing models
    Precision medicine
    Precision marketing
    Patient centricity strategies
    Drug pricing in context
    Strategic payer engagement
    Winning in the global marketplace
    Digital health strategies
    Creating agility through data and analytics
    Conclusion
    Index.
  • Digital
    Jeffrey A. Gusenoff.
    Summary: Obesity has become a worldwide epidemic. An increasing number of patients are undergoing weight loss procedures, resulting in an increase in patients with massive weight loss desiring body contouring surgeries. These patients can present with very challenging deformities of skin laxity, and are at higher risk of complications. Most texts only provide a chapter with basic descriptions of procedures for managing moderate deformities, with short discussions of complications. Managing Body Contouring Challenges and Complications offers comprehensive insight on the management of the most complex deformities after weight loss. Procedures are described in a step-by-step fashion, including small pearls of knowledge. This book also includes complex subjects not addressed in other books such as arm band deformities in brachioplasty, gluteal crease elongation in lower body lifting, recurrent saddlebag deformities, breast implant problems in massive weight loss, and many other topics. Managing Body Contouring Challenges and Complications focuses on the most challenging deformities and how to optimize results. Disappointing long term results are used to teach key areas of difficulty or potential pitfalls to avoid. This book also highlights evidence-based outcomes data from large studies to help guide surgical decision making.

    Contents:
    1. Challenges of obesity medicine and bariatric surgery
    2. Safety in Body Contouring
    3. Abdominal Contouring
    4. Thigh Contouring
    5. Lower Body Lifting and Augmentation
    6. Breast Contouring
    7. Arm Contouring
    8. Male Body Contouring
    9. Face and Neck Contouring
    10. Combining Procedures
    11. Common Complications.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Sara Booth, Julie Burkin, Catherine Moffat, Anna Spathis.
    Summary: Breathlessness Management in Clinical Practice presents evidence-based practical techniques for helping the breathless patient with advanced disease of any aetiology used in the Cambridge Breathlessness Intervention Service (CBIS). This book will help individuals in the multidisciplinary team both manage breathlessness in their current clinical setting and describe the breathlessness service model which can be adapted for use in any situation. It uses a model of care based on interventions for breathing, thinking and functioning. Breathlessness Management in Clinical Practice is an invaluable resource for those working in the respiratory medicine, oncology and cardiology and other specialties where breathlessness is commonly managed although less recognised like nephrology and neurology. It will be of help to occupational therapists, physiotherapists and specialist nurses as well as physicians. It will also be of interest to anyone who wishes to increase their knowledge of the advances in evidence that now enable clinicians to offer much improved care for those suffering with frightening symptom of breathlessness.

    Contents:
    Part I Introduction
    Breathlessness; the experience for the patient, and approach for the clinician
    The genesis and assessment of breathlessness
    Part II Non-pharmacological interventions - breathing
    Fan and oxygen therapy
    Positions to ease breathlessness
    Breathing techniques for breathlessness
    Part III Non-pharmacological interventions - thinking
    Anxiety management
    Energy conservation
    Part IV Non-pharmacologica interventions - functioning
    Exercise and activity promotion
    Supporting carers
    Part V An integrated strategy
    Care towards the end of life for the breathless patient
    An approach to the breathless patient.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Hatem A. Azim Jr.
    Contents:
    Overview
    1.Epidemiology of cancer in pregnancy
    2.Staging workup in pregnant cancer patients
    3.General concepts on surgical management of cancer during pregnancy
    4.Role and consequences of radiotherapy in managing cancer during pregnancy
    5.Pharmacokinetics of systemic anti-cancer therapies during pregnancy
    6.Obstetrical care of a pregnant woman with cancer
    7.Psychological and psychosocial care of a pregnant woman with cancer
    8.Supportive care during pregnancy
    10.Neonatal care and long-term consequences of in-utero exposure to systemic anticancer therapy
    Disease-specific chapters
    11.Managing breast cancer during pregnancy
    12.Managing melanoma during pregnancy
    13.Managing cervical cancer during pregnancy
    14.Managing ovarian tumors during pregnancy
    14.Managing lymphoma during pregnancy
    15.Managing leukemia during pregnancy
    16.Managing thoracic cancers during pregnancy.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by D. John Betteridge, Stephen Nicholls.
    Contents:
    The vascular endothelium in diabetes / Andrew Lansdown, Elizabeth Ellins, Julian Halcox
    New biomarkers of cardiovascular disease in diabetes / Hitesh Patel, Sujay Chandran, Kausik K. Ray
    Kidney disease in diabetes / Amanda Y. Wang, Meg Jardine, and Vlado Perkovic
    Vascular imaging / Kiyoko Uno, Jordan Andrews and Stephen J. Nicholls
    Glycaemia and CVD and its management / Jeffrey W. Stephens, Akhila Mallipedhi, Stephen C. Bain
    Hypertension and cardiovascular disease and its management / Jose A. García-Donaire and Luis M. Ruilope
    Dyslipidaemia and its management in type 2 diabetes / D. John Betteridge
    Thrombosis in diabetes and its clinical management / R.A. Ajjan and Peter J. Grant
    Diet and lifestyle in CVD prevention and treatment / Alice H. Lichtenstein
    Management of acute coronary syndrome / Christopher M. Huff and A. Michael Lincoff
    Management of peripheral arterial disease / Rüdiger-Egbert Schernthaner, Gerit-Holger Schernthaner, Guntram Schernthaner.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    editors, Elaine A. Donoghue, Colleen A. Kraft.
    Summary: "This fully revised and updated resource helps teachers and caregivers address the challenges of caring for children with chronic health conditions and special health care needs in child care and school settings"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Introduction: safe and appropriate care of children with chronic health needs
    Background
    The treatment team: partners in caring for children with chronic health needs
    Care plans
    Care plan implementation strategies for teachers and caregivers
    Medication administration issues
    Handling symptoms that develop while a child is in child care or school
    Planning for emergencies
    Transportation issues
    How to use the quick reference sheets
    Quick reference sheets
    Sample documents and forms.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2019
  • Print
    John D. Otis.
    Summary: Chronic pain has a multitude of causes, many of which are not well understood or effectively treated by medical therapies. Individuals with chronic pain often report that pain interferes with their ability to engage in occupational, social, or recreational activities. Sufferers' inability to engage in these everyday activities may contribute to increased isolation, negative mood and physical deconditioning, which in turn can contribute to their experience of pain. Cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT) has been proven effective at managing various chronic pain conditions, including rheumatoid arth.
    Digital Access Oxford 2007
  • Digital
    John Y.S. Kim, editor.
    Summary: Offering the perspective of seasoned surgeons who have seen, thought about, and worked through the common and uncommon problems that can arise in aesthetic breast surgery, this book serves as a reference to guide surgeons through the steps of understanding, potentially avoiding, and then treating these issues. Managing Common and Uncommon Complications of Aesthetic Breast Surgery is methodical in its approach, beginning with key relevant highlight of embryology and anatomy of the breast and continuing into common problems in breast surgery, implant-related surgery, breast lifts and reductions. A variety of pitfalls are also explored from rupture, capsular contracture, and implant malposition to the rare and uncommon surface-texture related lymphoma. Every process is explored in depth with carefully crafted, practical, and experientially tested solutions proposed. Featuring real patient photos, detailed tables, and high definition videos for supplemental learning, this text is a one-stop reference to help surgeons understand, manage, and treat complications in aesthetic breast surgery both common and uncommon.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Contributors
    Part I: Implants and Breast Augmentation
    1: Breast Embryology and Anatomy
    Introduction
    Embryology and Development
    Blood Supply to the Nipple-Areolar Complex
    Pedicles to the Nipple-Areolar Complex
    Innervation to the Breast and Nipple-Areolar Complex
    Pectoralis Muscle Anatomy
    What Is the IMF?
    Conclusion
    References
    2: Double Bubble: An Anatomic Analysis and Management Algorithm
    Introduction
    What Is the IMF?
    Translating IMF Anatomy to Iatrogenic Deformities: Pathophysiology of Double-Bubble Deformities Etiology, Incidence, and Risk Factors
    Prevention
    Techniques for Correction
    Pocket Conversion Techniques
    Inferior Support with Suture or Mesh-Assisted Capsulorrhaphy
    Algorithm for Double-Bubble Treatment
    Case Example
    Conclusion
    References
    3: Guiding Principles for Congenital Chest Wall and Breast Anomalies: Avoiding Complications
    Introduction
    Basic Science: Chest Wall Embryology and Breast Development
    Surgical Correction of Chest Wall Anomalies
    Rare Acquired Deformities
    The Psychosocial Implications Patient Assessment and Planning for Patients with Chest Wall and Breast Asymmetry
    Correction with Shaped Textured Versus Round Gel Implants
    The Increasing Role of Fat
    Conclusion
    References
    4: Treatment of Implant Malposition
    Introduction
    Types of Malposition and Their Causes
    Inferior Malposition
    Medial Malposition
    Lateral Malposition
    Superior Malposition
    Causes of Implant Malposition
    Operative Technique-Related Factors
    Implant-Related Factors
    Patient-Related Factors
    Treatment of Implant Malposition
    Evaluation
    Repair Approaches and Techniques Revision of Existing Pocket
    Creation of a New Pocket
    Case Examples
    Correction of Inferolateral Malposition
    Correction of Medial Malposition
    Correction of Inferior Malposition
    Prevention of Implant Malposition
    Conclusion
    References
    5: Implant Rupture: Pathophysiology, Diagnosis, and Management
    Introduction
    Pathophysiology
    Incidence of Implant Rupture
    Etiology of Rupture
    Diagnosis
    Management
    Management of Saline Implant Ruptures
    Management of Silicone Implant Ruptures
    Conclusion
    References 6: Capsular Contracture: Controversies in Etiology and Management
    Introduction
    Clinical Presentation
    Causes
    Prevention
    Implant Irrigation
    Insertion Devices
    Prophylactic Antibiotics
    Nipple Shields
    Incisions
    Postoperative Care
    Treatment
    Leukotriene Antagonists
    Capsulectomy
    Implant Site Change
    Acellular Dermal Matrices
    Case Examples
    Case 1
    Case 2
    Conclusion
    References
    7: Breast Infections
    Introduction
    Risk Factors for Infection in Breast Augmentation
    Presentation
    Management
    Conclusion
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Lakshmi Ratnam, Uday Patel, Anna Maria Belli, editors.
    Summary: Managing Common Interventional Radiology Complications: A Case Based Approach is an easy-to-use manual that will help trainees and practising radiologists by providing cases which cover most of the complications that a general interventionalist may encounter in normal practice. The cases are presented succinctly but thoroughly, so that the reader is equipped to manage the complication immediately. Managing Common Interventional Radiology Complications: A Case Based Approach aims to teach the range of procedures involved in interventional radiology, and focuses on the complications that can arise in the process.

    Contents:
    Embolization Coil Trapped in the Side Hole of a Catheter
    Retrieval of an Intravascular Foreign Body in the Venous System
    Migrated Superior Vena Cava Stent Repositioned Using a Balloon and Loop Snare Combination
    Central Venous Catheter Inserted into the Mediastinum
    Femoral Artery Pseudoaneurysm Treated with Percutaneous Thrombin Injection
    Superficial Femoral Artery Thrombosis Post-angioplasty
    Superficial Femoral Artery Rupture Following Angioplasty
    Distal Embolization Following Common Iliac and Superficial Femoral Artery Angioplasty
    Flow-Limiting Iliac Artery Dissection Post-angioplasty
    Dissection of Superior Mesenteric Artery (SMA) During Transarterial Chemoembolization (TACE) via a Replaced Right Hepatic Artery
    Iatrogenic Iliac Artery Rupture During Arterial Stenting
    Detachment of a Balloon-Expandable Stent from the Balloon and the Wire
    Migration of Common Hepatic Artery Stent Graft Occluding Right Hepatic Artery Flow
    Migrated Stent Graft During TIPS Revision
    Type 1A Endoleak Following EVAR Treated with a Proximal Cuff
    Management of a Type 1B Endoleak Following EVAR
    Persistent Type 2 Endoleak Post-EVAR with Aneurysm Expansion
    Acute Renal Artery Occlusion and Trapped Renal Artery Catheter During Infrarenal AAA Stent Grafting
    Maldeployment of the Contralateral Limb During EVAR
    Branch Endograft Disconnection and Impending Type 3 Endoleak Post-EVAR
    Hemorrhage Following Percutaneous Nephrostomy
    Injury to Bowel Following Transplant Nephrostomy Insertion
    Renal Arterial Hemorrhage Following Renal Artery Stenting
    Pyrexia After Tumor Embolization: Infection Versus Post-embolization Syndrome
    Arterioportal Fistula and Liver Hemorrhage After Radiofrequency Ablation and TACE
    Protrusion of Vena Cava Filter into the Aorta
    The Multiple Options for Retrieval of a Tilted IVC Filter
    Retrieval of a Well-Orientated IVC Filter with Embedded Struts
    Retrieving a Tilted IVC Filter with Struts Penetrating the IVC
    Fistula Rupture Post-fistuloplasty
    Circumferential Balloon Rupture and Retained Fragments During Fistuloplasty and Thrombolysis of a Thrombosed Fistula
    Hemorrhage After Transjugular Liver Biopsy.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Francis Carbonaro, K. Sheng Lim, editors.
    Summary: This well-illustrated book is intended as the go-to guide for the identification and management of the complications associated with specific glaucoma procedures. All of the routinely performed procedures are covered: filtration surgery, including trabeculectomy and ExPRESS shunt, nonpenetrating surgeries such as deep sclerectomy and canaloplasty, procedures involving the placement of tube shunt devices, glaucoma laser treatments, and minimally invasive glaucoma surgeries (MIGS). The book is succinct but sufficiently detailed to provide the reader with a very well informed description of possible complications and the best way to manage them, based on the evidence from recent and seminal research. The authors are recognized experts who come from a wide geographic and varied glaucoma background. The book will be ideal for all surgeons, whether new or experienced, who seek easily accessible, reliable guidance on how to manage the intraoperative and early and late postoperative complications that may arise when performing glaucoma surgery.

    Contents:
    Complications in Glaucoma Laser
    Minimally-invasive glaucoma surgery
    Non-penetrating Glaucoma Surgery (Deep Sclerectomy, Viscocanaloplasty and Canaloplasty)
    Trabeculectomy complications and their management
    Complications associated with Glaucoma Tube Surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Martin Jöhr.
    Contents:
    Concepts and strategy
    Airway related problems
    Vascular access
    Regional anaesthesia
    Medication related problems
    Pre-existing conditions.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital/Print
    major contributors, Matthews Mathai, Susheela Engelbrecht ; contributors, Mercedes Bonet [and others].
    Digital Access WHO 2017
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RG551 .M36 2017
    1
  • Digital
    Ivica Smokovski.
    Summary: This book covers the complexity of diabetes and related complications and presents the socio-economic burden of the disease, taking into account the rising prevalence reaching pandemic proportions and the associated costs. Factors causing high diabetes prevalence and the influence of the pharmaceutical industry are evaluated and solutions for sustainable diabetes care with limited resources are provided, including national focus on providing cost-effective diabetes treatment, nutrition and physical activity, structured diabetes education and centralized National e-Health System. Moreover, elaboration of long-term efforts to curb the diabetes burden through prevention activities are presented in this book. Managing Diabetes in Low Income Countries represents an essential guide for diabetes care clinicians and researchers, medical students and clinicians in training, diabetes policy makers, regulatory authorities, international diabetes and patient organisations all of whom are involved in current clinical practice for diabetes management.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Author
    Abbreviations
    Chapter 1: Burden of Diabetes Prevalence
    References
    Chapter 2: Diabetes Drivers
    References
    Chapter 3: Impact of Diabetes Complications
    References
    Chapter 4: Cost-Effectiveness of Available Diabetes Treatments
    References
    Chapter 5: Cost-Effectiveness of Monitoring Metabolic Control
    References
    Chapter 6: Importance of Structured Diabetes Education
    References
    Chapter 7: Benefits of Centralized e-Health System in Diabetes Care
    References
    Chapter 8: Promise of Nutrition
    References Chapter 9: Focus on Diabetes Prevention
    References
    Index
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    editor: Rishi P Singh.
    Summary: This handbook is an overview of the diagnosis, treatment and long-term management of diabetic retinopathy, within the context of overall long-term diabetes disease management. Diabetes-related eye damage (diabetic retinopathy) is one of the most common complications of diabetes, affecting approximately 30-40% of people with diabetes. The situation is so severe that in countries such as the US and UK, diabetic retinopathy is currently the leading cause of blindness in people age 20 to 74 years old. Fortunately, there are several existing and emerging treatments on the horizon and with adequate control of the underlying diabetes, this condition can be successfully managed.

    Contents:
    Impact of diabetic retinopathy
    A basic scientific understanding of diabetic retinopathy
    Diabetic retinopathy screening
    Medical management of diabetic retinopathy
    Diabetes and cataracts
    Diabetes and glaucoma
    Ocular surface disease in diabetes
    Management of diabetic macular edema
    Management of proliferative diabetic retinopathy
    Future therapies.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    George L. Bakris, Allison Hahr, Romesh Khardori, Daisuke Koya, Mark Molitch, Friedrich C. Prischl, Guntram Schernthaner, Bijin Thajudeen.
    Summary: An overview of the diagnosis, treatment, and long-term management of diabetic-related kidney disease in clinical practice. Includes an evidence-based discussion of currently available and experimental drug therapies currently in development, guided by international consensus guidelines. Ideal for physicians, medical trainees, nurses and other medical professional that regularly screen and treat patients with all types of diabetes.

    Contents:
    Overview
    Stages of disease and clinical features
    Pathogenesis and pathophysiology
    Patient assessment
    Treatment options.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Joseph M. Galante, Matthew J. Martin, Carlos J. Rodriguez, Wade Travis Gordon, editors.
    Summary: This text is designed to present a comprehensive and state-of the-art approach to dismounted complex blast injuries. Sections address care of these patients from the point of injury through rehabilitation. The specific areas addressed include blast mechanics, stabilization and hemorrhage control at the point of injury, early resuscitation at local hospitals, a systematic approach to surgical care, and finally reconstruction and rehabilitation. Specific chapters focus on operative management of pelvic, abdominal, genitourinary, orthopedic, neurological and thoracic injuries. The authors of each chapter, are experts in treating DCBIs that have had direct hands-on experience through military deployments in Iraq and Afghanistan. Each chapter describes patient presentation and an algorithm outlining treatment with support from the literature. The text will conclude with three chapters. The first explores new advances in care that can be applied to these injuries. The second highlights the organization and team approach to care of these patients. Finally, the last chapter describes an actual case, cared for by the editors, that encompasses points from the chapters in the text. Extensive illustrations and flow diagrams are used throughout the text. This text is specifically designed to be a “how to” guide for inexperienced military and civilian providers. The chapters are organized in a step-wise fashion that mirrors the patient’s course from point of injury through their hospital course. Combining authors’ experience with illustrations and algorithm diagrams creates a text that is easy to use as a reference text or basis of training for future military and civilian surgeons.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Naim Kapucu, Alpaslan Özerdem, Abdul-Akeem Sadiq
    Summary: "Managing Emergencies and Crises: Global Perspectives is primarily for graduate level students and instructors who study and research on a wide range of socio-economic and political issues related to the management of 'natural' disasters from a 'social disaster' perspective. From a broad perspective this book covers various concepts including prevention, preparedness, response, and recovery, as well as vulnerability and risk assessment that need to be understood by those in the emergency management field"-- Provided by publisher. "As the scale, frequency, and intensity of crises faced by the world have dramatically increased over the last decade, there is a critical need for a careful stocktaking on the knowledge of managing disasters. Managing Emergencies and Crises: Global Perspectives clearly and comprehensively explores the most important concepts of emergency and crisis management, such as mitigation, protection, prevention, preparedness, response, recovery, and vulnerability and risk assessment, and illustrates them with cases involving disasters and emergencies worldwide. Substantially revised, the Second Edition has been reorganized and includes two new and timely chapters on terrorism and emergency management and public health emergencies and crises. It also provides an emphasis on management and leadership and cross-sector governance from interdisciplinary and global perspectivesKey Features:- Two new chapters: Terrorism and Emergency Management and Public Health Emergencies and Crises. - Diverse scholarly perspectives are presented to guide readers' understanding of various concepts in the emergency and crisis management field. - Rich and diverse case studies illustrate how various stakeholders, including emergency program managers, respond in crisis and emergency management situation. - Navigate eBook Access (included with the print text) provides online or offline access to the digital textbook"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Hazards, Disasters, and Vulnerability
    Prevention, Mitigation, and Preparedness
    Response and Recovery
    Risk Perception and Communication
    Community Disaster Resilience
    Emergency and Crisis Management Stakeholders
    Decision Making in Managing Emergencies and Crises
    Leadership in Managing Emergencies and Crises
    Building an Effective Emergency Management Organization
    Evaluation and Accountability
    Public Health Emergencies and Crises
    Terrorism and Emergency Management
    International Actors and Perspectives
    Future Directions in Emergency and Crisis Management.
    Digital Access R2Library 2023
  • Digital
    Gregory M. Booth, Sarah Frattali, editors.
    Summary: Many primary care clinicians are busy to the point of being overwhelmed and there is not time to do thorough evaluations on every patient. The outpatient clinician must be able to quickly identify and manage the overtly ill but also those with potential or even hidden issues that require a referral to the emergency department. This book provides a concise yet comprehensive summary of the various conditions the primary care practitioner could encounter in his/her office that require emergency department referral. Organized system by system, this manual provides short, readable yet detailed descriptions of situations where the clinician must make the quick decision to escalate the level of care. The book is comprised of thirteen main sections, each detailing a medical specialty and is further broken down into specific conditions within these specialties. The specialties that are featured are cardiology, dermatology, endocrinology, gastroenterology, HEENT, hematology and oncology, infectious disease, nephrology, neurology, gynecology, ophthalmology, psychiatry, pulmonology and urology. The chapters are broken down into five key aspects. First, a brief synopsis of the problem is identified covering the incidence, the risk factors and general information to give the clinician the insight to manage the situation. Next, there is a review of key elements of the history that can elucidate whether the patient has or does not have the emergent condition. Physical exam findings that the clinician can look for during the evaluation are then discussed followed by diagnostics that the clinician can get quickly the same day to help evaluate the situation. Lastly, treatments that can be provided while waiting for the urgent or emergent condition to be evaluated are identified. Written by experts in the field, Managing Emergencies in the Outpatient Setting is a valuable resource for primary care physicians, physician assistants and nurse practitioners alike. .

    Contents:
    1. Cardiovascular Disease
    2. Infectious Disease
    3. Gastroenterology
    4. Neurology
    5. Nephrology
    6. Urology
    7. Obstetrics and Gynecology
    8. Otolaryngology (Ear Nose and Throat)
    9. Pulmonology
    10. Endocrinology
    11. Hematology and Oncology
    12. Ophthalmology
    13. Dermatology
    14. Psychiatry.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access WHO 2018
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RA643 .M337 2018
    1
  • Digital
    Editors: Fernando Perez-Ruiz, Ana Maria Herrero-Beites.
    Summary: "Gout has been a well-known disease for over 2000 years, and is the most common cause of joint inflammation in adult males. It has become apparent that no therapeutic target based on hyperuricemia outcome had been defined. Very few controlled trials were available to test the efficacy and safety of treatments, and no research on diagnosis and management had been done despite data showing that patients with gout were generally improperly treated even in the hands of specialists. In the last 10 years, good-quality evidence on gout impact and management has grown exponentially, renal transporters have been recently identified, and a number of new drugs have been approved or are under current development. This handbook discusses these developments and the future of gout treatment, which now looks promising."--Publisher's website.

    Contents:
    1. Disease overview
    2. Physiopathology of gout
    3. Diagnosis of gout
    4. Treatment of hyperuricemia in gout
    5. Prevention and treatment of inflammation in gout
    6. Appendix.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Print
    Helen Westman, Malinda Itchins, Bernardo L. Rapoport.
    Summary: "Fast Facts: Managing Immune-Related Adverse Events in Oncology, 2nd edition, provides an overview of immuno-oncology and an update on immune checkpoint inhibitors and their associated toxicities, alongside the principles of diagnosing and managing immune-related adverse events, important nursing care considerations and a set of convenient management summaries for quick reference. As such, it is essential reading for all members of the cancer care team."--Provided by publisher
    Digital Access R2Library 2023
  • Digital
    Yinghong Wang, editor.
    Summary: Certain organ toxicities can be severe and life-threatening. Therefore, it is crucial to recognize these disease entities early on to provide prompt and effective treatments to improve the quality of patient care, and enable the continuation of cancer therapy long-term. A clinical handbook with a particular focus in this field is lacking. This handbook focuses on the comprehensive, systematic review of clinical aspects of immunotherapy-induced toxicities in 15 major organ systems. The organs covered include endocrine, eye, gut, heart, kidney, liver, lung, muscular-skeletal, neuro, pancreas and skin etc. A unique feature about this book is the inclusion of perspectives from Anesthesiology, Infectious Disease, and Pathology besides specific organ toxicity management. The contributors are a group of experts offering routine clinical care to patients with most complex and refractory toxicity conditions, conducting pioneering research, and providing the guidance for the clinical practice to the peers and trainees in the field. The topics of each chapter include incidence, clinical presentations, evaluation, management, and long term follow up of each disease entity. There is also a simplified management algorithm or table illustrated in each chapter as well as audio PowerPoint slide deck to provide straightforward general instruction on the evaluation and treatment.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Introduction
    Contents
    Contributors
    Chapter 1: Anesthesia
    General Recommendations
    Organ-Specific Treatment Strategies
    References
    Chapter 2: Cardiology (Heart)
    Available Immune Checkpoint Inhibitors
    Cardiac Side Effect Profile of Immune Checkpoint Inhibitors
    Mechanisms of Myocardial Toxicity
    ICI-Associated Myocarditis
    Timing Onset of Myocarditis
    Diagnostic Testing Considerations in ICI-Associated Myocarditis
    Troponin
    Natriuretic Peptide
    Electrocardiogram (ECG)
    Echocardiography
    Cardiac Magnetic Resonance (CMR) Imaging Endomyocardial Biopsy (EMB)
    Management
    Advanced Management
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 3: Dermatology (Skin)
    Epidemiology
    Clinical Characteristics
    Morbilliform/Maculopapular Rash (MPR)
    Pruritus
    Eczematous Dermatitis
    Urticaria
    Lichenoid/Lichen Planus-Like Eruption
    Psoriasiform Dermatitis
    Vitiligo
    Granulomatous Dermatitis
    Xerosis
    Autoimmune Bullous Disorders
    Severe Cutaneous Adverse Reactions
    Erythema Multiforme (EM)
    Neutrophilic Dermatoses
    Sweet's Syndrome (Acute Febrile Neutrophilic Dermatosis)
    Pyoderma Gangrenosum Follicular Eruptions
    Rheumatologic Disease
    Dermatomyositis and polymyositis
    Mucosal Toxicities
    Hair Toxicities
    Nail irCAEs
    Less Common irCAEs
    Grover's Disease
    Keratoacanthoma/Cutaneous Squamous Cell Carcinoma
    Evaluation
    Diagnostic Tests for Specific irCAEs
    Bullous Pemphigoid
    Dermatitis Herpetiformis
    Pemphigus Vulgaris-Like Lesions
    Urticaria
    Hair Toxicities
    Rheumatologic Diseases
    Treatment
    Treatment Pearls
    Pruritus
    Eczematous
    Urticaria
    Lichenoid
    Psoriasiform
    Vitiligo
    Bullous Pemphigoid
    Alopecia Mucosal Toxicities (Including Lichenoid Eruptions)
    Nail Toxicities
    Neutrophilic Dermatoses
    Granulomatous
    SCARs
    Erythema Multiforme
    Sarcoidosis
    Treatment Recommendations
    Long-Term Complication and Follow-Up
    References
    Chapter 4: Endocrine
    Introduction
    Checkpoint Inhibitor-Induced Hypophysitis
    Epidemiology
    Clinical Characteristics
    Evaluation
    Treatment
    Long-Term Complications and Follow-Up
    Thyroid Dysfunction
    Epidemiology
    Clinical Characteristics
    Evaluation
    Treatment
    Long-Term Complications and Follow-Up Primary Adrenal Insufficiency
    Epidemiology
    Clinical Presentation
    Treatment
    Checkpoint Inhibitor-Induced Diabetes
    Epidemiology
    Clinical Characteristics
    Evaluation
    Treatment
    Long-Term Complications and Follow-Up
    References
    Chapter 5: Gastroenterology (GI)
    Epidemiology and Risk Factors
    Type of ICI Agent
    Type of Cancer
    The Patient
    Clinical Presentation and Evaluation
    Clinical Presentation
    Clinical Evaluation
    Biochemical and Stool Evaluation
    IMC, Infections, and Its Management
    Imaging
    Endoscopic Evaluation
    Histologic Evaluation
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Print
    editors, Timothy R. Shope, Andrew N. Hashikawa.
    Summary: This guide provides child care directors, teachers, and caregivers with essential information on infectious diseases in group care settings. It includes a robust section of more than 55 quick reference fact sheets on common infectious diseases and symptoms. Additionally, it includes forms that can be photocopied and used with families. As always, the reference is easy to use, providing clear, authoritative information on infectious diseases.

    Contents:
    Overview of Managing Infectious Diseases in Child Care and Schools
    Reduce the Risk of Infection: Practice Prevention
    Health of Educators and Other Staff Members
    Recognizing the Ill Child: Inclusion/Exclusion Criteria
    Signs and Symptoms Chart
    Quick Reference Sheet
    Emergencies and Disasters: Infectious Disease Outbreaks, Epidemics, Pandemics, and Bioterrorism
    Sample Letters, Forms, and Relevant Resources.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks [2023]
  • Digital
    edited by Susan S. Aronson and Timothy R. Shope.
    Summary: This award-winning guide provides child care directors, teachers, and caregivers with essential information on the prevention and management of infectious diseases in group care settings. The newly revised and updated fifth edition is aligned with the most recent version of the premier AAP source of information on infectious diseases, Red Book®: 2018-2021 Report of the Committee on Infectious Diseases, 31st Edition.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2019
  • Digital
    editor, Jane Meschan Foy
    Summary: This all-new point-of-care clinical support chart aids physicians in responding to the mental health needs of their patients encountered in everyday practice.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2021
  • Digital
    Rohit Aggarwal, Chester V. Oddis, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Donald R Taylor, MD.
    Summary: This text will provide readers with a thorough review of the complex condition of chronic pain and addictions. The book was originally commissioned due to the need in the field for more literature on the topic. This concise pocket book will review epidemiology, clinical features, diagnosis, and medical management of both chronic pain and addiction. Busy healthcare professionals will benefit from this text, which will not only cover the foundation of the management of both conditions and together, but discuss up-to-date national and international treatment guidelines, upcoming therapies and REMS.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Introduction to Chronic Pain
    Introduction to Managing Patients with Addictions and Chronic Pain
    Managing Patients with Chronic Pain and Addiction
    Case Studies
    Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Hania González.
    Contents:
    Introduction to obesity
    understanding a patient with obesity
    preventative care and behaviour modification
    medical management of the patient with obesity
    surgical management of the patient with obesity
    long-term support for the patient with obesity.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Michael Haase, Anja Haase-Fielitz, editors.
    Summary: As the number of people aged 65 years and above rises, physicians are increasingly confronted by elderly patients with impaired renal function, altered drug metabolism and multiple comorbidities. This book examines in detail the nature of renal injury in the elderly and its optimal management. A wide range of key topics are covered, including end-stage renal disease, diabetic nephropathy, acute kidney injury, drug metabolism and renal toxicity, dialysis and its complications and the use of renal transplantation. In addition, the assessment of glomerular filtration rate in the elderly and the role of novel renal biomarkers are carefully examined. Quality of life issues, the significance of other age-related medical problems and end of life care are also discussed. This book will be of value not only to nephrologists but also to general practitioners, medical students, intensivists, cardiologists, pharmacologists and those working in related specialties.

    Contents:
    Managing kidney injury in older patients
    Incidence, risk factors, and outcome
    Assessing glomerular filtration rate in older adults
    Risk assessment and diagnostic criteria of acute kidney injury: the role of tubular damage markers
    Pathogenesis and susceptibility to injury
    Drug kinetics, dosing, and renal toxicity in older adults
    Acute dialysis in older patients
    Quality of life, functional status, and specific medical problems in older patients
    End-of-life decision making in older patients with acute kidney injury and end-stage renal disease: ethical perspectives.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    David A. Jobes ; foreword by Marsha M. Linehan.
    Contents:
    Collaborative assessment and management of suicidality: a suicide-specific clinical intervention within contemporary health care
    The SSF and the evolution of CAMS
    Systems of clinical care and optimizing the use of CAMS
    CAMS risk assessment: the collaborative use of the SSF
    CAMS treatment planning: coauthoring a suicide-specific treatment plan
    CAMS interim sessions: tracking suicide risk assessments and treatment plan updates
    CAMS clinical outcomes and disposition: lessons in living and a postsuicidal life
    CAMS as a means of decreasing malpractice liability
    CAMS adaptations and future developments.
  • Digital
    edited by Nicholas Panay, Paula Briggs, Gabor T. Kovacs.
    Summary: "The menopause marks the permanent cessation of menstruation and heralds the transition in a woman's life from a reproductive state to a non-reproductive one. Whilst the average age of this landmark varies slightly across the world, the menopause generally occurs in the early 50s, and is only truly affected by factors such as smoking, and medical and surgical induction of the menopausal state. However, clinical symptoms may precede this, and the physiological changes which occur with the menopausal transition may begin several years prior to the onset of any manifestations. The basis of the clinical and biochemical changes associated with the perimenopausal period is the depletion of ovarian follicles to a critical level"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Physiology of the Menstrual Cycle and Changes in the Perimenopause / Philip J. Dutton and Janice M. Rymer
    Clinical Features of the Menopause/Post-menopause / Gab Kovacs
    The Ovarian Reserve : Predicting the Menopause / Richard A. Anderson
    Premature Ovarian Insufficiency : Fertility Options / Tony Rutherford and Gab Kovacs
    Premature Ovarian Insufficiency : Optimizing Quality of Life and Long-Term Effects / Vujovic Svetlana, Miomira Ivovic, Milina Tancic Gajic, Ljiljana Marina and Svetlana Dragojevic-Dikic
    Natural Hormone Replacement Therapy After Menopause by Ovarian Tissue / Jacques Donnez and Marie-Madeleine Dolmans
    Migraine in the Menopause / E. Anne MacGregor
    Psychological aspects of the menopause / Myra S. Hunter
    Memory and Mood in the Menopause / Michael C. Craig
    Libido and Sexual Function in the Menopause / Claudine Domoney
    Vulvo-Vaginal Atrophy (VVA) / Rossella E. Nappi
    Pelvic Floor, Urinary Problems and the Menopause / Marco Gambacciani, Eleonora Russo, Magdalena Montt Guevara and Tommaso Simoncini
    The Effect of Menopause of the Musculoskeletal System / Jean Calleja-Agius and Mark P. Brincat
    Hormonal Management of Osteoporosis During the Menopause / Panagiotis G. Anagnostis and John C. Stevenson
    Cardiovascular Disease and the Menopause / Marta Caretto, Andrea Giannini, Tommaso Simoncini and Andrea R. Genazzani
    Gynecological Pathology in the Menopause (Excluding Cancers) / John Eden
    Nutrition and Weight Gain in the Menopause / Nigel Denby
    The Use of Estrogens and Progestogens in Menopausal Hormone Therapy / Kugajeevan Vigneswaran and Haitham Hamoda
    Androgen Therapy for Postmenopausal Women / Susan R. Davis
    Contraception for the Perimenopausal Woman / Paula Briggs and Nicola Kersey
    Hormone Therapy and Cancer / Anne Gompel
    Menopausal Hormone Therapy (MHT) and Venous Thrombosis / Sven O. Skouby and Johannes J. Sidelmann
    The Risk-Benefit Analysis of Menopausal Hormone Therapy in the Menopause / Elizabeth Stephenson and Tim Hillard
    Selective Estrogen Receptor Modulators (SERMs) and Menopausal Hormone Therapy (MHT) / Steven R. Goldstein
    Non-hormonal Treatments for Menopausal Symptoms / Jenifer Sassarini
    Alternative Therapies for the Management of Menopausal Symptoms /
    Edzard Ernst and Paul Posadzki
    Menopause Symptoms / Sarah Gray
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    Kieron P. O'Connor, Marc E. Lavoie, Benjamin Schoendorff.
    Summary: A pioneering guide for the management of tics and habit disorders Managing Tic and Habit Disorders: A Cognitive Psychophysiological Approach with Acceptance Strategies is a complete client and therapist program for dealing with tics and habit disorders. Groundbreaking and evidence-based, it considers tics and habit disorders as part of the same spectrum and focuses on the personal processes that are activated prior to a tic and habit rather than the tic or habit itself. By drawing on acceptance and mindfulness strategies to achieve mental and physical flexibility in preparing action, individuals can release unnecessary tension, expend less effort and ultimately establish control over their tic or habit. The authors explain how to identify the contexts of thoughts, feelings and activities that precede tic or habit onset, understand how self-talk and language can trigger tic onset, and move beyond unhelpful ways of dealing with emotions - particularly in taking thoughts about emotions literally. They also explore how individuals can plan action more smoothly by drawing on existing skills and strengths, and overcome shame by becoming less self-critical and more self-compassionate. They conclude with material on maintaining gains, developing new goals, and creating a more confident and controlled lifestyle. Managing Tic and Habit Disorders is a thoughtful and timely guide for those suffering from this sometimes all-consuming disorder, and the professionals who set out to help them.

    Contents:
    1. The nature of tics and habits
    2. Evaluation and assessment
    3. Motivation and preparation for change
    4. Developing awareness
    5. Identifying at-risk contexts
    6. Reducing tension
    7. Increasing flexibility
    8. Addressing styles of planning action
    9. Experiential avoidance, cognitive fusion, and the matrix
    10. Emotional regulation and overcoming the habit-shame loop
    11. Achieving goals and maintaining gains.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Stefano Guerriero, Wellington P. Martins, Juan Luis Alcazar, editors.
    Summary: This book is a practical guide to the performance of ultrasonography in women of reproductive age for the diagnosis and treatment of infertility. The coverage includes the use of ultrasonography for evaluation of the various disorders associated with infertility, such as endometriosis, anovulatory disorders, tubal disease, and adenomyosis; its role in assisted reproductive techniques; and its application to assess the viability and early complications of pregnancy. The more recent advances in the field are all addressed, including assessment of ovarian reserve, new classifications of uterine malformations using three-dimensional ultrasonography, and novel ultrasonographic modalities for the evaluation of tubal patency. Within each chapter, the focus is especially on the performance of the ultrasound examination, with highlighting of useful technical tips. The contributors are acknowledged experts from across the world, and the book will be of value for physicians, ultrasonographers, and other medical staff involved in caring for patients with fertility issues.

    Contents:
    Part 1 Ultrasound evaluation of women with infertility: Assessment of the functional ovarian reserve.-Anovulatory disorders
    Tubal diseases
    Endometrial cavity
    Adenomyosis and fibroids
    Congenital uterine anomalies
    Endometrioma and pelvic endometriosis
    Saline/gel/foam for examining the endometrial cavity and tubal patency
    Part 2 Ultrasound in assisted reproductive techniques: Monitoring ovulation induction and controlled ovarian stimulation
    Oocyte retrieval
    Ultrasound guidance during embryo transfer
    Part 3 Initial ultrasound evaluation in women with positive pregnancy test: Evaluation of pregnancy viability
    Ectopic pregnancy and pregnancy of unknown location.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Mariagrazia Stracquadanio.
    Summary: This book is a practical clinical guide to the correct diagnosis and appropriate treatment of hyperandrogenism, an extremely common endocrine disease that can affect women from adolescence to menopause. The volume covers topics ranging from the causes to the treatment, providing an expert point of view on the assessment and the differential diagnosis. Since the hyper androgenic syndromes are often associated with menstrual disorders, it is a valuable and easy-to-use resource, not only for endocrinologists but for gynecologists as well. Thanks to its clear approach, it is also useful for all specialists who deal with this women's disease.

    Contents:
    1. Definition, epidemiology, genetics
    2. Causes of hyperandrogenism: Ovarian diseases
    Adrenal diseases
    Iatrogenic forms and other diseases
    3. Clinical features and assessment of hyperandrogenism: Hirsutism
    Acne
    Androgenic alopecia
    4. Differential Diagnosis for clinical use
    5. Treatment: Hormonal and antiandrogenic treatment
    Non-hormonal treatment
    Topical therapies.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Raymond A. Pensy, John V. Ingari, editors.
    Summary: This practical and generously illustrated text presents the current concepts regarding the management of the mangled extremity, including microsurgery, vascular surgery, free tissue, nerve, hand, and replantation surgery. Since the advent of microsurgical reconstruction, significant progress has been made in the areas of replantation, free tissue transfer, as well as the refinement of skeletal fixation techniques. The scope will encompass the initial triage of a patient with a mangled upper or lower extremity, the initial and subsequent reconstructive efforts, to include skeletal fixation, vascular and soft tissue reconstruction, muscle and tendon transfers, psychological impact, therapy requirements, amputation considerations, and current data on salvage versus amputation in these scenarios. Case examples will be included to add further depth and context to the techniques and recommendations provided. Presenting these surgical challenges in detail, The Mangled Extremity will be an ideal resource for orthopedic and trauma surgeons, residents and fellows, as well as emergency surgeons facing these intense, traumatic injuries.

    Contents:
    Rebuilding the Mangled Extremity: Foundation to Rooftop
    The Triage of the Patient with the Mangled Extremity
    Temporizing and Definitive Skeletal Fixation for the Mangled Lower Extremity
    Temporizing and Definitive Skeletal Fixation for the Mangled Upper Extremity
    Revascularization of the Mangled Limb
    Replantation of the Mangled Upper Extremity
    Non-Microsurgical Soft Tissue Coverage of the Mangled Limb
    Microsurgical Reconstruction for the Mangled Limb
    Growing Bone: Lengthening and Grafting
    Restoring Function: Tendon and Nerve Transfers
    Functional Muscle Transfer for the Mangled Limb
    The Psychological Impact of the Mangled Limb
    Therapy Requirements and Goals of the Patient with the Mangled Limb
    Non-Opioid Strategies for Pain Management
    Salvage vs. Amputation: Lower Extremity and Upper Extremity
    Orthotic Management of the Mangled Extremity
    Prosthetic Care for the Mangled Extremity
    The Mangled Extremity: Osseointegration.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Chittaranjan Kole, editor.
    Summary: This book represents the first comprehensive compilation of deliberations on botany; genetic resources; genetic diversity analysis; classical genetics & traditional breeding; in vitro culture & genetic transformation; detailed information on molecular maps & mapping of economic genes and QTLs; whole genome sequencing of the nuclear genome and sequencing of chloroplast genome; and elucidation of functional genomics. It also addresses alternate flowering, a unique problem in mango, and discusses currently available genomic resources and databases. Gathering contributions by globally reputed experts, the book will benefit the students, teachers, and scientists in academia and at private companies interested in horticulture, genetics, breeding, pathology, entomology, physiology, molecular genetics and breeding, in vitro culture & genetic engineering, and structural and functional genomics.

    Contents:
    Mango: The King of Fruits
    Botany of Mango
    Mango Propagation
    Genetic Resources in Mango
    Genetic diversity analysis of mango
    Alternate flowering in mango
    Classical genetics and breeding
    In Vitro Culture and genetic transformation in mango
    Molecular mapping and breeding in mango
    The genome sequence and transcription studies in mango (Mangifera indica L.)
    The mango chloroplast genome
    Mango functional genomics
    Mango genomic resources and databases.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    [edited by] Jeremy Farrar [and 5 others].
    Summary: From the difficult to diagnose to the difficult to treat, Manson's Tropical Diseases prepares you to effectively handle whatever your patients may have contracted. Featuring an internationally recognized editorial team, global contributors, and expert authors, this revised and updated medical reference book provides you with the latest coverage on parasitic and infectious diseases from around the world. Incorporate the latest therapies into your practice, such as recently approved drugs and new treatment options.Find what you need easily and apply it quickly with highlighted key information, convenient boxes and tables, extensive cross-referencing, and clinical management diagrams.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Print
    Comité Asesor de la OPS/OMS en Bacteriología de la Tuberculosis.
    Contents:
    Pt.
    1. La Muestra; El Examen microscópico.--pt.
    2. El Cultivo del Mycobacterium tuberculosis.--pt.
    3. Sensibilidad del Mycobacterium tuberculosis a lsa drogas; La Identificación de micobacterias.--pt.
    4. La Organización de los laboratorios de bacteriología de la tuberculosis; medidas de seguridad.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RA639 .P187
    2
  • Digital/Print
    [por] Gilbert ... [et al.].
    Contents:
    1. Enfermedades infecciosas y diatésicas. Intoxicaciones. Enfermedades de la sangre / [por C. Doptor, ... et al.]
    2. Enfermedades del aparato respiratorio. Enfermedades del aparato circulatorio / por M. Loeper ... [et al.].
    Digital Access Google Books [1916?]-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L61 .C46
    1
  • Digital
    edited by, Angela D. Klimaszewski, RN, MSN, [and 5 others].
    Digital Access R2Library 2015
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Derek L. Milne and Robert P. Reiser.
    Contents:
    Introduction and overview of evidence-based CBT supervision
    Guiding principles behind our CBT supervision manual
    The context for CBT supervision
    Training CBT supervisors
    The alliance in CBT supervision
    Goal-setting in CBT supervision
    Facilitating learning in CBT supervision
    Feedback and evaluation in CBT supervision
    Support and guidance in CBT supervision
    Concluding remarks
    Appendix: Video catalogue
    Index.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Mark W. Leitman.
    Contents:
    Medical history
    Measurement of vision and refraction
    Neuro-ophthalmology
    External structures
    The orbit
    Slit lamp examination and glaucoma
    The retina and vitreous.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Mark W. Leitman, MD.
    Summary: "The eye exam depends on many sophisticated, and costly instruments, together with highly trained professionals to operate them. Ophthalmologist - The ophthalmologist attended 4 years of college, 4 years of medical (MD) or osteopathic (DO) school, and 3 years of specialty eye residency training. They may remain general ophthalmologists, but now, more often than not, spend an additional 1-2 years subspecializing in corneal and external disease, vitreoretinal disease, cataracts, glaucoma, neuro-ophthalmology, oculoplastic surgery, pathology, pediatric (strabismus), or uveitis. Optometrist (OD) - The optometrist completes 4 years of college and 4 years of optometry school. They perform similar tasks to the ophthalmologist, with subspecialty fellowships similar to ophthalmology, but with stress on medical, rather than surgical skills.Opticians (ABO, American Board of Opticians) - Opticians grind the lenses and put them in frames (laboratory optician) or fit them on the patient (dispensing optician). Their training and certification is highly variable from state to state, but often includes 2 years at a community college. Ocularists (BCO, BRDO, FASO) - Ocularists are few in number and often learn their craft by apprenticeship. They have to pass tests for certification. Their job is to fit the rarely needed sclera shell after removal of an eye. (Fig. 423-426). Ophthalmic technicians - Ophthalmic technicians have varying degrees of licensure. With medical supervision, they may take medical histories; measure eye pressure; do refractions and visual field testing; take visual activities; teach contact lens fitting; and often assist in using the following diagnostic tests"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Medical history
    Measurement of vision and refraction
    Neuro-ophthalmology
    External structures
    The orbit
    Slit lamp examination
    Glaucoma
    Uvea
    Cataracts
    Retina.
    Digital Access Wiley 2021
  • Print
    [American Heart Association, Subcommittee on Emergency Cardiac Care, Working Group on CPR-ECC in Basic Cardiac Life Support].
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC732 .M297 1981
    1
  • Digital
    Judd W. Landsberg.
    Summary: "Clinical Practice Manual for Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, by Judd W. Landsberg, MD, is a unique point-of-care manual that provides essential information on managing inpatients and outpatients with common, serious respiratory and internal medicine presentation and problems. Easy-to-follow diagnostic and therapeutic algorithms are accompanied by case-based illustrations encountered on a daily basis by attendings, fellows, residents, and students. The bulleted format, concise approach, and familiar examples provide a framework for effective teaching, learning, and patient care"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Section 1: Pulmonary. Approach to oxygenation, hypoxemia and hypoxemic respiratory failure
    Ventilation and hypercapnic respiratory failure
    The chest radiograph
    Evaluating chronic dyspnea, dyspnea on exertion and exercise limitation
    Heart failure for the pulmonary critical care physician
    Pulmonary hypertension
    Exacerbation of obesity hypoventilation syndrome
    Lung cancer
    Aspergillus lung disease
    Oral anaerobic lung infection, aspiration pneumonia, lung abscess and empyema
    Chronic cough
    Cough syncope
    Bronchiectasis
    Sarcoidosis
    Acute venous thromboembolic disease
    Pneumothorax (PTX) and bronchopleural fistulas (BPF): air in the pleural space
    Smoking cessation
    Diffuse parenchymal lung disease and its mimics
    Section 2: Critical care. Shock
    Invasive mechanical ventilation
    Non-invasive ventilatory support with BIPAP
    Tracheostomy
    Hemoptysis
    Salt and water: the physiology of volume and tonicity regulation
    Diabetic emergencies
    The obtunded inpatient with normal vital signs
    Bedside presentations in the ICU
    Code status
    Advanced care planning and the family meeting-
    Compassionate, terminal extubation
    ICU pearls.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Maurene McQuestion, Lorraine C. Drapek, Mary Ellyn Witt.
    Summary: "Advances in technology, research, and evidence-based practice have led to improvements in the care of patients receiving radiation therapy. The knowledge and expertise required by nurses must focus on the needs of patients who come into their care at any point across the trajectory of the cancer journey. Nurses may work with patients at varying stages of the radiation therapy process and in a wide range of settings. Regardless, however, the need to be knowledgeable about the symptoms and side effects associated with this treatment is essential for nurses caring for this patient population. The Oncology Nursing Society has published the fifth edition of Manual for Radiation Oncology Nursing Practice and Education to support nurses who care for patients who will receive, are receiving, or have received radiation therapy. The fifth edition features significant updates and changes to the content to reflect advances in technology, treatment options, and symptom manage¬ment. New sections have been added based on input from radiation oncology nurses or as a result of changes in treatment options, the needs of specific patient populations, and observations from clinical practice. New topics include patients with cognitive changes and dementia; general distress and coping; patients with mental illness; special populations, such as women who are pregnant, ado-lescents, and young adults; special needs related to late effects of treatment and cardiac toxicities; and treatment modalities, includ¬ing cobalt therapy and immunotherapy. This manual serves as an essential resource for individual nurses new to working in a radiation therapy set¬ting as well as to nurses wanting to advance their knowledge in radiation biology and protection, diverse radiation therapy modalities, combination treatments, site- or disease-specific concerns, symptom management, special populations, and care during transition points. Additionally, this manual can be a resource to advanced practice clinicians, educators, and administrators, with a focus on support for nursing staff seeking the education and skills required to care for patients receiving radiation therapy and their families"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Scope of practice for the registered nurse
    Practice of radiation oncology
    Radiation protection and safety
    Symptom management
    Site-specific management
    Disease-specific management
    Oncologic emergencies : spinal cord compression and superior vena cava syndrome
    Modality-specific management
    Special populations
    Chemical modifiers of treatment
    General radiation oncology issues
    Patient, caregiver, and family education.
    Digital Access R2Library 2021
  • Digital
    Eduardo Casas Rojo, Covadonga Fernandez-Golfin, José Luis Zamorano, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Benjamin D. Nicholson, Michael J. Vitto, Harinder S. Dhindsa, editors.
    Summary: Ultrasound has rapidly become integral to the practice of emergency medicine. Over the past few years, with improvements in device size and cost, there has been increasing interest in exploring the utility of ultrasound in the prehospital environment. Much of the available literature on ultrasound in the emergency setting focuses on care delivered in emergency departments and intensive care units within the developed world. As a result, most resources are inappropriate and inadequate for doctors and non-physicians practicing in out-of-hospital environments that, by definition, are resource limited. This manual fills that gap by focusing on simplified discussions of ultrasound studies, ultrasound physics, and research that impacts out-of-hospital care in order to meet the needs of prehospital and austere providers. The manual discusses the use of ultrasound for diagnosis in out-of-hospital care, advanced noninvasive monitoring of patients, and safety in performing procedures common to the prehospital and austere environment. As is the approach for prehospital education, the chapters are complaint based and not diagnosis based where applicable. Chapters cover ultrasound image interpretation and basic physics; common image adjustments to improve image quality; unique challenges found in urban prehospital environments, austere/wilderness environments, tactical environments, and military special operations environments; and initial training, quality improvement/assurance programs, and credentialing. It also includes a section on procedures such as pericardiocentesis, vascular access, cricothyroidotomy, and others specific to austere providers. The Manual of Austere and Prehospital Ultrasound is an essential resource for physicians and related professionals, residents, and medical students in emergency medicine, civilian and military EMS providers, and critical care flight paramedics and nurses.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Introduction and Background
    Chapter 1: Physics and Knobs
    Part 2: Considerations for Specific Environments
    Chapter 2: Ground EMS
    Chapter 3: Helicopter Emergency Medical Services
    Chapter 4: Military Special Operations and Prolonged Field Care
    Chapter 5: Considerations for Ultrasound in the Urban Search and Rescue (USAR) Environment
    Part 3: Diagnosis
    Chapter 6: Shortness of Breath
    Chapter 7: Chest Pain
    Chapter 8: Trauma
    Chapter 9: Undifferentiated Hypotension
    Chapter 10: Advanced Diagnostic Topic for Austere Providers: Abdominal Pain
    Chapter 11: Advanced Diagnostic Topic for Austere Providers: Ocular
    Chapter 12: Advanced Diagnostic Topic for Austere Providers: Obstetric
    Chapter 13: Advanced Diagnostic Topic for Austere Providers: Skin and soft tissue
    Chapter 14: Advanced Diagnostic Topic for Austere Providers: Skeletal Trauma
    Part 4: Monitoring
    Chapter 15: Ultrasound Guidance of Resuscitation in Shock
    Chapter 16: Endotracheal tube placement
    Chapter 17: Intracranial Pressure Evaluation
    Chapter 18: Bladder Volume and Assessment of Hydronephrosis
    Part 5: Procedures
    Chapter 19: Vascular Access
    Chapter 20: Pericardiocentesis
    Chapter 21: Surgical cricothyroidotomy
    Chapter 22: Advanced Procedure Topic for Austere Providers: Thoracentesis
    Chapter 23: Advanced Procedure Topic for Austere Providers: Upper extremity nerve blocks
    Chapter 24: Advanced Procedure Topic for Austere Providers: Lower extremity nerve blocks
    Part 6: Training
    Chapter 25: Initial Training, Credentialing, and Quality Assurance/Quality Improvement Processes
    Chapter 26: Care of Equipment.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by David L. Brown, David Warriner.
    Contents:
    Cardiac Physical Examination in the Cardiac Intensive Care Unit
    Acute Myocardial Infarction
    Acute Myocardial Infarction: Adjunctive Pharmacologic Therapies
    Right Ventricular Myocardial Infarction
    Mechanical Complications of Acute Myocardial Infarction
    Cardiogenic Shock
    Acute Heart Failure and Pulmonary Edema
    Acute Fulminant Myocarditis
    Stress (Takotsubo) Cardiomyopathy
    Cardiorenal Syndrome Type 1
    Sudden Cardiac Death
    Ventricular Tachycardia
    Diagnosis and Treatment of Unstable Supraventricular Tachycardia
    Acute Presentations of Valvular Heart Disease
    Hypertensive Emergencies
    Acute Aortic Syndromes
    Inotropic and Vasoactive Agents
    Intensive Diuresis and Ultrafiltration
    Antidysrhythmic Electrophysiology and Pharmacotherapy
    Central Venous and Arterial Access Procedures
    Temporary Cardiac Pacing
    Pericardial Tamponade
    Invasive Hemodynamic Monitoring
    Temporary Mechanical Circulatory Support Devices
    Ventricular Assist Device Therapy in Advanced Heart Failure.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital/Print
    Bradley J. Harlan, Albert Starr, Fredric M. Hawrin.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Springer
    Springer
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: Oversize (Downstairs)
    RD598 .H32
    2
  • Digital
    Chiara Lestuzzi, Stefano Oliva, Francesco Ferraù, editors.
    Contents:
    I. Introductory aspects
    II. Cardiac problems as a consequence of cancer
    III. Oncologic treatments and cardiotoxicity
    IV. Cardiac tumors
    Improving the cooperation between oncologists, cardiologists, and general practitioners.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    editor, Brian P. Griffin, Venu Menon ; guest editors, Joseph M. Bumgarner, Chetan P. Huded, Newton B. Wiggins.
    Summary: "Publisher's Note: Products purchased from 3rd Party sellers are not guaranteed by the Publisher for quality, authenticity, or access to any online entitlements included with the product. An ideal reference for residents, fellows, practitioners, and nurse practitioners, Manual of Cardiovascular Medicine, 5th Edition is a concise, up-to-date overview of key topics in cardiology. Using a practical, outline format, this best-selling title presents evidence-based approaches to cardiovascular diagnosis, diseases, and treatment - perfect for daily practice or exam preparation. A new, larger format and content that is thoroughly up to date; organized by disease and treatment so you can find what you're looking for quickly. With a focus on guidelines and the evidence basis for cardiovascular disease management, coverage includes approaches to common clinical syndromes and investigations, including drug therapy. Updated content with the latest innovations in cardiovascular medicine- including percutaneous approaches to valve disease, device management of cardiogenic shock, and the heart in the athlete. Clear diagrams, high-quality ECGs, and helpful summary tables provide excellent visual reinforcement to the text. Authoritative perspectives from the experienced staff and fellows at the Cleveland Clinic provide practical guidance in performance of common cardiovascular procedures and integration of devices.Enrich Your eBook Reading Experience with Enhanced Video, Audio and Interactive Capabilities! Read directly on your preferred device(s), such as computer, tablet, or smartphone Easily convert to audiobook, powering your content with natural language text-to-speech Adapt for unique reading needs, supporting learning disabilities, visual/auditory impairments, second-language or literacy challenges, and more"-- Provided by publisher. "The 5th edition of the Manual of Cardiovascular Medicine has been extensively updated and revised"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Section VIII: Preventive cardiology. Dyslipidemia / Mohamed B. Elshazly, Leslie Cho
    Nonlipd cardiovascular risk factors / Donald Clark III
    Diabetes and the heart / Khendi White Solaru, Haitham Ahmed, Venu Menon. Section IX: Noninvasive assessment. Exercise electrocardiographic testing / Rayji S. Tsutsui
    Nuclear cardiac imaging / Brett W. Sperry, Wael A. Jaber
    Stress echocardiography / Jimmy L. Kerrigan
    Testing for myocardial viability / Terence Hill, Patrick Collier
    Cardiovascular computed tomography including calcium storing / Bo Xu, Christine Jellis
    Cardiovascular magnetic resonance imaging / Serge C. Harb. Section X: Electrophysiologic procedures. Electrophysiologic studies / Newton B. Wiggins, Thomas D. Callahan
    Cardiac resynchronization therapy / Mohamed B. Elshazly, John Rickard
    Cardiac pacing / Joseph M. Bumgarner
    Antitachycardia devices / Joseph M. Bumgarner
    Cather Ablation / Corey M. Coleman, Thomas D. Callahan. Section XI: Common cardiology procedures. Common ECG patterns / Salim H. Ahmed ... [et al.]
    Temporary cardiac pacing / Erich L. Kiel, Bryan J. Baranowski
    Electrical cardioversion / Corey M. Coleman
    Right heart catherization / Grant W. Reed, Venugopal Menon
    Endomyocardial biopsy / Antonio L. Perez, W. H. Wilson Tang
    Short-term mechanical circulatory support device / Grant W. Reed ... [et al.]
    Left heart catheterization / Samuel E. Horr, Amar Krisshnaswamy
    Percutaneous coronary intervention / Daniel M. Shivapour, Amar Krishnaswamy, Samir R. Kapadia
    Percutaneous structural heart disease procedures / Michael J. Johnson, Amar Krishnaswamy
    Transthoracic echocardiography / Albree Tower-Rader
    Transesophageal echocardiogarphy / Jorge Betancor, Maran Thamiliarasan
    Pericardiocentesis / Carlos L. Alviar, Brian P. Griffin.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library (Emergency)
    LWW Health Library (Cardiology)
  • Digital
    Giulio Agnetti, Merry L. Lindsey, D. Brian Foster, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction: why proteomic is important to you and the broad scientific community
    State-of-the-Art in Cardiac Proteomics
    Pitfalls to be avoided in experimental design
    Proteomic workflow: one size does not fit all
    Bottom-up Proteomics
    Top-Down Proteomics
    Targeted Proteomics
    Data Analysis and Data Mining
    Post-translational Modifications in the Cardiac Proteome
    Taylored Approaches to Study Post-translational Modifications
    Concluding Remarks: Proteomics AD 2025.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    P496.P2 N2 1950
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Mike Sharland [and twenty-seven others].
    Summary: This manual gives information on the causative organisms, epidemiology and clinical features of all important childhood infections. It includes guidance on the clinical management of the infections and on steps to be taken to prevent future cases.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    editors-in-chief, Larry F. Chu, Andrea J. Traynor, and Viji Kurup.
    Contents:
    Section I. Practice of anesthesiology
    section II. Monitoring
    section III. Equipment and procedures
    section IV. Pharmacology
    section V. Intraoperative fluid management and blood component therapy
    section VI. Neuraxial and regional anesthesia
    section VII. Anesthesia and comorbid diseases
    section VIII. Pediatric anesthesia
    section IX. Cardiac anesthesia
    section X. Obstetric anesthesia
    Section XI. Anesthetic concerns in other subspecialty anesthesia
    section XII. Postoperative concerns in anesthesia
    section XIII. Crisis management algorithms in anesthesia
    section XIV. Atlas of clincial procedures
    section XV. Atlas of preipheral nerve block procedures
    section XVI. Atlas of echocardiography.
    Digital Access Ovid 2021
  • Print
    researched and approved by Chicago Dietetic Association and South Suburban Dietetic Association of Cook and Will Counties.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RM216 .M29 1981
    1
  • Digital
    editors in chief, James H. Jorgensen, Emeritus, Department of Pathology, University of Texas Health Science Center, San Antonio, Texas, Michael A. Pfaller, T2 Biosystems, Lexington, Massachusetts, and Professor Emeritus, University of Iowa College of Medicine, Iowa City, Iowa ; volume editors, Karen C. Carroll, Department of Pathology, Division of Microbiology, The Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine, Baltimore, Maryland [and 4 others].
    Digital Access Wiley 2015
  • Digital/Print
    editors-in-chief, Karen C. Carroll, Division of Medical Microbiology, Department of Pathology, The Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine, Baltimore, Maryland, Michael A. Pfaller, Departments of Pathology and Epidemiology (emeritus), University of Iowa, Iowa City, and JMI Laboratories, North Liberty, Iowa ; volume editors, Marie Louise Landry, Laboratory Medicine and Internal Medicine, Yale University, New Haven, Connecticut, Alexander J. McAdam, Department of Laboratory Medicine, Boston Children's Hospital, Boston, Massachusetts, Robin Patel, Infectious Diseases Research Laboratory, Mayo Clinic, Rochester, Minnesota, Sandra S. Richter, Department of Laboratory Medicine, Cleveland Clinic, Cleveland, Ohio, David W. Warnock, Atlanta, Georgia.
    Contents:
    V. 1: Sect. I: Diagnostic strategies and general topics
    Sect. II: Bacteriology
    Sect. III: Antibacterial agents and susceptibility test methods
    V. 2: Sect. IV: Virology
    Sect. V: Antiviral agents and susceptibility test methods
    Sect. VI: Mycology
    Sect. VII: Antifungal agents and susceptibility test methods
    Sect. VIII: Parasitology
    Sect. IX: Antiparastitic agents and susceptibility test methods.
    Digital Access Wiley 2019
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QR46 .M43 2019
    2
  • Digital/Print
    editors, Bartosz Chmielowski, Mary Territo.
    Digital Access Ovid 2017
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC263 .M263 2017
    1
  • Print
    editors, Timothy A. Morris, Andrew L. Ries, Richard A. Bordow.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC756 .M26 2014
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Lais R. Costa, Mary Rose Paradis.
    Contents:
    Part I: General clinical examinations and routine procedures. Principles of horse handling for veterinarians: horse handling versus horse restraint
    Physical restraint of the horse for clinical procedures
    History and physical examination of the horse
    Venous blood collection
    Arterial blood collection
    Injection techniques
    Other routes of medication administration
    Placement and care of intravenous catheters
    Chemical restraint
    Aseptic technique
    Part II: Clinical procedures by body systems: digestive system. Oral and dental examination
    Perineural anesthesia for dental procedures
    Common dental procedures
    Nasogastric intubation
    Abdominocentesis
    Rectal examination
    Percutaneous cecal trocharization
    Gastroscopy and esophagoscopy
    Part III: Clinical procedures by body systems: respiratory system. Endoscopic examination of the upper respiratory tract
    Tracheostomy
    Nasopharyngeal sampling
    Nasotracheal intubation
    Endoscopy and catheterization of the guttural pouch for sampling and lavage
    Local bronchoalveolar lavage of adults and foals
    Transtracheal aspiration of adults and foals
    Part IV: Clinical procedures by body systems: locomotor system. Lameness examination.
    Perineural anesthesia of the limbs
    Arthrocentesis and intraarticular analgesia/anesthesia
    Intravenous regional limb perfusion in adult horses
    Collection of muscle biopsy in horses
    Examination of foot conformation and balance
    Limb bandages and splints
    Cast application
    Part V: Clinical procedures by body systems: reproductive system. Reproductive evaluation of the stallion
    Reproductive evaluation of the mare
    Artificial insemination
    Placement of Caslick's suture
    Evaluation and monitoring of the pregnant mare
    Impending parturition and delivery
    Evaluation and monitoring of the post-parturient mare
    Part VI: Clinical procedures in neonatal medicine. Restraining the neonatal foal
    Physical examination of the neonatal foal
    Electrocardiography in the neonatal foal
    Arterial blood pressure measurement in the neonatal foal
    Measurement of central venous pressure in the neonatal foal
    Pulse oximetry in the neonatal foal
    Cardiopulmonary cerebral resuscitation of the neonatal foal
    Arterial blood sampling in the neonatal foal
    Venous blood sampling in the neonatal foal
    Urinary catheter placement in the neonatal foal
    Cerebral spinal fluid collection in the neonatal foal
    Intravenous catheter placement in the neonatal foal
    Intraosseus needle placement in the neonatal foal
    Placement of a nasal insufflation tube in the neonatal foal
    Placement of a nasogastric tube in the neonatal foal
    Administration of enema in the neonatal foal
    Arthrocentesis and joint lavage in the neonatal foal
    Regional limb perfusion in the neonatal foal
    Part VII: Clinical Procedures by Body Systems: Urinary System. Urinary catheterization of adult male horses
    Urinary catheterization of mares
    Part VIII: Clinical procedures by body systems: ocular procedures. Equine ocular examination
    Ophthalmic nerve blocks
    Ophthalmic diagnostic procedures
    Ophthalmic therapeutic procedures
    Part IX: Clinical procedures by body systems: dermatological procedures. Brushing/grooming
    Cellophane tape preparation
    Skin scraping
    Dermatophilus preparation
    Fungal culture of superficial skin lesions
    Skin biopsy
    Onchocerca preparation
    Intradermal sweat testing
    Part X: Clinical procedures by body systems: neurologic procedures. Neurologic examination
    Epidural anesthesia and analgesia
    Equine field anesthesia
    Part XI: Clinical procedures by body systems: miscellaneous procedures. Bone marrow aspiration
    Saddle evaluation and fitting
    Pre-purchase examination
    Euthanasia.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Allan L. Truant, editor-in-chief.
    Contents:
    Role of the U.S Food and Drug Administration (FDA) in the regulation of clinical microbiology devices / Kathleen B. Whitaker, Sally A. Hojvat, and Estelle Russek-Cohen
    Commercial blood culture systems and methods / Micheal L. Wilson, Melvin P. Weinstein, and L. Barth Reller
    Rapid devices and instruments for the identification of aerobic bacteria / Laura J. Chandler, P. Rocco LaSala, and Susan Whittier
    Rapid devices and instruments for the identification of anaerobic bacteria / Christopher L. Emery, Maria D. Appleman, Jean A. Siders, Thomas E. Davis (and Stephen D. Allen, deceased)
    Rapid antigen devices and instruments for the detection and identification of viruses / Wallace H. Greene, Marilyn A. Menegus, and Allan L. Truant
    Molecular tests for the identification of viruses / Scott Duong and Christine C. Ginocchio
    Viral hepatitis / Emily Cartwright and Yun F. (Wayne) Wang
    Human papillomaviruses / N. Esther Babdy
    Human immunodeficiency virus / Richard L. Hodinka
    Chlamydia / Claudiu I. Bandea, Robert C. Jerris, and Carolyn M. Black
    Mycoplasma / Ken B. Waites and Cecile Bbar
    Commercial methods for identification and susceptibility testing of fungi / Stephen A. Moser and Jason Wicker
    Mycobacteria / Xiang Yang Han
    Diagnostic medical parasitology / Lynne S. Garcia and Gary W. Procop
    Molecular microbiology / Raghava Potula and Yi-Wei Tang
    Automated immunoassay analyzers / Richard L. Hodinka and Matthew J. Binnicker
    Molecular typing instruments and methods / Ruth Ann Luna
    Commercial methods in clinical veterinary microbiology / Thomas J. Inzana, Xiang-Jin Meng, Tanja Opriessing, and Lora Ballweber
    Microbiology laborry information systems / Raymond D. Aller and Vincent Salazar
    Emerging infectious diseases / Brett Laurence, Julie Collins, Carolyn Fernandes, Rafik Samuel, and Byungse Suh
    Automated and manual systems for antimicrobial susceptibility testing of bacteria / Alan T. Evangelista and James A. Karlowsky
    Bioterrorism / James W. Snyder and Michael A. Pentella
    Clinical microbiology : looking ahead / Natalie N. Whitfield, Raquel M. Martinez, and Donna M. Wolk.
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    Emmanouil Brilakis.
    Summary: "Manual of Coronary Chronic Total Occlusion Interventions: A Step-by-Step Approach, Second Edition, is an easy to read reference for coronary chronic total occlusion interventions (CTO). Written by recognized national and international experts in the field, this reference compiles the steps necessary to preform, what pitfalls to watch out for, and troubleshooting tactics necessary for coronary chronic total occlusion interventions (CTO). This second edition is updated with new developments in the field. The 2nd edition covers techniques like the Carlino technique, "scratch and go", "BASE", double-blind stick and swap, and subintimal crush, along with tips about how to use the latest complex PCI equipment. It also covers recently published trials, CTO scores and hybrid series"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    When to perform chronic total occlusion interventions
    Equipment
    The basics : timing, dual injection, studying the lesion, access, anticoagulation, guide support, trapping, pressure and electrocardiogram monitoring
    Antegrade wire escalation : the foundation of chronic total occlusion percutaneous coronary intervention
    Antegrade dissection/reentry
    The retrograde approach
    Putting it all together : the hybrid approach
    “balloon-uncrossable” and “balloon-undilatable” chronic total occlusions
    Complex lesion subsets
    Radiation management during chronic total occlusion percutaneous coronary intervention
    Stenting of chronic total occlusion lesions
    Complications
    How to build a successful coronary chronic total occlusion program
    Equipment commonly utilized in CTO interventions
    Commonly used acronyms in CTO interventions.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2018
  • Digital
    Mohan Thomas, James D'Silva.
    Summary: The most comprehensive cosmetic plastic surgery manual on body contouring surgeries explains in detail how to undertake body contouring procedures to remove excess fat deposits and sagging skin so as to improve the shape as well as the tone of the abdomen, back, thighs and other areas of the body, resulting in a body with smoother contours and providing an appropriate shape. It also describes the latest procedures including high definition and fine definition liposuction with the use of various technologies and body contouring after massive weight loss. It also contains chapters on important procedures of fat grafting along with live stem cells, and how they can only be harvested from the fat during liposuction. This surgical manual discusses all possible body contouring procedures in a step by step How To manner so as to help the novice Cosmetic Surgeons as well as seasoned and experienced Surgeons alike. The risks, complications along with pearls are discussed along with individual procedures with a series of step-by-step photographs and pre and post images and short video clips. This Manual in Cosmetic Surgery and Medicine sets the standard for doctors entering the field of aesthetic surgery and medicine. It is a reference book for people who are in practice as well as a step-by-step manual for students and young doctors wanting to pursue this field. The other volumes are on: Rhinoplastic procedures Intimate Genital procedures Non-Invasive Aesthetic procedures Breast reshaping Cosmetic procedures of the Face.

    Contents:
    The Art and Science of Body Sculpting - Sculptor's Perspective
    Surgical Anatomy of Different Areas of The Body
    Preoperative Consultation and Evaluation of a Liposuction Patient
    Liposuction- Principles and Techniques
    Upper Limb Lipo-contouring
    Lipocontouring of Lower- Limbs
    Back Rolls and their Treatment Options
    Lipocontouring of the Back and Buttocks
    Contouring of the Male Breast
    Large Volume Liposuction
    Complications in Body Contouring
    Hi- Def Liposuction
    Hi-Def Liposuction in Males and Females
    Hi-Def Liposuction
    Ultrasound Assisted Liposuction
    Radio Frequency Assisted Liposuction
    Lasers as an Adjunct to Body Contouring
    Use of J Plasma as an Adjunct
    Abdominoplasty Principles
    Lipo-abdominoplasty Techniques
    Lipo-abdominoplasty
    Tulua Abdominoplasty
    Secondary Abdominoplasty- Classification of Deformities and Treatment
    Abdominoplasty Procedure in Combination with Breast Surgery
    Neo-Umbilicus
    Banana Fold and its Treatment
    Thigh Lift
    Classification of Contour Deformities After Massive Weight Loss: Utilization for Proper Treatment Planning
    Upper Body Lifts
    Brachioplasty (Arm Reduction)
    Circumferential Body Lift with Breast Procedures
    Complications of Fat Transfer
    Spiral Lift
    Liposuction Body Lift in a Patient with Massive Weight Loss
    Modern Concepts and Safety in BBL
    Buttock Augmentation Using Autologous Flaps
    Body Reshaping Using Implants
    Gluteoplasty- Submuscular Implant.-Hand Rejuvenation.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    [edited by] Marianne Saunorus Baird.
    Summary: It's the ideal go-to reference for the clinical setting! Compact and easy to use, Manual of Critical Care Nursing, 6th Edition presents essential information on approximately 80 disorders and conditions, as well as concepts relevant to caring for all critically ill patients and functioning in the critical care environment. Award-winning clinical nurse specialists Marianne Baird and Sue Bethel separate the content first by body system and then by disorder, with each disorder including a brief description of pathophysiology, assessment, diagnostic testing, collaborative management, nursing diagnoses, desired outcomes, nursing interventions, and patient teaching and rehabilitation. A concise format presents the material in a way that reflects a practicing nurse's thought processes. - Publisher.

    Contents:
    General concepts in caring for the critically ill
    Managing the critical care environment
    Trauma
    Respiratory disorders
    Cardiac and vascular disorders
    Kidney injury
    Neurologic disorders
    Endocrinologic disorders
    Gastrointestinal disorders
    Hematologic/immunologic disorders
    Complex special situations.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2016
  • Digital/Print
    Kenneth A. Arndt, Jeffrey T.S. Hsu, Murad Alam, Ashish C. Bhatia, Suneel Chilukuri.
    Digital Access Ovid 2014
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RL74 .A75 2014
    1
  • Digital
    Daniel Simmen, Professor and Lecturer in Rhinology, University of Zurich, ENT Center, the Hirslanden Clinic, Zurich, Switzerland, Nick Jones, Professor, Department of Otorrhinolaryngology, Head and Neck Surgery, Queen's Medical Centre, University Hospital, Nottingham, UK ; with contributions by Karthik Balakrishnan, Hans Rudolf Briner, Leonardo Lopes Balsalobre Filho, Kris S. Moe, Robert Reisch, Bernhard Schuknecht, Aldo Cassol Stamm.
    Summary: "Highlighted by thousands of outstanding photographs and schematic illustrations, this step-by-step guide to endoscopic sinus and skull base surgery is ideal for all specialists who need to stay current in the field. In this expanded second edition, practitioners will not only find basic and advanced procedures in endoscopic sinus surgery (including key criteria for patient selection), but also four entirely new chapters on anterior skull base surgery that reflect important recent developments. Special features of the second edition: 30% larger, with nearly 1500 endoscopic images and corresponding line drawings that make every procedure easy to visualize. Provides a practical management approach that leads to optimal outcomes: Who are the best candidates for specific procedures? When should medical treatment or surgery be used? Why should surgery be undertaken? How are the operative procedures performed? Covers the latest techniques for removal of skull base tumors and repair of skull base defects. Includes new chapters on pathophysiology of rhinosinusitis, sense of smell, applied anatomy, the endoscopically assisted bimanual operating technique (developed by the author), transorbital surgery, interdisciplinary teamwork, and more. Offers online access to 18 videos of endoscopically guided surgical procedures and patient interviews, for an excellent review and refresher. From diagnosis and preoperative counseling to evidence-based procedures, complication avoidance, and postoperative management, this book covers the gamut of topics clinicians face in everyday practice. All otolaryngologists, neurosurgeons, and maxillofacial surgeons will find it essential when making diagnostic and treatment decisions involving the skull base and paranasal sinuses"--Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    Shikha Jain, Dattaprasad B. Inamdar, editors.
    Summary: This book is an illustrated yet comprehensive compilation by experts in the field of fertility enhancing endoscopic surgery and assisted reproduction. This book catalogues full spectrum of diagnostic and operative hysteroscopy in the infertile population. The authors describe different techniques in various clinical conditions and review the recent evidence based literature supporting them. All procedures are explained in clear and precise text supplemented with high quality color pictures.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction and general principles of hysteroscopy
    2. Anaesthesia for hyteroscopy
    3. Indications and contraindications of hysteroscopy
    4. Hysteroscopy and fertility
    5. Polyps: Hysteroscopic diagnosis & management
    6. Hysteroscopic myomectomy
    7. Hysteroscopy in mullerian anomalies
    8. Asherman syndrome and hysteroscopy
    9. Role of hysteroscopy in ART
    10. Hysteroscopy in tubal disease
    11. Hysteroscopy in endometrial tuberculosis
    12. Complications of hysteroscopy
    13. Newer developments and future applications of hysteroscopy in infertility.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    [edited by] Stefan Rammelt, Michael Swords, Mandeep S. Dhillon, Andrew K. Sands.
    Digital Access Thieme-Connect 2019
  • Digital
    Angela H.E.M. Maas, C. Noel Bairey Merz, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a much-needed, internationally oriented text, focusing on specific aspects of heart disease in women. Despite the large amount of information available, there is still considerable confusion regarding female patients. As such, the book highlights the health events that occur during aging in women and that may influence the future CVD risk. For instance, pregnancy-related disorders are important predictors for CVD risk in women, and inflammatory diseases like rheumatic, thyroid disorders etc, which also interfere with CVD risk, are also more common in women. Adopting a multidisciplinary approach, including gynecology and endocrinology, it offers separate chapters on female-specific manifestations of ischemic heart disease, such as Tako Tsubo CMP and spontaneous coronary artery dissections. The book also discusses the effects and side effects of important medications. The chapters are clearly formatted, making it easy for readers to find subjects of interest.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology cardiovascular disease in women
    Gender differences in traditional risk factors
    Female-specific risk factors
    Stable coronary artery disease
    Microvascular coronary artery disease
    Acute coronary syndromes
    Cardiovascular critical ill female patient
    Heart failure in women
    The female ECG and rhythm disorders
    Aortic diseases and peripheral arterial disease in women
    Stroke and cognition disorders in women
    Inflammatory disorders and CVD in women
    Gynecardiology in clinical practice
    Communication, coping with stress and psychosocial factors and CVD in women
    Pharmacotherapy in women.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Prashant Raghavan, Sugoto Mukherjee, Mark J. Jameson, Max Wintermark.
    Summary: This book is designed as an easily readable manual that will be of great practical value for radiology and otolaryngology residents during their clinical rotations. Key facts on head and neck imaging are presented in short chapters written in an easily readable style. Line drawings are used to illustrate key concepts, and tables, checklists, and algorithms will enable the readers to arrive at a quick diagnosis. In addition, emphasis is placed on clinical pearls that will assist them in preparing suitable reports. The Manual of Head and Neck Imaging is sized to allow residents to read it completely within a matter of days, and it will also serve as an ideal quick reference guide as different clinical situations arise.

    Contents:
    Spaces of the Neck
    Cervical Lymphadenopathy
    Nasopharynx
    Oral Cavity and Oropharynx
    Larynx and Hypopharynx
    Salivary Glands
    Orbits
    Temporal Bone and Skull Base
    Sinonasal Cavities
    Head and Neck Trauma
    Maxilla and Mandible
    Thyroid and Parathyroid Glands
    Pediatric Head and Neck Lesions.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Boban M Erovic, Piero Lercher.
    Summary: Ablative tumor surgery of the head and neck region often results in severe cosmetic and functional deformities. In these cases, microvascular free-tissue transfer enables three-dimensional reconstruction of head and neck defects. The selection of adequate donor tissue and a profound knowledge of the human anatomy and the various harvesting techniques are paramount in ensuring successful reconstruction. Reflecting current surgical approaches, this book presents the most frequently used flaps in head and neck surgery, including detailed overviews as well as their respective pearls and pitfalls. Moreover, each section contains a synopsis and pre-operative checklist. The overlay-technique merges high-quality-photographs with drawings and precisely illustrates the step-to-step descriptions of the different flap harvesting techniques, making this manual in pocket size an unique and accessible reference for both doctors in training and specialists in the field of otolaryngology, head and neck, plastic, maxillofacial and skull base surgery.

    Contents:
    Part I: Introduction
    1. History of microvascular surgery
    2. Selection of flaps
    3. Classification of flaps
    4. Preoperative considerations
    5. Intraoperative considerations
    6. Arterial anastomosis
    7. Venous anastomosis
    8. Postoperative care
    9. Timetable of homeostasis
    10. Flap surveillance protocol
    11. No patency and flap salvage options
    12. Skin graft harvest
    13. Full-thickness skin graft
    14. Harvesting vein grafts
    15. Sural nerve grafts
    16. Harvest of rib cartilage
    Part II: Regional Flaps
    17. Paramedian flap
    18. Buccal flap
    19. Palatal island flap
    20. Facial artery musculomucosal flap
    21. Sternocleidomastoid flap
    22. Supraclavicular artery flap
    23. Deltopectoral flap
    24. Pectoralis major flap
    Part III: Free flaps
    25. Tempoparietal fascia free flap
    26. Scapula/parascapula free flap
    27. Latissimus dorsi free flap
    28. Radial forearm free flap
    29. Tensor fascia lata free flap
    30. Anterolateral thigh flap
    31. Fibula free flap.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Donald N. Lombardi, Anthony D. Slonim.
    Contents:
    Making the transition to healthcare and physician leadership
    The PACT system for strategic leadership communication
    A healthcare leader's guide to people management
    Dealing with politics, problems, and process
    Practical strategy for planning
    Motivation, communication, and negotiation
    Maximizing team action and individual performance
    Encouraging creativity and innovation
    Education and development strategies
    Applying the C-formula: strategies for staff engagement.
    Digital Access AccessMedicine 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Qaiser Bashir, Elizabeth J. Shpall, Richard E. Champlin.
    Summary: Led by authors from MD Anderson’s Stem Cell Transplantation and Cellular Therapy Department, the world’s largest and highly respected program at the forefront of rapidly advancing treatments in the field, Manual of Hematopoietic Cell Transplantation and Cellular Therapies is a comprehensive, focused reference covering the latest clinical developments and applications of stem cell transplant and cellular therapies for hematologic malignancies and solid tumors. This cutting-edge title, with a majority contribution from the MD Anderson Cancer Center and leading faculty from other academic institutions, covers breakthrough cell-based therapies for various diseases including lymphoma, multiple myeloma, leukemia, and select solid tumor and autoimmune diseases. This unique, definitive resource is essential for hematologists, fellows in hematology and immunotherapy, mid-level providers, pharmacists, and oncologists who refer patients for cell-based therapies. Addresses hematologic conditions including leukemia, lymphoma, and myeloma.

    Contents:
    Hematopoietic Transplantation: Past, Present, and Future
    Role of the Human Leukocyte Antigen System in Hematopoietic Stem Cell Transplantation
    Hematopoietic Cell Collection
    Bayesian Statistical Methods in Stem Cell Transplantation and Cellular Therapy
    Patient and Donor Assessments in Preparation for Transplant
    Transfusion Support During Hematopoietic Cell Transplantation
    Haploidentical Hematopoietic Cell Transplantation
    Umbilical Cord Blood Transplantation
    Process and General Management of Patients Undergoing Chimeric Antigen Receptor Therapies
    Preparative Regimens Used in Hematopoietic Cell Transplantation and Chimeric Antigen Receptor T-Cell Therapies
    Pharmacology of Drugs Used in Hematopoietic Cell Transplant and Chimeric Antigen Receptor Therapies
    Radiobiologic Principles and the Role of Radiotherapy in Hematopoietic Cell Transplant and Chimeric Antigen Receptor T-Cell Therapy
    Hematopoietic Cell Transplantation in Adult With Acute Myeloid Leukemia
    Chimeric Antigen Receptor Therapy in Acute Myeloid Leukemia
    Allogeneic Hematopoietic Cell Transplantation for Patients With Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia
    Chimeric Antigen Receptor T-Cell Therapy in Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia
    Hematopoietic Cell Transplantation and Other Cellular Therapies for Chronic Lymphocytic Leukemia
    Allogeneic Hematopoietic Cell Transplantation in Myelodysplastic Syndrome Patients
    Allogeneic Cell Transplantation for Myeloproliferative Neoplasms
    Hematopoietic Cell Transplantation in Aplastic Anemia
    Hematopoietic Cell Transplantation in Multiple Myeloma
    Chimeric Antigen Receptor Therapy in Multiple Myeloma
    Hematopoietic Cell Transplantation in Light Chain Amyloidosis
    Hematopoietic Cell Transplantation for Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
    Hematopoietic Cell Transplantation for Hodgkin Lymphoma
    Chimeric Antigen Receptor Therapy in Lymphoma
    Hematopoietic Cell Transplantation in Rare Hematologic Malignancies
    Hematopoietic Cell Transplantation for Germ-Cell Tumors and Other Adult Solid Tumors
    Natural Killer Cells: A Promising Cellular Therapy Platform to Conquer Cancer
    Infection Control, Prophylaxis, and Vaccinations in Hematopoietic Cell Transplantation Recipients
    Management of Infections in Stem Cell Transplant Recipients
    Graft Failure After Hematopoietic Cell Transplantation
    Graft-Versus-Host Disease
    Miscellaneous Complications of Hematopoietic Cellular Transplantation
    Cytokine Release Syndrome Following CD19 Directed Chimeric Antigen Receptor T-Cell Therapy
    Neurologic Complications of Chimeric Antigen Receptor Therapy
    Miscellaneous Complications of Chimeric Antigen Receptor T-Cell Therapy
    Symptom Management and Palliative Care in Hematologic Malignancies
    Survivorship.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2024
  • Digital
    Ajay Garg, Anil Dewan.
    Summary: This book is a one-stop resource on all the critical aspects of planning and designing hospitals, one of the most complex healthcare projects to undertake. A well-planned and designed hospital should control infection rate, provide safety to patients, caregivers and visitors, help improve patients' recovery and have scope for future expansion and change. Reinforcing these basic principles, guidance on such effective planning and designing is the key focus. Readers are offered insights into eliminating shortcomings at every stage of setting up a hospital which may not be feasible to rectify later on through alterations. Chapters from 1 to 12 of the book provide exhaustive notes on initial planning, such as detailed project reports, feasibility studies, and area calculation. Chapters 13 to 27 include designing and layout of all the essential departments/units such as OPD, emergency, intermediate care, diagnostics, operating rooms, and intensive care units. Chapters 28 to 37 cover designing support services like sterilization department, pharmacy, medical gas pipeline, kitchen, laundry, medical record, and mortuary. Chapters 38 to 48 take the readers through planning other services like air-conditioning and ventilation, fire safety, extra low voltage, mechanical, electrical, and plumbing services. Chapter 49 is for the planning of medical equipment. A particular chapter on "Green" hospital designing is included. This book is a single essential tabletop reference for hospital consultants, medical and hospital administrators, hospital designers, architecture students, and hospital promoters.

    Contents:
    Section one - Hospital planning: phases of hospital planning and designing
    Inception of the idea
    Factors assessing feasibility of the hospital planning
    Preparation of detailed project report (dpr) and techno-commercial feasibility report (tcfr) for hospital
    Site selection for hospital
    General issues to be considered while designing hospital building
    Area requirement & planning
    Section two - Schematic design of hospital: schematic design
    Effects of covid-19 on the design of the hospital
    Site plan
    Detailed engineering drawings
    Section three - Construction documents
    Preparation of construction documents
    Section four - Design & development
    Designing details of department or spaces of the hospital
    Design of the main entrance gate to the hospital
    Entrance lobby of the hospital
    Emergency services
    Outpatient department
    Intensive care units
    Operation theatre suite
    Delivery room / labor room
    Intermediate care area (patient rooms)
    Radiology
    Clinical laboratories
    Blood bank
    Other investigation & procedures
    Radiation therapy
    Rehabilitation & allied health therapies
    Pharmacy unit
    Central sterilization supply department
    Piped medical gas supply system (mgps)
    Hospital kitchen
    Laundry
    Medical record department (mrd)
    Mortuary
    Administration area
    Stores in the hospital
    Engineering & maintenance unit
    Section five - Mep planning & designing
    Hvac (air-conditioning) system
    Electrical services
    Elv, ict and ibms services
    Information technology & computerization
    Water supply & drainage system
    Vertical transportation system
    Pneumatic tube systems (pts)
    Signage system
    Bio-medical waste management
    Fire safety
    Green hospitals
    Section six - Equipment planning.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access Google Books 1970-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    I445 .U56 1970
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access Google Books 1914-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    I192 .M29 1916
    1
  • Digital
    Douglas M. Coldwell.
    Contents:
    Essentials of medical oncology / Vivek R. Sharma
    Essentials of surgical oncology / Robert C.G. Martin II
    Essentials of radiation oncology / Andrew S. Kennedy
    Interventional radiology in the treatment of the cancer patient / Douglas M. Coldwell
    Chemotherapeutic agents / Douglas M. Coldwell
    Colorectal cancer / Douglas M. Coldwell
    Cancer of the pancreas / Douglas M. Coldwell
    Carcinoid tumor (neuroendocrine tumors of the gastrointestinal tract) / Douglas M. Coldwell
    Hepatocellular carcinoma / Douglas M. Coldwell
    Cholangiocarcinoma / Douglas M. Coldwell
    Lung cancer (non-small cell) / Douglas M. Coldwell
    Head and neck cancer / Douglas M. Coldwell
    Renal cell carcinoma / Douglas M. Coldwell
    Urothelial cancer and transitional cell cancer / Douglas M. Coldwell
    Prostate cancer / Douglas M. Coldwell
    Breast cancer / Douglas M. Coldwell
    Gynecologic tumors / Douglas M. Coldwell
    Clinical trials of interventional oncology / Douglas M. Coldwell
    Building an interventional oncology practice / Douglas M. Coldwell.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Radiology
  • Digital
    [edited by] Frances Talaska Fischbach, RN, BSN, MSN, Associate Clinical Professor of Nursing, School of Nursing, University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee, Milwaukee, Wisconsin, Associate Professor of Nursing (Ret), School of Nursing, University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee, Milwaukee, Wisconsin, Marshall Barnett Dunning III, BS, MS, PhD, Professor of Medicine & Physiology, Department of Medicine, Division of Pulmanary/Critical Care Medicine, Medical College of Wisconsin, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.
    Contents:
    Diagnostic testing
    Blood studies : hematology and coagulation
    Urine studies
    Stool studies
    Cerebrospinal fluid studies
    Chemistry studies
    Microbiologic studies
    Immunodiagnostic studies
    Nuclear medicine studies
    X-ray studies
    Cytologic, histologic, and genetic studies
    Endoscopic studies
    Ultrasound studies
    Pulmonary function, arterial blood gases (abgs), and electrolyte studies
    Prenatal diagnosis and tests of fetal well-being
    Special diagnostic, special specimen collection, and postmortem studies.
    Digital Access Ovid 2015
  • Digital
    Dr Paromita Mazumdar, Dr Deepshikha Chowdhury.
    Summary: "Dental postgraduate trainees often face the difficulty of formulating a study design due to lack of knowledge of instrument and experiment availability as well as the type of equipment that will be appropriate for conducting experiments and tests related to dental materials. This manual will be an accessible reference, providing an insight into the materials used in restorative dentistry, the properties studied, the methods used to study the properties and their respective advantages and disadvantages. Since there are many products available, it becomes difficult for dentists to select appropriate materials which are used in the oral cavity for various purposes -- restorations, endodontic treatments, orthodontic applications, surgical and prosthodontic treatments. Even though material testing has not reached the level of clinical simulation, they represent an important parameter of analyses. The knowledge of the principle laboratory tests is of high importance for proper screening of different dental restorative materials available. The book will be a helpful addition to any institute library or personal collection and will cater to the needs of postgraduate dental students, researchers and academics in the fields of dentistry and material sciences"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Assessment of Mechanical Properties of Dental Restorative Materials
    Assessment of Physical Properties of Dental Restorative Materials
    Isolation and Identification of Oral Microflora
    Assessment of Biocompatibility of Dental Materials
    Assessment of Optical Properties
    Simulation of Oral Environment
    Extra Mile : Biofilm Models and Assessment of Biofilms in Restorative Dentistry.
    Digital Access Wiley 2022
  • Digital/Print
    ed. by W.H. Allchin ...
    Digital Access Google Books 1900-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L46 .A416
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Barbara Detrick, John L. Schmitz, Robert G. Hamilton.
    Summary: Features detailed descriptions of general and specific methodologies; special focus on the interpretation of laboratory findings. Covers the immunology of infectious diseases, including specific pathogens, and the full range of autoimmune and immunodeficiency diseases, cancer, and transplantation.
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    Steven M. Donn, Sunil K. Sinha, editors.
    Contents:
    Section I. Lung development and maldevelopment
    Section II. Principles of mechanical ventilation
    Section III. Procedures and techniques
    Section IV. Monitoring the ventilated patient
    Section V. Noninvasive ventilatory techniques
    Section VI. Ventilatory modes and modalities
    Section VII. High-frequency ventilation
    Section VIII. Commonly used neonatal ventilators
    Section IX. Adjunctive therapies
    Section X. Management of common neonatal respiratory diseases
    Section XI. Bronchopulmonary dyplasia
    Section XII. Complications associated with mechanical ventilation
    Section XIII. Other considerations
    Section XIV. Ethical and legal considerations
    Section XV. Research, quality, and the literature
    Section XVI. Ventilatory case studies
    Appendix
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Steven M. Donn, Mark C. Mammel, Anton H. L. C. van Kaam, editors.
    Summary: Respiratory care is the largest overall component of neonatal intensive care, and the fifth edition of the Manual of Neonatal Respiratory Care is the leading bedside guide for all aspects of respiratory care in the neonatal intensive care unit. Its easy-to-read outline format is simple yet comprehensive and covers all aspects of lung disease in the newborn. The latest edition includes fully revised and updated information, coverage on new equipment and devices, and an expanded authorship to enhance its international appeal. The new edition also features two new co-editors, Dr. Mark Mammel and Dr. Anton Van Kaam, who bring a fresh and global perspective to the book. The text also features over 300 high-yield radiographic images, figures, tables, and algorithms covering the full spectrum of neonatal respiratory care.

    Contents:
    Development of the Respiratory System
    Malformations, Deformations, and Disorders of the Neonatal Airway
    Developmental Lung Anomalies
    Spontaneous Breathing
    Pulmonary Gas Exchange
    Oxygen Therapy
    Oxygen Toxicity
    Pulmonary Mechanics
    Basic Principles of Mechanical Ventilation
    Classification of Mechanical Ventilation Devices
    Ventilator Parameters
    Respiratory Gas Conditioning and Humidification
    Cardio-Respiratory Examination
    Neonatal Resuscitation
    Laryngoscopy and Endotracheal Intubation
    Vascular Access
    Tracheostomy
    Continuous Monitoring Techniques
    Clinical Controversies in Pulse Oximetry
    Interpretation of Neonatal Blood Gases
    Volumetric Capnography
    Neonatal Pulmonary Graphics
    Radiography
    Transillumination
    Echocardiography
    Bronchoscopy
    Nasal Interfaces for Noninvasive Ventilation
    Humidified High-Flow Nasal Cannula Therapy
    Continuous Distending Pressure
    Sustained Inflation
    Noninvasive Ventilation
    Nasal Intermittent Positive Pressure Ventilation
    Vapotherm High-Flow Support
    Intermittent Mandatory Ventilation
    Synchronized Intermittent Mandatory Ventilaton
    Assist/Control Ventilation
    Pressure Support Ventilation
    Volume-Targeted Ventilation
    Volume Guarantee Ventilation
    Pressure Control Ventilation
    High-Frequency Ventilation: General Concepts
    High-Frequency Jet Ventilation
    High-Frequency Oscillatory Ventilation
    Ventilator Mode Classification
    VIP BIRD Gold Ventilator
    AVEA Ventilator
    Twinstream Ventilator
    Puritan Bennett 840 and 980 Ventilators
    Draeger VN500 Ventilator
    Servo-i Ventilator/NAVA
    SLE 5000 and SLE 4000 Infant Ventilators
    STEPHANIE and SOPHIE Ventilators
    Leoni Plus Infant Ventilator
    Bunnell Life-Pulse High-Frequency Jet Ventilator
    High-Frequency Oscillatory Ventilators
    Hemodynamic Support
    Nutritional Support of Ventilated Infants
    Surfactant Replacement Therapy
    Pharmacologic Agents
    Automatic Control of Oxygen Delivery
    Aerosolization and Nebulization
    Sedation and Analgesia
    Inhaled Nitric Oxide Therapy
    Extracorporeal Membrane Oxygenation
    Liquid Ventilation for Neonatal Respiratory Failure
    Mechanisms of Respiratory Failure
    Tissue Hypoxia
    Indications for Mechanical Ventilation
    Respiratory Distress Syndrome
    Pneumonia
    Meconium Aspiration Syndrome
    Persistent Pulmonary Hypertension of the Newborn
    Congenital Diaphragmatic Hernia
    Pulmonary Hypoplasia/Agenesis
    Chylothorax
    Apnea, Bradycardia, and Desaturation
    Optimizing Lung Volume
    Weaning and Extubation
    Etiology and Pathogenesis
    Management
    Long-Term Outcome of Newborns with Bronchopulmonary Dysplasia
    Thoracic Air Leaks
    Patent Ductus Arteriosus
    Neonatal Pulmonary Hemorrhage
    Retinopathy of Prematurity
    Neurologic Complications of Mechanical Ventilation
    Nursing Care of the Ventilated Infant
    Transport of Ventilated Babies
    Role of the Respiratory Therapist in the NICU
    Long Term Ventilator Dependency in Infants without Lung Disease
    Home Ventilation
    Discharge Planning and Follow-Up of the NICU Graduate
    Initiation of Life Support at the Border of Viability
    Withdrawal of Ventilatory Support
    Medical Liability, Documentation, and Risk Management
    Interpreting Medical Literature
    Data Collection and Assessment of Respiratory Outcomes
    Practical Quality Improvement in the NICU
    Contemporary Classics in Neonatal Respiratory Care
    Ventilatory Cases. .
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital/Print
    edited by Robert W. Schrier.
    Contents:
    The edematous patient : cardiac failure, cirrhosis, and nephrotic syndrome / Robert W. Schrier and David H. Ellison
    The patient with hyponatremia or hypernatremia / Robert W. Schrier and Tomas Berl
    The patient with hypokalemia or hyperkalemia / Jie Tang and Stuart L. Linas
    The patient with an acid-base disorder / William D. Kaehny
    The patient with disorders of serum calcium and phosphorus / Jeffrey G. Penfield and Robert F. Reilly
    The patient with kidney stones / Robert F. Reilly
    The patient with urinary tract infection / Jessica B. Kendrick, L. Barth Reller, and Marilyn E. Levi
    The patient with hematuria, proteinuria, or both, and abnormal findings on urinary microscopy / Godela Brosnahan
    The patient with glomerular disease or vasculitis / Sarah E. Panzer and Joshua M. Thurman
    The patient with acute kidney injury / Sarah Faubel and Charles L. Edelstein
    The patient with chronic kidney disease / Michel Chonchol and Jessica B. Kendrick
    The patient receiving chronic renal replacement with dialysis / Seth Ferguson and Isaac Teitelbaum
    The patient with a kidney transplant / James Cooper, Lawrence Chan, and Alexander Wiseman
    The patient with kidney disease and hypertension in pregnancy / Phyllis August, Diana I. Jalal, and Judy Blaine
    The patient with hypertension / Seth Ferguson, Charles R. Nolan, and Robert W. Schrier
    Practical guidelines for drug dosing in patients with impaired kidney function / Ali Olyaei and William Bennett.
    Digital Access Ovid 2015
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC902 .M992 2015
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Andy S. Jagoda, Christopher A. Lewandowski
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    John G. Morris and Padraic J. Grattan-Smith.
    Contents:
    1. Higher functions
    2. Movement disorders
    3. Eyes/eye movements
    4. Head and neck
    5. Epilepsy
    6. Reflexes
    7. Gait
    8. Cerebellar disorders
    9. Upper motor neuron disorders
    10. Lower motor neuron/muscle disorders
    11. Faces
    12. Psychogenic disorders
    13. Skin disorders
    14. Miscellaneous signs.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Daniel Thomas Ginat.
    Summary: This text is a comprehensive reference guide for normative measurements of anatomic structures in the head and neck, including lymph nodes, temporal bone, skull base, craniocervical junction, orbit, tonsillar tissues, thyroid, and salivary glands. The aim is to assist in the accurate interpretation of imaging studies of this region, where the size of different structures is of high importance for the differentiation of normal and abnormal anatomy, taking into account patient age and gender. The book includes illustrated examples of the proper measurement techniques. Furthermore, examples of pathology with abnormal measurements are included for comparison. The Manual of Normative Measurements in Head and Neck Imaging will serve as a valuable asset for radiologists and clinicians who are involved in the evaluation of patients with head and neck disorders.

    Contents:
    Basic Quantitative Imaging Approaches
    Normative Measurements of the Orbital Walls and Contents
    Normative Measurements of Temporal Bone Structures on Imaging
    Normative Measurements of the Skull Base on Imaging
    Normative Measurements of the Craniocervical Junction on Imaging
    Normative Measurements of Head and Neck Lymph Nodes on Imaging
    Normative Measurements of the Thyroid, Salivary Glands, and Tonsils on Imaging.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital/Print
    David H. Alpers, Beth E. Taylor, Dennis M. Bier, Samuel Klein.
    Digital Access Ovid 2015
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RM217.2 .A47 2015
    1
  • Digital
    Valerie A. Dobiesz, Kathleen A. Kerrigan.
    Summary: "Manual of Emergency Medicine Obstetrics provides a practical overview of all trimesters in a convenient manual format. Nearly two dozen expert contributors representing both emergency medicine and obstetrics offer evidence-based treatment and management guidelines for virtually any situation you may encounter, providing a unique emergency medicine perspective on best practices for high-risk, high-stress obstetric situations in the ED"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Section I: General overview in pregnancy. Physiologic changes in pregnancy
    Drug therapy in pregnancy
    Venous thromboembolism in pregnancy
    Airway management in pregnancy
    Trauma in pregnancy
    Management of common medical comorbidities during pregnancy
    Management of common surgical conditions during pregnancy
    Ultrasound in obstetric emergencies
    Section II: EMS management of obstetric emergencies. Active labor and out-of-hospital delivery
    Prehospital management of obstetric bleeding
    Section III: Early pregnancy (<weeks). Nausea and vomiting of pregnancy
    Vaginal bleeding in the first trimester of pregnancy
    Ectopic pregnancy
    Gestational trophoblastic disease
    Section IV: Later pregnancy (>weeks). Preparation for precipitous delivery
    Hypertensive disorders in pregnancy
    Peripartum cardiomyopathy
    Preterm labor
    Prelabor rupture of membranes
    Placental abnormalities
    Section V: Delivery. Normal vaginal deliveries
    Breech deliveries
    Twin deliveries
    Emergency hysterotomy
    Umbilical cord abnormalities
    Shoulder dystocia
    Section VI: Emergencies after delivery. Postpartum hemorrhage
    Uterine inversion and uterine rupture
    Amniotic fluid embolism
    Postpartum infections
    This section is expanded section vii: care of the mother and newborn
    Resuscitation of the newborn.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2021
  • Digital/Print
    editors, Arthur T. Evans, Emily DeFranco.
    Contents:
    Part I. Obstetric care
    Part II. Obstetric complications
    Part III. Maternal complications
    Part IV. Fetal assessment
    Part V. Fetal complications
    Part VI. Neonatal care.
    Digital Access Ovid 2014
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RG531 .M294 2014
    1
  • Digital
    editors, Arthur T. Evans, Emily DeFranco.
    Summary: "Manual of Obstetrics skillfully addresses the care, assessment, and complications, as well as other emerging issues handled daily by obstetric providers. Top-rated among obstetrics manuals, this practical, authoritative text is both an excellent desk reference and on-the-spot guide. Essential data and commentary are provided on all the major areas of obstetric care, obstetric complications, maternal complications, fetal assessment, fetal complications, fetal therapy, fetal intervention issues, endocrine disorders, and neonatal care"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    edited by Mark R. Levine ; Richard C. Allen, editors.
    Summary: "For the last two decades, this best-selling, step-by-step guide to oculoplastic surgery has been highly respected and widely used by ophthalmologists, oculofacial plastic fellows, residents, ENT-facial plastic surgeons, and general plastic surgeons. The revised and updated fifth edition of Manual of Oculoplastic Surgery is designed to guide the physician in exploring and completing a variety of ocular plastic procedures in a comprehensive and logical step-by-step sequence. It features new authors. Sections include: Trauma, Lacrimal Surgery, Cosmetic, Congenital Ptosis, Acquired Ptosis, Eyelid Malposition, Facial Nerve Dysfunction, Eyelid Flaps, Orbital Surgery, and Therapeutic Considerations. Each procedure in this must-have resource includes a review of the surgical anatomy, step-by-step instructions, plus the book is complete with more than one hundred color illustrations and dozens of surgical videos for further education."-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Fred R.T. Nelson, Carolyn Taliaferro Blauvelt.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2022
  • Digital
    editor, Marc F. Swiontkowski ; associate editors, Steven D. Stovitz, Dagan Cloutier.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    Christoph Arnoldner, Vincent Y.W. Lin, Joseph M. Chen.
    Summary: Temporal bone dissection training is paramount to the surgical education of any otolaryngologist and a special rite of passage for those who wish to focus their practice on otology. The complexity of temporal bone anatomy, which is exposed in a stepwise fashion during dissection, holds a particular fascination for surgeons at all levels, while mastery of the microsurgical anatomy remains the most basic attribute defining surgical competence and skills. In spite of the recent progress in surgical simulation, the cadaver bone remains the gold standard and provides an indispensable platform for otological training. The Manual of Otologic Surgery takes the reader step-by-step through routine temporal bone surgeries while maximizing the use of the cadaver tissue. In an effort to improve visual realism, the book provides high-resolution photographs and anatomically accurate illustrations to allow the reader to better appreciate the three-dimensional relationship of the internal constructs of the temporal bone. Special emphasis is placed on describing the latest techniques for cochlear implantation and active middle ear implants. The book is further enhanced by additional links to edited videos of surgical cases and will therefore serve as a valuable reference guide to otologic surgeons of all experience levels.

    Contents:
    General Considerations
    Cortical Mastoidectomy
    Facial Nerve
    Facial recess
    Round window exposure
    Alternative approaches to the cochlea
    Unroofing the Epitympanum
    Canal Wall Down
    Skeletonizing the Facial Nerve
    Endolymphatic Sac Dissection
    Labyrinthectomy
    Internal Auditory Canal
    Middle Fossa Approach.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital/Print
    Coats, Joseph; Sutherland, Lewis Robertson.
    Digital Access Google Books 1883-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    J111 .C65 1903
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Coplin, W. M. Late; Coplin, W. M. Late.
    Digital Access Google Books 1894-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    J111 .C784 1913
    1
  • Digital
    Jerrold Lerman, Charles J. Coté, David J. Steward.
    Contents:
    Preface
    Chapter 1. Foundations of Pediatric Anesthesia
    Chapter 2. Anatomy and Physiology
    Chapter 3. Clinical Pharmacology
    Chapter 4. Techniques and Procedures
    Chapter 5. Regional Analgesia Techniques
    Chapter 6. Medical Conditions Influencing Anesthetic Management
    Chapter 7. Postoperative Care and Pain Management
    Chapter 8. Neurosurgery and Invasive Neuroradiology
    Chapter 9. Ophthalmology
    Chapter 10. Otorhinolaryngology
    Chapter 11. Dental Surgery
    Chapter 12. Plastic and Reconstructive Surgery
    Chapter 13. General and Thoraco-abdominal Surgery
    Chapter 14. Cardiovascular Surgery and Cardiologic Procedures
    Chapter 15. Orthopedic Surgery
    Chapter 16. Urologic Investigation and Surgery
    Chapter 17. Trauma, Including Acute Burns and Scalds
    Chapter 18. Anesthesia outside the operating room
    Appendix 1. Anesthesia
    Appendix 2. Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation, Including Neonatal Resuscitation
    Appendix 3. Drug Doses
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Kishore Phadke, Paul Goodyer, Martin Bitzan, editors.
    Summary: This manual is designed to meet the everyday needs of the wide range of medical professionals across the globe who play a role in the treatment of children referred because of renal disease. It is an easy-to-use, portable guide that will assist pediatricians, residents, and trainees in making prompt and appropriate first-level management decisions. It will also prove invaluable for adult nephrologists who are responsible for the care of children in many developing areas of the world, and will serve as a teaching guide for experts when training non-subspecialists. Individual sections are devoted to the evaluation of renal disease; fluid, electrolyte, and acid-base disorders; glomerular diseases; tubular disorders; congenital, inherited, and urological disorders; consequences of renal disease; and miscellaneous topics. The text is in a bulleted format with tables and algorithms wherever possible, making it straightforward and easy to read. An appendix includes further important information such as normal values, drug dosages, dosage adjustment in renal failure, drug nephrotoxicity, and dietary recommendations. The complexities of pediatric nephrology like pathogenesis, intricate physiological aspects, and details of advanced management are deliberately avoided since these issues typically arise during tertiary care at a referral center. If you are searching for a practical, comprehensive guide on pediatric nephrology that will meet the first-line needs of all practitioners, whether in developed or developing countries, this manual will be ideal.

    Contents:
    Evaluation of Renal Disease
    Fluids, Electrolytes, and Acid-Base Disorders
    Glomerular Diseases
    Tubular Disorders
    Cystic Renal Diseases
    Issues Related to Pediatric Urology
    Hypertension
    Acute Kidney Injury
    Chronic Kidney Disease (CKD)
    Chronic Dialysis
    Renal Transplantation
    Oncology and Kidney
    The Kidney and the Tropics
    HIV and the Kidney
    Newborn and the Kidney
    Nephrotoxicity
    Appendix.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Robert M. Bojar.
    Summary: "It is essential that all individuals involved in the assessment and management of patients with cardiac surgical disease have a basic understanding of the disease processes that are being treated. This chapter presents the spectrum of adult cardiac surgical disease that is encountered in most cardiac surgical practices. The pathophysiology, indications for surgery, specific preoperative considerations, and surgical options for various diseases are presented. Diagnostic techniques and general preoperative considerations are presented in the next two chapters. Issues related to cardiac anesthesia and postoperative care specific to most of the surgical procedures presented in this chapter are discussed in Chapters 4 and 8, respectively. The most current guidelines for the evaluation and management of patients with cardiac disease can be obtained from the American College of Cardiology website (www.acc.org)"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Synopsis of adult cardiac surgical disease
    Diagnostic techniques in cardiac surgery
    General preoperative considerations and preparation of the patient for surgery
    Cardiac anesthesia
    Cardiopulmonary bypass
    Myocardial protection
    Admission to the ICU and monitoring techniques
    Early postoperative care
    Mediastinal bleeding
    Respiratory management
    Cardiovascular management
    Fluid management, renal, metabolic, and endocrine problems
    Post-ICU care and other complications.
    Digital Access Wiley 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] Mariano Socolovsky, Lukas Rasulic, Rajiv Midha, Debora Garozzo.
    Contents:
    Nerve anatomy of the upper limbs
    Surgical anatomy and approaches to the nerves of the lower limb
    Nerve injuries : anatomy, pathophysiology, and classification
    Clinical aspects of peripheral nerve lesions in the upper limb
    Clinical aspects of traumatic peripheral nerve lesions in the lower limb
    Electrodiagnostic pre-, intra-, and postoperative evaluations
    Magnetic resonance neurography and peripheral nerve surgery
    Ultrasound in peripheral nerve surgery (compression neuropathy, trauma, tumor)
    Surgical repair of nerve lesions : neurolysis and neurorrhaphy with grafts or tubes
    Timing in traumatic peripheral nerve lesions
    Outcomes in the repair of nerve injuries
    Gunshot and other missile wounds to the peripheral nerves
    Compressive lesions of the upper limb : clinical presentation, timing, and surgical strategies
    Compressive lesions of the lower limb and trunk : clinical presentation and surgical management
    Thoracic outlet syndrome
    Traumatic brachial plexus lesions : clinical aspects, assessment, and timing of surgical repair
    Traumatic brachial plexus injuries : surgical techniques and strategies
    Neonatal brachial plexus lesions : clinical presentation and assessment
    Neonatal brachial plexus lesion : surgical strategies
    Lumbosacral plexus injuries : clinical presentation, assessment, and surgical strategies
    Facial nerve palsy : indications and techniques of surgical repair
    Benign peripheral nerve tumors
    Malignant peripheral nerve sheath tumors.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
    Thieme-Connect
  • Digital/Print
    Cunningham, D. J.; Robinson, Arthur.
    Contents:
    Vol.
    1. Superior extremity; inferior extremity - Vol.
    2. Thorax and abdomen - Vol.
    3. Head and neck.
    Digital Access
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    E34 .C97
    6
  • Digital
    Niraja Rajan, editor.
    Summary: This key resource provides insight and guidance to managing ambulatory surgery centers (ACSs) from a broad spectrum of expertise. Intended for a wide audience of healthcare professionals, this book covers topics such as regulatory issues, outpatient pediatric anesthesia, inventory management, personnel training, the culture of safety, and sedation standards. The format found in each chapter is designed intentionally to function as an educational manual. Many chapters are supplemented by high quality figures and tables to aid in visual learning. This text brings together authors from diverse professions including lawyers, administrators, surgeons, anesthesiologists and architects - all of whom have contributed their expertise to address the multitude of subjects that pertain to ASCs. Manual of Practice Management for Ambulatory Surgery Centers: An Evidence-Based Guide is a concise and evidence-based guide to successfully operating the modern health care facilities that have transformed the outpatient experience for millions of people.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: ASC Design and Construction
    Chapter 2: Obtaining ASC Contracts and Responding to RFPs
    3: Nuts and Bolts of Ambulatory Anesthesia Billing
    Chapter 4: Sterile Processing and Infection Control in ASCs
    Chapter 5: Scheduling: Optimal Block Schedule, Improving Utilization
    Chapter 6: Lean Management: Inventory, Waste Management
    Chapter 7: Perioperative Surgical Home Principles Applied to the Ambulatory Setting
    Chapter 8: Enhanced Recovery Program in the Ambulatory Surgery Setting
    Chapter 9: Medication Safety: Unique Aspects in ASCs
    Chapter 10: Sedation Guidelines
    Chapter 11: Monitors and Equipment for the Ambulatory Surgical Care Setting
    Chapter 12: PACU Management: Unique Concepts to ASCs
    Chapter 13: EHR
    Incorporating Into Practice
    Using Data Meaningfully, Obtaining Benchmarking and Metrics Information
    Chapter 14: Accreditation for the Ambulatory Surgery Center
    Chapter 15: HR Issues: Sexual Harassment, Workplace Diversity, Cultural Sensitivity, Privileging, Credentialing, Denying Privileges, Difficult Conversations
    Chapter 16: Risk Management and Quality Improvement
    Chapter 17: Culture of Safety
    Chapter 18: Education and Training: Staff and Facility
    Chapter 19: Emergency Preparedness in Ambulatory Surgery Centers and Office-Based Anesthesia Practices
    Chapter 20: Office-Based Anesthesia and Surgery: Unique Aspects
    Chapter 21: Pediatric Anesthesi.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    W45 .N27 1926
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Hossein Ardehali, Roberto Bolli, Douglas W. Losordo ; section editors, Sanjiv Shah, Marina Bayeva, Amy Rines, Andy Wasserstrom.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    by A.J. Larner.
    Summary: This book draws on the author's experience in conducting pragmatic test accuracy studies on screening instruments for dementia/mild cognitive impairment. To facilitate comprehension and assimilation, all data is presented in an easily accessible, succinct and user-friendly way by means of a structured tabular format that allows tests to be easily compared. The pragmatic design of studies ensures high external validity and generalizability for the test results. The book includes a wealth of data on previously presented studies, as well as hitherto unreported test measures ("Number needed" metrics). It presents recently described and new diagnostic metrics (Likelihood to be diagnosed or misdiagnosed; Summary utility index; Number needed for screening utility); data from new studies on screeners (Attended with sign; Free-Cog; Two question depression screener; Jenkins Sleep Questionnaire; Triple test); and previously unpublished data (combination of SMC Likert and MACE; IADL Scale and MMSE). Given its scope, the book will be of interest to all professionals, beginners and seasoned experts alike, whose work involves the assessment of individuals with cognitive (memory) complaints.

    Contents:
    1 Introduction
    1.1 Screening for dementia
    1.2 Pragmatic diagnostic test accuracy studies
    1.3 Data presentation
    1.3.1 "Number needed" metrics
    1.3.2 Likelihood to be diagnosed or misdiagnosed (LDM)
    1.3.3 Summary utility index (SUI) and its reciprocal (NNSU)
    2 Single-item cognitive screening questions
    2.1 Dementia CQUIN question
    2.2 Subjective Memory Complaint (SMC) Likert scale
    3 Neurological signs
    3.1 Attended alone sign
    3.2 Attended with sign
    3.3 Head turning sign
    3.4 Applause sign
    3.5 La maladie du petit papier
    4 Cognitive screeners (1): Brief patient-performance scales
    4.1 Mini-Mental State Examination (MMSE)
    4.2 Mini-Mental Parkinson (MMP)
    4.3 Codex
    4.4 Free-Cog
    4.5 Mini-Addenbrooke's Cognitive Examination (MACE)
    4.6 Short Montreal Cognitive Assessment (s-MoCA)
    4.7 Six-Item Cognitive Impairment Test (6CIT)
    4.8 Test Your Memory (TYM) test
    4.9 Hard-TYM (TYM-MCI)
    4.10 DemTect
    ^5 Cognitive screeners (2): Longer patient-performance scales
    5.1 Addenbrooke's Cognitive Examination (ACE)
    5.2 Addenbrooke's Cognitive Examination-Revised (ACE-R)
    5.3 Montreal Cognitive Assessment (MoCA)
    6 Cognitive screeners (3): Informant scales
    6.1 AD8
    6.2 Informant Questionnaire on Cognitive Decline in the Elderly (IQCODE)
    6.3 Cambridge Behavioural Inventory (CBI)
    7 Depression screeners
    7.1 Two question depression screener
    7.2 Patient Health Questionnaire-9 (PHQ-9)
    7.3 Cornell Scale for Depression in Dementia (CSDD)
    8 Functional screeners
    8.1 Instrumental Activities of Daily Living (IADL) Scale
    8.2 Zarit Burden Interview (ZBI)
    9 Sleep disorder screeners
    9.1 Jenkins Sleep Questionnaire (JSQ)
    9.2 Pittsburgh Sleep Quality Index (PSQI)
    10 Combining screeners (1): cognitive screeners
    10.1 MMSE and MoCA
    10.2 MMSE and IQCODE
    10.3 MMSE and AD8
    10.4 ACE-R and IQCODE
    10.5 AD8 and 6CIT
    10.6 AD8 and MoCA
    ^10.7 AD8 and MACE
    11 Combining screeners (2): other combinations
    11.1 Single-item and cognitive screener: SMC Likert scale and MACE
    11.2 Neurological signs: Triple
    11.3 Functional and cognitive screener: IADL Scale and MMSE
    11.4 Functional and cognitive screener: IADL Scale and ACE-R
    12 Converting screeners: Linear regression equations.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Sameer Mehta.
    Contents:
    Part I. Guidelines, thrombolytic therapy, pharmacology
    1. Compendium of STEMI clinical trials
    2. European Society of Cardiology and American College of Cardiology STEMI guidelines
    3. The role of thrombolytic therapy in the era of STEMI interventions
    4. Anticoagulants in STEMI interventions
    5. New oral and intravenous adenosine diphosphate blockers in STEMI intervention
    Part II. The STEMI procedure
    6. The role of acute circulatory support in STEMI
    7. Thrombus management for STEMI interventions
    8. Transradial techniques to improve STEMI outcomes
    9. Management of cardiogenic shock
    10. Present role of thrombectomy in STEMI interventions
    11. Choice of stent in STEMI interventions
    12. Illustrated STEMI procedures I. Basic STEMI skills
    13. Illustrated STEMI procedures II. Basic STEMI skills
    14. Illustrated STEMI Procedures III. Basic STEMI skills
    15. Remote ischemic conditioning for acute myocardial infarction
    Part III. The STEMI process
    16. Reducing door-to-balloon times
    17. Pre-hospital triage and management
    18. Creating networks for optimal STEMI management
    19. Pharacoinvasive management of STEMI
    Part IV. Global STEMI initiatives
    20. Stent for life: the European perspective on STEMI interventions
    21. Urban combined pharmacoinvasive managment of STEMI patients as antidote to traffic in large metropolitan cities
    22. Lessons from the Puerto Rico Unfarction National Collaborative Experience Initiative
    23. The STEMI Care Program in China
    24. STEMI India
    25. The role of telemedicine in STEMI interventions
    26. Innovative telemedicine STEMI protocols
    Part V. Future perspectives
    27. STEMI interventions, beyond the culprit lesion
    28. Promising technologies for STEMI interventions
    Index.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    R. T. Floyd EdD, ATC, CSCS, Director of Athletic Training and Sports Medicine, Distinguished Professor of Physical Education and Athletic Training Chair, Department of Physical Education and Athletic Training Chair, School of Health Sciences and Human Performance, The University of West Alabama Livingston, Alabama.
    Summary: "A very careful review of the entire text including all figures and tables has been conducted with the intent of simplifying and clarifying for better understanding when possible. Additional terms, content and concepts in select cases have been added. These include body positions, open vs. c;lose packed joint positions, concave-convex rule, Lombard's paradox, and a lever terminology table. Chapters 4 through 11 now have a table detailing how to locate and palpate the key bony and joint landmarks. The labeling and captions in many figures have been enhanced with further details. Terms for the "peroneal" muscles and nerves have been changed to more current international term fibular or fibularis. In many cases fibularis is directly followed by peroneal in parenthesis to avoid confusion. Further details on the plantaris muscle have also been added. Additional references have been added along with some revisions and additions to the review and laboratory exercises, and end-of-chapter worksheets. Additional questions and exercises will continue to be added to the Online Learning Center. Finally, a few new terms have been added to the Glossary"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2021
  • Digital
    Susan C. Lester ; [illustrated by] Christopher A. French, Shogun G. Curtis.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2024
  • Digital
    Joseph Torresi, Sarah McGuinness, Karin Leder, Daniel O'Brien, Tilman Ruff, Mike Starr, Katherine Gibney.
    Summary: The fourth edition of this well received book provides an authoritative and up-to-date resource to support good practice in travel medicine, a field that has evolved substantially in recent years. Concretely, there has been intensified monitoring of health problems among travellers, as well as extensive research efforts, which have led to the development of evidence-based approaches to the field. The book includes expert recommendations regarding e.g. immunizations, malaria prophylaxis, travellers diarrhea, altitude sickness, emerging infections, and non-infectious health issues encountered by travellers. It provides a practical approach to the pre-travel consultation and management of most issues that arise in medical care for travellers. In addition, it provides expert advice for high-risk travellers, e.g. those with immunosuppression, the elderly, pregnant women and young children. The text offers a user-friendly, practical handbook for healthcare practitioners during their clinical consultations, as well as nurses and pharmacists.

    Contents:
    Principles of pre-travel health care
    Pre-travel immunisation for various diseases
    Malaria prevention in travellers
    Arboviral infections in travellers
    Travellers diarrhoea
    Non-vaccine preventable infectious problems in travellers
    Non-infectious problems in travellers
    Travellers with special needs
    Illness in returned travellers
    Resources for travel health information.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    edited by Ranee Thakar, Philip Toozs-Hobson, Lucia Dolan.
    Summary: "Patient-centred questionnaires and patient reported outcome (PRO) measures are terms that are used interchangeably to reflect an instrument that provides evaluation of the lived experience of symptoms from the patients' perspective. PRO use has grown significantly in number and use in the past ten to fifteen years, recognising the importance of placing patients at the centre of their care [1)]. It is recognised that only those individuals experiencing symptoms can report on the more subjective elements (2). This is particularly important in the case of urodynamics, which is a clinical test. PROs provide a method of measuring subjective phenomena in an objective way and provide context to the data provided by clinical measurements. PROs can be used to record the presence and severity of symptoms and also to measure their impact, in particular on quality of life. This is useful when interpreting patients' priorities for treatment and understanding the most bothersome aspect of their symptoms"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Pre-test assessment of urodynamic function, using patient-centred questionnaires / Nikki Cotterill
    The assessment of women with lower urinary tract dysfunction, using bladder diaries / Prathiba De Silva & Matthew Parsons
    The assessment of women with urinary incontinence, using pad testing / Emmanuel Karantanis
    Setting-up urodynamic equipment / Lucy Swithinbank & Louise Webster
    Urodynamic flow-rate testing / Laura Thomas, Marcus Drake & Ahmed Shaban
    The cystometrogram / Angie Rantell
    Videocystourethrography / Sushma Srikrishna, Smita Rajshekhar
    Ambulatory urodynamic monitoring / Kate Anders & Kal Perkins
    Urodynamic artefacts / Reeba Oliver & Ranee Thakar
    The assessment of urethral function : supplementary investigations / Mark Slack & Rob Sherwin
    Urodynamics in the neurological patient / Laura Thomas & Chris Harding
    Urodynamics terminology / Paul Abrams.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    [edited by] Craig R. Asher, Brian P. Griffin.
    Summary: "Portable and clinically oriented, this full-color handbook is a unique and timely guide to valvular heart disease and percutaneous coronary interventions. A structured, standardized format helps you quickly find the information you need, while numerous illustrations and videos online provide visual support for key concepts and procedures. Key Features: Numerous tables, diagrams, and images highlight concepts, procedures, and devices related to valvular heart disease. Structured outline format lists landmark articles, key reviews, and relevant book chapters at the end of each chapter. Online chapter self-assessment questions and answers allow you to self-test and review key concepts. Authored by current or former Cleveland Clinic trainees and clinicians, as well as international experts in the field. Ideal for interventional cardiologists, fellows, cardiothoracic surgeons, anesthesiologists, cardiac technicians, sonographers, nurses, physician assistants and nurse practitioners. Your book purchase includes a complimentary download of the enhanced eBook for iOS, Android, PC & Mac."--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2018
  • Digital
    Marie Gerhard-Herman, Aaron Aday.
    Summary: This practical manual makes clinical vascular medicine easy for the health care provider to master by providing frameworks for each area of diagnosis and a practical approach to necessary testing. Rather than providing long lists of possible diagnoses for a clinical question, each approach is broken down into a flow chart of the thinking and questions necessary so that only those needed in each situation are utilized. Chapters cover a broad range of topics including arterial and venous testing in the laboratory, thrombophilia, cold disorders of the extremities and lymphatic diseases. Manual of Vascular Medicine provides extensive case-based learning for trainees and practicing physicians looking to expand their knowledge in this field that crosses many traditional disciplines. It is therefore of importance to any medical professional managing vascular patients, including cardiovascular and vascular physicians, nephrologists, neurologists, phlebologists, dermatologists, general medical doctors and vascular radiologists.

    Contents:
    Noninvasive Vascular Testing
    Evaluation of Leg Pain
    Peripheral Artery Disease
    Aortic Disease
    Renal and Mesenteric Vascular Disease
    Vasospastic Disease
    Cerebrovascular Disease
    Evaluation of Limb Swelling
    Venous Thromboembolic Disease
    Lymphedema
    Vascular Compression Syndromes
    Special Populations.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital/Print
    Edwin J. Wylie, Ronald J. Stoney, William K. Ehrenfeld ; illustrated by Ted Bloodhart.
    Digital Access Springer 1980
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: Oversize (Downstairs)
    RD598.5 W93
    2
  • Digital
    Jörn Rittweger, editor.
    Summary: This book addresses various practical aspects of vibration exercise and vibration therapy. In addition, it describes the technical and physiological background, providing applied scientists and doctors with a deeper understanding of the therapeutic potential that vibration exercise holds. Having first emerged two decades ago, vibration exercise has since established itself as a widespread form of physical exercise, used in all rehabilitation areas. The goal of this book is to close the gap between scientific knowledge and practice. Given that occupational exposure to vibration leads to well-known unfavorable effects, a substantial section of the book is dedicated to potential risks, hazards and contra-indications. Moreover, the application of vibration therapy in a number of specific conditions is presented in a clinically usable fashion. Lastly, the use of vibration as a diagnostic tool will also be discussed. Given its breadth of coverage, this book will be of interest to physiotherapists and exercise scientists, but also to a wider range of physicians working in the field of rehabilitation.

    Contents:
    Preface
    THE FUNDAMENTALS
    Physics of Vibration
    The Biology of Vibration.-Design principles of Available machines.-Safety and contra-indications
    PHYSIOLOGICAL RESPONSES
    Biomechanics of Vibration Exercise
    Cutaneous and muscle mechanoreceptors, their sensitivity to mechanical vibrations.-Electromyographical recordings during Vibration
    Supraspinal Responses & Spinal Reflexes
    Assesing reflex latencies in responses to vibration: Evidence for the involvement of more than one receptor.-Metabolic responses to whole body vibration exercise
    Circulation Effects
    Hormonal responses to vibration therapy
    USE OF VIBRATION FOR TRAINING
    Warming up.-Modulation of Neuromuscular Function
    Application in Athletics
    Using whole body vibration for countermeasure exercise
    CLINICAL APPLICATIONS
    How to Design Exercise Sessions with Whole Body Vibration Platforms
    Whole Body Vibration in Geriatric Rehabilitation. -Application of vibration training for enhancing bone strength.-Whole body vibration exercise as a treatment option for chronic lower back pain
    Pediatric Rehabilitation
    Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease (COPD)
    Urinary Incontinence.-Primary Muscle Disorders.-Application of vibration training in people with common neurological disorders
    Whole body vibration therapy in patients with pulmonary hypertension and right heart failure: Lessons from a pilot study.-Vibration exercise and vibration therapy in metabolic syndrome.-Whole body vibration exercise in Cancer.-GLOSSARY, APPENDICES.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Konrad Mohnike, Jens Ricke, Stefanie Corradini, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive insight into this special form of image-guided interventional therapy and its indications. It begins by introducing the fundamental principles of radiotherapy, the most up-to-date guidelines and the interdisciplinary aspects of the technique and then expands to more practical aspects such as therapy planning, indications and the use of the technique for certain tumor types, including liver metastases, rare tumors, cerebral malignancies and prostate tumors. Written and edited by pioneers in this technique, the chapters outline results and numerous illustrated case studies from the daily routine of daily clinical practice providing an insightful guidance to this relatively new but growing method. This is an indispensable guide for oncologists, radiation therapists and radiologists, but also general practitioners and all other specialties, which have an oncological focus.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    jointly sponsored by ILO, IAEA, and WHO.
    Contents:
    v. 1. Basic protection requirements / C.B. Braestrup, K.J. Vikterlöf, 1974
    v. 2. Unsealed sources / D. Frost, H. Jammet, 1975
    v. 3. X-ray diagnosis / B.E. Keane, K.B. Tikhonov, 1975
    v. 4. Radiation protection in dentistry / K. Koren, A.H. Wuehrmann, 1977
    v. 5. Personnel monitoring services / W. Minder, S.B. Osborn, 1980.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RA975.5.R3 M36
    5
  • Digital
    Bonnie An Henderson, editor.
    Contents:
    Manual Small Incision Cataract Surgery
    Instruments and Supplies
    Anesthesia for small incision cataract surgery
    Prep/Drape
    Incision
    The Capsular Opening
    Hydrodissection
    Lens Delivery
    Cortex Removal
    IOL Insertion
    Wound closure
    Drug treatment and Complications
    Conversion from Phacoemulsification to MSICS.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Roland Gautschi ; translator, Alan Wiser.
    Contents:
    Myofascial trigger points
    Trigger point induced disturbances
    Diagnosis of myofascial pain
    Treatment of myofascial pain
    Indications, contraindications
    Manual therapy of the muscles
    Neuromuscular entrapments
    Clinical aspects.
  • Digital/Print
    Dieulafoy, Georges.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Google Books
    Google Books
    Google Books
    Google Books
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L46 .D56 1897
    4
  • Digital/Print
    Dieulafoy, Georges.
    Digital Access Google Books 1880-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L46 .D56 1898
    1
  • Digital
    Enrique H. Bucher.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive, updated syntheses of all the information available on Mar Chiquita, covering a various aspects of the geography, geological history, biology and ecology of the site, as well as a detailed analysis of the current land-use patterns, environmental threats, and conservation issues. Mar Chiquita, located in the province of Cordoba, Argentina, is a protected wilderness area that includes South Americas largest saline lake and wetland. It has a very rich bird biodiversity, including three of the six species of flamingos that exist in the world, and high numbers of intercontinental migratory shorebirds. For this reason, the area has been declared an International Site by the Ramsar Convention on Wetlands of International Importance, and also a Site of Hemispheric Importance by the Western Hemisphere Shorebird Reserves Network. Largely unknown until very recently, particularly in terms of the English literature, the site is rapidly gaining international visibility, not only in terms of scientific research, but also as site of interest for the nature lovers around the globe. Written in a language accessible to the non-specialists, the book focuses on integrating the dynamic, functional processes in the ecosystem, while at the same time providing the necessary descriptive information. Accordingly, it is of interest to scientists from diverse disciplines interested in saline wetlands, as well as to students, managers, and the general public.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Geographic Overview
    Geomorphology
    Hydrology and Climate
    Limnology
    Fish
    Amphibians and Reptiles
    Birds
    Mammals
    Mosquitos
    Dulce River Wetland
    History of Human Settlement
    A Functional Overview
    Conservation and Sustainable Use.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    Elke Mühlberger, Lisa L. Hensley, Jonathan S. Towner, editors.
    Contents:
    Filovirus research: how it began / Werner Slenczka
    Ecology of filoviruses / Brian R. Amman [and 3 others]
    West Africa 2013 Ebola: from virus outbreak to humanitarian crisis / Daniel G. Bausch
    Clinical management of Ebola virus disease patients in low-resource settings / Armand Sprecher, Michel Van Herp and Pierre E. Rollin
    Clinical management of Ebola virus disease patients in high-resource settings / G. Marshall Lyon, Aneesh K. Mehta and Bruce S. Ribner
    Ebola virus disease in humans: pathophysiology and immunity / César Muñoz-Fontela and Anita K. McElroy
    Nonhuman primate models of Ebola virus disease / Richard S. Bennett [and five others]
    Small animal models for studying filovirus pathogenesis / Satoko Yamaoka [and three others]
    Accelerating vaccine development during 2013-2016 West African Ebola virus disease outbreak / Elizabeth S. Higgs [and eight others]
    Therapeutics against filovirus infection / John Connor, Gary Kobinger and Gene Olinger
    Filovirus strategies to escape antiviral responses / Judith Olejnik [and five others]
    Mechanisms of filovirus entry / R.A. Davey [and five others]
    Inside the cell: assembly of filoviruses / Larissa Kolesnikova [and three others]
    Filovirus structural biology: the molecules in the machine / Robert N. Kirchdoerfer [and three others]
    Reverse genetics of filoviruses / Thomas Hoenen [and four others]
    Guide to the correct use of filoviral nomenclature / Jens H. Kuhn.
  • Digital/Print
    edited by David W. Dempster, Jane A. Cauley, Mary L. Bouxsein, Felicia Cosman.
    Contents:
    -- Volume 1. Part I. Introduction. The nature of osteoporosis
    The bone organ system: form and function
    Part II. Developmental, cellular and molecular biology of bone. Development of the skeleton
    The skeletal stem cell
    Osteoclast biology
    Osteoblast biology: developmental origin and interactive nature of osteoblasts
    Osteocytes
    The regulatory role of matrix proteins in mineralization of bone
    Part III. Skeletal hormones and regulatory factors. Parathyroid hormone and parathyroid hormone-related protein
    Phosphatonins
    Skeletal growth factors
    WNT signaling in skeletal homeostasis and diseases
    Part IV. Biomechanics and mechanobiology. The mechanical behavior of bone
    Cellular and molecular mechanotransduction in bone
    Adaptation of skeletal structure to mechanical loading
    Biomechanics of hip and vertebral fractures
    Part V. Epidemiology of osteoporosis. Epidemiologic methods in studies of osteoporosis
    Genetics of osteoporosis
    Race, ethnicity, and osteoporosis
    Geographic variability in the incidence of hip and vertebral fractures
    Nutrition and osteoporosis
    Physical activity, exercise and skeletal health
    Reproductive and hormonal factors and the risk for osteoporosis
    Clinical and epidemiological studies: skeletal changes across menopause
    Osteoporosis in men: what is similar and what is different?
    Falls as risk factors for fracture
    Impact of physical characteristics and lifestyle factors on bone density and fractures
    Imminent fracture risk and disability post fracture
    Economics of osteopososis
    Part VI. General pathophysiology of osteoporosis. Skeletal heterogeneity and the purposes of bone remodeling
    On the evolution and contemporary roles of bone remodeling
    Estrogen deficiency and the pathogenesis of osteoporosis
    Cytokines and the pathogenesis of osteoporosis
    Bone and fat
    Bone, muscle, and sarcopenia
    Bone mineral acquisition in utero and during infancy and childhood
    Osteoporosis in childhood and adolescence
    Osteoporosis in premenopausal women, pregnancy, and lactation
    Bone and the microbiome
    Volume 2. Part VII. Impact of comorbidity and medications on skeletal health. Immobilization osteoporosis
    Osteoporosis in neurological disorders: Parkinson’s disease, stroke, and multiple sclerosis
    Effects on the skeleton from medications used to treat non-skeletal disorders
    Osteoporosis associated with gastrointestinal disorders; celiac and inflammatory bowel diseases
    Osteoporosis associated with eating disorders
    Glucocorticoid-induced osteoporosis and Cushing's syndrome
    Thyroid hormone, thyroid medication, and the skeleton
    The skeletal actions of parathyroid hormone in primary hyperparathyroidism
    Osteogenesis imperfecta and other defects of bone development as occasional causes of adult osteoporosis
    Human immunodeficiency virus and osteoporosis
    Diabetes, diabetic medications, and risk of fracture
    Skeletal health after bariatric surgery
    Osteoporosis in organ transplant patients
    Osteoporosis associated with rheumatologic disorders
    Osteoporosis associated with chronic kidney disease
    Relationship between periodontal disease, tooth loss and osteoporosis
    Impact of breast cancer and its treatment on bone loss and fracture risk – pathophysiology and management
    Management of bone health in men with prostate cancer
    Impact of MGUS and myeloma on skeletal health
    Renal stone disease, hypercalciuria and osteoporosis: use of thiazides and alkali for osteoporosis
    Sleep disorders and osteoporosis
    Part VIII. Diagnosis and evaluation. Evaluation of the osteoporosis patient
    Who should be screened for osteoporosis?
    Vertebral fracture identification
    Noninvasive imaging techniques and fracture risk assessment
    Biochemical markers of bone turnover in osteoporosis
    A comparison of fracture risk assessment tools
    Part IX. Patient management. Orthopedic aspects of osteoporosis
    Fall prevention interventions
    Exercise and other physical therapy interventions in the management of osteoporosis
    Calcium and vitamin d in the management of osteoporosis
    Nutrients beyond calcium and vitamin d to treat osteoporosis
    Condition still critical: compliance and persistence with osteoporosis medications
    Part X. Pharmacotherapeutics. Estrogen and estrogen analogs for prevention and treatment of osteoporosis
    Bisphosphonates pharmacology and use in the treatment of osteoporosis
    Denosumab for the treatment of osteoporosis
    Teriparatide and abaloparatide treatment for osteoporosis
    Calcitonin in osteoporosis
    Androgens
    Long-term bisphosphonate treatment: continuation and interruption
    Romosozumab in the treatment of postmenopausal osteoporosis
    Lessons from bone histomorphometry on the mechanisms of action of osteoporosis drugs
    Part XI. New directions. Long term treatment strategies and goal directed therapy.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2021
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC648 .O85 2021
    2
  • Digital
    editors: Marilena Streit-Bianchi, Margarita Cimadevila, Wolfgang Trettnak.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Takehide Asano, Norihide Fukushima, Takashi Kenmochi, Naoto Matsuno.
    Summary: In response to persistent donor organ shortages, organs from marginal donors, such as expanded criteria donors (ECD) and donation after cardiac death (DCD) donors, are now accepted and have been successfully transplanted, reducing the waiting times for transplantation. Especially in Japan, transplantation of DCD kidneys has a relatively long history because of the difficulty or lack of national consensus in accepting brain death, which has made it possible to accumulate considerable clinical experience. Thus, the current organ shortage has stimulated interest in the use of marginal donors for transplantation. This book, prepared by distinguished authorities in their fields, is intended for clinicians and researchers. It highlights the use of marginal donors as a comparatively novel source of transplantation organs and provides a thorough overview of marginal donors from their historical origins to recent clinical applications, including the state-of-the-art science of organ/donor management, procurement, and preservation. Also provided is valuable information on ABO-incompatible donors which extend the availability of donor sources. Each chapter offers an individual analysis of the optimal requirements for the safe management and preservation of organs, including the heart, lung, liver, kidney, pancreas, and pancreatic islets.

    Contents:
    1 History of Marginal Donors in the World
    2 Management of Extended Criteria Donors
    3 DCD for Heart Transplantation
    4 ECD for Heart Transplantation
    5 How to Initiate DCD Program for Lung Transplantation
    6 DCD for Lung Transplantation
    7 ECD for Lung Transplantation
    8 LD for Lung Transplantation
    9 How to Initiate DCD Program for Liver Transplantation
    10 DCD for Liver Transplantation
    11 ECD for Adult Liver Transplantation
    12 LD for Liver Transplantation
    13 How to Initiate a DCD Programme for Kidney Transplantation
    14 DCD for Kidney Transplantation
    15 Machine Perfusion Preservation for Kidney Transplantation
    16 ECD for Kidney Transplantation
    17 LD for Kidney Transplantation
    18 DCD for Pancreas Transplantation
    19 ECD for Pancreas Transplantation
    20 LD for Pancreas Transplantation
    21 DCD for Islet Transplantation
    22 ECD for Islet Transplantation
    23 ECD for Small Intestine Transplantation
    24 ABO-Incompatible Donor.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Michael T. Compton.
    Summary: "Even while many states have passed legislation pertaining to "medical marijuana" and others have decriminalized or even legalized recreational use, a debate continues within society as to whether marijuana is simply a harmless substance that should be fully legalized, a possibly beneficial treatment for patients with certain illnesses, or a drug with the potential to worsen addiction and cause mental health problems. The controversy persists in the medical community as well, where accumulating evidence implicates marijuana use, especially in adolescence, as a risk factor for poor educational achievement and substance use disorders, as well as schizophrenia and related psychotic disorders -- all of which complicates the heated discourse on legalization. Although other books have explored the medical marijuana and the neuroscience behind marijuana, no single source of comprehensive information on marijuana and mental health in modern American society has existed to date. Balanced, focused, and highly readable, Marijuana and Mental Health fills this void. It provides an academic foundation for further study while also informing clinical mental health practice as well as policy decisions by articulating the connection between marijuana and mental health, particularly in the United States. Chapters offer a concise compilation of research in this area, discussing topics such as: -The effects of marijuana on the brain and mind -Marijuana-related legislation -Medical marijuana -Comorbidities between marijuana misuse and mood and anxiety disorders -The complex link between marijuana use and psychotic disorder -Synthetic cannabinoid -Treatment and prevention of marijuana misuse Relatable clinical vignettes that contextualize these issues and illustrate the clinical applicability of the content, as well as key chapter points that emphasize major takeaways, make Marijuana and Mental Health the authoritative reference for clinical and research psychiatrists, psychiatric residents and fellows, clinical psychologists, and psychiatric nurses." -- Provided by the publisher.

    Contents:
    An introduction to marijuana and mental health / Michael T. Compton
    Marijuana's effects on the mind : intoxication, effects on cognition and motivation, and addiction / David L. Atkinson
    Medical and recreational marijuana policy : from prohibition to the rise of legalization / Arthur Robin Williams
    Medical marijuana : indications, formulations, efficacy, and adverse effects / Thida Thant, Elin C. Kondrad, Abraham M. Nussbaum
    Marijuana use and comorbidity : risk for substance use disorders and associations with mood, anxiety, and other behavioral health disorders / Charles Luther, Matthew Lorber, Ruth S. Shim
    Marijuana use and psychosis : from Reefer Madness to marijuana use as a component cause / Claire Ramsay Wan, Michael T. Compton
    Synthetic cannabinoids : emergence, epidemiology, and clinical effects, and management / Marc W. Manseau
    Treatment of marijuana addiction : clinical assessment and psychosocial and pharmacological interventions / Garrett M. Sparks
    Prevention of marijuana misuse : school-, family-, and community-based approaches / W. Alex Mason, Charles B. Fleming, Kevin P. Haggerty.
    Digital Access PsychiatryOnline 2016
  • Digital
    Hermann Ehrlich.
    Summary: The work is a source of modern knowledge on biomineralization, biomimetics and bioinspired materials science with respect to marine invertebrates. The author gives the most coherent analysis of the nature, origin and evolution of biocomposites and biopolymers isolated from and observed in the broad diversity of marine invertebrate organisms and within their unusual structural formations. The basic format is that of a major review article, with liberal use of references to original literature. There is a wealth of new and newly synthesized information, including dozens of previously unpublished images of unique marine creatures and structures from nano- to microscale including high-resolution scanning and transmission electron micrographs. The material is organized effectively along both biological (phyla) and functional lines. The classification of biological materials of marine origin is proposed and discussed. Much of the pertinent data is organized into tables, and extensive use is made of electron micrographs and line drawings. Several modern topics e.g. "biomineralization- demineralization-remineralization phenomena," or "phenomenon of multiphase biomineralization," are discussed in detail. Traditionally, such current concepts as hierarchical organization of biocomposites and skeletal structures, structural bioscaffolds, biosculpturing, biomimetism and bioinspiration as tools for the design of innovative materials are critically analyzed from both biological and materials science point of view using numerous unique examples of marine origin. This monograph reviews the most relevant advances in the marine biomaterials research field, pointing out several approaches being introduced and explored by distinct laboratories.

    Contents:
    Chapter1. Introduction
    Part 1: Biomaterials. Chapter 2. Biomaterials and Biological Materials, Common Definitions, History, and Classification
    Part 2. Biominerals and Biomineralization. Chapter 3. Biominerals
    Chapter 4. Biomineralization
    Chapter 5. Biomineralization-Demineralization-Remineralization Phenomena in Nature
    Chapter 6. Multiphase Biomineralization
    Part 3. Biomineralized Structures and Biocomposites. Chapter 7. Hierarchical Biological Materials
    Chapter 8. Paleodyction Honeycomb Structure
    Chapter 9. Pecularities of the Structural Organization of the Glass Sponges (Hexactinellida) Skeletons
    Chapter 10. Phenomenon of Interspace Mineralization in the Bilayered Organic Matrix of Deep-Sea Bamboo Coral (Anthozoa: Gorgonacea: Isididae)
    Chapter 11. Bamboo Corals as Living Bone Implants
    Chapter 12. Sand Dollar Spines
    Chapter 13. Molluscs Spicules
    Part 4. Non-mineralized Structures. Chapter 14. Spongin
    Chapter 15. Gorgonin
    Chapter 16. Antipathin
    Chapter 17. Rubber-like Bioelastomers of Marine Origin
    Chapter 18. Capsular Bioelastomers of Whelks
    Chapter 19. Byssus: from Inspiration to Development of Novel Biomaterials
    Chapter 20. Abductin
    Chapter 21. Resilin
    Chapter 22. Adhesion Systems in Echinodermata
    Chapter 23. Adhesive Gels from Marine Gastropods (Mollusca)
    Chapter 24. Barnacles cements
    Part 5. Suction-based Adhesion in Marine Invertebrates. Chapter 25. Suctorian Protozoa
    Chapter 26. Trichodina sucker disc
    Chapter 27. Giardia Suction
    Chapter 28. Suction in Mollusks
    Chapter 29. Halogenated Biocomposites
    Chapter 30. Chitin-protein-based Composites
    Part 6. Macromolecular Biopolymers. Chapter 31. Chitin
    Chapter 32. Marine Collagens
    Part 7. Self Made Biological Materials. Chapter 33. Self-made Biological Materials of Protozoans
    Chapter 34. Foraminifera
    Chapter 35. Polychaete Worms: from Tube Builders to Glueomics
    Part 8. Extreme Biomimetics. Chapter 36. Life in extreme Environments: from Bacteria to Diatoms
    Chapter 37. Epiloque.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Marco Ortiz, Ferenc Jordán, editors.
    Summary: The book presents a collection of large-scale network-modeling studies on coastal systems in Latin America. It includes a novel description of the functioning of coastal complex ecosystems and also predicts how natural and human-made disturbances percolate through the networks. Coastal areas belong to the most populated ecosystems around the globe, and are massively influenced by human impacts such as shipping, mining, fisheries, tourism, pollution and human settlements. Even though many of these activities have facilitated socio-economic development, they have also caused a significant deterioration in natural populations, communities and ecosystems worldwide. Covering coastal marine ecosystems of Latin America such as the NE and SE Pacific, NW Atlantic and Caribbean areas, it discusses the construction of quantitative (Ecopath-Ecosim-Ecospace and Centrality of Node Sets) and semi-quantitative (Loop Analysis) multispecies trophic-network models to describe and assess the impacts of natural and human interventions like pelagic and benthic fishing as well as natural events such as El Niño, and La Niña. The book also features steady state (and/or near moving equilibrium) and dynamical models to support the management of exploited organisms, and applies and quantifies macroscopic indices, based on Ascendency (Ulanowicz) and Local Stability (Levinsþ Loop Analysis). Further, it discusses the determination of the Keystone Species Complex Index, which is a holistic extension of the classical concept of Keystone Species (Paine), offering novel strategies for conservation monitoring and management.

    Contents:
    SECTION I. Natural and human environment of coastal ecosystems
    Chapter 1. Ecological modelling and conservation on the coasts of Mexico
    Chapter 2. SE Pacific: the ecosystem and its use along the Chilean and Peruvian coast
    SECTION II. Marine ecosystem models in the South East Pacific coast
    Chapter 3. Modelling the Northern Humboldt Current Ecosystem; from winds to predators
    Chapter 4. Marine ecosystem models in the South Pacific coast
    Chapter 5. Keystone Species Complexes and macroscopic properties for improving ecosystem-based conservation practices in kelp forest along the north-central Chilean coast
    Chapter 6. Exploring alternative management policies for benthic ecological systems of northern Chile (SE Pacific)
    SECTION III. Central Pacific, Caribbean and Atlantic coastal ecosystem models
    Chapter 7. How much biomass must remain at the sea after fishing to conserve ecosystem
    functioning? The case of the Monterey sardine in the Gulf of California, Mexico
    Chapter 8. Dynamic and spatial model of the coral reef of Banco Chinchorro Biosphere Reserve (Caribbean Sea) for assessment harvest scenarios: short-term responses
    Chapter 9. Ecological role of sharks assessed by Ecopath models
    SECTION IV. System-based conservation and management: conclusions
    Chapter 10. Graph theory in food webs: uses and applications for conservation of marine ecosystems
    Chapter 11. Modelling aim the conservation of coastal marine ecosystem in Latin America.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Bradley S. Moore.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
  • Digital
    Randall W. Davis.
    Summary: This comprehensive book provides new insights into the morphological, metabolic, thermoregulatory, locomotory, diving, sensory, feeding, and sleep adaptations of Cetacea (whales and dolphins), Pinnipedia (seals, sea lions and walrus), Sirenia (manatees and dugongs) and sea otters for an aquatic life. Each chapter reviews the discoveries from previous studies and integrates recent research using new techniques and technology. Readers will gain an understanding of the remarkable adaptations that enable marine mammals to spend all or most of their lives at sea, often while hunting prey at depth.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Return to the sea : the evolution of marine mammals
    3. Respiration and the effects of pressure
    4. Metabolism and thermoregulation
    5. Locomotion
    6. Physiological and metabolic adaptations for breath-hold diving
    7. Sensory systems
    8. Feeding and digestion
    9. Sleep.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Takashi Gojobori, Tokio Wada, Takanori Kobayashi, Katsuhiko Mineta, editors.
    Summary: This book presents the state-of-art marine metagenome research and explains the method of marine metagenomic analysis in an easy-to-understand manner. Changes in the marine environment due to global warming and pollution have become a major global problem. Maintaining a healthy marine ecosystem requires advanced environmental monitoring and assessment systems. As such, the book presents a novel metagenomic monitoring method, which has been developed for comprehensive analyses of the DNA of microorganisms living in seawater to further our understanding of the dynamics of the marine environment. The book can be used as a primer for new researchers and as a manual on experimental methods.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Technological Aspects of Marine Metagenomics: Sample Collection and preparation methods
    Chapter 1: Metagenomic methods: from seawater to the database
    Chapter 2: Collection of microbial DNA from marine sediments
    Chapter 3: Primer design, evaluation of primer universality and estimation of identification power of amplicon sequences in silico
    Chapter 4: High coverage expression profiling (HiCEP) of microbial community genomes in the ocean
    Part 2: Technological Aspects of Marine Metagenomics: Metagenome Data Analysis
    Chapter 5: Introduction and application of Digital DNA Chip Analysis (DDCA) to metagenomic analysis
    Chapter 6: Horizontal gene transfer in marine environment: a technical perspective on metagenomics
    Chapter 7: MAPLE enables functional assessment of microbiota in various environments
    Part 3: Applications in Ocean and Fisheries Sciences: Diversity and Function of Microbial Community
    Chapter 8: Comparison of microscopic and PCR amplicon and shotgun metagenomic approaches applied to marine diatom communities
    Chapter 9: Seasonal dynamics of bacterial community composition in coastal seawater at Sendai Bay, Japan
    Chapter 10: Shotgun metagenome analyses: seasonality monitoring in Sendai Bay and search for red tide marker sequences
    Chapter 11: Distribution and community composition of ammonia-oxidizing archaea and bacteria in coastal sediments in response to sediment material gradients at Sendai Bay, Japan
    Chapter 12: Marine metagenomic sequence counts of reads assigned to taxa consistently proportionate to read counts obtained for per g of sea water sample
    Chapter 13: New aquaculture technology based on host-symbiotic co-metabolism
    Part 4: Applications in Ocean and Fisheries Sciences: Analysis of the Red Tide
    Chapter 14: Influences of diurnal sampling bias on fixed-point monitoring of plankton biodiversity determined using a massively parallel sequencing-based technique
    Chapter 15: Detection of microorg anisms which show positive or negative correlations with red tide causing alga using a new time-series network model.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    Malgorzata Kloc, Jacek Z. Kubiak, editors.
    Summary: This book highlights the potential advantages of using marine invertebrates like tunicates, echinoderms, sponges and cephalopods as models in both biological and medical research. Bioactive compounds found in marine organisms possess antibacterial, antifungal, anti-diabetic and anti-inflammatory properties, and can affect the immune and nervous systems. Despite substantial research on the medicinal attributes of various marine invertebrates, they are still very much underrepresented in scientific literature: the majority of cell, developmental and evolutionary scientific journals only publish research conducted on a few well-known model systems like Drosophila melanogaster or Xenopus laevis. Addressing that gap, this book introduces readers to new model organisms like starfish or nemertera. By showing their benefits with regard to regeneration, stem cell research and Evo-Devo, the authors provide a cross-sectional view encompassing various disciplines of biological research. As such, this book will not only appeal to scientists currently working on marine organisms, but will also inspire future generations to pursue research of their own.

    Contents:
    Part 1. Gametes, Maturation, Fertilization and Modes of Reproduction
    1. Marine nemertean worms for studies of oocyte maturation and aging
    2. Sperm Nuclear Basic Proteins of Marine Invertebrates
    3. Fertilization in Starfish and Sea Urchin: Roles of Actin
    4. Starfish as a Model System for Analyzing Signal Transduction during Fertilization
    5. Towards multiscale modeling of molecular and biochemical events occurring at fertilization time in sea urchins
    6. Monosex in Aquaculture
    Part 2. Embryonic and Post-embryonic Development, and the Evolution of the Body Plan
    7. Medusa: A review of an ancient cnidarian body form
    8. Sea urchin larvae as a model for post-embryonic development
    9. The Ciona notochord gene regulatory network
    10. Model Systems for Exploring the Evolutionary Origins of the Nervous System
    11. Non-protein-coding RNAs as regulators of development in tunicates
    Part 3. Differentiation, Regeneration and Stemness --12. Differentiation and transdifferentiation of sponge cells
    13. Holothurians as a model system to study regeneration
    14. Regeneration in stellate echinoderms: Crinoidea, Asteroidea, and Ophiuroidea
    15. Solitary ascidians as model organisms in regenerative biology studies
    16. Whole-body regeneration in the colonial tunicate Botrylloides leachii
    Part 4. Biomolecules, Secretion, Symbionts and Feeding
    17. Beach to Bench to Bedside: Marine Invertebrate Biochemical Adaptations and their Applications in Biotechnology and Biomedicine
    18. Coral Food, Feeding, Nutrition and Secretion: A Review
    19. The suitability of fishes as models for studying appetitive behavior in vertebrates
    20. Glycans with Antiviral Activity from Marine Organisms
    21. Cnidarian jellyfish: ecological aspects, nematocyst isolation and treatment methods of sting
    22. These Colors Don't Run: Regulation of Pigment Biosynthesis in Echinoderms
    Part 5. Bioinformatics, Bioengineering and Information Processing
    23. Reef building corals as a tool for climate change research in the genomics era
    24. The crown-of-thorns starfish: from coral reef plague to model system
    25. Structures and composition of the crab carapace - an archetypal material in biomimetic mechanical design
    26. Octopus vulgaris: an alternative in evolution
    27. Vision made easy: cubozoans can advance our understanding of systems level visual information processing.
  • Digital
    Paul L. Marino.
    Summary: "A fundamental sourcebook for the care of critically ill patients. This edition continues the original intent to provide a "generic textbook" that presents fundamental concepts and patient care practices that can be used in any adult intensive care unit, regardless of the specialty focus of the unit"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    1. Vascular access
    2. Preventive practices in the ICU
    3. Hemodynamic monitoring
    4. Disorders of circulatory flow
    5. Cardiac emergencies
    6. Blood components
    7. Acute respiratory failure
    8. Mechanical ventilation
    9. Acid-base disorders
    10. Renal and electrolyte disorders
    11. The abdomen and pelvis
    12. Disorders of body temperature
    13. Nervous system disorders
    14. Nutrition & metabolism
    15. Critical care drug therapy
    16. Toxicologic emergencies
    17. Appendices.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library (Critical Care)
    LWW Health Library (Internal Medicine)
    LWW Health Library (Anesthesiology)
    LWW Health Library (Surgery)
  • Digital
    Paul L. Marino ; with contributions from Samuel M. Galvagno, Jr. ; illustrations by Patricia Gast.
    Summary: Quick lookup for the most essential info in critical care! Ideal for quick reference at the bedside, The Little ICU Book is a condensed, compact version of The ICU Book, Dr. Marino's best-selling comprehensive intensive care reference.The Little ICU Book zeroes in on only the essentials for the hands-on care of critically ill adult patients. Its fast-access format makes it an indispensible resource for residents as well as busy critical care physicians.

    Contents:
    Vascular Access
    Preventive Practices
    Hemodynamic Monitoring
    Cardiac Emergencies
    Disorders of Circulatory Flow
    Resuscitation Fluids
    Mechanical Ventilation
    AcidBase Disorders 23 AcidBase Analysis
    Renal Electrolyte Disorders
    Renal Electrolyte Disorders
    The Abdomen Pelvis 31 Pancreatitis and Liver Failure
    Temperature Disorders 34 Thermoregulatory Disorders
    Nutrition Metabolism 36 Nutritional Requirements
    Toxicologic Emergencies 46 Pharmaceutical Drug Overdoses
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    LWW Health Library (Critical Care)
    LWW Health Library (ObGyn)
  • Digital
    Valerie S. Gordon and Patricia C. Higginbottom.
    Summary: "Here’s an easy-to-follow, practical, easily-implementable, 21st-Century marketing book for academic and special libraries. Written by two practicing librarians who are passionate about communicating with users, the book provides both the inspiration and drive to market your library and practical tips and suggestions on how to do that effectively."-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Strategic planning
    The marketing plan
    Marketing plan components
    Implementation
    Evaluation
    Brands and campaigns
    Digital publications
    Social media
    Personal interactions and events
    Visual and print marketing materials.
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital/Print
    Michael Lieberman, PhD, Distinguished Teaching Professor, Department of Molecular Genetics, Biochemistry and Microbiology, University of Cincinnati College of Medicine, Cincinnati, Ohio, Alisa Peet, MD, Associate Dean Clinical Education, Associate Professor of Clinical Medicine, Lewis Katz School of Medicine at Temple University, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania ; illustrations by Matthew Chansky.
    Contents:
    I: Fuel metabolism
    Metabolic fuels and dietary components
    The fed or absorptive state
    Fasting
    II: Chemical and biologic foundations of biochemistry
    Water, acids, bases, and buffers
    Structures of the major compounds of the body
    Amino acids in proteins
    Structure–function relationships in proteins
    Enzymes as catalysts
    Regulation of enzymes
    Relationship between cell biology and biochemistry
    Cell signaling by chemical messengers
    III: Gene expression and the synthesis of proteins
    Structure of the nucleic acids
    Synthesis of DNA
    Transcription: synthesis of RNA
    Translation: synthesis of proteins
    Regulation of gene expression
    Use of recombinant DNA techniques in medicine
    The molecular biology of cancer
    IV: Carbohydrate metabolism, fuel oxidation, and the generation of adenosine triphosphate
    Basic concepts in the regulation of fuel metabolism by insulin, glucagon, and other hormones
    Cellular bioenergetics: adenosine triphosphate and O2
    Digestion, absorption, and transport of carbohydrates
    Generation of adenosine triphosphate from glucose, fructose, and galactose: glycolysis
    Tricarboxylic acid cycle
    Oxidative phosphorylation and mitochondrial function
    Oxygen toxicity and free-radical injury
    Formation and degradation of glycogen
    Pentose phosphate pathway and the synthesis of glycosides, lactose, glycoproteins, and glycolipids
    Gluconeogenesis and maintenance of blood glucose levels
    V: Lipid metabolism
    Digestion and transport of dietary lipids
    Oxidation of fatty acids and ketone bodies
    Synthesis of fatty acids, triacylglycerols, and the major membrane lipids
    Cholesterol absorption, synthesis, metabolism, and fate
    Metabolism of ethanol
    Integration of carbohydrate and lipid metabolism
    VI: Nitrogen metabolism
    Protein digestion and amino acid absorption
    Fate of amino acid nitrogen: urea cycle
    Synthesis and degradation of amino acids
    Tetrahydrofolate, vitamin B12, and S-adenosylmethionine
    Purine and pyrimidine metabolism
    Intertissue relationships in the metabolism of amino acids VII: tissue metabolism
    Actions of hormones that regulate fuel metabolism
    The biochemistry of erythrocytes and other blood cells
    Blood plasma proteins, coagulation, and fibrinolysis
    Liver metabolism
    Metabolism of muscle at rest and during exercise
    Metabolism of the nervous system
    The extracellular matrix and connective tissue.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QP514.2 .L54 2018
    1
  • Digital
    Michael Lieberman, Alisa Peet ; illustrations by Matthew Chansky.
    Summary: "It has been 5 years since the fifth edition was completed. The sixth edition has some significant organizational changes, as suggested by extensive surveys of faculty and students who used the fifth edition in their classes and studies"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2023
  • Digital
    Galen S. Wagner, MD, David G. Strauss, MD, PhD.
    Summary: "One of the strengths of Marriott's Practical Electrocardiography through its more than 50-year history has been its lucid foundation for understanding the basis for ECG interpretation. Again, in this revision, we have attempted to retain the best of the Marriott tradition--emphasis on the concepts required for everyday ECG interpretation and the simplicities, rather than complexities, of the ECG recordings. During preparation of the 9th and 10th editions, Tobin Lim coauthored many of the 11th edition chapters and served as the primary developer of the digital content associated with that edition. Tobin Lim's input continues into this 12th edition, and David Strauss has led even further into the electronic-based interactive learning experiences. More than 30 of the figures that evolved through previous editions have now been converted through the creative expertise of Mark Flanders into animated movies accessed via QR codes imbedded in the book. David has also collaborated with electrocardiographic educators who are especially skilled in e-based education to add interactive video content to many of the 12th edition chapters. Each of the now 24 chapters is divided (as indicated in the table of contents) into discrete, compact "learning units." Each learning unit begins on a new page to provide blank space for the reader's notes. The purpose of the learning units is to make this book easier to use by allowing the reader to be selective regarding the material to be considered at a particular time. Because the modern student of electrocardiography is primarily oriented to a visual perspective, we have typically begun each page with an illustration"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Cardiac electrical activity
    Recording the electrocardiogram
    Interpretation of the normal electrocardiogram
    The three-dimensional electrocardiogram
    Chamber enlargement
    Intraventricular conduction abnormalities
    Ventricular preexcitation
    Inherited arrhythmia disorders
    Myocardial ischemia and infarction
    Subendocardial ischemia from increased myocardial demand
    Transmural myocardial ischemia from insufficient blood supply
    Myocardial infarction
    Miscellaneous conditions
    Introduction to arrhythmias
    Premature beats
    Accelerated automaticity
    Reentrant atrial tachyarrhythmias-the atrial flutter/fibrillation spectrum
    Reentrant junctional tachyarrhythmias
    Reentrant ventricular tachyarrhythmias
    Ventricular versus supraventricular with aberrant conduction
    Decreased automaticity
    Atrioventricular block
    Artificial cardiac pacemakers
    Dr. Marriott's systematic approach to the diagnosis of arrhythmias.
    Digital Access Ovid 2014
  • Digital
    David G. Strauss, Douglas D. Schocken.
    Summary: "Marriott's Practical Electrocardiography, 13e will revised and updated to reflect the latest advances in ECG technology as well as the newest diagnostic applications, the 13th edition will offer internal medicine residents and cardiology fellows, along with practitioners, the resources they need to build their ECG interpretative skills. In addition, ECGs are increasingly used as a diagnostic tool, which means that not just cardiovascular healthcare providers need to have a solid understanding of this technology. The following are just three examples of scenarios where ECG is applied as a diagnostic tool in the Emergency Department, Heart Failure, and athlete scanning"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Print
    edited by G.E. Lamming ; consultant, Sir Alan Parkes.
    Contents:

    v. 1. Reproductive cycles of vertebrates.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QP251 .M32
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Brayfield, Alison; Buckingham, Robert; Martindale, William; Parfitt, Kathleen; Sweetman, Sean C.
    Digital Access Truven c1999-
    Search Martindale via the main Micromedex search screen.
    Print Access
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Reference (Upstairs)
    RS141.3 .M42
    2
    Retired Reference (Downstairs)
    RS141.3 .M42
    13
  • Digital
    Ian Olver, editor.
    Summary: This book is intended for medical students, residents, and fellows, as well as medical oncologists, radiation oncologists, surgeons, general practitioners, nurses and allied health workers. Complete with case vignettes, key points, and sidebar summaries to further assist readers using practical tips and tricks, this textbook provides current, updated information on the management and prevention of cancer-related side effects, referring to up-to-date sources that are useful for conducting further research. It also introduces new topics, such as financial toxicity and complementary medicine, as well as covering the new side effects of targeted therapies not covered in the last edition. Additionally, MASCC Textbook of Cancer Supportive Care and Survivorship, 2nd edition assembles international, multidisciplinary experts who focus on a comprehensive range of symptoms and side effects associated with cancer and its treatment.

    Contents:
    Part I: Introduction
    Cancer Symtoms, Treatment Side Effects and Disparities in Supportive Care
    Part II: General
    Cancer Pain
    Cancer-Related Fatigue
    Sleep and Cancer
    Palliative Care: End-of-Life Symptoms
    Supportive Care in Elderly Cancer Patients
    Supportive Care in Pediatric Oncology
    Health-Related Quality of Life in Cancer
    Financial Toxicity
    Integrative Oncology: The Role of Complementary Medicine in Supportive Cancer Care
    Part III: Cardiovascular
    Victims of Our Own Success: Cardiac Toxicities from Conventional and Emerging Cancer Therapies
    Cardiac Manifestations of Cancer and Their Management
    Part IV: Respiratory
    Pulmonary Toxicities of Anti Cancer Treatment
    Management of Respiratory Symptoms in People with Cancer
    Part V: Endocrine and Metabolic
    Endocrine and Metabolic Symptoms of Cancer and it's Treatment
    Part VI: Reproductive
    Sexual Problems in Patients with Cancer
    Sterility, Infertility, and Teratogenicity
    ^Menopause Symptoms
    Part VII: Hematological
    Thrombosis and Bleeding in Cancer Patients
    Anemia and Cancer
    Lymphedema in Cancer Patients
    Anemia and Cancer
    Lymphedema in Cancer Patients
    Infections and Cancer
    Part VIII: Gastrointestinal
    Cancer Cachexia and Anorexia
    Xerostomia and Dental Problems in the Head and Neck Radition Patient
    Dysphaia, Reflux, and Hiccups
    Nausea and Vomiting
    Mucositis (Oral and Gastrointestinal)
    Diarrhea, Constipation, and Obstruction in Cancer Management
    Ascites
    Hepatotoxicity and Hepatic Dysfuntion
    Part IX: Urogential
    Urological Symptoms and Side Effects of Treatment
    Gynecological Symptoms
    Part X: Neurologic and Muscular
    Central Nervous System Symptoms: Headache, Seizures, Encephalopathy, and Memory Impairment
    Neuromuscular Disease and Spinal Cord Compression
    Eye Symptoms and Toxicities of Systemic Chemotherapy
    Part XI: Skim
    Extravasation
    Dermatologic Adverse Events
    ^Management of Alopecia Due to Cancer Therapies
    Part XII: Survivorship
    Oral Health and Survivorship: Late Effects of Cancer and Cancer Therapy
    Psychosocial and Spiritual Issues in Supportive Cancer Care. Survivorship: Physical Issues.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Mauricio Lynn.
    Contents:
    General Information
    Pre-hospital Planning and Response to Sudden Mass Casualty Incidents
    Hospital Planning and Response to Sudden Mass Casualty Incidents
    Other Sudden Mass Casualty Incidents
    Challenges Related to Mass Casualty Incidents. .
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Lin He.
    Contents:
    Current status and future prospects of mass spectrometry imaging of small molecules / Victoria L. Brown and Lin He
    Sample preparation for 3D SIMS chemical imaging of cells / Nicholas Winograd and Anna Bloom
    TOF-SIMS imaging of lipids on rat brain sections / David Touboul and Alain Brunelle
    MALDI-MS-assisted molecular imaging of metabolites in legume plants / Erin Gemperline and Lingjun Li
    MALDI mass spectrometry imaging of lipids and primary metabolites on rat brain sections / David Touboul and Alain Brunelle
    Multiplex MALDI-MS imaging of plant metabolites using a hybrid MS system / Andrew R. Korte [and 3 others]
    DESI imaging of small molecules in biological tissues / Elaine C. Cabral and Demian R. Ifa
    Desorption electrospray ionization imaging of small organics on mineral surfaces / Rachel V. Bennett and Facundo M. Fernández-- Imaging of plant materials using indirect desoprtion electrospray ionization mass spectrometry / Christian Janfelt
    Imaging of lipids and metabolites using nanospray desorption electropray ionization mass spectrometry / Ingela Lanekoff and Julia Laskin
    Electrospray laser desorption ionization (ELDI) mass spectrometry for molecular imaging of small molecules on tissues / Min-Zong Huang, Siou-Sian Jhang, and Jentaie Shiea
    Automated cell-by-cell tissue imaging and single-cell analysis for targeted morphologies by laser ablation electrospray ionization mass spectrometry / Hang Li [and 4 others]
    Laser ablation sample transfer for mass spectrometry imaging / Sung-Gun Park and Kermit K. Murray
    Nanostructure imaging mass spectrometry : the role of fluorocarbons in metabolite analysis and yoctomole level sensitivity / Michael E. Kurczy [and 3 others]
    Nanostructure-initiator mass spectrometry (NIMS) for molecular mapping of animal tissues / Tara N. Moening, Victoria L. Brown, and Lin He
    Nanoparticle-assisted laser desorption/ionization for metabolite imaging / Michihiko Waki [and 4 others]
    Matrix-enhanced surface-assisted laser desorption/ionization mass spectrometry (ME-SALDI-MS) for mass spectrometry imaging of small molecules / Victoria L. Brown, Qiang Liu, and Lin He
    Laser desorption postionization mass spectrometry imaging of biological targets / Artem Akhmetov, Chhavi Bhardwaj, and Luke Hanley
    Data processing and analysis for mass spectrometry imaging / Jiangjiang Liu, Xingchuang Xiong, and Zheng Ouyang.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Daniel Raftery, University of Washington and Fred Hutchinson Cancer Research Center, Seattle, WA, USA.
    Contents:
    Overview of mass spectrometry-based metabolomics : opportunities and challenges
    Global metabolic profiling using ultra-performance liquid chromatography/quadrupole time-of-flight mass spectrometry
    LC-MS profiling to link metabolic and phenotypic diversity in plant mapping populations
    Mitochondrial metabolomics using high-resolution Fourier-transform mass spectrometry
    Sample preparation methods for LC-MS-based global aqueous metabolite profiling
    Methods of discovery-based and targeted metabolite analysis by comprehensive two-dimensional gas chromatography with time-of-flight mass spectrometry detection
    Analysis of mouse liver metabolites by GC x GC-TOF MS
    Metabolite fingerprinting by capillary electrophoresis-mass spectrometry
    Quantitative metabolomic profiling using dansylation isotope labeling and liquid chromatography mass spectrometry
    Quantitative analysis of amino and organic acids by methyl chloroformate derivatization and GC-MS/MS analysis
    Stable isotope-labeled tracers for metabolic pathway elucidation by GC-MS and FT-MS
    Multiplexed, quantitative, and targeted metabolite profiling by LC-MS/MRM
    Multidimensional mass spectrometry-based shotgun lipidomics
    Comprehensive quantitative determination of PUFA-related bioactive lipids for functional lipidomics using high-resolution mass spectrometry
    Ultra-performance liquid chromatography-mass spectrometry targeted profiling of bile acids : application to serum, liver tissue, and cultured cells of different species
    Analysis of volatile organic compounds in exhaled breath by gas chromatography-mass spectrometry combined with chemometric analysis
    Headspace SPME-GC-MS metabolomics analysis of urinary volatile organic compounds (VOCs)
    Metabolite profiling by direct analysis in real-time mass spectrometry
    Analysis of dried blood spots using DESI mass spectrometry
    DESI-MS imaging of lipids and metabolites from biological samples
    Metabolic imaging using nanostructure-initiator mass spectrometry (NIMS)
    Statistical analysis and modeling of mass spectrometry-based metabolomics data.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    by Peter K. Kaiser, Neil J. Friedman, Roberto Pineda II.
    Summary: The Massachusetts Eye and Ear Infirmary Illustrated Manual of Ophthalmology is the must-have medical reference book for the ever-changing field of ophthalmology. Thoroughly updated to include the latest advances in the field, the fourth edition of this renowned manual features high-quality color images and an intuitive design for easy comprehension and reference. Ideal for ophthalmic practitioners and allied health professionals alike, this indispensable resource is your comprehensive guide for the speedy diagnosis and treatment of the most common eye disorders. Accurately diagnose problems through the support of full-color photographs and real case studies.Rapidly locate key information with a highly templated format that includes chapters organized anatomically, not by ophthalmic subspecialty, in addition to key boxes and highlighted emergency management boxes.

    Contents:
    Orbit
    Ocular motility and cranial nerves
    Lids, lashes, and lacrimal system
    Conjuctiva and sclera
    Cornea
    Anterior chamber
    Iris and pupils
    Lens
    Vitreous
    Retina and choroid
    Optic nerve and glaucoma
    Visual acuity, refractive procedures, and sudden vision loss.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Anahita Dua, Drena Root, Scott Manchester, Young Kim, editors.
    Summary: This book is designed to provide easy to reference, up to date protocols and procedures for vascular ultrasound. The text also delineates how to interpret imaging findings and implement results for optimal patient care outcomes. Chapters thoroughly cover an array of topics focused on the interpretation of vascular ultrasound, including transcranial Doppler, hemodialysis fistula mapping, and pelvic venous duplex, as well as the protocols and standards of the Massachusetts General Hospital Vascular Lab. Expert authors provide step by step detail on how to perform vascular lab examinations correctly, how to clinically interpret results, and how to implement findings into clinical practice. There is additionally coverage of how to develop and receive accreditation for a new vascular laboratory. This is an ideal guide for vascular surgeons, general surgeons, primary care physicians, vascular technologists, interventional radiologists, cardiologists, vascular medicine specialists, anesthesiologist and any practitioners who practice vascular ultrasound.

    Contents:
    Transcranial Doppler
    Extracranial Cerebrovascular Duplex
    Temporal Artery Duplex
    Abdominal Aorto-Iliac Duplex
    Mesenteric Artery Duplex
    Renal Artery Duplex
    Upper Extremity Arterial Physiologic Testing
    Upper Extremity Arterial Duplex
    Palmar Arch Allen's Test
    Lower Extremity Peripheral Arterial Physiologic Testing
    Lower Extremity Arterial Duplex
    Lower Extremity Bypass Duplex
    Lower Extremity Arterial Aneurysm Evaluation
    Hemodialysis Fistula Mapping
    Hemodialysis Fistula Duplex
    Upper and Lower Extremity Vein Mapping for Bypass Graft Conduit
    Pelvic Venous Duplex
    Upper Extremity Venous Duplex
    Lower Extremity Venous Duplex
    Lower Extremity Venous Reflux Study
    Building a Vascular Laboratory.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Theodore A. Stern, Maurizio Fava, Timothy E. Wilens, and Jerrold F. Rosenbaum.
    Summary: The Massachusetts General Hospital is widely respected as one of the world's premier psychiatric institutions. Now, preeminent authorities from MGH present the newly updated edition of Massachusetts General Hospital Comprehensive Clinical Psychiatry, a unique medical reference book that continues to simplify your access to the current clinical knowledge you need - both in print and online! It provides practical approaches to a wide variety of clinical syndromes and settings, aided by stunning graphics and hundreds of questions and answers geared to each chapter. You'll have convenient access to all the authoritative answers necessary to overcome any clinical challenge.

    Contents:
    The doctor-patient relationship
    The psychiatric interview
    Laboratory tests and diagnostic procedures
    Treatment adherence
    Child, adolescent, and adult development
    Diagnostic rating scales and psychiatric instruments
    Understanding and applying psychological assessment
    Neuropsychological assessment
    Coping with medical illness and psychotherapy of the medically ill
    An overview of the psychotherapies
    Brief psychotherapy : an overview
    Couples therapy
    Family therapy
    Group psychotherapy
    Hypnosis
    Cognitive-behavioral therapy, behavioral therapy, and cognitive therapy
    The DSM-5 : a system for psychiatric diagnosis
    Delirium
    Dementia
    Intellectual disability
    Mental disorders due to another medical condition
    Sleep disorders
    Impulse-control disorders
    Somatic symptom disorders
    Factitious disorders and malingering
    Alcohol-related disorders
    Drug addiction
    Psychosis and schizophrenia
    Mood disorders : depressive disorders (major depressive disorder)
    Bipolar disorder
    Psychiatric illness during pregnancy and the post-partum period
    Anxiety disorders
    Obsessive-compulsive disorder and obsessive-compulsive and related disorders
    Trauma and posttraumatic stress disorder
    Dissociative disorders
    Sexual disorders and sexual dysfunction
    Eating disorders : evaluation and management
    Grief, bereavement, and adjustment disorders
    Personality and personality disorders
    Psychiatric neuroscience : incorporating pathophysiology into clinical case formulation
    The pharmacotherapy of anxiety disorders
    Antipsychotic drugs
    Antidepressants
    Pharmacological approaches to treatment-resistant depression
    Electroconvulsive therapy
    Neurotherapeutics
    Lithium and its role in psychiatry
    The use of antiepileptic drugs in psychiatry
    Pharmacotherapy of attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder across the life span
    Drug-drug interactions in psychopharmacology
    Side effects of psychotropic medications
    Natural medications in psychiatry
    The suicidal patient
    Psychiatric consultation to medical and surgical patients
    Life-threatening conditions in psychiatry : catatonia, neuroleptic malignant syndrome, and serotonin syndrome
    Psycho-oncology : psychiatric co-morbidities and complications of cancer and cancer treatment
    Psychiatric aspects of HIV infection and aids
    Organ transplantation : pre-transplant assessment and post-transplant management
    Approaches to collaborative care and primary care psychiatry
    Psychiatric and ethical aspects of care at the end of life
    Psychiatric epidemiology
    Statistics in psychiatric research
    Genetics and psychiatry
    Serious mental illness
    Aggression and violence
    Culture and psychiatry
    Community psychiatry
    Managed care and psychiatry
    Child and adolescent psychiatric disorders
    Psychiatric and substance use disorders in transitioning adolescents and young adults
    Geriatric psychiatry
    Neuroanatomical systems relevant to neuropsychiatric disorders
    The neurological examination
    Neuropsychiatric principles and differential diagnosis
    Neuroimaging in psychiatry
    Clinical neurophysiology and electroencephalography
    Psychiatric manifestations and treatment of seizure disorders
    Differential diagnosis and treatment of headaches
    Pathophysiology, psychiatric co-morbidity, and treatment of pain
    Psychiatric aspects of stroke syndromes
    Movement disorders
    Psychiatric manifestations of traumatic brain disorder
    Intimate partner violence
    Psychiatric correlates and consequences of abuse and neglect
    Legal and ethical issues in psychiatry i : informed consent, competency, treatment refusal, and civil commitment
    The role of psychiatrists in the criminal justice system
    Legal and ethical issues in psychiatry ii : malpractice and boundary violations
    Emergency psychiatry
    Rehabilitation psychiatry
    Military psychiatry
    Disaster psychiatry
    Coping with the rigors of psychiatric practice
    Psychiatry and the media
    Global mental health in the twenty-first century.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2015
  • Digital
    Eric P. Hazen, Christopher J. McDougle, editors.
    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Contents; Contributors; Part I: General Principles;
    1: Introduction; References;
    2: Office-Based Medical Care; Introduction; Pediatrics; Preparing the Office; Before the Visit; During the Visit; History; Developmental History; Past Medical History; Social and Family History; Physical Examination; Clinical Vignette #1; Healthcare Transition; Outpatient Care of Adults with ASD; Preparing the Office; Before the Visit; During the Visit; Physical Examination; Clinical Vignette #2; References;
    3: Inpatient Medical Care; Pediatric Inpatient Care; Clinical Vignette # 1; Background Challenges for Pediatric Patients with ASD in the Inpatient SettingStrategies for Improving Care of Pediatric Patients in the Inpatient Setting; The MGHfC Experience; Adult Inpatient Care; Clinical Vignette #2; Caring for Those with ASD in the Hospital: What Is Known; Innovation in Care Delivery for Inpatients with ASD; Case Study at the Massachusetts General Hospital: Improving Medical Care for Adults with ASD; MGH Autism Toolkit Components; References;
    4: Medical Procedures: Challenges and Strategies; Introduction; General Principles and Approaches; Communication; Visual Supports Behavioral Contingencies and Positive ReinforcementSystematic Desensitization; Relaxation Strategies; Collaboration with Providers and Individuals Familiar with the Patient; Approaches to Specific Procedures in the Outpatient Setting; Vital Signs; Blood Draws, Needle Sticks, and Shots; Urine Sample; Pill Swallowing; Audiology Services; Dental Visits; Approaches to Procedures in Emergency and Inpatient Settings; Electroencephalogram (EEG) and Electromyogram (EMG) Procedures; Imaging: Magnetic Resonance Imaging and X-Rays; Additional Considerations for Adults and Elderly Patients Knowing When to Terminate a Procedure/InteractionClinical Vignette
    #1: A Pediatric Patient; Clinical Vignette
    #2: An Adult Patient; Survey for Preparation of Medical Procedures; References;
    5: Quality Improvement; Introduction; Evidence for Unmet Needs; Quality Improvement Research: Areas for Intervention; The Quality Improvement Journey: Creating Change; Describing the Target Population; Defining the Problem: Measuring Unmet Care Needs and Gaps in Care Quality; Building a Case for Improvement with Preliminary Data; Identifying Stakeholders and Champions; Implementing Interventions Measuring Improvement/Transformational ChangeSummary; Massachusetts General Hospital Autism Care Collaborative: A Case Study; Resource Development; Medical Management of Adults with ASD on Inpatient Units; Education of Providers and Staff; Patient Flow; Communication and Information Transfer; Final Results; Next Steps; Summary; References; Part II: Care of Specific Disorders;
    6: Neurology; Introduction; A Pediatric Approach to Common Neurological Conditions; Epilepsy; Clinical Evaluation; Treatment; Clinical Vignette # 1; Motor Abnormalities; Clinical Evaluation; Treatment
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Ana-Maria Vranceanu, Joseph A. Greer, Steven A. Safren, editors.
    Summary: This text outlines the importance of biopsychosocial factors in improving medical care, and illustrates evidence-based, state-of-the-art interventions for patients with a variety of medical conditions. Each chapter is focused on a particular health concern or illness, which is described both in terms of prevalence and frequent psychological and psychiatric comorbidities that may present to clinicians working with these populations. Consistent with evidence-based care, information on the efficacy of the treatments being described is presented to support their continued use. To accommodate the needs of clinicians, we describe population specific approaches to treatment, including goal settings, modules and skills as well as strategies to assess and monitor progress. To facilitate learning, each chapter contains one or more case examples that explicate the skills described to convey change within a behavioral medicine protocol. Each chapter also includes resources in the form of books and websites to gain additional knowledge and detail as needed. Authors are experts in the field of each chapter, ensuring that information presented is recent and of high quality.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Preventive Health
    Smoking cessation
    Behavioral medicine and substance use
    Sleep
    Obesity and weight conditions
    Acute and Chronic Medical Conditions
    Acute and chronic musculoskeletal pain
    Diabetes
    HIV
    Cardiovascular issues
    Cancer
    Epilepsy and other Neurological conditions
    Management of gastro-intestinal issues
    Women's health
    Cultural Factors and Vulnerable Populations
    Palliative Care and End of Life issues
    Cultural competence
    Task Shifting and Delivery of Behavioral Medicine Interventions in Resource Poor Global Settings
    Resources. .
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Timothy J. Petersen, Susan E. Sprich, Sabine Wilhelm, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Basic Principles and Practice of Cognitive Behavioral Therapy
    Cognitive Techniques
    Behavioral Strategies
    Cognitive Behavioral Therapy for Anxiety Disorders
    Cognitive Behavioral Therapy for Depression
    Cognitive Behavioral Therapy for Bipolar Disorder
    Cognitive Behavioral Therapy for Obsessive Compulsive Disorder: Theory, Assessment and Treatment
    Cognitive Behavioral Treatment for Trichotillomania (Hair-Pulling Disorder) and Excoriation (Skin-Picking) Disorder
    Cognitive Behavioral Therapy for Tourette Syndrome and Chronic Tic Disorder
    Cognitive Behavioral Therapy for Body Dysmorphic Disorder
    Transdiagnostic Cognitive Behavioral Therapy for Eating Disorders
    Cognitive Behavioral Therapy for Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder
    Cognitive Behavioral Approaches for Schizophrenia and Other Psychotic Disorders
    Cognitive Behavioral Approaches for Substance Use Disorders
    Cognitive Behavioral Therapy for Posttraumatic Stress Disorder
    Treatment of Borderline Personality Disorder
    Behavioral Medicine Strategies in Outpatient Psychiatric Settings
    Cognitive Behavioral Therapy with Children and Adolescents
    Cognitive Behavioral Couple Therapy for the Treatment of Relationship Distress
    Evaluating Strategies for Combining Pharmacotherapy with Cognitive Behavioral Therapy
    Cognitive Behavioral Therapies for Chronic Depression.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    [edited by] Gary J. Brenner, James P. Rathmell.
    Contents:
    Section I. General considerations
    Section II. Diagnosis of pain
    Section III. Therapeutic options: pharmacologic approaches
    Section IV. Therapeutic options: interventional approaches
    Section V. Therapeutic options: nonpharmacologic/noninterventional approaches
    Section VI. Acute pain
    Section VII. Chronic pain
    Section VIII. Cancer pain and palliative care
    Section IX. Special considerations in pain medicine
    Appendix I. Dermatomes and nerve distribution
    Appendix II. Prescription guidelines
    Appendix III. Drug Enforcement Administration (DEA) drug schedules
    Appendix IV. Medications commonly used in pain practice
    Appendix V. Definitions and abbreviations.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    editors, Theodore A. Stern, Maurizio Fava, Timothy E. Wilens, Jerrold F. Rosenbaum.
    Summary: Put today's best approaches to work for your patients with this practical guide to cutting-edge psychopharmacologic and somatic treatments for psychiatric and neurologic conditions. Edited by Drs. Theodore A. Stern, Maurizio Fava, Timothy E. Wilens, and Jerrold F. Rosenbaum, and comprised of key chapters from the second edition of Stern et al.'s Massachusetts General Hospital Comprehensive Clinical Psychiatry, this user-friendly resource focuses on current psychotropic treatments, electroconvulsive therapy, and neurotherapeutics, making it an ideal quick reference for psychiatrists, psycholog.

    Contents:
    Psychiatric neuroscience: incorporating pathophysiology into clinical case formulation
    Treatment adherence
    Antidepressants
    Pharmacological approaches to treatment-resistant depression
    Bipolar disorder
    The pharmacotherapy of anxiety disorders
    Antipsychotic drugs
    Lithium and its role in psychiatry
    The use of antiepileptic drugs in psychiatry
    Stimulants and other medications for ADHD
    Drug-drug interactions in psychopharmacology
    Side effects of psychotropic medications
    Natural medications in psychiatry
    Dementia
    Alcohol-related disorders
    Drug addiction --pathophysiology, psychiatric co-morbidity, and treatment of pain
    Neurotherapeutics
    Electroconvulsive therapy.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2016
  • Digital
    Ranna Parekh, editor.
    Summary: Long considered important for professionals working with minority and under-represented populations, cross-cultural competency has become a requisite for all health care providers. As society in the US increasingly diversifies, there is a crucial need to prepare health care professionals to effectively treat this changing population. The Massachusetts General Hospital Textbook on Diversity and Cultural Sensitivity in Mental Health addresses the importance and relevance of cultural sensitivity in US mental health. Prominent researchers and clinicians examine the cultural and cross-cultural mental health issues of Native American, Latino, Asian, African American, Middle Eastern, Refugee and LGBQT communities. The discussion includes understanding the complexities in making mental health diagnoses and the various meanings it has for the socio-cultural group described, as well as biopsychosocial treatment options and challenges. In understanding the specific populations, the analysis delves into overarching concepts that may apply to specific populations and to those at the intersection of multiple cultures. An invaluable resource for mental health professionals, including clinicians, researchers, educators, leaders and advocates in the United States, The Massachusetts General Hospital Textbook on Diversity and Cultural Sensitivity in Mental Health provides the necessary understanding and insights for research and clinical practice in specific cultural and multicultural groups.

    Contents:
    Mental Health of Arab Americans: Cultural Considerations for Excellence of Care
    Identification and Approach to Treatment of Mental Health Disorders in South Asian Populations
    Cultural sensitivity: what should we understand about Latinos?
    Not by Convention: Working with People on the Sexual & Gender Continuum
    Indian and Alaska Native Mental Health Perspectives
    Psychiatry for People of African Descent in the US
    Understanding the mental health of refugees: Trauma, stress and the cultural context
    Diversity Dialogue: An Innovative model for diversity training
    The Engagement Interview Protocol (EIP): Improving the Acceptance of Mental Health Treatment among Culturally Diverse Populations
    Cultural and Diversity Issues in Mediation and Negotiation
    Providing Medical Care to Diverse Populations
    Cultivating Courage, Compassion, and Cultural Sensitivity in News Reporting of Mental Health.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Ranna Parekh, Nhi-Ha T. Trinh.
    Summary: This edition is updated to include new research and clinical material for practitioners working with mental health patients of diverse backgrounds. Written by experts in cultural sensitivity, the text begins by establishing innovative approaches to understanding diversity, tools for diversity educational training for health care providers, clinical interviewing techniques and effective strategies in having difficult conversations. Indirect approaches to understanding diversity and mental health come from unique chapters that range from the ways that journalists process and discuss mental health competency to the business model for cultural competency in health care. The second section of the book moves from the broader subjects to the needs of specific populations, including Native Americans, Latinos, Asians, African American, Middle Eastern, Refugee and LGBQT communities. The discussion includes understanding the complexities of making mental health diagnoses and the various meanings these diagnoses have for the socio-cultural group described. Each chapter also details biopsychosocial treatment options and challenges. The Massachusetts General Hospital Textbook on Diversity and Cultural Sensitivity in Mental Health, Second Edition, is an excellent resource for all clinicians working with diverse populations, including psychiatrists, primary care physicians, emergency room physicians, early career physicians and trainees, psychologists, nurses, social workers, researchers, and medical educators.

    Contents:
    Diversity Dialogue
    The Engagement Interview Protocol (EIP): Improving the Acceptance of Mental Health Treatment among Culturally Diverse Populations
    Cultural and Diversity Issues in Mediation and Negotiation
    Providing Medical Care to Diverse Populations
    Cultivating Courage, Compassion, and Cultural Sensitivity in News Reporting of Mental Health During Challenging Times
    Illegal, Alien, and Other: Cultural Competency and Migration
    Psychiatry for People of African Descent in the USA
    American Indian and Alaska Native Mental Health
    Mental Health of Arab Americans: Cultural Considerations for Excellence of Care
    An Approach to Mental Health in Asian Americans
    Cultural Sensitivity: What Should We Understand About Latinos?
    Not by Convention: Working with People on the Sexual and Gender Continuum
    Understanding the Mental Health of Refugees: Trauma, Stress, and the Cultural Context.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Mark A. Goldstein, editor.
    Summary: Adolescent Medicine offers a definitive, practical guide for the optimal clinical care of adolescents. The text comprises of user-friendly diagrams, charts and pathways, and covers the most appropriate approaches, diagnostic evaluation and best treatments for adolescent patients.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Acknowledgements
    PART 1. GENERAL ADOLESCENT MEDICINE
    1. Adolescent Preventive Services
    2. The Adolescent Patient Interview: Adolescent Confidentiality and Consent
    3. Pubertal Development
    4. Normal Adolescent Development
    5. Male Genitourinary Exam
    6. The Pelvic Examination and Pap Smear in Adolescents and Young Adults
    7. Adolescent Dermatology
    8. Obesity
    9. Nutrition: Healthy Eating in Adolescence; Nutritional Supplements: Performance-Enhancing Drugs, and Dietary Supplements; Irritable Bowel Syndrome; and Inflammatory Bowel Syndrome
    10. Sports Injuries in the Adolescent
    11. Cardiac Issues in Adolescence
    12. Hypertension in Adolescents
    13. Immunizations
    PART 2. SEXUALITY, GYNECOLOGY, AND ABNORMAL GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT
    14. Amenorrhea
    15. Abnormal Vaginal Bleeding
    16. Basics of Hormonal Contraception
    17. Adolescent Pregnancy
    18. Polycystic Ovary Syndrome
    19. Breast Disorders in Adolescence
    20. Sexually Transmitted Infections (STI) in Adolescents
    21. HIV in Adolescents
    22. Delayed Puberty, Short Stature, and Tall Stature
    PART 3. MENTAL HEALTH AND TRANSITION OF CARE
    23. Adolescent Substance Use and Prevention
    24. Adolescent Mental Health Disorders
    25. Eating Disorders
    26. Adolescent Relationship Abuse in Clinical Settings: Opportunities for Prevention and Intervention
    27. Bullying and Cyber Bullying
    28. Nature, Nurture, Adolescents and Resilience
    29. Transition of Care
    APPENDIX.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Nupur Gupta, Brett D. Nelson, Jennifer Kasper, Patricia L. Hibberd, editors.
    Summary: TheMassGeneral Hospital for Children Handbook of Pediatric Global Health is a concise resource for the ever-increasing number of health professionals involved in global health, many of whom spend a few weeks to months or even years providing medical care in resource-poor countries. This Handbook provides practical, evidence-based, hands-on guidance for managing and preventing childhood illnesses when resources are limited in low- and middle-income countries. It also offers a setting-specific understanding and management approaches to the major causes of childhood mortality, including pneumonia, diarrhea, birth asphyxia, complications of preterm birth, and neonatal sepsis. The Handbook providesan overview of childhood mortality, health systems, and the various stakeholders that play a role in the global health arena, and also contains chapters focusing on adolescents who are increasingly recognized as a unique population in whom interventions can go a long way in bothconsolidatingthe gains made in childhood and preventing adult disease. Finally, key topics in non-communicable diseases are covered, including trauma and injuries, pediatric mental health, child and adolescent rights, and oral health. Not meant solely for pediatricians, the Handbookis designed for generalists, specialists, doctors, nurses, other health care workers, and those in training. An indispensable reference for health professionals overseas, theHandbookwill also be a useful addition and resource for academic centers and universities in industrialized nations that are creating courses for trainees who will do clinical electives abroad during their training. .

    Contents:
    Overview of pediatric global health
    Child mortality in developing countries
    Stakeholders and approaches to address pediatric global health
    Global health systems
    Vulnerability of children in developing countries and disrupted settings
    Fundamentals of pediatric care in resource-limited settings
    Newborn health
    Maternal health
    Preventive newborn care
    Newborn resuscitation
    Neonatal infection
    Adolescent health
    Adolescent global health
    Adolescent preventative and clinical care: a checklist
    Sexually transmitted infections in adolescents
    Contraceptive options for adolescents
    Communicable diseases
    Acute respiratory infections
    Diarrheal illnesses
    Malaria
    Measles
    HIV/AIDS
    Tuberculosis
    Parasitic diseases
    Vaccine-preventable diseases
    Non-communicable diseases
    Malnutrition
    Micronutrient deficiencies
    Emergencyu pediatric care in resource-limited settings
    Child and adolescent mental health
    Child and adolescent health and human rights
    Pediatric preventive and clinical oral health care
    Neurological issues and epilepsy in children and adolescents in the developing world
    Care of the child immigrant
    Appendix A: WHO integrated management of childhood illness for high HIV settings
    Appendix B: WHO growth charts head circumference boys
    Appendix C: WHO growth charts head circumference for girls
    Appendix D: WHO growth charts weight for age boys 0-5
    Appendix E: WHO growth charts weight for age girst 0-5
    Appendix F: WHO growth charts weight for height boys 2-5
    Appendix G: WHO growth charts weight for height girls 0-5
    Appendix H: WHO growth charts weight for length boys 0-2
    Appendix I: WHO grow charts weight for length girls 0-2
    Appendix J: Essential medications for RLS
    Appendix K: GAPS monograph
    Appendix L: GAPS periodic questionnaire
    Appendix M: WHO immunization routine lifespan vaccinations
    Appendix N: WHO routine immunization children
    Appendix O: WHO delayed routrine immunization.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Nuno Sampaio Gomes, Ladislav Kovačič, Frank Martetschläger, Giuseppe Milano.
    Summary: This book offers a truly comprehensive overview of the understanding and treatment of massive and irreparable rotator cuff tears, a painful and disabling shoulder condition that continues to pose major challenges. A thorough examination of basic science issues and evidence lays the foundation for discussion of key controversies in the field and exposition of a practical approach to treatment in which the role of both conservative and surgical management is explained. Special insights are provided into the new biological and nonoperative approaches that are becoming increasingly popular among practitioners. All potential surgical techniques are described, from partial repair and tendon transfer, to the use of dedicated implants. In addition, the value of anesthesia and regional blocks, both during surgery and in the postoperative phase, is discussed. The concluding section addresses particularly complex scenarios and offers guidance on the management of treatment complications and failures. Written by leading international shoulder experts, the book will be of value for shoulder surgeons, rehabilitators, and other health care practitioners.

    Contents:
    Part 1 Basic science
    Massive and irreparable rotator cuff tears: defining the problem
    Biology of rotator cuff injury and repair
    Biomechanics of rotator cuff repair
    Re-rupture or non-healing? Factors determining an unsuccessful repair
    Biological augmentation in rotator cuff repair: growth factors
    Biological augmentation in rotator cuff repair: cell therapies
    Biological augmentation in rotator cuff repair: scaffolds
    Imaging of repaired rotator cuff
    Part 2 Controversies in massive rotator cuff tears
    Clinical outcome vs structural integrity: what really matters?
    Fatty infiltration and muscle atrophy: what it means and what happens after repair
    Pseudoparalysis: Pathomechanics and clinical relevance
    Rotator cuff tear arthropathy: where are the limits for repair?
    Suprascapular nerve release: fact or fiction
    Traumatic cuff tears: the relevance of timing
    Critical shoulder angle: does lateral acromioplasty have a role in preventing re-rupture
    Shoulder injections: options, ultrasound assistance, evidences
    Non-operative Treatment: The Role of Rehabilitation
    Patient Expectation in the treatment of rotator cuff tears: what is its role?
    Treatment of massive irreparable cuff tears: decision-making process
    Part 3 Surgical techniques
    Partial repair
    Patch Graft Augmentation
    Superior capsule reconstruction
    Postero-superior Massive Irreparable Rotator Cuff Tears: The Biceps Autograft
    Tendon Transfer for Posterosuperior Cuff: Latissimus Dorsi Transfer
    Tendon Transfer for Posterosuperior Cuff
    Tendon Transfer for Posterosuperior Cuff: Latissimus Dorsi Transfer
    Tendon transfer for anterosuperior cuff: The Pectoralis Major Transfer
    Tendon transfer for anterosuperior cuff: Latissimus Dorsi Transfer
    Subacromial spacer
    Regional blocks and opioid sparing anesthesia: helping the surgeon and with patients satisfaction
    Part 4 Complex and revision problems
    Traumatic rotator cuff tears with sho ulder stiffness
    Management of bone loss in rotator cuff tear arthropathy
    Work-up and management of infection in shoulder arthroplasty
    Biomechanics of failure of reverse shoulder arthroplasty in rotator cuff tear arthropathy
    Revision of reverse total shoulder arthroplasty: humeral component
    Failure of Rotator Cuff Repair
    Combined massive rotator cuff and recurrent shoulder instability
    "Reverse arthroplasty VS other options"
    Cases examples
    Case example 4: Massive rotator cuff tear and patient specific rehabilitation in sportsmen.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Lawrence V. Gulotta, Edward V. Craig, editors.
    Summary: Presenting a logical, comprehensive approach to the patient with a massive rotator cuff tear, this book begins with the pathoanatomy and diagnostic work-up for this common injury, including imaging. Both non-operative and operative treatment options for massive tears follow, including arthroscopy, the use of biologics and patches, tendon transfers, and hemiarthroplasty and reverse total shoulder arthroplasty. A practical treatment algorithm for clinicians treating patients with massive rotator cuff tears is also included. Each chapter opens with pearls and pitfalls covering the main key points for quick reference. The overarching theme of this book is that patients with similar imaging findings may demonstrate very different clinical presentations, and the final treatment recommendation should be made based on their complaints and expectations. As such, it will be an excellent resource for orthopedic surgeons, sports medicine and shoulder physicians, physiatrists, physical medicine and rehab specialists, and occupational therapists.

    Contents:
    Pathophysiology of Rotator Cuff Tears.- History and Physical Exam
    Imaging of the Rotator Cuff.- Non-Operative Management: Natural History, Medications and Injections.- Arthroscopic Treatment
    Biologics and Patches
    Latissimus Dorsi Tendon Transfer
    Pectoralis Major Tendon Transfer.- Hemiarthroplasty
    Reverse Total Shoulder Arthroplasty
    Treatment Algorithm for Patients with Massive Rotator Cuff Tears.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    Sternberg, Stephen S.
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Masson monographs in diagnostic pathology to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Digital
    Domenico Ribatti.
    Summary: This book covers the most important aspects of Mast Cell Biology. It enables the reader to immerse in the new aspects of Mast Cells biology, which are no longer seen as an immunological effector cell, but a multi-functional efector cell. One which have roles that expands beyond the immunological realm and shows deep implications in the pathophysiology of several human disorders as well as transforming into a very important and promising target for therapy development in cancer, neurodegerative disorders, angiogenesis, inflammation and allergy. Across twelve chapter on Mast Cells Research, starting from the discovery and characterization of Mast Cells until the lastest findings and translational perspectives, the reader will get a complete view and a profound insight on the fundamental and applied aspects of Mast Cells Biology. The chapters are written in a clear and concise way in order to help navigating through complex biological scenarios. The author, Domenico Ribatti, Full professor of the University of Bari, is an expert in the field of Mast Cells with more than 800 publications.

    Contents:
    Foreword
    Mast cell ontogeny
    Staining of mast cells
    Mast cells heterogeneity
    Mast cell biology and functions
    Mast cells in arteriogenesis
    Mast cells in primary systemic vasculitides
    Mast cells in blood-brain barrier alterations and neurodegenerative diseases
    Mast cells and basophils: a link between angiogenesis and inflammation in allergic diseases
    Mast cells in tumor fate
    Mast cells in tumor angiogenesis and lymphoangiogenesis
    Mast cells as therapeutic target in cancer
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Michael R. Hughes and Kelly M. McNagny.
    Contents:
    Paul Ehrlich's mastzellen : a historical perspective of relevant developments in mast cell biology / Jack Ghably [and others]
    Phylogenetic profile of mast cells / Enrico Crivellato, Luciana Travan, and Domenico Ribatti
    Mast cell development and function in the Zebrafish / Sahar I Da'as, Tugce B. Balci, and Jason N. Berman
    Human mast cell and basophil/eosinophil progenitors / Gail M. Gauvreau and Judah A. Denburg
    Methods for the study of mast cell recruitment and accumulation in different tissues / Tatiana G. Jones and Michael F. Gurish
    Notch2 signaling in mast cell development and distribution in the intestine / Mamiko Sakata-Yanagimoto and Shigeru Chiba
    Mast cells in human health and disease / Erin J. DeBruin ... [e tal.]
    Emerging prominence of the cardiac mast cell as a potent mediator of adverse myocardial remodeling / Joseph S. Janicki, Gregory L. Brower, and Scott P. Levick
    Parasympathetic nervous system as a regulator of mast cell function / Paul Forsythe
    Growth of human mast cells from bone marrow and peripheral blood-derived CD34+ pluripotent hematopoietic cells / Geethani Bandara, Dean D. Metcalfe, and Arnold S. Kirshenbaum
    Isolation and characterization of human intestinal mast cells / Axel Lorentz, Gernot Sellge, and Stephan C. Bischoff
    Human mast cell activation with viruses and pathogen products / Ian D. Haidl and Jean S. Marshall
    Basic techniques to study Fc[epsilon]RI signaling in mast cells / Yuko Kawakami and Toshiaki Kawakami
    Membrane-cytoskeleton dynamics in the course of mast cell activation / Pavel Dráber and Petr Dráber
    Fc[epsilon]RI expression and dynamics on mast cells / Eon J. Rios and Janet Kalesnikoff
    Regulation of mast cell survival and apoptosis / Christine Möller Westerberg, Maria Ekoff, and Gunnar Nilsson
    Protein tyrosine phosphatases in mast cell signaling / Alexander Geldman and Catherine J. Pallen
    MicroRNA function in mast cell biology : protocols to characterize and modulate MicroRNA expression / Steven Maltby [and others]
    Assay of mast cell mediators / Madeleine Rådinger [and others]
    Induction of mast cell apoptosis by a novel secretory granule-mediated pathway / Fabio R. Melo, Sara Wernersson, and Gunnar Pejler
    Measurement of nitric oxide in mast cells with the fluorescent indicator DAF-FM diacetate / Chris D. St. Laurent, Tae Chul Moon, and A. Dean Befus
    Real-time imaging of Ca2+ mobilization and degranulation in mast cells / Roy Cohen, David A. Holowka, and Barbara A. Baird
    Flow cytometry-based monitoring of mast cell activation / Glenn Cruse, Alasdair M. Gilfillan, and Daniel Smrz
    Measurement of mast cell surface molecules by high- throughput immunophenotyping using transcription (HIT) / D. James Haddon [and others]
    Cre/loxP-based mouse models of mast cell deficiency and mast cell-specific gene inactivation / Katrin Peschke [and others]
    Evaluation of synovial mast cell functions in autoimmune arthritis / Peter A. Nigrovic and Kichul Shin
    Methods for the study of mast cells in cancer / Nichole R. Blatner, FuNien Tsai, and Khashayarsha Khazaie
    Studying mast cells in peripheral tolerance by using a skin transplantation model / Victor C. de Vries [and others]
    Function of mast cells in autoimmune glomerulonephritis / Renato C. Monteiro [and others]
    Mouse model of atopic dermatitis / Yuko Kawakami and Toshiaki Kawakami
    Mouse models of allergic asthma / Matthew Gold, David Marsolais, and Marie-Renee Blanchet
    Methods in assessment of airway reactivity in mice / Matthew Gold and Marie-Renee Blanchet.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] Babak Azizzadeh, Mark R. Murphy, Calvin M. Johnson Jr., Guy G. Massry, Rebecca Fitzgerald.
    Summary: "Comprehensive coverage, multidisciplinary guidance, and step-by-step instruction both in print and on video help you choose the best approach and get the best results for any facial rejuvenation challenge. Master Techniques in Facial Rejuvenation, 2nd Edition, by Drs. Babak Azizzadeh, Mark Murphy, Calvin Johnson, Guy Massry, and Rebecca Fitzgerald, presents multiple facial rejuvenation techniques by experts in the fields of plastic surgery, facial plastic surgery, otolaryngology, oculoplastic surgery and dermatology. Competing and complementary techniques focus on all areas of the face, providing a balanced and systematic approach to this fast-growing field"--Publisher's description.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2018
  • Digital/Print
    [edited by] William H. Rosenblatt, Wanda M. Popescu.
    Contents:
    PART A. Upper Airway
    Section I. Evaluation and basic management of the difficult airway patient
    Section II. Preexisting conditions
    Section III. Otolaryngology
    Section IV. Maxillofacial
    Section V. Nasal intubation
    Section VI. Tracheostomy
    Section VII. foreign bodies adult
    Section VIII. Pediatrics
    Section IX. C-Spine
    Section X. Techniques
    Section XI. Extubation
    Section XII. Out of the OR
    Section XIII. Invasive airway rescue
    PART B. Lower Airway
    Section I. Interventional Pulmonary
    Section II. Lung isolation devices and techniques
    Section III. Airway surgery
    Section IV. Surgeries requiring lung isolation
    Section V. Preexisting conditions
    Section VI. Congenital abnormalities of the lower airway
    Section VII. Lung transplant
    Section VIII. Lower airway emergencies.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    LWW Health Library (Anesthesiology)
    LWW Health Library (Critical Care)
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC732 .M37 2015
    1
  • Print
    Conrad Fischer.
    Contents:
    Internal medicine
    Preventive medecine
    Dermatology
    Surgery
    Sports medicine
    Ear, nose, and throat (ENT)
    Pediatrics
    Obstetrics
    Gynecology
    Radiology
    Opthalmology
    Psychiatry
    Emergency medicine
    Ethics
    Biostatics and epidemiology.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    R834.5 .F573 2017
    2
  • Print
    Conrad Fischer, MD.
    Contents:
    Internal medicine
    Preventive medecine
    Dermatology
    Surgery
    Sports medicine
    Ear, nose, and throat (ENT)
    Pediatrics
    Obstetrics
    Gynecology
    Radiology
    Opthalmology
    Psychiatry
    Emergency medicine
    Ethics
    Biostatics and epidemiology
    Patient safety.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    R834.5 .F573 2021
    1
  • Print
    Conrad Fischer, MD.
    Contents:
    Part 1. Internal medicine
    Neurology
    Cardiology
    Infectious diseases
    Tropical, fungal, and animal-borne diseases
    Allergy and immunology
    Endocrinology
    Pulmonology
    Rheumatology
    Hematology
    Gastroenterology
    Nephrology
    Oncology
    Part 2. Preventive medicine
    Part 3. Biostatistics and epidemiology
    Part 4. Dermatology
    Part 5. Surgery
    Part 6. Urology
    Part 7. Pediatrics
    Part 8. Obstetrics
    Part 9. Gynecology
    Part 10. Radiology
    Part 11. Psychiatry
    Part 12. Emergency medicine/Toxicology
    Part 13. Ethics
    Part 14. Patient safety
    Part 15. Ophthalmology
    Part 16. Ear, nose, and throat.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    R834.5 .F5276 2022
    1
  • Digital
    Vonda J. Wright, Kellie K. Middleton, editors.
    Summary: This unique text focuses exclusively on the ever-growing population of aging and masters athletes, both professional and amateur, presenting both operative and nonoperative management strategies for the range of sports-related injuries. The book is thematically divided into three sections. Part I describes the science of musculoskeletal aging and the benefits of remaining active as we age, including proper nutrition, supplements and medical therapies and adjuvants. Injuries common to the masters athlete are presented in part II, from the upper and lower extremities to the hips and spine, with special considerations for these injuries and treatments noted. Recommendations for how to thrive as a masters athlete comprise the final section, including return to sport, injury prevention and exercise as medicine. An ideal resource for clinicians who treat active adults who won't slow down, Masterful Care of the Aging Athlete is a compilation of clinical, technical and research approaches aimed at keeping active people moving, returning them to sport rapidly and durably and protecting them from a sedentary lifestyle.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Davide Lomanto, William Tzu-Liang Chen, Marilou B. Fuentes, editors.
    Summary: This is an open access book. The book focuses mainly on the surgical technique, OR setup, equipments and devices necessary in minimally invasive surgery (MIS). It serves as a compendium of endolaparoscopic surgical procedures. It is an official publication of the Endoscopic and Laparoscopic Surgeons of Asia (ELSA). The book includes various sections covering basic skills set, devices, equipments, OR setup, procedures by area. Each chapter cover introduction, indications and contraindications, pre-operative patient’s assessment and preparation, OT setup (instrumentation required, patient’s position, etc.), step by step description of surgical procedures, management of complications, post-operative care. It includes original illustrations for better understanding and visualization of specific procedures. The book serves as a practical guide for surgical residents, surgical trainees, surgical fellows, junior surgeons, surgical consultants and anyone interested in MIS. It covers most of the basic and advanced laparoscopic and thoracoscopic surgery procedures meeting the curriculum and examination requirements of the residents.

    Contents:
    Part 1 Basic Principles
    1 Access, Pneumoperitoneum and Related Complications
    2 Image Systems in Endo-Laparoscopic Surgery
    3 Care and Handling of Laparoscopic Instrumentations
    4 Electrosurgery and energy devices
    5 Endo-laparoscopic Suturing
    6 Ergonomics in Laparoscopic Surgery
    7 Hemostasis in Laparoscopic Surgery
    8 Imaging-Enhancing System
    9 Instrumentations and Access Devices
    10 Operating Room Setup and Patient Positioning in MIS
    11 Surgical Smoke, Its Risks and Mitigation Strategies
    Part 2 Anesthesia in Laparoscopic Surgery
    12 Principles of Anesthesia
    13 Physiologic Considerations in Laparoscopic Surgery
    Part 3 Diagnostic Laparoscopy
    14 Staging Laparoscopy for Intra-Abdominal Carcinoma
    15 Diagnostic Laparoscopy
    Part 4 Emergency Laparoscopy
    16 Perforated Ulcer Treatment
    17 Laparoscopic Appendectomy
    18 Meckel’s Diverticula
    19 Emergency Groin Hernia Repair
    20 Laparoscopic Subtotal Cholecystectomy
    21 Adhesiolysis for Bowel Obstruction
    22 Emergency Laparoscopic Small Bowel Resection
    23 Laparoscopic Hartmann’s procedure
    Part 5 Endocrine Surgery
    24 Remote Access Endoscopic Thyroidectomy
    25 Transoral Endoscopic Thyroidectomy
    26 Laparoscopic Adrenalectomy Abdominal Approach
    27 Laparoscopic Adrenalectomy: Retroperitoneal approach
    Part 6 Breast Surgery
    28 Endoscopy-Assisted Breast Surgery for Breast Cancer
    29 Laparoscopic Omental Flap Partial Breast Reconstruction
    Part 7 Video Assisted Thoracic Surgery.-30 Basic Principles and Advanced VATS procedures
    Part 8 Upper Gastrointestinal Surgery - Esophageal Surgery
    31 Achalasia
    32 Resection of Gastroesophageal Junction Submucosal Tumours (SMTs)
    33 Transoral Endoscopic Zenker Diverticulotomy
    34 Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease
    35 Hiatal Hernia
    36 Esophageal Cysts
    37 McKeown Esophagectomy
    Part 9 Upper Gastrointestinal Surgery - Gastric Surgery
    38 Gastric Gastrointestinal Stromal Tumours
    39 Gastric Carcinoma : Subtotal and Total Gastrectomy
    Part 10 Bariatric Procedures
    40 Laparoscopic Gastric Banding for Morbid Obesity
    41 Laparoscopic Sleeve Gastrectomy
    42 Laparoscopic Roux En Y Gastric Bypass (LRYGB)
    43 One Anastomosis Gastric Bypass (OAGB)
    Part 11 Hepatobiliary Surgery – Gallbladder
    44 Elective Cholecystectomy
    Part 12 Hepatobiliary Surgery - Common Bile Duct Stones
    45 Laparoscopic Choledochotomy for Bile Duct Stones
    Part 13 Hepatobiliary Surgery – Liver
    46 Hepatic cyst/ abscess
    47 Laparoscopic Wedge Liver Resection
    48 Laparoscopic Left Liver Resection
    49 Laparoscopic Right Hepatectomy
    Part 14 Pancreas
    50 Laparoscopic internal drainage of pancreatic pseudocysts
    51 Laparoscopic Distal Pancreatectomy
    52 Laparoscopic Pancreaticoduodenectomy
    Part 15 Spleen
    53 Laparoscopic Splenectomy
    54 Intraoperative Splenic Injuries
    Part 16 Inguinal Hernia
    55 Transabdominal Pre-peritoneal approach (TAPP)
    56 Totally Extra-peritoneal approach in Inguinal Hernia Repair
    57 Laparoscopic Management of Recurrent and Re-Recurrent hernia
    58 Laparo-endoscopic approach to Complex Inguinal Hernia
    Part 17 Incisional/ Ventral Hernia Repair
    59 Laparoscopic Intraperitoneal Onlay Mesh (IPOM) and IPOM plus
    60 Extraperitoneal Ventral Hernia Repair
    61 Endoscopic anterior component separation technique (eACS)
    62 Role of Botulinum Toxin-A in Chemical Component Separation Technique.-63 Endo-Laparoscopic Repair of Lateral Ventral Hernia
    Part 18 Diastasis Recti
    64 Posterior Plication or Combined Plication of the Recti Diastasis
    65 Endo-laparoscopic retromuscular repair
    66 Endoscopic Subcutaneous Onlay Laparoscopic Approach
    Part 19 Other Hernias
    67 Minimally Invasive Surgery for Diaphragmatic Hernia
    68 Laparoscopic Parastomal Hernia Repair
    Part 20 Colorectal Surgery
    69 Laparoscopic Right Hemicolectomy with Complete Mesocolic Excision and Central Vascular Ligation (CME/CVL) for Right sided Colon Cancer
    70 Laparoscopic left hemicolectomy
    71 Anterior Resection
    72 Laparoscopic Abdominoperineal Resection
    73 Laparoscopic Total Colectomy
    74 Laparoscopic Ventral Mesh Rectopexy
    Part 21 Robotic Surgery
    75 Robotic Surgery - Operating Room Set Up and Docking
    Part 22 Other Laparoscopic Procedures
    76 Laparoscopic Varicocoelectomy
    77 Laparoscopic Paediatric Inguinal Hernia Repair.
    Digital Access Springer 2023
  • Digital
    [edited by] Patricia P. Sengstack, DNP, RN-BC, CPHIMS ; Charles M. Boicey, MS, RN-BC, PMP, CLNC, CPHIMS.
    Contents:
    The widening field of healthcare informatics / Patricia Sengstack
    Healthcare informatics planning and analysis / Marcy Stoots
    Designing a usable healthcare information system / Christy St. John
    Testing in the healthcare informatics environment / Seth Carlson
    Delivering healthcare informatics training / Brenda Kulhanek
    Healthcare system implementation / Sue Houston
    Maintaining and optimizing a healthcare information system / Tess Settegren
    Conducting quality healthcare IT outcome evaluations : guidelines and resources / Patricia Sengstack
    Essential tools for project management / Lisa Bove
    Security and privacy concepts in healthcare IT / Susan Martin
    Healthcare clinical decision support / Lincoln Farnum
    Use of standard terminologies in healthcare IT / Amy Jacobs, Luann Whittenburg
    Patient safety and healthcare IT / Patricia Sengstack
    Patient engagement in healthcare IT / Daniel Gracie, Melissa Barthold
    Informatics in non-acute care settings / Maria Arellano, Rick Gagnon
    Healthcare analytics / Charles Boicey
    Connected and mobile health's promise for the triple aim / Susan Hull
    Digital Access AccessAPN 2015
  • Digital
    Scott B. McCusker, Blaise Douros.
    Contents:
    Introduction to medical photography / Scott McCusker, Blaise Douros
    Photographic equipment / Blaise Douros
    Studio photography techniques / Blaise Douros
    Small structures and macrophotography / Scott McCusker, Blaise Douros
    Postprocessing and digital asset management / Phil Goetz, Blaise Douros, Scott McCusker, Michael Benninger
    Smartphones and telemedicine / Fawn Hogan
    Approach to the patient / Scott McCusker
    Intraoperative photography / Scott McCusker, Fawn Hogan
    Special considerations for reconstructive surgery / Scott McCusker, Fawn Hogan
    Face and neck / Scott McCusker
    Oral cavity and oropharynx / Scott McCusker
    Sinuses and nasopharynx / Erik Weitzel
    Imaging of the upper airway and larynx / N. Scott Howard, Scott McCusker.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Otolaryngology
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
  • Print
    Beth Tamplet Ulrich.
    Summary: "Nurse preceptors have the power and opportunity to inspire nurses to achieve greatness. Effective precepting programs depend on two critical groups: nurses who organize and manage the programs and nurses who support, teach, and coach. Beth Ulrich-nationally recognized for her research in work environments and transitional experiences of new graduate nurses-provides the knowledge, tools, skills, and wisdom both groups need for success. Written for staff nurses, their managers, and educators, this third edition of Mastering Precepting: A Nurse's Handbook for Success teaches preceptors both the science and art of precepting and empowers them to seek the support they need to be effective. For managers, it emphasizes the importance of providing nurse preceptors with positive and supportive experiences. For educators, it provides the information and knowledge required to develop and improve preceptor programs"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The preceptor role / Beth Tamplet Ulrich
    Learning : the foundation of precepting / Beth Tamplet Ulrich
    Core precepting concepts / Beth Tamplet Ulrich
    Precepting strategies / Beth Tamplet Ulrich
    Developing a professional identity / Lori C. Shank, Nelda Godfrey
    Having a plan : developing and using goals, objectives, and outcomes./ Mary S. Haras, Lauren A. Arrington, Kelly C. Walke
    Communication / Beth Ulrich with Laurie Shiparski
    Coachinh / Beth Ulrich with Laurie Shiparski
    Effectively using instructional technologies / Cathleen M. Deckers
    Precepting specific learner populations / Beth Tamplet Ulrich
    Precepting advanced practice registered nurses / Laura Lynn Rooney
    Assessing and addressing preceptee behavior and motivation / Cindy Lefton, Robert E. Lefton
    Pragmatics of precepting / Larissa Africa, Cherilyn Ashlock
    Self-care for preceptors / Kim A. Richards
    The NPD practitioner: responsibility for preceptor programs / Mary G. Harper, Joan Insalaco Warren, Patsy Maloney
    For managers : selecting, supporting, and sustaining preceptors / Carol A. Bradley, Amy K. Doepken, Denise D. Fall, Virginia Downie, Cindy Bianchini
    Preceptor development / Beth Tamplet Ulrich.
    Digital Access R2Library [2024]
  • Digital
    by Silvia M. Rogers.
    Summary: This self-help guide is intended for scientists and medical professionals and students who wish to improve their scientific writing skills. Exercises invite the reader to practice the most important aspects of scientific writing. Although the book addresses certain issues more troublesome to scientific communicators of a non-English language origin, the guide will be of equal benefit to those whose first language is English. If you want not only to write but to write well, this book is for you. This second edition takes into account new developments in the area of scientific communication. In particular, the importance of authenticity is addressed, drawing attention to the sensitive issue of plagiarism in scientific texts.

    Contents:
    Good versus Poor Scientific Writing: an orientation
    Words and Units: orthography and Punctuation
    Forming Sentences: grammar
    Putting it Nicely: Style
    Redundancy and Jargon: Focusing on the essentials
    Quoting Published Material: Reference Formats
    Avoiding Discrimination: ethics of Scientific Writing
    Sticking to your word: Plagiarism
    Structuring Scientific Texts: getting the Story out.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    [edited by] Janice C. Palaganas, Beth Tamplet Ulrich, Mary E. (Beth) Mancini.
    Summary: "Simulation can be a valuable tool in academic or clinical settings, but technology changes quickly, and faculty, students, and clinicians need to know how to respond. Understanding simulation scenarios and environments is essential when designing and implementing effective programs for interdisciplinary learners. In this fully revised second edition of Mastering Simulation, nationally known experts Janice Palaganas, Beth Ulrich, and Beth Mancini guide students and practitioners in developing clinical competencies and provide a solid foundation for improving patient outcomes"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Foreword
    Introduction
    1 Foundations of Simulation
    2 Developing Clinical Competence and Confidence
    3 Creating an Effective Simulation Environment
    4 Creating Effective, Evidence-Based Scenarios
    5 Key Concepts in Simulation: Debriefing and Reflective Practice
    6 Evaluating Simulation Effectiveness
    7 Simulation as a Continuous Learning System
    8 Using Simulation With Specific Learner Populations
    9 Using Simulation for Interprofessional Education and Practice
    10 Using Simulation in Academic Environments to Improve Learner Performance
    11 Using Simulation in Hospitals and Healthcare Systems to Improve Outcomes
    12 Using Simulation for Risk Management and Quality Improvement
    13 Using Simulation for Research
    14 Defining Roles and Building a Career in Simulation
    15 Credentialing and Certification in Simulation
    16 Designing Simulation Centers for Health Education
    17 The Future of Simulation in Healthcare.
    Digital Access AccessAPN 2020
  • Digital
    [edited by] Beth Ulrich, Mary E. (Beth) Mancini.
    Contents:
    Foundations of simulation
    Developing clinical competence and confidence
    Creating effective simulation environments
    Creating effective, evidence-based scenarios
    Debriefing and reflective practice
    Evaluating simulation effectiveness
    Using simulation with specific learner populations
    Using health care simulation for interprofessional
    Using simulation in academic environments to improve
    Using simulation in hospitals and health care systems
    Using simulation for risk management and quality
    Using simulation for research
    Defining roles and building a career in simulation
    Credentialing and certification in simulation
    Developing and building a simulation center
    The future of simulation in health care.
    Digital Access eBook Comp Acad 2014
  • Digital
    Michelle Kittleson.
    Summary: Like a mentor you may turn to in times of crisis, this book provides the wisdom earned from countless mentors and patients. You may be standing on the precipice of medical training or well into your career, trying to recapture the joy of medicine. A love of people and a love of science barely capture the essence of a life in medicine; there is so much more to being a physician than the ability to diagnose and treat diseases. While nothing can fully prepare you for the fear and anxiety that comes with inexperience, Mastering the Art of Patient Care eases some of that uncertainty with a system for surviving and thriving in medical school and beyond. Whatever your stage, the goal of this book is to share successes and failures to help you be a physician who takes outstanding care of patients, colleagues, and trainees and derives great joy from saving lives.

    Contents:
    Medical School
    Becoming Fluent in Medicine
    Your Career Path
    Diagnosis
    Tests and Interventions
    The Art of the Consult
    Good Habits for a Lifetime
    Leading Your Team
    The Tough Conversations
    The Patient-Physician Bond
    Being a Woman in Medicine
    Self-care
    What Covid Has Taught Us (or Not)
    The Joy of Medicine.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Steven A. Safren, Susan E. Sprich, Carol A. Perlman, Michael W. Otto.
    Summary: Used in conjunction with the treatment described in the corresponding online Therapist Guide, this online Workbook provides effective and practical skills that have been scientifically tested and shown to help adults cope with their ADHD symptoms. The treatment plan contains step-by-step, session-by-session information and materials necessary to participate in this treatment in the context of individual outpatient cognitive behavioural therapy. Clients can be active participants in this therapy by helping to personalize treatment strategy and monitoring progress, all toward the goal of learning to overcome their ADHD
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    Steven A. Safren, Susan E. Sprich, Carol A. Perlman, Michael W. Otto.
    Summary: "Attention Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD) in adulthood is a prevalent and impairing disorder. While medications have been effective in treating adult ADHD, the majority of individuals treated with medications still have symptoms that require additional skills and symptom management strategies. This Second Edition of Mastering Your Adult ADHD is thoroughly updated to present the most current, empirically supported treatment strategies in cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT) for coping with symptoms of adult ADHD. The Therapist Guide provides clinicians with effective means of teaching adult clients skills that have been scientifically tested and shown to help them cope with ADHD. The program has been updated to include the optional use of technology and smart phones to improve organization and planning. Core modules cover the development of systems for keeping track of appointments and tasks, reducing distractibility, and improving adaptive thinking skills, and there's an optional module on reducing procrastination. Information is also provided regarding holding an informational meeting with a spouse, partner, or family member. The step-by-step, session-by-session descriptions are a practical resource for therapists who deliver the treatment. The companion Client Workbook contains all of the necessary information for participating in the practical CBT intervention. It includes worksheets, forms, and a link to an assessment measure that can be used to gauge progress during treatment."-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Oxford [2017]
  • Digital
    [edited by] Rod J. Rohrich, Sammy Sinno, Paul N. Afrooz.
    Summary: "The rapid growth in global demand for cosmetic surgery has led to an urgent need for aesthetic surgeons to learn an ever-growing menu of advanced procedures. Masters of Cosmetic Surgery-The Video Atlas: The Dallas Cosmetic Model edited by internationally renowned plastic surgeon Rod J. Rohrich and esteemed colleagues Sammy Sinno and Paul N. Afrooz presents an amazing new method of learning cosmetic surgery techniques. The didactic video guide features contributions from the Who's Who of superb surgeons and dermatologists that are committed to excellence in their own practices and educational endeavors"-- Provided by publisher
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
  • Digital
    Dmitry Oleynikov, P. Marco Fisichella, editors.
    Summary: This book brings together all stages of the diagnosis and treatment of all complex esophageal disorders in a single volume. A special emphasis is given to emerging procedures in laparoscopy, thoracoscopy, and endoscopy. Stages of operative approaches with relevant technical considerations are outlined in an easily understandable manner. The text is illustrated throughout by easy to understand illustration line graphs that depict fundamental anatomic or technical principles. Each chapter includes a summary of the current management strategy for the disease process, and a review of current innovations surrounding the topic. The book is applicable to physicians in both the surgical disciplines and in gastroenterology, as well as residents and fellows in this area.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    editors, Larry R. Kaiser, MD, Irving L. Kron, MD, Thomas L. Spray, MD.
    Summary: This volume in the acclaimed Mastery Series delivers clear, how-to guidance on the most commonly performed procedures in adult and pediatric thoracic surgery. As with other volumes in the series, Mastery of Cardiothoracic Surgery delivers expert commentary from master surgeons following each chapter. Invaluable for cardiothoracic fellows, as well as thoracic and cardiac surgeons. Comprehensive text follows the Mastery style--with comments from the expert editors at the end of each chapter to help hone technique, improve results, and minimize error. Procedure-based chapters address critical details--from indications and preoperative assessment to surgical technique, postsurgical follow-up, and management of complications. Broad coverage addresses thoracic, adult cardiac, and congenital cardiac procedures to prepare readers for any challenge. NEW to the Third Edition ... Full-color design and art enliven the text and facilitate visual learning. New chapters address key disorders and surgical interventions--including Ascending Aortic Aneurysms, Minimally Invasive Maze Procedure, Reoperative Cardiac Surgery, Repair of Esophageal Hernia, Repair of Pectus Deformities, Thoracic Sympathectomy, and Percutaneous Mitral and Aortic Valve Repairs. Companion website provides access to the fully searchable text and images from the book.--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    General thoracic surgery
    Adult cardiac surgery
    General considerations
    Acquired valvular heart disease
    Coronary artery disease
    Surgery for heart failure
    Thoracic aortic disease
    Transplantation
    Arrhythmias
    Other cardiac
    Congenital cardiac surgery.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    edited by Lee L. Swanstrom, MD, Chief Innovation Officer (CIO) and Director of Innovations School (I-SIP), IHU-Strasbourg, Strasbourg, France, Interventional Endoscopy and Foregut Surgery, the Oregon Clinic, Professor of Surgery (Clinical), Oregon Health and Science University, Portland, Oregon, Nathaniel J. Soper, MD, Loyal and Edith Davis Professor and Chair, Department of Surgery, Northwestern University Feinberg School of Medicine, Chicago, Illinois ; in conjunction with Michael E. Leonard, Medical Illustrator, Clement, California, Steven Leeds, MD, Video Link Editor, Portland Providence Cancer Center and the Oregon Clinic, Portland, Oregon.
    Summary: "If there is a theme to this edition, it probably lies in the fact that most of the laparoscopic operations described are well-matured and backed with many years of outcomes data to support their "gold standard" status. This is an increasingly important component of any surgical approach in this era of cost containment and effectiveness measurements. We hope that the evidence listed in this edition will provide a ready reference for surgeons who need to defend their choice of a minimally invasive approach for their patients. A second theme to note is the continued emphasis on the utility and importance of flexible endoscopy as a surgical tool. As more and more operations, even laparoscopic ones, become doable by the flexible endoscope, it is increasingly apparent that the surgeon who relinquishes their right to perform endoscopy will face an increasingly narrow spectrum of practice. Mastery of Laparoscopic and Endoscopic Surgery has always reflected this philosophy, in this edition more than ever, and we are happy to see that the current political efforts by the American Board of Surgery and other leadership groups in surgery validate this emphasis"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Teaching and learning laparoscopic procedures
    Teaching and learning advanced flexible endoscopy
    New technology in flexible endoscopy
    New laparoscopic instrumentation: single port, minilap, and beyond
    Imaging systems in minimally invasive surgery
    Surgical robotics
    Anatomic and physiologic testing of esophageal function
    Endoluminal therapy of GERD: current status
    Laparoscopic nissen fundoplication
    Laparoscopic partial fundoplication
    Laparoscopic antireflux surgery: esophageal lengthening procedures
    Laparoscopic antireflux surgery: reoperations at the esophageal hiatus
    Laparoscopic repair of paraesophageal hernias
    Esophageal achalasia
    Per-oral endoscopic myotomy (POEM) for achalasia and other motility disorders
    Other esophageal motility disorders and diverticula
    Surgical treatments for gastroparesis
    Endoscopic and laparoscopic evaluation of foregut neoplasia
    Endoscopic therapies for Barrett's esophagus
    Laparoscopic transhiatal esophagectomy
    Minimally invasive Ivor Lewis method for resection of esophageal cancer with curative intent
    Endoscopic palliation of unresectable cancer of the esophagus
    Endoscopic resection of premalignant and malignant foregut disease
    Resection of nonadenomatous gastric tumors
    Laparoscopic resection for gastric adenocarcinoma
    Laparoscopic adjustable gastric band
    Laparoscopic Roux-en gastric bypass
    Laparoscopic duodenal switch and sleeve gastrectomy
    Laparoscopic and single-incision sleeve gastrectomy
    Endolumenal treatments for morbid obesity
    Metabolic surgery for diabetes
    Diseases of the liver and biliary tract: endoscopy of bile and pancreatic ducts
    Laparoscopic cholecystectomy
    Surgery of the extrahepatic bile ducts
    Biliary and vasculobiliary injuries
    Laparoscopic and image guided treatment of liver tumors
    Liver resection
    Endoscopic techniques for evaluating, staging, and treating pancreatic, ampullary, and periampullary tumors
    Endoscopic and laparoscopic management of pseudocysts and pancreatitis
    Minimally invasive pancreatic resection
    Laparoscopic adrenalectomy
    Less invasive approaches to the thyroid and parathyroid glands
    Endoscopic diagnosis of small intestinal diseases
    Laparoscopic treatment of disorders of the small bowel
    Flexible endoscopy of the lower gastrointestinal tract
    Laparoscopic surgery of the appendix and beyond-single incision and NOTES appendectomy
    Laparoscopic surgery for benign diseases of the colon
    Laparoscopic resection for carcinoma of the colon
    Laparoscopic resection for carcinoma of the rectum
    Transanal endoscopic microsurgery
    Laparoscopic inguinal hernia repair
    Laparoscopic ventral hernia repair and abdominal wall reconstruction
    Laparoscopic splenectomy
    Laparoscopic nephrectomy for malignant conditions
    Laparoscopic donor nephrectomy
    Video-assisted thoracoscopic surgery for the general surgeon
    Pediatric laparoscopy and endoscopy
    Minimally invasive gynecologic surgery for the general surgeon
    Update on natural orifice transluminal endoscopic surgery (NOTES)
    Single port laparoscopic surgery: general techniques and technologies.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2014
  • Digital
    Neil Hyman, Phillip Fleshner, Scott Strong, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a guide to the management of patients with Crohn's disease and ulcerative colitis. The indications for surgery within inflammatory bowel disease are covered, as well as new biologic medications and the effects they have on the immune system. Details on how these drugs should be managed to avoid complications and ensure patient safety are also included. Mastery of IBD Surgery sets out to cover surgical responses to inflammatory bowel disease from a multidisciplinary perspective and aims to help all surgeons and medical professionals working in this area. This book is relevant to colorectal surgeons, gastrointestinal surgeons, and gastroenterologists.

    Contents:
    Nutritional Repletion in the Surgical Patient
    Preoperative Bowel Prep
    Extended Venous Thromboembolism Prophylaxis after Surgery for Inflammatory Bowel Diseases
    The Use of Enhanced Recovery Pathways in Patients Undergoing Surgery for Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Perioperative Steroid Management in IBD Patients Undergoing Colorectal Surgery
    Managing ImmunomodulatorsPerioperatively
    Managing Biologics Perioperatively
    Management of Perianal Skin Tags
    Management of Chronic Anal Fissures in Patients with Crohn's Disease
    Management of Simple Anoperineal Fistulas
    Management of Severe Anoperineal Disease
    Management ofAno/Rectovaginal Fistula
    Proctectomy in Patients with "Watering Can"Perineum
    Management of Isolated Proctitis/Proctosigmoiditis
    Role of IPAA for Crohn's Disease
    Surgical Options for Neoplasia Complicating Crohn's Disease of the Large Intestine
    The Role of Segmental Resection for Colon Disease
    Role of Percutaneous Drainage for Disease-related Abscesses
    Management After Successful Percutaneous Drainage of Disease-Related Abscess
    Intraoperative Detection of Upper Gastrointestinal Strictures
    Management of long segment small bowel Crohn's disease
    Construction of the Ideal Ileocolic Anastomosis in Crohn's Disease
    Management of Enteroenteric Fistula
    Preventing Postoperative Crohn's Disease Recurrence
    Role of Minimally Invasive Reoperative Surgery
    Extent of mesenteric resection
    Role of Endoscopic Management in Ulcerative Colitis Patients with Dysplasia
    Surgical Options for Endoscopically Unresectable Dysplasia in Ulcerative Colitis
    Management of Ulcerative Colitis in Patients with Rectal Cancer
    Surgical Approach to the Older Ulcerative Colitis Patient
    Role of Minimally Invasive Surgery in Pouch Surgery
    How Many Stages Should We Use in Pouch Surgery?
    Optimal Design for Ileal-Pouch Anal Anastomosis
    Failed pouch-pouch excision vs redo
    Mucosectomy versus stapled ileal pouch-anal anastomosis
    Transanal Proctectomy and Ileoanal Pouch Procedure (ta-J Pouch)
    Use of Antiadhesive Barriers in Pouch Surgery
    Optimal management of Pelvic Abscess after Pouch Surgery
    Management of Chronic Pouchitis
    Management of Ileal Pouch Vaginal Fistulas
    Management of IPAA-Associated Persistent Presacral Sinus
    The Management of Patients with Dysplasia in the Anal Transitional Zone
    Pouch excision versus diversion for the failed pouch
    Pouch Excision vs. Redo IPAA After a Failed Pouch
    Continent Ileostomy after Removal of a Failed IPAA.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Cem Akin, editor.
    Summary: This unique book offers an in-depth, best-practices guide to diagnosis and management of mastocytosis, a too-often underdiagnosed disease. Mastocytosis: A Comprehensive Guide will open with a general overview and discussion of mast cell biology, addressing tryptase and other diagnostic markers in detail. Comprehensive diagnostic criteria and classification will follow, with special emphasis on commonly-seen related manifestations: skin disease, pediatric mastocytosis, gastrointestinal indicators, osteoporosis, anaphylaxis, venom and drug allergy, and pregnancy. Mastocytosis will be an ideal resource for not only the allergist confronted with this condition, but for a growing, multi-disciplinary audience of hematologists, gastroenterologists, dermatologists, pediatricians, primary care providers and other clinicians who encounter this disease in their patients.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Mast cell biology in health and disease.-Chapter 2: Clinical approach to a patient with elevated serum tryptase: implications of acute versus basally elevated levels. -Chapter 3: Urinary markers of mast cell disease and their role in diagnosis and management
    Chapter 4: Skin disease in mastocytosis
    Chapter 5: Pediatric Mastocytosis
    Chapter 6: Gastrointestinal Manifestations of Systemic Mastocytosis
    Chapter 7: Systemic Mastocytosis and Bone-Related Events
    Chapter 8:Anaphylaxis in Mastocytosis
    Chapter 9: Venom Allergy and Management in Mastocytosis
    Chapter 10: Drug Allergy and Perioperative Management of Mastocytosis.-Chapter 11: Mastocytosis in Pregnancy.-Chapter 12: KIT and Other Mutations in Mastocytosis.-Chapter 13: Management of the Hematologic Disease in Mastocytosis
    Chapter 14: Tyrosine Kinase Inhibitors in Systemic Mastocytosis
    Chapter 15: International Support and Advocacy for Mast Cell Disease Patients and Caregivers
    Chapter 16: Mastocytosis: Overview of Diagnosis and Classification. .
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    Tashean, Hakovbos; Nemesius.
    Contents:

    v. 1. Nemesius, Proclus, k︠h︡osrovig, Epiphanius and Secundus. 1895. (294 p.)
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
  • Digital/Print
    Hering, Constantine.
    Digital Access Google Books 1873-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    X1101 .H55 1873
    1
  • Digital
    David S. Riley (editor).
    Summary: Materia Medica of New and Old Homeopathic Medicines David S. Rileys interest in the research and subsequently the history and methodology of homeopathic drug provings began with his medical school training in 1979 and a residency in Internal Medicine. He was exposed to homeopathy in 1988 followed by study at the Hahnemann College of Homeopathy in Albany, California. He has investigated the interplay between contemporary research methods and the research methods associated with homeopathic drug provings. Dr Riley has developed research tools for data collection, symptom selection criteria and blinding; primarily to address the risk of bias. The homeopathic drug provings published here are the result of this work. For the 3rd edition twelve homeopathic drug provings, conducted by a number of internationally renowned proving directors, have been added. These homeopathic drug provings all follow good clinical practice (GCP) research guidelines and incorporate the guidelines suggested by Dr Samuel Hahnemann more than 200 years ago.

    Contents:
    Homeopathic drug provings
    Acidum alpha-ketoglutaricum
    Acidum alpha-lipoicum
    Acidum ascorbicum
    Acidum cis-aconiticum
    Acidum citricum
    Acidum fumaricum
    Acidum malicum
    Acidum oroticum
    Acidum succinicum
    Adenosinum monohydrogen phosphoricum (cAMP)
    Adenosinum triphosphoricum (ATP)
    Agnus castus
    Anthrachinonum
    Arteria suis
    Ascophyllum nodosum
    Bacterium coli
    Baryta oxalsuccinicum
    Benzochinonum, para
    Bryonia alba
    Bryonia dioica
    Calendula officinalis
    Cardiospermum halicacabum
    Cartilago suis
    Caulophyllum thalictroides
    Cerebrum suis
    Coenzymum A
    Colocynthis
    Cuprum formicicum
    Cyanocobalaminum
    Cysteinum
    Discus intervertebralis suis
    Embryo suis
    Fucus vesiculosus
    Fumaria officinalis
    Funiculus umbilicalis suis
    Galphimia glauca
    Geranium robertianum
    Glandula suprarenalis suis
    Glyoxalum
    Hepar suis
    Hydrochinonum
    Hypophysis suis
    Hypothalamus suis
    Kalium tetraiodobismutatum
    Levothyroxinum
    Luffa operculata
    Magnesium gluconicum
    Magnesium oroticum
    Mahonia aquifolium
    Manganum phosphoricum
    Medulla ossis suis
    Methylglyoxalum
    Mucosa nasalis suis
    Mucosa suis
    Myosotis arvensis
    Nadidum
    Naphthochinonum
    Natrium oxalaceticum
    Natrium pyruvicum
    Nicotinamidum
    Okoubaka aubrevillei
    Oleander
    Oleum pini
    Oxalis acetosella
    Pancreas suis
    Pelargonium sidoides
    Placenta suis
    Pyridoxinum hydrochloricum
    Riboflavinum
    Sinusitisinum
    Staphylococcus nosode
    Streptococcus nosode
    Symphytum officinale
    Terebinthina laricina
    Thiaminum hydrochloricum
    Tormentilla
    Trichinoylum
    Tuba uterina suis
    Ubichinonum
    Urtica urens
    Uterus suis
    Vena suis
    Veronica officinalis
    Zincum aceticum
    Zincum gluconicum
    Appendix .
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Stefan Bosse, Dirk Lehmhus, Walter Lang and Matthias Busse.
    Contents:
    Front Matter
    Introduction. On Concepts and Challenges of Realizing Material-Integrated Intelligent Systems / Stefan Bosse, Dirk Lehmhus
    System Development. Design Methodology for Intelligent Technical Systems / Mareen Va€holz, Roman Dumitrescu, Jürgen Gausemeier
    Smart Systems Design Methodologies and Tools / Nicola Bombieri, Franco Fummi, Giuliana Gangemi, Michelangelo Grosso, Enrico Macii, Massimo Poncino, Salvatore Rinaudo
    Sensor Technologies. Microelectromechanical Systems (MEMS) / Li Yunjia
    Fiber-Optic Sensors / Yi Yang, Kevin Chen, Nikhil Gupta
    Electronics Development for Integration / Jan Vanfleteren
    Material Integration Solutions. Sensor Integration in Fiber-Reinforced Polymers / Maryam Kahali Moghaddam, Mariugenia Salas, Michael Koerdt, Christian Brauner, Martina Hübner, Dirk Lehmhus, Walter Lang
    Integration in Sheet Metal Structures / Welf-Guntram Drossel, Roland Müller, Matthias Nestler, Sebastian Hensel
    Sensor and Electronics Integration in Additive Manufacturing / Dirk Lehmhus, Matthias Busse
    Signal and Data Processing: The Sensor Node Level. Analog Sensor Signal Processing and Analog-to-Digital Conversion / John Horstmann, Marco Ramsbeck, Stefan Bosse
    Digital Real-Time Data Processing with Embedded Systems / Stefan Bosse, Dirk Lehmhus
    The Known World: Model-Based Computing and Inverse Numeric / Armin Lechleiter, Stefan Bosse
    The Unknown World: Model-Free Computing and Machine Learning / Stefan Bosse
    Robustness and Data Fusion / Stefan Bosse
    Networking and Communication: The Sensor Network Level. Communication Hardware / Tim Tiedemann
    Networks and Communication Protocols / Stefan Bosse
    Distributed and Cloud Computing: The Big Machine / Stefan Bosse
    The Mobile Agent and Multiagent Systems / Stefan Bosse
    Energy Supply. Energy Management and Distribution / Stefan Bosse
    Microenergy Storage / Robert Kun, Chi Chen, Francesco Ciucci
    Energy Harvesting / Rolanas Dauksevicius, Danick Briand
    Application Scenarios. Structural Health Monitoring (SHM) / Dirk Lehmhus, Matthias Busse
    Achievements and Open Issues Toward Embedding Tactile Sensing and Interpretation into Electronic Skin Systems / Ali Ibrahim, Luigi Pinna, Lucia Seminara, Maurizio Valle
    Intelligent Materials in Machine Tool Applications: A Review / Hans-Christian Möhring
    New Markets/Opportunities through Availability of Product Life Cycle Data / Thorsten Wuest, Karl Hribernik, Klaus-Dieter Thoben
    Human-Computer Interaction with Novel and Advanced Materials / Tanja Döring, Robert Porzel, Rainer Malaka
    Index
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Katsuhiko Ariga and Mitsuhiro Ebara.
    Contents:
    Change Thinking toward Nanoarchitectonics / Katsuhiko Ariga, Masakazu Aono
    Zero- and One-Dimensional Nanoarchitectonics. Architectonics in Nanoparticles / Qingmin Ji, Xinbang Liu, Ke Yin
    Aspects of One-Dimensional Nanostructures: Synthesis, Characterization, and Applications / Amit Dalui, Ali Hossain Khan, Bapi Pradhan, Srabanti Ghosh, Somobrata Acharya
    Tubular Nanocontainers for Drug Delivery / Yusuf Darrat, Ekaterina Naumenko, Giuseppe Cavallaro, Giuseppe Lazzara, Yuri Lvov, Rawil Fakhrullin
    Two-Dimensional Nanoarchitectonics. Graphene Nanotechnology / Katsunori Wakabayashi
    Nanoarchitectonics of Multilayer Shells toward Biomedical Application / Wei Cui, Junbai Li
    Layered Nanoarchitectonics with Layer-by-Layer Assembly Strategy for Biomedical Applications / Wei Qi, Jing Yan
    Emerging 2D Materials / Ken Sakaushi
    Three-Dimensional and Hierarchic Nanoarchitectonics. Self-Assembly and Directed Assembly / Hejin Jiang, Yutao Sang, Li Zhang, Minghua Liu
    Functional Porous Materials / Watcharop Chaikittisilp
    Integrated Composites and Hybrids / Shenmin Zhu, Hui Pan, Mengdan Xia
    Shape-Memory Materials / Koichiro Uto
    Materials Nanoarchitectonics for Application 1: Physical and Chemical. Optically Active Organic Field-Effect Transistors / Yutaka Wakayama
    Efficient Absorption of Sunlight Using Resonant Nanoparticles for Solar Heat Applications / Satoshi Ishii, Kai Chen, Ramu P Sugavaneshwar, Hideo Okuyama, Thang D Dao, Satish L Shinde, Manpreet Kaur, Masahiro Kitajima, Tadaaki Nagao
    Nanoarchitectonics Approach for Sensing / Katsuhiko Ariga
    Self-Healing / Takeshi Sato, Mitsuhiro Ebara
    Materials Nanoarchitectonics for Application 2: Biological and Biomedical. Materials Nanoarchitectonics: Drug Delivery System / Yohei Kotsuchibashi
    Mechanobiology / Jun Nakanishi
    Diagnostics / Mitsuhiro Ebara
    Immunoengineering / Yasuhiro Nakagawa, Mitsuhiro Ebara.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Tomoaki Ikeda, Chizuko Aoki-Kamiya, editors.
    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; 1: Antepartum Management of Women with Cardiovascular Disease; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Cardiovascular and Other Physiological Changes During Pregnancy and Delivery (Tables 1.2 and 1.3, Fig. 1.3); 1.2.1 Hemodynamic Changes (Fig. 1.4); 1.2.2 Hematological Changes: Hypercoagulable State, Anemia; 1.2.3 Respiratory Change; 1.2.4 Great Arterial Wall; 1.2.5 Autonomic Nervous System; 1.2.6 Hormonal Change; 1.3 Cardiac Assessment Before Pregnancy; 1.4 Prepregnancy Counseling; 1.5 Cardiac Monitoring of the Mother During Pregnancy 1.6 Hemodynamic Assessment During Pregnancy1.7 Psychosocial Issues; 1.8 Arrhythmias; 1.9 Cardiac Failure; 1.10 Drug Therapy During Pregnancy; 1.11 Care Facilities for Pregnancy; 1.12 Invasive Treatment During Pregnancy; 1.13 Infective Endocarditis; 1.14 Summary; 1.15 Conclusions; References; 2: Intrapartum Management; 2.1 Intrapartum Physiological Changes; 2.2 Timing of Delivery; 2.3 Mode of Delivery; 2.3.1 Management of Vaginal Delivery; 2.3.2 Management of Cesarean Delivery; 2.4 Maternal Monitoring; References; 3: Obstetric Anesthesia; 3.1 General Considerations 3.1.1 Maternal Risk Stratification for Cesarean
    Section in Cardiovascular Disease3.1.2 Physiological Changes in Pregnancy (See Chaps.1 and 2); 3.1.2.1 Hemodynamic Changes; 3.1.2.2 Respiratory Changes; 3.1.2.3 Hemostatic Changes; 3.1.2.4 Fetal Oxygenation; 3.1.3 Multidisciplinary Communications; 3.2 Neuraxial Versus General Anesthesia for Cesarean Section; 3.2.1 Elective Cesarean Section; 3.2.2 Emergency Cesarean Section; 3.3 Contingency Plans; 3.4 Neuraxial Anesthesia; 3.4.1 A Suggested Technique for Epidural Anesthesia; 3.4.2 Alternative Neuraxial Techniques 3.4.3 Platelet Count Thresholds3.4.4 Failed Block; 3.5 General Anesthesia; 3.5.1 Monitoring; 3.5.2 Induction; 3.5.3 Maintenance; 3.5.4 Ventilatory Strategies; 3.5.5 Emergence; 3.6 Hemodynamic Management; 3.6.1 Arrhythmia; 3.6.2 Specific Diseases; 3.6.2.1 Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension; 3.6.2.2 Fontan Palliation; 3.6.2.3 Cardiovascular Surgery with Cardiopulmonary Bypass; 3.6.2.4 Maternal Cardiac Transplant; 3.6.3 Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation; 3.7 Postoperative Management; 3.7.1 Hemodynamic Management; 3.7.2 Postoperative Analgesia; 3.8 Conclusion; References 4: Postpartum Management4.1 The Immediate Puerperium Management; 4.2 The Late Puerperium Management; 4.3 Breast-Feeding and Cardiovascular Disease; 4.3.1 Physiology of Breast-Feeding; 4.3.2 Breast-Feeding and Cardiovascular Disease; 4.3.3 Breast-Feeding and Medication; 4.4 Impact of Pregnancy on Long-Term Outcomes; 4.5 Relations Between Peripartum and Later Cardiovascular Events; References; 5: Preconception Counseling and Contraception; 5.1 Overview of Preconception Counseling; 5.2 Risk Assessment of Pregnancy with  Cardiovascular Disease
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    John H. Wilson, William T. Schnettler, Adam M. Lubert, Gruschen R. Veldtman, Andrea Kelley Girnius.
    Summary: Heart disease is currently the leading cause of maternal mortality in developed countries and is expected to increase further due to advanced maternal age and conditions such as type 2 diabetes. Maternal Cardiac Care: A Guide to Managing Pregnant Women with Heart Disease is an up-to-date, multidisciplinary resource for physicians and advanced practice nurses caring for pregnant patients with a variety of preexisting and emerging cardiac issues. Offers comprehensive information on caring for women with heart disease, in an easy-to-follow, quick-access format. Shares knowledge from a multidisciplinary group of experts who are well versed in the team approach needed to treat this high-risk patient population. Includes extensive references for readers who want to delve more deeply into specific subjects. Ideal for obstetricians, internists, cardiologists, critical care specialists, and advanced practice nurses involved in caring for pregnant patients, as well as institutions and departments that need detailed guidance on establishing a maternal cardiac care program.

    Contents:
    Physiologic Adaptations to Pregnancy
    The Cardiac Physical Examination in Pregnancy
    Obstetric Care for Nonobstetricians
    Prepregnancy Counseling
    Cardiac Conditions That May Affect Pregnancy
    Obstetric Events That Affect Cardiac Patients
    Managing Specific Cardiac Conditions During Pregnancy, Labor, and Delivery
    Peripartum Cardiomyopathy
    Endocarditis in Pregnancy
    Arrhythmias During Pregnancy
    Fetal Tachycardia
    An Overview: Pharmacology During Pregnancy
    The Use of Cardiac Drugs During Pregnancy
    Anticoagulation During Pregnancy
    Cardiac Effects of Drugs Commonly Used in Obstetrics
    Cardiac Effects of Anesthetic Agents That May Be Used in Labor and Delivery
    Anesthesia for Cardiac Patients During Labor and Delivery
    Anesthesia for Nonobstetric Procedures During Pregnancy
    Cardiac Testing During Pregnancy
    Cardiac Intervention During Pregnancy
    Cardiac Surgery During Pregnancy
    Cardiac Arrest in Pregnancy
    The Maternal Cardiac Care Team and the Maternal Cardiac Care Facility
    Assessment of Maternal Risk and Assessment of Fetal Risk
    The Patient Management Plan
    Nursing Considerations
    Pregnancy After Heart Transplant
    COVID-19 in Pregnant Patients
    Breastfeeding
    Contraception
    Termination of Pregnancy
    Infertility Treatment
    Genetic Counseling
    Substance Abuse in Pregnancy
    The Placenta.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    David A. Schwartz, editor.
    Summary: This ambitious sourcebook surveys both the traditional basis for and the present state of indigenous women's reproductive health in Mexico and Central America. Noted practitioners, specialists, and researchers take an interdisciplinary approach to analyze the multiple barriers for access and care to indigenous women that had been complicated by longstanding gender inequities, poverty, stigmatization, lack of education, war, obstetrical violence, and differences in language and customs, all of which contribute to unnecessary maternal morbidity and mortality. Emphasis is placed on indigenous cultures and folkways--from traditional midwives and birth attendants to indigenous botanical medication and traditional healing and spiritual practices--and how they may effectively coexist with modern biomedical care. Throughout these chapters, the main theme is clear: the rights of indigenous women to culturally respective reproductive health care and a successful pregnancy leading to the birth of healthy children. A sampling of the topics: Motherhood and modernization in a Yucatec village Maternal morbidity and mortality in Honduran Miskito communities Solitary birth and maternal mortality among the Rarámuri of Northern Mexico Maternal morbidity and mortality in the rural Trifino region of Guatemala The traditional Ngäbe-Buglé midwives of Panama Characterizations of maternal death among Mayan women in Yucatan, Mexico Unintended pregnancy, unsafe abortion, and unmet need in Guatemala Maternal Death and Pregnancy-Related Morbidity Among Indigenous Women of Mexico and Central America is designed for anthropologists and other social scientists, physicians, nurses and midwives, public health specialists, epidemiologists, global health workers, international aid organizations and NGOs, governmental agencies, administrators, policy-makers, and others involved in the planning and implementation of maternal and reproductive health care of indigenous women in Mexico and Central America, and possibly other geographical areas.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Bengt Källén.
    Summary: This book is the combination of the literature on maternal drug use and birth defects with a set of new data on most types of drugs. In this book, for each group of drugs the relevant scientific literature on drug teratogenicity is presented, with consideration of possible sources of error and also what the findings may mean from a practical point of view. The book also adds data from the Swedish health registers for 1996-2013 based on more than 1.7 million early-pregnancy midwife interviews. Maternal Drug Use and Infant Congenital Malformations will find an engaged audience among people working within the field, and will be of interest to healthcare providers, especially obstetricians and other clinicians who treat women of childbearing age. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Abbreviations;
    Chapter 1: Background; Introduction; Ascertainment of Congenital Malformations; Other Outcomes; Ascertainment of Maternal Drug Use; Case-Control Methods; Prospective Methods Based on Interviews or Questionnaires; Teratology Information Services (TIS); Pregnancy Registers; Medical Documents and Prescription Registers; The Swedish Health Registers; Confounding; Mass Significance; References;
    Chapter 2: Maternal Use of Antacids or Drugs for Gastroesophageal Reflux Diagnosis (GERD) or Stomach Ulcer and Infant Congenital Malformations; Introduction Data from the Swedish Health RegistersMalformation Risk After Maternal Use of Antacids; Malformation Risk After Maternal Use of Drugs for GERD; Discussion; References;
    Chapter 3: Maternal Use of Drugs for Intestinal Problems, Except Intestinal Inflammations, and Infant Congenital Malformations; Introduction; Data from the Swedish Health Registers; Malformation Risk After the Use of Drugs for Functional Intestinal Disorders; Malformation Risk After the Use of Laxatives; Malformation Risk After the Use of Drugs for Intestinal Infections; Malformation Risk After the Use of Drugs for Diarrhea Malformation Risk After the Use of Anti-Propulsive Drugs (Loperamide)Discussion; References;
    Chapter 4: Maternal Use of Drugs for Inflammatory Intestinal Disease and Infant Congenital Malformations; Introduction; Data from the Swedish Health Registers; Congenital Malformations After Maternal Use of Drugs for Intestinal Inflammatory Disease; Discussion; References;
    Chapter 5: Maternal Use of Anti-Obesity Drugs and Infant Congenital Malformations; Introduction; Data from the Swedish Health Registers; Discussion; References
    Chapter 6: Maternal Use of Insulin or Oral Hypoglycemic Drugs and Infant Congenital MalformationsIntroduction; Data from the Swedish Health Registers; Insulin; Oral Hypoglycemic Agents; Discussion; References;
    Chapter 7: Maternal Use of Vitamins and Infant Congenital Malformation; Introduction; Data form the Swedish Health Registers; Malformation Risk After Maternal Use of Multivitamins; Malformation Risk After Maternal Use of Folic Acid; Malformation Risk After Maternal Use of Vitamin B12; Malformation Risk After Maternal Use of Some Other Vitamins; Discussion; References
    Chapter 8: Maternal Use of Anticoagulants or Hemostatic Drugs and Infant Congenital MalformationsIntroduction; Data from the Swedish Health Registers; Malformation Risk After Maternal Use of Anticoagulants; Malformation Risk After Maternal Use of Hemostatics; Discussion; References;
    Chapter 9: Maternal Use of Drugs for Cardiovascular Diseases and Infant Congenital Malformations; Introduction; Anti-hypertensives; Statins; Data from the Swedish Health Registers; Cardiac Therapy; Drugs Used at Hypertension; Other Anti-hypertensive Drugs; Diuretics; Beta-Blocking Agents; Calcium Channel Blockers
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Zoe Z. Dai.
    Summary: This brief explores the resurgence of the role of doulas in the child birthing process in Chinese clinical settings, as a lens to understand comparative pre- and post-natal care worldwide. The demand for doulas in China is increasing, and the rise in the use of doulas is thought to be due to increasing dissatisfaction with current institutional maternity health care. Attention is focused on Chinese women's relationships with their bodies and on women's experiences of choice, agency, and access to health and reproductive services as well as maternal health care information and support. Chapters present an overview of the current experience of pre- and post- natal care in China. In addition, chapters explore interview data on how Chinese doulas construct multiple identities, in terms of serving as lactation consultants, child care providers, and child care educators for women during pregnancy and childbirth. Maternal Healthcare and Doulas in China will be of interest to researchers in public health and health policy, particularly with an interest in maternal health or Asian studies, as well as, health practitioners, and clinicians who are interested in issues related to women, maternity, health care, childbirth, and feminist research in China.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Introduction
    Chapter 2: Critical Health Communication and Feminism
    Chapter 3: Career Motivations for Doulas
    Chapter 4: Sisterhood: Sisters, Families, or Emotional Labour?
    Chapter 5: Medical Procedures and Discourses Around Women's Bodies
    Chapter 6: Disagreements and Conflicts: Who is in Charge of the Delivery Room?
    Chapter 7: Looking Forward
    Concluding Thoughts and A New Beginning.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Christoph Lees, Wilfried Gyselaers.
    Summary: Discover new concepts in cardiovascular and hemodynamic functionality during pregnancy, with international experts in feto-maternal medicine. During the early stages of pregnancy, the maternal heart and circulation are subject to major gestational adaptive changes that allow for a normal course and outcome for both mother and baby. Any disruption to these processes can precipitate the onset of severe maternal and fetal complications such as preeclampsia, or intrauterine growth restriction. This invaluable reference work provides a comprehensive discussion of each aspect of the circulation. With a focus on the physiologic and pathophysiologic aspects of maternal cardiovascular function, this guide supports non-invasive assessment, management and prevention techniques for cardiovascular disease, for all stages of fetal and neonatal life. This text supports researchers and specialists in maternal-fetal medicine, whilst providing a key grounding in the topic, for trainees wishing to be at the cutting edge of theories and research.

    Contents:
    Cardiovascular and volume regulatory functions in pregnancy : an overview / Louis L. Peeters
    Cardiac function / Herbert valensise & Giuseppe Novelli & D. Farsetti
    The venous compartment in normal pregnancy / Kathleen Tomsin & Wilfried Gyselaers
    The microcirculation / Jerome Cornette & Andreas Bruckmann
    Plasma volume changes in pregnancy / Marc Spaanderman & Anneleen Staelens
    Arterial function in pathological pregnancies / Asma Khalil & Sylvia Salvi
    Cardiac dysfunction in hypertensive pregnancy / H. Valensise & G.P. Novelli
    Dysfunction of the venous system before and during preeclampsia / Sharona Vonck & Wilfried Gyselaers
    Microvascular findings in pathological pregnancy / Andreas Bruckmann & Jerome Cornette
    How to assess arterial function? / Helen Perry, Carmel Mceniery, Asma Khalil
    How to do a maternal venous doppler assessment? / Wilfried Gyselaers
    Non-invasive techniques of measuring cardiac output during pregnancy / Victoria Meah, Erik Stohr, John Cockcroft
    Techniques of measuring plasma volume changes in pregnancy / Anneleen Staelens & Marc Spaanderman
    Treatment options of hypertension in pregnancy / Foo L., Tay J., Wilkinson I.B.
    Aspirin / Shireen Meher
    Vascular endothelial growth factor gene therapy in the management of cardiovascular problems in pregnancy / Y. Ginsberg & Anna David
    No donors in preeclampsia / Thomas R. Everett, Taminrit Johal, and Christoph C. Lees
    Vasodilatation and fluid expansion / Herbert Valensise, D. Lo Presti, Marc Spaanderman
    Beyond temporal classification of early and late preeclampsia / Ferrazzi E., Di Martino D., Stampalija T., Muggiasca M.L.
    Chemotherapy and cardiovascular function in pregnancy / Kristel van Calsteren
    Maternal cardiovascular disease after preeclampsia / Johannes Duvekot.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    Luis D. Pacheco, George R. Saade, Gary D.V. Hankins.
    Summary: Focusing primarily on diagnosis and management, this unique reference delivers algorithmic care of the pregnant woman. Confidently diagnose and treat common pregnancy complications with this unique algorithmic approachMaternal Medicine is point-of-care reference designed to help you effectively treat conditions that often coexist with pregnancy. Focusing primarily on diagnosis and management with the goal of limiting complications early, the chapters focus on specific conditions rather than organ systems. This practical guide is designed to impart important relevant information that enables you to deliver patient care based on recommendations provided by experts in each field and grounded in the latest clinical evidence (when available). The authors have carefully selected topics that reflect conditions most often encountered in clinical practice. Coverage of each topic includes antepartum, intra-partum, and post-partum management, enabling you to deliver complete, uninterrupted patient care. You will find all the data you need in one convenient reference, including tables, tips, medication dosages, contraindications, lab values, diagnostic criteria, management algorithms, and levels of evidence. Luis D. Pacheco, MD is Associate Professor, Departments of Obstetrics and Gynecology and Anesthesiology, Divisions of Maternal-Fetal Medicine and Surgical Critical Care, Director of Project # Obstetrical Patient Safety, and Director of Residency Education Program in Surgical Intensive Care Unit, University of Texas Medical Branch, Galveston, Texas. George R. Saade, MD is Jennie Sealy Smith Distinguished Chair, Professor of ObGyn and Cell Biology, Chief of Obstetrics and Maternal-Fetal Medicine, and Director of Perinatal Research Division, University of Texas Medical Branch, Galveston, Texas. Gary D.V. Hankins, MD is Professor and Chairman, Garland D. Anderson, MD Distinguished University Chair in Maternal-Fetal Medicine, University of Texas Medical Branch, Galveston, Texas.

    Contents:
    Epilepsy and pregnancy
    Headache and pregnancy
    Meningitis
    Stroke
    Structural heart disease
    Myocardial infarction
    Treatment of arrhythmias during pregnancy
    Pulmonary edema in pregnancy
    Pneumonia and tuberculosis in pregnancy
    Asthma
    Pulmonary hypertension
    Hypertensive disorders
    Diabetes
    Thyroid disease
    Acute and chronic kidney disease
    Practical considerations for HIV care in pregnancy
    Obesity
    Lupus and collagen diseases
    Hepatitis
    Gastrointestinal bleeding in pregnancy
    Nausea, vomiting, and reflux
    Acute pancreatitis
    Peripheral neuromuscular diseases
    Depression in pregnancy
    Thrombophilias
    Anemia during pregnancy
    Breast cancer
    Other cancers
    Hematologic malignancies in pregnancy
    Deep venous thrombosis and pulmonary embolism
    Disseminated intravascular coagulopathy
    Severe sepsis
    Burn injuries in pregnancy
    Transplantation, pregnancy, and maternal-fetal medicine
    Pruritus in pregnancy
    Diagnositic imaging in pregnancy
    Physiologic and pharmacologic changes in pregnancy
    Physiologic and pharmacologic changes in pregnancy
    Pregnancy as a window to future health.
    Digital Access AccessObGyn 2015
  • Digital
    Kusum Jashnani, editor.
    Summary: The book discusses about 45 cases of maternal autopsies. These maternal mortalities are related to pregnancy-related diseases, pre-existing diseases that worsen or manifest during pregnancy and diseases for which pregnant patient has increased risk. As the study of maternal mortality is a healthcare quality indicator and plays an important role in the improvement of obstetric care, the book aims at discussing autopsy findings, which is the gold standard for establishing not only the causes of death, but also to uncover the various pathological lesions produced by the physiologic phenomenon of pregnancy. This helps in identifying the direct and indirect causes, which can be reviewed at multidisciplinary review meetings. The chapters are arranged according to direct and indirect causes of maternal death, involving varied target organ systems i.e. central nervous system, cardiovascular system, respiratory system, gastro-intestinal tract, hepato-biliary system and pancreas, urinary system, female genital tract and others. However, it does not include diseases coincidental in pregnancy. Each case begins with the complete case history (age, duration of pregnancy, clinical presentation, investigations, clinical diagnosis, therapy, and course during ward stay, if any), autopsy findings, followed by a clinico-pathological discussion and includes appropriate gross organ and microscopic images. The book caters to the specialists in pathology, obstetrics, general medicine, critical care, surgery, pulmonologists, cardiology and all those involved in the care of pregnant women.

    Contents:
    Part: I - Direct Maternal Death
    Catastrophic Abruptio Placentae- An Autopsy Case Series
    Liver Infarct in Pregnancy: A Complex, Rare and Dreadful Affair
    Cerebral Venous Sinus Thrombosis An Avertable Catastrophe
    Fatty Liver: More Likely to be Fatal in Pregnancy!
    Eclampsia: A Risk Factor for Intracranial Haemorrhage
    Cervical Trauma: Clinical Conundrum and Correlation
    Amniotic Fluid Embolism Syndrome: A Rare, Unpredictable and Catastrophic Complication of Pregnancy
    Systemic Thromboembolism and Giant Gastric Mucor Ulcer
    Puerperal Sepsis: A Preventable Cause of Maternal Death
    Peri-partum Cardiomyopathy- Failed Cardiac Physiology
    HELLP Syndrome: The Snowball Effect
    Uterine Anomalies: Less Common but Lethal if not Detected
    Retained Products of Conception and Dilatation & Curettage: A cause for Disseminated Intravascular Coagulation
    Part: II - Indirect Maternal Death
    Pulmonary Bone Marrow Embolism: The Uncommon but Fatal Complication of Sickle Cell Disease
    Neurocysticercosis, Pregnancy and Albendazole The Unholy Trio
    Lupus Nephritis and Pregnancy: Concern for Both Mother and Fetus
    Disseminated Microthrombi in Pregnancy: Not Always DIC, Think of TTP
    Hepatitis E Virus Associated Hepatic Necrosis
    H1N1 Influenza in Pregnancy Yet Another Dreaded Flu
    "Uber Diffuse" Myocarditis: Still a Giant Mystery!
    Liver: A Fatal Target of Sepsis Related Organ Dysfunction
    Complicated Malaria in Pregnancy
    Adrenal Hemorrhage: A Dark Horse in Maternal Mortality
    Disseminated Miliary Tuberculosis: A classic Case of Fatality!
    Disseminated Miliary TB with Missing Millet Tubercles on Gross: Suspect Severe Immunocompromised State
    Mystic Hepatopathy in a Sickle Hemoglobinopathy
    Acute Hemorrhagic Pancreatitis and Sepsis: A Cause for Maternal Death
    Maternal Death due to Nonhodgkins Lymphoma
    Normal Physiologic Changes of Gravid Uterus
    Lobar Pneumonia: A Fatal Non-Obstetric Infection!
    Uterine Arterio-Venous Malformation
    Herpes Simplex Pneumonitis
    Renal Cortical Necrosis in Pregnancy: Still a Sad Reality in Developing Countries
    Severe Anaemia and Pregnancy
    Hypertrophic Cardiomyopathy as an Incidental Finding
    Gastro-Intestinal Candidiasis An Unusual Accompaniment
    Plugging of Visceral Blood Vessels by Atypical Cells: Clue to Leukemia!
    Chronic Kidney Disease Masquerading as Pregnancy Induced Hypertension
    Pulmonary Edema and Aspiration Pneumonia- Cause for Maternal Death
    Post-Partum Febrile Illness - Recurrent Acute Rheumatic Fever
    Common Atrio-Ventricular Canal: A Fatality Due to A Commonality
    Choked Prosthetic Mitral Valve
    Interstitial Lung Disease: Scarred, Stiff Lungs with Honeycombing
    Diffuse Alveolar Damage in Covid 19 infection
    Takayasu Arteritis Third Trimester Tragedy.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    by George Mias.
    Summary: This book offers a comprehensive introduction to using Mathematica and the Wolfram Language for Bioinformatics. The chapters build gradually from basic concepts and the introduction of the Wolfram Language and coding paradigms in Mathematica, to detailed worked examples derived from typical research applications using Wolfram Language code. The coding examples range from basic sequence analysis, accessing genomic databases, and differential gene expression, to time series analysis of longitudinal omics experiments, multi-omics integration and building dynamic interactive bioinformatics tools using the Wolfram Language. The topics address the daily bioinformatics needs of a broad audience: experimental users looking to understand and visualize their data, beginner bioinformaticians acquiring coding expertise in providing biological research solutions, and practicing expert bioinformaticians working on omics who wish to expand their toolset to include the Wolfram Language.

    Contents:
    1 Introduction to Bioinformatics
    2. A Mathematica Primer for Bioinformaticians
    3. Statistics for Genomic Analysis
    4. Genomic Sequences
    5. Databases
    6. Transcriptomics
    7. Proteomics
    8. Metabolomics
    9. Systems Biology
    10. Networks
    11. Time Series Analysis
    12. Omics Integration and Systems Medicine
    13. Bioinformatics Development with Mathematica.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Carmen Molina-París, Grant Lythe, editors.
    Summary: The purpose of this book is to present current mathematical and computational models that are used to describe and characterise the immunology of T cells. The reader will be exposed to a variety of tools/methods that go hand-in-hand with the T cell-mediated immunological process that is being modelled. We aim in the proposed book to emphasise the role that mathematical (or computational) modelling has already played in Immunology. Each chapter will provide an example of the contribution of mathematics to T cell immunology under one of the following four headings: i) Generation of hypotheses, ii) Quantification of immunological processes, iii) Definition of observables to measure given an experimental objective, iv) reconciling disparate (or even conflicting) experimental results.

    Contents:
    Cytokine receptor signaling and CD4/CD8 lineage choice during T cell development in the thymus
    An agent-based model of T helper cell fate decisions in the thymus
    Modelling naive T cell homeostasis
    Mechanistic models of CD4 T cell homeostasis and reconstitution in health and disease
    Section 1MODELING THE DYNAMICS OF CD4+ T CELLS IN HIV- 1 INFECTION
    Modelling the response to Interleukin-7 therapy in HIV-infected patients
    Modeling immunopathology during persistent viral infections
    Delay in differentiation may suggest division of labour in models for CD8+ T cell differentiation
    Inferring differentiation order in adaptive immune responses from population level data
    Experimental and mathematical approaches to quantify recirculation kinetics of lymphocytes
    The public face and private lives of T cell receptor repertoires
    Population dynamics of immune repertoires
    Mathematical Modelling of T cell activation
    Agent-based model of heterogeneous T cell activation in vitro
    CTLA-4 mediated ligand trans-endocytosis: a stochastic model
    Automated gating and dimension reduction of high-dimensional cytometry data
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Marinella Cappelletti and Wim Fias.
    Contents:
    Chapter 1 - Neuronal foundations of human numerical representations / E. Eger
    Chapter 2 - What counts in estimation? The nature of the preverbal system / V. Karolis, B. Butterworth
    Chapter 3 - Core mathematical abilities in infants: Number and much more / M.D. de Hevia
    Chapter 4 - Cognitive and brain systems underlying early mathematical development / D.C. Geary, A.M. Moore
    Chapter 5 - Individual differences in children's mathematics achievement: The roles of symbolic numerical magnitude processing and domain-general cognitive functions / K. Vanbinst, B. De Smedt
    Chapter 6 - Similarity interference in learning and retrieving arithmetic facts / A. De Visscher, M.-P. Noël
    Chapter 7 - Memory and cognitive control circuits in mathematical cognition and learning / V. Menon
    Chapter 8 - On the ordinality of numbers: A review of neural and behavioral studies / I.M. Lyons, S.E. Vogel, D. Ansari
    Chapter 9 - On the instability and constraints of the interaction between number representation and spatial attention in healthy humans: A concise review of the literature and new experimental evidence / E. Fattorini, M. Pinto, S. Merola, M. D?Onofrio, F. Doricchi
    Chapter 10 - Age-related changes in strategic variations during arithmetic problem solving: The role of executive control / T. Hinault, P. Lemaire
    Chapter 11 - Subtypes and comorbidity in mathematical learning disabilities: Multidimensional study of verbal and visual memory processes is key to understanding / D. Szűcs
    Chapter 12 - Neurocognitive accounts of developmental dyscalculia and its remediation / T. Iuculano
    Chapter 13 - Approximate numerical abilities and mathematics: Insight from correlational and experimental training studies / D.C. Hyde, I. Berteletti, Y. Mou
    Chapter 14 - Brain stimulation, mathematical, and numerical training: Contribution of core and noncore skills / C.Y. Looi, R. Cohen Kadosh
    Index
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Matthias Dehmer, Frank Emmert-Streib, Zengqiang Chen, Xueliang Li, and Yongtang Shi.
    Contents:
    Entropy and Renormalization in Chaotic Visibility Graphs / Bartolo Luque, Fernando Javier Ballesteros, Alberto Robledo, Lucas Lacasa
    Generalized Entropies of Complex and Random Networks / Vladimir Gudkov
    Information Flow and Entropy Production on Bayesian Networks / Sosuke Ito, Takahiro Sagawa
    Entropy, Counting, and Fractional Chromatic Number / Seyed Saeed Changiz Rezaei
    Graph Entropy: Recent Results and Perspectives / Xueliang Li, Meiqin Wei
    Statistical Methods in Graphs: Parameter Estimation, Model Selection, and Hypothesis Test / Suzana de Siqueira Santos, Daniel Yasumasa Takahashi, Joao Ricardo Sato, Carlos Eduardo Ferreira, Andre Fujita
    Graph Entropies in Texture Segmentation of Images / Martin Welk
    Information Content Measures and Prediction of Physical Entropy of Organic Compounds / Chandan Raychaudhury, Debnath Pal
    Application of Graph Entropy for Knowledge Discovery and Data Mining in Bibliometric Data / Andre Calero Valdez, Matthias Dehmer, Andreas Holzinger.
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Stefano Ramat, Aasef G. Shaikh.
    Summary: Mathematical Modelling in Motor Neuroscience: State of the Art and Translation to the Clinic, Gaze Orienting Mechanisms and Disease, Volume 249, the latest release in the Progress in Brain Research series, highlights new advances in the field, with this new volume presenting interesting chapters on a variety of topics, including Sequential Bayesian updating, Maps and Sensorimotor Transformations for Eye-Head Gaze Shifts: Role of the Midbrain Superior Colliculus, Modeling Gaze Position-Dependent Opsoclonus, Eye Position-Dependent Opsoclonus in Mild Traumatic Brain Injury, Saccades in Parkinson's disease -- hypometric, slow, and maladaptive, Brainstem Neural Circuits for Fixation and Generation of Saccadic Eye Movements, and much more.

    Contents:
    Section I: Didactic : Modeling: 1. Sequential Bayesian updating as a model for human perception / Stefan Glasauer
    2. Maps and sensorimotor transformations for eye-head gaze shifts: Role of the midbrain superior colliculus / A. John van Opstal, Bahadir Kasap
    3. Modeling gaze position-dependent opsoclonus / Lance M. Optican, Janet C. Rucker, John-Ross Rizzo, Todd E. Hudson. Section II: Didactic : Translational: 4. Eye position-dependent opsoclonus in mild traumatic brain injury / John-Ross Rizzo, Todd E. Hudson, Alexandra J. Sequeira, Weiwei Dai, Yash Chaudhry, John Martone, David S. Zee, Lance M. Optican, Laura J. Balcer, Steven L. Galetta, Janet C. Rucker. Section III: Research : Saccades: 5. Saccades in Parkinson's disease : hypometric, slow, and maladaptive / Aasef G. Shaikh, Fatema F. Ghasia
    6. Brainstem neural circuits for fixation and generation of saccadic eye movements / Yoshikazu Shinoda, Mayu Takahashi, Yuriko Sugiuchi
    7. Morphological and electrophysiological characteristics of the commissural system in the superior colliculi for control of eye movements / Mayu Takahashi
    8. Potassium channels in omnipause neurons / Ümit S. Mayadali, Karoline Lienbacher, Michael Mustari, Michael Strupp, Anja K.E. Horn
    9. The cerebellum improves the precision of antisaccades by a latency-duration trade-off / Pietro Piu, Elena Pretegiani, Francesca Rosini, Valeria Serchi, Domenica Zaino, Tommaso Chiantini, Alessandra Rufa
    10. Saccade variability in healthy subjects and cerebellar patients / Thomas Eggert, Andreas Straube
    11. Electrical stimulation in a spiking neural network model of monkey superior colliculus / A. John van Opstal, Bahadir Kasap. Section IV: Research : Adaptation: 12. A neuronal process for adaptive control of primate saccadic system / Yoshiko Kojima
    13. A unified computational framework for visual attention dynamics / Dario Zanca, Marco Gori, Alessandra Rufa
    14. Improving the repeatability of two-rate model parameter estimations by using autoencoder networks / Murat C. Ozdemir, Thomas Eggert, Andreas Straube. Section V: Research : Nystagmus: 15. Rebound nystagmus, a window into the oculomotor integrator / Jorge Otero-Millan, Ayse I. Colpak, Amir Kheradmand, David S. Zee
    16. Central positional nystagmus: Characteristics and model-based explanations / Jeong-Yoon Choi, Ji-Soo Kim
    17. Modulation of acquired monocular pendular nystagmus in multiple sclerosis: A modeling approach / Ileok Jung, Sung-Hee Kim, Hyo-Jung Kim, Jeong-Yoon Choi, Ji-Soo Kim
    18. Fixation instability in amblyopia: Oculomotor disease biomarkers predictive of treatment effectiveness / Matteo Scaramuzzi, Jordan Murray, Jorge Otero-Millan, Paolo Nucci, Aasef G. Shaikh, Fatema F. Ghasia. Section VI: Research : Dystonia: 19. What can kinematic studies tell us about the mechanisms of dystonia? / Anna Sadnicka, Joseph Galea, Mark J. Edwards
    20. Implications of asymmetric neural activity patterns in the basal ganglia outflow in the integrative neural network model for cervical dystonia / Alexey Sedov, Ulia Semenova, Svetlana Usova, Alexey Tomskiy, John Douglas Crawford, Hyder A. Jinnah, Aasef G. Shaikh
    21. A motor control model of task-specific dystonia and its rehabilitation / Anna Sadnicka, Jaume Rosset-Llobet
    22. Tremor in chronic inflammatory demyelinating polyneuropathy: Proof of unifying network model for dystonia / Nataliya Pyatka, Alexey Sedov, Benjamin L. Walter, Hyder A. Jinnah, Aasef G. Shaikh. Section VII: Research : Parkinson's disease: 23. Oculomotor effects of medical and surgical treatments of Parkinson's disease / Salil Patel, James J. Fitzgerald, Chrystalina A. Antoniades
    24. Vestibular heading perception in Parkinson's disease / Sinem Balta Beylergil, Sarah Ozinga, Mark F. Walker, Cameron C. McIntyre, Aasef G. Shaikh
    25. A new approach for estimation of spiketrain patterns in basal ganglia / Vladislav Myrov, Alexey Sedov, Alexey Tomskiy, Ludmila Myrova, Elena Belova. Section VIII: Research : Others: 26. A model-based study of internuclear ophthalmoparesis and ocular-motor fatigue in multiple sclerosis / Jonathan B. Jacobs, Clara Chisari, Margaret M. Skelly, Mark F. Walker, Alessandro Serra
    27. Central positional vertigo : a clinical-imaging study / Emiliano De Schutter, Zachariah O. Adham, Jorge C. Kattah
    28. Eye-hand re-coordination: A pilot investigation of gaze and reach biofeedback in chronic stroke / John-Ross Rizzo, Mahya Beheshti, Azadeh Shafieesabet, James Fung, Maryam Hosseini, Janet C. Rucker, Lawrence H. Snyder, Todd E. Hudson
    29. Kinematics and the neurophysiological study of visually-guided eye movements / Laurent Goffart
    30. Deficient head motor control in functional dizziness : experimental evidence of central sensory-motor dysfunction in persistent physical symptoms / Nadine Lehnen, Lena Schröder, Peter Henningsen, Stefan Glasauer, Cecilia Ramaioli.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2019
  • Digital
    Richard J. Morris, editor.
    Summary: Progress in plant biology relies on the quantification, analysis and mathematical modeling of data over different time and length scales. This book describes common mathematical and computational approaches as well as some carefully chosen case studies that demonstrate the use of these techniques to solve problems at the forefront of plant biology. Each chapter is written by an expert in field with the goal of conveying concepts whilst at the same time providing sufficient background and links to available software for readers to rapidly build their own models and run their own simulations. This book is aimed at postgraduate students and researchers working the field of plant systems biology and synthetic biology, but will also be a useful reference for anyone wanting to get into quantitative plant biology.

    Contents:
    Physical models of plant morphogenesis
    Fluid transport in plants
    Modelling ion channels
    Modelling the plant microtubule cytoskeleton
    Bridging scales from protein function to whole-plant water relations with the OnGuard platform
    Single-cell approaches for understanding morphogenesis using computational morphodynamics
    Modeling plant tissue growth and cell division
    Modeling plant development with l-systems
    Flowering time as a model trait to bridge proximate and evolutionary questions
    All but sleeping? Consequences of soil seed banks on neutral and selective diversity in plant species.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Leszek Pstras and Jacek Waniewski.
    Summary: Beginning with an introduction to kidney function, renal replacement therapies, and an overview of clinical problems associated with haemodialysis, this book explores the principles of the short-term baroreflex regulation of the cardiovascular system and the mechanisms of water and solute transport across the human body from a mathematical model perspective. It synthesizes theoretical physiological concepts and practical aspects of mathematical modelling needed for simulation and quantitative analysis of the haemodynamic response to dialysis therapy. Including an up-to-date review of the literature concerning the modelled physiological mechanisms and processes, the book serves both as an overview of transport and regulatory mechanisms related to the cardiovascular system and body fluids and as a useful reference for the study and development of mathematical models of dynamic physiological processes. Mathematical Modelling of Haemodialysis: Cardiovascular Response, Body Fluid Shifts, and Solute Kinetics is intended for researchers and graduate students in biomedical engineering, physiology, or medicine interested in mathematical modelling of cardiovascular dynamics and fluid and solute transport across the human body, both under physiological conditions and during haemodialysis therapy.

    Contents:
    Introduction to renal replacement therapies and mathematical modelling in physiology
    Mathematical modelling in physiology
    Model structure, equations and parameters
    Model analysis and validation
    Simulation results and model outcomes
    Conclusions, challenges and future research directions.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Alex Fok, Hooi Pin Chew.
    Summary: This book presents a mechanistic approach--mathematical modeling--for carrying out dental materials research. This approach allows researchers to go beyond the null hypothesis and obtain a solution that is more general and therefore predictive for conditions other than those considered in a study. Hence it can be used either on its own or to complement the commonly used statistical approach. Through a series of practical problems with wide-ranging application, the reader will be guided on: How to construct a mathematical model for the behavior of dental materials by making informed assumptions of the physical, chemical, or mechanical situation How to simplify the model by making suitable simplifications How to calibrate the model by calculating the values of key parameters using experimental results How to refine the model when there are discrepancies between predictions and experiments Only elementary calculus is required to follow the examples and all the problems can be solved by using MS Excel© spreadsheets. This is an ideal book for dental materials researchers without a strong mathematical background who are interested in applying a more mechanistic approach to their research to give deeper insight into the problem at hand. Advance praise for Mathematical Models for Dental Materials Research: "This is a nice addition for research students on how to conduct their work and how to manage data analysis. It brings together a number of important aspects of dental materials investigations which has been missing in the literature. The practical examples make it much easier to understand."--Michael F. Burrow, Clinical Professor in Prosthodontics, The University of Hong Kong "The great strengths of this volume are the real world examples of dental materials research in the successive chapters. In turn, this is an outcome of the outstanding expertise of both authors. I warmly recommend this book to the dental biomaterials community worldwide." - David C. Watts, Professor of Biomaterials Science, University of Manchester, UK.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1
    Systematic Errors in Longitudinal Measurements
    Chapter 2
    Endodontic Treatment and Vertical Root Fracture
    Chapter 3
    Debonding of Resin Composite Restorations
    Chapter 4
    Attenuation of Curing Light through Resin Composite Restorations
    Chapter 5
    Release of Ions or Molecules from Dental Restorations
    Chapter 6
    Heat Generated from Dental Resin Composites during Curing
    Chapter 7
    Mechanical Failure of Dental Restorations
    The Weakest-Link Theory
    Chapter 8
    Stability of Dental Implants
    Chapter 9
    Kinetics of Photo-polymerization
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Stanislaw Brzychczy, Roman R. Poznanski.
    Summary: Mathematical Neuroscience is a book for mathematical biologists seeking to discover the complexities of brain dynamics in an integrative way. It is the first research monograph devoted exclusively to the theory and methods of nonlinear analysis of infinite systems based on functional analysis techniques arising in modern mathematics. Neural models that describe the spatio-temporal evolution of coarse-grained variables-such as synaptic or firing rate activity in populations of neurons -and often take the form of integro-differential equations would not normally reflect an integrative approach. This book examines the solvability of infinite systems of reaction diffusion type equations in partially ordered abstract spaces. It considers various methods and techniques of nonlinear analysis, including comparison theorems, monotone iterative techniques, a truncation method, and topological fixed point methods. Infinite systems of such equations play a crucial role in the integrative aspects of neuroscience modeling. The first focused introduction to the use of nonlinear analysis with an infinite dimensional approach to theoretical neuroscience. Combines functional analysis techniques with nonlinear dynamical systems applied to the study of the brain. Introduces powerful mathematical techniques to manage the dynamics and challenges of infinite systems of equations applied to neuroscience modeling.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital/Print
    by Arne Fisher ; translated from the Danish by Charlotte Dickson and William Boynge ; with introductory notes by M.C. Rorty and F.W. Frankland... v.1-.
    Digital Access Google Books 1922-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    A175 .F53d 1922
    1
  • Digital
    Fabrizio Gabbiani, Steven James Cox.
    Summary: This book presents a comprehensive introduction to mathematical and computational methods used in neuroscience to describe and model neural components of the brain from ion channels to single neurons, neural networks and their relation to behavior. The book contains more than 200 figures generated using Matlab code available to the student and scholar. Mathematical concepts are introduced hand in hand with neuroscience, emphasizing the connection between experimental results and theory.

    Contents:
    Passive isopotential cell
    Differential equations
    Active isopotential cell
    Quasi-active isopotential cell
    Passive cable
    Fourier series and transforms
    Passive dendritic tree
    Active dendritic tree
    Extracellular potential
    Reduced single neuron models
    Probability and random variables
    Synaptic transmission and quantal release
    Neuronal calcium signaling
    Neurovascular coupling, the BOLD signals and MRI
    Singular value decomposition and applications
    Quantification of spike train variability
    Stochastic processes
    Membrane noise
    Power and cross spectra
    Natural light signals and phototransduction
    Firing rate codes and early vision
    Models of simple and complex cells
    Models of motion detection
    Stochastic estimation theory
    Reverse-correlation and spike train decoding
    Signal detection theory
    Relating neuronal responses and psychophysics
    Population codes
    Neuronal networks
    Solutions to selected exercises.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Hozefa Ebrahim, David Ashton-Cleary.
    Contents:
    Data analysis and medical statistics / Andrew Biffen and David Ashton-Cleary
    Basic physics and electronics / Emma Foster and Hozefa Ebrahim
    Heat, temperature and humidity / Hozefa Ebrahim and Sean Chadwick
    Behaviour of fluids / Hozefa Ebrahim, Sunita Balla and James Rudge
    Gas measurement and supply / Jonathon Paige
    Gas concentration measurement / Catriona Frankling
    Blood gas analysis / David Connor
    Vapours and vaporizers / Ed Copley
    Ventilators and breathing systems / Dan Shuttleworth and Nick Dodds
    The environment and safety / Lauren Weekes
    Blood pressure measurement / Laura Beard and David Ashton-Cleary
    Cardiac output monitoring / Hozefa Ebrahim and Alistair Burns
    Cardiac support equipment / Katie Ramm and Laura May
    Ultrasound and doppler / David Ashton-Cleary
    Atomic structure, radiation, imaging, and lasers / David Ashton-Cleary and Jumana Hussain
    Electro-biophysiology / Vijay Venkatesh and David Ashton-Cleary.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2019
  • Digital
    Summary: Covers the world's mathematical literature since 1940. Its Author Database identifies authors and possible variations of authors' names as listed in Mathematical Reviews.
    Digital Access Database
  • Digital
    Stormy Attaway.
    Summary: MATLAB has become the standard software tool for solving scientific and engineering problems due to its powerful built-in functions and its ability to program. Assuming no knowledge of programming, this book guides the reader through both programming and built-in functions to easily exploit MATLAB's extensive capabilities for tackling engineering problems. The book starts with programming concepts, such as variables, assignments, and selection statements, moves on to loops, and then solves problems using both the programming concept and the power of MATLAB. In-depth coverage is given to input/output, a topic fundamental to many engineering applications. The third edition of MATLAB: A Practical Introduction to Programming and Problem Solving has been updated to reflect the functionality of the current version of MATLAB. It features new and revised end-of-chapter exercises, stronger coverage of loops and vectorizing, and more engineering applications to help the reader learn this software tool in context. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Part 1 Introduction to Programming Using MATLAB
    Introduction to MATLAB
    Vectors and matrices
    Introduction to MATLAB programming
    Selection statements
    Loop statements and vectorizing code
    MATLAB programs
    String manipulation
    Data structures
    Part 2 Advanced Topics for Problem Solving With MATLAB
    Advanced file input and output
    Advanced functions
    Introduction to object-oriented programming and graphics
    Advanced plotting techniques
    Sights and sounds
    Advanced mathematics.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2016
  • Digital
    Pascal Wallisch, Michael E. Lusignan, Marc D. Benayoun, Tanya I. Baker, Adam S. Dickey, Nicholas G. Hatsopoulous.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Print
    im Auftrage der Universität Basel ; hrsg. von Jans Georg Wackernagel.
    Contents:
    1. Bd. 1460-1529
    2. Bd. 1532/33-1600/01
    3. Bd. 1601/02-1665/66
    4. Bd. 1666/67-1725/26
    5. Bd. 1726/27-1817/18.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: History - LC Classification (Downstairs)
    L183 .B29 1956
    1
  • Print
    Irvin D. Yalom & Marilyn Yalom.
    Summary: "A co-written project by Irvin and Marilyn Yalom, which describes their heartbreaking journey as a couple married 65 years facing the end of their long partnership. A longtime teacher and therapist on the subject of death anxiety, Dr. Yalom now confronts the loss of his wife and his own mortality. This book will offer wisdom from one of the foremost existential psychiatrists and illuminate the importance of relationships--friendship, family, and romantic--as we all age"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The vital box
    Becoming an invalid
    Awareness of evanescence
    Why don't we move to assisted living?
    Retirement : the precise moment of decision
    Setbacks and renewed hopes
    Staring at the sun, once again
    Whose death is this anyway?
    Facing endings
    Considering physician-assisted suicide
    A tense countdown to Thursday
    A complete surprise
    So now you know
    Death sentence
    Farewell to chemotherapy-and to hope
    From palliative care to hospice
    Hospice care
    A soothing illusion
    French books
    The end approaches
    Death arrives
    The after-death experience
    Life as an independent separate adult
    Home alone
    Sex and grief
    Unreality
    Numbness
    Help from Schopenhauer
    Denial revealed
    Stepping out
    Indecisiveness
    On reading my own work
    Seven advanced lesson on the therapy of grief
    My education continues
    Dear Marilyn.
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC339.52.Y35 A3 2021
    1
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Varies.
    Call number varies. Search for Matthew B. Rosenhaus lecture to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Varies.
    Call number varies. Search for Maudsley monographs to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Digital
    editors, Matthew L. Boulton, Robert B. Wallace.
    Summary: "The leading post-graduate reference-text spanning the fields of public health and preventive medicine"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access AccessMedicine 2022
  • Digital
    William C. Scarfe, Christos Angelopoulos, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I Fundamentals of CBCT
    Historical Perspectives on CBCT
    What Is CBCT and How Does It Work?
    Image Processing and Visualization Techniques
    Image Quality
    Part II CBCT in Daily Clinical Practice
    CBCT Use in Daily Practice
    Ethical and Medicolegal Issues Related to CBCT
    CBCT Quality Assurance
    Radiation Dose, Risks, and Protection in CBCT
    Part III Regional Maxillofacial Imaging
    The Skull
    The Jaws, Oral Cavity, and Nasopharynx
    Neck and Cervical Spine
    Anatomy of the Nose and Paranasal Sinuses
    The Upper Airway
    Temporal Bone
    Part IV Clinical Applications
    Cone Beam Computed Tomography and Maxillofacial Diagnosis
    Incidental Findings on CBCT
    Soft Tissue Hyperdensities
    Applications of CBCT in Orthodontics
    Orthodontic and Orthognathic Surgery Planning and Simulation Software
    Dental Implants
    Planning and Assessment of Bone Reconstruction for Dental Implants
    Endodontic Applications of CBCT
    Periodontal Disease
    CBCT and the Diagnosis of Temporomandibular Joint Disease
    CBCT Sialography
    Image-Guided Surgical Navigation
    CBCT-Based Image Guidance for Sinus and Skull Base Surgery
    Obstructive Sleep Apnea Hypopnea Syndrome
    Dental Impactions
    CBCT Imaging of Sinonasal Disease
    CBCT and Additive Manufacturing Technology.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Peter Brennan, Henning Schliephake, G.E. Ghali, Luke Cascarini.
    Summary: Now in full color, Maxillofacial Surgery, 3rd Edition covers the entire specialty of maxillofacial surgery, including craniofacial deformity, oral surgery, trauma, and oncology. Unlike other OMFS texts where the contributors are singly boarded in oral surgery, this richly illustrated text boasts OMFS contributors who are all dual boarded in both oral surgery and medicine. Thoroughly updated with evidence-based content, it addresses the advances in technology and procedures providing oral and maxillofacial surgeons with new and exciting treatment options. And with print and digital formats, it is easy to use in any setting.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Akhilesh Kumar Singh, Naresh Kumar Sharma, editors.
    Summary: This book amalgamates the basic concepts in understanding the science of maxillofacial skeleton with the clinical skills required towards managing complex facial fractures. The book is presented in two sections. The first section introduces the readers with the introduction to maxillofacial trauma, biomechanics of maxillofacial skeleton, the principle of internal fixation, medicolegal aspects of maxillofacial trauma, and preoperative workup which provides a brief outline towards an understanding of the basic concepts about the anatomy and physiology of facial skeleton. The second section is oriented clinically with case-based discussions that start from the emergency management of facial trauma including the recent protocols of basic life support and advanced trauma life support, emergency airway management followed by definitive management guidelines in stabilizing and fixing the fractured facial bones. The clinical cases have been discussed in a way to provide practical knowledge and skills to the postgraduate students and clinicians who will enhance their knowledge and facilitate the decision-making process. This book would be a valuable read for clinicians in oral & maxillofacial surgery, ENT surgery, plastic surgery and allied trauma specialists dealing with maxillofacial trauma.

    Contents:
    Introduction to Craniomaxillofacial trauma
    Surgical Anatomy of the Face
    Biomechanics of Maxillofacial region
    Principles of Osteosynthesis
    Basic introduction to Internal Fixation devices and armamentarium
    Medicolegal aspects in Maxillofacial Trauma
    Perioperative and Anaesthetic considerations in Maxillofacial Trauma
    Emergency management of trauma patient and general considerations
    Soft tissue injuries
    Dentoalveolar fractures
    Introduction to Mandibular fractures
    Symphysis, Parasymphysis & Body Fractures
    Angle & Ramus fractures
    Condylar fractures
    Introduction to Mid face fractures
    Lefort fractures
    Zygomaticomaxillary complex fractures
    Naso-orbito-ethmoidal complex fractures
    Orbital fractures
    Frontal sinus wall fractures
    Panfacial Trauma
    Animal Bite, Firearm and Ballistic Injuries
    Complications in maxillofacial trauma
    Rehabilitation.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Deborah Alma Falta, MPH, PhD.
    Summary: "Maxwell's Environmental Health takes a unique approach to presenting Environmental Health. Rather than organizing topics around the traditional regulatory fields (air and water pollution, hazardous wastes, radiation, etc.), this book is structured around the choices we make as individuals and societies that result in environmental health hazards. Hence the subtitle: "How We Live in the World"-- Provided by publisher
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    David R. Holmes Jr., Robert L. Frye, Paul A. Friedman, Donald J Hagler, Thomas M. Munger, Erik L. Ritman, editors.
    Summary: This book explores the history of the Mayo Clinic Cardiac Catheterization Laboratory from 1940 to present day. It examines the life and journey of the Cardiac Catheterization Lab and its ultimate success in implementing the vision of the Mayo philosophy of emphasizing collaboration between lab-based scientists and clinical health care professionals to bring innovation to the clinical practice and lead landmark changes in the practice of medicine profoundly enhancing what we can offer to patients and society alike. The book is divided into decades, with separate sections in each decade on key cardiology topics such as congenital heart disease, coronary heart disease, hemodynamics, pacing, and electrophysiology (EP). Chapters will highlight training, advances, new procedures, new technologies, and fundamental changes to the field throughout the decades, attributed to the work done by Cath lab personnel. Chapters also identify the problems faced, the unmet clinical needs of patients and society, problems solved, and things learned and transmitted into the clinical arena along the way. The Mayo Clinic Cardiac Catheterization Laboratory will be a valuable resource for health care professionals, clinicians, scientists, innovators, administrators, and small and large device manufacturing companies as well as historians and past and present patients.

    Contents:
    Section 1: 1940
    1960
    Section 2. 1960
    Section 3. 1970
    Section 4. 1980
    Section 5. 1990
    Section 6. 2000
    Section 7. 2010
    Section 8. Current Developments and Future Directions.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    editor-in-Chief, Christopher M. Wittich
    Summary: The Mayo Clinic Internal Medicine Board Review, Twelfth Edition, is the result of the dedicated efforts of Mayo Clinic physicians in multiple specialties whose primary mission is to put the needs of the patient first. The field of internal medicine is constantly changing as science is advanced, and this textbook was written to provide readers with the essential elements for the practice of internal medicine. Readers preparing for the American Board of Internal Medicine Certification and Maintenance of Certification examinations will find the textbook comprehensive and easy to study. Additionally, readers who want a reference or a general knowledge review in internal medicine will find this textbook an important addition to their medical library. The current edition builds on years of knowledge, refinement, and expertise from the Department of Medicine. Chapters have been revised to include the most up-to-date knowledge for the practice of medicine. Two entirely new chapters on physician well-being and hospital internal medicine emphasize the importance of those areas to the practice of internal medicine. All the authors are Mayo Clinic experts primarily focused on caring for patients, and the editors are experienced internists who are expert diagnosticians and medical educators.
    Digital Access Oxford 2020
  • Digital
    Eduardo E. Benarroch, Jeremy K. Cutsforth-Gregory, Kelly D. Flemming.
    Contents:
    Integrated neuroscience for the clinician
    Neuroembryology and development of the nervous system
    Anatomical localization
    Neurocytology and pathologic reactions of the nervous system
    Neurophysiology
    Neurochemistry
    Sensory system
    Motor system
    Autonomic nervous system
    Emotion system
    Consciousness system
    Ventricular and cerebrospinal fluid system
    Vascular system
    Peripheral level
    Spinal level
    Posterior fossa level : brainstem and cranial nerve nuclei
    Posterior fossa level : cerebellar, auditory, and vestibular systems
    Diencephalon : thalamus, hypothalamus, and visual system
    Supratentorial level : cerebral hemisphe.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    Stephen J. Swensen, Tait D. Shanafelt.
    Contents:
    Section I: Foundation. Introduction ; Consequences of Professional Burnout ; Drivers of Burnout and Engagement ; The Business Case ; Quality Shortfalls From Health Care Waste: A Unifying Root Cause of Burnout
    Section II: Strategy. The Blueprint for Cultivating Esprit de Corps ; Ideal Work Elements ; Getting Senior Leadership on Board ; Assessment
    Section III: Execution.The Three Action Sets of the Intervention Triad: Evidence-based Strategies for Reducing Burnout and Promoting Esprit de Corps ; Agency Action Set: Introduction ; Agency Ideal Work Element: Partnership ; Agency Ideal Work Element: Trust and Respect ; Agency Ideal Work Element: Control and Flexibility ; Agency Action: Measuring Leader Behaviors ; Agency Action: Removing Pebbles ; Agency Action: Introducing Control and Flexibility ; Agency Action: Creating a Values Alignment Compact ; Coherence Action Set: Introduction ; Coherence Ideal Work Element: Professional Development and Mentorship ; Coherence Ideal Work Element: Fairness and Equity ; Coherence Ideal Work Element: Safety ; Coherence Action: Selecting and Developing Leaders ; Coherence Action: Improving Practice Efficiency ; Coherence Action: Establishing Fair and Just Accountability ; Coherence Action: Forming Safe Havens ; Camaraderie Action Set: Introduction ; Camaraderie Ideal Work Element: Community at Work and Camaraderie ; Camaraderie Ideal Work Element: Intrinsic Motivation and Rewards ; Camaraderie Action: Cultivating Community and Commensality ; Camaraderie Action: Optimizing Rewards, Recognition, and Appreciation ; Camaraderie Action: Fostering Boundarylessness ; Applying the Action Sets to Address the Unique Needs of Medical Students, Residents, and Fellows ; Nurturing Well-Being ; Section IV: The Journey. Summary ; Conclusion.
    Digital Access Oxford 2020
  • Digital
    Joseph S. Sanfilippo, MD, MBA, Professor of Obstetrics, Gynecology & Reproductive Sciences, University of Pittsburgh School of Medicine, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, Eric J. Bieber, MD, MSHCM, President and Chief Executive Officer, Rochester Regional Health, Clinical Professor of Health Sciences, Rochester Institiute of Techology, Rochester, New York, David Javitch, PHD, President, Javitch Associates, Adjuct Assistant Professor, Harvard T.H. Chan School of Public Health, Boston, Massachusetts, Richard B. Siegrist, Jr., MS, MBA, CPA, Director of Innovation and Entrepreseneurship, Co-Director, Health Care Management Program, Harvard T.H. Chan School of Public Health, Boston, Massaachusetts.
    Contents:
    Cost accounting : the foundation of management control / Richard Siegrist
    Management control structure and process / Richard Siegrist
    The next generation of information technology in the health care industry / John B. Foley and Eric J. Bieber
    Leadership / David Javitch
    Ethics and the business of the health care professional / S. Smith and Joseph Sanfilippo
    Applied business law / S. Smith and Joseph Sanfilippo
    Quality improvement in healthcare / Eric J. Bieber and William Annable
    Strategic planning creating a culture of quality and safety / Eric J. Bieber and Jennifer Radin
    Organizational development / David Javitch
    Motivation / David Javitch
    Negotiations / David Javitch
    Communication skills / Shruti Malik and Joseph Sanfilippo
    Competitive marketing / Linda MacCracken and Richard Siegrist
    The patient experience / Richard Siegrist
    The modern hospital/physician relationship / Eric J. Bieber and Elizabeth Hammack
    Entrepreneurship in health care / Richard Siegrist
    Risk management / Joseph Sanfilippo and S. Smith
    Extended case studies / David Javitch.
    Digital Access Oxford [2016]
  • Print
    Macnow, Alexander Stone.
    Summary: "Kaplan's MCAT Behavioral Sciences Review 2023-2024 offers an expert study plan, detailed subject review, and hundreds of online and in-book practice questions -- all authored by the experts behind the MCAT prep course that has helped more people get into medical school than all other major courses combined." -- Amazon.com.

    Contents:
    Biology and behavior
    Sensation and perception
    Learning and memory
    Cognition, consciousness, and language
    Motivation, emotion, and stress
    Identity and personality
    Psychological disorders
    Social processes, attitudes, and behavior
    Social interaction
    Social thinking
    Social structure and demographics
    Social stratification.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    R838.5 .K37 2022 [v. 1]
    2
  • Print
    edited by Alexander Stone Macnow.
    Summary: "Kaplan's MCAT Biochemistry Review 2023-2024 offers an expert study plan, detailed subject review, and hundreds of online and in-book practice questions -- all authored by the experts behind the MCAT prep course that has helped more people get into medical school than all other major courses combined." -- Amazon.com.

    Contents:
    Amino acids, peptides, and proteins
    Enzymes
    Nonenzymatic protein function and protein analysis
    Carbohydrate structure and function
    Lipid structure and function
    DNA and biotechnology
    RNA and the genetic code
    Biological membranes
    Carbohydrate metabolism I: Glycolysis, glycogen, gluconeogenesis, and the pentose phosphate pathway
    Carbohydrate metabolism II: Aerobic respiration
    Lipid and amino acid metabolism
    Bioenergetics and regulation of metabolism.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    R838.5 .K37 2022 [v. 2]
    2
  • Print
    Kaplan Test Prep.
    Summary: "Kaplan's MCAT Biology Review 2023-2024 offers an expert study plan, detailed subject review, and hundreds of online and in-book practice questions -- all authored by the experts behind the MCAT prep course that has helped more people get into medical school than all other major courses combined." -- Amazon.com.

    Contents:
    The cell
    Reproduction
    Embryogenesis and development
    The nervous system
    The endocrine system
    The respiratory system
    The cardiovascular system
    The immune system
    The digestive system
    Homeostasis
    The musculoskeletal system
    Genetics and evolution.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    R838.5 .K37 2022 [v. 3]
    2
  • Print
    edited by Alexander Stone Macnow, MD.
    Summary: "Kaplan's MCAT General Chemistry Review 2023-2024 offers an expert study plan, detailed subject review, and hundreds of online and in-book practice questions -- all authored by the experts behind the MCAT prep course that has helped more people get into medical school than all other major courses combined." -- Amazon.com summary.

    Contents:
    Atomic structure
    The periodic table
    Bonding and chemical interactions
    Compounds and stoichiometry
    Chemical kinetics
    Equilibrium
    Thermochemistry
    The gas phase
    Solutions
    Acids and bases
    Oxidation-reduction reactions
    Electrochemistry.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    R838.5 .K37 2022 [v. 5]
    2
  • Print
    edited by Alexander Stone Macnow, MD.
    Summary: "Kaplan's MCAT Organic Chemistry Review 2023-2024 offers an expert study plan, detailed subject review, and hundreds of online and in-book practice questions -- all authored by the experts behind the MCAT prep course that has helped more people get into medical school than all other major courses combined." -- Amazon.com.

    Contents:
    Nomenclature
    Isomers
    Bonding
    Analyzing organic reactions
    Alcohols
    Aldehydes and ketones I: Electrophilicity and oxidation-reduction
    Aldehydes and ketones II: Enolates
    Carboxylic acids
    Carboxylic acid derivatives
    Nitrogen- and Phosphorus-containing compounds
    Spectroscopy
    Separations and purifications.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    R838.5 .K37 2022 [v. 6]
    2
  • Print
    edited by Alexander Stone Macnow ; in partnership with Scientific American.
    Summary: "Kaplan's MCAT Physics and Math Review 2023-2024 offers an expert study plan, detailed subject review, and hundreds of online and in-book practice questions -- all authored by the experts behind the MCAT prep course that has helped more people get into medical school than all other major courses combined." -- Amazon.com.

    Contents:
    Kinematics and dynamics
    Work and energy
    Thermodynamics
    Fluids
    Electrostatics and magnetism
    Circuits
    Waves and sound
    Light and optics
    Atomic and nuclear phenomena
    Mathematics
    Reasoning about the design and execution of research
    Data-based and statistical reasoning.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    R838.5 .K37 2022 [v. 7]
    2
  • Print
    Summary: "Portable quicksheets that visually emphasize the most important information."-- Set container
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    R838.5 .K37 2022 [v. 8]
    2
  • Digital
    Alan B. Carr, DMD, MS, David T. Brown, DDS, MS.
    Contents:
    Partially edentulous epidemiology, physiology, and terminology
    Considerations for managing partial tooth loss : tooth replacements from the patient perspective
    Classification of partially edentulous arches
    Biomechanics of removable partial dentures
    Major and minor connectors
    Rests and rest seats
    Direct retainers
    Indirect retainers
    Denture base considerations
    Principles of removable partial denture design
    Surveying
    Considerations for the use of dental implants with removable partial dentures
    Diagnosis and treatment planning
    Preparation of the mouth for removable partial dentures
    Preparation of abutment teeth
    Impression materials and procedures for removable partial dentures
    Support for the distal extension denture base
    Occlusal relationships for removable partial dentures
    Laboratory procedures
    Work authorizations for removable partial dentures
    Initial placement, adjustment, and servicing of the removable partial denture
    Relining and rebasing the removable partial denture
    Repairs and additions to removable partial dentures
    Interim removable partial dentures
    Removable partial denture considerations in maxillofacial prosthetics.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2016
  • Digital
    [edited by] Jeffrey A. Dean ; associate editors, James E. Jones, Brian J. Sanders, LaQuia A. Walker Vinson, Juan Fernando Yepes ; video producer, Allison C. Scully.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2022
  • Digital
    [edited by] Brian Carpenter, Michelle L. Butterworth, William D. Fishco, John T. Marcoux, Daniel F. Vickers.
    Summary: "Newly reorganized and streamlined, the fifth edition of McGlamry's Foot and Ankle Surgery remains the definitive text for today's podiatrist, foot and ankle surgeon, resident, or student, whether for everyday reference or preparing for certification exams. All clinical chapters have been formatted for ease of use, with clearly written, highly illustrated coverage of traditional as well as new and emerging techniques. Covering topics from perioperative management to postoperative complications, this must-have reference helps you master the full range of foot and ankle surgeries and procedures"-- Publisher's website.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2022
  • Digital
    [edited by] Eduardo Calonje MD, DipRCPath, Thomas Brenn MD, PhD, FRCPath, Alexander J. Lazar MD, PhD and Steven D. Billings MD.
    Summary: "Comprehensive and lavishly illustrated, McKee's Pathology of the Skin, 5th Edition, is your reference of choice for up-to-date, authoritative information on dermatopathology. You'll find clinical guidance from internationally renowned experts along with details on etiology, pathogenesis, histopathology, and differential diagnosis - making this unique reference unparalleled in its wealth of clinical and histopathological material."--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    The structure and function of skin
    Specialized techniques in dermatopathology
    Disorders of keratinization
    Inherited and autoimmune subepidermal blistering diseases
    Acantholytic disorders
    Spongiotic, psoriasiform and pustular dermatoses
    Lichenoid and interface dermatitis
    Superficial and deep perivascular inflammatory dermatoses
    Granulomatous, necrobiotic and perforating dermatoses
    Inflammatory diseases of the subcutaneous fat
    Diseases of the oral mucosa
    Diseases of the anogenital skin
    Degenerative and metabolic diseases
    Cutaneous adverse reactions to drugs
    Neutrophilic and eosinophilic dermatoses
    Vascular diseases
    Idiopathic connective tissue disorders
    Infectious diseases of the skin
    Human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) and acquired immunodeficiency syndrome (aids)-associated cutaneous diseases
    Disorders of pigmentation
    Diseases of collagen and elastic tissue
    Diseases of the hair
    Diseases of the nails
    Tumors of the surface epithelium
    Melanocytic nevi
    Melanoma
    Tumors of the conjunctiva
    Sentinel lymph node biopsies
    Cutaneous lymphoproliferative diseases and related disorders
    Cutaneous metastases and Paget's disease of the skin
    Tumors of the hair follicle
    Tumors and related lesions of the sebaceous glands
    Tumors of the sweat glands
    Cutaneous cysts
    Connective tissue tumors
    Comparative dermatopathology.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2020
  • Digital
    by Ethan Rasiel.
    Summary: In today's fast-paced world, it's tough to find the time to read. But with Joosr guides, you can get the key insights from bestselling non-fiction titles in less than 20 minutes. Whether you want to gain knowledge on the go or find the books you'll love, Joosr's brief and accessible eBook summaries fit into your life. Find out more at joosr.com. What would you give to have the skills of a world-renowned consultant to help you address your business problems each and every day? Discover how you can translate the techniques of the world's leading business consultancy into meaningful practices that you can employ in your business or within your current role. The McKinsey Way is a look into the minds and practices of the most celebrated and respected consultancy in the game. By highlighting the tactics used by McKinsey consultants on every project, the book informs businessmen and women of techniques and strategies they can use on a daily basis to be more successful in their business roles. You will learn: ʺ How to become your boss's go to problem solver ʺ How to impress your audience when presenting informative data ʺ How maintaining a positive, adventurous attitude can make your job easier.
    Digital Access eBook Comp Acad 2016
  • Digital
    Bari M. Logan, Patricia A. Reynolds, Scott Rice ; original photography by Ralph T. Hutchings.
    Contents:
    Skull, skull bone articulations and teeth
    Cervical vetebrae and neck
    Face, orbit and eye
    Nose, oral cavity, pharynx, ear and larynx
    Cranial cavity and brain
    Clinical imaging.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2017
  • Digital
    Bari M. Logan, David J. Bowden ; original photography by Ralph T. Hutchings ; regional anaesthesia by Anand M. Sardesai, Sachin Daivajna, A.H.N. Robinson.
    Summary: McMinn s Color Atlas of Lower Limb Anatomy is the ideal study aid or trusted visual reference for the range of students and practitioners who require a detailed understanding of the anatomy of the foot, ankle and lower limb. It provides you with the perfect grasp of all the important lower limb structures that are likely to be encountered in practice or in the anatomy lab. Superb images of dissections, osteology, radiographic and surface anatomy offer an unmatched view of muscles, nerves, skeletal structures, blood vessels and more. Figures are accompanied by concise notes and commentaries, as well as orientational artworks to help you locate the structure accurately on the body.

    Contents:
    I: Lower limb, pelvis and hip
    II: Thigh, knee and leg b
    III: Foot
    IV: Imaging of the foot and ankle.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2018
  • Digital
    revised by Thomas R. Freeman.
    Summary: "Highly acclaimed in its first three editions, McWhinney's Textbook of Family Medicine is one of the seminal texts in the field. While many family medicine texts simply cover the disorders a practitioner might see in clinical practice, McWhinney's defines the principles and practices of family medicine as a separate and distinct field of practice. The fourth edition presents six new clinical chapters of common problems in family medicine: respiratory illness, musculoskeletal pain, depression, diabetes, obesity and multimorbidity. This new edition also provides information on stewardship of resources, patient information and data, delivery of care in the home, and consultation and referral. The volume also covers continuing advances in the research base of family medicine. Readers will come away with a deeper appreciation for the role of the generalist in healthcare"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The origins of family medicine
    Principles of family medicine
    Illness in the community
    The family in health and disease
    A profile of family practice
    Philosophical and scientific foundations of family medicine
    Illness, suffering, and healing
    Patient-doctor communication
    Clinical method
    The enhancement of health and the prevention of disease
    Respiratory illness
    Musculoskeletal pain
    Depression
    Diabetes
    Obesity
    Multimorbidity
    Home visits
    Stewardship of resources, patient information and data
    Practice management
    The health professions
    The community service network
    Consultation and referral
    Alternative or complementary medicine
    Education and research
    Continuing self-education
    Research in family practice.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    editors, Hagop M. Kantarjian, Robert A. Wolff.
    Contents:
    Sect. I: Leukemia
    Sect. II: Lymphoma and myeloma
    Sect. III: Stem cell transplantation
    Sect. IV: Lung cancer
    Sect. V: Head and neck cancer
    Sect. VI: Gastrointestinal cancers
    Sect. VII: Breast cancer
    Sect. VIII: Gynecologic malignancies
    Sect. IX: Genitourinary malignancies
    Sect. X: Neurologic tumors
    Sect. XI: Malignant melanoma and sarcomas
    Sect. XII: Other tumors
    Sect. XIII: Novel and other cancer topics of interest
    Sect. XIV: Supportive care
    Sect. XV: Palliative care and symptom management.
    Digital Access AccessMedicine 2016
  • Digital
    editors, Hagop M. Kantarjian, Robert A. Wolff, Alyssa G. Rieber.
    Summary: "Expert guidance on the management and treatment of all major cancers, from the world-renown physicians at The MD Anderson Cancer Center"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessHemOnc
    AccessHemOnc
    AccessMedicine
  • Digital
    edited by Barry W. Feig ; associate editor, C. Denise Ching.
    Summary: "The sixth edition of the MD Anderson Surgical Oncology Handbook focuses on multidisciplinary, cooperative approaches to issues confronting the surgical oncologist. Organized by disease and in full color for the first time, this volume is comprehensive yet concise, and takes into account all of the oncologic issues you need to consider in order to fully understand each disease and its relevant treatments. Written by current and former MD Anderson surgical oncology fellows. Each disease- or system-specific chapter covers epidemiology, pathology, staging, diagnosis, clinical presentation, surgical treatment and targeted therapies, and more. Includes a new chapter on peritoneal malignancies and is updated with the latest staging and protocols. Ideal for surgical residents, medical students facing a surgical/oncology rotation, and practicing surgeons. Enrich Your eBook Reading Experience with Enhanced Video, Audio and Interactive Capabilities! Read directly on your preferred device(s), such as computer, tablet, or smartphone. Customize for your language, including right-to-left reading, vertical writing, and enhanced annotation in over 30 languages. Easily convert to audiobook, powering your content with natural language text-to-speech. Adapt for unique reading needs, supporting learning disabilities, visual/auditory impairments, second-language or literacy challenges, and more."--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Noninvasive breast cancer / Oluwadamilola M. Fayanju and Kelly K. Hunt
    Invasive breast cancer / Rhiana S. Menen and Mediget Teshome
    Melanoma / Peter A. Prieto and Jeffrey E. Gershenwald
    Non-melanoma skin cancer / Melinda M. Mortenson, Kelly Herne, Sharon R. Hymes, and Janice N. Cormier
    Soft tissue and bone sarcoma / Naruhiko Ikoma, Christina L. Roland, and Barry W. Feig
    Cancers of the head and neck / Ryan P. Goepfert and Mark E. Zafereo
    Thoracic malignancies / Scott Atay and Boris Sepesi
    Esophageal carcinoma / Wayne L. Hofstetter
    Primary gastric malignancies / Michael E. Egger, Naruhiko Ikoma, and Brian D. Badgwell
    Small bowel malignancies / Sameer H. Patel and Jason B. Fleming
    Peritoneal malignancies / Travis E. Grotz, Keith F. Fournier, and Gary Mann
    Cancers of the colon, rectum, and anus / Callisia N. Clarke, Y. Nancy You, and Barry W. Feig
    Hepatobiliary cancers / Rebecca A. Snyder and Jean-Nicolas Vauthey
    Pancreatic adenocarcinoma / Jason W. Denbo, Michael P. Kim, Matthew H. G. Katz
    Pancreatic neuroendocrine tumors and multiple endocrine neoplasia / Jordan M. Cloyd and Jeffrey E. Lee
    Adrenal tumors / Casey B. Duncan and Jeffrey E. Lee
    Carcinoma of the thyroid and parathyroid glands / Kristin L. Long, Nancy D. Perrier, and Elizabeth G. Grubbs
    Hematologic malignancies and splenic tumors / Lakhbir Sandhu, David Santos, and Hun Ju Lee
    Genitourinary cancer / Firas G. Petros, Jose A. Karam, and Christopher G. Wood
    Gynecologic cancers / Katherine C. Kurnit and Pamela T. Soliman
    Neurosurgical malignancies / Ian E. McCutcheon
    Cancer of unknown primary site / Ashley Holder and Gauri R. Varadhachary
    Surgical emergencies in cancer Patients / Brian Badgwell
    Principles of radiation oncology / Shalini Moningi, Christopher Crane, and Prajnan Das
    Reconstructive surgery in cancer patients / Margaret S. Roubaud, Donald P. Baumann, Mark T. Villa, Geoffrey L. Robb, and Matthew M. Hanasono.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Print
    senior editor, Barry W. Feig ; associate editors, Michael G. White, Cameron Gaskill, Anai Kothari, Sandra Renae DiBrito.
    Summary: "Now with additional review content and a larger page size, The MD Anderson Surgical Oncology Manual, Seventh Edition, focuses on multidisciplinary, cooperative management approaches to issues confronting today’s surgical oncologist. Lead editor Dr. Barry W. Feig is joined by recently graduated surgical oncology fellows Michael G. White, Cameron E. Gaskill, Anai N. Kothari, and Sandra R. DiBrito to bring you comprehensive yet concise information on the complete range of oncologic considerations needed to effectively understand cancer and all aspects of its treatment. "-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Noninvasive breast cancer
    Invasive breast cancer - Melanoma
    Nonmelanoma skin cancers
    Merkel cell carcinoma
    Soft tissue and bone sarcoma
    Cancer of the head and neck
    Thoracic malignancies
    Esophageal carcinoma
    Primary gastric malignancies
    Small bowel malignancies
    Peritoneal malignancies
    Cancer of the colon, rectum, and anus
    Hepatobiliary cancers
    Pancreatic ductal adenocarcinoma
    Pancreatic neuroendocrine tumors and multiple endocrine neoplasia
    Adrenal tumors
    Carcinoma of the thyroid gland and neoplasms of the parathyroid glands
    Hematologic malignancies and splenic tumors
    Genitourinary cancer - Gynecologic cancers
    Neurosurgical malignancies: treating tumors of brain and spine and their effects on the nervous system
    Cancer of unknown primary site
    Surgical emergencies and palliative interventions in cancer patients
    Principles of radiation oncology
    Reconstructive surgery in cancer patients.
  • Digital
    Stephen Liben, Tom A. Hutchinson.
    Summary: This unique, step-by-step guide for instructors offers a comprehensive approach to teaching pre-clerkship medical students -- as well as residents and even experienced physicians -- about the transformational impact of mindful medical practice, or mindful whole person care. Indeed, integrating contemplative practices – such as "presence" and "relationship" -- into medical education is an established but still rapidly growing approach to bringing experiential learning to medical students. This book gives the rationale for administering a mindful medical practice (MMP) course, details the moment to moment process for each of the 7 classes that are outlined, and summarizes a way forward for instructors. Pages of the book can be copied and used in class with students, and there are appendices that include helpful tools a teacher can immediately copy and hand out in each class. Handy, one-page templates are provided at the end of each chapter for teachers to use as a guide while teaching each class. A unique contribution to the medical literature and the increasing focus on mindful medical practice, MD Aware: A Mindfulness-Based Whole Person Care Course Guide for Physicians is not only the ideal resource for teachers interested in setting up an MMP course in a medical school; it is also an invaluable practical guide for any clinician hoping to learn more about the importance and benefits of offering mindful medical practice to patients – and to themselves as healers.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Attention and Awareness
    3. Congruent Communication (Intra- and interpersonal)
    4. Awareness and Decision Making
    5. Clinical Congruence
    6. Building Resilience
    7. Responding to Suffering
    8. Mindful Congruent Practice
    9. Teaching for Learning that Sticks
    10. Live and In Person: One Class from Moment to Moment
    11. Conclusion: From Not Knowing to Actualization.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Michael Patlas, Douglas S. Katz, Mariano Scaglione, editors.
    Summary: This superbly illustrated book describes a comprehensive and modern approach to the imaging of abdominal and pelvic emergencies of traumatic and non-traumatic origin. The aim is to equip the reader with a full understanding of the roles of advanced cross-sectional imaging modalities, including dual-energy computed tomography (DECT) and magnetic resonance imaging (MRI). To this end, recent literature on the subject is reviewed, and current controversies in acute abdominal and pelvic imaging are discussed. Potential imaging and related pitfalls are highlighted and up-to-date information provided on differential diagnosis. The first two chapters explain an evidence-based approach to the evaluation of patients and present dose reduction strategies for multidetector CT imaging (MDCT). The remaining chapters describe specific applications of MDCT, DECT, and MRI for the imaging of both common and less common acute abdominal and pelvic conditions, including disorders in the pediatric population and pregnant patients. The book will be of value to emergency and abdominal radiologists, general radiologists, emergency department physicians and related personnel, general and trauma surgeons, and trainees in all these specialties.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Valeria Panebianco, Jurgen J. Fütterer.
    Summary: The new series A-Z Notes in Radiological Practice and Reporting provides practical guides for residents and general radiologists, organized alphabetically, primarily according to disease or condition, permitting easy and fast consultation. All booklet are designed so as to cover a large spectrum of topics referring to different anatomical regions of interests. The present booklet offers a reliable assistance during the performance and reporting of multidetector row computed tomography and magnetic resonance imaging in patients with urogenital conditions. Entries typically include a short description of pathological and clinical characteristics, guidance on selection of the most appropriate imaging technique, a schematic review of potential diagnostic clues, and useful tips and tricks. Some helpful illustrations and schemes are also included.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Carlo Nicola De Cecco, Marco Rengo.
    Summary: The new series A-Z Notes in Radiological Practice and Reporting provides practical guides for residents and general radiologists, organized alphabetically, primarily according to disease or condition. All booklets are designed so as to comprise only a small number of illustrations and to cover a large spectrum of topicsreferring to different anatomical regions of interest. The first volume on cardiac CT and MR imaging contains all the practical suggestions that can help a radiologist in the execution and reporting of a cardiac examination. The book is structured to offer an easy and fast consultation on cardiac imaging and pathology with the use of tables and figures. Entries typically include a short description of pathological and clinical characteristics, guidance on selection of the most appropriate imaging technique, a schematic review of potential diagnostic clues, and useful tips and tricks.

    Contents:
    Acute coronary syndrome
    Adenosine
    ALARA
    Alcohol septal ablation
    Amyloidosis, Cardiac
    Anderson-Fabry disease
    Angina
    Angiosarcoma
    Aorta, Thoracic
    Aortic aneurysm, Thoracic
    Aortic arch, Cervical
    Aortic arch, Right sided
    Aortic bleb
    Aortic bovine arch
    Aortic coarctation
    Aortic dissection
    Aortic valve
    Aortic valve, Bicuspid
    Aortic valve, Regurgitation
    Aortic valve, Stenosis
    Aortitis
    Apex, Ventricular
    Arrhythmia
    Arrhythmogenic right ventricular cardiomyopathy
    Artifacts, Magnetic resonance
    Assiste device, Left ventricular
    Atrial fibrillation
    Atrial isomerism
    Atrial septal aneurysm
    Atrial septal defect
    Atrial situs inversus
    Atrioventricular block
    Atrium, Left
    Atypical chest pain
    Balloon atrial septostomy
    Balloon valvuloplasty
    Barlow's syndrome
    Bentall operation
    Bernoulli formula
    Beta-blockers
    Biological risk
    Blalock-Taussig shunt
    Body mass index
    Bourneville-Pringle disease
    Breath hold
    Brock procedure
    Brugada syndrome
    Bundle branch block
    Bypass, Coronary
    Calcium score
    Cardiac index
    Cardiac resynchronization therapy
    Cardiomyopathies
    Catheter ablation
    Chagas disease
    Chiari network
    Chronic coronary occlusion
    Churg-Strauss syndrome
    Cine sequence, High temporal resolution
    Claustrophobia
    Common atrioventricular canal
    Congenitally corrected transposition of the great arteries
    Constrictive pericarditis
    Contrast-to-noise ratio
    Conversion factors, Radiation dose
    Cor triatriatum
    Coronary artery, Anomalous origin
    Crisscross anatomy
    Crista terminalis
    CT dose index
    CTDIW
    CTDI volume
    Culprit plaque
    Damus-Kaye-Stansel operation
    D-dimers
    Dextrocardia
    Diastolic dysfunction
    Diastolic tail
    DiGeorge syndrome
    Dilated cardiomyopathy
    Dipyridamole
    Dobutamine
    Dominance, Coronary
    Dose length product
    Double outlet right ventricle
    Dressler syndrome
    Ductus arteriosus or ductus botalli
    Ductus arteriosus, Persistent
    Dyslipidemia
    Dyssynchrony, Cardiac
    Dystrophies, Muscular
    Early gadolinium enhancement
    Ebstein's anomaly
    ECG
    ECG, Exercise
    ECG, Leads
    ECG, Preparation
    ECG pulsing
    Edema, Myocardial
    Effective dose
    Ehlers-Danlos syndrome
    Eisenmenger's syndrome
    Ejection fraction
    Embolic protection device
    Endocarditis, Infective
    Endocarditis, Prosthetic valve
    Endomyocardial fibrosis
    Endovascular aortic aneurysm repair
    Equivalent dose
    Eustachian valve
    Extramedullary hematopoiesis
    Fetal circulation
    Fibroelastoma, Papillary
    Fibroma
    Flail leaflet
    Flip angle
    Flow
    Fontan intervention
    Foramen ovale, Patent
    Fraction flow reserve
    Friedreich's ataxia
    Gadolinium
    Giant cell arteritis
    Glenn shunt
    Gray
    Heart failure
    Heart failure, Diastolic
    Hemochromatosis
    Heterotaxic syndrome
    Heyde's syndrome
    Hibernating myocardium
    Holt-Oram syndrome
    Hurler disease
    Hydatid disease
    Hypertrophic cardiomyopathy
    Implantable cardioverter defibrillator
    Inferior vena cava filter
    Inflammatory aortic aneurysm
    Interventricular septum movement
    Intra-aortic balloon counterpulsation
    Intramural hematoma
    Intravascular ultrasound
    Inversion time
    Iodine
    Iron overload, Myocardial
    Ischemic heart disease
    Jatene procedure
    Kartagener's syndrome
    Kawasaki's disease
    Keshan disease
    Konno operation
    Late gadolinium enhancement
    Lecompte maneuver
    Left superior vena cava
    Leiomyosarcoma
    Libman-Sacks syndrome
    Lipoma
    Lipomatous hypertrophy, Septal
    Liposarcoma
    Loffler's syndrome
    Lyme disease
    Lymphoma
    Lutembacher's syndrome
    Magnetohydrodynamic effect
    Major aortopulmonary collateral arteries
    Marfan syndrome
    Microvascular obstruction
    Milliampere
    Mitral valve
    Mitral valve, Prolapse
    Mitral valve regurgitation
    Mitral valve stenosis
    Myxoma
    Mustard procedure
    Myocardial infarct
    Myocardial viability
    Myocarditis
    Myocarditis, Eosinophilic
    Myocarditis, Tubercular
    Myocardium, Hibernating
    Myocardium, Stunned
    Nephrogenic systemic fibrosis
    Noncompaction cardiomyopathy
    Noonan's syndrome
    Norwood operation
    Osteosarcoma
    Pacemaker
    Paravalvular abscess
    Perfusion imaging, Myocardial
    Pericardial cyst
    Pericardial effusion
    Pericardial metastases
    Pericardial neoplasms
    Pericarditis, Acute
    Pericardium, Congenital absence
    Peripartum cardiomyopathy
    Plaque composition
    Pott's shunt
    Prinzmetal angina
    Prosthetic valves
    Pulmonary arteries
    Pulmonary artery aneurysm
    Pulmonary artery dissection
    Pulmonary artery tumors
    Pulmonary atresia
    Pulmonary arterial hypertension
    Pulmonary valve regurgitation
    Pulmonary valve stenosis
    Pulmonary veins
    Pulmonary vein atresia
    Pulmonary venous drainage, Anomalous
    Q fever
    Qp/Qs
    Rastelli procedure
    Regadenoson
    Restrictive cardiomyopathy
    Rhabdomyoma
    Rhabdomyosarcoma
    Rheumatic fever
    Right ventricle dilatation
    Right ventricular outflow tract obstruction
    Ross operation
    Sarcoidosis, Cardiac
    Saturation band
    Scimitar syndrome
    Senning operation
    Shimming
    Shunt
    Shunt, Surgical
    Simpson modified rule
    Sinus, Coronary
    Starr-Edwards valve
    Stent, Coronary
    Stent, Coronary biodegradable
    Stent, Coronary drug eluting
    Stroke volume
    Sudden cardiac death
    Takayasu arteritis
    Takotsubo cardiomyopathy
    Tamponade, Cardiac
    Taussig-Bing syndrome
    Test bolus
    Tetralogy of fallot
    Thalassemia
    Tissue doppler imaging
    Total cavopulmonary connection
    Transcatheter aortic valve replacement
    Transesophageal echocardiography
    Transplantation, Cardiac
    Transposition of the great arteries
    Tricuspid atresia
    Tricuspid valve
    Tricuspid valve regurgitation
    Tricuspid valve stenosis
    Troponin
    Truncus arteriosus
    Tumors, Cardiac
    Turner's syndrome
    Univentricular heart
    Uremic pericarditis
    Valvular cardiomyopathy
    Valvular tumors
    Valvular vegetations
    Vascular remodeling
    Vascular ring
    Velocity-encoded gradient
    Ventricular chambers identification
    Ventricular septal defect
    Ventricular systolic function
    Ventricular volumes
    Wall motion score index
    Warfarin ridge
    Waterston shunt
    Wegener's granulomatosis
    Weil disease
    Wenckebach's phenomenon
    Whipple disease
    William's syndrome
    Window/level setting
    Wolff-Parkinson-White syndrome
    X, Syndrome.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital/Print
    Layla F. Saad ; foreword by Robin DiAngelo
    Summary: "When Layla Saad began an Instagram challenge called #meandwhitesupremacy, she never predicted it would spread as widely as it did. She encouraged people to own up and share their racist behaviors, big and small. She was looking for truth, and she got it. Thousands of people participated in the challenge, and nearly 100,000 people downloaded the Me and White Supremacy Workbook. Updated and expanded from the original workbook, Me and White Supremacy, takes the work deeper by adding more historical and cultural contexts, sharing moving stories and anecdotes, and including expanded definitions, examples, and further resources. Awareness leads to action, and action leads to change. The numbers show that readers are ready to do this work--let's give it to them."--Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    A little about me
    What is white supremacy?
    Who is this work for?
    What you will need to do this work
    How to use this book
    Self-care, support, and sustainability
    Week 1: The basics
    Week 2: Anti-blackness, racial stereotypes, and cultural appropriation
    Week 3: Allyship
    Week 4: Power, relationships, and commitments
    Continuing the work after Day 28
    Working in groups: Me and White Supremacy book circles.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    HT1575 .S23 2020
    1
  • Digital
    Simon van Rysewyk, editor.
    Summary: Experiential evidence shows that pain is associated with common meanings. These include a meaning of threat or danger, which is experienced as immediately distressing or unpleasant; cognitive meanings, which are focused on the long-term consequences of having chronic pain; and existential meanings such as hopelessness, which are more about the person with chronic pain than the pain itself. This interdisciplinary book - the second in the three-volume Meanings of Pain series edited by Dr Simon van Rysewyk - aims to better understand pain by describing experiences of pain and the meanings these experiences hold for the people living through them. The lived experiences of pain described here involve various types of chronic pain, including spinal pain, labour pain, rheumatic pain, diabetic peripheral neuropathic pain, fibromyalgia, complex regional pain syndrome, endometriosis-associated pain, and cancer-related pain. Two chapters provide narrative descriptions of pain, recounted and interpreted by people with pain. Language is important to understanding the meaning of pain since it is the primary tool human beings use to manipulate meaning. As discussed in the book, linguistic meaning may hold clues to understanding some pain-related experiences, including the stigmatisation of people with pain, the dynamics of patient-clinician communication, and other issues, such as relationships between pain, public policy and the law, and attempts to develop a taxonomy of pain that is meaningful for patients. Clinical implications are described in each chapter. This book is intended for people with pain, their family members or caregivers, clinicians, researchers, advocates, and policy makers. "It is my opinion that this ... work will stand as the definitive reference work in this field. I believe it will enrich the professional and personal lives of health care providers, researchers and people who have persistent pain and their family members. The combination of framework chapters with chapters devoted to analysing the lived experience of pain conditions gives the requisite breadth and depth to the subject."--Dr Marc A. Russo, MBBS DA(UK) FANZCA FFPMANZCA, Newcastle, Australia, from the Foreword.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Contents;
    Chapter 1: Exploring the Meanings of Pain: My Pain Story; 1 Introduction; 2 My Pain Story; 3 Meanings When Nothing Made Sense; 4 Changing Meanings, Making Sense; 5 New Meanings, Sense Made; 6 Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 2: After the Tango in the Doorway: An Autoethnography of Living with Persistent Pain; 1 Introduction; 2 Writing an Autoethnography; 3 Going to the Doctor; 4 The Tango in the Doorway; 5 The Good Doctor Said; 6 Is Explanation Enough?; 7 Tensions Between a Culture of Medicine and a Personś Need 3.3 The Importance of Support in Managing the Struggle4 Managing the Self in Pain; 4.1 Long Term Support for Self-Management; 4.2 The Role of Medications; 4.3 Developing Knowledge About Medication Use; 4.4 Exercise; 4.5 Psychological Interventions; 4.6 Mindfulness; 4.7 Cognitive Behavioural Therapy for Pain; 5 Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 5: Changing Pain: Making Sense of Rehabilitation in Persistent Spine Pain; 1 Introduction; 2 Defining Pain; 3 Pain and Psychosocial Context; 4 Chronic Spine Pain Management as Patient-Centered Active Care 4 The Phenomenological Shift: Assessing the Modalities of Suffering5 An Integrative Method that Objectively Captures Subjective Suffering; References;
    Chapter 4: ``Pain Takes Over Everything:́́ The Experience of Pain and Strategies for Management; 1 The Somatic Experience of Chronic Pain; 2 The Personal Experience of Chronic Pain; 2.1 Body as Obstacle; 2.2 Disrupted Sense of Self; 2.3 Invisible But Real; 2.4 Unpredictability; 2.5 Fighting to Keep Going; 3 Learning to Live with Chronic Pain; 3.1 Adjusting to the Inevitable; 3.2 Doing It My Way Without Medication 5 The Promise of Interdisciplinary, Multimodal Pain Management6 Patient Education and the Therapeutic Alliance; 7 Exercise in the Management of Spine Pain; 8 The Science of Exercise in Spine Pain Management; 9 Medical Treatments and Interventions: When Is It the Right Time?; 10 Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 6: ``Let Me Be a Meaningful Part in the Outside World:́́ A Caring Perspective on Long-Term Rheumatic Pain and Fear-Avo ... ; 1 Rheumatic Pain; 2 Meanings of Pain; 3 Emotional Meanings of Pain Associated with Rheumatism: The Painful and Untrustworthy Body 8 What Am I Today and How Did I Get There? And Why Does that Matter in a Book About the Meanings of Pain?9 ``Us ́́and ``Them:́́ Othering; 10 Learning to Live with Pain; 11 Physician, Heal Thyself; 12 Alone But Not Alone, Yet Alone; References;
    Chapter 3: Diagnosing Human Suffering and Pain: Integrating Phenomenology in Science and Medicine; 1 Introduction: Phenomenology for the Practical Life of Evaluating Suffering in Pain Patients; 2 Defining Suffering/Pain-Related Suffering: Biases and Confusions; 3 The Important Parallelism Between Pain and Suffering
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    John Doerr.
    Summary: "In the fall of 1999, John Doerr met with the founders of a start-up he'd just given nearly $12 million, the biggest investment of his career. Larry Page and Sergey Brin had amazing technology, entrepreneurial energy, and sky-high ambitions, but no real business plan. For Google to change the world, or even survive, Page and Brin had to learn how to make tough choices on priorities while keeping their team on track. They had to know when to pull the plug on losing propositions, to fail fast. They needed timely, relevant data to track their progress--to measure what mattered. Doerr introduced them to a proven approach to operating excellence--Objectives and Key Results. The rest is history."--Jacket.

    Contents:
    Part 1. OKRs in action. Google, meet OKRs
    The father of OKRs
    Operation crush: An Intel story
    Superpower #1: Focus and commit to priorities
    Focus: The Remind story
    Commit: The Nuna story
    Superpower #2: Align and connect for teamwork
    Align: The MyFitnessPal story
    Connect : the Intuit story
    Superpower #3: Track for accountability
    Track : the Gates Foundation story
    Superpower #4: stretch for amazing
    Stretch: the Google Chrome story
    Stretch: the YouTube story
    Part 2. The new world of work. Continuous performance management : OKRs and CFRs
    Ditching annual performance reviews: the Adobe story
    Baking better every day: the Zume Pizza story
    Culture
    Culture change : the Lumeris story
    Culture change : Bono's ONE campaign story
    The goals to come.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    OverDrive
    Fulltext Limited to 1 simultaneous usersSUNet ID login required
    OverDrive
    Audio Book Limited to 1 simultaneous usersSUNet ID login required
  • Digital
    Peter J. Fabri.
    Contents:
    Introduction to Measurement and Analysis
    Data and Types of Data
    Software for Analytics
    Measurement and Uncertainty
    Mathematical and Statistical Concepts in Data Analysis
    Analysis by Modeling Data
    Principles of Supervised Learning
    Unsupervised Machine Learning
    Datasets Without Outcomes
    Survival Analysis
    Interpreting Outcomes: Cause and Effect and p-values
    Useful Tools.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Harry C. Sax, editor.
    Contents:
    1. Healthcare transformation: what are the challenges?
    2. Terminology and applications: hospital performance measures
    3. Measurements and analysis in transforming healthcare delivery: terminology and applications-- physician performances
    4. Assuring appropriate care
    5. Aligning medical staff within the academic medical center
    6. Aligning healthcare systems
    7. Influencing with integrity
    8. Perspectives from single payer systems
    9. Leadership to encourage and sustain performance
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Michael E. Harris and Vernon E. Anderson.
    Contents:
    1. Binding isotope effects for interrogating enzyme-substrate interactions
    2. Chemical ligation and isotope labeling to locate dynamic effects
    3. Measurement of enzyme isotope effects
    4. Extracting kinetic isotope effects from a global analysis of reaction progress curves
    5. Natural isotope abundance in metabolites: techniques and kinetic isotope effect measurement in plant, animal and human tissues
    6. Measurement of kinetic isotope effects in an enzyme-catalyzed reaction by continuous-flow mass spectrometry
    7. Primary deuterium kinetic isotope effects from product yields: rationale, implementation, and interpretation
    8. Measurement and prediction of chlorine kinetic isotope effects in enzymatic systems
    9. Kinetic deuterium isotope effects in cytochrome P450 reactions
    10. Use of isotopes and isotope effects for investigations of diiron oxygenase mechanisms
    11. Characterization of substrate, cosubstrate, and product isotope effects associated with enzymatic oxygenations of organic compounds based on compound-specific isotope analysis
    12. pH-free measurement of relative acidities, including isotope effects
    13. Isotope ratio monitoring ¹³C nuclear magnetic resonance spectrometry for the analysis of position-specific isotope ratios
    14. Applications of isotope ratio mass spectrometry in sports drug testing accounting for isotope fractionation in analysis of biological samples
    15. Kinetic isotope effect analysis of RNA 2'-O-Transphosphorylation
    16. Theory and application of the relationship between steady-state isotope effects on enzyme intermediate concentrations and net rate constants
    17. Determining carbon kinetic isotope effects using headspace analysis of evolved CO₂
    18. Kinetic isotope effect studies to elucidate the reaction mechanism of RNA-modifying enzymes
    19. Measurement of kinetic isotope effects by continuously monitoring isotopologue ratios using NMR spectroscopy
    Author index
    Subject index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Print
    Carolyn Feher Waltz, Louise Sherman Jenkins, editors.
    Contents:
    v. 1. Measuring nursing performance in practice, education, and research
    v. 2. Client outcomes and quality of care
    v. 3. Self care and coping.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RT85.5 .M434
    3
  • Digital
    Victor N. Cassar-Pullicino, A. Mark Davies, editors.
    Summary: Practical and comprehensive, this heavily-illustrated reference offers the latest information on the application of all imaging techniques currently used to manage musculoskeletal disorders. It has a unique design of three dovetailed sections.

    Contents:
    Part I Measurement
    1 The Radiograph
    2 Computed Tomography
    3 Ultrasound
    4 Magnetic Resonance Imaging
    5 Computer-Assisted Quantification
    Part II Measurements at Anatomical Sites
    6 Cervical Spine
    7 Thoracolumbar Spine
    8 Shoulder
    9 Elbow
    10 Wrist/Hand
    11 Pelvis/Hip Paediatric
    12 Pelvis/Hip: Adult
    13 Knee
    14 Patellofemoral Joint
    15 Foot and Ankle: Paediatric Measurements
    16 The Adult Ankle and Foot
    17 Long Bone Measurements
    Part III Measurements in Disease States
    18 Arthritis
    19 Metabolic Bone Disease
    20 Bone Marrow Disease
    21 Bone and Soft Tissue Tumours
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    Joel Fischer, Kevin Corcoran, and David W. Springer.
    Summary: "This title serves as the definitive reference volume on assessment measures for both practice and research in clinical mental health. It includes hundreds of standardized measures for use in clinical practice and in research. It features instruments that are cross-indexed by problem area. New to this edition : a new preface ; new instruments for measuring children's clinical conditions ; new measures for couples and families ; six new chapters ; target searches for instruments in health care conditions, personality disorders, and addictions. One of the key challenges of all types of practice and research is finding a way to measure a given problem. The seminal Measures for Clinical Practice and Research two-volume set contains hundreds of the most useful assessment measurement tools - alongside the authors' guidance on how to select and score them - for use in clinical practice and in research. While the first volume focuses on measures for use with couples, families, and children, the second volume focuses on measures for use with adults whose conditions of concerns are not focused on family relationships or couple relationships. Both include an introduction to the basic principles of measurement, an overview of different types of measures, and an overview of Rapid Assessment Instruments. The texts also contain descriptions and reviews of each instrument and information on how they were selected. Each classic compendium serves as a powerful tool that clinicians and researchers alike will find to be an invaluable addition to - or update of - their libraries."--adapted from publisher description.

    Contents:
    Volume 1. Couples, families, and children
    [List of] Instruments for Couples
    [List of] Instruments for Families
    [List of] Instruments for Children
    [List of] Instruments for Adults (Vol. 2)
    [List of] Instruments Cross-Indexed by Problem Area (Vols. 1 and 2)
    Foreword / by Bruce A. Thyer
    Preface to the Sixth Edition
    Part 1. Measurement and Practice
    Chapter 1. Introduction
    Chapter 2. Basic Principles of Measurement
    Chapter 3. Types of Measurement Tools
    Chapter 4. Advantages and Disadvantages of Rapid Assessment Instruments
    Chapter 5. Selecting Measures for Practice
    Chapter 6. Administering the Instruments
    Part 2. Instruments for Practice and Research
    Introduction
    Instruments for Couples
    Instruments for Families
    Instruments for Children
    References. Volume 2. Adults
    [List of] Instruments for Adults
    [List of] Instruments for Couples (Vol. 1)
    [List of] Instruments for Families (Vol. 1)
    [List of] Instruments for Children (Vol. 1)
    [List of] Instruments Cross-Indexed by Problem Area (Vols. 1 and 2)
    Foreword / by Bruce A. Thyer
    Preface to the Sixth Edition
    Instruments for Practice and Research
    Introduction to Volume 2
    Instruments for Adults. Tests/Measurements covered in this book. Instruments for couples. Beier-Sternberg discord questionnaire
    Competitiveness scale
    Conflict in adolescent dating relationships inventory
    Construction of problems scale
    Controlling behaviours scale
    Dominance-accommodation scale
    Dual-career family scale
    Dual-employed coping scales
    Dyadic adjustment scale
    Equity/inequity scale
    Hendrick sexual attitude scale
    Hypothetical, jealousy-producing events scale
    Index of marital satisfaction
    Index of sexual satisfaction
    Inventory of dyadic heterosexual preferences
    Kansas marital conflict scale
    Kansas marital goals orientation scale
    Kansas marital satisfaction scale
    Life distress inventory
    Locke-Wallace marital adjustment test
    Marital aggrandizement scale
    Marital alterantives scale
    Marital comparison level index
    Marital conventionalization scale
    Marital happiness scale
    Marital instability index
    Miller marital locus of control scale
    Non-physical abuse of partner scale
    Ongoing violence assessment tool
    Partner abuse scale: non-physical
    Partner abuse scale: physical
    Passionate love scale
    Physical abuse of partner scale
    Positive feelings questionnaire
    Primary communication inventory
    Relationship assessment scale
    Relationship events scale
    Semantic differential of sex roles
    Sexual arousability inventory and sexual arousability inventory--expanded
    Sexual attitude scale
    Sexual behavior inventory--female
    Sexual behavior inventory--male
    Sexual enabling inventory
    Spouse sobriety influence inventory
    Spouse treatment mediation inventories
    Survey of heterosexual interactions
    Tests/Measurements covered in this book. Instruments for families. Adolescent-family inventory of life vents and changes
    Adult-adolescent parenting inventory
    Attitude toward the provision of long-term care
    Beck codependence assessment scale
    Boundary ambiguity scales 1-6
    Chinese family assessment instrument
    Co-dependence inventory
    Codependent questionnaire
    Conflict tactics scales
    Coping health inventory for parents
    Cultural receptivity in fostering scale
    Environmental assessment index
    Family adaptability and cohesion evaluation scale
    Family assessment device
    Family attachment and changeability index 8
    Family awareness scale
    Family beliefs inventory
    Family celebrations index
    Family coping coherence index
    Family coping index
    Family coping inventory
    Family crisis oriented personal evaluation scales
    Family distress index
    Family emotional involvement and criticism scale
    Family empowerment scale
    Family functioning scale
    Family hardiness index
    Family inventory of life vents and changes
    Family inventory of resources and management
    Family member well-being
    Family-of-origin scale
    Family organized cohesiveness scale
    Family pressures scale--ethnic
    Family problem-solving communication
    Family responsibility index
    Family responsibility scale-Spanish version and English version
    Family schema--ethnic
    Family sens of coherence and family adaptation scales
    Family times and routines index
    Family traditions scale
    Family unpredictability scale
    Fatherhood scale
    Fetal health locus of control scale
    Healthy families parenting inventory
    Index of brother and sister relations
    Index of family relations
    Index of parental attitudes
    Individuation test for emerging adults--in relation to father (ITEA-F)
    Individuation test for emerging adults--in relation to mother (ITEA-M)
    Kansas family life satisfaction scale
    Kansas personal satisfaction scale
    Level of expressed emotion
    Memory and behavior problems checklist
    MOM empowerment scale
    Needs inventory for caregivers of hospitalized elderly
    Nuclear family functioning scale
    Parent affect test
    Parent's report
    Parent-child relationship survey
    Parental attachment scale
    Parental authority questionnaire
    Parental bonding instrument
    Parental nurturance scale
    Parental tolerance scale
    Parenting scale
    Perinatal grief scale
    Realizations of filial responsibility
    Self-report family instrument
    Social support index
    Transracial adoption parenting scale
    Tests/Measurements covered in this book. Instruments for children. Adolescent concerns evaluation
    Adolescent coping orientation for problem experiences
    Adolescent domain screening inventory
    Arizona risk/needs assessment
    Arizona risk/needs assessment instrument
    Assertiveness scale for adolescents
    Behavioral self-concept scale
    Behavior rating index for children
    Belonging scale and belonging scale-revised
    Body investment scale
    Child dental control assessment
    Child report of posttraumatic symptoms and parent report of posttraumatic symptoms
    Childhood personality scale
    Child's attitude toward father and mother scales
    Children's action tendency scale

    Children and adolescent social and adaptive functioning scale
    Children's attributional style questionnaire--revised
    Children's belifes about parental divorce scale
    Children's cognitive assessment questionnaire
    Children's loneliness questionnaire
    Children's perceived self-control scale
    Children's somatization inventory
    Children's thoughts questionnaire
    Chinese ways of coping questionnaire
    Common belief inventory for students
    Companion animal bonding scale
    Compulsive eating scale
    Concern over weight and dieting scale
    Depression self-rating scale
    Drinking motives questionnaire
    Elementary school success profile
    Emotion regulation questionnaire for children and adolescents
    Eyberg child behavior inventory
    Family, friends, and self form
    Hare self-esteem scale
    Hawaiian culture scale--adolescent
    Homework problem checklist
    Hopelessness scale for children
    Hospital fears rating scale
    How I feel
    Impulsivity scale
    Index of peer relations
    Internet sex screening test-adolescent
    Inventory of parent and peer attachment
    Level of stability index for children
    Mood thermometers
    Multi-attitude suicide tendency scale
    Multigroup ethnic identity measure and MEIN-R
    Nowicki-Strickland locus of control scale
    Oregon mental health referral checklist--youth version, parents and staff
    Ostracism experience scale for adolescents
    Pain response inventory
    Peer and self-rating scale
    Perceived school experiences scale
    Perceived social competence scale
    Perceived scale for children
    Personal attribute inventory for children and nonsexist personal attribute inventory
    Positive and negative suicide ideation inventory
    Purpose in life--short form
    Reason for living inventory for adolescents
    Risk-taking and self-harm inventory for adolescents
    Rosenberg self-esteem scale
    Scale of racial socialization for adolescents
    Self-concept scale for children
    Self-control rating scale
    Shortform assessment scale for children
    Spider phobia questionnaire for children
    Urban hassles scale
    Young children's social desirability scale
    Youth coping index
    Youth coping response inventory --
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    BF176 .F57 2020
    2
  • Digital
    Jean Carlos Santos, Geraldo Wilson Fernandes, editors.
    Springer Nature eBook.
    Summary: This book brings together a wide range of sampling methods for investigating different arthropod groups. Each chapter is organised to describe and evaluate the main sampling methods (field methods, materials and supplies, sampling protocols, effort needed, and limitations); in addition, some chapters describe the specimen preparation and conservation, species identification, data collection and management (treatment, statistical analysis, interpretation), and ecological/conservation implications of arthropod communities. The book aims to be a reference for zoologists, entomologists, arachnologists, ecologists, students, researchers, and for those interested in arthropod science and biodiversity. We hope the book will contribute to advance knowledge on field assessments and conservation strategies. Arthropods represent the most speciose group of organisms on Earth, with a remarkable number of species and interactions still to be described. These invertebrates are recognized for playing key ecological roles in terrestrial, freshwater and marine ecosystems. Because of the increasing and relentless threats arthropods are facing lately due to a multitude of human induced drivers, this book represents an important contribution to assess their biodiversity and role in ecosystem functioning and generation of ecosystem services worldwide.

    Contents:
    1. Fungal by-products in Food Technology
    2. Sampling and Analysis Methods for Ant Diversity Assessment
    3. Bees
    How and Why to Sample Them
    4. Social Wasp Sampling Methods
    5. Sampling Methods for Butterflies (Lepidoptera)
    6. Sampling Methods for Beetles (Coleoptera)
    7. Arthropods: Why it is so Crucial to Know Their Biodiversity?
    8. Sampling Methods of True Fruit Flies (Tephritidae)
    9. Sampling Methods for Dragonflies and Damselflies (Odonata)
    10. Sampling Methods for Termites (Insecta: Blattaria: Isoptera)
    11. Measuring Orthoptera Diversity
    12. Hemiptera Sampling Methods
    13. Collecting and Sampling Methods for Thrips
    14. Techniques for Collection and Sampling of Pseudoscorpions (Arthropoda, Arachnida)
    15. Standardized Sampling Methods and Protocols for Harvestman and Spider Assemblages
    16. Sampling Galls and Galling Arthropods
    17. Collecting, Rearing and Preserving Leaf-Mining Insects
    18. Canopy Insect Sampling
    19. Sampling Methods for Soil and Litter Fauna
    20. Sampling Methods for Aquatic Insects
    21. Sampling Methods for Blood Feeding Insects Diversity
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Artur Struzik.
    Summary: This book presents a thorough description and critical discussion of different approaches to measuring leg stiffness during vertical jumps, as well as practical applications. Various topics covered include the applicability of the spring-mass (linear) model of the human motion system, leg stiffness controversies and interpretations, and computational and measuring methods of leg stiffness during vertical jumps. Additionally, a description of a research project performed expressly for inclusion in this book is given; the study aims to determine normative values for leg stiffness for young, healthy, non-athletes during single vertical jumps to maximal and specific heights. A final chapter covers additional perspectives, enabling the reader to acquire different perspectives on measuring leg stiffness during vertical jumps across a breadth of information and interpretations. Measuring Leg Stiffness During Vertical Jumps: Theory and Methods is an ideal book for researchers and practitioners in the fields of biomedical engineering, biomechanics, and sport sciences.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Biomechanical Characteristics of the Countermovement Jump
    Leg Stiffness and Quasi-stiffness
    Research Project
    Leg stiffness controversies and interpretations
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    editors: Shaun D. Gregory, Michael C. Stevens, John F. Fraser.
    Contents:
    1. Descent into heart and lung failure
    2. Heart and lung transplantation
    3. First-generation ventricular assist devices
    4. Second-generation ventricular assist devices
    5. Third-generation ventricular assist devices
    6. Biventricular assist devices
    7. Total artificial hearts
    8. Extracorporeal membrane oxygenation
    9. Pediatric devices
    10. Hydraulic design
    11. Motor design and impeller suspension
    12. Pulsatile vs. continuous flow
    13. Preclinical evaluation
    14. Optimizing the patient and timing of the introduction of mechanical circulatory and extracorporeal respiratory support
    15. Surgical implantation
    16. Complications of mechanical circulatory and respiratory support
    17. Medical management of the supported patient
    18. Cannula design
    19. Blood-device interaction
    20. Physiological control
    21. Percutaneous and transcutaneous connections
    22. Wearable systems
    23. Route to market
    24. Cost-effectiveness
    25. The past, present, and future
    Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Andrea Montalto, Antonio Loforte, Francesco Musumeci, Thomas Krabatsch, Mark S. Slaughter, editors ; in collaboration with Cristiano Amarelli.
    Contents:
    PART I: PREOPERATIVE EVALUATION
    1 Physiopathology and Fate of End-Stage Cardiac Heart Failure in the era of Mechanical Circulatory Support
    2 The Advantage of Mechanical Solution: Results of Clinical Trials to Date
    3 Mechanical Circulatory Support Candidate Selection Criteria
    4 Preoperative Assessment and Clinical Optimization
    5 Preoperative Evaluation of Right Ventricular Function
    6 High INTERMACS profiles: Medical vs. Mechanical Circulatory Support treatment
    7 Low INTERMACS Profiles: which Strategies? (Temporary ECMO or TAH support; Temporary mid-term Paracorporeal Ventricular Assisted Device Support; Primary long-term Ventricular Assisted Device placement)
    8 From BTT to DT Strategy: USA and Europe views
    9 Mechanical Circulatory Support as a Bridge to Recovery
    10 Mechanical Circulatory Support as a Bridge to Candidacy
    PART II: INTRAOPERATIVE TIPS AND PITFALLS
    11 Pulsatile vs. Continuous Flow pumps: Engineering and Clinical Considerations
    12 Which Approach? Traditional vs. MICS
    13 To Pump or not to Pump: the Role of Cardio-Pulmonary Bypass or ECMO
    14 Techniques for Inflow Cannula Placement
    15 Techniques for Outflow Cannula Placement
    16 Techniques for Driveline Positioning
    17 Percutaneous Devices: Options
    18 Paracorporeal Biventricular Devices
    19 Biventricular Implantable Continuous flow pumps
    20 The Total Artificial Heart
    21 Mechanical Circulatory Support in Pediatric Population
    22 Concomitant Cardiac Surgery during Ventricular Assisted Device Placement: When is It too Much?
    23 Pump Removal after Recovery
    24 Intraoperative anesthesiological monitoring and management
    25 Intraoperative right ventricular failure management
    PART III: POSTOPERATIVE RECOMMENDATIONS
    26 Physiotherapy and Rehabilitation Management in Ventricular Assisted Device Patients
    27 Coagulation Monitoring
    28 Adverse events management: Ischemic and Haemorragic Stroke
    29 Adverse events management: Gastro-intestinal Bleeding
    30 Adverse events management: Pump Thrombosis
    31 Adverse events management: Infectious Complications
    32 Adverse events management: AVW Syndrome
    33 Adverse events management: Concomitant non-Cardiac Surgery during MCS: Management of Therapy
    34 Pump and Equipment Failure: How to Behave
    35 The Outpatient Care: The Role of Ventricular Assisted Device coordinator and the Remote Monitoring
    PART IV: MISCELLANEA
    36. Miniaturization and Future Technologies
    37 ReliantHeart
    Forward Compatibility and TET
    38 The BIVACOR project
    39 Potential of CARMAT in the Future
    40 The ReinHeart Solution
    41 Ethical and Psychological aspects of long-term MCS
    42 Health-Economic Aspects of Mechanlical Circulatory Support Therapy
    43 The Mechanical Circulatory Support Registries: Role and Perspectives
    44 Conclusions.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Hua Yan, editor.
    Summary: This book provides state-of-the-art information for ophthalmologists and other clinicians facing tough cases, helping them to make the most appropriate decision concerning the management of patients who have suffered mechanical ocular trauma. The discussion of mechanical ocular trauma addresses various parts of the eye: each chapter discusses a certain part of the eye, supplemented by illustrative sample cases. Though the latest consensus is provided for each topic or case, different opinions on controversial topics will also be discussed in detail. Pearls of advice at the end of each chapter highlight its main points. Topics covered include: Traumatic cataract and the timing of surgery and IOL implantation, Traumatic hypotony, Traumatic glaucoma, Timing of vitrectomy after primary repair, Use of silicone oil in traumatic eyes, Intraocular foreign bodies, Traumatic endophthalmitis, and much more. As a topic-based clinical reference work on mechanical ocular trauma bringing together consensus and controversies, the book offers useful and attractive information for ophthalmologists and other readers. Hua Yan is a professor and chairman at the Department of Ophthalmology and the secretary of Tianjin Medical University General Hospital, Tianjin, China.

    Contents:
    Introduction.- Anterior Segment Trauma
    Posterior Segment Trauma.- Intraocular Foreign Bodies (IOFBs)
    Traumatic Endophthalmitis
    Mechanical Ocular Trauma in Children
    Severe traumatic eyes with No Light Perception.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Jamshid H. Karimov, Kiyotaka Fukamachi, Randall C. Starling, editors.
    Springer Nature eBook.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive overview of mechanical circulatory support of the failing heart in adults and children. The book uniquely combines engineering knowledge and the clinicians perspective into a single resource, while also providing insights into current and future development of mechanical circulatory support technology, such as ventricular assist devices, the total artificial heart and catheter-based technologies for heart failure. Topics featured in this book include: The history of mechanical circulatory device development. Fundamentals of hemodynamics support. Clinical management of mechanical circulatory devices. Surgical implantation techniques. Current limitations of device therapies in advanced heart failure. Advanced and novel devices in the development pipeline. Opportunities for advancement in the field. Mechanical Support for Heart Failure: Current Solutions and New Technologies is a must-have resource for not only physicians, residents, fellows, and medical students in cardiology and cardiac surgery, but also clinical and basic researchers in biomedical engineering with an interest in mechanical circulatory support, heart failure, and new technological applications in medicine.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Foreword
    Preface
    Contents
    Contributors
    Part I: Overview of the Mechanical Circulatory Support
    1: A History of Mechanical Circulatory Support
    The Possibility of Mechanical Circulatory Support Revealed
    The US Artificial Heart Program as Key Catalyst
    Early Assist Devices: 1960s-1970s
    Early Total Artificial Hearts: 1950s-1960s
    The Goal of Permanent Replacement: TAHs
    Wider Clinical Uptake: VADs
    Conclusion
    References
    2: A Personalized History of Rotary Blood Pumps
    Epiphany
    The Secret of my Success: Serendipity The Beginning of the Journey
    Happy Chance
    First Human Implantation of a Rotary Blood Pump: A Moment in History [13]
    Patient Selection
    Case Report
    CorAide LVAD
    HeatWare HVAD
    Complete Magnetic Suspension
    The Future
    Stroke
    Percutaneous Site Infection
    Pump Intelligence
    Lessons Learned
    References
    3: History of Pediatric Devices for Mechanical Circulatory Support
    Introduction
    Early History Leading to the Need for Pediatric Mechanical Circulatory Devices
    Key Events Leading Up to Pediatric ECMO
    Evolution of Pediatric Ventricular Assist Devices Conclusions
    References
    4: Overview of Mechanical Circulatory Support Devices and Concepts
    Introduction
    The Intra-aortic Balloon Pump (IABP)
    The Impella Pump
    TandemHeart
    Extracorporeal Membrane Oxygenation (ECMO)
    HeartMate III
    References
    5: Physiology of Blood Pump Circulation in Heart Failure
    Introduction
    Types of Ventricular Assist Device
    Continuous-Flow Left Ventricular Assist Device (cf-LVAD) Hemodynamics
    Pressure-Flow Relationship (HQ Curve)
    Impact of LVAD Pumping on Ventricular Mechanics and Energetics
    Physiology of Myocardial Energetics LVAD Impact on Ventricular Mechanics
    Impact of Blood Inertia on the Instantaneous Pressure-Flow Relationship
    Pump Power and Flow Relationship
    Artificial Flow Pulsatility
    Impact of RPMs on LVAD Flow and Total Flow to the Body
    Ramp Test
    HeartMate II Echocardiographic Ramp Test
    HVAD Echocardiographic Ramp Test
    Impact of RPM on Left Ventricle
    Impact of RPM on Total Body Flow
    Defining and Quantifying Ventricular Unloading
    Impact of RPM on CVP and PCWP
    Special Considerations
    RV Failure with LVAD
    Pulmonary Hypertension
    Clinical LVAD Physiology
    Hypertension VAD-Exercise Physiology
    Hemodynamic Factors Affecting VAD Flow During Exercise
    Chronotropic Incompetence and Preload
    Effect of Pump Speed Adjustment During Exercise
    Summary
    References
    6: Engineering Requirements for Mechanical Circulatory Support Devices
    Introduction
    Engineering MCS Devices
    Differing MCS Designs and Their Corresponding Engineering Requirements
    Risk Analysis to Engineer MCS Devices
    Disclaimer
    References
    7: Clinical Requirements for Mechanical Circulatory Support Devices
    Introduction
    Long-Term MCS and End-Stage Heart Failure
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Amir A. Hakimi, Thomas E. Milner, Govind R. Rajan, Brian J-F Wong, editors.
    Summary: The surge in COVID-19 cases leading to hospitalizations around the world quickly depleted hospital resources and reserves, forcing physicians to make extremely difficult life-or-death decisions on ventilator allocation between patients. Leaders in academia and industry have developed numerous ventilator support systems using both consumer- and industry-grade hardware to sustain life and to provide intermediate respiratory relief for hospitalized patients. This book is the first of its kind to discuss the respiratory pathophysiology underlying COVID-19, explain ventilator mechanics, provide and evaluate a repository of innovative ventilator support devices conceived amid the pandemic, and explain both hardware and software components necessary to develop an inexpensive ventilator support device. This book serves both as a historical record of the collaborative and innovative response to the anticipated ventilator shortage during the COVID-19 pandemic and as a guide for physicians, engineers, and DIY'ers interested in developing inexpensive transitory ventilator support devices. Provides a qualitative appraisal of numerous transitory ventilator devices developed and/or used during the COVID-19 pandemic including non-invasive ventilation; Explores the mechanics, considerations, and concerns of emergency ventilator components; Provides a detailed framework for beginners and experts alike to develop their own emergency ventilation systems.

    Contents:
    History of ventilator devices
    Ventilator splitters: requirements and feasibility
    SARS CoV-2 transmission and innovative protective barriers
    What is a bridge ventilator and why is it needed?
    Fundamental requirements for a bridge ventilator
    Categorization for emergency ventilators amid COVID-19 pandemic
    Mechanics of resuscitation bag
    How to compress a bag: an overview of mechanical and pneumatic methods
    Choosing the right motor: considerations and concerns
    Re-purposing positive airway pressure machines (CPAP and BiPAP) for ventilators
    The role of non-invasive ventilation to treat COVID-19 induced lung disease
    Categorization of non-invasive ventilators amid the COVID-19 pandemic
    An appraisal of FDA-approved emergency ventilator designs
    DIY: A detailed guide to build your own bridge ventilator
    Regulatory considerations for ventilator production
    Post-regulatory concerns: liability, risk mitigation, and more.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Giacomo Bellani, editor.
    Summary: This book aims to give a comprehensive overview of the current challenges and solution posed to the health care professionals who need to use mechanical ventilation to treat their patients. Mechanical ventilation is a cornerstone of the treatment of critically ill patients, as also dramatically underlined by the recent COVID-19 pandemic. The topic is not simple to approach, since it requires integration of multiple data which, in turn, result from complex interplays between patient's condition and ventilatory settings. While technological development empowered advanced monitoring and decision support, these also increase the burden of data on the practitioners. Furthermore, considering that sometimes mechanical ventilation is seen under two, apparently opposite, approaches, physiology vs. protocols the book aims to reconcile these two aspects. And this has been done by each author following the above trajectory in their chapters. The exposure of the topic begins from the pathophysiology (i.e. the physiology of the disease so that the reader can better understand the concept and rationale of any given approach. At the same time, any rationale or hypothesis (for as much as supported by physiology) must hold at the proof of clinical research and evidence, which is summarized in each chapter. In summary, the purposes is that the readers understand not only which is the best clinical practice to adopt but also why and which mechanisms this is based upon and how to approach a novel issue they might encounter. The book addressed to physicians, nurses and respiratory therapist features chapters on novel or not topics like, obviously, COVID-19, ECMO, but also MV in low resource setting.

    Contents:
    Part 1. Techniques
    Chapter 1. Basic physiology of respiratory system: gas exchange and respiratory mechanics
    Chapter 2. A short history of Mechanical Ventilation
    Chapter 3. Airway management in critically ill
    Chapter 4. Controlled mechanical ventilation: modes and monitoring
    Chapter 5. Assisted ventilation: pressure support and bilevel ventilation modes
    Chapter 6. Monitoring the patient during assisted ventilation
    Chapter 7. Neurally Adjusted Ventilatory Assist
    Chapter 8. Proportional Assist Ventilation
    Chapter 9. Non-invasive ventilation: indications and caveats
    Chapter 10. High-flow Nasal Cannula
    Chapter 11. Nursing of mechanically ventilated and ECMO patient
    Chapter 12. Closed Loop ventilation modes
    Chapter 13. Aiway pressure release ventilation
    Part 2. Clinical Scearios
    Chapter 14. Acute Respiratory Failure and Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome
    Chapter 15. Ventilator Induced Lung Injury and Lung Protective Ventilation
    Chapter 16. Mechanical ventilation in the heathy lung: OR and ICU
    Chapter 17. PEEP setting in ARDS
    Chapter 18. Ventilation in brain injured patient
    Chapter 19. Invaisve and noninvasive ventilation in patient with cardiac failure
    Chapter 20. COPD and severe asthma
    Chapter 21. Ventilation in the obese patient
    Chapter 22. Weaning the simple and complex patients
    Chapter 23. Noninvasive ventilation in COVID-19
    Chapter 24. Invasive Ventilation in COVID-19
    Chapter 25. Mechanical ventilation in different surgical settings
    Chapter 26. Following up the patients at long term
    Chapter 27. Mechanical Ventilation in limited resource settings
    Chapter 28. Mechanical Ventilation during patient's trasferral
    Part 3. Adjuncts to MV
    Chapter 29. Prone Position
    Chapter 30. Veno-Venous ECMO and ECCO2R
    Chapter 31. Mechanical Ventilation setting during ECMO
    Part 4. Monitoring
    Chapter 32. Ultrasound assesment of the respiratory system
    Chapter 33. Electrical Impedance Tomography
    Chapter 34. Esophageal pressure monitoring
    Chapter 35. Lung Volumes and volumetric capnography
    Chapter 36. Radiological monitoring
    Chapter 37. Clinical vignettes (waveforms)
    Chapter 38. Teaching Mechanical ventilation: on line resources and simulation.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Antonio M. Esquinas, S. Egbert Pravinkumar, Ayman O. Soubani, editors.
    Summary: This book aims to equip the reader to make optimal decisions on the use of mechanical ventilatory support in critically ill cancer patients with acute respiratory failure (ARF) and to implement the different strategies effectively. Detailed information is provided on the rationale for invasive and non-invasive ventilation, the different modes of ventilation, indications and contraindications, prognostic factors, and outcomes. The role of postoperative mechanical ventilation following various forms of surgery is extensively addressed, and key aspects of withdrawal from ventilatory support are discussed. Attention is also devoted to mechanical ventilation in the palliative care context. The concluding part of the book focuses on healthcare resource utilization and organizational support in cancer critical care. ARF is the most common reason for hospital and intensive care admission among oncological patients, and there is growing evidence that outcome following mechanical ventilation is improving. Readers will find this book to be an invaluable aid when selecting and executing a strategy for management of ARF in individual cancer patients.

    Contents:
    Part I. Background and Therapeutic Procedures in Critically Ill Cancer Patients
    Epidemiology of Acute Respiratory Failure
    Acute Respiratory Failure in Different Settings
    Chemotherapy
    Radiation Therapy
    Blood Marrow Transplantation
    Bronchoscopy
    Non-bronchoscopic Procedures
    Invasive and Interventional Procedures
    Part II. Invasive Mechanical Ventilation
    Rationale
    Mechanical Ventilatory Modes
    Part III. Non-invasive Mechanical Ventilation
    Nasal High-Flow System
    Devices
    Continuous Positive Airway Pressure (CPAP)
    Bilevel Positive Airway Pressure
    Indications and Contraindications
    Determinants of Success or Failure
    NIV Outcome Decision Algorithm
    Part IV. Postoperative Mechanical Ventilation
    General Postoperative Complications
    Mechanical Ventilation After Neurosurgery
    Mechanical Ventilation After Cardiothoracic Surgery
    Mechanical Ventilation After Thoracic Surgery
    Mechanical Ventilation After Abdominal Surgery
    Mechanical Ventilation After Orthopedic Surgery
    Part V. Withdrawal from Mechanical Ventilation Support
    Weaning from Mechanical Ventilation
    Tracheotomy
    Analgesia/Sedation
    Venous Thromboembolic and Gastrointestinal Prophylaxis
    Chest Physiotherapy
    Nutrition
    Long-Term Mechanical Ventilation
    Part VI. Palliative Ventilatory Support in Cancer Critical Care
    Palliative Care
    Avoidance of Endotracheal Intubation
    End-of-life Care. Part VII. Healthcare Resource Utilization and Organizational Support in Cancer Critical Care
    Organization of Ventilatory Support
    Healthcare Resources Ventilatory Support
    Quality-of-Life Ventilatory Support
    Mechanical Ventilation: Current Evidence and Evidence-Based Practice.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Susan R. Wilcox, Ani Aydin, Evie G. Marcolini.
    Summary: This book functions as both an introduction and a refresher of fundamental mechanical ventilation concepts. It reviews the core evidence-based principles of ventilation and focuses on this topic as it occurs in the emergency setting, covering the management from intubation until transfer to the ICU. Comprehensive and concise, this second edition features updated new material on blood gas analysis, advanced modes of ventilation, as well as a completely revamped chapter on the ventilator screen, and five new case studies. Additionally, many of the expertly written chapters are supplemented with illustrations crafted for quick, visual learning. Written with the daily challenges of the emergency room in mind, Mechanical Ventilation in Emergency Medicine, Second Edition, is an invaluable reference for all emergency health care providers.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Ashok P. Sarnaik, Shekhar T. Venkataraman, Bradley A. Kuch, editors.
    Summary: This textbook comprehensively covers mechanical ventilation in neonates and children integrating the latest knowledge and understanding of developmental biology, age-related and disease-specific physiologic differences in the practice of mechanical ventilation. The physiology associated with ventilation and lung mechanics are described. Guidance is provided on how to carry out a range of clinical assessments appropriately, including those for ventilation, mechanics and breathing control. Available pathophysiology-based management strategies for a range of situations including respiratory failure and ventilatory failure are also provided. Mechanical Ventilation in Neonates and Children: A Pathophysiology Based Management Approach broadly covers a range of topics associated with mechanical ventilation in children and neonates. It is a valuable resource for specific seminars or courses that concentrate on respiratory failure in children and for those preparing for board certification examinations for neonatal/perinatal medicine and pediatric critical care medicine.

    Contents:
    Mechanical Characteristics of the Lung and the Chest Wall
    Physiology of Inflation and Deflation
    Gas Exchange
    Clinical Examination and Assessment
    Monitoring
    Ventilators and Modes
    Mechanical Ventilation Strategies
    Mechanical Ventilation for Neonates
    Ventilator graphics
    Noninvasive Mechanical Ventilation
    Respiratory Care Equipment
    Chronic Ventilation and Home Care
    Case-based Analysis of Respiratory Failure.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    editors, W. Ben Kibler and Aaron D. Sciascia.
    Summary: As clinical interest in overhead athletic injuries is on the upswing, so is greater interest in the factors for performance and injury risk in throwing and other overhead motion. This practical, case-based text is divided into two sections and will present the basic principles of overhead athletes followed by unique clinical case presentations describing different aspects of performance, injury and management in throwing and other overhead athletes. Part I discusses the mechanics and pathomechanics of the overhead motion, along with principles of evaluation, the physical exam, surgical management of both the shoulder and elbow, rehabilitation and return to play, injury risk modification, and the role of the scapula. Unique clinical cases comprise all of part II and follow a consistent format covering the history, exam, imaging, diagnosis and outcome of the chosen intervention. These cases illustrate a cross-section of sports and activities, from the baseball player to the swimmer, and a range of shoulder and elbow problems in pediatric and adult overhead athletes Providing a unique case-based approach to a growing hot topic, Mechanics, Pathomechanics and Injury in the Overhead Athlete is an ideal resource for orthopedic surgeons, sports medicine specialists, physiatrists, physical therapists, certified athletic trainers and allied medical professions treating active persons of all ages.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Andrea Aliverti, Antonio Pedotti, editors.
    Summary: This book offers a state-of-the-art description of the complexity of the healthy and pathological respiratory system, with particular reference to the mechanics of the airways, lung and chest wall. Detailed information is provided on new insights into the mechanics of breathing that have been obtained through technological innovations in measurement systems, cutting-edge modeling techniques and novel approaches to functional imaging of the respiratory system. It is explained how these advances permit the assessment of emerging treatment approaches, including new drugs, innovative surgical techniques and modes of mechanical ventilation and new forms of rehabilitation. In order to ensure comprehensive coverage of the subject, the editor has assembled a multidisciplinary team of authors comprising basic scientists in respiratory medicine, chest and intensive care physicians and bioengineers involved in both modeling and instrumentation. The book is intended for intensive care physicians, respirologists, physiologists, rehabilitation specialists, basic scientists in respiration, research and clinical fellows, biomedical engineers involved with respiratory mechanics and respiratory therapists. They will update their knowledge and improve their clinical expertise.

    Contents:
    The Act of Breathing
    Work of Breathing During Exercise: Implications for Performance
    Pathology of COPD and Asthma
    Pathophysiology of Airflow Obstruction
    Role of Airway Smooth Muscle Mechanical Properties in the Regulation of Airway Caliber
    Nitric Oxide in Asthma Is Like Insulin in Type II Diabetes
    Static and Dynamic Hyperinflation in Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease
    Lung Recruitment and De-recruitment
    Lung Function Testing, Spirometry, Diffusion Capacity and Interpretation
    Forced Oscillation Technique
    Optoelectronic Plethysmography: Principles of Measurements and Recent Use in Respiratory Medicine
    Respiratory Muscle Blood Flow Measured by Near-Infrared Spectroscopy (NIRS) and Indocyanine Green Dye (ICG)
    Assessment of Dyspnoea
    Noninvasive Measures of Lung Structure and Ventilation Heterogeneity
    Computed Tomography (CT)-Based Analysis of Regional Lung Ventilation
    Functional Imaging of Airway Distensibility
    Function and Microstructure by Hyperpolarized Gas MRI
    Pulmonary Functional Imaging with Positron Emission Tomography
    Pharmacological Treatment: an Update
    Respiratory and Non-respiratory Muscle Dysfunction in COPD
    Pathophysiology of Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease
    Old and New Trends in Invasive Mechanical Ventilation
    Use of Respiratory Mechanics for Monitoring and Setting of Noninvasive Mechanical Ventilation
    Use of FOT for Optimising Mechanical Ventilation.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Print
    edited by Fred E. Hahn.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RM267 .M4 1979
    1
  • Print
    Lundholm, Lennart.
    Contents: <br/
    >1. Effect on skeletal muscle vessels.
  • Digital
    Kathleen A. Sluka, PT, PhD, FAPTA, Kate Daum Research Professor, Department of Physical Therapy and Rehabilitation Science, Pain Research Program, The University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa.
    Summary: "Comprehensive in scope and invaluable for both practitioners and students, Mechanisms and Management of Pain for the Physical Therapist, Second Edition, thoroughly covers the wide range of issues requiring the interdisciplinary management of pain. Joined by more than 20 international contributors, Dr. Kathleen Sluka provides a practical, evidence-based framework for understanding the basics of pain mechanisms and management. This highly regarded, updated text covers the basics of pain neurobiology and reviews evidence on the mechanisms of action of physical therapy treatments, as well as their clinical effectiveness in specific pain syndromes."--Back cover.

    Contents:
    Introduction : definition, concepts, and models of pain / Kathleen A. Sluka
    Peripheral pathways involved in nociception / Kathleen A. Sluka
    Central nociceptive pathways / Kathleen A. Sluka
    Motor control and pain / Paul W. Hodges
    Individual differences and pain variability / Laura Frey Law and Steven Z. George
    Pain assessment / Josimari M. DeSantana and Kathleen A. Sluka
    General principles of physical therapy practice / Kathleen A. Sluka
    The specific influences of non-specific effects / Mark D. Bishop and Joel E. Bialosky
    Education and self-management for pain control / Kathleen A. Sluka and G. Lorimer Moseley
    Exercise-induced hypoalgesia : an evidence-based review / Marie Hoeger Bement and Kathleen A. Sluka
    Transcutaneous electrical nerve stimulation (tens) and interferential therapy (ift) / Kathleen A. Sluka and Deirdre M. Walsh
    Overview of other electrophysical agents including thermal modalities / G. David Baxter and Jeffrey R. Basford
    Manual therapy / Kathleen A. Sluka and Stephan Milosavljevic
    Interdisciplinary pain management / Harriet Wittink
    Medical management of pain / Eva Kosek
    Psychological approaches in pain management / Dennis C. Turk and Hilary D. Wilson
    Myofascial pain and fibromyalgia syndrome / Kathleen A. Sluka
    Temporomandibular disorders and headache / Kathleen A. Sluka
    Low back pain / Steven Z. George and Katie A. Butera
    Neck pain / Michele Sterling
    Neuropathic pain and complex regional pain syndrome / Kathleen A. Sluka
    Osteoarthritis and rheumatoid arthritis / Kathleen A. Sluka
    Pain associated with central nervous system disorders : central neuropathic pain / Sonja Bareiss and Dana Dailey
    Case studies / Kathleen A. Sluka and Carol G.T. Vance.
    Digital Access Ovid 2016
  • Digital
    volume editor, Paul B. Fisher, Devanand Sarkar.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2021
  • Digital
    Mirza Hasanuzzaman, Kamrun Nahar, Masayuki Fujita, editors.
    Summary: Arsenic is likely the most talked-about metalloid in the modern world because of its toxic effects on both animal and plants. Further, arsenic pollution is now producing negative impacts on food security, especially in many south Asian countries. Since plants are a major food source, their adaptation to As-rich environments is essential, as is being informed about recent findings on multifarious aspects of the mechanisms of arsenic toxicity and tolerance in plants. Although numerous research works and review articles have been published in journals, annual reviews and as book chapters, to date there has been no comprehensive book on this topic. This book contains 19 informative chapters on arsenic chemistry, plant uptake, toxicity and tolerance mechanisms, as well as approaches to mitigation. Readers will be introduced to the latest findings on plant responses to arsenic toxicity, various tolerance mechanisms, and remediation techniques. As such, the book offers a timely and valuable resource for a broad audience, including plant scientists, soil scientists, environmental scientists, agronomists, botanists and molecular biologists.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; List of Contributors; About the Editors;
    Chapter 1: Arsenic Uptake and Transportation in Plants; 1.1 Introduction: Uptake and Transport of Arsenic Depend on Soil Properties and As Species; 1.2 Arsenite and Arsenic Methylated Derivatives; 1.2.1 Uptake and Translocation Systems; 1.2.1.1 NIPs in Arsenic Transport; 1.2.1.2 PIPs in Arsenic Transport; 1.2.1.3 TIPs in Arsenic Transport; 1.2.1.4 Transport Systems for Arsenite and Methylated Derivatives of As Other than AQPs; 1.3 Arsenate Uptake and Its Translocation Systems; 1.4 Concluding Remarks; References 2.4.3.3 Respiration Rate2.4.4 Nutrient and Water Uptake; 2.4.4.1 Micro- and Macronutrient; 2.4.4.2 Water Loss; 2.4.5 Membrane Integrity; 2.4.5.1 Cellular Membrane Damage; 2.4.5.2 Release of Electrolytes; 2.5 Conclusions and Outlook; References;
    Chapter 3: Consequences of Paddy Cultivation in Arsenic-Contaminated Paddy Fields of Lower Indo-Gangetic Plain on Arsenic Accumulation Pattern and Selected Grain Quality Traits: A Preliminary Assessment; 3.1 Introduction; 3.1.1 Rice and Economy; 3.1.2 Rice Grain Quality Attributes from Consumer's Prospective 3.1.3 Arsenic Contamination in Rice Agroecosystem3.1.3.1 Consequences of Rice Cultivation in As-Contaminated Agroecosystem; 3.2 Materials and Methods; 3.2.1 Description of Study Sites and Agriculture Practice; 3.2.2 Sample Collection, Soil Physicochemical Properties, and As Content Analysis; 3.2.3 Physicochemical Properties and Cooking Characteristics of Milled Rice; 3.2.4 Data Analysis; 3.3 Results and Discussion; 3.3.1 Physicochemical Properties of As Content in Paddy Field Soil; 3.3.2 As Content in Irrigation Water 3.3.2.1 As Accumulation Pattern in Different Plant Parts of Studied Varieties3.3.2.2 A Correlative Aspect of Grain as Content and Physicochemical Properties of As-Contaminated Paddy Field Soil; 3.3.3 Selected Grain Quality Attributes of Studied Rice Varieties Cultivated in As-Contaminated Paddy Fields; 3.3.4 Statistical Aspect of Grain As Content and Physicochemical Properties and Cooking Characteristics of Non-parboiled Milled Rice; References;
    Chapter 4: Arsenic-Induced Oxidative Stress in Plants; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Sites and Pathways of ROS Generation in Plants
    Chapter 2: Plant Responses to Arsenic Toxicity: Morphology and Physiology2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Uptake and Transport of Arsenic; 2.3 Morphological Effects of Arsenic; 2.4 Physiological Effects of Arsenic; 2.4.1 Growth and Productivity; 2.4.1.1 Root Plasmolysis; 2.4.1.2 Biomass; 2.4.1.3 Cell Division, Elongation, and Expansion; 2.4.2 Photosynthetic System; 2.4.2.1 Chlorophyll Synthesis; 2.4.2.2 CO2 Fixation; 2.4.2.3 Stomatal Conductance; 2.4.2.4 Chloroplast Membrane; 2.4.2.5 Expression of RuBisCO Gene; 2.4.3 ATP Synthesis and Energy Flow; 2.4.3.1 Rate of ATP Synthesis; 2.4.3.2 Energy Flow
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Maria Spies and Anna Malkova.
    Contents:
    Using the Flp recombinase to induce site-specific protein-DNA nicks / Kristoffer P. Jakobsen and Lotte Bjergbaek - A proximity ligation-based method for quantitative measurement of D-loop extension in S. cerevisiae / Aurèle Piazza, Romain Koszul, and Wolf-Dietrich Heyer - Inducing and detecting mitotic DNA synthesis at difficult-to-replicate loci / Lorenza Garribba, Wei Wu, Özgün Özer, Rahul Bhowmick, Ian D. Hickson, and Ying Liu - An approach to detect and study DNA double-strand break repair by transcript RNA using a spliced-antisense RNA template / Havva Keskin and Francesca Storici
    Assaying repair at DNA nicks / Luther Davis, Yinbo Zhang, and Nancy Maizels
    Recovery of alternative end-joining repair products from Drosophila embryos / Terrence Hanscom, Varandt Y. Khodaverdian, and Mitch McVey
    High-throughput analysis of DNA break-induced chromosome rearrangements by amplicon sequencing / Alexander J. Brown, Aneesa T. Al-Soodani, Miles Saul, Stephanie Her, Juan C. Garcia, Dale A. Ramsden, Chengtao Her, and Steven A. Roberts
    Assaying mutations associated with gene conversion repair of a double-strand break / Gajendrahar Dwivedi and James E. Haber
    Investigation of break-induced replication in yeast / Rajula Elango, Zachary Kockler, Liping Liu, and Anna Malkova - Targeting allostery with avatars to design inhibitors assessed by cell activity: dissecting MRE11 endo- and exonuclease activities / Davide Moiani, Daryl A. Ronato, Chris A. Brosey, Andrew S. Arvai, Aleem Syed, Jean-Yves Masson, Elena Petricci, and John A Tainer - Integrating experimental and in silico HTS in the discovery of inhibitors of protein-nucleic acid interactions / Quinn Li, Laura Folly da Silva Constantino, and M. Ashley Spies - Monitoring recombination during meiosis in budding yeast / Shannon Owens, Shangming Tang, and Neil Hunter - S1-seq assay for mapping processed DNA ends / Eleni P. Mimitou and Scott Keeney
    Methods for controlled protein depletion to study protein function during meiosis / Hardeep Kauer, Jasvinder S. Ahuja, and Michael Lichten - Quantitative methods to investigate the 4D dynamics of heterochromatic repair sites in Drosophila cells / Christopher P. Caridi, Laetitia Delabaere, Harianto Tjong, Hannah Hopp, Devika Das, Frank Alber, and Irene Chiolo
    Analysis of meiotic double-strand break initiation in mammals / Kevin Brick, Florencia Pratto, Chi-Yu Sun, Rafael D. Camerini-Otero, and Galina Petukhova..
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Maria Spies and Anna Alkova.
    Summary: Mechanisms of DNA Recombination and Genome Rearrangements: Intersection between Homologous Recombination, DNA Replication and DNA Repair, Volume 601, the latest release in the Methods in Enzymology series, continues the legacy of this premier serial with quality chapters authored by leaders in the field. Homologous genetic recombination remains the most enigmatic process in DNA metabolism. The molecular machines of recombination preserve the integrity of the genetic material in all organisms and generate genetic diversity in evolution. The same molecular machines that support genetic integrity by orchestrating accurate repair of the most deleterious DNA lesions, however, also promote survival of cancerous cells and emergence of radiation and chemotherapy resistance. This two-volume set offers a comprehensive set of cutting edge methods to study various aspects of homologous recombination and cellular processes that utilize the enzymatic machinery of recombination. The chapters are written by the leading researches and cover a broad range of topics from the basic molecular mechanisms of recombinational proteins and enzymes to emerging cellular techniques and drug discovery efforts.

    Contents:
    1. DSB processing in yeast Loraine Symington 2. Purification of DNA end resection enzymes Petr Ceijka 3. Biochemistry of DNA end resection Petr Ceijka 4. Visualization of telomere movement and interchromosomal homology searches in ALT Roger Greenberg 5. Pre-steady state kinetic methods for investigating the DNA exonuclease activity of Mre11 Scott Nelson 6. Production of large quantities of human RAD51 Maria Spies 7. Determining the RAD51 nucleoprotein filamentous structure and mechanism by CryoEM Hong-Wei Wang 8. Single-molecule TIRF analysis of human RAD51 nucleation Maria Spies 9. TIRF-based single-molecule detection of the RecA presynaptic filament dynamics Sung Hyun Kim 10. Archaeal (Sulpholobus) RadA and its paralogs Cynthia Haseltine 11. 4-strand DNA strand exchange Alexander Mazin 12. Purification and biochemistry of DMC1 recombinase Doug Bishop 13. Single-molecule TIRF analysis of yeast Rad51 nucleoprotein disassembly by helicases Sua Myong 14. The recombination mediator BRCA2: architectural plasticity of recombination intermediates revealed by single molecule imaging (SFM/TIRF) Claire Wyman 15. Visualisation and quantitation of BRCA2/RAD51 dynamics in cells Roland Kanaar 16. RPA
    DNA curtains Eric Greene 17. Single-molecule studies of ssDNA binding proteins Taekjip Ha 18. BRCA2 as recombination mediator Aura Carreira 19. Ustilago maydis Brh2 as a model for human BRCA2 Bill Holloman 20. Purification and analysis of holiday junction resolvases Stephen West 21. Structural analysis of HJ resolving enzyme GEN1 David Lilley 22. The preparation of four-stranded recombination intermediates for use in the HJ resolution reactions Stephen West
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Carsten Carlberg, Ferdinand Molnár.
    Summary: This textbook aims to describe the fascinating area of eukaryotic gene regulation for graduate students in all areas of the biomedical sciences. Gene expression is essential in shaping the various phenotypes of cells and tissues and as such, regulation of expression is a fundamental aspect of nearly all processes in physiology, both in healthy and in diseased states. This pivotal role for the regulation of gene expression makes this textbook essential reading from students of all the biomedical sciences in order to be better prepared for their specialized disciplines. A complete understanding of transcription factors and the processes that alter their activity is a major goal of modern life science research. The availability of the whole human genome sequence (and that of other eukaryotic genomes) and the consequent development of next-generation sequencing technologies have significantly changed nearly all areas of the biological sciences. For example, the genome-wide location of histone modifications and transcription factor biding sites, such as provided by the ENCODE consortium, has greatly improved our understanding of gene regulation. Therefore, the focus of this book is the description of the post-genome understanding of gene regulation. The purpose of this book is to provide, in a condensed form, an overview on the present understanding of the mechanisms of gene regulation.

    Contents:
    Overview: What is gene expression?
    The impact of chromatin
    The basal transcriptional machinery
    Transcription factors
    Linking signal transduction and gene regulation
    Switching genes on and off at the example of nuclear receptors
    Mapping the genome
    Chromatin modifiers
    Genomic imprinting
    The epigenome
    Chromatin remodeling
    Chromatin architecture
    Regulatory RNA.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Robert Fitridge, editor.
    Summary: This extensively revised third edition provides a practically applicable guide to the pathophysiology, assessment and management of vascular disorders encountered in vascular surgical practice. It features detailed information on the latest developments in the pathophysiology of conditions including atherosclerosis, multi-organ failure, limb compartment syndromes and Raynaud's phenomenon in a clear easy to digest format. Disorders such as reperfusion injuries, vasculitides, and aortic dissection are covered. Furthermore, key topics in vascular and endovascular practice such as radiation biology and radiation safety are also detailed. Each chapter contains a set of learning objectives and key references, enabling the reader to quickly identify key points. Mechanisms of Vascular Disease: A Textbook for Vascular Specialists comprehensively covers a variety of common and unusual pathophysiologies encountered in vascular surgery, and is an ideal resource for both the trainee, and practicing clinical vascular surgeon seeking an up-to-date resource on the topic.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    Abbreviations
    Chapter 1: Vascular Endothelium in Health and Disease
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Endothelium-Dependent Regulation of Vascular Tone
    1.2.1 Gaseous Mediators
    1.2.2 Endothelium-Dependent Hyperpolarisation
    1.2.3 Metabolites of Arachidonic Acid
    1.2.4 Endothelins
    1.3 Angiogenesis
    1.4 Haemostasis
    1.5 Inflammation
    1.6 Conclusions
    References
    Further Reading
    Chapter 2: Pathophysiology of Atherosclerosis
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Normal Vessel Wall
    2.3 Stages of Atherosclerosis
    2.3.1 Intimal Xanthomas or Fatty Streaks 2.3.2 Fibroatheroma
    2.3.3 Thin-Cap Fibroatheroma
    2.3.4 Plaque Rupture
    2.3.5 Fibrous Calcified Plaque
    2.3.6 Plaque Erosion
    2.4 Pathophysiology of Atherosclerosis and Atherothrombosis
    2.4.1 Endothelial Dysfunction
    2.4.2 Lipoprotein Entry and Modification
    2.4.3 Leukocyte Recruitment
    2.4.4 Foam Cell Formation
    2.4.5 Lymphocyte Responses
    2.4.6 Smooth Muscle Cell Migration and Fibrous Cap Formation
    2.4.7 Macrophage Apoptosis and Necrotic Core Formation
    2.4.8 Calcification
    2.4.9 Neovascularisation and Intraplaque Haemorrhage 2.4.10 Fibrous Cap Degradation and Plaque Rupture
    2.4.11 Plaque Erosion
    2.5 The Role of Inflammation in Atherosclerosis
    2.6 Risk Factors
    2.6.1 Genetic Risk Factors
    2.6.2 Traditional Risk Factors
    2.7 Conclusion
    References
    Further Reading
    Chapter 3: Mechanisms of the Vulnerable Atherosclerotic Plaque and Imaging
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Plaque Rupture
    3.2.1 Thin Cap Fibroatheromas
    3.2.2 Plaque Size and Positive Luminal Remodeling
    3.2.3 Lipid-Rich Necrotic Core
    3.2.4 Neovascularisation and Plaque Haemorrhage
    3.2.5 Calcification
    3.3 Plaque Erosion 3.4 Calcified Nodules
    3.5 Effect of Diabetes on Plaque Morphology
    3.6 Carotid Imaging
    3.6.1 Carotid Ultrasound
    3.6.2 Carotid Computed Tomography
    3.6.3 Carotid Magnetic Resonance Imaging
    3.7 Molecular Imaging
    3.7.1 Imaging Inflammation: Fluorodeoxyglucose (18F-FDG)
    3.7.2 Imaging Microcalcification: Sodium Fluoride (18F-NaF)
    3.8 Intravascular Imaging
    3.8.1 Intravascular Ultrasound (IVUS)
    3.8.2 Optical Coherence Tomography (OCT)
    3.8.3 Intravascular Molecular Imaging
    3.9 Conclusion: Vulnerable Plaques and Vulnerable Patients
    References
    Further Reading Chapter 4: Current and Emerging Therapies for Atherosclerosis
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Risk Stratification
    4.3 Lifestyle Measures
    4.4 Anti-platelet and Anti-thrombotic Therapies
    4.5 Blood Pressure Therapies
    4.6 LDL Cholesterol Lowering Therapies
    4.7 Additional Lipid Modifying Therapies
    4.8 Glucose Lowering Therapies
    4.9 Anti-Inflammatory Therapies
    4.10 Obesity Targeted Therapies
    4.11 Cardiac Rehabilitation
    4.12 Conclusion
    References
    Further Reading
    Chapter 5: Pathophysiology of Angiogenesis and Its Role in Vascular Disease
    5.1 Introduction
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Simon C. F. Rawlinson.
    Contents:
    Extracellular Matrix Structure and Stem Cell Mechanosensing / Nicholas D Evans, Camelia G Tusan
    Molecular Pathways of Mechanotransduction / Hamish T J Gilbert, Joe Swift
    Sugar-Coating the Cell / Stefania Marcotti, Gwendolen C Reilly
    The Role of the Primary Cilium in Cellular Mechanotransduction / Kian F Eichholz, David A Hoey
    Mechanosensory and Chemosensory Primary Cilia in Ciliopathy and Ciliotherapy / Surya M Nauli, Rinzhin T Sherpa, Caretta J Reese, Andromeda M Nauli
    Mechanobiology of Embryonic Skeletal Development / Andrea S Pollard, Andrew A Pitsillides
    Modulating Skeletal Responses to Mechanical Loading by Targeting Estrogen Receptor Signaling / Gabriel L Galea, Lee B Meakin
    Mechanical Responsiveness of Distinct Skeletal Elements / Simon C F Rawlinson
    Pulmonary Vascular Mechanics in Pulmonary Hypertension / Zhijie Wang, Lian Tian, Naomi C Chesler
    Mechanobiology and the Kidney Glomerulus / Franziska Lausecker, Christoph Ballestrem, Rachel Lennon
    Dynamic Remodeling of the Heart and Blood Vessels / Ken Takahashi, Hulin Piao, Keiji Naruse
    Aortic Valve Mechanobiology / K Jane Grande-Allen, Daniel Puperi, Prashanth Ravishankar, Kartik Balachandran
    Testing the Perimenopause Ageprint using Skin Visoelasticity under Progressive Suction / Gérald E Piérard, Claudine Piérard-Franchimont, Ulysse Gaspard, Philippe Humbert, Sébastien L Piérard
    Mechanobiology and Mechanotherapy for Skin Disorders / Chao-Kai Hsu, Rei Ogawa
    Mechanobiology and Mechanotherapy for Cutaneous Wound-Healing / Chenyu Huang, Yanan Du, Rei Ogawa
    Mechanobiology and Mechanotherapy for Cutaneous Scarring / Rei Ogawa, Chenyu Huang
    Mechanobiology and Mechanotherapy for the Nail / Hitomi Sano, Rei Ogawa
    Bioreactors / James R Henstock, Alicia J El Haj
    Cell Sensing of the Physical Properties of the Microenvironment at Multiple Scales / Julien E Gautrot
    Predictive Modeling in Musculoskeletal Mechanobiology / Hanifeh Khayyeri, Hanna Isaksson, Patrick J Prendergast
    Porous Bone Graft Substitutes / Charlie Campion, Karin A Hing
    Exploitation of Mechanobiology for Cardiovascular Therapy / Winston Elliott, Amir Keshmiri, Wei Tan.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Print
    Joshua Rueda.
    Summary: "Test Prep Books' Med Surg Certification Review Book: CMSRN(R) Study Guide and Medical Surgical (RN-BC(R)) Exam Prep with Practice Test Questions [5th Edition]"-- Amazon.com.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    RD99.25 .M437 2021
    1
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Retired Reference Periodicals (Downstairs)
    5
  • Print
    Jean F. MacFaddin.
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Reference (Upstairs)
    QR66.3 .M33
    1
  • Digital
    Giuliano Gentili, Mario Di Napoli.
    Summary: This atlas systematically reviews motor conduction studies of the median nerve, from pilot human studies in peripheral nerve conduction during the 1950s through to the most recent scientific evidence. Descriptions are provided of a wealth of motor nerve conduction techniques that were reproduced in the laboratory, including both the originally proposed methods and variants. The techniques are organized according to practical criteria for ease of reference. Attention is focused especially on those techniques which have shown higher sensitivity and specificity in the diagnosis of compressive mononeuropathies like carpal tunnel syndrome (CTS)and on the most widely accepted guidelines, recommendations, quality measures, and electrodiagnostic classifications. The volume is completed with a detailed, well-illustrated glossary explaining the more commonly used terms in electrodiagnostic medicine (EDX). The atlas is primarily intended for residents and professionals in Neurology, as well as rehabilitation physicians and clinical neurophysiologists. The detailed descriptions of techniques and their practical use will also make the book an invaluable tool for novices and clinical neurophysiology technicians.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    List of Abbreviations
    Synoptic Table
    Motor Conduction Studies Index (according to practical criteria)
    Part I Motor Conduction Studies, The Median Nerve
    Part II Motor Conduction Studies, Anterior Interosseous Nerve (motor branch of the median nerve)
    Glossary
    Subject Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Giuliano Gentili, Mario Di Napoli.
    Summary: This atlas systematically reviews sensory conduction studies of the median nerve, from pilot human studies in peripheral nerve conduction during the 1950s through to the most recent scientific evidence. Descriptions are provided of a wealth of sensory nerve conduction techniques that were reproduced in the laboratory, including both the originally proposed methods and variants. The methods are organized according to practical criteria for ease of reference. Attention is focused especially on those techniques which have shown higher sensitivity and specificity in the diagnosis of compressive mononeuropathies like carpal tunnel syndrome (CTS), and on the most widely accepted guidelines, recommendations, quality measures, and electrodiagnostic classifications. A detailed, well-illustrated glossary explains the more commonly used terms in electrodiagnostic medicine (EDX). The book is primarily intended for residents and professionals in Neurology, as well as rehabilitation physicians and clinical neurophysiologists. The detailed descriptions of techniques and their practical use will also make the book an invaluable tool for novices and clinical neurophysiology technicians.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    List of abbreviations
    Synoptic table
    Sensory conduction studies index (according to practical criteria)
    Part 1 Sensory conduction studies
    Part 2
    Glossary
    Subject Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Renato Franco, Federica Zito Marino, Antonio Giordano, editors.
    Summary: This book discusses the main approaches for mediastinal mass diagnosis and treatment, whose different aspects have been thoroughly treated by a multidisciplinary team of experts from different clinical fields. The complex anatomy of the mediastinum, as well as the different clinical, radiographic and prognostic features of mediastinal tumors suggests that specialists adopt more flexible and comprehensive practices, as highlighted in this text. The book includes a brief introductory section describing the anatomic sites of mediastinal masses and the epidemiological evidence for each different clinical-pathological entity. In particular, specific chapters are dedicated to thymic tumors, lymphomas, thyroid and parathyroid masses, and germ cell tumors of the anterior mediastinum.

    Contents:
    Mediastinum masses
    Anterior mediastinum masses
    Middle mediastinum masses
    Posterior mediastinum masses.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Neda Kalhor, Cesar Moran.
    Summary: This book provides a practical approach to the diagnosis of the diverse tumors that can be seen in the mediastinum. It discusses not only a historical perspective of what has been done in the past but also the assessments of those changes from experts in their fields. By doing so, the text aims to improve the treatment and assessment of patients with mediastinal tumors. This book focuses on daily practice, as pathologists are confronted with this type of pathology regularly. In some areas, it is inevitable that current practice calls for ancillary tests, including immunohistochemistry and molecular techniques. Mediastinal Pathology should be useful not only to general surgical pathologists or thoracic surgical pathologists, but also to thoracic surgeons, radiologists, and oncologist, who are called upon to care for patients with mediastinal tumors. .
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    contributors, H.G. Baumgarten ... [et al.] ; editor, G. Bertaccini.
    Contents:
    Part 1. Morphological basis and neurophysiological control
    Part 2. Endogenous and exogenous agents.
  • Digital
    Khan Muhammad Azaan, Gizem Ashraf, Hamza Ashraf, editors.
    Summary: Patient-healthcare worker communication is the cornerstone of an informed and patient-centered approach to healthcare. It is continually stressed throughout all aspects of medical training and practice, but this can be impaired by the myriad of medical jargon and complex pathophysiology required in explaining a patients condition. This book aims to provide a comprehensive reference of analogies which simplify and make the most common medical conditions that patients may question about or be afflicted with comprehensible. There is need for an efficient way to translate years of study and experiential learning from the doctor and healthcare professional to the patient. The book contains over 200 analogies that span across 19 chapters covering a wide variety of medicine specialties, including but not limited to cardiology, dermatology, endocrinology, gastroenterology, and more. Each chapter follows a consistent format: a condition is given, the analogy title for the condition is given, and then the analogy is explained in the body text. The authors took some of the most common encountered medical conditions and attributed them to digestible analogies that help bridge the gap between healthcare professional to patient. Medical Analogies for Clinician-Patient Communication: Innovative Strategies for Improving the Clinical Encounter serves as a fruitful reference for anyone wanting to communicate profoundly with their patients without forfeiting brevity. .

    Contents:
    Cardiology
    Dermatology
    Endocrinology
    Ear, nose and throat
    General practice
    Gastroenterology
    Haematology
    Infectious diseases
    Musculoskeletal system.-Nephrology
    Neurology
    Ophthalmology
    Paediatrics
    Peri- and post-operative care
    Psychology
    Respiratory
    Rhematology
    Womens health
    General Surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Summary: This book integrates topics in basic research and clinical medicine as well as molecular and cell biology. It presents innovative advances in the field of immunodeficiency syndromes and viral/bacterial respiratory infections, including a novel hyperbaric oxygen treatment for COVID-19. A comprehensive insight is offered into the unresolved molecular pathways in chemosensing that plays a vital role in detecting insufficient tissue oxygenation, as well as in sporting accomplishments. Other articles address cardiorespiratory and humoral responses to hypoxia, the function of cementum in the repair and regeneration of teeth, and periprosthetic fractures following hip arthroplasty in the elderly. The issue of the overwhelming burdens on caregivers to spinal injury patients, damaging both health and psychosocial status, is addressed. The book promotes translation of scientific advances to the general medical practice. It will be a valuable reference for clinical healthcare professionals and researchers interested in innovative practices to improve the prevention, diagnosis, and management of diseases.

    Contents:
    Role of IP3 Receptors in Shaping the Carotid Chemoreceptor Response to Hypoxia but not to Hypercapnia in the Rat Carotid Body: An Evidence Review
    The Role of Hyperbaric Oxygen Treatment for COVID-19: A Review
    Primary Immunodeficiencies
    Diseases of Children and Adults: A Review
    Pneumococcal Vaccine in Adult Asthma Patients
    Immunoglobulin G Deficiency in Children with Recurrent Respiratory Infections with and without History of Allergy
    Pruritus Characteristics in Severe Atopic Dermatitis in Adult Patients
    Pathophysiological Responses to a Record-Breaking Multi-Hour Underwater Endurance Performance: A Case Study
    Respiratory Muscle Strength and Ventilatory Function Outcome: Differences between Trained Athletes and Healthy Untrained Persons
    Uroflowmetry and Altitude Hypoxia: A Report from Healthy Italian Trekkers and Nepali Porters during Himalayan Expedition
    Effects of Intraligamentary Injection of Osteogenic-Induced Gingival Fibroblasts on Cementum Thickness in the Dog Model of Tooth Root Resorption
    In-Silico Evaluation of Treatment of Periprosthetic Fractures in Elderly Patients after Hip Arthroplasty
    Appraisal of burden of caregivers to chronically rehabilitated patients with spinal cord injuries in a tertiary neurological center in Nepal.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Brendan C. Stack, Donald L. Bodenner, editors ; Twlya B. Bartel, associate editor ; Andrew M. Hinson, assistant editor.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    senior editors, Joel Bozue, Christopher K. Cote, Pamela J. Glass.
    Contents:
    Historical overview: from poisoned darts to pan-hazard preparedness
    Epidemiology of biowarfare and bioterrorism
    Food, waterborne, and agricultural diseases
    Consequence management: the local and national response
    Medical management of potential biological casualties: a stepwise approach
    Anthrax
    Brucellosis
    Glanders
    Melioidosis
    Plague
    Tularemia
    Q fever
    Multidrug-resistant bacterial infections as a threat to the US military health system: acinetobacter infections as a case study
    Botulinum toxin
    Clostridium perfringens epsilon toxin
    Ricin
    Staphylococcal enterotoxin B and related toxins produced by staphylococcus aureus and streptococcus pyogenes
    Toxins from venoms and poisons
    Marine algal toxins of concern as intentional contaminants
    Alphavirus encephalitides
    Hemorrhagic fever-causing mammarenaviruses
    Henipaviruses
    Filoviruses
    Smallpox and related orthopox viruses
    Emerging infectious diseases and future threats
    Laboratory identification of threats
    Medical countermeasures
    Future prospects of vaccines and antibodies in biodefense
    Aerobiology: history, development, and programs
    Biosafety
    Biological surety
    Ethical issues in the development of drugs and vaccines for biodefense
    Abbreviations and acronyms.
    Digital Access R2Library 2007
  • Digital
    edited by S. Hossein Fatemi, Paula J. Clayton.
    Contents:
    The Mental Status Examination
    Syndromes of Brain Dysfunction Presenting with Cognitive Impairment or Behavioral Disturbance: Delirium, Dementia, and Mental Disorders Due to Another Medical Condition
    The Amnestic Syndrome
    Bipolar Illness
    Major Depressive Disorder
    Schizophrenia
    Schizoaffective and Schizophreniform Disorders
    Delusional Disorders
    Anxiety Disorders
    Obsessive Compulsive Disorder
    Somatizing and Dissociative Disorders
    Anorexia Nervosa and Bulimia Nervosa
    Antisocial Personality Disorder
    Alcoholism
    Drug Addiction
    Sexual Disorders: Dysfunction, Gender Identity and Paraphilias
    Other Psychiatric Syndromes: Adjustment Disorder, Factitious Disorder, Illicit Steroid Abuse, Cultural Syndromes
    ADHD and the Disruptive Behavior Disorders
    Mood Disorders in Children and Adolescents
    Autism Spectrum Disorder
    Childhood Anxiety Disorders and Obsessive-Compulsive Disorder
    Schizophrenia in Children and Adolescents
    Mood Disturbances
    Anxiety Symptoms
    Thought Disorder
    From Phenomenology to Strong Biologism and Epigenetics in Psychiatry
    Catatonia in Psychiatric Illnesses
    Personality Disorders
    Genetics of Psychiatric Disorders
    Novel Targets for Drug Treatment in Psychiatry
    Use of Laboratory in Psychiatry
    Epidemiology of Psychiatric Illness
    Suicide and Attempted Suicide
    Clinical Psychopharmacology
    Cognitive and Behavioral Therapies
    Forensic Psychiatry
    Sleep Disorders
    Neuromodulation in Psychiatry
    Rating Scales for Psychiatric Disorders
    Neuroimaging in Psychiatry
    Electroconvulsive Therapy: Indications, Use and Adverse Effects
    Profiles in History of Neuroscience and Psychiatry
    Normal Laboratory Values and Drug Therapeutic and Toxic Ranges.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Gustavo Blanco, Antonio Blanco.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Sankhavaram R. Panini.
    Summary: "Medical Biochemistry - An Illustrated Review - for success in the classroom and on the USMLE! High-yield, biochemical principles presented in a concise, easy-to-understand format with supporting summary tables 200 full-color illustrations of biochemical pathways that highlight associated disorders and drug targets 400 color-coded boxes that connect biochemical concepts with other basic sciences and clinical conditions 400 factual and USMLE-style questions with full explanations"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Nutrition and Digestion
    Carbohydrate Structure and Chemistry
    Lipid Structure and Chemistry
    Amino Acids and Proteins
    Biochemical Reactions and Enzymes
    Membranes and Transport.
    Cell Signaling
    Principles of Cellular Respiration
    Glycolysis and the Fate of Pyruvate
    Tricarboxylic Acid Cycle
    Oxidative Phosphorylation and Mitochondria
    Carbohydrate Metabolism
    Fatty Acid Metabolism
    Cholesterol and Steroid Metabolism
    Protein and Amino Acid Metabolism
    Nucleotide and Heme Metabolism
    DNA Replication and Repair Transcription
    Translation and Posttranslational Modifications
    Cell Cycle, Apoptosis, and Cancer
    Molecular Biotechniques.
  • Digital
    Joseph D. Fontes, Darla L. McCarthy.
    Contents:
    Chemical foundations : acid-base chemistry, buffers, and bioenergetics
    Chemistry of carbohydrates, lipids, proteins, and nucleotides
    Biochemical reactions and catalysis
    Protein structure and function
    The TCA cycle and oxidative phosphorylation
    Carbohydrate digestion and metabolism
    Fatty acid metabolism and lipid digestion
    Cholesterol and steroid metabolism
    Protein, amino acid, and one carbon metabolism
    Nucleotide, heme, and iron metabolism
    nutrition and integrated metabolism
    Cellular signaling and posttranslational modifications
    DNA replication and cell cycle
    DNA mutation and repair
    Gene transcription and RNA processing
    Protein translation
    Cell stress and death
    Biochemical and molecular techniques.
  • Digital/Print
    Deirdre Cooper Owens.
    Contents:
    Introduction. American gynecology and black lives
    The birth of American gynecology
    Black women's experiences in slavery and medicine
    Contested relations: slavery, sex, and medicine
    Irish immigrant women and American gynecology
    Historical black superbodies and the medical gaze
    Afterword.
    Digital Access EBSCOhost 2019
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: History - LC Classification (Downstairs)
    RG67.U6 C66 2017
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ClinicalKey
    ScienceDirect
    Print Access
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    54
  • Digital
    Elizabeth Roberts, MA Ed, CPC.
    Digital Access STAT!Ref 2018
    Limited to 2 simultaneous users
  • Print
    Jonathan S. Kahan, Michael S. Heyl.
    Contents:
    The framework for regulation of medical devices
    The 510(k) premarket notification process
    Device modifications requiring a 510(k) notice
    FDA regulation of medical device software and digital health technology
    The investigational device exemption application : overview of the IDE process and humanitarian devices
    Medical device clinical studies
    The premarket approval application
    Review of a premarket approval application
    PMA supplements
    Medical device reclassification
    The regulation of in vitro diagnostics
    The quality system regulation
    Compliance
    Medical device exports and imports
    Product jurisdiction and the regulation of combination products
    Working well with FDA.
    Print Unavailable: Checked out Recall Item
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    KF3827.M4 K34 2020
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Summary: "This fifth edition of the MEC is divided into two parts. Part I describes how the recommendations were developed and Part II contains the recommendations and describes how to use them" -- page 5.
    Digital Access WHO 2015
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    HQ766 .M48 2015
    1
  • Digital
    Vidal Haddad Junior.
    Summary: This is the second edition of the book originally published under the title Medical Emergencies Caused by Aquatic Animals: A Zoological and Clinical Guide. Including updated chapters, new content and additional references, it discusses follow-up with patients, describes diseases that are not emergencies and explains procedures that can take place at health stations and outpatient centers, focusing on clinical and biological aspects relevant to researchers and practitioners alike. The chapter on Invertebrate Aquatic Animals presents facts and advances that were left out of the first edition. In addition, it includes improved images. The subtopic on Cnidaria presents recent data on outbreaks and new species identification in unprecedented areas, with a timely discussion on first aid treatment. The chapter on Injuries by Vertebrate Aquatic Animals has been improved, based on continued work with bathers and fishermen. Featuring numerous images and representative clinical cases, it explores the most significant injuries caused by fish around the globe. The chapter on Ingestion of Aquatic Venomous Animals: Toxinology, Clinical Aspects, and Treatment discusses outbreaks of intoxication diseases from eating fish and seafood, drawing on reliable records of serial cases of Haff's syndrome, scombroidism and ciguatera. Further, it examines the indiscriminate consumption of aquatic animals, which the author argues present the same (or even greater) risks of poisoning and infections as terrestrial animals. Lastly, since there is a general lack of awareness of the risk of infections in aquatic environments, the chapter on Bacterial and Fungal Infections in Aquatic Environments describes the symptoms and treatments and highlights preventive measures.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Invertebrate Aquatic Animals.-Injuries caused by Vertebrate Aquatic Animals
    Ingestion of Aquatic Venomous Animals: Toxinology, Clinical Aspects, and Treatment
    Bacterial and Fungal Infections in Aquatic Environments.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Vidal Haddad Jr.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Invertebrate Aquatic Animals
    Injuries by Vertebrate Aquatic Animals-Phylum Chordata (Fish, Reptiles and Mammals)
    Ingestion of Aquatic Venomous Animals: Toxinology, Clinical Aspects and Treatment
    Bacterial and Fungi Infections in Aquatic Environments.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Stanley F. Malamed, DDS (Dentist Anesthesiologist, Emeritus Professor of Anesthesia and Medicine, Ostrow School of Dentistry, University of Southern California, Los Angeles, California).
    Summary: "Be prepared to prevent, recognize, and manage life-threatening medical emergencies! Medical Emergencies in the Dental Office, 8th Edition helps you learn the skills needed to manage health issues in the dental office or clinic. The text describes how to recognize and manage medical emergencies promptly and proactively and details the resources that must be on hand to effectively deal with these situations. Written by noted dentistry educator Dr. Stanley Malamed, this expert text includes the latest guidelines for drug-related emergencies, cardiac arrest, and more."--publisher's website.

    Contents:
    Half title
    Title page
    Copyright
    Dedication
    t Foreword
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    Introduction
    Prevention
    Preparation
    Legal considerations
    Unconsciousness: general considerations
    Vasodepressor syncope
    Postural hypotension
    Acute adrenal insufficiency
    Unconsciousness: differential diagnosis
    Respiratory distress: general considerations
    Foreign body ingestion and aspiration
    Hyperventilation
    Asthma
    Heart failure and acute pulmonary edema
    Respiratory distress: differential diagnosis
    Altered consciousness: general considerations
    Diabetes mellitus
    Thyroid gland dysfunction
    Cerebrovascular accident
    Altered consciousness: differential diagnosis
    Seizures
    Drug-related emergencies: general considerations
    Drug overdose reactions
    Allergy
    Drug-related emergencies: differential diagnosis
    Chest pain
    Stable ischemic heart disease - angina pectoris
    Acute coronary syndrome - myocardial infarction
    Chest pain: differential diagnosis
    Cardiac arrest
    Pediatric considerations
    Quick-reference section to life-threatening situations.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital/Print
    Greenberg, Raymond S.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessPharmacy
    AccessMedicine
    AccessMedicine
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RA650 .M489
    6
  • Digital
    Conrad Fischer, MD, Caterina Oneto, MD.
    Contents:
    Autonomy
    Competence and the capacity to make decisions
    Informed consent
    Confidentiality and medical records
    End-of-life issues
    Reproductive issues
    Organ and tissue donation
    Reportable illnesses
    Hiv-related issues
    Sexually transmitted diseases (STDs)
    Malpractice
    Doctor/patient relationship
    Doctor and society
    Doctor/doctor relationship
    Experimentation.
  • Digital
    Matjaž Zwitter.
    Summary: This book discusses medicine from an ethical perspective, whereas books on medical ethics more commonly present ethics from a bio-medical standpoint. The book is divided into 23 chapters. The introductory chapters present some basic concepts of medical ethics, such as the relation between the legal system and ethics, ethical documents, ethical theories, and ethical analysis. The following chapters address issues of importance in all fields of medicine: respecting autonomy, communication, relations within a healthcare team, professional malpractice, limited resources, and the portrait of a physician. In turn, the third part of the book focuses on ethical aspects in a broad range of medical activities - preventive medicine, human reproduction, genetics, pediatrics, intensive care, palliative medicine, clinical research, unproven methods in diagnostics and treatment, and the role of physicians who aren't directly responsible for patient care. The last part presents students' seminars with case stories. The book offers a valuable resource for physicians of all specialties, students of medicine, professionals, and students from other fields devoted to human health, journalists, and general readers with an interest in medicine.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Ethics and law
    Ethical codes and declarations
    Ethical theories
    Ethical analysis
    Autonomy and its limitations
    Communication
    Relations in health care teams
    Professional malpractice
    Limited resources, priorities, and corruption
    Image of a physician
    Preventive medicine
    Ethics at the beginning of life
    Paediatrics
    Genetics
    Emergency medicine and transplantation
    Elderly and psychiatric patients
    Dying and death
    Research
    Unproven methods of diagnostics and treatment
    Physicians beyond patient care
    Students' seminars.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Martin A. Finkel, Angelo P. Giardino.
    Summary: The fourth edition of this best-selling reference is a valuable resource to clinicians and child advocates serving children and families affected by suspicions of child sexual abuse.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2019
  • Digital
    Charles Fried ; edited by Franklin Miller and Alan Wertheimer.
    Summary: This new edition of Charles Fried's Medical Experimentation includes a general introduction by Franklin Miller and the late Alan Wertheimer, a reprint of the 1974 text, an in-depth analysis by Harvard Law School scholars I. Glenn Cohen and D. James Greiner, and a new essay by Fried reflecting on the original text and how it applies to the contemporary landscape of medicine and medical experimentation.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    Lynn B. Jorde, PhD, John C. Carey, MD, MPH, Michael J. Bamshad, MD.
    Summary: "Up to date and extensively revised to reflect recent advances in the genetics of common diseases, as well as current progress in gene therapy, Medical Genetics, 6th Edition, delivers easy-to-read, highly visual coverage of this rapidly changing field. This accessible, practical text integrates key concepts with clinical practice, highlighted by numerous illustrations, tables, concept summaries, and more - all designed to enhance effective learning and retention of complex material."--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2020
  • Print
    ed., by Sushila Gore [et al.].
    Contents:

    v. 1. Conception control.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    N236 .I61 1962
    1
  • Digital
    Manas Das.
    Contents:
    Section I. Biology
    Section II. Histology
    Section III. Embryology
    Section IV. Comprehensive Exam
    Index.
  • Digital
    Vinita Agarwal.
    Summary: With an increasing number of individuals living with chronic illness and pain, integrative approaches offering self-management support are needed. This book proposes a multi-layered framework integrating the body/self/environment that cultivates wholeness as an authentic embodied presence in alignment with a reflexive self.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    Chapter One The Wholeness Project
    Chapter Two A Social Constructionist Epistemology
    Chapter Three The Reflexive Self
    Chapter Four The Embodied Self
    Chapter Five The Discursive Body
    Chapter Six The Material Body
    Chapter Seven Time, Change, and Illness Intrusion
    Chapter Eight Traditional Health Systems
    Chapter Nine Food, Nature, and Body/Self-Integration
    References
    Index
    About the Author
  • Print
    Bleakley, Alan.
    Summary: This ground-breaking book sets out a fresh vision for a future medical education by providing a radical reconceptualisation of the purposes of medical humanities through a lens of critical health psychology and liberatory pedagogy. The medical humanities are conceived as translational media through which reductive, instrumental biomedicine can be raised in quality, intensity, and complexity by embracing ethical, aesthetic, political, and transcendental values. This translation occurs through innovative use of metaphor. A note of caution is offered - that the medical humanities too can be instrumental and reductive if not framed well. Drawing on major theorists such as MichelFoucault and Jacques Rancire and bringing together insights from diverse but inter-related fields, Bleakley focuses on the "ills" of contemporary biomedicine and medical education, and the need for reconceptualisation, which - it is argued - the translational medical humanities have the potential to accomplish. Current instrumental approaches to medical humanities, embracing communication skills training and narrative-based medicine, have failed to address the chronic symptoms suffered by medicine. These include resort to closed, functional systems thinking rather than embracing dynamic, complex, open, and adaptive systems thinking; lack of democratic habits in medical culture, compromising patient safety and care; the production of insensibility rather than deepening of sensibility in medical education; a lack of attention to ethics, aesthetics, and politics where the instrumental is privileged; and a lack of critical reflexivity in revisioning habitual practices. Through persuasive argument, Bleakley sets out a more radical manifesto for the role the arts and humanities might play in medical/healthcare education and offers a new approach based on curriculum process rather than syllabus content, to recuperate aesthetic sensibilities, discernment, and affect in medicine. The book will appeal to medical and healthcare educators, medical and health humanities scholars, engaged clinicians, social scientists drawing on critical theory, and arts and humanities practitioners engaging with medical and healthcare themes.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2023
  • Digital
    Howard Wainer.
    Contents:
    New York's cancer maps : what we don't know won't hurt us, it's what we do know that ain't
    A centenary celebration for Will Burtin : a pioneer of scientific visualization
    That's funny ...
    Commentary on some graphs in the 2008 National Healthcare Quality Report
    Improving graphic displays by controlling creativity
    Diabetes and the obesity : taking a better look at blood sugar as a start
    A second look at second opinions, with hip fractures as an example
    False positives, or, Is a pound of prevention worth an ounce of cure
    Assessing long-term risk with shorter-term data
    A remarkable horse : an inquiry into the accuracy of medical predictions
    On the role of replication in the advance of science : the survival of the fittist
    What does it take to change practice?
    Why is a raven like a writing desk? Musing on the power of convention.
  • Print
    by Paul Peck.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    H836 .P36 1960
    1
  • Digital
    [edited by] K.C. Santosh, Sameer Antani, D.S. Guru, Nilanjan Dey.
    Summary: The book discusses varied topics pertaining to advanced or up-to-date techniques in medical imaging using artificial intelligence (AI), image recognition (IR) and machine learning (ML) algorithms/techniques. Further, coverage includes analysis of chest radiographs (chest x-rays) via stacked generalization models, TB type detection using slice separation approach, brain tumor image segmentation via deep learning, mammogram mass separation, epileptic seizures, breast ultrasound images, knee joint x-ray images, bone fracture detection and labeling, and diabetic retinopathy. It also reviews 3D imaging in biomedical applications and pathological medical imaging.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Editors
    1. A novel stacked model ensemble for improved TB detection in chest radiographs
    2. The role of artificial intelligence (AI) in medical imaging: general radiologic and urologic applications
    3. Early detection of epileptic seizures based on scalp EEG signals
    4. Fractal analysis in histology classification of non-small cell lung cancer
    5. Multi-feature-based classification of osteoarthritis in knee joint X-ray images
    6. Detection and classification of non-proliferative diabetic retinopathy lesions
    7. Segmentation and analysis of CT images for bone fracture detection and labeling
    8. A systematic review of 3D imaging in biomedical applications
    9. Review on the evolution of comprehensive information for digital sliding of pathology and medical image segmentation
    10. Pathological medical image segmentation: a quick review based on parametric techniques
    Index.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2020
  • Digital
    Aarthi Ramlaul, editor.
    Summary: This exciting new book equips radiography students and practitioners with the key skills and strategies required to undertake research within medical imaging and radiotherapy and to disseminate the research findings effectively. Quantitative and qualitative research methods are covered, with guidance provided on the entire research process, from literature researching, information management and literature evaluation through to data collection, data analysis, and writing up. Attention is drawn to sampling errors and other potential sources of bias, and the conduct of randomized controlled trials, systematic reviews, and meta-analyses are clearly explained. Specific instruction is given on the structure and presentation of dissertations, writing journal articles for publication, and the dissemination of research findings at conferences. Information on patient and public involvement in research and research funding bodies are also provided with advice on how to maximize the likelihood of success when submitting applications for funding.

    Contents:
    Section 1 Getting started with research
    1 History of research
    2 FINDING A RESEARCH QUESTION
    3 Literature searching
    4 Literature evaluation and critique
    5 Reflective practice and the patient voice
    6 Ethical considerations
    Section 2 Research planning
    7 Planning your research study
    8 Types of information
    9 Epidemiological research methods
    10 Sampling errors, bias and objectivity
    11 Research outcome measures
    Section 3 Health technology assessment
    12 Health technology assessment
    Section 4 Dosimetry and service evaluation
    13 Dosimetry
    14 Clinical audit
    Section 5 Data analysis
    15 Quantitative methods and analysis
    16 Qualitative analysis
    Section 5 Data analysis
    15 Quantitative methods and analysis
    16 Qualitative analysis
    Section 6 Writing up and disseminating
    17 Dissertation structure and presentation
    18 Writing for publication and presenting at conferences
    19 Applying for research funding
    20 Research writing: tips and common.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Sukru Mehmet Erturk, Tomoaki Ichikawa, Suzan Saylisoy, editors.
    Summary: This volume highlights and broadens our understanding of the correct use and the possible contraindications of contrast agents applied in radiology. Written by experts in the field, it not only focuses on the chemistry, physiochemical properties and pharmacokinetics of both iodinated and gadolinium-containing contrast agents, but also on the relevant safety issues such as frequency of their short- and long-term side effects and ways to avoid them nephrotoxicity risk related to the iodinated contrast agents NSF (nephrogenic systemic fibrosis) accumulation of gadolinium in the brain use of contrast agents in pediatric patients and pregnancy It also includes essential data on the use of contrast agents, such as scanning protocols, in the context of various clinical conditions. This comprehensive manual addresses all professionals involved in radiological imaging and is an invaluable tool for radiologists and technologists, as well as for residents and clinicians.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Colin G. Miller, Joel Krasnow, Lawrence H. Schwartz, editors.
    Summary: Medical Imaging in Clinical Trials is a key text in understanding the methodology and the metrics that are required in the field of medical imaging. As the pharmaceutical, biotech and medical device industries continue to identify ways to improve and speed up product development, medical imaging plays a more significant role. Medical Imaging in Clinical Trials aims to educate and provide a hands-on text for those involved in clinical trials and either new to medical imaging and having to assimilate it into clinical trials or requiring to understand the key differences between clinical trial imaging and routine clinical imaging. It is targeted to those professionals involved in clinical trials at the clinical research site, pharmaceutical and medical device industries, and regulators. This is not the "how to image" book written for the radiologist or Radiological Technologist, but covers the critical aspects of clinical trial methodology that are important for these individuals to understand. This book addresses the ethics and radiation dosages of the different modalities, the end points commonly used for the different trial phases, the acquisition and analysis techniques, as well as the logistics management of medical imaging and the role of the central imaging lab or imaging core lab (ICL) which is now the standard requirement for clinical trials. Furthermore this text delves into the details of the major therapeutic areas where medical imaging plays a primary or secondary efficacy or safety end point.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Victor I. Mikla and Victor V. Mikla.
    Contents:
    1. Advances in imaging from the first X-ray images
    2. Computed tomography
    3. Physics of magnetic resonance imaging
    4. Positron emission tomography
    5. X-ray detectors
    6. Effects of charge carrier trapping on detector performance
    7. Ultrasound imaging
    8. Raman spectroscopy in medicine.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Print
    Society of Actuaries and Association of Life Insurance Medical Directors of America.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Retired Reference (Downstairs)
    HG8784.U6 M4
    1
  • Digital
    Alain Venot, Anita Burgun, Catherine Quantin, editors.
    Summary: Over the years, medical informatics has matured into a true scientific discipline. Fundamental and applied aspects are now taught in various fields of health, including medicine, dentistry, pharmacy, nursing and public health. Medical informatics is also often included in the curricula of many other disciplines, including the life sciences, engineering and economics. Medical informatics is a complex and rapidly changing discipline. Relatively few books have been published on the subject, and they rapidly become obsolete. This book is the fruit of a collaborative effort between authors teaching medical informatics in France and others who are conducting research in this field. In addition, an international perspective was pursued, as reflected in the inclusion of various developments and actions in both the USA and Europe. This book is divided into 18 chapters, all of which include learning objectives, recommendations for further reading, exercises and bibliographic references.

    Contents:
    Medical Informatics as a scientific discipline
    Medical vocabulary, terminological resources, health information coding
    The management and dissemination of knowledge in Healthcare
    The representation of the patient data in the health information systems and the electronic medical record
    Medical Image processing: principles, main applications and prospects
    Augmented Medical Interventions : Surgetics and Robotics
    Clinical diagnostic decision making support
    Therapeutic decision making support
    Medico-economic decision making support
    Public health decision making
    Security, legal and ethical aspects of computerized health data
    Clinical Information Systems in hospitals
    Shared medical records
    Computerizing the medical office
    Computerizing the dental office
    Computerizing the pharmacy
    The development of E-Health
    Translational Medical Informatics
    Human Factors and Ergonomics for Medical Informatics.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital/Print
    Steven A. Cole, Julian Bird.
    Summary: The Medical Interview by Drs. Steven A. Cole and Julian Bird equips you to communicate effectively with your patients so you can provide optimal care! This best-selling, widely adopted resource presents a practical, systematic approach to honing your basic interviewing skills and managing common challenging communicating situations. Its Three-Function Approach - "Build the Relationship," "Assess and Understand," and Collaborative Management" offers straightforward tasks, behaviors, and skills that can be easily mastered, making this an ideal learning tool for beginners and a valuable reference for experienced healthcare professionals. Effectively meet a full range of communication challenges including language and cultural barriers, sexual issues, elderly patients, breaking bad news, and non-adherence.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2014
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
  • Digital
    Huma Fatima
    Summary: "Medical Kidney Diseases: Morphology-Based Novel Approach to Renal Biopsy is designed to provide brief and concise yet comprehensive information for practicing pathologists, pathology residents, and nephrology fellows. It presents a simple and practical approach to renal biopsy by providing a pertinent differential diagnosis related to various patterns of injuries involving renal parenchyma by light microscopy and reaching a correct diagnosis by assimilating immunofluorescence and electron microscopy findings. The book is divided into four sections: glomerular, vascular, tubulointerstitial, and transplant renal pathology. It is further divided into subsections based on the particular pattern of injury by light microscopy. A differential diagnosis is followed by real-life cases taken from the author’s practice, illustrated by numerous photomicrographs. It includes up-to-date classification schemes for membranoproliferative glomerulonephritis (MPGN) and focal segmental glomerulosclerosis (FSGS) variants as well as Banff 97 criteria for acute cellular rejection and International Society of Nephrology/Renal Pathology Society (ISN/RPS) classification of lupus nephritis."-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Pattern of glomerular lesions
    Vascular lesions
    Tubulointerstitial lesions
    Renal transplant pathology
    List of acronyms
  • Digital
    Geraldine MacCarrick.
    Summary: Using a case-based approach, Medical Leadership and Management uses internationally recognized competency frameworks to support knowledge acquisition and skills relevant to medical management and leadership. The text and supporting cases studies describe key medical management and leadership competencies, illustrating the theoretical and practical aspects of these competencies in the healthcare setting. With 23 years in clinical, teaching and health administration, Dr Geraldine MacCarrick has extensive knowledge of the education and training issues facing the medical profession. Despite lack of formal training, doctors worldwide are increasingly assuming greater leadership and management roles in healthcare. Effective medical leadership is recognized as essential for improving the performance of health services, enhancing the wellbeing of patients and the quality of outcomes. Medical Leadership and Management is of interest to all medical educators interested in supporting their students to acquire leadership and management skills in preparation for graduation and beyond.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2.Professional Leadership and Management in Medicine
    3. The Effective Medical Manager. -4. Expertise in Medical Management
    5. The Adaptable Communicator
    6. The Creative Collaborator
    7. The Active Advocate
    8. The Resourceful Scholar .
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    James E. Szalados, editor.
    Summary: The Medical-Legal Aspects of Acute Care Medicine: A Resource for Clinicians, Administrators, and Risk Managers is a comprehensive resource intended to provide a state-of-the-art overview of complex ethical, regulatory, and legal issues of importance to clinical healthcare professionals in the area of acute care medicine; including, for example, physicians, advanced practice providers, nurses, pharmacists, social workers, and care managers. In addition, this book also covers key legal and regulatory issues relevant to non-clinicians, such as hospital and practice administrators; department heads, educators, and risk managers. This text reviews traditional and emerging areas of ethical and legal controversies in healthcare such as resuscitation; mass-casualty event response and triage; patient autonomy and shared decision-making; medical research and teaching; ethical and legal issues in the care of the mental health patient; and, medical record documentation and confidentiality. Furthermore, this volume includes chapters dedicated to critically important topics, such as team leadership, the team model of clinical care, drug and device regulation, professional negligence, clinical education, the law of corporations, tele-medicine and e-health, medical errors and the culture of safety, regulatory compliance, the regulation of clinical laboratories, the law of insurance, and a practical overview of claims management and billing. Authored by experts in the field, The Medical-Legal Aspects of Acute Care Medicine: A Resource for Clinicians, Administrators, and Risk Managers is a valuable resource for all clinical and non-clinical healthcare professionals.

    Contents:
    Morality, Ethics, the Foundations of the American Legal System, and Ethical Challenges in the Digital Age
    Traditional and Applied Clinical Ethics: Contemporary and Evolving Challenges
    The Ethics and Laws Governing Informed Decision-Making in Healthcare: Informed Consent, Refusal, and Discussions Regarding Resuscitation and Life Sustaining Treatment
    The Laws and Regulations Governing Hospitals and Healthcare Entities
    The Timeline of a Medical Malpractice Lawsuit
    Regulation of Provider Practice: State Oversight, Licensing, Credentialing, Peer Review and the National Practitioner Databank
    Laws and Liability Relating to the Education and Supervision of Trainees and Allied Health Professionals
    The Science of Teamwork in Healthcare: Importance to Patient Outcome
    Medical Error, Quality Management, and the Evolving Culture of Safety
    Laws Pertaining to Insurance and Risk Management
    Overview of the Claims Submission, Medical Billing and Revenue Cycle Management Processes
    Regulations and Regulatory Compliance: False Claims Act, Kickback and Stark laws, and HIPAA
    Medical Records and Confidentiality: Evolving Liability Issues Inherent In The Electronic Health Record, HIPAA, and Cybersecurity
    The Legal and Regulatory Components of Tele-ICU Care
    Digital Technologies in Healthcare: Opportunities and Risk for Health Systems and Pro-viders
    The Laws of Professional Negligence: What is Malpractice and How Does Litigation Work?
    Legal Reasoning: Why the Law and its Application are Confusing to Medical Providers
    Ethical Conflicts and Legal Liability in Professional Nursing
    Criminal Statutes Affecting Medical Providers
    Ethical and Legal Issues in Contemporary Pharmacy Practice: Scope of Practice, Drug Use Stewardship, Medical Error Management, and Teamwork
    Legal Issues in Mental Health Relevant to Acute Care Practice
    Clinical Labs: CLIA and other Evolving Challenges
    Social Work, Care Managers, Physician Advisors: Liability Related to Discharge Planning and Continuity of Care
    Employment and Human Resources Law: An Overview
    Anatomy of Healthcare Contracts: Pitfalls and Avoidance of Liability
    Corporate and Partnership Structures used in Healthcare Entity Formation
    Corporate and Partnership Structures used in Healthcare Entity Formation
    Statutory Controls and Regulation of Pharmaceuticals and Medical Devices
    Ethical Principles and Laws Governing Clinical Research
    State of Emergency: The Laws Governing Natural Disasters and other Mass Casualty Incidents
    New and Evolving Frontiers in Resuscitation: Ethical and Legal Concerns
    Defining Standards of Care and the Role of Expert Testimony in Jurisprudence
    The Second Victim in Medical Malpractice Litigation: the Stress of Litigation
    Liability for Advanced Care Practitioners.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Marcia M. Boumil (Professor of Public Health and Community Medicine, Tufts Univesity School of Medicine), Paul A. Hattis (Associate Professor of Public Heath and Community Medicine, Tufts University School of Medicine).
    Summary: "Reliable source on medical liability law. Written by experts in the field, this Nutshell offers insight on establishing professional relationships and examines negligence-based claims, intentional torts, causation, damages, affirmative defenses, limitations, immunities, and liabilities. It also provides an overview of medical care liability issues affecting hospitals and managed care organizations." -- Publisher.

    Contents:
    Establishing the professional relationship
    Negligence-based claims
    Intentional torts
    Informed decision making
    Causation and damages
    Affirmative defenses, limitations and immunities
    Vicarious liability and strict liability
    Liability of health care institutions
    Review of care and reform of liability.
    Digital Access EBSCO 2017
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    C. Laird Birmingham, Janet Treasure.
    Summary: Now in its third edition, the Medical Management of Eating Disorders is the definitive text on the diagnosis and general management of patients with anorexia nervosa, bulimia nervosa, binge eating disorder and other related eating disorders. Providing up-to-date information and research on world-class treatments, this book helps health care professionals understand how to treat eating disorders and other subsequent medical complications that arise as a result of the patient's disorder. Each chapter begins with 'Study Questions' to focus the reader and put the relevant information into perspective, and concludes with 'Implications for Health Care Professionals' to summarise the key learnings of the chapter. 'Patient Information' sections are also included to give examples of how the topics covered can be presented to patients and families. This text is essential reading for all health care professionals involved in the care and management of patients with eating disorders.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2019
  • Digital
    Aniyizhai Annamalai.
    Summary: This book is a practical guide for psychiatrists to use when treating patients for medical issues. Over the past 10-20 years, the number of medications prescribed for psychiatric illnesses has steadily increased, and psychiatric practitioners are frequently called upon to manage medical issues and side effects that result from psychotropic treatment. Covering a wide range of conditions from thyroid disorders to cardiac disease, this book is a helpful resource for understanding common adverse medical effects that occur when psychotropic drugs are administered. Presented in a practical format, each chapter discusses management of a particular medical problem or side effect and then provides a summary and flowchart of the major points highlighted in that chapter. Each chapter contains an overview of key medications causing a particular side effect. The book also includes special topics such as psychotropic prescribing in medical illness and tips on electrocardiographic interpretation. This easy-to-reference book aims to bridge the gap between medicine and psychiatry by elaborating on medical conditions seen in routine outpatient psychiatric practice. It serves as an invaluable tool for mental health providers, nurses, health educators, and pharmacologists alike.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Samoon Ahmad, Kevin page Hill.
    Summary: This timely handbook presents today's available information on cannabis and its uses in all areas of patient care. "Medical Marijuana: A Clinical Handbook" summarizes what is currently known about the positive and negative health impacts of cannabis, detailed pharmacological profiles of both THC and CBD, considerations for each medical specialty, treatment approaches used by practicing clinicians, and insights into the history of cannabis and the current regulatory environment in the United States. This concise, easy-to-navigate guide is an invaluable resource for physicians and residents, nurse practitioners, pharmacists, and other clinicians who seek reliable clinical guidelines in this growing area of health care. -- From publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Cannabis: an introduction
    The history of cannabis
    The classification of cannabis
    Constituents of cannabis
    U.S. cannabis regulations from past to present
    The endocannabinoid system
    The pharmacology of cannabis
    The pharmacodynamics of cannabis
    Commonly encountered preparations
    Endocrinology
    Oncology
    Gastroenterology
    Neurology
    Psychiatry
    Gynecology
    Rheumatology
    Internal medicine/primary care
    Ophthalmology
    Hepatology
    Dermatology
    Cannabis use disorder
    Adverse effects.
    Digital Access Ovid 2021
  • Digital
    Patrick R. Murray, Ken S. Rosenthal, Michael A. Pfaller.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Michael R. Barer, Will Irving, Andrew Swann, Nelun Perera.
    Summary: "Medical microbiology concerns the nature, distribution and activities of microbes and their impact on health and wellbeing. In spite of the introduction of many antimicrobial agents and immunisations, we continue to face major challenges in combatting infection, not least the gathering crisis in antimicrobial resistance. Now in a fully revised and updated 19th edition, Medical Microbiology provides comprehensive coverage of infection from the microbial perspective, combining a clear introduction to key principles with a focus explicitly geared to modern clinical practice. It provides ideal coverage for medical and biomedical students - with 'Key Points' boxes throughout to highlight the essentials - and sufficient detail to also inform specialists in training"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Section 1: Microbial biology. Microbiology and medicine
    Morphology and nature of micro-organisms
    Bacterial identification and systematics (classification, identification and typing of micro-organisms)
    Bacterial growth, physiology and death
    Antimicrobial agents and antimicrobial susceptibility testing
    Bacterial genetics
    Virus-cell interactions
    Section 2: Infection and immunity. Innate and adaptive immunity
    Immunity in infection
    Bacterial pathogenicity
    The human microbiome and the natural history of infection
    Section 3: Bacterial pathogens and associated diseases. Staphylococcus
    Streptococcus and Enterococcus
    Coryneform bacteria, Listeria and Erysipelothrix
    Bacillus
    Shigella and Escherichia
    Salmonella
    Klebsiella, Enterobacter, Proteus and other enterobacteria
    Yersinia
    Campylobacter and Helicobacter
    Vibrio
    Pseudomonads and non-fermenters
    Haemophilus
    Bordetella
    Legionella
    Neisseria and Moraxella
    Mycobacterium
    Other actinobacteria
    Clostridium
    Non-sporing anaerobes
    Brucella, Bartonella and Streptobacillus
    Treponema And Borrelia
    Leptospira: Leptospirosis; Weil's Disease
    Chlamydia
    Mycoplasmas
    Rickettsia, Orientia, Ehrlichia, Anaplasma and Coxiella
    Section 4: Viral pathogens and associated diseases. Adenoviruses
    Herpesviruses
    Poxviruses
    Papillomaviruses
    Polyomaviruses
    Hepadnaviruses
    Parvoviruses
    Picornaviruses
    Orthomyxoviruses
    Paramyxoviruses
    Arboviruses: alphaviruses, flaviviruses and bunyaviruses
    Hepaciviruses
    Hepeviruses
    Arenaviruses and filoviruses
    Reoviruses
    Retroviruses
    Caliciviruses and astroviruses
    Coronaviruses
    Rhabdoviruses
    Togaviruses
    Prion diseases
    Section 5: Fungal pathogens, parasitic infections and medical entomology. Fungi
    Protozoa
    Helminths
    Arthropods
    Section 6: Diagnosis, treatment and control of infection. Infective syndromes
    Diagnostic procedures
    Molecular methods in diagnostic microbiology
    Management of antimicrobial chemotherapy
    Epidemiology and control of community infections
    Hospital infection
    Immunization.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    Melphine M. Harriott, Michelle Swanson-Mungerson, Samia Ragheb, Matthew P. Jackson.
    Contents:
    General immunology / Alexander S. Maris, Samia Ragheb, and Thomas C. Bolig
    Inflammation / Samia Ragheb
    Autoimmune disease / Samia Ragheb
    Immunodeficiency disorders / Michelle Swanson-Mungerson
    Hypersensitivity reactions / Michelle Swanson-Mungerson
    Transplant rejection and cancer immunology / Michelle Swanson-Mungerson
    General microbiology / Melphine M. Harriott, Thomas C. Bolig, and Matthew P. Jackson
    Nervous system infections / Melphine M. Harriott
    Head, neck, and respiratory infections / Matthew P. Jackson, Alexander S. Maris, Melphine M. Harriott, and Thomas C. Bolig
    Infections of the esophagus, stomach, small and large bowel/rectum, liver, and biliary tree / Melphine M. Harriott
    Renal and urinary tract infections / Melphine M. Harriott
    Reproductive and sexually transmitted infections / Melphine M. Harriott
    Congenital and neonatal infections / Melphine M. Harriott
    Skin, soft tissue, and musculoskeletal infections / Matthew P. Jackson and Melphine M. Harriott
    Cardiovascular, systemic, lymph nodes, and multisystem infections / Melphine M. Harriott, Matthew P. Jackson, and Michelle Swanson-Mungerson.
  • Digital
    Jonathan Leo.
    Summary: This book provides medical students with the information to build skills that will aid them in studying for any level of their board exams. It also prepares students with the ability to look at a patient's neurological signs and symptoms, logically think through the various tracts, and determine where a lesion is located. Unique and comprehensive, this textbook specifically fills a gap in the literature for medical students studying for their board exams and those about to go on a neuro-related rotation. Written by a renowned professor with over 25 years of teaching experience specific to board exam preparation, chapters are crafted with the goal of aiding students in understanding concepts by explaining the reasoning behind signs and symptoms, rather than pure memorization. Medical Neuroanatomy for the Boards and the Clinic is the go-to book for students seeking a practical yet nuanced reference for board exam preparation.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Chapter One. The Three Long Tracts in the Spinal Cord and Brainstem
    Chapter Two. Spinal Cord
    Chapter Three. Spinal Cord Lesions
    Chapter Four. Nystagmus and Lateral Gaze.-Chapter Five. Vestibulocochlear Nerve
    Chapter Six. Visual Fields
    Chapter Seven. Autonomics
    Chapter Eight. Facial Nerve
    Chapter Nine. Thinking Clinically about the Brainstem
    Chapter Ten. Cerebellum
    Chapter Eleven. Basal Ganglia
    Chapter Twelve. Thalamus
    Chapter Thirteen. Limbic Circuit
    Chapter Fourteen. More on Brainstem Lesions
    Chapter Fifteen. Cranial Nerve Three In-Depth
    Chapter Sixteen. Cerebral Cortex
    Chapter Seventeen. Blood Supply
    Chapter Eighteen. Fibers, Reflexes, and Radiculopathies .
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Peggy Mason.
    Summary: This textbook guides the medical student, regardless of background or intended specialty, through the anatomy and function of the human nervous system. In writing specifically for medical students, the author concentrates on the neural contributions to common diseases, whether neurological or not, and omits topics without clinical relevance.

    Contents:
    Section 1 Introduction to Medical Neurobiology.
    1. Introduction to the Nervous System.
    2. Cells of the Nervous System: Neurons and Glia.
    Section 2 Neuroanatomy.
    3. Developmental Overview of Central Neuroanatomy: The Tube Within the Brain.
    4. Spinal Cord: Conduit Between Body and Brain.
    5. Cranial Nerves and Cranial Nerve Nuclei.
    6. The Versatile Brainstem.
    7. Forebrain: Action, Perception, Emotion, and Thought.
    8. Following the Nutrients: Blood Supply, Blood-Brain Barrier, and Ventricles.
    Section 3 Neural Communication.
    9. The Neuron at Rest.
    10. Electrical Communication Within a Neuron.
    11. Neurotransmitter Release.
    12. Synthesis, Packaging, and Termination of Neurotransmitters.
    13. Receiving the Synaptic Message.
    Section 4 Perception.
    14. Perceiving the World.
    15. Seeing the World.
    16. Audition: Communication Portal.
    17. Somatosensation: From Movement to Pain.
    18. The Vestibular Sense: Balance and Equilibrium.
    19. Gaze Control.
    Section 5 Motor Control.
    20. Voluntary Motor Control.
    21. The Motor Unit and Orderly Recruitment.
    22. Reflexes and Gait.
    23. From Movement to Action: Postural Stability, Orienting, and Praxis.
    24. Cerebellum.
    25. Basal Ganglia: Action Selection.
    Section 6 Homeostasis.
    26. Introduction to Homeostasis.
    27. Homeostatic Systems: Staying Alive.
    Section 7 You and the Brain.
    28. The Brain in a Physician's Life.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    Manas Das, Lee A. Baugh.
    Summary: "Thieme Test Prep for the USMLE: Medical Neuroscience by Manas Das and Lee Baugh fills a void in available board prep materials with its focus on neuroscience. Readers will learn to recall, analyze, integrate, and apply biochemical and molecular biological knowledge to solve clinical problems. Key Highlights ʺ Approximately 520 USMLE-style multiple choice questions on neuroscience, classified as easy, moderate, and difficult, with detailed explanations ʺ Questions cover clinical neurology as well as basics of neuroscience such as development, structure, and function ʺ Chapters are organized based on neuroanatomical structure and systems, from the spinal cord to the automatic nervous system ʺ Neuroimaging section and final exam chapter are invaluable tools for students to utilize before the boards ʺ Questions begin with a clinical vignette, and approximately 35% are image-based, mirroring the USMLEʼ format This essential resource will help you assess your knowledge and fully prepare for the USMLE Step 1 or COMLEX Level 1 exam"--Provided by publisher.
  • Digital/Print
    Eade, Peter.
    Contents:
    fasc. 1. Notes on diphtheria; and particularly on this disease as it has occurred in Norfolk
    fasc. 2. Influenza in East Anglia, 1847, 1878, 1890, 1891.
    Digital Access Google Books 1883-<1891>
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L138 .E11 1883
    1
  • Digital
    Márcia R. F. Campiolo.
    Contents:
    Chapter 1 Introduction
    Chapter 2 The World Today
    Understanding how the client Arrived to the Current Profile
    Chapter 3 The Doctor's Office Clients
    Chapter 4 Ensuring Customer Loyalty: The Challenge of a Long-Lasting and Stable Relationship.
    Chapter 5 Selecting New Members for the Clinic's Staff: The Search for New Talents
    Chapter 6 The Preparation of the Clinic's Staff
    Chapter 7 Basic Areas of Customer Service in Medical Clinics
    Chapter 8 The Process of Communicating with the Client
    Chapter 9 Managing the Client's Time Perception
    Chapter 10 Pearls of Wisdom in Customer Service
    Real-Life Stories.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Kanani E. Titchen, Elizabeth Miller, editors.
    Summary: Human trafficking is an increasingly large issue in medicine, particularly for the adolescent population. The pubertal and neurologic development of early- and mid-adolescence may serves as a foothold for trauma bonds and human trafficking. To date, there are few case studies of human trafficking in the medical literature. More often, these cases are missed, and human trafficking patients are unlikely to disclose their victimization to their physicians for multiple reasons. As a result, physicians fail to ask key questions and fail to notice important red flags for human trafficking. Research shows that this is primarily due to a lack of medical training and awareness and a resultant denial on the part of many physicians that victims of human trafficking present to their clinics or specialties. This book provides clinicians with a case-based guide to scenarios they may encounter in their practice that involve human trafficking. These cases include those involving sex trafficking and labor trafficking; male and female and transgender victims; victims from a range of racial, ethnic, geographic and socioeconomic backgrounds; as well as presentations of adolescent and young adult victims to fields such as adolescent medicine, general pediatrics, neonatology, rheumatology, transplant medicine, and obstetrics-gynecology, in addition to the stereotypical presentations to emergency departments. Each case is followed by a discussion that highlights key aspects of human trafficking in adolescent and young adult patients. These discussions also reference the growing body of research on human trafficking, orient the reader to medico-legal aspects of reporting human trafficking in the adolescent and young adult populations, and feature useful questions, exercises, and resources to promote discussion among those medical professionals who interact with adolescent medicine and young adult patients. Written by physicians, legal advocates and lawyers, Medical Perspectives on Human Trafficking in Adolescents is the definitive guide for all clinicians who care for adolescent patients. It is also a useful resource for mental health professionals and social workers.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1 Human Trafficking: Definitions, Epidemiology, and Shifting Ground
    chapter 2 Adolescent Medicine: Physical and Neurocognitive Development
    chapter 3 Human Rights and Human Trafficking of Adolescents: Legal and Clinical Perspectives
    chapter 4 Medical Perspectives on Human Trafficking in Adolescent Sex Trafficking: A Review
    chapter 5 Medical Perspectives on Human Trafficking in Adolescent Sex Trafficking: A Review
    chapter 6 Technology/Sexting/Social Media
    chapter 7 Child Abuse
    chapter 8 Human Trafficking in the Foster Care System
    chapter 9 The Psychiatric Patient
    chapter 10 Human Trafficking in Adolescents and Young Adults with Co-Existing Disordered Eating Behaviors
    chapter 11 LGBTQIA+ Youth and Human Trafficking
    chapter 12 Homelessness, Unstable Housing, and the Adolescent Patient
    chapter 13 The Patient with Substance Use
    chapter 14 Human Trafficking in Suburban and Rural America
    chapter 15 Boys Are Trafficked Too?
    chapter 16 Surgery and ObGyn: Beyond the Chief Complaint
    chapter 17 The Subspecialties
    chapter 18 Medicolegal Aspects and Mandatory Reporting
    chapter 19 Survivor Insights
    chapter 20 Educating Our Students
    chapter 21 Building Resilience and Fostering Prevention.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Derek G. Waller, Anthony Sampson, Andrew Hitchings.
    Summary: Medical Pharmacology & Therapeutics provides all the information medical and healthcare students need throughout their degree programme and beyond, including for professional qualifications such as the PSA. This all-round textbook covers basic pharmacology through to drug prescribing in clinical contexts, covering the pathogenic mechanisms of disease; drug actions, side effects, and the therapeutic principles of drug use. It takes a helpful systems-based approach that orders information according to body systems and disease areas, rather than by drug class. Now in its sixth edition, the book has been fully updated to include latest scientific understanding of drug action and administration and current best practice in prescribing medications, informed by the latest national guidelines. A clinical focus throughout - suitable for medical, nursing and other healthcare students throughout their training Thorough update of clinically-relevant medicines to ensure best practice Information aligned with the British National Formulary (BNF), NICE guidelines and relevant professional benchmarks Comprehensive drug compendia allow all drugs to be identified and placed within their respective classes Extensive self-assessment questions to support learning and revision New to this edition Expanded discussion of the pathophysiology and management of shock Revised discussion of the management of chronic pain Consideration of treatment of Covid-19 Expanded discussion of the pathophysiology and management of shock Revised discussion of the management of chronic pain Consideration of treatment of Covid-19
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2022
  • Digital
    [edited by] Walter F. Boron, Emile L. Boulpaep.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Rodney A. Rhoades, David R. Bell.
    Contents:
    Part I. Cellular physiology. Medical physiology: an overview
    Cell signaling, membrane transport, and membrane potential
    Part II. Neuromuscular physiology. Action potential, synaptic transmission, and nerve function
    Sensory physiology
    Motor system
    Autonomic nervous system
    Integrative functions of the central nervous system
    Skeletal and smooth muscle
    Part III. Blood and immunology. Blood composition and function
    Immunology, organ interaction, and homeostasis
    Part IV. Cardiovascular physiology. Overview of the cardiovascular system and hemodynamics
    Electrical activity of the heart
    Cardiac muscle mechanics and the cardiac pump
    The systemic circulation
    Microcirculation and lymphatic system
    Special circulations
    Control mechanisms in cardiovascular function
    Part V. Respiratory physiology. Ventilation and the mechanics of breathing
    Gas transfer and transport
    Pulmonary circulation and ventilation/perfusion
    Control of ventilation
    Part VI. Renal physiology and body fluids. Kidney function
    Regulation of fluid and electrolyte balance
    Acid-base homeostasis
    Part VII. Gastrointestinal physiology. Gastrointestinal system functions
    Liver functions and immune surveillance
    Motility and gastrointestinal regulation
    Part VIII. Temperature regulation and exercise physiology. Regulation of body temperature
    Exercise physiology
    Part IX. Endocrine physiology. Endocrine control mechanisms
    Hypothalmus and the pituitary gland
    Thyroid gland
    Adrenal gland
    Endocrine pancreas
    Endocrine regulation of calcium, phosphate, and bone homeostasis
    Part X. Reproductive physiology. Male reproductive system
    Female reproductive system
    Fertilization, pregnancy, and fetal development
    Appendix A: common abbreviations in physiology
    Appendix B: normal blood, plasma, or serum values.
  • Digital
    Gabi N. Waite, Maria Sheakley.
    Contents:
    Cellular physiology
    The nervous system
    Musculoskeletal and integumentary systems
    Blood and immune systems
    Cardiovascular and lymphatic systems
    Respiratory system
    Renal and urinary systems
    Gastrointestinal system
    Endocrine system
    Reproductive system
    Multisystem processes and disorders.
  • Digital/Print
    edited by Martin Dinges, Kay Peter Jankrift, Sabine Schlegelmilch, Michael Stolberg ; translated by Margot Saar.
    Contents:
    Cornucopia officinae medicae : medical practice records and their origin / Volker Hess and Sabine Schlegelmilch
    Doctors and their patients in the seventeenth to nineteenth centuries / Marion Baschin, Elisabeth Dietrich-Daum and Iris Ritzmann
    Daily business : the organization and finances of doctors' practices / Philipp Klaas, Hubert Steinke and Alois Unterkircher
    Medicine in practice : knowledge, diagnosis and therapy / Annemarie Kinzelbach, Stephanie Neuner and Karen Nolte
    Medical practice in context : religion, family, politics and scientific networks / Ruth Schilling and Kay Peter Jankrift
    What a magnificent work a good physician is' : the medical practice of Johannes Magirus (1615-i697) / Sabine Schlegelmilch
    Social mobility and medical practice : Johann Friedrich Glaser (1707-1789) / Ruth Schilling
    Observationes et curationes nurimbergenses : the medical practice of Johann Christoph Gotz (1688-1733) / Annemarie Kinzelbach, Susanne Grosser, Kay Peter Jankrift, and Marion Ruisinger
    Medical bedside training and healthcare for the poor in the Würzburg and Gottingen policlinics in the first half of the nineteenth century / Stephanie Neuner and Karen Nolte
    Unlicensed practice : a lay healer in rural Switzerland / Alois Unterkircher and Iris Ritzmann
    Administrative and epistemic aspects of medical practice : Caesar Adolf Bloesch (1804-1863) / Lina Gafner
    Franz von Ottenthal : local integration of an Alpine doctor's private practice (1847-1899) / Elisabeth Dietrich-Daurn, Marina Hilber and Eberhard Wofjf
    A special kind of practice? : the homeopath Friedrich von Bonninghausen (1828-1910) / Marion Baschin.
    Digital Access 2016
    Access via Clio medica 2016; 96
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
  • Digital
    Ana Johnson, Thérèse A. Stukel, editors.
    Contents:
    Disparities in Medical Practices
    Introduction to Medical Practice Variations and Outcomes Research
    Knowledge Translation Case Studies in Health Services Research
    Medical Practice Variation Methods
    Medical Practice Variations in Acute Care Hospitalization
    Medical Practice Variations in Acute Myocardial Infarction
    Medical Practice Variations in Cancer Surgery
    Medical Practice Variations in Diabetes Mellitus
    Medical Practice Variations in Elective Surgery
    Medical Practice Variations in Emergency Services
    Medical Practice Variations in End-of-Life Care
    Medical Practice Variations in Heart Failure
    Medical Practice Variations in Joint Replacement in Patients with Osteoarthritis
    Medical Practice Variations in Mental Health and Addictions Care
    Medical Practice Variations in Pediatric Care
    Medical Practice Variations in Primary Care
    Medical Practice Variations in Reproductive, Obstetric and Gynaecological Care
    Medical Practice Variations in Stroke
    Medical Practice Variations: Theory of Local Standards
    Practice Guidelines and Practice Variation: Diagnostic Technology in Maternity Care
    Shared Decision-Making for Medical Practice Variations in Elective Surgeries and Tests
    Strategies and Tools to Manage Variation in Regional Governance Systems
    Variations in Healthcare Spending and Quality among Institutions.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Print
    edited by Richard L. Byyny, MD, Maxine A. Papadakis, MD, Douglas S. Paauw, MD.
    Contents:
    Preface. Medical professionalism : best practices / Richard L. Byyny
    Introduction / Maxine Papadakis
    The problem with professionalism / Catherine R. Lucey
    Current practices in remediating medical students with professionalism lapses / Deborah Ziring, Suely Grosseman, and Dennis Novack
    Models. Review of current models for remediation of professionalism lapses / Sheryl A. Pfeil, and Douglas S. Paauw
    Cultural transformation in professionalism / Jo Shapiro
    Enhancing interprofessional professionalism: a systems approach / Rebecca Saavedra
    Pursuing professionalism (but not without an infrastructure) / Gerald B. Hickson, and William O. Cooper
    Remediation. Clinical skills remediation : strategy for intervention of professionalism lapses / Anna Chang
    Remediating professional lapses of medical students : each school an island? / Richard Frankel
    Summary. Concluding thoughts / George Thibault
    Improving professionalism in medicine : what have we learned? / Sheryl A. Pfeil.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RA399.A1 M435 2015
    1
  • Print
    edited by Richard L. Byyny, MD, FACP, Richard Byyny, MD, Sean Christensen, MD, Jonathan D. Fish, MD.
    Summary: "To continue the development and ongoing scholarship of medical professionalism, A[omega]A hosts a biennial Professionalism Conference bringing together leaders in the field of medical professionalism. In February 2019, more than 25 medical educators and specialists in medical professionalism, physician burnout and resiliency came together in Denver for three days to discuss Medical Professionalism Best Practices: Addressing Burnout and Resilience in Our Profession. The meeting was co-chaired and moderated by Samantha Dizon, MD, Douglas S. Paauw, MD, Sheryl Pfeil, MD, and Kathleen Ryan, MD. The conference presenters shared personal, heartrending, intimate stories of their struggles combating burnout. Many of their stories had never before been told in public. They agreed to share their experiences with the hope of helping others in their profession. The outcome of the conference and presentations is the monograph Medical Professionalsm Best Practices: Addressing Burnout and Resilience in our Profession. It is A[omega]A's hope that the 2020 monograph, "Medical Professionalism Best Practices: Addressing Burnout and Resilience in Our Profession" will aid practitioners, medical schools, professional organizations, and all involved in health care to better care for themselves, and contemporaneously their patients"--Page 5-6.

    Contents:
    Preface: burnout and resilience in our profession / Richard L. Byyny and George E. Thibault
    Burnout and resiliency / Richard L. Byyny
    Personal and professional perspective on the burnout crisis / Darrell G. Kirch
    The juggler's handbook: a conversation about life / Linda Hawes Clever
    Electronic health records: maintaining professionalism / Carrie A. Horwitch
    Burnout, resilience & (the logic of) professionalism: reframing our historical moment / Frederic W. Hafferty and Jon C. Tilburt
    For whom the bell tolls: the system and cultural influences affecting the next generation of health professionals / Holly J. Humphrey and Heather Snijdewind
    Development of a resilient professional identity / Molly Blackley Jackson
    Re-examining exams: national board of medical examiners' efforts on wellness (RENEW) / Miguel Paniagua Madeline DelVescovo and Liselotte N. Dyrbye
    Professional development: professionalism and resilience in the learning environment / Douglas S. Paauw and Sheryl Pfeil
    Well-being definition and measures in medical education / Anne Eacker
    Personal strategies to beat burnout: the percent you can control / Christina M. Surawicz
    Changing the behavior of organizations / Steven A. Wartman
    Recovering the joie de vivre in medicine: the importance of organizational culture / Eve J. Higginbotham and Dominique Alexis
    Resilience, burnout, and communities of practice / Sylvia R. Cruess and Richard L. Cruess
    Reflections on best practices for addressing burnout and resilience in our profession / Richard L. Byyny.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RA399.A1 M435 2020
    1
  • Print
    edited by Richard L. Byyny, MD, FACP, Douglas S. Paauw, MD, MACP, Sheryl A. Pfeil, MD.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RA399.A1 M435 2022
    1
  • Print
    edited by Richard L. Byyny, MD, Douglas S. Paauw, MD, Maxine A. Papadakis, MD, Sheryl Pfeil, MD.
    Summary: "To continue the development and ongoing scholarship of medical professionalism, A[Omega]A hosts a biennial Professionalism Conference bringing together leaders in the field of medical professionalism. In September 2016, more than 20 medical educators and specialists in medical professionalism came together in Chicago for three days to discuss Medical Professionalism Best Practices: Professionalism in the Modern Era. The meeting was co-chaired and moderated by Douglas S. Paauw, MD, Maxine Papadakis, MD, and Sheryl Pfeil, MD. The following chapters are taken from the 2016 conference speakers' presentations and resulting discussion. The hope is that this monograph will aid medical schools, professional organizations, practitioners, and all involved in health care in their very important work on professionalism in medicine"--Preface.

    Contents:
    Preface : Medical professionalism in the modern era / Richard L. Byyny and George E. Thibault
    Chapter 1 Introduction / Richard L. Byyny
    Chapter 2 Constructs of professionalism / David M. Irby
    Chapter 3 Transforming a medical curriculum to support professional identity formation / Sylvia R. Cruess and Richard L. Cruess
    Chapter 4 Generational differences in the interpretation of professionalism / Douglas S. Paauw, Maxine Papadakis and Sheryl Pfeil
    Chapter 5 Medical professionalism in the new millennium : a neo-Oslerian call to caring / Charles S. Bryan
    Chapter 6 Resistance and radicalization : retraining professionals for the modern era / Frederic W. Hafferty, Barret Michalec, Maria Athina (Tina) Martimianakis, and Jon Tilburt
    Chapter 7 Building an infrastructure to support professionalism in the modern era: the required elements (people, process, and technology) / William O. Cooper and Gerald Hickson
    Chapter 8 Professionalism education at Drexel university College of Medicine / Steven Rosenzweig, Dennis Novack and Pamela Duke
    Chapter 9 Becoming a doctor: the learner and the learning environment: a complex interaction / Holly Humphrey and Dana Levinsen
    Chapter 10 Professionalism in the 21st century : challenges and opportunities / Eve J. Higginbotham
    Reflections on best practices for medical proffessionalism in the modern era / Richard L. Byyny.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RA399.A1 M435 2017
    1
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Medical psychiatry to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Digital
    Angelo P. Giardino, Lee Ann Riesenberg, Prathibha Varkey, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive medical textbook is a compendium of the latest information on healthcare quality. The text provides knowledge about the theory and practical applications for each of the core areas that comprise the field of medical quality management as well as insight and essential briefings on the impact of new healthcare technologies and innovations on medical quality and improvement. The third edition provides significant new content related to medical quality management and quality improvement, a user-friendly format, case studies, and updated learning objectives. This textbook also serves as source material for the American Board of Medical Quality in the development of its core curriculum and certification examinations. Each chapter is designed for a review of the essential background, precepts, and exemplary practices within the topical area: Basics of Quality Improvement Data Analytics for the Improvement of Healthcare Quality Utilization Management, Case Management, and Care Coordination Economics and Finance in Medical Quality Management External Quality Improvement -- Accreditation, Certification, and Education The Interface Between Quality Improvement and Law Ethics and Quality Improvement With the new edition of Medical Quality Management: Theory and Practice, the American College of Medical Quality presents the experience and expertise of its contributors to provide the background necessary for healthcare professionals to assume the responsibilities of medical quality management in healthcare institutions, provide physicians in all medical specialties with a core body of knowledge related to medical quality management, and serve as a necessary guide for healthcare administrators and executives, academics, directors, medical and nursing students and residents, and physicians and other health practitioners.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Brian J. McParland.
    Summary: Medical Radiation Dosimetry: Theory of Charged Particle Collision Energy Loss provides a uniquely required advanced, comprehensive and definitive theoretical description of the physics of charged particle collision energy loss and the role that it plays in the clinical radiation dosimetry resulting from exposure to ionising radiation. Medical Radiation Dosimetry: Theory of Charged Particle Collision Energy Loss is both an advanced mathematical and physics treatise and an essential reference volume for the medical physics graduate student and the medical radiation physicist working in the field of clinical and research radiation dosimetry. It will assist both audiences in both the understanding of the genesis of the numerical data provided in multiple technical reports and publications, and of the limitations of these data.

    Contents:
    Part I. Introduction to Charged Particles
    1. Introduction
    2. Elements of Quantum Scattering Theory
    Part II. Elastic Coulomb Scatter
    3. Introduction of Part II
    4. Elastic Coulomb Scatter from an Unscreened Point Charge
    5. Elastic Coulomb Scatter from Distributed and Screened Charges
    6. Multiple Elastic Coulomb Scatter
    Part III. Collision Energy Loss
    7. Introduction to Part III
    8. Soft Collisions
    9. Hard Collisions
    10. Total and Restricted Collision Stopping Powers and Theory of the Mean Energy Expended to Create an Ion Pair
    11. Mean Excitation Energy
    12. Higher-Order Corrections in the Collision Stopping Power
    13. Charged Particle Range
    14. Collision Energy Loss in Compound Media
    Part IV. Stochastic Collision Energy Loss
    15. Introduction to Part IV
    16. Collision Statistics
    17. The Chapman-Kolmogorov and Bothe-Landau Equations
    18. Probability Distribution Functions for Collision Energy Loss.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Summary: This book shares the experimental findings and views in current multidisciplinary medical science combining both basic and applied research aimed at resolving problematic health issues. The key topics address contagious diseases, in particular the epidemiology, clinical presentation, and management of influenza and influenza-like infections as well as brain tuberculosis. Pulmonary medicine is represented by articles addressing a range of practical issues, including the diagnosis, symptoms, comorbidities, and treatment of obstructive sleep apnea, a syndrome whose incidence shows a persistent upward trend worldwide. Other articles address the pathogenesis of air pollution toxicity and allergy and sensory irritation in toxic exposure studies. An intriguing relation of atopic dermatitis to depression and serotoninergic system is debated. The book attempts to integrate research into clinical work and to implement findings to improve care and to decrease suffering from diseases. It is dedicated to the practicing professionals, researchers, and all engaged in health care.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    Nosocomial Infections in Patients Hospitalized with Respiratory Syncytial Virus: A Practice Review
    1 Introduction
    2 Methods
    3 Results
    4 Discussion
    References
    Regional Activity and Spread of Influenza Viruses in Poland in the Context of Neighboring Countries in the Epidemic Season 201...
    1 Introduction
    2 Methods
    2.1 Patients and Samples
    2.2 Molecular Biology Tests
    2.3 Virus Isolation in Cell Culture
    2.4 Epidemiological Mapping
    3 Results and Discussion
    References Bacteremia in Children Hospitalized Due to Respiratory Syncytial Virus Infection
    1 Introduction
    2 Methods
    3 Results
    4 Discussion
    References
    Multi-spectral Pattern of Clinical Presentation and the Resultant Outcome in Central Nervous System Tuberculosis: A Single Cen...
    1 Introduction
    2 Methods
    3 Results
    4 Discussion
    References
    Adherence to Therapy in Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease: A Systematic Review
    1 Introduction
    2 Methods
    2.1 Search Strategy
    2.2 Statistical Elaboration
    3 Results 3.1 Test of Adherence to Inhalers (TAI): Five Studies Included in the Analysis
    3.1.1 TAI: % of Good Scores of Adherence to Therapy
    3.1.2 TAI: % of Inadvertent Non-adherence to Therapy
    3.1.3 TAI: % of Erratic Non-adherence to Therapy
    3.1.4 TAI: % of Deliberate Non-adherence to Therapy
    3.2 Morisky Medication Adherence Scale (MMAS-8): Six Studies Included in the Analysis
    3.2.1 MMAS-8: % of High Scores of Adherence to Therapy
    3.3 Factors Affecting Adherence to Therapy in COPD Patients
    4 Discussion
    References How Healthy Is Healthy? Comparison Between Self-Reported Symptoms and Clinical Outcomes in Connection with the Enrollment of V...
    1 Introduction
    2 Methods
    3 Results
    3.1 Overview of Recruitment Strategies of Current Studies on Sensory Irritation
    3.2 Re-Evaluation of Recruitment of Healthy Volunteers for Six IPA Studies
    4 Discussion and Conclusions
    References
    Co-expression of Hsp70 Protein and Autophagy Marker Protein LC3 in A549 Cells and THP1 Cells Exposed to Nanoparticles of Air P...
    1 Introduction
    2 Methods
    2.1 Cell Cultures
    2.2 Cell Treatment 2.3 LC3 and Hsp70 Expression
    2.4 Data Analysis
    3 Results
    4 Discussion
    References
    Whole Blood Assay as a Tool to Describe the Effects of Zinc Oxide Exposure on Innate Immunity
    1 Introduction
    2 Methods
    2.1 Study Group
    2.2 Cellular Blood Composition
    2.3 Whole Blood Assay (WBA)
    2.4 Cytokine Quantification
    2.5 Data Elaboration
    3 Results
    3.1 ZnO Effects in Whole Blood Assay (WBA): Evaluation of the Group of 16 Subjects
    3.1.1 Normal Range Calculated as 25th and 75th Percentiles of Cytokine Release
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Summary: This volume is dedicated to multidisciplinary research at the interface between basic biomedicine and clinical practice. This book guides best practice in the diagnosis and therapy while dealing with difficult-to-treat disorders of yet unclear etiology. Chapters address such disorders as granulomatosis with polyangiitis causing autoimmune-related multiorgan inflammation of blood vessels, increasingly widespread allergy to peanuts, occupational exposure to zinc oxide, and immunogenic responses to pneumococcal and influenza vaccination underlying their preventive effectiveness. Other hot issues deal with the proper use of fluid therapy in the perioperative period and a cognitive decline in lung transplant patients. A new physiotherapeutic approach of treating key myofascial trigger points in low-back pain appears highly beneficial in reducing patients’ disability, advancing physiotherapy of this overwhelming condition. Finally, other chapters consider ways to streamline medical management to increase the number of physicians and their availability for patients, a particularly sensitive issue in the current COVID-19 pandemic. The dissemination of clinical knowledge about high-risk and hardly controllable conditions is an inalienable part of progress in medical practice. The book is a resource for clinical specialists, general practitioners, and allied healthcare professionals.

    Contents:
    Overload of Medical Documentation: A Disincentive for Healthcare Professionals
    Epidemiologic Benefits of Pneumococcal Vaccine Introduction into Preventive Vaccination Programs
    Serum Vitamin D and Immunogenicity of Influenza Vaccination in the Elderly
    Influenza A (H1N1) and Respiratory Syncytial Virus (RSV) Coinfection in a Newborn Child: A Case Report
    Thoracic Manifestation of Granulomatosis with Polyangiitis: A Case Report
    The Natural Course of Impaired Fasting Glucose
    Oleosins: A Short Allergy Review
    Shortage of Physicians: A Critical Review
    Fluid Therapy in Patients Undergoing Abdominal Surgery: A Bumpy Road Towards Individualized Management
    Manual Pressure Release and Low-Grade Electrical Peripheral Receptor Stimulation in Nonspecific Low Back Pain: A Randomized Controlled Trial
    Human Inhalation Study with Zinc Oxide: Analysis of Zinc Levels and Biomarkers in Exhaled Breath Condensate. Cognitive Function After Lung Transplantation.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    editor Mieczyslaw Pokorski.
    Summary: This book shares the latest research and practice-oriented findings in medical sciences with a wide audience. It addresses a range of contemporary issues, often unresolved or contentious, across various medical fields, including advances in the management of hemorrhagic brain stroke. It also discusses metastatic renal cell carcinoma--a global scourge with an extremely poor long-term survival prognosis, the course and sequelae of renal cell carcinoma, as well as advances in targeted molecular therapy with sunitinib, a receptor tyrosine kinase inhibitor. Further, it examines the molecular targeting of proliferative signaling of the epidermal growth factor receptor in the first-line treatment of patients with metastatic non-small-cell lung cancer. Other articles cover clearance of toxins in hemodialyzed patients; the search for diagnostic and therapeutic markers in the connective tissue disease scleroderma; obesity linked to inappropriate dietary habit; clinical problems related to the diagnosis of sensitization to fungi and its role in asthma; and reasons for the perilous trend of avoiding basic vaccinations in children. Lastly, the book explores the rapid developments in e-health technologies that increase access to health services, particularly for the elderly. The book is intended for clinical specialists, researchers, and all allied health professionals from various fields.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Jeannette Naish and Denise Syndercombe Court.
    Summary: An integrated approach to teaching basic sciences and clinical medicine has meant that medical students have been driven to a range of basic science textbooks to find relevant information. Medical Sciences is designed to do the integration for you. In just one book, the diverse branches of medical science are synthesised into the appropriate systems of the human body, making this an invaluable aid to approaching the basics of medicine within in a clinical context. . An integrated approach to teaching basic sciences and clinical medicine has meant that medical students have been.

    Contents:
    Introduction and homeostasis / Jeannette Naish
    Biochemistry and cell biology / Marek H. Dominiczak
    Energy metabolism / Mark Holness, Mary Sugden, and Jeannette Naish
    Pharmacology / Walter Wieczorek and Jeannette Naish
    Human genetics / Denise Syndercombe Court and David P. Kelsell
    Pathology and immunology / Denise Syndercombe Court, Paola Domizio, Armine Sefton, and Nigel Yeatman
    Epidemiology : science for the art of medicine / Jeannette Naish and Denise Syndercombe Court
    The nervous system / Brian Pentland
    Bone, muscle, skin, and connective tissue / Lesley Robson and Denise Syndercombe Court
    Endocrinology / Joy Hinson and Peter Raven
    The cardiovascular system / Andrew Archbold and Jeannette Naish
    Haematology / Drew Provan, Adrian C. Newland, and Denise Syndercombe Court
    The respiratory system / Gavin Donaldson
    The renal system / Girish Namagondlu and Alistair Chesser
    The alimentary system / John Wilkinson
    Diet and nutrition / Amrutha Ramu, Penny Neild, and Jeannette Naish.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    [edited by] Mary P. Harward.
    Summary: "For more than 30 years, the highly regarded Secrets Series has provided students and practitioners in all areas of health care with concise, focused, and engaging resources for quick reference and exam review. Medical Secrets, 6th Edition, features the Secrets' popular question-and-answer format that also includes lists, tables, pearls, memory aids, and an easy-to-read style - making inquiry, reference, and review quick, easy, and enjoyable"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Medical ethics
    General medicine and ambulatory care
    Medical consultation
    Cardiology
    Vascular medicine
    Pulmonary medicine
    Gastroenterology
    Nephrology
    Acid-base and electrolyte disorders
    Rheumatology
    Allergy and immunology
    Infectious diseases
    Acquired immunodeficiency syndrome and human immunodeficiency virus infection
    Hematology
    Oncology
    Endocrinology
    Neurology
    Geriatrics
    Palliative medicine.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    Jill B. Delston.
    Summary: Doctors routinely deny patients access to hormonal birth control prescription refills, and this issue has broad interest for feminism, biomedical ethics, and applied ethics in general. Medical Sexism argues that such practices violate a variety of legal and moral standards, including medical ethics, informed consent, and human rights. Jill B. Delston makes the case that medical sexism serves as a major underlying cause of these systemic and persistent violations. Delston also considers other common abuses in the medical field, such as policy on abortion access and treatment in childbirth. Delston argues that sexism is a better explanation for the widespread abuse of patient autonomy in reproductive health specifically and health care generally. Identifying, addressing, and rooting out medical sexism is necessary to successfully protect medical and moral values. -- Publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction: Paternalism, Pap Tests, and the Pill
    Chapter 1: Doctors Denying Drugs: The Role of Physicians in Contraception Access and Why It Matters
    Chapter 2: Contraception Care Corrupted: Negative Health Outcomes of Limited Access to Birth Control
    Chapter 3: In Conceivable Care: A Case of Medical Malpractice
    Chapter 4: Pre Conceived Notions: Some Ethical Considerations in Denying Patients Needed Care
    Chapter 5: Fertile Ground for Bias: Medical Sexism Explains the Practice
    Chapter 6: A Typical Treatment: Abortion
    Chapter 7: The Two-Body Problem: Medical Sexism in Reproductive Health
    Chapter 8: Losing Patients: Broader Implications for Medical Sexism
    Chapter 9: Grace Period: Solutions and Conclusions
  • Digital
    Ramakrishna HK.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Understanding Biostatistics, Probability and Tests of Significance
    Understanding Basic Statistical Terms
    Chi Square Test
    Student's T Test
    Fisher's Test
    Other Commonly Used Concepts
    Designing a Study or Clinical Trial
    General considerations
    Collection and Compilation of Data
    Data analysis and inference
    Presentation of data and Results
    Evidence Based Medicine
    Writing an Article for Journals.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Dana Zappetti, Jonathan D. Avery, editors.
    Summary: This book tackles the most common challenges that medical students experience that lead to burnout in medical school by carefully presenting guidelines for assessment, management, clinical pearls, and resources for further references. Written by national leaders in medical student wellness from around the country, this book presents the first model of care for combating one of the most serious problems in medicine. Each chapter is concise and follows a consistent format for readability. This book addresses many topics, including general mental health challenges, addiction, mindfulness, exercise, relationships and many more of the important components that go into the making of a doctor. Medical Student Well-being is a vital resource for all professionals seeking to address physician wellness within medical schools, including medical students, medical education professionals, psychiatrists, addiction medicine specialists, hospitalists, residents, and psychologists.

    Contents:
    The Physiology of Stress
    Mental Health and Medical Education
    Medical Students and Substance Use Disorders
    Mindfulness
    Incorporating Exercise into a Busy Life in Medical School
    Religion and Spirituality among Medical Students
    Wellness for All: Diversity, Challenges and Opportunities to Improve Wellness for Medical Students
    Financial Wellness for Medical Students
    Beyond Graduation: Next Steps in Wellness.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    Summary: "Prepare for your Certified Medical-Surgical Registered Nurse (CMSRN) or Medical-Surgical Nursning Certification (MEDSURG-BC) exam with Medical-Surgical Nursing Certification Practice Q&A. With 600 high-quality questions and comprehensive rationales based on the most recent Medical-Surgical Nursing Certification Board (MSNCB) and American Nurses Credentialing Center (ANCC) exam blueprints, this essential resource is designed to help you study your way: sharpen your specialsty knowledge with practice Q&A organized by exam topic or strengthen your test-taking skills with two 150-question practice exams. Combined, it gives you everything you need to pass the first time, guaranteed. Know that you're ready. Know that you'll pass with Springer Publishing Exam Prep."--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Practice Questions
    Chapter 1: Gastrointestinal System
    Chapter 2: Pulmonary System
    Chapter 3: Cardiovascular System
    Chapter 4: Hematological System
    Chapter 5: Endocrine System
    Chapter 6: Immune System
    Chapter 7: Urinary System
    Chapter 8: Musculoskeletal System
    Chapter 9: Neurological System
    Chapter 10: Eyes, Ears, Nose, and Throat
    Chapter 11: Integumentary System
    Part 2: Practice Exams
    Chapter 12: MSNCB Certification Practice Exam
    Chapter 13: MSNCB Certification Practice Exam: Answers
    Chapter 14: ANCC Certification Practice Exam
    Chapter 15: ANCC Certification Practice Exam: Answers.
    Digital Access R2Library [2023]
  • Digital
    clinical editors, Carolyn Gersch, Nicole Heimgartner, Cherie Rebar, Laura M. Willis.
    Contents:
    Medical-surgical nursing practice / Mary Jane Nottoli
    Nursing process / Tracy Taylor
    Fluids and electrolytes / Tracy Taylor
    Perioperative care / Mary Jones
    Pain management / Marilyn J. Schuler
    Neurologic disorders / Jessica Ledford
    Eye disorders / Katrin Moskowitz
    Ear, nose, and throat disorders / Katrin Moskowitz
    Cardiovascular disorders / Natalie Burkhalter
    Respiratory disorders / Estella J. Wetzel
    Gastrointestinal disorders / Mary Jane Nottoli
    Endocrine disorders / Katie Dinh
    Renal and urologic disorders / Mary Jones
    Reproductive system disorders / Mary Jones
    Musculoskeletal disorders / Amy Potter
    Hematologic and lymphatic disorders / Shelba Durston
    Immunologic disorders / Shelba Durston
    Skin disorders / Estella J. Wetzel
    Cancer care / Eileen Danaher Hacker
    Obesity / Estella J. Wetzel
    Gerontologic care / Melanie N. DeGonzague
    End-of-life care / Melanie N. DeGonzague.
    Digital Access Ovid 2017
  • Digital
    clinical editors, Keelin C. Cromar, Casey Moebius.
    Contents:
    Medical-surgical nursing practice / Casey Moebius
    Nursing process / Keelin C. Cromar
    Fluids and electrolytes / Kathryn Toche O'Grady
    Perioperative care / Marcy A. Geary
    Pain management / Carol A. Strasburger Miller
    Neurologic disorders / Charity Hacker
    Eye disorders / Benita Hays Smith
    Ear, nose, and throat disorders / Melody L. Skinner
    Cardiovascular disorders / Keelin C. Cromar
    Respiratory disorders / Keelin C. Cromar
    Gastrointestinal disorders / Abram Bustamante
    Endocrine disorders / Lisa Vaira
    Renal and urologic disorders / Kim Chapman
    Reproductive system disorders / Lisa Vaira
    Musculoskeletal disorders / Robyn Mitchell
    Hematologic and lymphatic disorders / Hannah M. Lopez
    Immunologic disorders / Rachel Reitan
    Skin disorders / Sean Kevin Skinner
    Cancer care / Hannah M. Lopez
    Obesity / Sarah Beth Wedel
    Gerontologic care / Linda Earwood
    End-of-life care / Darla Green.
    Digital Access Ovid 2023
  • Print
    authors, Nancy Henne Batchelor, Paula Harrison Gillman, Jeanine Karle Goodin, Deborah J. Schwytzer.
    Summary: "The Nursing Knowledge Center's 'Medical-Surgical Nursing Review and Review and Resource Manual' is a must-have tool for nurses planning to take the American Nurses Credentialing Center's (ANCC's) Medical-Surgical Nursing certification exam."--Cover.

    Contents:
    Taking the certification examination
    Development / Nancy Henne Batchelor
    Communication / Jeanine Goodin and Deborah J. Schwytzer
    Basic and applied sciences / Jeanine Goodin, and Deborah Jane Schwytzer
    Behavioral sciences / Nancy Henne Batchelor and Deborah J. Schwytzer
    Delivery of care / Nancy Henne Batchelor and Deborah J. Schwytzer
    Nursing process / Deborah jane schwytzer
    Health promotion and wellness / Nancy Henne Batchelor and Deborah J. Schwytzer
    Management and leadership / Deborah Schwytzer
    Legal and ethical issues / Deborah Schwytzer
    Legal and ethical issues / Deborah Schwytzer
    Cardiovascular and pulmonary systems / Paula Harrison Gillman
    Gastrointestinal system / Paula Harrison Gillman
    Renal and genitourinary (GU) system / Paula Harrison Gillman
    Musculoskeletal disorders / Nancy Henne Batchelor
    Metabolism and endocrine system / Deborah Jane Schwytzer
    Immune & hematologic systems / Deborah Jane Schwytzer
    Shock and multisystem organ failure / Deborah Jane Schwytzer
    Eyes, ears, nose, throat disorders / Paula Harrison Gillman and Jeanine Karle Goodin
    Integumentary system / Jeanine Karle Goodin
    Neurologic system / Jeanine Karle Goodin
    Pharmacotherapeutics, polypharmacy, and complementary and alternative therapies / Paula Harrison Gillman
    Appendix A : review questions
    Appendix B : answers to review questions.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    RD99.25 .B38 2015
    1
  • Print
    Barbara Janson Cohen, MSEd, Shirley A. Jones, MSEd, MHA, MSN, EMT-P, RN
    Summary: "Medical Terminology: An Illustrated Guide, Ninth Edition helps readers develop a fundamental knowledge of the medical terminology necessary for a career in any health care setting."-- Back cover.

    Contents:
    Part I. Introduction to Medical Terminology
    Chapter 1. Concepts, Suffixes, and Prefixes of Medical Terminology
    Chapter 2. Body Structure
    Chapter 3. Disease and Treatment
    Part II. Body Systems
    Chapter 4. Integumentary System
    Chapter 5. Skeletal System
    Chapter 6. Muscular System
    Chapter 7. Nervous System and Mental Health
    Chapter 8. Special Senses: Ear and Eye
    Chapter 9. Endocrine System
    Chapter 10. Cardiovascular and Lymphatic Systems
    Chapter 11. Blood and Immunity
    Chapter 12. Respiratory System
    Chapter 13. Digestive System
    Chapter 14. Urinary System
    Chapter 15. Male Reproductive System
    Chapter 16. Female Reproductive System; Pregnancy and Birth
    Appendix 1. Commonly Used Symbols
    Appendix 2. Abbreviations and Their Meanings
    Appendix 3. Word Parts and Their Meanings
    Appendix 4. Meanings and Their Corresponding Word Parts
    Appendix 5. Word Roots
    Appendix 6. Suffixes
    Appendix 7. Prefixes
    Appendix 8. Metric Measurements
    Appendix 9. Stedman's Medical Dictionary at a Glance
    Appendix 10. Drugs
    Appendix 11. Answer Key.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    R123 .C56 2021
    1
  • Digital
    Gary R. Lichtenstein, editor
    Summary: Medical Therapy of Ulcerative Colitis will serve as an invaluable resource for individual physicians use who treat patients with ulcerative colitis. The text presents a comprehensive overview of medical therapy for management of specific clinical scenarios and also a focus on the individual medications used to treat patients with ulcerative colitis. The book will be evidence based and focus on simplifying the current treatment to make it easy to understand. The chapters are written by experts in their fields and provide the most up to date information. This book will target gastroenterologists who focus on IBD, general gastroenterologists, fellows, and surgeons such as colorectal surgeons or GI surgeons who may treat patients with ulcerative colitis.

    Contents:
    The History of Medical Therapy of Ulcerative Colitis.- The Role of the Food and Drug Administration in Medical Therapy for Ulcerative Colitis
    The Natural History of Ulcerative Colitis
    Principles of Management of Ulcerative Colitis
    The Importance of Mucosal Healing in Ulcerative Colitis
    Oral Mesalamine
    Contrast and Comparison of Mesalamine Derivatives in the Treatment of Ulcerative Colitis
    Topical Mesalamine
    Oral and Parenteral Corticosteroid Therapy in Ulcerative Colitis
    Rectal Glucocorticoid Use In Ulcerative Colitis
    Antimetabolite Therapy in ulcerative colitis: Azathioprine, 6-Mercaptupurine and Methotrexate
    Azathioprine / 6-Mercaptopurine Metabolism in Ulcerative Colitis: A Guide to Metabolite Assessment: An Evidence Based Approach
    Cyclosporine for Ulcerative colitis
    Tacrolimus, Sirolimus and Mycophenolate Mofetil
    Infliximab for Ulcerative Colitis
    Beyond Infliximab: Other anti-TNF therapies for Ulcerative Colitis
    Novel Biologics for the Treatment of Ulcerative Colitis
    Probiotics, Prebiotics, and Antibiotics for Ulcerative colitis
    Novel NonBiologic Therapies for Ulcerative Colitis
    Disease Modifiers in the Management of Ulcerative Colitis
    Treatment of Ulcerative Proctitis
    Treatment of Distal / Left Sided Ulcerative Colitis
    Treatment of Severe Ulcerative Colitis
    Pregnancy and Fertility in Ulcerative Colitis
    Pediatric Issues in Treating Ulcerative Colitis
    Chemoprevention in Ulcerative Colitis
    Safety Considerations in the Medical Therapy of Ulcerative Colitis
    Management of Steroid-Dependent and Steroid-Refractory
    Medical Therapy of Ulcerative Colitis
    Medication Adherence in Ulcerative Colitis
    The Role of Telemedicine for Management of Ulcerative Colitis
    Assessment of Disease Activity in Ulcerative Colitis
    Medical Management of Toxic
    Medical Treatment of Extraintestinal Manifestation of Ulcerative Colitis
    Mimics of Ulcerative Colitis
    The role of diet and nutrition in ulcerative colitis
    Parenteral Nutrition Use in Ulcerative Colitis
    Maintenance of Remission in Ulcerative Colitis
    Management of Irritable Bowel Syndrome in the Patient with Ulcerative Colitis
    Medical Treatment of Hepatobiliary Diseases Associated with Ulcerative Colitis
    Step-Up versus Top-Down Therapy in Ulcerative Colitis.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    editors, Xinghuai Sun and Yi Dai.
    Summary: This book provides comprehensive information on current medications for glaucoma. From anatomy and physiology of glaucoma related ocular structure to the current mechanism theories and evaluation techniques of glaucoma, our understanding of glaucoma has been considerably improved in the last three decades. A large number of medications have been developed for the treatment of glaucoma, whose pharmacological information and data on efficacy and safety will be introduced in detail in this book. Practical guidelines for different type of glaucoma and specific patients, and pharmaceutical agents combined usage are concise and credible. The other chapters on patient managements and updates on glaucoma guidelines add useful and practical information to the book. New experimental and clinical investigations are promising and may develop new therapeutic targets for treatment of glaucoma in future. The primary target audience for this book is practicing ophthalmologists and ophthalmologists in training. Other healthcare professionals who need information about medical treatment for glaucoma may also find this book valuable. We will provide both evidence-based information and clinical experience on antiglaucoma medications, and guide the clinician on how to use them for the patient's maximal benefit.

    Contents:
    Glaucoma related ocular structure and function
    Mechanism theories of glaucoma
    Briefs on evaluation techniques for glaucoma
    Medical treatment strategy for glaucoma
    Medical therapy for glaucoma-Principles
    Medical therapy for glaucoma-IOP lowering agents
    Pharmaceutical agents combined usage
    Clinical practice considerations
    Patient managements
    Concluding comments/Authors' preferences for the guidelines.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Yuan Lei.
    Summary: A user-friendly guide to the basic principles and the technical aspects of mechanical ventilation and modern complex ventilator systems.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Basic concepts
    Lung ventilation
    Ventilator system concept
    Ventilator system composition
    Humidification, nebulization, and gas filtering
    Essential variables and breath types
    Mechanical ventilation modes
    Ventilator control parameters
    Special ventilation functions
    Ventilator monitoring
    Alarms and safety mechanisms
    Troubleshooting and error reporting.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    Robert B. Taylor.
    Summary: "This book is a clear and comprehensive guide that assists readers in translating observations, ideas, and research into articles, reports, or book chapters ready for publication. For both researchers and practicing physicians, skills in medical writing are essential. Dr. Robert B. Taylor, a distinguished leader in academic medicine, uses a clear, conversational style throughout this book to emphasize the professional and personal enrichment that writing can bring. The text includes in depth instructions for writing and publishing: review articles, case reports, editorials and letters to the editor, book reviews, book chapters, reference books, research protocols, grant proposals, and research reports. This third edition is additionally fully updated to include the intricacies of medical writing and publishing today, with new coverage of: open access, pay to publish and predatory journals, peer review fraud, publication bias, parachute studies, public domain images, and phantom authors. Loaded with practical information, tips to help achieve publication, and real world examples, Medical Writing can improve skills for clinicians, educators, and researchers, whether they are new to writing or seasoned authors"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Getting started in medical writing
    Basic writing skills
    From page one to the end
    Technical issues in medical writing
    What?s special about medical writing?
    How to write a review article
    Case reports, editorials, letters to the editor, book reviews, and other publication models
    Writing book chapters and books
    How to write a research proposal
    How to write a grant proposal
    How to write a report of a clinical study
    Getting your writing published.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Dilfuza Egamberdieva, Antonio Tiezzi, editors.
    Summary: This book provides insights into various aspects of medicinal plant-associated microbes, known to be a unique source of biological active compounds, including their biotechnological uses and their potential in pharmaceutical, agricultural and industrial applications. Featuring review papers and original research by leading experts in the field, it discusses medicinal plants and their interactions with the environment; medicinal plants as a source of biologically active compounds; medicinal plant-associated microbes (diversity and metabolites); their pharmaceutical, agricultural and industrial applications as well as their potential applications as plant growth stimulators and biocontrol agents. As such the book offers a valuable, up-to-date overview of the current research on medicinal plants, their ecology, biochemistry and associated biomes.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Ethno-botanical aspects of some traditional medicinal plants
    Chapter 2. Medicinal plant
    environment interaction and mitigation to abiotic stress
    Chapter 3. Antibacterial, antifungal and antiviral properties of medical plants
    Chapter 4. Biologically active components of the Western Ghats medicinal fern Diplazium esculentum
    Chapter 5. Medicinal plants as a source of alkaloids
    Chapter 6. Nutraceutical and bioactive significance of ferns with emphasis on the medicinal fern Diplazium
    Chapter 7. Studies on the production of secondary metabolites from medicinal plants by plant tissue cultures
    Chapter 8. Endophytic bacteria associated with medicinal plants: the treasure trove of antimicrobial compounds
    Chapter 9. The importance of endophytic fungi from the medicinal plant: Diversity, natural bioactive compounds, and control of plant pathogens
    Chapter 10. Medicinal plant associated microbes as a source of protection and production of crops
    Chapter 11. Endophytic microbial diversity in the halophytic medicinal plant Ferula, and their bioapplicable traits
    Chapter 12. Endophytic bacteria mediated regulation of Secondary metabolites for the growth induction in Hyptis suaveolens under stress
    Chapter 13. Bioactive potentials of novel molecules from the endophytes of medicinal plants.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    by Robert W. Baloh.
    Summary: Despite the rapid advances in medical science, the majority of people who visit a doctor have medically unexplained symptoms (MUS), symptoms that remain a mystery despite extensive diagnostic studies. The most common MUS are back pain, abdominal pain, headache, fatigue, and dizziness. This book addresses the obstacles of managing people with MUS in our modern day society from both a historical and contemporary perspective. Most MUS are psychosomatic in origin, caused by a complex interaction between nature and nurture, between biological and psychosocial factors. Psychosomatic symptoms are as real and as severe as the symptoms associated with structural damage to the brain. Unique and concise, the book explores the biological and psychosocial mechanisms, the clinical features, and current and future treatments of common MUS. Exploring the unsolved in an accessible manner, Medically Unexplained Symptoms invokes the methodologies of medical science, history, and sociology to investigate how brain flaws can lead to debilitating symptoms.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Overview of Medically Unexplained Symptoms
    Chapter 2. Early Ideas on Hysteria
    Chapter 3. The Golden Age of Hysteria
    Chapter 4. Psychosomatic Illness in the 20th Century
    Chapter 5. Biological Mechanisms of Psychosomatic Symptoms
    Chapter 6. Psychosocial Mechanisms of Psychosomatic Symptoms
    Chapter 7. Low Back Pain, Abdominal Pain and Headache
    Chapter 8. Fibromyalgia and Chronic Fatigue Syndrome
    Chapter 9. Chronic Dizziness
    Chapter 10. Treatment of Psychosomatic Symptoms.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Puzantian, Talia; Carlat, Daniel.
    Contents:
    Intro
    Introduction
    ADHD Medications
    General Prescribing Tips
    Amphetamine (Adzenys XR-ODT, Dyanavel XR, Evekeo) Fact Sheet [G]
    Atomoxetine (Strattera) Fact Sheet [G]
    Clonidine (Catapres, Kapvay) Fact Sheet [G]
    Dexmethylphenidate (Azstarys, Focalin, Focalin XR) Fact Sheet [G]
    Dextroamphetamine (Dexedrine, ProCentra, Zenzedi) Fact Sheet [G]
    Guanfacine (Intuniv, Tenex) Fact Sheet [G]
    Lisdexamfetamine (Vyvanse) Fact Sheet
    Methamphetamine (Desoxyn) Fact Sheet [G]
    Methylphenidate IR (Methylin, Ritalin) Fact Sheet [G] Methylphenidate ER (Concerta, Ritalin SR and LA, others) Fact Sheet [G]
    Methylphenidate Transdermal (Daytrana) Fact Sheet
    Mixed Amphetamine Salts (Adderall, Adderall XR, Mydayis) Fact Sheet [G]
    Viloxazine XR (Qelbree) Fact Sheet
    Antidepressants
    General Prescribing Tips
    Brexanolone (Zulresso) Fact Sheet
    Bupropion (Wellbutrin, others) Fact Sheet [G]
    Citalopram (Celexa) Fact Sheet [G]
    Clomipramine (Anafranil) Fact Sheet [G]
    Desvenlafaxine (Pristiq) Fact Sheet [G]
    Duloxetine (Cymbalta, Drizalma Sprinkle) Fact Sheet [G]
    Escitalopram (Lexapro) Fact Sheet [G] Esketamine (Spravato) Fact Sheet
    Fluoxetine (Prozac, Prozac Weekly, Sarafem) Fact Sheet [G]
    Fluvoxamine (Luvox, Luvox CR) Fact Sheet [G]
    Ketamine (Ketalar) Fact Sheet [G]
    Levomilnacipran (Fetzima) Fact Sheet
    Mirtazapine (Remeron) Fact Sheet [G]
    Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitors (MAOIs) Fact Sheet [G]
    Nefazodone (Serzone) Fact Sheet [G]
    Paroxetine (Brisdelle, Paxil, Paxil CR, Pexeva) Fact Sheet [G]
    Selegiline Transdermal (Emsam) Fact Sheet
    Sertraline (Zoloft) Fact Sheet [G]
    Thyroid (Cytomel, Synthroid, others) Fact Sheet [G]
    Trazodone (Desyrel) Fact Sheet [G] Tricyclic Antidepressants (TCAs) Fact Sheet [G]
    Venlafaxine (Effexor, Effexor XR) Fact Sheet [G]
    Vilazodone (Viibryd) Fact Sheet
    Vortioxetine (Trintellix) Fact Sheet
    Antipsychotics
    General Prescribing Tips
    Aripiprazole (Abilify) Fact Sheet [G]
    Asenapine (Saphris, Secuado) Fact Sheet [G]
    Brexpiprazole (Rexulti) Fact Sheet
    Cariprazine (Vraylar) Fact Sheet
    Chlorpromazine (Thorazine) Fact Sheet [G]
    Clozapine (Clozaril, FazaClo, Versacloz) Fact Sheet [G]
    Fluphenazine (Prolixin) Fact Sheet [G]
    Haloperidol (Haldol) Fact Sheet [G]
    Iloperidone (Fanapt) Fact Sheet Loxapine (Adasuve, Loxitane) Fact Sheet [G]
    Lumateperone (Caplyta) Fact Sheet
    Lurasidone (Latuda) Fact Sheet
    Molindone (Moban) Fact Sheet [G]
    Olanzapine (Lybalvi, Symbyax, Zyprexa) Fact Sheet [G]
    Paliperidone (Invega) Fact Sheet [G]
    Perphenazine (Trilafon) Fact Sheet [G]
    Pimavanserin (Nuplazid) Fact Sheet
    Quetiapine (Seroquel, Seroquel XR) Fact Sheet [G]
    Risperidone (Risperdal) Fact Sheet [G]
    Thioridazine (Mellaril) Fact Sheet [G]
    Thiothixene (Navane) Fact Sheet [G]
    Trifluoperazine (Stelazine) Fact Sheet [G]
    Ziprasidone (Geodon) Fact Sheet [G]
    Limited to 1 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    Gregory J. Hughes.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ClinicalKey Nursing
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Gregory J. Hughes.
    Summary: Offering a unified resource for both clinicians and pharmacists, A Medication Guide to Internal Medicine Tests and Procedures provides concise, focused answers to common medication questions before, during, and after internal medicine tests and procedures. Co-authored by experienced physicians and clinical pharmacists, this unique, time-saving reference brings together essential information for healthcare providers and students in a convenient, highly templated, pocket-sized book.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2022
  • Digital
    Sven Otto, editor.
    Summary: Osteonecrosis of the jaws is a well-known side-effect of antiresorptive therapy that predominantly occurs in patients suffering from malignant diseases and receiving intravenous administrations of nitrogen-containing bisphosphonates or subcutaneous administrations of denosumab, a monoclonal antibody. Less frequently it may also be observed in patients with osteoporosis who are being treated with these antiresorptive drugs. This textbook provides detailed, up-to-date information on all aspects of medication-related osteonecrosis of the jaws, including clinical features, pathogenesis, treatment options, and preventive measures. It also explains safe prevention and treatment strategies for patients receiving antiresorptive drugs who require extractions, implant insertions, and other dento-alveolar surgeries. This book will be of major interest for medical and dental students, dentists, and oral and maxillofacial surgeons as well as osteologists and oncologists.

    Contents:
    Pharmacology of Antiresorptive Drugs
    The Role of Antiresorptive Drugs in the Treatment of Osteoporosis
    The Role of Antiresorptive Drugs in the Treatment of Skeletal Manifestations of Malignant Diseases
    Clinical Features, Localization, Definition and Staging of the Disease
    Radiological Findings / Imaging
    General Characteristics and Risk Factors for BRONJ
    Epidemiology
    Histopathology of BRONJ
    Prevention of Osteonecrosis and Dentoalveolar Surgery Under Treatment With Antiresorptive Drugs
    Bisphosphonates and Dental Implants
    Treatment of BRONJ
    Local and Microvascular Flaps in ONJ-Treatment
    Rehabilitation of Patients After BRONJ
    Adjuvant Treatment Strategies
    Microbiology and Antibiotics
    Animal Models of ONJ
    ONJ Under Denosumab and Other New Drugs
    Possible Use of Antiresorptive Drugs in OMS
    Dental Treatment Under BPs and After BRONJ
    Dental Rehabilitation Under Bisphosphonates and After BRONJ
    History of ONJ.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by John M. Stern and Raman Sanka ; Michael Sperling, associate editor.
    Summary: Fifty million people worldwide have epilepsy and yet up to 35% of patients experience seizures that are resistant to anti-epileptic drugs. Patients with medication-resistant epilepsy have increased risks of premature death, psychosocial dysfunction and a reduced quality of life. This key resource delivers guidance for all clinicians involved in caring for patients with medication-resistant epilepsy in order to reduce these risks. Covering the epidemiology, biology, causes and potential treatments for medication-resistant epilepsy, this definitive and focused text reviews the clinical care needs of patients. Guidance is practical and includes treatment for specialized groups including pediatric patients and those with psychiatric comorbidities. Several promising non-pharmacologic interventions available for patients, such as surgery, neuromodulation diet therapy and botanical treatment are explored in detail. Leading international figures from a range of disciplines bring their expertise together holistically in this essential manual.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    [edited by] Karen Whalen, PharmD, BCPS, CDE, Assistant Dean for Clinical Education, Clinical Professor, Department of Pharmacotherapy and Translational Research, University of Florida College of Pharmacy, Gainesville, Florida, Heather C. Hardin, PharmD, BCACP, Clinical Assistant Professor, Medication Therapy Management Center, Department of Pharmacotherapy and Translational Research, University of Florida College of Pharmacy, Gainesville, Florida.
    Summary: The need to improve the use of medications has major implications for the nation's healthcare system. Burdened by high costs and an ineffective process of providing medication therapy, the current prescription drug environment poses considerable risks to patient safety. Medication Therapy Managment (MTM) is designed to address these deficiencies--and this essential text gives pharmacists all the right MTM tools to identify and eliminate drug-related problems that can cause potentially severe adverse events. Cohesively organized, this expert-authored guide begins with an introduction to data sets for MTM, covering essential topics such as establishing quality and performance improvement, the payer perspective, conducting the comprehensive medication review, and reimbursement. The second part reviews MTM data sets for a wide spectrum of disorders, from asthma and atrial fibrillation to HIV and heart disease. Enhanced by the latest perspectives on therapeutics, including completely up-to-date tables throughout, Medication Therapy Managment is a practical, skill-building roadmap for optimizing drug therapy and enhancing patient outcomes. -- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2018
  • Digital
    edited by David M. Angaran, Karen L. Whalen.
    Contents:
    I: INTRODUCTION TO DATA SETS FOR MEDICATION THERAPY MANAGEMENT
    Medicare and Medicaid
    Medicare Part D's Medication Therapy Management: Shifting from Neutral to Drive
    Practice Model
    Medication Therapy Management Quality and Performance Improvement
    Payer Perspective
    Physician Perspective on Medication Therapy Management
    Conducting the Comprehensive Medication Review
    Oral and Nonverbal Communication in Medication Therapy Management
    Documentation
    Reimbursement for Pharmacist Services
    The Complicated Patient. II: DISEASE-BASED MEDICATION THERAPY MANAGEMENT: DATA SETS
    Overview of Medication Therapy Management Data Sets
    Asthma Medication Therapy Management Data Set
    Atrial Fibrillation Medication Therapy Management Data Set
    Bipolar Disorder Medication Therapy Management Data Set
    Chronic Kidney Disease Medication Therapy Management Data Set
    Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease Medication Therapy Management Data Set
    Chronic Stable Angina Medication Therapy Management Data Set
    Dementia-Related Disorders Me-dication Therapy Management Data Set
    Depression Medication Therapy Management Data Set
    Diabetes Mellitus Medication Therapy Management Data Set
    Dyslipidemia Medication Therapy Management Data Set
    Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease Medication Therapy Management Data Set
    Headache Medication Therapy Management Data Set
    Heart Failure Medication Therapy Management Data Set
    Human Immunodeficiency Virus Medication Therapy Management Data Set
    Hypertension Medication Therapy Management Data Set
    Incontinence Medication Therapy Management Data Set
    Osteoarthritis Medication Therapy Management Data Set
    Osteoporosis Medication Therapy Management Data Set
    Pain Management Medication Therapy Management Data Set
    Peripheral Neuropathy Medication Therapy Management Data Set
    Rheumatoid Arthritis Medication Therapy Management Data Set
    Schizophrenia Medication Therapy Management Data Set
    Stroke Medication Therapy Management Data Set
    Thyroid Disorders Medication Therapy Management Data Set. III: APPENDICES
    Appendix A: Therapy Management Effective Characteristics and Questions to be Answered
    Appendix B: Medication Therapy Management Practice Model and Training Survey
    Appendix C: Medicare Part D Medication Therapy Management Program Standardized Format.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2015
  • Digital
    Summary: This TIP reviews three Food and Drug Administration-approved medications for opioid use disorder treatment--methadone, naltrexone, and buprenorphine--and the other strategies and services needed to support people in recovery.

    Contents:
    Part 1: An introduction to medications for the treatment of opioid use disorder. The approach to OUD care
    Overview of medications for OUD
    Duration of treatment with OUD medication
    Treatment settings
    Challenges to expanding access to OUD medication
    Resources
    Notes
    Part 2: Addressing opioid use disorder in general medical settings. Scope of the Problem
    Screening
    Assessment
    Treatment planning or referral
    Resources
    Appendix
    Notes
    Part 3: Pharmacotherapy for opioid use disorder. Pharmacotherapy for opioid use disorder
    Overview of pharmacotherapy for opioid use disorder. Methadone
    Naltrexone
    Buprenorphine
    Medical management strategies for patients taking OUD medications in office-based settings
    Medical management of patients taking OUD medications in hospital settings
    PART 4: Partnering addiction treatment counselors with clients and healthcare professionals. Overview and context
    Quick guide to medications
    Counselor-prescriber communications
    Creation of a supportive counseling experience
    Other common counseling concerns
    Notes
    Part 5: Resources related to medications for opioid use disorder. General Resources
    Resources for counselors and peer providers
    Resources for clients and families
    Provider tools and sample forms
    Glossary of TIP terminology
    Notes
    Digital Access R2Library 2018
  • Digital
    Summary: This new compendium contains AAP clinical practice guidelines, policy statements, clinical reports, and technical reports related to the use of medications in the pediatric population
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2020
  • Print
    Pescador del Hoyo, Luis.
    Contents: <br/
    >1. El vuelo de alta cota. Bibliografia (p. [187]-190).
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L781 .P47 1941
    1
  • Digital
    Noeline Latt, Katherine Conigrave, John B. Saunders, E. Jane Marshall, David Nutt ; Edizione italiana a cura di Massimo Clerici ed Ester di Giacomo.
    Summary: L'abuso di sostanze può essere alla base di un gran numero di patologie e disturbi psichiatrici, e viene classificato tra i primi quattro fattori di rischio che contribuiscono al carico di malattia globale. Una situazione di dipendenza può infatti complicare un quadro psichiatrico già difficile, poiché si sovrappone ad altri disturbi e talvolta ne prende le forme, rendendo ancora più ardua la valutazione del paziente. Individuare con precisione un disturbo da abuso di sostanze può facilitare la diagnosi clinica, evitare test non necessari e abbreviare la durata del ricovero. Questo volume costituisce una guida pratica e concisa rivolta agli studenti, ai medici e ad altre figure professionali che si confrontano con la moderna medicina della dipendenza. Illustrando una vasta gamma di evidenze, metodi e soluzioni per la gestione del paziente con dipendenza, questa guida fornisce gli strumenti e le conoscenze di base utili a una pratica clinica rapida ed efficace in questo campo.

    Contents:
    1 Obiettivi della Medicina delle Dipendenze
    2 Valutazione e diagnosi: principi generali
    3 Approcci alla gestione
    4 Alcool
    5 Tabacco
    6 Ipnotici sedativi
    7 Cannabis
    8 Oppioidi
    9 Psicostimolanti
    10 Altre sostanze
    11 Comorbidità psichiatrica
    12 Strati speciali della popolazione
    13 Sindromi cliniche specifiche
    14 Situazioni urgenti e difficili
    15 Questioni legali ed etiche
    Appendice.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital/Print
    Felix Garzón Maceda.
    Digital Access Google Books 1916-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    R482.A6 G2
    1
  • Digital
    Tariq Aftab, Khalid Rehman Hakeem, editors.
    Summary: Before the concept of history began, humans undoubtedly acquired life benefits by discovering medicinal and aromatic plants (MAPs) that were food and medicine. Today, a variety of available herbs and spices are used and enjoyed throughout the world and continue to promote good health. The international market is also quite welcoming for MAPs and essential oils. The increasing environment and nature conscious buyers encourage producers to produce high quality essential oils. These consumer choices lead to growing preference for organic and herbal based products in the world market. As the benefits of medicinal and aromatic plants are recognized, these plants will have a special role for humans in the future. Until last century, the production of botanicals relies to a large degree on wild-collection. However, the increasing commercial collection, largely unmonitored trade, and habitat loss lead to an incomparably growing pressure on plant populations in the wild. Therefore, medicinal and aromatic plants are of high priority for conservation. Given the above, we bring forth a comprehensive volume, "Medicinal and Aromatic Plants: Healthcare and Industrial Applications," highlighting the various healthcare, industrial and pharmaceutical applications that are being used on these immensely important MAPs and its future prospects. This collection of chapters from the different areas dealing with MAPs caters to the need of all those who are working or have interest in the above topic.

    Contents:
    Medicinal Plants and Herbal Drugs: An Overview
    Secondary Metabolites in Medicinal and Aromatic Plants (MAPs): Potent Molecules in Nature's Arsenal to Fight Human Diseases
    Biodiversity, Management and Sustainable Use of Medicinal and Aromatic Plant Resources
    Bioactive Secondary Metabolites of Medicinal and Aromatic Plants and Their Disease-Fighting Properties
    Potential Uses of Bioactive Compounds of Medicinal Plants and Their Mode of Action in Several Human Diseases
    Understanding the Mechanistic Functioning of Bioactive Compounds in Medicinal Plants
    Nutraceutical Potential of Herbs and Aromatic Plants of Himalayan Region
    Phytochemistry, Pharmacology and Toxicity of Medicinal Plants
    Amaranthus caudatus L. as a Potential Bioresource for Nutrition and Health
    Antidiabetic Property of Aloe vera (Aloe barbadensis) and Bitter Melon (Momordica charantia)
    Ethnobotanical Properties and Traditional Uses of Medicinal Plant Abutilon theophrasti Medik
    Phytochemistry, Pharmacology, and Toxicity of an Epiphytic Medicinal Shrub Viscum album L. (White Berry Mistletoe)
    Saffron: A Therapeutic and Prophylactic Nutrition for Human Population
    Phytochemistry, Pharmacology, and Pharmacokinetics of Phytoestrogens from Red Clover Extract: An Exhaustive Overview
    Roles of Phytometabolites in the Management of Obesity
    Chicory Inulin: A Versatile Biopolymer with Nutritional and Therapeutic Properties
    Medicinal Plant-Derived Antimicrobials' Fight Against Multidrug-Resistant Pathogens
    Biosynthesis of Lemongrass Essential Oil and the Underlying Mechanism for Its Insecticidal Activity
    Multiple-Usage Shrubs: Medicinal and Pharmaceutical Usage and Their Environmental Beneficiations
    Aromatic and Medicinal Plants for Phytoremediation: A Sustainable Approach
    Environmental Pollutants and Their Remediation Using Medicinal and Aromatic Plants
    Toxicity: Its Assessment and Remediation in Important Medicinal Plants
    State-of-the-Art Technologies for Improving the Quality of Medicinal and Aromatic Plants
    System Biology Approach for Functional Analysis of Medicinal and Aromatic Plants
    Synthetic Seed-Mediated Synchronized Multiplication Under In Vitro Conditions: An Efficient Technique for Conservation, Multiplication and Storage of Medicinal Plants
    Use of Secondary Metabolites from Medicinal and Aromatic Plants in the Fragrance Industry
    The Conservation and Utilization of Medicinal Plant Resources
    Medicinal Plant Resources: Threat to Its Biodiversity and Conservation Strategies
    Phytoremediation Potential of Medicinal and Aromatic Plants
    Medico-legal Perspectives of Usage, Commercialization, and Protection of Traditional Drug-Yielding and Essential Oil-Yielding Plants in India.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Ákos Máthé, Arnaldo Bandoni, editors.
    Summary: This volume, as the seventh of the series Medicinal and Aromatic Plants of the World, deals with the medicinal and aromatic plant (MAPs) treasures of the so-called Southern Cone, the three southernmost countries (Argentina, Chile and Uruguay) of South America. Similarly to the previous volumes of the series, the main focus is to collect and provide information on major aspects of botany, traditional usage, chemistry, production / collection practices, trade and utilization of this specific group of plants. The contributors, who are recognized professionals and specialist of the domain, have collected and present state of the art information on 41 species. Most of these are not only of interest from the scientific point of view, but hold also a potential for the prospective utilization of the decreasing, occasionally overexploited / endangered medicinal plant resources of this huge continent. The book is expected to serve as a source of information also on some less known or less studied species. As such the volume is expected to support future research and public health professionals.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Herbal Medicines in Argentina, Chile and Uruguay
    Chapter 2. The Native Floras of Argentina, Chile and Uruguay as Sources of Aromatic Products
    Chapter 3. Acantholippia seriphioides
    Chapter 4. Adesmia boronioides
    Chapter 5. Aloysia gratissima
    Chapter 6. Aloysia polystachya
    Chapter 7. Aristotelia chilensis
    Chapter 8. Artemisia copa
    Chapter 9. Aspidosperma quebracho blanco
    Chapter 10. Baccharis dracunculifolia
    Chapter 11. Baccharis tola and B. boliviensis
    Chapter 12. Berberidaceae from Chile
    Chapter 13. Bulnesia sarmientoi
    Chapter 14. Calceolaria spp
    Chapter 15. Dysphania ambrosioides
    Chapter 16. Chiliotrichum diffusum
    Chapter 17. Cissampelos spp
    Chapter 18. Colliguaja integérrima
    Chapter 19. Crinodermum spp
    Chapter 20. Cyclolepis genistoides
    Chapter 21. Eugenia uniflora
    Chapter 22. Fabiana imbricata
    Chapter 23. Fabiana spp
    Chapter 24. Gentianella spp
    Chapter 25. Gleditsia amorphoides
    Chapter 26. Hydrocotyle bonariensis
    Chapter 27. Ibicella lutea
    Chapter 28. Ilex paraguariensis
    Chapter 29. Ligaria cuneifolia
    Chapter 30. Lippia turbinata and L. fissicalyx
    Chapter 31. Lithraea molleoides
    Chapter 32. Madia sativa
    Chapter 33. Minthostachys mollis
    Chapter 34. Mulinum spinosum
    Chapter 35. Nectandra spp
    Chapter 36. Nothofagus antárctica
    Chapter 37. Parastrephia spp
    Chapter 38. Passiflora spp
    Chapter 39. Peumus boldus
    Chapter 40. Picrasma crenata
    Chapter 41. Quillaja brasiliensis
    Chapter 42. Quillaja saponaria
    Chapter 43. Schinus molle & S. areira
    Chapter 44. Solanum crispum
    Chapter 45. Solanum sisymbrifolium
    Chapter 46. Tagetes minuta
    Chapter 47. Zuccagnia punctata.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Kylie O'Brien, Philip Blair.
    Summary: This book functions as a clinician's guide to the use of cannabidiol (CBD) in the treatment of mental health conditions. It conveys the scientific evidence of efficacy of CBD as well as THC and addresses the social stigma attached to its medical use. The book describes the endocannabinoid system, how stress and the endocannabinoid system interact and key constituents, pharmacokinetics and safety aspects of medicinal cannabis, focusing on CBD and THC. Chapters on specific mental health conditions describe the underpinning pathomechanisms including how the endocannabinoid system is involved, and summarises the scientific evidence including animal and human research for the use of CBD and THC in treatment of such conditions. Topics covered include anxiety, depression, post-traumatic stress disorder, insomnia, Alzheimer's Disease and autism spectrum disorder. Chapters also discuss treatment guidelines and case studies. Unique and focused, Medicinal Cannabis and CBD in Mental Healthcare is an invaluable reference for medical practitioners seeking to adopt CBD-use in their treatment plans.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Endocannabinoid system
    ECS and regulation of stress
    Overview of cannabis
    Stress and Anxiety.-Depression
    PSTD
    Sleep
    Alzheimers
    Autism
    Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    Burger, Alfred.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    V403 .B95 1951
    2
  • Digital
    Dinesh Chandra Agrawal, Muralikrishnan Dhanasekaran, editors.
    Summary: The ever-rising increase in the consumption of medicinal herbs and its products and its exposure in the human population have generated concerns about the potential neurotoxicity of several new and existing botanicals. This book offers an accurate, relevant, and comprehensive coverage of a wide variety of medicinal herbs and fungi affecting the central and peripheral nervous system. It includes review articles that thoroughly describe the benefits and adverse effects of some of the most commonly used medicinal herbs and fungi, and the pathophysiological mechanisms underlying them. The book provides an all-inclusive overview of the diverse aspects of medicinal herbs and fungi related to neurotoxicity and/or neuroprotection, ranging from discussions of cellular and molecular processes and pathology to clinical aspects. The rich compilation brings together thorough and extensive research updates on the advances in the field. The chapters have been contributed by the experienced and eminent academicians, researchers, and scientists working in the field across the globe.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Mitosis Inhibitors and Medicinal Plants - Neurotoxicity and Neuroprotection.-Chapter 2. The Neurotrophic and Neuroprotective Potential of Macrofungi
    Chapter 3. Andrographolide, a Diterpene from Andrographis paniculata, and Its Influence on the Progression of Neurodegenerative Disorders
    Chapter 4 Ginseng: A Boon or a Curse to Neurodegenerative Diseases
    Chapter 5 Insights into Mechanisms and Models for Studying Neurological Adverse Events Mediated by Pharmacokinetic Interactions Between Clinical Drugs and Illicit Substances of Herbal and Fungal Origin
    Chapter 6 Cannabis Induced Neuroactivity: Research Trends and Commercial Prospects
    Chapter 7 Neurotoxicity of Polyherbal Formulations: Challenges and Potential Solutions
    Chapter 8 Balancing the Neuroprotective Versus Neurotoxic Effects of Cannabis
    Chapter 9 Alpha-Synuclein: Biomarker for Parkinson's Disease, It's Estimation Methods and Targeted Medicinal Therapies
    Chapter 10 Screening of Herbal Medicines for Neurotoxicity: Principles and Methods
    Chapter 11 Plants with Phytomolecules Recognized by Receptors in The Central Nervous
    Chapter 12 Reserpine Induced Depression and Other Neurotoxicity: A Monoaminergic Hypothesis
    Chapter 13 Traditional Medicinal Plants of Sri Lanka and Their Derivatives of Benefit to the Nervous System
    Chapter 14 Ameliorative Effects of Shodhana (Purification) Procedures on Neurotoxicity Caused by Ayurvedic Drugs of Mineral and Herbal Origin
    Chapter 15 St. John's Wort: A Therapeutic Herb to be Cautioned for Its Potential Neurotoxic Effects and Major Drug Interactions
    Chapter 16. Neurotoxic Potential of Alkaloids from Thorn Apple (Datura stramonium L.)
    A Commonly Used Indian Folk Medicinal Herb
    Chapter 17 Medicinal Plants in Uganda as Potential Therapeutics Against Neurological Disorders
    Chapter 18 Ayurvedic Ideology on Rasapanchak Based Cognitive Drug Intervention
    Chapter 19 Neurotoxic Medicinal Plants of Indian Himalayan Regions: An Overview
    Chapter 20.Neuroprotective Effects of Portulaca oleracea and Portulaca quadrifida Linn. .
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Dinesh Chandra Agrawal, Muralikrishnan Dhanasekaran, editors.
    Summary: Medicinal mushrooms are increasingly gaining attention worldwide because of their pharmacologically bioactive compounds, which have demonstrated potent and unique clinical properties. Scientific studies carried out during the last decade have confirmed their efficacy in treating a wide range of diseases. Extracts and bioactive compounds obtained from mushrooms have been used medicinally as anticancer, immunomodulator, antibacterial, antiviral, anti-inflammatory, anti-atherosclerotic, neuroprotectant, cardioprotectant, antioxidant, and anti-hypoglycemic agents, and in stem cell-based therapies. Introducing readers to the latest developments in, and ongoing research efforts on, medicinal mushrooms, this book gathers articles contributed by eminent researchers in different disciplines and from around the globe. Highlighting the tremendous potential of mushrooms for the development of new drugs, the topics covered include but are not limited to: Recent progress in research on the pharmaceutical potential of medicinal mushrooms and prospects for their clinical application; Edible mushroom neuronutraceuticals: Basis of therapeutics; Overview of therapeutic efficacy of mushrooms; Mushrooms - a wealth of resources for prospective stem cell-based therapies; Mushrooms as potential natural cytostatics.

    Contents:
    Intro; Dedication; Preface; Acknowledgments; Contents; About the Editors and Contributors; Editors; Contributors;
    1: Recent Progress in Research on the Pharmacological Potential of Mushrooms and Prospects for Their Clinical Application; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Biological and Genetic Resources of Medicinal Mushrooms and Their Application; 1.3 Mushroom-Derived Bioactive Compounds; 1.3.1 Polysaccharides; 1.3.2 Terpenoids, Steroids, and Sterols; 1.3.3 Phenolics and Other Compounds; 1.4 Pharmacological Activity of Mushrooms; 1.4.1 Antimicrobial (Antifungal and Antibacterial) Activity 1.4.2 Immunomodulatory and Anticancer Activities1.4.3 Hypocholesterolemic, Hypoglycemic, and Anti-obesity Effects; 1.4.4 Antioxidant and Anti-inflammatory Effects; 1.4.5 Cardioprotective Effect; 1.4.6 Neuroprotective and Antidepressant Effects; 1.4.7 Antiviral and Anti-allergic Effects; 1.5 Nutritional and Dietary Values of Medicinal Mushrooms; 1.6 Current State of Epidemiological and Clinical Studies of Medicinal Mushrooms; 1.7 Conclusions and Future Prospects; References;
    2: Edible Mushrooms as Neuro-nutraceuticals: Basis of Therapeutics; 2.1 Introduction 2.1.1 The Good and Bad Mushrooms2.1.1.1 Edible Mushrooms; 2.1.1.2 Medicinal Mushrooms; 2.1.1.3 Edible Mushrooms with Toxic Effects; 2.1.1.4 Poisonous Mushrooms; 2.2 Mushrooms and Neural Cells; 2.2.1 Neuroprotective Effects of Mushrooms; 2.2.2 Neuro-regenerative Effects of Mushrooms; 2.2.3 Neuronal Differentiation, Stem Cell Generation, and Myelinogenesis; 2.3 Mushrooms and Some Neurological Diseases; 2.3.1 Fatigue and Depression; 2.3.2 Beneficial Effects of Mushrooms in Alzheimer's Disease; 2.3.3 Mushrooms Are Good for Parkinson's Disease 2.4 Mechanisms by Which Mushrooms Exert Medicinal Effects2.4.1 Short-Term or Long-Term ER Stress Have Varied Effects on Neural Health; 2.4.2 Erinacine A Regulates Cellular Oxidant Stress and Immunity to Affect Neuronal Rescue; 2.4.3 Pleurotus giganteus Blocks Nitrosative Stress to Aid in Neuronal Protection; 2.4.4 Amanita caesarea Regulates Ca2+-Mediated Apoptosis and Increases Autophagy in Cells; 2.4.5 Polyozellin Tames Apoptosis During Excitotoxicity; 2.5 Mushrooms as Probiotic: The Gut-Brain Axis; 2.6 Conclusions; References;
    3: Overview of Therapeutic Efficacy of Mushrooms 3.1 Introduction3.2 Overview of the Therapeutic Efficacy of Mushrooms; 3.2.1 Beneficial Role of Mushrooms or Mushroom-Derived Substances in Neurological Diseases; 3.2.2 Beneficial Role of Mushrooms or Mushroom-Derived Substances in Cardiovascular Diseases; 3.2.3 Beneficial Role of Mushrooms or Mushroom-Derived Substances in Cancer; 3.2.4 Beneficial Role of Mushrooms or Mushroom-Derived Substances in Diabetes Mellitus; 3.2.5 Beneficial Role of Mushrooms or Mushroom-Derived Substances Against Infectious Diseases
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Shaik Mahammad Khasim, Chunlin Long, Kanchit Thammasiri, Henrik Lutken, editors.
    Summary: Plants have been a source of medicines and have played crucial role for human health. Despite tremendous advances in the field of synthetic drugs and antibiotics, plants continue to play a vital role in modern as well as traditional medicine across the globe. In even today, one-third of the world's population depends on traditional medicine because of its safety features and ability to effectively cure diseases. This book presents a comprehensive guide to medicinal plants, their utility, diversity and conversation, as well as biotechnology. It is divided into four main sections, covering all aspects of research in medicinal plants: biodiversity and conservation; ethnobotany and ethnomedicine; bioactive compounds from plants and microbes; and biotechnology. All sections cover the latest advances. The book offers a valuable asset for researchers and graduate students of biotechnology, botany, microbiology and the pharmaceutical sciences. It is an equally important resource for doctors (especially those engaged in Ayurveda and allopathy); the pharmaceutical industry (for drug design and synthesis); and the agricultural sciences.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Editors and Contributors
    About the Editors
    Contributors
    Part I: Biodiversity and Conservation
    1: Biodiversity of Medicinal Plants in the Eastern Ghats of Northern Andhra Pradesh, India
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Biodiversity of Medicinal Plants in the Eastern Ghats of Andhra Pradesh
    1.3 Conclusions
    References
    2: Biodiversity, Conservation and Medicinal Uses of Seaweeds: The Glimpses
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Biodiversity
    2.3 Conservation
    2.4 Medicinal Uses
    2.5 Recommendations
    References 3: Tree Flora of Andhra Pradesh, India
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Location and Characteristics of the Study Area
    3.3 Geographical Division
    3.3.1 The Coastal Plains
    3.3.2 Eastern Ghats
    3.3.3 The Western Peneplains
    3.3.3.1 Vegetation
    3.4 Tree Flora Analysis
    3.5 Phytogeographical Distributional Pattern of Tree Taxa
    3.6 Endemic Tree Taxa to Andhra Pradesh
    3.7 Endemic Trees of Peninsular India Occurring in Andhra Pradesh (Source, Nayar et al. 1984)
    3.8 Overexploited Tree Taxa
    3.9 Causes for Depletion of Tree Species and Its Conservation
    References 4: Genetic Diversity and Variability Analysis in Sweet Flag (Acorus calamus L.)
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Genetic Diversity Analysis in Acorus calamus L.
    4.2.1 Clustering Pattern
    4.2.2 Intra- and Inter-Cluster Distances
    4.2.3 Cluster Mean for Different Characters
    4.2.4 Contribution of Characters to Genetic Divergence
    4.2.5 Genetic Variability
    4.3 Conclusion
    References
    5: Flora of Mangrove Species Utilized for Ethnomedicinal Practices in Gautami Godavari Estuary, Andhra Pradesh, India
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Mangrove Flora and Ethnomedicinal Purposes 7: Structure Design and Establishment of Database Application System for Miao Medicinal Plants in Guizhou Province, China
    7.1 Introduction
    7.2 Database Structure
    7.2.1 Demand Analysis
    7.2.2 Data Sources of Medicinal Plants
    7.3 Web Development Platform
    7.3.1 Software and Hardware Configuration
    7.3.2 Development of Technology
    7.3.3 Framework Database
    7.4 Implementation of the Database System
    7.4.1 Homepage
    7.4.2 Species Identification
    7.4.3 Data Retrieval
    7.4.4 Plant Lists
    7.4.5 User Center
    7.5 Conclusion
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Nirmal Joshee, Sadanand A. Dhekney, Prahlad Parajuli, editors.
    Summary: This book offers a fresh look on a variety of issues concerning herbal medicine - the methods of growing and harvesting various medicinal plants; their phytochemical content; medicinal usage; regulatory issues; and mechanism of action against myriad of human and animal ailments. 'Medicinal Plants: From Farm to Pharmacy comprises chapters authored by renowned experts from academics and industry from all over the world. It provides timely, in-depth study/analysis of medicinal plants that are already available in the market as supplements or drug components, while also introducing several traditional herbs with potential medicinal applications from various regions of the world. The book caters to the needs of a diverse group of readers: plant growers, who are looking for ways to enhance the value of their crops by increasing phytochemical content of plant products; biomedical scientists who are studying newer applications for crude herbal extracts or isolated phytochemicals; clinicians and pharmacologists who are studying interactions of herbal compounds with conventional treatment modalities; entrepreneurs who are navigating ways to bring novel herbal supplements to the market; and finally, natural medicine enthusiasts and end-users who want to learn how herbal compounds are produced in nature, how do they work and how are they used in traditional or modern medicine for various disease indications.

    Contents:
    1. The Evolution of Modern Medicine: Garden to Pill Box
    2. Bioprospecting for Pharmaceuticals- An Overview and Vision for Future Access and Benefit Sharing
    3. Nepal: A Global Hotspot for Medicinal Orchids
    4. Current Status and Future Prospects for Select Underutilized Medicinally-Valuable Plants of Puerto Rico: A Case Study
    5. Black Pepper: Health Benefits, In Vitro Multiplication and Commercial Cultivation
    6. Prospects for Goji Berry (Lycium barbarum L.) Production in North America
    7. Skullcaps (Scutellaria spp.): Ethnobotany and Current Research
    8. Cultivating Medical Grade Cannabis for the Development of Phytopharmaceuticals
    9. Natural Products as Possible Vaccine Adjuvants for Infectious Diseases and Cancer
    10. In vitro Plant Cell Cultures: A Route to Production of Natural Molecules and Systematic in vitro Assays for Their Biological Properties
    11. Antioxidant, Antimicrobial, Analgesic, Anti-inflammatory and Antipyretic Effects of Bioactive Compounds from Passiflora Species
    12. Modulation of Tumor Immunity by Medicinal Plant or Functional Food Derived Compounds
    13. Dietary Brown Seaweed Extract Supplementation in Small Ruminants
    14. Discovery of Green Tea Polyphenol-Based Antitumor Drugs: Mechanisms of Action and Clinical Implications
    15. Therapeutic and Medicinal Uses of Terpenes
    16. Unexplored Medicinal Flora Hidden Within South Africas Wetlands
    17. Seabuckthorn: A Multipurpose Medicinal Plant From Upper Himalayas
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Woon-Chien Teng, Ho Han Kiat, Rossarin Suwanarusk, and Hwee-Ling Koh.
    Contents:
    Malaria : an overview
    Current anti-malarial drugs
    Research on medicinal plants for malaria
    Selected anti-malarial plants.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Namrita Lall.
    Summary: "Medicinal Plants for Holistic Health and Well-Being discusses, in depth, the use of South African plants to treat a variety of ailments, including tuberculosis, cancer, periodontal diseases, acne, postmacular hypomelanosis, and more. Plants were selected on the basis of their traditional use, and the book details the scientific evidence that supports their pharmacological and therapeutic potential to safely and effectively treat each disease. Thus, this book is a valuable resource for all researchers, students and professors involved in advancing global medicinal plant research." --Publisher.

    Contents:
    Traditional medicine : the ancient roots of modern practice
    Are medicinal plants effective for skin cancer?
    Fighting the inevitable : skin aging and plants
    Exploiting medicinal plants as possible treatments for acne vulgaris
    Medicinal plants as alternative treatments for progressive macular hypomelanosis
    The role of medicinal plants in oral care
    Can medicinal plants provide an adjuvant for tuberculosis patients?
    Medicinal plants used in the treatment of superficial skin infections : from traditional medicine to herbal soap formulations
    Garlic (Allium sativum) and its associated molecules, as medicine
    Maximizing medicinal plants : steps to realizing their full potential.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Victor Kuete
    Contents:
    Part I. Diverse degenerative diseases in Africa
    1. Diseases in Africa : an overview
    2. Management of inflammatory and nociceptive disorders in Africa
    3. Burden and health policy of cancers in Africa
    5. Management of infectious diseases in Africa
    6. Overview of governmental support across Africa toward the development and growth of herbal medicine
    7. Preparation, standardization, and quality control of medicinal plants in Africa
    Part II. Therapeutic potential of African medicinal spices and vegetables
    8. Antimicrobial activities of African medicinal spices and vegetables
    9. Anti-inflammatory and anti-nociceptive activities of African medicinal spices and vegetables
    10. Anticancer activities of African medicinal spices and vegetables
    11. Antiemetic African medicinal spices and vegetables
    12. African Medicinal Spices and Vegetables and Their Potential in the Management of Metabolic Syndrome
    13. Other health benefits of African medicinal spices and vegetables
    Part III. Popular African medicinal spices and vegetables, and their health effects
    14. Allium cepa
    15. Allium sativum
    16. Canarium schweinfurthii
    17. Cinnamon species
    18. Cymbopogon citratus
    19. Curcuma longa
    20. Lactuca sativa
    21. Mangifera indica L. (Anacardiaceae)
    22. Moringa oleifera
    23. Myristica fragrans : a review
    24. Passiflora edulis
    25. Petroselinum crispum. a Review
    26. Sesamum indicum
    27. African Medicinal Spices of Genus Piper
    28. Thymus vulgaris
    29. Syzygium aromaticum
    Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Print
    R. Steven Urban, J. Rush Pierce Jr., Roger D. Smalligan.
    Contents:
    Infectious disease
    Hospital-based medicine
    Rheumatology
    Pulmonary disease
    Cardiology
    Endocrinology and metabolic disease
    Gastroenterology
    Nephrology
    Hematology and oncology
    Neurology
    Dermatology
    General medicine and prevention
    Allergy and immunology
    Geriatrics
    Women's health.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    R834.5 .M4 2016
    2
  • Digital
    Ronald V. Bucci.
    Contents:
    Healthcare and Business
    Leadership and Governance
    Revenue Cycle
    Financial Definitions and Variances
    Income Statement
    Balance Sheet
    Statement of Cash Flows
    Financial Ratios
    Budgeting and Variance Analysis
    Strategic Planning and Business Planning
    Healthcare Insurance
    Managed Care
    Payment Methods
    Corporation and Hospital Structures
    Physician Employment and Compensation
    Medical Business Law and Regulations
    New Government Initiatives.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital/Print
    Borms, J.; Hebbelinck, M.; Hills, Andrew P.; Jokl, Ernst; Micheli, Lyle J.; Noakes, Timothy; Shephard, Roy J.
    Digital Access Karger v. 17-, 1984-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC1200 .M484
    37
  • Digital/Print
    Paul S. Auerbach.
    Summary: Since 1986, Medicine for the Outdoors has been hailed as the definitive take-along manual on the subject. Packed with step-by-step instructions and how-to explanations, this updated edition tells you the best way to respond to just about any medical problem. Logically organized, simple-to-understand enhanced illustrations and an increased focus on new topics mean this medical reference book may literally save your life. Whether you're venturing into mountains, deserts, forests, or out to sea, it belongs in your pack!

    Contents:
    General first-aid principles
    An approach to the unconscious victim
    Chest injury
    Serious lung disorders
    Chest pain
    Bleeding
    Shock
    Head injury
    Allergic reaction
    Seizure
    Fractures and dislocations
    Amputation
    Burns
    Inhalation injuries
    Abdominal pain
    Emergency childbirth
    Diabetes
    Stroke
    Infectious diseases
    Dealing with death
    General symptoms
    Head (also eye, ear, nose, throat, and mouth)
    Upper respiratory disorders
    Disorders of the gastrointestinal tract
    Skin disorders
    Minor bruises and wounds
    Musculoskeletal injuries
    Disorders of the kidneys, bladder, and prostate
    Male genital problems
    Psychiatric emergencies
    Injuries and illnesses due to cold
    Injuries and illnesses due to heat
    Wildland fires
    High altitude-related problems
    Snakebite
    Insect and arthropod bites
    Lightning strike, tornado (cyclone), hurricane (typhoon), flood, earthquake, tidal wave (tsunami), landslide (mudslide), volcano, and snow avalanche
    Hazardous aquatic life and aquatic infections
    Underwater diving accidents
    Drowning
    Animal attacks
    Wild plant and mushroom poisoning
    Oxygen administration
    Water disinfection
    Motion sickness
    Jet lag
    First-aid kits
    Immunizations
    Transport of the injured victim
    Ground-to-air distress signals
    Lost people
    Procedures
    Commonly used drugs (medications) and doses
    Conversion tables
    Guidelines for prevention of diseases transmitted via human blood and other bodily fluids
    Commonly used applications of the SAM splint
    Personal safety in an age of global conflict, kidnapping, and terrorism
    Emergency canine medicine.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2016
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC88.9.O95 A94 2016
    1
  • Digital
    Yann Meunier.
    Summary: This book outlines risk assessments for 28 diseases and medical conditions including the following aspects: genetics, biochemistry, serology, past medical history, family history, co-morbidities, age, gender, ethnicity, nutrition and lifestyle. Recommendations are made for how to avoid, eliminate or mitigate risks. Preventing measures concerning chemical compound intake, lifestyle and nutrition are proposed. The unique content and approach of the book to chronic disease management make it a state-of-the-art reference work, addressing a missing component of medical care and reflecting the cutting edge of preventive medicine.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Diseases and Medical Conditions
    Pointer Documents.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Mira Harrison-Woolrych, editor.
    Summary: In this definitive new text, the major medicines, devices and vaccines used by women worldwide are brought together for the first time in a single volume. Written and edited by international experts with an evidence-based approach, Medicines for Women offers a comprehensive summary of all key areas. In the first part, issues relating to female drug exposure and prescribing to subgroups of women ℓ́ℓ for example during pregnancy and lactation, and to adolescent women ℓ́ℓ are presented in the context of contemporary clinical practice. In the second part, specific groups of medicines are reviewed, including oral contraceptives (with an additional chapter on venous thromboembolism), emergency contraception, contraceptive devices, treatment of chronic pelvic pain, hormone replacement therapy, bisphosphonates, herbal medicines for women, and human papilloma virus vaccines. Every chapter reviews and summarizes the efficacy and safety of each group of products and concludes with a useful set of clinical ℓ́ℓtake-homeℓ́ℓ messages. In the third part of the book, broader perspectives are presented ℓ́ℓ from a primary-care overview of prescribing for women, through to regulatory, political and religious aspects, including issues in developing countries. The two final chapters focus on communicating the benefits and risks of medicines for women. This book is aimed at prescribers, other healthcare professionals and students of womenℓ́ℓs health throughout the world. It is an extremely valuable resource for all in clinical practice, for students of medicine, nursing, pharmacy and related sciences, and also for those in medicines regulation, pharmacovigilance and the pharmaceutical industry.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    <Glavni redaktor : Ante Šercer ; redaktor za ilustracije Alexsandar Vučer>.
    Contents:
    1. A-Ćul. Yud 83- (Yu 66-2212)
    2. D-Giu YuD 83- (Yu...).
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Retired Reference (Downstairs)
    R125 .M481
    4
  • Digital
    Swati Jha, Emma Ferriman, editors.
    Summary: This book highlights minimum standards relating to the management of different conditions in the practice of Obstetrics and Gynaecology. The editors explore clinical governance issues, common causes of as well as ways to avoid litigation. The UK is experiencing a dramatic increase in medico-legal claims. The 4 main reasons for litigation are: accountability, the need for an explanation, concern with standards of care and compensation. However the decision to take legal action is determined not only by the original injury, but failure to provide information, an explanation and an apology. Insensitive handling of an injury and poor communication after the original incident increases the risk of litigation and erodes the patient-doctor relationship. Doctors almost never deliberately cause harm to patients, however increasingly claims are being defended successfully. This book is invaluable to clinicians and lawyers alike and raises awareness of how to avoid facing clinical negligence claims in our day to day practice.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Part I: General Swati Jha and Robert Burrell;
    1: Ethics in Medicine; 1.1 The Difference Between the Law and Ethics; 1.2 Ethical Principles; 1.3 Case Scenario; 1.3.1 Termination Ethics; 1.3.2 Personhood; 1.3.3 Bodily Autonomy Versus Not Killing; 1.3.4 Taking Potentiality Seriously; 1.3.5 Deprivation of Futures; 1.4 Case Scenario; References;
    2: Why Doctors Get Sued; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Consent; 2.2.1 Key Legal Principles; 2.3 Errors of Treatment or Surgery; 2.3.1 Key Legal Principles; 2.4 Errors of Diagnosis/Delayed Diagnosis. 2.4.1 Key Legal PrinciplesReferences;
    3: Consent After Montgomery: Clinical Considerations; 3.1 Background; 3.2 Requirements for Consent; 3.3 Consent After Montgomery: What Constitutes Sufficient Information?; 3.3.1 Exceptions to Provision of Information; 3.3.2 Birth Choices Post-Montgomery; 3.4 Court Decisions Since Montgomery; 3.4.1 A v East Kent Hospitals University NHS Foundation Trust [2015] EWHC 1038; 3.4.2 Spencer v Hillingdon Hospitals NHS Trust [2015] EWHC 1058; References;
    4: Consent After Montgomery: Legal Considerations; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Use of a Consent Form. 4.3 Future Law4.4 The Decision Record; References;
    5: Duty of Candour; 5.1 Background; 5.2 Professional Duty of Candour; 5.3 Statutory Duty of Candour (CQC-Registered Healthcare Organisations, England); 5.4 Consequences of Not Complying with Duty of Candour; 5.5 Case Study: Bladder Injury; References;
    6: Leading Cases; 6.1 Negligence; 6.1.1 What Constitutes Negligence?; 6.2 Causation; References;
    7: The Claim Journey; 7.1 Introduction; 7.2 Letter Before Action; 7.3 Letter of Claim; 7.4 The Response; 7.5 Formal Proceedings. 7.6 Doctors Witness Statement and Exchange of Witness Statements7.7 Trial; References;
    8: GMC Referral; 8.1 Background; 8.2 GMC Guidance; 8.3 GMC Statistics on Number and Outcome of Referrals; 8.4 Sources of Referral; 8.5 When You Should Self-Report?; 8.6 What Type of Concerns Are Investigated?; 8.7 Notification of Criminal Investigations; 8.8 IOT Hearings; 8.9 GMC Investigation; 8.10 Referral to a MPT Hearing; 8.11 Resolution of Cases Not Referred to a MPT Hearing; 8.12 Things to Remember; References;
    9: Report Writing; 9.1 Introduction; 9.2 Legal and Ethical Framework. 9.3 Pitfalls and Risks9.4 Positive Advice; References;
    10: Being an Expert Witness; 10.1 Background; 10.2 Definition of an Expert Witness; 10.3 Duty of the Expert Witness; References;
    11: The Obstetrician/Gynaecologist in Coroner's Court; 11.1 History; 11.2 Current Position in England and Wales; 11.3 The Investigation; 11.4 The Inquest; 11.5 Conclusions; 11.6 Unnatural Death; 11.7 Accident/Misadventure; 11.8 Unlawful Killing; 11.9 Stillbirths; 11.10 Abortion; 11.11 Preparing for the Inquest; References;
    12: Intimate Examinations and Chaperones; 12.1 Background.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    I399.A3 A8
    1
  • Print
    Ijeoma Oluo.
    Summary: From the author of the New York Times bestseller So You Want to Talk About Race, a subversive history of white male American identity. What happens to a country that tells generation after generation of white men that they deserve power? What happens when success is defined by status over women and people of color, instead of by actual accomplishments? Through the last 150 years of American history-from the post-Reconstruction South and the mythic stories of cowboys in the West, to the present-day controversy over NFL protests and the backlash against the rise of women in politics--Ijeoma Oluo exposes the devastating consequences of white male supremacy on women, people of color, and white men themselves. Mediocre investigates the real costs of this phenomenon in order to imagine a new white male identity, one free from racism and sexism. As provocative as it is essential, this book will upend everything you thought you knew about American identity and offers a bold new vision of American greatness.

    Contents:
    Introduction: Works according to design
    Cowboys and patriots: how the West was won
    For your benefit, in our image: the centering of white men in social justice movements
    The Ivy League and the tax eaters: white men's assault on higher education
    We have far too many Negroes: white America's bitter dependency on people of color
    Fire the women: the convenient use and abuse of women in the workplace
    Socialists and quota queens: when women of color challenge the political status quo
    Go fucking play: football and the fear of Black men
    Conclusion: Can white manhood be more than this?
    Digital Access 2020
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    edited by Narayanan Srinivasan.
    Contents:
    The neuroscience of meditation: classification, phenomenology, correlates, and mechanisms / Tracy Brandmeyer, Arnaud Delorme, Helané Wahbeh
    Evolution from four mental states to the highest state of consciousness: A neurophysiological basis of meditation as defined in yoga texts / Singh Deepeshwar, H.R. Nagendra, Bal Budhi Rana
    Meditation induces physical relaxation and enhances cognition: A perplexing paradox / Kishore K. Deepak
    Contingent negative variation and P3 modulations following mindful movement training / Stefano Lasaponara, Joseph Glicksohn, Federica Mauro, Tal Dotan Ben-Soussan
    State-trait influences of Vipassana meditation practice on P3 EEG dynamics / Ratna Jyothi Kakumanu [and others]
    Short-term mindful breath awareness training improves inhibitory control and response monitoring / Joan P. Pozuelos, Bethan R. Mead, M. Rosario Rueda, Peter Malinowski
    Fully immersed: State absorption and electrophysiological effects of the OVO Whole-Body Perceptual Deprivation chamber / Tal Dotan Ben-Soussan Kakumanu [and others]
    Concentrative (Sahaj Samadhi) meditation training and visual awareness: An fMRI study on color afterimages / Amrendra Singh, V.S. Chandrasekhar Pammi, Anupam Guleria, Narayanan Srinivasan
    Toward a brain theory of meditation / Antonino Raffone Kakumanu [and others]
    Tibetan Buddhist monastic debate: Psychological and neuroscientific analysis of a reasoning-based analytical meditation practice / Marieke K. van Vugt [and others]
    Training attention for conscious non-REM sleep: The yogic practice of yoga-nidrā and its implications for neuroscience research / Stephen Parker
    Nondual awareness: Consciousness-as-such as non-representational reflexivity / Zoran Josipovic
    The contemplative exercise through the lenses of predictive processing: A promising approach / Giuseppe Pagnoni
    Mindfulness training as cognitive training in high-demand cohorts: An initial study in elite military servicemembers / Anthony P. Zanesco, Ekaterina Denkova, Scott L. Rogers, William K. MacNulty, Amishi P. Jha
    Contemplative neuroscience, self-awareness, and education / Aviva Berkovich-Ohana, Patricia A. Jennings, Shiri Lavy
    Yoga: Balancing the excitation-inhibition equilibrium in psychiatric disorders / Urvakhsh Meherwan Mehta, B.N. Gangadhar.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2019
  • Digital
    Donato F. Romagnolo, Ornella I. Selmin, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I: Mediterranean Diet and Lifestyle in a World Context
    Updating the Benefits of the Mediterranean Diet: From the Heart to the Earth
    Mediterranean Diet and Lifestyle in a Modern World Context
    Part II: Historical, Behavioral, and Geographical Perspective of the Mediterranean Diet and Lifestyle
    Historical and Behavioral Perspectives of the Mediterranean Diet
    Historical Origins of the Mediterranean Diet, Regional Dietary Profiles and the Development of the Dietary Guidelines
    Implementing the Mediterranean Diet: a French Perspective and Comparisons with other Mediterranean Countries
    Part III: Mediterranean Diet and Lifestyle for Health Promotion
    Mediterranean Oils and Fats, and Disease Risk
    Inflammation and Cardiovascular Disease and Protection by the Mediterranean Diet
    Wine, Polyphenols and Cardioprotection
    Impact of Mediterranean Diet on Metabolic Syndrome
    Effects of Mediterranean Diet on the Metabolome
    Part IV: Aging and Cancer Risk
    The Value of the Mediterranean Diet for Older Adults: Emphasis on Obesity Interventions
    The Mediterranean Diet and Neurodegenerative Diseases
    The Mediterranean Diet and Breast Cancer
    Mediterranean Diet, Inflammatory Bowel Disease and Colon Cancer
    Epigenetics of Mediterranean Diet: Altering Disease Risk
    Part V: Building a Mediterranean-Like Pyramid
    Physical Activity and the Mediterranean Diet
    Mediterranean Diet and Biodiversity
    Food-Based Approaches for Achieving Nutritional Adequacy with the Mediterranean DASH, and USDA Food Patterns
    Building the Mediterranean Pyramid-Part A: Mediterranean Recipes
    Building the Mediterranean Pyramid-Part B: Balancing the Plate.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Pier Giorgio Giacomini, editor.
    Summary: The book offers a thorough description of rhinoplasty techniques for patients from the Mediterranean area. Noses come in different shapes and colors, depending on the various biotypes of the different geographic regions. This represents a topical issue for rhinoplasty surgeons, since different nasal morphologies imply different anatomic conditions. Moreover, beauty ideal varies from one region to the other, and those differences need to be taken into consideration. Based on these premises, the ethnic rhinoplasty is becoming more and more important among facial plastic surgeons. In order to broaden the understanding of anatomo-functional and cultural or cosmetic aspects specific to the Mediterranean nasal biotype, the book collects and discusses the experiences of surgeons operating on patients from the various regions of the Mediterranean area. Mediterranean Rhinoplasty represents a valuable resource not only for surgeons who are already experts in facial plastic surgery, but also for young otorhinolaryngologists, plastic surgeons and maxillofacial surgeons.

    Contents:
    Shape and function of the nose
    Nasal biotypes in the Mediterranean area
    Anatomical cues of the Mediterranean noses
    Morphological diagnostic tools in rhinoplasty
    Functional diagnostic tools in rhinoplasty
    Rhinoplasty Italian experience: Closed approach. Open approach. Preservation approach. Tip surgery
    Western Mediterranean nose correction
    Southern Mediterranean nose correction
    Eastern Mediterranean nose correction. .
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Print
    Guttmann, Walter; Volkmann, Herbert.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    H123 .G98 1917
    1
  • Print
    Guttmann, Walter; Volkmann, Herbert.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    H123 .G98 1923
    1
  • Digital
    Summary: An online journal and ebook service of the Thieme Publishing Group.
    Digital Access Database
  • Digital
    Summary: An online journal and ebook service of the Thieme Publishing Group.
    Digital Access Database
  • Digital
    Summary: An online journal and ebook service of the Thieme Publishing Group.
    Digital Access Database
  • Digital
    Summary: An online journal and ebook service of the Thieme Publishing Group.
    Digital Access Database
  • Digital
    Summary: An online journal and ebook service of the Thieme Publishing Group.
    Digital Access Database
  • Digital
    Summary: An online journal and ebook service of the Thieme Publishing Group.
    Digital Access Database
  • Digital
    edited by Catherine Arnott Smith and Alla Keselman.
    Contents:
    1. Designing health information programs to promote the health and well-being of vulnerable populations: the benefits of evidence-based strategic health communication / Gary L. Kreps and Linda Neuhauser
    2. Health literacy research's growth, challenges, and frontiers / Robert A. Logan
    3. Medical information for the consumer before the World Wide Web / Catherine Arnott Smith
    4. Ethical health information: Do it well! Do it right! Do no harm! / Michelynn McKnight
    5. Health information resource provision in the public library setting / Mary Grace Flaherty
    6. Who needs a health librarian? Ethical reference transactions in the consumer health library / Nancy C. Seeger
    7. Consumer health information: the community college conundrum / Anne Chernaik
    8. Health information delivery outside the clinic in a developing nation: The Qatar Cancer Society in the State of Qatar / Ellen N. Sayed and Alan S. Weber
    9. Health information and older adults / Kay Hogan Smith
    10. Re-envisioning the health information-seeking conversation: insights from a community center / Prudence W. Dalrymple and Lisl Zach
    11. For the mutual benefit: health information provision in the science classroom / Albert Zeyer, Daniel M. Levin and Alla Keselman
    12. "You will be glad you hung on to this quit": sharing information and giving support when stopping smoking online / Marie-Thérèse Rudolf von Rohr
    13. Health information in bits and bytes: considerations and challenges of digital health communication / Clare Tobin Lence and Korey Capozza
    14. Does specialization matter? How journalistic expertise explains differences in health-care coverage / Michael W. Wagner
    Afterword
    Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2015
  • Digital
    Amy S. Kelley, Diane E. Meier, editors.
    Summary: Meeting the Needs of Older Adults with Serious Illness: Challenges and Opportunities in the Age of Health Care Reform provides an introduction to the principles of palliative care, describes current models of delivering palliative care across care settings, and examines opportunities in the setting of healthcare policy reform for palliative care to improve outcomes for patients, families and healthcare institutions. The United States is currently facing a crisis in health care marked by unsustainable spending and quality that is poor relative to international benchmarks. Yet this is also a critical time of opportunity. Because of its focus on quality of care, the Affordable Care Act is poised to expand access to palliative care services for the sickest, most vulnerable, and therefore most costly, 5% of patients- a small group who nonetheless drive about 50% of all healthcare spending. Palliative care is specialized medical care for people with serious illnesses. It focuses on providing patients with relief from the symptoms, pain, and stress of a serious illness, whatever the diagnosis or stage of illness. The goal is to improve quality of life for both the patient and the family. Research has demonstrated palliative care?s positive impact on health care value. Patients (and family caregivers) receiving palliative care experience improved quality of life, better symptom management, lower rates of depression and anxiety, and improved survival. Because patient and family needs are met, crises are prevented, thereby directly reducing need for emergency department and hospital use and their associated costs. An epiphenomenon of better quality of care, the lower costs associated with palliative care have been observed in multiple studies. Meeting the Needs of Older Adults with Serious Illness: Challenges and Opportunities in the Age of Health Care Reform, a roadmap for effective policy and program design, brings together expert clinicians, researchers and policy leaders, who tackle key areas where real-world policy options to improve access to quality palliative care could have a substantial role in improving value.

    Contents:
    When More is Less: Overuse of medical services harms patients
    Disparities in Access to Palliative Care
    Family Caregiving and Palliative Care: Aligning Theory, Practice, and Policy
    This is Your Life: Achieving a Comprehensive, Person-Centered Model of Care at the Intersection of Policy, Politics, and Private Sector Innovation
    Hospice and Health Care Reform: What is the Optimal Path?
    Palliative Care in the Long Term Care Setting
    Meeting the Needs of Older Adults with Serious Illness: Challenges and Opportunities in the Age of Health Care Reform
    Palliative care?s impact on utilization and costs: Implications for health services research and policy
    Long-term Services and Supports: A Necessary Complement to Palliative Care
    The Manifest Destinies of Managed Care and Palliative Care
    Models of Care Delivery and Coordination: Palliative Care Integration within Accountable Care Organizations
    Implementing a Care Planning System: How to Fix the Most Pervasive Errors in Health Care
    Igniting Action to Integrate Palliative Care in our US Health System: The Role of Disease Specific Advocacy Groups A cancer advocacy case study
    What do you mean you don't also offer palliative care? Effective public engagement to harness demand to improve care for serious illness
    Research Priorities in Palliative Care for Older Adults
    Medical and Nursing Education & Training.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Riitta Hari, Aina Puce.
    Contents:
    Insights into the human brain
    Basic physics and physiology of MEG and EEG
    An overview of EEG and MEG
    Instrumentation for MEG and EEG
    Practicalities of data collection
    Data acquisition and preprocessing
    Artifacts
    Analyzing the data
    Brain rhythms
    Evoked and event-related responses
    Auditory responses
    Visual responses
    Somatosensory responses
    Other sensory responses & multisensory interactions
    Motor function
    Brain signals related to change detection
    The social brain
    Brain disorders
    MEG/EEG in the study brain function
    Looking to the future.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    S.R. Pandi-Perumal, Pablo Torterolo, Jaime M. Monti, editors.
    Summary: This book offers a compilation of papers on the role of melanin-concentrating hormone (MCH) in sleep, sleep disorders and neuroendocrine functions. Leading experts in sleep medicine, psychiatry and neuroendocrinology provide a broad perspective on the field, from the anatomical structure and physiology of the MCH system to the connection with other systems influencing sleep and diseases like anxiety and depression. The potential of MCHR-1 antagonists as anxiolytic/antidepressant drugs is also reviewed. The book will represent an interdisciplinary guide for sleep disorder specialists, sleep researchers, psychiatrists, neurologists, psychologists, and behavioral sleep medicine specialists.

    Contents:
    1. Neuroanatomical structure of the MCH system.
    2. Projections of the MCH system to structures involved in the regulation of sleep and wakefulness
    3. MCH and the Orexin system
    reciprocal influences
    4. Optogenetic stimulation of MCH neurons
    5- Role of MCH in REM sleep control
    6. MCH, REM sleep and the monoaminergic system
    7. MCH and depression
    8. MCH receptor 1 antagonists: anxiolytic/antidepressant potential in animal models
    9. Cannabinoidsand the MCH system
    10. MCH receptors and thermoregulation
    11. Sleep during the postpartum period. Role of MCH
    12. MCH, sleep and neuroendocrine functions
    13. MCH, pain and sleep
    14. MCH and hypersomnia.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Mai P. Hoang, Martin C. Mihm Jr., editors.
    Summary: Melanocytic Lesions: A Case Based Approachprovides a concise yet comprehensive guidelineon how to diagnose common as well as problematic and challenging melanocytic lesions.In the first 11 chapters, each entityis illustrated by an actual case; followed by discussion of how the diagnosis is reached, of the histologic differential diagnoses, and of diagnostic pitfalls; and ends with bulleted teaching points.Pertinent and up to date referencesare included at the end of each chapter. The latter chapterscover current microstaging and classification of melanoma, ancillary techniques including immunohistochemistry as well as available molecular assays and molecular targeted therapy. Melanocytic Lesions: A Case Based Approach serves as a useful resource for pathologists, dermatologists and researchers dealing with melanocytic lesions.

    Contents:
    1. Lentigo and the acquired nevus
    2. Variations on the acquired nevus
    3. Dermal melanocytosis
    4. Congenital nevus and variants
    5. Spindle and epithelioid cell (Spitz) nevus and variants
    6. Vulvar nevus and malignant melanoma
    7. Dysplastic nevus
    8. Problems in various subtypes of malignant melanoma
    9. Primary versus metastatic malignant melanoma
    10. Special features of premalignant and malignant conjunctival melanocytic lesions
    11. Special variants of malignant melanoma
    12. Approach to microstaging of primary melanoma and evaluation of prognostic
    variables
    13. Ancillary techniques in diagnosing melanocytic lesions
    14. Molecular classification and molecular targeted therapy of melanoma .
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital/Print
    Howard L. Kaufman, Janice M. Mehnert, editors.
    Contents:
    Heterogeneity in Melanoma
    Melanoma Epidemiology and Prevention
    Methods Of Melanoma Detection
    Melanoma: Clinical Presentations
    Principles Of Melanoma Stagin
    Surgical Management of Melanoma
    Adjuvant Therapy of Melanoma
    Chemotherapy for Melanoma
    Checkpoint Blockade for the Treatment of Advanced Melanoma
    Targeted Therapy for Melanoma
    Treatment of Melanoma CNS Metastases
    Treatment of Melanoma CNS Metastases
    Mucosal Melanoma: Epidemiology, Biology and Treatment
    Acral Lentiginous Melanoma
    Pediatric Melanoma and Atypical Melanocytic Neoplasms
    Novel Treatments in Development for Melanoma.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC280.M37 M453 2016
    1
  • Digital
    David E. Fisher, Boris C. Bastian, editors.
    Summary: Melanoma is a cutting edge, comprehensive reference work on the topic of melanoma. The overarching goal is to provide detailed scholarly information which broadly covers all aspects of the clinical presentation and management of the disease, as well as the biological and scientific understanding of its pathogenesis and treatment. Key topics highlighted include recent breakthroughs in molecular diagnostics, breakthroughs in targeted therapeutic approaches, overviews of signaling and transcriptional pathways, and important controversies such as screening, early diagnosis, sentinel node biopsy, and prevention strategies. In all, the volume provides a cutting edge and comprehensive presentation of the field of melanoma, written by a team of internationally renowned thought-leaders.

    Contents:
    Acral Melanoma
    Adjuvant Therapy
    Animal Models of Melanoma
    Biology of Melanoma Metastasis
    Care of the Melanoma Patient
    Clinical Management of Primary Cutaneous Melanoma
    Combinatorial Approach to Treatment of Melanoma
    Developmental Biology of Melanocytes
    Epidemiology of Melanocytic Neoplasia
    Genetic Counseling
    Imaging Melanoma
    Immunotherapy (Clinical)
    Inherited Contributions to Melanoma Risk
    Key Signaling Pathways in Normal and Neoplastic Melanocytes.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Adam I. Riker, editor.
    Summary: This text serves as a very useful clinical guide and realistic approach to the clinical management of melanoma. Primary care physicians, specialists from varying areas of medical practice and numerous other healthcare providers will find this text to be quite useful as a standard daily reference and use in the office setting. It provides a clear and concise source of information in order to make real-life, evidence-based decisions for all aspects of management for cutaneous melanoma. This book also provides the latest breakthroughs in melanoma research, ranging from recent discoveries in genomics and epigenetics, to newly identified genes that have been selectively targeted for the development of a personalized approach to treatment. All chapters are written by specialists and true experts within their respective fields, incorporating the latest scientific, clinical and evidence-based medicine for melanoma (and non-melanoma skin cancers). This up-to-date information can be easily applied and translated to the clinical setting for the melanoma patient.

    Contents:
    History of Melanoma
    Anatomy and Physiology of the Skin
    Melanoma Epidemiology and Prevention
    Methods of melanoma Detection
    Staging and Classification of Melanoma
    The Genetic Evolution of Melanoma
    Epigenetics in Melanoma
    Immunobiology of the Melanoma Microenvironment
    Dermoscopy of Melanocytic Lesions
    International Models of Melanoma Management (Australia)
    Pigmented Lesions: Biopsy Methods and Emerging Noninvasive Imaging Techniques
    The Pathology of Melanoma
    Pediatric Melanoma and Atypical Melanocytic Neoplasms
    Melanoma in Pregnancy
    Mucosal Melanoma
    Uveal Melanoma
    Current Surgical Management of Primary Cutaneous Melanoma
    Mohs Surgery for Melanoma-in-Situ
    Surgical Management of Head and Neck Melanoma
    Management of Melanoma Locoregional Recurrence
    Reconstruction Options for Ear and Nose Melanoma
    Reconstruction Options for Lip, Cheek, Forehead and Scalp Melanoma
    Reconstructions Options for Trunk and Extremity Melanoma
    Sentinel Lymph Node Biopsy for Melanoma
    Operative Techniques for Melanoma
    Isolated Limb Infusion for Recurrent and Locally Metastatic Limb Melanoma
    Surgery for Stage IV Metastatic Melanoma
    Adjuvant Therapy of Melanoma
    Radiation Therapy for Melanoma
    Immuno-oncolytic Virotherapy for Melanoma
    Chemotherapy and Biochemotherapy for Melanoma
    Therapeutic Cancer Vaccines for Melanoma
    Adoptive Cell Therapy for Melanoma
    Current Immunotherapy of Melanoma
    Immune-Related Adverse Toxicities and Clinical Management
    Management of Non-Melanoma Skin Cancers: Basal Cell Carcinoma, Squamous Cell Carcinoma
    Management of Non-Melanoma Skin Cancers: Rare Subtypes
    Management of Non-Melanoma Skin Cancers: Merkel Cell Carcinoma.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Rhoda M. Alani, Debjani Sahni, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a concise practical guide to melanoma enabling the reader to develop a thorough understanding of the etiology, pathogenesis, diagnosis, treatment and prevention of melanoma. It features easy to digest instructional text that describes a variety of techniques for detecting and staging melanoma including total body photography. Surgical, radiation and systemic therapy treatment options as well as prevention strategies are also covered. Melanoma in Clinical Practice represents a thorough guide on how to diagnose treat and prevent melanoma, and provides a valuable resource for the trainee and experienced clinical dermatologists who are seeking a reference guide to use in their clinical practice.

    Contents:
    Melanoma Prevention
    Epidemiology of Melanoma
    Pathogenesis of Melanoma
    The Histopathology of Melanocytic Nevi and Malignant Melanoma
    Aids to Detecting Melanoma
    Evolution of Melanoma: Staging
    Lentigo Maligna Melanoma
    Surgical Treatment of Primary Melanoma
    Evolution of Neoadjuvant Therapy in Melanoma
    Sentinel Lymph Node Biopsy and Nodal Surgery
    Adjuvant systemic therapy for stage III melanoma
    Adjuvant Radiation Therapy for Stage III Melanoma
    Systemic Therapy of Advanced Melanoma
    Radiation therapy in advanced melanoma
    Novel Therapies in Melanoma
    Predictive Biomarkers of Melanoma
    Acral Melanoma
    Mucosal Melanoma
    Melanoma in Pediatric Patients
    Melanoma in Ethnic Skin
    Melanoma in Pregnancy.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Nilton Di Chiacchio, Antonella Tosti, editors.
    Summary: The purpose of this book is to guide the dermatologist and the general physician in the differential diagnosis and treatment of melanonychias. Melanonychia is a longitudinal pigmentation of the nail and it is considering a common presenting problem in general dermatology. The differential diagnosis varies from subungual hematoma to a fungal infection to a melanocytic lesion (hypermelanosis, lentigo, nevus, and melanoma) among others. Melanonychia may also indicate an early stage of nail melanoma, and its diagnosis remains a challenge among dermatologist. A recent publication on Dermatologists accuracy in early diagnosis of melanoma of the nail matrix showed that in situ melanoma of the nail matrix is very difficult for dermatologists to diagnose, regardless of the level of their experience. On Melanonychias the reader will find a complete discussion about all the most important topics on this condition, since its basic aspects (such as nail anatomy and epidemiology) until applied topics (including clinical features, nail biopsy and treatment).
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Evangeline B. Handog, Maria Juliet Enriquez-Macarayo, editors.
    Summary: This book sheds new light on pigmentary disorders in people with brown skin. Brown skin encompasses many races and ethnicities. Due to migration, people with brown skin are seen almost everywhere in the world. A wide variety of pigmentary disorders exists among this population but the most disturbing and challenging are melasma and vitiligo This book covers these two disorders, among people of brown skin, from the epidemiology to management, in a detailed yet easy-to-read and easy-to-use style.

    Contents:
    Part I. The Brown Skin
    1. The concept of brown skin
    2. Prevalent skin disorders in brown skin
    Part II. Melasma in Brown Skin
    3. Definition, incidence, and etiology of melasma in brown skin
    4. Pathogenesis of melasma
    5. Classification and clinical presentations of melasma in brown skin
    6. Diagnosis of melasma in brown skin: Wood's Lamp, dermoscopy , and confocal microscopy
    7. The histopathology of melasma in brown skin
    8. The scoring aid: MASI and modified MASI
    9. Differential diagnosis of melasma in brown skin
    10. Melasma and comorbidities
    11. Melanogenesis and new signaling regulatory for the treatment of melasma
    12. Topical agents in melasma
    13. Botanicals in melasma
    14. Oral lightening agents
    15. Chemical peeling for melasma
    16. The role of lasers and light devices for the treatment of melasma
    17. Iontophoresis and mesotherapy in melasma
    18. Quality of life in melasma
    Part III. Vitiligo in Brown Skin
    19. Vitiligo: definition, incidence, etiology
    20. Pathogenesis of vitiligo
    21. Vitiligo classification and clinical presentations
    22. Dermoscopy in vitiligo
    23. The histopathology of vitiligo in brown skin
    24. Differential diagnosis of vitiligo in brown skin
    25. Comorbidities in vitiligo
    26. Topical medications in vitiligo
    27. Oral medications in vitiligo
    28. Vitiligo management: procedural options
    29. Phototherapy in vitiligo
    30. Vitiligo and quality of life
    Part IV. Other Management Options for Melasma and Vitiligo
    31. Phtoprotection in brown skin
    32. Camouflage for brown skin with melasma or vitiligo
    33. What's in the pipeline for melasma and vitiligo.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Francisco López-Muñoz, Venkataramanujam Srinivasan, Domenico de Berardis, Cecilio Álamo, Takahiro A. Kato, editors.
    Summary: This work is a guidebook for clinicians who are involved in treating depressive patients and also serves the research scientists who are working on the psychopharmacological mechanisms of antidepressant actions and psychopathological mechanisms underlying mood disorders. Mood disorders such as major depressive disorder (MDD), bipolar disorder (BPD) and seasonal affective disorder (SAD) are the most disabling disorders that are among the most expensive of all medical illnesses. The pathophysiology of mood disorders is very complex and involves many mechanisms like circadian rhythm disruption, sleep abnormalities, melatonin rhythm abnormalities and alterations in melatonin receptor mechanisms, abnormalities in monoaminergic neurotransmitter mechanisms, glutamatergic release mechanisms, hippocampal neurogenesis, and abnormal immune and cytokine release mechanisms. Many antidepressants that are in clinical use today including the recently introduced novel agents like agomelatine or other antidepressants cause clinical remission by resynchronizing disrupted circadian rhythms and melatonin receptor functions, enhancing monoaminergic neurotransmission, promoting hippocampal neurogenesis, and regulating immune mechanisms. This book explains various etiological factors that are involved in the pathogenesis of mood disorders and the mechanisms of therapeutic actions of antidepressants including the recently introduced agomelatine and other antidepressants that exhibit rapid onset of action with greater efficacy and fewer side effects.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Srinivasan Venkataramanujam, Amnon Brzezinski, Sukru Oter, Samuel D. Shillcutt, editors.
    Summary: The book aims to cover basic physiologic functions of melatonin, and its therapeutic applications in humans for a variety of clinically relevant disorders. This bookcontains chapters on the recent aspects of melatonin physiology, its receptors and their role in mitochondrial function, its immunomodulatory role and importance in seasonal dependent diseases, role in human reproduction, role in sleep, circadian rhythm and sleep disorders, role in neurologic disorders such as Parkinsons disease, Alzheimers disease. Additionally, melatonins therapeutic use in neurobehavioral disorders in children, migraine and tension headache is also covered in this book. Melatonins antioxidant role in Duchennes muscular dystrophy and in glaucoma have also been discussed in short chapters. Two major melatonin agonists, ramelteon and agomelatine are discussed extensively on their current clinical application and ongoing research. Two chapters on agomelatonin and its role in mood disorders, particularly depressive disorders, are an important feature of this book. The chapters are written by experts from the global academia recognized for their original research and published work in the field of melatonin science.

    Contents:
    Melatonin Receptors and Their Role in Human Diseases
    Melatonins Antioxidant Properties: Molecular Mechanisms
    Past, Present and Future of Melatonins Clinical Uses
    Melatonin in Human Cancer: Therapeutic Possibilities
    Melatonin: Its Microbicidal Properties and Clinical Applications
    Melatonin and the Metabolic Syndrome
    Development of Agonists and Antagonists for Melatonin Receptors
    Multiple Facets of Melatonin in Immunity: Clinical Applications
    Melatonin and Immune Function: Clinical Significance
    Circadian Variation of Immune Mechanisms in Lung Cancer and the Role of Melatonin
    Melatonin and Melatonergic Drugs for Therapeutic Use in Breast Cancer
    Melatonin and Malaria: Therapeutic Avenues
    Melatonin's role in human reproduction: recent studies
    Melatonin Treatment and Fertility
    Melatonin and Pain: Therapeutic Applications
    Melatonin in Alzheimers disease: Focus on Neuroprotective Role
    Melatonin in Parkinsons disease and its Therapeutic Potential
    Melatonin and Its Agonists in Sleep Disorders
    Agomelatine in Depressive Disorders
    Melatonin in Mood Disorders and Agomelatines Antidepressant Efficacy
    The Role of Agomelatine in the Treatment of Anxiety Disorders .- Melatonin in the Etiology, Pathophysiology, and Management of Schizophrenia
    Neurobiology of Monoaminergic Neurotransmission and Antidepressants
    Melatonergic Drug - Ramelteon and Its Therapeutic Applications in Insomnia
    Melatonins Neuroprotective Actions on Hippocampal Neurons
    Jet Lag: Use of Melatonin and Melatonergic Drugs
    Sleep, Melatonin and Circadian Rhythmicity in Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder
    Melatonergic Drugs and Their Therapeutic Use in Nasal Polyposis
    Protective Effects of Exogenous Melatonin Against Methotrexate- Induced Intestinal Injury.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Click on Series link(s) for access options
  • Print
    Print Access
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Reference (Upstairs)
    R712.A3 S216
    1
    Retired Reference (Downstairs)
    R712.A3 S216
    7
  • Digital
    Joachim Krebs, editor.
    Summary: "This book describes the newest discoveries on calcium signaling happening at the cellular and intracellular membranes, often exerted in so called microdomains. Calcium entry and release, its interaction with proteins and resulting events on proteins and organelles are comprehensively depicted by leading experts in the field. Knowledge about details of these highly dynamic processes rapidly increased in recent years, the book therefore provides a timely summary on the processes of calcium signaling and related membrane dynamics; it is aimed at students and researchers in biochemistry and cell biology."-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    E. Anibal Disalvo, editor.
    Contents:
    1. Membrane hydration: a hint to a new model for biomembranes
    2. Use of x-ray and neutron scattering methods with volume measurements to determine lipid bilayer structure and number of water molecules/lipid
    3. Water and lipid bilayers
    4. Hydration forces between lipid bilayers: a theoretical overview and a look on methods exploring dehydration
    5. Monitoring membrane hydration with 2-(dimethylamino)-6-acylnaphtalenes fluorescent probes
    6. Long-range lipid-water interaction as observed by ATR-FTIR spectroscopy
    7. Hydration and nanoconfined water: insights from computer simulations
    8. Aquaphotomics: near infrared spectoscopy and water states in biological systems
    9. Hydration in lipid monolayers: correlation of water activity and surface pressure
    10. Water at biological phase boundaries: its role in interfacial activation of enzymes and metabolic pathways
    11. Anhydrobiosis: an unsolved problem with applications in human welfare
    Concluding remarks
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital/Print
    Marco Canepari, Dejan Zecevic, Olivier Bernus, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I. Principles of Membrane Potential Imaging
    1. Historical overview and general methods of mambrane potential imaging
    2. Design and use of organic voltage sensitve dyes
    Part II. Membrane Potential Signals with Single Cell Resolution
    3. Imaging submillisecond membrane potential changes from individual regions of single axons, dendrites and spines
    4. Combining membrane potential imaging with other optical techniques
    5. Monitoring spiking activity of many individual neurons in invertebrate ganglia
    Part III. Monitoring Activity of Networks and Large Neuronal Populations
    6. Monitoring integrated activity of individual neurons using FRET-based voltage-senstive dyes
    7. Monitoring population membrane potential signals from neocortex
    8. Voltage imaging in the study of hippocampal circuit function and plasticity
    9. Monitoring population membrane potential signals during development of the vertebrate nervous system
    10. Imaging the dynamics of mammalian neocortical population activity in-vivo
    11. Imaging the dynamics of neocortical population activity in behaving and freely moving mammals
    Part IV. Monitoring Membrane Potential in the Heart
    12. Optical imaging of cardiac action potential
    13. Optical mapping of ventricular fibrillation dynamics
    14. Imaging of ventricular fibriallation dynamics
    15. Biophotonic modelling of cardiac optical imaging
    16. Towards depth-resolved optical imaging of cardiac electrical activity
    Part V. New Approaches: Potentials and Limitations
    17. Two-photon excitation of fluorescent voltage-sensitive dyes: monitoring membrane potential in the infrared
    18. Random-access multiphoton microscopy for fast three-dimensional imaging
    19. Second harmonic imaging of membrane potential
    20. Genetically encoded protein sensors of membrane potential
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Arun K. Shukla.
    Summary: Membrane Proteins - Production and Function Characterization a volume of Methods in Enzymology, encompasses chapters from the leading experts in the area of membrane protein biology. The chapters provide a brief overview of the topics covered and also outline step-by-step protocol. Illustrations and case example images are included wherever appropriate to help the readers understand the schematics and general experimental outlines.

    Contents:
    Engineering Escherichia coli for functional expression of membrane proteins
    ACEMBLing a multiprotein transmembrane complex: the functional SecYEG-SecDF-YajC-YidC holotranslocon protein secretase/insertase
    Expression of purification of OsVDAC4
    Membrane protein expression in Lactococcus lactis
    An unconventional anaerobic membrane protein production system based on Wolinella succinogenes
    Membrane protein expression and analysis in yeast
    Heterologous expression of G-protein-coupled receptors in yeast
    Recombinant G protein-coupled receptor expression in Saccharomyces cerevisiae for protein characterization
    Baculovirus-mediated expression of GPCRs in insect cells
    Expression of membrane proteins in the eyes of transgenic Drosophila melangaster
    Rapid method to express and purify human membrane protein using the Xenopus Oocyte system for functional and low-resolution structural anlaysis
    Expression of G protein-coupled receptors in mammalian cells
    Construction of stable mammalian cell lines for inducible expression of G protein-coupled receptors
    Rapid and facile recombinant expression of bovine rhodopsin in HEK293S GnTI- cells using a PiggyBac inducible system
    Semliki forest virus-based expression of recombinant GPCRs
    Screening for lipid requirements of membrane proteins by combining cell-free expression with nanodiscs
    Liposome reconstitution and transport assay for recombinant transporters
    Lipid reconstitution and recording of recombinant ion channels
    Reconstitution of membrane proteins: a GPCR as an example
    Ion channel reporter for monitoring the activity of engineered GPCRs
    Methods for labeling skeletal muscle ion channels site-specifically with fluorophores suitable for FRET-based structural analysis
    Structural and fucntional studies of NirC from Salmonella typhimurium
    Surface plasmon resonance analysis of seven-transmembrane receptors
    Cross-linking strategies to study peptide ligand-receptor ineractions
    From recombinant expression to crystals: a step-by-step guide to GPCR crystallography
    Structure-based biophysical analysis of the interaction of rhodopsin with G protein and arrestin.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Bor Luen Tang.
    Summary: This second edition explores membrane trafficking research that has been at the frontier of cell and molecular biology. In the past 20 years, this field has witnessed a remarkable convergence and synergism from information gained using genetic approaches in yeast cells, and biochemical and molecular approaches in mammalian cells. This volume contains updated chapters and the inclusion of a large number of new chapters, and is divided into three parts. Part I includes biochemical and molecular genetics approaches and methods used in analysing membrane traffic, in both yeast and mammalian cell models. Part II focuses on imaging and microscopy approaches and techniques, while Part III highlights the Omics-type approaches. Written in the highly successful Methods in Molecular Biology series format, chapters include introductions to their respective topics, lists of the necessary materials and reagents, step-by-step, readily reproducible laboratory protocols, and tips on troubleshooting and avoiding known pitfalls. Cutting-edge and resourceful, Membrane Trafficking, Second Edition, is a valuable resource for both experienced researchers, graduate students, and junior scientists in the field of membrane trafficking.

    Contents:
    Intracellular parcel service : current issues in intracellular membrane trafficking / Johannes M. Herrmann and Anne Spang
    In vitro analysis of the mitochondrial preprotein import machinery using recombinant precursor polypeptides / Dorothea Becker and Wolfgang Voos
    Import of proteins into isolated yeast mitochondria / Valentina Peleh, Ajay Ramesh, and Johannes M. Herrmann
    Evaluation of unconventional protein secretion in Saccharomyces cerevisiae / Natsuko Miura and Mitsuyoshi Ueda
    Fractionation of plasmodium-infected human red blood cells to study protein trafficking / Simone Külzer, Verena Bittl, and Jude M. Przyborski
    Investigating signaling processes in membrane trafficking / Laura J. Sharpe and Andrew J. Brown
    Recruitment of coat proteins to liposomes and peptidoliposomes / Sonja Huser, Gregor Suri, Pascal Crottet, and Martin Spiess
    A [beta]-lactamase based assay to measure surface expression of membrane proteins / Pieter Beerepoot, Vincent M. Lam, and Ali Salahpour
    Cell-free reconstitution of multivesicular body (MVB) cargo sorting / Monica Gireud, Natalie Sirisaengtaksin, Susan Tsunoda, and Andrew J. Bean
    Analysis of biogenesis of lipid droplets by examining Rab40c associating with lipid droplets / Ran Tan, Xiaohui Xu, Wanjin Hong, and Tuanlao Wang
    Analysis of conventional and unconventional trafficking of CFTR and other membrane proteins / Heon yung Gee, Joo Young Kim, and Min Goo Lee
    Assessing mammalian autophagy / Sharon A. Tooze, Hannah C. Dooley, Harold B.J. Jefferies, Justin Joachim, Delphine Judith, Christiopher A. Lamb, Minoo Razi, and Martina Wirth
    Expression of functional myc-tagged conserved oligomeric golgi (COG) subcomplexes in mammalian cells / Rose A. Willett, Tetyana A Kudlyk, and Vladimir V. Lupashin
    Molecular and cellular characterization of GCC185 : a tethering protein of the trans-golgi network / Pak-yan Patricia Cheung and Suzanne R. Pfeffer
    Visualizing toll-like receptor-dependent phagosomal dynamics in murine dendritic cells using live cell microscopy / Adriana R. Mantegazza and Michael S. Marks
    Understanding of complex protein interactions with respect to anchorage independence / Jill M. Tham, Sofie C. Van Huffel, and Wanjin Hong
    Application of flow cytometry to analyze intracellular location and trafficking of cargo in cell populations / Wei Hong Toh, Fiona J. Houghton, Pei Zhi Cheryl Chia, Yasmin M. Ramdzan, Danny M. Hatters, and Paul A. Gleeson
    Approaches to analyze the role of Rab GTPases in endocytic trafficking of epidermal growth factor receptor (EGFR) / Christelle En Lin Chua, Angeline Yim Kiat Lim, and Bor Luen Tang
    Does super-resolution fluorescence microscopy obsolete previous microscopic apporaches to protein co-localization? / Laura MacDonald, Giulia Baldini, and Brian Storrie
    Bimolecular fluorescence complementation (BiFC) technique in yeast Saccharomyces cerevisiae and mammalian cells / Marion Weber-Boyvat, Shiqian Li, Kari-Pekka Skarp, Vesa M. Olkkonen, Daoguang Yan, and Jussi Jäntti
    Microscopic and spectroscopic techniques to investigate lipid droplet formation and turnover in yeast / Heimo Wolinski and Sepp D. Kohlwein
    Image-based identification of nuclear export inhibitors from natural products / Bastien Cautain, Nuria de Pedro, Fernando Reyes, and Wolfgang Link
    Correlative video-light-electron microscopy of mobile organelles / Galina V. Beznoussenko and Alexander A. Mironov
    Live cell imaging of endosomal trafficking in fungi / Sebastian Baumann, Norio Takeshita, N. Grün, Reinhard Fischer, and Michael Feldbrügge
    Quantitative analysis of transferrin cycliing by automated fluorescence microscopy / David T. Hirschmann, Christoph A. Kasper, and Martin Spiess
    Identification of factors regulating MET receptor endocytosis by high-throughput siRNA screening / Ivana Gaziova, Robert A. Davey, and Lisa A. Elferink
    Large-scale analysis of membrane transport in yeast using invertase reporters / Lauren Dalton, Michael Davey, and Elizabeth Conibear
    RNAi screens for genes involved in Golgi glycosylation / Germaine Y. Goh and Frederic A. Bard
    Proteomic analyses of a bi-lobed structure in Trypanosoma brucei / Ladan Gheiratmand and Cynthia Y. He
    Application of the proximity-dependent assay and fluorescence imaging approaches to study viral entry pathways / Alex Lipovsky, Wei Zhang, Akiko Iwasaki, and Daniel DiMaio.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Jeannette M. Potts, editor.
    Summary: This book covers issues of men's health, including screening, diagnosis and management of common disorders and opportunities for prevention and health maintenance. Each chapter pertains to a component of the physical exam and/or organ system. Examples include appropriate survey and screening of the integument, the significance of buccal/dental integrity, tailoring cardiovascular remedies and balancing prostate cancer screening with quality of life. The book follows the methodical approach of a comprehensive wellness visit, including inventory of psychosocial factors, which significantly impact physical well-being. Justification for often overlooked topics in the review of systems, such as sexual history and satisfaction, relationship issues, and vocational fulfillment are provided. This book is written in the spirit of the rich bedside acumen and the art of healing, we must strive to protect. While informative and stimulating, this text serves to remind us of the specialized diagnostic tools we carry between our ears, and the power of healing we possess in our hands as well as the counsel and education we provide to our patients. Men's Health: A Head to Toe Guide for Clinicians serves as an important and readily accessible resource for primary care physicians, internists and family doctors, physician's assistants and nurse practitioners who care for adult males.

    Contents:
    His Occupation: Safety and Fulfillment
    Sunscreens & Ultraviolet light: What you need to know
    His Mouth
    Screening and Management for Pulmonary and Sleep Issues
    His Upper GI Tract
    His Lower GI Tract
    Cardiovascular Prevention in Men
    Metabolic Syndrome: The Vicious Cycle
    Andrology: Puberty-Fertility-Andropause
    Genital Dermatology
    Male Sexual Concerns
    Benign Prostatic Hyperplasia and LUTS
    Prostate Cancer Screening
    Men Have Bladders, Too
    Chronic Pelvic Pain in Men is NOT prostatitis!
    Male Mental Health: A Peek Inside The Black Box.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Sanchia S. Goonewardene, Oliver Brunckhorst, David Albala, Kamran Ahmed, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a concise overview of the latest controversies and advances in mens health. It covers the male anatomy, physiology, and the metabolic syndromes that most commonly affect males. A range of benign and malignant conditions affecting the prostate, testes, rectum and colon are detailed. Chapters feature an easy-to-follow format and feature learning objectives to highlight the key concepts in each chapter aiding the reader to develop a thorough understanding of fundamental aspects in mens health. Mens Health and Wellbeing features insightful reviews of controversies and recent developments in mens health, and is a valuable resource for all trainee and practicing medical professionals who treat these patients.

    Contents:
    The Male Reproductive System Anatomy
    Physiology of Male Hormones
    Hypogonadism and Late onset Hypogonadism
    Male Factor Infertility
    Erectile Dysfunction
    Benign Prostatic Hyperplasia and Lower Urinary Tract Symptoms
    Impact of Urinary Incontinence on Mens Health
    Metabolic Syndrome, Obesity and Cancer Risk
    Impact of Trauma and Orthopaedics on Mens Health
    Sexually Transmitted Diseases
    Alcohol related liver disease
    Recreational Drugs and Mens Health
    Benign Surgical Conditions
    Benign Gastrointestinal Conditions
    Malignant Gastrointestinal Conditions
    Lung Cancer and Smoking
    Testicular Malignancy
    Prostate Cancer Malignancy
    Physical activity and dietary considerations for men diagnosed with prostate cancer
    Prostate Cancer Survivorship and Physical Health
    Mind and Body in Mens Health
    Engaging Men with Mens Health.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Joel J. Heidelbaugh, editor.
    Contents:
    Men's Health in the 2010's: What is the Global Challenge?
    Masculinity in Men's Health: Barrier or Portal to Healthcare
    Health Seeking Behavior and Meeting the Needs for the Most Vulnerable Men
    Providing Preventive Services for Men: A Substantial Challenge?
    The Evidence-Based Physical Examination of the Child and Adolescent Male
    Caring for the Adolescent Male
    The Evidence-Based Well Examination in Adult Men
    Promoting Cardiovascular Health in Adult Men
    Male Sexual Health
    Sexually Transmitted Infections in Men
    Benign Prostatic Hyperplasia and Lower Urinary Tract Symptoms
    Testicular, Scrotal and Penile Disorders
    Male Hypogonadism: The Relationship to Cardiometabolic Syndrome and the Controversy Behind Testosterone Replacement Therapy
    Prostate Cancer: A Primary Care Perspective
    Caring for Men Who Have Sex with Men.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    John P Mulhall, Wayland Hsiao editors.
    Summary: In the last decade, much of the clinical interest in the field of infertility has focused on advancing reproductive techniques and has often under-appreciated the role that male sexuality plays in reproductive problems. Male sexual function is an integral part of reproduction, and the treatment of sexual dysfunction is an important component for any couple seeking fertility. In some cases, treatment of sexual dysfunction may obviate the need for more invasive cures through advanced reproductive techniques. Thanks to recent clinical and scientific advances in male sexual medicine, the management of men's sexual dysfunction is often more effective and less invasive than how it was historically described. Men's Sexual Health and Fertility is the only resource that focuses on the interplay and interconnections between male sexual dysfunction and male factor infertility, gathering insightful data from a panel of experts in male sexual medicine for clinicians who treat couples with fertility issues due to male sexual dysfunction. Chapters discuss advances in the field of men's sexual medicine, including the latest treatment for erectile dysfunction, the most up-to-date understanding of the physiology and pathophysiology of ejaculation, and the growing body of evidence that low testosterone and male infertility are intimately related. As such, this book provides important information in order to be able to better understand the link between sexual dysfunction and infertility and, most importantly, to better treat male sexual dysfunction in the infertile couple.

    Contents:
    Physiology of Erection
    Physiology of Ejaculation
    Physiology of Testosterone Production
    The Effects of Vaginal Lubricants on Sperm Function
    Sexually Transmitted Infections
    Erectile Dysfunction and Infertility
    Anejaculation, Retrograde Ejaculation, and Anorgasmia
    Premature Ejaculation
    Delayed Ejaculation and Orgasm
    Hypogonadism and Infertility
    Varicoceles and Hypogonadism
    Nutraceuticals for Fertility and Erectile Health: A Brief Overview of What Works and What Is Worthless
    Effects of Phosphodiesterase-5 Inhibitors on Testicular and Sperm Function
    Circumcision and Vasectomy: Do They Affect Sexual Function?
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Stephen Burgess, Simon G. Thompson.
    Summary: Mendelian Randomization: Methods For Causal Inference Using Genetic Variants provides thorough coverage of the methods and practical elements of Mendelian randomization analysis. It brings together diverse aspects of Mendelian randomization from the fields of epidemiology, statistics, genetics, and bioinformatics. Through multiple examples, the first part of the book introduces the reader to the concept of Mendelian randomization, showing how to perform simple Mendelian randomization investigations and interpret the results. The second part of the book addresses specific methodological issues relevant to the practice of Mendelian randomization, including robust methods, weak instruments, multivariable methods, and power calculations. The authors present the theoretical aspects of these issues in an easy-to-understand way by using non-technical language. The last part of the book examines the potential for Mendelian randomization in the future, exploring both methodological and applied developments. Features Offers first-hand, in-depth guidance on Mendelian randomization from leaders in the field Makes the diverse aspects of Mendelian randomization understandable to newcomers Illustrates technical details using data from applied analyses Discusses possible future directions for research involving Mendelian randomization Software code is provided in the relevant chapters and is also available at the supplementary website This book gives epidemiologists, statisticians, geneticists, and bioinformaticians the foundation to understand how to use genetic variants as instrumental variables in observational data. New in Second Edition: The second edition of the book has been substantially re-written to reduce the amount of technical content, and emphasize practical consequences of theoretical issues. Extensive material on the use of two-sample Mendelian randomization and publicly-available summarized data has been added. The book now includes several real-world examples that show how Mendelian randomization can be used to address questions of disease aetiology, target validation, and drug development
    Digital Access TandFonline 2021
  • Digital
    Helmut Schaaf.
    Summary: This book summarizes the concrete, practical issues surrounding Ménière's disease with vertigo, hearing loss, tinnitus, and offers perspectives and recommendations for affected persons, relatives, and medical and psychotherapeutic practitioners.In the course of Ménière's disease, in addition to the organic impairment anxious observation with increasing restriction of movement space, insecurity and helplessness, and even occupational disability and depressive development may occur. Nevertheless, help and support are possible, how is shown in this first English edition. This book is a translation of the original German 8th edition Morbus Menière by Helmut Schaaf published by Springer Fachmedien Wiesbaden GmbH, part of Springer Nature in 2017.

    Contents:
    Clinic of Ménière's disease
    Physiological and anatomical basics
    Pathophysiology of Ménière's disease
    Special forms of Ménière's disease
    Differentiation from other clinical pictures
    Diagnostics and examination methods
    Therapy of Ménière's disease
    Bilateral disease
    Possible consequences
    What could make a good therapist?
    Short answers to frequently asked questions
    Self-help groups
    Compound overview
    Glossary
    Literature
    Subject index.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    volume editor Michael W. McDermott.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
  • Digital
    [edited by] Paolo Cappabianca, Domenico Solari.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Otolaryngology
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
  • Digital
    Rodrigo Hasbun, editor.
    Summary: This book seeks to improve outcomes for meningitis and encephalitis cases handled by physicians who may or may not be thoroughly trained for these challenges. The text introduces the current guidelines but also discusses the gaps that leave clinicians struggling to implement the most appropriate approaches for these particular neurological infections. Each chapter delivers the tools necessary to identify and adhere to the most appropriate diagnostic technique, management protocols, and prevention approach for each situation. All chapters conclude with discourse on future directions in research and quality improvement. Written by experts in infectious diseases, the book covers topics that are the most devastating, including healthcare-acquired infections, autoimmune encephalitis, and infections as they present in HIV patients. Meningitis and Encephalitis is a well-rounded resource for all medical professionals encountering these neurological syndromes, including infectious disease specialists, neurologists, primary care physicians, and immunologists.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Community-acquired acute Bacterial Meningitis
    Healthcare-acquired meningitis and ventriculitis
    Acute Aseptic Meningitis syndrome
    Cryptococcal Meningitis
    Tuberculous meningitis
    Neurobrucellosis
    West Nile encephalitis
    Herpes simplex and Varicella Zoster virus
    Human immunodeficiency virus associated CD8 encephalitis
    Challenges in the management and prevention of Japanese encephalitis
    Autoimmune encephalitis
    Neurosyphilis
    Neuroborreliosis
    Emerging causes of encephalitis: Zika, Dengue, Chikungunya and beyond.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by John D. Kelly IV.
    Summary: Thoroughly discussing the varied elements of meniscal damage and repair, Meniscal Injuries: Management and Surgical Techniques includes the insights and expertise of over 20 leading surgeons and researchers on topics ranging from meniscal anatomy, physical examination, innovative resection and repair techniques, gene therapy, and tissue regeneration. This treatise offers wisdom aimed at assessing true surgical candidates, exploring the intricacies of meniscal composition and function, an overview of meniscal scaffolds and replacements, and patient examination pearls. Also discussed in depth is cutting edge research concerning meniscal repair enhancement, nanofiber technology as a means of meniscal replacement, and biologic agents directed toward chondral protection. All the science presented will direct the sports medicine practitioner to state-of-the-art treatment aimed at knee preservation. Meniscal repair and regeneration is a rapidly evolving science - early attempts at meniscal restoration or repair resulted in short-term gains which often sacrificed long-term joint integrity. Now, the practitioner is afforded numerous means of retaining or restoring meniscal tissue. Breakthroughs in scaffold and allograft replacement, as featured herein, offer the promise of articular cartilage preservation like never before. In addition, tissue regeneration and gene therapy techniques, featured throughout, offer a glimpse into emerging technologies aimed at preserving or replacing meniscal tissue in previously considered hopeless cases. As such, Meniscal Injuries will be an indispensible resource to orthopedic surgeons and sports medicine practitioners interested in providing the absolute most contemporary and evidence-based care to their patients.

    Contents:
    Meniscal Anatomy
    Physical Examination for Meniscus Tears
    Imaging of Meniscus Pathology
    Menisectomy: The Basics
    Meniscus Allograft Transplantation
    Meniscal Scaffolds: Options Post-Menisectomy
    Meniscal Repair Techniques
    Meniscal Posterior Root Tear
    Indications for Meniscus Repair
    Basic Science of Meniscus Repair: Limitations and Emerging Strategies
    Biological Augmentation of Meniscus Repair and Restoration
    Rehabilitation Following Meniscus Repair.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Robert F. LaPrade, Elizabeth A. Arendt, Alan Getgood, Scott C. Faucett, editors.
    Summary: This book is a comprehensive journey through the pathogenesis and treatment of meniscal pathology. It details the elements that are necessary to properly understand, diagnose, and treat meniscal tears, ranging from vertical tears to radial tears and root avulsions. Treatment techniques are thoroughly described and illustrated, with presentation of the latest evidence on outcomes. The algorithmic treatment of meniscal tears has undergone a rapid transformation. We have progressed from the initial treatments involving removal of the meniscus using an open technique, to the performance of partial meniscectomies and complex meniscal repairs by means of an arthroscopic technique. The current treatment goal is to maintain the biology and mechanical integrity of this vital knee structure, an aim too often disregarded by past generations of surgeons. An explosion of new knowledge, coupled with advances in arthroscopic and surgical technology, has paved the way for wider application of approaches that help to preserve the meniscus, in the hope of preventing or delaying the development of knee arthritis. This book will have utility for all clinicians who treat meniscal lesions and will serve as a valuable resource for years to come.

    Contents:
    Meniscal anatomy and vascular supply
    Biomechanical function of the menisci
    Classification of meniscal tears
    Meniscectomy-updates on techniques and outcomes
    Meniscal root tears
    a missed epidemic: how should they be treated?- Meniscal ramp lesions-diagnosis and treatment strategies
    Peripheral meniscal tears
    how to diagnose and repair
    Radial meniscal tears
    updates on repair techniques and outcomes
    All-inside meniscal repair
    updates on techniques
    Step by step surgical approaches for meniscal repairs
    The role of alignment in meniscal tears and the role of osteotomy
    Outside-in meniscal repair techniques and outcomes
    Biologic augmentation of meniscal repairs
    Meniscal repair outcomes-isolated versus combined with other procedures
    Treatment of meniscus degeneration and meniscal cysts
    Discoid Menisci and their treatment
    Updates and outcomes on meniscal transplants
    Conclusions and future directions.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    MedKnow
    v. 1-, 2003- Free full text HTML only.
    PubMed Central
  • Print
    edited by Alice J. Dan, Effie A. Graham, Carol P. Beecher.
    Contents:
    v. 1. A Synthesis of interdisciplinary research
    v. 2. Research and implications for women's health.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RG163 .M46
    2
  • Digital
    edited by Rebecca Jacob, University of Cambridge ; Michael Gunn, University of Staffordshire ; Anthony Holland, University of Cambridge.
    Summary: "Prior to its introduction, clinicians and carers were in uncertain legal territory when making decisions of a social, health or financial nature for those individuals without capacity. Importantly, however, the statute is more than a solution to a recognized gap in English and Welsh Law; it is also about a culture change. It requires those in a caring and/or professional capacity to engage with a person, who may lack decision-making capacity, in a manner that involves him/her, and others important to them, in the process of decision-making. In doing so they must have regard to past and presents beliefs and values of the person concerned. The MCA, in its approach, is not so much giving power to others to make decisions, rather it is asking those who have to take a decision on behalf of another to do so in a manner that is transparent, justifiable, and respectful of all issues relevant to that person. It is applicable in any situation where someone might lack capacity including, for example, the person transiently incapacitated through excess alcohol or from a head injury requiring treatment, to people with potentially more enduring incapacity due to dementia or learning disabilities. It is therefore as relevant in intensive care as it is in social care. The MCA is both about the 'here and now', when an immediate decision may have to be made on behalf of a person lacking capacity at the present time but also about planning for the future; how individuals, whilst having capacity, can determine who can take decisions on their behalf in the event that they lose capacity through illness or injury, at a later date"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Foreword / George Szmukler
    Preface / Rebecca Jacob, Michael Gunn and Antony Holland
    Introduction / Rebecca Jacob and Antony Holland
    The assessment of mental capacity / Benjamin Spencer and Matthew Hotopf
    Best interests / Charlotte Emmett and Julian C. Hughes
    Deprivation of liberty : past, present and future / Susan F. Welsh
    Mental capacity act application : hospital settings / Elizabeth Fistein
    Mental capacity act application : social care settings / Michael Dunn and Antony Holland
    Mental capacity and end of life decision making / Annabel Price and Caroline Barry
    Clinical ambiguities in the assessment of capacity / Elizabeth Fistein and Rebecca Jacob.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Raul J. Rosenthal, Armando Rosales, Emanuele Lo Menzo, Fernando D. Dip.
    Summary: This book is intended for medical students and surgical trainees such as surgical residents and fellows. It provides a practical preparation guide for common surgical procedures. Operations are divided into twelve sections that cover commonly performed general surgery operations such as bariatric, breast, cardiothoracic, colorectal, minimally invasive, and more. The chapters included in these sections aim to assist residents and fellows in facilitating memorization of the operation sequence and movements required to perform a given task. It will also help enhance skill development in the operating room. Written by residents and highly experienced attending surgeons, Mental Conditioning to Perform Common Operations in General Surgery Training: A Systematic Approach to Expediting Skill Acquisition and Maintaining Dexterity in Performance provides a comprehensive systematic approach to performing surgical procedures.

    Contents:
    Evidence Behind Mental Training
    Introduction to Systematic Approach and Mental Training
    Laparoscopic Roux-en-Y Gastric Bypass (Revised)
    Laparoscopic Sleeve Gastrectomy
    Modified Radical Mastectomy
    Lumpectomy
    Sentinel Lymph Node Biopsy
    Chest Tube Thoracostomy
    Video Assisted Thoracoscopic Procedures
    Thoracentesis
    Hartmanns Procedure
    Laparoscopic Sigmoid Resection
    Open Sigmoid Resection
    Laparoscopic Right Hemicolectomy
    Open Right Hemicolectomy
    Laparoscopic Low Anterior Rectal Resection with Diverting Loop Ileostomy
    Open Low Anterior Resection with Diverting Loop Ileostomy
    Laparoscopic Proctocolectomy with Ileal pouch-anal Anastomosis (IPAA)
    Open Proctocolectomy with Ileal Pouch Anal Anastomosis (IPAA)
    Abdominoperineal Resection and Miles Resection (Extralevator)
    Loop Ileostomy Creation and Closure
    External Hemorrhoidectomy
    Lateral Internal Sphincterotomy for Fissure-in-ano
    Incision and Drainage of Perianal Abscess
    Transanal Total Mesorectal Excision (TaTME)
    Internal Jugular Vein Central Line Placement with and Without Ultrasound
    Subclavian Vein Central Line Placement
    Femoral Line Placement with Ultrasound
    Arterial line Placement
    Tracheostomy
    Laparoscopic Appendectomy
    Laparoscopic Cholecystectomy
    Laparoscopic Heller Myotomy
    Laparoscopic Nissen Fundoplication
    Laparoscopic Hiatal Hernia Repair with Nissen Fundoplication
    Laparoscopic Distal Gastrectomy with Billroth II Anastomosis
    Laparoscopic Splenectomy
    Laparoscopic Total Extraperitoneal (TEP) Inguinal Hernia Repair
    Open Jejunostomy
    Open Small Bowel Resection and Primary Side-to-Side Bowel Anastomosis
    Open Ventral Hernia Repair with Underlay Mesh
    Open Inguinal Hernia Repair
    Thyroidectomy and Parathyroidectomy
    Laparoscopic Pancreatic Cystogastrostomy
    Laparoscopic Left Hepatectomy
    Laparoscopic Right Hepatectomy
    Laparoscopic Central Pancreatectomy
    Laparoscopic Distal Pancreatectomy with Splenectomy
    Laparoscopic Pancreaticoduodenectomy (Whipple procedure)
    Laparoscopic Un-roofing of Hepatic Cyst
    Open Pancreatoduodenectomy (Whipple Procedure)
    Open Distal Pancreatectomy with Splenectomy
    Open Longitudinal Pancreaticojejunostomy
    Excision of Lipoma
    Nevi Excision
    Carotid Endarterectomy
    Femoral Thrombectomy and Thromboembolectomy
    Radio-Cephalic Arteriovenous (AV) Fistula Formation
    Open Resection of Abdominal Aortic Aneurysm
    Technique for Compartment Release of the Leg: Two-incision Technique
    Femoral Popliteal Bypass (FEM-POP) Bypass (Above the knee)
    Great Saphenous Vein Ligation and Stripping
    Great Saphenous Vein Radiofrequency Ablation
    Surgical Knot
    Port and Umbilical Port placement
    Surgical Instruments
    Suture and Needles Used in Surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by André F. Carvalho, Roger S. McIntyre.
    Contents:
    The epidemiology, burden, and treatment of mental disorders in primary care / Bernd Puschner, Markus Kösters, Lea Bouché, and Stefan Weinmann
    Across the spectrum / Victoria J. Palmer and Rob Whitley
    Collaborative care models for the management of mental disorders in primary care / Christsina van der Feltz-Cornelis, Harm van Marwijk, and Leona Hakkart-van Roijen
    Operationalizing patient-centredness to enhance recovery and primary care for mental disorders / John Furler, Victoria J. Palmer, and Jane Gunn
    Neurobiology of psychiatric disorders / Valdimir Maletic and Bernadette DeMuri
    The DSM-5 / Joel Paris
    Anxiety disorders in primary care / Markus Dold and Siegfried Kasper
    ADHD across the lifespan / David W. Goodman
    Trauma and strssor-related disorders / Andrea Feijo Mello and Mary Sau Ling Yeh
    Depressive disorders / Andrea Fagiolini, Giovanni Amodeo, and Giuseppe Maina
    Bipolar disorder / Paulo R. Nunes Neto, Cristiano A. Köhler, Michael Berk, and André Carvalho
    Suicide and suicidal behavior / Erkki Isometsä
    Somatic symptom and related disorders / Alexandra Murray, Anne Toussaint, and Bernard Löwe
    Substance use disorders in primary care settings / Kathleen Broad and Tony P. George
    Motivational interviewing / Jeffrey P. Haibach, Elizabeth A. DiNapoli, Deborah S. Finnell, John W. Kasckow, and Adam J. Gordon
    Psychosis / Jayashri Kulkarni, Emorfia Gavrilidis, Shainal Nathoo, and Jasmin Grigg
    Late-life depression / Fabian Fu€er, Tarik Karakaya, and Johannes Pantel
    Psychotherapeutic interventions / Fiammetta Cosci and Giovanni Andrea Fava
    Major depressive disorder / Sheng-Min Wang and Chi-Un Pae
    Untoward side effects of psychiatric drugs / Manu S. Sharma, Ives Cavalcante Passos, and André F. Carvalho
    Drug interactions involving psychotropic drugs / Subramoniam Mahusoodanan, Marina Tsoy-Podosenin, Leah R. Steinberg, and Nitin Tandan.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    Deb O'Kane ; [foreword by Sharon Lawn].
    Summary: Essential mental health information, strategies and skills for students and healthcare professionals. This highly valued quick reference guide returns in its fourth edition to provide practical and helpful strategies for responding effectively to those in crisis. Mental Health: A pocket guide delivers a comprehensive overview of the relevant concepts vital to contemporary mental healthcare. With a clear focus on the consumer, it covers the issues faced by people living with mental illness, as well as best practice approaches for primary health, first responders and multidisciplinary healthcare professionals.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2022
  • Digital
    Vee P. Prasher, Philip W. Davidson, Flavia H. Santos editors.
    Summary: This book brings together findings from research and clinical practice, with comprehensive coverage of the important aspects of mental health in ageing persons with intellectual and developmental disabilities. It is crucial for professionals involved in the care of persons with all intellectual and developmental disabilities to have a broad understanding of the essential range of issues, and therefore this book provides a truly multi-disciplinary perspective, complete with many figures and illustrations to underline the key points. Undoubtedly, research and clinical practice are much more advanced in the general ageing population than in persons with intellectual and developmental disabilities, and so professionals and academics must be made fully aware of commonalities and idiosyncrasies of older people with intellectual and developmental disabilities. This book presents the ongoing developments concerning mental health and aging, which will become relevant to the intellectually disabled population. Through experience, this book also acknowledges that the impact on the persons themselves and on their carers always needs to be taken into account, with treatment programs established with a multi-faceted team approach in mind. Avoiding the jargon of many titles in this area while maintaining the hands-on approach of clinical practice, this book meshes the practical and scientific worlds, with all chapters written by leading experts in the field.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    edited by Donna M. Norris, Annelle B. Primm.
    Summary: "Collected in a single volume for the first time, the writings in this novel anthology represent more than four decades of perspectives from the American Psychiatric Association's Solomon Carter Fuller Award lectures, named for the first Black psychiatrist in the United States. The chapter authors--Solomon Carter Fuller awardees themselves, psychiatrists building on the work of previous awardees, and other scholar experts--offer a multidisciplinary, cross-sectional examination of both the historical and contemporary environments that inform the Black experience in the United States.These treatises look at the intersection of mental health with topics that include the following: * Public health and public policy* Health care inequities* Racism* Economic well-being* Media* Education Emphasizing the real challenges that Black communities have faced and continue to face, each chapter also offers reasons for perseverance in the face of adversity.Readers will come away with a better understanding of the complexity of the Black experience in America and its impact on mental health, as well as a greater awareness of and appreciation for the legacy and ongoing contributions of Black psychiatric leaders to the field."-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Conditions affecting life in black communities. Public health and mental health disparities in Black communities : challenges for American psychiatry / June Jackson Christmas, Donna M. Norris, Annelle B. Primm
    The highs and lows of public health practice / David Satcher
    Why economic disparities matter in mental health / Hassell H. McClellan
    African americans and substance use / H. Westley Clark
    Black psychiatrists responding to the mental health impact of natural and human-caused disasters and systemic inequities / Annelle B. Primm
    Responding to the realities of racism. Application of an emotional competence framework to racism / Loma K. Flowers
    Centering blackness in mental health equity / Michelle P. Durham
    The media is the message : film and tv influences on Black mental health / Keith Hermanstyne
    A call to research. The work and legacy of Dr. Carl Bell Part 1: Building a better village / Johnny Williamson
    Part 2: Public health efforts / Ruth S. Shim
    Will advances in research address racial disparities? / Williams Lawson
    Identities at the intersections of race, gender, and mental illness: remembering Chester Pierce / Pamela Y. Collins, Nicola Park
    Racism, leadership, and organized psychiatry. Reflections on the origin of the Black psychiatrists of America / James P. Comer
    The urgency of responsible leadership in American psychiatry : racial bias and the biopsychosocial crises impacting mental health in communities of color / Donna M. Norris
    The caravan moves on : from Solomon Carter Fuller to psychiatry in the twenty-first century / Altha J. Stewart
    Nigrescence and the future of American psychiatry / Stephen A. McLeod-Bryant - Appendix. Solomon Carter Fuller award lecturers.
  • Digital
    Erlanger A. Turner.
    Summary: In Mental Health among African Americans: Innovations in Research and Practice, Erlanger A. Turner presents a new theoretical framework that emphasizes culturally sensitive clinical practices and Afrocentric values in order to address the lower rates of African Americans seeking medical treatment in the United States. -- Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    Ethical dilemmas in psychology
    Discrimination and race-related stress
    The four A's of treatment initiation
    Clinical practice with African American clients
    African American values
    Defining the future of research and clinical practice.
  • Digital
    Serge Marchand, Djéa Saravane, Isabelle Gaumond, editors ; foreword by Antonio Damasio.
    Summary: This book proposes a didactic approach to the different aspects of pain in mental health. The various chapters cover the myths, neurophysiology, perception, measurement and management of pain in mental health. The most common problems, including mood disorders, schizophrenia, anxiety, somatoform disorders, and pervasive developmental disorders, are covered. Each chapter addresses the problem of pain by putting an emphasis on the characteristics of different populations of patients suffering from mental illness. The book helps specialists working in different areas of mental health to appreciate the importance of pain problems in mental health, and also offers avenues for the measurement and treatment of pain in these patients. Mental health and pain are complex issues. They also share certain mutually influential neurophysiological mechanisms, which makes it even more difficult to identify their specific individual characteristics. This duality between the somatic and psychic components can become a pitfall for the specialist in mental health since it can be difficult to disentangle the evolution of a painful condition from the mental illness.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Introduction
    History
    the myths
    Neurophysiological bases of pain
    Pain perception in mental health
    Epidemiology of chronic pain in mental health: the example of depression
    Depression, bipolar disorder and pain
    Anxiety disorders and pain
    Schizophrenia and pain
    Somatoform disorders and pain
    Post traumatic stress disorder and pain
    Pain in suicidal ideation
    Pain in children with autism
    Addiction and pain
    Pain assessment in mental health
    Treatment and therapeutic perspectives.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Jun Shigemura, Rethy Kieth Chhem.
    Contents:
    Foreword
    Preface
    1. Godzilla mon amour: the Origins and Legacy of Nuclear Fear in Japan
    2. Unforeseeable Accidents from the Point of View of the Legal System
    3. Report on Fukushima Counseling Support Professional Team: Interdisciplinary Team Approach for Psychosocial Care of Evacuees
    4. Societal and Ethical Aspects of Radiation Risk Perception
    5. Thinking Across Disaster
    6. Emotional Consequences of TMI and Chernobyl: Lessons Learned for Fukushima
    7. 3/11 and 9/11: A Multi-faceted Investigation of a Survivor Exchange Program
    8. Psychosocial Responses to Disaster and Exposures: Distress Reactions, Health Risk Behavior, and Mental Disorders
    9. Psychosocial Challenges of the Fukushima Nuclear Plant Workers.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Rosaleen Ow, Abner Weng Cheong Poon.
    Summary: This book showcases current thinking on social work in the field of mental health and illness from a bio-ecological and spiritual framework reflecting the transition in mental health care from institution to community. The book presents a valuable tool for understanding theories on aetiology and social work interventions in mental health from varying socio-cultural, economic and political contexts. Topics covered include: the values and ethics of social work practice in mental health; psycho-social theories on mental health and illness, including psychological perspective and the structural/ social development perspective; social work approaches in working with individuals, families and communities; contextualized social work practice in mental health with a specific population group or community; structural factors such as legal provision and financial challenges in mental health and illness; and new directions in social work and mental health.

    Contents:
    Part One: Introduction
    Part Two: General Theories on Mental Health and of Aetiology of Mental Illness
    Part Three: Overview of social work approaches in working with individuals, families and community
    Part Four:Contextualized practice with individuals and families
    Part Five: Structural factors in social work and mental health
    Part Six: Concluding chapter.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Esther Murray, Jo Brown.
    Summary: "In 2015 I started working at a medical school, it was an important move for me as I wanted to be part of how doctors were trained, not only to ensure patients get the best possible care but also to understand how we can support doctors in practicing their profession without being harmed by it. I hadn't taken up a research post, but I had come along with a research idea, I wanted to know how it was that doctors (at this stage of my thinking) could practice for years, see terrible and upsetting things daily, and not be affected by it. I had carried out some literature searches and found concepts like compassion fatigue and burnout, I'd read reports of Post Traumatic Stress Disorder in emergency responders, but what I hadn't seen was a systematic approach to understanding what was happening to doctors, and how we could combat it"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Borrowed Words in emergency medicine : how 'moral injury' makes space for talking
    What does creative enquiry have to contribute to flourishing in medical education?
    Embracing Difference : towards an understanding of queer identities in medicine
    Stress and mental wellbeing in Emergency Medical Dispatchers
    Paramedics' Lived Experiences of Post
    Incident Traumatic Distress and Psychosocial support : An Interpretative Phenomenological Study
    On knowing, not knowing and wellbeing : Conversations about practice
    The complex issues that lead to nurses leaving the emergency department
    How do we protect our healthcare workers from occupational hazard that nobody talks about?
    What is peer support?
    The Theatre Wellbeing Project
    evolution from major incident to pandemic
    RUOK? RU sure UR OK?
    The story and the storyteller
    Death and Disability meetings at London's Air Ambulance: working in a Just Culture
    Digital Access Wiley 2021
  • Digital/Print
    Summary: "WHO's Mental Health Atlas series has already established itself as the single most comprehensive and most widely used source of global information on mental health situation. This new edition of Mental Health Atlas, carried out in 2014, assumes new importance as a repository of mental health information in WHO Member States because it is providing much of the baseline data against which progress towards the objectives and targets of the Comprehensive Mental Health Action Plan 2013-2020 is to be measured. The Action Plan contains four objectives: (1) To strengthen effective leadership and governance for mental health (2) To provide comprehensive, integrated and responsive mental health and social care services in communitybased settings (3) To implement strategies for promotion and prevention in mental health (4) To strengthen information systems, evidence and research for mental health."--Page 7

    Contents:
    Project teams and partners
    Preface
    Executive summary
    Introduction
    Results
    1. GLOBAL REPORTING ON CORE MENTAL HEALTH
    2. MENTAL HEALTH SYSTEM GOVERNANCE
    3. FINANCIAL AND HUMAN RESOURCES FOR MENTAL HEALTH
    4. MENTAL HEALTH SERVICE AVAILABILITY AND UPTAKE
    5. MENTAL HEALTH PROMOTION AND PREVENTION
    6. COMPARISONS WITH SELECTED MENTAL HEALTH ATLAS 2011 RESULTS
    References
    Appendices
    APPENDIX A. PARTICIPATING COUNTRIES AND CONTRIBUTORS MENTAL HEALTH SYSTEM GOVERNANCE
    APPENDIX B. GLOSSARY OF TERMS.
    Digital Access WHO 2015
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Retired Reference (Downstairs)
    RA790 .W69 2014
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Summary: Collects together data compiled from 177 World Health Organization Member States/Countries on mental health care. Coverage includes policies, plans and laws for mental health, human and financial resources available, what types of facilities providing care, and mental health programmes for prevention and promotion.
    Digital Access WHO 2017
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Reference (Upstairs)
    RA790 .W69 2017
    1
  • Digital
    editor, Jane Meschan Foy.
    Summary: "This indispensable resource provides vital guidance for integrating mental health care into your primary care practice. Learn from leading experts the latest information on enhancements to the medical home and on the care of children and adolescents with mental health symptoms that do not rise to the threshold for a diagnosis, as well as those that do"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Part 1: The pediatric advantage. Integrating preventive mental health care into pediatric practice
    Pediatric care of children and adolescents with mental health problems
    Part 2: Enhancing pediatric mental health care. Office and network systems to support mental health care
    Partnering to improve community mental health systems
    Effective communication methods: common factors skills
    Part 3: Elements of care. Iterative mental health assessment
    Psychosocial therapies
    Self-regulation therapies and biofeedback
    Complementary and integrative medical therapies
    Adapting psychosocial interventions to primary care
    Psychotropic medications in primary care
    Transitioning adolescents with mental health conditions to adult care
    Part 4: Pediatric care of children with common mental health concerns, signs, and symptoms. Agitation, suicidality, and other psychiatric emergencies
    Anxiety and trauma-related distress
    Disruptive behavior and aggression
    Eating abnormalities
    Emotional or behavioral disturbance in children younger than 5 years
    Family dysfunction
    Gender expression and identity
    Inattention and impulsivity
    Learning difficulty
    Low mood
    Maternal depression
    Medically unexplained symptoms
    Nonadherence to medical treatment
    School absenteeism and school refusal
    Self-injury
    Sleep disturbances
    Speech and language concerns
    Substance use 1: use of tobacco and nicotine
    Substance use 2: use of other substances
    Substance use 3: specialty referral and comanagement
    Appendixes.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2018
  • Digital
    Ruby Castilla-Puentes, Tatiana Falcone, editors.
    Summary: This book is the first authoritative medical text that considers the unique cultural backgrounds of Hispanic populations in a straightforward yet sensitive way, all while building a framework for practical psychiatric assessment and treatment plans. As the only book to consider the unique challenges facing Hispanic mental healthcare, this book is at the forefront of a serious issue that has gone unchallenged for too long. The text is written by two expert psychiatrists with an established history of leadership in this space. Chapters carefully and meticulously establish the issues of access to care in Latinx communities before addressing the unique needs of these patients in the context of common psychiatric disorders. Each disorder includes clinical cases for a reader-friendly approach to the challenges that develop effective assessment and treatment plans. Mental Health for Hispanic Communities is a concise yet comprehensive reference invaluable to all clinicians, students, and other medical professionals seeking to work with this population effectively.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    editor, Anne Duffy.
    Contents:
    Mental health in adolescents : bipolar disorder / Anne Duffy
    Diagnosis in children and adolescents / Joseph C. Blader
    Benefits of early intervention in young people with bipolar disorder / Aswin Ratheesh & Patrick D McGorry
    Medical comorbidity in youth with bipolar disorder : prevalence and implications for outcome / Muna M. Ali, Danielle S. Cha & Roger S. McIntyre
    Substance use in youth with bipolar disorder / Timothy E. Wilens & Courtney A. Zulauf
    Transitioning from child to adult care / Roberto B. Sassi
    Acute treatment / Ute Lewitzka
    Maintenance treatment / Ute Lewitzka
    State of the art : psychotherapies for individuals at risk, or experiencing a first episode, of bipolar disorder / Martine Vallarino and Jan Scott
    The implications of manic-like symptoms for subsequent psychopathology / Anne Duffy
    Multiple choice questions : answers.
    Digital Access Future Med 2014
  • Print
    edited by D. V. Siva Sankar.
    Contents:

    v. 1. Aponte, H. J. et al. Genetics, family, and community studies.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    P499 .M54
    3
  • Digital
    Jitendra Kumar Trivedi, Adarsh Tripathi, editors.
    Summary: This book tackles the issue of mental health legislation in South Asia. The first of its kind, it addresses an issue that is necessary for protecting the rights of people with mental disorders and serves as an essential text for reinforcing mental health policy in South Asia. it is a timely addition to our global understanding of mental health and how different regions address it.Asia is by far the largest continent in the world in terms of area with population exceeding 3.5 billion and has dozens of cultures, religions, languages and ethnic groups. As a result of its highly varied political systems, Asia also spawns a wide variety of health care systems including mental health care systems, often based on historical roots and at times colonial heritages. The people who suffer from mental or neurological disorders in the continent form a vulnerable section of society and often face stigma, discrimination and marginalization in all societies, and this increases the likelihood that their human rights will be violated
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Eugene Hong, Ashwin L. Rao, editors.
    Summary: This unique book provides a practical framework for and coverage of a broad range of mental health concerns applicable to the care of athletes, including depression, suicide, mood disorders, substance abuse and risk-taking behaviors. To this end, it presents content relevant to the care of athletes, including doping and the use of performance-enhancing drugs, the mental health impact of concussion, bullying and hazing, the impact of social media and exercise addiction, among other pertinent topics. Current basic and translational research on behavioral health and the relationship of brain to behavior are reviewed, and current treatment approaches, both pharmacological and non-pharmacological (including mindfulness training), are considered. This practical resource targets the stigma of mental illness in athletes in order to overcome barriers to care by presenting a definitive perspective of current concepts in the mental health care of athletes, provided by experts in the field and targeting sports medicine providers, mental health providers and primary care physicians involved in the direct care of recreational and competitive athletes at all levels.

    Contents:
    The Stigma of Mental Illness in Athletics
    Screening for Mental Health Conditions in Athletes
    Depression in Athletes: Incidence, Prevalence, and Comparisons to the Non-Athletic Population
    Suicide in Athletes: Are Athletes at Greater Risk?- Managing Psychiatric Disorders in Athletes
    ADHD in Athletes: Treatment and Considerations for Competition
    Risk-Taking Behaviors in Athletes
    The Psychological Response to Injury
    Substance Abuse and Sport
    Coping with Doping: PEDs in the Athletic Culture
    The Female Athlete Triad and Relative Energy Deficiencies in Athletes
    The Mental Health Manifestations of Concussion
    Bullying and Hazing in Athletic Culture
    The Impact of Social Media on Mental Health
    Mental Health in the Pediatric Athlete
    Exercise Addiction
    The Cellular and Physiological Basis of Behavioral Health: Basic and Translational Research
    An Update on Translational Research: The Brain and Behavior Relationship
    Non-Pharmacologic Approaches to Mental Health in Athletes
    Mindfulness Approaches to Athlete Well-Being
    Administrating Mental Health: Societal, Coaching, and Legislative Approaches to Mental Health
    Sports Psychology Demystified: Performance Versus Clinical Psychology
    Whats the Difference and Why Does It Matter?- Exercise as a Prescription for Mental Health.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Neil Krishan Aggarwal.
    Contents:
    Mental health, culture, and power in the war on terror
    Bioethics and the conduct of mental health professionals in the war on terror
    The meanings of symptoms and services for Guantanamo detainees
    Depictions of Arabs and Muslims in psychodynamic scholarship
    Depictions of suicide bombers in the mental health scholarship
    Knowledge and practice in war on terror deradicalization programs.
    Digital Access eBook Comp Acad 2015
  • Digital
    Michelle B. Riba, Sagar V. Parikh, John F. Greden, editors.
    Summary: This book offers a guide to better understanding models of workplace mental health, as well as best practices for mental health professionals, employee assistance groups, employers and employees alike. The cost of depression at the workplace is staggering, both in terms of absenteeism and productivity loss while at work, and in terms of human and family suffering. Depression is highly prevalent and affects employees' concentration, decision-making skills and memory, contributing to accidents and quality issues. Analyses indicate that the returns on investment for workplace mental health programs are significant, with employers reporting lower productivity-related financial losses and less need staff turnover due to mental health conditions. The book also addresses substance use and misuse, and ways to address such problems.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Jessica D. Tenenbaum, Piper A. Ranallo, editors.
    Summary: This textbook provides a detailed resource introducing the subdiscipline of mental health informatics. It systematically reviews the methods, paradigms, tools and knowledge base in both clinical and bioinformatics. Key foundational technologies, such as terminologies, ontologies and data exchange standards are all covered. The learning health system model is utilized to emphasize the bi-directional nature of the translational science associated with mental health processes. Descriptions of the data, technologies, paradigms and products that are generated by and used in each process and their limitations are discussed. Mental Health Informatics: Enabling a Learning Mental Healthcare System is a comprehensive introductory resource for students, educators and researchers in mental health informatics and related behavioral sciences. It is an ideal resource for use in a survey course for both pre- and post-doctoral training programs, as well as for healthcare administrators, funding entities, vendors and product developers working to make mental healthcare more evidence-based.

    Contents:
    Precision Medicine and the Learning Health System
    What is Informatics?
    What is Mental Health?
    Epistemological Differences between the Behavioral and Biological Sciences
    What is Mental Health Informatics?
    Big Picture: Process View of Mental Health Care Delivery
    Introduction to Technologies for Data Acquisition in Mental Health
    Informatics Technologies for the Acquisition of Biological Data
    Informatics Technologies for the Acquisition of Psychological and Behavioral Data
    Informatics Technologies for the Acquisition of Interpersonal, Social and Environmental Data: The Exosome
    Informatics Technologies for the Acquisition of Population Level Data
    Introduction to Methods for Extracting Meaningful Information from Data in Mental Health
    Concept and Knowledge Representation to Transform Data into Information in Mental Health
    Bioinformatics Methods in Mental Health Research and Practice
    Psychometric Methods
    Computational Models and Analytic Methods
    Natural Language Processing in Mental Health Research and Practice
    Introduction to Paradigms for Knowledge Discovery in Mental Health
    Paradigms for Knowledge Discovery in Clinical and Research Data Repositories
    Biomarker Discovery
    Data Visualization
    Inferential Analysis and Predictive Modeling
    The Role of Biological Information in Mental Health Research and Practice
    Electronic Health Record (EHR) Systems in Mental Health
    Computerized Clinical Decision Support in Mental Health
    Informatics Technologies in Detection and Diagnosis of Mental Health Conditions
    Informatics Technologies in Prevention and Treatment of Mental Health Conditions
    Informatics Technologies for Care Coordination and Continuity of Care
    Informatics Technologies to Improve Patient Safety in Mental Health
    Registries
    Disseminating Newly Acquired Knowledge
    Ethical Legal and Social Issues (ELSI)
    The Future of Mental Health Informatics.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Clint A. Bowers, Deborah C. Beidel, and Madeline R. Marks, Editors.
    Summary: The stress that comes with being a first responder has been known to lead to depression, anxiety, substance abuse, and suicide. However, few clinicians are informed about these health concerns and how to adequately treat them in this population. Therefore, there is an urgent need for practitioners to understand the latest information regarding treatments that will be useful to this specific population. Mental Health Intervention and Treatment of First Responders and Emergency Workers is an essential reference source that focuses on the latest research for diagnosing and treating mental health.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Assessing needs: using a wellness survey to guide interventions
    Chapter 2. Swimming upstream: the first responder's marriage
    Chapter 3. Posttraumatic stress and alcohol use among first responders
    Chapter 4. Unique job roles and mental health risk factors among emergency dispatchers
    Chapter 5. The first, first responder: the neglected needs and unique challenges of work as a 9-1-1 telecommunicator
    Chapter 6. Occupational risk factors and the mental health of women firefighters
    Chapter 7. Critical incident stress management: a comprehensive, intergrative, systematic, and multi-component program for supporting first responder psychological health
    Chapter 8. Application and integration of psychological first aid in first responder organizations
    Chapter 9. The HEROES project: building mental resilience in first responders
    Chapter 10. Disaster responder self-care, self-compassion, and protective factors: a pilot study on responders' resilience and competence
    Chapter 11. Bridging the gaps: toward effective collaboration between peer supporters and behavioral health professionals
    Chapter 12. Evidence-based practices to enhance first responder well-being and performance
    Chapter 13. Trauma management therapy for first responders
    Chapter 14. Narrative therapy to address trauma for emergency medical services and firefighters
    Chapter 15. Organizational prevention and intervention services: beyond the early intervention system
    Chapter 16. "More than peer support: organizational and relational intervention model": first responder assistance program (f.r.a.p.)
    Chapter 17. Changing hearts and minds: getting administrative support for delivery of care.
  • Digital
    edited by Anne Borsay and Pamela Dale.
    Contents:
    Foreword. The struggle is never over / Mick Carpenter
    Mental health nursing : the working lives of paid carers from 1800 to the 1990s / Anne Borsay and Pamela Dale
    Psychiatric nurses and their patients in the nineteenth century : the Irish perspective / Oonagh Walsh
    A duty to learn : attendant training in Victoria, Australia, 1880-1907 / Lee-Ann Monk
    'Who are these?' : nursing shell-shocked patients in Cardiff during the First World War / Anne Borsay and Sara Knight
    Discourse of dispute : narratives of asylum nurses and attendants, 1910-22 / Barbara Douglas
    'Surely a nice occupation for a girl?' : stories of nursing, gender, violence and mental illness in British asylums, 1914-30 / Vicky Long
    Reassessing staffing requirements and creating new roles for nurses during a period of rapid change at the Royal Western Counties Institution, 1927-48 / Pamela Dale
    'The weakest link in the chain of nursing?' : recruitment and retention in mental health nursing in England, 1948-68 / Claire Chatterton
    Wardens, letter writing and the welfare state, 1944-74 / John Welshman
    Learning disability nursing : surviving change, c. 1970-90 / Duncan Mitchell
    Between asylum and community : DGH psychiatric nurses at Withington General Hospital, 1971-91 / Val Harrington.
    Digital Access Oxford 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Ronald Schouten.
    Contents:
    Basics of the law and legal system / Ronald Schouten
    Civil commitment / Ronald Schouten and Philip Candilis
    Violence risk assessment / Jennifer L. Piel and Ronald Schouten
    Practice and malpractice in the evaluation of suicidal patients / Gary Jacobson
    Informed consent / Ronald Schouten and Kimberly Kumer
    Guardianships, conservatorships, and alternative forms of substitute decision making / Ronald Schouten and Rebecca W. Brendel
    Treatment refusal / Ariana Nesbit, Steven K. Hoge, and Debra A. Pinals
    Malpractice / Jennifer L. Piel and Phillip J. Resnick
    Confidentiality and testimonial privilege / Robert Scott Johnson and Ronald Schouten
    Evaluation of child abuse and neglect / Matthew Soulier and Catherine Ayoub
    Juveniles and the law / Matthew Lahaie and Robert Kinscherff
    Mental health professionals and the criminal justice system / Reena Kapoor and Alec Buchanan
    Disability evaluations / Marilyn Price
    Malingering and factitious disorder / Scott Beach and Matt Lahaie
    Ethics at the intersection of mental health and the law / Philip J. Candilis and Navneet Sidhu.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    Naakesh A. Dewan, John S. Luo, Nancy M. Lorenzi, editors.
    Contents:
    Past, Present and Future Policy Landscape for Technology in Public Mental Health Care
    Electronic Health Records Technology: Policy and Realities
    Leading Health IT Optimization: A Next Frontier
    Computer aided Psychotherapy Technologies
    Cognitive Assessment and Enhancement Technologies
    Digital platform and technology innovation in treatment of substance use disorders
    Technology and Adolescent Behavioral Health Care
    An Overview of Practicing High Quality Telepsychiatry
    Virtual Reality Technologies
    Social Media Technologies
    Technology Tools supportive of DSM-V: An Overview
    Summary and Look Forward.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    by Susan G. Forman, Jeffrey D. Shahidullah, Cody A. Hostutler, Cori M. Green, Rebecca A. Baum
    Summary: For many children and teens, primary care clinicians are the first to notice and help with mental health issues. This guide helps primary care pediatricians, family doctors, nurse practitioners, and other professionals identify, treat, and prevent mental health problems as well as promote good mental health in their patients.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2022
  • Digital/Print
    Buros, Oscar Krisen; Carlson, Janet F.; Conoley, Jane Close; Geisinger, Kurt F.; Impara, James C.; Kramer, J. J.; Mitchell, James V.; Plake, Barbara S.; Spies, Robert A.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    Database Limited to 4 simultaneous users
    Ovid
    Test reviews online Limited to 4 simultaneous users
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Retired Reference (Downstairs)
    Z5814.P8 M4
    19
  • Digital
    Mario F. Mendez.
    Summary: The ability to effectively assess cognitive and other behavioral functions is an essential skill for neurologists, psychiatrists, geriatricians, nurses, and other clinicians who perform clinic and bedside examinations. Unique in the field, The Mental Status Examination Handbook is a user-friendly, comprehensive resource that provides practical guidance on cognitive assessment, clarifies mental status testing procedures, and assists with decision making for neuropsychological referrals. This detailed manual draws from the full history of behavioral neurology testing, making the complex and challenging area of cognitive assessment accessible for both students and practitioners. Offers guidance on how to choose and perform a large number of mental status tests, with information on selected test materials and normative values. Covers the bedside evaluation of arousal, attention, memory, language, perception, executive abilities, and other cognitive and behavioral areas. Provides an authoritative assessment and compendium of commonly used mental status scales, inventories and questionnaires. Describes relevant correlations with formal neuropsychological testing, neuroimaging, and neuropsychiatric disease. Explains how to weigh, use, and understand mental status scales and neuropsychological instruments. Discusses the meaning of cognitive symptoms and signs, and their neuroanatomical and neuropathological correlations. Enhanced eBook version included with purchase. Your enhanced eBook allows you to access all of the text, figures, and references from the book on a variety of devices.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Anthony Bateman and Peter Fonagy.
    Summary: Loss of mentalizing leads to interpersonal and social problems, emotional variability, impulsivity, self-destructive behaviours, and violence. This practical guide on MBT treatment of personality disorders outlines the mentalizing model of borderline and antisocial personality disorders and how it translates into an effective clinical treatment.

    Contents:
    Pt. 1 Mentalizing framework
    1. What is mentalizing?
    2. Using the mentalizing model to understand personality disorder
    3. Comorbidity
    4. Assessment of mentalizing
    pt. 2 Mentalizing practice
    5. Structure of mentalization-based treatment
    6. Clinician stance
    7. Principles for the mentalizing clinician
    8. Mentalizing focus: support, empathy, and validation
    9. Mentalizing focus: clarification, affect elaboration, affect focus, and challenge
    10. Relational focus of mentalizing: transference tracers and mentalizing the relationship
    Pt. 3. Mentalizing groups
    11. MBT-Introductory group (MBT-I)
    12. Mentalizing group therapy
    13. Antisocial personality disorder: mentalizing, MBT-G, and common clinical problems
    Pt. 4 Mentalizing systems
    14. Mentalizing and families: the Families and Carers Training and Support program (FACTS)
    15. Mentalizing the system.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    Marie-Luise Althoff.
    Summary: In this book, the author discusses with a view to psychotherapeutic practice how power and the exercise of power can be used in a constructive sense. Spontaneously, people tend to associate the topic of power negatively. They mostly talk about their own powerlessness and the power of "those up there", and very rarely about their own striving for power. It is undisputed that power and the exercise of power, as well as dealing with powerlessness, play an important role in psychotherapy. Nevertheless, the constructive and destructive aspects of power are still too little reflected. Here, there is a mentalization deficit on the part of both psychotherapists and patients. In this book questions are asked and suggestions for practice are developed. Written for psychotherapists, child and adolescent psychotherapists, family therapists, counselors, psychiatrists, physicians, students, and psychotherapists in training. From the contents Is it a bad thing to use power, to exert influence in order to get one's way? Where is the boundary between the constructive exercise of power and destructive "power games"? Do some situations require assertiveness and a certain distance and other situations rather closeness and credibility and persuasiveness? The author Dr. phil. Marie-Luise Althoff, studied mathematics, psychology and education; she is a psychoanalyst, lecturer, supervisor and teaching analyst. This book is a translation of an original German edition. The translation was done with the help of artificial intelligence (machine translation by the service DeepL.com). A subsequent human revision was done primarily in terms of content, so that the book will read stylistically differently from a conventional translation.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    The development of the mentalizing ability
    Power and powerlessness
    what is it?- How do I as a psychotherapist recognize constructive and destructive use of power on both sides?- How do I as a psychotherapist deal with destructive use of power?
    How do I recognize the successful overcoming of a destructive power entanglement?
    Working through and healing: dealing with powerlessness and manifesting power
    The social dimension.
    Digital Access Springer 2023
  • Digital
    Helen M. Woolnough, Sandra L. Fielden.
    Contents:
    Gendered career development within nursing and healthcare
    Mentoring as a career development tool
    Diversity in mentoring : gender, race, and ethnicity
    Mentoring in nursing and healthcare
    Designing and implementing a formal mentoring programme
    Evaluating formal mentoring relationships
    Does mentoring work? : the realities of mentoring from the perspective of both mentee and mentor
    The challenging perceptions programme and the long term benefits of mentoring.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Sharon E. Straus, David L. Sackett.
    Contents:
    What is the evidence for mentorship?
    What are the characteristics and behaviors of effective mentors and mentees?
    How can you initiate mentorship?
    Some effective mentoring strategies and tactics : part 1, mentorship meetings, priority setting, and time-management
    Some effective mentoring strategies and tactics : part 2, protecting mentees from dys-opportunities
    Some effective mentoring strategies and tactics : part 3, mentoring for knowledge generation
    Some effective mentoring strategies and tactics : part 4, mentoring for knowledge dissemination
    Some effective mentoring strategies and tactics : part 5, mentoring for promotion, protection, and job prospects
    How can you assess, diagnose and treat mentorship that is in trouble?
    How can you initiate and maintain a mentorship progam?
    How can you evaluate the impact of a mentorship program?
    How can you scale up and sustain a mentorship program?.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Professional Version
    Consumer Version
    Print Access
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Retired Reference (Downstairs)
    RC71 .M555
    11
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC71 .M555
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Professional Version
    Consumer Version
    Print Access
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Retired Reference (Downstairs)
    RC71 .M555
    11
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC71 .M555
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Aiello, Susan E.; Fraser, Clarence M.
    Digital Access Latest ed. only
    Print Access
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Retired Reference (Downstairs)
    SF748 .M47
    2
    Reference (Upstairs)
    SF748 .M47
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Curtis D. Pollman, Darren G. Rumbold, Donald M. Axelrad.
    Summary: This book integrates 30 years of mercury research on the Florida Everglades to inform scientists and policy makers. The Everglades is an iconic ecosystem by virtue of its expanse; diversity of biota; and multiple international designations. Despite this, the Everglades has been subjected to multiple threats including: habitat loss, hydrologic alterations, invasive species; and altered water quality. Less well recognized as a threat to Everglades human use and wildlife populations is the toxic metal, mercury. This volume focuses on sources of mercury to the Everglades from the late-1980s when there was bewilderment as to why there were very high levels of mercury in the Everglades food web. Soon came the finding that mercury loadings from atmospheric deposition accounted for over 95% of total input to the Everglades which resulted in Florida conducting the most comprehensive mercury monitoring and modeling study performed to date. Topics discussed in this volume include: (1) Why atmospheric deposition fluxes of mercury to the Everglades are amongst the highest in the U.S; (2) That these are overwhelmingly from sources outside of the U.S; (3) That mitigation strategies for resolving the elevated food web mercury problem in the Everglades that rely solely on reducing atmospheric mercury inputs will not be effective for many decades; (4) That consideration of other strategies, in particular controlling factors related to Everglades mercury biogeochemical cycling seem warranted.

    Contents:
    1. Overview of the Everglades
    2. The Evolution of the Everglades as a Perturbed Ecosystem.-3. Overview of the Atmospheric Mercury Cycle
    4. Atmospheric Deposition Flux of Mercury to the Everglades
    5. Mercury Emission Sources and Contributions of Atmospheric Deposition to the Everglades
    6. Atmospheric Deposition of Mercury in the Everglades
    Synthesis of Global Cycling and Local Process Effects.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Darren G. Rumbold, Curtis D. Pollman, Donald M. Axelrad, editors.
    Contents:
    Intro; Preface Volume II; References; Contents; Contributors;
    Chapter 1: Aquatic Cycling of Mercury; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Cycling of Hg in Surface Water; 1.3 Cycling of Hg in Aquatic Soils/Sediments and the Formation of MeHg; 1.4 Perturbations Affecting Hg Cycling; 1.5 Summary and Conclusions; References;
    Chapter 2: Sulfur Contamination in the Everglades, a Major Control on Mercury Methylation; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Historical and Background Levels of Sulfur in the Everglades; 2.3 Present Levels of Sulfate in the Everglades; 2.4 Other Forms of Sulfur in the Everglades 2.5 Sources of Sulfate to the Everglades2.6 Remobilization of Sulfur from Drought and Fire; 2.7 Sulfur Controls on Mercury Methylation; 2.8 Other Impacts of Sulfur on the Everglades; 2.9 Conclusions; References;
    Chapter 3: A Causal Analysis for the Dominant Factor in the Extreme Geographic and Temporal Variability in Mercury Biomagnific ... ; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Methods; 3.3 Analysis; 3.3.1 Candidate Cause: Balance Between Sulfate and Sulfide; 3.3.1.1 Mechanistically Plausible Cause: The Relationship Between the Causal Agent and Effect Should Be Consistent with Known ... 3.3.1.2 Spatial Gradient: Effects Should Decline or Increase as the Stressor Declines or Increases Over Space3.3.1.3 Laboratory Tests of Site Media: Controlled Laboratory Manipulation of Site Media Should Induce the Same Effects as See ... ; 3.3.1.4 Manipulation of Exposure: Field Experiment or Management Actions That Decrease or Increase the Intensity of the Causal ... ; 3.3.1.5 Temporal Gradient: Effects Should Increase or Decrease as the Stressor Increases or Decreases Over Time 3.3.1.6 Stressor-Response Relationships from Ecological Simulation Models: The Causal Agent in the Case Is at Levels That Are ... 3.3.1.7 Verified Predictions: Knowledge of the Causal Agentś Mode of Action Permits Prediction of Unobserved Effects That Can ... ; 3.3.2 Candidate Cause: Microbes Other Than SRB as Hg Methylators; 3.3.3 Candidate Cause: Differences in Food Webs Are Responsible for Extreme Geographical and Temporal Variability in Biomagnif ... ; 3.3.4 Candidate Cause: Dissolved Organic Matter (DOM) May Have as Much or More Influence in the Accumulation of Hg Than Sulfate 3.4 Management Relevant Conclusions3.5 Final Thoughts; References;
    Chapter 4: Dissolved Organic Matter Interactions with Mercury in the Florida Everglades; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 DOM Concentrations and Quality in the FL Everglades; 4.2.1 Sources of DOM; 4.2.2 Impact of Nutrient Enrichment; 4.2.3 Hydrologic Controls on DOM Fluxes and Quality; 4.3 Hg Complexation by DOM; 4.3.1 Hg-DOM and MeHg-DOM Complexes and Competition with Other Ligands; 4.3.2 Implications for Hg and MeHg Transport; 4.4 Interactions of DOM with Hg-Sulfide Species; 4.5 DOM and Microbial Hg Methylation
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    [edited by] Sandra L. Gardner, Brian S. Carter, Mary Enzman-Hines, Susan Niermeyer.
    Summary: "Merenstein & Gardner's Handbook of Neonatal Intensive Care, 9th Edition is the leading resource for interprofessional, collaborative care of critically ill newborns. It offers comprehensive coverage with a unique interprofessional collaborative approach and a real-world perspective that make it a practical guide for both nurses and physicians. The new ninth edition features a wealth of expanded content on delivery-room care; new evidence-based care "bundles"; palliative care in the NICU; interprofessional collaborative care of parents with depression, grief, and complicated grief; and new pain assessment tools. Updated high-quality references have also been reintegrated into the book, making it easier for clinicians to locate research evidence and standards of care with minimal effort. These additions, along with updates throughout, ensure that clinicians are equipped with the very latest clinical care guidelines and practice recommendations -- all in a practical quick-reference format for easy retrieval and review"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Evidence-based practice. Evidence-based clinical practice
    Support of the neonate. Prenatal environment: effect on neonatal outcome
    Perinatal transport and levels of care
    Care at birth
    Immediate newborn care after birth
    Heat balance
    Physiologic monitoring
    Acid-base homeostasis and oxygenation
    Diagnostic imaging in the neonate
    Pharmacology in neonatal care
    Drug withdrawal in the neonate
    Pain and pain relief
    The neonate and the environment impact on development
    Metabolic and nutritional care of the neonate. Fluid and electrolyte management
    Glucose homeostasis
    Total parenteral nutrition
    Enteral nutrition
    Breastfeeding the neonate with special needs
    Skin and skin care
    Infection and hematologic diseases of the neonate. Newborn hematology
    Neonatal hyperbilirubinemia
    Infection in the neonate
    Common systemic diseases of the neonate. Respiratory diseases
    Cardiovascular diseases and surgical interventions
    Neonatal nephrology
    Neurologic disorders
    Genetic disorders, malformations, and inborn errors of metabolism
    Neonatal surgery
    Psychosocial aspects of neonatal care. Families in crisis: theoretical and practical considerations
    Grief and perinatal loss
    Discharge planning and follow-up of the neonatal intensive care unit infant
    Ethics, values, and palliative care in neonatal intensive care.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Elan D. Louis, MD, MS, Professor of Neurology and Epidemiology, Chief, Division of Movement Disorders, Deartments of Neuology and Chronic Disease Epidemiology, Yale School of Medicine and Yale School of Public Health, Yale University, New Haven, Connecticut, Stephan A. Mayer, MD, FCCM, Professor of Neurology and Neurosurgery, Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai, Director, Neurocritical Care, Mount Sinai Health System, New York, New York, Lewis P. Rowland, MD, Professor of Neurology, Chairman of Neurology, Emeritus, The Neurological Institute of New York, Columbia University Medical Center, New York, New York.
    Contents:
    Sect. I: Approach to the neurologic patient
    Sect. II: Common problems in neurology
    Sect. III: Diagnostic tests
    Sect. IV: Cerebrovascular diseases
    Sect. V: Neurotrauma
    Sect. VI: Dementia
    Sect. VII: Headache and pain syndromes
    Sect. VIII: Epilepsy and paroxysmal disorders
    Sect. IX: Central nervous system infections
    Sect. X: Demyelinating and inflammatory diseases
    Sect. XI: Movement disorders
    Sect. XII: Neuromuscular diseases
    Sect. XIII: Neurooncology
    Sect. XIV: Hydrocephalus and cerebral edema
    Sect. XV: Spinal cord disorders
    Sect. XVII: Systemic organ function and the brain
    Sect. XVIII: Neurologic toxidromes
    Sect. XIX: Pediatric neurology
    Sect. XX: Psychiatry and neurology
    Sect. XXI: Recovery and end-of-life care.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    [edited by] Elan D. Louis, Stephan A. Mayer, James M. Noble.
    Summary: "For more than 60 years, Merritt’s Neurology has remained a trusted landmark text in clinical neurology, providing unparalleled guidance on neurologic protocols, treatment guidelines, clinical pathways, therapeutic recommendations, and imaging. The fourteenth edition reflects the state of today’s practice, with fully updated content and timely new sections and chapters. With this edition, Dr. James Noble joins Drs. Elan Louis and Stephan A. Mayer as co-editor, all of whom trained at Columbia University where Dr. H. Houston Merritt wrote the initial editions of this book. Lauded for its comprehensive coverage, colorful and dynamic visual style, readability, and ease of use, this up-to-date reference is ideal for neurologists, primary care physicians, and residents alike."-- From back cover.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Yaoliang Tang, Buddhadeb Dawn.
    Contents:
    Insights into the Mechanism of Exosome Formation and Secretion / Kobina Essandoh, Guo-Chang Fan
    An Overview of the Proteomic and miRNA Cargo in MSC-Derived Exosomes / Soon Sim Tan, Tian Sheng Chen, Kok Hian Tan, Sai Kiang Lim
    Exosome Function in miRNA-Mediated Paracrine Effects / Sathyamoorthy Balasubramanian, Sheeja Rajasingh, Jayakumar Thangavel, Buddhadeb Dawn, Johnson Rajasingh
    Current Methods to Purify and Characterize Exosomes / W. Michael Dismuke, Yutao Liu
    Stem Cell Extracellular Vesicles: A Novel Cell-Based Therapy for Cardiovascular Diseases / Ewa K. Zuba-Surma, Marta Adamiak, Buddhadeb Dawn
    Therapeutic Potential of Stem Cell-Derived Extracellular Vesicles in Cardioprotection and Myocardium Repair / Bin Yu, Muhammad Ashraf, Meifeng Xu
    Engineered/Hypoxia-Preconditioned MSC-Derived Exosome: Its Potential Therapeutic Applications / Wei Zhu, Han Chen, Jian'an Wang
    Exosome-Based Translational Nanomedicine: The Therapeutic Potential for Drug Delivery / Lei Lv, Qingtan Zeng, Shenjun Wu, Hui Xie, Jiaquan Chen, Xiang Jiang Guo, Changning Hao, Xue Zhang, Meng Ye, Lan Zhang
    Effect of Exosomes from Mesenchymal Stem Cells on Angiogenesis / Susmita Sahoo, Feng Dong, Lola DiVincenzo, William Chilian, Liya Yin
    Exosomes for Bone Diseases / Paulomi Sanghavi, Porter Young, Sunil Upadhyay, Mark W. Hamrick
    Diagnostic and Prognostic Applications of MicroRNA-Abundant Circulating Exosomes / Baron Arnone, Xiaoqi Zhao, Zhipeng Zou, Gangjian Qin, Min Cheng.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2015
  • Digital
    J. Jordi Rowe, Erinn Downs-Kelly, editors.
    Summary: This book utilizes a uniform approach to provide a framework for the diagnosis of mesenchymal tumors of the breast while highlighting their mimics. Emphasis is placed on a practical approach to the morphologic interpretation and useful ancillary tests while exploring the differential diagnoses in depth. Given the overall low incidence of mesenchymal lesions of the breast along with their mimics, surgical pathologists are not consistently exposed to these spindle cell lesions. Compounding this problem is the broad differential that these lesions engender, with entities ranging from reactive/reparative lesions to poorly differentiated spindle cell malignancies. Furthering the challenge, the diagnoses may be complicated by fixation issues, sampling method, small sample size, lack of clinical history and prior treatment effects. The goal of this book is to introduce readers to the spectrum of these lesions while providing a systematic approach that helps establish accurate diagnoses that in turn drive appropriate clinical follow up and treatment. Chapters cover the spectrum of benign and malignant mesenchymal tumors and their mimics that are found in the breast in an easy to read format with richly detailed images to aid in diagnoses. The text also discusses practical components to aid in establishing and evaluating the differential diagnosis. Given how morphologically and clinically diverse these lesions are, Mesenchymal Tumors of the Breast and Their Mimics provides a construct for integrating the varied components that go into establishing a diagnosis for this challenging aspect of breast pathology.

    Contents:
    Metaplastic Carcinoma of the Breast
    Phyllodes Tumors
    Periductal Stromal Hyperplasia and Periductal Stromal Tumor
    Vascular Tumors of the Breast
    Mesenchymal Breast Tumors with Fibroblastic and Myofibroblastic Differentiation
    Adipocytic Tumors
    Inflammatory Lesions and Inflammatory-Like Lesions
    Miscellaneous Mesenchymal Tumors of the Breast.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Eli D. Ehrenpreis, John C. Alverdy, Steven D. Wexner, editors.
    Summary: Recent discoveries and clarifications of known information about the mesentery have now established that these complex structures function together as an individual organ within the human body. As such, conditions that affect the mesentery can now be grouped within a single area of study and clinical practice. The various aspects of mesenteric diseases have not been brought together in a single source and this book aims to bring them together for the first time. It will cover general areas such as anatomy, histology and physiology of the mesentery. A description of diagnostic procedures used to evaluate patients with mesenteric disorders will follow. A practical survey with detailed descriptions of medical, surgical, and neoplastic disorders of the mesentery is also be included. This book is intended to be a guide for clinical practitioners including gastroenterologists, general surgeons, colorectal surgeons, primary care physicians, nurse practitioners and physician assistants who manage patients with mesenteric disorders.

    Contents:
    Section 1: General
    Redefining the mesentery as an organ
    Embryology of the mesentery
    General anatomy of the mesentery
    Section II: Anatomy and Physiology
    Vascular Anatomy of the Mesentery
    Introduction to the Physiology of the Mesentery
    Emergence of the human gut microbiota as an influencer in health and disease
    Cellular Anatomy of the Mesentery
    Section III: Diagnostic Procedures
    Radiography of the Mesentery
    Mesenteric biopsy
    Diagnosing mesenteric diseases: Laparoscopy
    Immunologic Function of the MesenteryNeurophysiologic Function of the Mesentery
    Physiology of the Mesenteric Circulation
    Section IV: Role of Mesentery in Systemic Medical Diseases
    The Role of the Mesentery in Metabolic Syndrome and Diabetes Mellitus
    Crohn's Disease and the Mesentery
    The Role of the Mesentery in Pancreatic diseases
    IgG4-Related Diseases and the Mesentery
    ^Role of the Mesentery in Systemic Inflammation Response Syndrome (SIRS) and Multiple Organ Dysfunction Syndrome (MODS)
    Section V: Medical Disorders of the Mesentery
    Mesenteric Hemorrhage
    Mesenteric Panniculitis
    PPP Syndrome: Pancreatitis, Panniculitis, Polyarthritis
    Mesenteric Adenitis
    Mesenteric Abscess
    Mesenteric Venous Thrombosis
    Mesenteric Arterial Occlusion
    Ischemic Enteropathy (also called Mesenteric Ischemia)
    Colonic Ischemia (also known as Ischemic Colitis)
    Mesenteric Lymphangioma
    Radiation-Induced Mesenteric Injury
    Drug Induced Mesenteric and Retroperitoneal Diseases
    Section VI: Neoplasms of the Mesentery
    Primary Solid Neoplasms
    Metastatic Diseases of the Mesentery
    Mesenteric Lymphoma
    Castleman Disease with Mesenteric Involvement
    Section VII: Surgical Diseases of the Mesentery
    Mesenteric Resection in Upper Abdominal Surgery
    Mesenteric Considerations in Surgery of the Colon and Rectum
    ^Mesocolic Resection in Colon Cancer
    Mesenteric Resection in Rectal Cancer
    Mesenteric Resection in Crohn's disease
    Mesenteric resection in Crohn's disease
    Section VIII: Surgery for Individual Conditions
    Surgical Management of Intestinal Volvulus
    Embryologic Abnormalities of the Mesentery
    Mesenteric Hernia
    Surgical Management of Bands and Adhesions
    Mesenteric Trauma
    Mesenteric Cysts
    Mesenteric Abscess
    Mesenteric Neoplasms
    Mesenteric Artery Thrombosis and Embolism
    Section IX: Future
    Future Research on the Role of the Mesentery in Health and Disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Gustavo S. Oderich, editor.
    Summary: This book represents the first comprehensive textbook devoted to the standard of care, current guidelines and innovations in the field of mesenteric vascular disease. The book reviews imaging modalities, diagnostic work up, physiologic tests, traditional open surgical techniques and novel endovascular approaches. Technical aspects of both open surgical and endovascular techniques are provided by experts in the field, with illustrations and photographs of key steps for each type of procedure. Results of epidemiologic studies and national databases are summarized, as well as large institutional experiences. An evidence-based approach is used for recommendations regarding best therapies. Diagnostic approaches including imaging and novel physiologic tests, including gastric tonometry and oxygen light spectroscopy are also covered. Mesenteric Vascular Disease: Current Therapy will serve as a very useful resource for clinicians, surgeons, interventionalists, gastroenterologists and researchers dealing with and interested in mesenteric vascular diseases.

    Contents:
    History of Mesenteric Vascular Disease
    Normal and Variant Mesenteric Anatomy
    Pathophysiology
    Epidemiology and Natural History
    Duplex Ultrasound of the Mesenteric Vessels
    Functional Testing in the Diagnosis of Chronic Mesenteric Ischemia
    Non-invasive Arterial Imaging: Computed Tomography and Magnetic Resonance Angiography
    Diagnostic Angiography
    Clinical Presentation, Etiology, and Diagnostic Considerations
    Non-Atherosclerotic Causes of Mesenteric Arterial Disease
    Techniques of Open Mesenteric Reconstructions
    Results of Open Mesenteric Reconstructions
    Techniques of Endovascular Mesenteric Revascularization
    Results of Endovascular Mesenteric Revascularization
    Clinical Presentation, Etiology, and Diagnostic Considerations
    Technique of Open Mesenteric Catheter Embolectomy
    Techniques of Open and Hybrid Mesenteric Revascularization for Acute Mesenteric Ischemia
    Techniques of Endovascular Revascularization for Acute Mesenteric Ischemia
    Second Look Laparotomy, the Open Abdomen, and Temporary Abdominal Closure in Acute Mesenteric Ischemia
    Results of Open and Endovascular Revascularization for Acute Mesenteric Ischemia
    Medical Management of Short Bowel Syndrome and Nutritional Support
    Clinical Presentation, Etiology, and Diagnostic Considerations
    Thrombophilia Testing in Splanchnic Vein Thrombosis
    Treatment of Mesenteric Venous Thrombosis
    Clinical Presentation and Diagnosis
    Management and Results
    Clinical Presentation and Diagnostic Considerations
    Open Surgical Treatment
    Laparoscopic Trans-peritonaeal Approach
    Results of Open and Laparoscopic Median Arcuate Ligament Release
    Clinical Presentation, Etiology, and Diagnostic Considerations of Isolated Visceral Artery Dissections
    Open Surgical and Endovascular Revascularizations of Isolated Visceral Artery Dissections
    Results of Medical, Interventional, and Surgical Treatment
    Clinical Presentation, Etiology, Diagnostic Considerations, Treatment, and Results.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital/Print
    J. Calvin Coffey, editor.
    Summary: The volume summarizes the most recent advances in our understanding of the mesentery and explains the how these are important in inflammation. It comprises a series of state of the art chapters by leading authorities in each area. It explains how recent advances in our understanding of the mesenteric organ, have advanced the diagnosis and treatment abdominal and systemic conditions including cancer, inflammatory bowel disease and endocrine conditions such as diabetes, and circulatory disorders such as atherosclerosis. .

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Introduction to ``The Mesentery in Inflammation ́́
    1 Introduction: Inflammation and the Mesentery
    2 Overview of Chapters
    3 The Mesentery
    4 Inflammation of the Mesentery
    5 The Mesenteric Interstitium
    6 The Mesenteric Lymphatic Framework
    7 General Immunology of the Mesentery
    8 Bacterial Translocation
    9 The Effects of Mesenteric Inflammation on Adjoining Intestine
    10 Targeting the Mesentery
    11 Conclusion
    References
    The Development and Anatomy of the Mesentery
    1 Introduction
    2 The Mesentery Redefined 3 The Mesenteric Model of Abdominal Anatomy
    4 Histology of the Mesentery
    5 Vasculature of the Mesentery
    6 The Mesentery and the Immune System
    7 Implications for Our Understanding of Abdominal Inflammation
    8 Implications for Treatment
    9 Implications for Medical Practice in General
    10 Conclusion
    References
    The Interstitium of the Mesentery: Contents and Inter-organ Connections
    1 Introduction
    2 Categories of Interstitial Spaces
    3 Interstitial Spaces of the Mesentery
    3.1 Continuity of Interstitial Spaces Within the Mesentery 3.2 Continuity Between the Mesenteric Interstitium and Extra-Mesenteric Tissues
    4 Resident Cells of the Interstitium
    4.1 Interstitial Lining Cells and Other Stromal Cells
    4.2 Macrophages
    4.3 Mast Cells
    4.4 Cell Derived Exosomes
    5 The Matrix of the Interstitium
    5.1 Extracellular Matrix
    5.2 Fluid Contents of the Interstitium
    6 The Mesenteric Interstitium in Disease
    7 Conclusion
    References
    Mesenteric Organ Lymphatics in Abdominal Inflammation
    1 Introduction
    2 Anatomy of the Mesenteric Lymphatic Vasculature
    3 Developmental Origins of Mesenteric LECs 4 Mesenteric Lymphatic Molecular Regulation
    5 Function of Mesenteric Lymphatics
    6 Mesenteric Lymphatics and Abdominal Inflammation
    6.1 Obesity
    6.2 Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    6.3 Intestinal Infection
    7 Translational Perspectives
    References
    The Immunological Importance of the Mesentery
    1 Phenotypic Findings and Functional Implications
    1.1 Adipocyte Hyperplasia: Immune Nutrition?
    1.2 Only Adipocyte Hyperplasia?
    2 Adipokines
    2.1 Leptin
    2.2 Adiponectin
    3 Adipocytes as Cells of the Innate Immune System
    4 Immune Cell Infiltration and Function 4.1 Macrophages
    4.2 T and B Cells
    4.3 Intestinal Barrier
    5 Working Model
    6 Conclusion
    References
    Bacterial Translocation to the Mesentery
    1 Concept of Bacterial Translocation and Methods of Detection
    1.1 Historical Context
    1.2 Detection Methods
    2 Translocation of the Gut Microbiome in Chronic Inflammation
    2.1 The Leaky Gut Hypothesis
    2.2 Bacterial Translocation Patterns in Distinct Chronic Inflammatory Diseases
    2.3 Microbial Influence on Mesenteric Adipose Immune and Metabolic Function
    2.4 Bacterial Translocation and Creeping Fat
    Digital Access Springer 2023
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC867 .M474 2023
    1
  • Digital
    Giovanni Luca Ceresoli, Emilio Bombardieri, Maurizio D'Incalci, editors.
    Summary: This book offers an updated review of malignant mesothelioma, including the latest advances in our understanding of its genetic control and molecular biology, as well as pre-clinical and clinical research. It also presents state-of-the-art diagnostic approaches and therapeutic options, and an open discussion on the future prospects for patient management. Malignant mesothelioma is an enormous global health problem related to asbestos exposure. Despite the best efforts of scientists and oncologists, the prognosis for those affected remains poor. Due to anatomical characteristics and non-specific symptoms, the diagnosis of mesothelioma at an early stage is often difficult, while surgery and radiotherapy are only of limited use, even if some multimodality approaches seem promising. In turn, medical treatments are sometimes successful in tumor control, but have little impact on overall survival. However, advances in our understanding of the diseaseâ#x80;#x99;s biology, together with the availability of new drugs and combinations, make mesothelioma an essential and highly topical field for pre-clinical and clinical studies. This book is subdivided into four parts: epidemiology and preclinical data, diagnosis, therapy, and extrathoracic mesothelioma. It highlights the progress made in a variety of areas â#x80;#x93; e.g. in vitro and in vivo experimental models, genetics, environment, biomarkers, targeting agents, immunotherapy, metabolic imaging and ongoing clinical trials â#x80;#x93; and describes the standard clinical management of mesothelioma patients, including those with extra-thoracic localizations. Given its scope, the book offers an invaluable tool for researchers, oncologists and clinicians alike.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology of mesothelioma
    Asbestos and pathophysiology of mesothelioma
    Screening issues in exposed subjects and early diagnosis
    Genetics and epigenetics of mesothelioma
    Microenvironment and immunology of mesothelioma
    Pre clinical models in mesothelioma
    Pathological diagnosis of mesothelioma
    Tissue and circulating biomarkers in mesothelioma
    Diagnostic imaging of mesothelioma
    Measuring malignant pleural mesothelioma
    Role of metabolic imaging in mesothelioma
    Staging of malignant pleural mesothelioma
    Surgery and multimodality treatment in malignant pleural mesothelioma
    Role of radiotherapy in malignant pleural mesothelioma
    Role of chemotherapy in malignant pleural mesothelioma
    Targeting angiogenesis in mesothelioma
    Targeted therapies in mesothelioma
    Mesothelin-targeting agents in mesothelioma
    Immunotherapy of mesothelioma: vaccines and cell therapy
    Immunotherapy of mesothelioma: immune checkpoints inhibitors
    Peritoneal mesothelioma: diagnosis and management
    Rare localizations of mesothelioma
    Unmet needs and future outlook of mesothelioma management.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Matthew McKay, PhD, Martha Davis, PhD, Patrick Fanning.
    Summary: "Many people assume that good communicators possess an intrinsic talent for speaking and listening to others, a gift that can't be learned or improved. The reality is that communication skills are developed with deliberate effort and practice, and learning to understand others and communicate your ideas more clearly will improve every facet of your life. Messages has already helped thousands of people build communication skills and cultivate better relationships with friends, family members, coworkers, and partners. With this fully revised and updated fourth edition, you'll discover new skills to help you communicate your ideas more effectively and become a better listener. Learn how to: Read body language Develop skills for couples communication Negotiate and resolve conflicts Communicate with family members. Handle group interactions. Talk to children. Master public speaking. Prepare for job interviews. This new edition features a much-needed chapter on digital communication. Effective communication can easily be compromised when you're not able to read your conversation partner's body language, facial expression, or vocal tone. This chapter teaches you how to express yourself well via phone, email, texting, and video--all the skills you need to thrive in the digital age" --Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Part I: Basic Skills ; Listening ; Self-Disclosure ; Expressing
    Part II: Advanced Skills ; Body Language ; Paralanguage and metamessages ; Hidden agendas ; Transactional Analysis ; Clarifing language
    Part III: Conflict Skills ; Assertiveness training ; Validation strategies ; Negotiation
    Part IV: Social Skills ; Forming accurate first impressions ; Making contact ; Digital communication
    Part V: Family Skills ; Couples skills ; Communicating with children ; Family communications
    Part VI: Public Skills ; Influencing others ; Public speaking ; Interviewing
    Recommended reading
    References
    Digital Access Ebsco 2018
  • Digital
    Mallikarjun B. Hanji.
    Contents:
    Protocol writing for meta-analysis study
    Formulation of research problem
    Location and selection of studies
    Quality assessment of selected studies
    Effect sizes of primary studies
    Preparation of meta-analysis master sheet
    Meta-analysis plots
    Meta-analysis of two studies
    Methods for pooling estimates : fixed effects mode
    Method for pooling estimates : random effects model
    Individual patient data meta-analysis
    Meta-analysis of observational studies
    Additional meta-analysis techniques
    Reporting meta-analysis results
    Implications of results of meta-analysis
    Meta-analysis software
    Running meta-analysis using STATA.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2017
  • Digital
    Boris A. Shenderov, Alexander V. Sinitsa, Mikhail M. Zakharchenko, Christine Lang.
    Summary: Aimed at students, researchers, nutritionists, and developers in food technology, this research text addresses the nascent field of metabiotics. Metabiotics are products based on components of cells, metabolites, and signaling molecules released by probiotic strains, engineered to optimize host-specific physiological functions in a way that traditional probiotics cannot. This book examines the history, processes, design, classifications, and functions of metabiotics. It includes an overview of the composition and function of the gut microbiota, and discusses development of target-specific metabiotics. Further coverage includes comparisons to traditional probiotics, as well as probiotic safety and side-effects. Metabiotics: Present State, Challenges and Perspectives provides a complete history and understanding of this new field, the next phase of the probiotic industry.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Authors
    Introduction
    The Composition and Functions of Human Gut Symbiotic Microbiota
    Contemporary Views on Biotechnological Potential of Symbiotic Microorganisms
    The Digestive Function of Human Gut Microbiota
    Metabolic Relationship Between the Host and Its Gut Microbiota
    Factors and Agents that Modify the Composition and Functions of Symbiotic Microbiota
    Diagnostic Methods for Microecological Imbalance and its Consequences Contemporary Microecological Strategies of Gut Microbiota Modulation for Human Health Preservation, Restoration and Improvement
    Molecular Language of Symbiotic Gut Microorganisms
    Drawbacks and Negative Consequences of Traditional Probiotics Based on Live Microorganisms
    Metabiotics: New Stage of the Probiotic Concept Development
    Methods and Techniques Used for Obtaining and Identifying of Microbial Low Molecular Weight Cellular Compounds, Metabolites and Signaling Molecules
    Classification of Metabiotics and their Brief Description Some New Targets and Approaches to the Construction of Intended-Use Metabiotics
    Modulators of QS-Regulation
    Modulators of Immunity
    Modulators of Energy Metabolism
    Modulators of Antioxidant Status
    Modulators of Intercellular Information Exchange
    Modulators of Neuropsychic and Social Behavior
    Modulators of Epigenome Regulation
    Metabiotics on the Base of Microbial Gas Molecules
    Hybrid Multicomponent Microbial Molecules as a Base for Metabiotics
    Other Contemporary Examples of the Techniques Needed to Create, Maintain and Correct Human Microbial Ecology
    Conclusion Some of the Best-known Metabiotics on the Market of Microecological Products
    Cellular Metabiotics and Metabolite Metabiotics
    Cellular Metabiotics
    Helicobacter and Stomach Health
    Probiotics in Helicobacter Therapy
    The Helinorm/Pylopass Strategy
    The Pylopass Strain
    Characteristics of Pylopass
    Cell Walls Exhibit the Co-Aggregation Sites
    The Power of Metabiotic Formulation
    Clinical Evaluation
    Outlook
    Metabolite Metabiotics
    Clinical Assessment
    Prospects in the Field of Intended-Use Metabiotics Creation
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Mariagrazia Stracquadanio, Lilliana Ciotta.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Etiopathogenesis
    Clinical Features
    Psychological implications of PCOS
    Diagnosis and Assessment
    PCOS Therapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    edited by Louis V. Avioli, Stephen M. Krane.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC930.M46
    2
  • Digital
    Pauline M. Camacho, editor.
    Summary: This concise, case-based text discusses the current state of the art for the diagnosis and management of metabolic bones diseases. Each chapter opens with a unique case presentation and utilizes a consistent format that includes relevant anatomy, physiology, and pathophysiology as well as examination, treatment approaches and clinical outcomes. Topics covered include osteoporosis, rickets and osteomalacia, hypoparathyroidism and pseudohypoparathyroidism, osteogenesis imperfecta, Paget's disease of bone, calcium and phosphorous disorders, hypophosphatasia, sclerotic bone disorders, fibrous and osteochondroplasia, and other malignancies of bone. Written and edited by experts in the field, Metabolic Bone Diseases is a valuable resource for practicing endocrinologists, rheumatologists and orthopedic surgeons, residents and fellows.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Stephan Herzig, editor.
    Summary: The HEP issue on Metabolic Control provides a state-of the art overview over both classical concepts and emerging areas in metabolism and associated disorders. In this context, metabolic control is highlighted at various levels of complexity ranging from transcriptional mechanisms in metabolic pathway control over metabolic communication routes in physiology and pathophysiology to current treatment modalities and options in metabolic disorders, including type 2 diabetes and obesity. Dedicated chapters by leading experts in their fields provide a concise overview over important areas in metabolic research at a molecular level, including the role of the central nervous system in metabolism, inflammation and metabolism, pancreatic hormone signaling, brown adipose tissue, and therapeutic concepts.

    Contents:
    1 Central nervous system control of metabolism
    2 Glucocorticoids and metabolic control
    3 Anti-lipidemic drugs
    4 Genomics and metabolism
    5 cAMP signaling
    6 cGMP and brown adipose tissue
    7 Inflammatory signaling and metabolism
    8 Insulin signaling
    9 Nuclear receptor co-factors in metabolism
    10 Novel treatment options in diabetes
    11 Adipose tissue stem cells
    12 Adipokines
    13 Immune cells and metabolism
    14 Brown adipose tissue in humans
    15 Diabetes and Cancer
    16 Cancer Cell Metabolism
    17 Incretins.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital/Print
    edited by Paul W. Ackermann, David A. Hart.
    Contents:
    Preface
    Part I Basic Biology and Anatomy
    Chapter 1. Tendon structure and composition
    Thorpe, Screen
    Chapter 2. Blood supply
    Kubu
    Chapter 3. Tendon Innervation
    Karolinska/ Calgary
    Chapter 4. Tendon stem cells
    J. Wang
    Chapter 5. Informing Stem Cell-Based Tendon Tissue Engineering Approaches with Embryonic Tendon Development
    C. Kuo
    Chapter 6. Tendon cell signaling
    A. Banes
    Chapter 7. Methods of assessing human tendon metabolism.
    Kjaer, Magnusson
    Part II Tendon Disorders Associated with Altered Metabolism and Metabolic Disorders
    Chapter 8. Towards an understanding of the genetics of tendinopathy
    September A
    Chapter 9. Tendons involvement in Congenital Metabolic metabolic disorders
    Andia I
    Chapter 10. Hyperuricemia
    Isabel Andia, Abate
    Chapter 11. Influence of Thyroid hormones on tendon homeostasis
    Francesco Oliva
    Chapter 12. Sex hormones and tendon
    Mette Hansen, M. Kjaer
    Chapter 13. Tendon Homeostasis in Hypercholesterolemia
    Louis Soslowsky
    Chapter 14. How Obesity affects tendons
    Michele Abate
    Chapter 15
    Does diabetes affect Tendon healing
    A. Ahmed
    Chapter 16. Metalloproteinase changes in diabetes
    Bento
    Chapter 17. How high glucose levels affect tendon homeostasis
    Snedeker
    Chapter 18. Rehabilitation of tendon problems in patients with diabetes mellitus
    A. Scott
    Chapter 19. Inflammation in tendon disorders
    C. Speed
    Chapter 20. Deep venous thrombosis and tendon healing
    E. Arverud
    Chapter 21. Drug induced tendon disorders
    K. Knobloch
    Chapter 22. Glucocorticoid effects on tendon metabolism
    Dean and Carr
    Chapter 23. Influence of Ageing on tendon homeostasis
    Helen Birch, Clegg PD
    Part III Novel therapies that may affect tendon metabolism
    Chapter 24. Does platelet-rich plasma increase tendon metabolism?
    de Vos
    Chapter 25
    Can shockwave therapy improve tendon metabolism?
    Zwerver. Chapter 26
    Do dietary factors influence tendon metabolism? A. Scott
    Part IV Summary.
    Chapter 27. General overview and summary of concepts
    P. Ackermann, Dave Hart.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Pablo Carbonell.
    Summary: This textbook presents solid tools for in silico engineering biology, offering students a step-by-step guide to mastering the smart design of metabolic pathways. The first part explains the Design-Build-Test-Learn-cycle engineering approach to biology, discussing the basic tools to model biological and chemistry-based systems. Using these basic tools, the second part focuses on various computational protocols for metabolic pathway design, from enzyme selection to pathway discovery and enumeration. In the context of industrial biotechnology, the final part helps readers understand the challenges of scaling up and optimisation. By working with the free programming language Scientific Python, this book provides easily accessible tools for studying and learning the principles of modern in silico metabolic pathway design. Intended for advanced undergraduates and master's students in biotechnology, biomedical engineering, bioinformatics and systems biology students, the introductory sections make it also useful for beginners wanting to learn the basics of scientific coding and find real-world, hands-on examples.

    Contents:
    Part I. Metabolic Pathway Modeling
    Getting on the Path to Engineering Biology
    Genome-Scale Modeling
    Pathway Modeling
    Modeling Chemical Diversity
    Part II. Metabolic Pathway Discovery
    Enzyme Discovery and Selection
    Pathway Discovery
    Pathway Selection
    Part III. Metabolic Pathway Design
    Pathway Design
    Pathway Redesign.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Enrico Ferrazzi, Barry Sears, editors ; foreword by Roberto Romero.
    Contents:
    Part I. Truncal obesity, inflammation, metabolic syndrome: an insight
    Part II. Inflammation and physiology of pregnancy
    Part III. The potential value of nutrition and nutriceutical supplementation to prevent obstetrical complications
    Part IV. Future dietary strategies to reduce inflammation and metabolic syndrome by an healthy eating plate.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Marina Kurian, Bruce M. Wolfe, Sayeed Ikramuddin, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a concise, state-of-the art review of the surgical treatment of metabolic syndrome and diabetes mellitus. The volume reviews what current practices in surgery and metabolic syndrome and diabetes including the biohormonal effects of the different surgeries. Isolating the effects of the different procedures is critical to the decision tree for type of procedure selected for an individual patient. Specifically for diabetes, this textbook will provide a guide for practitioners to a tailored approach to the treatment. Areas of ongoing research that highlight the minimally invasive approach as well as incorporating what we know of the biochemical results of surgery are presented. Results of established weight loss procedures and ongoing trials are juxtaposed against some of the more novel techniques to ascertain a best practice. Metabolic Syndrome and Diabetes serves as a very useful resource for physicians and researchers dealing with, and interested in, this rising epidemic of metabolic syndrome and diabetes. It provides a concise yet comprehensive summary of the current status of the field that will help guide patient management and stimulate investigative efforts.

    Contents:
    Definition, history and management of the metabolic syndrome and Management Gaps
    Extending current definitions of the Metabolic Syndrome
    Understanding Diabetes Mellitus: Pathophysiology
    Medical Approaches to Weight-Centric Management of Obese Patients with Type 2 Diabetes
    Adipocyte Dysfunction Obesity and Insulin resistance (and inflammation in obesity)
    Type 2 Diabetes Mellitus, Bariatric Surgery, and the Microbiome
    History of Metabolic Surgery
    Obesity and Cancer
    Effect of bariatric surgery on Incretin function
    Effect of Bariatric Surgery on Insulin Secretion
    Gastric banding
    Sleeve Gastrectomy
    Gastric Bypass
    Biliopancreatic Diversion with Duodenal Switch
    Ileal Interposition with Sleeve Gastrectomy for the Treatment of Type 2 Diabetes
    Balancing complications and Metabolic benefit
    Neural Modulation in the Treatment of Obesity
    Endolumenal Sleeve
    Endoscopic primary obesity and balloon therapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    volume editors, Wieland Kiess, Martin Wabitsch, Claudio Maffeis, Arya M. Sharma.
    Contents:
    Definitions and clinical aspects. Definitions
    Hypothalamic obesity in children
    Causes. Genetics of obesity in childhood and adolescence
    Nutrition
    Sedentary lifestyle
    Socio-economic aspects
    Consequences. Carbohydrate metabolism
    Orthopaedic aspects of obesity in children and adults
    Urogenital complications: renal disease, urolithiasis and lower urinary tract symptoms
    Influences of childhood obesity on pubertal development
    Social aspects and prevention. Urban living conditions: the relation between neighborhood characteristics and obesity in children and adolescents
    Metabolic syndrome and the 'Western diet': science and politics
    An economic perspective on childhood obesity
    Prevention of childhood and adolescent obesity and its barriers
    E-health in overweight and obesity prevention
    Obesity management. Obesity treatment programmes
    Adolescent bariatric surgery: current status in an evolving field
    Beyond weight loss: experiences and insights related to working effectively with families and operating within the health care system to manage pediatric obesity.
    Digital Access Karger 2015
  • Digital
    volume editors, Vera Popovic, Marta Korbonits.
    Contents:
    Metabolic syndrome in polycystic ovary syndrome / Pasquali, R.
    Metabolic syndrome in thyroid disease / Iwen, K.A.; Oelkrug, R.; Kalscheuer, H.; Brabant, G.
    Metabolic syndrome in hypopituitarism / Milji, D.; Popovi, V.
    The metabolic syndrome in central hypogonadotrophic hypogonadism / Dwyer, A.A.; Quinton, R.
    Metabolic syndrome in male hypogonadism / Rastrelli, G.; Filippi, S.; Sforza, A.; Maggi, M.; Corona, G.
    Metabolic syndrome in hyperprolactinemia / Andersen, M.; Glintborg, D.
    Metabolic complications of acromegaly / Mercado, M.; Ramirez-Renteria, C.
    Metabolic syndrome in Cushing's syndrome patients / Ferrau, F.; Korbonits, M.
    Metabolic syndrome in parathyroid diseases / Corbetta, S.; Mantovani, G.; Spada, A.
    Metabolic complications in adrenal insufficiency / Ueland, G.A.; Husebye, E.S.
    Digital Access Karger 2018
  • Digital
    Thorsten Cramer, Clemens A. Schmitt, editors.
    Contents:
    Metabolic requirements of cellular proliferation
    The role of myc in cancer metabolism
    Metabolic control of inflammation
    Metabolism-targeting therapies
    The role of pH regulation and hypoxia in cancer progression
    Metabolic profiling in breast cancer
    Imaging of tumor metabolism.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital/Print
    Alessandra Sussulini, editor.
    Contents:
    Part 1. Fundamentals and analytical methodologies in metabolomics. Metabolomics: definitions and significance in systems biology
    Collection and preparation of clinical samples for metabolomics
    Nuclear magnetic resonance strategies for metabolic analysis
    Metabolomic strategies involving mass spectrometry combined with liquid and gas chromatography
    Strategies involving mass spectrometry combined with capillary electrophoresis in metabolomics
    part 2. Statistical analysis and data interpretation. Preprocessing and pretreatment of metabolomics data for statistical analysis
    Chemometrics methods and strategies in metabolomics
    Computational strategies for biological interpretation of metabolomics data
    part 3.Applications and future trends of metabolomics in clinical cases. Applications of metabolomics in cancer studies
    Chronic diseases and lifestyle biomarkers identification by metabolomics
    Lipidomics, biomarkers, and schizophrenia: a current perspective
    Spatial metabolite profiling by matrix-assisted laser desorption ionization mass spectrometry imaging
    Single-cell metabolomics
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Jacob T. Bjerrum.
    Contents:
    Metabonomics : analytical techniques and associated chemometrics / Jacob T. Bjerrum
    Sample collection and preparation of biofluids and extracts for NMR spectroscopy / Gwénaëlle Le Gall
    NMR sprectroscopy of biofluids and extracts / Gwénaëlle Le Gall
    High-resolution magic-angle-spinning NMR spectroscopy of intact tissue / Guro F. Giskeødegård, Maria D. Cao, and Tone F. Bathen
    Sample collection and preparation of biofluids and extracts for liquid chromatography-mass spectrometry / Peiyuan Yin [and three others]
    Liquid chromatography-mass spectrometry of biofluids and extracts / Xinjie Zhao [and three others]
    Sample collection and preparation of biofluids and extracts for gas chromatography-mass spectrometry / Abdul-Hamid M. Emwas, Zeyad A. Al-Talla, and Najeh M. Kharbatia
    Gas chromatography-mass spectrometry of biofluids and extracts / Abdul-Hamid M. Emwas [and three others]
    Capillary electrophoresis-mass spectrometry / Masataka Wakayama, Akiyoshi Hirayama, and Tomoyosji Soga
    Preprocessing of raw metabonomic data / Riyas Vettukattil
    Extracting meaningful information from metabonomic data using multivariate statistics / Max Bylesjö
    Combining metabonomics and other -omics data / Mattias Rantalainen
    The strengths and weaknesses of NMR-spectroscopy and mass spectrometry with particular focus on metabolomics research / Abdul-Hamid M. Emwas
    Metabonomics and drug development / Pranov Ramana [and three others]
    Metabonomics and toxicology / Liang Zhao and Thomas Hartung
    Metabonomics and diagnostics / Lucy C. Hicks, Simon J.L. Ralphs, and Horace R.T. Williams
    Metabonomics and systems biology / Vicky De Preter.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Senthilkumar Rajagopal, Murugavel Ponnusamy.
    Summary: This book will provide current understandings about two ubiquitously expressed metabotropic GPCRs, G-coupled purinoreceptor type 2 (P2Y) and Takeda G-protein-coupled bile acid receptor 5 (TGR5). G protein coupled receptors (GPCRs) are the largest family of proteins implicated in majority of cellular responses. The two receptor sub-families play a central role in many physiological functions as well as in many pathological conditions. This book offers up-to-date information on the physiological functions, signaling pathways and regulatory mechanisms of P2Y and TGR5 receptors. In addition, this book provides a comprehensive overview about the abnormalities of P2Y/TGR5 receptors and their contribution in the development and progression of pathological conditions. It also covers the currently available natural, chemical and pharmacological agents targeting these two receptor families and their therapeutic implications in P2Y and TGR5 associated disorders. This book is a valuable source for beginners and researchers to follow the rapidly progressing field of these two GPCR subfamily members.

    Contents:
    Module 1. Overview of G-Protein coupled receptor
    Module 2. TGR5 receptor
    Module 3. P2Y receptor
    Module 4. Therapeutically Targeting TGR5 & P2Y receptors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Saravanan Rajendran, Hassan Karimi-Maleh, Jiaqian Qin, Eric Lichtfouse, editors.
    Summary: This book summarizes recent findings on the use of new nanostructured materials for biofuels, batteries, fuel cells, solar cells, supercapacitors and health biosensors. Chapters describe principles and how to choose a nanomaterial for specific applications in energy, environment and medicine.

    Contents:
    Cellulose photocatalysis for renewable energy production
    Lithium iron phosphate (LiFePO4) as high performance cathode material for lithium ion batteries
    Recent Advances in Hybrid Supercapacitors
    Metal, Metal Oxides And Metal Sulfides Roles In Fuel Cell
    Role of TiO2 in highly efficient solar cells
    Metal Oxides And Sulphides-Based Biosensors For Monitoring And Health Control
    Applications of Metals, Metal Oxides, and Metal Sulfides in Electrochemical Sensing and Biosensing
    Developing Trends in DNA Biosensor and Their Applications
    Electrochemical Sensors Based on Metal Oxide and Sulfide Nanostructures
    Biosensor Devices Based on Metal Oxide Materials.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Jennifer K. Chen, Jacob P. Thyssen, editors.
    Summary: This volume has been compiled in response to the ongoing revolution in our understanding of metal contact allergy, and the ensuing challenge this has created for clinicians and others to synthesize large amounts of sometimes contradictory data. It opens by providing a comprehensive overview of the use and regulation of metals in our society, metal properties, and available testing methodologies. Common and uncommon metal allergens and sources of exposure are then reviewed in depth, and detailed sections are devoted to hypersensitivity to metal implants (which may be associated with device failure and/or dermatitis), metal allergy in select patient populations, and less frequently encountered manifestations of metal allergy. The prevalence of metal allergy in the general population is high: up to 17% of people are allergic to nickel, and 1-3% to cobalt and chromium. Environmental sources of metal exposure include jewelry, clothing, electronic devices, coins, leather, diet, and occupational exposure. As metals are ubiquitous, this book will be an indispensable reference text for a wide range of clinicians and investigators, meeting the needs of all who are interested in metal allergy and its diagnosis and management.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Albert J. Shih, Bruce L. Tai, Rui Li.
    Summary: This book introduces state-of-the-art experimental and numerical methods and examples for evaluating the drilling performance of engineering and biological materials, particularly in thermal aspects. The authors use a common pathway to present the technological and analytical methods for both industry (metal) drilling and orthopaedic surgery (bone) drilling research, making this book a resource for both industrial and clinical readers who wish to understand the evolution of technologies, techniques, and challenges in drilling. The authors also focus on advanced engineering materials, such as titanium alloys and high-strength cast irons, which have broad applications in the automotive, aerospace, medical device, and sports industries. This book is a must-read for a broad audience, including engineering students in upper-level undergraduate and graduate courses that involve machining processes; for surgery residents, fellows, and practicing surgeons; and for engineers in the medical device industry who develop new bone cutting tools. Bridges the knowledge on drilling from the manufacturing industry to healthcare; Covers the experimental and modeling aspects of drilling thermal analysis; Includes experimental studies that contain parameters and data that emulate practical production and clinical drilling.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction
    Chapter 2. Experimental Analysis of Titanium Drilling
    Chapter 3. Modeling of Drill Temperature and Thermal Stress in Titanium Drilling
    Chapter 4. Analysis of Cast Iron Drilling in Dry and MQL conditions
    Chapter 5. Modeling of Workpiece Temperature and Thermal Expansion in MQL Drilling
    Chapter 6. Experimental Study of Bone Temperature in Drilling
    Chapter 7. Model-Based Approach for Predicting Thermal Damage in Bone Drilling
    Chapter 8. Advancements of Surgical Bone Drills
    a Case study of Notched K-wires.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Robert Crichton and Roberta Ward.
    Contents:
    Brain function, physiology, and the blood-brain barrier
    Role of metal ions in brain function, metal transport, storage, and homeostasis
    Immune system and neuroinflammation
    Oxidative stress in neurodegenerative diseases
    Aging and mild cognitive impairment, MCI
    Parkinson's disease
    Alzheimer's disease
    Huntington's disease and polyglutamine expansion neurodegenerative diseases
    Friedreich's ataxia and diseases associated with expansion of non-coding triplets
    Creutzfeldt-Jakob and other prion diseases
    Amyotropic lateral sclerosis
    Alcoholic brain damage
    Other neurological diseases
    Therapeutic strategies to combat the onset and progression of neurological diseases.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    Yufeng Zheng, Xiaoxue Xu, Zhigang Xu, Junqiang Wang, and Hong Cai.
    Summary: With its comprehensive coverage of recent progress in metallic biomaterials, this reference focuses on emerging materials and new biofunctions for promising applications. The text is systematically structured, with the information organized according to different material systems, and concentrates on various advanced materials, such as anti-bacterial functionalized stainless steel, biodegradable metals with bioactivity, and novel structured metallic biomaterials. Authors from well-known academic institutes and with many years of clinical experience discuss all important aspects, including design strategies, fabrication and modification techniques, and biocompatibility.

    Contents:
    Introduction of the Biofunctions into Traditional Metallic Biomaterials
    Development of Mg-Based Degradable Metallic Biomaterials
    Development of Fe-Based Degradable Metallic Biomaterials
    Development of Zn-Based Degradable Metallic Biomaterials
    Development of Bulk Metallic Glasses for Biomedical Application
    Development of Bulk Nanostructured Metallic Biomaterials
    Titanium Implants Based on Additive Manufacture
    Future Research on Revolutionizing Metallic Biomaterials.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Marco Aurélio Zezzi Arruda, editor.
    Summary: This book covers the new Omics area, Metallomics. As Metallomics is intrinsically a transdisciplinary area, this book is authored by experts in the field on such diverse topics as Environmental, Nuclear, and Human Metallomics. Within these topics metals play important role, as being part of biomolecules, controlling different biochemical process, being signaling agents, being catalyst of biochemical reactions, among others. This volume demonstrates the importance of more investigation about metals and their interactions with biomolecules. As the knowledge in this field is growing and growing daily, then new challenges concerning studies involving Metallomics is appearing, such as comparative metallomics, speciation metallomics, real-time metallomics, new predictions of metals in biomolecules, metalloprotein databank expansion, interactions between metalloprotein-metalloprotein, among others.

    Contents:
    1. Metallomics: The Science of Biometals and Biometalloids
    2. Metallomics Applied to the Study of Neurodegenerative and Mental Diseases
    3. Environmental Metallomics
    4. Metallomics Study in Plants Exposed to Arsenic Mercury, Selenium and Sulphur
    5. Metallomics in Fish
    6. The Use of Stable Isotopic Tracers in Metallomics Studies
    7. Bioimaging Metallomics
    8. Chemical Speciation and Metallomics
    9. Advanced Nuclear and Related Techniques for Metallomics and Nanometallomics
    10. New Frontiers of Metallomics: Elemental and Species-Specific Analysis and Imaging of Single Cells.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Juan C. Fontecilla- Camps, Yvain Nicolet.
    Contents:
    Advances in Research on Metalloproteins
    Purification of O2-Sensitive Metalloproteins
    Expression and Purification of NifB Protein from Aerobic and Anaerobic Sources
    Techniques for the Production, Isolation and Analysis of Iron-Sulfur Proteins
    Cell-Free Synthesis of the H-cluster: a Model for the In Vitro Assembly of Metalloprotein Metal Centers
    Electrochemistry of Metalloproteins Protein Film Electrochemistry for the Study of E. coli [NiFe]-Hydrogenase-1
    FTIR Spectroscopy of Metalloproteins
    Characterizing Millisecond Intermediates in Hemoproteins Using Rapid-Freeze-Quench Resonance Raman Spectroscopy
    A Practical Guide for Nuclear Resonance Vibrational Spectroscopy (NRVS) of Biochemical Samples and Model Compounds
    Study of Metalloproteins Using Continuous Wave Electron Paramagnetic Resonance (EPR)
    Mssbauer Spectroscopy
    X-Ray Absorption Spectroscopy of Metalloproteins
    X-Ray Crystallographic Studies of Metalloproteins
    Quantum Mechanical Methods for the Investigation of Metalloproteins and Related Bioinorganic Compounds
    Density Functional Theory Broken Symmetry (DFT-BS) Methodology Applied to Electronic and Magnetic Properties of Bioinorganic Prosthetic Groups.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Piotr Dziegiel, Bartosz Pula, Christopher Kobierzycki, Mariusz Stasiolek, Marzenna Podhorska-Okolow.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Metallothioneins : structure and functions
    Metallothionein-3
    The role of metallothioneins in carcinogenesis
    Metallothioneins and immune function.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    James C. Dabrowiak.
    Contents:
    Inorganic chemistry basics
    Metallo-drugs and their action
    Platinum drugs for treating cancer
    Anticancer agents beyond cisplatin
    Responsive metal complexes
    Metal complexes for treating arthritis and diabetes
    Metal complexes for killing parasites, bacteria, and viruses
    Metal ion imbalance in the body
    Metal complexes for detecting disease
    Nanomedicine.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Andrey Yudin.
    Summary: When analyzing the results of diagnostic imaging studies, the radiologist traditionally makes reference to particular features representative of normality or pathology. Most of these features are associated with images of the world around us. This pictorial issue contains nearly 400 illustrations and descriptions of more than 100 classic radiological signs of chest and abdominal diseases that are not named after authors but based on metaphors derived from contemplation of our environment. By correlating the results of computed tomography with these vivid descriptive images, readers will be able to memorize typical and often pathognomonic patterns of disease more quickly and more easily. This book will be of value for both radiology residents and more experienced radiologists.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Miriam Dwek, Susan A. Brooks, Udo Schumacher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Springer
    Springer
  • Digital
    R. Lor Randall, editor.
    Contents:
    Part One: The Problem
    Bone Metastases: Epidemiology and Societal Effect
    Part Two: Biology of Metastases and Tissue of Origin Considerations
    Pathobiology of Osteolytic and Osteoblastic Bone Metastases
    Biology of Bone Cancer Pain
    Breast Cancer Bone Metastases
    Prostate Cancer Bone Metastasis
    Lung
    Kidney Metastatic Bone Disease
    Thyroid
    Myeloma
    Part Three: Work-Up for Patients with Suspected Metastatic Bone Disease
    Evaluation of the Patient with Carcinoma of Unknown Origin Metastatic to Bone
    Biopsy Considerations
    Part Four: Medical Therapy
    Bisphosphonates, Denosumab and Anabolic Agents in the Treatment of Metastatic Bone Disease
    Biotargeting in Metastatic Bone Disease
    Part Five: Supportive Oncology
    Psychosocial Considerations for Patients with Metastatic Bone Disease
    Pain Management in Metastatic Bone Disease
    When is Hospice Appropriate? The Role for Hospice in Palliating Patients with Bone Metastases
    Part Six: Radiation Oncology
    Current and Emerging Modalities
    Part Seven: Interventional Oncology
    Ablation and Cementation Technologies
    Part Eight: Principles of Orthopaedic Surgical Oncology
    Issues Facing the Established Metastatic Bone Disease Patient, Timing/Indications for Surgery
    Questions to Ask Your Medical Oncology Colleagues
    Consideration of the Temporal Relationship between Surgery and Radiation Therapy
    Role of Surgery in Oligometastatic Disease
    Part Nine: Specific Anatomic Considerations for Surgery
    Metastatic Bone Disease: Pelvis
    Metastatic Bone Disease: Femur
    Metastatic Bone Disease: Femur: Tibia
    Metastatic Bone Disease: Foot
    Metastatic Bone Disease: Femur: Humerus, Scapula
    Metastatic Bone Disease: Forearm, Hand
    Metastatic Bone Disease: Spine
    Part Ten: Emerging Surgical Technologies
    Intraoperative Imaging and Navigation
    Part Eleven: Putting It All Together
    Integrative Approach with the Patient in Mind: A Glance Forward.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by David Schiff and Martin J. van den Bent.
    Summary: "Metastatic Disease of the Nervous System, Volume 149, begins with an overview of the impact and range of direct neoplastic involvement of the central and peripheral nervous system, comprehensively reviewing all aspects of brain metastases, from clinical, radiological and neuropathological manifestations, to the roles of surgery, radiation, systemic and palliative therapy in their management, and the complications of these interventions. The clinical manifestations, diagnosis and treatment of leptomeningeal, dural, spinal epidural and plexus metastases are also covered in detail."--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Section I. Overview
    Overview of metastatic disease of the central nervous system
    Section II. Brain metastases
    Brain metastases: epidemiology
    Pathogenesis and biology
    Role of the blood-brain barrier in metastatic disease of the central nervous system
    Metastatic diseases of the central nervous system - neuropathological aspects
    Brain metastasis: clinical manifestations, symptom management and palliative care
    Brain metastases: neuroimaging
    The role of surgery for brain metastases from solid tumors
    Brain metastases: fractionated whole brain radiotherapy
    Brain metastases: radiosurgery
    Systemic therapy for brain metastases
    Neurocognitive aspects of brain metastasis
    Section III. Other nervous system metastases
    Leptomeningeal metastasis
    Intracranial dural, calvarial and skull base metastases
    Epidural and intramedullary spinal metastasis: clinical features and role of fractionated radiotherapy
    Management - spinal metastases
    Plexus and peripheral nerve metastasis
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Rex A.W. Marco, editor.
    Summary: This comprehensive text focuses exclusively on the management of metastatic spinal disease, evaluating the most recent literature and providing patient-centered treatment algorithms. Beginning with initial imaging, classification and clinical decision-making, the spine is approached anatomically from the upper cervical to the sacrum, describing the unique considerations and approaches appropriate to each region, such as laminectomy and stabilization, en bloc spondylectomy and resection and reconstruction. Less invasive and minimally invasive approaches are discussed throughout the text. Radiation therapy modalities and other adjuvant treatments are also discussed, as well as reconstructive flap coverage and the management of complications. The spinal column is the most common site of metastatic cancer, and a multidisciplinary approach is required to provide patients with reasonable management options to prevent and treat the disabling symptoms caused by this debilitating condition. This compendium of experience from thought leaders in the treatment of metastatic spine disease will provide spine surgeons, oncologists, radiation oncologists, physiatrists and palliative care specialists with up-to-date information to guide their patients through the multidisciplinary management of metastatic spinal disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Marina G. Kalyuzhnaya, Xin-Hui Xing, editors.
    Summary: This book provides in-depth insights into the most recent developments in different areas of microbial methane and methanol utilization, including novel fundamental discoveries in genomics and physiology, innovative strategies for metabolic engineering and new synthetic approaches for generation of feedstocks, chemicals and fuels from methane, and finally economics and the implementation of industrial biocatalysis using methane consuming bacteria. Methane, as natural gas or biogas, penetrates every area of human activity, from households to large industries and is often promoted as the cleanest fuel. However, one should not forget that this bundle of energy, carbon, and hydrogen comes with an exceptionally large environmental footprint. To meet goals of long-term sustainability and human well-being, all areas of energy, chemicals, agriculture, waste-management industries must go beyond short-term economic considerations and target both large and small methane emissions. The search for new environment-friendly approaches for methane capture and valorization is an ongoing journey. While it is not yet apparent which innovation might represent the best solution, it is evident that methane biocatalysis is one of the most promising paths. Microbes are gatekeepers of fugitive methane in Nature. Methane-consuming microbes are typically small in number but exceptionally big in their impact on the natural carbon cycle. They control and often completely eliminate methane emission from a variety of biological and geothermal sources. The tremendous potential of these microbial systems, is only now being implemented in human-made systems. The book addresses professors, researchers and graduate students from both academia and industry working in microbial biotechnology, molecular biology and chemical engineering.

    Contents:
    Methanotrophy: an evolving field
    Diversity of methanotrophic bacteria
    Methanotrophic Verrucomicrobia: diversity and metabolic potential
    C1 and N cycles
    Metals in methanotrophy
    Pyrophosphate metabolism in C1-utilization
    Systems biology and metabolic modeling of C1-metabolism
    Metabolic Engineering in methanotrophic bacteria
    Synthetic methylotrophy
    Engineering soluble methane monooxygenase for biocatalysis
    Methanol biosynthesis using methanotrophs
    Reversing methanogenesis
    From methanol to value added chemicals via metabolic engineering of methylotrophic cell factories
    Potential for landfill methane utilization
    Mixed methanotrophic consortium for promising applications in environmental bioengineering and biocatalysis
    TEA/LCA of methane utilization
    Cracking "economies of scale": biomanufacturing on methane-rich feedstock
    Methanotrophy goes commercial: challenges and opportunities
    Methanotrophy goes commercial: challenges and opportunities-2.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Eun Yeol Lee, editor.
    Summary: This book offers a comprehensive overview of the microbiological fundamentals and biotechnological applications of methanotrophs: aerobic proteobacteria that can utilize methane as their sole carbon and energy source. It highlights methanotrophs pivotal role in the global carbon cycle, in which they remove methane generated geothermally and by methanogens. Readers will learn how methanotrophs have been employed as biocatalysts for mitigating methane gas and remediating halogenated hydrocarbons in soil and underground water. Recently, methane has also attracted considerable attention as a potential next-generation carbon feedstock for industrial biotechnology, because of its abundance and low price. Methanotrophs can be used as biocatalysts for the production of fuels, chemicals and biomaterials including methanobactin from methane under environmentally benign production conditions. Sharing these and other cutting-edge insights, the book offers a fascinating read for all scientists and students of microbiology and biotechnology.

    Contents:
    Methanotroph Ecology, Environmental Distribution and Functioning
    Enrichment and Isolation of Aerobic and Anaerobic Methanotrophs
    The Biochemistry of Methane Monooxygenases
    Multi-omics Understanding of Methanotrophs
    Diversity, Physiology, and Biotechnological Potential of Halo(alkali)philic Methane-Consuming Bacteria
    Metabolic Engineering of Methanotrophs for the Production of Chemicals and Fuels
    Methanobactin: A Novel Copper-Binding Compound Produced by Methanotrophs
    Environmental Applications of Methanotrophs.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Yinduo Ji.
    Contents:
    Clinical, epidemiologic, and laboratory aspects of methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus infections / Elizabeth L. Palavecino
    Community-associated methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus case studies / Madeleine G. Sowash and Anne-Catrin Uhlemann
    Rapid methods for detection of MRSA in clinical specimens / Elizabeth L. Palavecino
    Immunofluorescence microscopy for the detection of surface antigens in methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA) / Yekaterina Timofeyeva, Ingrid L. Scully, and Annaliesa S. Anderson
    Internal transcribed spacer (ITS)-PCR identification of MRSA / Shin-ichi Fujita
    Pulsed-field gel electrophoresis typing of Staphylococcus aureus isolates / Yiping He, Yanping Xie, and Sue Reed
    Multilocus sequence typing (MLST) of Staphylococcus aureus / Nicholas A. Saunders and Anne Holmes
    Staphylococcal cassette chromosome mec (SCCmec) analysis of MRSA / Teruyo Ito ... [and 6 others]
    Genetic interruption of target genes for investigation of virulence factors / Adhar C. Manna
    Molecular analysis of staphylococcal superantigens / Wilmara Salgado-Pabón, Laura C. Case-Cook, and Patrick M. Schlievert
    Investigation of Staphylococcus aureus adhesion and invasion of host cells / Junshu Yang and Yinduo Ji
    Investigation of biofilm formation in clinical isolates of Staphylococcus aureus / James E. Cassat, Mark S. Smeltzer, and Chia Y. Lee
    Transcriptomic analysis of Staphylococcus aureus using microarray and advanced next-generation RNA-seq technologies / Ting Lei, Aaron Becker, and Yinduo Ji
    Proteomic aproach to investigate pathogenicity and metabolism of methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus / Patrice Franc̦ois ... [and 3 others]
    Metabolomic investigation of methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus / Ting Lei ... [and 3 others]
    Treatment of infections due to resistant Staphylococcus aureus / Gregory M. Anstead, Jose Cadena, and Heta Javeri
    Anti-infective drug development for MRSA / Anu Daniel
    Animal models in drug development for MRSA / Andrea Marra.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    G183 .A52 1963
    1
  • Digital
    Raphael L.C. Araújo, Rachel P. Riechelmann, editors.
    Summary: This book introduces and discusses the most important aspects of clinical research methods and biostatistics for oncologists, pursuing a tailor-made and practical approach. Evidence-based medicine (EBM) has been in vogue in the last few decades, particularly in rapidly advancing fields such as oncology. This approach has been used to support decision-making processes worldwide, sparking new clinical research and guidelines on clinical and surgical oncology. Clinical oncology research has many peculiarities, including specific study endpoints, a special focus on survival analyses, and a unique perspective on EBM. However, during medical studies and in general practice, these topics are barely taught. Moreover, even when EBM and clinical cancer research are discussed, they are presented in a theoretical fashion, mostly focused on formulas and numbers, rather than on clinical application for a proper literature appraisal. Addressing that gap, this book discusses more practical aspects of clinical research and biostatistics in oncology, instead of relying only on mathematical formulas and theoretical considerations. Methods and Biostatistics in Oncology will help readers develop the skills they need to understand the use of research on everyday oncology clinical practice for study design and interpretation, as well to demystify the use of EBM in oncology.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Digital Access Wiley v. 11-, 2000-
    VOLUMES LISTED OUT OF ORDER. LOOK FOR PUBLICATION DATE.
  • Digital/Print
    Michael F. Drummond, Mark J. Sulpher, Karl Claxton, Greg L. Stoddart, George W. Torrance.
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
  • Digital
    edited by Indra Neil Sarkar.
    Summary: Seeking to cross the bridge among overview, theory, and practice, this book incorporates both methodological approaches and their potential application in the domains associated with biomedical informatics.The multi-contributor book is useful for (1) those coming from a domain seeking biomedical informatics approaches for addressing specific needs; and, (2) current biomedical informaticians seeking a foundational background for methods that might be utilized in practical scenarios germane to their ongoing research.A unique characteristic of the text is its balance between foundational coverage of core topics in biomedical informatics with practical "in-the-trenches" scenarios. Contributors represent leading experts from the biomedical informatics field: individuals who have demonstrated effective use of methodology in real-world, high-quality data applications. Contains appendices that function as primers on: (1) Unix; (2) Ruby; (3) Databases; and (4) Web Services.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital/Print
    Prescott, David M.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QH631 .P929
    85
  • Digital
    edited by Renata Basto and Wallace F. Marshall.
    Contents:
    Imaging centrosomes and cilia in the mouse kidney / Masato Hoshi, Jinzhi Wang, Sanjay Jain, Moe R. Mahjoub
    Ependymal cell differentiation, from monociliated to multiciliated cells / Nathalie Delgehyr, Alice Meunier, Marion Faucourt, Montserrat Bosch Grau, Laetitia Strehl, Carsten Janke, Nathalie Spassky
    Observing planar cell polarity in multiciliated mouse airway epithelial cells / Eszter K. Vladar, Yin Loon Lee, Tim Stearns, Jeffrey D. Axelrod
    Imaging and analyzing primary cilia in cardiac cells / Nicolas Diguet, Jean-Francois Le Garrec, Tommaso Lucchesi, Sigolene M. Meilhac
    Cilia in photoreceptors / Linjing Li, Manisha Anand, Kollu Nageswara Rao, Hemant Khanna
    Analysis of primary cilia in the developing mouse brain / Judith T.M.L. Paridaen, Wieland B. Huttner, Michaela Wilsch-Brauninger
    In vivo investigation of cilia structure and function using Xenopus / Eric R. Brooks, John B. Wallingford
    A quantitative approach to study endothelial cilia bending stiffness during blood flow mechanodetection in-vivo / Francesco Boselli, Jacky G. Goetz, Gilles Charvin, Julien Vermot
    Quantitative description of fluid flows produced by left-right cilia in zebrafish / Craig Fox, M. Lisa Manning, Jeffrey D. Amack
    Efficient live fluorescence imaging of intraflagellar transport in mammalian primary cilia / Hiroaki Ishikawa, Wallace F. Marshall
    Analysis of soluble protein entry into primary cilia using semipermeabilized cells / David K. Breslow, Maxence V. Nachury
    Methods for imaging individual cilia in living echinoid embryos / Robert L. Morris, Hans W. Pope, Adam N. Sholi, Leah M. Williams, Chelsea R. Ettinger, Gwendolyn M. Beacham, Tatsushi Shintaku, Zachary D. Abbott, Elyse M. Doherty
    The planarian Schmidtea mediterranea as a model for studying motile cilia and multiciliated cells / Cyril Basquin, Anne-Marie Orfila, Juliette Azimzadeh
    Quantitative analysis of flagellar proteins in Drosophila sperm tails / Teresa Mendes Maia, Perrine Paul-Gilloteaux, Renata Basto
    Imaging cilia in Drosophila melanogaster / Jennifer Vieillard, Jean-Luc Duteyrat, Elisabeth Cortier, Benedicte Durand
    Studying G protein-coupled receptors: Immunoblotting, immunoprecipitation, phosphorylation, surface labeling, and cross-linking protocols / Kasturi Pal, Hemant Badgandi, Saikat Mukhopadhyay
    Image analysis of Caenorhabditis elegans ciliary transition zone structure, ultrastructure, molecular composition and function / Anna A. W. M. Sanders, Julie Kennedy, Oliver E. Blacque
    Genetic and genomic approaches to identify genes involved in flagellar assembly in Chlamydomonas reinhardtii / Huawen Lin, Susan K. Dutcher
    Axonemal motility in Chlamydomonas / Ken-ichi Wakabayashi, Ritsu Kamiya
    Posttranscriptional control over rapid development and ciliogenesis in marsilea / Stephen M. Wolniak, Thomas C. Boothby, Corine M. van der Weele
    Total internal reflection fluorescence microscopy of intraflagellar transport in tetrahymena thermophila / Yu-Yang Jiang, Karl Lechtreck, Jacek Gaertig
    Ciliary heterogeneity within a single cell : the paramecium model / Anne Aubusson-Fleury, Jean Cohen, Michel Lemullois
    Imaging intraflagellar transport in trypanosomes / Julien Santi-Rocca, Nicolas Chenouard, Cécile Fort, Thibault Lagache, Jean-Christophe Olivo-Marin, Philippe Bastin
    Scanning and three-dimensional electron microscopy methods for the study of trypanosoma brucei and leishmania mexicana flagella / Eva Gluenz, Richard John Wheeler, Louise Hughes, Sue Vaughan.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2015
  • Print
    edited by Joseph Larner, Stephen L. Pohl.
    Contents:
    v. 1. Laboratory methods, pts. A-C
    v. 2. Clinical methods.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC660 .M49
    4
  • Digital/Print
    Abelson, John N.; Colowick, Sidney P.; Kaplan, Nathan Oram; Simon, Melvin I.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QP601 .M49
    495
  • Digital
    Dennis, Edward A.; Dennis, Martha G.; Dewey, Virginia C.
    Contents:
    v. 7 (1964). Volumes I through VI / prepared by Virginia C. Dewey (ix, 266 p.)
    v. 33 (1975). Volumes I-XXX / edited by Martha G. Dennis, Edward A. Dennis (xxv, 1078 p.)
    v. 75 (1982). Volumes 31, 32 and 34-60 (xxv, 1078 p.)
    v. 95 (1985). Volumes 61-74, 76-80 (xxviii, 402 p.)
    v. 120 (1986). Volumes 81-94 and 96-101
    v. 140 (1988). Volumes 102-119 and 121-134
    v. 175 (1990). Volumes 135-139, 141-167
    v. 199 (1993). Volumes 168-174, 176-194
    v. 229 (1995). Volumes 195-198 and 200-227
    v. 265 (1996). Volumes 228, 230-262
    v. 285 (1998). Volumes 263, 264, 266-289
    v. 320 (2000). Volumes 290-319
    v. 355 (2002). Subject index to volumes 33, 75, 95, 120, 140, 175, 199, 229, 265, 285 and 320.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    Fulltext (Index to v. 1-6) Indexes to v. 1-<320>
    ScienceDirect
    Fulltext (Index to v. 1-30) Indexes to v. 1-<320>
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
    Fulltext (Index to v. 290-319) Indexes to v. 1-<320>
  • Digital
    George Rutherford, editor.
    Summary: This book describes the variety of direct and indirect population size estimation (PSE) methods available along with their strengths and weaknesses. Direct estimation methods, such as enumeration and mapping, involve contact with members of hard-to-reach groups. Indirect methods have practical appeal because they require no contact with members of hard-to-reach groups. One indirect method in particular, network scale-up (NSU), has several strengths over other PSE methods: It can be applied at a province/country level, it can estimate size of several hard-to-reach population in a single study, and it is implemented with members of the general population rather than members of hard-to-reach groups. The book discusses methods to collect, analyze, and adjust results and presents methods to triangulate and finalize PSEs.

    Contents:
    Review of size estimation methods
    Methods to estimate the average social network size
    Estimating the size of hidden groups
    Data smoothing, extrapolation, and triangulation.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    Dorfman, Ralph I.
    Contents:
    v. 1. Chemical determinations
    v. 2. Bioassay
    v. 3. & 4. Steroidal activity in experimental animals and man, Part A & B.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    F801.H7 D6
    5
  • Print
    edited by Thomas Weimbs.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
  • Digital
    edited by Dylan M. Owen.
    Contents:
    Introduction to membrane lipids /Richard M. Epand
    Introduction : membrane properties (good) for life /Marek Cebecauer
    Introduction to fluorescence probing of biological membranes /Alexander P. Demchenko ... [et al.]
    Assembly and use of tethered bilayer lipid membranes (tBLMs) /Charles Cranfield ... [et al.]
    Preparation of detergent-resistant membranes (DRMs) from cultured mammalian cells /Deborah A. Brown
    Isolation of giant plasma membrane vesicles for evaluation of plasma membrane structure and protein partitioning /K. R. Levental and I. Levental
    Asymmetric giant lipid vesicle fabrication /Peichi C. Hu and Noah Malmstadt
    Cholesterol depletion using Methyl-[Beta]-cyclodextrin /Saleemulla Mahammad and Ingela Parmryd
    Comparative LC-MS based profiling approach to analyze lipid composition in tissue culture systems /G. Ekin Atilla-Gokcumen and Ulrike S. Eggert
    Imaging membrane order using environmentally sensitive fluorophores /G.W. Ashdown and Dylan M. Owen
    3D super-resolution imaging by localization microscopy /Astrid Magenau and Katharina Gaus
    Electron microscopy methods for studying plasma membranes /Alison J. Beckett and Ian A. Prior
    Measuring cytoskeleton and cellular membrane mechanical properties by atomic force microscopy /Charles Roduit ... [et al.]
    Fluorescence linear dichroism imaging for quantifying membrane order /Richard K. P. Benninger
    Scanning fluorescence correlation spectroscopy on biomembranes /Eduard Hermann, Jonas Ries, and Ana J. García-Sáez
    X-ray diffraction of lipid model membranes /Arwen I. I. Tyler, Robert V. Law, and John M. Seddon
    Solid state NMR of lipid model membranes /Arwen I. I. Tyler ... [et al.]
    Fluorescence recovery after photobleaching (FRAP) : acquisition, analysis, and applications /Michael Carnell, Alex Macmillan, and Renee Whan
    Laurdan spectral phasor method to explore membrane micro-heterogeneity and lipid domains in live cells /Ottavia Golfetto, Elizabeth Hinde, and Enrico Gratton
    Cholesterol behavior in asymmetric lipid bilayers : insights from molecular dynamics simulations /Semen O. Yesylevskyy and Alexander P. Demchenko
    Computer simulations of phase separation in lipid bilayers and monolayers /Svetlana Baoukina and D. Peter Tieleman.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital/Print
    Bennett, P. M.; Bergan, T.; Brown, Alistair J. P.; Colwell, R. R.; Craig, Alister G.; Dorrell, Nick; Grigorova, R.; Grinsted, J.; Hoheisel, Jörg D.; Kabelitz, Dieter; Kaufmann, S. H. E.; Ketley, Julian; Mayer, Frank; Norris, J. R.; Oren, Aharon; Paul, John H.; Pothoulakis, Charalabos; Rainey, Fred A.; Read, D. J.; Ribbons, Douglas W.; Salmond, George; Sansonetti, P. J.; Savidge, Tor; Smith, Margaret C. M.; Sockett, R. Elizabeth; Stansfield, Ian; Stark, Michael J. R.; Tuite, Mick; Varma, A.; Williams, Peter; Wren, Brendan; Zychlinksy, Arturo.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QR65 .N59
    39
  • Digital
    edited by Vicente Andres, Beatriz Dorado.
    Contents:
    Use of mouse models in atherosclerosis research / Godfrey S. Getz and Catherine A. Reardon
    Cytokines and immune responses in murine atherosclerosis / Pascal J. H. Kusters and Esther Lutgens
    Intravital microscopy for atherosclerosis research / Remco T. A. Megens and Oliver Soehnlein
    Noninvasive molecular imaging of mouse atherosclerosis / Martina A. McAteer and Robin P. Choudhury
    Oil red O and hematoxylin and eosin staining for quantification of atherosclerosis burden in mouse aorta and aortic root / M. Jesús Andrés-Manzano, Vicente Andrés, and Beatriz Dorado
    Isolation, culture, and polarization of murine bone marrow-derived and peritoneal macrophages / Inés Pineda-Torra ... [et al.]
    Isolation of mouse primary aortic endothelial cells by selection with specific antibodies / Pedro Molina-Sánchez and Vicente Andrés
    Isolation and culture of aortic smooth muscle cells and in vitro calcification assay / Ricardo Villa-Bellosta and Magda R. Hamczyk
    Immunostaining of macrophages, endothelial cells, and smooth muscle cells in the atherosclerotic mouse aorta / Prashanthi Menon and Edward A. Fisher
    Immunostaining of lymphocytes in mouse atherosclerotic plaque / Anton Gisterå and Daniel F. J. Ketelhuth
    Flow cytometric analysis of immune cells within murine aorta / Breanne N. Gjurich, Parésa L. Taghavie-Moghadam, and Elena V. Galkina
    In vitro differentiation of naïve CD4+ T cells : a tool for understanding the development of atherosclerosis / Salvador Iborra and Jose M. González-Granado
    Quantification of apoptosis in mouse atherosclerotic lesions / Nichola L. Figg and Martin R. Bennett
    Quantification of cellular proliferation in mouse atherosclerotic lesions / José J. Fuster
    Quantification of in vitro macrophage cholesterol efflux and in vivo macrophage-specific reverse cholesterol transport / Joan Carles Escolà-Gil ... [et al.]
    In vitro macrophage phagocytosis assay / Magda R. Hamczyk, Ricardo Villa-Bellosta, and Vicente Andrés
    Glucose and insulin tolerance tests in the mouse / Ángela Vinué and Herminia González-Navarro
    Wire myography to study vascular tone and vascular structure of isolated mouse arteries / Lara del Campo and Mercedes Ferrer
    Pressure myography to study the function and structure of isolated small arteries / Olav L. Schjørring, Rune Carlsson, and Ulf Simonsen
    Generation of aorta transcript atlases of wild-type and apolipoprotein E-null mice by laser capture microdissection-rased mRNA expression microarrays / Changjun Yin ... [et al.]
    Analysis of gene and protein expression in atherosclerotic mouse aorta by western blot and quantitative real-time PCR / José Rivera-Torres
    Bone marrow transplantation in mice to study the role of hematopoietic cells in atherosclerosis / Vinatha Sreeramkumar and Andrés Hidalgo
    Tandem stenosis to induce atherosclerotic plaque instability in the mouse / Yung Chih Chen, Jennifer Rivera, and Karlheinz Peter
    Detection of intraplaque hemorrhage in mouse atherosclerotic lesions / Judith C. Sluimer, Marion J. Gijbels, and Sylvia Heeneman
    Mechanical stabilization of mouse carotid artery for in vivo intravital microscopy imaging of atherogenesis / Raphaël Chèvre
    Intravital microscopy in the cremaster muscle microcirculation for endothelial dysfunction studies / Cristina Rius and María J. Sanz
    Fluorescent molecular tomography for in vivo imaging of mouse atherosclerosis / Alicia Arranz ... [et al.]
    In vivo 18F-FDG-PET imaging in mouse atherosclerosis / Jesús Mateo ... [et al.]
    Magnetic resonance imaging of the atherosclerotic mouse aorta / Jesús Mateo ... [et al.].
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editors, Didier Reinhardt and Anil K. Sharma.
    Summary: This book compiles various methodologies used in understanding interactions within the rhizosphere. An in-depth understanding of the rhizosphere is essential to developing successful strategies for future sustainable agriculture. The book summarizes methods and techniques used to study the mechanisms involved in mutualistic symbioses and pathogenic interactions of plants with various microbial organisms including fungi, bacteria, and oomycetes. Each chapter discusses different methodologies used in rhizosphere biology, while also providing real-world experimental data and trouble-shooting tips. Interested researchers will also find a wealth of literature references for further research. As the first comprehensive manual and compilation of methods and techniques used in rhizosphere biology, the book represents an essential resource for all researchers who are newcomers to soil microbiology experimentation.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; About the Editors; Part I: Root Symbioses;
    1: Synthetic Plasmids to Challenge Symbiotic Nitrogen Fixation Between Rhizobia and Legumes; 1.1 Introduction; 1.1.1 Formation of Effective Nodules on Legume Roots; 1.1.2 Genes of Rhizobia Modulating Nodule Formation and Invasion; 1.1.3 From Specific to Promiscuous Symbioses; 1.1.4 Are Many Keys Responsible for ``Much Harmony?́́; 1.2 A Forward Genetic Approach to Study Nodulation Genes; 1.2.1 pMSy
    m2: A Small Replicon That Confers Nodulation to Recipient Bacteria 1.3 pMSy
    m2: A Successful Step Towards Constructing Synthetic Symbiotic RepliconsReferences;
    2: In Vivo Analysis of Rhizosphere Enzyme Activities by the Use of Plastic Syringes; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Description of the Method and Discussion; 2.3 Conclusions and Outlook; References;
    3: Characterization of Arbuscular Mycorrhizal Communities in Roots of Vineyard Plants; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Approaches, Techniques and Results; 3.2.1 Root Sampling in Vineyard; 3.2.2 DNA Extraction; 3.2.3 Amplification of AMF Phylogenetic Marker 3.2.4 High-Throughput Sequencing, Data Processing and Community Analysis3.3 Discussion/Conclusions; References;
    4: Molecular Methods for Research on Actinorhiza; 4.1 Introduction; 4.1.1 Actinorhizal Plants; 4.1.2 The Actinomycete Frankia; 4.1.3 Development of Actinorhizae, the Actinorhizal Nodules; 4.1.4 Specific Issues; 4.2 Approaches, Techniques, and Results; 4.2.1 Plant Side; 4.2.1.1 Growing Actinorhizal Plants; 4.2.1.2 Nodulation Experiments; Nodulation in Hydroponics; Spot Inoculation; Split Root Culture System; 4.2.1.3 Functional Genomics; Nucleic Acid Extraction 4.3 Conclusions and OutlookReferences;
    5: Molecular and Functional Characterization of Beneficial Bacteria Associated with AMF Spores; 5.1 Introduction; 5.1.1 Arbuscular Mycorrhizal Fungi; 5.1.2 Bacteria Associated with AMF Spores and Their Functional Roles; 5.2 Approaches, Techniques, and Results; 5.2.1 Fungal Material and Spore Collection; 5.2.2 Culture-Independent Approaches for the Detection of Bacteria Strictly Associated with AMF Spores; 5.2.2.1 Techniques; 5.2.2.2 Results; 5.2.3 Culture-Dependent Approaches for the Quantification of Bacteria Associated with AMF Spores Plant Genomic Resources4.2.1.4 Genetic Transformation of Actinorhizal Plants; Agrobacterium tumefaciens-Mediated Transformation of Actinorhizal Plants (Stable); Agrobacterium rhizogenes-Mediated Transformation of Actinorhizal Plants (Hairy Root); 4.2.1.5 Imaging the Early Stages of Frankia Colonization and Associated Host Responses in Living Tissues; 4.2.2 Bacterial Side; 4.2.2.1 Frankia Cultivation and Isolation; 4.2.2.2 Molecular and ``Omics ́́Tools to Study the Bacterial Partner Frankia; 4.2.3 Molecular Tools Used to Analyze Abiotic Stresses on Actinorhizal Plants
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Volker Gurtler, Gangavarapu Subrahmanyam.
    Summary: "The book "Methods in Silkworm Microbiology" is the first ever publication that provides in-depth reviews on the latest progresses about silkworm - pathogen interactions, diseases and management practices for sustainable development of sericulture. Different molecular and immunodiagnostic methods for the detection of pathogens have been comprehensively addressed. Most recent advancements on the role of Micro RNAs in silkworm and pathogen interactions are provided with suitable illustrations. Recent technological advances and emerging trends in exploring silkworm gut microbial communities towards translation research, particularly to understand microbiome functions have been highlighted. Information on various immune mechanisms of silkworm against invading pathogens is summarized. The book further highlights the silkworm gut microbiota as a potential source for biotechnological applications."--publisher's web page, viewed July 08, 2021.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2021
  • Digital
    edited by J. Michael Oakes, Jay S. Kaufman.
    Contents:
    Advancing methods in social epidemiology / Jay S. Kaufman and J. Michael Oakes
    The measurement of socioeconomic status / J. Michael Oakes and Kate E. Andrade
    Measuring and analyzing 'race', racism, and racial discrimination / Saffron Karlsen and James Yzet Nazroo
    Measuring poverty / David M. Betson and Jennifer L. Warlick
    Health inequalities : measurement and decomposition / Sam Harper and John Lynch
    A conceptual framework for measuring segregation and its association with population outcomes / Sean F. Reardon
    Measures of residential community contexts / Patricia O'Campo Ph.D. and Margaret O'Brien Caughy
    Community-based participatory research : rationale and relevance for social epidemiology / Paula M. Lantz, Barbara A. Israel, Amy J. Schulz, and Angela G. Reyes
    Social network analysis for epidemiology / David A. Shoham and Lynne C. Messer
    Fieldwork with in-depth interviews : how to get strangers in the city to tell you their stories / Melody L. Boyd and Stefanie DeLuca
    Experimental social epidemiology : controlled community trials / Peter J. Hannan
    Propensity score matching for social epidemiology / J. Michael Oakes and Pamela Jo Johnson
    Longitudinal approaches to social epidemiologic research / Magdalena Cerdá and Katherine M. Keyes
    Fixed effects and difference-in-differences / Erin C Strumpf, Sam Harper, and Jay S Kaufman
    Fixed versus random effects models for multilevel and longitudinal data / Ashley Schempf Hirai, and Jay S. Kaufman
    Mediation analysis in social epidemiology / Arijit Nandi and Tyler J. VanderWeele
    A roadmap for estimating and interpreting population intervention parameters / Jennifer Ahern and Alan E. Hubbard
    Natural experiments and instrumental variables analyses in social epidemiology / Maria Glymour, Stefan Walter, and Eric J. Tchetgen
    Using causal diagrams to understand common problems in social epidemiology / M. Maria Glymour.
  • Digital
    edited by Stuart C. Feinstein and Nichole E. Lapointe.
    Summary: Methods in Tau Cell Biology, Volume 141, the latest release in the Methods in Cell Biology series, looks at methods involved in tau cell biology. Edited by leaders in the field, this volume provides proven, state-of-art techniques and relevant historical background and theory that aids researchers with tactics for efficient design and effective implementation of experimental methodologies. Topics of note in this updated volume include sections on Recombinant tau expression and purification, In vitro MT dynamics and MT ends, Methods related to investigating tau structure and MT bundling, Neurite outgrowth and retraction, and Methods related to studying tau fragmentation.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Ormond A. Macdougald.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
  • Digital
    editor, Ana Laura Ibáñez.
    Summary: Pursuing a multidisciplinary approach, this book highlights current challenges in, and potential solutions to, environmental water management in Mexico. It includes an essential review of current literature and state of the art research, providing a one-stop resource for researchers, graduate students and environmental water managers alike. The result of a cooperation between 35 researchers from seven Mexican academic institutions, two Federal Commissions and one international organization, the book links science to practice for living organisms and their environment, while also addressing anthropogenic effects on our water ecosystems. Particularly the book addresses the following subjects: Biodiversity in inland waters, physical and chemical characterization of inland waters, physico-chemical characterization of Mexican coastal lagoons, microbiota in brackish ecosystems, diversity associated with southern Mexico's pacific coral reefs, fry fish stockings in aquatic epicontinental systems, a review of tuna fisheries in Mexico, fishery resource management challenges stemming from climate change, aquatic invasive alien species, harmful algal blooms, and aquatic protected areas, related ecological and social problems and the importance for fisheries' yield.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Acknowledgements; Abbreviations; Contents; Contributors; Chapter 1: Physical and Chemical Characterization of Inland Waters; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 The Mexican Territory; 1.2.1 Geography; 1.2.2 Climate; 1.3 Water Administration by the Government; 1.4 Background Studies; 1.4.1 National/Regional Scale; 1.4.2 Rivers; 1.4.3 Trans-Mexican Volcanic Belt; 1.4.4 Michoacán; 1.4.5 Yucatan Peninsula; 1.4.6 Water Bodies of Other Areas; 1.4.7 Exceptional Lakes; 1.5 Water Management; References; Chapter 2: Biodiversity in Inland Waters; 2.1 History; 2.1.1 Freshwater Ecoregions of the World 2.1.2 Priority Hydrological Regions2.1.3 Gaps and Omissions Analysis in Conservation of Epicontinental Aquatic Biodiversity of Mexico; 2.1.4 The National Wetland Inventory; 2.1.5 The Ramsar Convention on Wetlands: Mexico; 2.1.6 National Wetland Policy; 2.1.7 State Biodiversity Studies and Strategies; 2.1.8 Environmental Flow and Water Reserves (WWF-FGRA-CONAGUA); 2.2 Biodiversity; 2.2.1 Main Aquatic Ecosystems; 2.2.1.1 Lotic
    Rivers and Streams Systems; 2.2.1.2 Lentic
    Lakes and Ponds Systems; 2.2.1.3 Wetlands; 2.2.2 Biological Richness; 2.2.2.1 Lake Chapala, Jalisco 2.2.2.2 Cuatro Ciénegas, Coahuila2.2.2.3 Cenotes of the Yucatán Peninsula; 2.2.2.4 Oases of the Baja California Peninsula; 2.2.2.5 Lake Alchichica, Puebla; References; Web Sites; Chapter 3: Physicochemical Characterization of Mexican Coastal Lagoons, Current Status, and Future Environmental Scenarios; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Information Analysis; 3.2.1 Temperature; 3.2.2 Salinity; 3.2.3 pH; 3.2.4 Oxygen; 3.2.5 Nutrients; 3.2.6 N:P Ratio; 3.2.7 Chlorophyll a; 3.2.8 Trophic Status and Eutrophication; 3.3 Future Environmental Scenarios; 3.4 Final Considerations; References 5.6 Future Research AgendasReferences; Chapter 6: Fish Fry Stocking in Epicontinental Aquatic Systems: The Production Policy; 6.1 Introduction; 6.2 Recent History of Fisheries Policies; 6.3 Species Used in Freshwater Stocking; 6.4 Distribution of Tilapia and Carp Stocking from 2001 to 2013; 6.5 Fish Fry Stocking Versus Inland Production; 6.5.1 Fish Stocking Versus Inland Fish Production at the National Level from 1974 to 2014; 6.5.2 Fish Stocking Versus Inland Fish Production at the Geoeconomic Level from 2001 to 2013; 6.6 Freshwater Fisheries Policies; 6.7 Conclusions; References Chapter 4: Microbiota in Brackish Ecosystems: From Water Quality to Ecological Processes4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Microbial Ecology; 4.2.1 Microbial Diversity; 4.2.2 Biogeochemical Cycles; 4.2.3 Microbiota and Contaminants; 4.3 Sanitary Microbiology; 4.3.1 Microbiological Indicators in Coastal Lagoons of Mexico; 4.3.2 Pathogenic Bacteria in Coastal Lagoons of Mexico; 4.4 Vulnerability; References; Chapter 5: Biodiversity Associated with Southern Mexican Pacific Coral Systems; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Environmental Setting; 5.3 Coral Communities and Reefs; 5.4 Biodiversity; 5.5 Biodiversity Drivers
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Alfredo Ortega-Rubio, editor.
    Summary: This book presents valuable and recent lessons learned regarding the links between natural resources management, from a Socio-Ecological perspective, and the biodiversity conservation in Mexico. It address the political and social aspects, as well as the biological and ecological factors, involved in natural resources management and their impacts on biodiversity conservation. It is a useful resource for researchers and professionals around the globe, but especially those in Latin American countries, which are grappling with the same Bio-Cultural heritage conservation issues.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Preface; Contents; Part I: Public Policies;
    Chapter 1: Biodiversity Conservation inMexico: Assessing the Institutional Capacity for Implementing Nagoya Protocol and Aichi Targets; 1.1 Introduction; 1.1.1 Study Area; 1.1.2 Background; 1.2 Methodology; 1.3 Results; 1.3.1 Biodiversity and Ecosystems Status; 1.3.2 Human Settlements; 1.3.3 Management Plan of Each NPA; 1.3.4 Effectiveness AssessmentThrough the Implementation of the Annual Operation Plan; 1.3.5 Biodiversity Conservation Status; 1.3.6 NPA Effectiveness for Nagoya Protocol and Aichi Targets Implementation 1.4 Conclusion References;
    Chapter 2: Are Current Actions for Conservation in Mexico Enough? A Review of the Proximate and Ultimate Threats; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Proximal or Direct Threats to Biodiversity; 2.2.1 Loss of Habitats; 2.2.2 Overexploitation or Extraction of Organisms; 2.2.3 Invasive Species; 2.2.4 Pollutants; 2.2.5 Climate Change; 2.3 Ultimate or Indirect Threats to Biodiversity; 2.3.1 Population Growth; 2.4 Strategies for Conservation; 2.5 Conclusions; References 4.2.2 The 2030 Agenda for Sustainable Development; 4.2.3 Strategic Plan for Biodiversity (SPB) 2011-2020 and the Aichi Targets; 4.3 The Legal Framework for Biodiversity Conservation in Mexico; 4.3.1 The Constitution; 4.3.2 The General Law for Ecological Equilibrium and Environmental Protection (LGEEPA) and its Regulations; 4.3.3 The General Law for Wildlife (LGVS); 4.3.4 The General Law for Sustainable Forest Development (LGDFS); 4.3.5 The Federal Law for the Sea; 4.3.6 Other Laws; 4.3.7 The Proposal of General Law forBiodiversity 4.4 Federal Strategies and Programs for Biodiversity Conservation; 4.5 Conclusions; References;
    Chapter 5: Public Mexican Corporations' Sustainability Indicators: Measuring the Profit Benefits of Protected Natural Areas Programs for Socially Responsible Investors; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Literature Review; 5.3 Empirical Test of the Impact of NPAP's in the Profits and SRI Stock Prices; 5.3.1 Data Processing; 5.4 Tests Results Review; 5.4.1 ROI Panel Regression; 5.5 Percentage Stock Price Variation or VAR_P Panel Regression Model; 5.6 Corollary of Results; 5.7 Conclusions; References
    Chapter 3: Patrimonialism, Natural Resource Management, and Civil Service in Mexico: Lessons Learnt from the Last 30 Years; 3.1 Introduction: Mexico in Crisis; 3.2 Patrimonialism and the Case of Mexico; 3.3 Professional Ideal-Type and the Absence of Civil Service in the Environmental Sector; 3.4 Mexican Government in Two Contexts: Other Countries and Mexican Nonprofit Organizations; References;
    Chapter 4: Public Policies and Biodiversity Conservation inMexico; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 International Framework for Biodiversity Conservation; 4.2.1 The Convention on Biological Diversity
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Juan J. Morrone.
    Summary: This book presents an evolutionary biogeographic analysis of the Mexican Transition Zone, which is situated in the overlap of the Nearctic and Neotropical regions. It includes a comprehensive review of previous track, cladistic and molecular biogeographic analyses and is illustrated with full color maps and vegetation photographs of the respective areas covered. Given its scope, the book will be of interest to students and researchers whose work involves systematic and biogeographic analyses of plant and animal taxa of the Mexican Transition Zone or other transition zones of the world, and to ecologists working in biodiversity conservation, who will be able to appreciate the evolutionary relevance of the Mexican Transition Zone for establishing conservation areas.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. What is a Biogeographic Transition Zone?
    Chapter 2. What is Evolutionary Biogeography?
    Chapter 3. A Historical Perspective of the Mexican Transition Zone
    Chapter 4. Biogeographic Regionalization of the Mexican Transition Zone
    Chapter 5. The Biotic Assembly of the Mexican Transition Zone
    Chapter 6. Perspectives.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    [edited by Hanna K. Gaggin, James L. Januzzi].
    Summary: Preparing for the cardiology board examination is an intensely stressful period and traditionally relies on the participant searching through their own references, whether that be the large textbooks, small handbooks and their own notes. Good books are generally too long and time-consuming, while shorter books are either insubstantial in content or rely too much on the views of one author. The key elements for a successful reference for those taking their boards are a balanced proportion of essential content alongside rare but frequently tested topics, the wisdom of experts in the field, a practical questions session at the end of every topic and additional visuals not possible on the two-dimensional page. In the MGH Cardiology Board Review, the Editors have compiled the expertise of over 72 experienced authors from the Mass General in a succinct volume, applying methods thoroughly tested in the Board Review Conference. In addition, two very important sections are included on ECGs and images, contents of which are derived from the board examination answer keys, the very ones that readers are expected to know. Plans on how to best approach the board examination preparation and what additional resources to go to are provided. In short, this book has all the strengths to ensure your success on the boards exam.

    Contents:
    History and physical examination
    Cardiac noninvasive Imaging: chest radiography, Cardiovascular magnetic resonance & computed tomography of the heart
    Acute coronary syndrome
    Chronic coronary artery disease
    Hypertension
    Lipoprotein disorders
    Diabetes mellitus and the metabolic syndrome
    Nuclear cardiology and exercise stress testing
    Cardiac catheterization, coronary arteriography and intravascular diagnostics
    Vascular disease and venous thromboembolism
    Diseases of the aorta
    Cardiovascular disease in women and pregnancy
    Basic statistics
    Diagnosis and management of acute heart failure
    Chronic and end-stage heart failure
    Valvular heart disease
    Dilated, restrictive, infiltrative and hypertrophic cardiomyopathies
    Pericardial Disease and hemodynamics
    Tumors of the Heart
    Myocarditis
    Adult congenital heart disease (ACHD)
    Pulmonary hypertension
    Supraventricular arrhythmias
    Ventricular arrhythmias and defibrillators
    Bradycardia and pacemakers/CRT
    Syncope
    Ischemic stroke, muscular dystropy and Friedreich's ataxia
    Coma after cardiac arrest: management and neurological prognostication
    Infective endocarditis, device infections, and cardiac manifestations of HIV
    Perioperative cardiovascular management
    Cardiac manifestations of rheumatologic diseases
    Cardiovascular disease in endocrine disorders
    Pharmacology
    ACLS
    Imaging studies section (Echocardiograms, ventriculograms, aortogram and angiograms
    Electrocardiography.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    editors, Hanna K. Gaggin, James L. Januzzi, Jr.
    Summary: This comprehensively revised new edition prepares the reader for the cardiology board examination, as well as provide a concise review of the essentials of general cardiology and the less common but clinically relevant topics in a dynamic and time-efficient manner, augmenting existing learning. It uses board-style questions and answers at the end of each topic, enabling readers to test their learning and commit key concepts to long-term memory. Instructive figures and tables are used to consolidate teaching points. This book also contains practical tips from recent board exam takers and other resources in order to make best use of the reader's limited time. In the MGH Cardiology Board Review, the Editors have compiled the expertise of over 60 experienced authors in a succinct volume, applying methods thoroughly tested in Board Review. In addition, two very important sections on ECGs and images are included, contents of which are derived from the board examination answer keys, the very ones that readers are expected to know. Plans on how to best approach board examination preparation and what additional resources to go to are provided. In short, this book has all the strengths to ensure your success on the boards exam. .

    Contents:
    History and Physical Examination
    Acute Coronary Syndrome
    Chronic Coronary Artery Disease
    Systemic Hypertension
    Lipoprotein Disorders
    Diabetes Mellitus and the Metabolic Syndrome
    Exercise Stress Testing and Nuclear Cardiology
    Cardiac Catheterization, Coronary Arteriography and Intravascular Imaging
    Supraventricular Arrhythmias
    Sudden Cardiac Death, Syncope, Ventricular Arrhythmias and Defibrillators
    Bradycardia and Pacemakers/CRT
    Diagnosis and Management of Acute Heart Failure Chronic and End-Stage Heart Failure
    Cardiomyopathies and Myocarditis
    Pericardial Disease
    Pulmonary Hypertension
    Hemodynamics and Right Heart Catheterization
    Aortic and Pulmonic Valvular Heart Disease Mitral and Tricuspid Valvular Heart Disease
    Adult Congenital Heart Disease
    Peripheral Vascular Disease and Venous Thromboembolism
    Diseases of the Aorta.-&n bsp;Cardiac Critical Care and Hypotension
    Perioperative Cardiovascular Management-cardiac and non-cardiac Cardiovascular Disease in Women & Pregnancy
    Cardio-oncology and Tumors of the Heart
    Geriatric Cardiovascular Disease
    Cardiovascular Management and Cardiovascular Screening in Athletes and High Risk Professionals
    Stroke
    Neurological Disease
    Infective Endocarditis and device infections
    Cardiac manifestation of HIV
    Rheumatology
    Endocrine disorders
    Renal disorders
    Injury and poisoning
    Pharmacology
    Heart healthy diet and nutrition
    ACLS
    Basic Statistics
    Electrocardiography
    Cardiac Noninvasive Imaging: Chest Radiography, Cardiovascular Magnetic Resonance and Computed Tomography of the Heart
    Imaging Studies.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Federico Garrido.
    Summary: This book is about the escape strategies used by cancer cells to avoid the immune response of the host. The main characters of this story are the "Antigen Presenting Molecules" and the "T Lymphocytes". The former are known as the Major Histocompatibility Complex (MHC): the H-2 and the HLA molecules. The latter are a subgroup of white cells travelling all over our body which are capable to distinguish between "self and non self". Readers will know from the inside about the history of the HLA genetic system and will discover how T lymphocytes recognize and destroy cancer cells. One of the key important questions is: Why tumors arise, develop and metastasize? This book tries to answer this question and will explain how cancer cells become invisible to killer T lymphocytes. The loss of the HLA molecules is a major player in this tumor escape mechanism. Cancer immunotherapy is aimed at stimulating T lymphocytes to destroy tumor cells. However, the clinical response rate is not as high as expected. The molecular mechanisms responsible for MHC/HLA antigen loss play a crucial role in this resistance to immunotherapy. This immune escape mechanism will be discussed in different types of tumors: lung, prostate, bladder and breast...ect. as well as melanoma and lymphoma. This book will be useful to Oncologists, Pathologists and Immunologist that will enter this fascinating area of research. It will be also interesting for biologist, doctoral students and medical residents interested in "Tumor Immunology".

    Contents:
    Preface
    Introduction
    Mhc/Hla Class I Loss In Cancer Cells
    Hla Class-I Expression And Cancer Immunotherapy
    Hla Class-Ii Expression In Human Tumors
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    editors, David L. Brown, Gregory H. Borschel, Benjamin Levi.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RD118 .M53 2014
    1
  • Digital
    Zilong Yu, Luo Zhang, Demin Han, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a complete overview of two-dimension and three-dimension images of structures in normal and man-made minimal lesions in temporal bone. First chapters present a series of two-dimension reconstructions of the temporal bone made via micro-CT scanning on axial, coronal and sagittal view just as HRCT showed. Subsequent chapters address three-dimension reconstruction of the temporal bone, and some models of man-made lesions in the temporal bone were reconstructed via micro-CT scanning. Last chapter discusses differences between micro-CT and high resolution CT scan of temporal bone. This atlas is a valuable reference for otolaryngology & head and neck surgeons, radiologists, and related researchers.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Principles and Conditions of Micro-CT
    Chapter 2. Two-Dimension Reconstruction of Temporal Bone on Axial View
    Chapter 3. Two-Dimension Reconstruction of Temporal Bone on Coronal View
    Chapter 4. Two-Dimension Reconstruction of Temporal Bone on Sagittal View
    Chapter 5. Two-Dimension Reconstruction of Stapes
    Chapter 6. Two-Dimension Reconstruction of Cochlea
    Chapter 7. Three-Dimension Reconstruction of Temporal Bone
    Chapter 8. Two-Dimension Observation of Man-Made Tiny Lesion Models in Temporal Bone
    Chapter 9. Three-Dimension Observation of Man-Made Tiny Lesion Models in Temporal Bone
    Chapter 10. Comparison between Micro-CT and High Resolution CT Scan of Temporal Bone.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    editors, Md. Asraful Alam and Zhongming Wang.
    Summary: This book addresses microalgae, which represent a very promising biomass resource for wastewater treatment and producing biofuels. Accordingly, microalgae are also an expanding sector in biofuels and wastewater treatment, as can be seen in several high-profile start-ups from around the globe, including Solix Biofuels, Craig Venter's Synthetic Genomics, PetroSun, Chevron Corporation, ENN Group etc. In addition, a number of recent studies and patent applications have confirmed the value of modern microalgae for biofuels production and wastewater treatment systems. However, substantial inconsistencies have been observed in terms of system boundaries, scope, the cultivation of microalgae and oil extraction systems, production costs and economic viability, cost-lowering components, etc. Moreover, the downstream technologies and core principles involved in liquid fuel extraction from microalgae cells are still in their early stages, and not always adequate for industrial production. Accordingly, multilateral co-operation between universities, research institutes, governments, stakeholders and researchers is called for in order to make microalgae biofuels economical. Responding to this challenge, the book begins with a general introduction to microalgae and the algae industry, and subsequently discusses all major aspects of microalgal biotechnology, from strain isolation and robust strain development, to biofuel development, refinement and wastewater treatment.

    Contents:
    Intro; Contents; Part I: Microalgae Strain and Culture Technology;
    Chapter 1: Recent Trends in Microalgae Research for Sustainable Energy Production and Biorefinery Applications; 1 Microalgae Research Outlook; 2 Rationale of Microalgae Biorefinery; 3 Sustainability Prospects of Microalgae Bioprocesses; 3.1 Strain Isolation and Selection; 3.2 Cultivation; 3.3 Harvesting; 4 Microalgae Sustainability Through Technology Integration; 4.1 Biogas Industry Waste for Microalgae Feed and Single-Cell- Protein Synthesis; 4.2 Microalgae Technology Integration with Microbial Fuel Cell 2.2.4.3 Exploration of New Types or Modified PBRs3 Design Principle; 3.1 Light; 3.2 CO2/O2 Balance and Gas Exchange; 3.3 Temperature; 3.4 pH; 3.5 Mixing; 3.6 Other Considerations; 3.6.1 Sterility (Species Control) and Clean Ability; 3.6.2 Material Selection; 4 CFD of Open Pond and Closed Bioreactors; 4.1 General Description; 4.2 Bioreactor Modelling; 5 Process Management; 5.1 Temperature Control; 5.2 Feeding Strategy; 5.3 Measurement and Control; 6 Maintenance and Cleaning of Pond/PBRs; 7 Advances in the PBR System and Manufacturers; 8 Conclusion: Challenges and Future Prospects; References 4.3 Microalgae in Bio-hydrogen Technology4.4 Microalgae Coculture System; 4.5 Extremophile Microalgae; 5 Conclusions; References;
    Chapter 2: The Culture Technology for Freshwater and Marine Microalgae; 1 Introduction; 2 Nutritional Requirements of Culturing Media; 2.1 Impact of Nitrogen on Growth and Lipid Productivity; 2.2 Impact of Phosphorus on Growth and Metabolite Content; 2.3 Impact of Carbon on Microalgae Cultivation; 2.4 Impact of Inoculum Size on Lipid Productivity; 3 Maintenance of Cultivation Systems: Challenges and Opportunities; 4 Media Recycling and Utilization 5 Strategies to Control Biological Contaminants in Culture5.1 Algicidal Bacteria; 5.2 Viral Contaminants; 5.3 Fungi; 5.4 Zooplanktonic Grazers; 5.5 Toxic Freshwater and Marine Algal Species; 6 Conclusion and Future Perspective; References;
    Chapter 3: Open Pond Culture Systems and Photobioreactors for Microalgal Biofuel Production; 1 Introduction; 2 Types of Microalgal PBRs; 2.1 Open Pond Culture Systems; 2.2 PBRs; 2.2.1 VC-PBRs (Wang et al. 2012); 2.2.2 FP-PBRs; 2.2.3 T-PBRs; 2.2.4 Other Types of PBRs; 2.2.4.1 Membrane PBRs (MPBRs); 2.2.4.2 Plastic Bag PBRs
    Chapter 4: Standard Techniques and Methods for Isolating, Selecting and Monitoring the Growth of Microalgal Strain1 Introduction; 2 Strain Isolation and Screening Technique; 2.1 Screening Criteria and Methods; 2.2 Sample Collection; 2.3 Single-Cell Isolation by Micropipette; 2.4 Single-Cell Isolation via Streak Plate Technique; 2.5 Dilution Techniques; 2.6 Gravity Separation: Centrifugation and Settling; 3 Monitoring of Microalgal Growth; 3.1 Cell Counting by Microscope; 3.1.1 Haemocytometer; 3.1.2 Sedgewick Rafter Counting Cell; 3.1.3 Palmer-Maloney Slide; 3.2 Coulter Counter
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Md. Asraful Alam, Jing-Liang Xu, Zhongming Wang, editors.
    Summary: "Microalgae Biotechnology for Food, Health and High Value Products" presents the latest technological innovations in microalgae production, market status of algal biomass-based products, and future prospects for microalgal applications. It provides stimulating overviews from different perspectives of application that demonstrate how rapidly the commercial production of microalgae-based food, health and high value products is advancing. It also addresses a range of open questions and challenges in this field. The book highlights the latest advances of interest to those already working in the field, while providing a comprehensive overview for those readers just beginning to learn about the promise of microalgae as a sustainable source of both specialty and commercial products. It offers a valuable asset for commercial algae producers, algae product developers, scientific researchers and students who are dedicated to the advancement of microalgae biotechnology for applications in health, diet, nutrition, cosmetics, biomaterials etc.

    Contents:
    Part 1. Microalgae in Food Product Development
    Chapter 1. Food and high value products from microalgae: market opportunities and challenges
    Chapter 2. Algae as a mainstream food ingredient: demand and supply perspective
    Chapter 3. Microalgae pigments: a source of natural food color
    Chapter 4. Algal biotechnology: a sustainable route for omega-3 fatty acids and carotenoids production
    Part 2. Microalgae in Health Product Development
    Chapter 5. Microalgae in human health and medicine
    Chapter 6. Astaxanthin production from microalgae
    Chapter 7. Microalgae nutraceuticals: the role of lutein in human health
    Part 3. Microalgae for Cosmetic Formulations
    Chapter 8. Algae and Aging
    Chapter 9. Extracts and bioactives from microalgae (sensu stricto): opportunities and challenges for a new generation of cosmetics
    Part 4. Other High Value Application
    Chapter 10. Microalgae as Vaccine Delivery System to Aquatic Organisms
    Chapter 11. Microalgal as a sustainable source for bioplastic
    Chapter 12. Microalgae as biofertillizer in modern agriculture
    Part 5. Biomass Production
    Chapter 13. Microalgae biomass production, drying and storage
    Chapter 14. Microalgal carbohydrate and proteins: synthesis, extraction, application and challenges
    Chapter 15. Pretreatment and lipid extraction from wet microalgae: Challenges, potential and application for industrial scale application.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Christon J. Hurst, editor.
    Summary: This collection of essays discusses fascinating aspects of the concept that microbes are at the root of all ecosystems. The content is divided into seven parts, the first of those emphasizes that microbes not only were the starting point, but sustain the rest of the biosphere and shows how life evolves through a perpetual struggle for habitats and niches. Part II explains the ways in which microbial life persists in some of the most extreme environments, while Part III presents our understanding of the core aspects of microbial metabolism. Part IV examines the duality of the microbial world, acknowledging that life exists as a balance between certain processes that we perceive as being environmentally supportive and others that seem environmentally destructive. In turn, Part V discusses basic aspects of microbial symbioses, including interactions with other microorganisms, plants and animals. The concept of microbial symbiosis as a driving force in evolution is covered in Part VI. In closing, Part VII explores the adventure of microbiological research, including some reminiscences from and perspectives on the lives and careers of microbe hunters. Given its mixture of science and philosophy, the book will appeal to scientists and advanced students of microbiology, evolution and ecology alike.

    Contents:
    Part I. Recognizing the Role of Microorganisms in our World. Our Living World Rests upon a Foundation of Microorganisms: The Constant Struggle for Habitat and Niche ; Darwin's Science's Impact on the Evolution of the Microbiological Sciences ; Microbes and Marine Sediments: A Lifelong Relationship on Earth's Biosphere ; The Democracy of Dirt: Relating Micro-Scale Dynamics to Macro-Scale Ecosystem Function
    Part II. Microbial Life Persists Within Even the Most Extreme Environments. The Concept of Evanescent Microbial Ecosystems in Earth's Atmosphere ; When the Vital Signs of Microbial Life Go Cold, Does That Mean the Pulse Is Gone? Microbial Life Persists at the Limits of Cryoenvironments on Earth ; Lithotrophic ("Stone Eating") Microbes Provide the Foundation for Deep Subsurface Ecosystems
    Part III. Understanding the Core Values of Microbial Metabolism. Miraculous Fixation of Molecular Nitrogen from the Atmosphere ; Mutagens, Radicals, Rocket Fuel and Laughing Gas: Stringing Metabolic Modules to Survive on Nitrogenous Poisons ; The Grand Microbial Variety Show
    Part IV. Microbes Established and Sustain Life. Microbes' Many Roles in Climate Change: Contribution, Consequence, Mitigation, and Model System ; The Revolutionary Potential of the Hidden Half of Nature in Agriculture and Medicine ; Microscale Carbon Cycling Between Bacteria and Algae under the Sun
    Part V. The Basic Aspects of Microbial Symbioses. Discovering the Symbiotic Nature of Microbial Life: Summarizing Milestone Publications from 1866 through 1947 ; Microscopic World and the Phenomenon of Symbiosis in the Natural Environment ; Symbiosis in a Rapidly Changing World ; Diversity-Function Relationships and the Underlying Ecological Mechanisms in Host-Associated Microbial Communities ; Darwinian Medicine: We Evolved to Require Continuing Contact with the Microbiota of the Natural Environment. Evolution Turns the Inevitable into a Necessity ; Biochemistry and Molecular Biology of the Enzyme ACC Deaminase ; The Diazotroph as an Endophyte and How a Diazotroph Interacts with Its Plant Host ; The Hologenome Hypothesis and Its Application to Plant-Microbe Interactions on an Evolutionary Scale ; Beneficial Role of Plant Growth-Promoting Rhizobacteria in Bioremediation of Heavy Metal(loid) Contaminated Agricultural Fields ; Defensive Microbiomes: A Widespread Phenomenon in Nature ; Coevolution of Molluscs and Their Microbes ; Invisible Interactions between Microorganisms
    Part VI. Microbial Symbiosis as a Driving Force in Evolution. The Game of Evolution Is Won by Competitive Cheating ; The Importance of Being Symbiont and the Role of Symbiosis as a Driving Force in Evolution ; Viruses, Underestimated Drivers of Ecology and Evolution of Life ; Coevolution of Bryophytes and their Associated Microorganisms
    Part VII. The Adventure of Microbiology Research.- BUBBLES in the MUD: A Reminiscence and Perspective ; Salty, Alkali-Laced Tales (Mostly True) from the Great Basin Desert, California and Nevada.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Ashok Kumar, Swati Sharma, editors.
    Summary: Microbial enzymes play a vital role in maintaining soil health and removing pollutants from contaminated land. Soil microflora is closely associated with maintaining soil fertility, and the use of chemical pesticides, fertilizers and other volatile sprays in agriculture threatens the health ofthe microbial population in the soil. Every single particle of healthy soil contains millions of bacteria, which interact with the nutrients available, sustaining the nutrient cycle and making this microflora an essential component of life on earth. How do microbes help in the nutrient cycle? Either by intracellular digestion of macromolecules and converting these into smaller units in their metabolic pathways, or by secreting enzymes into the extracellular environment to facilitate the conversion of complex macromolecules into micro-molecules that can be easily absorbed by other living species. To meet demands for energy and food for the growing global population, it is important to protect agricultural land from contamination and maintain its productivity. Heavy metal ions from contaminated land canenter crops, fish or aquatic organismsvia contaminated water, and theseare then taken up by the human body, where they can accumulate and alter the normal microflora. The microbiological component of the soil is ahighly complex system and is still not fully understood. How do microbes survive in the changing physicochemical environment of soil?. This book helps readers understand the mechanism, various routes of microbialsoil remediation, the interactionsof different genera, and how microbial enzymes support the sustainable restoration of healthy soil.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Let's protect our earth: Environmental challenges and implications
    Chapter 2. Microbes and Processes in Bioremediation of Soil
    Chapter 3. Unique microorganisms inhabit natural extreme soils
    Chapter 4. Effect of Pollution on Physical & Chemical Properties of Soil
    Chapter 5. Role of soil microbiome and enzyme activities in plant growth nutrition and ecological restoration of soil health
    Chapter 6. Marine microbes in Bioremediation: Current status and future trends
    Chapter 7. Role of Microbial Hydrolases in Bioremediation
    Chapter 8. Laccases for soil bioremediation
    Chapter 9. Environmental fate of organophosphate residues from agricultural soils to fresh farm produce: Microbial interventions for sustainable bioremediation strategies
    Chapter 10. Secreted Microbial Enzymes for Organic Compound Degradation
    Chapter 11. Role of microbes in degradation of chemical pesticides
    Chapter 12. Biodegradation of Pesticides in Brazil and other Tropical Countries: Experimental and in silico Studies
    Chapter 13. Microbial Degradation of Phenolic Compounds.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Anita Sharma, editor.
    Summary: This book sheds new light on ways to alleviate biotic and abiotic stress in plants, using signaling molecules of plant growth promotory rhizobacteria. Further, it elaborates on the different types of stress and strategies used by plants under various stress conditions. The respective sections describe the importance of the microbiome for the overall health of plants and how exploring plant-microbe communication and signaling pathways could offer a promising avenue for future research. The book also discusses how rhizobacteria could be exploited in stress alleviation and sustainable agriculture, and addresses omics strategies for stress response and mitigation. Thanks to clearly annotated references, the book also supports and encourages readers to further explore the topics discussed.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Rhizospheric engineering for sustainable agriculture
    Chapter 2. Stress alleviation in plants using sar and isr: current views on stress signalling network
    Chapter 3. Plant - microbe interaction: a sustainable strategy to elevate salinity tolerance in plants
    Chapter 4. Concepts and application of plant-microbe interaction in remediation of heavy metals
    Chapter 5. Abiotic stress: its outcome and tolerance in plants
    Chapter 6. Physiological and molecular aspects of retrieving environmental stress in plants by microbial interactions
    Chapter 7. Plant-microbe interactions: an insight into the underlying mechanisms to mitigate diverse environmental stresses. Chapter 8. Omics technology: role and future in providing biotic and abiotic stress tolerance to plants. Chapter 9. Role of arbuscular mycorrhizal fungi in amelioration of drought stress in crop plants. Chapter 10. Drought stress tolerance: an insight to resistance mechanism and adaptation in plants. Chapter 11. Phytoremediation: a synergistic interaction between plants and microbes for removal of unwanted chemicals/contaminants. Chapter 12. Involvement of synergistic interactions between plants and rhizospheric microbes for the removal of toxic /hazardous contaminants
    Chapter 13. Understanding the role of microbes and plants in the management of heavy metal stress: a current perspective. Chapter 14. Ros signalling under oxidative stress in plants
    Chapter 15. Bacterial antagonists effective against soil borne and foliar pathogens.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    volume editors, Caitlin S.M. Cowan, Brian E. Leonard.
    Summary: "In the past decade, a revolution has occurred in neuroscience research with the (re)discovery of the impact of the gut microbiome on physical and mental health and psychiatric disorders. This book discusses the impact of the microbiome on different aspects of brain function, ranging from changes in the immune and endocrine systems to changes in cognition and behavior, highlighting advances in psychopharmacology and biological psychiatry. It should be of interest to psychiatrists, neurologists, and neuroscientists"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The Microbiome-Gut-Brain Axis in Neurocognitive Development and Decline / Cowan, C.S.M., Cryan, J.F.
    Maternal Exposure to Adversity : Impact on the Gut Microbiota-Brain Axis, Inflammation and Offspring Psychiatric Outcomes / Rajasekera, T.A., Gur, T.L.
    Gut Microbiota as a Mediator of Host Neuro-Immune Interactions : Implications in Neuroinflammatory Disorders / Caputi, V., Popov, J., Giron, M.C., O'Mahony, S.
    The Effect of Microbiota on Behaviour / Champagne-Jorgensen, K., McVey Neufeld, K.-A.
    Is Anxiety Associated with Gut Microbiota? / Foster, J.A.
    Production of Psychoactive Metabolites by Gut Bacteria / Wiley, N., Cryan, J.F., Dinan, T.G., Ross, R.P., Stanton, C.
    Diet and Mental Health / Loughman, A., Staudacher, H., Rocks, T., Ruusunen, A., Marx, W., O'Neil, A., Jacka, F.
    Psychotropic Drugs and the Microbiome / Cussotto, S., Clarke, G., Dinan, T.G., Cryan, J.F.
    Psychobiotics : Evolution of Novel Antidepressants / Dinan, T.G., Butler, M.I., Cryan, J.F.
    Digital Access Karger 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Prem Lal Kashyap, Alok Kumar Srivastava, Shree Prakash Tiwari, Sudheer Kumar.
    Summary: "Microbes and climate are major influences on crop growth, and therefore significantly influence the quality, productivity, and sustainability of food production systems. Global warming is projected to significantly impact agriculture in terms of temperature, precipitation, chilling and glacial run-off etc. Microbes can be both beneficial and detrimental in agriculture; the array of functions they perform under stressed/limited conditions are currently underestimated. Agriculture is affected by the crop microbiome, nutrient cycling microbes, endophytes, and mycorrhizae, as well as pests and disease. Agricultural sustainability has always been highly dependent on the relationships between these factors. Various microorganisms can thrive under extreme conditions - extreme temperatures, extreme pH, high saline concentrations and pressures, etc. As a result, they provide excellent models for understanding the stress tolerance, adaptation and response mechanisms that can be subsequently engineered into crop plants to cope with climate change induced stresses. Use of these microorganisms may alleviate stresses in crop plants, which in turn opens a new and emerging application in agriculture. While there is an abundance of information on this topic, there is not yet a comprehensive volume pulling current research together. This text will be authored by leaders in the field and edited to ensure conciseness and clarity. Chapters will cover a broad range of agriculturally important crops, impact of climate change on crops as well as biotechnologically and environmentally relevant microbes; the text will serve as a springboard for novel research findings and new applications in the field"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The role of the phytomicrobiome in maintaining biofuel crop production in a changing climate / Gayathri Ilangumarana, John R. Lamonta, and Donald L. Smitha
    The impact of agriculture on soil microbial community composition and diversity in Southeast Asia / Binu M. Tripathi, Itumeleng Moroenyane, and Jonathan M. Adams
    Climate change impact on plant diseases : opinion, trends, and mitigation strategies / Moni Gupta, Deepika Sharma, and Sachin Gupta
    Microalgae : potential agent for carbon dioxide mitigation / Preeti Singh, Rahul Kunwar Singh, Dhananjay Kumar
    Photosynthetic microorganisms and bioenergy prospects : challenges and potential / Balkrishna Tiwari, Sindhunath Chakraborty, Ekta Verma, and Arun Kumar Mishra
    Amelioration of abiotic stresses in plants through multi-faceted beneficial microorganisms / Usha Chakraborty, Bishwanath Chakraborty, Jayanwita Sarkar
    Role of methylotrophic bacteria in climate change mitigation / Manish Kumar, Raghvendra Saxena, Rajesh Singh Tomar, Pankaj K. Rai, and Diby Paul Conservation agriculture for climate change resilience : a microbiological perspective / Raj Pal Meena and Ankita Jha
    Archaeal community structure : resilience to climate change / Manesh Thomas, K.K. Pal, and Rinku Dey
    Mycorrhiza
    helping plants to navigate environmental stresses / Raghvendra Pratap Singh, Geetanjali Manchanda, Mian Nabeel Anwar, Jun Jie Zhang, and Yue Zhang Li
    Endophytic microorganisms : future tool to climate resilient agriculture / R. Dey, Kamal Krishna Pal, Thomas M., D.N. Sherathia, V.B. Mandaliya, R.A. Bhadania, M.B. Patel, P. Maida, D.H. Mehta, B.D. Nawade V. Patel
    Bacillus thuringiensis : genetic engineering for insect pest management / Gothandapani Sellamuthu, Prabhakaran Narayanasamy, and Jasdeep Chatrath Padaria
    Microbial nanotechnology for climate resilient agriculture / Prem Lal Kashyap, Shikha Sharma, Poonam Jasrotia, Sudheer Kumar, Alok Kumar Srivastava.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Md. Aslam Khan, Wasim Ahmad, editors.
    Summary: The focus of this book is on the potential of entomopathogens in agroecosystem functioning. Entomopathogens are natural enemies of insect pests and have been regularly isolated around the world for pest management purposes. Employing entomopathogens to combat insect pests of agricultural importance has gained momentum due to ecofriendly approaches applied. Although they play a critical role in IPM they remain relatively underutilized despite their many advantages over other biological and chemical products. The different chapters throw light on topics such as soil-borne entomopathogens and their molecular phylogeny; ascomycota and IPM; conidial thermotolerance; oxidative stress for mycoinsecticide enhancement; cytotoxic factors of entomopathogenic bacteria and insect haemocytes; EPN and non-target arthropods; granuloviruses and IPM; entomopathogens with other pest management options; synergism and antagonism among entomopathogen and chemical insecticides. Microbes for Sustainable Insect Pest Management, Volume 1: An Eco-friendly Approach, along with the forthcoming Volume 2: Secondary Metabolites, Hydrolytic Enzymes & Nanoparticles, provide detailed accounts on the safe use of entomopathogens for sustainable management of insect pests. Together, they aim at providing solid foundations for the students, teachers, and researchers interested in eco-friendly management of important insect crop pests.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Preface; Contents; Chapter 1: Synthetic Chemical Insecticides: Environmental and Agro Contaminants; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Background and History; 1.3 Environmental Contaminants; 1.4 Impact on Human Health; 1.5 Resistance Among Insect Pests; 1.6 Effects on Non -Target Organisms; 1.7 Effects on Beneficial Arthropods; 1.8 Pesticides Degradation; 1.9 Conclusion; References; Chapter 2: Soil-Borne Entomopathogenic Bacteria and Fungi; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Soil-Borne Entomopathogenic Bacteria; 2.2.1 Isolation; 2.2.2 Mechanism of Action; 2.3 Soil-Borne Entomopathogenic Fungi 2.3.1 Entomophthorales (Entomopthoromycotina: Entomophthoromycetes)2.3.2 Hypocreales (Pezizomycotina: Sordariomycetes); 2.4 Current Status as Biopesticides; 2.5 Conclusion; References; Chapter 3: Molecular Phylogeny of Entomopathogens; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Molecular Phylogenetics and its Importance; 3.3 Entomopathogenic Viruses; 3.3.1 Origin, Natural History and Geographical Distribution; 3.3.2 Taxonomy and Evolution; 3.3.3 Genomics and Phylogeny; 3.4 Entomopathogenic Bacteria (EB); 3.4.1 Origin, Natural History and Geographical Distribution; 3.4.2 Taxonomy and Evolution 3.4.3 Genomics and Phylogeny3.5 Entomopathogenic Fungi (EF); 3.5.1 Origin, Natural History and Geographical Distribution; 3.5.2 Taxonomy and Evolution; 3.5.3 Genomics and Phylogeny; 3.6 Conclusion; References; Chapter 4: Potential of Entomopathogenic Bacteria and Fungi; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Bacterial History and Diversity; 4.2.1 Gram Positive: Firmicutes and Actinobacteria; 4.2.1.1 Bacillaceae; 4.2.1.2 Paenibacillaceae; 4.2.1.3 Clostridiaceae; 4.2.1.4 Streptomycetaceae; 4.2.1.5 Pseudonocardiaceae; 4.2.2 Gram-Negative: Proteobacteria; 4.2.2.1 Enterobacteriaceae; 4.2.2.2 Pseudomonadaceae 4.2.2.3 Coxiellaceae4.2.2.4 Neisseriaceae; 4.2.2.5 Burkholderiaceae; 4.3 Soil Habitat and Pathogenesis of Bacteria; 4.4 Fungal History and Diversity; 4.4.1 Oomycota (Kingdom: Chromista); 4.4.2 Microsporidia; 4.4.3 Chytridiomycota; 4.4.4 Blastocladiomycota; 4.4.5 Zygomycota; 4.4.6 Entomophthoromycota; 4.4.7 Basidiomycota; 4.4.8 Ascomycota; 4.5 Soil Habitat and Pathogenesis of Entomophthorales and Hypocreales; 4.6 Conclusion; References; Chapter 5: Ascomycota and Integrated Pest Management; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Biology and Taxonomy; 5.3 Mode of Action; 5.3.1 Beauveria spp.; 5.3.2 Isaria spp. 5.3.3 Metarhizium spp. 5.3.4 Lecanicillium spp.; 5.3.5 Nomuraea rileyi; 5.3.6 Hirsutella thompsonii; 5.3.7 Aschersonia spp.; 5.4 Ascomycetes in IPM Programmes; 5.4.1 Beauveria spp.; 5.4.2 Lecanicillium lecanii; 5.4.3 Metarhizium spp.; 5.4.4 Nomuraea sp.; 5.4.5 Isaria spp.; 5.4.6 Aschersonia sp.; 5.4.7 Hirsutella spp.; 5.5 Ascomycetes as Mycoinsectides; 5.6 Genetic Modifications to Enhance Virulence; 5.6.1 Augmenting Virulence; 5.6.2 Tolerance to Abiotic Stresses
    UV Radiation and Heat; 5.7 Conclusion and Future Prospects; References; Chapter 6: Thermotolerance of Fungal Conidia
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Md. Aslam Khan, Wasim Ahmad, editors.
    Summary: The search for new strategies of pest control with safer molecules is currently of great importance and interest. Microbe-mediated biological crop protection is an attractive and promising technology with no concern for a negative impact on the environment and biodiversity. Microbial hydrolytic enzymes such as proteases, chitinases, lipases, etc. are attractive for this purpose. They present toxic properties and act synergistically to control pest attacks. Also, some metabolites, that microorganisms produce for their survival or defense, can be explored and exploited for plant protection. The focus of this Volume is on the potential of microbial hydrolytic enzymes and their metabolites in agroecosystem functioning. Subsequent chapters review topics such as microbial hydrolytic enzymes as powerful management tools, chitinases in IPM of agro-horticultural crops, metabolites as pesticides and the importance of the metabolites of entomopathogenic fungi, metabolites and virulence factors. Other topic as include: microbial-based nanoparticles, recombinant DNA technologies to improve the efficacy of microbial insecticides, the effects of entomopathogens on insect predators and parasitoids, and the management of major vegetable insect pests. This volume provides detailed accounts on the safe use of microbial products for sustainable management of insect pests. Its aim is to build solid foundations for the students, teachers, and researchers interested in eco-friendly management of important insect crop pests.

    Contents:
    1. Microbial Hydrolytic Enzymes: Powerful Weapons Against Insect Pests (F. C. Lopes, A. H. S. Martinelli, E. O. John, R. Ligabue-Braun)
    2. Microbial Hydrolytic Enzymes: Powerful Weapons Against Insect Pests (Ajinath Dukare, Sangeeta Paul, Asha A.D., Nivetha N., Chetana Aggarwal and Pratap Divekar)
    3. Hydrolytic Enzymes and Integrated Pest Management (Tariq Ahmad and Ajaz Rasool)
    4. Microbial Metabolites as Pesticides (Surendra K. Dara)
    5. Unraveling the Importance of Metabolites from Entomopathogenic Fungi in Insect Pest Management (Amit Paschapur, Subbanna A.R.N.S., Ashish Kumar Singh, Jeevan B., Stanley J., Rajashekhar H., Mishra K.K.)
    6. Toxic Secondary Metabolites and Virulence Factors Expression by Entomopathogenic Fungi during Insect Infection and Potential Impact as a Tool for Pest Management (M. Constanza Mannino, Belén Davyt-Colo and Nicolás Pedrini)
    7. Microbial-based Nanoparticles as Potential Approach of Insect Pest Management (Nivetha, N., Asha, A. D., Bandeppa, Jyoti Kumar Thakur, Ajinath S. Dukare, Bishwajeet Paul and Sangeeta Paul)
    8. Role of Recombinant DNA Technology to Improve the Efficacy of Microbial Insecticides (Ugur Azizoglu, and Salih Karabörklü)
    9. Effects of Entomopathogens on Insect Predators and Parasitoids (Amin Sedaratian-Jahromi)
    10. Biological Management of Major Vegetable Insect Pests with macro- and microorganisms (Jaydeep Halder and Atanu Seni)
    11. Biorational Approaches for the Management of Insect Pests of Vegetable Crops (Amandeep Kaur and Ravinder Singh Chandi).
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Vivek Kumar, Manoj Kumar, Ram Prasad, editors.
    Summary: The book discusses ways to overcome the side effects of using hydrocarbon-based products as energy sources. Hydrocarbons produce raw crude oil waste of around 600,000 metric tons per annum, with a range of uncertainty of 200,000 metric tons per year. The various chapters in this book focus on approaches to reduce these wastes through the application of potential microbes, in a process called bioremediation. The book is a one-stop reference resource on the methods, mechanisms and application of the bio-composites, in the laboratory and field. Focusing on resolving a very pressing environmental issue, it not only provides details of existing challenges, but also offers deeper insights into the possibility of solving problems using hydrocarbon bioremediation.

    Contents:
    Microbial Consortia and Biodegradation of Petroleum Hydrocarbons in Marine Environments
    Biosurfactants in Improving Bioremediation Effectiveness in Environmental Contamination by Hydrocarbons
    Bioremediation of Petroleum Hydrocarbon in Seawater: Oil Spill Plume Modelling Approaches
    Hydrocarbon Degradation Assessment: Biotechnical Approaches Involved
    Microbes and Petroleum bioremediation
    Microbial Degradation of Petroleum Hydrocarbons: Technology and Mechanism
    Biosurfactant Enhanced Petroleum Oil Bioremediation
    Modeling Applications in Bioremediation of Hydrocarbon Pollutants
    Biodegradation of Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons (PAHs) by Microbes Isolated from the Marine Sponge Biemna fortis (Topsent 1897)
    A Comprehensive Review on the Bioremediation of Oil Spills
    The Small-Scale Microbial Processes for Remediation of Sediments Contaminated with Hydrocarbons
    Enzyme Activities in Contaminated Soil with Hydrocarbons
    Microbial Degradation of Petroleum Hydrocarbons
    Microbial Bioremediation of Petroleum Hydrocarbon: An Overview
    Microbial Degradation of Hydrocarbons in the Ecosystem
    Microbial Degradation of Hydrocarbons in the Environment: An Overview
    Plant-Microbe Association for Bioremediation of Hydrocarbon Substrates
    Bioaugmentation of Petroleum Hydrocarbon in Contaminated Soil : A Review
    Petroleum Microbiology under Extreme Conditions
    Microbial Degradation of Petroleum Hydrocarbons: An Overview
    Oil Spill Removal by Mycoremediation
    Treatment of Oily Waste Water Using Hydrogels
    Biosurfactants Produced by Microbacterium sp., isolated from Aquatic Macrophytes in Hydrocarbon-Contaminated area in the Rio Negro, Manaus, Amazonas
    Novel and Cost Effective Technologies for Hydrocarbon Bioremediation
    Role of Filamentous Fungi to Remove Petroleum Hydrocarbons from Environment
    Petroleum Biodegrading Property of Microbial Consortia from a contaminated site
    The Role of Microbes towards Biodegradation of Hydrocarbons
    Hydrocarbon Degradation
    A Review on the Bioremediation of Petroleum Hydrocarbons: Current State-of-the-Art.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Gianfranco Donelli.
    Contents:
    Methods for dynamic investigations of surface-attached in vitro bacterial and fungal biofilms / Claus Sternberg, Thomas Bjarnsholt, and Mark Shirtliff
    Aqueous two-phase system technology for patterning bacterial communities and biofilms / Mohammed Dwidar, Shuichi Takayama, and Robert J. Mitchell
    Quorum sensing in gram-positive bacteria : assay protocols for Staphylococcal agr and Enterococcal fsr systems / Akane Shojima and Jiro Nakayama
    Advanced techniques for in situ analysis of the biofilm matrix (structure, composition, dynamics) by means of laser scanning microscopy / Thomas R. Neu and John R. Lawrence
    Multiplex fluorescence in situ hybridization (M-FISH) and confocal laser scanning microscopy (CLSM) to analyze multispecies oral biofilms / Lamprini Karygianni, Elmar Hellwig, and Ali Al-Ahmad
    Field emission scanning electron microscopy of biofilm-growing bacteria Involved in nosocomial infections / Claudia Vuotto and Gianfranco Donelli
    Experimental approaches to investigating the vaginal biofilm microbiome / Marc M. Baum, Manjula Gunawardana, and Paul Webster
    Imaging bacteria and biofilms on hardware and periprosthetic tissue in orthopedic infections / Laura Nistico, Luanne Hall-Stoodley, and Paul Stoodley
    Animal models to evaluate bacterial biofilm development / Kim Thomsen, Hannah Trøstrup, and Claus Moser
    Animal models to investigate fungal biofilm formation / Jyotsna Chandra, Eric Pearlman, and Mahmoud A. Ghannoum
    Nonmammalian model systems to investigate fungal biofilms / Marios Arvanitis ... [et al.]
    Microbiological methods for target-oriented screening of biofilm inhibitors / Livia Leoni and Paolo Landini
    In vitro screening of antifungal compounds able to counteract biofilm development / Marion Girardot and Christine Imbert
    Biofilm matrix-degrading enzymes / Jeffrey B. Kaplan
    Efficacy evaluation of antimicrobial drug-releasing polymer matrices / Iolanda Francolini, Antonella Piozzi, and Gianfranco Donelli
    Antibiotic polymeric nanoparticles for biofilm-associated infection therapy / Wean Sin Cheow and Kunn Hadinoto
    Pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics of antibiotics in biofilm infections of Pseudomonas aeruginosa in vitro and in vivo / Wang Hengzhuang, Niels Høiby, and Oana Ciofu
    Contribution of confocal laser scanning microscopy in deciphering biofilm tridimensional structure and reactivity / Arnaud Bridier and Romain Briandet
    Chip calorimetry for evaluation of biofilm treatment with biocides, antibiotics, and biological agents / Frida Mariana Morais, Friederike Buchholz, and Thomas Maskow
    Bacteriophage attack as an anti-biofilm strategy / Sanna Sillankorva and Joana Azeredo
    Photodynamic therapy as a novel antimicrobial strategy against biofilm-based nosocomial infections : study protocols / Francesco Giuliani
    Capturing air-water interface biofilms for microscopy and molecular analysis / Margaret C. Henk
    Biofilm-growing bacteria involved in the corrosion of concrete wastewater pipes : protocols for comparative metagenomic analyses/ Vicente Gomez-Alvarez
    Culture-independent methods to study subaerial biofilm growing on biodeteriorated surfaces of stone cultural heritage and frescoes / Francesca Cappitelli, Federica Villa, and Andrea Polo
    Biofilms of thermophilic bacilli isolated from dairy processing plants and efficacy of sanitizers / Sara A. Burgess, Denise Lindsay, and Steve H. Flint.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Joginder Singh, Deepansh Sharma, Gaurav Kumar, Neeta Raj Sharma, editors.
    Summary: This book presents a comprehensive overview of the use of microorganisms and microbial metabolites as a future sustainable basis of agricultural, environmental and industrial developments. It provides a holistic approach to the latest advances in the utilization of various microorganism bioprospecting including their wide range of applications, traditional uses, modern practices, and designing strategies to harness their potential. In addition, it highlights advanced microbial bioremediation approaches, including genetic manipulation, metagenomics analysis and bacteriophage-based sensors for the detection of food-borne pathogens. Lastly, it elaborates on the latest advances regarding the role of microbes in the sustainable development of various industrial products.

    Contents:
    Intro; Contents; About the Editors; Part I: Microorganisms for Sustainable Agriculture and Environmental Applications;
    1: Small at Size, Big at Impact: Microorganisms for Sustainable Development; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Origin of Life and Microbes: Billion-Years-Old Connection; 1.3 Diversity of Microbial World; 1.4 Remarkable Survival and Adaptability of Microorganisms; 1.5 How Microbes Affect Nature and Life; 1.6 Human Microbiome; 1.7 Microbe-Plant Interactions; 1.8 Beneficial Roles and Uses of Microorganisms; 1.8.1 Microbial Cell Factories; 1.8.2 Fermented Foods and Probiotics 1.8.3 Industrial Products from Microbes1.8.4 Antibiotics and Biotherapeutics; 1.9 Conclusion and Future Directions; References;
    2: Bioherbicidal Concept: A Novel Strategy to Control Weeds; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Bioherbicide: Concepts and Approaches; 2.3 Mechanism of Herbicide Resistance Among Weeds; 2.4 Features Required for Probable Bioherbicide; 2.5 Steps in Bioherbicide Development; 2.6 Formulation of Mycoherbicide; 2.6.1 The Liquid Formulations; 2.6.2 Solid or Granular Formulations; 2.7 Constraints in Bioherbicide Development; 2.8 Successful Bioherbicides; References
    3: Endophytic Microorganisms as Bio-­inoculants for Sustainable Agriculture3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Plants and Associated Endophytes; 3.3 Endophytes in Sustainable Agriculture; 3.3.1 Actinomycetes; 3.3.2 Bacteria; 3.3.3 Fungi; 3.4 Conclusion and Future Prospects; References;
    4: Endophytes: A Gold Mine of Enzyme Inhibitors; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Endophytes: A Potential Resource of Bioactive Metabolites; 4.3 Enzyme Inhibitors; 4.3.1 Angiotensin Converting-Enzyme (ACE) Inhibitors; 4.3.2 Acetylcholinesterase Inhibitors; 4.3.3 Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor 5.3 Types of Bioremediation5.3.1 In Situ Bioremediation; 5.3.1.1 Biosparging; 5.3.1.2 Bioventing; 5.3.1.3 Bioaugmentation; 5.3.2 Ex Situ Bioremediation; 5.4 Phytoremediation; 5.4.1 Phytodegradation; 5.4.2 Phytovolatilization; 5.4.3 Phytostabilization; 5.4.4 Phytoextraction; 5.4.5 Rhizofiltration; 5.5 System of Microbial Remediation; 5.5.1 Cadmium (Cd); 5.5.2 Chromium (Cr); 5.5.3 Arsenic (As); 5.5.4 Lead (Pb); 5.5.5 Copper (Cu); 5.5.6 Zinc (Zn); 5.5.7 Cobalt (Co); 5.5.8 Nickel (Ni)
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    Jayanta Kumar Patra, Gitishree Das, Han-Seung Shin, editors.
    Summary: This edited book, is a collection of 25 chapters describing the recent advancements in the application of microbial technology in the food and pharmacology sector. The main focus of this book is application of microbes, food preservation techniques utilizing microbes, probiotics, seaweeds, algae, enzymatic abatement of urethane in fermentation of beverages, bioethanol production, pesticides, probiotic biosurfactants, drought tolerance, synthesis of application of oncolytic viruses in cancer treatment, microbe based metallic nanoparticles, agro chemicals, endophytes, metabolites, antibiotics etc. This book highlighted the significant aspects of the vast subject area of microbial biotechnology and their potential applications in food and pharmacology with various topics from eminent experts around the World. This book would serve as an excellent reference book for researchers and students in the Food Science, Food Biotechnology, Microbiology and Pharmaceutical fields.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Contributors; About the Editors; Part I: Application of Microbial Technology in Food;
    Chapter 1: Recent Food Preservation Techniques Employed in the Food Industry; 1.1 Introduction; 1.1.1 Basis of Food Preservation; 1.1.2 Major Food Preserving Technologies; 1.1.2.1 Low Temperature; 1.1.2.2 Reduction of Water Activity; 1.1.2.3 Vacuum and Modified-Atmosphere Packaging; 1.1.2.4 Acidification; 1.1.2.5 Uses of Food Preservatives; 1.1.2.6 Heat; 1.1.2.7 Physical Preservation Technologies; 1.1.3 Novel and Traditional Food Preserving Technology. 1.2 Recent Food Preservation Techniques Employed1.2.1 Novel Techniques of Food Preservation Based on Freezing; 1.2.1.1 High Pressure Freezing and Thawing; 1.2.1.2 Progressive Freeze Concentration (PFC); 1.2.1.3 Osmo-Dehydrofreezing; 1.2.1.4 Freezing in Ice Slurry and Immersion Freezing; 1.2.1.5 Use of Antifreeze Proteins (AFP); 1.2.2 Novel Techniques of Thermal Food Preservation; 1.2.2.1 High Temperature: Short Time (HTST) Pasteurization; 1.2.2.2 Non Thermal Food Preservation Techniques; 1.2.2.2.1 Irradiation; 1.2.2.2.2 Ultrasound; 1.2.2.2.3 Electrical Methods. 1.2.2.2.4 Ultrafiltration1.2.2.2.5 Anti-Microbials; 1.2.2.2.6 High Hydrostatic Pressure; 1.3 Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 2: Metagenomic Insights into Environmental Microbiome and Their Application in Food/Pharmaceutical Industry; 2.1 Introduction; 2.1.1 Metagenomics; 2.1.2 Metagenomics in Food and Pharmaceutical Industries; 2.2 Metagenomics in Food Industry; 2.2.1 Metagenomics of Probiotic and Prebiotic Foods; 2.2.2 Metagenomics for Detection of Foodborne Pathogens; 2.2.3 Antimicrobial Resistant Genes from Food and Food Products; 2.3 Metagenomics for Pharmaceutical Application. 2.3.1 Predicting Novel Antimicrobial Resistant Genes2.3.2 Screening Pharmaceutically Important Novel Compounds; 2.4 Overview of Metagenome Derived Enzymes for Food and Pharmaceutical Application; 2.4.1 Lipases; 2.4.2 Esterases; 2.4.3 Proteases; 2.4.4 β-Lactamases; 2.4.5 Other Pharmaceutically Important Enzymes; 2.5 Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 3: Changing Paradigm of Probiotics from Functional Foods to Biotherapeutic Agents; 3.1 What Are Probiotics?; 3.2 Probiotics as Bio-therapeutic Agents; 3.3 Gastrointestinal Cancer; 3.4 Obesity; 3.5 Diabetes; 3.6 Mental Health. 3.7 Probiotic Based Drug Delivery Systems3.8 Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 4: Microbial Valorization of Chitinous Bioresources for Chitin Extraction and Production of Chito-Oligomers and N-Acetylglucosamine: Trends, Perspectives and Prospects; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Chitin Extraction and Subsequent Generation of Chitosan, Oligosaccharides and Monosaccharides; 4.2.1 Chitin Extraction from Crustacean Shells; 4.2.1.1 Chemical Extraction; 4.2.1.2 Biological Reclamation; 4.2.1.2.1 Enzymatic Deprotenization; 4.2.1.2.2 Fermentative Deprotenization; 4.2.1.2.2.1 Lactic Acid Fermentation.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Ajar Nath Yadav, Ali Asghar Rastegari, Vijai Kumar Gupta, Neelam Yadav, editors.
    Summary: Our country's cultural legacy is one of the worlds most diverse, drawing millions of visitors every year to our convents and monuments, and to our museums, libraries, concert halls and festivals. In addition, it is a dynamic trigger of economic activity and jobs. Among the various scientific branches, microbial biotechnology offers an innovative and precise approach to the complexity of problems that restorers face in their daily work. This book discusses a range of topics, including the biodiversity of microbial communities from various cultural heritage monuments, microbial biotechnological cleaning techniques, the role of bacterial fungal communities for the conservation of cultural heritage, and microbial enzymes and their potential applications as biorestoration agents. Written by internationally recognized experts, and providing up-to-date and detailed insights into microbial biotechnology approaches to cultural heritage monuments, the book is a valuable resource for biological scientists, especially microbiologists, microbial biotechnologists, biochemists and microbial biotechnologists.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    Editors and Contributors
    About the Editors
    Contributors
    1: Microbial Community Present on the Reverse Side of a Deteriorated Canvas
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Biodeterioration of Paintings
    1.3 Microbial Communities in Biodeterioration
    1.3.1 Algae and Cyanobacteria
    1.3.2 Fungi as Biodeteriogens of Canvas Paintings
    1.3.3 Bacteria as Biodeteriogens of Canvas Paintings
    1.4 Conclusion and Future Prospects
    References
    2: Microbial Biocleaning Technologies for Cultural Heritage: Current Status and Future Challenges 2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Biocleaning Technologies
    2.2.1 Role of Sulphates
    2.2.2 Role of Nitrates
    2.2.3 Role of Organic Matter
    2.3 Chemical Degradation
    2.4 Preventive Care
    2.5 Cleaning Methods
    2.6 Repair and Restoration Techniques
    2.6.1 Sistine Chapel
    2.7 Conclusion and Future Prospects
    References
    3: Role of Bacterial Communities to Prevent the Microbial Growth on Cultural Heritage
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Common Organisms Involved in the Biodeterioration
    3.3 Type of Damage Identification
    3.3.1 Cultural Heritage and Damage Type 3.3.2 Type of Conservation Treatment
    3.4 Current Scenario Concerning Use of Microorganisms in Preservation of Cultural Heritage
    3.5 Certain Chemical Compounds, Role of Microbes and Literature Available About Managing Them
    3.5.1 Microbial CaCO3 for Strength Improvement of Stony Monuments
    3.5.2 Microbial CaCO3 for Surface Consolidation
    3.5.3 Microbial CaCO3 for Self-healing of Cracks in Concrete
    3.6 Control of Biodeteriorating Agents
    3.6.1 Preventive Methods
    3.6.2 Role of Natural Biocides to Prevent Microbial Growth on Cultural Heritage (Biocontrol Methods) 3.6.3 Biocleaning and Biocidal Methods
    3.6.3.1 Organic Matter
    3.6.3.2 Nitrates
    3.6.4 Routine Maintenance of Buildings
    3.6.5 Housekeeping
    3.6.6 Documentation of Collections
    3.7 Factors Influencing Biodeterioration
    3.8 Conclusion and Future Prospects
    References
    4: Entomogenous Fungi and the Conservation of the Cultural Heritage
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Impendence to Cultural Heritage
    4.3 Fungal Mechanisms in Deterioration of Cultural Heritage (Mycodeterioration)
    4.3.1 Entomopathogenic Fungi
    4.4 Mechanisms Comprising Mycodeterioration of Paintings 4.4.1 Mural Paintings
    4.4.2 Canvas Paintings
    4.5 Mechanisms Comprising Mycodeterioration of Textual Heritage
    4.5.1 Papyrus
    4.5.2 Parchment
    4.5.3 Paper
    4.6 Mechanisms Comprising Mycodeterioration of Fabric
    4.6.1 Textiles
    4.6.2 Cellulose Fibres
    4.6.3 Wool Fibres
    4.6.4 Silk Fibres
    4.7 Mechanisms Comprising Mycodeterioration of Stone
    4.8 Conservation of Cultural Heritage
    4.8.1 Mechanical Methods
    4.8.1.1 Physical Methods
    4.8.1.2 Chemical Methods
    4.8.1.3 Biological Methods
    4.9 Cleaning Agents
    4.9.1 Cleaning Agents for Paper and Painting Heritage
    4.9.2 Modern Chemical Agents for the Conservation and Restoration of Cultural Heritage.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Nicolas Derome, editor.
    Summary: This book sheds light on the major functions of microbial communities in aquaculture ecosystems, showing that by recycling nutrients, degrading organic matter and preventing disease outbreaks, a variety of microbes are truly beneficial to a wide range of aquaculture industries. It discusses how deteriorating environmental quality enables some microbial strains to trigger disease, describes the development of highly sustainable tools to improve water quality, and identifies crucial factors that endanger microbial homeostasis in aquaculture ecosystems. The book also covers post-antibiotic approaches for preventing and treating opportunistic microbial infections based on harnessing environmental and fish-associated microbial communities. Furthermore, it explores how manipulating and engineering these complex microbial communities using bio-agents such as probiotics, phages, natural nutritional additives, or with fine-tuned biofilters will open the door for new ways to develop a more sustainable and cost-effective aquaculture industry. Including an accessible presentation of modern high-throughput sequencing technology to identify host-microbial interactions in aquaculture ecosystems, this book is a valuable resource for scientists, aquaculture and fishery experts, sustainability enthusiasts and scholars in the areas of biology and marine agriculture.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; The Rise and Fall of Antibiotics in Aquaculture; 1 A Brief History of Antibiotics; 1.1 Discovery of Antibiotics; 1.2 First Steps in the Use of Antibiotics in Aquaculture; 2 The Phenomenon of Antibiotic Resistance; 2.1 Why Does a Bacterium Become Resistant?; 2.2 How Does a Bacterium Become Resistant?; 2.3 The Role of Aquaculture in Antibiotic Resistance; 3 Adverse Effects of Antibiotherapy on Fish Microbiota; 3.1 Roles of the Microbiota in Fish Health; 3.2 Collateral Targeting of the Microbiota by Antimicrobial Compounds; 3.3 Over-elicitation of Inflammatory Responses 1 The Enemy of My Enemy Is My Friend2 The Biology of Phages; 3 Phagotherapy in the Digital Age: What if We Could Make a Custom Phage?; 4 Phage Therapy in Aquaculture; 5 Toward Phagotherapy to Control Furunculosis; 6 Keep Going Until Efficient Phagotherapy; References; Controlling Factors for Community Assembly in Developing Cod Larvae (Gadus morhua); 1 Introduction; 2 Effect of Live Feed Diets on Cod Larval Microbiota; 2.1 Summary of Research Results; 3 Effect of Water Treatment and Water Microbiota on Microbiota and Gene Expression in Cod Larvae; 3.1 Summary of Research Results 2.1 Atlantic Salmon (Salmo salar)2.1.1 Compositional Shifts During Freshwater-Seawater Migration; 2.1.2 Influence of the Diet and Protein Sources; 2.1.3 Antibiotherapy; 2.1.4 Captivity; 2.2 Rainbow Trout (Oncorhynchus mykiss); 2.2.1 Influence of Nutrition; 2.2.2 Diet-Immunity Interactions; 2.2.3 Pathogen Inhibition; 2.3 Brook Charr (Salvelinus fontinalis); 2.3.1 Microbiota Structure and the Stress Response; 2.3.2 Symbiont-Based Therapeutic Tools Against Opportunistic Pathogens; 3 An Overview of High-Throughput Methods and Their Contribution to Microbiota Studies 3.1 Whole-Genome Sequencing (for Specific Microbes)3.2 Metabarcoding (Who Is There?); 3.3 Metagenomics (What Are They Doing?); 4 Future Perspectives for Microbiota Modulation; 4.1 Host-Microbiota Interactions in Light of the One Health Perspective; 4.2 Fine-Grained Modulation Using Dietary Supplements; 4.2.1 Probiotics; 4.2.2 Prebiotics and Synbiotics; 4.2.3 Phage Therapy; 4.3 Coarse-Grained Modulation: The Case of K-Selection; 4.4 Toward Real-Time Microbiota Monitoring; 5 Conclusion; References; Would Bacteriophages Be a New Old Complement to Antibiotics in Aquaculture? 3.4 Permanent Alteration of the Microbiota3.5 Increased Carrying Capacity for Resistant and/or Pathogenic Bacteria; 4 Aquatic Pathogens Resistant to Antibiotics: The Case of Aeromonas salmonicida; 5 Antibiotic Alternatives and the One Health Perspective; 6 Conclusion; References; Host-Microbiota Interactions and Their Importance in Promoting Growth and Resistance to Opportunistic Diseases in Salmonids; 1 Introduction; 1.1 Salmonid Aquaculture and Related Stressors; 1.2 Host-Microbiota Interactions and Their Involvement in Health; 2 An Overview of Salmonid Microbiomes
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Shan-Ho Chou, Nicolas Giuliani, Vincent T. Lee, Ute Römling, editors.
    Summary: This book explores the broad and diverse biological and physiological impacts of established and newly discovered cyclic di-nucleotide second messenger signaling systems, while also providing descriptions of the intriguing biochemical characteristics of multiple turnover enzymes and receptors. The respective chapters discuss the commonalities and diversity of cyclic di-GMP, cyclic di-AMP and recently discovered cyclic GMP-AMP signaling systems in manifold Gram-negative and Gram-positive bacteria. The global human pathogens Mycobacterium tuberculosis, Vibrio cholerae, Salmonella typhimurium, Escherichia coli and Streptococcus pneumoniae, the facultative human pathogen Pseudomonas aeruginosa, global plant pathogens as exemplified by Xanthomonas campestris and Burkholderia spp., and the omnipresent probiotic Lactobacilli, as well as environmentally important photoautotrophic cyanobacteria, the multicellular Myxococcus xanthus, and chemolithotrophic Acidithiobacillus are among the representatives of the microbial kingdom that are described. In turn, the various aspects of bacterial physiology affected by these signaling systems- e.g. biofilm formation and dispersal, the cell cycle, motility, virulence, production of antimicrobials, fundamental metabolism and osmohomeostasis - are discussed in detail in the context of different microorganisms. Dedicated chapters focus on the population diversity of cyclic dinucleotide signaling systems, their tendency to be horizontally transferred, the cyclic di-GMP signaling system in the social amoeba Dictyostelium, honorary cyclic (di)nucleotides, and the development of strategies for interfering with cyclic dinucleotide signaling in order to manipulate microbial behavior. Taken together, the chapters provide an authoritative source of information for a broad readership: beginners and advanced researchers from various disciplines; individuals seeking a broad overview of cyclic di-nucleotide signaling; and those who want to learn more about specific aspects. Also featuring reviews with a forward-looking perspective, the book offers a valuable source of inspiration for future research directions.

    Contents:
    Part I: Biochemistry/Structural Biology
    Enzymes
    Chapter 1: Cyclic Dinucleotide Signaling In Mycobacteria
    Chapter 2: Structure and regulation of EAL domain proteins
    Chapter 3: Insights into the molecular basis of biofilm dispersal from crystal structures of di-domain containing proteins
    Chapter 4: Structure and function of HD-GYP phosphodiesterases
    Chapter 5: A unified catalytic mechanism for c-di-NMP hydrolysis by DHH/DHHA1 phosphodiesterases
    Chapter 6: Enzymatic degradation of linear dinucleotide intermediates of cyclic dinucleotides
    Part II: Biochemistry/Structural Biology
    Receptors
    Chapter 7: Detection of cyclic dinucleotide binding proteins
    Chapter 8: Non-canonical c-di-GMP binding modes
    Part III: Biochemistry/Structural Biology
    Sensing
    Chapter 9: Sensory domains that control cyclic di-GMP-modulating proteins: a critical frontier in bacterial signal transduction
    Part IV: Cyclic di-AMP biochemistry and physiology
    Chapter 10: Metabolic regulation by cyclic di-AMP signaling
    Chapter 11: Osmoregulation via cyclic-di-AMP signaling
    Part V: Population diversity
    Chapter 12: Measuring individual cell c-di-GMP: Identifying population diversity and c-di-GMP heterogeneity.-Part VI: Cyclic di-GMP and exopolysaccharide regulation
    Chapter 13: Activation of bacterial cellulose biosynthesis by cyclic-di-GMP
    Chapter 14: The Regulation of Alginate Biosynthesis viaC-di-GMPSignaling
    Part VII: Environmental bacteria
    Chapter 15: Cyclic di-GMP Signaling in Bacillus subtilis
    Chapter 16: C-di-GMP signaling systems in the Gram-positive Bacillus cereus group
    Chapter 17: Cyclic-di-AMP in Bacillus subtilisbiofilm formation.-Chapter 18: Regulation by c-di-GMP in Myxococcusxanthus
    Chapter 19: Light-regulated nucleotidesecond messenger signalingin cyanobacteria
    Chapter 20: C-di-GMP-dependent regulation of antibiotic biosynthesis in Lysobacter
    Chapter 21: Cyclic di-GMP signalingin extreme acidophilic bacteria
    Part VIII: Pathogens
    Chapter 22: Signals modulating cyclic di-GMP pathways in Vibrio cholera
    Chapter 23: Cyclic di-GMP regulation of gene expression
    Chapter 24: Cyclic di-GMP signaling in Salmonella enterica serovar Typhimurium
    Chapter 25: Cyclic di-GMP signaling in the phytopathogen Xanthomonas campestris pv. Campestris
    Chapter 26: Cyclic di-AMP in Mycobacterium tuberculosis
    Chapter 27: Cyclic di-AMP signaling in Streptococcus pneumonia
    Part IX: Gram-negative bacteria
    Chapter 28: Regulation of cyclic-di-GMP signaling in Pseudomonas aeruginosa
    Chapter 29: Unconventional Cyclic di-GMPSignalling in Escherichia coli
    Chapter 30: Cyclic di-GMP in Burkholderia spp
    Chapter 31: Cyclic di-GMP and the regulation of biofilm dispersion
    Part X: Cyclic di-GMP signaling in eukaryotes
    Chapter 32: Cyclic-di-GMP activates adenylate cyclase A and protein kinase A to induce stalk formationin Dictyostelium
    Part XI: Interference Strategies
    Chapter 33: Targeting cyclic di-nucleotide signaling with small molecules
    Part XII: Novel cyclic di-nucleotides
    Chapter 34: Cyclic di-GMP signaling gone astray: cGAMP signaling via Hypr GGDEF and HD-GYP enzymes
    Chapter 35: Microbial cyclic GMP-AMP signaling pathways.-Part XIII: Honorary cyclic nucleotides
    Chapter 36: 2',3'-cyclic mononucleotide metabolism and possible roles in bacterial physiology
    Part XIV: Horizontal gene transfer
    Chapter 37: Horizontal transfer of c-di-GMP associated genes. Theoretical underpinnings and future perspectives.-Part XV: Conclusion
    Chapter 38: Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Shiwani Guleria Sharma, Neeta Raj Sharma, Mohit Sharma, editors.
    Summary: This book focuses on the application of microbes in all fields of biology. There is an urgent need to understand and explore new microbes, their biological activities, genetic makeup and further opportunities for utilizing them. The book is divided into sections, highlighting the application of microbes in agriculture, nanotechnology, genetic engineering, bioremediation, industry, medicine and forensic sciences, and describing potential future advances in these fields. It also explores the potential role of microbes in space and how they might support life on a different planet.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Microbial ecosystem and anthropogenic impacts
    Part 1. Microbes in Agriculture
    Chapter 2. Recent advances in Plant-microbe interaction
    Chapter 3. Microbes in crop production: Formulation and Application
    Chapter 4. Microorganisms improving food quality and safety
    Chapter 5. Microbes in Soil and their Metagenomics
    Part 2. Microbes in Nanotechnology
    Chapter 6. Microbial cell factories in nanotechnology
    Chapter 7. Nanotechnology and food microbiology
    Part 3. Microbes in Genetic Engineering
    Chapter 8. Bioengineered microbes in disease therapy
    Chapter 9. Benefits and biohazards of microbial recombinants
    Part 4. Microbial Enzymes & Applications
    Chapter 10. Extremophile Microorganisms and Their Industrial Applications
    Chapter 11. Innovative techniques for improving microbial enzyme production
    Chapter 12. Microbial enzymes from in vitro to market
    Part 5. Microbes in Bioremediation
    Chapter 13. Microbial clean up strategy for polluted water
    Chapter 14. Microbial clean up strategy for eating garbage
    Part 6. Microbes in Industries
    Chapter 15. Microbes in Food and beverage industry
    Chapter 16. Microbes in pharmaceutical industry
    Chapter 17. Industrial Potential of Microbial Enzymes
    Part 7. Microbes in Medicine
    Chapter 18. Living medicines for health and disease management
    Chapter 19. Fighting microbes with microbes
    Chapter 20. Impact of Human Microbiome on health
    Part 8. Microbes in Forensic Science
    Chapter 21. An Introduction to Microbial forensics
    Chapter 22. Microbial Forensics: A new boon to Legal Justice
    Part 9. Microbes in Space
    Chapter 23. Microbes supporting life off-planet.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    editors, Tulasi Satyanarayana, Bhavdish Narain Johri and Subrata Kumar Das.
    Summary: This book discusses microbial diversity in various habitats and environments, its role in ecosystem maintenance, and its potential applications (e.g. biofertilizers, biocatalysts, antibiotics, other bioactive compounds, exopolysaccharides etc.). The respective chapters, all contributed by renowned experts, offer cutting-edge information in the fields of microbial ecology and biogeography. The book explains the reasons behind the occurrence of various biogeographies and highlights recent tools (e.g. metagenomics) that can aid in biogeography studies by providing information on nucleic acid sequence data, thereby directly identifying microorganisms in various habitats and environments. In turn, the book describes how human intervention results in depletion of biodiversity, and how numerous hotspots are now losing their endemic biodiversity, resulting in the loss of many ecologically important microorganisms. In closing, the book underscores the importance of microbial diversity for sustainable ecosystems.

    Contents:
    Volume 1. Microbial Diversity in Normal & Extreme Environments Section I: Introduction to microbial diversity 1. Emerging concepts in bacterial taxonomy by Ch. V. Ramana 2. Bioinformatics Tools for Microbial Diversity Analysis by M. Krishna Mohan 3. Application of genomics to understand the pathogenic microbial diversity by Subrata K. Das 4. Fungal Diversity; Global perspectives and Ecosystem Dynamics by B.N. Johri Section II: Microbes in normal and extreme environments 5. Marine microbial diversity for sustainable development by Anil Kumar 6. Diversity of microbes in hot springs and their sustainable use by Subrata K. Das 7. Thermophilic fungal diversity in sustainable development by Bijender Singh 8. Microbiome of the deep terrestrial subsurface by Pinaki Sar 9. Marine fungal diversity
    the present status and future challenges by V.V. Sharma 10. Diversity of iron and sulphur oxidisers in sulphide mine leachates by S.R. Dave 11. Distribution and bio-prospecting potentials of actinobacteria from Indian mangrove ecosystems by Syed Dastager 12. Gut microbiome and its impact on human health by Syed Dastager 13. Cyanobacterial diversity and production of value-added proteases by S.N. Bagchi 14. Utility of microbial diversity in mitigating climate change by Anjana Sharma 15. Microbial diversity in waste treatment by I.S. Thakur 16. Cyanobacteria as future biofuel: Facts and Figments by Ashish K. Bhatnagar 17. Halocin diversity among halophilic archaea and their potential applications by Santosh Tiwari 18. Microbial Diversity and Dynamics in Hydrocarbon Resource Environments (HRE) by Akhil Agrawal 19. Mining human microbiome for therapeutics by Yogesh Souche 20. Microbiome as source of novel bioactive compounds by Rakesh Sharma 21. Conclusions 22. Subject index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Tulasi Satyanarayana, Subrata Kumar Das, Bhavdish Narain Johri, editors.
    Summary: This volume comprehensively reviews recent advances in our understanding of the diversity of microbes in various types of terrestrial ecosystems, such as caves, deserts and cultivated fields. It is written by leading experts, and highlights the culturable microbes identified using conventional approaches, as well as non-culturable ones unveiled with metagenomic and microbiomic approaches. It discusses the role of microbes in ecosystem sustainability and their potential biotechnological applications. The book further discusses the diversity and utility of ectomycorrhizal and entomopathogenic fungi and yeasts that dwell on grapes, it examines the biotechnological applications of specific microbes such as lichens, xylan- and cellulose-saccharifying bacteria and archaea, chitinolytic bacteria, methanogenic archaea and pathogenic yeasts.

    Contents:
    Part 1. Soil and Agroecosystem
    Chapter 1. Cave microbiome for human welfare
    Chapter 2. 2. Diversity of nitrogen fixing symbiotic rhizobia with special reference to Indian Thar Desert
    Chapter 3. Soil microbiota and sustainable Jhum agroecosystem
    Chapter 4. Diversity in Type III secreting systems (T3SS) in Legume-Rhizobial symbiosis
    Chapter 5. Microbe based novel biostimulants for sustainable crop production
    Chapter 6. Ectomycorrhizal diversity and tree sustainability
    Chapter 7. Diversity of AM fungi in relation to sustainable plant production systems
    Chapter 8. Microbial diversity on grapes and other fruits: Role and significance in fermentation
    Chapter 9. Harnessing entomopathogenic fungi for enhanced farm productivity and profitability
    Chapter 10. Bioactive molecules obtained from microbes of the Sundarbans
    Chapter 11. Microbiome engineering in rhizosphere: Potential in improving food security
    Chapter 12. Dynamics of plant-microbiome and its effect on the plant traits
    Part 2. Diversity of Specific microbial Groups
    Chapter 13. Phylogenetic diversity of lichen photobionts, its coevolution with mycobionts, and potential bioprospects
    Chapter 14. Diversity in xylan-degrading prokaryotes and their bioprospects
    Chapter 15. Diversity in cellulose degrading microbes and their cellulases: role in ecosystem sustainability and potential applications
    Chapter 16. New paradigm in degradation of lignocellulosic biomass and discovery of novel microbial strains
    Chapter 17. Secondary metabolism in Trichoderma- chemical and genomic diversity
    Chapter 18. Diversity of chitinase producing bacteria and their possible role in plant pest control
    Chapter 19. Diversity in endophytic microbes and their bioactive compounds
    Chapter 20. Wild edible mushroom of North West Himalaya
    their nutritional, neutraceutical and sociobiological Aspects
    Chapter 21. Methanogens for humanwelfare: more boon than bane
    Chapter 22. Genetic diversity in pathogenic yeasts.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    María Eugenia Farías, editor.
    Summary: The Central Andean Altiplane represents a unique extreme environment due to its high altitude, closed basins that modulate the salt pans and saline wetlands surrounded by deserts, as well as the considerable influence of volcanic activity. UV radiation, arsenic content, high salinity, alkalinity and low dissolved oxygen levels, together with extreme daily temperature fluctuations and oligotrophic conditions, shape an environment that resembles the early Earth and, even more, extraterrestrial conditions. By developing simple biofilms stratified microbial mats or complex microbialites, extreme microbial ecosystems, colonize and thrived in different environments like salt flats, wetlands, lakes volcano vents, geysers and deserts. This book presents our current understanding of these amazing ecosystems, providing a basis for their protection and sustainable utilization. The main audience for this book included researchers and graduate students as well as professionals working in the government, mining industry and similar activities. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    [I]. General considerations: Origin and evolution of the Central Andes : deserts, salars, lakes, and volcanoes / Ricardo N. Alonso, Walter Rojas
    Modern microbial mats and endoevaporite systems in Andean lakes : a general approach / María Eugenia Farías, Luis Alberto Saona Acuña. [II]. Preandean and Andean Atacama Desert : life at limits: The desert polyextreme environment and endolithic habits / Jacek Wierzchos, Carmen Ascaso, Octavio Artieda, María Cristina Casero
    Preandean Atacama desert endolithic microbiology / María Cristina Casero, Victoria Meslier, Jacek Wierzchos, Jocelyne DiRuggiero
    Desert biosignatures / Petr Vítek, Jacek Wierzchos
    Microbial characterization of Andean peatland's soil / Carolina Belfiore, Ana Paula Santos, Alejandra Leonor Valdez, Manuel Contreras Leiva, María Eugenia Farías. [III]. Life in Andean volcanoes and fumaroles: Of microbes and mummies : tales of microbial activity and inactivity at 6000 m a.s.l. / Steven K. Schmidt, Preston Sowell, Zachary R. Schubert, Lara Vimercati, Adam J. Solon, Dorota L. Porazinska et al.
    A unique natural laboratory to study polyextremophile microorganisms : Diamante Lake as a window to the origin of life / Tatiana Stepanenko, Mariana N. Soria, Luis Alberto Saona Acuña, Agustina I. Lencina, María Eugenia Farías. [IV]. Evaporitic microbial ecosystems at salars : living in the salt: Microbial communities composition, activity, and dynamics at Salar de Huasco : a polyextreme environment in the Chilean Altiplano / Cristina Dorador, Verónica Molina, Martha Hengst, Yoanna Eissler, Marcela Cornejo, Camila Fernández et al.
    Prokaryotic diversity at the hypersaline Laguna Tebenquiche in the Salar de Atacama, Chile / Ana Beatriz Fernández, Pieter T. Visscher, María Cecilia Rasuk, Manuel Contreras Leiva, María Eugenia Farías
    Complete characterization of stratified ecosystems of the Salar de Llamara (Atacama Desert) / María Cecilia Rasuk, Manuel Contreras Leiva, Daniel Kurth, María Eugenia Farías
    Microbial diversity in Athalassohaline Argentinean salterns / Merit del Rocío Mora-Ruiz, Carlos Díaz-Gil. [V]. Carbonatic microbialites at Central Andean lakes: Characterization of microbialites and microbial mats of the Laguna Negra hypersaline lake (Puna of Catamarca, Argentina) / Flavia Jaquelina Boidi, Estela Cecilia Mlewski, Fernando Javier Gomez, Emmanuelle Gérard
    Extreme microbiology at Laguna Socompa : a high-altitude Andean lake (3570 m a.s.l.) in Salta, Argentina / Virginia Helena Albarracín, Fátima Silvina Galván, María Eugenia Farías
    Mats and microbialites from Laguna La Brava / María Cecilia Rasuk, Pieter T. Visscher, Manuel Contreras Leiva, María Eugenia Farías
    The carbonate system in hypersaline lakes : the case of Laguna Negra (in the Puna Region of Catamarca, Argentina) / Fernando Javier Gomez, Flavia Jaquelina Boidi, Estela Cecilia Mlewski, Emmanuelle Gérard. [VI]. Generalities and particularities of microbial ecosystems at the Central the Andes: Integral prospection of Andean microbial ecosystem project / María Eugenia Farías, Patricio G. Villafañe, Agustina I. Lencina
    Linear megaplasmids spreading in the Andean resistome / Martin Wagenknecht, María Florencia Pérez, Julián Rafael Dib
    Arsenic and its biological role : From early Earth to current Andean microbial ecosystems / Luis Alberto Saona Acuña, Mariana N. Soria, Patricio G. Villafañe, Tatiana Stepanenko, María Eugenia Farías.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital/Print
    editor, Mark Lyte.
    Contents:
    Microbial Endocrinology: An Ongoing Personal Journey
    New Trends and Perspectives in Evolutionary Considerations of Neurotransmitters in Microbial, Plant and Animal Cells
    Catecholamine-directed Epithelial Cell Interactions With Bacteria in the Intestinal Mucosa
    Modulation of the Interaction of Enteric Bacteria with Intestinal Mucosa
    Dietary Catechols and their Relationship to Microbial Endocrinology
    Mechanisms by Which Catecholamines Induce Growth in Gram-Negative and Gram-Positive Human Pathogens
    Molecular Profiling: Catecholamine Modulation of Gene Expression in Escherichia coli O157:H7 and Salmonella enterica serovar Typhimurium
    Microbial Endocrinology of Pseudomonas aeruginosa
    Interkingdom Chemical Signaling in Enterohemorrhagic Escherichia coli O157:H7
    Role of Microbial Endocrinology in Periodontal Disease
    Staphylococci, Catecholamine Inotropes and Hospital-Acquired Infections
    Experimental Design Considerations for In Vitro Microbial
    The Role of the Microbiome in the Relationship of Asthma and Affective Disorders
    Psychological Stress, Immunity and Effects on Indigenous Flora
    Microbiome to Brain: Unraveling the Multidirectional Axes of Communication
    Mycologic Endocrinology.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital/Print
    Mark Lyte, John F. Cryan, editors.
    Summary: "The field of microbial endocrinology is expressly devoted to understanding the mechanisms by which the microbiota (bacteria within the microbiome) interact with the host ("us"). This interaction is a two-way street and the driving force that governs these interactions are the neuroendocrine products of both the host and the microbiota. Chapters include neuroendocrine hormone-induced changes in gene expression and microbial endocrinology and probiotics. This is the first in a series of books dedicated to understanding how bi-directional communication between host and bacteria represents the cutting edge of translational medical research, and hopefully identifies new ways to understand the mechanisms that determine health and disease"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Part 1. Basic concepts underlying the microbiota-gut-brain axis. Microbial endocrinology and the microbiota-gut-brain axis / Mark Lyte
    Utilizing "omics" tools to study the complex gut ecosystem / Anthony Fodor
    The enteric nervous system and gastrointestinal innervation: integrated local and central control / John B. Furness, Brid P. Callaghan, Leni R. Rivera, and Hyun-Jung Cho
    Intestinal barrier function and the brain-gut axis / Carmen Alonso, María Vicario, Marc Pigrau, Beatriz Lobo, and Javier Santos
    Vagal pathways for microbiome-brain-gut axis communication / Paul Forsythe, John Bienenstock, and Wolfgang A. Kunze
    The brain-gut axis in health and disease / Yasser Al Omran and Qasim Aziz
    part 2. Mechanistic factors influencing the microbiota-gut-brain axis. Gastrointestinal hormones and their targets / Jens F. Rehfeld
    Microbiome, HPA axis and production of endocrine hormones in the gut / Nobuyuki Sudo
    Neuropeptides and the microbiota-gut-brain axis / Peter Holzer and Aitak Farzi
    Bacterial neuroactive compounds produced by psychobiotics / Rebecca Wall, John F. Cryan, R. Paul Ross, Gerald F. Fitzgerald, Timothy G. Dinand, and Catherine Stanton
    Multidirectional chemical signalling between mammalian hosts, resident microbiota, and invasive pathogens: neuroendocrine hormone-induced changes in bacterial gene expression / Michail H. Karavolos and C.M. Anjam Khan
    Influence of stressor-induced nervous system activation on the intestinal microbiota and the importance for immunomodulation / Michael T. Bailey
    part 3. The microbiota-gut-brain axis in health and disease. The effects of inflammation, infection and antibiotics on the microbiota-gut-brain axis / Premysl Bercik and Stephen M. Collins
    Microbiota, inflammation and obesity / Yolanda Sanz and Angela Moya-Pérez
    Microbiota, immunoregulatory old friends and psychiatric disorders / Graham A.W. Rock, Charles L. Raison, and Christopher A. Lowry
    Microbiota-gut-brain axis and cognitive function / Mélanie G. Gareau
    The impact of microbiota on brain and behavior: mechanisms & therapeutic potential / Yuliya E. Borre, Rachel D. Moloney, Gerard Clarke, Timothy G. Dinan, and John F. Cryan
    Neuroimaging the microbiome-gut-brain axis / Kirsten Tillisch and Jennifer S. Labus
    The future of probiotics for disorders of the brain-gut axis / Eamonn M.M. Quigley and Fergus Shanahan
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Naveen Kumar Arora, Jitendra Mishra, Vaibhav Mishra, editors.
    Summary: "Microbial Enzymes: Roles and applications in industry" offers an essential update on the field of microbial biotechnology, and presents the latest information on a range of microbial enzymes such as fructosyltransferase, laccases, amylases, lipase, and cholesterol oxidase, as well as their potential applications in various industries. Production and optimisation technologies for several industrially relevant microbial enzymes are also addressed. In recent years, genetic engineering has opened up new possibilities for redesigning microbial enzymes that are useful in multiple industries, an aspect that the book explores. In addition, it demonstrates how some of the emerging issues in the fields of agriculture, environment and human health can be resolved with the aid of green technologies based on microbial enzymes. The topics covered here will not only provide a better understanding of the commercial applications of microbial enzymes, but also outline futuristic approaches to use microbial enzymes as driver of industrial sustainability. Lastly, the book is intended to provide readers with an overview of recent applications of microbial enzymes in various industrial sectors, and to pique researchers interest in the development of novel microbial enzyme technologies to meet the changing needs of industry.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Editors
    1: Fructosyltransferase Enzymes for Microbial Fructan Production
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Fructan Diversity and Function
    1.3 Biosynthesis of Fructans
    1.4 Microbial Fructan Production
    1.4.1 Enzymatic Production
    1.4.1.1 Whole-Cell Synthesis
    1.4.1.2 Production with Isolated Enzymes
    1.4.1.3 Production by Hydrolysis of Fructans
    1.4.2 Immobilization Technology
    1.5 Microbial Fructosyltransferases
    1.5.1 Mechanism of Action
    1.5.1.1 Enzyme Structure and Function
    1.5.1.2 Physicochemical Properties 1.5.2 Substrate Specificity
    1.5.2.1 Role of Active Site in Substrate Specificity
    1.5.2.2 Donor and Acceptor Specificities Among Microorganisms
    1.5.2.3 Cofactor Requirements in Substrate Preference
    1.5.2.4 Specificity in Structure
    1.5.3 Reaction Specificity
    1.5.3.1 Effect of pH and Ionic Strength
    1.5.3.2 Effect of Temperature
    1.5.3.3 Effects of Substrate and Enzyme Concentrations
    1.5.3.4 Effects of Solvents
    1.5.3.5 Effect of Inhibitors
    1.5.3.6 Effect of Reaction Time
    1.6 Industrial Applications of Microbial Fructosyltransferases 1.6.1 Applications of Inulin Produced by Microbial Inulosucrases
    1.6.1.1 Food Industry
    1.6.1.2 Medicine
    1.6.1.3 Pharmaceuticals
    1.6.1.4 Animal Feed
    1.6.2 Applications of Levan Produced by Microbial Levansucrases
    1.6.2.1 Food Industry
    1.6.2.2 Medicine
    1.6.2.3 Pharmaceuticals
    1.6.2.4 Cosmetics
    1.6.2.5 Bioseparation
    1.6.2.6 Packaging
    1.6.2.7 Aquaculture
    1.7 Conclusion
    References
    2: Exploitation of Saccharomyces cerevisiae Enzymes in Food Processing and Preparation of Nutraceuticals and Pharmaceuticals
    2.1 Introduction 2.2 Enzyme Production
    2.2.1 Overall Enzyme Production Process
    2.2.2 Cell Disruption and Purification Methods for Enzymatic Fraction Recovery
    2.3 Biotechnological Tools for Improving Enzyme Properties
    2.4 S. cerevisiae Enzymes
    2.4.1 Pectinases
    2.4.2 Chitinases
    2.4.3 Invertases
    2.4.4 Catalases
    2.4.5 Tannases
    2.4.6 Amylases
    2.4.7 Inulinases
    2.4.8 Cellulases
    2.4.9 Lipases
    2.4.10 Laccases
    2.4.11 Proteases
    2.5 Recent Applications of S. cerevisiae Enzymes
    2.5.1 Dairy Products
    2.5.2 Beverages (Wine, Beer, Juices) 2.5.3 Sweeteners
    2.5.4 Bakery
    2.5.5 Protein Hydrolysates/Autolysates
    2.5.6 Cosmeceuticals
    2.5.7 Biofuel Industry
    2.6 Conclusion
    References
    3: Laccase: Recombinant Expression, Engineering and Its Promising Applications
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Cloning and Expression of Fungal and Mushroom Laccases
    3.3 Cloning and Expression of Actinobacterial Laccases
    3.4 Cloning and Expression of Bacterial Laccases
    3.5 Laccase Engineering
    3.6 Multifaceted Applications of Recombinant Laccases
    3.7 Conclusion
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Vijay Tripathi, Pradeep Kumar, Pooja Tripathi, Amit Kashore, editors.
    Summary: "In recent decades, significant advances in new methodologies like DNA sequencing and high-throughput sequencing have been used to identify microorganisms and monitor their interactions with different environments. Microbial genomics techniques are opening new approaches to microbiology by revealing how microorganisms affect human beings and the environment. This book covers four major areas: 1) Environmental microbial genomics, 2) Microbial genomics in human health, 3) Microbial genomics in crop improvement and plant health protection, and 4) Genome analysis of microbial pathogens. Within these areas, the topics addressed include: microbial genome diversity, evolution, and microbial genome sequencing; bioinformatics and microarray-based genomic technologies; functional genomics of bioremediation of soil and water from organic and inorganic pollutants and carbon management; functional genomics of microbial pathogens and relevant microorganisms; functional genomics of model microorganisms; and applied functional genomics. Given its scope, the book offers a comprehensive source of information on the latest applications of microorganisms and microbial genomics to enhance the sustainability of agriculture and the environment."--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    1. Functional genomics and System biology approach in bioremediation of soil and water from organic and inorganic pollutants
    2. Mycorrhiza and plant disease control
    3. Mycovirus and the genome of plant fungi pathogen
    4. Bacterial Pan-genomics
    5. Phyllosphere and its potential role in sustainable agriculture
    6. Functional genomics and systems biology approach for understanding Agroecosystems
    7. Advancements in Microbial Genome Sequencing and Microbial Community Characterization
    8. Bioinformatics and microarray-based technologies to Viral genome sequence analysis
    9. Application of whole genome sequencing (WGS) approach against identification of foodborne bacteria
    10. Functional metagenomics for rhizospheric soil in agricultural systems
    11. Microbial genomics in carbon management and energy production
    12. Microbial genome diversity and microbial genome sequencing
    13. Molecular Techniques for the Identification and Genotyping of Microorganisms
    14. RNA-guided CRISPR-Cas9 System for Removal of Microbial Pathogens
    15. Biosorption-cum-bioaccumulation of heavy metals from industrial effluent by brown algae-Deep insight
    16. Linking microbial genomics to renewable energy production and global carbon management
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Vijay Tripathi, Pradeep Kumar, Pooja Tripathi, Amit Kishore, Madhu Kamle, editors.
    Summary: Today, microbiology is a rapidly growing discipline in the life sciences, and the technologies are evolving on a virtually daily basis. Next-generation sequencing technologies have revolutionized microbial analysis, and can help us understand the biology and genomic diversity of various bacterial species with significant impacts on agro-ecosystems. In addition, advances in molecular biology and microbiology techniques hold the potential to improve the productivity and sustainability of agriculture and forestry. This new volume addresses the role of microbial genomics in understanding the living systems that exist in the soil and their interactions with plants, an aspect that is also important for crop improvement. The topics covered focus on a deeper and clearer understanding of how microbes cause diseases, the genome-based development of novel antibacterial agents and vaccines, and the role of microbial genomics in crop improvement and agroforestry. Given its scope, the book offers a valuable resource for researchers and students of agriculture and infectious biology.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Shared microbiome in different ecosystems: a meta-omics perspective
    Chapter 2: Application of molecular and sequencing techniques in analysis of microbial diversity in agroecosystem
    Chapter 3: Bioinformatics Resources for Microbial Research in Biological Systems
    Chapter 4: Applications of microarray-based technologies in identifying disease-associated single nucleotide variations
    Chapter 5: Impact of microbial genomics approaches for novel antibiotic target
    Chapter 6: Next Generation Sequencing (NGS) platforms: An Exciting Era of Genome Sequence Analysis
    Chapter 7: Annotation of Biological Network of Fungus Saccharomyces cereviseae Using Cytoscape in System Biology
    Chapter 8: Recent Advances in Microbial Genome Sequencing
    Chapter 9: Functional genomics of Microbial Pathogens for Crop Improvement
    Chapter 10: Role of microbial genomics in plant health protection and soil health maintenance
    Chapter 11: Role of Microbial genomics in Crop improvement
    Chapter 12: Current Status and Future Prospects of Omics Tools In Climate Change Research
    Chapter 13: Plant and Microbial genomics in Crop improvement
    Chapter 14: Alkaline Protease: A tool to manage solid waste and its utility in detergent industry
    Chapter 15: Heavy metal toxicity and possible functional aspects of microbial diversity in heavy metal contaminated sites
    Chapter 16: Bioremediation of nutrients and heavy metals from wastewater by microalgal cells: mechanism and kinetics
    Chapter 17: Meta-omics in detection of silkworm gut microflora diversity.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Dhananjaya Pratap Singh, Vijai Kumar Gupta, Ratna Prabha.
    Summary: Microbial communities and their functions play a crucial role in the management of ecological, environmental and agricultural health on the Earth. Microorganisms are the key identified players for plant growth promotion, plant immunization, disease suppression, induced resistance and tolerance against stresses as the indicative parameters of improved crop productivity and sustainable soil health. Beneficial belowground microbial interactions with the rhizosphere help plants mitigate drought and salinity stresses and alleviate water stresses under the unfavorable environmental conditions in the native soils. Microorganisms that are inhabitants of such environmental conditions have potential solutions for them. There are potential microbial communities that can degrade xenobiotic compounds, pesticides and toxic industrial chemicals and help remediate even heavy metals, and thus they find enormous applications in environmental remediation. Microbes have developed intrinsic metabolic capabilities with specific metabolic networks while inhabiting under specific conditions for many generations and, so play a crucial role. The book Microbial Interventions in Agriculture and Environment is an effort to compile and present a great volume of authentic, high-quality, socially-viable, practical and implementable research and technological work on microbial implications. The whole content of the volume covers protocols, methodologies, applications, interactions, role and impact of research and development aspects on microbial interventions and technological outcomes in prospects of agricultural and environmental domain including crop production, plan-soil health management, food & nutrition, nutrient recycling, land reclamation, clean water systems and agro-waste management, biodegradation & bioremediation, biomass to bioenergy, sanitation and rural livelihood security. The covered topics and sub-topics of the microbial domain have high implications for the targeted and wide readership of researchers, students, faculty and scientists working on these areas along with the agri-activists, policymakers, environmentalists, advisors etc. in the Government, industries and non-government level for reference and knowledge generation.

    Contents:
    1.50 Years of Development of Beneficial Microbes for Sustainable Agriculture and Society: Progress and Challenges Still to be Met: Part of the Solution To Global Warming and 'Hothouse Earth
    2. Metabolomics Approaches in Microbial Research: Current Knowledge and Perspective towards the Understanding of Microbe Plasticity
    3. Is PGPR an Alternative for NPK Fertilizers in Sustainable Agriculture
    4. Soil: Microbial Cell Factory for Assortment with Beneficial Role in Agriculture
    5. Insights Into the Unidentified Microbiome: Current Approaches and Implications
    6. Interactions in Soil-Microbe-Plant System: Adaptation to Stressed Agriculture
    7. Microbe-mediated Tolerance in Plants against Biotic and Abiotic Stresses
    8. Arbuscular Mycorrhizal Colonization and Activation of Plant Defence Responses against Phytopathogens
    9. Microbes as Resource of Biomass, Bioenergy and Biofuel
    10. Microbe-Mediated Reclamation of Contaminated Soils: Current Status and Future Perspectives
    11. Plant Growth-Promoting Rhizobacteria (PGPR) and Fungi (PGPF): Potential Biological Control Agents of Diseases and Pests
    12. Biofortification: A Promising Approach Towards Eradication of Hidden Hunger
    13. Microbes in Foods and Feed Sector
    14. New Edge Agricultural Bioinputs
    15. Microbial Bio-production of Proteins and Valuable Metabolites
    16. 2, 4-diacetylphloroglucinol: A Novel Biotech Bioactive Compound for Sgriculture
    17. Coral Reef Microbiota and Its Role in Marine Ecosystem Sustainability
    18. Diversity and Ecology of Ectomycorrhizal Fungi in the Western Ghats
    19. Halotolerant PGPR Bacteria: Amelioration for Salinity Stress
    20. Microbial Degradation of Nitro-Aromatic Pesticide: Pendimethalin
    21. Nisin Production with Aspects on Its Practical Quantification.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Dhananjaya Pratap Singh, Vijai Kumar Gupta, Ratna Prabha, editors.
    Summary: Microbial communities and their functions play a crucial role in the management of ecological, environmental and agricultural health on the Earth. Microorganisms are the key identified players for plant growth promotion, plant immunization, disease suppression, induced resistance and tolerance against stresses as the indicative parameters of improved crop productivity and sustainable soil health. Beneficial belowground microbial interactions with the rhizosphere help plants mitigate drought and salinity stresses and alleviate water stresses under the unfavorable environmental conditions in the native soils. Microorganisms that are inhabitants of such environmental conditions have potential solutions for them. There are potential microbial communities that can degrade xenobiotic compounds, pesticides and toxic industrial chemicals and help remediate even heavy metals, and thus they find enormous applications in environmental remediation. Microbes have developed intrinsic metabolic capabilities with specific metabolic networks while inhabiting under specific conditions for many generations and, so play a crucial role. The book Microbial Interventions in Agriculture and Environment is an effort to compile and present a great volume of authentic, high-quality, socially-viable, practical and implementable research and technological work on microbial implications. The whole content of the volume covers protocols, methodologies, applications, interactions, role and impact of research and development aspects on microbial interventions and technological outcomes in prospects of agricultural and environmental domain including crop production, plan-soil health management, food & nutrition, nutrient recycling, land reclamation, clean water systems and agro-waste management, biodegradation & bioremediation, biomass to bioenergy, sanitation and rural livelihood security. The covered topics and sub-topics of the microbial domain have high implications for the targeted and wide rea dership of researchers, students, faculty and scientists working on these areas along with the agri-activists, policymakers, environmentalists, advisors etc. in the Government, industries and non-government level for reference and knowledge generation.

    Contents:
    1. Microbial Inoculants for Sustainable Crop Management
    2. Manufacturing and Quality Control of Inoculants from the Paradigm of Circular Agriculture
    3.Microbial Biological Control of Diseases and Pests., 3.PGPR Inoculation and Chemical Fertilization of Cereal Crops, How do the Plants and Their Rhizosphere Microbial Communities Response?
    4. PGPR Inoculation and Chemical Fertilization of Cereal Crops, How do the Plants and Their Rhizosphere Microbial Communities Response?
    5. Biological Treatment: A Response to the Accumulation of Biosolids
    6. Microbial Bioconversion of Agricultural Wastes for Rural Sanitation and Soil Carbon Enrichment
    7. Plant Growth-Promoting Rhizobacteria (PGPRs): Functions and Benefits
    8. Functional Diversity of Plant Growth Promoting Rhizobacteria: Recent Progress and Future Prospects
    9. Microbial Augmentation of Salt Affected Soils: Emphasis on Haloalkalitolerant PGPR
    10. Impact of Plant Associated Microbial Communities on Host Plants under Abiotic Stresses
    11. Alleviating Drought Stress of Crops through PGPR: Mechanism and Application
    12. Fertilizer Nitrogen as a Significant Driver of Rhizosphere Microbiome in Rice Paddies
    13. Environmental Remediation: Microbial and Non-Microbial Prospects
    14. Tree ecosystem: Microbial Dynamics and Functionality
    15. Engineering Rhizobacterial Functions for the Improvement of Plant Growth and Disease Resistance
    16. Impact Assessment of Microbial Formulations in Agricultural Soil
    17. Harnessing the Microbial Interactions in Rhizosphere and Microbiome for Sustainable Agriculture
    18. Plant Microbiome Interaction and the Effects of Biotic and Abiotic Components in Agroecosystem
    19. Plant-Microbial Communication
    New Facets for Sustainable Agriculture.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Dhananjaya Pratap Singh, Ratna Prabha, editors.
    Summary: Microbial communities and their multi-functionalities play a crucial role in the management of soil and plant health, and thus help in managing agro-ecology, the environment and agriculture. Microorganisms are key players in N-fixation, nutrient acquisition, carbon sequestration, plant growth promotion, pathogen suppression, induced systemic resistance and tolerance against stresses, and these parameters are used as indicators of improved crop productivity and sustainable soil health. Beneficial belowground microbial interactions in the rhizosphere help plants combat abiotic challenges in the unfavourable environmental conditions of native soils. These microorganisms and their products offer potential solutions for agriculture in problematic areas since they are able to degrade xenobiotic compounds, pesticides and toxic chemicals and help remediate heavy metals in the rhizosphere and so make deteriorated soils suitable for crop production. This book compiles the latest research on the role of microbes in the rhizosphere and agro-ecology, covering interaction mechanisms, microbe-mediated crop production, plant and soil health management, food and nutrition, nutrient recycling, land reclamation, clean water systems, agro-waste management, biodegradation, bioremediation, biomass and bioenergy, sanitation and rural livelihood security. It is a comprehensive reference resource for agricultural activists, policymakers, environmentalists and advisors working for governments, non-governmental organizations and industries, helping them update their knowledge of this important, but often neglected, research area.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Role of Microorganisms for Managing Climate Change Impacts
    Chapter 2. Microbial interventions in soil and plant health for improving crop efficiency
    Chapter 3. Fusariam wilts of chickpea, pigeonpea and lentil and their management
    Chapter 4. Application of Arbuscular Mycorrhizae in Soil Management
    Chapter 5. Plant Growth-Promoting Rhizobacteria (PGPRs): A Fruitful Resource
    Chapter 6. Microbes for Bioremediation of Heavy Metals
    Chapter 7. Plant growth promoting endophytic bacteria and their potential to improve agricultural crop yields
    Chapter 8. Importance and Utilization of Plant Beneficial Rhizobacteria in Agriculture
    Chapter 9. Potash Solubilizing Bacteria (KSB)
    Chapter 10. Seed biopriming with potential microbial inoculants as sustainable options for stress management in crops
    Chapter 11. Cropping Systems Effect on Soil Biological Health and Sustainability
    Chapter 12. Influence Of Endophytic Bacteria On Growth Promotion And Protection Against Diseases in Associated Plants
    Chapter 13. Agricultural perspectives of Mycorrhizal glomalin as 'soil fertility determinants
    Chapter 14. Perspectives of Plant Growth Promoting Rhizobacteria in Conferring Salinity Tolerance in Crop
    Chapter 15. Microbe- Mediated Biotic and Abiotic Stress Tolerance in Crop Plants
    Chapter 16. Application of microbial products for enhancing the nutritional quality of agricultural produce
    Chapter 17. Microbial products: Protein, enzyme, secondary metabolites and chemicals
    Chapter 18. Microbial products and biotechnological applications thereof: proteins, enzymes, secondary metabolites & valuable chemicals
    Chapter 19. Systems and Synthetic biology approach to understand the importance of Pathogen- Host interaction
    Chapter 20. Microbes Mediated Nutrient Use Efficiency in Pulse Crops
    Chapter 21. Omics-data Integration in Microbial Research for Agricultural and Environmental Applications.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Wolfgang Karl Hofbauer, Georg Gärtner.
    Summary: This book provides a detailed overview of the microorganisms that form the initial growth on the exterior facades of buildings. It deals with the ecophysiological properties that characterize the basic conditions under which these microorganisms can occur on facades. In addition to an identification key for the types and forms of microorganisms, this book provides a detailed description of the individual organisms, stating their ecological range. Furthermore, the various ecological parameters are discussed in short chapters. Measures to prevent and combat the colonization of facades with microorganisms are also addressed. Specialists (architects, construction experts), builders, scientists and master students can find all the information they need on facade algae and fungi here. The authors Dr. Wolfgang Karl Hofbauer is chief scientist (taxonomy, ecophysiology and genetics) of the department Environment, Sensors and Hygiene at the Fraunhofer Institute for Building Physics. His professional research areas are taxonomy and ecophysiology of organisms on building surfaces, about which he did his doctorate in 2008, genetic barcoding of building relevant (micro)organisms and greening of building surfaces. Retired Prof. Dr. Dr.h.c Georg Gartner worked and researched at the University of Innsbruck on the cultivation and taxonomy of soil-and airborne. algae for many years. In 2012, Prof. Gartner was awarded an honorary doctorate by Sofia University for his services to the cooperation in algal studies between the botanical institutes of the University of Innsbruck and the University of Sofia.

    Contents:
    Introduction: Facades colonized by aerophytic microorganisms
    Facades as a functional part of a building
    The environment facade
    History of aerobiology, in respect of research on man-made surfaces
    Tools/Methods
    Experimental investigations and the assessment of primary growth of microorganisms on modern buiding structures
    Assessment of starter germ load of materials. Germ counts for specimens
    Culture based taxonomic analysis
    Taxonomy
    Pre-culture investigation
    Sample collection and preparation
    Establishment of pure cultures
    Background concentrations
    Air germ measurement
    Sedimentation
    Germ load of precipitation
    Ecophysiologic data
    Testing methods in respect of ths susceptibility of building products against colonisation by microorganisms
    Aerophytic organisms colonizing facades: their diversity and taxonomy with recognition of ecophysiological characteristics
    Regnum Eubacteria non oxygen phosynthetic active groups
    Regnum Archaea
    Division Rhodophyta Class Rhodophyceae
    Division Stramenopiles (Heterokonta), Class Bacillariophyceae
    Division Stramenopiles (Heterokonta), Class Xanthophyceae
    Division Stramenopiles (Heterokonta), Class Eustigmatophyceae
    Division (Infraregnum) Chlorophyta, Class Chlorophyceae
    Division (Infraregnum) Streptophyta
    Class Bryopsida Musci
    Class Pteridopsida
    Subregnum Eumycota
    Division Archemycota
    Class Zygomycetes
    Division Ascomycota
    Class Ascomycetes
    Division Basidiomycota
    Class Basidiomycetes
    Form of organisation Lichenes
    Formgroup Ascolichenes
    Synopsis
    Summary
    Acknowledgements
    Glossary 1
    Glossary 2 (important technical terms)
    Literature.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Pankaj Kumar Arora, editor.
    Summary: Xenobiotic compounds including pesticides, nitrophenols, pyridine, polycyclic aromatic compounds and polychlorinated biphenyls are widely spread in environment due to anthropogenic activities. Most of them are highly toxic to living beings due to their mutagenic and carcinogenic properties. Therefore, the removal of these compounds from environment is an essential step for environmental sustainability. Microbial remediation has emerged as an effective technology for degradation of these xenobiotic compounds as microorganisms have unique ability to utilize these compounds as their sole source of carbon and energy. The primary goal of this book is to provide detailed information of microbial degradation of many xenobiotic compounds in various microorganisms.

    Contents:
    Microbial Degradation of Pyridine and Pyridine Derivatives
    Anaerobic Biodegradation of Pesticides
    DNA Stable Isotope Probing to Examine Organisms Involved in Biodegradation
    Enzymatic Bioremediation: Current Status, Challenges of Obtaining Process, and Applications
    Biotransformation of Heavy Crude Oil and Biodegradation of Oil Pollution by Arid Zone Bacterial Strains
    Catalytic Promiscuity of Aromatic Ring-Hydroxylating Dioxygenases and Their Role in the Plasticity of Xenobiotic Compound Degradation
    Aromatic Compounds and Biofilms: Regulation and Interlinking of Metabolic Pathways in Bacteria
    Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs): Environmental Fate, Challenges and Bioremediation
    Bioremediation of Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons (PAHs): Current Practices and Outlook
    Microbes Are Essential Components of Arsenic Cycling in the Environment: Implications for the Use of Microbes in Arsenic Remediation
    Biodegradation of Synthetic Pyrethroid Insecticides
    Microbial Degradation of Polyethylene: Recent Progress and Challenges
    Biodegradation of Polychlorinated Biphenyls
    Role of Macrofungi in Bioremediation of Pollutants
    Microemulsions as a Novel Tool for Enhancing the Bioremediation of Xenobiotics
    An Overview of Nitro Group-Containing Compounds and Herbicides Degradation in Microorganisms
    Distillery Effluent: Pollution Profile, Eco-friendly Treatment Strategies, Challenges and Future Prospects.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Ram Prasad, editor.
    Summary: Microbial Nanobionics: Volume 1, State of the Art, discusses a wide range of microbial systems and their utilization in biogenic synthesis of metallic nanoparticles. The rich biodiversity of microbes makes them excellent candidates for potential nanoparticle synthesis biofactories. Through a better understanding of the biochemical and molecular mechanisms of the microbial biosynthesis of metal nanoparticles, the rate of synthesis can be better developed and the monodispersity of the product can be enhanced. The characteristics of nanoparticles can be controlled via optimization of important parameters, such as temperature, pH, concentration and pressure, which regulate microbe growth conditions and cellular and enzymatic activities. Large scale microbial synthesis of nanoparticles is a sustainable method due to the non-hazardous, non-toxic and economical nature of these processes. The applications of microbial synthesis of nanoparticles are wide and varied, spanning the industrial, biomedical and environmental fields. Biomedical applications include improved and more targeted antimicrobials, biosensing, imaging and drug delivery. In the environmental fields, nanoparticles are used for bioremediation of diverse contaminants, water treatment, catalysis and production of clean energy. With the expected growth of microbial nanotechnology, this volume will serve as a comprehensive and timely reference.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Ram Prasad, editor.
    Summary: Microbial Nanobionics: Volume 2, Basic Research Applications continues the important discussion of microbial nanoparticle synthesis with a focus on the mechanistic approach of biosynthesis towards nanobionics. This volume also explores the toxicity of nanomaterials in microbes and their effect on human health and the environment. Special Emphasis is given to the use of polymeric nanomaterials in smart packing for the food industry and agricultural sector. The future of nanomaterials for detection of soil microbes and their interactions and tools for environmental remedies is also comprehensively covered. The rich biodiversity of microbes make them excellent candidates for potential nanoparticle synthesis biofactories. Through a better understanding of the biochemical and molecular mechanisms of the microbial biosynthesis of metal nanoparticles, the rate of synthesis can be better developed and the monodispersity of the product can be enhanced. The characteristics of nanoparticles can be controlled via optimization of important parameters, such as temperature, pH, concentration and pressure, which regulate microbe growth conditions and cellular and enzymatic activities. Large scale microbial synthesis of nanoparticles is a sustainable method due to the non-hazardous, non-toxic and economical nature of these processes. The applications of microbial synthesis of nanoparticles are wide and varied, spanning the industrial, biomedical and environmental fields. Biomedical applications include improved and more targeted antimicrobials, biosensing, imaging and drug delivery. In the environmental fields, nanoparticles are used for bioremediation of diverse contaminants, water treatment, catalysis and production of clean energy. With the expected growth of microbial nanotechnology, this volume will serve as a comprehensive and timely reference.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction to Nanoscience, Nanomaterials, Nanocomposite, Nano-Polymer and Engineering Smart Materials
    2. Single Particle Inductively Coupled Plasma Mass Spectrometry for Characterization of Engineered Nanoparticles
    3. Green Synthesis of Microbial Nanoparticle: Approaches to Application
    4. Enzyme Nanoparticles: Microbial Source, Applications and Future Perspectives
    5. Bacterial Nanowires: An Invigorating Tale for Future
    6. Antimicrobial Silver Nanoparticles: Future of Nanomaterials
    7. Recent progress on Novel Ag-TiO2 nanocomposites for antibacterial applications
    8. Ecotoxic effect of photocatalytic active nanoparticles on Human health / Environment
    9. Nano-toxicity: Sources and Effects on Environment
    10. Role of Nanomaterials in Food Preservation
    11. Antimicrobial Nanocomposites for Improving Indoor Air Quality Sensing Soil Microbes and Interactions: How can Nanomaterials Help?
    12. Applications of Carbon Based Nanomaterials for Antimicrobial Photodynamic Therapy
    13. Application of Nanotechnology in Plant Protection by Phytopathogens: Present and Future Prospects
    Index.-
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Uday Kishore, editor.
    Summary: This book updates in detail the microbial pathogenesis of various important pathogens, including HIV-1, MERS, SARS-CoV-2, Mycobacterium and Plasmodium. There is also a general discussion of the innate and adaptive immune responses against primary and opportunistic infections. The overall purpose of the book is to aid in the development of anti-viral and anti-microbial targets.

    Contents:
    1.Human Papillomavirus-associated cancers
    2. Mechanisms of immune evasion by Ebola virus
    3. Innate immune mechanisms against HIV-1
    4. Current insights into the host immune response to respiratory viral infections
    5. Immune responses to MERS-CoV in humans and animals
    6. SARS-CoV-2: Pathogenesis and host-pathogen interaction
    7. Antibiotic Resistance mechanisms and their transmission in Acinetobacter baumannii
    8. Pathogenesis and host immune response in leprosy
    9. Innate immunity and tuberculosis
    10. Vaccination strategies against Mycobacterium tuberculosis: BCG and beyond
    11. Candida pathogenicity and interplay with the immune system
    12. Immune responses in Malaria and vaccine strategies.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Qiang Wang, editor.
    Summary: As the largest scale chemical reaction, photosynthesis supplies all of the organic carbon and oxygen for life on Earth. It is estimated that the photosynthetic activity of microorganisms is responsible for more than 50% of the primary production of molecular oxygen on Earth. This book highlights recent breakthroughs in the multidisciplinary areas of microbial photosynthesis, presenting the latest developments in various areas of microbial photosynthesis research, from bacteria to eukaryotic algae, and from theoretical biology to structural biology and biophysics. Furthermore, the book discusses advances in photosynthetic chassis, such as in the context of metabolic engineering and green chemical production. Featuring contributions by leading authorities in photosynthesis research, the book is a valuable resource for graduate students and researchers in the field, especially those studying biological evolution and the origin of life.

    Contents:
    Part 1. Photosynthesis and Energy Transfer
    Chapter 1. Molecular mechanism of photosynthesis driven by red-shifted chlorophylls
    Chapter 2. Cyanobacterial NDH-1-photosystem I supercomplex
    Chapter 3. Recent progress on the LH1-RC complexes of purple photosynthetic bacteria
    Chapter 4. Composition, organisation, and function of purple photosynthetic machinery
    Chapter 5. Redox potentials of quinones in aqueous solution: Relevance to redox potentials in protein environments
    Chapter 6. Photosynthesis in Chlamydomonas reinhardtii: what we have learned so far?
    Part 2. Photosynthesis and the Environment
    Chapter 7. Photosynthetic performances of marine microalgae under influences of rising CO2 and solar UV radiation
    Chapter 8. Acquisition of Inorganic Carbon by Microalgae and Cyanobacteria
    Chapter 9. Circadian Clocks in Cyanobacteria
    Chapter 10. Iron Deficiency in Cyanobacteria
    Chapter 11. Adaptive Mechanisms of the Model Photosynthetic Organisms, Cyanobacteria, to Iron Deficiency
    Chapter 12. The roles of sRNAs in regulating stress responses in cyanobacteria
    Part 3. Artificial Photosynthesis and Light-driven Biofactory
    Chapter 13. Mimicking the Mn4CaO5-cluster in Photosystem II
    Chapter 14. Photosynthetic improvement of industrial microalgae for biomass and biofuel production
    Chapter 15. Self-assembly, organisation, regulation, and engineering of carboxysomes: CO2-fixing prokaryotic organelles.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Doris Zúñiga-Dávila, Fernando González-Andrés, Ernesto Ormeño-Orrillo, editors.
    Summary: The book is a comprehensive compilation of the most recent advances in the practical approach of the use of microbial probiotics for agriculture. Unlike the rest of the publications about biofertilizers, this book bridges the gap between the lab studies (molecular, physiological, omics, etc.) and the agronomic application.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Cyclic di-GMP Regulation in Beneficial Plant-Microbe Interactions
    Chapter 2. NADPH Oxidases have Key Roles in Mutulistic Associations with Rhizobia or with Mycorrhizal Fungi in Root Legumes
    Chapter 3. Linking Ammonia Volatilization with Moisture Content and Abundance of Nitrification and Denitrification Genes in N-fertilized Soils
    Chapter 4. Azospirillum as Biofertilizer for Sustainable Agriculture: Azospirillum Brasilense AZ39 as a Model of pgpr and Field Traceability
    Chapter 5. The Potential of Nitrogen-fixing Bacteria in the Sustainability of Agro-forestry Ecosystems
    Chapter 6. Challenges, Regulations and Future Actions in Biofertilizers in the European Agriculture: From the Lab to the Field Original Research Papers
    Chapter 7. PGPR Characterization of Non-nodulating Endophytes from Root Nodules of Vigna Unguiculata (L.)
    Chapter 8. Endophytic Bacteria from Passiflora Incarnata L. Leaves with Genetic Potential for Flavonoid Biosynthesis
    Chapter 9. Isolation and Characterization of Antifungal Secondary Metabolites Produced by Rhizobacteria from Common Bean
    Chapter 10. Rhizobia Promote rice (Oryza sativa l.) Growth. First Evidence in Cuba
    Chapter 11. Arbuscular Mycorrhizae and PGPR Applications in Tropical Savannas
    Chapter 12. Early Effects of Land use Intensity on Arbuscular Mycorrhizal Fungi in Rice-soybean Rotations
    Chapter 13. Evaluation of Bioproducts and Mycorrhizal Inoculation in Asian Soybean Rust Control, Nutrient Leaf Contents and Yield Under field Conditions
    Chapter 14. Effects of the Inoculation with Native Glomeromycota Fungi and Fertilization in the Yield of Maize in Acid Soils
    Chapter 15. Sustainability of Potato Farms and use of Microbial Inoculants in the Central Coast of Peru
    Chapter 16. Characterization of Plant Growth-Promoting Bacteria and in Vitro Antagonistic Activity on Root-knot Nematodes (Meloidogyne spp.)
    Chapter 17. Combined Application of Microbial and Non-microbial Biostimulants to Improve Growth of Peanut Plants Exposed to Abiotic Stresses.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Deepak G. Panpatte, Yogeshvari K. Jhala, editors.
    Summary: Pollution is one of the most serious issues facing mankind and other life forms on earth. Environmental pollution leads to the degradation of ecosystems, loss of services, economic losses, and various other problems. The eco-friendliest approach to rejuvenating polluted ecosystems is with the help of microorganism-based bioremediation. Microorganisms are characterized by great biodiversity, genetic and metabolic machinery, and by their ability to survive, even in extremely polluted environments. As such, they are and will remain the most important tools for restoring polluted ecosystems / habitats. This three-volume book sheds light on the utilization of microorganisms and the latest technologies for cleaning up polluted sites. It also discusses the remediation or degradation of various important pollutants such as pesticides, wastewater, plastics, PAHs, oil spills etc. The book also explains the latest technologies used for the degradation of pollutants in several niche ecosystems. Given its scope, the book will be of interest to teachers, researchers, bioremediation scientists, capacity builders and policymakers. It also offers valuable additional reading material for undergraduate and graduate students of microbiology, ecology, soil science, and the environmental sciences.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Rhizosphere
    Niche for Microbial Rejuvenation and Biodegradation of Pollutants
    Chapter 2: Bioremediation of Pesticides: An Eco-friendly Approach for Environment Sustainability
    Chapter 3: Microbial Indicators of Bioremediation-Potential and Success
    Chapter 4: Phycoremediation: A Sustainable Biorefinery Approach
    Chapter 5: Cyanobacteria Mediated Bioremediation of Problem Soils
    Chapter 6: VAM- An Alternate Strategy for Bioremediation of Polluted Environment
    Chapter 7: Strategies to Improve Remediation Technology Using Fungi
    Chapter 8: Bioremediation of Polluted Soil by Using Plant Growth Promoting Rhizobacteria
    Chapter 9: The Utilization of Microbial Biofilm for the Biotransformation and Bioremediation of heavily Polluted Environment
    Chapter 10: Microbes: A Novel Source of Bioremediation for Degradation of Hydrocarbon
    Chapter 11: Microbial Bioremediation of Petroleum Hydrocarbons.-Chapter 12: Potential of Extremophiles for Bioremediation
    Chapter 13: Role of Microbes in Bioremediation of Radioactive Waste
    Chapter 14: Plastic Eating Microorganism: Recent Biotechnological Techniques for Recycling of Plastic
    Chapter 15: Bioaugmentation: A Powerful Biotechnological Techniques for Sustainable Ecorestoration of Soil and Groundwater Contaminants.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Deepak G. Panpatte, Yogeshvari K. Jhala, editors.
    Springer Nature eBook.
    Summary: Pollution is one of the most serious issues facing mankind and other life forms on earth. Environmental pollution leads to the degradation of ecosystems, loss of services, economic losses, and various other problems. The eco-friendliest approach to rejuvenating polluted ecosystems is with the help of microorganism-based bioremediation. Microorganisms are characterized by great biodiversity, genetic and metabolic machinery, and by their ability to survive, even in extremely polluted environments. As such, they are and will remain the most important tools for restoring polluted ecosystems / habitats. This three-volume book sheds light on the utilization of microorganisms and the latest technologies for cleaning up polluted sites. It also discusses the remediation or degradation of various important pollutants such as pesticides, wastewater, plastics, PAHs, oil spills etc. The book also explains the latest technologies used for the degradation of pollutants in several niche ecosystems. Given its scope, the book will be of interest to teachers, researchers, bioremediation scientists, capacity builders and policymakers. It also offers valuable additional reading material for undergraduate and graduate students of microbiology, ecology, soil science, and the environmental sciences.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Bioremediation of Industrial Pollutants
    Chapter 2: Bioremediation of Metals, Metalloids and Non-metals
    Chapter 3: Fungal Mediated Bioremediation of Heavy Metal Polluted Environment
    Chapter 4: Biological Decolorization and Degradation of Synthetic Dyes: A Green Step towards Sustainable Environment
    Chapter 5: Bioremediation of Waste Gases and Polluted Soils
    Chapter 6: E-Waste and its Hazard Management by Specific Microbial Bioremediation Processes
    Chapter 7: Current Methods of Enhancing Bacterial Bioremediation of Pesticide Residues in Agricultural Farmlands
    Chapter 8: Mechanism of Actions involved in Sustainable Ecorestoration of Petroleum Hydrocarbons Polluted Soil by the Beneficial Microorganism
    Chapter 9: Biosorption: An Ecofriendly Technology for Pollutant Removal
    Chapter 10: Synergistic and Aantagonistic Effects of Microbial Co-culture on Bioremediation of Polluted Environments
    Chapter 11: Enzymes-Oriented Strategies to Mitigate Polluting Agents from Environment
    Chapter 12: Non Aqueous Catalysis-A Way Forward for the Intermediation of Phenolic Environmental Pollutant Bisphenol A
    Chapter 13: Nanoparticles Mediated Adsorption of Pollutants- A way forward to Mitigation of Environmental Pollution
    Chapter 14: Nano-Bio remediation Application for Environment Contamination by Microorganism
    Chapter 15: Biosorption and Bioaccumulation of Pollutants for Environmental Remediation.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Charles Oluwaseun Adetunji, Deepak G. Panpatte, Yogeshvari K. Jhala, editors.
    Summary: Pollution is one of the most serious issues facing mankind and other life forms on earth. Environmental pollution leads to the degradation of ecosystems, loss of services, economic losses, and various other problems. The eco-friendliest approach to rejuvenating polluted ecosystems is with the help of microorganism-based bioremediation. Microorganisms are characterized by great biodiversity, genetic and metabolic machinery, and by their ability to survive, even in extremely polluted environments. As such, they are and will remain the most important tools for restoring polluted ecosystems / habitats. This three-volume book sheds light on the utilization of microorganisms and the latest technologies for cleaning up polluted sites. It also discusses the remediation or degradation of various important pollutants such as pesticides, wastewater, plastics, PAHs, oil spills etc. The book also explains the latest technologies used for the degradation of pollutants in several niche ecosystems. Given its scope, the book will be of interest to teachers, researchers, bioremediation scientists, capacity builders and policymakers. It also offers valuable additional reading material for undergraduate and graduate students of microbiology, ecology, soil science, and the environmental sciences.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Strain Improvement and Mass Production of Beneficial Microorganisms for Their Environmental and Agricultural Benefit
    Chapter 2: Biochemical Role of Beneficial Microorganisms: An Overview on Recent Development in Environmental and Agro-Science
    Chapter 3: Recent Advances in Application of Microbial Enzymes for Biodegradation Waste and Hazardous Waste Material
    Chapter 4: Biological, Biochemical and Biodiversity of Biomolecules from Marine based beneficial Microorganisms: Industrial Perspective
    Chapter 5: Climate Change and Pesticides: Their Consequence on Microorganisms
    Chapter 6: Effect of Heavy Metals on Activities of Soil Microorganism
    Chapter 7: Microbial Community Dynamics in Anaerobic Digestors for Biogas Production
    Chapter 8: Effect of Microbially Produced Silver Nanoparticles on Bioremediation of Waste Dye: Nanobioremediation
    Chapter 9: Bioremoval of Fluoride: Process and Mechanism
    Chapter 10: A Critical Review of Microbial Transport in Effluent Waste and Sewage Sludge Treatment
    Chapter 11: Recent Trends in Utilization of Biotechnological Tools for Environmental Sustainability
    Chapter 12: Artificial Intelligence and Internet of Things in Instrumentation and Control in Waste Biodegradation Plants: Recent Developments
    Chapter 13: Bioremediation of Polythene and Plastics Using Beneficial Microorganisms
    Chapter 14: Recent Advances in the Application of Genetically Engineered Microorganisms for Microbial Rejuvenation of Contaminated Environment
    Chapter 15: Efficacy of Microorganisms in the Removal of Toxic Materials from Industrial Effluents.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Ipek Kurtböke.
    Contents:
    Planctomycetes : new models for microbial cells and activities / John A. Fuerst
    A flavor of prokaryotic taxonomy : systematics revisited / Paul De Vos, Fabiano Thompson, Cristiane Thompson and Jean Swings
    Bioactive actinomycetes : reaching rarity through sound understanding of selective culture and molecular diversity / Ipek Kurböke
    Microbial resources for global sustainability / Jim Philp and Ronald Atlas
    Modern natural products drug discovery and its relevance to biodiversity conservation / C. Benjamin Naman, Christopher A. Leber and William H. Gerwick
    Hydrocarbon-oxidizing bacteria and their potential in eco-biotechnology and bioremediation / Irena B. Ivshina, Maria S. Kuyukina and Anastasiya V. Krivoruchko
    An overview of the industrial aspects of antibiotic discovery / Evan Martens and Arnold L. Demain
    Accessing marine microbial diversity for drug discovery/ Lynette Bueno Pérez and William Fenical
    Cryptic pathways and implications for novel drug discovery / Kozo Ochi
    The Nagoya protocol applied to microbial genetic resources / Philippe Desmeth
    Fungal genetic resources for biotechnology / Kevin McCluskey
    Industrial culture collections : gateways from microbial diversity to applications / Olga Genilloud
    An overview of biological resource center-maintenance of microbial resources and their management / Ken-ichiro Suzuki
    IP and the Budapest Treaty : depositing biological material for patent purposes / Vera Bussas, Avinash Sharma and Yogesh Shouche
    Biosafety, transport, and related legislation concerning microbial resources : an overview / Vera Bussas.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Pankaj Kumar Arora, editor.
    Summary: Rampant industrialization has caused high levels of contamination by various toxic chemicals in our water bodies, which is a matter of concern in terms of ecosystems, as well as human and animal health. Polluted wastewater can contaminate drinking water and is also is a causal factor for bio-magnification of heavy metals into our food cycle. In the last decade, several methodologies have been adopted to clean the wastewaters, and among these, microbial remediation has emerged as an effective technology. Several variants of microbial technologies have been developed for wastewater treatment and biodegradation specific to the industry, type of waste and toxicity of the chemicals. This book describes the recent advances in microbial degradation and microbial remediation of various xenobiotic compounds in soil and wastewater. It also explains various modern microbial technologies for biodegradation and wastewater treatment. It covers various microbial technologies for wastewater treatment, biodegradation, bioremediation and solid waste management. Gathering contributions from leading international it focuses on the status quo in industrial wastewater treatment and its biodegradation. The book is intended for researchers in the field of industrial wastewater, students of environmental sciences and practitioners in water pollution abatement.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Series Editor
    About the Editor
    1: Microbial Peroxidases and Their Unique Catalytic Potentialities to Degrade Environmentally Related Pollutants
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Peroxidases: Potential Sources
    1.2.1 Physiochemical and Catalytic Properties of LiP (EC 1.11.1.14)
    1.2.2 Physiochemical and Catalytic Properties of MnP
    1.2.3 Physiochemical and Catalytic Properties of HRP
    1.3 New or Advanced Enzyme-Based Techniques
    1.3.1 Genetic Engineering
    1.3.2 Enzyme Engineering
    1.3.3 Nanozymes 1.3.4 Immobilized Peroxidases and Properties
    1.4 LiP-Assisted Degradation of Hazardous Contaminants
    1.5 MnP-Assisted Degradation of Hazardous Contaminants
    1.6 HRP-Assisted Degradation of Hazardous Contaminants
    1.7 Conclusion
    References
    2: Microalgal Technology: A Promising Tool for Wastewater Remediation
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Adverse Effects of Wastewater on the Environment
    2.3 Newer Approaches Over Conventional Wastewater
    2.4 Microalgal Species Involved in the Wastewater Treatments
    2.5 Factors Affecting the Wastewater Remediation
    2.5.1 Carbon 2.10 Development of Photobioreactors
    2.11 Applications of Phycoremediation in Wastewater Treatment
    2.11.1 Microalgae in Wastewater Treatment
    2.11.1.1 Removal of Nutrients
    2.11.1.2 Reduction of Biological and Chemical Oxygen Demand (BOD/COD)
    2.11.1.3 Removal of Coliform Bacteria
    2.11.1.4 Heavy Metal Removal
    2.12 Formation of Valuable Products
    2.12.1 Biomass Production
    2.12.2 Bioethanol Production
    2.12.3 Biomethane Production
    2.12.4 Biochar Production
    2.12.5 Microalgae in Bioelectrochemical Systems
    2.12.6 Microalgal Biofilms 2.13 Other Applications of Microalgae
    2.13.1 Production of Secondary Metabolites
    2.13.2 Sulfated Polysaccharides
    2.13.3 Proteins and Amino Acids
    2.13.4 PHA and PHB Production
    2.14 Conclusion and Future Prospects
    References
    3: Microbial Remediation for Wastewater Treatment
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Wastewater Pollution Sources
    3.3 Bioremediation of Wastewater
    3.4 Microbial Enzymes in Biodegradation
    3.5 Limitations of Bioremediation
    3.6 Conclusions
    References
    4: Quorum Quenching for Sustainable Environment: Biology, Mechanisms, and Applications 2.5.2 pH
    2.5.3 Salinity
    2.5.4 Temperature
    2.5.5 Light
    2.5.6 Inhibitory Substance
    2.6 Problems Encountered During Wastewater Remediation
    2.7 Mechanism of Action of Microalgae During Wastewater Treatment
    2.7.1 Assimilation
    2.7.2 Precipitation
    2.7.3 Biosorption
    2.7.4 Bioaccumulation
    2.8 Biotechnological Strategies for Improvement of Phycoremediation of Wastewater
    2.8.1 Immobilized Cell System
    2.8.2 Hyperconcentrated Cultures
    2.8.3 Genetic Engineering
    2.9 Microalgal-Bacterial Aggregate System for Wastewater Treatment
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Pankaj Kumar Arora, editor.
    Summary: This book describes various aspects of modern microbiology including microbial enzymes, secondary metabolites, next-generation sequencing, microbial-based biopesticides, microbial-based cancer therapies, biodiesel, and microbial products from fermentation, biodegradation, bioremediation and wastewater treatment. Further, it explains how and why microbes play an important role in preserving the welfare of living beings and the environment. Many bacteria play a significant part in cleaning our environment by detoxifying various xenobiotic compounds, while several microbes produce secondary metabolites that are useful to human beings. The book is divided into 15 chapters that cover various aspects of microorganism-based biotechnology, including recent methodologies such as advanced molecular techniques, as well developments in classical microbiological techniques. The authors also explain how the latest and classical techniques are being used in modern-day microbial biotechnology. All chapters were written by experts from prominent universities, research laboratories, and institutes around the globe. Above all, they focus on recent advances in microbial technology that promote the welfare of living beings and the environment.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Biotechnological applications of lipases in flavour and fragrance esters production
    Chapter 2. Synthesis and regulation of fungal secondary metabolites
    Chapter 3. Microbial based cancer therapy: Diagnostic tools and therapeutic strategies
    Chapter 4. Biodiesel and the Potential Role of Microbial Lipases in its production
    Chapter 5. Light-mediation as a strategy to induce production of valuable microbial compounds
    Chapter 6. Microbe-based Bio-pesticide Formulation: A Tool for Crop Protection and Sustainable Agriculture Development
    Chapter 7. Techno-economic assessment of microbe assisted wastewater treatment strategies for energy and value-added product recovery
    Chapter 8. Type III polyketide synthases: current state and perspectives
    Chapter 9. Production of a variety of industrially significant products by biological sources through fermentation
    Chapter 10. Molecular diagnosis of acute and chronic brucellosis in humans
    Chapter 11. Arbuscular Mycorrhizal Fungi remediation potential of organic and inorganic compounds
    Chapter 12. Light Emitting Diode for the Inactivation of Microorganisms on Fruits and Vegetables
    Chapter 13. Pseudomonas Species: Natural Scavenger of Aromatic Compounds from Industrial Effluents
    Chapter 14. Bioremediation of persistent toxic substances
    from conventional to new approaches in using microorganisms and plants
    Chapter 15. Next Generation Sequencing & its application: empowering in public health beyond reality.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    editors, Fernando Baquero, Emilio Bouza, J.A. Gutiérrez-Fuentes, Teresa M. Coque.
    Summary: Microbial transmission, the processes by which microbes transit to new environments, is a significant and broad-reaching concept with applications throughout the biological sciences. This collection of reviews, edited by an international team of experts studying and working across a range of disciplines, explores transmission not just as an idea in disease but as a fundamental biological process that acts in all domains of nature and exerts its force on disparate size scales, from the micro to the macro, and across units of time as divergent as a single bacterial replication cycle and the entire course of evolution. In five sections, this overview --Defines the concept of transmission and covers basic processes of transmission, including causality, control strategies, fitness costs, virulence, and selection--Presents numerous combinations of transmission scenarios across the bacterial, animal, and human interface --Examines transmission as the defining characteristic of infectious disease--Presents methods for experimentally verifying and quantifying transmission episodes--Concludes with important theoretical and modeling approaches. Anyone studying or working in microbial colonization, evolution, pathogenicity, antimicrobial resistance, or public health will benefit from a deeper understanding of Microbial Transmission.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Raghvendra Pratap Singh, Geetanjali Manchanda, Indresh Kumar Maurya, Yunlin Wei, editors.
    Summary: The book compiles the latest studies on microorganisms thriving in extreme conditions. Microbes have been found in extremely high and low temperatures, highly acidic to saline conditions, from deserts to the Dead sea, from hot-springs to underwater hydrothermal vents- the diversity is incredible. The various chapters highlight the microbial life and describe the mechanisms of tolerance to these harsh conditions, and show how an understanding of these phenomena can help us exploit the microbes in biotechnology. The theme of the book is highly significant since life in these environments can give vital clues about the origin and evolution of life on earth, as a lot of these conditions simulate the environment present billions of years ago. Additionally, the study of adaptation and survival of organisms in such environments can be important for finding life on other planets. This book shall be useful for students, researchers and course instructors interested in evolution, microbial adaptations and ecology in varied environments.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Contents
    Editors and Contributors
    About the Editors
    Contributors
    Part I: Microbes in Harsh Environments
    1: The Multifaceted Life of Microbes: Survival in Varied Environments
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Microbes in Varied Environments
    1.2.1 Microbes in High Salt Concentration
    1.2.2 Microbes in Low-Temperature Environments
    1.2.3 Microbes in High-Temperature Environments
    1.2.4 Microbes in the Atmosphere
    1.2.5 Microbes in Varied pH Environments
    1.2.6 Microbes in High-Pressure Environments 1.2.7 Microbes in Radiation Environment
    1.2.8 Microbes in Metallic Environment
    1.2.9 Microorganisms in Xerophilic Environment
    1.3 Future Prospective
    References
    2: Thermophilic and Halophilic Prokaryotes Isolated from Extreme Environments of Armenia and Their Biotechnological Potential
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Thermal Springs Studied in Armenia
    2.3 Thermophilic Microbes Isolated and Identified from Armenian Hot Springs and Their Biotechnological Importance
    2.4 Saline and Hypersaline Environments in Armenia 2.5 Halophilic Microbes Isolated from Saline and Hypersaline Environments in Armenia and Their Biotechnological Importance
    2.6 Conclusion
    References
    3: Microbial Life at Extreme of Salt Concentration: Adaptation Strategies
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Basic Adaptation Strategies Under Extremes of Salinity
    3.2.1 Accumulation of Potassium and Its Transport
    3.2.2 Accumulation of Organic Solutes and Its Transport
    3.2.3 Chaperone Genes
    3.3 Genomics and Proteomics of Halophiles
    3.4 Relevance and Future Prospects
    3.5 Conclusion
    References 4: Rhizobia at Extremes of Acidity, Alkalinity, Salinity, and Temperature
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Response to Acid Stress in Rhizobia
    4.3 Response to Alkali Stress in Rhizobia
    4.4 Response to Salt and Alkali Stress in Rhizobia
    4.5 Response to Temperature Stress in Rhizobia
    4.6 Conclusion
    References
    5: Mechanism of Microbial Adaptation and Survival Within Psychrophilic Habitat
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Cold-Adapted Bacteria Strains, Plasmid, Transformation Methods, and Efficiency Promoters Used in Cold-Adapted Bacteria
    5.2.1 Cold-Adapted Bacteria Strains 5.2.2 Storage of Cold-Adapted Bacteria
    5.2.3 Plasmid Used in Cold-Adapted Bacteria
    5.2.4 Genetic Transformation Method for Cold-Adapted Bacteria
    5.2.5 Efficiency Promoters Used in Cold-Adapted Bacteria
    5.3 Mechanisms for Cold Adaptation
    5.3.1 Cold Shock Proteins or Antifreeze Proteins
    5.3.2 Cold Shock Proteins of E. coli
    5.3.3 CspA Regulation in E. coli
    5.3.4 Enzymes
    5.3.5 Increased Membrane Fluidity and Cell Envelope Modification
    5.3.6 Secondary Metabolites
    5.4 Conclusion
    References
    6: Secretome of Microbiota in Extreme Conditions
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital/Print
    Jeremy Nuttall, editor.
    Summary: One of the most promising new approaches for the prevention of HIV transmission, particularly for developing countries, involves topical, self-administered products known as microbicides. The development of microbicides is a long and complicated process, and this volume provides an overview of all the critical areas, from the selection of appropriate candidate molecules and their formulation, preclinical and clinical testing for safety and efficacy, strategies for product registration and finally, issues associated with product launch, distribution and access. The book will prove valuable to both those working in the field and all others who are interested in learning more about this product class, which has the potential to significantly impact the future of this devastating epidemic.

    Contents:
    Candidate Microbicides and Their Mechanisms of Action
    Microbicide Dosage Forms
    Preclinical Safety Evaluation
    Clinical Safety and Pharmacology Trial
    Microbicides for Prevention of HIV Infection: Clinical Efficacy Trials
    Rectal Microbicide Development
    Developing Regulatory Strategy for Microbicides
    Preparing for Microbicide Introduction, Rollout and Sustained Access.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Reeta Goel, Ravindra Soni, Deep Chandra, editors.
    Summary: The book explores the challenges and opportunities associated with high-altitude agro-ecosystems and the factors that influence them. It discusses the various indigenous agricultural practices and approaches, as well as the microbiology of mountain & hill agro-ecosystems, providing a comprehensive overview of the various factors that control the microbiome at high altitudes. The contributions examine microbiological advances, such as use of "omics" technologies for hill agriculture and environmental sustainability, and explore the use of nanotechnology for agricultural and environmental sustainability at higher altitudes. The book also describes various aspects of low-temperature microbiology in the context of high-altitude farming and environmental sustainability.

    Contents:
    High altitude agro-ecosystems : challenges and opportunities / Anil Kumar Shankhwar, Prashansa Tamta, Rashmi Paliwal, R. K. Srivastava
    An overview of Indian agriculture with focus on challenges and opportunities in north east / Sachin Kumar Vaid
    Sari system : a traditional cropping pattern of the Uttarakhand Himalaya / Satish Chandra, Dinesh Chandra, Rajkumar Pandey, Arun Kumar Khajuria, Vivek Kumar, Pankaj Bhatt
    Factors influencing soil ecosystem and agricultural productivity at higher altitudes / Narendra Kumar, Amit Kumar, Neha Jeena, Ranjeet Singh, Hukum Singh
    Traditional farming systems and agro-biodiversity in eastern Himalaya region of India / Krishna Giri, Gaurav Mishra, Monica Rawat, Shailesh Pandey, Rajarishi Bhattacharyya, Nabajyoti Bora et al.
    Indigenous agricultural practices : a supreme key to maintaining biodiversity / Ishwar Prakash Sharma, Chandra Kanta, Tripuresh Dwivedi, Ranjana Rani
    Management of biotic and abiotic stress affecting agricultural productivity using beneficial microorganisms isolated from higher altitude agro-ecosystems : a remedy for sustainable agriculture / Yogeshvari K. Jhala, Deepak G. Panpatte, Charles Oluwaseun Adetunji, Rajababu V. Vyas, Harsha N. Shelat
    Microbial diversity in north western Himalayan agroecosystems : functions and applications / Vandana Jaggi, N. T. Brindhaa, Manvika Sahgal
    Biodiversity of microbial community : association with sustainable hill agroecosystems / Harshita Negi, Anju Rani, Samiksha Joshi, Pradeep Kumar Sharma
    Soil microbiota : a key bioagent for revitalization of soil health in hilly regions / Amir Khan, Viabhav Kumar Upadhayay, Manisha Panwar, Ajay Veer Singh
    Characteristics of microbial community and enzyme activities in higher altitude regions / Vikas Sharma, Digvijay Dahiya, D. Vasanth Preservation of fungal culture with special reference to mineral oil preservation / Pooja Kannojia, Abhijeet S. Kashyap, Nazia Manzar, Divya Srivastava, Udai B. Singh, Sushil K. Sharma et al.
    Applications of advanced omics technology for harnessing the high altitude agriculture production / Apoorv Tiwari, Gohar Taj
    Nanotechnology for agriculture and environmental sustainability at higher altitudes / Mamta Bisht, Deepika Rajwar, M. Raju. Psychrotolerant microbes : characterization, conservation, strain improvements, mass production, and commercialization / Pankaj K. Mishra, Samiksha Joshi, Saurabh Gangola, Priyanka Khati, J. K. Bisht, A. Pattanayak
    Understanding cold-adapted plant growth-promoting microorganisms from high-altitude ecosystems / Himani Singh, Nupur Sinha, Prachi Bhargava
    Microbes for cold stress resistance in plants : mechanism, opportunities, and challenges / Prity Kushwaha, Prem Lal Kashyap, Pandiyan Kuppusamy
    Nutrient cycling at higher altitudes / Saranya Packialakshmi Jeyakumar, Biplab Dash, Anup Kumar Singh, Deep Chandra Suyal, Ravindra Soni
    Assessment of genes and enzymes of microorganisms of high altitudes and their application in agriculture / Geeta Bhandari, Niki Nautiyal, Mukund Sharma
    Microbiological advances in bioactives from high altitude / Suresh Chandra Phulara, Nazia Ahmad, Bidyut Mazumdar, Vikrant Singh Rajput
    Bioprospecting of endophytic microbes from higher altitude plants : recent advances and their biotechnological applications Vinay Kumar, Lata Jain, Ravindra Soni, Pankaj Kaushal, Reeta Goel
    Biosensor : a boon for heavy metals detection in natural water reservoirs at higher altitudes / Shraddha Chauhan, Lata Sheo Bachan Upadhyay
    Frankia : a promising N-fixing plant growth promoting rhizobacteria (PGPR) improved drought tolerance in crops at higher altitude / Sanjay Mohan Gupta, Kamal Kumar, Rajat Kumar Joshi, Supriya Gupta, Madhu Bala
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Microbiological risk assessment series to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Print
    [edited by] Matthew B. Grisham.
    Contents:
    High Yield Facts
    Physiology and Molecular Microbiology
    Virology
    Bacteriology
    Rickettsiae, Chlamydiae, and Mycoplasms
    Mycology
    Parasitology
    Immunology.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    QR61.5 .M57 2014
    2
  • Digital
    Melphine Harriott.
    Contents:
    Nervous system
    Head and neck
    Respiratory system
    Systemic infections
    Gastrointestinal system
    Liver and biliary system
    Renal and urinary systems
    Reproductive system
    Skin and soft tissue and musculoskeletal systems
    Multiple organ systems.
  • Digital
    edited by Kateryna Kon and Mahendra Rai.
    Summary: The Microbiology of Central Nervous System Infections, Volume 3, discusses modern approaches to the diagnosis, treatment and prophylaxis of central nervous system (CNS) infections. This new release is divided into five sections that cover treatment strategies, imaging, molecular diagnosis, management of CNS infections with metal nanoparticles, and prophylaxis of CNS infections, including bacterial, viral and fungal infections. The last section contains a chapter on transmissible spongiform encephalopathies and modern trends in its diagnosis and treatment. University teachers, medical practitioners, graduate and postgraduate students, researchers in microbiology, and those in the pharmaceutical and laboratory diagnostic industries will find the book very important.

    Contents:
    Section I. Central nervous system infections: current trends in diagnosis, treatment, and prophylaxis
    Section II. Bacterial and viral infections of the CNS
    Section III. Fungal and protozoal infections of the CNS.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Steven L. Percival, Marylynn V. Yates, David W. Williams, Rachel M. Chalmers, Nicholas F. Gray.
    Summary: The second edition of Microbiology of Waterborne Diseases describes the diseases associated with water, their causative agents and the ways in which they gain access to water systems. The book is divided into sections covering bacteria, protozoa, and viruses. Other sections detail methods for detecting and identifying waterborne microorganisms, and the ways in which they are removed from water, including chlorine, ozone, and ultraviolet disinfection. The second edition of this handbook has been updated with information on biofilms and antimicrobial resistance. The impact of global warming and climate change phenomena on waterborne illnesses are also discussed. This book serves as an indispensable reference for public health microbiologists, water utility scientists, research water pollution microbiologists environmental health officers, consultants in communicable disease control and microbial water pollution students. Focuses on the microorganisms of most significance to public health, including E. coli, cryptosporidium, and enterovirus. Highlights the basic microbiology, clinical features, survival in the environment, and gives a risk assessment for each pathogen. Contains new material on antimicrobial resistance and biofilms. Covers drinking water and both marine and freshwater recreational bathing waters.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Erle S. Robertson, editor.
    Summary: This book ventures into a new and exciting area of discovery that directly ties our current knowledge of cancer to the discovery of microorganisms associated with different types of cancers. Recent studies demonstrate that microorganisms are directly linked to the establishment of cancers and that they can also contribute to the initiation, as well as persistence of, the cancers. Microbiome and Cancer covers the current knowledge of microbiome and its association with human cancers. It provides important reading for novices, senior undergraduates in cancer and microbiology, graduate students, junior investigators, residents, fellows and established investigators in the fields of cancer and microbiology. We cover areas related to known, broad concepts in microbiology and how they can relate to the ongoing discoveries of the micro-environment and the changes in the metabolic and physiologic states in that micro-environment, which are important for the ongoing nurturing and survival of the poly-microbial content that dictates activities in that micro-environment. We cover the interactions of microorganisms associated with gastric carcinomas, which are important for driving this particular cancer. Additional areas include oral cancers, skin cancers, ovarian cancers, breast cancers, nasopharyngeal cancers, lung cancers, mesotheliomas, Hodgkin?s and non-Hodgkin?s lymphomas, glioblastoma multiforme, hepatocellular carcinomas, as well as the inflammatory response related to the infectious agents in cancers. This book covers the metabolic changes that occur because of infection and their support for development of cancers, chronic infection and development of therapeutic strategies for detection and control of the infection. The field of microbiome research has exploded over the last five years, and we are now understanding more and more about the context in which microorganisms can contribute to the onset of cancers in humans. The field of microbiome research has demonstrated that the human body has specific biomes for tissues and that changes in these biomes at the specific organ sites can result in disease. These changes can result in dramatic differences in metabolic shifts that, together with genetic mutations, will produce the perfect niche for establishment of the particular infection programmes in that organ site. We are just beginning to understand what those changes are and how they influence the disease state. Overall, we hope to bring together the varying degrees of fluctuations in the microbiome at the major organ sites and how these changes affect the normal cellular processes because of dysregulation, leading to proliferation of the associated tissues.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Jun Yu, editor.
    Summary: This book covers state-of-the-art topics covering evidences indicate that the gut microbiota can be harnessed for cancer prevention as well as to modulate the efficacy of chemotherapy and immunotherapy. This book includes: 1) characterization of the dysregulated microbiome in gastrointestinal cancers (Chapters 1-6); 2) the molecular mechanism of action of gut microbiota via microbial metabolites and direct interaction with host cancer or immune cells (Chapters 7-11); 3) key methodologies for studying the role of gut microbiota in cancers (Chapters 12-13); and 4) the potential application of gut microbes for the prevention and treatment of gastrointestinal cancers (Chapters 14-17). The contributors are international experts in molecular and cellular biology, microbiology, metabolomics, bioinformatics and physician scientists to provide in-depth reviews of this subject. This book provides a rich resource of information on this important topic for graduate students, basic researchers and physicians.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Gut microbiome in health and diseases
    Microbiome in colorectal cancer
    Microbiome in gastric cancer
    Microbiome in liver cancer
    Virus, fungi and archaea in gastrointestinal cancer
    Microbial metabolomics in gastrointestinal cancer
    Diet and gut microbiome in gastrointestinal cancer
    Diet and gut microbiome in fatty liver and its associated liver cancer
    Host-microbiome interaction in gastrointestinal cancer
    Gut microbiome and immune responses in gastrointestinal cancer
    Animal models in the study of microbiome in gastrointestinal cancer
    High-throughput sequencing data analyses for microbiome profiling
    Gut microbiota modulation: probiotics and prebiotics in gastrointestinal cancer
    Roles of gut microbiota in efficacy of anticancer treatment of gastrointestinal cancer
    Targeting gut microbiota to treat gastrointestinal cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2023
  • Digital
    Choudhary, Devendra K.; Kumar, Manoj; Kumar, Vivek; Prasad, Ram.
    Summary: The book discusses the complex interactions between plants and their associated microbial communities. It also elucidates the ways in which these microbiomes are connected with the plant system, and how they affect plant health. The different chapters describe how microbiomes affect plants with regard to immunity, disease conditions, stress management and productivity. In addition, the book describes how an additional plant genome functions as a whole organ system of the host, and how it presents both challenges and opportunities for the plant system. Moreover, the book includes a dedicated section on using omics tools to understand these interactions, and on exploiting them to their full potential.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Applications of Plant-Microbe Interactions in Agro-ecosystems
    Chapter 2. Exploring the Phyllosphere Bacterial Community for Improving Tree Crops Protection
    Chapter 3. Microbes Core to Sustainable Agriculture
    Chapter 4. Bacteria Inducing Legume Nodules Involved in the Improvement of Plant Growth, Health and Nutrition
    Chapter 5. Applications of Beneficial Microbe in Arid and Semiarid Agroecosystem: IAA Producing Bacteria
    Chapter 6. Role of Endophytes in Plant Health and Abiotic Stress Management
    Chapter 7. Affirmative Plant-Microbe Interfaces towards Agro-ecosystem Sustainability
    Chapter 8. Emerging Insight on Rhizobacterial Functions
    Chapter 9. Microbiome in Plant Health and Disease: Challenges and Opportunities
    Chapter 10. Influence of Rhizospheric Microbiome in Plant Health Management
    Chapter 11. Role of Microbes in Plant Health, Disease and Abiotic Stress Management
    Chapter 12. Plant- Microbe Interactions in Agro-Ecosystem- An Application
    Chapter 13. Biodiversity and Biotechnological Applications of Microorganisms Associated with Tropical Plants
    Chapter 14. Rhizobia for Biological Control of Plant Diseases
    Chapter 15. Bioactive Compounds Produced by Biocontrol Agents Driving Plant Health
    Chapter 16. The Continuous Story of Truffles Plant Interaction
    Chapter 17. Can Soil Microorganisms Reduce Broomrape (Orobanche spp.) Infestation in Cropping Systems?
    Chapter 18. Environmental perspectives of plant-microbe nexus for soil and water remediation
    Chapter 19. Development of Future Bioformulations for Sustainable Agriculture
    Chapter 20. Exploring Diversity of Bacterial Endophyte Communities Using Advanced Sequencing Technology
    Chapter 21. Perceptions of Microbe-Microbe, Plant-Microbiome Interfaces: The Metagenomic Manoeuvre
    Chapter 22. Metagenomic Approach In Relation To Microbe-Microbe; Plant-Microbiome-Interactions.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Yvonne Huang, Stavros Garantziotis.
    Summary: This book comprehensively covers the microbiome in respiratory disease, from the initial research study to the disease-specific implications and related applications. Research on the respiratory microbiome is increasing in volume and scope. This reflects rapidly growing interest in the study of respiratory disease to understand how microbiota shape mechanisms of disease pathogenesis. The respiratory tract spans the nasal passages, sinus cavities, oropharynx, and the tracheobronchial tree of the lungs. In these compartments of the upper and lower respiratory tract, the microbiota have now been studied in the context of several chronic respiratory conditions. These include chronic sinusitis, allergic rhinitis, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), bronchiectasis and pulmonary fibrosis, to name a few. The potential impact of ecological interactions (i.e., between microbes and between microbiota and host) within and across respiratory compartments is increasingly recognized. The book is organized into two main sections. Part I, Principles and Tools, covers conceptual modeling of the respiratory microbiome, experimental methodology with a focus on a priori considerations in study design and sampling, laboratory and computational methods for analysis of respiratory microbiome data, and minimizing interpretive pitfalls. Part II, Applications, discusses the evidence from specific studies that have shed novel insights into the influence of respiratory microbiota on mechanisms or outcomes in specific diseases. Based on current best evidence, disease-specific chapters include chronic rhinosinusitis, asthma (pediatric and adult studies), chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), cystic fibrosis (CF), bronchiectasis not due to CF, idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis, and lung transplant. This is an ideal reference for forward-thinking practitioners with interest in novel developments in precision medicine applications in lung disease, as well as translational scientists in the field of microbiology, immunology and lung biology.

    Contents:
    SECTION I: Principles and Tools of Respiratory Microbiome Investigation
    Conceptual Framework and Hypothesis Testing
    Study Design and Sampling Considerations
    Laboratory Platforms to Study the Microbiome
    Analysis and Reporting of Microbiome Data
    SECTION II: Applications in the Study of Specific Diseases
    Chronic Rhinosinusitis /Allergic Rhinitis
    Bronchiolitis, Viral Infection and Pediatric Asthma Risk
    Asthma Pheotype
    Cystic Fibrosis
    Bronchiectasis (non-CF)
    COPD
    Idiopathic Pulmonary Fibrosis
    Lung Transplantation and Immune Suppression
    The Future: Knowledge gaps and priorities.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Gaafar Ragab, T. Prescott Atkinson, Matthew L. Stoll, editors.
    Summary: This book discusses the role of the microbiome in rheumatic diseases and details its implications for patient treatment. Recently, with technological advances, there has been significant research into the microbiome. This has enabled us to more profoundly understand its role in our immune system maturation as well as the role played by microorganisms in autoimmunity and the deeply related rheumatic diseases. This book comprehensively explains the emerging microbiome research through the interrelationships of biomedical sciences, including: immunology, microbiology, bioinformatics, and, with special emphasis, the clinical aspect of rheumatology. It examines the interplay between infectious organisms and major autoimmune diseases, including rheumatoid arthritis, psoriatic arthritis, juvenile arthritis, systemic lupus erythematosus, and vasculitis, and explains how to apply that knowledge to diagnostic techniques and treatment decisions. The international team of expert authors provides insight into current therapies and future interventions specifically targeting the microbiota and explores the impact of our deeper understanding on enhancing personalized medicine. The Microbiome in Rheumatic Diseases and Infection is an essential resource for rheumatologists, pediatricians, internists, microbiologists, and critical care providers caring for children and adults with rheumatic diseases.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Eugene Rosenberg.
    Summary: This book examines an important paradigm shift in biology: Plants and animals, traditionally viewed as individuals, are now considered to be complex systems and host to a plethora of microorganisms. After first presenting historical aspects of microbiota research, bacterial compositions of individual microbiomes and the critical analysis of current methods, the book discusses how microbial communities inside the human body are profoundly affected by numerous factors, such as macro- and micro-nutrients, physical exercise, antibiotics, gender and age. As described by current research, the author highlights how microbiomes contribute to the fitness of the host by providing nutrients, inhibiting pathogens, aiding in the storage of fat during pregnancy, and contributing to development and behavior. The author not only focusses on prokaryotic components in microbiomes, but also addresses single-cell eukaryotes and viruses. This follow-up to the successful book The Hologenome Concept: Human, Animal and Plant Microbiota, published in 2013, provides a contemporary overview of microbiomes. It appeals to anyone working in the life sciences and biomedicine.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Composition of Microbiomes
    Dynamics of Microbiomes
    Holistic Fitness: Microbiomes are Part of the Holobiont's Fitness
    Transmission of Hologenomes Between Generations: Mothers Matter Most
    Eukaryotic Microorganisms are Part of Holobionts
    Viruses are Part of the Holobiont's Fitness and Evolution
    Genetic Variation in Holobionts
    Evolution of Holobionts: The Hologenome Concept
    Microbiomes in Medicine and Agriculture
    Microbiomes: Some Philosophical and Sociological Implications.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Khalid Rehman Hakeem, Gowhar Hamid Dar, Mohammad Aneesul Mehmood, Rouf Ahmad Bhat, editors.
    Springer Nature eBook.
    Summary: An increasing population has put tremendous pressure on agricultural productivity to fulfill the demands of human consumption. Numerous agricultural activities and techniques have been developed to raise annual crop production globally. While agriculture has succeeded in enhancing the yearly crop productivity, this achievement is at the cost of environmental degradation by applying synthetic persistent substances, such as industrial fertilizers, pesticides, herbicides, etc. Chemical fertilizers are nearly as destructive as they are productive, causing monocultures and consequences associated with elimination of diversity, nutrient pollution as evidenced by algae blooms, eutrophication, water quality issues, lower oxygen levels and dangers to fish stocks. Therefore, the scientific approach to maintain sustainable fertility in soil and plants is to switch over to biofertilisers. Biofertilisers are compounds of organic matter that are applied to crops for growth and health. Their constituent micro-organisms interact in an ecofriendly manner with the soil, root and seeds of plants, promoting the growth of micro-flora that enhances soil fertility. They are known to play a number of vital roles in soil fertility, crop productivity and production in agriculture. Application of biofertilisers results in increased mineral and water uptake, root development, vegetative growth and nitrogen fixation. They liberate growth promoting substances and vitamins and help to maintain soil fertility. They act as antagonists and play a pivotal role in neutralising the soil borne plant pathogens, thereby assisting in the bio-control of diseases. Application of biofertilisers in lieu of synthetic fertilizers could be the promising technique to raise agricultural productivity without degrading the environmental quality. The present book focuses on the latest research approaches and updates from the microbiota ecosystem and their applications in agriculture industry. It also highlights the great potential and possible future of action of microbiota in the development of sustainable agricultural systems.

    Contents:
    2.3 Organic Agriculture: A Sustainable Agriculture
    2.4 Organic Nutrition and Crop Productivity/Yield and Quality Parameters
    2.5 Organic Agriculture and Environmental Sustainability
    2.5.1 Organic Nutrition and Soil Fertility
    2.5.2 Organic Fertilizers and Soil Biological Properties
    2.5.3 Organic Agriculture and Climate Change and Global Warming
    2.5.4 Organic Agriculture and Nitrate Leaching and Carbon Sequestration
    2.6 Organic Farming and Human Health Implications
    2.7 Conclusions and Prospects
    References
    Chapter 3: Responses of Soil Properties to Organic Amendments 3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Effect of Organic Farming on Soil Physical Properties
    3.3 Effect of Organic Farming on Soil Chemical Properties
    3.4 Effect of Organic Farming on Soil Biological Properties
    3.5 Impediments of Organic Farming
    3.6 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 4: Vermicomposting: Sustainable Tool for Agriculture Environs
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Solid Waste Minimization Using Vermicomposting
    4.3 Waste Water of Aquatic Animals Is Recycled in Zoo
    4.4 Worms and Their Biological Features
    4.5 Temperature, PH in Vermiprocessing Technique 4.6 Vermicomposting for Agriculture
    4.7 Soil Health vs Organic Fertilizers
    4.8 Temperature, PH in Vermiprocessing Technique
    4.9 Endurable Use of Vermicomposting in Zoo
    4.10 Use of Earthworms in Aquaculture and Poultry Farming
    4.11 Formation of Vermiwash and Its Uses
    4.12 Soil Health vs Organic Fertilizers
    4.13 Vermicomposting for Agriculture
    4.14 Starving Worms Are Future Biodegrading Agents
    4.15 Summary/Conclusion and Future Prospects
    References
    Chapter 5: Application and Viability of Macrophytes as Green Manure
    5.1 Introduction 5.2 Macrophytes: Brief Description of Their General Aspects
    5.3 Biotechnological Applications of Macrophytes
    5.3.1 Macrophytes as Organic Biofertilizers or Green Manure
    5.3.2 Macrophyte Applications as Biofertilizers or Green Manure in Agriculture and Horticulture
    5.3.3 Macrophytes as Phytoremediators
    5.3.4 Conclusion and Perspectives
    References
    Chapter 6: Role of Microorganisms as Biofertilizers
    6.1 Introduction
    6.2 Mode of Action of Microorganisms as Biofertilizers
    6.2.1 Direct Methods
    6.2.1.1 Biological Nitrogen Fixation Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Acknowledgements
    About the Book
    Contents
    About the Editors
    Chapter 1: Chemical Fertilizers, Formulation, and Their Influence on Soil Health
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Background
    1.3 Chemical Fertilizers and Their Formulations
    1.4 Chemical Fertilizer Effect on Soil Parameters
    1.4.1 Soil Chemical Parameters
    1.4.2 Physical Parameters
    1.4.3 Biological Parameters
    References
    Chapter 2: Organic Agriculture: Principles, Current Status, and Significance
    2.1 Introduction
    2.1.1 Concept and Principles
    2.2 Current Status
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Gowhar Hamid Dar, Rouf Ahmad Bhat, Mohammad Aneesul Mehmood, Khalid Rehman Hakeem, editors.
    Summary: The dependence of present farming on artificial input of chemical fertilizers has caused numerous ecological tribulations associated with global warming and soil contamination. Moreover, there is an essential requirement for realistic agricultural practices on a comprehensive level. Accordingly, biofertilizers including microbes have been recommended as feasible environmentally sound solutions for agricultural practices which not only are natural, and cost-effective but also preserve soil environs and important biota of agricultural land. In addition, it enhances the nutrient quantity of soils organically. Microbial biofertilizers promote plant growth by escalating proficient absorption of nutrients for the plants and by providing an excellent disease-fighting mechanism. Agriculture, the backbone of human sustenance, has been put under tremendous pressure by the ever-increasing human population. Although various modern agro-techniques boosted agricultural production, the excessive use of synthetic fertilizers, pesticides and herbicides have proven extremely detrimental to agriculture as well as to the environment in which it is carried out. Besides this some faulty agricultural practices like monoculture and defective irrigation, further complicate the scenario by eliminating biodiversity, increasing the efflux of nutrients into the water bodies, the formation of algal blooms, eutrophication, damaging the water quality and lowering fish stocks. Biofertilizers are the organic compounds applied to crops for their sustainable growth and the sustainability of the environment as the microbiota associated with biofertilizers interact with the soil, roots and seeds to enhance soil fertility. Application of biofertilizers results in the increased mineral and water uptake, root development, vegetative growth and nitrogen fixation besides liberating growth-promoting substances and minerals that help the maintenance of soil fertility. They further act as antagonists and play a pivotal role in neutralising soil-borne plant pathogens and thus, help in the bio-control of diseases. Application of biofertilizers instead of synthetic fertilizers could be a promising technique to raise agricultural productivity without degrading environmental quality. The present book focuses on the latest research approaches and updates from the microbiota and their applications in the agriculture industry. We believe this book addresses various challenges and shed lights on the possible future of the sustainable agricultural system.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Acknowledgements
    About the Book
    Contents
    Contributors
    About the Editors
    Chapter 1: Chemical Fertilizers and Their Impact on Soil Health
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Types of Chemical Fertilizers
    1.3 Nitrogenous Fertilizer
    1.3.1 Characteristics
    1.4 Phosphorus Fertilizer
    1.4.1 Characteristics
    1.5 Potassium Fertilizer
    1.5.1 Characteristics of Potassium Fertilizer
    1.6 Advantages of Chemical Fertilizer
    1.7 Drawbacks of Chemical Fertilizer
    1.8 Important Nutrients in Fertilizers
    1.9 Primary Nutrients 1.10 Secondary Nutrients
    1.11 Micronutrients
    1.12 Soil Health Concept
    1.13 Positive Effects of Fertilizers
    1.14 Impacts of Chemical Fertilizers on Soil Health
    1.14.1 Soil Quality
    1.14.2 Physicochemical Properties of Soil
    1.14.3 Soil Enzyme Activity
    1.14.4 Soil Compaction
    1.14.5 Soil Acidification
    1.14.6 Effect on Soil Biota
    1.15 Soil Organic Matter (SOM)
    1.16 Soil Salinity
    1.17 Effect on Plants
    1.18 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 2: Microbial Bioremediation of Pesticides/Herbicides in Soil
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Merits of Pesticide Use 2.3 Risks Associated with Pesticide Use
    2.4 Microbial Bioremediation
    2.5 Factors Affecting Microorganism Bioremediation of Pesticide
    2.6 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 3: Pollution Cleaning Up Techniques
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Agricultural Pollution
    3.3 Bioremediation Via Microbes
    3.4 Microbial Processes Concerned with Bioremediation
    3.4.1 Metal Microbe Mechanism of Interaction
    3.5 Bioremediation Strategies
    3.6 Phytoremediation
    3.7 Phytoextraction
    3.8 Phytostabilization
    3.9 Rhizofiltration
    3.10 Phytovolatilization 3.11 Aquatic Plant Species Studied for Phytoremediation
    3.12 Pesticide Degradation by Bacteria
    3.12.1 Role of Fungi
    3.12.2 Role of Enzymes
    3.13 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 4: Role of Mushrooms in the Bioremediation of Soil
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Mushroom as a Significant Tool for Mycoremediation
    4.3 Remediation Through Mushrooms
    4.3.1 Biodegradation
    4.3.2 Bioconversion
    4.3.3 Biosorption
    4.4 White-Rot Fungi Degradation System
    4.5 Mycoremediation of Solid Wastes
    4.6 Xenobiotic Organic Compounds (XOCs) and Mycoremediation
    4.6.1 Petroleum Hydrocarbons 4.6.2 Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons (PAHs)
    4.6.3 Halogenated Organic Compounds
    4.6.4 Synthetic Dyes
    4.6.5 Synthetic Pesticides
    4.6.6 Heavy Metals
    4.7 Role of Mycorrhizae in Remediation of Soil
    4.8 Disadvantages of Mycoremediation
    4.9 Conclusion and Future Aspects
    References
    Chapter 5: Microbial Degradation of Organic Constituents for Sustainable Development
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Some Persistent Organic Pollutants (POPs)
    5.3 Role of Microbes in the Degradation of Organic Substances
    5.4 Microbial Degradation of Persistent Organic Pollutants
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital/Print
    Andreas Schwiertz, editor.
    Contents:
    Preface
    Chapter 1. Microbiota: what does it mean (historic considerations- Schwiertz et. al)
    Chapter 2. Studying the human microbiota
    Alan Walker
    Chapter 3. The gut microbiota and their metabolites: potential implications for the host epigenome
    Mona Mischke and Torsten Plösch
    Chapter 4. The Oral Microbiota
    Nicole B. Arweiler, Lutz Netuschil
    Chapter 5. Skin Microbiota
    Markus Egert and Rainer Simmering
    Chapter 6. Vaginal Microbiota
    Werner Mendling
    Chapter 7. Gastrointestinal Microbiota
    Hermie J.M. Harmsen and Marcus. C. de Goffau
    Chapter 8. How to manipulate the Microbiota by Probiotics
    Verena Grimm and Christian U. Riedel
    Chapter 9. How to manipulate the Microbiota by Prebiotics
    Petra Louis, Harry J. Flint and Catherine Michel. Chapter 10. Microbiota transplantation
    Susana Fuentes, Ph.D. and Willem M. de Vos, Prof. Ph.D
    Index. .
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Ann Van Schpdael.
    Contents:
    An overview of the use of microchips in electrophoretic separation techniques : fabrication, separation modes, sample preparation opportunities, and on-chip detection / Stijn Hendrickx, Wim de Malsche, and Deirdre Cabooter
    Microchip electrophoresis for fast and interference-free determination of trace amounts of glyphosate and glufosinate residues in agricultural products / Xuan Wei and Qiaosheng Pu
    Microchip capillary electrophoresis of nitrite and nitrate in cerebrospinal fluid / Marián Masár, Róbert Bodor, and Peter Troška
    Analysis of thiols by microchip capillary electrophoresis for in situ planetary investigations / Maria F. Mora, Amanda M. Stockton, and Peter A. Willis
    Analysis of ofloxacin in ofloxacin ear drops by microfluidic chip coupled with contactless conductivity detection / Bing Chen and Kaicheng Li
    Microchip capillary electrophoresis : quantum dots and paramagnetic particles for bacteria immunoseparation / Sona Krizkova [and 6 others]
    Fast high-throughput screening of H1N1 virus by parallel detection with multichannel microchip electrophoresis / Peng Zhang [and three others]
    Sex identification of ancient DNA samples using microfluidic device / Kristy J. Shaw [and three others]
    Fast and continuous-flow detection and separation of DNA complexes and DNA in nanofluidic chip format / Martina Viefhues, Jan Regtmeier, and Dario Anselmetti
    Multidimensional microchip-capillary electrophoresis device for determination of functional proteins in infant milk formula / Ruige Wu, Ahiping Wang, and Ying Sing Fung
    Fast assembly of anti-voltage photonic crystals in microfluidic channels for ultrafast separation of amino acids and peptides / Yi Chen, Tao Liao, and Can Hu
    Rapid determination of catecholamines in urine samples by nonaqueous microchip electrophoresis with LIF detection / Hongmei Hu, Yuanming Guo, and Tiejun Li
    Carbon nanotube-based separation columns for microchip electrochromatography / K. B. Mogensen, B. Delacourt, and J. P. Kutter
    Electrochromatography on acrylate-based monolith in cyclic olefin copolymer microchip : an attractive technology / Y. Ladner, G. Cretier, and K. Faure
    On-chip electromembrane extraction for monitoring drug metabolism in real time by electrospray ionization mass spectrometry / Nickolaj J. Petersen, Henrik Jensen, and Stig Pedersen-Bjergaard
    Sample preparation for N-glycosylation analysis of therapeutic monoclonal antibodies by electrophoresis / Ákos Szekrényes [and 5 others].
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    edited by John Grayson and Walter Zingg.
    Contents:
    v. 1. Blood-vessel interactions
    v. 2. Microcirculation.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    QP106.6 .W67 1975
    2
  • Digital
    Maria Dorobantu, Lina Badimon, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive reference book of coronary microcirculation broadly covers theoretical aspects, clinical cases and therapeutic considerations from an innovative perspective. Topics covered include: ischemic heart disease, silent cerebral damage, heart failure, left ventricular hypertrophy arrhythmias, and cerebral and renal microcirculation. Microcirculation: From Bench to Bedside underlines the clinical importance of addressing coronary microcirculation with relevant clinical examples that are often encountered by practitioners. It therefore provides a critical resource on microcirculation for both specialist and non-specialist practitioners. .

    Contents:
    I. Coronary microcirculation
    Theoretical aspects
    1. Basic concepts of microcirculation
    2. Coronary microvascular dysfunction in cardiovascular disease: lessons from large animal models
    3. Dynamic testing of microcirculation
    4. Study of microcirculation through direct microscopic techniques
    5. Platelet function and coronary microvascular dysfunction
    6. Role of perivascular tissue in microvascular dysfunction
    7. Myocardial infarction with non-obstructive coronary artery disease
    II. Clinical cases
    8. Role of coronary microcirculation in no-reflow phenomenon in myocardial infarction with ST segment elevation
    9. Microcirculatory dysfunction in chronic angina
    10. Vasospastic angina
    11. Brain microcirculation and silent cerebral damage
    12. Microcirculation and left ventricular hypertrophy
    13. Microcirculatory dysfunction in acute heart failure
    14. Relationship between coronary microcirculation and arrhythmias: a Janus with two faces
    III. Therapeutical considerations
    15. Treatment of no-reflow phenomenon
    16. Lipid lowering treatment in microcirculation
    17. Cell strategies to stimulate angiogenesis/vasculogenesis for improvement of microcirculation.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Enrico Agabiti-Rosei, Anthony M. Heagerty, Damiano Rizzoni.
    Summary: This book offers an extensive review of the most recent data on the pathophysiological role of structural and functional alterations in the microcirculation, particularly focusing on hypertension and diabetes. It covers several relevant and innovative aspects, including the possible mechanisms involved in the development of microvascular remodeling and rarefaction, the technical approaches available for the detection of microvascular alterations, including non-invasive evaluations, the prognostic role of changes in small resistance artery structure, the possibility of preventing or regressing such alterations with appropriate treatment, and the potential clinical advantages of such intervention. A number of innovative areas of research are considered, including the role of the immune system, inflammation and oxidative stress in the development of microvascular alterations. Lastly, it examines the availability of recent non-invasive methods for the evaluation of small resistance artery morphology in the retina, which in the near future may provide a useful tool for the stratification of cardiovascular risk and even for clinical decisions regarding drug treatment, thus providing physicians with a clinically relevant instrument for improving and optimizing the management of hypertensive and diabetic patients. The book provides valuable, clinically relevant information for specialists (cardiology, internal medicine, and endocrinology) and general practitioners, and also offers novel and stimulating data to basic and clinical researchers.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1 Structure and Function of the Microcirculation
    Chapter 2 Assessment of Small Artery Structure and Function by Micromyography
    Chapter 3 Assessment of Retinal Arteriolar Morphology by SLDF
    Chapter 4 Assessment of Retinal Arteriolar Morphology by Adaptive Optics
    Chapter 5 The Cerebral Microcirculation
    Chapter 6 Role of Inflammation in Microvascular Damage
    Chapter 7 Immune Mechanisms in Vascular Remodeling in Hypertension
    Chapter 8 Microvascular Endothelial Dysfunction in Hypertension
    Chapter 9 Interrelationships Between Micro and Macrocirculation
    Chapter 10 Alterations in Capillary and Microcirculatory Networks in Cardiovascular Diseases
    Chapter 11 Microvascular Alterations in Obesity
    Chapter 12 Microvascular Alterations in Diabetes: Focus on Small Resistance Arteries
    Chapter 13 Cardiovascular Effects of Anti-angiogenic Drugs
    Chapter 14 Pathophysiological Mechanisms Implicated in Organ Damage and Cardiovascular Events
    Chapter 15 The Role of Perivascular Adipose Tissue in Arterial Function in Health and Disease
    Chapter 16 Prognostic Role of Microvascular Damage and Effect of Treatment.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Tatsuhisa Takahashi.
    Summary: This book presents a new method for analyzing the structure and function of the biological branching systems of fractal trees, with a focus on microcirculation. Branching systems in humans (vascular and bronchial trees) and those in the natural world (plants, trees, and rivers) are characterized by a fractal nature. To date, fractal studies have tended to concentrate on fractal dimensions, which quantify the complexity of objects, but the applications for practical use have remained largely unexplored. This book breaks new ground with topics that include the human retinal microcirculatory network, oxygen consumption by vascular walls, the Fh raeus-Lindqvist effect, the bifurcation exponent, and the asymmetrical microvascular network. Readers are provided with simple formulas to express functions and a simulation graph with in vivo data. The book also discusses the mechanisms regulating blood flow and pressure and how they are related to pathological changes in the human body. Researchers and clinicians alike will find valuable new insights in these pioneering studies.

    Contents:
    Branching Systems of Fractal Vascular Trees
    A Theoretical Model for the Microcirculatory Network
    Oxygen Consumption by Vascular Walls in the Retinal Vasculature
    The Fh raeus-Lindqvist Effect on the Retinal Microcirculation
    Effects of a Reduction in the Bifurcation Exponent from 3.00 to 2.85
    Asymmetrically B ranching Microvascular Networks.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Emilia Biffi.
    Contents:
    Fabrication of microfluidic platforms with pneumatically/hydraulically controlled PDMS valves and their use in neurobiological research / Bryson M. Brewer, Donna J. Webb, and Deyu Li
    Reliable reversible bonding method for perfused microfluidic devices / Paola Occhetta, Emilia Biffi, and Marco Rasponi
    Bridging two cultures : minimalistic networks prepared by microfluidic arraying, and open access compartments for electrophysiology / Jonathan West ... [et al.]
    Asymmetric genetic manipulation and patch clamp recording of neurons in a microfluidic chip / Prasanna Sakha ... [et al.]
    Development of a compartmentalized biochip for axonal isolation and neuronal-circuit formation at the single-cell level / Ting Huang ... [et al.]
    Campenot cultures and microfluidics provide complementary platforms for spatial study of dorsal root ganglia neurons / Sara J. Fenstermacher, Maria F. Pazyra-Murphy, and Rosalind A. Segal
    Development of microfluidic devices for the manipulation of neuronal synapses / Anika Jain and Martha U. Gillette
    Use of a 3-compartment microfluidic device to study activity dependent synaptic competition / Ainsley Coquinco and Max Cynader
    Multi-compartment neuron-glia coculture microsystem / Jaewon Park ... [et al.]
    Compartmentalized microfluidic platforms as tool of choice to study the interaction between neurons and osteoblasts / Estrela Neto ... [et al.]
    Novel in vitro primary culture model of the lower motor neuron-neuromuscular junction circuit / Katherine A. Southam ... [et al.]
    Compartmentalized microfluidics for in vitro Alzheimer's disease studies / Yufei Ren, Anja Kunze, and Philippe Renaud
    Selective biochemical manipulation of twin neuronal networks on microelectrode arrays / Giulia Regalia ... [et al.]
    Compartmentalized synapse microarray for high- throughput screening / Amol D. Jadhav ... [et al.].
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Vinod Kumar Yata.
    Summary: This book describes the fundamentals of microfluidics and fabrication methods of microfluidic devices that can be adopted for animal-assisted reproduction. It presents microfluidic methods for sorting highly fertile spermatozoa. This book also describes the application of microfluidics in vitro fertilization and embryo culture. It discusses the use of microfluidics in sperm sexing and the cryopreservation of animal gametes and embryos. Lastly, the book examines the potential opportunities of microfluidics in infertility diagnosis, sperm selection and guidance, oocyte selection, insemination, and embryo monitoring.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction to Microfluidics and animal reproductive techniques
    Chapter 2. Principles, materials and fabrication methods of microfluidics
    Chapter 3. Microfluidics and non-microfluidics methods of sperm sorting and sperm analysis
    Chapter 4. Applications of microfluidcs for in vitro fertilization and embryo Culture
    Chapter 5. Microfluidics in cryoreservation of animal gametes and embryos
    Chapter 6. New hope for sperm sexing: possible role of microfluidics.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Daniel A. Fletcher, Junsang Doh, Matthieu Piel.
    Summary: Microfluidics in Cell Biology Part C, Volume 148, a new release in the Methods in Cell Biology series, continues the legacy of this premier serial with quality chapters authored by leaders in the field. Unique to this updated volume are three sections on microfluidics in various multi-cellular models, including microfluidics in cell monolayers/spheroids, microfluidics in organ on chips, and microfluidics in model organisms. Specific chapters discuss collective migration in microtubes, leukocyte adhesion dynamics on endothelial monolayers under flow, constrained spheroid for perfusion culture, cells in droplet arrays, heart on chips, kidney on chips, liver on chips, and more. Contains contributions from experts in the field from across the world. Covers a wide array of topics on both mitosis and meiosisIncludes relevant, analysis based topics.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Erik Seedhouse.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Long Duration Flight Data
    3. Earthbound and Microgravity Pathophysiology of Increased Intracranial Pressure
    4. Papilledema and Microgravity-Induced Fluid Shift
    5. The Role of Carbon Dioxide and Exercise
    6. Diet and Personalized Medicine
    7. Future Research
    Glossary
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Jaspreet Singh Kochhar, Justin J.Y. Tan, Yee Chin Kwang, Lifeng Kang.
    Summary: This monograph covers a novel technology to deliver drugs and cosmetics through the skin in a minimally invasive manner. Microneedles - a bed of miniaturized needles is one of the most studied topics in delivering actives through the skin barrier. This book enables readers to understand the delivery of ingredients through the skin, describes a novel and simple method to fabricate microneedles containing a range of small and large molecular weight compounds, studies their physical properties as well as delivery through the skin layers. Readers will discover this book to be extremely beneficial to help them understand the state of the field of transdermal drug delivery, with extensive coverage including experimental data on basics of microneedle fabrication technology using photolithography, encapsulation of drugs within the polymeric matrix of microneedles and studying their release patternsin vitro and ex vivo . Academic researchers, pharmaceutical and cosmeceutical industry as well as students of skin science will find this account very useful in their pursuits. As microneedles grow and develop into a commercial reality with more actives being delivered and significant clinical research being put in, this account will hold well in providing basic principles and knowledge together with rigorous experimental data.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Introduction & Literature review
    Materials & Methods
    A Simple Method of Microneedle Array Fabrication for Transdermal Drug Delivery
    Protein Encapsulation in Polymeric Microneedles by Photolithography
    Microneedle Patch for Fast Onset and Long-lasting Delivery of Painkillers
    Microneedle Patch to Deliver Collagen through the Skin
    Recent trends in microneedle development & applications in medicine & cosmetics (2013-2018)
    Conclusions & Future Directions
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Elizabeth Bahar Houshmand.
    Contents:
    Introduction to Microneedling / Elizabeth Bahar Houshmand
    A Short History of Skin Needling / Desmond Fernandes
    The Value of Medical Needling in Burn Scars / Matthias Aust
    Skin Care Used with Microneedling / Chytra V. Anand and Parinitha Rao
    Treatment of Hyperpigmentation with Microneedling / Atchima Suwanchinda
    Treatment of Acne and Acne Scars with Microneedling / Stuti Khare Shukla and Michael H. Gold
    Microneedling and Platelet-Rich Plasma (PRP) / Elizabeth Bahar Houshmand.
    Digital Access Wiley 2021
  • Digital
    Feres Chaddad-Neto, Marcos Devanir Silva da Costa.
    Summary: Microneuroanatomy is essential to understanding the brain. In many cases, passing on neuroanatomical knowledge is a difficult task to accomplish, yet this is chiefly due to those who are tasked with conveying this knowledge in classes and lectures, or in books. In reality, neuroanatomy is simple and needs to be understood as a tool for approaching the different areas of the brain, not as an obstacle, and the only way to overcome this problem is to correlate neuroanatomy with various types of disease (arteriovenous malformations, aneurysms, tumors, cavernomas, hydrocephalus, etc.) This book provides a novel approach to the relation between microneuroanatomy and brain diseases. Each chapter addresses a specific neuroanatomical region, and correlates all the key neuroanatomical aspects with diseases that affect it; further, each chapter provides detailed insights into safely performing brain surgery in the respective region.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Surgical Anatomy of the Sulci and Gyri of the Brain
    Chapter 2. Surgical Anatomy of the Frontal Lobe
    Chapter 3. Surgical Anatomy of the Parietal and Occipital Lobes
    Chapter 4. Surgical Anatomy of the Temporal Lobe
    Chapter 5. Surgical Anatomy of the Central Core of the Brain
    Chapter 6. Surgical Anatomy of the Lateral Ventricles
    Chapter 7. Surgical Anatomy of the Third Ventricle
    Chapter 8. Surgical Anatomy of the Cerebellum and Forth Ventricle
    Chapter 9. Surgical Anatomy of the Midbrain
    Chapter 10. Surgical Anatomy of the Pons
    Chapter 11. Surgical Anatomy of the Medulla
    Chapter 12. Surgical Anatomy of the Anterior Basal Cisterns
    Chapter 13. Surgical Anatomy of the Posterior Basal Cisterns
    Chapter 14. Surgical Anatomy of the Posterior Fossa Cisterns
    Chapter 15. Surgical Anatomy of the Sellar Region
    Chapter 16. Surgical Anatomy of the Parasellar Region
    Chapter 17. Surgical Anatomy of the Foramen Magno
    Chapter 18. Surgical Anatomy of the Pineal Region.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Summary: The second edition of Microorganisms in Foods 7: Microbiological Testing in Food Safety Management updates and expands on information on the role of microbiological testing in modern food safety management systems. After helping the reader understand the often confusing statistical concepts underlying microbiological sampling, the second edition explores how risk assessment and risk management can be used to establish goals such as a "tolerable levels of risk," Appropriate Levels of Protection, Food Safety Objectives or Performance Objectives for use in controlling foodborne illness. Guidelines for establishing effective management systems for control of specific hazards in foods are also addressed, including new examples for pathogens and indicator organisms in powdered infant formula, Listeria monocytogenes in deli-meats, enterohemorrhagic Escherichia coli in leafy green vegetables, viruses in oysters and Campylobacter in poultry. In addition, a new chapter on application of sampling concept to microbiological methods, expanded chapters covering statistical process control, investigational sampling, environmental sampling, and alternative sampling schemes. The respective roles of industry and government are also explored, recognizing that it is through their collective actions that effective food safety systems are developed and verified. Understanding these systems and concepts can help countries determine whether imported foods were produced with an equivalent level of protection. Microorganisms in Foods 7 is intended for anyone using microbiological testing or setting microbiological criteria, whether for governmental food inspection and control, or industrial applications. It is also intended for those identifying the most effective use of microbiological testing in the food supply chain. For students in food science and technology, this book provides a wealth of information on food safety management principles used by government and industry, with many references for further study. The information was prepared by the International Commission on Microbiological Specifications for Foods (ICMSF). The ICMSF was formed in response to the need for internationally acceptable and authoritative decisions on microbiological limits for foods in international commerce. The current membership consists of fifteen food microbiologists from twelve countries, drawn from government, universities, and food processing and related industries.

    Contents:
    Microbiological Hazards and their Control
    Evaluating Risks and Establishing Food Safety Objectives and Performance Objectives
    Meeting FSO and PO through Control Measures
    Selection and Use of Acceptance Criteria
    Establishment of Microbiological Criteria
    Concepts of Probability and Principles of Sampling
    Sampling Plans
    Selection of Cases and Attributes Plans
    Sampling, Sample Handling, Sample Analysis and Laboratory Quality Assurance
    Impact of Sampling Concepts on the Effectiveness of Microbiological Methodologies
    Tightened, Reduced and Investigational Sampling
    Sampling to Assess Control of the Environment
    Statistical Process Control
    Aflatoxins in Peanut
    Pathogens and Indicator Organisms in Powdered Infant Formula
    Listeria monocytogenes in Ready-to-eat Deli-meats
    Enterohemorrhagic Escherichia coli on Fresh-cut Leafy Vegetables
    Viruses in Oysters
    Campylobacter in Chicken Meat.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Bhoopander Giri, Ajit Varma, editors.
    Contents:
    Part-I Genesis and Impact of Salinity on the Diversity and Distribution of Microorganisms in Saline Habitats 1. Salinity: An Overview Priyanka Srivastava and *Bhoopander GiriDepartment of Botany, Swami Shraddhanand College, University of Delhi, Delhi 110036, India*e-mail: bhoopg@yahoo.com 2. Occurrence and Distribution of Fungi in Saline EnvironmentsAdèle L. Bunbury-Blanchette and Allison K. Walkera*Acadia University, Department of Biology, 33 Westwood Ave., Wolfville, Nova Scotia, Canada, B4P 2R6*email: allison.walker@acadiau.ca 3. Microbial Ecology of Saline EcosystemsVishnuvardhan Reddy Sultanpuram# and Thirumala MotheMicrobial Ecology Laboratory, Department of Applied Biosciences, Mahatma Gandhi University, Anneparthy, Yellareddygudem (PO), Nalgonda-508254, Telangana, India.#E-mail: svr.micro@gmail.com 4. Microbial diversity of saline habitats: An overview of biotechnological applicationsShubhrima Ghosh, Sumit Kumar and Sunil Kumar Khare*Enzyme and Microbial Biochemistry Laboratory, Department of Chemistry, Indian Institute of Technology Delhi, Hauz Khas, New Delhi-110016, India*email: skkhare@chemistry.iitd.ac.in; skhare@rocketmail.com 5. Investigation of the Structural and Functional Microbial Diversity in Indian MangrovesShayantan Mukherji1, Shyamalina Haldar2, Abhrajyoti Ghosh1*Department of Biochemistry, Bose Institute, P1/12 CIT Road, Scheme VIIM, Kolkata- 700054, West Bengal, IndiaEmail: abhrajyoti.ghosh@jcbose.ac.in, aghosh78@gmail.com Part-II Impact of Salinity on Plants and Microbial Life 6. Exopolysaccharides and Biofilms in Mitigating Salinity Stress: The Biotechnological Potential of Halophilic and Soil Inhabiting PGPR MicroorganismsAparna Banerjee*, Shrabana Sarkar, Sara Cuadros-Orellana, Rajib BandopadhyayVicerrectoría de Investigación y Postgrado, Centro de Biotecnología de los Recursos Naturales, Universidad Católica del Maule, Talca, Chile*E-mail: abanerjee@ucm.cl 7. Impact of Salinity Stress on Growth and Development of Aquatic FungiDepartment of Botany, Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México, Mexico City, MexicoCorresponding author e-mail: pvelez@ib.unam.mx 8. Cellular mechanisms of plant salt tolerance*Mohamed Magdy F. Mansour and Karima Hamid A. SalamaDepartment of Botany, Faculty of Science, Ain Shams University, Cairo 11566, Egypt*email: magdi.abdelhamid@yahoo.com 9. Microorganisms Aiding Existence and Efficiency of Plants in Saline Environment: What We Know and What to ExpectUsha Chakraborty*, Swarnendu Roy1 and Bishwanath Chakraborty2Plant Biochemistry Laboratory, Department of Botany, University of North Bengal, Siliguri, West Bengal*email: ucnbu2012@gmail.com 10. Effect of Salinity on Physiological Processes in PlantsOkon Godwin OkonDepartment of Biological Sciences, Ritman University, P.O. BOX 1321, Ikot Ekpene, Akwa Ibom State, Nigeria. E-mail: okonokongodwin@yahoo.com Part-III Plant-Microbe Interactions in Saline Environment 11. Influence of Native Arbuscular Mycorrhizal Fungi and Pseudomonas Fluorescens on Tamarix Shrubs Under Different Salinity LevelsKarima Bencherif*; Yolande Dalpé, Anissa Lounès
    Hadj SahraouiUniversité de Djelfa, Faculté des sciences de la Nature et de la vie, Route de Moudjbara, BP 3117. Djelfa (17000) Algérie. Université du Littoral Côte d'Opale, Unité de Chimie Environnementale et Interactions sur le Vivant (UCEIV), EA4492, 50 rue Ferdinand Buisson, 62228 Calais, France. lounes@univ-littoral.fr*Email: bencherif-karima@yahoo.fr 12. Salt-tolerant Microbes: Isolation and AdaptationMohammad Javad ZareaDepartment of Agronomy and Plant breeding, Faculty of Agriculture, Ilam University, Ilam, IranE-mail: zareamj@yahoo.com or mj.zarea@ilam.ac.ir 13. The Mechanisms Involved in Enhancing Plant Salt Stress Tolerance Using Arbuscular Mycorrhizal FungiMagdi T Abdelhamid, Raafat R El-Masry, Darwish S Darwish, Mazhar M F Abdalla, Shinya Oba, Ragab RagabBotany Department, National Research Centre, 33 EL Bohouth St, Dokki, Giza 12622, Egypt, E-mail: magdi.abdelhamid@yahoo.com 14. Plant Growth Promoting Bacteria for Improving Crops Under Saline ConditionsBensidhoum Leila And Nabti Elhafid* Laboratoire de Maitrise des Energies Renouvelables, Faculté des Sciences de la Nature et de la Vie, Université de Bejaia, 06000 Bejaia, Algeria.*e-mail: elhnabti1977@yahoo.fr 15. Insights in The Physiological, Biochemical and Molecular Basis of Salt Stress Tolerance in Plants Nisha Kumari*, Kamla Malik, Babita Rani, Minakshi Jattan, Sushil, Ram Avtar, Sarita Devi and Sunder Singh AryaDepartment of Biochemistry, CCS Haryana Agricultural University, Hisar-125 004, India*e-mail: nishaahlawat211@gmail.com 16. Arbuscular mycorrhizal fungi alleviate soil salinity stress in arid and semi-arid areasKarima Bencherif*, Yolande Dalpé, Anissa Lounès Hadj-SahraouiUniversité de Djelfa, Faculté des sciences de la Nature et de la vie, Route de Moudjbara, BP 3117. Djelfa (17000) Algérie. Unité de Chimie Environnementale et Interactions sur le Vivant (UCEIV), Université du Littoral Côte d'Opale, SFR Condorcet CNRS 3417, 50, rue Ferdinand Buisson, F-62228 Calais cedex, France. *e-mail: bencherif-karima@yahoo.fr 17. Salinity Stress Dependent Coordination of Metabolic Networks in Relation to Salt Tolerance in Plants Ashutosh Dubey* and A.K. Verma Department of Biochemistry, College of Basic Sciences and Humanities, G.B. Pant university of agriculture and technology, Pantnagar-263 145, INDIA*E-Mail: drashutoshdubey@rediffmail.com 18. Salt Stress on Plant Growth and Role of Microbes in Promoting Plant Growth Under Salt Stress Manik Prabhu Narsing Rao1, Zhou-Yan Dong, Min-Xiao1 and Wen-Jun Li1State Key Laboratory of Biocontrol and Guangdong Key Laboratory of Plant Resources, School of Life Sciences, Sun Yat-Sen University, Guangzhou, P'R Chin*e-mail: liwenjun3@mail.sysu.edu.cn Part-IV Strategies for Mitigation and Reclamation of Saline Soils 19. Strategies for Reclamation of Saline Soils*Vinay Shankar and Heikham EvelinDepartment of Botany, Deshbandhu College, University of Delhi, New Delhi
    110 019*Email: meevelin@gmail.com 20. Biochar for Reclamation of Saline Soils Sharma Mona*, Rachna Bhateria, Bansal Deepak, Bala Kiran, Rani Nisha Department of Environmental Science & Engineering, Guru Jambheshwar University of Science & Technology, Hisar, Haryana, India*Email: drmonasharma1@gmail.com.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Matthieu Piel and Manuel Théry.
    Summary: "Micropatterning refers generally to techniques which provide an experimental control over the chemical, physical, or geometrical properties of materials at the micron or submicron scale, and are thus used to produce spatial patterns of these properties. These techniques, which were often originally designed for application in microelectronics, have spread over most areas of science, including biology. They have proved particularly useful for cell biology, bridging the gap between the Petri-dish and complex 3D assays and tissues."--Preface.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
  • Digital
    Edoardo Midena, editor.
    Contents:
    Microperimetry and Multimodal Retinal Imaging: the Fundamentals: Functional Evaluation of the Retina: an Introduction
    Retinal Fixation and Microperimetry
    Microperimetry: technical remarks
    OCT/SLO Microperimetry and Correlates
    Scotopic microperimetry
    Multimodal retinal imaging: an Introduction. Clinical Applications of Microperimetry and Multimodal Retina Imaging: Early and Intermediate Age-Related Macular Degeneration
    Geographic atrophy
    Neovascular age-related macular degeneration
    Retinal Pigment Epithelium and Choroid Graft
    Macular Telangiectasia Type 2
    Diabetes and Retinal Vascular Disorders
    Myopia
    Retinal Dystrophies
    Disorders of the vitreoretinal interface
    Inflammatory chorio-retinal diseases
    Toxic retinopathies
    Glaucoma. The contribution to visual rehabilitation: Low vision: diagnosis and rehabilitation.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital/Print
    Gaetano Santulli, editor.
    Contents:
    1. A fleeting glimpse inside microRNA, epigenetics and micropeptidomics
    2. The microRNA machinery
    3. microRNAs in mitochondria: an unexplored niche
    4. microRNAs distinctively regulate vascular smooth muscle and endothelial cells: functional implications in angiogenesis, atherosclerosis, and in-stent restenosis
    5. Mechanistic role of microRNAs in coupling lipid metabolism and atherosclerosis
    6. microRNAs in pancreatic β-cell physiology
    7. microRNA and cardiac regeneration
    8. microRNAs and endometrial pathophysiology
    9. microRNA and NF-kappa B
    10. microRNAs: key players in hematopoiesis
    11. Regulatory roles of miRNAs in aging
    12. Computational prediction of microRNA targets
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital/Print
    Gaetano Santulli, editor.
    Contents:
    microRNAs in the malignant transformation process / Anne E. Sarver, Lihua Li, Reena V. Kartha, Subbaya Subramanian
    microRNA and chronic lymphocytic leukemia / Dana Elena Giza, George A. Calin
    microRNA in malignant lymphoma / Hiroyuki Tagawa
    MicroRNAs and gastrointestinal stromal tumor / Pinar Akçakaya, Weng-Onn Lui
    Insights into the role of microRNAs in pancreatic cancer pathogenesis: potential for diagnosis, prognosis, and therapy / Mohammad Aslam Khan [and others]
    microRNAs and colorectal cancer / Anna Lena Ress, Samantha Perakis, Martin Pichler
    microRNAs and prostate cancer / Sajni Josson, Leland W. K. Chung, Murali Gururajan
    microRNA and ovarian cancer / Ream Langhe
    microRNA and lung cancer / Valerio Del Vescovo, Michela A. Denti
    microRNAs and soft tissue sarcomas / Tomohiro Fujiwara, Toshiyuki Kunisada, Ken Takeda, Toshifumi Ozaki
    microRNA and bone cancer / Mary Nugent.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital/Print
    Gaetano Santulli, editor.
    Contents:
    Exploiting microRNA specificity and selectivity: paving a sustainable path towards precision medicine / Gaetano Santulli
    microRNAs and personalized medicine: evaluating their potential as cancer biomarkers / Anne Saumet and Charles-Henri Lecellier
    microRNA and pain / Atsushi Sakai and Hidenori Suzuki
    microRNA and epilepsy / Cristina R. Reschke and David C. Henshall
    microRNA and autism / Ayyappan Anitha and Ismail Thanseem
    microRNAs and neurogenerative diseases / Lifeng Qiu, Eng King Tan, and Li Zeng
    microRNAs and Fragile X Syndrome / Shi-Lung Lin
    The emerging role of mitomiRs in the pathophysiology of human disease / Filipe V. Duarte, Carlos M. Palmeira, and Anabela P. Rolo
    microRNAs in cerebrovascualar disease / Ondřej Volný, Linda Kašičková, Dominika Coufalová, Petra Cimflová, and Jan Novák
    microRNAs and cardiovascular remodeling / Koh Ono
    microRNAs in essential hypertension and blood pressure regulation / Francine Z. Marques and Fadi J. Charchar
    microRNA and pulmonary hypertension / Olivier Boucherat, François Potus, and Sébastien Bonnet
    microRNAs in diabetic kidney disease / Arthur C.K. Chung
    microRNA and kidney transplantation / Kíra Jelencsics and Rainer Oberbauer
    microRNA and wound healing / Jaideep Banerjee and Chandan K. Sen
    Essential role of microRNA in skin physiology and disease / Damjan Glavač and Metka Ravnik-Glavač
    microRNA and allergy / Ana Rebane
    microRNA in human reproduction / Iris Eisenberg, Noora Kotaja, Debra Goldman-Wohl, and Tal Imbar
    microRNAs and hepatitis B / Yutaka Naito, Yasuhito Tanaka, and Takahiro Ochiya
    Circulating microRNAs: the future of biomarkers in anti-doping field / Nicolas Leuenberger and Martial Saugy
    microRNA expression profiling: technologies, insights, and prospects / Christine Roden, Stephen Mastriano, Nayi Wang, and Jun Lu.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Yoichi Robertus Fujii.
    Summary: This book tells the story of the discovery of microRNA (miRNA) quantum code, the basic theory of biological data science for medical investigation with miRNA, to its implementation. It explains the use of a new algorithm called the miRNA entangling target sorter (METS), based on the quantum computation algorithm, to give the etiologic analysis for diseases such as cancer, infectious diseases, and age-related disorders. Providing detailed descriptions to make the METS algorithm simple to grasp, it also explains the accumulated cutting-edged data for human diseases utilizing artificial intelligence (AI) for quantum miRNA language (miRNA qubit) (MIRAI). Further, it describes a discovery story for quantum miRNA surveillance against tumors and quantum miRNA immunity against viruses. Since this is a multidisciplinary field of study, crucial details on physics, mathematics, computer science, data science, virology, immunology, oncology, pathology, and biology are supplied. This book will support professional advancement for scientists, clinicians, educators, students, and science enthusiasts. The reader's knowledge of the subject and its practical medical applications will be enriched by the wealth of informative figures and supporting data.

    Contents:
    RNA Controls RNA
    MicroRNA Qubit
    Matrix Multiplication for MicroRNA Qubit
    MicroRNA Quantum Computing
    Vital METS/MIRAI
    Etiologic Analysis for Human cancer
    Encounter with the unknown
    Diabetes Mellitus: Quantum microRNA Language with Artificial Intelligence (MIRAI) as an Early Diagnostic Tool for Type II Diabetes Mellitus for Sustainable Healthcare
    Thyroid Cancer: Quantum microRNA Language/Artificial Intelligence (MIRAI)-Based Etiologic Analysis of Thyroid Cancer by Serum/Plasma miRNA Panel Data
    Metabolic Disease and Alzheimer’s Disease
    Quantum MiRNA Immunity and Quantum MiRNA Surveillance
    Quantum MiRNA code.
    Digital Access Springer 2023
  • Digital
    Zengrong Liu, Jianwei Shen, Shuiming Cai, Fang Yan.
    Summary: This book discusses topics related to the topological structure and biological function of gene networks regulated by microRNAs. It focuses on analyzing the relation between topological structure and biological function, applying these theoretical results to gene networks involving microRNA, illustrating their biological mechanisms, and identifying the roles of microRNA in controlling various phenomena emerging from the networks. In addition, the book explains how to control the complex biological phenomena using mathematical tools and offers a new perspective on studying microRNA. It is a useful resource for graduate students and researchers who are working on or interested in microRNAs and gene network.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Topological structure and biological function of gene network regulated by microRNA
    MicroRNA function of some life process in the gene network
    Controlling the complex biological phenomena using mathematical tools.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital/Print
    Catherine M. Greene, editor.
    Summary: The book serves as a comprehensive resource for scientists and clinicians studying the role of non-coding RNAs in inflammation (viral infections, wound inflammation), human inflammatory diseases (i.e. rheumatoid arthritis, Crohnℓ́ℓs disease, diabetes), and innate immunity. It provides a universal reference work comprising both basic and specialized information. Given that ncRNAs represent new therapeutic targets, this volume will also be of interest to industrial biomedical researchers and those involved in drug development.

    Contents:
    The biology of microRNA
    The biology of long non-coding RNA
    microRNA regulation of neutrophil function
    How non-coding RNAs contribute to macrophage polarization
    Endogenous control of dendritic cell activation by miRNA
    Noncoding RNA expression during viral infection: the long and the short of it
    Wound inflammation: emerging role of miRNA
    The importance of microRNAs in rheumatoid arthritis
    MicroRNAs with impact on adipose tissue inflammation in obesity
    The relationship between miR-29, NOD2 and Crohn's disease
    The role of ncRNA in diabetes
    ncRNA as diagnostics and prognostics for hepatocellular carcinoma.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QP623 .M537 2015
    1
  • Digital
    Michael Sand.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Objectives of this work
    Summary and discussion of this work
    Closing remarks
    Paper 1: Expression levels of the microRNA processing enzymes Drosha and Dicer in epithelial skin cancer
    Paper 2: Expression levels of the microRNA maturing microprocessor complex component DGCR8 and the RNA- induced silencing complex (RISC) components argonaute-1, argonaute-2, PACT, TARBP1 and TARBP2 in epithelial skin cancer
    Paper 3: Expression of microRNAs in basal cell carcinoma
    Paper 4: Microarray analysis of microRNA expression in cutaneous squamous cell carcinoma
    Paper 5: The miRNA machinery in primary cutaneous malignant melanoma, cutaneous malignant melanoma metastases and benign melanocytic nevi
    Paper 6: Immunohistochemical expression patterns of the microRNA-processing enzyme Dicer in cutaneous malignant melanomas, benign melanocytic nevi and dysplastic melanocytic nevi
    Paper 7: Comparative microarray analysis of microRNA expression profiles in primary cutaneous malignant melanoma, cutaneous malignant melanoma metastases and benign melanocytic nevi
    Paper 8: MicroRNAs and the skin: tiny players in the body's largest organ
    Paper 9: microRNA in non-melanoma skin cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Luisa Ciobanu.
    Summary: "In the past two decades, significant advances in magnetic resonance microscopy (MRM) have been made possible by a combination of higher magnetic fields and more robust data acquisition technologies. This technical progress has enabled a shift in MRM applications from basic anatomical investigations to dynamic and functional studies, boosting the use of MRM in biological and life sciences. This book provides a simple introduction to MRM emphasizing practical aspects relevant to high magnetic fields. It focuses on biological applications and presents a number of selected examples of neuroscience applications. The text is mainly intended for those who are beginning research in the field of MRM or are planning to incorporate high-resolution MRI in their neuroscience studies."--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    1. About this book
    2. Hardware
    3. Image formation
    4. Acquistion strategies
    5. Image artifacts
    6. Sample preparation
    7. A bit of history
    8. Diffusion weighted magnetic resonance microscopy
    9. Manganese enhanced magnetic resonance microsopy
    On the horizon.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2017
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Microscopy handbooks to find individual volumes of this title.
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
  • Digital
    Lars Kaestner, Peter Lipp, editors.
    Summary: This book provides in depths information on different microscopy approaches and supplies the reader with methods how to untangle highly complex processes involved in physiological and pathophysiological cardiac signaling. Microscopy approaches have established themselves as the quasi gold standard that enables us to appreciate the underlying mechanisms of physiological and pathophysiological cardiac signaling. This book presents the most important microscopy techniques from the level of individual molecule e.g. Forster-Resonance Energy Transfer (FRET), up to cellular and tissue imaging, e.g. electron microscopy (TEM) or light sheet microscopy. The book is intended for graduate students and postdocs in cardiovascular research, imaging and cell biology, pre-clinical and clinical researchers in cardiovascular sciences as well as decision makers of the pharmaceutical industry.

    Contents:
    Studying structure and function of the heart cells using scanning ion conductance microscopy
    Optical sectioning microscopy at 'temporal super-resolution'
    Quantitative super-resolution microscopy of cardiomyocytes
    Caged compounds : applications in cardiac muscle research
    Optogenetic tools in the microscopy of cardiac excitation-contraction coupling
    Electron microscopy.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Hsun-Liang (Albert) Chan, Diego Velasquez-Plata, editors.
    Summary: This book compiles all relevant information regarding fundamental concepts and advanced techniques related to the applications of minimally invasive procedures in periodontal and implant therapy facilitated with the operating microscope. Microsurgical therapy, wound healing principles as well as biomechanical and design aspects of micro-instruments and suturing armamentarium are discussed. The book offers information that is usually scattered in the dental and medical literature and not only hard to compile but also to frame in the appropriate clinical categories. Its unique emphasis on ergonomics (patient, operator and assistant positioning) and collaboration techniques like four to six hand assisting make this work unique. Each topic is discussed by world renowned experts in the field. The book is a valuable resource for the dental society including general dentists, periodontists, oral surgeons and implantologists.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    A Tribute to Dennis A. Shanelec, DDS: The Father of Periodontal Microsurgery
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    Introduction to Microsurgery
    1 Introduction
    2 History of Operating Microscope in Medicine
    3 History of Operating Microscope in Dentistry
    4 History of OM in Periodontology and Implant Dentistry
    5 Advantages of Using OM in Surgical Dentistry
    6 Current Trends that Favor Using OM
    7 Future Directions
    8 Conclusion
    9 Key Points
    References
    The Impact of a Minimally Invasive Approach on Oral Wound Healing
    1 Introduction 2 An Overview of the Biological Pathways to Mucosal Wound Repair and Regeneration
    2.1 Inflammation Phase (First Stage of Mucosal Wound Healing)
    2.2 Proliferation Phase (Second Stage of Mucosal Wound Healing)
    2.2.1 Epithelialization
    2.2.2 Angiogenesis
    2.2.3 Granulation Tissue Formation
    2.3 Remodeling Phase (Third Stage of Mucosal Wound Healing)
    3 Impact of the Microsurgical Technique on the Healing Process of Oral Mucosal Wounds: Clinical Results and Potential Triggers for Enhanced Healing 3.1 Scientific Evidence of Improved Outcomes After Periodontal Plastic Microsurgeries: Some Critical Comments about the Clinical Relevance of the Results
    3.2 The Interconnectedness of the Microsurgical Technique with the Healing Process of Mucosal Wounds
    3.2.1 Influence of Modified (Minimal-Invasive) Incision Designs on Wound Stability and Wound Integrity
    3.2.2 Healing of Periodontal Wounds Created by Traditional, but Microsurgically Modified Flap Designs
    4 How to Translate Findings from Basic Research into Clinical Success? 4.1 Incision Design and Wound Healing from a Histological and Physiological Perspective
    4.2 Micromechanical Properties of the Extracellular Matrix of the Oral Mucosa and the Blood Clot after Wounding
    4.2.1 Micromechanical Aspects of Oral Mucosal Tissues
    4.2.2 Micromechanical Aspects of the Blood Clot during Healing
    4.3 Microsurgically Controlled Instrument Handling and its Impact on Tissue Mechanotransduction
    5 Closing Remarks
    6 Key Points
    References
    Fundamentals of the Operating Microscope
    1 Introduction
    2 Magnification
    3 Loupes 4 Loupes Versus Operating Microscope
    5 Parts and Functions of a Surgical Microscope
    5.1 The Body of the Microscope
    5.1.1 Microscope Eyepieces
    5.1.2 Binocular Tube Head
    5.1.3 Co-Observation
    5.1.4 Microscope Objective Lens
    5.1.5 Microscope Magnification Changer or Zoom system
    5.1.6 Focusing
    5.2 Light Source
    5.2.1 Illumination
    5.2.2 Augmented Visualization
    5.3 The Suspension System
    5.4 Imaging Systems and Documentation Devices
    6 Conclusions
    7 Glossary
    8 Key Points
    References
    Design and Ergonomics of Microsurgical Instruments
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Arbak Khachatryan, Artur Tevosyan, David Novoselskiy, Gevorg Arakelyan, Alexey Yushkevich, David Nazaretovich Nazarian.
    Summary: This book provides a practically applicable guide on how to develop essential microsurgery skills and successfully perform a range of procedures. Emphasis is placed within each chapter on equipping the reader with the necessary information to enable them to develop a strong foundational knowledge of every technique covered with clear step-by-step guides on how to perform a range of methodologies. Helpful tips are provided on how to avoid common pitfalls and enhance skill acquisition. Accompanying video material also reinforces the key points detailed. Topics covered include how to develop skills utilizing the porcine model of flap harvesting along with the use of animal models for techniques such as vascular anastomoses, anesthesia, and exposure of relevant recipient vessels. Microsurgery Manual for Medical Students and Residents is a detailed resource on how to acquire core microsurgery skills, making it an ideal resource for medical students and trainees seeking a resource on how to further develop their skills.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Acknowledgement
    Table of contents
    Section 1 Introduction: Microsurgery training organization and Principles
    Essential equipment
    Workspace organization
    Assembly of operating microscope
    Standard microsurgical instrumental set
    Essential suture materials review
    Features of working with magnification
    Microsurgical suture technique - End-to-end
    Microsurgical suture technique - Side-to side
    Microsurgical suture technique - Nerve suturing
    Specifies of working with an assistant
    Training curve
    Section 2 Basic Training exercises: How to start?
    Simple exercises
    Chicken hip and leg training model
    Chicken wing training model
    Perforator flap training model using a chicken leg
    Section 3 Microsurgery training on Rodents
    Maintaining of animal welfare
    Preoperative management and anesthesia
    Vascular
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    Richard C. Troutman ; with 457 tone drawings in 137 plates by Virginia Cantarella.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RE80 .T76
    2
  • Digital
    Toshio Matsushima.
    Summary: This book provides the anatomy of the posterior fossa, together with the main associated surgical techniques, which are detailed in numerous photographs and step-by-step color illustrations. The text presents approaches and surgical techniques such as the trans-cerebellomedullary fissure approach and its variation to the fourth ventricle, as well as the cerebellomedullary cistern, infratentorial lateral supracerebellar approach to the fifth cranial nerve in the upper cerebellopontine angle, infrafloccular approach to the root exit zone of the seventh cranial nerve, transcondylar fossa approach through the lateral part of the foramen magnum, and the stitched sling retraction technique utilized during microvascular decompression procedures for trigeminal neuralgia and hemifacial spasm. It also describes in detail the bridging veins of the posterior fossa, especially the petrosal vein, and bridging veins to the tentorial sinuses, which can block approaches to the affected area. The original Japanese version of this work was published 8 years ago, and has established itself as a trusted guide, especially among young neurosurgeons who need to study various surgical approaches and techniques. In the course of being translated into English, some sections have been revised and new information has been added. The author hopes that the book will help neurosurgeons around the world perform safer operations with confidence.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Luis A.B. Borba, Jean G. de Oliveira.
    Summary: "A deep knowledge of regional anatomy, improved understanding of pathologies and their behaviors, technological advances, and multidisciplinary collaboration have led to more effective treatments for the once inoperable skull base lesions. Microsurgical and Endoscopic Approaches to the Skull Base: Anatomy, Tactics, and Techniques by renowned skull base neurosurgeons Luis A. B. Borba and Jean G. de Oliveira presents a balanced, anatomy-based perspective on microsurgical and endoscopic approaches to manage these highly challenging lesions. The text leverages the best current scientific literature on this topic and insights from global skull base surgery experts"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
    Thieme-Connect
  • Digital
    Evgenii G. Belykh, Nikolay L. Martirosyan, M.Yashar S. Kalani.
    Summary: "All neurosurgeons must undergo rigorous training in the laboratory and practice bypass techniques repetitively before performing microneurosurgery on a patient. Microsurgical Basics and Bypass Techniques by Evgenii Belykh, Nikolay Martirosyan, and M. Yashar S. Kalani is a comprehensive yet succinct manual on fundamental laboratory techniques rarely included in clinical textbooks. The resource simplifies repetitive microsurgical practice in the laboratory by providing a menu of diverse, progressively challenging exercises. Step-by-step instructions accompanied by easy-to-understand illustrations, expert commentary, and videos effectively bridge the gap between laboratory practice and operating room performance. The book starts with an opening chapter on four founding principles of microsurgical practice inherited from great thinkers and concludes with a chapter featuring cerebrovascular bypass cases. Chapters 2-8 offer a complete one-week curriculum, with a different lab exercise each day, focused on learning basic microsurgery skills"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The philosophy of microsurgical practice : four founding principles inherited from the great thinkers / Evgenii Belykh and Peter Nakaji
    Day 1 : The organization of the microsurgical laboratory: necessary tools and equipment / Evgenii Belykh, Nikolay L. Martirosyan, and Mark C. Preul
    Day 2 : Dry-laboratory microsurgical training : techniques and manual skills /
    Evgenii Belykh and Nikolay Martirosyan
    Day 3: Wet-laboratory microsurgical training : basic principles for working with laboratory animals / Evgenii Belykh and Nikolay L. Martirosyan
    Day 4 : Exercise set 1 : basic arterial anastomoses / Evgenii Belykh and Nikolay L. Martirosyan
    Day 5 : Exercise set 2 : deep field anastomoses and complex vascular reconstructions / Evgenii Belykh and Nicolay L. Martirosyan
    Day 6 : Exercises : kidney autotransplantation, supermicrosurgery, and aneurysm clipping / Evgenii Belykh and Nikolay L. Martirosyan
    Day 7 : Models for microneurosurgical training and schedules for training /
    Evgenii Belykh
    Possible bypass errors / Evgenii Belykh and Peter Nakaji
    Translation of laboratory skills : indications for bypass in neurosurgery /
    Evgenii Belykh, M. Yashar S. Kalani, and Peter Nakaji
    Case examples of cerebrovascular bypass / M. Yashar S. Kalani, Ken-ichiro Kikuta, and Evgenii Belykh
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
  • Digital
    Hans-Jakob Steiger, Nima Etminan, Daniel Hänggi.
    Summary: This compact book provides step-by-step guidance in the approaches and techniques developed and currently used at the authorsℓ́ℓ center in D©ơsseldorf for the treatment of a variety of aneurysms. All of the described procedures are minimally invasive and of proven efficacy. In order to assist the reader in fully comprehending all aspects of the techniques, they are illustrated through clear graphics instead of complex photos and radiologic imaging. While the rapid development of endovascular treatment means that it is no longer necessary to employ microsurgery for difficult and hidden aneurysms, proficiency in microsurgery remains essential. For example, full mastery of microsurgical techniques is vital in order to treat middle cerebral and peripheral aneurysms efficiently and with minimal trauma. Minimal invasiveness and optimal cosmetic results have become critically important in enabling the microsurgical method to compete with the endovascular method.℗ℓ In documenting ℓ́ℓtried and testedℓ́ℓ procedures, this book will be invaluable for both established neurosurgeons and residents in neurosurgery.

    Contents:
    General Concepts: Pathophysiology and Anatomy
    Perioperative Management of Aneurysms and Subarachnoid Hemorrhage
    Surgical Approaches: Specific Aneurysm: ICA-Ophthalmic
    ICA-Pcom
    ICA-other
    MCA
    M1
    Peripheral MCA
    Acom
    A2-Pericallosal
    A1
    PICA
    Peripheral Cerebellar Arteries A.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Mario Sanna, Hiroshi Sunose, Fernando Mancini, Alessandra Russo, Abdelkader Taibah ; with the collaboration of Enrico Piccirillo, Antonio Caruso, Lorenzo Lauda, Anna Lisa Giannuzzi, Gianluca Piras.
    Summary: "The cholesteatoma, strictly speaking a cyst and not a cancer, nevertheless shows expansive and destructive growth patterns that may give rise to serious symptoms and consequences, including fatality, not unlike those seen for malignant neoplasms. The great challenge of therapy is to eradicate the pathologic growth while preserving hearing and other critical functions of the middle ear and petrous bone, respecting the proximity of vital neural and vascular structures, and the intricate three-dimensional relationships involved. Mario Sanna's Microsurgical Management of Middle Ear and Petrous Bone Cholesteatoma is the ultimate illustrated guide to complete management of the cholesteatoma, including assessment of the full expansion and degree of destruction caused by the growths, and short- and long-term follow-up to assess and treat for recurrence. Key Features - Brilliantly illustrated with diagnostic images from otoscopy and radiology, both normal and pathological - Step-by-step description of approaches and techniques for the procedures - Special coverage of petrous bone cholesteatoma, which is less frequent than other forms but more difficult to diagnose and treat, with introduction and description of a new function-sparing procedure, the subtotal petrosectomy"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Anatomy and radiology of the normal temporal bone
    Diagnosis of cholesteatoma
    Operating room setup and anesthesia for middle ear cholesteatoma
    Basic techniques and decision making in middle ear cholesteatoma surgery
    Retroauricular transcanal approach
    Canal wall up tympanoplasty
    Canal wall down tympanoplasty
    Congenital cholesteatoma of the middle ear
    Cholesteatoma of the external auditory canal
    Problems and solutions in middle ear cholesteatoma surgery
    Obliteration of the middle ear (subtotal petrosectomy) in cholesteatoma surgery
    Cochlear implantation in cholesteatoma surgery
    Management of iatrogenic injuries in middle ear cholesteatoma surgery
    Petrous bone cholesteatoma.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Otolaryngology
  • Digital
    Guoxian Pei, editor.
    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents;
    1: Overview of Microscopic Orthopaedics; 1.1 A Brief History of Microscopic Orthopedics; 1.2 Application Range of Microscopic Orthopedic; 1.2.1 Replantation Surgery; 1.2.2 Reconstructive Surgery; 1.2.3 Nerve Repair; 1.2.4 Tissue Transplants; 1.2.5 Applications in Other Surgical Field; 1.3 Indications for Microscopic Orthopaedic Surgery; 1.4 The Developing Trends of Microscopic Orthopaedics; Bibliography;
    2: Basic Techniques of Micro-Orthopedics; 2.1 Basic Microsurgical Techniques; 2.1.1 Microsurgical Instruments 2.1.1.1 Magnifier and Magnifying Spectacles2.1.1.2 Common Microsurgical Instruments; 2.1.2 Basic Technique Training; 2.1.2.1 Application of an Operation Microscope; 2.1.2.2 Application of Microsurgery Instruments; 2.1.2.3 Training of Basic Operation Techniques; 2.2 Microscopic Vascular Anastomosis Techniques; 2.2.1 Basic Principles for Microscopic Vascular Anastomosis; 2.2.1.1 Non-invasive Principle; 2.2.1.2 Proper Tension Principle; 2.2.1.3 Approximate Diameter Principle; 2.2.1.4 Principle of Even and Extrophy Anastomotic Stoma 2.2.1.5 Principle of Evenness and Symmetry of Edge Distance and Needle Pitch2.2.2 Methods of Microscopic Vascular Anastomosis; 2.2.2.1 Basic Skill Training for Microscopic Vascular Anastomosis; 2.2.2.2 Methods of Anastomosis; 2.3 Microsurgical Nerve Suture; 2.3.1 Types of Nerve Suture; 2.3.2 Methods of Nerve Suture; 2.3.2.1 Preparation; 2.3.2.2 Procedures of Nerve Suture; 2.4 Microsurgical Tendon Suture; 2.4.1 Methods of Microsurgical Tendon Suture; 2.4.1.1 Suture of Tendon; 2.4.1.2 Restoration of Tendon Sheaths and Peri-Tendon Tissues
    3: Perioperative Management in Microsurgical Orthopaedics3.1 Preoperative Planning and Preparation; 3.1.1 Team Approach; 3.1.2 Replantation; 3.1.2.1 Management and Transportation of Patients and Amputated Limbs (Finger); 3.1.2.2 After Arrival at a Hospital; 3.1.3 Free Flap Transfer; 3.1.4 Peripheral Nerve Repair; 3.2 Anesthesia; 3.3 Intra-Operative Care; 3.4 Postoperative Monitoring and Nursing; 3.4.1 General Considerations; 3.4.2 Observation Indicators; 3.4.3 Treatment of Vascular Crisis; 3.5 Routine Postoperative Medication; Bibliography;
    4: Major Limb Replantation 4.1 Introduction4.2 Anatomic Considerations; 4.2.1 Proximal 1/3 Section of the Arm; 4.2.2 Middle 1/3 Section of the Arm; 4.2.3 Distal 1/3 Section of the Arm; 4.2.4 Proximal 1/3 Section of the Forearm; 4.2.5 Middle 1/3 Section of the Forearm; 4.2.6 Distal 1/3 Section of the Forearm; 4.2.7 Proximal 1/3 Section of the Thigh; 4.2.8 Middle 1/3 Section of the Thigh; 4.2.9 Distal 1/3 Section of the Thigh; 4.2.10 Cross Section of the Leg; 4.3 Classification of Amputated Limb; 4.3.1 Classification According to the Nature of the Injury; 4.3.1.1 Amputation Resulting from Guillotine Injury
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Shi-Ting Li, Jun Zhong, Raymond F. Sekula, Jr., editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Qingyu Fan, editor.
    Summary: The book provide up-to-date information on clinical application of microwave ablation for limb salvage in bone tumors. First chapters briefly introduce clinical diagnosis, stage, amputation and limb salvage surgery of bone tumors. In the following chapters, detailed procedure of microwave ablation of bone tumors in various parts of the body, for example, upper limb, lower limb, pelvis and spine, is described, accompanying a large number of high-resolution illustration. Microwave ablation of different kinds of bone tumors, for example, bone metastases, giant cell tumor, osteosarcoma, soft tissue tumors is also presented with tips in clinical procedure. In the closing chapters, joint function preservation, prevention and treatment of complications, and the advantages and disadvantages of microwave ablation of bone tumors are also discussed for reader to have a in-depth understanding. It will be a valuable reference for orthopedic surgeons and oncologists, as well as practitioners interested in this field.

    Contents:
    Clinical Diagnosis of Bone Tumors
    Stage of Malignant Bone Tumors
    Assessment of Resection Margins in Bone Tumor Surgery
    Most Common Malignant Bone Tumors
    Amputation
    Limb Salvage Surgery
    Basic Principles of Microwave Ablation
    Indications and contraindications of Microwave Ablation
    Microwave Ablation of Bone Tumor of Upper Limb
    Microwave Ablation of Bone Tumor of Lower Limb
    Microwave Ablation of Bone Tumor of Pelvis
    Microwave Ablation of Bone Metastases
    Microwave Ablation of Osteosarcoma in Children
    Microwave Ablation of Giant Cell Tumor of Bone
    Microwave Ablation of Bone Tumor of Vertebral Column
    Microwave Ablation of Soft Tissue Tumors
    Ablated Bone
    Preservation of Joint Function
    Prevention and Treatment of Complications
    Survival Rates
    The Advantages and Disadvantages of Microwave Ablation. .
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Ping Liang, Xiao-ling Yu, Jie Yu.
    Summary: Microwave ablation is a simple, affordable, and highly precise technique. After its successful application in treating liver tumors, it is now widely used to combat renal tumors, adrenal tumors, thyroid nodes, uterine fibroids and other solid tumors. This book presents 40 successful cases of treating these diseases. A series of picture before treatment, after treatment and from different angles is provided for each kind of tumor treatment. In each chapter, step by step operative techniques and illustrations are included. This book also examines CT, NMR and ultrasonography to evaluate the effect of microwave ablation. Editor Ping Liang, is the Director and Professor at Dept. of Interventional Ultrasound, General Hospital of PLA, Beijing, China. Editor Xiaoling Yu is Professor and Chief physician, Editor Jie Yu is Associate Chief physician at the same department.

    Contents:
    Microwave ablation principles and techniques
    Microwave ablation of hepatocellular carcinoma
    Percutaneous Ultrasound-guided Microwave Ablation of Liver Metastasis
    Microwave Ablation of Large (?5.0cm) Hepatocellular carcinoma
    Percutaneous microwave ablation for benign focal liver lesions
    Complications of microwave ablation for liver tumors
    Percutaneous microwave ablation for liver tumors adjacent to large vessels
    Microwave Ablation Therapy of Malignant Liver Tumors Adjacent to the Gallbladder
    Microwave ablation of liver tumors adjacent to hepatic hilum
    Percutaneous Microwave Ablation with Temperature MonitorCombined with ethanol ablation for Hepatocellular Carcinoma Abutting the Gastrointestinal Tract
    Artificial ascites in assisting percutaneous microwave ablation for hepatic tumors adjacent to the gastrointestinal tract
    Microwave ablation in the treatment of Hepatocellular Carcinoma near diaphragm
    Application of artificial pleural effusion in microwave ablation of liver tumor
    Microwave ablation combined with cellular immunotherapy for hepatocellular carcinoma
    Traditional Chinese Medicine Combined with Microwave Ablation against Hepatocellular Carcinoma
    Comparison of microwave ablation with resection and with radiofrequency ablation treatment in hepatocellular carcinoma
    Microwave ablation in renal cell carcinoma
    Microwave ablation of Renal Angiomyolipoma
    Microwave Ablation of Benign Thyroid Nodules
    Microwave Ablation of Adrenal Tumors
    microwave ablation for superficial malignant tumors
    Microwave Ablation of spleen
    Microwave ablation for adenomyosis
    Microwave Ablation for Symptomatic Uterine fibroids
    Microwave ablation in other tumor (lung, breast and bone)
    Three-dimensional visualization technology and therapy planning system for microwave ablation therapy of Liver Tumor
    Clinical application of three-dimensional visualization techniques in microwave ablation for liver cancer
    Microwave Ablation Assisted by a Real-time Virtual Navigation System for Liver Cancer
    Contrast-enhanced ultrasound-guided microwave ablation for hepatic tumors inconspicuous on conventional ultrasound
    Application of contrast enhanced ultrasound in the evaluation of clinical effect of microwave ablation of hepatocellular carcinoma : comparison with other imaging modality
    Effectiveness of contrast-enhanced ultrasound in evaluating microwave ablation of renal cell carcinoma.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editors, John Spencer, Mark C. Bagley.
    Contents:
    Microwaves in drug discovery and development : recent advances / John Spencer & Mark C. Bagley
    Microwave-assisted processing techniques in medicinal chemistry / Alexander Stadler & Jennifer M. Kremsner
    Microwave-assisted medicinal chemistry : examples from a pharmaceutical company / Jesús Alcázar & Yannick Ligny
    Microwave-assisted synthesis of anti-tuberculosis, HIV and hepatitis C agents / Johan Gising, Mats Larhed & Luke R. Odell
    Synthesis of drug-like molecules for respiratory diseases : utilizing microwave chemistry / Valerie Boissel, Rebecca Butler, Paul J. Oakley & Neil J. Press
    Microwave-assisted synthesis of MK2 inhibitors for targeting p38 MAPK signal transduction in Werner syndrome cells / Mark C. Bagley, Mohammed Baashen, Jessica Dwyer, Pierre Milbeo, David Kipling & Terence Davis
    Microwave-assisted organic chemistry : monitoring reactions / Nicholas E. Leadbeater
    Microwave-assisted synthesis of sulfonamides / Andrea Porcheddu & Lidia De Luca
    Microwave-assisted synthesis of natural products (analogs) with potential biological applications / Pratik A. Ambasana, Dipak D. Vachhani & Erik V. Van der Eycken
    Arylboronate coupling partners : towards the synthesis of biaryl derivatives / Christine B. Baltus & John Spencer
    Development of nucleoside analogs under microwave irradiation / Elżbieta Niemiec, Maxime Bessières, Vincent Roy & Luigi A. Agrofoglio
    Classical and microwave-assisted synthesis of cucurbit[n]urils, hemicucurbit[n]urils and bambus[n]urils / Oliver B. Sutcliffe
    Microwave applications in pharmaceutical dosage form development / Mariarosa Moneghini & Nicola De Zordi.
    Digital Access Future Med 2014
  • Digital
    Hirokazu Tamamura, Takuya Kobayakawa, Nami Ohashi.
    Summary: This brief describes studies conducted by the authors on mid-size drugs utilizing peptides and peptidomimetics, and on the development of anti-HIV agents. Peptides are important biological molecules and have various physiological actions. Peptide-based drug discovery may help bring about the development of useful medicines that are highly safe and show potent pharmacological effects in small doses. Recently, it has been shown that there is an important drug-like space in the mid-sized region between low- and high-molecular-weight compounds. Thus, mid-size drugs such as peptide compounds are being focused on. To date, several peptidomimetics that mimic primary, secondary, and tertiary structures of peptides have been developed to maintain and improve biological activities and actions of peptides. In this book, the features and advantages of mid-size drugs are described in detail. In addition, the merits of utilizing peptidomimetics in the development of mid-size drugs are referred to. Understanding such peptide-derived mid-size drugs will lead to a comprehensive expansion of medicinal chemistry.#xE000;

    Contents:
    1. Introduction of Mid-Size Drugs and Peptidomimetics
    2. Chloroalkene Dipeptide Isosteres as Peptidomimetics
    3. Conformational-restricted Cyclic Peptides
    4. Peptidomimetics that Mimic Secondary Structures of Peptides
    5.Peptidomimetics that Mimic Tertiary Structures of Peptides
    6. Conjugated Compounds Involving Peptides
    7. Summary and Future Perspectives of Researches on Mid-Size Drugs.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Salah Mansour, Jacques Magnan, Karen Nicolas, Hassan Haidar.
    Summary: This book covers the latest advances in disciplines related to the middle ear pathologies such as: the innovations in the understanding of its functional anatomy and their implications along with the breakthroughs in the physiopathology of its diseases and the most recent concepts of their pathogenesis. More adapted audiological investigative methods and the advanced imaging approaches for an accurate diagnostic work up and the best management of middle ear ailments are presented . As an up-to-date learning resource, based on demonstrated clinico-radiological correlations, this book is a highly valuable teaching tool, especially when contemplating proceeding in middle ear surgery. Middle Ear Diseases is a comprehensive work, aimed for trainees, board candidates and teachers in otolaryngology and otology to respond to every educational need in regard to the most common middle ear pathologies. It is also a useful update for more experienced professionals in this field, as well as radiologists, audiologists and speech therapists.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    Mary Jane Smith, PhD, RN, FAAN, Patricia R. Liehr, PhD, RN, Roger D. Carpenter, PhD, RN, editors.
    Summary: "The interest in middle range theory continues to grow as demonstrated by the increased number of published theories as well as the desire among nursing faculty, students, and researchers to use theories at the middle range to guide practice and research. A third editor, Dr. Roger D. Carpenter, has been added to the book. He brings previous experience as a book editor, and an associate editor of a well-established nursing research journal. In addition, he has experience teaching theory and research to DNP and PhD students. There are four added features in the fifth edition of this book. These are the addition of new theories, addition of a section on application of middle range theory to practice, extensive revision on the chapter on building concepts for research, and addition of a chapter on application of middle range theory to education"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Disciplinary perspectives linked to middle range theory / Marlaine C. Smith
    Understanding middle range theory by moving up and down the ladder of abstraction / Mary Jane Smith and Patricia Liehr
    Evaluation of middle range theories for the discipline of nursing / Marlaine C. Smith.
    Digital Access R2Library [2024], ©2024
  • Digital
    Mary Jane Smith, Patricia R. Liehr, editors.
    Summary: "The fourth edition of this invaluable publication on middle range theory in nursing reflects the most current theoretical advances in the field. With five additional chapters, new content incorporates exemplars that bridge middle range theory to advanced nursing practice. Additional content for DNP programs includes two new theories: Bureaucratic Caring and Self-Care of Chronic Illness. This user-friendly text stresses how theory informs practice and research in the everyday world of nursing. Divided into four sections, content sets the stage for understanding middle range theory by elaborating on disciplinary perspectives, an organizing framework, and evaluation of the theory. Middle Range Theory for Nursing, Fourth Edition, presents a broad spectrum of 13 middle range theories. Each theory is broken down into its purpose, development, and conceptual underpinnings, and includes a model demonstrating the relationships among the concepts, and the use of the theory in research and practice. Including concept building for research through the lens of middle range theory, a rigorous 10-phase process that moves from a practice story to a conceptual foundation, and exemplars that clarify the concept building process, this new edition remains an essential text for advanced practice theory and research courses."-- Cover page 4.

    Contents:
    Disciplinary perspectives linked to middle range theory / Marlaine C. Smith
    Understanding middle range theory by moving up and down the ladder of abstraction / Mary Jane Smith and Patricia R. Liehr
    Evaluation of middle range theories for the discipline of nursing / Marlaine C. Smith
    Theories of uncertainty in illness / Margaret F. Clayton, Marleah Dean, & Merle Mishel
    Theory of meaning / Teresa Daniel Ritchie, Suzy Mascaro Walter, & Patricia Starck
    Theory of bureaucratic caring / Marilyn A. Ray
    Theory of self-transcendence / Pamela G. Reed
    Theory of symptom management / Melinda S. Bender, Susan Janson, Linda S. Franck, and Kathryn A. Lee
    Theory of unpleasant symptoms / Elizabeth R. Lenz and Linda C. Pugh
    Theory of self-efficacy / Barbara Resnick
    Story theory / Patricia R. Liehr and Mary Jane Smith
    Theory of transitions / Eun-Ok Im
    Theory of self-reliance / John Lowe
    Theory of cultural marginality / Heeseung Choi
    Theory of moral reckoning / Alvita K. Nathaniel
    Theory of self-care of chronic illness / Barbara Riegel, Tiny Jaarsma, and Anna Stromberg
    Concept building for research / Patricia R. Liehr and Mary Jane Smith
    Nature immersion : a concept for nursing research / Misako Nagata
    Sheltering in place : a concept for nursing research / Kimberly Ann Wallace
    Yearning for sleep while enduring distress : from concept building to research proposal development / April L. Shapiro
    Reconceptualizing normal : from concept building to proposal development / Shelley J. Greif
    Middle range theory : spinning research and practice to create knowledge for the new millennium / Liehr, Patricia and Smith, Mary Jane
    Middle range theory : a perspective on development and use / Patricia Liehr and Mary Jane Smith.
    Digital Access R2Library 2018
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    A. Wesley Burks, MD, Stephen T. Holgate, CBE, FMedSci, Robyn E. O'Hehir, FRACP,PhD, FRCPath, David H. Broide, MB ChB, Gurjit K. Khurana Hershey, MD, PhD, R. Stokes Peebles, Jr., MD.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey v. 1-2, 2020
  • Digital
    Paolo Cappabianca, Luigi Maria Cavallo, Oreste de Divitiis, Felice Esposito, editors.
    Contents:
    Preface
    Acknowledgements
    Part I Pituitary adenomas
    1 Introduction to pituitary adenomas
    2 Endoscopic endonasal transsphenoidal approach (standard and extended technique)
    3 Endoscopic endonasal ethmoid-pterygoid transsphenoidal approach to the cavernous sinus
    4 Frontotemporal approach
    5 Radiotherapy and radiosurgery
    Part II Craniopharyngiomas
    6 Introduction to craniopharyngiomas
    7 Endoscopic endonasal transsphenoidal approach
    8 Frontotemporal approach
    9 Supraorbital approach
    10 Transcallosal approach
    11 Radiotherapy and radiosurgery for craniopharyngiomas
    Part III Cystic sellar lesions
    12 Introduction to cystic sellar lesions
    13 Arachnoid cysts
    14 Rathke cleft cyst
    Part IV Anterior cranial fossa meningiomas
    15 Introduction to anterior cranial fossa meningiomas
    16 Endoscopic endonasal transsphenoidal approach
    17 Frontotemporal approach
    18 Subfrontal approach
    19 Supraorbital approach
    20 Radiotherapy and radiosurgery
    Part V Clival chordomas
    21 Introduction to clival chordomas
    22 Endoscopic endonasal transsphenoidal approach
    23 Retrosigmoid approach
    24 Skull base approaches
    25 Radiotherapy, radiosurgery and proton beam
    Part VI Cranial base reconstruction after transcranial and transnasal skull base surgery
    26 Indications for cranial base reconstruction
    27 Neuroradiology in cranial base reconstruction
    28 Anatomy of cranial base reconstruction
    29 Techniques for cranial base reconstruction.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Vicky Chapman, Cathy Charles.
    Contents:
    Labour and normal birth / Cathy Charles
    Vaginal examinations and amniotomy / Vicky Chapman
    Fetal heart rate monitoring in labour / Bryony Read
    Perineal trauma and suturing / Vicky Chapman
    Examination of the newborn baby at birth / Caroline Rutter
    Home birth / Cathy Charles
    Water for labour and birth / Cathy Charles
    Malpositions and malpresentations in labour / Vicky Chapman
    Slow progress in labour / Vicky Chapman
    Assisted birth: ventouse and forceps / Cathy Charles
    Caesarean section / Cathy Charles
    Vaginal birth after caesarean section / Vicky Chapman
    Preterm birth / Charlise Adams
    Breech birth / Lesley Shuttler
    Twins and higher-order births / Jo Coggins
    Obstetric haemorrhage / Hannah Bailey
    Emergencies in labour and birth / Hannah Bailey
    Neonatal and maternal resuscitation / Nick Castle
    Induction of labour / Cathy Charles
    Pre-eclampsia and diabetes / Annette Briley
    Stillbirth and neonatal death / Cathy Charles
    Risk management, litigation and complaints / Cathy Charles
    Intrapartum blood tests / Vicky Chapman
    Medicines and the midwife / Vicky Chapman.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital/Print
    Richard Bucala, Jürgen Bernhagen, editors.
    Contents:
    MIF and CD74-dependent Mechanisms
    HSP90-stabilized MIF in Oncogenesis and Cell Growth Control- CD74, MIF, and Breast Tumorigenesis: Insights from Recent Large-scale Tumor Genomics and Proteomics Studies
    MIF-dependent Regulation of Monocyte/Macrophage Polarization
    Advances in understanding the role of MIF in the pathogenesis of autoimmune diseases
    Role of MIF in Experimental Autoimmune Encephalomyelitis and Multiple Sclerosis
    Role of MIF in Hepatic Inflammatory Diseases and Fibrosis
    MIF and Pulmonary Disease
    MIF Mediates Pelvic Inflammation and Pain
    MIF Family Proteins in Cardiac Ischemia / Reperfusion Injury
    The MIF-CD74 Inflammatory Axis in Alphaviral Infection
    MIF in Eosinophilic Inflammation
    The Role of MIF in Parasitic Infections
    Parasite MIF Orthologs.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QR185.8.C95 M54 2017
    1
  • Digital/Print
    David W. Dodick, Stephen D. Silberstein.
    Contents:
    Diagnosis
    Genetics
    Less common migraine subtypes
    Migraine comorbidity
    Migraine pathogenesis
    Non- pharmacologic therapy
    Acute migraine therapy
    Preventative treatment
    Chronic migraine
    Neuromodulation
    Hormones.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC392 .D38 2016
    1
  • Digital
    Shalini Shah, editor.
    Summary: This book covers proper migraine diagnostic tools and treatment options. It addresses the complex nature of treating this pain condition and underscores the intricacies of diagnosis and management. Succinct yet thorough, the book opens with information on migraine diagnosis, symptomology, and pathophysiology. Subsequent chapters examine various current and emerging evidence-based treatment options including immune modulation, stem cell regenerative therapy, and new potential applications of therapeutics for use in pediatric migraine. Following this, the chapters discuss the processes of neuro-modulation, dietary modifications, and surgical treatment for chronic migraine disorders. The book concludes with a handy set of reference guides of commonly prescribed drugs and doses. Written by experts in the field, Migraine provides the headache or pain practitioner with a comprehensive yet quick reference that fills a current gap in the literature for treating migraines and emerging therapeutic options.

    Contents:
    1. Migraine Diagnosis and Symptomatology
    2. Pathophysiology of Migraine Disorder
    3. Acute Migraine Interventions and Evidence
    4. Prophylaxis of Migraine Protocols and Options
    5. CGRP and Immune Modulation Evidence-Based Therapy
    6. Onabotulinumtoxin A (Botox) Evidence-Based Therapy
    7. Pediatric Migraine Presentation and Treatment Algorithm
    8. Peripheral Nerve Block for the Management of Headache and Face Pain
    9. Neuromodulation for Migraine Disorders
    10. Surgical Treatment of Chronic Migraine Headaches
    11. Dietary Modification and Migraine Relief
    12. Quick Reference Guides of Commonly Prescribed Drugs and Doses.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Paolo Martelletti, editor.
    Summary: This book on migraine is the first machine-generated scientific book in medicine published by Springer Nature, and reflects a new publication format which focuses on literature reviews: state-of-the-art computer algorithms were applied to select relevant sources from Springer Nature journal articles, rearrange them in a topical order, and provide short summaries of these articles. The result is the auto-summarization of current texts, organized by means of a similarity-based clustering routine in coherent chapters and sections. The human intervention of a world-renowned expert in this field grants the scientific soundness and appropriate organization of the contents identified. The AI-based approach seemed especially suitable to provide an innovative perspective as the topics are indeed both complex, interdisciplinary and multidisciplinary, as is migraine, the most important among the chronic non communicable diseases under the age of 50s. The result of this innovative process will be of help especially for readers with limited time, interested in migraine and wishing to learn more about the subject quickly and particularly if they are new to the topic. Springer Nature seeks to support anyone who needs a fast and effective start in their content discovery journey: from the undergraduate student exploring interdisciplinary content, to Master or PhD-thesis developing research questions, to the practitioner seeking support materials, this book can serve as an inspiration, to name a few examples. .

    Contents:
    Public Health: Epidemiology
    Personal and Societal Impact
    Economics of Migraine
    Governance of Headache Centers. Mechanisms: Genetics
    Biology
    Comorbidities.Lifestyle
    Hormones
    Drug-Drug Interactions. Diagnosis: Classification
    Medical History
    Medication Overuse
    Differential Diagnosis
    Diagnostic Tools: Treatment: Guidelines
    Acute
    Preventive
    Non-pharmacological
    Invasive and non-invasive neuromodulation
    Emergency Management
    Pregnancy
    Childhood and Adolescent
    Elderly
    Outcome Measures and Algorithms
    Infrequent Migraine subtypes. Future Research Directions: Brain Traumas Brain Traumas
    Post-CoVID Epidemiology
    New drugs.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Bahman Guyuron.
    Contents:
    History of migraine surgery / Bahman Guyuron
    An overview of migraine headaches / Hossein Ansari
    Surgical anatomy of the frontal and occipital trigger sites / Jeffrey E. Janis and Ibrahim Khansa
    Surgical anatomy of the temporal migraine headaches / Ali Totonchi
    Evidence for efficacy of migraine headaches / Bahman Guyuron
    Detection of migraine headache trigger sites / Bahman Guyuron
    Surgical treatment of frontal migraine headaches / Bahman Guyuron
    Surgical treatment of temporal migraine headaches / Bahman Guyuron
    Surgical treatment of rhinogenic migraine headaches / Bahman Guyuron
    Surgical treatment of occipital migraine headaches / Bahman Guyuron
    Surgical treatment of auriculotemporal migraine headaches / Bahman Guyuron
    Surgical treatment of lesser occipital migraine headaches / Bahman Guyuron
    Surgical treatment of nummular headaches / Bahman Guyuron.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Otolaryngology
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
  • Digital
    Thomas Muehlberger.
    Summary: Migraine surgery is the only existing treatment option that can lead to a permanent symptomatic improvement. Surgical techniques and advances in the understanding of the underlying mechanisms are evolving rapidly. This book intends to familiarise surgeons with the concept of migraine headaches and explains the surgical deactivation of trigger sites, which consists of much more than the decompression of pericranial nerves. The traditional notion of the brain as the sole origin of migraine is supplanted by a concept where the alteration of afferent signals in conjunction with peripheral and central sensitization can trigger a migraine attack. Migraine surgery targets the crucial role of extracranial tissues in the genesis of migraine which is corroborated by substantial clinical, anatomical and pathophysiological evidence.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    William C. Faquin, Esther Diana Rossi, editors ; Zubair Baloch, Güliz A. Barkan, Maria P. Foschini, Daniel F.I. Kurtycz, Marc Pusztaszeri, Philippe Vielh, associate editors.
    Summary: This volume describes a uniform international approach for classifying and reporting salivary gland FNA samples. The new reporting system is evidence-based using data from the literature as well as upon the experience of a multi-disciplinary group of leading experts involved in the field of salivary gland cytopathology. Each diagnostic category of this novel salivary gland reporting system includes detailed descriptions of the cytologic criteria as well as a comprehensive set of photomicrographs demonstrating all of the key microscopic features along with annotated descriptions for each image. Designed as a practical book with easy readability, The Milan System for Reporting Salivary Gland Cytopathology combines the high-quality images of an atlas with a logical approach described in concise text-form and in line-drawing algorithms. It presents for the first time, an international cytologic reporting system for salivary gland lesions designed and endorsed by a panel of experts in the field.

    Contents:
    The Milan System for Reporting Salivary Gland Cytopathology
    Non-Diagnostic
    Non-Neoplastic
    Atypia of Undetermined Significance
    Neoplasm
    Suspicious for Malignancy
    Malignant
    Ancillary Studies for Salivary Gland Cytology
    Clinical Management
    Histologic Considerations and Salivary Gland Tumor Classification in Surgical Pathology.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Laura Weiss Roberts, editor ; Christopher H. Warner, associate editor.
    Summary: This authoritative and comprehensive title is designed to enhance best clinical practices for all healthcare providers who care for military service personnel and veterans. The book is organized into four sections. The first section covers foundational information on the culture and context of health care for members of the US military and veteran population. The second section focuses on systems of care for mental health needs of military and veteran populations. The third section characterizes best practices as well as ethical issues in clinical care for mental health needs of members of the military and veterans. Guidance in relation to a wide range of clinical topics is provided, such as mood disorders, post-traumatic stress disorder, combat and operational stress, military sexual assault, psychosis, and sleep disorders. The last section is intended to assist readers in reinforcing their learning through a set of clinical cases with accompanying questions for deeper consideration. An invaluable resource for all clinicians, allied health personnel, and administrators concerned with the mental health needs of service members and veterans, Military and Veteran Mental Health: A Comprehensive Guide is a gold-standard addition to the literature on military healthcare.

    Contents:
    Section 1: Foundations of Military and Veteran Mental Health Care
    1. Modern History of Military and Veteran Mental Health Care
    2. The Importance of U.S. Military Cultural Competence
    3. The Commitment of the Veterans Health Administration to Mental Health Care for Veterans: Historical Overview and Context
    4. Resilience in the Military: The Double-Edged Sword of Military Culture
    5. Psychiatry Graduate Medical Education in Military and Veterans Affairs Training Facilities
    6. Ethical Considerations of the Practice of Psychiatry in the Military
    Section 2: Systems of Care for Mental Health Needs of Military and Veteran Populations
    7. Veterans Affairs and Department of Defense Integrated Systems of Mental Health Care
    8. Screening for Mental Health Disorders in the Military
    9. Mental Health Command Consultation
    10. The Perpetrator Hypothesis: Victimization Involving LGBT Service Members
    11. The Military Mental Health Disability System
    12. Vocational Rehabilitation
    13. Risk Factors, Service Delivery, and Prevention of Veteran Homelessness
    Section 3: Clinical Care for Mental Health Needs of Military and Veteran Populations
    14. Mood Disorders
    15. Understanding and Treating Posttraumatic Stress Disorder in Veterans
    16.Combat and Operational Stress
    17. Military Sexual Assault
    18. Ethical Challenges in Treating Detainees and Prisoners of War
    19. Substance Use in Military and Veteran Populations
    20. Co-Occurring Substance and Mental Health Disorders
    21. Psychosis: Schizophrenia and Related Disorders
    22. Mental Health of the Older Veteran
    23. Traumatic Brain Injury Among U.S. Service Members, Veterans, and their Families
    24. Suicidal Behaviors in Military and Veteran Populations: Risk Factors and Strategies for Prevention and Intervention
    25. The Role of Sleep in Mental Illness in Veterans and Active Servicemembers
    Section 4: Clinical Cases and Self-Study Questions on Mental Health Needs of Military and Veteran Populations
    26. Clinical Cases and Self-Study Review for the Mental Health of Military and Veteran Populations.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    editors, Pearay L. Ogra, W. Allan Walker, Bo Lönnerdal.
    Summary: "This publication covers the 94th Nestle Nutritional Institute Workshop, which was designed to provide a comprehensive overview on the latest human milk research and its role in modulating mucosal immunity, the microbiome, and its impact on the neonate. This publication should provide scientific support to anyone seeking a deeper understanding of human milk and its immunological properties, and enlarge the knowledge of those who specialize in human milk research"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The Evolution of Lactation in Mammalian Species / Oftedal, O.T.
    Immunology of Human Milk and Lactation : Historical Overview / Ogra, P.L.
    The Mammary Gland as an Integral Component of the Common Mucosal Immune System / Mestecky, J.
    Immunomodulatory Components of Human Colostrum and Milk / Tlaskalová-Hogenová, H.; Kverka, M.; Hrdý, J.
    Breastfeeding, a Personalized Medicine with Influence on Short- and Long-Term Immune Health / Verhasselt, V.
    Summary on Immunology of Milk and Lactation / Ogra, P.L.
    Milk Microbiome and Neonatal Colonization
    Overview / Rautava, S.
    Human Milk Microbiota : Origin and Potential Uses / Fernández, L.; Rodríguez, J.M.
    Beyond the Bacterial Microbiome : Virome of Human Milk and Effects on the Developing Infant / Mohandas, S.; Pannaraj, P.S.
    Gut Microbiota, Host Gene Expression, and Cell Traffic via Milk / Neu, J.
    Breast Milk and Microbiota in the Premature Gut : A Method of Preventing Necrotizing Enterocolitis / Walker, W.A.; Meng, D.
    Summary on Microbiota of Milk and Lactation : Influence on Gut Colonization / Walker, W.A.
    Human Milk Oligosaccharides : Structure and Functions / Bode, L.
    Oligosaccharides and Viral Infection : Human Milk Oligosaccharides versus Algal Fucan-Type Polysaccharides / Hanisch, F.-G.; Aydogan, C.
    Milk Fat Globule Membranes : Effects on Microbiome, Metabolome, and Infections in Infants and Children / Hernell, O.; Lönnerdal, B.; Timby, N.
    Clinical Trials of Lactoferrin in the Newborn : Effects on Infection and the Gut Microbiome / Embleton, N.D.; Berrington, J.E.
    Effects of Milk Osteopontin on Intestine, Neurodevelopment, and Immunity / Jiang, R.; Lönnerdal, B.
    Effects of Milk Secretory Immunoglobulin A on the Commensal Microbiota / Dunne-Castagna, V.P.; Mills, D.A.; Lönnerdal, B.
    Summary on Protective Factors in Human Milk / Lönnerdal, B.
    Digital Access Karger 2020
  • Digital
    [edited by] Ara Kanekanian, Cardiff Metropolitan University, UK.
    Contents:
    The health benefits of bioactive compounds from milk and dairy products
    Bioactive peptides from casein and whey proteins
    Colostrum : Its health benefits
    Casein and whey proteins in human health
    Sports nutrition and dairy products
    Dairy fat : Perceptions and realities
    Milk ingredients as functional foods
    Milk-derived bioactive components from fermentation
    Minerals and vitamins in milk and dairy products
    Legislations and relevant regulations.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    Donald J. McGraw.
    Springer Nature eBook.
    Summary: National Science Foundation (NSF) is a unique federal agency because it supports scientific research financially, but does not engage in scientific work itself. Its history is known only in part because the NSF is a vibrant, expanding, and living entity that makes the final telling of its story impossible. Much can be learned from its beginning as well as its component parts. If the founding of the NSF in 1950 was couched in an era of physics, especially atomic physics, certainly by the end of the 20th century and the beginning of the 21st, biology was, and remains, the queen of sciences for the predictable future. This book highlights the elite status of America's biological sciences as they were funded, affected, and, to a very real degree, interactively guided by the NSF. It examines important events in the earlier history of the Foundation because they play strongly upon the development of the various biology directorates. Issues such as education, applied research, medical science, the National Institutes of Health, the beginnings of biotechnology, and other matters are also discussed.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. The Year 1975
    Chapter 2. The Effects of the Social and Behavioral Sciences
    Chapter 3. Little Biology and Biology of the Little
    Chapter 4. The Big End of the Spectrum
    Chapter 5. A Second "Time of Tumult" and A New Home for Biology
    Chapter 6. Technology and the "Fearless Biologists"
    Chapter 7. Genes and Beyond
    Chapter 8. Integrating Biology
    Chapter 9. Expanding Big Bio
    Epilogue
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    editor-in-chief, Michael A. Gropper ; honorary editor, Ronald D. Miller ; co-editors, Neal H. Cohen [and four others].
    Contents:
    Section 1: Introduction. Scope of modern anesthetic practice
    The international scope and practice of anesthesia
    Perioperative medicine
    Informatics in perioperative medicine
    Quality improvement in anesthesia practice
    Human performance and patient safety
    Patient simulation
    Ethical aspects of anesthesia care
    Section 2: Anesthetic physiology. Consciousness, memory, and anesthesia
    Sleep medicine
    Cerebral physiology and the effects of anesthetic drugs
    Neuromuscular physiology
    Respiratory physiology and pathophysiology
    Cardiac physiology
    Gastrointestinal physiology and pathophysiology
    Hepatic physiology and pathophysiology
    Renal anatomy, physiology, pharmacology and evaluation of function
    Basic principles of pharmacology
    Inhaled anesthetics: mechanisms of action
    Inhaled anesthetic pharmacokinetics: uptake, distribution, metabolism and toxicity
    Pulmonary pharmacology and inhaled anesthetics
    Inhaled anesthetics: delivery systems
    Intravenous anesthetics
    Opioids
    Nonopioid pain medications
    Intravenous drug delivery systems
    Pharmacology of neuromuscular blocking drugs
    Reversal (antagonism) of neuromuscular blockade
    Local anesthetics
    Section 3: Anesthesia management. Risk of anesthesia
    Preoperative evaluation
    Anesthetic implications of concurrent diseases
    Complementary and alternative therapies
    Patient positioning for anesthesia
    Neuromuscular disorders and other genetic disorders
    Cardiovascular monitoring
    Perioperative echocardiography
    Implantable cardiac pulse generators: pacemakers and cardioverter-defibrillators
    Neurologic monitoring
    Monitoring depth of anesthesia (monitoring brain state)
    Respiratory monitoring
    Renal pathophysiology and treatment for perioperative ischemia and nephrotoxic injury
    Neuromuscular monitoring
    Airway management in the adult
    Spinal, epidural, and caudal anesthesia
    Peripheral nerve blocks
    Perioperative fluid and electrolyte therapy
    Perioperative acid-base balance
    Patient blood management: transfusion therapy
    Patient blood management: coagulation
    Section 4: Adult subspecialty management. Management of the patient with chronic pain
    Palliative medicine
    Anesthesia for thoracic surgery
    Anesthesia for cardiac surgical procedures
    Anesthesia for cardiac catherization and electroconversion
    Anesthesia for vascular surgery
    Anesthesia for neurologic surgery and neurointerventions
    Anesthesia for bariatric surgery
    Anesthesia and the renal and genitourinary systems
    Anesthesia for organ transplantation
    Anesthesia for organ procurement
    Anesthesia for obstetrics
    Anesthesia for fetal surgery and other fetal therapies
    Anesthesia for orthopaedic surgery
    Geriatric anesthesia
    Anesthesia for trauma
    Anesthesia in prehospital and emergency care
    Biologic, natural and human-induced disasters: the role of the anesthesiologist
    Anesthesia for ophthalmic surgery
    Anesthesia for otolaryngologic and head-neck surgery
    Anesthesia for robotic surgery
    Anesthesia for ambulatory (outpatient) surgery
    Non-operating room anesthesia (NORA)
    Clinical care in extreme environments: at high and low pressure and in space (aka hyperbaric)
    Extreme physiology
    Section 5: Pediatric anesthesia. Regional anesthesia in children
    Pediatric anesthesia
    Anesthesia for pediatric cardiac surgery
    Pediatric and neonatal intensive care
    Section 6: Postoperative care. The postanesthesia care unit
    Immediate and long-term complications
    Acute postoperative pain
    Cognitive dysfunction and other long-term complications of surgery and anesthesia
    Section 7: Critical care medicine. Critical care anesthesiology
    Neurocritical care
    Extracorporeal membrane oxygenation and cardiac devices
    Cardiopulmonary resuscitation and advanced cardiac life support
    Section 8: Ancillary responsibilities and problems. Electrical burns and other burns
    Environmental safety and chemical dependency
    Evidence and clinical trials
    Interpreting the medical literature.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2020
  • Digital
    Pardo, Manuel.
    Summary: "Miller’s Basics of Anesthesia provides comprehensive yet concise coverage of both basic science and clinical topics in anesthesiology. Under the experienced editorial leadership of Dr. Manuel C. Pardo, Jr., the 8th Edition has been meticulously updated to reflect the latest advances in practice and important aspects of contemporary anesthesia care, including pathophysiology, pharmacology, regional anesthesia, anesthetic management, and special problems and patient groups."-- publisher's description.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    Greenson, Joel K.; Hornick, Jason L.; Longacre, Teri A.; Mills, Stacey E.; Reuter, Victor E.; Sternberg, Stephen S.
    Digital Access Ovid 2022
  • Digital
    Richard V. Goering, Mark Zuckerman, Hazel M. Dockrell, Peter L. Chiodini ; foreword by Cedric Mims.
    Contents:
    Section 1 The adversaries
    Pathogens
    Pathogens as parasites
    The bacteria
    The viruses
    The fungi
    The protozoa
    The helminths
    The arthropods
    Prions
    The host parasite relationship
    section 2 The adversaries
    host defences
    The innate defences of the body
    Adaptive immune responses bring specificity
    Cooperation leads to effective immune responses
    pt. 3 the conflicts
    Background to the infectious diseases
    Entry, exit and transmission
    Immune defences in action
    Spread and replication
    Parasite survival strategies and persistent infections
    Pathological consequences of infection
    section 4 clinical manifestation and diagnosis of infections by body system
    The clinical manifestations of infection
    Upper respiratory tract infections?
    Lower respiratory tract infections
    Urinary tract infections
    Sexually transmitted infections
    Gastrointestinal tract infections
    Obstetric and perinatal infections
    Central nervous system infections
    Infections of the eye
    Infections of the skin, soft tissue, muscle and associated systems
    Vector-borne infections
    Multisystem zoonoses
    Fever of unknown origin
    Infections in the compromised host
    section 5 Diagnosis and control
    Diagnosis of infection and assessment of host defence mechanisms
    Epidemiology and control of infectious diseases
    Attacking the enemy: antimicrobial agents and chemotherapy
    Protecting the host: vaccination
    Active, passive and adoptive immunotherapy
    Infection control.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    Vida Demarin, editor.
    Contents:
    Intro
    Introduction
    Contents
    Contributors
    Creativity-The Story Continues: An Overview of Thoughts on Creativity
    Can Creativity Be Taught?
    George Land's Creativity Test [4]
    Where Creativity Comes from? Is There a Special Place in the Brain?
    Drawing 2: Brain Tree (Author: Ivan Šarić, Courtesy from the Private Collection)
    Computers Produced 3-D Wiring Diagrams of the Brain
    Drawing 3: Flower Brain (Author: Ivan Šarić, Courtesy from the Private Collection)
    Music and Neuroplasticity
    Types of Creativity and Creative Thinking Deliberate and Cognitive-Thomas Edison
    Personal Breakthrough 'A-ha' Moments
    Isaac Newton 'Eureka' Moments
    'Epiphanies'
    Lateral Thinking
    Aesthetic Thinking
    Systems Thinking
    Inspirational Thinking
    References
    Artificial Intelligence and Brain Health
    Introduction to Artificial Intelligence
    Neurobiology of Creativity and Machine Learning
    Virtual Doctor and Therapeutic Games
    Ethical Issues and Artificial Intelligence Technologies in Mental Health
    Conclusion
    References
    Neuropsychoanalysis-Gluing the Bits Together Again
    References Healing Beyond Mind and Body
    References
    Primary Headache from a Psychosocial Perspective
    Interoceptive Model of a Headache
    Social Stress
    Individual's Response to Stress
    Distress as a Trigger Factor of Primary Headaches and as a Risk for Chronic Headaches
    Cognitive Factors
    Negative Emotions and Precision of Predictions
    Biopsychosocial Approach to Headache Treatment
    Conclusions
    References
    From Mild Encephalitis Hypothesis to Autoimmune Psychosis
    At the Beginning an Appreciation of Personalities and Atmosphere of Pula Congresses From Mild Encephalitis Hypothesis to First Consensus Description of Autoimmune Psychosis
    Emerging Clinical and Therapeutic Relevance of the ME/AP Concept
    ME Hypothesis, AP Diagnosis, and Beyond
    Conclusion
    References
    Psychiatric Disorders in Neurological Diseases
    Introduction
    Stroke
    Cerebral Autosomal Dominant Arteriopathy with Subcortical Infarcts and Leukoencephalopathy (CADASIL)
    Encephalopathy
    Psychiatric Disturbances
    Depression
    Delirium
    Post-stroke Language Disorders
    Neuropsychology of Acute Stroke
    Multiple Sclerosis
    Parkinson's Disease Huntington Disease
    Wilson Disease
    Epilepsy
    References
    Huntington's Disease
    History and Epidemiology
    Natural History
    Pathology and Pathophysiology
    Neuroimaging
    Clinical Features
    Motor Symptoms
    Cognitive Disorder
    Psychiatric Symptoms
    Diagnosis
    Treatment
    Experimental Therapeutics and Prospects
    References
    Non-motor Symptoms in Parkinson's Disease
    Introduction
    Cognitive Problems and Dementia
    Depression
    Anxiety
    Apathy and Fatigue
    Impulse Control Disorders
    Psychosis
    Future Perspective
    Conclusions
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Patricia Lynn Dobkin, editor.
    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction: Mindful Medical Practice
    Chapter 2. Mindful Rounds, Narrative Medicine, House Calls and Other Stories
    Chapter 3. Lost Heart(beat)/Broken(body)
    Chapter 4. Working with Groups Mindfully
    Chapter 5. The Opera of Medicine
    Chapter 6. The Mindful Psychiatrist: Being Present with Suffering
    Chapter 7. The Death of a Snowflake
    Chapter 8. Carmen's Story
    Chapter 9. A Mindful Life in Medicine: One Pediatrician's Reflections on Being Mindful
    Chapter 10. Embodied Wisdom: Meeting Experience through the Body
    Chapter 11: Minding Baby Abigale
    Chapter 12. Mindfulness in Oncology: Healing Through Relationship
    Chapter 13. Choosing to Survive: A Change in Reproductive Plans
    Chapter 14. Mindfulness in the Realm of Hungry Ghosts
    Chapter 15. In the Heart of Cancer
    Chapter 16. Hiking on the Eightfold Path
    Chapter 17. Strengthening the Therapeutic Alliance Through Mindfulness: One Nephrologist's Experiences
    Chapter 18. Richard's Embers
    Chapter 19. Mindful Decisions in Urogynecological Surgery: Paths from Awareness to Action
    Chapter 20. The Good Mother
    Chapter 21. I Am My Brother's Keeper
    Chapter 22. The Mindful Shift
    Chapter 23. Lifeline
    Chapter 24. Medical Students' Voices: Reflections on Mindlessness During Clinical Encounters
    Chapter 25. Growth and Freedom in 5 Chapters
    Chapter 26. A Wounded Healer's Reflections on Healing
    Chapter 27. Mindfulness, Presence and Whole Person Care
    Chapter 28. Mindful Attitudes Open Hearts in Clinical Practice
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Michiel van Vreeswijk, Jenny Broersen, Ger Schurink.
    Contents:
    Theoretical background
    Introduction
    Schema therapy
    Mindfulness
    Training manual
    Framework
    Contraindications
    Training
    Pitfalls
    Conclusion
    Appendix:
    Part iii" participant workbook
    Participant workbook
    Appendix: homework sheets.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    Stuart J. Eisendrath, editor.
    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction
    Part I. MBCT for Medical Conditions
    Chapter 2. Pain
    Chapter 3. Diabetes
    Chapter 4. Traumatic Brain Injury
    Chapter 5. Gynecologic Cancer
    Chapter 6. Headache
    Chapter 7. Unexplained Symptoms
    Chapter 8. Urologic Cancer
    Chapter 9. Cardiac
    Chapter 10. Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Chapter 11. HIV
    Part II. MBCT for Psychiatric Conditions
    Chapter 12. Perinatal Depression
    Chapter 13. Relapse Prevention
    Chapter 14. Panic Disorder
    Chapter 15. Treatment Resistant Depression
    Chapter 16. Generalized Anxiety
    Chapter 17. Perinatal Anxiety
    Chapter 18. Dysthymia
    Chapter 19. OCD
    Chapter 20. Bipolar
    Chapter 21. PTSD
    Chapter 22. Suicidal Behavior.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Gerhard Zarbock, Siobhan Lynch, Axel Ammann, Silka Ringer.
    Contents:
    Welcome
    Mindfulness
    Week 1: Introduction to Mindfulness
    Week 2: The five elements of mindfulness
    Week 3: Integrating mindfulness into every day life
    Week 4: Mindfulness as a way of life
    Week 5: Mindfulness as a home base for therapists
    Week 6: Mindfulness of the body
    Week 7: Integrating mindfulness into therapeutic practice
    Week 8: Review and next steps
    Week 9: Your Oasis
    Extending your practice
    Exercises in everyday personal and professional lives
    Mindfulness exercises for the helping role
    Mindful moments with your clients
    Short Manual for running a group based on the presented material.
    Digital Access Wiley 2015
  • Print
    edited by C.L. Comar, Felix Bronner.
    Contents:
    v. 1. Principles, processes, and systems. 2 pts.
    v. 2. The elements. 2 pts
    v. 3. Calcium physiology.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    D333 .C728
    4
  • Digital
    edited by Dr. Mahmoud Torabinejad.
    Contents:
    Pulp and periradicular pathways, pathosis, and closure / Mahmoud Torabinejad
    Chemical properties of mineral trioxide aggregate / David W. Berzins
    Physical properties of mineral trioxide aggregate / Lawrence Gettleman and Ricardo Caicedo
    Use of MTA in vital pulp therapy / Till Dammaschke, Joe Camp, and George Bogen
    Use of MTA in teeth with necrotic pulps and open apices / Shahrokh Shabahang and David Witherspoon
    Use of MTA in regenerative endodontics / Mahmoud Torabinejad, Robert P. Corr, and George T.J. Huang
    Use of MTA as root perforation repair / Mahmoud Torabinejad and Ron Lemon
    Root canal obturation with MTA / George Bogen, Ingrid Lawaty, and Nicholas Chandler
    Use of MTA as root end filling / Seung-Ho Baek and Su-Jong Shin
    Calcium silicate-based cements / Masoud Parirokh and Mahmoud Torabinejad.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    Dominique G. Poitout, Henri Judet, editors.
    Summary: In recent years, mini-invasive surgery has become increasingly important for reducing the risk of infection and minimizing blood loss and volume of implants. Hip surgery requires small incisions, which make the use of the appropriate equipment and an extensive knowledge of the anatomy of the region essential. Mini-invasive surgery requires the surgeon to consider the indications for surgery for each patient he treats and to know the exact loco-regional anatomy for that patient. Methods must be very precise and warrant visual explanations to help teach young surgeons.

    Contents:
    Minimally invasive anterior approach for total hip replacement / Thierry Siguier, Marc Siguier, and Bertrand Brumpt
    Mini-invasive approach and navigation in total prosthesis of the hip / Henri Judet
    Anterior Hueter-type approach in lateral decubitus on a conventional table / Gilles Wepierre
    Smith-Petersen approach and lateral position with mini-stem / Dominique G. Poitout
    Anterior approach for total hip arthroplasty : technique without fracture table / Michael S.H. Kain and Michael Leunig
    The anterolateral Watson Jones approach in total hip replacement in the supine position / Pierre Henky
    Transtrochanteric approach to the hip / Luc Kerboull, Moussa Hamadouche, and Marcel Kerboull
    A modified anterolateral, less invasive approach to the hip : surgical technique and preliminary results of first 103 cases / Herve Hourlier
    Minimally invasive posterior approach : technical evaluation, initial results and follow-up at two years / Stephan Procyk
    Hip resurfacing and anterior approach / Philippe Piriou, Thierry Judet, Michel Serrault, and M. Mullins
    Surgical technique in hip resurfacing : minimally invasive surgery with posterior approach / Michael Menge
    Navigation and the square angle pointer in hip resurfacing / N. Szöke
    Navigated modular short-stemmed total hip arthroplasty by a less invasive technique / Djordje Lazovic, Ferenc József Dunai, and Rasmus Zigan.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Alvaro R. Lara, Guillermo Gosset, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive overview of the design, generation and characterization of minimal cell systems. Written by leading experts, it presents an in-depth analysis of the current issues and challenges in the field, including recent advances in the generation and characterization of reduced-genome strains generated from model organisms with relevance in biotechnology, and basic research such as Escherichia coli, Corynebacterium glutamicum and yeast. It also discusses methodologies, such as bottom-up and top-down genome minimization strategies, as well as novel analytical and experimental approaches to characterize and generate minimal cells. Lastly, it presents the latest research related to minimal cells of serveral microorganisms, e.g. Bacillus subtilis. The design of biological systems for biotechnological purposes employs strategies aimed at optimizing specific tasks. This approach is based on enhancing certain biological functions while reducing other capacities that are not required or that could be detrimental to the desired objective. A highly optimized cell factory would be expected to have only the capacity for reproduction and for performing the expected task. Such a hypothetical organism would be considered a minimal cell. At present, numerous research groups in academia and industry are exploring the theoretical and practical implications of constructing and using minimal cells and are providing valuable fundamental insights into the characteristics of minimal genomes, leading to an understanding of the essential gene set. In addition, research in this field is providing valuable information on the physiology of minimal cells and their utilization as a biological chassis to which useful biotechnological functions can be added.

    Contents:
    Reduced and Minimal Cell Factories in Bioprocesses: Towards a Streamlined Chassis
    Construction of minimal genomes and synthetic cells
    Engineering reduced-genome strains of Pseudomonas putida for product valorization
    Genome-reduced Corynebacterium glutamicum fit for biotechnological applications
    Reduction of the Saccharomyces cerevisiae genome: challenges and perspectives
    The use of in silico genome-scale models for the rational design of minimal cells
    From minimal to minimized genomes: Functional design of microbial cell factories
    Resource allocation principles and minimal cell design.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Gautam N. Allahbadia, Markus Nitzschke, editors.
    Summary: This contributed volume regenerates the significance of and respect for natural phenomenon in the background of the risks and complications seen in ART such as ovarian hyperstimulation and multiple pregnancies. Balancing the clinical practice between the beneficial natural physiology and the prolific use of stimulation drugs for ART may help eliminate risks that may prove clinically, financially and psychologically expensive. It underscores the fact that 'greater' is not always synonymous with 'better' with regard to the oocyte yield. While highlighting the risks involved with the use of high-dose gonadotropins, the book presents a stratification of patients who might benefit from the 'soft' minimal and natural cycle IVF stimulation protocols that may be used. Additionally, clinicians can understand the significance of cryopreservation technology, now a useful adjunct to minimal stimulation protocols, with its manifold future advantages. Written by an international team of experts, this handbook emphasizes how minimal stimulation and natural cycle IVF can lead to a milder, safer and more effective approach to ART. .
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Kosar A. Khwaja, Jose J. Diaz, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Won Lee, editor.
    Summary: In this book, authors will describe various techniques about botulinum toxin injection, filler injection and thread lifting based on latest evidences of minimally invasive plastic surgery techniques. For example, doppler ultrasound guided filler injection technique, short scar minimally invasive thread lifting techniques, and neck lifting techniques. Also described the basic knowledge for minimally invasive aesthetic techniques such as hyaluronic acid filler properties and rheology, threads components and classifications, and botulinum toxin classifications. Simple and easy techniques are described for beginners and also showed step by step injecting photographs. Also described basic anatomy for botulinum toxin, filler injection and thread lifting. Various detail illustrations and clinical photographs will be presented to help readers easier understanding and performing procedures.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Editors
    1: Artistic Approach for Minimally Invasive Plastic Surgery
    1.1 Patient Analysis
    1.1.1 Patient Expectations
    1.1.2 Patient's Past History
    1.1.3 Current Status of Patient
    1.2 Plan of the Procedure
    1.2.1 Choice of the Procedure
    1.2.2 Choice of the Material
    1.3 Considerations for the Design
    1.3.1 Esthetic Aspects
    1.3.2 Functional Aspects
    1.4 Beauty Criteria
    1.4.1 Facial Shape
    1.4.2 Forehead
    1.4.2.1 The Proportion of Facial Length and Forehead (Fig. 1.9) 1.4.2.2 Forehead Shape (Fig. 1.10)
    1.4.2.3 Forehead Volume and Curvature
    1.4.3 Eyebrows
    1.4.4 Eyelid
    1.4.5 Nose
    1.4.5.1 The Radix
    1.4.5.2 The Dorsum
    1.4.5.3 Nasal Tip
    1.4.5.4 Columellar-Alar Complex
    1.4.5.5 Nasal Base
    1.4.6 Lips
    1.4.7 Chin
    1.5 Evaluation of the Success of a Procedure
    References
    2: Anatomical Considerations for Botulinum Toxin Injections
    2.1 Muscles of the Face
    2.1.1 Frontalis Muscle
    2.1.2 Corrugator Supercilii Muscle
    2.1.3 Procerus Muscle
    2.1.4 Orbicularis Oculi Muscle
    2.1.5 Nasalis Muscle 2.1.6 Depressor Septi Nasi Muscle
    2.1.7 Levator Labii Superioris (LLS) Muscle
    2.1.8 Levator Labii Superioris Alaeque Nasi Muscle
    2.1.9 Levator Anguli Oris (LAO) Muscle
    2.1.10 Zygomaticus Major and Minor Muscles
    2.1.11 Risorius Muscle
    2.1.12 Depressor Anguli Oris (DAO) Muscle
    2.1.13 Mentalis Muscle
    2.1.14 Masseter Muscle
    2.2 Parotid and Submandibular Glands of the Face
    2.3 Vessels of the Face
    References
    3: Clinical Injection Techniques for Botulinum Toxin
    3.1 History
    3.2 Botulinum Toxin Types, Mechanism, and Usages 3.3 Upper Face Botulinum Toxin Injections
    3.3.1 Horizontal Wrinkle of the Forehead
    3.3.2 Glabellar Frown Line
    3.3.3 Eyebrow Elevation
    3.3.4 Crow's Feet
    3.4 Midface Botulinum Toxin Injection Techniques
    3.4.1 Bunny Lines
    3.4.2 Upper Lip
    3.5 Lower Face Botulinum Toxin Injection Techniques
    3.5.1 Depressor Anguli Oris Muscle
    3.5.2 Mentalis
    3.5.3 Masseter Hypertrophy
    3.5.4 Platysma Bands
    3.6 Microbotox Injection Technique
    3.6.1 Techniques
    3.6.2 Mechanism
    3.6.3 Indications 3.7 Recent Consensus on the Use of Botulinum Toxin and Hyaluronic Acid Filler
    3.7.1 Conceptualization of the Aging Process
    3.7.2 General Techniques
    References
    4: Anatomical Considerations for Filler Injection
    4.1 Arteries of the Face
    4.1.1 Arteries of the Perioral Region
    4.1.2 Arteries of the Perinasal Region
    4.1.3 Arteries of the Periorbital Region
    4.1.4 Arteries of the Frontal and Glabellar Regions
    4.1.5 Arteries of the Temporal Region
    4.1.6 Arteries of the Cheek Region
    4.2 Veins of the Face
    4.3 Nerves of the Face
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Patricio C. Gargollo, editor.
    Summary: This book provides a data-driven analysis of robotic assisted, laparoscopic, and endoscopic urological procedures in children, including renal surgery, ureteral surgery, oncology, and bladder surgery. Introductory chapters outline and describe the logistics of establishing a dedicated minimally invasive program at your institution, as well as the basics of anatomy, instrumentation, access, and trocar placement. Subsequent chapters are organized by anatomic compartment (upper tract and lower tract) and organ system. Each chapter also addresses advanced techniques and future directions, as well as common complications and case-based challenges. The final chapters review oncology and special considerations in infants. Minimally Invasive and Robotic-Assisted Surgery in Pediatric Urology provides a comprehensive, evidence-based text on pediatric urology robotic and minimally invasive surgery, allowing readers to implement the material presented for the improvement of their own practices and patient outcomes.

    Contents:
    History of Minimally Invasive and Robotic Assisted Surgery in Pediatric urology
    Physiologic Considerations in Laparoscopic Surgery
    Anesthesia for Laparoscopic Surgery
    Relevant Anatomy in MIS
    Basic Instrumentation and Equipment
    Patient Positioning, Trocar Placement, and Initial Access
    Trans Abdominal vs Retroperitoneal Procedures
    Pyeloplasty
    Hemi-nephrectomy
    Nephrectomy
    Ureteral Reimplantation
    Management of Duplication Anomalies
    Urachal Anomalies and Posterior Bladder Surgery
    Continent Catheterizable Channels
    Complex Bladder Reconstruction
    Bladder Augmentation Procedures
    Orchidopexy
    Varicocelectomy
    Fetal Surgery
    Complications in Pediatric Urology MIS
    New Robotic Systems
    Education and Simulation in MIS
    Tips and Tricks. Future Direction and Case Based Discussions.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Gianluca Plotino, editor.
    Summary: This book describes the latest minimally invasive approaches in endodontics and explains the principles that guide them. The advantages and limitations of these approaches are critically analyzed with the intention of defining new endodontic gold standards. The trend toward the use of more conservative procedures within endodontics reflects the wider adoption of minimally invasive dentistry in general and is being fostered by the introduction of new materials, devices, instruments, and techniques as well as the use of magnification and advanced three-dimensional diagnostic imaging technologies. In this book, readers will find clear explanation of these advances and their impacts. Minimally invasive access to the root canal system is described, and detailed attention is devoted to the application of novel strategies in root canal instrumentation and disinfection, root canal filling, coronal restoration, retreatment, and endodontic surgery. Minimally invasive alternatives to complete endodontic treatment, such as vital pulp therapies, and to dental extraction and implant placement, including surgical extrusion, intentional replantation, and tooth autotransplantation, are also discussed. Minimally Invasive Approaches in Endodontic Practice will be of value for endodontists at all levels of experience.

    Contents:
    The Role of Technology in Minimally Invasive Endodontics
    Minimally Invasive Access to the Root Canal System
    Minimally Invasive Root Canal Instrumentation
    Root Canal Debridement and Disinfection in Minimally Invasive Preparation
    Filling of Root Canals after Minimally Invasive Preparation
    Strategies for the Reconstruction of Minimally Invasive Endodontic Treatments
    A Minimally Invasive Approach to Endodontic Retreatment and Micro-Surgical Endodontics
    Minimally Invasive Alternatives to Dental Extraction.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Howard M. Ross, Sang W. Lee, Matthew G. Mutch, David E. Rivadeneira, Scott R. Steele, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I. Preoperative
    1. Perioperative Assessment / Charlotte Kvasnovsky and Andrea Chao Bafford
    2. Patient Positioning, Instrumentation, and Trocar Placement / Mehraneh Dorna Jafari, Michael J. Stamos, and Steven Mills
    3. Surgical Anatomy / Todd D. Francone and Ron G. Landmann
    Part II. Procedures
    4. Right Colectomy: Straight Laparoscopic / Steven Robert Hunt
    5. Right Colectomy: Hand-Assist / Kirk A. Ludwig and Timothy Ridolfi
    6. Laparoscopic Sigmoidectomy/Left Colectomy / Toyooki Sonoda
    7. Hand-Assisted Left Colectomy / Steven Lee-Kong and Daniel L. Feingold
    8. Total Abdominal Colectomy: Straight Laparoscopic Approach / Amanda V. Hayman and Eric J. Dozois
    9. Total Abdominal Colectomy: Hand- Assisted Approach / Kiyokazu Nakajima, Tsunekazu Mizushima, and Riichiro Nezu
    10. Operative Details of Laparoscopic Rectal Resection for Cancer / Martin R. Weiser
    11. Laparoscopic Hand-Assisted Low Anterior Resection / Govind Nandakumar and Sang W. Lee
    12. Laparoscopic Abdominoperineal Resection / Jennifer S. Davids and Justin A. Maykel
    13. Laparoscopic Proctocolectomy / David A. Etzioni and Tonia M. Young-Fadok
    14. Laparoscopic Rectopexy / Mia DeBarros and Scott R. Steele
    15. Minimally Invasive Approach for Stoma Creation / Seth I. Felder, Zuri Murrell, and Phillip Fleshner
    16 Laparoscopic Stoma Reversal / Emre Gorgun
    17. Laparoscopic Parastomal Hernia Repair / Joshua A. Tyler and Matthew G. Mutch
    Part III. Technical Challenges and Tips
    18. Overcoming Technical Challenges: The Abdomen / Eric K. Johnson
    19. Overcoming Technical Challenges: The Pelvis / M. Shane McNevin
    20. Overcoming Technical Challenges: Reoperative Surgery / Brian R. Englum, M. Benjamin Hopkins, and John Migaly
    21. Overcoming Technical Challenges: Prevention and Managing Complications / Bradley R. Davis
    Part IV. New Horizons
    22. Single-Incision Laparoscopic Approaches to Colorectal Disease / Virgilio George
    23. Natural Orifice Surgery (NOTES) / Mark H. Whiteford
    24. Robotic Surgery /Mehraneh Dorna Jafari, David E. Rivadeneira, and Alessio Pigazzi
    25. Transanal Minimally Invasive Surgery (TAMIS): Operative Technique, Pitfalls, and Tips / Francisco Quinteros, Kumaran Thiruppathy, and Matthew R. Albert
    26. Combined Endo-Laparoscopic Surgery (CELS) / Kelly A. Garrett and Sang W. Lee
    Part V. Special Situations
    27. Emergent Laparoscopic Colorectal Surgery / Rodrigo Pedraza and Eric M. Haas
    28. Laparoscopy in the Elderly Patient / Joshua I. S. Bleier and Brian R. Kann
    29. Laparoscopic Colectomy in the Obese Patient / Arida Siripong and H. David Vargas
    30. Minimally Invasive Surgery in Crohn's Disease Patients / Chang Sik Yu
    31. Minimally Invasive Surgery in Ulcerative Colitis Patients / Marco E. Allaix and Alessandro Fichera
    32. Minimally Invasive Approaches to Colon and Rectal Diseases: Technique and Best Practices--Pediatrics / Eric J. Krebill and Daniel J. Robertson
    33. Laparoscopy in Pregnant Patients / Melissa M. Alvarez-Downing and David J. Maron
    34. Economics of Laparoscopic Colectomy / Anthony J. Senagore
    35. Outcomes of Laparoscopic Surgery / Jennifer Leahy and Rocco Ricciardi
    Part VI. Conclusions
    36. Future Directions in Minimally Invasive Surgery / Howard M. Ross and Matthew Miller Philp.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Marcello Lucchese, Nicola Scopinaro, editors.
    Summary: This book explains the concept of metabolic surgery and provides step-by-step descriptions of all the principal minimally invasive surgical techniques employed to treat morbid obesity. The approach adopted is very practical. For each procedure, indications, technical aspects, clinical management, and outcomes are described, and helpful tips and tricks, highlighted. Guidance is provided on the management of emergencies and potential complications, as well as on general postoperative management and long-term follow-up. The coverage also includes new frontiers of robotic and endoscopic surgery. While the focus is on surgical techniques, emphasis is placed on the need for a multidisciplinary approach, with explanation of the role of the multidisciplinary team and the bariatric center. In addition, important information is presented on the definition of morbid and severe obesity, incidence/prevalence, pathophysiology, and obesity-related comorbidities. The authors are internationally acknowledged experts who present best practice know-how in the field and draw on the most recent research literature.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editors: Stacy A. Brethauer, Philip R. Schauer, Bruce D. Schirmer.
    Summary: The second edition of Minimally Invasive Bariatric Surgery provides a comprehensive, state-of-the art review of this field, and it serves as a valuable resource for clinicians, surgeons and researchers with an interest in minimally invasive bariatric surgery. Additionally, the second edition includes new features that will benefit the resident, fellow, or bariatric surgeon new to the field. Specifically, each evidence-based chapter (i.e. outcomes, complications, epidemiology, etc) concludes with three or four exam questions that emphasize the salient points of the chapter and provide fellowship programs a valuable training tool and resource for their academic curriculum. These questions are either single-answer multiple choice or true/false format and the correct response with a brief explanation follows. As more emphasis is placed on completing a comprehensive curriculum and obtaining certification for bariatric training, this aspect of the book is unique and provides added value to the text. The new edition also incorporates many new or updated medical illustrations to enhance the technique chapters and provide more uniformity for the artwork throughout the book. Each of the major procedures include surgical technique, outcomes, and management of complications in separate chapters to provide an easy reference for the busy clinician preparing for a case or presentation. Another unique feature of the text is a link to video files hosted online for the relevant chapters. This video library will be of great value to the user. As the number of fellowships in laparoscopic bariatric surgery continues to increase, this updated text will provide a valuable resource for general and bariatric surgeons, laparoscopic surgeons, fellows, residents, medical students, obesity researchers, and industry representatives involved in this field. Minimally Invasive Bariatric Surgery is a valuable resource for Medical students, surgical oncology fellows, general surgeons, and educators.

    Contents:
    The Global Burden of Obesity and Diabetes
    Pathophysiology of Obesity Comorbidity: The Effects of Chronically Increased Intraabdominal Pressure
    Medical Management of Obesity
    History of Bariatric and Metabolic Surgery
    Developing a Successful Bariatric Surgery Program
    Essential Bariatric Equipment: Making your Facility More Accommodating to Bariatric Surgical Patients
    Patient Selection: Pathways to Surgery
    The Role of Behavioral Health in Bariatric Surgery
    Operating Room Positioning, Equipment and Instrumentation for Laparoscopic Bariatric Surgery
    Anesthesia for Minimally Invasive Bariatric Surgery
    Postoperative Pathways in Minimally Invasive Bariatric Surgery
    Bariatric Surgery: Patient Safety and Quality Improvement
    Data Management for the Bariatric Surgery Program
    Sleeve Gastrectomy: Technique, Pearls, & Pitfalls
    Laparoscopic Sleeve Gastrectomy: Outcomes
    Laparoscopic Sleeve Gastrectomy: Management of Complications
    Sleeve Gastrectomy as a Revisional Procedure.- Laparoscopic Gastric Plication
    Laparoscopic Adjustable Gastric Banding: Technique
    Laparoscopic Adjustable Gastric Banding: Outcomes
    Laparoscopic Adjustable Gastric Banding: Long-Term Management
    Laparoscopic Adjustable Gastric Banding: Management of Complications
    Laparoscopic Adjustable Gastric Banding: Controversies
    Bypass: Transoral Circular Stapler Gastrojejunostomy Technique
    Gastric Bypass: Transgastric Circular Stapler Technique
    Laparoscopic Gastric Bypass: Hand-Sewn Gastrojejunostomy Technique
    Laparoscopic Gastric Bypass Using Linear Stapled Technique/- Outcomes after Laparoscopic Gastric Bypass
    Laparoscopic Gastric Bypass: Management of Complications
    Gastric Bypass as a Revisional Procedure
    Laparoscopic Gastric Bypass: Nutritional Management after Surgery
    Laparoscopic Malabsorptive Procedures: Technique of Duodenal Switch
    Laparoscopic Malabsorption Procedures: Outcomes
    Laparoscopic Malabsorption Procedures: Management of Complications
    Laparoscopic Malabsorption Procedures: Management of Nutritional Complications after Biliopancreatic Diversion
    Alternative Minimally Invasive Options: Neural Modulation
    Intragastric Balloon
    Alternative Minimally Invasive Options: Endoluminal Bariatric Procedures
    Innovative Metabolic Operations
    Venous Thrombosis and Pulmonary Embolism in the Bariatric Surgery Patient
    Role of Flexible Endoscopy in the Practice of Bariatric Surgery
    Bariatric Surgery in Adolescents
    Bariatric Surgery in the Elderly
    The High-Risk Bariatric Patient
    Long-term Mortality after Bariatric Surgery
    Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease in the Bariatric Surgery Patient
    Gallbladder and Biliary Disease in Bariatric Surgery Patients
    Effects of Bariatric Surgery on Diabetes.- Cardiovascular Disease in the Bariatric Surgery Patient
    Obesity and Cancer with Emphasis on Bariatric Surgery
    Obstructive Sleep Apnea in Bariatric Surgery Patients
    Ventral Hernias in the Bariatric Patient.- Plastic Surgery Following Weight Loss
    The Female Patient: Pregnancy and Gynecologic Issues in the Bariatric Surgery Patient
    Medicolegal Issues: The Pitfalls and Pratfalls of the Bariatric Surgery Practice.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    William C.S. Meng, Hester Y.S. Cheung, David T.Y. Lam, Simon S.M. Ng, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Steven N. Hochwald, editor ; Moshim Kukar, associate editor.
    Summary: This book provides detailed, comprehensive and illustrative content to the surgical community in the areas of foregut oncologic surgery. The text contains an in-depth review of all surgical aspects of oncologic diseases involving the stomach and esophagus. The main focus is on the minimally invasive techniques including potential complications and their management. The text also includes an online link to the videos for all minimally invasive foregut surgical procedures, including animation content which provide a more comprehensive learning experience. Minimally Invasive Foregut Surgery for Malignancy: Principles and Practice is structured in a way that makes it useful at every level of training and will be of great utility to practicing surgeons, fellows in surgical subspecialty training and surgical residents.

    Contents:
    Pathogenesis of esophageal cancer.- Endoscopic Treatment of Pre-Malignant and Early Esophageal Malignancy
    The Volume-outcome Relationship, Standardized Clinical Pathways and Minimally Invasive Surgery for Esophagectomy
    Goals of Surgical Therapy for Esophageal Cancer
    Optimization of Patients for Esophageal Cancer Surgery
    Pathogenesis of Gastric Cancer
    Standards for Surgical Therapy of Gastric Cancer
    Endoscopic Submucosal Dissection for Gastric Cancer
    Its Indication, Technique, and Our Experience.-Multimodality Therapy in Gastric Cancer
    Laparoscopic Transhiatal Esophagectomy for Esophageal Cancer
    Laparoscopic and Thoracoscopic Esophagectomy with EEA Anastomosis
    Laparoscopic and Thoracoscopic Esophagectomy with Side-Side Thoracic Anastomosis
    Laparoscopic and Thoracoscopic Transhiatal Esophagectomy with Cervical Anastomosis
    Laparoscopic and Thoracoscopic Esophagectomy with Colonic Interposition
    Thoracolaparoscopic Esophagectomy in the Prone Position for Carcinoma of the Esophagus
    Thoracoscopic Enucleation of Esophageal Benign Tumors
    Minimally Invasive Feeding Tube and Esophageal Stent Placement
    Robotic Utilization in Esophageal Cancer Surgery
    Minimally Invasive Intragastric Surgery
    Laparoscopic Partial Gastrectomy
    Principles and Practice of Laparoscopic Gastrectomy with Gastroduodenostomy (Billroth I)
    Laparoscopic Subtotal Gastrectomy with Gastrojejunostomy and D2 Lymphadenectomy
    Laparoscopic Proximal Gastrectomy with Double Tract Anastomosis
    Laparoscopy-Assisted Total Gastrectomy
    Robotic Utilization in Gastric Cancer Surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Jinzhong Zhao, editor.
    Summary: The book provides essential surgical techniques to restore knee function, in addition to the anatomical reconstruction. It introduces 44 techniques in separated chapters, which are composized with the same text structure and high-resolution photos. The authors are good at managing and teaching these techniques. The step-by-step descriptions and illustrations are very helpful for the readers of orthopaedic and sports medicine surgeons.

    Contents:
    Part 1 Knee Basics
    1 Arthroscopic Knee Examination
    2 Treatment Strategies of Meniscus Injuries
    3 Arthroscopic Meniscus Repair with Autograft Tendon Fibers
    4 Outside-in Transfer All-inside Meniscus Repair
    5 Lateral Meniscus Posterior Root Repair
    6 Combined Pull-out Repair and Centralization for Medial Meniscus Posterior Root Tear
    7 Arthroscopic synovectomy
    8 Arthroscopic Treatment of Pigmented Villonodular Synovitis of the Knee
    9 Hamstring Tendon Harvesting
    10 Harvesting the Anterior Half of the Peroneus Longus Tendon
    11 Preparation of Autogenous Tendon
    12 Graft Length in the Tunnel in Cruciate Ligaments Reconstruction
    Part 2 Anterior cruciate ligament
    13 Principles of Anterior Cruciate Ligament Reconstruction
    14 Isometric Single-bundle Transtibial Anterior Cruciate Ligament Reconstruction
    15 Single-bundle Isometric ACL Reconstruction with Remnant Preservation
    16 Anatomical Transtibial Single-bundle Anterior Cruciate Ligament Reconstruction
    17 Treatment Strategies of a Partial ACL Injury
    18 Single-bundle Anatomical Hardware-free ACL Reconstruction
    19 Anterior Cruciate Ligament Reconstruction with Internal Bracing
    20 Anatomical Double-bundle Transtibial Anterior Cruciate Ligament Reconstruction
    21 Double-bundle Anterior Cruciate Ligament Reconstruction with Remnant Preservation
    22 Combined ACL-mimicking Anterolateral Structure Reconstruction and Single-bundle Anterior Cruciate Ligament Reconstruction
    23 Combined ACL-mimicking Anterolateral Structure Reconstruction and Double-bundle Anterior Cruciate Ligament Reconstruction
    24 Slope-reducing High Tibial Osteotomy and Anterior Cruciate Ligament Reconstruction
    25 Basic Concepts in Revision Anterior Cruciate Ligament Reconstruction
    26 Three-in-one Procedure for Revision ACL Reconstruction
    27 Basic Concepts in the Treatment of Tibial Avulsion Fracture of the Anterior Cruciate Ligament
    28 Arthroscopic Suture-to-Adjustable Loop Fixation of Adult ACL Tibial Avulsion Fracture
    29 Arthroscopic Epiphyseal Plate-sparing Fixation of ACL Tibial Avulsion Fracture in Skeletally Immature Patients
    30 Suture Bridge Fixation for Adolescent ACL Tibial Avulsion Fracture
    Part 3 Posterior Cruciate ligament
    31 Ultra-Strong Posterior Cruciate Ligament Reconstruction
    32 Single Bundle Posterior Cruciate Ligament Reconstruction without Remnant Preservation
    33 Single-bundle Anatomical Posterior Cruciate Ligament Reconstruction with Remnant Preservation
    34 Lower Tibial Tunnel Placement in Transtibial PCL Reconstruction
    35 Four-Tunnel Double-Bundle Anatomical Posterior Cruciate Ligament Reconstruction without Remnant Preservation
    36 Sandwich-Style Posterior Cruciate Ligament Reconstruction: Four-tunnel Double-bundle Posterior Cruciate Ligament Reconstruction with Remnant Preservation
    37 Basic Concepts in the Treatment of Tibial Avulsion Fracture of the Posterior Cruciate Ligament
    38 Arthroscopic Suture to Loop Fixation of PCL Tibial Avulsion Fracture
    Part 4 Collateral and Multi ligaments
    39 The Basic Concept in Treatment of Injuries of the Posteromedial Corner of the Knee
    40 Structural Augmentation of the Posteromedial Corner of the Knee
    41 Basic Concept in the Treatment of Knee Posterolateral Corner Injury
    42 Knee Posterolateral Corner Reconstruction with a Single Tendon
    43 Arthroscopic popliteal tendon reconstruction for type A PLC injury
    44 The Lateral Gutter Drive-thru Sign and Drive-thru Test
    45 Basic Concepts in the Treatment of Knee Dislocation
    46 Treatment Strategies for Multi Ligament Injuries of the knee
    47 Simultaneous anterior cruciate ligament, posterior cruciate ligament, posteromedial corner, and posterolateral corner reconstruction of the knee
    Part 5 Patellofemoral Joint
    48 Basic Concepts in the Diagnosis and Treatment of Patella Instability and Dislocation
    49 Wide-patellar Insertion Medial Patellofemoral Ligament Reconstruction with Internal Bracing
    50 Polyethylene Suture Augmentation of the Medial Patellofemoral Ligament in Skeletally Immature Patients with Recurrent Patella Dislocation
    51 Arthroscopic Release of the Lateral Retinaculum of the Patella
    52 Tibial Tubercle Transfer: Indications and Modified Fulkerson Osteotomy
    53 Surgical treatment of Habitual patellar dislocation with patella Baja
    54 Derotational Distal Femoral Osteotomy For Recurrent Patellar Dislocation
    55 Biplanar Knee Derotation Osteotomy in the Treatment of Patella Instability
    56 Rebalance of the Quadriceps Femoris
    57 Arthroscopic Patellofemoral Arthroplasty for Isolated Patellofemoral Osteoarthritis
    Section 6 Knee Osteoarthritis and Stiffness
    58 Arthroscopic Arthroplasty for Knee Osteoarthritis
    59 Anterior Proximal-to-Posterior Distal Oblique Proximal Tibial Osteotomy
    60 Basic Concepts in the Treatment of Knee Stiffness
    61 Arthroscopic Release of Severe Flexion- and Extension-impeding Knee Stiffness with Inaccessible Joint
    62 Zhao Mini-invasive Quadriceps Plasty.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Chelvin C. A. Sng, Keith Barton, editors.
    Summary: The book is provided open access under a CC BY 4.0 license. This book covers all aspects of minimally invasive glaucoma surgery (MIGS) and provides detailed information on each MIGS device, including its mechanism of action; patient selection; implantation techniques; post-operative management; and a review of the existing literature. Step-by-step descriptions are provided for the surgical technique used in implanting each MIGS device, accompanied by clear photographs of each surgical stage. Other areas covered include intra-operative gonioscopy (with tips on optimising the view of the anterior chamber angle) and the management of the intra-operative and post-operative complications. Essential information on the anatomy and physiology of the different aqueous outflow pathways is also included. A separate chapter addresses the introduction of MIGS globally, including the consideration of different reimbursement environments and the different types of glaucoma, e.g. angle closure glaucoma. This book will assist both glaucoma surgeons and general ophthalmologists in overcoming the learning curve involved in performed MIGS, by providing valuable and practical clinical pearls.

    Contents:
    Overview of micro-invasive glaucoma surgery
    Anatomy of aqueous outflow drainage pathways
    MIGS: iStent Trabecular Microbypass Stent and iStent Inject
    MIGS: Ab Interno Trabeculotomy (Trabectome)
    MIGS: Hydrus
    MIGS: XEN Implant
    MIGS: Microshunt
    MIGS: Cypass and iStent Supra
    MIGS: new modalities of cycloablation and high-intensity focused ultrasound
    Controversies in the use of MIGS
    Globalization of MIGS.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] Brian A. Francis, Steven R. Sarkisian, Jr., James C. Tan.
    Contents:
    I: Eye anatomy and physiology
    IA Trabecular outflow
    IB Uveoscleral outflow
    IC Aqueous production
    ID Subconjunctival filtration
    II: Clinical procedures
    IIA Trabecular outflow procedures
    IIB Uveoscleral outflow procedures
    IIC Aqueous humor reduction procedure
    IID Transconjunctival filtration procedures.
  • Digital
    Geraldo Gastal Gomes-da-Silveira, Gustavo Py Gomes da Silveira, Suzana Arenhart Pessini, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Madhu S. Agrawal, Dilip K. Mishra, Bhaskar Somani, editors.
    Summary: Urolithiasis is a common and ever-increasing problem all over the world. During the last few decades, percutaneous nephrolithotomy (PCNL) has become the preferred treatment method for moderate and large volume upper tract urinary calculi. In recent years, there have been groundbreaking advances in the field of percutaneous renal surgery in the form of minimally invasive percutaneous nephrolithotomy. Various techniques have been described over the years in the area, which have improved the results of percutaneous nephrolithotomy surgery while reducing the complication rate and morbidity. This book provides a broad, state-of-the-art review in the field of minimally-invasive percutaneous nephrolithotomy. It serves as a valuable resource for Urologists, endourology fellows, and researchers interested in mini-percutaneous nephrolithotomy. The book reviews the latest data about percutaneous management of Urolithiasis from the world over, various classification systems for mini-percutaneous nephrolithotomy, armamentarium, different techniques, and multiple advances, plus the results including complications. This book serves as a valuable resource for urologists dealing with and interested in learning the newer advances in percutaneous renal surgery. It delivers a comprehensive summary of the current status of minimally-invasive percutaneous nephrolithotomy in the management of Urolithiasis. All the chapters have been written by experts in minimally invasive percutaneous nephrolithotomy and present the most recent scientific data. .

    Contents:
    Surgical anatomy of Kidney with respect to (mini-) PCNL
    History, Evolution & Classification of minimally-invasive PCNL
    Diagnostic Imaging for mini-PCNL
    ALARA: How to reduce radiation exposure
    Instrumentation for Mini-PCNL (Access sheaths, Endoscopes and Accessories)
    Fragmentation devices: Lithotripters, Lasers and other advances
    Anesthesia in Mini PCNL
    Positioning for MIP (Prone and Supine)Fluoroscopic-guided access
    Ultrasonography-guided access
    Newer advances in access (including Endoscopic-guided access)
    Access in Supine position
    Simulation based training for Access Intarenal pressure, fluid management & principle of 'whirlpool effect' in Mini-PCNL
    Tract dilation, Nephroscopy, Stone fragmentation and retrieval
    Exit strategy: Large tube, Small tube, Tubeless or Totally Tubeless?
    Ultra Mini PCNL
    Micro PCNL
    Super Perc
    Super Mini Perc
    Flexible Mini Nephroscopy
    Endoscopic Combined Intra-Renal Surgery (ECIRS)
    Failed access and Secondary punctures
    Simultaneous Bilateral Mini PCNL
    Special situations: Stone with PUJO, Calyceal diverticulum
    Obese Patients and spinal deformities, Ectopic & Pelvic kidneys
    Horseshoe kidneys, Polycystic kidney, Post-transplant kidneysPediatric PCNL
    Outcomes of Mini-PCNL
    Complications in Mini PCNL.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Stephen K. Harrel, Thomas G. Wilson, Jr.
    Contents:
    Overview of minimally invasive therapy / Stephen K. Harrel and Thomas G. Wilson, Jr.
    Visualization for minimally invasive periodontal therapy : an overview / Stephen K. Harrel
    Ultrasonic endoscopic periodontal debridement / John Y. Kwan and Suzanne Newkirk
    Endoscope use in daily hygiene practice / Kara Webb and Angela Anderson
    The use of the dental endoscope and videoscope for diagnosis and treatment of peri-implant diseases / Thomas G. Wilson, Jr.
    Development of minimally invasive periodontal surgical techniques / Stephen K. Harrel
    The MIS and V-MIS surgical procedure / Stephen K. Harrel
    Minimally invasive surgical technique (MIST) and modified-MIST (M-MIST) in periodontal regeneration / Dott Pierpaolo (Sandro) Cortellini
    MI soft tissue grafting / Edward P. Allen and Lewis C. Cummings
    Future potential for minimally invasive periodontal therapy / Stephen K. Harrel and Thomas G. Wilson, Jr.
    Digital Access Wiley 2015
  • Digital
    Michael Wang, Yi Lu, Praveen Mummaneni, D. Greg Anderson, editors.
    Summary: Contemporary spinal surgeons, whether orthopedic or neurosurgeons, are increasingly recognizing minimally invasive spine surgery (MISS) as a valuable option for managing advanced degenerative diseases. MISS techniques minimize blood loss and surgical site pain, while speeding recovery. Thus, the combination of MISS with adult spinal deformity was a natural choice. Currently, the techniques, technologies, and education of surgeons have finally reached a point where MISS deformity surgeries are becoming commonplace. Nevertheless, the field is young enough (and still evolving) that no comprehensive texts have addressed the unique challenges it poses for surgeons. This book fills that gap.

    Contents:
    Deformity Surgery Principles: The epidemiology of adult spinal deformityand the aging population
    Classification scheme for scoliosis
    Indications for surgery
    Sagittal balance
    Lumbopelvic parameters
    Importance of the fractional curve
    Importance of the fractional curve
    Radiation safety
    Impact of MIS surgery on costs
    Percutaneous Segmental Fixation: Fluoroscopic techniques
    Image guidance
    Nuances of thoracolumbar screw placement
    Rod contouring, passage, and connection
    Percutaneous pelvic screw fixation.-Managing osteoporotic bone.-Use of cement in MIS deformity surgery
    Posterior Approaches:Interbody cage options
    Multi-level TLIF for spinal deformity
    Expandable cages for thoracic spinal deformity
    Expandable cages for lumbar spinal deformity
    Lumbar endoscopic fusion
    Osteotomy techniques
    Lateral Approaches: Thoracoscopic approaches
    Role of neuromonitoring
    Single incision approach to the lumbar spine
    Dual incision approach to the lumbar spine
    Which side to approach from?- Stand-alone lateral surgery for deformity
    Thoracic interbody surgery.-Complications of the lateral approach
    Dealing with the Lumbo-Pelvic Junction: Mini-open ALIF for fusing the lumbosacral junction
    Trans-sacral interbody fusion as an adjunct to anchoring constructs at the lumbosacral junction
    Minimally invasive sacroiliac joint fusion
    Achieving Intersegmental Arthodesis: Bone graft extenders.-Minimally invasive Wiltse approach posterolateral fusion
    Facet joint fusion
    Future Directions.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Sang-Heon Lee, editor.
    Summary: This book is an up-to-date guide to the techniques and devices that may be used when performing minimally invasive spine interventions. The indications for such procedures, which offer various advantages over open surgery, continue to expand, and the aim of the book is to equip spine interventionists with the knowledge required in order to achieve optimal clinical outcomes consistently. After discussion of all aspects of patient preparation, conventional minimally invasive procedures for disorders of the cervical, thoracic, lumbar, and sacral spine are thoroughly reviewed. Attention then turns to more advanced techniques and devices, including percutaneous epidural neurolysis, foraminoplasty, the LDISQ device for disc decompression, transforaminal epiduroscopic laser annuloplasty (TELA), trans-sacral endoscopic laser decompression (SELD), percutaneous endoscopic lumbar discectomy (PELD), and minimally invasive lumbar decompression (MILD). In addition to full description and illustration of treatment methods, guidance is provided on indications, contraindications, potential complications, and postoperative care.

    Contents:
    Part 1.Histories & Concepts
    Part 2. Preparation
    2.1. Procedure room setting
    2.2. Sedation & IV lines
    2.3. Evaluation & Records
    2.4. Precaution about comorbidity status
    2.5. anticoagulants
    2.6. Selection for injectates
    Part 3. Conventional techniques
    3.1. Cervical procedures
    3.1.1. AA joint
    3.1.2. Z-joint
    3.1.3. MBB
    3.1.4. interlaminar epidural injection
    3.1.5. transforaminal injection
    3.1.6. intradiscal approach
    3.2. Thoracic procedures
    3.2.1. Z-joint
    3.2.2. MBB
    3.2.3. interlaminar epidural injection
    3.2.4. transforaminal injection
    3.2.5. inradiscal approach
    3.3. lumbar procedure
    3.2.1. Z-joint
    3.2.2. MBB
    3.2.3. interlaminar epidural injection
    3.2.4. transforaminal injection
    3.2.5. inradiscal approach
    3.4. Sacral procedures
    3.4.1. SI joint
    3.4.2. caudal approach
    3.4.3. ganglion impar
    Part 4. Advanced techniques (devices & procedures)
    4.1. Percutaneous epidural neurolysis
    4.2. Manual Foraminoplasty
    4.3. Automated Forminoplasty
    4.4. LDISQ
    4.5 TELA
    4.6. PELD & SELD
    4.7. MILD
    Part 5. Conclusions.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Luis Manuel Tumialán ; illustrator, Joshua Lai.
    Summary: "The purpose of this work is to be a readable cohesive single-authored introductory text that discusses the principles of minimally invasive spine surgery and then explains the technique procedure by procedure. It is the goal for the reader to experience each chapter as if they are in the operating room with the author. The hope is that the words from the book become the voice inside the resident's head as they see, learn and eventually perform the procedure. This work is written as if the author were actually teaching the resident in a rotation. He begins discussing the philosophical approach to minimally invasive spinal surgery as compared to open procedures and the mindset that one should apply. He then walks the reader through the basic procedures, such as a microdiscectomies and laminectomies. Principles introduced in early chapters are reinforced in the latter chapters; in this manner, the earlier chapters become the building blocks for the latter chapters. This is analogous to resident education, where one would teach a resident a minimally invasive microdiscectomy before going into a lumbar fusion. Each chapter has narrated video for review"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    A Minimally Invasive Perspective : The Conversion
    The Minimally Invasive Microdiscectomy
    Minimally Invasive Lumbar Laminectomy
    Minimally Invasive Transforaminal Lumbar Interbody Fusion
    Minimally Invasive Far Lateral Microdiscectomy
    Transpsoas Lumbar Interbody Fusion
    Minimally Invasive Posterior Cervical Foraminotomy
    Minimally Invasive Posterior Cervical Laminectomy
    Anterior Cervical Discectomy with Arthroplasty or Fusion
    Minimally Invasive Decompressions for Metastatic Spinal Disease
    Minimally Invasive Resection of Intradural Extramedullary Lesions within the thoracic Spine
    Radiation and Minimally Invasive Spine Surgery
    Minimizing Ionizing Radiation in Minimally Invasive Spine Surgery.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
    Thieme-Connect
  • Digital
    Frank M. Phillips, Isador H. Lieberman, David W. Polly, Jr., editors.
    Summary: Over the past decade, minimally invasive techniques have developed rapidly and are widely applied in the management of spine disorders. With the development of enabling technologies, including specifically designed spinal retractor systems, intra-operative imaging and navigation technologies, and real-time neural monitoring, minimally invasive spine surgery (MISS) techniques are safe, effective and reproducible. Indeed, studies have confirmed the clinical and economic advantages of these procedures. Minimally Invasive Spine Surgery includes detailed discussions of enabling technologies, surgical techniques (including posterior decompression and fusion), approaches to specific diseases and conditions, as well as strategies to manage the unique risks and complications of MISS. Generously illustrated, this will be an essential reference for orthopedic surgeons, neurosurgeons and all health care professionals who treat the spine.

    Contents:
    History and Evolution of Minimally Invasive Spine Surgery
    Philosophy and Biology of Minimally Invasive Spine Surgery
    Economics of Minimally Invasive Spine Surgery
    Microscopes and Endoscopes
    Intraoperative Neurophysiology Monitoring
    Image Guidance
    Robotic-Assisted Spine Surgery
    Fusion Biologics
    Lasers
    Posterior Cervical Decompression
    Thoracic Decompression
    Lumbar Decompression Using a Tubular Retractor System
    Minimally Invasive Posterior Cervical Fusion
    Percutaneous Pedicle Screws
    Minimally Invasive Facet Screw Fixation
    Minimally Invasive Transforaminal Lumbar Interbody Fusion
    Mini-Open Anterior Lumbar Interbody Fusion
    Minimally Disruptive Lateral Transpsoas Approach for Thoracolumbar Anterior Interbody Fusion
    Presacral Approaches for Minimally Invasive Spinal Fusion
    Mini-open Lateral Thoracic Fusion
    Thoracoscopic Fusion
    The Painful Sacroiliac Iliac Joint
    Cervical Herniated Nucleus Pulposus and Stenosis
    Thoracic Herniated Nucleus Pulposus
    Lumbar Herniated Nucleus Pulposus
    Lumbar Spinal Stenosis
    Minimally Invasive Spine Surgery in Lumbar Spondylolisthesis
    Adolescent Scoliosis
    Adult Scoliosis
    Anterior Column Realignment (ACR): Minimally Invasive Surgery for the Treatment of Adult Sagittal Plane Deformity
    Thoracolumbar Spine Trauma
    Minimally Invasive Surgery for Spinal Tumors
    Pathologic Fractures
    Minimally Invasive Spine Surgery in the Elderly
    Minimally Invasive Applications of Motion
    Choice of Minimally invasive Approaches: A Review of Unique Risks and Complications
    Minimally Invasive Spine Surgery Complications with Implant Placement and Fixation
    Neural and Dural Injury
    Pseudarthrosis.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Frank M. Phillips, Isador H. Lieberman, David W. Polly Jr., Michael Y. Wang, editors.
    Summary: The use of minimally invasive spine surgery (MISS) has grown rapidly over the last decade and remains the fastest growing area in spine surgery. Now in a revised and expanded second edition including 19 new chapters, this comprehensive textbook provides an updated presentation of the field of MISS, highlighting surgical techniques and clinical outcomes as well as providing a unique focus on how these techniques are applied for specific spinal conditions. Minimally Invasive Spine Surgery, Second Edition includes detailed discussions of enabling technologies, surgical techniques, approaches to specific diseases and conditions, a new section on out-patient/ambulatory spine surgery, and strategies to manage the unique risks and complications associated with MISS. Each chapter, whether revised or new, is formatted in a consistent manner, including bulleted key learning points as well as review questions, pearls and pitfalls, and generous illustrations and intra-operative photographs. Written and edited by thought leaders in the field, this user-friendly textbook will be an essential resource for orthopedic and neurosurgery trainees, as well as a valuable reference and review for spine surgeons and health care professionals who treat the spine.

    Contents:
    Part I: Introduction to minimally invasive spine surgery: 1. History and evolution of minimally invasive spine surgery / R. Nick Hernandez, Jonathan Nakhla, Rodrigo Navarro-Ramirez, and Roger Härtl
    2. Philosophy and biology of minimally invasive spine surgery / Pawel Glowka, Choll W. Kim, and Kris Siemionow
    3. Economics of minimally invasive spine surgery / Robert A. Ravinsky and Y. Raja Rampersaud
    4. Learning curve for minimally invasive spine surgery / Victor P. Lo and Neel Anand
    5. The role of MI spine surgery in global health : a development critique / Carlyn R. Rodgers and W. B. Rodgers. Part II: Enabling technologies for minimally invasive spine surgery: 6. Microscopes and endoscopes / Harel Deutsch
    7. Intraoperative neurophysiology monitoring / Mihir Gupta, Sandra E. Taylor, Richard A. O'Brien, William R. Taylor, and Laura Hein
    8. Image guidance in minimally invasive spine surgery / Ryan B. Kochanski, Hussein Alahmadi, and John E. O'Toole
    9. Robotic-assisted spine surgery / Anthony E. Bozzio, Xiaobang Hu, and Isador H. Lieberman
    10. Fusion biologics and adjuvants in minimally invasive spine surgery / Gurmit Singh and Wellington K. Hsu
    11. Use of stem cells in spinal treatments / S. Mohammed Karim, Shuanhu Zhou, and James D. Kang
    12. Lasers / Christopher A. Yeung and Anthony T. Yeung
    13. Radiation exposure and avoidance in minimally invasive spine surgery / Bryan S. Lee, Dominic W. Pelle, Nicholas R. Arnold, and Thomas E. Mroz. Part III: Surgical techniques : minimally invasive decompression: 14. Posterior cervical decompression / Neil M. Badlani and Frank M. Phillips
    15. Thoracic decompression / Mena G. Kerolus, Mazda K. Turel, Albert P. Wong, Zachary A. Smith, and Richard G. Fessler
    16. Lumbar decompression using a tubular retractor system / Mark A. Shapses, Arjun Balakumar, and D. Greg Anderson
    17. Endoscopic decompression / James J. Yue
    18. Interspinous and interlaminar devices for decompression / Saqib Hassan and Hyun Bae
    19. Minimally invasive posterior cervical fixation / Larry T. Khoo, Zachary A. Smith, and Roya Gheissari
    20. Percutaneous pedicle screws / Jonathan N. Sembrano, Sharon C. Yson, and David W. Polly Jr.
    21. Minimally invasive facet screw fixation / Anthony E. Bozzio, Xiaobang Hu, and Isador H. Lieberman
    22. Minimally invasive transforaminal lumbar interbody fusion / Ankur S. Narain, Fady Y. Hijji, Miguel A. Pelton, Sreeharsa V. Nandyala, Alejandro Marquez-Lara, and Kern Singh
    23. Minimally invasive midline pars-cortical screw techniques / Daniel L. Cavanaugh, Kunwar (Kevin) S. Khalsa, Nitin Khanna, and Gurvinder S. Deol
    24. Minimally invasive spinous process fixation and fusion / Jonathan N. Sellin, G. Damian Brusko, and Michael Y. Wang
    25. Mini-open anterior lumbar interbody fusion / Amir M. Abtahi, Douglas G. Orndorff, Jocelyn M. Zemach, and Jim A. Youssef
    26. Minimally disruptive lateral transpsoas approach for thoracolumbar anterior interbody fusion / Dorcas Chomba, W. C. Rodgers III, and W. B. Rodgers
    27. Anterior column reconstruction for sagittal plane deformity correction / Gurpreet S. Gandhoke, Zachary J. Tempel, and Adam S. Kanter
    28. Thoracoscopic fusion / Rodrigo Navarro-Ramirez, Christoph Wipplinger, Sertac Kirnaz, Eliana Kim, and Roger Härtl 29. Pre-psoas approaches for thoracolumbar interbody fusion / James D. Lin, Jamal N. Shillingford, Joseph M. Lombardi, Richard W. Schutzer, and Ronald A. Lehman Jr.
    30. Endoscopic spinal fusion / Jason Ilias Liounakos, Gregory Basil, Karthik Madhavan, and Michael Y. Wang
    31. Navigated spinal fusion / Ana Luís, Rodrigo Navarro-Ramirez, Sertac Kirnaz, Jonathan Nakhla, and Roger Härtl
    32. Cervical herniated nucleus pulposus and stenosis / Pablo R. Pazmiño and Carl Lauryssen
    33. Thoracic herniated nucleus pulposus / Krystin A. Hidden, Safdar N. Khan, and Elizabeth M. Yu
    34. Lumbar herniated nucleus pulposus / Philip K. Louie and Gregory D. Lopez
    35. Lumbar spinal stenosis / Kenneth C. Nwosu, Safdar N. Khan, and Thomas D. Cha
    36. Lumbar spondylolisthesis / Timothy Y. Wang, Vikram Mehta, John Berry-Candelario, Isaac O. Karikari, and Robert E. Isaacs
    37. Adolescent scoliosis / Daniel J. Miller, Todd J. Blumberg, Susan E. Nelson, Per D. Trobisch, and Patrick J. Cahill
    38. Adult scoliosis / Teja Karukonda, Steven M. Presciutti, Isaac L. Moss, and Frank M. Phillips
    39. Anterior column realignment (ACR) : minimally invasive surgery for the treatment of adult sagittal plane deformity / Gregory M. Mundis Jr., Pooria Hosseini, Amrit Khalsa, and Behrooz A. Akbarnia
    40. Thoracolumbar spine trauma / Kelley E. Banagan, Daniel L. Cavanaugh, Ian Bussey, Alysa Nash, Jael E. Camacho-Matos, M. Farooq Usmani, and Steven C. Ludwig
    41. Minimally invasive surgery for spinal tumors / Zach Pennington, Camilo A. Molina, and Daniel M. Sciubba
    42. Pathologic fractures / Alexandra Carrer, William W. Schairer, Dean Chou, Murat Pekmezci, Vedat Deviren, and Sigurd H. Berven 43. How and when to incorporate minimally invasive surgery for treatment of deformity : decision-making / Andrew C. Vivas, Jason M. Paluzzi, and Juan S. Uribe
    44. Sacroiliac joint dysfunction / Vinko Zlomislic and Steven R. Garfin
    45. Minimally invasive spine surgery in the elderly / Oliver Tannous and R. Todd Allen . Part IV: Surgical techniques : minimally invasive fusion: 46. Clinical and economic advantages of out-patient spine surgery / Neil M. Badlani, Joel Lehr, and Frank M. Phillips
    47. Clinical outcomes of outpatient spine surgery / Richard N. W. Wohns, Laura A. Miller Dyrda, and Kenneth C. Nwosu
    48. Selection of appropriate patients for outpatient spine surgery / William D. Smith, Karishma Gupta, Maritza Kelesis, and Joseph L. Laratta
    49. Analgesia and anesthesia to enable outpatient spine surgery / Ramesh M. Singa and Asokumar Buvanendran
    50. Postoperative care following outpatient spine surgery / Troy I. Mounts and Gil Tepper
    51. Choice of minimally invasive approaches : a review of unique risks and complications / William P. Mosenthal, Srikanth N. Divi, Jason L. Dickherber, and Michael J. Lee
    52. Minimally invasive spine surgery complications with implant placement and fixation / Joseph S. Butler and Mark F. Kurd
    53. Neural and dural injury in minimally invasive surgery / Clifton W. Hancock, Donna D. Ohnmeiss, and Scott L. Blumenthal
    54. Pseudarthrosis / Philip K. Louie, Bryce A. Basques, Nicollette M. Pepin, and Grant D. Shifflett.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Giorgio Pietramaggiori, Saja Scherer, editors.
    Summary: This book presents the essential steps involved in diagnosing and treating pain due to peripheral nerve injury and compression. In the first chapter, the relevant anatomy and diagnostic tools to identify peripheral-nerve-related issues are described. The main part of the book, however, deals with the surgical techniques to address specific types of peripheral nerve pain, e.g. neuroma, thoracic outlet or migraine. A step-by-step, practical approach is provided, including important aspects to consider both pre- and post-op. The procedures presented are minimally-invasive and maximally effective. Each chapter features detailed surgical illustrations and anatomical images. Chronic pain control is a growing need and minimally invasive yet effective surgical techniques, combining the competences of neurosurgery, plastic surgery, orthopedics, general surgery, pain management and neurology are in high demand. The increasing demand on the part of patients suffering from neuropathic pain is to date not matched by adequate practical training in peripheral nerve surgery to control pain. The authors are experts in this discipline "from head to toe" and present a valuable guide that provides medical students and experienced clinicians alike with useful information for their daily practice.

    Contents:
    Foreword.-Preface
    Anatomy & diagnosis of peripheral nerve injury or compression for the surgeon
    Diagnosis & treatment of painful neuromas - Targeted Muscle Reinnervation
    Diagnosis & Treatment of Neuro-vascular temporal headaches .-Diagnosis & Treatment of Occipital Neuralgia
    Diagnosis & Treatment of pectoralis minor syndrome (neurogenic Thoracic Outlet)
    Diagnosis & Treatment of Groin and Genital Pain
    Diagnosis & Treatment of central neurogenic Wrist Pain
    Nutritional recommendations to address pain: focus on ketogenic / low carbohydrate diet.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Joseph Kim, Julio Garcia-Aguilar, editors.
    Summary: Similar to the 1st edition, the 2nd edition of Minimally Invasive Surgical Techniques for Cancers of the Gastrointestinal Tract provides different approaches for various organs of the gastrointestinal tract. This book provides an updated resource of advanced minimally invasive surgical techniques for patients with GI cancers. It is primarily designed to provide a step-by-step approach of surgical techniques, highlighting key learning points and potential operative pitfalls. The text is largely focused on minimally invasive surgical techniques (laparoscopic and robotic), with new chapters on innovations in gastric cancer surgery including middle gastrectomy, pylorus preserving gastrectomy, and sentinel lymph node dissection. In addition, the text also includes new chapters on single incision surgery for cancers of the GI tract, on advanced instrumentation for trans-anal procedures, and on refined robotic approaches to total mesorectal excision. Chapters are written by experts with extensive experience in new techniques, and are accompanied by companion videos in almost every chapter. The 2nd edition of Minimally Invasive Surgical Techniques for Cancers of the Gastrointestinal Tract proves to be a valuable resource for surgeons at all levels of training that are interested in learning new techniques to improve patient satisfaction and cancer outcomes.

    Contents:
    Robotic Assisted Minimally Invasive Esophagectomy
    Minimally Invasive Ivor Lewis Esophagectomy
    Robotic Three-Field Esophagectomy
    Robotic Segmental Gastrectomy for Large Gastrointestinal Stromal Tumor
    Minimally Invasive Gastric Wedge Resection
    Step by Step Description of Pylorus-Preserving Gastrectomy
    Minimally Invasive Sentinel Lymph Node Biopsy for Gastric Cancer
    Minimlly Invasive Total Gastrectomy
    Minimlly Invasive Gastrectomy
    Minimally Invasive Hyperthermic Intraperitoneal Perfusion for Gastric Cancer
    Eastern Experience of Minimally Invasive Pancreaticoduodenectomy
    Development of the Robotic Approach to Pancreaticoduodenectomy
    Robotic Pancreaticoduodenectomy
    Implementation of the Robotic Technique in Pancreaticoduodenectomy
    Minimally Invasive Small Bowel Resection
    Robotic Small Bowel Resection
    Laparoscopic Right Colectomy
    Robotic Right Colectomy
    Single Incision Right Colectomy
    Laparoscopic Left Colectomy
    Robotic Left Colectomy
    Minimally Invasive Low Anterior Resection
    Robotic Low Anterior Resection with Double Staple Technique
    Laparoscopic Total Abdominal Colectomy
    Robotic Total Abdominal Colectomy: A Step by Step Approach
    Robotic Pouch Creation
    Robotic Abdominoperineal Resection
    Laparoscopic Pelvic Exenteration
    Robotic Pelvic Exenteration
    Laparoscopic Lateral Pelvic Lymph Node Dissection
    Minimally Invasive Lateral Pelvic Lymph Node Dissection
    Transanal Endoscopic Microsurgery
    The Approach to Transanal Total Mesorectal Excision
    Robotic Transanal Minimally Invasive Surgery (TAMIS).
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Ciro Esposito, Ramnath Subramaniam, François Varlet, Lorenzo Masieri, editors.
    Summary: In the last 10 years, the management of paediatric urological pathologies has been radically transformed; over 70% of all cases can now be treated with minimally invasive techniques. This book is unique in its format, because for each pathology it explores all MIS techniques available for its treatment (laparoscopy, retroperitoneoscopy, robotics, prone position, pneumovesicoscopy, endourology, laser, fetoendoscopy, etc.). Each technique is described in a dedicated chapter, which includes a video of the procedure that can be viewed online. Written by internationally renowned paediatric urology experts, the book offers a valuable toolkit for surgeons, paediatricians and urologists.

    Contents:
    Foreword.-Part I - General
    1. Laparoscopic approach in Pediatric Urology
    2. Retropertioneoscopy approach in Pediatric Urology
    3. Prone approach in Pediatric Urology
    4. Robotics in Pediatric Urology
    5. Endoscopic Approach for urinary tract pathologies.-6. Devices in pediatric endourology
    7. Instruments for pediatric MIS urology (laparoscopy, endourology, robotics)
    8. Energy sources in pediatric MIS urology
    9. Endoscopic suturing in pediatric MIS uroligy
    10. Pediatric Anesthesia in MIS Urology
    Part II - Kidney
    11. Endourologic retrograde balloon dilatation of the primary ureteropelvic junction obstruction in children
    12. Robotic Pyeloplasty
    13. Laparoscopic approach for uretero-pyelo-junction-obstruction (UPJO)
    14. Retroperitoneal laparoscopic pyeloplasty in infants and children
    15. Uretero-Pelvic Junction Obstruction (UPJO) treatment using One-Trocar Assisted Pyeloplasty (OTAP)
    16. Laparoscopic management of extrinsic uretero-pelvic junction obstruction (UPJO) by crossing vessels
    17. Minimally invasive redo-pyeloplasty.-18. Nephrectomy: robotic approach.-19. Laparoscopic Nephrectomy in pediatric patients
    20. Retroperitoneal laparoscopic nephrectomy
    21. Posterior prone retroperitoneoscopic nephrectomy
    22. Robot-assisted partial nephrectomy in children.-23. Laparoscopic partial nephrectomy in pediatric patients.-24. Partial nephrectomy using retroperitoneoscopy
    25. Retroperitoneoscopic Prone Partial Nephrectomies
    26. The management of kidney stones using RIRS
    27. Management of kidney stones using perc/microperc as minimally invasive percutaneous procedures
    28. Place of laparoscopic and robotic surgery in the management of kidney urolithiasis
    29. Mis management of symptomatic simple renal cysts
    30. Laparoscopic radical nephrectomy for wilms tumors
    31. Robotic approach for kidney tumors in pediatric patients
    32. MIS management of Adrenal Tumors in pediatric patients.-Part III - Ureter
    33. Endoscopic treatment of primary obstructive megaureter
    34. Laparoscopic management of the primary obstructive megaureter
    35. Robot-assisted Laparoscopic Tapered Ureteral Reimplantation (RAL-TUR) for obstructed megaureter in children: Step-by-Step Technique
    36. Retrocaval ureter in pediatric patients
    37. Minimally invasive treatment of ureteric stones in children
    38. Minimally invasive treatment of rare ureteral pathologies in pediatric patients
    Part IV - Bladder
    39. Minimally Invasive Techniques in Pediatric Urology
    40. Vesico-ureteric reflux (VUR) laparoscopic lich gregoir repair
    41. Technique of pneumovesicoscopy
    42. Robot-assisted extravesical ureteral reimplantation (revur) for vesico-ureteral reflux in children
    43. Minimally invasive treatment of ureterocele
    44. Minimally invasive treatment of pediatric bladder tumors.-45. Minimally invasive techniques in Neurogenic bladder
    46. Robotic Mitrofanoff Procedure
    47. Robotic management of bladder stones in children
    48. Robotic bladder neck construction for voiding continence
    Part V - Urethra
    49. Management of posterior urethral valves
    50. Minimally invasive management of urethral stenosis and stricture
    Part VI - Miscellaneous
    51. Pre-natal minimally invasive procedures for fetal lower urinary tract obstruction
    52. Robot-assisted laparoscopy in differences of sexual development - Resection of embryological remnants.-53. Laparoscopic treatment of prostatic utricle in children
    54. Laparoscopic treatment of seminal vesicle cyst
    55. Laparoscopic lymphatic sparing palomo varicocelectomy in children using indocyanine green (ICG) fluorescence lymphography
    56. MIS Management of impalpable testis
    57. Application of 3D reconstruction in paediatric urology
    58. Evidence Based Medicine in minimally invasive pediatric urology.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Celestino Pio Lombardi, Rocco Bellantone, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Ultrasound features of thyroid, parathyroid, neck lymph nodes: normal and pathologic pattern
    2. Fine needle aspiration biopsy
    3. Cytology of thyroid lesions
    4. Molecular markers in thyroid fine-needle aspiration biopsises
    5. Percutaneous ethanol injection for the management of thyroid lesions
    6. Percutaneous laser thermal ablation (LAT): techniques, indications, experience, and complications
    7. Percutaneous radiofrequency ablation
    8. High-intensity focused ultrasound ablation (Hi-FU) in endocrine neck diseases
    9. Mini-invasive techniques for the treatment of thyroid nodules: critical issues
    10. Minimally invasive video-assisted thyroidectomy (MIVAT)
    11. Locoregional anesthesia in thyroid and parathyroid surgery
    12. Robotic thyroidectomy
    13. Minimally invasive video-assisted parathyroidectomy (MIVAP)
    14. Endoscopic parathyroidectomy
    15. Minimally invasive video-assisted neck dissection
    16. Minimally invasive surgical techniques: critical appraisal and future perspectives
    17. Superior laryngeal nerve monitoring
    18. Recurrent laryngeal nerve monitoring
    19. Hemostatic devices
    20. Topical hemostatic agents
    21. Critical appraisal
    22. How to avoid and manage post-operative complications
    23. Perioperative medical treatment
    24. Patient counselling and patients' involvement in health policy.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Gopal H. Badlani, editor.
    Summary: "Minimally Invasive Therapy for Urinary Incontinence and Pelvic Organ Prolapse provides a detailed insight into "when, why, what and how" of various minimally invasive surgical procedures for surgical management of SUI, OAB & POP. The volume provides detailed diagrammatic and pictorial step-by-step descriptions of the techniques and management of complications related to these procedures. This book also presents an up to date, one-stop reference for anything pertaining to MIT of these pelvic disorders. Written by experts in the field, Minimally Invasive Therapy for Urinary Incontinence and Pelvic Organ Prolapse is a comprehensive resource designed for both the urologist and urogynecologist treating patients with urinary disorders and pelvic organ prolapsed, as well as for residents in training."--Publisher's website.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Sang-Ho Lee, Junseok Bae, Sang-Hyeop Jeon, editors.
    Summary: This book describes and illustrates a variety of minimally invasive approaches to the thoracic spine, covering procedures applicable in not only degenerative diseases but also deformities and trauma. Surgery to the thoracic spine is demanding because of the surrounding ribs, lungs, heart, and large blood vessels and the challenges posed by the vulnerable spinal cord within a relatively small spinal canal. Consequently, postsurgical morbidity is often high. In this context, minimally invasive surgery offers significant benefits, but to date, comprehensive coverage in textbooks is lacking owing to the limited experience in the use of minimally invasive surgical techniques. This book will be ideal for all who are searching for clear guidance that is faithful to the established principles of spine surgery and evidence-based medicine. In addition to the comprehensive coverage of procedures appropriate in different pathologies, including thoracic disc herniation, ossification of the posterior longitudinal ligament, ossification of the ligamentum flavum, and stenosis, individual chapters address the transforaminal endoscopic approach, interventional treatment, intraoperative neuromonitoring, and navigation for thoracic spine surgery.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    A. Anatomical consideration of the thoracic spine
    B. Anesthetic consideration of the thoracic spine surgery
    C. Clinical presentation of the thoracic spinal compression
    2. Thoracic disc herniation
    A. Transforaminal endoscopic approach with foraminoplasty
    B. Thoracoscopic approach
    C. Minithoracotomy and discectomy
    D. Minimally invasive Posterior approach
    3. Ossification of the ligamentum flavum
    A. Microscopic decompression
    B. Endoscopic decompression
    4. Ossification of the posterior longitudinal ligament
    A. Mini-Thoracotomy and OPLL resection
    B. Thoracoscopic approach
    C. Oblique paraspinal approach
    5. Trauma
    A. Vertebroplasty and Kyphoplasty
    B. Minimally invasive reconstruction of vertebral body in Kummell's disease
    C. Minithoracotomy and Corpectomy using Expandable cage
    6. Arachnoid cyst
    A. Minimally invasive resection of thoracic arachnoid cyst
    7. Tumor
    A. Minimally invasive resection of IDEM tumor
    B. Stereotactic Radiosurgery of thoracic spine
    8. Deformity on the thoracic spine
    A. Adolescent Idiopathic Scoliosis
    B. Posttraumatic deformity
    C. Proximal Junctional Kyphosis
    9. Interventional treatment
    A. CT and ultrasound guided block
    B. Epidural Neuroplasty
    10. Intraoperative Neuromonitoring
    11. Robotic surgery in thoracic spine
    12. Navigation for thoracic spine surgery. .
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] Philip Buttaravoli, Stephen M. Leffler, R. Ramsey Herrington.
    Summary: "For clinicians who see patients suffering from non-life-threatening crises, Minor Emergencies, 4th Edition, provides concise, expert guidance on what to do and what not to do for nearly 200 common presentations, including both the correct procedural and pharmaceutical treatments. Completely updated with the latest equipment, devices, dosages, and techniques, this award-winning reference delivers fast, efficient guidance just when you need it. Instructional videos clearly demonstrate pearls and pitfalls of a wide variety of procedures"--Publisher's description.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2022
  • Digital
    Takeharu Nagai, Yuichi Togashi, editors.
    Summary: This book provides an accessible introduction to an exciting new field of life science in which the focus is on small numbers of molecules and minorities within cell populations and their significance for the understanding of biological phenomena. Numbers, or quantitative data, are attracting more attention in cell biology following, for example, determination of the absolute copy number of each protein species in each bacterial cell and the recognition of leader cells that drive collective cell migration. Within this context, the authors present recent advances in experimental techniques, biological findings, and theories. A variety of cutting-edge topics and issues are addressed, with explanation of the ways in which recent developments in the field cast light on seemingly straightforward but difficult-to-answer questions. Readers will learn that we are on the verge of a paradigm shift as the importance of cooperation among groups of molecules in live cells is acknowledged. The book is designed to be enjoyable to read and easy to understand. It will be of interest for a wide range of readers, including young researchers and undergraduate/high school students.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Contributors; A Look at Functions That Emerge from Small Numbers; Neuronal Synaptic Connections Organized by Small Numbers of Molecules; Cajal Meets a Present-Day Neuroscientist (The Following Is Fiction); Observation of Synapses with Electron Microscopy and Proof of the Neuron Theory; Proteins in the Synapse; Only a Small Number of Molecules Are Localized in the Synapse; References; Invasions of Small Numbers: How Many Virus Particles Does It Take to Infect Someone with the Flu?; Reference; Rebellion by the Minority: Prophecies by Molecules on Paper and Computers A Simple QuestionDo Minorities Change Big Groups?; Small Numbers of Molecules, Cells, Individuals ... ; References; The Personality of Small Numbers: Do Molecules Have Personality?; What Is Personality?; Do Molecules Have Personalities?; Molecular Personalities Inside Cells; References; Distinguishing and Searching for Minority Cells: Small in Number, But Large in Effect; References; Digital Bioanalysis; What Is Digitalization?; Smaller Is Better; What Is That Good for?; How Small Numbers of Long Genomic DNA Are Stored in Cells; References Formation by Small Numbers: Minority Biological Scenarios in Correlations Among the Structure, Dynamics, and Function of Nuclear ChromosomesScenarios of the Structural Formation of Nuclear Chromosomes; The World Where Molecular Minority Shows Itself; Recognition of Homologous Nuclear Chromosomes; Searching for the Wellspring; References; Dividing Small Numbers: The Discreteness and Distribution of Molecules in the Cell Membrane; The Physical Properties of Cells; Artificial Cells (Cell Models); How Osmotic Pressure Is Generated; The Shapes of Macromolecules; Deformation of the Membrane Single Molecularity of GenomeReferences; Getting to Know the Functions of Small Numbers; How Do Muscles Contract?; Is There a Mechanism That Makes Muscles Contract Efficiently?; Working in Small Numbers: The Behaviors That Emerge When Small Numbers of Bionanomachines Team Up; The World in Which Bionanomachines Work: Is It Crowded?; Do Bionanomachines Have a Brain?; Behaviors Born Out of Teamwork; References; Thinking Small Numbers: When, Where, and How Many Molecules There Are in the Cell; The Cell: A Multipurpose Factory Facility; Production Strategies in an Industrial Group The Lineup of Products and Numbers of UnitsThe Effects of "Fickleness"; Determining Small Numbers: How the Number of Flagella Is Determined; The Formation of Cellular Apparatuses and the Importance of Their Numbers; Flagella: The Motility Apparatuses of Bacterial Cells and the Control of Their Numbers; Mutants with Abnormal Flagellar Motors; FlhF and FlhG Regulate the Number of Flagella; In Conclusion; References; Controlling Production with Small Numbers: Precision Apparatuses Made of Proteins at Work in Bacteria; Bacterial Flagella; The Flagellum Grows at the Tip
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access Google Books 1993-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RA11.D1 M663
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Adrian Pei.
    Summary: If you're the only person from your ethnic background in your organization or team, you probably know what it's like to be misunderstood or marginalized. Organizational consultant Adrian Pei describes key challenges ethnic minorities face in majority-culture organizations, unpacking the historical forces at play and what both minority and majority cultures need to know in order to work together fruitfully.

    Contents:
    Self-doubt : understanding pain
    Pain, power, and the past : three distinctives of the minority experience
    Domestication : understanding power
    Weariness : understanding the past
    Challenges in organizational development : how to diversify your organization
    Seeing pain with eyes of compassion
    Stewarding power with hands of advocacy
    Reframing the past with a heart of wisdom
    The challenge and the opportunity.
    Digital Access EBSCO 2018
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    BT734.2 .P45 2018
    1
  • Print
    Stacey Abrams.
    Summary: "Minority Leader is a guide to harnessing the strengths of being an outsider by Stacey Abrams, slated to become the first black female governor in the U.S. Networking, persistence, and hard work are the crucial ingredients to advancing a career, but for people like Stacey Abrams, and many in the New American Majority, it takes more than that to get ahead. Stacey, who grew up in a working poor family in Gulfport, Mississippi, rose from humble roots to Yale Law School, and through a career in C-suite businesses, to become the first woman to lead either party in the Georgia General Assembly and the first African American to lead in the House of Representatives. In Minority Leader, Stacey combines aspects of memoir with real-world advice for women and people of color, offering hard-won insights for navigating worlds that, until now, were largely the territory of white men alone. Stacey encourages her readers both to leverage otherness to their advantage and to recognize their own underlying feelings of unworthiness and legitimate fears. Sure, networking helps, but so do well-chosen mentors, thoughtful self-advocacy, and, above all, pinpointing one's genuine passions. Stacey applies her lessons to the recent graduate taking her big idea to the startup level, the Latino city councilman eyeing the mayor's office, and the young assistant navigating her way to a higher position. There is precious little such wisdom out there. Stacey is determined to change that."--Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    Dare to want more
    Fear and otherness
    Hacking and owning opportunity
    The myth of mentors
    Money matters
    Prepare to win and embrace the fail
    Making what you have work
    Work-life Jenga
    Taking power.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    E185.93.G4 A27 2018
    1
  • Print
    prepared by the MIRD Committee of the Society of Nuclear Medicine and Molecular Imaging: Rachel M. Bartlett, Wesley E. Bolch, A. Bertrand Brill [and 8 others].
    Print Unavailable: Checked out Recall Item
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RM852 .B37 2022
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Carlo M. Croce, Paul B. Fisher.
    Contents:
    Chapter One. MicroRNAs and cancer: a long story for short RNAs
    Chapter Two. The enigma of miRNA regulation in cancer
    Chapter Three. Animal models to study microRNA function
    Chapter Four. Cancer hallmarks and microRNAs: the therapeutic connection
    Chapter Five. microRNAs in cancer susceptibility
    Chapter Six. Role of the tRNA-derived small RNAs in cancer: new potential biomarkers and target to therapy
    Chapter Seven. MicroRNAs and epigenetics.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Christoph Arenz.
    Contents:
    Part I. Reviews
    Pathway of miRNA maturation / Michael Sand
    MicroRNA maturation and human disease / Marlen Hesse and Christoph Arenz
    Approaches to the modulation of miRNA maturation / Valerie T. Tripp, Jaclyn R. McKenna, and Douglas D. Young
    Part II. Methods
    Expression profiling of components of the miRNA maturation machinery / Michael Sand and Marina Skrygan
    Primary MicroRNA processing assay reconstituted using recombinant Drosha and DGCR8 / Ian Barr and Feng Guo
    In vivo processing assay based on a dual-luciferase reporter system to evaluate DROSHA enzymatic activity / Vera Bilan, Danilo Allegra, Florian Kuchenbauer, and Daniel Mertens
    Assaying dicer-mediated miRNA maturation by means of fluorescent substrates / Marlen Hesse, Brian P. Davies, and Christoph Arenz
    Fluorescence correlation spectroscopy-based enzyme assay for human dicer / Eileen Magbanua and Ulrich Hahn
    Detection of microRNA maturation using unmodified pre-microRNA and branched rolling circle amplification / Saskia Neubacher and Christoph Arenz
    Quantitative RT-PCR specific for precursor and mature miRNAs / Hannah Zöllner, Stephan A. Hahn, and Abdelouahid Maghnouj
    Cellular microRNA sensors based on luciferase reporters / Colleen M. Connelly and Alexander Deiters
    Identification of inhibitors of microRNA function from small molecule screens / Colleen M. Connelly and Alexander Deiters
    Inhibition of miRNA maturation by peptide nucleic acids / Concetta Avitabile, Enrica Fabbri, Nicoletta Bianchi, Roberto Gambari, and Alessandra Romanelli
    Molecular methods for validation of the biological activity of peptide nucleic acids targeting microRNAs / Eleonora Brognara, Enrica Fabbri, Nicoletta Bianchi, Alessia Finotti, Roberto Corradini, and Roberto Gambari
    Lentiviral overexpression of miRNAs / Hannah Zöllner, Stephan A. Hahn, and Abdelouahid Maghnouj.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Malik Yousef, Dabburiya Village, Israel, Jens Allmer, Izmir Institute of Technology, Izmir, Turkey.
    Contents:
    Introduction to microRNAs in biological systems / Ayse Elif Erson-Bensan
    The role of microRNAs in biological processes / Kemal Uğur Tüfekci, Ralph Leo Johan Meuwissen, and S̮̜ermin Genç
    The role of microRNAs in human diseases / Kemal Uğur Tüfekci [and three others]
    Introduction to bioinformatics / Tolga Can
    MicroRNA and noncoding RNA-related data sources / Patrizio Arrigo
    High-throughput approaches for MicroRNA expression analysis / Bala Gür Dedeoğlu
    Introduction to machine learning / Yalin Baş̧tanlar and Mustafa Özuysal
    Introduction to statistical methods for microRNA analysis / Gökmen Zararsiz and Erdal Coş̧gun
    Computational and bioinformatics methods for microRNA gene prediction / Jens Allmer
    Machine learning methods for microRNA gene prediction / Müş̧erref Duygu Saçar and Jens Allmer
    Functional, structural, and sequence studies of microRNA / Chanchal K. Mitra and Kalyani Korla
    Computational methods for microRNA target prediction / Hamid Hamzeiy, Jens Allmer, and Malik Yousef
    MicroRNA target and gene validation in viruses and bacteria / Debora Baroni and Patrizio Arrigo
    Gene reporter assay to validate microRNA targets in Drosophila S2 cells / Bünyamin Akgül and Çağdaş̧ Göktaş̧
    Computational prediction of microRNA function and activity / Hasan Oğul
    Analysis of microRNA expression using machine learning / Henry Wirth [and three others]
    MicroRNA expression landscapes in stem cells, tissues, and cancer / Mehmet Volkan Çakir [and three others]
    Master regulators of posttranscriptional gene expression are subject to regulation / Syed Muhammad Hamid and Bünyamin Akgül
    Use of microRNAs in personalized medicine / Çiğir Biray Avci and Yusuf Baran.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    volume editors, Kurt S. Zänker, Srini V. Kaveri.
    Contents:
    Mistletoe through cultural and medical history : the all-healing plant proves to be a cancer-specific remedy / Ramm, H.
    Chemical constituents of viscum album L. : implications for the pharmaceutical preparation of mistletoe / Urech, K.; Baumgartner, S.
    The anti-cancer activity of mistletoe preparations, as related to their polyphenolic profiles / Schramm, H.M.
    From Berlin and Witten to Southampton and Hamburg : 25 years of mistletoe research cooperation / Schumacher, U.; Pfüller, U.
    Mistletoe compounds as anti-cancer drugs : effects and mechanisms in the treatment of glioblastoma / Schötterl, S.; Naumann, U.
    Cancer surgery and supportive mistletoe therapy : from scepticism to randomised clinical trials / Galun, D.; Tröger, W.; Milicevic, M.
    Dissecting the anti-inflammatory effects of viscum album : inhibition of cytokine-induced expression of cyclo-oxygenase-2 and secretion of prostaglandin E2 / Elluru, S.R.; Saha, C.; Hedge, P.; Friboulet, A.; Bayry, J.; Kaveri, S.V.
    Dancing with the Devil : cancer-related fatigue, from inflammation to treatment options / Zänker, K.S.
    Digital Access Karger 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Liza A. Pon, Eric A. Schon.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2020
  • Digital
    Andrea Urbani, Mohan Babu, editors.
    Contents:
    The chapters will be divided into three sections: (I) Mitochondria in human disease (II) Omics and systems biology approaches to address mitochondrial disorders (III) Discovery pertaining to mitochondrial disorders and how the mitochondrial human proteome initiative has been working towards addressing these goals Chapters that have been confirmed to date: 1. Roberto Scatena, Mitochondria metabolism in Cancer (Institute of Biochemistry and Clinical Biochemistry
    Catholic University, Rome, Italy) 2. Young-Ki Paik, Mitochondria Proteins in Hepatocarcinoma progression (Yonsei University, Seoul, Department of Biochemistry) 3. Maurizio Ronci; Cancer stem cells metabolic shunt and mitochondria proteomics (Department of Medical, Oral and Biotechnological Sciences, University G. d'Annunzio of Chieti-Pescara, Chieti, Italy) 4. Mauro Fasano, Mitochondria proteins in the development of Parkinson Disease (Biomedical Research Division, Department of Theoretical and Applied Sciences, University of Insubria, Busto Arsizio, Italy) 5. Fernando Corrales, Mitochondria proteomics in the development of NASH and NAFLD (Faculty of medicine, University of Navarra, 31008 Pamplona, Spain) 6. Albert Sickmann, Mitochondria proteomics: regulation and dynamics of importing (Bioanalytics department, Scientific director, ISAS, Dortmund) 7. Wu Y, Aerbesold R ; Mitochondria functional dynamics network (Professor, Deputy Head of Department of Biology HPT E78, Institute of Molecular Systems Biology, Zurich, Switzerland) 8. Nenad Ban , Structural Proteomics of Mitochondria protein complexes (Department of Biology, Institute of Molecular Biology and Biophysics, Otto-Stern-Weg 5, ETH Zurich, CH-8093 Zurich, Switzerland. 9. Alessio Soggiu; Mitochondria proteomics on the verge of host-pathogen interaction (Dipartimento di Scienze Veterinarie e Sanità Pubblica (DIVET), Università degli Studi di Milano, Milano, Italy) 10. Federica Ciregia; Mitochondria protein acetylation and phenotypic control (Department of Pharmacy, University of Pisa, Pisa, Italy) 11. Jodi Nunnari; Mitochondrial proteomics (UC Davis, Department of Cellular and Molecular Biology, University of California Davis, One Shields Avenue, United States) 12. Angus McQuibban: Mitochondrial ER contact sites (University of Toronto, Department of Biochemistry, Toronto, Canada).
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Paulo J. Oliveira, editor.
    Summary: This book addresses the therapeutic strategies to target mitochondrial metabolism in diseases where the function of that organelle is compromised, and it discusses the effective strategies used to create mitochondrial-targeted agents that can become commercially available drug delivery platforms. The consistent growth of research focused in understanding the multifaceted role of mitochondria in cellular metabolism, controlling pathways related with cell death, and ionic/redox regulation has extended the research of mitochondrial chemical-biological interactions to include various pharmacological and toxicological applications. Not only does the book extensively cover basic mitochondrial physiology, but it also links the molecular interactions within these pathways to a variety of diseases. It is one of the first books to combine state-of-the-art reviews regarding basic mitochondrial biology, the role of mitochondrial alterations in different diseases, and the importance of that organelle as a target for pharmacological and non-pharmacological interventions to improve human health. The different chapters highlight the chemical-biological linkages of the mitochondria in context with drug development and clinical applications.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Contents; Part I: Mitochondrial Biology; Introduction: Mitochondria, the Cell Furnaces; References; Mitochondria: Where Are They Coming From?; 1 Introduction; 2 Problems and Controversies Regarding the Precise Bacterial Origin of Mitochondria; 3 Integrated Approaches to Identify Possible Relatives of Proto-mitochondria; 4 Conclusion; References; Mitochondrial Dynamics: A Journey from Mitochondrial Morphology to Mitochondrial Function and Quality; 1 Mitochondrial Fusion and Fission: Shaping the Mitochondrial Network; 1.1 Mitochondrial Fusion. 1.1.1 Mitochondrial Fusion Proteins1.1.2 Regulation of Mitochondrial Fusion; 1.2 Mitochondrial Fission; 1.2.1 Mitochondrial Fission Proteins; 1.2.2 Regulation of Mitochondrial Fission; 2 Mitochondrial Dynamics Regulates Mitochondrial Function and Quality; 2.1 Regulation of Mitochondrial Function by Mitochondrial Dynamics; 2.2 Regulation of Mitochondrial Quality by Mitochondrial Dynamics; References; Mitochondria and Ageing; 1 The Free Radical Theory of Ageing. The Mitochondrial Free Radical Theory of Ageing as Proposed by Miquel; 2 Mitochondrial Disruption of Cell Signalling in Ageing. 2 Mitochondria Contribute to the Progression of Liver Disease3 Mitochondria Changes in Liver Diseases; 3.1 Non-alcoholic Fatty Liver Disease (NAFLD); 3.2 Alcoholic Liver Disease (ALD); 3.3 Hepatitis C Virus (HCV) Infection; 3.4 Hemochromatosis; 3.5 Wilson's Disease; 3.6 Chronic Cholestatic Disorders; 4 Assessment of Liver Mitochondrial Function In Vivo; 4.1 Respiratory Chain Activity; 4.2 Alpha-Ketoacid Dehydrogenase; 4.3 Octanoic Acid; 4.4 Benzoic Acid; 4.5 Urea Production; 4.6 [31P] Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy; 5 Conclusions; References. 3 Mitochondrial DNA Is More Susceptible to Damage than Nuclear DNA4 Mitochondria Are Damaged Inside Cells; 5 Sex Differences in Free Radical Production and Its Relationship with Longevity; 6 Mitochondrial Diseases; 7 Toxicological Aspects: The Treatment of AIDS with Zidovudine Causes Mitochondrial Pathology that Explains Muscle Damage Associated with AIDS Treatment; 8 Alzheimer's Disease; References; The Mitochondrial Permeability Transition Pore; 1 Mitochondrial Permeability Transition; 2 Mitochondrial Permeability Transition Pore Complex: Molecular Structure; 2.1 Regulatory Components. 3 Pathological Relevance3.1 Ischemia/Reperfusion Injury; 3.2 Cancer; 3.3 Neurodegenerative Diseases; 4 Conclusions; References; Mitochondrial Regulation of Cell Death; 1 Introduction; 2 Mitochondrial Reactive Oxygen Species and Mitochondrial Dysfunction; 3 Mitochondrial Calcium as a Trigger of Cell Death; 4 BCL-2 Family Members; 5 Mitochondrial Intermembrane Space Proteins; 6 Mitophagy; 6.1 Molecular Mechanisms; 6.2 Mitophagy, Cell Death or Cytoprotection; 7 Conclusion and Perspectives; References; Mitochondria in Liver Diseases; 1 Introduction.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Matthew McKenzie
    Contents:
    Part I. Detection of mitochondrial DNA mutations and mitochondrial DNA damage
    Part II. Visualization of mitochondrial DNA and mitochondrial DNA nucleoids
    Part III. Analysis of mitochondrial DNA replication, mitochondrial DNA-encoded protein translation and mitochondrial DNA copy number
    Part IV. Modification of mitochondrial DNA
    Part V. Purification of proteins involved in mitochondrial DNA replication and transcription
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Hongzhi Sun, Xiangdong Wang, editors.
    Contents:
    1. How far can mitochondrial DNA drive the disease?
    2. Mitochondrial DNA in lung cancer
    3. Approach, application, and bioethics of mtDNA sequencing in cancer
    4. Roles of mitochondrial DNA signaling in immune responses
    5. Mitochondrial DNA in telocytes
    6. Roles of mitochondrial DNA in energy metabolism
    7. The role of DNA repair in maintaining mitochondrial DNA stability
    8. Is mitochondrial cell fragility a cell weakness?
    9. Mitochondrial DNA methylation and related disease
    10. Beyond deubiquitylation: USP30-mediated regulation of mitochondrial homeostasis
    11. Metabolic regulation in mitochondria and drug resistance
    12. Mitochondrial lon protease and cancer
    13. Regulatory roles of mitochondrial ribosome in lung diseases and single cell biology
    14. Epithelial mitochondrial dysfunction in lung disease
    15. Significance of mitochondria DNA mutations in diseases.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Gaetano Santulli, editor ; foreword by Wilson S. Colucci.
    Summary: "This text covers the basic principles of mitochondrial dynamics in cardiovascular medicine, with particular emphasis on their functional roles in physiology and disease. The book will include articles pertaining to mitochondrial fitness on a global basis, providing therefore an update on the progress made in several aspects in the field. Thus, it will assist scientists and clinicians alike in furthering basic and translational research. Organized in sections focusing on: basic science, mitochondrial dysfunction in cardiac disorders, in vascular disorders, in metabolic disorders, in kidney disease, therapeutic challenges and options, this essential volume fills imperative gaps in understanding and potentially treating several cardiovascular disorders"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Functional implications of cardiac mitochondria clustering / Felix T. Kurz, Miguel A. Aon, Brian O'Rourke, Antonis A. Armoundas
    Mitochondrial calcium handling in physiology and disease / Veronica Granatiero, Diego De Stefani, Rosario Rizzuto
    The in vivo biology of the mitochondrial calcium uniporter / Julia C. Liu, Randi J. Parks, Jie Liu, Justin Stares, Ilsa I. Rovira, Elizabeth Murphy [and others]
    Mitochondrial bioenergetics and dysfunction in failing heart / Freya L. Sheeran, Salvatore Pepe
    Mitochondrial mutations in cardiac disorders / Sung Ryul Lee, Jin Han
    Mitochondrial function in non-ischemic heart failure / Anisha A. Gupte, Dale J. Hamilton, FACP
    Mitochondria in ischemic heart disease / L. Maximilian Buja
    Mitochondrial bioenergetics during ischemia and reperfusion / Alicia E. Consolini, Mar̕a I. Ragone, Patricia Bonazzola, Germ̀n A. Colareda
    Mechanistic role of mPTP in ischemia-reperfusion injury / Giampaolo Morciano, Massimo Bonora, Gianluca Campo, Giorgio Aquila, Paola Rizzo [and others]
    Functional role of mitochondria in arrhythmogenesis / Jessica Gambardella, Daniela Sorriento, Michele Ciccarelli, Carmine Del Giudice [and others]
    Mitochondria and cardiac hypertrophy / Heberty di Tarso Fernandes Facundo, Robert Eli Brainard [and others]
    Connexin 43 and mitochondria in cardiovascular health and disease / Kerstin Boengler, Rainer Schulz
    Mitochondrial mechanosensor microdomains in cardiovascular disorders / Michele Miragoli, Aderville Cabassi
    Mechanistic role of thioredoxin 2 in heart failure / Chaofei Chen, Haixuan Chen, Huanjiao Jenny Zhou, Weidong Ji, Wang Min
    Mitochondria in structural and functional cardiac remodeling / Natalia Torrealba, Pablo Aranguiz, Camila Alonso, Beverly A. Rothermel [and others]
    Functional role of Nox4 in autophagy / Maurizio Forte, Silvia Palmerio MS, Derek Yee, Giacomo Frati [and others]
    Mitochondrial ubiquitin ligase in cardiovascular disorders / Tao Yu, Yinfeng Zhang, Pei-feng Li
    Nitrite-nitric oxide signaling and cardioprotection / Matthias Totzeck, Ulrike B. Hendgen-Cotta, Tienush Rassaf
    Peripheral blood mitochondrial dna and myocardial function / Tatiana Kuznetsova, Judita Knez
    Mitochondrial proton leak plays a critical role in pathogenesis of cardiovascular diseases / Jiali Cheng, Gayani Nanayakkara, Ying Shao, Ramon Cueto, Luqiao Wang, William Y. Yang [and others]
    Mitochondria and angiogenesis / Raluca Marcu, Ying Zheng, Brian J. Hawkins
    High-density lipoprotein regulation of mitochondrial function / C. Roger White, Geeta Datta, Samantha Giordano
    Mitomirs keep the heart beating / Samarjit Das, Hannah R. Vasanthi, Ramesh Parjapath
    Mitochondrial dysfunction in cardiovascular aging / Charles L. Hoppel, Edward J. Lesnefsky, Qun Chen, Bernard Tandler
    Insulin resistance and mitochondrial dysfunction / Alba Gonzalez-Franquesa, Mary-Elizabeth Patti
    Mechanistic role of kinases in the regulation of mitochondrial fitness / Daniela Sorriento, Jessica Gambardella, Antonella Fiordelisi, Bruno Trimarco [and others]
    Mitochondria damage and kidney disease / Pu Duann, Pei-Hui Lin
    Mitochondrial dysfunction in the diabetic kidney / Kumar Sharma
    Prohibitin signaling at the kidney filtration barrier / Christina Ising, Paul T. Brinkkoetter
    Mitochondrial heteroplasmy / George B. Stefano, Christina Bjenning, Fuzhou Wang, Nan Wang [and others]
    Mitochondrial transplantation in myocardial ischemia and reperfusion injury / Borami Shin, Douglas B. Cowan, Sitaram M. Emani, Pedro J. del Nido [and others]
    Mitochondria-targeted antioxidants for the treatment of cardiovascular disorders / Hyoung Kyu Kim, Jin Han.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Yvonne Will, James A. Dykens.
    Contents:
    Mitochondrial Dysfunction Caused by Drugs and Environmental Toxicants. Front Matter
    Contributions of Plasma Protein Binding and Membrane Transporters to Drug-Induced Mitochondrial Toxicity / Gavin P McStay
    The Role of Transporters in Drug Accumulation and Mitochondrial Toxicity / Kathleen M Giacomini, Huan-Chieh Chien
    Structure-Activity Modeling of Mitochondrial Dysfunction / Steve Enoch, Claire Mellor, Mark Nelms
    Mitochondria-Targeted Cytochromes P450 Modulate Adverse Drug Metabolism and Xenobiotic-Induced Toxicity / Haider Raza, F Peter Guengerich, Narayan G Avadhani
    Mitochondrial Dysfunction in Drug-Induced Liver Injury / Annie Borgne-Sanchez, Bernard Fromenty
    Evaluating Mitotoxicity as Either a Single or Multi-Mechanistic Insult in the Context of Hepatotoxicity / Amy L Ball, Laleh Kamalian, Carol E Jolly, Amy E Chadwick
    Cardiotoxicity of Drugs / Zoltan V Varga, Pal Pacher
    Skeletal Muscle Mitochondrial Toxicity / Eric K Herbert, Saul R Herbert, Karl E Herbert
    Manifestations of Drug Toxicity on Mitochondria in the Nervous System / Jochen H M Prehn, Irene Llorente-Folch
    Nephrotoxicity / Ana Belén Sanz, Maria Dolores Sanchez-Niño, Adrian M Ramos, Alberto Ortiz
    Mammalian Sperm Mitochondrial Function as Affected by Environmental Toxicants, Substances of Abuse, and Other Chemical Compounds / Sandra Amaral, Renata S Tavares, Sara Escada-Rebelo, Andreia F Silva, João Ramalho-Santos
    Biological and Computational Techniques to Identify Mitochondrial Toxicants / Robert B Cameron, Craig C Beeson, Rick G Schnellmann
    The Parallel Testing of Isolated Rat Liver and Kidney Mitochondria Reveals a Calcium-Dependent Sensitivity to Diclofenac and Ibuprofen / Sabine Schulz, Sabine Borchard, Tamara Rieder, Carola Eberhagen, Bastian Popper, Josef Lichtmannegger, Sabine Schmitt, Hans Zischka
    In Vitro Methodologies to Investigate Drug-Induced Toxicities / Rui F Simões, Teresa Cunha-Oliveira, Cláudio F Costa, Vilma A Sardão, Paulo J Oliveira
    Combined Automated Measurement of Respiratory Chain Complexes and Oxidative Stress / Marc Conti, Thierry Delvienne, Sylvain Loric
    Measurement of Mitochondrial Toxicity by Flow Cytometry / Padma Kumar Narayanan, Nianyu Li
    MitoChip / Varsha G Desai, G Ronald Jenkins
    Using 3D Microtissues for Identifying Mitochondrial Liabilities / Simon Messner, Olivier Frey, Katrin Rössger, Andy Neilson, Jens M Kelm
    Toward Mitochondrial Medicine / David A Dunn, Michael H Irwin, Walter H Moos, Kosta Steliou, Carl A Pinkert
    Measurement of Oxygen Metabolism In Vivo / M P J Diemen, R Ubbink, F M Münker, E G Mik, G J Groeneveld
    Detection of Mitochondrial Toxicity Using Zebrafish / Sherine S L Chan, Tucker Williamson
    MiRNA as Biomarkers of Mitochondrial Toxicity / Terry R Vleet, Prathap Kumar Mahalingaiah
    Biomarkers of Mitochondrial Injury After Acetaminophen Overdose / Benjamin L Woolbright, Hartmut Jaeschke
    Acylcarnitines as Translational Biomarkers of Mitochondrial Dysfunction / Richard D Beger, Sudeepa Bhattacharyya, Pritmohinder S Gill, Laura P James
    Mitochondrial DNA as a Potential Translational Biomarker of Mitochondrial Dysfunction in Drug-Induced Toxicity Studies / Afshan N Malik
    Predicting Off-Target Effects of Therapeutic Antiviral Ribonucleosides / Jamie J Arnold, Craig E Cameron
    Imaging of Mitochondrial Toxicity in the Kidney / Andrew M Hall, Joana R Martins, Claus D Schuh
    Imaging Mitochondrial Membrane Potential and Inner Membrane Permeability / Anna-Liisa Nieminen, Venkat K Ramshesh, John J Lemasters
    Quantifying Skeletal Muscle Mitochondrial Function In Vivo by 31P Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy / Graham J Kemp
    Supplemental Images
    Front Matter
    Statin and Fibrate-Induced Dichotomy of Mitochondrial Function / Viruna Neergheen, Alex Dyson, Luke Wainwright, Iain P Hargreaves
    Friend or Foe / Sofia Annis, Adeel Safdar, Eduardo Biala, Ayesha Saleem, Housaiyin Li, Priya Gandhi, Zoe Fleischmann, Carmen Castaneda-Sceppa, Jonathan L Tilly, Dori C Woods, Konstantin Khrapko
    Involvement of Mitochondrial Dysfunction on the Toxic Effects Caused by Drugs of Abuse and Addiction / Daniel José Barbosa, João Paulo Capela, Maria Lourdes Bastos, Félix Carvalho
    Drug-Induced Mitochondrial Toxicity during Pregnancy / Diana Luz Juárez-Flores, Ana Sandra Hernández, Laura García-Otero, Mariona Guitart-Mampel, Marc Catalán-García, Ingrid González-Casacuberta, Jose César Milisenda, Josep Maria Grau, Francesc Cardellach, Constanza Morén, Glòria Garrabou
    Mitochondrial Toxicity in Children and Adolescents Exposed to Antiretroviral Therapy / Antoni Noguera-Julian, Eneritz Velasco-Arnaiz, Clàudia Fortuny
    Drug-Induced Mitochondrial Cardiomyopathy and Cardiovascular Risks in Children / Neha Bansal, Mariana Gerschenson, Tracie L Miller, Stephen E Sallan, Jason Czachor, Hiedy Razoky, Ashley Hill, Miriam Mestre, Steven E Lipshultz
    Role of Mitochondrial Dysfunction in Linezolid-Induced Lactic Acidosis / Alessandro Santini, Dario Ronchi, Daniela Piga, Alessandro Protti
    Metformin and Lactic Acidosis / Jean-Daniel Lalau
    Lessons Learned from a Phase I Clinical Trial of Mitochondrial Complex I Inhibition / Cecilia C Low Wang, Jeffrey L Galinkin, William R Hiatt
    Pharmacological Activation of Mitochondrial Biogenesis for the Treatment of Various Pathologies / Whitney S Gibbs, Natalie E Scholpa, Craig C Beeson, Rick G Schnellmann
    Mitochondrial Toxicity Induced by Chemotherapeutic Drugs / Luciana L Ferreira, Ana Raquel Coelho, Paulo J Oliveira, Teresa Cunha-Oliveira
    The Mitochondrial Exposome / Douglas I Walker, Kurt D Pennell, Dean P Jones
    Central Mitochondrial Signaling Mechanisms in Response to Environmental Agents / Young-Mi Go, Karan Uppal, Dean P Jones
    Detection of Mitochondrial Toxicity of Environmental Pollutants Using Caenorhabditis elegans / Laura L Maurer, Anthony L Luz, Joel N Meyer
    Persistent Organic Pollutants, Mitochondrial Dysfunction, and Metabolic Syndrome / Hong Kyu Lee, Youngmi Kim Pak
    Cigarette Smoke and Mitochondrial Damage / Jalal Pourahmad, Marjan Aghvami, Mohammad Hadi Zarei, Parvaneh Naserzadeh.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Amy K. Reeve, Eve M. Simcox, Michael R. Duchen, Doug M. Turnbull, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I. Mitochondria and Neurodegenerative Disease
    An Introduction to Mitochondria, Their Structure and Functions
    Part II. Mitochondrial Dysfunction: Causes and Effects?
    Neurodegeneration in Mitochondrial Disorders
    The Ageing Brain, Mitochondria and Neurodegeneration
    Mitochondrial Genes and Neurodegenerative Disease
    Mitochondrial Signalling and Neurodegeneration
    Part III. Functional Consequences of Mitochondrial Dysfunction
    Life on the Edge: Determinants of Selective Neuronal Vulnerability in Parkinson's Disease
    Mitochondrial Dynamics and Neurodegeneration
    Mitochondrial Dysfunction and Transport in Demyelinating Disease with Inflammation
    Mitochondria, the Synapse, and Neurodegeneration
    Protein Misfolding and Aggregation: Implications for Mitochondrial Dysfunction and Neurodegeneration
    Mitochondrial Degradation, Autophagy and Neurodegenerative Disease
    The Deleterious Duo of Neurodegeneration: Lysosomes and Mitochondria
    Part IV. Measuring the Contribution of Mitochondrial Dysfunction to Neurodegenerative Disease
    Can We Accurately Model Mitochondrial Dysfunction in Neurodegeneration?
    Mitochondrial Function and Dynamics Imaged In Vivo
    Part V. The Future
    Development of Treatments and Therapies to Target Mitochondrial Dysfunction
    Summary and Conclusions.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    volume editor, Anne N. Murphy, David C. Chan.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Viswanathan Natarajan, Narasimham L. Parinandi, editors.
    Summary: Mitochondria, often referred to as the 'powerhouses' of the cell, generate adenosine triphosphate (ATP) by oxidative phosphorylation or OXPHOS, and maintain cellular homeostasis. In addition to generating ATP, mitochondria are involved in regulation of cell cycle, proliferation, free radical production, innate immune responses and apoptosis. Mitochondrial Function in Lung Health and Disease fills the current gap in the literature and outlines the growing clinical relevance of mitochondrial dysfunction. Currently, there is no overview on the role of mitochondria in pulmonary diseases and this volume focuses on the mitochondrial metabolism, redox signaling, and mechanisms of mitochondrial pathways in lung injury, inflammation, repair and remodeling. Furthermore, in addition to their well-recognized role in cellular energy production and apoptosis, mitochondria appear to play a role in many respiratory diseases and lung cancer. Chapters are written by top notch researchers and clinicians and outline the evidence for mitochondrial biogenesis in inhalational lung injury, COPD and asthma.

    Contents:
    Role of Mitochondrial Reactive Oxygen and Nitrogen Species in Respiratory Diseases
    Regulation of Mitochondrial Functions by Transcription Factor NRF2
    Mitochondrion: A Missing Link in Asthma Pathogenesis
    ROS Signaling in Cardiovascular Dysfunction Associated with Obstructive Sleep Apnea
    Mitochondrial Excitation-Energy Coupling in Airway Smooth Muscle
    Mitochondrial Lipid Peroxidation in Lung Damage and Disease
    The Impact of DNA Damage on Epithelial Cell Maintenance of the Lung
    Mitochondrial Function in Lung Health and Disease
    Age-Specific Difference in Pulmonary Cellular Injury and Mitochondrial Damage.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Volkmar Weissig, Marvin Edeas.
    Summary: This expert volume covers an interdisciplinary and rapidly growing area of biomedical research comprising genetic, biochemical, pathological, and clinical studies aimed at the diagnosis and therapy of human diseases which are either caused by or associated with mitochondrial dysfunction. It dedicates itself to showcasing the tremendous efforts and the progress that has been made over the last decades in developing techniques and protocols for probing, imaging, and manipulating mitochondrial functions. "Mitochondrial Medicine: Volume I, Probing Mitochondrial Function" focuses on methods being used for the assessment of mitochondrial function under physiological conditions as well as in healthy isolated mitochondria. Written in the highly successful "Methods in Molecular Biology" series format, chapters include introductions to their respective topics, lists of the necessary materials and reagents, step-by-step, readily reproducible laboratory protocols, and tips on troubleshooting and avoiding known pitfalls.Comprehensive and practical, "Mitochondrial Medicine" provides an essential source of know-how and inspiration to all researchers who are fascinated by this tiny organelle that seems so clearly to control the life and death of a single cell and whole organisms alike.

    Contents:
    Preparation of "functional' mitochondria : a challenging business / Stefan Lehr, Sonja Hartwig, and Jorg Kotzka
    Isolation and quality control of functional mitochondria / Sonja Hartwig, Jorg Kotzka, and Stefan Lehr
    Isolation of mitochondria-associated ER membranes (MAMs) and glycosphingolipid-enriched microdomains (GEMs) from brain tissues and neuronal cells / Ida Annunziata, Annette Patterson, and Alessandra d'Azzo
    Fluorescence analysis of single mitochondria with nanofluidic channels / Ted Pham [and 3 others]
    Optical microwell arrays for large-scale studies of single mitochondria metabolic responses / Venkata Suresh Vajrala [and 4 others]
    Deep resequencing of mitochondrial DNA / Brendan A.I.Payne [and 3 others]
    Single-cell analysis of mitochondrial DNA / Brendan A.I.Payne, Lynsey Cree, and Patrick F. Chinnery
    A high-throughput next-generation sequencing assay for the mitochondrial genome / Shale Dames, Karen Eilbeck, and Rong Mao
    Rapid mitochondrial DNA isolation method for direct sequencing / Wilber Quispe-Tintaya [and 4 others]
    Analysis of mitochondrial DNA and RNA integrity by a real-time qPCR-based method / Wei Wang [and 3 others]
    Mitochondria-targeted RNA import / Geng Wang [and 4 others]
    Accurate measurement of circulating mitochondrial DNA content from human blood samples using real-time quantitative PCR / Saima Ajaz, Anna Czajka, and Afshan Malik
    mTRIP : an imaging tool to investigate mitochondrial DNA dynamics in physiology and disease at the single-cell resolution / Laurent Chatre and Miria Ricchetti
    Simultaneous quantification of mitochondrial ATP and ROS production / Liping Yu, Brian D. Fink, and William I. Sivitz
    Live-cell assessment of mitochondrial reactive oxygen species using dihydroethidine /Marleen Forkink [and 3 others]
    Detection and differentiation between peroxynitrite and hydroperoxides using mitochondria-targeted arylboronic acid / Jacek Zielonka [and 3 others]
    Time-resolved spectrometry of mitochondrial NAD(P)H fluorescence and its applications for evaluating the oxidative state in living cells / Julia Horilova [and 5 others]
    Novel methods for measuring the mitochondrial membrane potential / Roger Springett
    High-throughput real-time analysis of cell oxygenation using intracellular oxygen-sensitive probes / James Hynes and Conn Carey
    In vivo aassessment of mitochondrial oxygen consumption / Floor A. Harms and Egbert G. Mik
    Imaging mitochondrial hydrogen peroxide in living cells / Alexander R. Lippert, Bryan C. Dickinson, and Elizabeth J. New
    Simultaneous high-resolution measurement of mitochondrial respiration and hydrogen peroxide production / Gerhard Kumschnabel [and 6 others]
    Measurement of mitochondrial NADH and FAD autofluorescence in live cells / Fernando Bartolomé and Andrey Y. Abramov
    Mitochondrial coenzyme Q10 determination via isotope dilution liquid chromatography tandem mass spectrometry / Outi Itkonen and Ursula Turpeinen
    Assessing the bioenergetic profile of human pluripotent stem cells / Vanessa Pfiffer and Alessandro Prigione
    Integrative methods for studying cardiac energetics / Philippe Kiole [and 7 others]
    Computer-based prediction of mitochondria-targeting peptides / Pier Luigi Martelli [and 4 others]
    Prediction of mitochondrial protein function by comparative physiology and phylogenetic profiling / Yiming Cheng and Fabiana Perocchi
    Assessment of posttranslational modification of mitochondrial proteins / Sudharsana R. Ande, G. Pauline Padilla-Meier, and Suresh Mishra
    Assessment of mitochondrial protein glutathionylation as a signaling for CO pathway / Ana S. Almeida and Helena L.A. Vieira.
    High-resolution melting analysis for identifying sequence variations in nuclear genes for assembly factors and structural subunits of cytochrome C oxidase / Alžběta Vondráčková [and 3 others]
    Heterologous inferential analysis (HIA) as a method to understand the role of mitochondrial rRNA mutations in pathogenesis / Joanna L. Elson, Paul M. Smith, and Antón Vila-Sanjurjo
    Analysis of mitochondrial dysfunction during cell death / Vladimir Gogvadze, Sten Orrenius, and Boris Zhivotovsky
    The use of FLIM-FRET for the detection of mitochondria-associated protein interactions / Elizabeth J. Osterlund, Qian Liu, and David W. Andrews
    Assessment of mitochondrial Ca²⁺ uptake / András T. Deak [and 6 others]
    Qualitative characterization of the rat liver mitochondrial lipidome using all ion fragmentation on an exactive benchtop orbitrap MS / Susan S. Bird [and 4 others]
    Characterization of mitochondrial populations during stem cell differentiation / Petra Kerscher [and 4 others]
    An ex vivo model for studying mitochondrial trafficking in neurons / Helena Bros, Raluca Niesner, and Carmen Infante-Duarte.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Volkmar Weissig, Marvin Edeas.
    Summary: This expert volume covers an interdisciplinary and rapidly growing area of biomedical research comprising genetic, biochemical, pathological, and clinical studies aimed at the diagnosis and therapy of human diseases which are either caused by or associated with mitochondrial dysfunction. It dedicates itself to showcasing the tremendous efforts and the progress that has been made over the last decades in developing techniques and protocols for probing, imaging, and manipulating mitochondrial functions. "Mitochondrial Medicine: Volume II, Manipulating Mitochondrial Function" describes techniques developed for manipulating and assessing mitochondrial function under general pathological conditions and specific disease states. Written in the highly successful "Methods in Molecular Biology" series format, chapters include introductions to their respective topics, lists of the necessary materials and reagents, step-by-step, readily reproducible laboratory protocols, and tips on troubleshooting and avoiding known pitfalls.Comprehensive and practical, "Mitochondrial Medicine" provides an essential source of know-how and inspiration to all researchers who are fascinated by this tiny organelle that seems so clearly to control the life and death of a single cell and whole organisms alike.

    Contents:
    DQAsomes as the prototype of mitochondria-targeted pharmaceutical nanocarriers: Preparation, characterization, and use
    Predicting mitochondrial targeting by small molecule xenobiotics within living cells using QSAR models
    Targeting mitochondria with small molecules: the preparation of mitoB and mitoP as exomarkers of mitochondrial hydrogen peroxide
    Synthesis of triphenylphosphonium phospholipid conjugates for the preparation of mitochondriotropic liposomes
    Synthesis and evaluation of (1)(8)F-labeled fluoroalkyl triphenylphosphonium salts as mitochondrial voltage sensors in PET myocardial imaging
    Bridging the gap between nature and antioxidant setbacks: Delivering caffeic acid to mitochondria
    Mitochondriotropic nanoemulsified genistein-loaded vehicles for cancer therapy
    Formulation and optimization of mitochondria-targeted polymeric nanoparticles
    Ex vivo generation of functional immune cells by mitochondria-targeted photosensitization of cancer cells
    Targeting the mitochondrial genome via a dual function MITO-porter: Evaluation of mtDNA levels and mitochondrial function
    Mitochondrial, acidic, and cytosolic pHs determination by (3)(1)p NMR spectroscopy: Design of new sensitive targeted ph probes
    Methodology for use of mitochondria-targeted cations in the field of oxidative stress-related research
    Synthesis and testing of novel isomeric mitochondriotropic derivatives of resveratrol and quercetin
    Evaluation of respiration of mitochondria in cancer cells exposed to mitochondria-targeted agents
    The effect of mitochondrially targeted anticancer agents on mitochondrial (super)complexes
    Mitochondrial targeting of recombinant RNA
    Mitochondrial targeting of catalytic RNAs
    Allotopic expression of ATP6 in the mouse as a transgenic model of mitochondrial disease
    Analysis of pollutant-induced changes in mitochondrial DNA methylation
    ETS and DEAS studies of the reduction of xenobiotics in mitochondrial intermembrane space
    Analysis of mitochondrial morphology and function under conditions of mitofusin 2 deficiency
    Yeast as a tool to study mitochondrial retrograde pathway en route to cell stress response
    Cell energy budget platform for assessment of cell metabolism
    Induced pluripotent stem cells (iPSCs) for modeling mitochondrial DNA disorders
    Cytoplasmic transfer methods for studying the segregation of mitochondrial DNA in mice
    In vivo visualization and quantification of mitochondrial morphology in C. elegans
    Mitochondrial DNA as a biosensor of UV exposure in human skin
    Assessment of short- and medium-chain fatty acids on mitochondrial function in severe inflammation
    Atomic force microscopy-based shape analysis of heart mitochondria
    Enzymatic assays for probing mitochondrial apoptosis
    A cybrid cell model for the assessment of the link between mitochondrial deficits and sporadic parkinson's disease
    Analysis of mitochondrial network by imaging: Proof of technique in schizophrenia.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Carlos M. Palmeira, Anabela P. Rolo.
    Contents:
    Isolation of crude mitochondrial fraction from cells / Mariusz R. Wieckowski and Lech Wojtczak
    Isolation of mitochondria from liver and extraction of total RNA and protein : analyses of MicroRNA and protein expressions / Pedro M. Borralho, Clifford J. Steer, and Cecília M.P. Rodrigues
    PCR based determination of mitochondrial DNA copy number in multiple species / John P. Rooney [and eight others]
    NAD⁺ content and its role in mitochondria / Wei Li and Anthony A. Sauve
    Measuring PGC-1[alpha] and its acetylation status in mouse primary myotubes / Ana P. Gomes and David A. Sinclair
    Measurement of mitochondrial oxygen consumption rates in mouse primary neurons and astrocytes / Sofia M. Ribeiro, Alfredo Giménez-Cassina, and Nika N. Danial
    Determination of oxidative phosphorylation complexes activities / João S. Teodoro, Carlos M. Palmeira, and Anabela P. Rolo
    Histoenzymatic methods for visualization of the activity of individual mitochondrial respiratory chain complexes in the muscle biopsies from patients with mitochondrial defects / Agnieszka Karkucinska-Wieckowska, Maciej Pronicki, and Mariusz R. Wieckowski
    A method aimed at assessing the functional consequences of the supramolecular organization of the respiratory electron transfer chain by time- resolved studies / Fabrice Rappaport
    BN-PAGE-based approach to study thyroid hormones and mitochondrial function / Elena Silvestri [and three others]
    Detection of UCP1 protein and measurements of dependent GDP-sensitive proton leak in non- phosphorylating thymus mitochondria / Kieran J. Clarke [and three others]
    Exploring liver mitochondrial function by ¹³C-stable isotope breath tests : implications in clinical biochemistry / Ignazio Grattagliano [and five others]
    Following mitochondria dynamism : confocal analysis of the organelle morphology / Francesca R. Mariotti, Mauro Corrado, and Silvia Campello
    Analysis of pro-apoptotic protein trafficking to and from mitochondria / Ignacio Vega-Naredo [and four others]
    Mitophagy and mitochondrial balance / Simone Patergnani and Paolo Pinton.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by David Sharp.
    Contents:
    Analysis of Mitotic Protein Dynamics and Function in Drosophila Embryos by Live Cell Imaging and Quantitative Modeling
    Rapid Measurement of Mitotic Spindle Orientation in Cultured Mammalian Cells
    Automated Segmentation of the First Mitotic Spindle in Differential Interference Contrast Micro copy Images of C. elegans Embryos
    Imaging the Mitotic Spindle by Spinning Disk Microscopy in Tobacco Suspension Cultured Cells
    Image-Based Computational Tracking and Analysis of Spindle Protein Dynamics
    The Use of Cultured Drosophila Cells for Studying the Microtubule Cytoskeleton
    Measuring Microtubule Growth and Gliding in C. elegans Embryos
    XenopusEgg Extracts as a Simplified Model System for Structure Function Studies of Dynein Regulators
    Covalent Immobilization of Microtubules on Glass Surfaces for Molecular Motor Force Measurements and Other Single-Molecule Assays
    An Improved Optical Tweezers Assay for Measuring the Force Generation of Single Kinesin Molecules
    Seeded Microtubule Growth for Cryo-electron Microscopy of End Binding Proteins
    The Segmentation of Microtubules in Electron Tomograms using Amira
    Manipulating Cell Shape by Placing Cells into Micro-fabricated Chambers
    Four color FISH for the Detection of Low Levels Aneuploidy in Interphase Cells.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Print
    edited by Helder Maiato, Melina Schuh.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
  • Digital
    edited by Fernando Monje-Casas, Ethel Queralt.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Francis C. Wells, Robert H. Anderson, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive review of the basic science of the mitral valve needed to begin to comprehend both normal and the failing valve. This knowledge is infrequently discussed in the clinical arena, with a rush towards definition of lesions based on limited analysis. It provides a ready single source of the most important basic science subjects pertaining to the valve, and the pathologies found therein, and thus a more complete understanding of the factors that result in dysfunction may be appreciated. Mitral Valve Disease: Basic Sciences and Current Approaches to Management includes chapters on embryology and anatomy, including details of structural, comparative and functional features. Since the valve is completely influenced by genetics and molecular biology, subjects rarely if ever addressed in the clinical arena, these topics receive in-depth attention. Coverage concludes with lengthy discussions of the importance of multi-disciplinary work, along with the importance of the electrophysiological disturbances encountered in some groups of these patients. It therefore is an essential and up-to-date resource for the practicing and trainee cardiac surgeon and any researcher working within this topic.

    Contents:
    The Mitral valve: A brief history
    Anatomical Development of the Left Atrioventricular Valvar Complex
    How should we describe the mitral valve and its component parts?
    The Anatomy of the Mitral Valve
    The surgical utility of a detailed knowledge of the basic sciences pertaining to the Mitral valve
    The atrioventricular valve in the animal kingdom
    The Atrioventricular complex: function and dysfunction
    Mitral Valve Pathology
    Morphogenetic aspects of mitral valve development
    Genetics of Mitral Valve Disease
    Genetics and Genetic Counselling relevant to Mitral Valve Prolapse
    Assessment of mitral valve function: the valve and the ventricle
    Arrhythmias in Mitral Valve Prolapse
    The organisation of specialist valve care provision.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Leslie Curry, Yale University, Marcella Nunez-Smith, Yale University.
    Summary: "This must-have mixed methods resource for any health science researcher presents key theories, concepts, and approaches in an accessible way. Packed with illustrations from the health sciences literature, this ready-to-use guidebook shows readers how to design, conduct, review, and use mixed methods research findings. Helpful checklists, figures, tables, templates, and much more give readers examples that will elevate the quality of their research, facilitate communication about their methods, and improve efficiency over the course of their projects. Real-world examples and insights from mixed methods researchers provide unique perspectives on every aspect of mixed methods research. This book successfully pulls together foundational mixed methods principles, synthesizes the knowledge base in the field, and translates it for a health science researcher audience."--Publisher.

    Contents:
    Definition and overview of mixed methods designs
    Applications and illustrations of mixed methods health sciences research
    Determining the appropriateness and feasibility of using mixed methods
    Writing a scientifically sound and compelling grant proposal for a mixed methods study
    Examples of funded grant applications using mixed methods
    Assessing quality in mixed methods studies
    Sampling and data collection in mixed methods studies
    Data analysis and integration in mixed methods studies
    Managing mixed methods teams
    Implementation issues in mixed methods research
    Publishing mixed methods studies in the health sciences.
    Digital Access Sage 2015
  • Digital
    Elke Jurandy Bran Nogueira Cardoso, José Leonardo de Moraes Gonçalves, Fabiano de Carvalho Balieiro, Avílio Antônio Franco, editors.
    Summary: The aim of this book is to present, in depth, updated information on soil and microbial processes involved in mixed plantations of Eucalyptus and N2-fixing species, especially Acacia mangium, focusing on Forestry, Soils, Biology, Ecosystem Services and Sustainability. The potential of substituting chemical N fertilizer by a consortium of leguminous species that fix atmospheric nitrogen is an interesting solution for a more sustainable, economically and environmentally sound forest system. Among the main topics, we present reference topics on soil microbiology, as biological nitrogen fixation, the role of mycorrhiza in mixed plantations, bio-indicators of soil quality, and plantgrowth promoting bacteria with biotechnological potential. Here we discuss Ecosystem services and ecological benefits of these systems, the invasive potential of A. mangium, as well as the regulations and perspectives of land use policies for mixed forests and their role in the sustainability of the system.-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    1. Why mixed forest plantation?
    2. Growth patterns at different sites and forest management systems
    3. Nutrient cycling in mixed-forest plantations
    4. Litter decomposition and soil carbon stocks in mixed plantations of eucalyptus spp. and nitrogen-fixing trees
    5. Soil bacterial structure and composition in pure and mixed plantations of eucalyptus spp. and leguminous trees
    6. Biological nitrogen fixation (BNF) in mixed-forest plantations
    7. Mycorrhiza in mixed plantations
    8. Mesofauna and macrofauna in soil and litter of mixed plantations
    9. Bioindicators of soil quality in mixed plantations of eucalyptus and leguminous trees
    10. Ecosystem services in eucalyptus planted forests and mixed and multifunctional planted forests
    11. The risk of invasions when using acacia spp. in forestry
    12. Multifunctional mixed-forest plantations : the use of Brazilian native leguminous tree species for sustainable rural development
    13. The Brazilian legal framework on mixed-planted forests.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    American College of Physicians.
    Contents:
    Part A: [v. 1] Cardiovascular medicine
    [v. 2] Dermatology
    [v. 3] Gastroenterology and hepatology
    [v. 4] Hematology and oncology
    [v. 5] Neurology
    [v. 6] Rheumatology
    Part B: [v. 7] Endocrinology and metabolism
    [v. 8] General internal medicine
    [v. 9] Infectious disease
    [v. 10] Nephrology
    [v. 11] Pulmonary and critical care medicine
    [v. 12] Cumulative index.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC59 .M43 2015
    11
  • Digital/Print
    American College of Physicians.
    Contents:
    Part A: [v.1] Cardiovascular medicine
    [v.2] Dermatology
    [v.3] Gastroenterology and hepatology
    [v.4] Hematology and oncology
    [v.5] Neurology
    [v.6] Rheumatology Part B: [v.1] Endocrinology and metabolism
    [v.2] General internal medicine --[v.3] Infectious disease
    [v.4] Nephrology
    [v.5] Pulmonary and critical care
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Get Password
    Audio Companion
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    RC59 .M43 2018
    11
  • Digital/Print
    American College of Physicians.
    Contents:
    Part A: [v.1] Gastroenterology and hepatology
    [v.2] General internal medicine 1
    [v.3] Infectious disease
    [v.4] Nephrology
    [v.5] Neurology
    [v.6] Oncology
    Part B: [v.1] Cardiovascular medicine
    [v.2] Endocrinology and metabolism --[v.3] General internal medicine 2
    [v.4] Hematology
    [v.5] Pulmonary and critical care medicine
    [v. 6] Rheumatology.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Get Password
    Audio Companion
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    RC59 .M43 2021
    12
  • Digital
    Jose L. Contreras-Vidal, Dario Robleto, Jesus G. Cruz-Garza, José M. Azorín, Chang S. Nam, editors.
    Summary: Mobile Brain-Body Imaging and the Neuroscience of Art, Innovation and Creativity is a trans-disciplinary, collective, multimedia collaboration that critically uncovers the challenges and opportunities for transformational and innovative research and performance at the nexus of art, science and engineering. This book addresses a set of universal and timeless questions with a profound impact on the human condition: How do the creative arts and aesthetic experiences engage the brain and mind and promote innovation? How do arts-science collaborations employ aesthetics as a means of problem-solving and thereby create meaning? How can the creative arts and neuroscience advance understanding of individuality and social cognition, improve health and promote life-long learning? How are neurotechnologies changing science and artistic expression? How are the arts and citizen science innovating neuroscience studies, informal learning and outreach in the public sphere? Emerging from the 2016 and 2017 International Conferences on Mobile Brain-Body Imaging and the Neuroscience of Art, Innovation and Creativity held in Cancun, Mexico and Valencia, Spain to explore these topics, this book intertwines disciplines and investigates not only their individual products-art and data-but also something more substantive and unique; the international pool of contributors reveals something larger about humanity by revealing the state of the art in collaboration between arts and sciences and providing an investigational roadmap projected from recent advances. Mobile Brain-Body Imaging and the Neuroscience of Art, Innovation and Creativity is written for academic researchers, professionals working in industrial and clinical centers, independent researchers and artists from the performing arts, and other readers interested in understanding emergent innovations at the nexus of the creative arts, science and engineering. The book contains language, design features (illustrations, diagrams) to develop a conversational bridge between the disciplines involved supplemented by access to video, artistic presentations and the results of a hackathon from the MoBI conferences.

    Contents:
    Foreword
    Introduction
    Part I
    Neuroaesthetics and Creativity: How Do the Creative Arts Engage the Human Mind and Promote Creativity and Innovation Across Fields?
    Introduction to Part I
    How Artists Think (or the History of Neuroaesthetics)
    Art and Neuroscience: a State of the Union
    Brain Mechanisms of Creativity: What We Know, What We Don't
    SPECIAL MULTIMEDIA FEATURE: Interviews
    Part II: How Do Arts-Science Collaboration Create New Knowledge through Aesthetic Problem Solving?
    Introduction to Part II
    Myths and Realities of Art: Science Collaborations
    Forging New Paths between Art, Materials and Society
    Is Beauty in the Eye of the Beholder or an Objective Truth? A Neuroscientific Approach
    Part III: Brain Mechanisms of Aesthetic Perception and Artistic Brain-Computer Interfaces
    Introduction to Part III
    How We See Art and How Artists Make It
    Reverse Engineering of Creativity
    Chapter 9 (no title yet)
    SPECIAL MULTIMEDIA FEATURE Your Brain on Art: Creativity in Sound, Movement and Visual Arts
    Part IV: Cognitive and Medical Applications: How Can Arts and Neuroscience Research Improve Physical and Mental Health and Promote Wellbeing?
    Introduction to Part IV
    Outcomes of Art Therapy Treatment for Military Service Members with Traumatic Brain Injury and Post-Traumatic Stress
    Brain on Art therapy: Examining Processes and Outcomes of Art Making in Therapeutic Contexts
    Chapter 12: No title (TBC)
    Part V. Mobile Brain-Body Imaging Technologies: How Disruptive Neurotechnologies Are Changing Science, Arts and Innovation
    Introduction to Part V
    Control Mechanisms in Artistic Brain-Computer Interfaces
    The Art, Science and Engineering of BCI Hackathons
    ArtScience Navigating the Ecology of Knowledge: Lessons Learned and Suggestions for Transdisciplinary Apprenticeships
    Part VI. How Can The Arts and Neuroscience Describe and Promote the Processes of Learning and Creativity in K-12 and Higher Education?
    Introduction to Part VI
    The Effects of Arts Integration on Learning: From Research to Practice
    Bach to Explore the Tension between Novelty and Familiarity and Examine the Implications for Imaging/Brain Science
    No title (TBA)
    Part VII. Experiential Learning in Art-Science Hackathons
    Introduction to Part VII
    Brain and Painting
    Do, Re, Mi and EEG
    Purpose-Specific EEG Placement Prototype to Limit User Discomfort and Burden
    Harnessing Creative Skill Training in Artistic BCIs
    True Integration, the MoBI Hackathon for STEM informing Arts and Arts informing STEM
    Paint with Brainwaves: An Active BCI Painting Prototype
    Mediated Interdependence in Motion: A Co-op Augmented Reality and Brain-Computer Interface Installation
    Mind's EYE: Multimodal Theatrical Staging: An Alternative Picture of a Human Mind
    Part VIII: Roadmap.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    James M. Rehg, Susan A. Murphy, Santosh Kumar, editors ; foreword by Deborah Estrin.
    Summary: This volume provides a comprehensive introduction to mHealth technology and is accessible to technology-oriented researchers and practitioners with backgrounds in computer science, engineering, statistics, and applied mathematics. The contributing authors include leading researchers and practitioners in the mHealth field. The book offers an in-depth exploration of the three key elements of mHealth technology: the development of on-body sensors that can identify key health-related behaviors (sensors to markers), the use of analytic methods to predict current and future states of health and disease (markers to predictors), and the development of mobile interventions which can improve health outcomes (predictors to interventions). Chapters are organized into sections, with the first section devoted to mHealth applications, followed by three sections devoted to the above three key technology areas. Each chapter can be read independently, but the organization of the entire book provides a logical flow from the design of on-body sensing technology, through the analysis of time-varying sensor data, to interactions with a user which create opportunities to improve health outcomes. This volume is a valuable resource to spur the development of this growing field, and ideally suited for use as a textbook in an mHealth course.

    Contents:
    Introduction to Section 1: mHealth Applications and Tools
    StudentLife: Using Smartphone to Assess Mental Health and Academic Performance of College Students
    Circadian Computing: Sensing, Modeling, and Maintaining Biological Rhythms
    Design Lessons from a Micro-Randomized Pilot Study in Mobile Health
    The Use of Asset-Based Community Development in a Research Project Aimed at Developing mHealth Technologies for Older Adults
    Designing Mobile Health Technologies for Self-Monitoring: The Bit Counter as a Case Study
    mDebugger: Assessing and Diagnosing the Fidelity and Yield of Mobile Sensor Data
    Introduction to Section II: Sensors to mHealth Markers
    Challenges and Opportunities in Automated Detection of Eating Activity
    Detecting Eating and Smoking Behavior Using Smartwatches
    Wearable Motion Sensing Devices and Algorithms for Precise Healthcare Diagnostics and Guidance
    Paralinguistic Analysis of Children's Speech in Natural Environments
    Pulmonary Monitoring Using Smartphones
    Wearable Sensing of Left Ventricular Function
    A new direction for Biosensing: RF sensors for monitoring cardio-pulmonary function
    Wearable Optical Sensors
    Introduction to Section III: Markers to mHealth Predictors
    Exploratory Visual Analytics of Mobile Health Data: Sensemaking Challenges and Opportunities
    Learning Continuous-Time Hidden Markov Models for Event Data
    Time-series Feature Learning with Applications to Healthcare Domain
    From Markers to Interventions: The Case of Just-in-Time Stress Intervention
    Introduction to Section IV: Predictors to mHealth Interventions
    Modeling Opportunities in mHealth Cyber-Physical Systems
    Control Systems Engineering for Optimizing Behavioral mHealth Interventions
    From Ads to Interventions: Contextual Bandits in Mobile Health
    Towards Health Recommendation Systems: An Approach for Providing Automated Personalized Health Feedback from Mobile Data.
  • Digital
    edited by Avraham Rasooly, Keith E. Herold.
    Contents:
    Mobile device for disease diagnosis and data tracking in resource-limited settings
    Microfluidic devices for nucleic acid (NA) isolation, isothermal NA amplification, and real-time detection
    Mobile based gold nanoprobe TB diagnostics for point-of-need
    Immunofluorescence microtip sensor for point-of-care tuberculosis (TB) diagnosis
    Improving lateral-flow immunoassay (LFIA) diagnostics via biomarker enrichment for mHealth
    Microfluidic toner-based analytical devices: Disposable, lightweight, and portable platforms for point-of-care diagnostics with colorimetric detection
    Detection of protein biomarker using a blood glucose meter
    Microchip ELISA coupled with cell phone to detect ovarian cancer HE4 biomarker in urine
    Point-of-care rare cell cancer diagnostics
    Mobile flow cytometer for mHealth
    Mobile fiber-optic sensor for detection of oral and cervical cancer in the developing world
    Opto-fluidics based microscopy and flow cytometry on a cell phone for blood analysis
    Optofluidic device for label-free cell classification from whole blood
    A wearable sensing system for assessment of exposures to environmental volatile organic compounds
    Quantitative point-of-care (POC) assays using measurements of time as the readout: A new type of readout for mHealth
    Smartphone-based fluorescence detector for mHealth
    Two-layer lab-on-a-chip (LOC) with passive capillary valves for mHealth medical diagnostics
    Spectrometry with consumer-quality CMOS cameras
    Mobile phone based electrochemiluminescence detection in paper-based microfluidic sensors
    iStethoscope: A demonstration of the use of mobile devices for auscultation
    iPhysiometer: A smartphone photoplethysmograph for measuring various physiological indices
    Smartphone attachment for stethoscope recording
    Use of smartphones and portable media devices for quantifying human movement characteristics of gait, tendon reflex response, and Parkinson's disease hand tremor
    Measuring tremor with a smartphone
    The use of single-electrode wireless EEG in biobehavioral investigations
    Smartphone based monitoring system for long-term sleep assessment
    Intracranial ventricular catheter placement with a smartphone assisted instrument
    High-resolution microendoscope for the detection of cervical neoplasia
    Skin lesions image analysis utilizing smartphones and cloud platforms
    Melanoma and other skin lesion detection using smart handheld devices.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Busi Siddhardha, Madhu Dyavaiah, Asad Syed, editors.
    Summary: "This book provides essential insights into microbial pathogenesis, host-pathogen interactions, and the anti-microbial drug resistance of various human pathogens on the basis of various model organisms. The initial sections of the book introduce readers to the mechanisms of microbial pathogenesis, host-pathogen interactions, anti-microbial drug resistance, and the dynamics of biofilm formation. Due to the emergence of various microbial resistant strains, it is especially important to understand the prognosis for microbial infections, disease progression profiles, and mechanisms of resistance to antibiotic therapy in order to develop novel therapeutic strategies. In turn, the second part of the book presents a comparative analysis of various animal models to help readers understand microbial pathogenesis, host-pathogen interactions, anti-microbial drug discovery, anti-biofilm therapeutics, and treatment regimes. Given its scope, the book represents a valuable asset for microbiologists, biotechnologists, medical professionals, drug development researchers, and pharmacologists alike."-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Editors and Contributors
    About the Editors
    Contributors
    1: Microbial Infections and Virulence Factors
    1.1 Introduction
    1.1.1 Colonization of Host Surfaces by Pathogenic Microorganisms
    1.1.2 Initiation and Maintenance of Pathogens in Intracellular Lifestyle
    1.1.3 Crossing of Host Barriers by Pathogens
    1.2 Microbial Infections
    1.2.1 Bacterial Infections
    1.2.2 Fungal Infections
    1.2.3 Viral Infections
    1.3 Virulence Factors Associated with Microbial Infections
    1.3.1 Extracellular Virulence Factors 1.3.2 Cell Associated Virulence Factors
    1.4 Conclusion
    References
    2: Microbial Pathogenesis: Virus Pathogen-Host Interactions
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Historical Views of Host-Microbe Interactions
    2.2.1 Fundamental Properties of Viruses
    2.2.1.1 Principal Rules of Virus-Host Interactions
    2.2.2 Host Defense Mechanisms
    2.2.2.1 Defensive Host and Unwearied Pathogens
    2.2.3 Different Types of Virus-Host Interactions
    2.2.3.1 Transient Infections
    2.2.3.2 Acute Infections
    2.2.3.3 Latent Infections
    2.2.3.4 Persistent Infections 2.2.4 Virus-Host Interactions
    2.2.4.1 Virus-Host Interactions: Attachment and Entry
    2.2.4.2 Virus-Host Interactions: Reprogramming the Metabolism
    2.2.4.2.1 General Trends of Metabolic Changes
    2.2.5 Virus-Host Interactions: Reprogramming the Changes in Structure and Function of Cell Organelles
    2.2.6 Future Directions of Virus-Host-Pathogen Interactions
    2.3 Conclusion
    References
    3: A Physical Insight of Biofilms
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Single Particle Tracking Method
    3.3 Relevance of Physical Properties in Biofilms Formation
    3.4 Branching Patterns 3.5 Recent Observations on Biofilms
    References
    4: A Review on Microbial Pathogenesis and Host Response
    4.1 Introduction
    4.1.1 Host-Microbe Relationship
    4.1.1.1 Mutualism
    4.1.1.2 Commensalism
    4.1.1.3 Parasitism
    4.2 Routes of Infection and Progression
    4.2.1 Adhesion
    4.2.2 Internalization
    4.2.3 Colonization
    4.2.4 Microbial Secretion System
    4.3 Microbial Pathogenesis and Host Immune Response
    4.3.1 Innate Immune Response
    4.3.2 Adaptive or Specific Immune Responses
    4.4 Conclusion
    References 5: Role of Quorum Sensing in Microbial Infections and Biofilm Formation
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 The Bacterial Chatter's
    5.3 Quorum Sensing: The Bacterial Language
    5.4 Biofilm Formation and Bacterial Infections Control by Quorum Sensing
    5.5 Applications of Quorum Sensing in Biotechnology
    5.6 Biofilm Matrix Composition and Architecture
    5.6.1 Biofilm Matrix Composition
    5.6.2 Biofilm Architecture
    5.6.3 Biofilm Role in Human Infections
    5.7 Applications of Biofilm in Biotechnology
    5.8 Conclusion
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Busi Siddhardha, Madhu Dyavaiah, Kaviyarasu Kasinathan, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive overview of state-of-the-art applications of nanotechnology in biology and medicine, as well as model organisms that can help us understand the biological activity and associated toxicity of nanoparticles, and devise strategies to minimize toxicity and enhance therapies. Thanks to their high surface-to-volume ratio, nanoparticles are characterized by excellent biocompatibility and bioavailability, a high therapeutic index, and relatively low toxicity, which has led to their widespread application in the early diagnosis of diseases, comprehensive monitoring of disease progression, and improved therapeutics. The book also explores nanoparticle-based insecticides and their mechanisms of action, and provides a comparative analysis of the various model organisms that are used to understand the biological properties of nanoparticles. Further, it describes various in-vivo models that yield important insights into nanomaterial-mediated toxicity, promoting the optimal utilization of nanoparticles. In closing, the book discusses future perspectives and regulatory issues concerning the use of nanomaterials in translational research.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Editors
    1: Nanotechnology: Application in Biology and Medicine
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 History of Nanotechnology
    1.3 Definition
    1.4 Importance of Size
    1.5 Applications in Biology and Medicine
    1.6 Applications in Biology
    1.6.1 Bioseparation: Separation and Purification of Biological Molecules
    1.6.1.1 Separation of DNA
    1.6.1.2 Separation of Proteins
    1.6.1.3 Separation of Biomolecules
    1.6.2 Probing of DNA Structure
    1.6.3 Fluorescent Biological Labels
    1.6.4 Biological Processes 1.6.5 Biosensing with Magnetic Nanoswitches
    1.6.6 Single Cell Phenotypes
    1.6.7 Delivery Vehicles
    1.6.7.1 Delivering Hydrophobic Compounds Without Solvents
    1.6.7.2 Delivering siRNA for Biological Studies
    1.6.7.3 Delivering Agents to Subcellular Organelles
    1.7 Applications in Medicine
    1.7.1 Drug Delivery
    1.7.2 Diagnostic Applications
    1.7.2.1 Quantum Dots
    1.7.2.2 Gold Nanoparticles
    1.7.3 Cardiac Therapy
    1.7.4 Orthopedic Applications
    1.7.5 Dentistry
    1.7.6 Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI)
    1.7.7 Cancer Therapy
    1.7.8 Hyperthermia 1.7.9 Ophthalmology
    1.7.10 Tissue Engineering
    1.8 Conclusion
    References
    2: Biological Activities of Nanoparticles and Mechanism of Action
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Green Synthesis of Nanoparticles
    2.3 Interaction of NPs with Biological Components
    2.4 Antibacterial Activity of Nanoparticles
    2.5 Anticancer Activity of Nanoparticles
    2.6 General Mechanism for Activity by Nanoparticles
    2.6.1 Oxidative Stress
    2.6.2 Nonoxidative Mechanism
    2.6.3 Dissolved Metal Ions
    2.7 Application of Metal NPs
    2.7.1 Antimicrobial Application of NPs 2.7.2 Anticancer Application of NPs
    2.8 Conclusion and Perspectives
    References
    3: Application of Nanoparticles in Drug Delivery
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Nanoparticles
    3.3 Antimicrobial Mechanism of NPs
    3.4 Application of Silver Nanoparticles as an Antibacterial and Antifungal Agents
    3.5 Application of Magnesium Oxide (MgO) and Calcium Oxide NPs (CaO) NPs as Antimicrobial Agents
    3.6 Application of Silica NPs (SiO2) as Antimicrobial Agents
    3.7 Application of Titanium Dioxide (TiO2) NPs as Antimicrobial Agents 3.8 Application of Zinc Oxide (ZnO) NPs as Antimicrobial Agents
    3.9 Application of Iron Oxide (Fe3O4) NPs as Antimicrobial Agents
    3.10 Application of Gold (Au) NPs as Antimicrobial Agents
    3.11 Application of Copper Oxide (CuO) NPs as Antimicrobial Agents
    3.12 Application of Aluminum (Al) NPs as Antimicrobial Agents
    3.13 Application of Bismuth (Bi) NPs as Antimicrobial Agents
    3.14 Application of Carbon-Based NPs as Antimicrobial Agents
    3.15 Application of Organic NPs as Antimicrobial Agents
    3.16 Application of Eco-friendly Green NPs as Antimicrobial Agents
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    María Elena Álvarez-Buylla Roces, Juan Carlos Martínez-García, José Dávila-Velderrain, Elisa Domínguez-Hüttinger, Mariana Esther Martínez-Sánchez.
    Summary: "This book contributes to better understand how lifestyle modulations can effectively halt the emergence and progression of human diseases. The book will allow the reader to gain a better understanding of the mechanisms by which the environment interferes with the bio-molecular regulatory processes underlying the emergence and progression of complex diseases, such as cancer. Focusing on key and early cellular bio-molecular events giving rise to the emergence of degenerative chronic disease, it builds on previous experience on the development of multi-cellular organisms, to propose a mathematical and computer based framework that allows the reader to analyze the complex interplay between bio-molecular processes and the (micro)-environment from an integrative, mechanistic, quantitative and dynamical perspective. Taking the wealth of empirical evidence that exists it will show how to build and analyze models of core regulatory networks involved in the emergence and progression of chronic degenerative diseases, using a bottom-up approach"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Medical systems biology / María Elena Álvarez-Buylla Roces, Juan Carlos Martínez-García, José Dávila-Velderrain, Elisa Domínguez-Hüttinger, Mariana Esther Martínez-Sánchez
    Modeling procedures / María Elena Álvarez-Buylla Roces, Juan Carlos Martínez-García, José Dávila-Velderrain, Elisa Domínguez-Hüttinger, Mariana Esther Martínez-Sánchez
    Case studies / María Elena Álvarez-Buylla Roces, Juan Carlos Martínez-García, José Dávila-Velderrain, Elisa Domínguez-Hüttinger, Mariana Esther Martínez-Sánchez.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Sid M. Becker.
    Contents:
    Molecular simulations of complex membrane models / D. Jefferies and S. Khalid
    Microbial strategies for oil biodegradation / G.E. Kapellos
    Modeling and measurement of biomolecular transport and sensing in microfluidic cell culture and analysis systems / J.F. Wong, C.A. Simmons and E.W.K. Wong
    Coupling microscale transport and tissue mechanics / M. Marino, G. Pontrelli, G. Vairo, and P. Wriggers
    Modeling cystic fibrosis and mucociliary clearance / R. Chatelin, D. Anne-Archard, M. Murris-Espin, D. Sanchez, M. Thiriet, A. Didier, and P. Poncet
    Intracellular microfluid transportation in fast growing pollen tubes / S. Liu, H. Liu, M. Lin, F. Xu, and T.J. Lu
    Microorganisms and their response to stimuli / R.J. Clarke
    Nano-swimmers in lipid-bilayer membranes / M.-J. Huang and A. Mikhailov
    Phase field modeling of Inhomogeneous biomembranes in flow / S. Aland
    Modeling and experimental analysis of thermal therapy during short pulse laser irradiation / S. Miller, C. Gross Jones, and K. Mitra
    Micro-scale bio-heat diffusion using green's functions / F. De Monte and A. Haji-Sheikh
    Microstructural influences on growth and transport in biological tissue / L. Irons, J. Collis, and R.D. O'Dea
    How dense core vesicles are delivered to axon terminals / I.A. Kuznetsov and A.V. Kuznetsov
    Modeling of food digestion / S. Marze.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Gianfranco Butera, Silvia Schievano, Giovanni Biglino, Doff B. McElhinney, editors.
    Summary: This book combines medicinal and engineering knowledge to present engineering modelling applications (mainly computational, but also experimental) in the context of facilitating a patient-centred approach to treating congenital heart disease (CHD). After introducing the basic concepts of engineering tools, it discusses modelling and the applications of engineering techniques (e.g. computational fluid dynamics, fluid-structure interaction, structural simulations, virtual surgery, advanced image analysis, 3D printing) in specific congenital heart diseases. It also offers a number of clinical case studies describing the applications in real-life clinical practice. The final section focuses on the importance of surgical training, counselling and patient communication. Considering the unique anatomical arrangement pre/post repair in CHD, as well as the different surgical strategy and device options (e.g. stents) for interventions, a patient-specific approach is certainly warranted in this area of medicine, and engineering is helping improve our understanding of individual patients and their particular anatomy and physiology. To reinforce the idea of a necessary dialogue between engineers and clinicians, this book has not only been edited by two cardiologists and two bioengineers, but each chapter has been written by a clinician and an engineer, incorporating both voices in the description of state-of-the-art models for different CHDs.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Foreword
    Part 1: Basic concepts
    1. Overview of computational methods
    2. Congenital heart diseases: basic concepts from a paediatric cardiology perspective
    Part 2: Diseases: modelling and applications
    3. Septal defects: clinical concepts, engineering applications and impact of an integrated medico-engineering approach --- Occluder devices
    4. Aortic coarctation: clinical concepts, engineering applications and impact of an integrated medico-engineering approach
    5. Tetralogy of Fallot, the right ventricular outflow tract. Clinical concepts, engineering applications and impact of an integrated medico-engineering approach
    6. Tetralogy of Fallot: clinical concepts, engineering applications and impact of an integrated medico-engineering approach - Ventricle
    7. Complete Transposition of Great Arteries post Arterial Switch Operation: an integrated approach of imaging and modelling to assess long-term outcomes
    8. Double Outlet Right Ventricle: introductory concepts and applications
    9. Hypoplastic Left Heart Syndrome: Introductory Concepts
    10. Hypoplastic left heart syndrome, Norwood and variants: engineering applications and impact of an integrated medico-engineering approach
    11. Univentricular hearts: clinical concepts and impact of an integrated medico-engineering approach
    12. Fontan surgery and fluid dynamics
    13. Ventriculo-arterial coupling in Fontan patients
    14. Modelling the pulmonary circulation in CHD: clinical concepts, engineering applications and of an integrated medico-engineering approach
    15. Modelling pulmonary arterial hypertension: clinical concepts, engineering applications and an integrated medico-engineering approach
    Part 3: How I used a model in clinical practice
    16. Patient-specific numerical modeling to predict coronary artery compression in transcatheter pulmonary valve implantation
    17. Transcatheter correction of Sinus Venosus Atrial Septal Defect (SVASD) and partial anomalous pulmonary venous drainage with a covered stent
    18. Modelling the coronary anatomy in a case of suspected Kawasaki disease with giant coronary aneurysms
    19. Criss cross heart: is biventricular repair ever possible?
    20. Use of 3D printing for Congenital Heart Disease
    21. Case Report: Three-dimensional printed model guiding transcutaneous device closure of a complex residual ventricular septal defect: comparing apples to apples
    22. 3D modeling and printing in neonate with complex twisted heart: new frontier for clinical decision and optimal surgical approach
    23. Biventricular Repair of Complex Transposition of Great Arteries Guided by 3D Reconstruction Imaging
    Part 4: Training, counselling and miscellanea
    24. Three-Dimensional Printing and its Applications in Education and Teaching
    25. Dassault Systemes Living Heart Project
    26. Cardiovascular simulation as a decision support tool
    27. Artificial intelligence in Paediatric Cardiology
    28. Communication in congenital heart disease: a relevant application for engineering models?
    29. Three Dimensional Multimodality Fusion in Minimally Invasive Congenital Heart Interventions.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Ewart Carson, Caludio Cobelli.
    Contents:
    1. An introduction to modelling methodology / Claudio Cobelli and Ewart Carson
    2. Control in physiology and medicine / B. Wayne Bequette
    3. Deconvolution / Giovanni Sparacino [and three others]
    4. Structural identifiability of biological and physiological systems / Maria Pia Saccomani
    5. Parameter estimation / Paolo Magni and Giovanni Sparacino
    6. New trends in nonparametric linear system identification / Gianluigi Pillonetto and Giuseppe De Nicolao
    7. Population modelling / Paolo Magni, Alessandra Bertoldo and Paolo Vicini
    8. Systems biology / Ruoting Yang [and three others]
    9. Reverse engineering of high-throughput genomic and genetic data / Barbara Di Camillo and Gianna Toffolo
    10. Tracer experiment design for metabolic fluxes estimation in steady and nonsteady state / Andrea Caumo and Claudio Cobelli
    11. Stochastic models of physiology / Boris Kovatchev and Stephen Patek
    12. Probabilistic modelling with Bayesian networks / Francesco Sambo, Fulvia Ferrazzi and Riccardo Bellazzi
    13. Mathematical modelling of pulmonary gas exchange / Dan S. Karbing [and three others]
    14. Mathematical models for computational neuroscience / Mauro Ursino, Filippo Cona and Elisa Magosso
    15. Insulin modelling / Morten Gram Pedersen and Claudio Cobelli
    16. Glucose modelling / Chiara Dalla Man and Claudio Cobelli
    17. Blood-tissue exchange modelling / Paolo Vicini and James B. Bassingthwaighte
    18. Physiological modelling of positron emission tomography images / Alessandra Bertoldo and Claudio Cobelli
    19. Tumor growth modelling for drug development / Monica Simeoni [and four others]
    20. Computational modelling of cardiac biomechanics / Emiliano Votta and Alberto Redaelli
    21. Downstream from the heart left ventricle : aortic impedance interpretation by lumped and tube-load models / Roberto Burattini
    22. Finite element modelling in musculoskeletal biomechanics / Zimi Sawacha and Bernhard Schrefler
    23. Modelling for synthetic biology / Lorenzo Pasotti, Susanna Zucca and Paolo Magni.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2015
  • Digital
    David Collett.
    Summary: Modelling Survival Data in Medical Research, Fourth Edition, describes the analysis of survival data, illustrated using a wide range of examples from biomedical research. Written in a non-technical style, it concentrates on how the techniques are used in practice. Starting with standard methods for summarising survival data, Cox regression and parametric modelling, the book covers many more advanced techniques, including interval-censoring, frailty modelling, competing risks, analysis of multiple events, and dependent censoring. This new edition contains chapters on Bayesian survival analysis and use of the R software. Earlier chapters have been extensively revised and expanded to add new material on several topics. These include methods for assessing the predictive ability of a model, joint models for longitudinal and survival data, and modern methods for the analysis of interval-censored survival data. Features: Presents an accessible account of a wide range of statistical methods for analysing survival data Contains practical guidance on modelling survival data from the author's many years of experience in teaching and consultancy Shows how Bayesian methods can be used to analyse survival data Includes details on how R can be used to carry out all the methods described, with guidance on the interpretation of the resulting output Contains many real data examples and additional data sets that can be used for coursework All data sets used are available in electronic format from the publisher's website Modelling Survival Data in Medical Research, Fourth Edition, is an invaluable resource for statisticians in the pharmaceutical industry and biomedical research centres, research scientists and clinicians who are analysing their own data, and students following undergraduate or postgraduate courses in survival analysis.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    TandFonline
    2023 Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    ProQuest Ebook Central
    2023 Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital/Print
    Lang Tran, Miguel A. Bañares, Robert Rallo, editors.
    Summary: In today's nanotechnology and pharmaceutical research, alternative toxicology testing methods are crucial for ethically and commercially sound practice. This book provides practical guidelines on how to develop and validate quantitative nanostructure-toxicity relationship (QNTR) models, which are ideal for rapidly exploring the effects of a large number of variables in complex scenarios. Through contributions by academic, industrial, and governmental experts, Modelling the Toxicity of Nanoparticles delivers clear instruction on these methods and their integration and use in risk assessment. Specific topics include the physico-chemical characteristics of engineered nanoparticles, nanoparticle interactions, in vivo nanoparticle processing, and more. A much-needed practical guide, Modelling the Toxicity of Nanoparticles is a key text for researchers as well as government and industry regulators.

    Contents:
    Engineering nanomaterials: their physicochemical characteristics and how to measure them
    Assessment of human exposure to ENMs
    The life cycle of engineered nanoparticles
    From dose to response: in vivo nanoparticle processing and potential toxicity
    Literature review of (Q)SAR modelling of nanomaterial toxicity
    Systems biology to support nanomaterial grouping
    Multiscale modelling of bionano interface
    Biological surface adsorption index of nanomaterials: modelling surface interactions of nanomaterials with biomolecules
    An integrated data-driven strategy for safe-by-design nanoparticles: the FP7 MODERN project
    Compilation of data and modelling of nanoparticle interactions and toxicity in the NanoPUZZLES project
    Case study III: the construction of a nanotoxicity database, the MOD-ENP-TOX experience.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Pramod C. Rath, editor.
    Summary: The book deals with basic cellular and molecular mechanisms associated with aging. It comprehensively describes the important genetic, epigenetic, biochemical and metabolic regulations during aging, as well as some important age-related diseases.The book is divided into four major sections for easy understanding. It takes the readers through the various aspects of aging in a story-like manner. Certain interventions for healthy aging such as dietary restriction, regular exercise and maintaining a balanced and peaceful life-style are also suggested by the experts. The book would be a companion for both beginners, as well as established researchers in the field. It would be useful for science education, research, clinical approach and policy making.

    Contents:
    PART I ~ ALTERATIONS IN CELLULAR MECHANISMS DURING AGING
    Chapter 1 Protein Structure and Function in Aging and Age-related Diseases
    Chapter 2 DNA, DNA Replication and Aging
    Chapter 3 Transcription and Aging
    Chapter 4 Ribosomes, Translation and Aging
    Chapter 5 p53 and Aging
    Chapter 6 Paired Box (Pax) Transcription Factors and Aging
    Chapter 7 Telomeres, Telomerase and Aging
    Chapter 8 The Epigenome of Ageing
    Chapter 9 Attaining Epigenetic Rejuvenation: Challenges Ahead
    Chapter 10 Mitochondria as a Key Player in Aging
    Chapter 11 Aging, Free Radicals and Reactive Oxygen Species: An Evolving Concept
    Chapter 12 Stem Cells and Aging
    Chapter 13 Can Autophagy Stop the Clock: Unravelling the Mystery in Dictyostelium discoideum
    Chapter 14 Aging: Reading, Reasoning and Resolving Using Drosophila as a Model System
    Chapter 15 Nothobranchius furzeri as a New Model System for Aging Studies
    PART II ALTERATIONS IN METABOLISM DURING AGING AND DISEASES
    Chapter 16 Aging in Muscle
    Chapter 17 Metabolic Diseases and Aging
    Chapter 18 Interplay Between Nutrient Sensing Molecules During Aging and Longevity
    Chapter 19 Protein Aggregation, Related Pathologies and Aging
    Chapter 20 Biological Rhythms and Aging
    Chapter 21 The Biology of Ageing and Cancer
    A Complex Association.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Pramod C. Rath, editor.
    Summary: This book examines the basic cellular and molecular mechanisms associated with aging. It comprehensively describes the genetic, epigenetic, biochemical and metabolic regulation of aging, as well as some important age-related diseases. Divided into two major sections, it takes readers through the various aspects of aging in a story-like manner and suggests various interventions for healthy aging, such as dietary restriction, regular exercise, nutrition and maintaining a balanced and a non-stressful lifestyle. It describes the implications of aging on the nervous system, metabolism, immunity and stem cells as well as care for the elderly. The book is an ideal companion for both new and established researchers in the field and is also useful for educators, clinicians and policy makers.

    Contents:
    Part I Alterations in Nervous System, Genes, Hormones and Immunity during Aging.
    Neurological problems of the Elderly
    Molecular marker and therapeutic regimen for neurodegenerative diseases
    Neurodegeneration during Aging: Role of Oxidative Stress through Epigenetic Modifications
    Polyglucosan Bodies in Aged Brain and Neurodegeneration: Cause or Consequence?
    Signaling of Nociceptors and Pain Perception: Impact of age
    Association between Ageing and REM sleep loss: Noradrenaline acting as a mediator
    Age related changes in the human retina: a role for oxidative stress.
    Ageing: Influence on Duchenne muscular dystrophy (DMD) and Becker muscular dystrophy (BMD)
    Mitophagy, Diseases and Aging
    Genetics, Ageing and Human Health
    Genetic Syndromes and Aging
    Role of Stress and Hormones of the Hypothalamic-Pituitary-Adrenal (HPA) Axis in Aging
    Sex Steroids, Cognate Receptors and Aging
    Immunosenesence, Inflammaging and their implications for Cancer and Anemia
    Bone Marrow Stem Cells, Aging and Age-related Diseases
    Part II Interventions for Healthy Aging
    Infantile radiation and Aging Stresses: Effects of Calorie and Dietary Restrictions
    Mechanisms and Late Life Intervention of Aging
    Healthy Ageing and Cancer in Humans
    Nutrition for elderly
    Care of older persons in India: scope of policy and technology tools.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Amit Kumar Tripathi, Abhishek Kumar Singh, editors.
    Summary: This book summarizes various tools and techniques used to provide insights into the cellular and molecular pathophysiology of stroke. It also presents rodent animal models to help shed light on the pathophysiology of ischemic stroke. Presenting the latest information on the different types of stroke, including embolic, filament, photothrombotic, and bilateral common carotid artery, the book also describes techniques that are used for confirmation of stroke surgery, such as laser speckle imaging (LSI) and laser Doppler flowmetry (LDF), and discusses the non-human primates that are used in stroke surgery, cerebral venous sinuous thrombosis, and neurobehavioral assessment. Lastly, it analyzes various neuroprotective agents to treat and prevent ischemic stroke, and examines the challenges and advances in treating and preventing acute ischemic stroke.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    About the Editors
    Chapter 1: Rodent Stroke Model Guidelines: An Update
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 The General Guideline for a Rodent Model for Stroke
    1.3 STAIR Committee, Recommendations, and Guidelines
    1.4 Intraluminal Model
    1.5 Different Types of the Occluder and their Success Rate
    1.6 PLL-Coated Occluders
    1.7 Flame Blunted Occluders
    1.8 Silicone-Rubber Coated Occluders
    1.9 An Optimization Technique for Intraluminal Inserting Occluders
    1.10 Optimization of Surgical Procedure
    1.11 The Tamura Method of a Stroke Model 1.12 Infarction Area Estimation
    1.13 Methods for Infarction Visualization
    1.14 Direct Image of Infarction in Fresh Brain Sections Stained with TTC Solution
    1.15 Digital Method for Defining the Infarction
    1.16 Calculation of Infarction Volume
    1.17 Preparation of Stroke Surgical Procedure
    1.18 Koizumiś Suture Method
    1.19 Longaś MCAO Method
    1.20 Neurobehaviour Assessment of Functional Recovery
    1.21 Assessment of Neurological Functional Outcomes
    1.21.1 Composite Score
    1.21.1.1 Bederson Scale and Neurological Deficit Scoring 1.21.1.2 Modified Neurological Severity Score
    1.21.2 Motor Tests
    1.21.2.1 Cylinder Test
    1.21.2.2 Ledged Tapered Beam Test
    1.21.2.3 Pellet Retrieval Task
    1.21.3 Sensorimotor Test
    1.21.3.1 Forelimb Flexion
    1.21.3.2 Forelimb Placing
    1.21.3.3 Accelerated Rotarod Test
    1.21.3.4 Adhesive Removal Test
    1.22 Anesthetics
    1.23 Monitoring and Maintaining the Core Brain Temperature
    1.24 Mechanical Ventilation, Blood Gases, Glucose, and Blood Pressure Monitoring
    1.25 Pilot Study Plan and Implementation of a Preclinical Stroke Trial 1.26 Application of the Suitable Statistical Method for Data Analysis
    1.27 Standard Operating Procedures for Creating a Stroke Model
    1.28 Conclusion and Future Direction
    References
    Chapter 2: Bilateral Common Carotid Artery Occlusion: Stroke Model
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Importance of BCCAO
    2.3 Permanent BCCAO
    2.4 Transient BCCAO
    2.5 BCCAO Sham Surgery
    2.6 Factors Affecting the BCCAO
    2.6.1 Effect of Ischemic Preconditioning
    2.7 Effect of ROS
    2.8 Effect of Mitochondrial Dysfunction
    2.9 Role of the Apoptotic Pathway 2.10 Effect of BCCAO Duration and Animal Model Sex
    2.11 Effect on Blood-Brain Barrier
    2.12 Effect of Oxygen Free Radicals
    2.13 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 3: Cerebral Venous Sinus Thrombosis Rodent Model
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Clinical Manifestation, Diagnosis, and Prognosis of CVST
    3.3 Clinical Recommendation for Management of CVST Patients
    3.4 Experimental CVST Model Protocol
    3.5 Precautions
    3.6 TTC Staining Technique
    3.7 Neurological Evaluation
    3.8 CVST as a Preclinical Model for Evaluation of Neuroprotective Agents
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Mary Jo Fitz-Gerald, Junji Takeshita, editors.
    Summary: This book describes a spectrum of possible solutions to providing comprehensive emergency psychiatric care. It discusses in detail all components of emergency psychiatric care, such as triage, security, management of suicide risk, violent patients, interdisciplinary treatment teams, administration, and telepsychiatry. It has been written by and is of interest to psychiatrists, emergency medicine physicians, nurses, social workers, administrators, the police and security staff.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Introduction: Models of Psychiatric Emergency Services That Work
    Contents
    Part I: Models of Emergency Psychiatry Care
    1: Models of Emergency Psychiatric Care
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Hospital-Based PES
    1.3 Regional Dedicated Emergency Psychiatric Facility
    1.4 Community-Based PES
    1.5 Systems Integration and Crisis Prevention
    1.6 Comprehensive Psychiatric Emergency Program
    1.7 Summary
    References
    2: Business as Usual: Emergency Rooms with No Psychiatric Coverage at All
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Limitations and Capabilities of This System 2.3 Personnel and Staffing Needed
    2.4 Patient and Staff Safety Concerns
    2.5 Collaboration Needed
    2.6 Expertise Needed
    2.7 Resources Needed
    2.8 Consideration of Coordination of Care
    2.9 Interaction with Probate Courts and Criminal Justice System
    2.10 Security Needed
    2.11 Special Considerations
    2.12 Summary
    References
    3: Psychiatric Consultation to the Emergency Department and Co-Management Model
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Liabilities and Capabilities of the System
    3.3 Limitations of the System
    3.4 Personnel and Staffing Needed 3.5 Patient and Staff Safety Concerns
    3.6 Collaboration Needed
    3.7 Expertise Needed
    3.8 Considerations of Coordination of Care
    3.9 Interactions with Probate Courts and the Criminal Justice System
    3.10 Security Needed
    3.11 Special Considerations
    3.12 Summary
    References
    4: Adjacent Psychiatric Emergency Services to the Main Emergency Room
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Liabilities and Capabilities of the System
    4.3 Limitations of the System
    4.4 Personnel and Staffing Needed
    4.5 Patient and Staff Safety Concerns
    4.6 Collaboration Needed 4.7 Expertise Needed
    4.8 Resources Needed
    4.9 Considerations of Coordination of Care
    4.10 Interactions with Probate Courts and Criminal Justice System
    4.11 Security Needed
    4.12 Summary
    References
    5: Crisis Stabilization Services
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Liabilities and Capabilities of This System
    5.3 Limitations of This System
    5.4 Personnel and Staffing Needed
    5.5 Patient and Staff Safety Concerns
    5.6 Collaboration Needed
    5.7 Expertise Needed
    5.8 Resources Needed
    5.9 Considerations of Coordination of Care 5.10 Interactions with Probate Courts and Criminal Justice System
    5.11 Security Needed
    5.12 Summary
    References
    6: Crisis Intervention Team
    6.1 Introduction
    6.2 Liabilities and Capabilities of the System
    6.3 Limitations of the System
    6.4 Personnel, Staffing, and Expertise Needed
    6.5 Patient and Staff Safety Concerns
    6.6 Collaboration and Resources Needed
    6.7 Considerations of Coordination of Care
    6.8 Interactions with Probate Courts and the Criminal Justice System
    6.9 Special Considerations
    6.10 Summary
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Annikki Mäkelä, Harry T. Valentine.
    Summary: The book is designed to be a textbook for university students (MSc-PhD level) and a reference for researchers and practitioners. It is an introduction to dynamic modelling of forest growth based on ecological theory but aiming for practical applications for forest management under environmental change. It is largely based on the work and research findings of the authors, but it also covers a wide range of literature relevant to process-based forest modelling in general. The models presented in the book also serve as tools for research and can be elaborated further as new research findings emerge. The material in the book is arranged such that the student starts from basic concepts and formulations, then moves towards more advanced theories and methods, finally learning about parameter estimation, model testing, and practical application. Exercises with solutions and hands-on R-code are provided to help the student digest the concepts and become proficient with the methods. The book should be useful for both forest ecologists who want to become modellers, and for applied mathematicians who want to learn about forest ecology. The basic concepts and theory are formulated in the first four chapters, including a review of traditional descriptive forest models, basic concepts of carbon balance modelling applied to trees, and theories and models of tree and forest structure. Chapter 5 provides a synthesis in the form of a core model which is further elaborated and applied in the subsequent chapters. The more advanced theories and methods in Chapters 6 and 7 comprise aspects of competition through tree interactions, and eco-evolutionary modelling, including optimisation and game theory, a topical and fast developing area of ecological modelling under climate change. Chapters 8 and 9 are devoted to parameter estimation and model calibration, showing how empirical and process-based methods and related data sources can be bridged to provide reliable predictions. Chapter 10 demonstrates some practical applications and possible future development paths of the approach. The approach in this book is unique in that the models presented are based on ecological theory and research findings, yet sufficiently simple in structure to lend themselves readily to practical application, such as regional estimates of harvest potential, or satellite-based monitoring of growth. The applicability is also related to the objective of bridging empirical and process-based approaches through data assimilation methods that combine research-based ecological measurements with standard forestry data. Importantly, the ecological basis means that it is possible to build on the existing models to advance the approach as new research findings become available.

    Contents:
    Preface
    List of symbols
    1. Introduction
    2. Descriptive Models
    3. Carbon Balance
    4. Tree Structure
    5. Carbon Balance and Structure
    6. Competition
    7. Tree structure revisited: Eco-evolutionary models
    8. Predicting stand growth: parameters, drivers and modular inputs
    9. Calibration
    10. Applications and future outlook
    Solutions to Exercises
    References
    Author Index
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Michael Kost.
    Contents:
    Scope of practice and legal and regulatory considerations for the sedation provider
    Presedation assessment and patient selection
    Basic pharmacologic concepts for sedation clinical practice
    Pharmacology of moderate procedural sedation and analgesic agents and techniques of administration
    Sedation-analgesia pharmacological profile
    The effects of hypnotic suggestions in sedation and anesthesia
    Airway management strategies for the sedation provider
    Sedation monitoring modalities
    Intraveneous insertion techniques and procedural fluid selection
    Sedation considerations for the geriatric patient
    Sedation considerations for the pediatric patient
    Postsedation patient care
    Sedation simulation: design and risk management strategies
    Care of the moderate procedural sedation and analgesia patient: unfolding clinical case study
    Digital Access R2Library 2020
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Lorenzo Drago, editor.
    Contents:
    The concept of biofilm-related implant malfunction and "low-grade infection"
    Mechanisms of bacterial colonization of implants and host response
    Animal models of implant-related low-grade infections, a twenty-year review
    Microbiological diagnosis of implant-related infections: scientific evidence and cost/benefit analysis of routine antibiofilm processing
    The role of biomarkers for the diagnosis of implant-related infections in orthopaedics and trauma
    Antibacterial bioactive glass, S53P4, for chronic bone infections- a multinational study
    Prosthetic joint infections and cost analysis?
    Algorithm to diagnose delayed and late PJI: role of joint aspiration
    Erratum: microbiological diagnosis of implant-related infections: scientific evidence and cost/benefit analysis of routine antibiofilm processing
    Erratum: antibacterial bioactive glass, S53P4, for chronic bone infections- a multinational study
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Ton J. Cleophas, Aeilko H. Zeinderman.
    Summary: The current textbook has been written as a help to medical / health professionals and students for the study of modern Bayesian statistics, where posterior and prior odds have been replaced with posterior and prior likelihood distributions. Why may likelihood distributions better than normal distributions estimate uncertainties of statistical test results? Nobody knows for sure, and the use of likelihood distributions instead of normal distributions for the purpose has only just begun, but already everybody is trying and using them. SPSS statistical software version 25 (2017) has started to provide a combined module entitled Bayesian Statistics including almost all of the modern Bayesian tests (Bayesian t-tests, analysis of variance (anova), linear regression, crosstabs etc.). Modern Bayesian statistics is based on biological likelihoods, and may better fit clinical data than traditional tests based normal distributions do. This is the first edition to systematically imply modern Bayesian statistics in traditional clinical data analysis. This edition also demonstrates that Markov Chain Monte Carlo procedures laid out as Bayesian tests provide more robust correlation coefficients than traditional tests do. It also shows that traditional path statistics are both textually and conceptionally like Bayes theorems, and that structural equations models computed from them are the basis of multistep regressions, as used with causal Bayesian networks.

    Contents:
    Preface
    General Introduction to Modern Bayesian Statistics
    Traditional Bayes: Diagnostic Tests, Genetic Research, Bayes and Drug Trials
    Bayesian Tests for One Sample Continuous Data
    Bayesian Tests for One Sample Binary Data
    Bayesian Paired T-Tests
    Bayesian Unpaired T-Tests
    Bayesian Regressions
    Bayesian Analysis of Variance (Anova)
    Bayesian Loglinear Regression
    Bayesian Poisson Rate Analysis
    Bayesian Pearson Correlations
    Bayesian Statistics: Markov Chain Monte Carlo Sampling
    Bayes and Causal Relationships
    Bayesian Network
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Su Jin Kim Hsieh, Elizabeth Anne Morris, editors.
    Summary: The available information on breast cancer has evolved so rapidly that a textbook understanding is no longer sufficient to make sound therapeutic decisions. Further, the latest findings and data are spread throughout the scientific literature of various medical fields, making it difficult for medical professionals to keep abreast of these advances, and to apply them in their day-to-day work. This book provides updated information on breast cancer, such as the modern molecular classification and staging, and demonstrates how imaging with pathologic correlation can be used in management decisions. In addition, it identifies the most suitable imaging modalities for screening, diagnosis and monitoring for each clinical case. Given its scope, the book offers a valuable resource for all medical professionals (practicing or still in training) whose work involves breast cancer, including radiologists, breast surgeons, pathologists, radiotherapists and nuclear medicine professionals.

    Contents:
    Part I. Updates in clinical and pathological aspects for breast cancer
    1. Molecular basis of breast cancer
    2. Risk factors for breast cancer
    3. Genomic tests
    4. Updates in Surgical approaches for breast and axilla
    5. Pathologic aspects for diagnosis
    Part II. Update in Imaging method
    6. Radiation based Imaging: digital mammography, tomosynthesis
    7. Sonographic based imaging: ultrasound, color doppler, elastography and automated breast imaging
    8. Magnetic resonance imaging: regular protocols and fast protocols
    9. Nuclear medicine based methods: PET FDG and other tracers
    10. Image guided percutaneous biopsies
    11. Preoperative localization techniques
    Part III. Different clinical scenario: clinical management and role of imaging modalities
    12. Screening
    13. Diagnostic
    14. Preoperative (Breast)
    15. Staging (total body - when, how)
    16. Neoadjuvant systemic therapy
    17. Postoperative
    18. Radiation therapy
    19. Adjuvant therapy
    20. Follow up after treatment
    21. Breast cancer during pregnancy and lactation.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Alan B.R. Thomson, L.R. DaCosta, and William C. Watson.
    Digital Access Springer 1992
  • Digital
    Kirsten Haastert-Talini, Hans Assmus, Gregor Antoniadis, editors.
    Summary: "This book focuses on posttraumatic repair and reconstruction of peripheral nerves. Written by internationally respected specialists, it provides an overview of the challenges and the latest advances in diagnosis and treatment of traumatic peripheral nerve injuries. It presents an outline of state-of the-art procedures from diagnostics, including newest imaging techniques, over conventional and alternative surgical approaches to clinical follow-up and rehabilitation, including the latest concepts to improve functional recovery. The purely clinical topics are preceded by neuroanatomical principles and neurobiological events related to peripheral nerve transection injuries and followed by an outlook on current experimental developments in the area of biomaterials for artificial nerve grafts and peripheral nerve tissue engineering. Peripheral nerve injuries not only affect the nerve tissue at the site of injury, but also target tissue and parts of the central nervous system. They often have dramatic consequences for patients, including loss of sensory and motor functions combined with paresthesia or pain, and a reduced quality of life and ability to work. An adequate understanding of the procedures for proper decision-making and reconstructing peripheral nerves is therefore essential to ensure optimized functional recovery."-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Volodymyr Nadykto, editor.
    Summary: This book presents the latest trends and challenges in the development of general engineering and mechanical engineering in particular. Energy sector workers will benefit from findings that reveal innovative ways to solve electrical engineering challenges especially those based on the use of electro technologies. Agricultural and horticultural product processors will find the scientifically grounded recommendations in this book on extending the period of its storage, improving quality, etc. very useful and timely. The effectiveness of the practical application of the trends presented in this book is based on the results of relevant scientific research in the direction of the agricultural production, its economics, management, finance and marketing.

    Contents:
    Opment
    Modeling innovative economic activity of peasant farm
    Prospects of Ukraine on the World Market of Dairy Desserts
    Cognitive modeling in the regional strategic management
    Managing Competitiveness of the Enterprise: Theoretical-methodological Aspect
    International Ranking and Clustering Systems in Complex Evaluation of Demographic and Migration Processes
    Ukraine in the context of the world organic production of agricultural products
    Development and incipience decentralization of authority in Ukraine and formation of its impact on local budgets financial capacity
    Analyses of Personnel Usage at Agricultural Enterprises
    Methodical approaches to implementation of financial bank stability
    Accounting and analytical methods for identifying risks of agricultural enterprises sustainable development
    Managing of the Living Quality of Population in the Social Sphere
    Accounting essence of amortization policy
    Problems and prospects for development of family households in Ukraine
    Comprehensive Assessment of the White Roots Aroma
    Influence of the Growth Regulator Application Method on Antioxidant Plant System Activity of Winter Wheat (Triticum Aestivum L.)
    Effects of Different Dietary Selenium Sources Including Probiotics Mixture on Growth Performance, feed Utilization, Serum Biochemical Profile of Quails
    Influence of Oat Seed Extract Bioflavonoids on the Antioxidant Status of Geese
    Screening of Agricultural Raw Materials and Long-term Storage Products to Identify Bacillary Contaminants
    Development of Formulation and Quality Assessment of Fast-Cooking Grain Composition for Pregnant Women
    Innovative Technology of the Scoured Core of the Sunflower Seeds After Oil Expression for the Bread Quality Increasing
    Effect of Living Mulch on Chlorophyll Index, Leaf Moisture Content and Leaf Area of Sweet Cherry (Prunus avium L.)
    Modification of Modeling Methods Toxic Hepatodistrophy in Rats
    Technological Properties of W inter Wheat Grain Depending on the Ecological and Geographical Origin of a Variety and Weather Conditions
    Multicriteria Optimization of Quality Indicators of Sweet Cherryfruits of Ukrainian Selection During Freezing and Storage
    Effect of Preparations Methyure (6-methyl-2-mercapto-4-hydroxypyrimidine) on Corn (Zea Mays L.) Biological Productivity under Saline Soil Conditions
    Sweet Ices with High Nutritional Value
    Nitrogen in Soil Profile and Fruits in the Intensive Apple Cultivation Technology
    Technological Indices of Spring Wheat Grain Depending on the Nitrogen Supply
    Use of Alternative Types of Fuel for Grain Drying
    Effect of Seed Sowing Period on Antioxidant Protection of Basil (Ocimum Basilicum L.) under Greenhouse Conditions
    Determining the Risks of the Production Environment of an Agricultural Enterprise
    Development of Emulsion Sauce Technology for Preventive Nutrition
    The Influence of AKM Growth Regulator on Photosynthetic Activity of Oilseed Flax Plants in the Conditions of Insufficient Humidification of the Southern Steppe of Ukraine
    Investigation of the Grinding Mode of the Enriched Wheat Products in the Rolling Mill 1- Grinding System of the Milling Mill of Wheat Grinding.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    by Eugene Lepeschkin ; foreword by Frank N. Wilson.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L683 .L59 1951
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Vangelis Sakkalis.
    Summary: Modern Electroencephalographic Assessment Techniques: Theory and Applications presents numerous signal processing and connectivity analysis methodologies addressing a wide variety of clinical applications including epilepsy, schizophrenia, Alzheimer's disease and even alcoholism. Among the different topics addressed, the neurophysiological basis of cognitive processes is also investigated. The goal is to provide a comprehensive overview of the most modern and widely established approaches mainly applied in, but not limited to, decomposing high resolution multichannel Electroencephalography (EEG) and Magnetoencephalography (MEG) signals into functional interconnected brain regions. Synergistic approaches linking both EEG/ MEG and functional Magnetic Resonance Imaging (fMRI) techniques are also discussed. In line with the popular Neuromethods series, chapters present the theoretical basis of each method along with prosperous application domains, in the form of a balanced mixture of theoretical tutorials, comprehensive reviews and original research. Emphasis is given to the underlying assumptions, to technical matters that greatly affect the outcome of each proposed method, to the ambitions and to the domain of application of each method. Furthermore, links to graph theory and visualization of connectivity motifs is also addressed in an attempt to better describe the functional characteristics of brain networks.Authoritative and practical, Modern Electroencephalographic Assessment Techniques: Theory and Applications touches upon both the biomedical and computational aspects of this exciting and rapidly evolving field and will allow for a more in-depth, vital understanding of the brain's complex underlying mechanisms.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Timothy L. Lash, Tyler J. VanderWeele, Sebastien Haneuse, Kenneth J. Rothman.
    Summary: The thoroughly revised and updated Third Edition of Dr. Rothman's acclaimed Modern Epidemiology reflects the conceptual development of this evolving science and the engagement of epidemiologists with an increasing range of current public health concerns.
    Digital Access Ovid 2021
  • Digital
    Reinhold Ganz, editor.
    Summary: This book comprehensively discusses both the history and the current concepts of modern hip preservation surgery. Offering an overview of the game-changing studies on the hip and pelvis vascular anatomy it thoroughly describes the evolution of a new and comprehensive pathophysiology of the hip joint degeneration. Moreover, in the first part, particular emphasis is devoted to the history and current knowledge of femoroacetabular impingement and hip dysplasia. The second part examines the main surgical procedures that have evolved and matured since the 1980s, culminating in a new class of open surgical approaches, such as hip surgical dislocation, periacetabular osteotomies, proximal femoral osteotomies and corrections, and widening the door for hip-arthroscopy. Based on over 40 years of practical and pioneering experience by the editor and 15 years of collaboration with the GICCA Study Group, this book offers a valuable resource to residents, researchers and practicing orthopedic surgeon wishing to gain insights into hip preservation surgery.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    1 Vascular anatomy of the hip: an update
    2 Femoro-acetabular impingement: concept and treatment
    3 Overview on developmental dysplasia of the hip
    4 Safe surgical dislocation of the hip: anatomic preconditions, technique and results
    5 Extended retinacular flap for intra-articular hip surgery: Operative technique and indications
    6 Femoroacetabular impingement - treatment options: arthroscopy
    7 Femoro acetabular impingement - treatment options: open femoral osteochondroplasty and rim trimming
    8 Acetabular reorientation procedure
    9 How to reduce the risk of nerve injury during Bernese PAO?
    10 Surgical hip dislocation for anatomic reorientation of slipped capital femoral epiphysis
    11 Relative lengthening of the femoral neck
    12 Indications and results of femoral neck osteotomy in adults
    13 Subtrochanteric osteotomy for the management of femoral mal-torsion
    14 Surgical hip dislocation in traumatology
    15 Intra- and juxta-capsular osteotomies for childhood deformities of the hip: Surgical technique and follow-up of selected cases.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Rifat Latifi, editor.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive review of the modern hospital and serves as a valuable resource for hospital administrators, clinicians, surgeons, nurses, researchers, and the public who has an interest in the hospital as an industry. Early sections discuss the transformation of hospitals over the centuries, the new medical world order, the concept of the modern hospital, the academic mission of the modern hospital, and the economics of modern healthcare. The text also addresses the nine specific elements of hospital modernization, including the organization of new emergency departments, the trauma room, hybrid operating rooms, intensive care units, radiology, pharmaceutical, nutritional and, finally, patient and public relation services as essential aspects of every modern hospital. These nine elements reflect the most important and most visible indicators of modernization and transformation of the modern hospital. Lastly, this book examines the team approach as an essential component of embracing the new hospital transformation as well as specific perspectives on the modern hospital, such as perspectives of nurses, physicians, surgeons, and hospital administrators. All chapters are written by practicing experts in their fields and include the most current scientific and clinical information.

    Contents:
    The New Medical World Order: Not so flat
    Five Transformative Episodes in the History of the American Hospital
    Hospital and Healthcare Transformation over the Last few Decades
    Navigating and Rebuilding Academic Health Systems (AHS)
    Academic Mission of the New Hospital: More Than Just the Bottom Line
    The Role of the Hospital in the Healthcare System
    Can Hospitals Advance Health Equity in the United States? The Influence of Technology, Economics and Policy
    The Tall Order of the Modern Hospital: Balancing Patient Care with Economics and Academic Missions. Administrator's Perspective
    The Modern Hospital: Patient Centered, Science Based
    Modern Hospitals, Airports, Surgeons, and Pilots: What do they have in Common?
    Disease-oriented Regionalization Approach: Quality of Care and Volume Above All
    Volume, Quality and Research of the Modern Hospital: The Survivable Strategy
    Precision Medicine: Disruptive Technology in the Modern Hospital
    Nanotechnology: Managing Molecules for Modern Medicine
    Advanced Technologies: Paperless Hospital, the Cost and the Benefits
    Newer does not Necessarily Mean Better
    The Winning Team: Science, Knowledge, Industry and Information
    Modern Hospital training Grounds- Dealing with Resident Issues in New Era
    Healthcare Provider-centered: Ergonomics of Movement and Functionality
    Ergonomics in Minimal Access Surgery
    Emergency Department of the New Era
    Trauma Room: “A minute Man” Operating room- Managing the Chaos Using Technologies
    Acute Care Surgical Services: return to Traditional Surgery as Back Bone of the Modern Hospital
    Ambulatory Surgery Services: Changing the Paradigm of Surgical Practice
    Cardiac Surgery in the Modern Hospital
    Transplant Services ? The Surgery is the Least of It
    The Imaging Department of the Modern Hospital
    Intensive Care Unit Model of Modern Hospital: Genomically Oriented, Biology Based
    Surgeon of the Modern Hospital
    The Solo Surgeon in the Modern Hospital
    The Role of Hospitalists in a New Hospital: Physician?s Perspective
    The Nurse in the Modern Hospital
    Wound Healing: Proof-of-Principle Model for the Modern Hospital- Patient Stratification, Prediction, Prevention and Personalisation of Treatment
    Home Healthcare Services as an Extension of Intensive Care Unit
    The Hospital of the Future-Evidence Based, Data Driven
    Embracing the New Transformation Through Team Approach
    Patient-Centered Care: Making the Modern Hospital Truly Modern
    The Architecture of New Hospitals: Complex, Yet Simple and Beautiful
    Patient's Perception is the New Reality: The intersection of multiple stakeholders and their experience and perception of your organization and why it matters
    Surgical Volunteerism as an Extension of Modern Hospital: Serving one Patient at a time and Building Bridges
    The Human Cost of Modern Hospital and Healthcare.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Peiguo Chu and Lawrence Weiss.
    Summary: Since the publication of the first edition of this best-selling book in 2009, the field of immunohistochemistry has advanced significantly. Fully updated to reflect the latest developments in the field, Modern Immunohistochemistry, Second Edition, is a practical guide to all the important diagnostic markers in each organ system. Concise text is supplemented by over 1,100 high-quality colour images and algorithms. The new edition features even more summary tables, highlighting the key points of differential immunophenotypic panels. A new, expanded introduction explains the basic principles of immunohistochemistry, and chapters have been updated to incorporate predictive/prognostic markers and the latest WHO classifications. All chapters are written by the same expert authors, providing a consistent, engaging style throughout and avoiding contradictory advice. An essential text for residents, this is also an extremely valuable resource for practitioners in anatomic pathology wishing to familiarise themselves with diagnostic markers at a quick glance.

    Contents:
    Skin tumors
    Tumors of head and neck
    Tumors of the lung and mediastinum
    Tumors of endocrine system
    Tumors of the digestive system
    Tumors of genitourinary system
    Tumors of breast and female genital organs
    Hematopoietic and lymphoid tumors
    Tumors of soft tissue and bone
    Tumors of central nervous system
    Metastatic carcinoma of unknown primary.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2014
  • Digital
    Johan Giesecke.
    Summary: Highly practical yet authoritative, the new edition of Modern Infectious Disease Epidemiology has been thoroughly updated and revised in line with changing health concerns. This successful book continues to outline the tools available to the infectious disease student or clinician seeking a thorough background in the epidemiology of infectious and communicable diseases. Building on many case studies and practical scenarios included, the book then uses the tools learnt to illustrate the fundamental concepts of the study of infectious diseases, such as infection spread, surveillance and control, Infectivity, incubation periods, seroepidemiology, and immunity in populations. New edition of this popular book, completely revised and updated, Retains the clarity and down-to-earth approach praised in previous editions, Successfully combines epidemiological theory with the principles of infectious disease treatment and control, A highly experienced author brings a personal and unique approach to this Important subject, All students of epidemiology, infectious disease medicine and microbiology will find this text invaluable, ensuring its continued popularity. Book jacket.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2017
  • Digital
    Graham A. Webb (ed.).
    Contents:
    Applications in chemistry, biological and marine sciences. pt. 1, [1-3]
    Applications in medical and pharmaceutical sciences. pt. 2, [4-5]
    Applications in materials science and food science. pt. 3, [6-7].
    Digital Access Springer 2006
  • Digital
    Riccardo A. Audisio, James G. Geraghty, and Walter E. Longo, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Salam O. Salman, editor.
    Summary: This book provides detailed, specific information regarding the non-surgical and surgical treatment modalities currently employed for the management of obstructive sleep apnea (OSA) with the aim of enabling practitioners to achieve optimal outcomes in individual patients. The book opens by offering clear guidance on the medical and surgical evaluation of patients with OSA. Coverage of medical management options includes positive airway pressure therapy, positional therapy, the use of mandibular repositioning devices, along with other treatment modalities. Surgical interventions are then exhaustively described in a series of chapters that document the approaches to specific sites of obstruction. Information is included on operative airway management, and the concluding chapter addresses the care of pediatric patients. Modern Management of Obstructive Sleep Apnea will be a valuable asset for oral and maxillofacial surgeons, otolaryngologists, and sleep medicine physicians.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Robert Dickson, Juergen Harms.
    Contents:
    The beginnings of surgery for spinal deformities
    Basic principles
    The etiology of spinal deformities
    Idiopathic scoliosis
    Scheuermann's disease
    Congenital deformities
    Neuromuscular deformities
    Deformities associated with neurofibromatosis
    Spinal deformity due to tumors
    Miscellaneous conditions associated with spine deformities
    Spondylolysis and spondylolisthesis.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
  • Digital
    edited by Mostafa Metwally, Tin-Chiu Li.
    Summary: "Uterine fibroids are a major cause of morbidity in women. Fibroids have variable clinical presentations, depending on size and location. These include pelvic pain (20 to 40% of patients), bleeding (30% of patients), and anemia. Fibroids are the leading cause of hysterectomy in the United States. Bleeding from fibroids generally presents as abnormal uterine bleeding (AUB) and often prolonged or heavy menstrual bleeding (HMB). Fibroids that bleed are more frequently submucosal or extend into the endometrial cavity. Other problems 8 related to fibroids include problems with implantation, preterm labor, recurrent loss of pregnancy, obstruction of labor and urinary incontinence. Medical costs for patients with fibroids in the United States were estimated as $4.1 to $9.4 billion in 2010 US dollars"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Pathophysiology of uterine fibroids / Mohamed Otify & Hilary Critchley
    Evaluation of uterine fibroids using two-dimensional and three dimensional ultrasonography / Sotirios Saravelos
    Ulipristal and other medical treatments for the management of uterine fibroids / Mohamed Ali, Zunir Chaudhry & Ayman Al-Hendy
    The role of MRI imaging in the management of fibroids / Lisa Shannon & Shahram Abdi
    Fibroids and fertility / Tulay Karasu & Mostafa Metwally
    Fibroids and reproduction / Elizabeth Pritts
    Open myomectomy / T.C. Li & Jacqueline Chung
    Instrumentation for laparoscopic and robotic myomectomy / Ahmed El-Minawi
    Principles and techniques of laparoscopic myomectomy / Ephia Yasmin & Ertan Saridogan
    Uterine fibroids : the morcellation debate / Jimmy Alvarez & Charles Miller
    Total laparoscopic hysterectomy for fibroid uterus / Alpha Gebeh & Mostafa Metwally
    Hysteroscopic resection of submucosal fibroids / Rudi Campo & Cristine Di Cesare
    Intramural myoma and fertility / Dan Yu, T.C. Li & Enlan Xia
    Outpatient myomectomy / Mary Connor
    Vaginal hysterectomy with fibroids / Swati Jha
    Leiomyosarcoma : implications for the treatment of fibroids / Elizabeth Pritts
    MRI-guided ultrasound lysis of fibroids / Jessica Gelman & Charles Miller
    Uterine fibroid embolization for the management of uterine fibroid / Mark Regi, Krit Dwivedi & Trevor Cleveland
    Uterine fibroids in postmenopausal women / Mohamed Ali, Zunir Chaydhry & Ayman Al-Hendy.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    Hilde Löfqvist.
    Summary: This unique book is structured to give the reader a comprehensive view to understand the decline of hormones at midlife and the risks and benefits of evidence based hormonal treatments. The difference between bio-identical and synthetic hormones is shown. With this book the author intends to restore the trust of the mostly positive effects of hormone treatment during menopause. In this book effective hormone treatments that may be carried on for years are discussed. Those hormones may even prevent age related diseases (arthralgia, osteoporosis, cardiovascular diseases) if started at the right time frame directly after menopause, known as "window of opportunity". This book fills a gap for medical health providers and can be of benefit for all women searching evidence-based information and answers on hormone menopausal changes and treatments. The book provides the reader with case histories to show how different women are at the menopausal transition, and what the doctor has to consider in the choice of investigation and treatment.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    About the Book
    Contents
    About the Author
    Abbreviations
    Chapter 1: Midlife Crisis During the Female Hormonal Transition, a Theme with Variations
    1.1 How It Feels When Sex Hormones Are Declining
    1.2 Resilience, the Ability to Cope with Difficulties
    1.3 The Menopause Rating Scale (MRS)
    1.4 Symptoms and Apprehensions
    1.4.1 Hot Flushes
    1.4.2 Sleeping Disorders
    1.4.3 Mental Disorders
    1.4.4 Sexual Problems
    1.4.5 Physical Disorders
    1.5 Cultural, Social and Ethnic Differences in Climacteric Symptoms and Treatments 1.6 Summary for the Health Professional
    1.7 Summary for the Climacteric Woman
    References
    Chapter 2: Hormones
    2.1 What Are Hormones?
    2.2 The Sex Hormones
    2.2.1 Oestrogens
    2.2.2 Androgens
    2.2.3 Progesterone
    2.3 Hormonal Changes from the Conception Until the Postmenopausal Period
    2.3.1 Conception
    2.3.2 The Foetus
    2.3.3 The Newborn Female Baby
    2.3.4 Childhood
    2.3.5 Prepuberty
    2.3.6 Adolescence
    2.3.7 The Mature Woman
    2.3.8 The Menopausal Transition
    2.3.9 Perimenopause
    2.3.10 Menopause and the Postmenopause 2.4 Other Important Hormones, Which Decrease with Age
    2.4.1 Growth Hormone
    2.4.2 Melatonin
    2.5 Hormones That Are Important All Through Life
    2.5.1 Thyroid Hormones
    2.5.2 Insulin
    2.5.3 Leptin
    2.5.4 Stress Hormones
    2.6 Summary for the Health Professional
    2.7 Summary for the Climacteric Woman
    References
    Chapter 3: Menopause Treatments with Hormones
    3.1 Treatment of Age-Related Hormone Deficiency in Menopause
    3.1.1 Oestradiol
    3.1.1.1 Oral Oestradiol (a)
    3.1.1.2 Transdermal Oestradiol (b)
    3.1.1.3 Vaginal Oestradiol
    3.1.2 Oestriol
    3.1.3 Progesterone 3.1.3.1 Oral Micronized Progesterone
    3.1.3.2 Vaginal Progesterone
    3.1.3.3 Percutaneous Progesterone
    3.1.4 Androgens
    3.1.4.1 Testosterone
    3.1.4.2 DHEA
    3.1.5 Phytoestrogens
    3.1.6 Progestogens
    3.1.7 Conjugated Equine Estrogens
    3.2 Hormonal Treatment of Gynaecological Disorders During the Menopausal Transition
    3.2.1 Progestins as Monotherapy
    3.2.2 Progestogens + Oestradiol/Ethinyloestradiol (OC, Oral Contraceptive Pills)
    3.3 Advantages and Disadvantages in the Use of Different Menopausal Hormone Treatments
    3.4 Hormonal Treatment in Menopause After Cancer 3.5 Summary for the Health Professional
    3.6 Summary for the Climacteric Woman
    References
    Chapter 4: Treatment with Female Hormones: Rise and Fall, Confusion and Comeback
    4.1 Positive Attitudes to Female Hormones Until 2002
    4.2 The Impact of the WHI Study, Misinterpretation and Confusion
    4.3 Protests Against Female Hormone Treatment
    4.4 Body-Identical Hormone Replacement Therapy: The European Development
    4.5 Bio-identical Hormone Replacement Therapy (BHRT): The American Development
    4.6 The Renaissance of the Hormonal Treatment
    4.7 Summary for the Health Professional
    4.8 Summary for the Climacteric Woman.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Ton J. Cleophas, Aeilko H. Zwinderman.
    Summary: Modern meta-analyses do more than combine the effect sizes of a series of similar studies. Meta-analyses are currently increasingly applied for any analysis beyond the primary analysis of studies, and for the analysis of big data. This 26-chapter book was written for nonmathematical professionals of medical and health care, in the first place, but, in addition, for anyone involved in any field involving scientific research. The authors have published over twenty innovative meta-analyses from the turn of the century till now. This edition will review the current state of the art, and will use for that purpose the methodological aspects of the authors' own publications, in addition to other relevant methodological issues from the literature. Are there alternative works in the field? Yes, there are, particularly in the field of psychology. Psychologists have invented meta-analyses in 1970, and have continuously updated methodologies. Although very interesting, their work, just like the whole discipline of psychology, is rather explorative in nature, and so is their focus to meta-analysis. Then, there is the field of epidemiologists. Many of them are from the school of angry young men, who publish shocking news all the time, and JAMA and other publishers are happy to publish it. The reality is, of course, that things are usually not as bad as they seem. Finally, some textbooks, written by professional statisticians, tend to use software programs with miserable menu programs and requiring lots of syntax to be learnt. This is prohibitive to clinical and other health professionals. The current edition is the first textbook in the field of meta-analysis entirely written by two clinical scientists, and it consists of many data examples and step by step analyses, mostly from the authors' own clinical research.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Meta-Analysis in a Nutshell
    Mathematical Fram-ework
    Meta-Analysis and the Scientific Method
    Meta-Analysis and Random Effects Analysis
    Meta-Analysis Software Programs
    Meta-Analysis of Randomized Controlled Trials
    Meta-Analysis of Observational plus Randomized Studies
    Meta-Analysis of Observational Studies
    Meta-Regression
    Meta-Analysis of Diagnostic Studies
    Meta-Meta-Analyses
    Network Meta-Analysis
    Random Intercepts Meta-Analysis
    Probit Regression
    Meta-Analysis with General Loglinear Models
    Meta-Analysis with Variance Components
    Ensembled Correlation Coefficients
    Ensembled Accuracies
    Meta-Analyses with Multivariate Assessments
    Transforming Odds Ratios into Correlation Coefficients
    Meta-Analyses with Direct and Indirect Comparisons
    Contrast Coefficients Meta-Analysis
    Meta-Analysis with Evolutionary Operations.-
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Print
    author, Roger E. Schirmer.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RS189 .S29
    3
  • Digital
    John F. Reinisch, Youssef Tahiri, editors.
    Summary: Microtia is a rare congenital deformity where the external ear is underdeveloped or absent. Occurring on average in one out of 12,000 children born in the world, there are very few books dedicated to ear reconstruction and microtia, specifically. Microtia reconstruction is a relatively uncommon and notoriously difficult procedure, where hearing as well as external ear deformity need to be addressed. This book is the result of 30 years dedicated to the surgical treatment of microtia: understanding in depth the pathophysiology and trying various surgical techniques to provide long lasting and pleasing aesthetic and functional results. With the limited amount of published information on microtia and ear reconstruction, Modern Microtia Reconstruction shines significant light on the new techniques and advances currently available. It presents advanced surgical techniques alongside inventive approaches that will lay the foundation on which surgeons can continue to expand their knowledge and know-how of the surgical approach of ear reconstruction. While the literature that is currently available on ear reconstruction focuses primarily on cartilage-based surgery, this book explores several other techniques detailing their advantages and disadvantages for both the surgeon and the patient discussing techniques for primary ear reconstruction, secondary ear reconstruction, reconstruction in the unsatisfied patient, as well as for post-traumatic ear reconstruction. Providing not only full-color images and illustrations but extensive video clips of each surgical technique to truly see and experience the subtleties of the surgery in a variety of patients. The primary audience is plastic surgeons, ENT surgeons, oral/maxillofacial surgeons, audiologists, physicians assistants, and nurse practitioners with a secondary audience of course being highly knowledgeable parents of patients with microtia. With over a quarter of a century experience between the two editors, this book repre sents a major advance in showing a reliable approach to ear reconstruction surgery.

    Contents:
    Dedication
    First Preface: Ear Reconstruction in the Twenty First Century
    Second Preface: Benefits of Connecting the Dots and Staying Hungry
    Contributors
    1: Anatomy and Anthropometry of the Ear
    2: Classification of Congenital Ear Deformities
    3: Microtia
    4: Microtia-Associated Syndromes
    5: Autologous Ear Reconstruction
    6: Polyethylene Ear Reconstruction: A State-of-the-Art Surgical Technique
    7: Complications and Management of Alloplastic Ear Reconstruction
    8: Other Techniques for Microtia Management
    9: Management of Conductive Hearing Loss Associated with Aural Atresia and Microtia
    10: Combined Atresia Microtia (CAM) Repair: A New Method of Reconstruction of Form and Function in Congenital Aural Atresia and Microtia
    11: Bilateral Microtia Reconstruction
    12: Adjunct Procedures Related to Mandibular Reconstruction and Soft Tissue Facial Improvement
    13: Salvage of the Unsatisfactory Microtia Reconstruction
    14: Non-Microtia Ear Reconstruction
    15: Treacher Collins Franceschetti Syndrome
    16: Tissue Engineering an Ear
    17: Anesthesia Considerations in Ear Reconstruction
    18: Medical Photography
    19: Evolution of Porous Polyethylene Ear Reconstruction
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    editors, A. Catharine Ross, Benjamin Caballero, Robert J. Cousins, Katherine L. Tucker, Thomas R. Ziegler.
    Contents:
    Part I. Specific Dietary Components
    A. Major dietary constituents
    B. Minerals
    C. Vitamins
    D. Other compounds with health relevance
    Part II. Nutritional Roles in Integrated Biological Systems
    A. Nutrient-gene mechanisms
    B. Digestive, endocrine, immune, and neural mechanisms
    Part III. Nutritional Needs and Assessment During the Life Cycle and Physiologic Changes
    Part IV. Prevention and Management of Disease
    A. Obesity and diabetes
    B. Cardiovascular diseases
    C. Pediatric and adolescent disorders
    D. Disorders of the alimentary tract
    E. Nutritional management during cancer
    F. Skeletal and joint disorders
    G. Nutrition in surgery and trauma
    H. Behavioral, psychiatric, and neurologic disorders
    I. Other systemic disorders
    J. Food additives, hazards, and nutrient-drug interactions
    Part V. Nutrition of Populations
    A. Nutrition in a changing world.
    Digital Access Ovid 2014
  • Print
    Howells, John G.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RC331 .M689
    7
  • Digital
    Jim Kozubek.
    Summary: This book tells the dramatic story of Crispr and the potential impact of this gene-editing technology.

    Contents:
    Crispr, Cas and capitalists
    The gene trade
    Asilomar
    We can play God in that cell
    Modem Prometheus
    Biopolitics
    Life in a bubble
    To summon a leviathan
    A molecular fairytale
    Secrets from a freshwater fish
    Gene hackers
    Washington.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital/Print
    Hamid Mirzaei, Martin Carrasco, editors.
    Contents:
    Sample preparation strategies for proteomics. Proteomes, their compositions and their sources / Anna Kwasnik, Claire Tonry, Angela Mc Ardle, Aisha Qasim Butt, Rosanna Inzitari [and others]
    Protein fractionation and enrichment prior to proteomics sample preparation / Andrew J. Alpert
    Sample preparation for mass spectrometry-based proteomics; from proteomes to peptides / John C. Rogers, Ryan D. Bomgarden
    Plant structure and specificity: challenges and sample preparation considerations for proteomics / Sophie Alvarez, Michael J. Naldrett
    Improving proteome coverage by reducing sample complexity via chromatography / Uma Kota, Mark L. Stolowitz
    Mass spectrometry for proteomics analysis. Database search engines: paradigms, challenges and solutions / Kenneth Verheggen, Lennart Martens, Frode S. Berven, Harald Barsnes, Marc Vaudel
    Mass analyzers and mass spectrometers / Anthony M. Haag
    Top-down mass spectrometry: proteomics to proteoforms / Steven M. Patrie
    Bioinfomatic tools for proteomics data analysis and interpretation. Platforms and pipelines for proteomics data analysis and management / Marius Cosmin Codrea, Sven Nahnsen
    Tandem mass spectrum sequencing: an alternative to database search engines in shotgun proteomics / Thilo Muth, Erdmann Rapp, Frode S. Berven, Harald Barsnes, Marc Vaudel
    Visualization, inspection and interpretation of shotgun proteomics identification results / Ragnhild R. Lereim, Eystein Oveland, Frode S. Berven, Marc Vaudel, Harald Barsnes
    Protein inference / Zengyou He, Ting Huang, Can Zhao, Ben Teng
    Modification site localization in peptides / Robert J. Chalkley
    Useful web resources / Andre Bui, Maria D. Person
    Mass spectrometry-based protein quantification / Yun Chen, Fuqiang Wang, Feifei Xu, Ting Yang
    Bioinformatics tools for proteomics data interpretation / Karla Grisel Calderón-González, Jesús Hernández-Monge, María Esther Herrera-Aguirre [and others]
    Applications of proteomis technologies in biological and medical sciences. Identification, quantification, and site localization of protein posttranslational modifications via mass spectrometry-based proteomics / Mi Ke, Hainan Shen, Linjue Wang, Shusheng Luo, Lin Lin, Jie Yang, Ruijun Tian
    Protein-protein interaction detection via mass spectrometry-based proteomics / Benedetta Turriziani, Alexander von Kriegsheim, Stephen R. Pennington
    Protein structural analysis via mass spectrometry-based proteomics / Antonio Artigues, Owen W. Nadeau, Mary Ashley Rimmer, Maria T. Villar, Xiuxia Du [and others]
    Introduction to clinical proteomics / John E. Wiktorowicz, Allan R. Brasier
    Clinical proteomics. Discovery of candidate biomarkers / John E. Wiktorowicz, Kizhake V. Soman
    Statistical approaches to candidate biomarker panel selection / Heidi M. Spratt, Hyunsu Ju
    Qualification and verification of protein biomarker candidates / Yingxin Zhao, Allan R. Brasier
    Protocol for standardizing high-to-moderate abundance protein biomarker assessments through an mrm-with-standard-peptides quantitative approach / Andrew J. Percy, Juncong Yang, Andrew G. Chambers, Yassene Mohammed, Tasso Miliotis [and others].
    Digital Access Springer 2016
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Click on Series link(s) for access options
  • Digital
    Mark Roettger, editor.
    Summary: This book is intended as a one-stop reference that will assist primary care community dentists, sports physicians, athletic trainers, and emergency room physicians in meeting the needs of athletes when managing facial and dental trauma and sports-related oral diseases. The opening chapters provide a complete review of sports-related dentoalveolar trauma, with coverage of emergent care, the role of endodontics, surgical issues, and restorative considerations. Prevention of dental trauma by means of mouthguards is then examined, with attention to materials and design, public policy concerning the use of mouthguards, and the role of mouthguards in relation to the ever more pressing issue of concussion in sport. Dental erosion in athletes, for example due to energy drinks, is discussed, as are the possible sequelae of use of spit tobacco, performance-enhancing drugs, and ergogenic aids. The new topic of the potential value of dental appliances in enhancing sports performance is also addressed. The book concludes by reviewing the role of the dentist within the multidisciplinary sports medicine team. The text is supported by an abundance of informative illustrations.

    Contents:
    Introduction to Sports Dentistry
    Epidemiology of Athletic Dental Trauma
    Sports Related Dento-Alveolar Trauma: Emergent Care
    Role of Endodontics in Dental Trauma
    Facial Trauma Oral Maxillofacial Surgical Issues
    Temporomandibular Joint Trauma
    Restorative Considerations of Athletic Dental Trauma
    Prevention of Athletic Dental Trauma: The Mouthguard
    Sports Dentistry and Public Health: Rules, Policy and Politics
    Concussion in Sport: Role of Dentistry
    Dental Erosion in Sports
    Tobacco Use and Sport
    Athletic Performance: Drugs and Ergogenic Aids
    Oral appliances and athletic performance
    Team Dentist: Role of the Dentist in the Modern Sports Medicine Team.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    Thorek, Max.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    M32 .T48 1949
    5
  • Digital
    volume editors, Marilyn M. Bui, Liron Pantanowitz.
    Summary: "The purpose of this book is to describe, illustrate, and review many of the most recent developments regarding modern techniques employed in cytopathology. It is intended for all cytologists, including cytopathologists, cytotechnologists, cytology lab assistants, trainees, research scientists, and anyone who is interested in the field of cytopathology"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The interventional cytopathologist and ultrasound-guided fine-needle aspiration / Rollins, S.D.
    Cell blocks : evolution, modernization and assimilation into emerging technologies / Saqi, A.; Balassanian, R.
    Fluorescence in-situ hybridization in cytopathology / Monaco, S.E.; Dacic, S.
    Next-generation sequencing in cytopathology / Roy-Chowdhuri, S.; Roy, S.; Pantanowitz, L.
    Liquid biopsy : recent advances in the detection of circulating tumor cells and their clinical application / Katz, R.L.; Zaidi, T.; Ni, X.
    Computer-assisted pap test screening / Pantanowitz, L.; Bui, M.M.
    Telecytology for rapid on-site evaluation / Hanna, M.G.; Lin, O.; Sirintrapun, S.J.; Pantanowitz, L.
    Whole-slide imaging in cytopathology / Li, Z.; Quick, M.; Pantanowitz, L.
    Image analysis in cytopathology / Pantanowitz, L.; Bui, M.M.
    Other cytology applications : clinical trials, checkpoint inhibitors, and cytobanking / Pantanowitz, L.; Monaco, S.E.; da Cunha Santos, G.
    Digital Access Karger 2020
  • Print
    edited by Frankis T. Evans and T. Cecil Gray.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    M81 .E93 1958
    1
  • Digital
    Gabriel Cristóbal, Saúl Blanco, Gloria Bueno, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    [edited by] Edward E. Wallach, Roger D. Kempers ; under the auspices of the American Fertility Society.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RG201 .M62
    2
  • Digital
    Sajal Chakraborti, Naranjan S. Dhalla, Madhu Dikshit, Nirmal K. Ganguly, editors.
    Summary: This book highlights the multifaceted roles of Reactive Oxygen Species (ROS) in modulating normal cellular and molecular mechanisms during the development of different types of heart disease. Each chapter in the book deals with the role that altered redox homeostasis plays in the pathophysiology of heart disease. In addition, the book explains how reactive oxidant species interact with their targets and provides novel strategies for attenuating oxidative stress-induced types of heart disease. The book not only covers ROS-induced response in heart disease at the cellular level, but also demonstrates that an imbalance of redox states has its roots in our genes, and explains the ways gene expression is regulated. In turn, it reviews potential sources of ROS, their pathological effects on the heart, and potential sites for therapeutic interventions.

    Contents:
    A. Regulation of Oxidative Stress
    1. Impact of genetic and epigenetic factors on the oxidative stress in cardiovascular disease
    2. Role of aging and metabolic disease in oxidative stress of heart
    3. Role of monoamine oxidases in heart diseases
    4. Role of miRNA in oxidative stress induced heart diseases
    5. Modulation of Oxidative (stressed) Heart Disease by Uncoupling Proteins
    6. Redox regulation in heart by ion channels
    7. Molecular regulators in ROS mediated cardiac diseases.
    8. The inflammatory stress that follows preceded oxidative stresses in the pathogenesisof heart diseases
    9. Metabolic signatures of redox-dependent cardiovascular disease.
    10. Role of heat shock proteins in oxidative stress induced heart diseases. B. Pathophysiology of Oxidative Stress
    11. Oxidative stress in metabolic syndrome : experimental model of biomarkers
    12. Oxidative stress as a critical determinant of adult cardiac progenitor cell-fatedecisions
    13. Role of oxidative stress in hyperhomocysteinemia-induced heart disease
    14. Oxidative Stress and the Aging Heart
    15. Basic mechanisms of ischemia/reperfusion injury leading to cellular and tissuedamage
    16. Oxidative stress in congenital heart defects.
    17. Nitrosative stress and cardiogenesis: Cardiac remodeling perturbs embryonicmetabolome
    18. Oxidative Stress and Mitochondrial Dysfunction in Heart Diseases
    19. Role of oxidative stress, mitochondrial dysfunction and autophagy in cardiovasculardisease: Its pathogenesis and amelioration by different small natural molecules
    20. Regulation of cardiac ion channels in stress related heart diseases 21.In silico perspectives of the mechanism of oxidative stress during the onset of heart disease. 22.Biomarkers of oxidative stress and endothelial dysfunction in the elderly: oxidizedLDL versus LDL oxidizability C. Prevention & therapeutics
    23. Restoring nitroso-redox balance as a therapeutic for heart disease
    24. Oxidative stress role in cardiovascular prevention and disease
    25. Mitochondrial dynamics and mitophagy in heart: role in disease and interventional opportunities
    26. Role of exercise in prevention and treatment of heart diseases: focus on redox balance
    27. Mitochondrial biology and its therapeutic use in cardiovascular disease
    28. Oxidative stress-driven cardiotoxicity of cancer drugs.
    29. Modifying redox signaling to enhance success of regenerative therapy in the heart.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Thomas G. Boyce, MD, MPH Associate Clinical Professor, University of North Carolina, Pediatric Infectious Diseases and Immunology Levine Children's Hospital, Atrium Health, Charlotte, North Carolina.
    Summary: This comprehensive board review book prepares pediatric residents, fellows, and practitioners for the pediatric ID board exam, which is given every other year. Each chapter begins with a short summary and contain 15-20 questions with detailed explanations and suggested readings. Written as a complement to the main Moffet's, the board review book's contents are structured in a similar fashion. The review book also includes two new chapters on the principles of immunization and use of antimicrobial agents, which are increasingly important topics in pediatrics and general infectious disease prevention. While the subspecialty itself is small, general pediatricians see a range of infectious disease on a regular basis. Additionally, infectious disease makes up 7% of the general pediatrics board exam, more than any other topic besides wellness and prevention. Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Clinical decision making in pediatric infectious diseases
    Nose and throat syndromes
    Infectious mononucleosis and mononucleosis-like syndromes
    Oral cavity and salivary gland syndromes
    Eye, ear, and sinus syndromes
    Face and neck syndromes
    Middle respiratory syndromes
    Pneumonia syndromes
    Neurologic syndromes
    Fever and sepsis syndromes
    Rash syndromes
    Gastroenteritis and intra-abdominal syndromes
    Hepatitis syndromes
    Urinary syndromes
    Genital syndromes
    Orthopedic syndromes
    Skin and soft tissue syndromes
    Cardiovascular syndromes
    Congenital, perinatal, and neonatal syndromes
    HIV infection and AIDS
    Exposure problems
    Infections complicating chronic diseases
    Primary immunodeficiency syndromes
    Principles of immunization
    Rational use of antimicrobial agents
    Answers, explanations, and suggested reading
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2019
  • Digital
    Randall G. Fisher, MD, Professor of Pediatrics, Eastern Virginia Infectious Diseases Division, Children's Specialty Group, PLLC, Children's Hospital of the King's Daughters, Thomas G. Boyce, MD, MPH, Associate Professor of Pediatrics, Mayo Clinic College of Medicine, Division of Pediatric Infectious Diseases, Mayo Clinic, Rochester, Minnesota, Armando G. Correa, MD, Assistant Professor of Pediatrics, Baylor College of Medicine, Section of Academic General Pediatrics, Texas Children's Hospital, Houston, Texas.
    Contents:
    Clinical decision making in pediatric infectious diseases
    Nose and throat syndromes
    Infectious mononucleosis and mononucucleosis-like syndromes
    Oral cavity and salivary gland syndromes
    Eye, ear, and sinus syndromes
    Face and neck syndromes
    Middle respiratory syndromes
    Pneumonia syndromes
    Neurologic syndromes
    Fever and sepsis syndromes
    Rash syndromes
    Gastrointestinal and intra-abdominal syndromes
    Hepatitis syndromes
    Urinary syndromes
    Genital syndromes
    Orthopedic syndromes
    Skin and soft-tissue syndromes
    Cardiovascular syndromes
    Congenital, perinatal, and neonatal syndromes
    HIV infection and AIDS
    Exposure problems
    Infections complicating chronic diseases
    The child with frequent, severe, or unusual infections : primary immunodeficiency syndromes.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    Heide Schatten, editor.
    Summary: "The second of two companion books which address the biology and clinical aspects of prostate cancer. This volume, Prostate Cancer: Molecular & Diagnostic Imaging and Treatment Stategies, discusses both classic and the most recent imaging approaches for detection, early diagnosis and treatment of prostate cancer. The companion title, Cell & Molecular Biology of Prostate Cancer, covers classic and modern cell and molecular biology as well as genetics, epigenetics, mitochondrial dysfunctions and apoptosis, cancer stem cells, angiogenesis, progression to metastasis, and treatment strategies including clinical trials related to prostate cancer. Taken together, these volumes form one comprehensive and invaluable contribution to the literature"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Androgen deprivation therapy for prostate cancer / Vincenzo Pagliarulo
    Advances in radiotherapy for prostate cancer treatment / Tarun K. Podder, Elisha T. Fredman, Rodney J. Ellis
    Role of prostate MRI in the setting of active surveillance for prostate cancer / Samuel J. Galgano, Zachary A. Glaser, Kristin K. Porter, Soroush Rais-Bahrami
    Evaluation of prostate needle biopsies / Giovanna A. Giannico, Omar Hameed
    Multiparametric MRI and MRI/TRUS fusion guided biopsy for the diagnosis of prostate cancer / Viktoria Schütz, Claudia Kesch, Svenja Dieffenbacher, David Bonekamp, Boris Alexander Hadaschik, Markus Hohenfellner [and others]
    Applications of nanoparticles probes for prostate cancer imaging and therapy / Tang Gao, Anyao Bi, Shuiqi Yang, Yi Liu, Xiangqi Kong, Wenbin Zeng
    Castration-resistant prostate cancer: mechanisms, targets and treatment / André Mansinho, Daniela Macedo, Isabel Fernandes, Luís Costa
    Peptide-based radiopharmaceuticals for molecular imaging of prostate cancer / Tamila J. Stott Reynolds, Charles J. Smith, Michael R. Lewis
    Targeted Prostate biopsy and MR-guided therapy for prostate cancer / David A. Woodrum, Akira Kawashima, Krzysztof R. Gorny, Lance A. Mynderse
    Immunodiagnostics and immunotherapy possibilities for prostate cancer / Heide Schatten.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Bingmei M. Fu, Neil T. Wright, editors.
    Summary: "This book introduces the latest research in molecular, cellular, and tissue engineering of the vascular system. Topics covered include the roles of endothelial surface glycocalyx as a mechano-sensor and transducer for blood flow, a barrier to water and solute transport across the vascular wall and to the interaction between circulating cells and the vessel wall, the roles of nuclear envelope proteins and nuclear lamina in regulating vascular functions under blood flow-induced forces, and the roles of smooth muscle cells and extracellular components in arterial vasoconstriction. Other topics covered include non-surgical vascular interventions for coronary artery diseases, genesis and mechanisms of atherosclerotic plaque microcalcifications and human abdominal aortic aneurysms, experiments and modelling for red blood cell and tumor cell movement in microcirculation, transport across the blood-brain barrier and its role in Alzheimer's disease, mathematical models for cell survival after hyperthermia, application of hypothermia in enhancing treatment for brain and spinal cord injuries, and damage of eardrums due to blast waves. This is an ideal book for biomedical engineers and researchers, medical researchers, and students in biomedical engineering and medical sciences"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    The role of endothelial surface glycocalyx in mechanosensing and transduction / Ye Zeng, X. Frank Zhang, Bingmei M. Fu, John M. Tarbell
    The molecular structure of the endothelial glycocalyx layer (EGL) and surface layers (ESL) modulation of transvascular exchange / Fitz-Roy E. Curry
    Role of the glycocalyx as a barrier to leukocyte-endothelium adhesion / Herbert H. Lipowsky
    Mechanobiology and vascular remodeling: from membrane to nucleus / Ying-Xin Qi, Yue Han, Zong-Lai Jiang
    Endothelial nuclear lamina in mechanotransduction under shear stress / Julie Y. Ji
    Regional heterogeneity in the regulation of vasoconstriction in arteries and its role in vascular mechanics / Sae-Il Murtada, Jay D. Humphrey
    Microcalcifications, their genesis, growth, and biomechanical stability in fibrous cap rupture / Luis Cardoso, Sheldon Weinbaum
    Abdominal aortic aneurysm pathomechanics: current understanding and future directions / Erica M. C. Kemmerling, Robert A. Peattie
    Vascular intervention: from angioplasty to bioresorbable vascular scaffold / Fengyi Du, Jiangbing Zhou
    On the physics underlying longitudinal capillary recruitment / Jacques M. Huyghe
    Tumor metastasis in the microcirculation / Bingmei M. Fu
    Modeling cell adhesion and extravasation in microvascular system / L. L. Xiao, W. W. Yan, Y. Liu, S. Chen, B. M. Fu
    Transport across the blood-brain barrier / Bingmei M. Fu
    Blood-brain barrier integrity and clearance of amyloid-[beta] from the BBB / Irsalan Cockerill, Joy-Anne Oliver, Huaxi Xu, Bingmei M. Fu, Donghui Zhu
    Mathematical models of cell response following heating / Neil T. Wright
    Hypothermia used in medical applications for brain and spinal cord injury patients / Liang Zhu
    Biomechanical changes of tympanic membrane to blast waves / Rong Z. Gan.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital/Print
    Jörg Kleine-Tebbe, Thilo Jakob, editors ; foreword 1 by Robert G. Hamilton, foreword 2 by Stefan Vieths.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC586 .M65 2017
    1
  • Digital
    editor, Gustav K. von Schulthess.
    Summary: "This brand new book discusses the most relevant technique or combination thereof for each disease and provides guidance on which modality to use -It is a disease oriented reference meant for interpreting integrated imaging studies. While it focuses on PET-CT and SPECT-CT, it also integrates PET-MR were applicable. Features: Allows clinical hybrid imaging users to compare modalities and decide whether to use PET/CT, PET/MR or SPECT/CT to solve a clinical question. Focus on clinical applications sans technological & radiopharmaceutical details. Inclusion of emerging field of PET/MR. New PART III on workflow and normal scans with various clinical tracers. Only book that incorporates PET/MR in a systematic way"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Ovid 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Rita Fior, Rita Zilhão.
    Summary: This textbook takes you on a journey to the basic concepts of cancer biology. It combines developmental, evolutionary and cell biology perspectives, to then wrap-up with an integrated clinical approach. The book starts with an introductory chapter, looking at cancer in a nut shell. The subsequent chapters are detailed and the idea of cancer as a mass of somatic cells undergoing a micro-evolutionary Darwinian process is explored. Further, the main Hanahan and Weinberg "Hallmarks of Cancer" are revisited. In most chapters, the fundamental experiments that led to key concepts, connecting basic biology and biomedicine are highlighted. In the books closing section all of these concepts are integrated in clinical studies, where molecular diagnosis as well as the various classical and modern therapeutic strategies are addressed. The book is written in an easy-to-read language, like a one-on-one conversation between the writer and the reader, without compromising the scientific accuracy. Therefore, this book is suited not only for advanced undergraduates and master students but also for patients or curious lay people looking for a further understanding of this shattering disease.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Molecular and Cell Biology of Cancer when cells break the rules and hijack their own planet
    Cancer as an Evolutionary Process
    Cell signaling in cancer
    The cell cycle, cytoskeleton and cancer
    Genomic Instability: DNA Repair and Cancer
    Cell metabolism in cancer
    an energetic switch
    Cancer immunoediting and hijacking of the immune system
    Angiogenesis
    vessels recruitment by tumor cells
    Tumor niche disruption and metastasis: the role of epithelial-mesenchymal transition (EMT)
    Case studies
    Molecular Pathology perspective and impact on oncologic patients management
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Danny R. Welch and Paul B. Fisher.
    Contents:
    Chapter One: Detecting Tumor Metastases: The Road to Therapy Starts Here
    1. Introduction
    2. Preclinical In Vitro and In Vivo Models of Metastasis
    2.1. In Vitro Models
    2.2. In Vivo Models
    3. Approaches Currently Used to Detect Metastatic Lesions (on a Preclinical Level)
    3.1. Lab Tests/Histopathology
    3.2. Noninvasive Blood Tests
    3.3. Small Animal Imaging
    3.4. Molecular-Genetic Imaging (Promoter-Based Protocols)
    3.5. Circulating Tumor Cells
    4. Approaches Used to Detect Metastatic Lesions (on a Clinical Level)
    4.1. Biomarkers for Metastasis
    4.2. Imaging Procedures
    4.3. Circulating Tumor Cells
    5. Metastasis Detection/Therapy: Combining Imaging with Therapy (Theranostics)
    6. Challenges Faced in Detecting Metastatic Cells
    7. Conclusions and Future Directions
    Acknowledgments
    References
    Chapter Two: The Relationship Between Dormant Cancer Cells and Their Microenvironment
    1. Introduction
    2. Models to Study Tumor Cell Dormancy
    3. Intrinsic and Extrinsic Signals Converge to Induce Tumor Cell Dormancy
    4. Cooperative Extrinsic Signals Induce Dormancy Within the Bone Microenvironment
    5. Endosteal and Perivascular Niches Support Cancer Cell Dormancy
    6. Reactivation from Dormancy
    7. The Immune System and Dormancy
    8. Summary and Outlook
    References
    Chapter Three: Defining the Influence of Germline Variation on Metastasis Using Systems Genetics Approaches
    1. Introduction
    2. Hereditary Factors Associated with Cancer Aggressiveness and Metastasis in Human Populations
    2.1. Epidemiological Analysis
    2.2. Genetic Analysis Human Cohorts
    3. Systems Genetics Approaches to Identify Hereditary Modifiers of Metastasis
    3.1. Breast Cancer
    3.2. Prostate Cancer
    3.3. Melanoma
    4. Conclusions
    Acknowledgments
    References
    Chapter Four: Breast Cancer Metastasis Suppressor 1 (BRMS1): Robust Biological and Pathological Data, But Still Enigmatic ...
    Concluding Thoughts
    Acknowledgments
    References
    Chapter Five: Immune Regulation of the Metastatic Process: Implications for Therapy
    1. Introduction
    2. Key Players
    2.1. Monocytes
    2.2. Macrophages
    2.3. Neutrophils
    2.4. T Lymphocytes
    2.5. Natural Killer Cells
    3. Invasion and Intravasation
    3.1. Macrophages
    3.2. Neutrophils
    3.3. T Lymphocytes
    4. Survival and Extravasation
    4.1. Monocytes
    4.2. Neutrophils
    4.3. T Lymphocytes
    4.4. NK Cells
    5. Ectopic Growth
    5.1. Macrophages
    5.2. Neutrophils
    5.3. T Lymphocytes
    5.4. NK Cells
    6. Therapeutic Implications
    Acknowledgments
    References
    Chapter Six: MicroRNA and Metastasis
    1. MicroRNAs
    1.1. Noncoding RNAs and the Discovery of MicroRNAs
    1.2. miRNA Biogenesis and Mechanisms of Action
    1.3. miRNA Functions
    2. miRNAs in Cancer ...
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Michael S. Wolfe.
    Summary: The Molecular and Cellular Basis of Neurodegenerative Diseases: Underlying Mechanisms presents the pathology, genetics, biochemistry and cell biology of the major human neurodegenerative diseases, including Alzheimer's, Parkinson's, frontotemporal dementia, ALS, Huntington's, and prion diseases. Edited and authored by internationally recognized leaders in the field, the book's chapters explore their pathogenic commonalities and differences, also including discussions of animal models and prospects for therapeutics. Diseases are presented first, with common mechanisms later. Individual chapters discuss each major neurodegenerative disease, integrating this information to offer multiple molecular and cellular mechanisms that diseases may have in common. This book provides readers with a timely update on this rapidly advancing area of investigation, presenting an invaluable resource for researchers in the field.

    Contents:
    1. Solving the puzzle of neurodegeneration / Michael S. Wolfe
    2. Prion diseases / Robert C.C. Mercer, Alex J. McDonald, Erin Bove-Fenderson, Cheng Fang, Bei Wu and David A. Harris
    3. Alzheimer's Disease: toward a quantitative biological approach in describing its natural history and underlying mechanisms / Colin L. Masters, Ben Gu, Simon Laws, Yen Y Lim, Blaine Roberts, Victor L. Villemagne and Konrad Beyreuther
    4. Neurodegeneration and the ordered assembly of tau / Michel Goedert
    5. Amyotrophic lateral sclerosis and other TDP-43 proteinopathies / Jorge Gomez-Deza and Christopher E. Shaw
    6. Parkinson's disease and other synucleinopathies / Mark R. Cookson
    7. Huntington's disease and other polyglutamine repeat diseases: molecular mechanisms and pathogenic pathways / Audrey S. Dickey and Albert R. La Spada
    8. Prion-like propagation in neurogenerative diseases / Wouter Peelaerts, Veerle Baekelandt and Patrik Brundin
    9. Neurodegenerative diseases as protein folding disorders / Jermey D. Baker, Jack M. Webster, Lindsey B. Shelton, John Koren, III, Vladimir N. Uversky, Laura J. Blair and Chad A. Dickey
    10. Heat shock proteins and protein quality control in Alzheimer's disease / Fred W. Van Leeuwen and Harm H. Kampinga
    11. Neurodegenerative diseases and autophagy / Angeleen Fleming, Mariella Vicinanza, Maurizio Renna, Claudia Puri, Thomas Ricketts, Jens Füllgrabe, Ana Lopez, Sarah M. De Jager, Avraham Ashkenazi, Mariana Pavel, Floriana Licitra, Andrea Caricasole, Stephen P. Andrews, John Skidmore and David C. Rubinsztein
    12. Neurodegenerative Diseases and axonal transport / Lawrence S. Goldstein and Utpal Das
    13. Mitochondrial function and neurodegenerative diseases / Heather M. Wilkins, Ian Weidling, Scott Koppel, Xiaowan Wang, Alex Von Schulze and Russell H. Swerdlow
    14. Non-cell autonomous degeneration: role of astrocytes in neurodegenerative diseases / Sarah E. Smith and Azad Bonni
    15. Neurodegenerative diseases and RNA-mediated toxicity / Tiffany W. Todd and Leonard Petrucelli
    16. Neuroinflammation in are-related neurodegenerative diseases / Kathryn P. MacPherson, Maria E. De Sousa Rodrigues, Amarallys F. Cintron and Malú G. Tansey
    17. Neurodegenerative diseases and the aging brain / Stephen K. Godin, Jinsoo Seo and Li-Huei Tsai
    Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Maurice B. Hallett editor.
    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Contributors
    1 An Introduction to Phagocytosis
    Introduction to Phagocytosis
    The Cell Biology of Phagocytosis
    Phagocytosis Dissected
    The Importance of Phagocytosis
    Evolution and Phagocytosis
    Introduction to the Chapters in This Book
    2 A Brief History of Phagocytosis
    Introduction
    Purpose of Chapter
    Let's Start at the Very Beginning
    The Eureka Moment of Metchnikoff
    Inside the Phagocyte
    Phagosomal pH
    Ca2+ Ions and Phagocytosis
    Conclusion
    3 The Role of Membrane Surface Charge in Phagocytosis
    Introduction Lipids That Contribute to Phagocytosis and Phagosome Maturation
    Phospholipid Dynamics and Inner Leaflet Charge During Phagocytosis and Phagosome Maturation
    Role of Electrostatic Interactions in Protein Localization During Phagocytosis and Phagosome Maturation
    Relevance of Inner Leaflet Surface Charge to Phagocytes and Immunity
    Concluding Remarks
    4 Receptor Models of Phagocytosis: The Effect of Target Shape
    Introduction
    Why Modelling?
    Receptor Models of Phagocytosis
    The Basic Receptor Model
    Phagocytosis Versus Other Types of Endocytosis
    The Effect of Target Shape Known Experimental Results
    Modelling Shape Dependence
    Model Extensions and the Future
    Summary
    5 Decision Making in Phagocytosis
    Introduction
    Uptake, Processing, and Release of Long Particles
    Uptake of a Long Particle
    Phagosome Processing
    Release of a Particle
    Myosin-II Does Not Accumulate on the Incipient Phagosome
    Conversion of a Tubular Phagosome into a Bleb
    Simultaneous Uptake and Release of Particles
    Struggle for a Bacterium
    Discussion
    6 Membrane Tension and the Role of Ezrin During Phagocytosis
    Introduction Apparent Expansion of Cell Surface Area During Phagocytosis
    Exocytotic Addition to the Plasma Membrane
    Cell Surface "Wrinkles"
    Membrane Tension and Cell Shape Changes
    Wrinkles and Membrane Tension
    Molecular Maintenance of Membrane Tension
    Ezrin
    Ezrin and Membrane Tension
    Ezrin and Phagocytosis
    Regulation Membrane Tension by Ezrin During Phagocytosis
    Actin Push and the Brownian Ratchet
    Conclusion and Synthesis
    7 Molecular Mechanisms of Calcium Signaling During Phagocytosis
    Abbreviations
    Introduction
    Overview of Ca2+ Signaling
    Phagocytic Ca2+ Signals Ca2+-Permeable Channels Involved in Phagocytic Ca2+ Signals
    ORAI Channels, STIM Proteins and Junctate
    TRPC Channels
    TRPC3
    TRPC4/5
    TRPC6
    TRPM Channels
    TRPM2
    TRPM8
    TRPML Channels
    TRPV Channels
    TRPV1 and TRPV2
    TRPV4
    P2X Channels
    P2X7
    P2X4
    Conclusions and Future Directions
    8 Calpain Activation by Ca2+ and Its Role in Phagocytosis
    Introduction
    Ca2+ in Phagocytosis and Cell Shape Change
    Calpain Activation in Shape Change
    Calpain in Phagocytosis
    Structure of Calpain 1 and 2
    Physiological Activation of Calpain by Ca2+ in Cells Conclusions
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Nicholas Boulis, Deirdre O'Connor, and Anthony Donsante.
    Contents:
    1. Molecular and extracellular cues in motor neuron specification and differentiation / R.L. Swetenburg, S.L. Stice and L. Karumbaiah
    2. Natural history of amyotrophic lateral sclerosis / M.J. Magnussen and J.D. Glass
    3. Genetics of amyotrophic lateral sclerosis / K.P. Kenna, J.E. Landers and N. Ticozzi
    4. Molecular mechanisms of amytrophic lateral sclerosis / M. Collins and R. Bowser
    5. An introduction to natural history, genetic mapping, and clinical spectrum of spinal muscular atrophy / A. McDonough, L. Urquia and N. Boulis
    6. Genetics of spinal muscular atrophy / A.H.M. Burghes and V.L. McGovern
    7. Introduction to gene and stem-cell therapy / D.M. O'Connor
    8. Gene therapy for amytrophic lateral sclerosis / A. Dosante
    9. Stem cell therapy for amytrophic lateral sclerosis / K.S. Chen and E.L. Feldman
    10. Gene therapy for spinal muscular atrophy / M.R. Miller, E.Y. Osman and C.L. Lorson
    11. Cellular therapy for spinal muscular atrophy / I. Faravelli and S. Corti
    12. Clinical trials to date / B.J. Mader and N. Boulis.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Kaushik Parthasarathi, editor.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive review of the structure, function and pathophysiology of the pulmonary vasculature. Emerging evidence reveals the multifaceted roles played by the pulmonary vasculature. To reflect those roles, the individual chapters address topics ranging from pulmonary blood vessel development to vascular endothelial apoptosis, and delve deeply into our current understanding of various aspects of the pulmonary vasculature.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Thomas H. Schindler, Richard T. George, Joao A.C. Lima, editors.
    Summary: This book provides the most up-to-date coverage of the combined use of imaging modalities in order to acquire important functional and morphological information on cardiovascular disease and enhance disease detection. The recent developments in PET/MRI, cardiac CT, PET/CT, and SPECT/CT and their impact on clinical practice are explained, and special attention is also devoted to imaging parameters and protocols for use in practice and research. The utility of multimodality imaging techniques for diagnosis and evaluation is discussed in the context of various clinical scenarios, including ischemic cardiomyopathy, myocarditis, myocardial fibrosis, cardiac sarcoidosis, and atherosclerotic plaque disease. Written by renowned researchers and clinicians, the book is an ideal concise reference on today's most advanced imaging techniques. It will appeal to all clinicians, trainees, and technicians who are involved in the diagnosis and risk assessment of cardiovascular disease.

    Contents:
    PET/MRI: Physics, Instrumentation, and Scanners
    Potential Role of Cardiac PET/MRI in Cardiovascular Disease
    Initial Experience
    PET/MRI for Cardiac Imaging
    Technical Considerations
    Role of PET and MRI in Assessing Cardiac Sarcoidosis
    Myocardial Viability: Hibernating and Stunning Myocardium
    underlying Pathophysiology
    Concepts of SPECT, PET and MRI in the assessment of myocardial viability leading to PET/MRI
    Adding T-1 Mapping and MRI for Myocardial Fibrosis Assessment
    Potential of PET/MRI in Assessment of Cardiovascular Plaque Burden and Activity
    CT in Assessing Coronary Morphology, Perfusion and Viability
    3D Fusion Display of CT-Coronary Angiography and Scintigraphic Perfusion Imaging
    3D Fusion Display of CT-Coronary Angiography and PET-Determined Myocardial Flow Reserve. Is it the Future?
    Adding CT-measurements of Coronary Artery Calcification to SPECT Perfusion Imaging for Risk Stratification
    Cardiac Risk Stratification in Heart Failure Patients
    Combining Assessment of Myocardial Viability with Sympathetic Innervations.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Hina Younus, editor.
    Summary: Throughout history black seeds, Nigella sativa seeds, have been highly revered for its medicinal properties. Thymoquinone (TQ), an active principle component of the volatile oil of black cumin seeds, is an emerging natural compound with a wide range of medical applications, and has several beneficial pharmacological actions i.e anti-oxidant, anti-diabetic, anti-inflammatory, anti-microbial, anti-tumor, anti-mutagenic, anti-epileptic, hepatoprotective, neuroprotective, and nephroprotective. As such, it is important to move TQ from the bench to bedside. This book illustrates the therapeutic importance of TQ, offering a detailed account of some of its molecular and therapeutic properties, and discussing in depth its anti-diabetic, anti-cancer, anti-oxidant, anti-inflammatory, anti-microbial, anti-epileptic and hepatoprotective actions. Lastly, the book examines the future prospects of TQ research and its use as a pharmaceutical.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Contributors; About the Editor;
    1: Introduction; 1.1 History of Using Black Cumin Seeds for Therapeutic Purposes; 1.2 Components of Nigella sativa Seeds; 1.3 Therapeutic Actions of Thymoquinone; References;
    2: Antidiabetic Action of Thymoquinone; 2.1 Diabetes and Glycation; 2.2 Antidiabetic Action of N. sativa Seeds; 2.3 Antidiabetic Action of Thymoquinone (TQ); 2.4 Conclusions; References;
    3: Anticancer Action of Thymoquinone; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Structure and Function of Thymoquinone; 3.3 Possible Mechanism of Action of Thymoquinone. 3.20 Nano-formulation of Thymoquinone and Its Role in Killing Cancel Cells3.21 Conclusion and Future Prospective; References;
    4: Antioxidant and Anti-inflammatory Action of Thymoquinone; 4.1 Oxidative Stress and Antioxidants; 4.2 Antioxidant Action of Thymoquinone; 4.3 Anti-inflammatory Action of Thymoquinone; References;
    5: Antimicrobial Action of Thymoquinone; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Antibacterial Activity; 5.3 Antiviral Activity; 5.4 Antifungal Activity; 5.5 Conclusions; References;
    6: Hepatoprotective Action of Thymoquinone; 6.1 Introduction. 3.4 Action of Thymoquinone on Cancer3.5 Thymoquinone Action Against Cancer Through Modulation of Molecular Targets; 3.6 Cell Cycle; 3.7 Enzymes Linked with Cancer Initiation; 3.8 Growth Factors; 3.9 Protein Kinases; 3.10 Antioxidant Enzymes; 3.11 Apoptosis; 3.12 Transcription Factor; 3.13 P53 and PTEN Gene; 3.14 Phase I and Phase II Enzyme; 3.15 Androgen Receptor; 3.16 Telomerase; 3.17 Cellular Components/Microtubules Degradation; 3.18 Human Trial Study Based on Thymoquinone; 3.19 LD 50, Safety and Toxicity Level of Thymoquinone. 6.2 Protective Action of TQ Under In Vitro Conditions6.3 Protection of Isolated Mice/Rat Hepatocytes by TQ; 6.4 Protective Effect of TQ in Mice/Rat Liver Under In Vivo Conditions; 6.5 Conclusions; References;
    7: Anti-epileptic Action of Thymoquinone; 7.1 Epilepsy; 7.2 Anti-epileptic Activity of TQ; 7.3 Role of TQ in Temporal Lobe Epilepsy (TLE); 7.4 Beneficial Interaction of TQ with Known Anti-epileptic Drugs; References;
    8: Future Prospects and Conclusions; 8.1 Potential Use of Thymoquinone (TQ) in the Inhibition of Important Cell Signaling Pathways; 8.2 Inhibition of Akt Signaling.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Fernando C. Schmitt, editor.
    Summary: This book is intended for practicing pathologists and cytopathologists, as well as for pathology trainees and cytotechnicians. It starts with a detailed description of the extremely important pre-analytical phase for molecular testing followed by a presentation of the key tests and their application in different organs, e.g. the lung or thyroid. Step-by-step instructions for the different assays, reporting and clinical integration of the test results are discussed. The authors help the reader to benefit from their experiences by providing a valuable tool for the implementation of these techniques in daily practice. Though the use of molecular techniques is well established in surgical biopsies, to date they are not widely used in connection with cytological material. However, in some fields like lung cancer or aspirates from the pancreas and biliary tract the only available material for diagnosis is the cytological preparation a fact that has created a need for the standardization of molecular techniques on cytology. .

    Contents:
    Why Cytology for Molecular Testing? Pros and Cons
    How to Prepare Cytological Samples for Molecular Testing
    Molecular Tests Use in Cytological Material (analytical phase)
    Molecular Cytology Applications on Head and Neck
    Molecular Cytology Applications on Lung
    Molecular Cytology of Serous Effusions
    Molecular Cytology Applications on Urine
    Molecular Cytology Applications on Gynecological Cytology
    Molecular Applications in Hematolymphoid Cytology
    Molecular Cytology Application on Thyroid
    Molecular Cytology Applications on Pancreas and Biliary Tract
    Molecular Cytology Applications in Soft Tissue (Pediatric tumors)
    Molecular Cytology Applications in Metastases
    Clinical Integration of Molecular Results on Cytology (post-analytical phase).
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Gajanan V. Sherbet, Newcastle University, Newcastle upon Tyne, United Kingdom, the Institute for Molecular Medicine, Huntington Beach, CA, United States.
    Summary: Molecular Approach to Cancer Management discusses molecular mechanisms of cancer initiation, growth and secondary spread, emphasizing how this information can be used to devise new modes of treatment of cancer, especially in combatting secondary spread. The book addresses the basic concepts relating to cancer biology, the genetic determinants, and the signal transduction cascades associated with tumor growth, EMT, stem cell maintenance and propagation, and invasion and metastasis. The salient features of the signaling systems that are amenable to targeted manipulation are emphasized to facilitate research and development in the design of novel therapies and for the planning of new trials. This book is the only unique volume with coverage of topics that target therapy. As such, it is a valuable source for cancer researchers, molecular oncologists and members of the biomedical field who are interested in knowing more about molecular approaches to cancer therapy.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Sudhir P. Singh [and more], editors.
    Summary: This book discusses molecular approaches in plant as response to environmental factors, such as variations in temperature, water availability, salinity, and metal stress. The book also covers the impact of increasing global population, urbanization, and industrialization on these molecular behaviors. It covers the natural tolerance mechanism which plants adopt to cope with adverse environments, as well as the novel molecular strategies for engineering the plants in human interest. This book will be of interest to researchers working on the impact of the changing environment on plant ecology, issues of crop yield, and nutrient quantity and quality in agricultural crops. The book will be of interest to researchers as well as policy makers in the environmental and agricultural domains.

    Contents:
    Molecular approaches in plant biology and environmental challenges
    Promising transcription factors for salt and drought tolerance in plants
    Role of superoxide dismutases (SODs) in stress tolerance in plants
    Receptor-like kinases and environmental stress in plants
    Role of histone acetyltransferases in plant abiotic stress
    Function of plant heat shock transcription factors in abiotic stress
    Mode of communication between plants during environmental stress
    Molecular approaches for combating multiple abiotic stresses in crops of arid and semi-arid region
    Applications of landscape genetics to study the effect of varying landscapes and environmental challenges in plant populations
    Arsenic in rice grain : role of transporters in arsenic accumulation
    Metabolic engineering of stress protectant secondary metabolites to confer abiotic stress tolerance in plants
    An update on the applications of CRISPR/Cas9 technology in tomato
    Transgenic approaches for enhancement of salinity stress tolerance in plants
    Genome engineering in rice : applications, advancements and future perspectives
    Secondary metabolite pathways in medicinal plants : approaches in reconstruction and analysis
    Molecular biology of glandular trichomes and their functions in environmental stresses
    Gene regulatory networks : current updates and applications in plant biology
    Genomics and transcriptomics advance in plant sciences
    Molecular interventions to ameliorate environmental stresses in orchids
    Development of bryophytes as a new model system to understand the phenomenon of terrestrialization with environmental changes
    Role of endosymbionts in nutritional uptake of sap sucking insects.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Keith A. Foster, editor.
    Summary: Currently, there are tremendous advances being made in understanding the basic science of both the structure and function of botulinum neurotoxins. This knowledge is opening up opportunities in regard to both therapeutic uses and treatment and protection options for civil and bio-defense applications. This volume fully evaluates the status of neurotoxin research and exploitation. The book is a multi-authored collection of chapters written by the leading authorities responsible for the current scientific and clinical research that is advancing the understanding and exploitation of the neurotoxins, and is both up to date and authoritative.

    Contents:
    Overview and history of botulinum neurotoxin research and exploitation
    Pharmacology of botulinum neurotoxins
    Absorption and transport of botulinum neurotoxins
    The botulinum neurotoxin complex and the role of ancillary proteins
    Neurotoxin structure
    The dual receptor recognition of botulinum neurotoxins
    Translocation, entry into the cell
    Protease activity of the botulinum neurotoxins
    Molecular basis for persistence of botulinum neurotoxins
    Clostridium botulinum genomes and genetic diversity
    Botulinum neurotoxin risks and detection in environment, agriculture and food chains
    Botulism as a disease of humans
    Prevention and treatment of botulism.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Archana Singh, Indrakant K. Singh, editors.
    Summary: The book offers an integrated overview of plant-pathogen interactions. It discusses all the steps in the pathway, from the microbe-host-cell interface and the plant's recognition of the microbe to the plant's defense response and biochemical alterations to achieve tolerance / resistance. It also sheds light on the classes of pathogens (bacteria, fungus and viruses); effector molecules, such as PAMPs; receptor molecules like PRRs and NBS-LRR proteins; signaling components like MAPKs; regulatory molecules, such as phytohormones and miRNA; transcription factors, such as WRKY; defense-related proteins such as PR-proteins; and defensive metabolites like secondary metabolites. In addition, it examines the role of post-genomics, high-throughput technology (transcriptomics and proteomics) in studying pathogen outbreaks causing crop losses in a number of plants. Providing a comprehensive picture of plant-pathogen interaction, the updated information included in this book is valuable for all those involved in crop improvement.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Contributors; About the Editors; Abbreviations;
    1: Arabidopsis thaliana as a Model Organism to Study Plant-Pathogen Interactions; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Plant-Pathogen Interactions; 1.3 How Arabidopsis thaliana Recognize and Respond to Pathogens?; 1.4 Arabidopsis thaliana: An Important Model Host for Studying Plant-Pathogen Interactions; 1.5 A. thaliana-Pathogen Interactions; 1.5.1 Arabidopsis-Virus Interactions; 1.5.2 Arabidopsis-Bacterium Interactions; 1.5.3 Arabidopsis-Fungus Interactions; 1.6 Conclusion; Glossary; References. 2.2.4.7 Magnaporthe oryzae2.2.5 Bacterial Biotrophy and Necrotrophy; 2.2.6 Basis of Bacterial Pathogenicity: The HRP System; 2.2.7 Effector Proteins Synthesized by the Bacteria; 2.2.8 Extracellular Polysaccharide and Toxins Produced by Bacteria; 2.2.9 Plant Cell Wall-Degrading Enzymes (PCWDE); 2.3 Plant Defense Responses Against Pathogen Attack; 2.4 Use of Effector Proteins in Plant Breeding; 2.5 Prospects; Glossary; References;
    3: Plantâ#x80;#x93;Virus Interactions; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Environment and Evolution Modulate Plant Pathogenesis; 3.3 Plantâ#x80;#x93;Virus Relationships.
    2: Fungal and Bacterial Biotrophy and Necrotrophy2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Fungal Biotrophy and Necrotrophy; 2.2.1 Effector Proteins Secreted by Fungal Plant Pathogens; 2.2.2 Effectors Produced by Pathogens Disturb the Phytohormonal Signaling; 2.2.3 Phytotoxins Released by Fungal Pathogens; 2.2.4 Significant Effector Proteins Secreted by Few Biotrophic, Hemibiotrophic, and Necrotrophic Fungi; 2.2.4.1 Cladosporium fulvum; 2.2.4.2 Ustilago maydis; 2.2.4.3 Blumeria graminis; 2.2.4.4 Botrytis cinerea; 2.2.4.5 Sclerotinia sclerotiorum; 2.2.4.6 Alternaria brassicicola. 3.3.1 Compatible Hostâ#x80;#x93;Virus Relationships3.3.2 Non-compatible Hostâ#x80;#x93;Virus Relationships; 3.4 Methods of Diagnosis of Viruses; 3.4.1 Serological Assays: Traditional Molecular Method of Disease Detection; 3.4.2 Molecular Techniques or Nucleic Acid-Based Methods for Virus Detection; 3.4.3 Innovative Detection Methods; 3.4.3.1 Lateral Flow Microarrays (LFM); 3.4.3.2 Methods Based on the Analysis of Volatile Compounds as Biomarkers; 3.5 Transmission of Viruses; 3.6 Virus Accumulation and Movement in the Host; 3.6.1 Viral Factors Involved in Plant Pathogenesis. 3.6.2 Viral Long-Distance Movement3.7 Responses of Plants to Viruses; 3.7.1 Cellular Stress; 3.7.2 Development Defects; 3.7.3 Abnormalities in Chloroplast; 3.8 Viral Infection and Physiological Functioning of Host Plants; 3.8.1 Virion Disassembly and Viral Genome Translation; 3.8.1.1 Host Factors in Virion Decoating; 3.8.2 Viral Replication Complex Composition; 3.8.2.1 Host Factors in Viral Genome Translation; 3.8.2.2 Regulation of Viral Replication by Viral Protein Modifications; 3.8.2.3 Interference of Viral and Plant Factors with Hormone Regulation.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Syed Ibrahim Rizvi, Ufuk Çakatay, editors.
    Summary: This book describes the nature of aging, age-related disorders, and the molecular principles of emerging strategies for anti-aging interventions, while also discussing the discovery of targets for geroprotective drugs. Although significant medical advances in the treatment and eradication of life-threatening conditions such as cardiovascular and infectious disease have been made over the past five decades, the prevalence of age-related disorders still remains high in older populations. Intervening into aging is the next frontier in contemporary medicine, and will be of increasing importance over time, as other sources of poor health are combated more and more successfully. Given the universal interest in anti-aging strategies, the book will appeal to a very broad audience. It addresses a diverse range of anti-aging interventions - including stem cells, autophagy, senolytics, anti-inflammatory methods, and telomerase induction - that will be of interest to scientists and researchers from various disciplines in the life sciences.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Preface; Contents; About the Editors;
    1: Aging Principles and Perspectives for Intervention; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Basis of Survival: Homeostasis Versus Homeodynamics; 1.3 Genetics and Epigenetics of Aging; 1.4 Molecular Mechanisms of Aging; 1.5 Aging Interventions: Treatment, Prevention or Management; 1.5.1 Piecemeal Remedies; 1.5.2 Replenishment and Supplementation; 1.5.3 Strengthening the Homeodynamics; 1.5.4 Gene Therapy and Intelligent Redesigning; 1.6 Recapitulation; References 2.12 Non-coding RNAs and Amyotrophic Lateral Sclerosis (ALS)2.13 miRNAs and circRNAs as Potential Targets for Neurodegenerative Diseases; 2.14 Progress Being Made; 2.15 Strategies Ahead; 2.16 Advent of Non-coding RNAs as an Early Diagnostic Tool; 2.17 C. elegans as Model Organism to Study the Role of Non-coding RNAs for Neurodegenerative Diseases; 2.18 Future Directions; References;
    3: The Potential Role of Stem Cell Reprogramming in Antiaging; 3.1 Stem Cells and Aging; 3.2 Recent Advances in Cellular Reprogramming Era; 3.3 Molecular Mechanism of Stem Cell Reprogramming
    2: Non-coding RNAs as Potential Targets for Treatment and Early Diagnosis of Age-Associated Neurodegenerative Diseases2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Neurodegenerative Diseases; 2.2.1 Alzheimer's Disease; 2.2.2 Parkinson's Disease; 2.3 Challenges in Treating the Neurodegenerative Diseases; 2.4 Treatments Available; 2.5 Junk DNA Hypothesis; 2.6 Non-coding RNAs; 2.7 History of miRNA; 2.8 Role of Non-coding RNAs in Various Disease Progressions; 2.9 Non-coding RNAs and Alzheimer's Disease; 2.10 Non-coding RNAs and Parkinson's Disease; 2.11 Non-coding RNAs and Huntington's Disease 3.4 Antiaging Strategy with In Vivo and In Vitro Stem Cell Reprogramming3.5 Therapeutic Approaches of Aging; 3.6 Conclusion; References;
    4: Tissue Engineering and Regenerative Medicine: A Translational Research for Antiaging Strategy; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Stem Cells, Sources, and Its Therapeutic Potential; 4.3 Tissue Engineering for Aging-Associated Disorder; 4.4 Biomaterials; 4.5 Tissue Engineering Strategies for Aging-Associated Liver Disorders; 4.6 Tissue Engineering Strategies for Aging-Associated Cardiovascular Disorders
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    [edited by] John Mendelsohn, Joe W. Gray, Peter M. Howley, Mark A. Israel, Craig B. Thompson.
    Contents:
    Cancer : a genetic disorder / William C. Hahn, Robert A. Weinberg
    Oncogenes and signal transduction / Luca Grumolato, Stuart A. Aaronson
    Tumor suppressor genes / Nelson E. Brown, Philip W. Hinds
    DNA repair pathways and human cancer / Alan D. D'Andrea
    Epigenetics and cancer / Stephen B. Baylin
    Infectious agents and cancer / Peter M. Howley
    Environmental carcinogenesis / Erika L. Abel, John DiGiovanni
    Animal models : flies, fish, and yeast / Elspeth Payne, A. Thomas Look
    Genetic mouse models of cancer / Monte M. Winslow, Tyler Jacks
    Cancer stem cells and the microenvironment / Hasan Korkaya, April Davis, Max S. Wicha
    Regulation of the cell cycle / Yan Li, Olena Barbash, J. Alan Diehl
    Cell growth / David A. Guertin, David M. Sabatini
    Metabolism of cell growth and proliferation / Lydia W.S. Finley, Craig B. Thompson
    Apoptosis, necrosis, and autophagy / Eileen White, Douglas R. Green, Anthony G. Letai
    Cellular senescence / Jessica E. Bolden, Scott W. Lowe
    Role of the microenvironment in tumor initiation, progression, and metastasis / Cyrus M. Ghajar, Ana Luísa Correia, Mina J. Bissell
    Tumor angiogenesis / Brian Keith, M. Celeste Simon
    Invasion and metastasis / Swarnali Acharyya, Lynn Matrisian, Danny R. Welch, Joan Massagué
    Inflammation and cancer / Daniela F. Quail, Johanna A. Joyce
    Cancer systems biology : the future / Andrea Califano
    Biomarkers for assessing risk of cancer / Xifeng Wu, Jian Gu
    Protein biomarkers for detecting cancer : molecular screening / Susan Fisher, H. Ewa Witkowska
    Technology of analyzing nucleic acids in Cancer / Elaine R. Mardis
    Understanding and using information about cancer genomes / Paul T. Spellman, Josh Stuart, Joe W. Gray
    High-content analysis with cellular and tissue systems biology : a bridge between cancer cell biology and tissue-based diagnostics / Albert Gough, Timothy Lezon, James R. Faeder, Chakra Chennubhotla, Robert F. Murphy, Rebecca Critchley-Thorne, D. Lansing Taylor
    Molecular genetics of acute lymphoblastic leukemia / Eric S. Schafer, Judith Margolin, David G. Poplack, Karen R. Rabin
    Molecular biology of childhood neoplasms / David Malkin
    Biology of adult myelocytic leukemia and myelodysplasia / Sean M. Post, Hagop Kantarjian, Alfonso Quintás-Cardama
    Lymphoma / Owen A. O'Connor, Jennifer Amengual, Changchun Deng, Ahmed Sawas, Bachir Alobeid, Daniela Hoehn, Govind Bhagat
    Multiple myeloma / Giovanni Tonon, Kenneth C. Anderson
    Molecular mechanisms of esophageal cancer / Mario D. Terán, Ronan Kelly, Malcolm V. Brock
    Molecular basis of lung cancer / Jill E. Larsen, Ramaswamy Govindan, John D. Minna
    Molecular pathogenesis of head and neck cancer / Matthew L. Hedberg, Jennifer R. Grandis
    Colon and rectal cancer / Eric R. Fearon
    Molecular pathogenesis of pancreatic adenocarcinoma / Rachna T. Shroff, James L. Abbruzzese
    Molecular biology of breast cancer / Adrian V. Lee, Steffi Oesterreich, Nancy E. Davidson
    Molecular pathogenesis of ovarian cancer / Robert C. Bast Jr., Ignacio Romero, Gordon B. Mills
    Molecular basis of prostate cancer / Long-Cheng Li, Andrew C. Hsieh, Davide Ruggero, Kirsten L. Greene, Peter R. Carroll
    Molecular abnormalities in kidney cancer / Sabina Signoretti, Toni K. Choueiri, William G. Kaelin Jr.
    Biology of primary brain tumors / Matthew C. Havrda, Mark A. Israel
    Epithelial skin cancer / Adam B. Glick, Stuart H. Yuspa
    Molecular basis for treating cutaneous molecular / Marc S. Ernstoff
    Thyroid cancer / Steven I. Sherman
    Soft tissue sarcomas / Julie D.R. Reimann, Christopher D.M. Fletcher
    From bench to bedside with targeted therapies / John Mendelsohn
    Cancer therapeutics / William N. Hait, Eric Rubin, Joseph R. Bertino
    Natural and acquired resistance to cancer therapies / Branimir I. Sikic
    Phase I trials today / Daniel Morgensztern, Patricia M. LoRusso, Scott A. Boerner, Roy S. Herbst, Joseph Paul Eder
    Pharmacogenomics / Peter H. O'Donnell, Mark J. Ratain
    Monoclonal antibodies for the treatment of cancer / Louis M. Weiner, Rishi Surana
    Cancer and the cellular immune response / Patrick Hwu, Gregory Lizée, Yong-Jun Liu
    Cancer immunotherapy with vaccines and checkpoint blockade / Drew Pardoll
    Interferons / Ernest C. Borden
    Gene therapy and oncolytic viruses / Tanja Meyer Tamguney, W. Michael Korn, Frank McCormick
    RNA as a therapeutic molecule / George Adrian Calin, Carlo Maria Croce
    Heat shock protein 90 and the proteasome : housekeeping proteins that are also molecular targets for cancer therapy / Len Neckers, Mehdi Mollapour
    Hematopoietic growth factors and cytokines / Suhendan Ekmekcioglu, Razelle Kurzrock, Elizabeth A. Grimm
    Cancer chemoprevention / Scott M. Lippman, J. Jack Lee
    Molecular pathology / Christopher L. Corless.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2015
  • Digital
    William B. Coleman, Gregory J. Tsongalis, editors.
    Summary: This book covers the concepts of molecular medicine and personalized medicine. Subsequent chapters cover the topics of genomics, transcriptomics, epigenomics, and proteomics, as the tools of molecular pathology and foundations of molecular medicine. These chapters are followed by a series of chapters that provide overviews of molecular medicine as applied broadly to neoplastic, genetic, and infectious diseases, as well as a chapter on molecular diagnostics. The volume concludes with a chapter that delves into the promise of molecular medicine in the personalized treatment of patients with complex diseases, along with a discussion of the challenges and obstacles to personalized patient care. Aimed at oncologists, researchers, and all medical professionals who work with cancer.

    Contents:
    Cancer Epidemiology: Incidence and Etiology of Human Neoplasms
    Essential Concepts and Techniques in Molecular Biology
    Cancer Genomics
    Cancer Cytogenetics
    The Epigenetic Basis of Human Cancer
    Cancer Proteomics
    An Overview of Cancer Genes
    Oncogenes and the Initiation and Maintenance of Tumorigenesis
    Positive Mediators of Cell Proliferation in Neoplasia: Growth Factors and Receptors
    Senescence, Apoptosis, and Cancer
    Novel Cancer Therapies Targeting Angiogenesis
    Beyond the Primary Tumor: Progression, Invasion, and Metastasis
    Simple Sequence Mutations
    Single Nucleotide Polymorphisms and Cancer Susceptibility
    Chromosomes and Chromosomal Instability in Human Cancer
    Epigenetic Mechanisms in Cancer Development
    MicroRNAs and Cancer
    Erionite and Asbestos in the Pathogenesis of Human Malignant Mesotheliomas
    Viral Mechanisms in Human Carcinogenesis
    Hormonal Carcinogenesis: The Role of Estrogens
    Sporadic Cancers
    Hereditary Cancer
    Retinoblastoma: Clinical and Molecular Perspectives
    Xeroderma Pigmentosum and the DNA Damage Response to Ultraviolet Light
    Hereditary Colorectal Cancer
    Hereditary Breast and Ovarian Cancer
    The Molecular Basis of Prostate Carcinogenesis
    Molecular Basis of Lung Carcinogenesis
    The Molecular Basis of Skin Carcinogenesis
    The Molecular Biology of Leukemias
    Molecular Mechanisms in Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
    The Molecular Pathology of Head and Neck Squamous Cell Carcinoma
    Ovarian Cancer
    Molecular Pathology of Bone and Soft Tissue Tumors
    The Molecular Biology of Human Brain Tumors
    Cancer Drug Discovery and Anticancer Drug Development
    Biological Principles and Clinical Application of EGFR Inhibitors in Cancer
    Targeting Oncoproteins for Molecular Cancer Therapy
    Therapeutic Agents that Inhibit Angiogenesis
    Small Molecule Inhibitors
    Molecular Detection and Diagnosis of Cancer
    Gene Therapy in the Treatment of Human Cancer
    Personalized Medicine for the Treatment of Human Cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Patrick L. Iversen.
    Summary: This book illuminates mechanisms of resilience. Threats and defense systems lead to adaptive changes in gene expression. Environmental conditions may dampen adaptive responses at the level of RNA expression. The first seven chapters elaborate threats to human health. Human populations spontaneously invade niche boundaries exposing us to threats that drive the resilience process. Emerging RNA viruses are a significant threat to human health. Antiviral drugs are reviewed and how viral genomes respond to the environment driving genome sequence plasticity. Limitations in predicting the human outcome are described in "nonlinear anomalies." An example includes medical countermeasures for Ebola and Marburg viruses under the "Animal Rule." Bacterial infections and a review of antibacterial drugs and bacterial resilience mediated by horizontal gene transfer follow. Chapter 6 shifts focus to cancer and discovery of novel therapeutics for leukemia. The spontaneous resolution of AML in children with Down syndrome highlights human resilience. Chapter 7 explores chemicals in the environment. Examples of chemical carcinogenesis illustrate how chemicals disrupt genomes. Historic research ignored RNA damage from chemically induced nucleic acid damage. The emergence of important forms of RNA and their possible role in resilience is proposed. Chapters 8-10 discuss threat recognition and defense systems responding to improve resilience. Chapter 8 describes the immune response as a threat recognition system and response via diverse RNA expression. Oligonucleotides designed to suppress specific RNA to manipulate the immune response including exon-skipping strategies are described. Threat recognition and response by the cytochrome P450 enzymes parallels immune responses. The author proposes metabolic clearance of small molecules is a companion to the immune system. Chapter 10 highlights RNA diversity expressed from a single gene. Molecular Resilience lists paths to RNA transcriptome plasticity forms the molecular basis for resilience. Chapter 11 is an account of ExonDys 51, an approved drug for the treatment of Duchenne muscular dystrophy. Chapter 12 addresses the question "what informs molecular mechanisms of resilience?" that drives the limits to adaptation and boundaries for molecular resilience. He speculates that radical oxygen, epigenetic modifications, and ligands to nuclear hormone receptors play critical roles in regulating molecular resilience.

    Contents:
    Prologue
    Preface
    Social Entropy
    Virus among Us
    Non-linear Anomalies
    Bacterial Infectious Disease
    Cure 2000
    Chemicals in the Environment
    Immune Defense
    Metabolic Defense
    Analog Genetics
    Eteplirsen
    Regulating Resilience.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    George Feuer, Felix A. De la Iglesia.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RB112.5 .F48
    2
  • Digital
    David P. Clark, Nanette J. Pazdernik, Michelle R. McGehee.
    Summary: "Molecular Biology, Third Edition, provides a thoroughly revised, invaluable resource for college and university students in the life sciences, medicine and related fields. This esteemed text continues to meet the needs of students and professors by offering new chapters on RNA, genome defense, and epigenetics, along with expanded coverage of RNAi, CRISPR, and more ensuring topical content for a new class of students. This volume effectively introduces basic concepts that are followed by more specific applications as the text evolves"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Unit 1: Basic chemical and biological principles. Cells and organisms
    Basic genetics
    DNA, RNA, and protein
    Genes, genomes, and DNA
    Manipulation of nucleic acids
    Unit 2: The genome. The polymerase chain reaction
    Cloning genes for analysis
    DNA sequencing
    Genomics and systems biology
    New chapter to cover metagenomics, symbiosis, epigenomics etc
    Unit 3: The central dogma of molecular biology. Cell division and DNA replication
    Transcription of genes
    Protein synthesis
    Protein structure and function
    Proteomics: global analysis of proteins
    Unit 4: Regulating gene expression. Regulation of transcription in prokaryotes
    Regulation of transcription in eukaryotes
    Processing of RNA
    Regulation at the RNA level
    Genome defense (RNAi and CRISPR)
    Analysis of gene expression (transcriptome)
    Unit 5: Subcellular life forms. Plasmids
    Viruses
    Mobile DNA
    Unit 6: Changing the DNA blueprint. Mutations and repair
    Recombination
    Bacterial genetics
    Molecular evolution.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Print
    by H. E. Schultze and J. F. Heremans.
    Contents:

    v. 1. Nature and metabolism of extracellular proteins.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    F551 .S39 1966
    1
  • Digital
    editor, Ahmad M. Khalil.
    Summary: This book examines key issues in lncRNA biology, including critical studies that have led to the discovery and annotation of lncRNAs in numerous species and the molecular mechanisms for a few lncRNA that have begun to emerge.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Chromatin regulation by long non-coding RNAs
    Regulation of Eukaryotic Cell Differentiation by Long Noncoding RNAs
    Roles of long non-coding RNAs in X-chromosome inactivation
    Roles of Long Non-Coding RNAs in Genomic Imprinting
    Dysregulation of long noncoding RNAs in human disease
    Functions of long non-coding RNAs in non-mammalian systems
    Emerging technologies to study long non-coding RNAs
    Long non coding RNAs and nuclear body formation and function
    The role of long non-coding RNAs in immunity
    Novel methods to study long non-coding RNAs
    OMICs of long non-coding RNAs
    Cancer epigenetics and long non-coding RNAs
    Roles of long non-coding RNAs in human development
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    Richard H. ffrench-Constant, editor.
    Summary: This book provides an essential update on the startling array of novel insecticidal toxins and drugs produced by the fascinating bacterium Photorhabdus. The respective chapters describe everything from the detailed molecular biology of the 'Toxin complexes' or Tc's to the complexity of insect immune response in relation to both the bacterium and its nematode vector. The volume covers both primary (toxin production and regulation) and secondary (natural product synthesis and regulation) metabolism and emphasises the potential use of toxins and drugs in both agriculture and medicine. It also discusses in detail two totally novel quorum sensing mechanisms and the likely role of LuxR solos in sensing the presence of different bacterial hosts. Lastly, the book explores the unique case of P. asymbiotica, which seems to have evolved the ability to infect both insects and humans. This synthesis proves that Photorhabdus truly does offer a 'gold mine' for the discovery of novel insecticidal proteins and novel natural products with potential uses in agriculture and medicine alike.

    Contents:
    Insecticidal Toxin Complexes from Photorhabdus luminescens
    Identifying Anti-host Effectors in Photorhabdus
    Flagellar Regulation and Virulence in the Entomopathogenic Bacteria
    Xenorhabdus nematophila and Photorhabdus luminescens
    Natural Products from Photorhabdus and Other Entomopathogenic Bacteria
    The Regulation of Secondary Metabolism in Photorhabdus
    Quorum Sensing and LuxR Solos in Photorhabdus
    Insect Immunity to Entomopathogenic Nematodes and Their Mutualistic Bacteria
    Photorhabdus asymbiotica as an Insect and Human Pathogen
    A Review of Clinical Cases of Infection with Photorhabdus Asymbiotica
    A Practical Guide to Recombineering in Photorhabdus and Xenorhabdus
  • Print
    Bruce Alberts, Alexander Johnson, Julian Lewis, David Morgan, Martin Raff, Keith Roberts, Peter Walter ; with problems by John Wilson, Tim Hunt.
    Summary: "As the amount of information in biology expands dramatically, it becomes increasingly important for textbooks to distill the vast amount of scientific knowledge into concise principles and enduring concepts. As with previous editions, Molecular Biology of the Cell, Sixth Edition accomplishes this goal with clear writing and beautiful illustrations. The Sixth Edition has been extensively revised and updated with the latest research in the field of cell biology, and it provides an exceptional framework for teaching and learning. The entire illustration program has been greatly enhanced. Protein structures better illustrate structure-function relationships, icons are simpler and more consistent within and between chapters, and micrographs have been refreshed and updated with newer, clearer, or better images. As a new feature, each chapter now contains intriguing open-ended questions highlighting "What We Don't Know," introducing students to challenging areas of future research. Updated end-of-chapter problems reflect new research discussed in the text. Thought-provoking end-of-chapter questions have been expanded to all chapters, including questions on developmental biology, tissues and stem cells, the immune system, and pathogens."-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Cells and genomes
    Cell chemistry and bioenergetics
    Proteins
    DNA, chromosomes, and genomes
    DNA replication, repair, and recombination
    How cells read the genome: from DNA to protein
    Control of gene expression
    Analyzing cells, molecules, and systems
    Visualizing cells
    Membrane structure
    Membrane transport of small molecules and the electrical properties of membranes
    Intracellular compartments and protein sorting
    Intracellular membrane traffic
    Energy conversion: mitochondria and chloroplasts
    Cell signaling
    The cytoskeleton
    The cell cycle
    Cell death
    Cell junctions and the extracellular matrix
    Cancer
    Development of multicellular organisms
    Stem cells and tissue renewal
    Pathogens and infection
    The innate and adaptive immune systems.
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
  • Print
    Bruce Alberts, Rebecca Heald, Alexander Johnson, David Morgan, Martin Raff, Keith Roberts, Peter Walter ; with problems by John Wilson, Tim Hunt.
    Contents:
    Part I. Introduction to the Cell
    Chapter 1. Cells, genomes, and the diversity of life
    Chapter 2. Cell chemistry and bioenergetics
    Chapter 3. Proteins
    Part II. Basic Genetic Mechanisms
    Chapter 4. DNA, chromosomes, and genomes
    Chapter 5. DNA replication, repair, and recombination
    Chapter 6. How cells read the genome : From DNA to protein
    Chapter 7. Control of gene expression
    Part III. Ways of Working with Cells
    Chapter 8. Analyzing cells, molecules, and systems
    Chapter 9. Visualizing cells and their molecules
    Part IV. Internal Organization of the Cell
    Chapter 10. Membrane structure
    Chapter 11. Small-molecule transport and electrical properties of membranes
    Chapter 12. Intracellular organization and protein sorting
    Chapter 13. Intracellular membrane traffic
    Chapter 14. Energy conversion and metabolic compartmentation : Mitochondria and chloroplasts
    Chapter 15. Cell signaling
    Chapter 16. The cytoskeleton
    Chapter 17. The cell cycle
    Chapter 18. Cell death
    Part V. Cells in Their Social Context
    Chapter 19. Cell junctions and the extracellular matrix
    Chapter 20. Cancer
    Chapter 21. Development of multicellular organisms
    Chapter 22. Stem cells in tissue homeostasis and regeneration
    Chapter 23. Pathogens and infection
    Chapter 24. The innate and adaptive immune systems
    Glossary
    Index.
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
  • Digital
    Nalini M. Rajamannan, editor.
    Summary: This book presents the cellular details and the basic molecular biology approaches for understanding cardiac valvular disease. It provides novel cellular targets for developing future clinical trials and comprehensive clinical discussion of this expanding field. Molecular Biology of Valvular Heart Disease will guide physicians on the potential medical therapies to treat valvular heart disease while providing a platform for cellular targeting of valvular heart disease. Residents and fellows in cardiology, interventional cardiology, cardiac surgery, and current and future valve biologists alike will find this book to be an invaluable resource for developing further interest and understanding of the cellular basis for cardiac valvular disease treatment.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Susan Carson, Heather B. Miller, D. Scott Witherow, Melissa C. Srougi.
    Contents:
    Part I. Manipulation of DNA
    Getting oriented: practicing with micropipettes
    Purification and digestion of plasmid (vector) DNA
    Completion of vector preparation and polymerase chain reaction amplification of egfp
    Preparation on insert DNA (egfp) PCR product
    DNA ligation and transformation of Escherichia coli
    Part II. Screening transformants
    Screening of transformants, part I
    Screening of transformants, part II
    Analysis of DNA sequence from a positive clone
    Part III. Expression, detection, and purification of recombinant proteins from bacteria
    Expressions of fusion protein from positive clones, SDS-PAGE and Western Blot: Part I
    Expressions of fusion protein from positive clones, SDS-PAGE and Western Blot: Part II
    Extraction of recombinant protein from Escherichia coli using a glutathione affinity culture
    Analysis of purification fractions
    Part IV. Analysis of mRNA levels
    Total RNA purification
    Analysis of gst:egfp mRNA levels by RT-qPCR: Part I
    Analysis of gst:egfp mRNA levels by RT-qPCR: Part II
    Analysis of gst:egfp mRNA levels by semiquantitative RT-PCR, Part I
    Analysis of gst:egfp mRNA levels by semiquantitative RT-PCR, Part II
    Part V. Modulation of gene expression
    Culturing mammalian cells
    Transient transfection of mammalian cells
    RNAi-mediated knockdown of EGFP, Part I
    RNAi-mediated knockdown of EGFP, Part II
    RNAi-mediated knockdown of EGFP, Part III
    CRISPR-mediated knockout of EGFP, Part I
    CRISPR-mediated knockout of EGFP, Part II
    Advanced CRISPR, Part I
    Advanced CRISPR, Part II
    Interim laboratory session
    Advanced CRISPR, Part III
    Advanced CRISPR, Part IV
    Advanced CRISPR, Part V
    Advanced CRISPR, Part VI.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Print
    Harvey Lodish, Arnold Berk, Chris Kaiser, Monty Krieger, Anthony Bretscher, Hidde Ploegh, Kelsey Martin, Michael Yaffe, Angelika Amon.
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
  • Digital
    edited by Lorenzo Galluzzi, José Manuel Bravo-San Pedro and Guido Kroemer.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
  • Digital
    Bin Yang, Jianyu Rao, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Advantage of molecular testing using cytologic materials
    3. Validation of molecular techniques in liquid-based specimens
    4. Establishment of molecular cytology laboratory
    5. Researches on molecular cytopathology
    6. Molecular Biomarkers in cervical cytology
    7. Molecular Biomarkers in thyroid cytology
    8. Molecular Biomarkers in head and neck cytology
    9. Molecular Biomarkers in pulmonary cytology
    10. Molecular Biomarkers in breast cytology
    11. Molecular Biomarkers in urine cytology
    12. Molecular Biomarkers in hepatobiliary and pancreatic cytology
    13. Molecular Biomarkers in mesothelioma and body fluid cytology
    14. Molecular Biomarkers in soft tissue cytology
    15. Molecular Biomarkers in brain tumors
    16. Molecular cytopathology in therapeutic surveillance.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Csaba Ortutay, Zsuzsanna Ortutay.
    Contents:
    Introduction to R statistical environment
    Simple sequence analysis
    Annotating gene groups
    Next-generation sequencing : introduction and genomic applications
    Quantitative transcriptomics : qRT-PCR
    Advanced transcriptomics : gene expression microarrays
    Next-generation sequencing in transcriptomics : RNA-seq experiments
    Deciphering the regulome : from CHIP to CHIP-seq
    Inferring regulatory and other networks from gene expression data
    Analysis of biological networks
    Proteomics : mass spectrometry
    Measuring protein abundance with ELISA
    Flow cytometry : counting and sorting stained cells.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Barbara Burtness, Erica Golemis, editors.
    Summary: Head and neck cancers, involving sites from the nasopharynx to the subglottic larynx, are frequently devastating cancers that afflict patients around the world. These cancers are frequently locally advanced prior to detection, and require multimodality therapy that is associated with high morbidity. As this book addresses this difficult disease, it accomplishes three main goals. First, it introduces the etiology and subclasses of squamous cell carcinomas of the head and neck (SCCHNs), and how these factors affect prognosis. Although habitual exposures to tobacco, alcohol, and other agents have historically been the main causes of SCCHN, a rising proportion of oropharynx cancers arise from transforming human papillomavirus (HPV) infection. These two broad classes of SCCHN have significant differences in disease profile and response to treatment, as we discuss. Second, it summarizes the current state of understanding of the genetic, epigenetic and protein expression changes associated with the various classes of SCCHN. In the past decade, disease pathogenesis of SCCHN has been appreciated to involve deregulation of multiple tumor pathways, including the receptor tyrosine kinases (RTKs) EGFR, ERBB2, ERBB3, c-MET, and IGF1R; transforming growth factor β (TGFβ); Notch; cytoplasmic signaling proteins including PTEN, PI3K, JAK/STAT, and Wnt-responsive β-catenin; mutation control systems, including p53 and the DNA damage repair (DDR) machinery; and hypoxic response. The specific understanding of the action of these proteins in SCCHN is presented here. Finally, this book defines potential therapeutic targets for improved management of the disease in the future, discussing prospects for improved prediction of prognosis.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Barbara Burtness, Erica A. Golemis.
    Summary: Squamous cell cancers of the head and neck (SCCHN), also known as head and neck cancers (HNC) encompass malignancies of the oral cavity, larynx, nasopharynx and pharynx, and are diagnosed in over 500,000 patients worldwide each year, accounting for 5% of all malignancies. It is estimated that approximately 50,000 patients develop head and neck cancer annually in the United States, of whom approximately 50% succumb to this cancer. For most cases of SCCHN, treatment is multimodal, often combining surgery or irradiation with chemotherapy; even successfully treated patients frequently experience durable and severe side effects. Improving cure rates and reducing chronic morbidity are urgent clinical needs for head and neck cancer.^However, in contrast to cancer types such as breast or prostate that have been much studied and have well-defined biology, until recently, relatively few researchers investigated the molecular basis of HNC, making it difficult to design targeted treatments with better efficacy and less debilitating side effects. This volume will provide an overview of the factors contributing to disease pathogenesis, including the recognition of discrete molecular subtypes with distinct etiology, prognosis, and treatment response. This volume will familiarize the reader with the critical signaling pathways and oncogenic drivers for HNC. It will outline the differences between HPV-positive and HPV-negative disease, and how these differences affect treatment choice and outcome.^The book will emphasize developments in the past five years, including the growing understanding of the genomic and epigenomic features of the disease based on analysis of next generation sequencing (NGS) data, and timely topics such as the analysis of HNC stem cell populations, non-coding mRNAs, and inflammatory response. It will address exciting new therapeutic approaches such as the use of immunotherapies to treat HNC patients. Overall, the book will provide the reader with current understanding of the biology and treatment of the disease, and describe timely questions that will guide future research aimed at controlling and curing this disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Seiji Isonishi, Yoshihiro Kikuch, editors.
    Contents:
    1 Cancer Stem Cells in gynecologic cancer
    2 Patient-derived xenograft models in gynaecological malignancies
    3 Cancer genomic profiling of gynecological malignancies by Todai OncoPanel, a twin DNA and RNA panel
    4 Investigating the molecular carcinogenesis of ovarian high-grade serous cancer
    5 The role of G protein-coupled receptor signaling in gynecologic malignancy
    6 Tailor-made therapy according genetic alteration in epithelial ovarian cancers
    7 Signaling and drug resistance
    8 Molecular analysis in endometrial carcinoma
    9 Molecular Landscape in Ovarian Clear Cell Carcinoma
    10 Molecular pathology and clinicopathological significance of endometrial carcinoma
    11 Novel approach for therapeutics of cervical cancer based on HPV-associated carcinogenesis at the cervix
    12 Hereditary gynecological malignancy and molecular features.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    W. Edward Highsmith, Jr., editor.
    Summary: Molecular Diagnostics: 12 Tests That Changed Everything focuses on specific laboratory tests and emphasizes how the availability of these tests has altered how clinicians treat their patients. Presented as a standard outline, each chapter focuses on a specific molecular test and provides background on the test and its clinical applications. Continuing with some discussion on how the test is done, interpreted, and used clinically, each chapter then concludes with a discussion of how that test has changed the way medicine is practiced with respect to the disease or condition in question. Authored by renowned experts in the field, Molecular Diagnostics: 12 Tests That Changed Everything is a valuable resource for pathologists, pathology residents, laboratory directors, development personnel, lab medicine fellows and those working in the broad area of oncology, infectious disease and genetics.

    Contents:
    Clinical FISH Testing for the Diagnosis of Solid Tumors
    Epidermal Growth Factor Receptor Testing in Lung Adenocarcinoma
    The Human Epidermal Growth Factor Receptor 2 (HER2)
    Tamoxifen and Irinotecan Pharmacogenomics
    Hepatitis C Virus Testing
    Laboratory Testing for HIV Infection: Advances after 27 years
    Detection of Herpes Simplex Virus in Cerebrospinal Fluid using Real-time PCR
    Toward a Safer Blood Supply: The Impact of Molecular Testing
    Chromosomal Microarrays
    BRCA1 and BRCA2 Testing in Inherited Breast Cancer
    Cystic Fibrosis: Carrier Testing, Newborn Screening, and Diagnostic Testing
    Newborn Screening by Tandem Mass Spectrometry and Molecular Confirmation
    Next Generation Clinical Diagnostics: The Sequence of Events.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Lela Buckingham.
    Contents:
    Nucleic acids and proteins
    Gene expression and epigenetics
    Nucleic acid extraction methods
    Resolution and detection of nucleic acids
    Analysis and characterization of nucleic acids and proteins
    Nucleic acid amplification
    Chromosomal structure and chromosomal mutations
    Gene mutations
    DNA sequencing
    DNA polymorphisms and human identification
    Detection and identification of microorganisms
    Molecular detection of inherited diseases
    Molecular oncology
    DNA-based tissue typing
    Quality assurance and quality control in the molecular laboratory.
    Digital Access R2Library 2019
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    edited by E. van Pelt-Verkuil, W.B. van Leeuwen, R. te Witt.
    Summary: The books Molecular Diagnostics Part 1 and 2 provide a comprehensive and practical overview of the state-of-the-art molecular biological diagnostic strategies that are being used in a wide variety of disciplines. The editors and experts in their respective fields have combined their knowledge to write these two books. Many years of experience in the development, application and quality control of molecular diagnostic methods is reflected herewith. Molecular Diagnostics Part 1 is dedicated to the theoretical backgrounds of the technologies often applied in molecular diagnostics, in which nucleic acid amplification methods (such as real-time PCR), sequencing and bioinformatics are the basic tools. The assay design and -development, combined with items of trouble-shooting are described in detail. As a foundation of reliable molecular diagnostic assays, the quality control required for validation, implementation and performance of molecular diagnostic assays is thoroughly discussed. This book also provides extensive information for those working with molecular techniques in a wide variety of research applications using conventional and real-time PCR technology, Sanger and high throughput sequencing techniques, and bioinformatics. Molecular Diagnostics Part 2 highlights the applications of the molecular diagnostic methods in the various diagnostic laboratories, comprising: - Clinical microbiology - Clinical chemistry - Clinical genetics - Clinical pathology - Molecular hematopathology - Veterinary health - Plant health - Food safety Both full-color and well-illustrated books are particularly valuable for students, clinicians, scientists and other professionals who are interested in (designing) molecular diagnostic methods and for those who wish to broaden their knowledge on the current molecular biological revolution. The information in the books highlights the trend of the integration of multiple (clinical) disciplines into one universal molecular laboratory.

    Contents:
    The importance of nucleic acids in diagnostics
    Background and analysis of nucleic acids
    Primers and probes
    Basic principles of nucleic acid hybridisation
    Principles of PCR
    Quality assurance, management and control in molecular diagnostics
    Quantitative isothermal molecular amplification techniques
    DNA sequencing
    Bioinformatics
    The ongoing revolution of MALDI TOF Mass Spectrometry for Molecular Diagnostics
    Information in the amplification curve.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Asfar S. Azmi.
    Summary: Molecular Diagnostics and Treatment of Pancreatic Cancer describes the different emerging applications of systems biology and how it is shaping modern pancreatic cancer research. This book begins by introducing the current state of the art knowledge, trends in diagnostics, progress in disease model systems as well as new treatment and palliative care strategies in pancreatic cancer. Specific sections are dedicated to enlighten the readers to newer discoveries that have emerged from gene expression profiling, proteomics, metabolomics and systems level analyses of pancreatic cancer datasets.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology, Treatment, and Outcome of Pancreatic Cancer
    Advances in Primary Cell Culture of Pancreatic Cancer
    Multimodal Therapies for Pancreatic Cancer
    The Role of Notch Signaling Pathway in the Progression of Pancreatic Cancer
    Bioinformatics Analysis of Pancreas Cancer Genome in High-Throughput Genomic Technologies
    Statistical Analysis of High-Dimensional Data for Pancreatic Cancer
    Gene Expression Profiling in Pancreatic Cancer
    Genetic Susceptibility and Risk of Pancreatic Cancer
    Proteomics in Pancreatic Cancer Translational Research
    Proteomic Differences and Linkages between Chemoresistance and Metastasis of Pancreatic Cancer Using Knowledge-Based Pathway Analysis
    RNAi Validation of Pancreatic Cancer Antigens Identified by Cell Surface Proteomics
    The Significance of the Feedback Loops between Kras and Ink4a in Pancreatic Cancer
    Systems Biology of Pancreatic Cancer Stem Cells
    Characterizing the Metabolomic Effects of Pancreatic Cancer
    Prioritizing Diagnostic, Prognostic, and Therapeutic MicroRNAs in Pancreatic Cancer: Systems and Network Biology Approaches
    Integration of Protein Network Activation Mapping Technology for Personalized Therapy: Implications for Pancreatic Cancer
    Computational and Biological Evaluation of Radioiodinated Quinazolinone Prodrug for Targeting Pancreatic Cancer
    Systems and Network Pharmacology Strategies for Pancreatic Ductal Adenocarcinoma Therapy: A Resource Review.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2014
  • Digital
    Gregory A. Hosler, Kathleen M. Murphy.
    Summary: "This textbook presents the current (and near-future) state of affairs of molecular testing as it pertains to the dermatology patient. It focuses on practical applications of molecular diagnostics over a cross-section of dermatologic disease, including melanoma, lymphoma, soft tissue tumors, genodermatoses, and infectious disease. It includes practical advice to those ordering molecular tests as well as to those considering performing such tests, providing a potential template for a comprehensive dermatologic molecular diagnostics test menu. Pitfalls of interpretation and algorithmic approaches to testing are included. The textbook is directed towards all readers -- clinicians, pathologists, laboratorians, and other inquisitive minds -- independent of their level of molecular expertise, to provoke thought or perhaps even change practice. The context for the book is the rapid evolution of the field of molecular diagnostics, which is becoming more pervasive in all disciplines of medicine, including dermatology. This is indeed an exciting time in dermatology. Molecular testing is now incorporated into all aspects of patient management, including diagnostics (identifying and classifying disease), prognostics (predicting disease course), and theranostics (predicting response to therapy). For example, molecular tests are now used to detect germline mutations that result in genodermatoses, somatic genetic events that characterize tumors such as melanoma and sarcomas, and genetic material of otherwise undetectable infectious organisms. For melanoma and lymphoma, testing can potentially predict tumor behavior and modify patient staging. Regarding theranostics, molecular tests that identify specific mutations in proto-oncogenes, such as BRAF and others, are now used to predict which patients will respond to designer targeted therapies. Molecular theranostics has revolutionized the entire treatment paradigm for patients with advanced melanoma, replacing "excise and pray" approaches with personalized medicine."--Publisher's website.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Basics of Nucleic Acids and Molecular Biology
    3. Molecular Methods
    4. Melanoma. Part I. Risk Assessment, Diagnosis, and Prognosis: Using Molecular Tools to Diagnose Melanoma, Predict Its Behavior, and Evaluate for Inheritable Forms
    5. Melanoma. Part II. Personalized Medicine: Using Molecular Tools to Guide Targeted Therapy
    6. Leukemia and Lymphoma. Part I. Mycosis Fungoides and Sézary Syndrome: Using Molecular Tools to Aid in the Diagnosis, Staging, and Therapy for Mycosis Fungoides and Sézary Syndrome
    7. Leukemia and Lymphoma. Part II: Primary Cutaneous B-Cell Lymphoma and Other Non-MF/SS HematopoieticTumors
    8. Tumors of the Soft Tissue: Using Molecular Tools to Aid in the Diagnosis of Soft Tissue Tumors and the Management of the Sarcoma Patient
    9. Genodermatoses. Part I: Muir-Torre Syndrome
    10. Genodermatoses. Part II: Other Hereditary Dermatologic Disease
    11. Infectious Disease Testing
    12. Emerging Molecular Applications and Summary.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Magdalena Thurin, Francesco M. Marincola.
    Contents:
    Novel insights/translational implication from the emerging biology of melanoma / Antoni Ribas
    Emerging clinical issues in melanoma in the molecularly targeted era / Ryan J. Sullivan and Michael B. Atkins
    Integrating molecular biomarkers into current clinical management in melanoma / Ragini Kudchadkar, Geoffrey Gibney, and Vernon K. Sondak
    Advances in adjuvant therapy : potential for prognostic and predictive biomarkers / Diwakar Davar [and three others]
    Immunologic monitoring of cancer vaccine trials using the ELISPOT assay / Lisa H. Butterfield and Mary Jo Buffo
    Markers for anti-cytotoxic T-lymphocyte antigen 4 (CTLA- 4) therapy in melanoma / Michael A. Postow [and four others]
    Marker utility for combination therapy / Ester Simeone, Antonio M. Grimaldi, and Paolo A. Ascierto
    Assaying for BRAF V600E in tissue and blood in melanoma / David J. Panka, James W. Mier, and Ryan J. Sullivan
    Selecting patients for KIT inhibition in melanoma / Richard D. Carvajal, Omid Hamid, and Cristina R. Antonescu
    Detecting mechanisms of acquired BRAF inhibitor resistance in melanoma / Roger S. Lo and Hubing Shi
    Current status of diagnostic and prognostic markers in melanoma / Danielle Levine and David E. Fisher
    Chromosomal copy number analysis in melanoma diagnostics / Jeffrey P. North, Swapna S. Vemula, and Boris C. Bastian
    Construction and analysis of multiparameter prognostic models for melanoma outcome / Bonnie E. Gould Rothberg and David L. Rimm
    Immunohistochemical diagnostic and prognostic markers for melanoma / Mehdi Nosrati and Mohammed Kashani-Sabet
    Lymphatic invasion as a prognostic biomarker in primary cutaneous melanoma / Xiaowei Xu [and four others]
    Tumor-infiltrating lymphocytes and their significance in melanoma prognosis / Tobias Schatton [and three others]
    Pathological staging of melanoma / David E. Elder
    Genotyping of human leukocyte antigen (HLA) ancestral haplotypes as prognostic marker in cancer using PCR analysis / Lisa Villabona [and three others]
    B7-H abnormalities in melanoma and clinical relevance / Barbara Seliger
    Melanoma susceptibility genes and risk assessment / Alexander Marzuka-Alcalá, Michele Jacobs Gabree, and Hensin Tsao
    Clinical, pathologic, and imaging features and biological markers of uveal melanoma / Alia B. Rashid and Hans E. Grossniklaus
    Prognostic test to predict the risk of metastasis in uveal melanoma based on a 15-gene expression profile / J. William Harbour
    Molecular karyotyping for detection of prognostic markers in fine needle aspiration biopsy samples of uveal melanoma / Arupa Ganguly, Jennifer Richards-Yutz, and Kathryn G. Ewens
    ERBB4 mutation analysis : emerging molecular target for melanoma treatment / Christopher Lau [and three others]
    Epigenetic markers of prognosis in melanoma / Luca Sigalotti [and four others]
    Isolation of melanoma cell subpopulations using negative selection / Ana Slipicevic [and three others]
    Circulating tumor cells as prognostic biomarkers in cutaneous melanoma patients / Eiji Kiyohara [and three others]
    Detection of chondroitin sulfate proteoglycan 4 (CSPG4) in melanoma / Yangyang Wang [and three others]
    Targeting damage-associated molecular pattern molecules (DAMPs) and DAMP receptors in melanoma / Brian A. Boone and Michael T. Lotze
    The clinical use of PET/CT in the evaluation of melanoma / Khun Visith Keu and Andrei H. Iagaru
    Immune system functional pathway analysis using single cell network profiling (SCNP) : a novel tool in cancer immunotherapy / Alessandra Cesano and David Spellmeyer
    Quantitative and spatial image analysis of tumor and draining lymph nodes using immunohistochemistry and high-resolution multispectral imaging to prdict metastasis / Kim R.M. Blenman and Peter P. Lee
    COLD-PCR enriches low-level variant DNA sequences and increases the sensitivity of genetic testing / Elena Castellanos-Rizaldos [and seven others]
    Isolation of circulating microRNAs from microvesicles found in human plasma / John F. Quackenbush [and seven others]
    Detection of circulating tumor cells by photoacoustic flowmetry / Ryan M. Weight and John A. Viator
    Statistical design and evaluation of biomarker studies / Kevin K. Dobbin
    Tissue resources for clinical use and marker studies in melanoma / Jonathan L. Curry [and five others].
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    editors, Kamla Kant Shukla, Praveen Sharma and Sanjeev Misra.
    Summary: This book aims to bring together a broad variety of examples of the role of pharmacogenomics in current drug development, uncovering dynamic concentration-dependent drug responses on biological systems to understand pharmacodynamics responses in human cancer where genetic lesions serve as tumor markers and provide a basis for cancer diagnosis. The book describes methods and protocols applied in molecular diagnostics. It offers pathologists and researchers providing molecular diagnostic services an array of the most recent and readily accessible reference to compare methods and techniques. Highlights include the molecular diagnosis of genetic aberrations by quantitative polymerase reaction (qPCR), sequence-specific oligonucleotide arrays, next-generation sequencing (NGS), CGH arrays-and methodologies directed at the detection of epigenetic events, high-throughput nucleic acid and protein arrays, direct sequencing and FISH-based methodologies, currently used in the diagnosis of solid tumors. The book also includes an innovative line of treatment in relation to the molecular prognosis, diagnosis and pharmacogenomics in the actual practice of clinical findings at molecular levels. The book covers the applications of numerous genetic testing methodologies; in approximately the chronological order of discovery and high-throughput diagnosis using advanced genomic approaches to identify such genes, in the search for novel drug targets and/or key determinants of drug reactions. It also promotes a wider understanding of molecular diagnostics among physicians, medical students, and scientists in academics, industry and corporate world.

    Contents:
    Introduction of molecular diagnostics
    Molecular Diagnostics in Bladder cancer
    Molecular Diagnostics in Lung cancer
    Molecular Diagnostics in Brain cancer
    Molecular Diagnostics in Melanoma
    Molecular Diagnostics in Breast cancer
    Molecular Diagnostics in Non-Hodgkin lymphoma
    Molecular Diagnostics in Cervical cancer
    Molecular Diagnostics in Colorectal cancer
    Molecular Diagnostics in Pancreatic cancer
    Molecular Diagnostics in Oral cancer
    Molecular Diagnostics in Prostate cancer
    Molecular Diagnostics in Kidney cancer
    Molecular Diagnostics in Skin cancer
    Molecular Diagnostics in Leukaemia
    Molecular Diagnostics in Thyroid cancer
    Molecular Diagnostics in Liver cancer
    Molecular Diagnostics in Uterine cancer
    Molecular Diagnostics in Ovarian cancer
    Pharmacogenomics Testing for Medication & Drug Response.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Maximiliano Nardelli, Juan Ignacio Túnez, editors.
    Summary: Although all living beings modify their environment, human beings have acquired the ability to do so on a superlative space-time scale. As a result of industrialization and the use of new technologies, the anthropogenic impact has been increasing in the last centuries, causing reductions in the sizes or the extinction of numerous wild populations. In this sense, from the field of conservation genetics, various efforts have been made in recent decades to provide new knowledge that contributes to the conservation of populations, species, and habitats. In this book, we summarize the concrete contributions of researchers to the conservation of the Neotropical mammals using Molecular Ecology techniques. The book is divided into three major sections. The first section provides an up-to-date review of the conservation status of Neotropical mammals, the applications of the molecular markers in its conservation, and the use of non-invasive and forensic genetic techniques. The second and third sections present, respectively, a series of case studies in various species or taxonomic groups of Neotropical mammals.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1 - Introduction
    Section 1 - Background and Technical Notes
    Chapter 2 - Conservation status of Neotropical mammals: A review
    Chapter 3 - The use of molecular markers in Neotropical mammal conservation
    Chapter 4 - Non-invasive genetic sampling techniques applied to conservation genetic studies in mammals
    Chapter 5 - Landscape Genomics in wildlife conservation
    Chapter 6 - The use of forensic DNA on the conservation of Neotropical mammals
    Chapter 7 - Leveraging conservation through massive sequencing technologies
    Chapter 8 - The importance of considering genetic factors in population viability analysis
    Section 2 - Case studies
    Chapter 9 - Effects of the sample sizes in the determination of the true number of haplogroups within a species with conservation purposes: the case of the Cebus albifrons in Ecuador, and the cases of the jaguarundi, the kinkajou and the coati throughout Latin America
    Chapter 10 - Molecular Ecology Approaches to Study Neotropical Bats
    Chapter 11 - Phylogeographic approximation of the subspecies Odocoileus virginianus veraecrusis (Goldman & Kellogg 1940) in the South Eastern Coastal Plain, Mexico.-Chapter 12 - Perspectives on Neotropical primate conservation genetics
    Chapter 13 - The use of Genetic Footprints as a tool to trace the origin of the heavily trafficked White-footed tamarins (Saguinus leucopus) in Colombia
    Chapter 14 - Schrödinger's cat in genetics for the conservation of species in the tropical Andes: bibliographical review of the order Carnivora
    Chapter 15 - Conservation genetics of rodents in Argentina
    Chapter 16 - Conservation genetics of caviomorphs and sigmodontine rodents in the Neotropics.-Chapter 17 - Aquatic Mammals of the Amazon: a review of gene diversity, population structure and phylogeography
    Conclusion
    Chapter 18 - Concluding remarks.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Robert T. Gerlai.
    Summary: Molecular-Genetic and Statistical Techniques for Behavioral and Neural Research presents the most exciting molecular and recombinant DNA techniques used in the analysis of brain function and behavior, a critical piece of the puzzle for clinicians, scientists, course instructors and advanced undergraduate and graduate students. Chapters examine neuroinformatics, genetic and neurobehavioral databases and data mining, also providing an analysis of natural genetic variation and principles and applications of forward (mutagenesis) and reverse genetics (gene targeting). In addition, the book discusses gene expression and its role in brain function and behavior, along with ethical issues in the use of animals in genetics testing. Written and edited by leading international experts, this book provides a clear presentation of the frontiers of basic research as well as translationally relevant techniques that are used by neurobehavioral geneticists.

    Contents:
    Section I. Neuroinformatics, Computational Models and Data Analysis
    Section II. Searching for New Genes: Natural Genetic Variation
    Section III. Discovery of New Genes and New Functions of Genes Using Gene Expression Analyses
    Section IV. Discovery of Genes and Biological Mechanisms: Forward Genetics and Other Screening-Based Methods
    Section V. Manipulating Known Genes to Understand Biological Function: Reverse Genetics
    Section VI. Ethical Considerations.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Amit Singh, Madhuri Kango-Singh, editors.
    Summary: Drosophila melanogaster (fruit fly) is a highly versatile model with a genetic legacy of more than a century. It provides powerful genetic, cellular, biochemical and molecular biology tools to address many questions extending from basic biology to human diseases. One of the most important questions in biology is how a multi-cellular organism develops from a single-celled embryo. The discovery of the genes responsible for pattern formation has helped refine this question and has led to other questions, such as the role of various genetic and cell biological pathways in regulating the process of pattern formation and growth during organogenesis. The Drosophila eye model has been extensively used to study molecular genetic mechanisms involved in patterning and growth. Since the genetic machinery involved in the Drosophila eye is similar to humans, it has been used to model human diseases and homology to eyes in other taxa. This updated second edition covers current progress in the study of molecular genetic mechanisms of pattern formation, mutations in axial patterning, genetic regulation of growth, and more using the Drosophila eye as a model.

    Contents:
    Early eye development: Specification and Determination
    Generation of third dimension: Axial patterning in the developing Drosophila eye
    Catching the Next Wave: Patterning of the Drosophila eye by the Morphogenetic Furrow
    Ghost in the Machine- the Peripodail Epithelium
    Cell Polarity in Drosophila Retina
    Negative regulation for neural patterning in the Drosophila eye
    Adhesion and the cytoskeleton in the Drosophila pupaleye
    Drosophila eye as a model to study regulation of growth control: The discovery of size control pathways
    Drosophila cancer modeling using the eye imaginal discs
    Recent contributions of the Drosophila eye to unraveling the basis of neurodegeneration
    Genetic regulation of early eye development in non-dipteran insects
    Eyes for an eye: A comparative account on compound eye of Drosophila melanogaster with vertebrate eye
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital/Print
    Lora Hedrick Ellenson, editor.
    Summary: "This comprehensive text provides a much-needed review of a disease that is currently garnering the interest of molecular biologists, translational scientists, and clinicians. The volume includes emerging developments in the molecular genetics of endometrial carcinoma. In addition to covering the basic genetics of endometrial carcinoma, chapters also cover a wide range of signaling pathways implicated in endometrial carcinoma. A section of the book includes a number of genetically engineered mouse models, which contribute to understanding the role of various genetic alterations in the development and progression of endometrial carcinoma. These models also provide preclinical models for developing effective targeted therapeutic approaches. Endometrial carcinoma is the most common malignancy of the female genital tract in the United States and the number of cases continues to increase around the world. This book is a meant to serve as a resource for a wide range of scientists, from molecular geneticists to signal transduction biologists, as well as to both clinicians and scientists interested in developing targeted therapeutic approaches for women with endometrial carcinoma"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Introduction. Epidemiology of endometrial carcinoma: etiologic importance of hormonal and metabolic influences / Ashley S. Felix, Hannah P. Yang, Daphne W. Bell [and others]
    Clinical behavior and treatment of endometrial cancer / Divya Gupta
    Pathology of endometrial carcinoma / Sigurd F. Lax
    Molecular profiling. Traditional approaches to molecular genetic analysis / Christopher J. Walker, Paul J. Goodfellow
    Next-generation sequencing / Matthieu Le Gallo, Fred Lozy, Daphne W. Bell
    Endometrial carcinoma: specific targeted pathways / Nuria Eritja, Andree Yeramian, Bo-Juen Chen, David Llobet-Navas [and others]
    Mouse models. LKB1 as a tumor suppressor in uterine cancer: mouse models and translational studies / Christopher G. Peña, Diego H. Castrillón
    Mig-6 mouse model of endometrial cancer / Tae Hoon Kim, Jung-Yoon Yoo, Jae-Wook Jeong
    PI3K/PTEN/AKT genetic mouse models of endometrial carcinoma / Ayesha Joshi, Lora Hedrick Ellenson.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Mauro D'Amato, John D. Rioux, editors.
    Summary: Inflammatory bowel disease (IBD) affects 1% of people worldwide. This condition is partly inherited, and genetic research has made enormous progress during the last few years, providing important insight into disease pathogenesis. This book provides a concise but complete overview of existing knowledge, with particular focus on the molecular and genetic mechanisms at the basis of IBD. Invited experts, at the frontline of IBD research, introduce basic concepts in the pathophysiology of IBD and its two major forms Crohn?s disease and ulcerative colitis, provide a historical perspective and highlight latest discoveries of IBD genetic research, describe how this information has helped to unravel novel pathogenetic pathways, and formulate a vision for future investigations and their clinical application in IBD. State-of-the-art information contained in this book is an exceptional resource for all those in the biomedical field with a specific interest in IBD, including basic scientists, gastroenterologists, GI specialist doctors and research nurses, but also medical and biomedical students.

    Contents:
    Part I: The Foundation of IBD Genetics, Human and Animal Studies. A Primer on IBD: Phenotypes, Diagnosis, Treatment, and Clinical Challenges / Xinjun Cindy Zhu and Richard P. MacDermott
    Genetic Epidemiology of Inflammatory Bowel Disease, Early Twin and Family Studies / Jonas Halfvarson
    Insights from Recent Advances in Animal Models of Inflammatory Bowel Disease / Emiko Mizoguchi, Atsushi Mizoguchi and Atul K. Bhan
    Part II: The Genetic and Molecular Makeup of Inflammatory Bowel Disease. Complex Disease Genes and Their Discovery / Jeffrey C. Barrett and Mark J. Daly
    The Genetics of Crohn's Disease / Andre Franke and Miles Parkes
    Genetics of Ulcerative Colitis / Mauro D'Amato, Catherine Labbé and John D. Rioux
    Genetic Overlap Between Inflammatory Bowel Disease and Other Diseases / Charlie W. Lees and Alexandra Zhernakova
    Molecular Profiling of IBD Subtypes/Response to Therapy / Isabelle Cleynen and Séverine Vermeire
    Epigenetics of Inflammatory Bowel Disease / Robert Häsler, Stefan Schreiber and Stephan Beck
    Part III: Pathogenetic Pathways in Inflammatory Bowel Disease. Nod1 and Nod2 and the Immune Response to Bacteria / Maria Kaparakis-Liaskos, Dana J. Philpott
    The IL23-Th17 Axis in Intestinal Inflammation / Kevin J. Maloy
    Inflammatory Bowel Disease at the Intersection of Autophagy and Immunity: Insights from Human Genetics / Natalia B. Nedelsky, Petric Kuballa and Adam B. Castoreno
    The Epithelial Barrier / Stefan Koch, Asma Nusrat and Charles A. Parkos
    Host Interactions with Bacteria: From "Entente Cordiale" to "Casus Belli" / Nouara Lhocine and Philippe J. Sansonetti
    Cytokines in Inflammatory Bowel Disease / Matthias A. Engel and Markus F. Neurath
    Part IV: Concluding Remarks and Future Perspectives. Towards Personalized Therapy in Inflammatory Bowel Disease / Dermot P.B. McGovern.
    Digital Access Springer 2013
  • Digital
    Charlotte Hedin, John D. Rioux, Mauro D'Amato, editors.
    Summary: Inflammatory bowel disease (IBD) affects 1% of people worldwide. This condition is partly inherited, and genetic research has made enormous progress during the last few years, providing important insight into disease pathogenesis. This book provides a concise but complete overview of existing knowledge, with particular focus on the molecular and genetic mechanisms at the basis of IBD. Invited experts, at the frontline of IBD research, introduce basic concepts in the pathophysiology of IBD and its two major forms Crohn's disease and ulcerative colitis, provide a historical perspective and highlight latest discoveries of IBD genetic research, describe how this information has helped to unravel novel pathogenetic pathways, and formulate a vision for future investigations and their clinical application in IBD. State-of-the-art information contained in this book is an exceptional resource for all those in the biomedical field with a specific interest in IBD, including basic scientists, gastroenterologists, GI specialist doctors and research nurses, but also medical and biomedical students.

    Contents:
    Part 1: The Foundation of IBD Genetics, Human and Animal Studies
    A Primer on IBD: Phenotypes, Diagnosis, Treatment and Clinical Challenges
    Genetic Epidemiology of Inflammatory Bowel Disease, Early Twin and Family Studies
    Insights from Recent Advances in Animal Models of Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Part 2: The Genetic and Molecular Makeup of Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Complex Disease Genes and their Discovery
    The Genetics of Crohn's Disease
    Genetics of Ulcerative Colitis
    Genetic Overlap between Inflammatory Bowel Disease and Other Diseases
    Molecular Profiling of IBD Subtypes/Response to Therapy
    Epigenetics of Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Part 3: Pathogenetic Pathways in Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Nod1 and Nod2 and the Immune Response to Bacteria
    The IL-23-Th17 Axis in Intestinal Inflammation
    Inflammatory Bowel Disease at the Intersection of Autophagy and Immunity: Insights from Human Genetics
    The Epithelial Barrier
    Host Interactions with Bacteria: From "Entente Cordiale" to "Casus Belli"
    Cytokines in Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Part 4: Concluding Remarks and Future Perspectives
    Towards Personalized Therapy in Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Graham F. Hatfull, Department of Biological Sciences, University of Pittsburgh, Pittsburgh, PA, and William R. Jacobs, Jr., Howard Hughes Medical Institute, Albert Einstein College of Medicine, Bronx, NY
    Summary: A comprehensive collection of perspectives by experts in mycobacterial molecular biology, written by leading experts in the field. This book is an invaluable resource for anyone interested in the molecular genetics and molecular biology of mycobacteria.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    Cristina Nanni, Stefano Fanti, Lucia Zanoni, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive overview of the importance of molecular imaging in multiple myeloma, with detailed explanation of its clinical impact. Other important features are the definition of criteria that will aid PET/CT interpretation; identification and explanation of the most frequent pitfalls; a brief overview of the advantages and limitations of DWI MR imaging, still an experimental technique in multiple myeloma; and examination of the possible role of emerging PET tracers. When appropriate, clinical cases are used to illustrate key teaching points. All physicians involved in oncological imaging should regularly reassess and update their routine practice in the evaluation of multiple myeloma patients. This is especially true now, given the recent clarification by the International Myeloma Working Group (IMWG) of the criteria for bone damage requiring therapy and the emerging data supporting the role of the newer functional imaging techniques in predicting outcome and/or evaluating response to therapy. In this challenging context, Molecular Imaging in Multiple Myeloma will be of high value for nuclear medicine physicians, radiologists, and hematologists.

    Contents:
    1.Multiple Myeloma: clinical aspects
    2. What does a clinician need from new imaging procedures?
    3.FDG PET in Multiple Myeloma
    4. Role of Standard Magnetic Resonance Imaging
    5.Whole Body Diffusion-Weighted Magnetic Resonance Imaging: A new era for whole body imaging in myeloma?
    6.CXCR4 imaging in Multiple Myeloma
    7.PET/CT with Standard NON-FDG Tracers
    8. The issue of interpretation
    9. Clinical Teachning Cases: FDG PET/CT .
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital/Print
    Otmar Schober, Fabian Kiessling, Jürgen Debus, editors.
    Summary: The impact of molecular imaging on diagnostics, therapy, and follow-up in oncology is increasing steadily. This handbook addresses all aspects of molecular imaging in oncology, from basic research to clinical applications in the era of evidence-based medicine.

    Contents:
    Computed tomography and magnetic resonance imaging
    Single photon emission computed tomography
    tracer
    Non-peptidyl 18F-labelled PET tracers as radioindicators for the noninvasive detection of cancer
    Ultrasound Imaging
    Optical and opto-acoustic imaging
    Multifunctional magnetic imaging probes
    Modern X-ray concepts-differential phase-contrast imaging
    Pre-clinical SPECT and SPECT-CT
    Optical and photo-acoustic imaging
    Applications of small animal PET
    Preclinical molecular imaging using PET and MRI
    Molecular ultrasound imaging
    Advanced microscopy techniques
    Mass spectroscopy
    Quantitative SPECT-CT
    Optical imaging of breast tumors and of gastrointestinal cancer by laser-induced fluorescence
    FDG PET and PET-CT
    Non-FDG PET-CT
    Clinical MR biomarkers
    Clinical PET-MR
    Advanced ultrasound imaging
    Radiomics and Radiogenomics
    Cross validation techniques
    Image-guided brain surgery
    Image-guided abdominal surgery
    Photon radiation therapy
    Particle radiation therapy
    Internal radiotherapy
    Future challenges of multimodality imaging.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    S.S. Gambhir.
    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Molecular imaging
    Chapter 2. Basic cell & molecular biology
    Chapter 3. Ovreview of imaging modalities
    Chapter. 4. Molecular imaging strategies
    Chapter 5. Assays
    Chapter 6. Nanoparticle imaging
    Chapter 7. Clinical applications
    Chapter 8. Molecular imaging examples
    Chapter 10. Frequently asked questions
    Chapter 11. Useful tables
    Chapter 12. Probe structures table.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RB43.7 .G36 2015
    1
  • Digital
    Nakanishi, Toshio; Baldwin, H. Scott; Fineman, Jeffrey R.; Yamagishi, Hiroyuki.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital/Print
    edited by Hubert Hilbi.
    Summary: Legionnaires' disease, a potentially fatal type of pneumonia primarily affecting elderly and immuno-compromised persons, is caused by the ubiquitous environmental bacterium Legionella pneumophila. This book offers authoritative reviews of different facets of its virulence, focusing on comparative phagocyte infection, virulence gene regulation, biochemical functions of effector proteins and cellular pathogen-host interactions, as well as host responses and immunity to L. pneumophila. Taken together, the contributions in this compilation provide a state-of-the-art overview of current insights into the molecular pathogenesis of the opportunistic and potentially fatal pathogen L. pneumophila.

    Contents:
    From Amoeba to Macrophages: Exploring the Molecular Mechanisms of Legionella pneumophila Infection in Both Hosts / Pedro Escoll and Monica Rolando
    The Legionella pneumophila Two-Component Regulatory Systems that Participate in the Regulation of Icm/Dot Effectors / Gil Segal
    Facets of Small RNA-Mediated Regulation in Legionella pneumophila / Hana Trigui, Nilmini Mendis and Laam Li
    Type II Secretion and Legionella Virulence / Nicholas P. Cianciotto
    Effector Translocation by the Legionella Dot/Icm Type IV Secretion System / Jiazhang Qiu and Zhao-Qing Luo
    Modulation of Small GTPases by Legionella / Roger S. Goody and Aymelt Itzen
    Host Lipidation: A Mechanism for Spatial Regulation of Legionella Effectors / Stanimir S. Ivanov and Craig Roy
    Phosphoinositide Lipids and the Legionella Pathogen Vacuole / Ina Haneburger and Hubert Hilbi
    Legionella Phospholipases Implicated in Virulence / Katja Kuhle and Antje Flieger
    Cytotoxic Glucosyltransferases of Legionella pneumophila / Yury Belyi, Thomas Jank and Klaus Aktories
    Modulation of the Ubiquitination Machinery by Legionella / Andree Hubber, Tomoko Kubori and Hiroki Nagai
    Host Signal Transduction and Protein Kinases Implicated in Legionella Infection / Andrew D. Hempstead and Ralph R. Isberg
    Mouse Models of Legionnaires' Disease / Andrew S. Brown and Ian R. van Driel.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Kazunari Kaneko, editor.
    Contents:
    Part 1. Introduction
    1. History of Research on Pathogenesis of Idiopathic Nephrotic Syndrome
    Part 2. Minimal-change nephrotic syndrome (MCNS)
    2. Hemopexin in Minimal Change Nephrotic Syndrome
    3. Angiopoietin-like-4 (Angptl4) in MCNS
    4. Co-stimulatory molecule CD80 (B7.1) in MCNS
    5. Energy and Mammalian target of rapamycin complex 1 (mTORC1) in minimal change nephrotic syndrome
    6. The role of c-mip in the pathogenesis of Minimal Change Nephrotic Syndrome
    7. REGULATORY T-CELLS AND OXIDATIVE STRESS IN MINIMAL CHANGE NEPHROPATHY
    8. CYTOKINES AS ACTIVE FACTORS IN MINIMAL CHANGE NEPHROTIC SYNDROME
    Part 3. Focal segmental glomerulosclerosis (FSGS)
    9. Soluble urokinase-type plasminogen activator receptor (suPAR) in Focal Segmental Glomerulosclerosis
    10. CYTOKINES AS ACTIVE FACTORS IN FOCAL SEGMENTAL GLOMERULOSCLEROSIS
    Part 4. Idiopathic Membranous Nephropathy (IMN)
    11. M-Type Phospholipase A2 Receptor (PLA2R) and Thrombospondin Type-1 Domain-Containing 7A (THSD7A) in Membranous Nephropathy
    12. Cationic Bovine Serum Albumin as Cause of Membranous Nephropathy: From Mice to Men
    Part 5. Treatment in Idiopathic Nephrotic Syndrome
    13. Podocytes as a direct target of drugs used in Idiopathic Nephrotic Syndrome.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    by Tara Karimi.
    Summary: This book presents a novel molecular description for understanding the regulatory mechanisms behind the autonomy and self-organization in biological systems. Chapters focus on defining and explaining the regulatory molecular mechanisms behind different aspects of autonomy and self-organization in the sense of autonomous coding, data processing, structure (mass) formation and energy production in a biological system. Subsequent chapters discuss the cross-talk among mechanisms of energy, and mass and information, transformation in biological systems. Other chapters focus on applications regarding therapeutic approaches in regenerative medicine. Molecular Mechanisms of Autonomy in Biological Systems is an indispensable resource for scientists and researchers in regenerative medicine, stem cell biology, molecular biology, tissue engineering, developmental biology, biochemistry, biophysics, bioinformatics, as well as big data sciences, complexity and soft computing.

    Contents:
    Intro; Dedication; Preface; Contents;
    Chapter 1: The Relativity ofCode, Energy, andMass Versus theRelativity ofEnergy andMass; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Biological Systems Are Highly Autonomous; 1.3 Significance andFundamental Applications ofRegulatory Mechanisms ofAutonomy inBiological Systems; 1.4 Chemical Foundation ofLife; 1.5 Physical Foundation ofLife: Thermodynamics andGeneral Relativity ofEnergy andMass; 1.6 Code: TheThird Dimension ofNature's Law; 1.7 Relativity ofCode, Energy, andMass: TheMolecular Mechanism ofAutonomy inBiological Systems; References 2.3 Cognitive Chemistry Algorithm: ABiomimetic Multilayer Molecular Coding Algorithm forSolving NP ProblemsReferences;
    Chapter 3: Molecular Mechanism ofSelf-Organization inBiological Systems; 3.1 An Introduction toSelf-Organization andEmbryonic Organogenesis; 3.2 Potential Applications ofSelf-Organization inTechnology andBiomedical Sciences; 3.3 Remarkable Properties ofSelf-Organization; 3.3.1 Polarity Formation; 3.3.2 Energy Balance; 3.4 Self-Organization Is aBottom-Up Process; 3.5 Developmental Biology ofEmbryonic Organogenesis 3.5.1 Developmental Biology ofAutonomous Morphogenesis andSpontaneous Pattern Formation3.5.2 Developmental Biology ofAutonomous Specification andDifferentiation; 3.5.3 Molecular andPhysical Foundation ofEmbryonic Self-Organization byCognitive Chemistry andRelativity ofCode Energy andMass; References;
    Chapter 4: Molecular Mechanism ofSelf-Fueling inBiological Systems by Relativity ofCode, Energy, andMass; 4.1 Self-Fueling Property ofLiving Systems andtheMaintenance ofCell Organization; 4.2 Photosynthesis: ANatural Sustainable Energy Solution forLife 4.3 Quantum Coherence: TheEfficiency ofSolar Energy Uptake andConversion inPhotosynthesis4.4 Photosynthesis: Quantum Coherence, Energy Transfer, andProduction ofDesigner Mass; 4.5 Photosynthesis: APromising Model Illustrating theRelativity ofCode, Energy, andMass intheNature; 4.6 Photosynthesis Is aCode-Based Energy andMass Transformation System; 4.7 Inspiring fromPhotosynthesis andConstruction ofaCycle ofMolecular Code, Energy, andMass forSustainability; References
    Chapter 2: Molecular Mechanism ofCoding andAutonomous Decision-Making inBiological Systems2.1 Molecular Mechanism ofAutonomous Coding andData Processing Based onPhysical andChemical Foundation ofLife; 2.2 Basic Principles ofCoding andData Processing inBiological Systems; 2.2.1 Information Storage inMolecules andMaterials; 2.2.2 Multilayer Coding; 2.2.3 Molecular Coding and Algorithmic Chemistry; 2.2.4 Inherent andConserved Coding; 2.2.5 Conditional Coding; 2.2.6 Dynamic andDe Novo Coding; 2.2.7 Integration ofSoftware andHardware
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital/Print
    Rafal P. Piprek, editor.
    Contents:
    Early Development of the Gonads
    Origin and Differentiation of the Somatic Cells of the Genital Ridges
    The formation and migration of primordial germ cells in mouse and man
    The Gonadal Supporting Cell Lineage and Mammalian Sex Determination: the Differentiation of Sertoli and Granulosa Cells
    Mesonephric cell migration into the gonads and vascularization are processes crucial for testis development
    Origin and Differentiation of Androgen-producing Cells in the Gonads
    Germ cell commitment to oogenic versus spermatogenic pathway
    the role of retinoic acid
    Ovarian Folliculogenesis
    Control of oocyte growth and development by intercellular communication within the follicular niche
    Biology of the Sertoli cell in the Fetal, Pubertal and Adult Mammalian Testis
    Mechanisms Regulating Spermatogonial Differentiation
    Stem cells in mammalian gonads
    A Role of microRNAs in Cell Differentiation during Gonad Development
    The Battle of the Sexes: Human Sex Development and its Disorders
    Methods for the study of gonadal development.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Print
    Steffen Backert: editor.
    Summary: This book focuses on immune reactions and interactions of humans with Helicobacter pylori - a human pathogen connected to gastritis, peptic ulcers and even gastric cancer. With nearly half of the worlds population colonized, it has been characterized as one of the most successful pathogens for more than 100,000 years of co-evolution with its host. The respective chapters discuss not only how H. pylori infection is considered a paradigm for persistent bacterial infection and chronic inflammation, but also how the infection might be connected to host protection against gastro-esophageal diseases, asthma, and other allergic disease manifestations. Readers will gain essential insights into the roles of specific factors in the immune response and learn about the impact of genetic polymorphisms on the risk of gastric carcinogenesis. In addition, the book discusses the strategies used by this bacterium, which allow it to colonize specific sites in the stomach, interact with the microbiome, evade immune surveillance and undermine the resolution of inflammation during persistent infection. This volume presents a concise summary of recent advances in the areas of induction, resolution and escape of inflammation, innate and adaptive immunity, gastric disease development, as well as treatment and vaccination against H. pylori. Accordingly, it offers a valuable asset for scientists and clinicians alike.

    Contents:
    Inflammation, immunity and vaccine development for the gastric pathogen Helicobacter pylori
    Impact of Helicobacter pylori Virulence Factors on the Host immune Response and Gastric Pathology
    Genetic polymorphisms in inflammatory and other regulators in gastric cancer: risks and clinical consequences
    MALT lymphoma as a model of chronic inflammation-induced gastric tumor development
    Crosstalk between DNA damage and inflammation in the multiple steps of gastric carcinogenesis
    Importance of toll-like receptors in pro-inflammatory and anti-inflammatory responses by Helicobacter pylori infection
    Role of NOD1 and ALPK1/TIFA signalling in innate immunity against Helicobacter pylori infection
    Carbohydrate-dependent and antimicrobial peptide defense mechanisms against Helicobacter pylori infections
    The sweeping role of cholesterol depletion in the persistence of Helicobacter pylori infections
    Helicobacter pylori deregulates T and B cell signaling to trigger immune evasion
    Mechanisms of inflammasome signaling, microRNA induction and resolution of inflammation by Helicobacter pylori
    Impact of the gastrointestinal microbiome in health and disease: co-evolution with the host immune system
    Resolution of gastric cancer-promoting inflammation: a novel strategy for anti-cancer therapy.
  • Digital
    Steffen Backert, editor.
    Summary: This book focuses on immune reactions and interactions of humans with Helicobacter pylori - a human pathogen connected to gastritis, peptic ulcers and even gastric cancer. With nearly half of the worlds population colonized, it has been characterized as one of the most successful pathogens for more than 100,000 years of co-evolution with its host. The respective chapters discuss not only how H. pylori infection is considered a paradigm for persistent bacterial infection and chronic inflammation, but also how the infection might be connected to host protection against gastro-esophageal diseases, asthma, and other allergic disease manifestations. Readers will gain essential insights into the roles of specific factors in the immune response and learn about the impact of genetic polymorphisms on the risk of gastric carcinogenesis. In addition, the book discusses the strategies used by this bacterium, which allow it to colonize specific sites in the stomach, interact with the microbiome, evade immune surveillance and undermine the resolution of inflammation during persistent infection. This volume presents a concise summary of recent advances in the areas of induction, resolution and escape of inflammation, innate and adaptive immunity, gastric disease development, as well as treatment and vaccination against H. pylori. Accordingly, it offers a valuable asset for scientists and clinicians alike.

    Contents:
    Inflammation, immunity and vaccine development for the gastric pathogen Helicobacter pylori
    Impact of Helicobacter pylori Virulence Factors on the Host immune Response and Gastric Pathology
    Genetic polymorphisms in inflammatory and other regulators in gastric cancer: risks and clinical consequences
    MALT lymphoma as a model of chronic inflammation-induced gastric tumor development
    Crosstalk between DNA damage and inflammation in the multiple steps of gastric carcinogenesis
    Importance of toll-like receptors in pro-inflammatory and anti-inflammatory responses by Helicobacter pylori infection
    Role of NOD1 and ALPK1/TIFA signalling in innate immunity against Helicobacter pylori infection
    Carbohydrate-dependent and antimicrobial peptide defense mechanisms against Helicobacter pylori infections
    The sweeping role of cholesterol depletion in the persistence of Helicobacter pylori infections
    Helicobacter pylori deregulates T and B cell signaling to trigger immune evasion
    Mechanisms of inflammasome signaling, microRNA induction and resolution of inflammation by Helicobacter pylori
    Impact of the gastrointestinal microbiome in health and disease: co-evolution with the host immune system
    Resolution of gastric cancer-promoting inflammation: a novel strategy for anti-cancer therapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Tilman Borggrefe, Benedetto Daniele Giaimo, editors.
    Summary: This book describes the Notch signaling pathway with a focus on molecular mechanisms. The Notch signaling pathway is a seemingly simple pathway that does not involve any second messenger. Upon ligand binding two consecutive proteolytic cleavages of the NOTCH receptor release the Notch intracellular domain from the membrane. The Notch intracellular domain migrates into the nucleus and activates gene expression. Recently, new technologies allowed us to better understand this pivotal signaling cascade and revealed new regulatory mechanisms. The different chapters cover many aspects of the Notch signaling focusing on the mechanisms governing the receptor/ligand interaction as well as on the downstream intracellular signaling events. Aspects of both canonical and non-canonical signaling are discussed and the function of Notch signaling in physiological and pathological contexts are elucidated. This book is not only intended for experts but it should also be a useful resource for young, sprouting scientists or interested scientists from other research areas, who may use this book as a stimulating starting point for further discoveries and developments"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Introduction to molecular mechanisms in notch signal transduction and disease pathogenesis / Benedetto Daniele Giaimo, Tilman Borggrefe
    Molecular mechanisms of receptor/ligand interactions. Structural insights into notch receptor-ligand interactions / Penny A. Handford, Boguslawa Korona, Richard Suckling, Christina Redfield, Susan M. Lea
    The molecular mechanism of notch activation / Klaus N. Lovendahl, Stephen C. Blacklow, Wendy R. Gordon
    Regulation of notch function by O-glycosylation / Beth M. Harvey, Robert S. Haltiwanger
    Modeling the notch response / Udi Binshtok, David Sprinzak
    Endocytic trafficking of the notch receptor / Bj̲örn Schnute, Tobias Troost, Thomas Klein
    Intracellular signaling mechanisms. The notch interactome: complexity in signaling circuitry / Diana M. Ho, K. G. Guruharsha, Spyros Artavanis-Tsakonas
    Integration of drosophila and human genetics to understand notch signaling related diseases / Jose L. Salazar, Shinya Yamamoto
    Mechanisms of non-canonical signaling in health and disease: diversity to take therapy up a notch? / Victor Alfred, Thomas Vaccari
    The notch3 receptor and its intracellular signaling-dependent oncogenic mechanisms / Diana Bellavia, Saula Checquolo, Rocco Palermo, Isabella Screpanti
    Notch and neurogenesis / Anna Engler, Runrui Zhang, Verdon Taylor
    Notch and stem cells / Anna Bigas, Cristina Porcheri
    Oscillatory control of notch signaling in development / Ryoichiro Kageyama, Hiromi Shimojo, Akihiro Isomura
    CSL-associated corepressor and coactivator complexes / Franz Oswald, Rhett A. Kovall
    Disease links and therapeutics. Notch and senescence / Matthew Hoare, Masashi Narita
    Control of blood vessel formation by notch signaling / Fabian Tetzlaff, Andreas Fischer
    Notch and T cell function: a complex tale / Jyothi Vijayaraghavan, Barbara A. Osborne
    Notch in leukemia / Anna C. McCarter, Qing Wang, Mark Chiang.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    by Svetlana Trofimova.
    Summary: This book discusses the pathology of the retina, and reviews current research on the use of cell replacement therapy and short peptides to restore functional activity in retinal neurons. As the book describes, pathologies of the retina, including age-related macular degeneration, diabetic retinopathy, and retinitis pigmentosa, present a long-standing challenge in the practice of clinical ophthalmology. Modern treatment for these conditions, which lead to irreversible blindness, includes laser exposure, surgical intervention, and drugs. These treatments aim to reduce the risk of new complications in the eye; pathogenetic therapy of degenerative diseases of the retina is practically absent in current ophthalmic practice. The first section of the book reviews the molecular mechanisms of age-related macular degeneration, diabetic retinopathy, and retinitis pigmentosa, and reports on methods of treatment. The second section presents the results of recent experimental studies of the effects of short peptides on pluripotent embryonic cells; on proliferative activity in retinal cells and pigment epithelium; on expression of markers of differentiation or retinal neurons and pigment epithelium; and on the course of hereditary retinal pigmentation in Campbell rats. The third section offers results of clinical studies on the effectiveness of short peptides in patients with macular degeneration, and in patients with retinitis pigmentosa. The author concludes that the regular use of peptides in the treatment of degenerative diseases of the retina can slow the progression of the pathological process and preserve the patient's vision for some 10-15 years. In addition, in 80 percent of patients, it is possible to increase visual function by increasing visual acuity, improving the boundaries of the visual field and the fundus.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Literature review
    Chapter 2. Results of experimental studies of short peptides (cytogens) in ophthalmology
    Chapter 3. Results of the clinical study of short peptides (cytogens) in ophthalmology
    Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    editors in chief: David H. Persing, Fred C. Tenover; editors: Randall T. Hayden, Margareta Ieven, Melissa B. Miller, Frederick S. Nolte, Yi-Wei Tang, Alex van Belkum.
    Summary: Presents the latest molecular diagnostic techniques to support clinical care and basic and clinical research. The authors-all experienced researchers and diagnosticians-have conducted a comprehensive review and evaluation of this rapidly evolving field and written a book that offers a broad range of practical guidance and techniques. Encapsulates the current state of the science and points to new avenues for research that will broaden the application and usefulness of molecular diagnostics.

    Contents:
    Chapter 28 : Diagnostic Approaches to Genitourinary Tract Infections / Claire C. Bristow, Jeffrey D. Klausner
    Chapter 29 : Syndromic Diagnostic Approaches to Bone and Joint infections / Alexander J. McAdam
    Virology
    Chapter 30 : Molecular Detection and Characterization of Human Immunodeficiency Virus Type 1 / Angela M. Caliendo, Colleen S. Kraft
    Chapter 31 : Molecular Detection and Characterization of Hepatitis C Virus / Michael S. Forman, Alexandra Valsamakis
    Chapter 32 : Molecular Detection and Characterization of Hepatitis B Virus / Jeffrey J. Germer, Joseph D.C. Yao
    Chapter 33 : Molecular Detection of Human Papillomaviruses / Denise I. Quigley, Elizabeth R. Unger
    Chapter 34 : Molecular Diagnostics for Viral Infections in Transplant Recipients / Matthew J. Binnicker, Raymund R. Razonable
    Fungi and Protozoa
    Chapter 35 : Molecular Detection and Identification of Fungal Pathogens / Katrien Lagrou, Johan Maertens, Marie Pierre Hayette
    Chapter 36 : Molecular Approaches for Diagnosis of Chagas' Disease and Genotyping of Trypanosoma cruzi / Patricio Diosque, Nicolas Tomasini, Michel Tibayrenc
    Chapter 37 : Molecular Approaches for Diagnosis of Malaria and the Characterization of Genetic Markers for Drug Resistance / Lisa C. Ranford-Cartwright, Laura Ciuffreda
    Chapter 38 : Molecular Detection of Gastrointestinal Parasites / Jaco J. Verweij, Alex Van Belkum, C. Rune Stensvold
    Point-of-Care/Near-Care Diagnostics
    Chapter 39 : Molecular Diagnostics and the Changing Face of Point-of-Care / David L. Dolinger, Anne M. Whalen
    Chapter 40 : Point-of-Care Technologies for the Diagnosis of Active Tuberculosis / Grant Theron
    Chapter 41 : Molecular Diagnostics for Use in HIV/AIDS Care and Treatment in Resource-Limited Settings / Maurine M. Murtagh
    Chapter 42 : Rapid Point-of-Care Diagnosis of Malaria and Dengue Infection / Lieselotte Cnops, Marjan Van Esbroeck, Jan Jacobs
    The Host and Host Response
    Chapter 43 : Implications of Pharmacogenetics for Antimicrobial Prescribing / Ar Kar Aung, Elizabeth J. Phillips, Todd Hulgan, David W. Haas
    Chapter 44 : Exploiting MicroRNA (miRNA) Profiles for Diagnostics / Abhijeet Bakre, Ralph A. Tripp
    Chapter 45 : Host Response in HIV Infection / Paul J. McLaren, Amalio Telenti
    Chapter 46 : Biomarkers of Gastrointestinal Host Responses to Microbial Infections / Rana E. El Feghaly, Hansraj Bangar, David B. Haslam
    Information Technology
    Chapter 47 : Point-of-Care Medical Device Connectivity: Developing World Landscape / Jeff Baker
    Chapter 48 : WHONET: Software for Surveillance of Infecting Microbes and Their Resistance to Antimicrobial Agents / John Stelling, Thomas F. O'brien
    Chapter 49 : Cloud-Based Surveillance, Connectivity, and Distribution of the GeneXpert Analyzers for Diagnosis of Tuberculosis (TB) and Multiple-Drug-Resistant TB in South Africa / Wendy S. Stevens, Brad Cunningham, Naseem Cassim, Natasha Gous, Lesley E. Scott
    Quality Assurance
    Chapter 50 : Molecular Method Verification / Donna M. Wolk, Elizabeth M. Marlowe
    Chapter 51 : Molecular Microbiology Test Quality Assurance and Monitoring / Matthew J. Bankowski
    Chapter 52 : Proficiency Testing and External Quality Assessment for Molecular Microbiology / Roberta M. Madej
    Chapter 53 : Practices of Sequencing Quality Assurance / Kara L. Norman, David M. Dinauer
    Chapter 54 : Verification and Validation of Matrix-Assisted Laser Desorption Ionization Time of Flight Mass Spectrometry-Based Protocols / Matthew L. Faron, Blake W. Buchan, Nathan A. Ledeboer
    The Business of Diagnostics
    Chapter 55 : Improved Diagnostics in Microbiology: Developing a Business Case for Hospital Administration / Elizabeth M. Marlowe, Susan M. Novak-Weekley, Mark Larocco
    Chapter 56 : Molecular Diagnostics and the Changing Legal Landscape / Mark L. Hayman, Jing Wang, Jeffrey M. Libby
    Index.
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Andreas Kukol, University of Hertfordshire, Hatfield, Hertfordshire, UK.
    Contents:
    Molecular dynamics simulations / Erik R. Lindahl
    Monte Carlo simulations / David J. Earl and Michael W. Deem
    Hybrid quantum and classical methods for computing kinetic isotope effects of chemical reactions in solutions and in enzymes / Jiali Gao ... [et al.]
    Comparison of protein force fields for molecular dynamics simulations / Olgun Guvench and Alexander D. MacKerell, Jr.
    Normal modes and essential dynamics / Steven Hayward and Bert L. de Groot
    Calculation of absolute protein-ligand binding constants with the molecular dynamics free energy perturbation method / Hyung-June Woo
    Free energy calculations applied to membrane proteins / Christophe Chipot
    Molecular dynamics simulations of membrane proteins / Philip C. Biggin and Peter J. Bond
    Membrane-associated proteins and peptides / Marc F. Lensink
    Implicit membrane models for membrane protein simulation / Michael Feig
    Comparative modeling of proteins / Gerald H. Lushington
    Transmembrane protein models based on high-throughput molecular dynamics simulations with experimental constratints / Andrew J. Beevers and Andreas Kukol
    Nuclear magnetic resonance-based modeling and refinement of protein three-dimensional structures and their complexes / Gloria Fuentes, Aalt D.J. van Dijk, and Alexandre M.J.J. Bonvin
    Conformational changes in protein function / Haiguang Liu ... [et al.]
    Protein folding and unfolding by all-atom molecular dynamics simulations / Hongxin Lei and Yong Duan
    Modeling of protein misfolding in disease / Edyta B. Małolepsza
    Identifying putative drug targets and potential drug leads : starting points for virtual screening and docking / David S. Wishart
    Receptor flexibility for large-scale in silico ligand screens : chances and challenges / B. Fischer, H. Merlitz, and W. Wenzel
    Molecular docking / Garrett M. Morris and Marguerita Lim-Wilby.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] David Murphy, Harold Gainer.
    Summary: "Discusses the mechanisms that enhance peptide and protein diversity beyond what is encoded in the genome through post-translational modification"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    Eric J. Nestler, MD, PhD, Nash Family Professor and Chair of Neuroscience, Director, Friedman Brain Institute, Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai, New York, New York, Steven E. Hyman, MD, Harvard University Distinguished Service Professor, Professor of Stem Cell and Regenerative Biology, Director, Stanley Center for Psychiatric Research, Broad Institute of MIT and Harvard, Cambridge, Massachusetts, David M. Holtzman, MD, Andrew B. and Gretchen P. Jones Professor, Chair, Department of Neurology, Washington University School of Medicine, St. Louis, Missouri, Robert C. Malenka, MD, PhD, Pritzker Professor of Psychiatry, Deputy Director, Stanford Neurosciences Institute, Stanford University, Palo Alto, California.
    Summary: Reviews the fundamental biochemistry of the functioning nervous system and then describes how nerve cells communicate with one another through numerous types of neurotransmitters involving amino acids, monoamines, neuropeptides, and neurotrophic factors, among several others.

    Contents:
    Basic principles of neuropharmacology
    Cellular basis of communication
    Synaptic transmission
    Signal transduction in the brain
    Excitatory and inhibitory amino acids
    Widely projecting systems: monoamines, acetylcholine, and orexin
    Neuropeptides
    Atypical neurotransmitters
    Autonomic nervous system
    Neural and neuroendocrine control of the internal milieu
    Pain
    Neuroinflammation
    Sleep and arousal
    Higher cognitive function and behavioral control
    Mood and emotion
    Reinforcement and addictive disorders
    Schizophrenia and bipolar disorder
    Neurodegeneration
    Seizure disorders
    Stroke and migraine.
    Digital Access AccessNeurology 2015
  • Digital
    editors, Eric J. Nestler, Paul J. Kenny, Scott J. Russo, Anne Schaefer.
    Summary: "The book's structure permits the incorporation of a great deal of clinical information, much of it representing the integration of modern molecular genetics and brain imaging with neuropharmacology"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Basic Principles of Neuropharmacology
    Cellular Basis of Communication
    Synaptic Transmission
    Signal Transduction in the Brain
    Excitatory and Inhibitory Amino Acids
    Widely Projecting Systems : Monoamines, Acetylcholine, and Orexin
    Neuropeptides
    Atypical Neurotransmitters
    Autonomic Nervous System
    Neural and Neuroendocrine Control of the Internal Milieu
    Pain
    Neuroinflammation
    Sleep and Arousal
    Higher Cognitive Function and Behavioral Control
    Mood and Emotion
    Reinforcement and Addiction
    Schizophrenia and Bipolar Disorder
    Neurodegeneration
    Seizure Disorders
    Stroke and Migraine.
    Digital Access AccessNeurology 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Edward P. Gelmann, chief, Division of Hematology/Oncology and deputy director for Clinical Research, Herbert Irving Comprehensive Cancer Center and Columbia University Medical Center, New York, NY, USA, Charles L. Sawyers, chair, Human Oncology and Pathogenesis Program, Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center, New York, NY, USA, Frank J. Rauscher III, professor, Gene Expression and Regulation Program, professor, Tumor Microenvironment and Metastasis Program, deputy director for Basic Research, Wistar Institute Cancer Center, Philadelphia, PA, USA.
    Summary: "The genomic era has allowed enormous strides in our understanding of the molecular changes that underlie malignant transformation. Mutations have been discovered that are critical drivers of large cross-sections of human cancers. These discoveries have allowed us to find drugs that target these drivers and make important strides in treatment. Genomics and high-throughput technologies have illuminated the complexity of cancer and the facility with which cancers adapt during their natural history. The field is evolving rapidly with new discoveries and new drugs reported monthly. This book is a timely foundation for understanding in context the origins of molecular oncology and its future directions. The content reviews available technologies for the analysis of cancer tissues and genes; summaries of key oncogenic pathways from a molecular perspective; the technologies, pathways and targeted therapies of a wide range of human malignancies; and new pharmacologic therapies that have a common mechanistic target"-- Provided by publisher. "This book was conceived more than five years before its publication date. It was intended to provide a resource that summarized technology, biochemistry, molecular pathophysiology, and targeted therapeutics. As contributors were being recruited and chapters written the field that was being described changed at an accelerating pace. It is a tribute to scientific progress that volumes like this one are out-of-date as they are published, but books like this are not meant to contain the most current laboratory discovery or report the most recent FDA approval"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Part 1.1. Analytical techniques: analysis of DNA
    Part 1.2. Analytical techniques: analysis of RNA
    Part 2.1. Molecular pathways underlying carcinogenesis: signal transduction
    Part 2.2. Molecular pathways underlying carcinogenesis: apoptosis
    Part 2.3. Molecular pathways underlying carcinogenesis: nuclear receptors
    Part 2.4. Molecular pathways underlying carcinogenesis: DNA repair
    Part 2.5. Molecular pathways underlying carcinogenesis: cell cycle
    Part 2.6. Molecular pathways underlying carcinogenesis: other pathways
    Part 3.1. Molecular pathology: carcinomas
    Part 3.2. Molecular pathology: cancers of the nervous system
    Part 3.3. Molecular pathology: cancers of the skin
    Part 3.14 Molecular pathology: endocrine cancers
    Part 3.5. Molecular pathology: adult sarcomas
    Part 3.6. Molecular pathology:lymphoma and leukemia
    Part 3.7. Molecular pathology: pediatric solid tumors
    Part 4. Pharmacologic targeting of oncogenic pathways.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2013
  • Digital
    Michael Ola Idowu, Catherine Isabelle Dumur, Carleton Theodore Garrett, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I. Overview of Basic Cellular Biology
    1. Normal molecular biology and definition of terms
    2. Pathologic changes: Chromosomes, genes, DNA, RNA and proteins
    3. Standard nomenclature
    introduction and brief overview
    Part II. Molecular Oncology Methodology
    4. General principles of Oncology testing
    5. Molecular methodologies
    6. General principles of validating a molecular test
    Part III. Molecular testing in Solid Tumors
    7. Lung and mediastinum
    8. Breast
    9. Head and neck (salivary glands)
    10. Thyroid and parathyroid (endocrine)
    11. Gastrointestinal and Pancreatobiliary
    12. Soft tissue
    13. Genitourinary system
    14. Central Nervous System
    15. Skin and adnexa
    16. Common Hereditary Cancer Syndromes
    Part IV. The future is here
    17. Application of next generation sequencing
    Part V. Quality Assurance and Regulatory affairs
    18. Quality Assurance
    pre-analytic, analytic and post-analytic
    19. Regulatory affairs (including accreditation)
    20. Coding and re-imbursement.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Masahiro Kizaki, editor.
    Contents:
    1. Identification and biology of CML stem cells
    2. Molecular mechanisms of CML stem cell maintenance
    3. Roles for signaling molecules in the growth and survival of CML cells
    4. Goals of CML treatment in the tyrosine kinase inhibitor era
    5. Biomarkers for determining the prognosis of CML
    6. Updated European LeukemiaNet recommendations for the management of CML
    7. Optimal monitoring of CML treatment: molecular and mutation analysis
    8. Recommendations for the management of CML in the era of second-generation TKIs
    9. The role of new TKIs and combinations with interferon-α for the treatment of CML
    10. Safety profiles of first-line TKIs and managing adverse effects
    11. Molecular mechanism of TKI resistance and potential approaches to overcome resistance
    12. Discontinuation of therapy and treatment-free remission in CML.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Domenico Coppola.
    Summary: Molecular pathology is based on the emergence of new techniques that greatly enhance the diagnostic accuracy when facing with challenging differential diagnoses. In addition, new molecular techniques are entering the clinical arena for their value in predicting therapy response and tumor prognosis. This book provides a guide for the practicing pathologist and for both pathology residents and fellows during the daily sign-out of challenging cases. The book is organized by anatomical systems and provides a detailed description of molecular tests that may help in the diagnosis. Furthermore, a description of the current molecular tests required to identify patients for treatment is offered. The application of molecular pathology techniques to the clinical practice has already shown its usefulness and the number of such tests is growing exponentially as more molecular targets are discovered. Molecular Pathology and Diagnostics of Cancer will give practicing and training pathologists an up-to date resource to guide the correct management of pathology cases requiring molecular testing.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Molecular Pathology and Diagnostics of Gliomas.-Molecular Pathology and Diagnostics of Thyroid and Parathyroid Malignancies
    Molecular Pathology and Diagnostics of Breast Cancer
    Molecular Pathology and Diagnostics of Non-Small Cell Lung Carcinoma
    Molecular Pathology and Diagnostics of Colorectal Cancer
    Molecular Pathology and Diagnostics in Esophago-Gastric Cancer
    Molecular-Genetic Testing in Hepatocellular Carcinoma and Its Premalignant Conditions
    Molecular Diagnostics of Pancreatic Cancer
    Molecular Pathology and Diagnostics of Prostate Cancer
    Molecular Diagnosis of Bladder and Kidney Cancer
    Molecular-Genetic Testing in Penile, Scrotal, and Testicular Cancer
    Molecular Pathology and Diagnostics of Gynecologic Malignancies
    Molecular Pathology of Bone and Soft Tissue Neoplasms and Potential Targets for Novel Therapy
    Molecular Pathology and Diagnostics of Pancreatic Endocrine Neoplasms
    Molecular Pathology and Diagnostics of Childhood Tumors
    Molecular Pathology and Diagnostics of Cutaneous Malignancy
    Molecular Diagnostics of Lymphoid Neoplasms
    Molecular Diagnostics of Myeloid Neoplasms.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Maika G. Mitchell.
    Summary: Molecular Pathology and the Dynamics of Disease bridges the basic science of, and primary clinical literature on, human disease. Topics covered include several major disease areas, such as inflammation and host response, vascular disease, obesity, weight regulation and appetite, cancer biology, drug development, and gene- and cell-based therapeutics that are all presented in a way that emphasizes the interplay between clinical care and investigation. As new technologies and techniques are constantly changing and laboratory scientists plays a critical role in validating data used by clinicians in diagnosing patients, this book provides a timely guide that includes a clinical, research and theory perspective.

    Contents:
    1. Molecular pathology introduction and research review
    2. Challenges in molecular pathology
    3. Review of clinical human medical genetics
    4. Molecular medicine in action
    5. Mechanisms of disease
    Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Debra G.B. Leonard, editor.
    Contents:
    I. Genetics
    II. Inherited Cancers
    III. Solid Tumors
    IV. Neoplastic Hematopathology
    V. Infectious Diseases
    VI. Identity Testing
    VII. HLA Typing
    VIII. Evolving Clinical Molecular Technologies
    IX. Laboratory Management.-Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Matthias A. Karajannis, David Zagzag, editor.
    Summary: This book serves as a comprehensive guide to the rapidly evolving field of molecular neuropathology of nervous system tumors, as well as the underlying biology and emerging molecular targeted therapies. Special emphasis is given to already established and emerging molecular diagnostic tests in neuropathology, as well as molecular targeted therapies. The book is organized by clinico-pathologic disease entities, and each chapter is written by a team of experts in their field. Molecular Pathology of Nervous System Tumors is of great value and utility for physicians and scientists involved with or interested in the up-to-date diagnosis and treatment of patients with brain tumors.

    Contents:
    1. Hereditary Predisposition to Primary CNS Tumors
    2. Brain Tumor Stem Cells
    3. Molecular Pathology Techniques.- 4. Low-grade Gliomas.- 5. Ependymoma.- 6. Adult High Grade (Diffuse) Glioma.- 7. High-Grade Gliomas and DIPG (Pediatric)
    8. Oligodendroglial Tumors: Current Treatments and the Promise of Molecular Genetics.- 9. Molecular Pathology of Nervous System Tumors: Medulloblastoma and CNS Primitive Neuroectodermal Tumors.- 10. Subependymal Giant Cell Astrocytoma.- 11. Germ Cell Tumors.- 12. Choroid Plexus Tumors.- 13. Atypical Teratoid Rhabdoid Tumors.- 14. Hemangioblastoma.- 15. Schwannomas.- 16. Molecular Pathology of Nervous System Tumors.- 17. Molecular Genetic Pathology of Meningiomas. .
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Lu-qi Huang, editor.
    Summary: This book discusses the application of molecular biology in resource science and authentication of traditional Chinese medicine (TCM). It also reviews the latest developments in pharmacognosy, introduces new perspectives and insights, discusses the hotspots and focuses in the field of molecular pharmacognosy, and predicts new directions of study. In the last five years, the technologies and scope of molecular pharmacognosy have constantly expanded and evolved. As such, this new edition includes extra content, such as the molecular phylogeography of medicinal plants, functional genome of medicinal plants, and synthetic biology of active compounds. Elucidating the concept, theory, and methodology of molecular pharmacognosy, it promotes the full use of the newly developed technologies and methodologies within the framework of molecular pharmacognosy to solve problems in the field.

    Contents:
    Emerging Molecular Pharmacognosy
    Molecular Identification of Traditional Medicinal Materials
    Molecular phylogeography of Medicinal plants
    The Mechanism of Formation of Dao-di herbs
    Seeking for New members of Origin Materials for CMM
    Salvation of Rare and Endangered Medicinal Plants
    Functional Genome of medicinal plants
    Gene Modification of Pharmic Plant Germplasm Resources
    Regulation of the Active Constituents Production of medicinal Plants
    Synthetic biology of active compounds.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Pascale Besse.
    Contents:
    Plant Taxonomy: An Historical Perspective, Current Challenges and Perspectives
    Guidelines for the Choice of Sequences for Molecular Plant Taxonomy
    Leaf Tissue Sampling and DNA Extraction Protocols
    DNA Extraction from Herbarium Specimens
    Analysis of Variation in Chloroplast DNA Sequences
    Mitochondrial Genome and Plant Taxonomy
    Nuclear Ribosomal RNA Genes: ITS Region
    New Technologies for Ultra-High Throughput Genotyping in Plant Taxonomy
    Development of Microsatellite Enriched Libraries
    Randomly Amplified Polymorphic DNA (RAPD) and Derived Techniques
    Multilocus Profiling with AFLP, ISSR and SAMPL
    Transposon Based Tagging: IRAP, REMAP and iPBS
    Phylogenetic Reconstruction Methods: An Overview
    The Application of Flow Cytometry for Estimating Genome Size and Ploidy Level in Plants
    Molecular Cytogenetics (FISH and Flurochrome Banding): Resolving Species Relationships and Genome Organisation
    GISH: Resolving Interspecific and Intergeneric Hybrids
    On the Relevance of Molecular Tools for the Taxonomy Revision in Malvales, Malvaceae s.l. and Dombeyoideae
    What Has Molecular Systematics Contributed to Our Knowledge of the Plant Family Proteaceae.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Michael Baumann, Mechthild Krause, Nils Cordes, editors.
    Contents:
    Molecular Radiobiology: Hypoxia
    Molecular Targeting of Growth Factor Receptor Signaling
    Molecular Targeting of Cell Adhesion Molecules
    Tumor Pathophysiology
    DNA Repair
    Cancer Stem Cells
    Normal Tissue. Biomarkers/Personalized Radiation Oncology: EGFR and other RTKs
    HPV
    Hypoxia
    Study design for Biomarker research in radiation oncology
    Gene expression/system biology. Molecular Imaging in Radiation Oncology:FMISO as a biomarker for clinical radiation oncology
    FDG and beyond
    Molecular imaging techniques beyond PET.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Henning Willers, Iris Eke, editors.
    Summary: Molecular Targeted Radiosensitizers: Opportunities and Challenges provides the reader with a comprehensive review of key pre-clinical research components required to identify effective radiosensitizing drugs. The book features discussions on the mechanisms and markers of clinical radioresistance, pre-clinical screening of targeted radiosensitizers, 3D radiation biology for studying radiosensitizers, in vivo determinations of local tumor control, genetically engineered mouse models for studying radiosensitizers, targeting the DNA damage response for radiosensitization, targeting tumor metabolism to overcome radioresistance, radiosensitizers in the era of immuno-oncology, and more. Additionally, the book features discussions on high-throughput drug screening, predictive biomarkers, pre-clinical tumor models, and the influence of the tumor microenvironment and the immune system, with a specific focus on the challenges radiation oncologists and medical oncologists currently face in testing radiosensitizers in human cancers. Edited by two acclaimed experts in radiation biology and radiosensitizers, with thirteen chapters contributed by experts, this new volume presents an in-depth look at current developments within a rapidly moving field, with a look at where the field will be heading and providing comprehensive insight into the framework of targeted radiosensitzer development. Essential reading for investigators in cancer research and radiation biology.

    Contents:
    Introduction to Molecular Targeted Radiosensitizers: Opportunities and Challenges
    Translating Targeted Radiosensitizers into the Clinic
    Cartography of the Radiogenome of Human Cancers
    Mechanisms and Markers of Clinical Radioresistance
    Preclinical Strategies for Testing of Targeted Radiosensitizers
    3D Radiation Biology for Identifying Radiosensitizers
    Preclinical in vivo evaluation of novel radiosensitizers by local tumor control experiments
    Genetically Engineered Mouse Models for Studying Radiation Biology and Radiosensitizers
    Targeting the DNA Damage Response for Radiosensitization
    Targeting Tumor Metabolism to Overcome Radioresistance.-Targeting Tumor Hypoxia
    Normalizing the Tumor Microenvironment for Radiosensitization
    Radiosensitizers in the Era of Immuno-Oncology
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Yuichi Takiguchi, editor.
    Summary: This book discusses the latest molecular targeted therapy of lung cancer including its evaluation and future directions. It clearly illustrates the initial dramatic effectiveness of molecular targeted therapy, recurrence of the disease, overcoming the wide variety of resistance mechanisms using new-generation molecular targeted agents and potential novel approaches. It also outlines the increasing necessity for new diagnostic technology and strategies for managing different adverse effects and novel methods for evaluating effectiveness and safety. Edited and authored by opinion leaders, Molecular Targeted Therapy of Lung Cancer provides a comprehensive overview of the disease and its treatments. It is a valuable resource for graduate students, post-doctoral fellows and faculty staff, as well as researchers involved in clinical and translational research on lung cancer, helping promote new ideas for further advances.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    George M. Yousef, Serge Jothy, editors.
    Summary: Molecular Testing in Cancer provides a state of the art review of clinically relevant molecular pathology in cancer. The book provides a brief, easy to read review of commonly employed diagnostic molecular techniques including recently developed "next generation" analytic tools, and offers a system-based run-through of the utility of molecular testing in individual cancer types, as well as reviewing current markers in cancer diagnosis, prognosis, and management. The volume also provides a prospective for the future which includes recently characterized and emerging biomarkers. Written by experts in the field, Molecular Testing in Cancer serves as a useful and comprehensive resource for pathologists, hematologists, laboratory technicians and molecular scientists.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Dayong Wang.
    Summary: This book will focus on the molecular basis of oxidative stress induced by toxicants or stresses and various molecular signalling pathways in regulating the toxicity of toxicants or stresses in Caenorhabditis elegans. It will also cover the discussion on the aspects of response signals, G-protein coupled receptors and ion channels, specific molecular signals, and epigenetic signals involved in the regulation of toxicity from toxicants or stresses. The molecular basis for adaptive response for transgenerational toxicity of environmental toxicants or stresses will be further discussed. Nematode Caenorhabditis elegans is a classic model animal with well-described genetic and developmental backgrounds based on the study of life science, and has been further successfully and widely used in both toxicity assessment and toxicological study of various environmental toxicants or stresses. Based on related available data, this book aims at providing a systematic understanding of the knowledge system of molecular toxicology in C. elegans.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents;
    Chapter 1: Molecular Basis for Oxidative Stress Induced by Environmental Toxicants in Nematodes; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Evidence for the Direct Association of Oxidative Stress with Toxicity of Environmental Toxicants; 1.2.1 Induction of Oxidative Stress in Targeted Organs of Environmental Toxicants; 1.2.2 Pharmacological Evidence for the Association of Oxidative Stress and Toxicity Formation of Environmental Toxicants; 1.2.3 Association of Induction of Oxidative Stress in Intestine and Toxicity Formation in Other Targeted Organs 1.3 Molecular Machinery for the Activation of Oxidative Stress in Nematodes1.3.1 Role of GAS-1 in the Activation of Oxidative Stress; 1.3.2 Role of MEV-1 in the Activation of Oxidative Stress; 1.3.3 Role of ISP-1 in the Activation of Oxidative Stress; 1.3.4 Role of CLK-1 in the Activation of Oxidative Stress; 1.3.4.1 Mitochondrial CLK-1; 1.3.4.2 Nuclear CLK-1; 1.4 Response Signals with the Functions to Defend Against the Oxidative Stress; 1.4.1 Superoxide Dismutases (SODs); 1.4.1.1 SOD-1; 1.4.1.2 SOD-2 and SOD-3; 1.4.1.3 SOD-4; 1.4.1.4 SOD-5; 1.4.2 Catalases (CATs); 1.4.3 Insulin Signaling 1.6 Molecular Basis for Induction of Oxidative Stress in Nematodes Exposed to Environmental Toxicants1.6.1 Alteration in Primary Molecular Mechanism for the Control of Oxidative Stress Induced by Environmental Toxicants; 1.6.2 Induction of Expression for Proteins with the Functions to Defend Against the Oxidative Stress Induced by Environmental Toxicants; 1.6.3 Suppression in Expressions of Genes Mediating the Protection Response Defending Against Oxidative Stress in Nematodes After Chronic Exposure to Certain Environmental Toxicants
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Phouthone Keohavong, Stephen G. Grant.
    Contents:
    Array-Based Immunoassays with Rolling-Circle Amplification Detection
    Analysis of Protein Changes Using Two-Dimensional Difference Gel Electrophoresis
    Assessment of Pathological and Physiological Changes in Mouse Lung Through Bronchoalveolar Lavage
    Analysis of Clinical and Biological Samples Using Microsphere-Based Multiplexing Luminex System
    Detection of DNA Methylation by MeDIP and MBDCap Assays: An Overview of Techniques
    Screening of DNA Methylation Changes by Methylation-Sensitive Random Amplified Polymorphic DNA-Polymerase Chain Reaction (MS-RAPD-PCR)
    Strategies for Measurement of Biotransformation Enzyme Gene Expression
    Genotyping Technologies: Application to Biotransformation Enzyme Genetic Polymorphism Screening
    TaqMan Fluorogenic Detection System to Analyze Gene Transcription in Autopsy Material
    32P-Postlabeling Analysis of DNA Adducts
    Modification of the 32P-Postlabeling Method to Detect a Single Adduct Species as a Single Spot
    DNA Isolation and Sample Preparation for Quantification of Adduct Levels by Accelerator Mass Spectrometry
    Analysis of DNA Strand Cleavage at Abasic Sites
    Premature Chromosome Condensation in Human Resting Peripheral Blood Lymphocytes Without Mitogen Stimulation for Chromosome Aberration Analysis Using Specific Whole Chromosome DNA Hybridization Probes
    Mutagen Sensitivity as Measured by Induced Chromatid Breakage as a Marker of Cancer Risk
    Pulsed-Field Gel Electrophoresis Analysis of Multicellular DNA Double-Strand Break Damage and Repair
    Detection of Pig-a Mutant Erythrocytes in the Peripheral Blood of Rats and Mice
    The Blood-Based Glycophorin A (GPA) Human In Vivo Somatic Mutation Assay
    Flow Cytometric Quantification of Mutant T Cells with Altered Expression of the T-Cell Receptor: Detecting Somatic Mutants in Humans and Mice
    Analysis of In Vivo Mutation in the Hprt and Tk Genes of Mouse Lymphocytes. (Continued)
    Quantifying In Vivo Somatic Mutations Using Transgenic Mouse Model Systems
    The Human T-Cell Cloning Assay: Identifying Genotypes Susceptible to Drug Toxicity and Somatic Mutation
    Molecular Analysis of Mutations in the Human HPRT Gene
    Simultaneous Quantification of t(14; 18) and HPRT Exon 2/3 Deletions in Human Lymphocytes
    Mutation Screening of the TP53 Gene by Temporal Temperature Gel Electrophoresis (TTGE)
    Detection of Point Mutations of K-ras Oncogene and p53 Tumor-Suppressor Gene in Sputum Samples
    ACB-PCR Quantification of Somatic Oncomutation
    Gel-Based Nonradioactive Single-Strand Conformational Polymorphism and Mutation Detection: Limitations and Solutions
    Detection and Characterization of Oncogene Mutations in Preneoplastic and Early Neoplastic Lesions
    Quantitative PCR-Based Measurement of Nuclear and Mitochondrial DNA Damage and Repair in Mammalian Cells
    The Sister Chromatid Exchange (SCE) Assay
    The Gene Cluster Instability (GCI) Assay for Recombination
    Measuring Recombination Proficiency in Mouse Embryonic Stem Cells
    Microsatellite Instability: An Indirect Assay to Detect Defects in the Cellular Mismatch Repair Machinery
    Unscheduled DNA Synthesis: The Clinical and Functional Assay for Global Genomic DNA Nucleotide Excision Repair
    Analysis of Actively Transcribed DNA Repair Using a Transfection-Based System
    An Immunoassay for Measuring Repair of UV Photoproducts
    Analysis of Double-Strand Break Repair by Nonhomologous DNA End Joining in Cell-Free Extracts from Mammalian Cells
    Bioenergetic Analysis of Intact Mammalian Cells Using the Seahorse XF24 Extracellular Flux Analyzer and a Luciferase ATP Assay
    Quantification of Selective Phosphatidylserine Oxidation During Apoptosis
    Quantitative Method of Measuring Phosphatidylserine Externalization During Apoptosis Using Electron Paramagnetic Resonance (EPR) Spectroscopy and Annexin-Conjugated Iron
    Detection of Programmed Cell Death in Cells Exposed to Genotoxic Agents Using a Caspase Activation Assay.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Matthias Giese, editor.
    Summary: This title discusses all aspects of non-infectious and non-cancer -- so called NINC -- vaccines. Hypertension, diabetes and allergy vaccine development are referred to as well as the use of adjuvants and nanotechnology in vaccine development. The way of novel vaccines from bench to preclinical to clinical studies and launch to the market under EMEA (European Medicines Agency) and FDA (Food and Drug Administration) guidelines are described in-depth. Practical perspectives of patentability of vaccines are discussed. The book is therefore of interest for researchers and clinicians engaged in vaccine development and molecular vaccine application.

    Contents:
    Non-infectious and non-cancer vaccines
    Adjuvants and nanotechnology
    In silico and delivery systems
    Patenting, manufacturing, registration.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Zhaosheng Liu, Yanping Huang, Yi Yang, editors.
    Summary: This book summarizes the recent advancements for drug delivery systems (DDS) in terms of fundamental principles, rapidly emerging techniques and developing frontiers of molecular imprinting. Especially with the combination of enantioselective molecularly imprinted polymers and water compatible molecularly imprinted polymers, stimuli responsive imprinted DDS have been innovated and applied to dermal delivery, ophthalmic drugs and cancer treatment. This philosophy comprehensively revolutionizes the treatment strategy of human healthcare and provides the possibility to re-trigger in vivo an exhaust system after the complete release of the starting drug cargo, thus enabling precision medicine. To this end, the following unique features will be discussed and concluded: 1) State-of-the-art definition of MIP as drug delivery systems. 2) Advanced techniques and clinical applications of MIP as drug delivery systems in the past decade. 3) Novel frontiers and brand-new technologies, for example, drug delivery devices for zero-order sustained release and stimuli responsive imprinted DDS. 4) Revolutionary impact on dermal delivery, ophthalmic drugs and cancer treatment. 5) Future challenges and perspectives.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction
    Chapter 2. Synthetic Strategies for the Generation of Molecularly Imprinted Polymers
    Chapter 3. Special Control by Molecular Imprinting Materials-zero-order Sustained Release, Enantioselective MIPs and Self-regulated Drug Delivery Microdevices
    Chapter 4. Water Compatible Molecularly Imprinted Polymers
    Chapter 5. Stimuli Responsive Imprinted DDS
    Chapter 6. MIP as Drug Delivery Systems for Dermal Delivery
    Chapter 7. MIP as Drug Delivery Systems of Anticancer Agents
    Chapter 8. MIP as Dug Delivery Systems of Ophthalmic Drugs
    Chapter 9. MIP as Drug Delivery Systems for Special Application
    Chapter 10. Outlook.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Harvey G. Klein, David J. Anstee.
    Summary: "Mollison's Blood Transfusion in Clinical Medicine is an icon in the field of transfusion and the first edition was published in 1951. The book arose from the concept of the transfusionist, as both scientist and expert consultant. For many years, this text has provided the primary, and often the sole, reference for detailed information and practical experience in blood transfusion. The book is completely revised and updated throughout to include the latest advances and developments in the field"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Rebecca Kirby and Andrew Linklater.
    Contents:
    An introduction to SIRS and the rule of 20 / Rebecca Kirby
    Fluid balance / Elke Rudloff and Rebecca Kirby
    Blood pressure / Lauren Sullivan
    Albumin and colloid osmotic pressure / Adesola Odunayo
    Glucose / Natara Loose
    Electrolytes / Linda Barton
    Acid base status / Jan Kovacic and Ryan Wheeler
    Oxygenation and ventilation / Christin Reminga and Lesley King
    Coagualation / Andrew Linklater
    Red blood cells and hemoglobin / Andrew Linklater and Veronica Higgs
    Heart rate, rhythm and contractility / Dennis Burkett
    Neurological status / Christine Iacovetta
    The renal system / Lee Herold
    White blood cells, immune status and antimicrobial stewardship
    / Carol Haak
    Gastrointestinal system motility and integrity / Jennifer Klaus
    Nutrition / Caroline Tonozzi
    Temperature / Conni Wehausen
    Drug selection and dosing regimens / Dawn Merton Boothe
    Pain management / Armi Pigott
    Veterinary nursing care / Heather Darbo and Cheryl Page
    Wounds and bandages / Jennifer Devey, Andrew Linklater and Rebecca Kirby
    Anesthesia of the critical patient / Sue Leonard.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    John W. Cherrie, Sean E. Semple, Marie A. Coggins.
    Summary: "This is the fifth edition of what we hope continues to be a practical textbook for those studying or carrying out the important task of protecting workers from hazards. The previous edition was published in 2010, and that built upon work by Indira Ashton and Frank Gill going back to the first edition published in 1982. In that near 40 year span the book has developed considerably and has expanded to include hazards such as nanoparticles and exposure routes including skin contact and inadvertent ingestion of chemicals that were not considered in the first work. Since the 4th Edition published in 2010, new chemical regulations (REACH) have become increasingly widely adopted in Europe. Hazard assessment procedures under REACH often require the generation of robust exposure data, thus stimulating the need to measure or model exposure to chemicals"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Front Matter
    INTRODUCTION. Occupational Hygiene and Risk Assessment
    Identifying Hazards
    Exposure, Exposure Routes and Exposure Pathways
    The Exposure Context
    Modelling Exposure
    Why Measure?
    How to Carry Out a Survey
    Analysis of Measurement Results
    Introduction to Control
    The Importance of Good Records and How to Write a Survey Report
    Risk Assessment
    Risk Communication
    HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES. An Introduction to Hazardous Substances
    Dust, Particles and Fibrous Aerosols
    Gases and Vapours
    Bioaerosols
    Dermal and Inadvertent Ingestion Exposure
    Human Biomonitoring
    PHYSICAL AGENTS. An Introduction to Physical Agents
    Noise
    Vibration
    Heat and Cold
    Lighting
    Ionising Radiation
    Non-Ionising Radiation
    CONTROL OF HAZARDS. Assessing the Effectiveness of Exposure Controls
    Assessing Local Ventilation Control Systems
    Personal Protective Equipment
    THE FUTURE. Monitoring for Hazards at Work in the Future
    Appendix: Survey Checklists
    Equipment Suppliers
    Chemical Analytical Services
    Index
    Digital Access Wiley 2021
  • Digital
    Jean-Michel Arnal ; with contribution by Robert Chatburn.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Jesse M. Ehrenfeld, Maxime Cannesson, editors.
    Summary: This is an introduction to the patient monitoring technologies that are used in today's acute care environments, including the operating room, recovery room, emergency department, intensive care unit, and telemetry floor. To a significant extent, day-to-day medical decision-making relies on the information provided by these technologies, yet how they actually work is not always addressed during education and training. The editors and contributors are world-renowned experts who specialize in developing, refining, and testing the technology that makes modern-day clinical monitoring possible. Their aim in creating the book is to bridge the gap between clinical training and clinical practice with an easy to use and up-to-date guide. ·How monitoring works in a variety of acute care settings ·For any healthcare professional working in an acute care environment ·How to apply theoretical knowledge to real patient situations ·Hemodynamic, respiratory, neuro-, metabolic, and other forms of monitoring ·Information technologies in the acute care setting ·New and future technologies.

    Contents:
    Section I. Fundamental Principles of Monitoring
    Overview of Clinical Monitoring
    Monitoring in Acute Care Environments: Unique Aspects of Intensive Care Units, Operating Rooms, Recovery Rooms, Telemetry Floors
    Introduction to Signals
    Signal Analysis: Acquisition, Storage, and Analysis of Physiological Signals
    Information Displays and Ergonomics
    Decision Support and Closed-Loop Systems
    Section II. Hemodynamic Monitoring
    Introduction to Hemodynamic Monitoring
    Pulmonary Artery Catherization
    Non-invasive Cardiac Output Monitoring
    Transpulmonary Thermodilution
    Echocardiography in the Acute Care Setting
    Non-invasive Arterial Pressure Monitoring
    Heart Rate Variability
    Preload-Dependent Monitoring
    Monitoring the Microcirculation in Critically Ill Patients
    Hemodynamic Monitoring During Cardiopulmonary Bypass
    Closed-Loop Fluid Management and Hemodynamic Optimization
    Section III. Respiratory Monitoring
    Introduction to Respiratory Monitoring
    Photoplethysmography: Analysis of the Pulse Oximeter Waveform
    Time and Volumetric Capnography
    Monitoring Diaphragmatic Function
    The Anesthesia Machine as a Monitor
    Ventilator Settings in Acute Care Environments
    Monitoring Respiratory Rate
    Closed-Loop Mechanical Ventilation
    Section IV. Neuromonitoring
    Introduction to Neuromonitoring
    Transcranial Doppler
    Brain Oxygenation
    Intracranial Pressure and SvjO2
    Monitoring the EEG for Assessing Depth of Anesthesia
    Monitoring Analgesia
    Neuromonitoring during Spine Surgery
    Closed-loop Anesthesia Based on Neuromonitoring
    Target-Controlled Infusions
    Section V. Metabolic Monitoring
    Glucometrics and Measuring Blood Glucose in Critically Ill Patients
    Noninvasive Hemoglobin Monitoring
    Monitoring of O2 Uptake and CO2 Elimination During Anesthesia and Surgery
    Gastric Tonometry
    Temperature Monitoring
    Section VI. Other Forms of Monitoring in the Acute Care Environment
    Point-of-Care Coagulation Monitoring
    Pediatric Monitoring
    Fetal Monitoring
    Other Forms of Monitoring in the Acute Care Environment
    Ultrasound
    Section VII. Information Technologies in the Acute Care Setting
    Overview of Electronic Health Records
    Benefits and Drawbacks of Health Information Technology
    Special Case: Perioperative Information Management Systems
    Section VIII. New and Emerging Technologies
    Intelligent Patient Monitoring and Clinical Decision-Making
    Robotization.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Antoun Koht, Tod B. Sloan, J. Richard Toleikis, editors.
    Summary: This widely praised, first-of-its-kind book has been thoroughly updated, expanded, and enriched with extensive new case material, illustrations, and link-outs to multimedia, practice guidelines, and more. Written and edited by outstanding world experts, this was the first and remains the leading single-source volume on intraoperative neurophysiological monitoring (IOM). It is aimed at graduate students and trainees, as well as members of the operative team, including anesthesiologists, technologists, neurophysiologists, surgeons, and nurses. Now commonplace in procedures that place the nervous system at risk, such as orthopedics, neurosurgery, otologic surgery, vascular surgery, and others, effective IOM requires an unusually high degree of coordination among members of the operative team. The purpose of the book is to help students, trainees, and team members acquire a better understanding of one another's roles and thereby to improve the quality of care and patient safety. From the reviews of the First Edition: "A welcome addition to reference works devoted to the expanding field of nervous system monitoring in the intraoperative period ... will serve as a useful guide for many different health care professionals and particularly for anesthesiologists involved with this monitoring modality ... An excellent reference ... [and] a helpful guide both to the novice and to the developing expert in this field."--Canadian Journal of Anesthesia "Impressive ... [The book] is well written, indexed, and illustrated ... The chapters are all extensively referenced. It is also very good value at the price ... I would recommend this book to all residents and especially to all neuroanesthesiologists. It will make a worthwhile addition to their library." --Journal of Neurosurgical Anesthesiology.

    Contents:
    SECTION I. Monitoring Techniques
    1. Somatosensory-Evoked Potentials
    2. Transcranial Motor-Evoked Potentials
    3. Auditory-Evoked Potentials
    4. Visual-Evoked Potentials
    5. Deep Brain Stimulation
    6. Monitoring of Spinal Cord Functions
    7. Electromyography
    8. The Use of Reflex Responses for IOM
    9. Brain and Spinal Cord Mapping
    10. EEG Monitoring
    11. Clinical Application of Raw and Processed EEG
    12. A Guide to Central Nervous System Near-Infrared Spectroscopic Monitoring
    13. Transcranial Doppler Ultrasound
    14. Monitoring of Jugular Venous Oxygen Saturation
    15. Intracranial Pressure Monitoring
    16. IOM Instrumentation Layout and Electrical Interference
    17. Signal Optimization in Intraoperative Neuromonitoring
    SECTION II. Anesthesia Considerations
    18. Anesthesia for Awake Neurosurgery
    19. Anesthesia Management and Intraoperative Electrophysiological Monitoring
    SECTION III. Clinical Applications
    20. Monitoring Applications and Evaluating Changes
    21. Intraoperative Neurophysiological Monitoring for Intracranial Aneurysm Surgery
    22. Intracranial Arteriovenous Malformation Surgery
    23. Intraoperative Neurophysiologic Monitoring During Surgery for Supratentorial Mass Lesions
    24. Surgery for Infratentorial Mass
    25. Trigeminal Microvascular Decompression
    26. Surgery for Hemifacial Spasm
    27. Skull Base Surgery
    28. Surgery for Chiari Type I Malformation
    29. ENT and Anterior Neck Surgery
    30. Carotid Surgery
    31. Anterior Cervical Spine Surgery
    32. Posterior Cervical Spine Surgery
    33. Surgery for Scoliosis Correction
    34. Neurophysiological Monitoring in Thoracic Spine Surgery
    35. Intraoperative Neurophysiologic Monitoring for Lumbo-Sacral Spine Procedures
    36. Intramedullary Spinal Cord Surgery
    37. Intraoperative Monitoring in Tethered Cord Surgery
    38. Surgery in the Peripheral Nervous System
    39. Surgery of the Aortic Arch
    40. Electrophysiological Monitoring During Thoracic Aortic Aneurysm Surgery
    41. Monitoring During Cardiopulmonary Bypass
    42. Interventional Neuroradiology
    43. Intra-operative Neuromonitoring in Pediatric Surgery
    SECTION IV. Intensive Care
    44. Monitoring in the Intensive Care Unit
    45. Epilepsy and Seizures: OR and ICU Applications of EEG
    46. Monitoring Cerebral Blood Flow.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Print
    edited by Oliver Kepp, Lorenzo Galluzzi,
    Summary: Monitoring Vesicular Trafficking in Cellular Responses to Stress, Volume 164-165 in the Methods in Cell Biology series, highlights new advances in the field, with this new volume presenting interesting chapters on a variety of timely topics. Each chapter is written by an international board of authors.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
  • Digital
    edited by Vincent Ossipow, Nicolas Fischer.
    Contents:
    Antigen production for monoclonal antibody generation / Giovanni Magistrelli and Pauline Malinge
    Method for the generation of antibodies specific for site and posttranslational modifications / Hidemasa Goto and Masaki Inagaki
    Immunization, hybridoma generation, and selection for monoclonal antibody production / Hyung-Yong Kim, Alexander Stojadinovic, and Mina J. Izadjoo
    Hybridoma technology for the generation of rodent mAbs via classical fusion / Efthalia Chronopoulou [and three others]
    Generation of rabbit monoclonal antibodies / Pi-Chen Yam and Katherine L. Knight
    Screening hybridomas for cell surface antigens by high-throughput homogeneous assay and flow cytometry / Alejandro Uribe-Benninghoff [and four others]
    Screening and subcloning of high producer transfectomas using semisolid media and automated colony picker / Suba Dharshanan and Cheah Swee Hung
    Design and generation of synthetic antibody libraries for phage display / Gang Chen and Sachdev S. Sidhu
    Selection and screening using antibody phage display libraries / Patrick Koenig and Germaine Fuh
    Yeast surface display for antibody isolation : library construction, library screening, and affinity maturation / James A.Van Deventer and Karl Dane Wittrup
    Human B cell immortalization for monoclonal antibody production / Joyce Hui-Yuen, Siva Koganti, and Sumita Bhaduri-McIntosh
    Using next-generation sequencing for discovery of high- frequency monoclonal antibodies in the variable gene repertoires from immunized mice / Ulrike Haessler and Sai T. Reddy
    Cloning, reformatting, and small-scale expression of monoclonal antibody isolated from mouse, rat, or hamster hybridoma / Jeremy Loyau and François Rousseau
    Cloning of recombinant monoclonal antibodies from hybridomas in a single mammalian expression plasmid / Nicole Müller-Sienerth [and three others]
    Monoclonal antibody purification by ceramic hydroxyapatite chromatography / Larry J. Cummings, Russell G. Frost, and Mark A. Snyder
    Rapid purification of monoclonal antibodies using magnetic microspheres / Pauline Malinge and Giovanni Magistrelli
    Generation of cell lines for monoclonal antibody production / Krista Alvin and Jianxin Ye
    Expression and purification of recombinant antibody formats and antibody fusion proteins / Martin Siegemund [and four others]
    Purification of antibodies and antibody fragments using CaptureSelect [trademark] affinity resins / Pim Hermans, Hendrik Adams, and Frank Detmers
    Reformatting of scFv antibodies into the scFv-Fc format and their downstream purification / Emil Bujak [and three others]
    Antibody V and C domain sequence, structure, and interaction analysis with special reference to IMGT® / Eltaf Alamyar [and three others]
    Measuring antibody affinities as well as the active concentration of antigens present on a cell surface / Palaniswami Rathanaswami
    Determination of antibody structures / Robyn L. Stanfield
    Affinity maturation of monoclonal antibodies by multi-site- directed mutagenesis / Hyung-Yong Kim, Alexander Stojadinovic, and Mina J. Izadjoo
    Epitope mapping with membrane-bound synthetic overlapping peptides / Terumi Midoro-Horiuti and Randall M. Goldblum
    Epitope mapping by epitope excision, hydrogen/deuterium exchange, and peptide-panning techniques combined with in silico analysis/ Nicola Clementi [and five others]
    Fine epitope mapping based on phage display and extensive mutagenesis of the target antigen / Gertrudis Rojas
    Epitope mapping with random phage display library / Terumi Midoro-Horiuti and Randall M. Goldblum
    Epitope mapping of monoclonal and polyclonal antibodies using bacterial cell surface display / Anna-Luisa Volk, Francis Jingxin Hu, and Johan Rockberg
    Ion exchange-high-performance liquid chromatography (IEX-HPLC) / Marie Corbier, Delphine Schrag, and Sylvain Raimondi
    Size exclusion-high-performance liquid chromatography (SEC-HPLC) / Delphine Schrag, Marie Corbier, and Sylvain Raimondi
    N-glycosylation characterization by liquid chromatography with mass spectrometry / Song Klapoetke
    Fc engineering of antibodies and antibody derivatives by primary sequence alteration and their functional characterization / Stefanie Derer [and six others]
    Labeling and use of monoclonal antibodies in immunofluorescence : protocols for cytoskeletal and nuclear antigens / Christoph R. Bauer
    Generation and use of antibody fragments for structural studies of proteins refractory to crystallization / Stephen J. Stahl, Norman R. Watts, and Paul T. Wingfield
    Antibody array generation and use / Carl A.K. Borrebaeck and Christer Wingren.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Antoinette Maassen van den Brink, Paolo Martelletti, editors.
    Summary: Intended to promote a more appropriate and modern therapeutic approach to migraine management, this book is the first to deal with monoclonal antibodies in this context. Authored by the most respected migraine experts from around the globe and drawing on the lessons learned in both clinical trials and clinical practice, it reviews the current state of knowledge on this important therapeutic innovation, which has produced impressive data in randomized controlled trials, and the efficacy and safety of which have been confirmed in day-to-day real-world use. Given its scope, the book will appeal to a broad range of specialists, including pharmacologists, clinical pharmacologists, neurologists and internists, but also to residents and medical students.

    Contents:
    The CGRP family of neuropeptides and their receptors in the trigeminovascular system
    Pharmacology; where do the mAbs act, gepants vs mAbs
    Monoclonal Antibody Biology
    Guidelines for clinical trials
    Human Models
    CGRP Antibodies for Animal Models of Primary and Secondary Headache Disorders
    Galcanezumab
    Eptinezumab
    Erenumab
    Fremanezumab
    Potential side effects and pregnancy
    Real-world data, clinical practice so far
    Migraine vs Cluster headache and potential other indications.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Urs Eggli, Reto Nyffeler, editors.
    Summary: This second edition provides a comprehensive list of the latest taxonomy including the updated relevant plant data. All succulent species of the monocotyledonous plant families and genera are described in detail. This work will be particularly useful to botanists, plant taxonomists and scholars as well as to herbaria and botanic gardens. It will also appeal to the committed collector of succulent plants, horticultural cognoscenti and succulent plant lovers. -- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Yunheng Ji.
    Summary: This book provides essential information on the morphology, biology, phytochemistry, pharmaceutical prospects, evolution, phylogeny, biogeography, and taxonomy of Paris (Melanthiaceae), a morphologically distinctive plant genus with great economic importance. Since the establishment of this genus, 70 species and 24 subspecific taxa have been described, resulting in considerable confusion in species delimitation. In this book, the taxonomy of all described taxa is carefully revised. Based on multi-disciplinary evidences, a revised classification system of Paris containing five sections is outlined. Every species is provided with a concise but diagnostic description, a color illustration, photographs that highlight distinguishing characters, examined specimens and distribution range. The interspecific relationships are clarified with an identification key. This monograph offers taxonomists, evolutionary biologists, ecologists, horticulturalists, phytochemists, and practitioners a thorough and up-to-date overview about this interesting plant group. It is equally valuable for undergraduate and graduate students, teachers and professionals engaged in related fields.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgements
    Contents
    Chapter 1: Introduction: Taxonomic History
    1.1 Establishment of the Genus
    1.2 Affinities
    1.3 History of Species Discoveries
    1.4 Generic Circumscription and Subdivision
    1.5 Issues to Be Resolved
    References
    Chapter 2: Morphology
    2.1 Gross Morphology
    2.1.1 Rhizome
    2.1.2 Mycorrhiza
    2.1.3 Leaves
    2.1.4 Flower
    2.1.5 Fruit
    2.1.6 Seeds
    2.1.7 Taxonomic Significance
    2.2 Pollen Morphology
    2.2.1 Pollen Size, Shape, and Ornamentation
    2.2.2 Taxonomic Implications
    References
    Chapter 3: Biology 3.1 Distribution and Habitat
    3.2 Phenology
    3.3 Propagation and Growth
    3.3.1 Pollination
    3.3.2 Seed Production
    3.3.3 Seed Dispersal
    3.3.4 Life Cycle
    3.4 Chromosomes
    3.4.1 Karyotype
    3.4.2 B Chromosomes
    3.4.3 Chromosome Evolution
    3.5 Genomes
    3.5.1 Genome Size
    3.5.2 Possible Mechanisms Underlying the Formation of Large Genomes
    3.5.3 Plastid Genomes
    3.5.3.1 General Features
    3.5.3.2 Pseudogenization of Plastid cemA
    3.5.3.3 Hotspots of Sequence Variation
    References
    Chapter 4: Economic Importance
    4.1 Medicinal Importance 4.1.1 Overall Information
    4.1.2 Traditional Uses and Ethnopharmacological Properties
    4.2 Horticultural Potential
    4.2.1 P. cronquistii (Takht.) H. Li
    4.2.2 P. delavayi Franch
    4.2.3 P. lancifolia Hayata
    4.2.4 P. luquanensis H. Li
    4.2.5 P. marmorata Stearn
    4.2.6 P. yunnanensis Franch
    4.3 Phytochemistry
    4.3.1 Steroidal Saponins
    4.3.2 Phytoecdysones
    4.3.3 Phytosterols
    4.3.4 Flavonoids
    4.3.5 Triterpenoid Saponins
    4.3.6 Others
    4.4 Pharmaceutical Prospects
    4.4.1 Anti-Tumor
    4.4.2 Hemostatic Activity
    4.4.3 Uterine Contractile Agonistic Activity 4.4.4 Antimicrobial
    4.4.5 Other Activities
    References
    Chapter 5: Phylogeny, Classification, Biogeography, and Evolution
    5.1 Ancient and Recent Hybridization
    5.2 Generic Circumscription
    5.3 Infrageneric Classification
    5.4 Historical Biogeography
    5.5 Species Diversification
    5.6 Origin and Evolution of Genomic Gigantism
    References
    Chapter 6: Taxonomic Revision
    6.1 Section Paris
    6.2 Section Kinugasa
    6.3 Section Thibeticae
    6.4 Section Axiparis
    6.5 Section Euthyra
    References
    Chapter 7: Conservation Considerations
    7.1 Conservation Status 7.1.1 Species Rarity
    7.1.2 Extinction Risk
    7.2 Principal Threats
    7.2.1 Commercial Collecting
    7.2.2 Arbitrary Introduction
    7.2.3 Habitat Degradation
    7.3 Conservation Priorities
    7.4 Conservation Strategies
    7.4.1 Commercial Cultivation
    7.4.2 In situ Conservation
    7.4.3 Ex situ Conservation
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Wilhelm Foissner, Kuidong Xu.
    Contents:
    vol.
    1. Protospathidiidae, Arcuospathidiidae, Apertospathulidae --
    Digital Access Springer 2006
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access Karger v. 1-, 1973-
    Vols. 1-3 are 2nd editions
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QH573 .M752
    19
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Monographs in epidemiology and biostatistics to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Digital/Print
    Beckman, Lars; Hauge, M.
    Digital Access Karger v. 1-, 1966-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    QH431 .M554
    12
  • Print
    Falkner, Frank T.; Kretchmer, Norman; Rossi, E.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Periodicals (Downstairs)
    8
  • Digital/Print
    Melnick, Joseph L.
    Digital Access Karger v. 1-, 1968-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Periodicals (Downstairs)
    19
  • Print
    Achté, Karl Aimo.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RC331 .M743
    1
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Monographs of the Physiological Society to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Print
    Braakman, R.; Minderhoud, J. M.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RC321 .M751
    3
  • Digital/Print
    Eugene G. Hrycay, Stelvio M. Bandiera, editors.
    Contents:
    Foreword
    1. Monooxygenase, Peroxidase and Peroxygenase Properties and Reaction Mechanisms of Cytochrome P450 Enzymes
    2. Oxidizing Intermediates in P450 Catalysis: A Case for Multiple Oxidants
    3. Current Approaches for Investigating and Predicting Cytochrome P450 3A4-Ligand Interactions
    4. Acyl-Carbon Bond Cleaving Cytochrome P450 Enzymes: CYP17A1, CYP19A1 and CYP51A1
    5. Regioselective Versatility of Monooxygenase Reactions Catalyzed by CYP2B6 and CYP3A4: Examples With Single Substrates
    6. Cytochrome P450 Enzymes in the Bioactivation of Polyunsaturated Fatty Acids and their Role in Cardiovascular Disease
    7. Monooxygenation of Small Hydrocarbons Catalyzed by Bacterial Cytochrome P450s
    8. Use of Chemical Auxiliaries to Control P450 Enzymes for Predictable Oxidations at Unactivated C-H Bonds of Substrates,- 9. Cytochrome P450 Enzymes and Electrochemistry: Crosstalk with Electrodes as Redox Partners and Electron Sources
    10. Mechanistic Basis of Electron Transfer to Cytochromes P450 by Natural Redox Partners and Artificial Donor Constructs
    11. Biological Diversity of Cytochrome P450 Redox Partner Proteins
    12. Cytochrome P450cin (CYP176A1)
    13. Fungal Unspecific Peroxygenases: Heme-Thiolate Proteins that Combine Peroxidase and Cytochrome P450 Properties.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    the University of Cincinnati residents from the Department of Surgery, University of Cincinnati College of Medicine ; editors, Jeffrey M. Sutton, MD [and 6 others].
    Contents:
    Part I: Perioperative care. Surgical history and physical examination
    Fluids and electrolytes
    Nutrition
    Wound healing
    Surgical risk assessment
    Suture types, needle types, and instruments
    Part II: Anesthesia. Local anesthesia
    Conscious sedation
    Part III: Surgical critical care. Surgical infection
    Hemorrhage and coagulation
    Shock
    Cardiopulmonary monitoring
    Mechanical ventilation
    Part IV: Trauma surgery. Primary and secondary survey
    Abdominal trauma
    Thoracic trauma
    Extremity trauma
    Burns
    Neurosurgical emergencies
    Part V: Gastrointestinal surgery. Acute abdomen
    Abdominal wall hernias
    Gastrointestinal bleeding
    Intestinal obstruction
    Peptic ulcer disease
    Inflammatory bowel disease
    Benign colorectal disease
    Appendix
    Benign pancreatic disease
    Bariatric surgery
    Part VI: Surgical oncology. Tumor biology, syndromes, and genetic mutations
    Head and neck malignancy
    Esophageal malignancy
    Gastric malignancy
    Small bowel malignancy
    Malignant colorectal and perianal disease
    Malignant pancreas disease
    Diseases of the breast
    Malignant skin lesions
    Part VI: Hepatobiliary surgery. Malignant gallbladder and biliary tree
    Liver tumors
    Part VIII: Transplant surgery. Renal transplantation
    Liver transplantation
    Pancreas transplantation
    Part IX: Endocrine surgery. Thyroid
    Parathyroid
    Adrenal gland
    Neuroendocrine tumors
    Part X: Vascular surgery. Thromboembolic disease
    Aneurysms
    Peripheral vascular disease
    Carotid disease
    Mesenteric ischemia
    Dialysis access
    Diabetic patient
    Part XI: Dardiothoracic surgery. Benign tumors of the lung
    Malignant tumors of the lung
    Thymus and mediastinal tumors
    Cardiac surgery
    Cardiac transplantation
    Part XII: Surgical subspecialties. General pediatric surgery
    Neurosurgery
    Orthopedic surgery
    Plastic surgery: breast reconstruction
    Part XIII: Future of surgery. Robotics and new surgical technologies
    Part XIV: Procedures.
    Part XV: Rapid references.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Sudhakar Selvaraj, Paolo Brambilla, Jair Soares.
    Summary: "Mood disorders are the most common mental illnesses with a lifetime prevalence of up to 20% worldwide 1. Major depressive disorder (MDD) and Bipolar Disorder (BD) are significant health problems in the US and worldwide 2. In the United States alone, the lifetime prevalence of MDD is up to 17%, and that of BD about 2.1% 2 that can go up to 4% of individuals with mood episodes not meeting episodic criteria are included. Both are chronic and recurrent illnesses characterized by recurrent episodes of depression and mania and depression in MDD and BD respectively"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Brian Henderson.
    Contents:
    What is protein moonlighting and why is it important? / Constance J. Jeffery
    Exploring structure-function relationships in moonlighting proteins / Sayoni Das, Ishita Khan, Daisuke Kihara, Christine Orengo
    Overview of protein moonlighting in bacterial virulence / Brian Henderson
    Moonlighting proteins as cross-reactive autoantigens / Wim van Eden
    Chaperonin 60 paralogues in mycobacterium tuberculosis and tubercle formation / Brian Henderson
    Legionella pneumophila chaperonin 60 an extra- and intra-cellular moonlighting virulence-related factor / Karla N. Valenzuela-Valderas, Angela L. Riveroll, Peter Robertson, Lois E. Murray, and Rafael A. Garduño
    An overview of peptidylprolyl isomerases in bacterial virulence / Brian Henderson
    GAPDH : a multifunctional moonlighting protein in eukaryotes and prokaryotes / Michael A. Sirover
    Streptococcus pyogenes GAPDH : a cell surface major virulence determinant / Vijay Pancholi
    Group B streptococcus GAPDH and immune evasion / Paula Ferreira and Patrick Trieu-Cuot
    Mycobacterium tuberculosis cell surface gapdh functions as a transferrin receptor / Vishant M Borradia, Manoj Raje, Chaaya Iyengar
    Gapdh and probiotic organisms / Hideki Kinoshita
    Impact of streptococcal enolase in virulence / Marcus Fulde and Simone Bergmann
    Streptococcal enolase and immune evasion / Masaya Yamaguchi and Shigetada Kawabata
    Borrelia burgdorferi enolase and plasminogen binding / Catherine A. Brissette
    Triosephosphate isomerase from staphylococcus aureus and plasminogen receptors on microbial pathogens / Reiko Ikeda, Tomoe Ichikawa
    Moonlighting functions of bacterial fructose-1,6 bisphosphate-aldolases / Neil J Oldfield, Fariza Shams, Karl G Wooldridge and David PJ Turner
    Pyruvate dehydrogenase and plasminogen binding in mycoplasmas / Anne Gründel, Kathleen Friedrich, Melanie Pfeiffer, Enno Jacobs, Roger Dumke
    Unexpected interactions of leptospiral ef-tu proteins / Natalia Salazar and Angela Barbosa
    Mycobacterium tuberculosis antigen 85 family proteins : mycolyl transferases and matrix-binding adhesins / Christopher P. Ptak, Chih-Jung Kuo, and Yung-Fu Chang
    Miscellaneous il-1[beta]-binding proteins of aggregatibacter actinomycetemcomitans / Riikka Ihalin
    Bacteriophage moonlighting in the control of bacterial pathogenicity / Janine Bowring, Alberto Marina, José R. Penadés and Nuria Quiles-Puchalt
    Viral entry glycoproteins and viral immune evasion / Jonathan D. Cook and Jeffrey E. Lee.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Arthur F. Dalley II, Anne M.R. Agur.
    Contents:
    Overview and Basic Concepts
    Back
    Upper Limb
    Thorax
    Abdomen
    Pelvis and Perineum
    Lower Limb
    Head
    Neck
    Summary of Cranial Nerves.
  • Print
    Anne M. R. Agur, Arthur F. Dalley II.
    Summary: "Known for its hallmark Clinical Blue Boxes, Moore's Essential Clinical Anatomy, 7th Edition, combines an easy-to-read approach, dynamic surface anatomy and medical imaging features, and engaging digital resources to build clinical confidence and equip users for success from foundational science courses through clinical training and practice. The concise, user-friendly format emphasizes structures and functions critical to physical diagnosis for primary care, interpretation of diagnostic imaging, and understanding the anatomical basis of emergency medicine and general surgery. This updated 7th Edition reflects the latest clinical perspectives and is supported by valuable self-assessment tools, case studies, and interactive BioDigital software to enrich understanding for students and practitioners alike. NEW! Sex and gender content clarifies important gender considerations and reflects an equitable focus on female as well as male anatomy. Extensively revised Clinical Blue Boxes highlight the practical applications of anatomy, accompanied by helpful icons, illustrations, and images that distinguish the type of clinical information covered. Revised comprehensive surface anatomy photographs ensure accurate, effective physical examination diagnoses with integrated natural views of unobstructed surface anatomy and illustrations superimposing anatomical structures with landmarks for more accurate physical examination. Insightfully rendered, anatomically accurate illustrations, combined with many photographs and medical images, strengthen comprehension of anatomical concepts and retention of "mental images" of anatomical structures. Medical Imaging sections familiarize students with plain and contrast radiographic, MRI, CT, and ultrasonography studies they'll use in clinical practice. Comprehensive tables clarify complex information about muscles, veins, arteries, nerves, and other structures for easy study and review. "-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    Anne M.R. Agur, Authur F. Dalley II ; founding coauthor (with Anne M.R. Agur) and coauthor for first to fifth editions, Keith L. Moore.
    Summary: "Twenty-two years have passed since the first edition of Essential Clinical Anatomy was published. The main aim of the sixth edition is to provide a compact yet thorough textbook of clinical anatomy for students and practitioners in the health care professions and related disciplines. With each edition, we strive to make the book even more student friendly. This edition has been thoroughly revised, keeping in mind the many invaluable comments received from students, colleagues, and reviewers"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Overview and basic concepts
    Back
    Upper limb
    Thorax
    Abdomen
    Pelvis and perineum
    Lower limb
    Head
    Neck
    Review of cranial nerves.
  • Digital
    editor, Wesley S. Moore ; associate editors, Peter F. Lawrence, Gustavo S. Oderich.
    Contents:
    Machine generated contents note: SECTION 1 Introduction
    1.A History of Vascular Surgery / Wiley F. Barker
    2.Embryology of the Vascular System / David S. Maxwell
    SECTION 2 General Principles
    3.Anatomy, Physiology, and Pharmacology of the Vascular Wall / Ted R. Kohler
    4.Anatomy and Surgical Exposure of the Vascular System / Todd L. Rasmussen
    5.Hemodynamics for the Vascular Surgeon / R. Eugene Zierler
    6.Hemostasis and Thrombosis / Thomas G. DeLoughery
    7.Atherosclerosis: Pathology, Pathogenesis, and Medical Management / Jessica Beth O'Connell
    8.Nonatherosclerotic Vascular Disease / Gregory J. Landry
    9.Venous Vascular Malformations / Peter Gloviczki
    10.Congenital Arterial Malformations / Daiva Nevidomskyte
    11.Antibiotic Prophylaxis in Vascular Disease Management / Taimur Saleem
    12.Patterns of Diabetic Vascular Disease / Joseph L. Mills
    13.Medical Management of Vascular Disease
    Including Pharmacology of Drugs Used in Vascular Disease Management / Jessica Beth O'Connell
    14.Noninvasive Vascular Diagnostic Laboratory / J. Dennis Baker
    15.Principles of Imaging in Vascular Disease / Antoinette S. Gomes
    SECTION 3 Arterial Occlusive Disease
    16.Vascular Grafts: Characteristics and Rational Selection / Alik Farber
    17.Introduction to Endovascular Surgery: Arterial Access, Guidewires, Catheters, Sheaths Angioplasty Catheters, and Stents / Alan B. Lumsden
    18.Atherectomy and Arterial Closure Devices: Selection, Technique, and Results / Donald T. Baril
    19.Extracranial Cerebrovascular Disease: The Carotid Artery / Wesley S. Moore
    20.Surgical Reconstruction of the Supra-Aortic Trunks and Vertebral Arteries / Enrique Criado
    21.Endovascular Repair of Extracranial Cerebrovascular Lesions / Peter A. Schneider
    22.Carotid Body Tumors: Diagnosis and Surgical Management / Rameen S. Moridzadeh
    23.Surgical Management of Aortoiliac Occlusive Disease / Michael Belkin
    24.Angioplasty and Stenting for Aortoiliac Disease: Technique and Results / William D. Jordan, Jr.
    25.Diagnosis and Surgical Management of the Visceral Ischemic Syndromes / Bruce L. Gewertz
    26.Diagnosis and Management of Renal Vascular Occlusive Disease / Benjamin J. Pearce
    27.Angioplasty and Stenting for Mesenteric and Renal Artery Disease / Emanuel Junio R. Tenorio
    28.Surgical Management of Femoral, Popliteal, and Tibial Arterial Occlusive Disease / Enrico Ascher
    29.Endoscopic Harvesting of the Saphenous Vein / Christian Eisenring
    30.Infrainguinal Endovascular Reconstruction: Technique and Results / Peter A. Schneider
    31.Endovascular Repair of Infrapopliteal Arterial Occlusive Disease / Joseph L. Mills
    32.Thoracic and Lumbar Sympathectomy: Indications, Technique, and Results / Peter Gloviczki
    33.Thoracic Outlet Syndrome and Vascular Disease of the Upper Extremity / David A. Rigberg
    34.Natural History and Nonoperative Treatment of Chronic Lower Extremity Ischemia / Gregory L. Moneta
    35.Thrombolysis for Arterial and Graft Occlusions: Technique and Results / Vikram Kashyap
    SECTION 4 Arterial Aneurysm Disease
    36.Descending Thoracic and Thoracoabdominal Aortic Aneurysms: General Principles and Open Surgical Repair / Hazim J. Safi
    37.Endovascular Repair of Thoracic Aortic Aneurysm / Michel S. Makaroun
    38.Combined Endovascular and Surgical (Hybrid) Approach to Aortic Arch and Thoracoabdominal Aortic Pathology / William J. Quinones-Baldrich
    39.Fenestrated-Branched and Parallel Stent-Grafts for Endovascular Repair of Aortic Arch and Thoracoabdominal Aortic Aneurysms / Giuliano de A. Sandri
    40.Acute and Chronic Aortic Dissection: Medical Management, Surgical Management, Endovascular Management, and Results / Benjamin W. Starnes
    41.Aneurysms of the Aorta and Iliac Arteries / Jerry Goldstone
    42.Endovascular Repair of Juxtarenal (Chimney), Infrarenal, and Iliac Artery Aneurysms / Ronald M. Fairman
    43.Open Surgical and Endovascular Management of Ruptured Abdominal Aortic Aneurysm / Mario Lachat
    44.Laparoscopic Aortic Surgery for Aneurysm and Occlusive Disease: Technique and Results / Catherine Cagiannos
    45.Building a Hybrid Operating Suite Including Robotic Capability / Alan B. Lumsden
    46.Splanchnic and Renal Artery Aneurysms / Jonathan L. Eliason
    47.Aneurysms of the Peripheral Arteries / Fred A. Weaver
    48.Surgical and Endovascular Management of Vascular Trauma Including Aortic Transection / David L. Gillespie
    SECTION 5 Venous Disease
    49.Venous Thromboembolic Disease / Thomas Wakefield
    50.Thrombolysis and Mechanical Thrombectomy for Deep Venous Thrombosis and Pulmonary Embolism / Maxim L. Shaydakov
    51.Surgical Management of Chronic Venous Obstruction / Ying Huang
    52.Endovascular Repair of Chronic Venous Obstruction / Arjun Jayaraj
    53.Etiology and Management of Varicose Veins: Surgery, Endovenous Ablation, and Sclerotherapy / David A. Rigberg
    54.Management of Venous Leg Ulcers / Steven M. Farley
    55.Portal Hypertension / Hugh A. Gelabert
    56.Lymphedema / Thorn W. Rooke
    57.Hemodialysis and Vascular Access / Ahmed Kayssi
    SECTION 6 Complications in Vascular Surgery
    58.Neointimal Hyperplasia / Melina R. Kibbe
    59.Prosthetic Graft Infection / Julie Ann Freischlag
    60.Noninfectious Complications in Vascular Surgery / Juan Carlos Jimenez
    61.Management of Complications After Endovascular Abdominal Aortic Aneurysm Repair / Sharif H. Ellozy
    SECTION 7 Miscellaneous Topics
    62.Diabetic Foot Complications: A Primer for Vascular Surgeons / Joseph L. Mills
    63.The Wound Care Center and Limb Salvage / Steven M. Farley
    64.Lower Extremity Amputation / Juan Carlos Jimenez
    65.Anterior Spine Exposure: Operative Techniques for the Vascular Surgeon / William J. Quinones-Baldrich
    66.Carotid Sinus Stimulation: Background, Technique, and Future Directions / John D. Bisognano.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    Connie M. Ulrich, Christine Grady, editors.
    Summary: "This is the first book on the market or within academia dedicated solely to moral distress among health professionals. It aims to bring conceptual clarity about moral distress and distinguish it from related concepts. Explicit attention is given to the voices and experiences of health care professionals from multiple disciplines and many parts of the world. Contributors explain the evolution of the concept of moral distress, sources of moral distress including those that arise at the unit/team and organization/system level, and possible solutions to address moral distress at every level. A liberal use of case studies will make the phenomenon palpable to readers. This volume provides information not only for academia and educational initiatives, but also for practitioners and the research community, and will serve as a professional resource for courses in health professional schools, bioethics, and business, as well as in the hospital wards, intensive care units, long-term care facilities, hospice, and ambulatory practice sites in which moral distress originates."--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    What We Know About Moral Distress / Lynn Musto, Patricia Rodney
    Healthcare Professional Narratives on Moral Distress: Disciplinary Perspectives / Anne J. Davis, Marsha Fowler, Sophia Fantus, Joseph J. Fins, Michelle Joy, Katherine Kruse, Alyssa Burgart, Margaret Lindsey, Kim Mooney-Doyle, Tanya Uritsky, and Christine Grady
    A Broader Understanding of Moral Distress / Stephen M. Campbell, Connie M. Ulrich, Christine Grady
    Sources of Moral Distress / Mary K. Walton
    Building Compassionate Work Environments: The Concept of and Measurement of Ethical Climate / Linda L. Olson
    Moral Distress Research Agenda / Carol L. Pavlish, Ellen M. Robinson, Katherine Brown-Saltzman, Joan Henriksen
    International Perspectives on Moral Distress / Connie M. Ulrich, An Lievrouw, Bo Van den Bulcke, Dominique Benoit, Ruth Piers, Georgina Morley, Renatha Joseph, Baraka Morris, Subadhra D. Rai, and Margaret Mei Ling Soon
    Reflections on Moral Distress and Moral Success / Christine Grady, Nancy Berlinger, Arthur Caplan, Sheila Davis, Ann B. Hamric, Shaké Ketefian, Robert Truog, and Connie M. Ulrich.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Kurt Widhalm, Gerhard Prager.
    Summary: As the worldwide prevalence of morbid obesity among adolescents continues to rise, recent years have seen a large increase in the performance of adolescent bariatric surgery. While surgical intervention often becomes necessary when conservative weight-loss therapies have failed, no standards regarding the post-operative regimen and long-term management of adolescent patients have been established. Thus, the treatment of obesity and its co-morbidities requires a multidisciplinary approach, taking into account epidemiological, clinical, nutritional, and genetic aspects of morbid obesity in the pediatric age group. This volume discusses both conventional therapy and surgical options for morbid obesity in the pediatric age group. In the first part, obesity-related diseases, genetics, and psychological factors are analyzed. The second part focuses on current bariatric surgery procedures, including dietary restrictions and guidelines to prevent nutritional deficiencies common after surgery. Therefore, the book will prove an invaluable resource for pediatricians, surgeons, nutritionists, dieticians, and all other health professionals who treat adolescent obesity.

    Contents:
    Paediatric Body Composition Measurement Techniques in Morbidly Obese Patients
    Insulin Resistance in the Morbidly Obese Adolescent
    Inflammation as a Trigger for Insulin Resistance and Cardiometabolic Disease
    Inpatient Lifestyle Interventions to Treat Childhood Obesity
    Conservative Treatment for Morbidly Obese Adolescents: The German Experience
    Comorbidities: Non Alcoholic Fatty Liver in Childhood Obesity
    Measurement of Atherosclerosis in Morbidly Obese Adolescents
    Arthritis and Joint Problems in Morbidly Obese Adolescents
    Bariatric Surgery in Adolescents: Practical Guidelines from a Pediatrician{u2019}s Point of View
    Vitamin Deficiencies After Bariatric Surgery?
    Laparoscopic Gastric Banding
    Metabolic Surgery in Adolescents
    Situation in Sweden
    Experiences from Adolescents at the Viennese Center for Bariatric Surgery
    Is There an Indication for BPD-DS/BPD? What the Potential Advantages/Disadvantages to RYNGB?
    Psychological, Nutritional and Sports-Scientific Aspects of Obesity in Adolescence
    Current Guidelines of Bariatric Surgery in Adolescents
    Cardiovascular Risk in Childhood Obesity.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access WHO 2018
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    GV341 .M67 2018
    1
  • Digital
    Edzard Ernst, Kevin Smith.
    Summary: This book reveals the numerous ways in which moral, ethical and legal principles are being violated by those who provide, recommend or sell ‘complementary and alternative medicine’ (CAM). The book analyses both academic literature and internet sources that promote CAM. Additionally the book presents a number of brief scenarios, both hypothetical and real-life, about individuals who use CAM or who fall prey to ethically dubious CAM practitioners. The events and conundrums described in these scenarios could happen to almost anyone. Professor emeritus of complementary medicine Edzard Ernst together with bioethicist Kevin Smith provide a thorough and authoritative ethical analysis of a range of CAM modalities, including acupuncture, chiropractic, herbalism, and homeopathy. This book could and should interest all medical professionals who have contact to complementary medicine and will be an invaluable reference for patients deliberating which course of treatment to adopt.

    Contents:
    Medical ethics
    Competence
    Research
    Education
    Informed Consent
    Truth
    Exploitation
    Conclusions
    Glossary with short explanations of the main alternative therapies.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    Mary Bennett Ritter, MD ; introduction by Gesa E. Kirsch ; edited by Gesa Kirsch.
    Summary: "Mary Bennet Ritter was a farmer's daughter who in the 1880s defied all conventions to pursure her passion: to receive medical training and become a physician. Ritter's memoir is a riveting account of her accomplishments and a revealing peek into an earlier era through her keen sense of observation, humor, savvy, and her courage to challenge gender norms. It is filled with adventures--house calls via horse and buggy rides through the dark streets of Berkeley, a spurned lover's suicide, a near drowning at Pacific Grove Beach, one of the first automobile rides across rugged California dirt roads, intercontinental rail travel, and voyages to the Far East. As the story unfolds, readers encounter the movers and shakers of the time--University of California presidents and families of wealth and influence, including the Scrippses, the Hearsts, and the Rockefellers"--Back cover.

    Contents:
    Childhood memories
    Youthful days
    Undercurrents
    An interlude
    Medical student and interne
    First years in Berkeley
    The "ply-wood" of life
    University interests
    Medical practice
    Keeping pace with a biologist
    The quest for a southern site
    A transitional half-decade
    Pioneering in a biological laboratory
    The half decade 1913-1918
    My war work
    The turning of a long lane
    Last years in La Jolla
    The other side of the world
    The South Sea Isles
    Retirement
    Washington days
    Europe again
    Sunset and afterglow.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: History - LC Classification (Downstairs)
    R154.R443 A3 2017
    1
  • Print
    Robert M. Kaplan.
    Summary: American science produces the best--and most expensive--medical treatments in the world. Yet U.S. citizens lag behind their global peers in life expectancy and quality of life. Robert Kaplan brings together extensive data to make the case that health care priorities in the United States are sorely misplaced. America's medical system is invested in attacking disease, but not in addressing the social, behavioral, and environmental problems that engender disease in the first place. Medicine is important, but many Americans act as though it were all important. The U.S. stakes much of its health funding on the promise of high-tech diagnostics and miracle treatments, while ignoring strong evidence that many of the most significant pathways to health are nonmedical. Americans spend millions on drugs to treat high cholesterol, for example, which increase life expectancy by six to eight months on average. But they underfund education, which might extend life expectancy by as much as twelve years. Wars on infectious disease have paid off, but clinical trials for chronic conditions--costing billions--rarely confirm that new treatments extend life. By comparison, the National Institutes of Health spends just 3 percent of its budget on research in social and behavioral determinants of health, even though these factors account for 50 percent of premature deaths. America's failure to take prevention seriously costs lives. More than Medicine argues that we need a shake-up in how we invest resources, and it offers a bold new vision for longer, healthier living.-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Let's be average
    Research promise and practice
    Mistaking the meaning of health
    Making health care safe and effective
    Social determinants of health
    The act of well-being
    A way forward.
    Print Unavailable: Checked out Recall Item
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RA395.A3 K353 2019
    1
  • Digital
    Ronald L. Braithwaite, Tabia Henry Akintobi, Daniel S. Blumenthal, W. Mary Langley ; foreword by Valerie Montgomery Rice ; afterword by David Satcher.
    Summary: "Braithwaite and his coauthors, of Morehouse Medical School, describe the collaboration between community organizations and university faculty essential to public health and reliable research. They explain the Morehouse model of outreach in which citizen participation is a critical element for facilitating behavioral change in the community. Through case studies, exploratory research, surveys, and interventions, they provide lessons for advancing participatory research and promoting community health"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction to the Morehouse School of Medicine Model
    Social Accountability, Medical Education, and Public Health
    Community-Based Participatory Research (CBPR)
    Evolution of the Morehouse Model for Community Engagement
    Engaging Micropolitan and Rural Communities in Health Promotion and Disease Prevention
    Educational and Leadership Development
    For Communities, by Communities : The Strategic Engagement of Community Health Workers
    The Medical School of Tomorrow.
    Digital Access eBook Comp Acad 2020
  • Digital/Print
    Butterworth, John F.; Mackey, David C.; Mikhail, Maged S.; Morgan, G. Edward; Wasnick, John D.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessAnesthesiology
    AccessAnesthesiology
    AccessMedicine
    AccessMedicine
    AccessMedicine
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RD81 .M671
    3
  • Digital
    editors: Jean Guex, John S. Torday, William B. Miller Jr.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Yasuya Nomura.
    Summary: This book approaches inner ear diseases from a perspective that is as multifaceted as the diseases themselves. Common among these disorders are sudden deafness, Mnires disease, and perilymphatic fistula. With an awareness of the generally insufficient understanding of the causes and etiologies of these and other inner ear diseases, the author helps to fill those gaps in knowledge. Several factors have impeded a clearer understanding of inner ear diseases, chiefly the small size of the organ and its location in the hard temporal bone and, consequently, the inadequate resolution of CT and MRI images for pathophysiological analysis. This book provides morphological information about the inner ear, elucidating its fluids and blood vessels to help familiarize the reader with the complicated inner ear structures. Important information about how the inner ear responds to various stimuli is also given for a better understanding of the characteristics of the organ. Included are chapters describing specific diseases and animal models of the diseases. Examples and illustrations are presented for surgical applications. For instance, patients with intractable vertigo of inner-ear origin require surgical treatment and the application of a laser to the vestibular labyrinth, described in detail. With its generous use of color photographs, this book is an excellent reference text for all doctors and trainees in the field of otolaryngology.

    Contents:
    Structure of the Inner Ear
    Inner Ear Fluid
    Blood Vessels
    Sudden Deafness
    Menieres Disease
    Viral Disease
    Laser Surgery
    Presbycusis
    Anomalies.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Giuseppe d'Onofrio, Gina Zini ; translated by Barbara J. Bain.
    Contents:
    Blood and bone marrow cells
    Erythropoiesis and anaemia
    Myelodysplastic syndromes
    Acute myeloid leukaemia
    Myeloproliferative neoplasms
    Hypereosinophilia
    Myelodysplastic/myeloproliferative neoplasms
    Acute lymphoblastic and mixed phenotype leukaemia
    Neoplasms of mature B, T and NK cells
    Plasma cell proliferative disorders
    Reactive bone marrow changes and non-haemopoietic neoplasms.
    Digital Access Wiley 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] Bernard F. Morrey, Joaquin Sanchez-Sotelo, Mark E. Morrey.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2018
  • Digital
    Jeffrey S. Markowitz.
    Summary: This compelling book examines mortality risk among former Hispanic and African-American players in Major League Baseball (MLB) during the 40-year period following desegregation in the League. Analyzing a variety of biological, cultural, social, and environmental factors, the author illustrates the potential health effects of racial disparities on these elite athletes and fills a significant gap in the mortality literature. Included in the coverage: The history and evolution of professional baseball in both the United States and Latin America Literature and statistical reviews of racial and ethnic inequalities in mortality in the US general population Overview and evaluation of methodologies used to statistically analyze mortality risk in this professional-athlete population Implications and applications of research findings related to Hispanic and African-American MLB-player mortality A unique perspective on a pressing public health issue, Mortality Among Hispanic and African-American Players After Desegregation in Major League Baseball is a salient read for public health professionals including epidemiologists, medical professionals, and social scientists, as well as athletes, historians, and those with broad interest in African American and Latino health.

    Contents:
    Preface.- List of Tables and Figures.- Part I
    The Backstory.- The Roots of Baseball in the US.- A Mini-history of Latin America and Professional Baseball.- Literature and Statistical Review of Race/Hispanic Origin and Mortality.- Part II
    Empirical Study Description and Preliminary Results.- Study Methods.- Births and Deaths in the Study Cohort.- Preliminary Testing of Main Study Hypotheses.- Part III
    Other Independent Variables and More Definitive Testing of Study Hypotheses.- The Role of Educational Attainment.- Examination of Other Independent Variables.- Final Multivariate Testing of Study Hypotheses.- Part IV
    External Analysis and Discussion.- Comparison of Mortality Rates Between Major League Baseball Players and the General Population .- Summary, Conclusions, and Implications.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Jeffrey S. Markowitz.
    Summary: Of ResultsDiscussion; References; Chapter 5: Body Mass Index (BMI); Introduction; General Literature Review; The Prevalence and Costs of Obesity; BMI Background; Literature Review of BMI and Mortality in Professional Basketball and Football; Professional Basketball; Professional Football; Methods; Measurement of BMI for This Study; Statistical Plan; Results; Descriptive Statistics; Height and Weight; BMI; Mortality Outcomes by BMI; Vital Status by BMI Categories and League; Cox Models Predicting Mortality Risk Based on BMI.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Methods
    Life and death statistics
    Part I. Internal risk factor analysis
    Race
    Body mass index (BMI)
    Birthplace region
    Playing experience
    Multivariate analysis
    Player position
    Part II. External analysis
    Mortality comparisons between NBA and NFL players versus the general population
    Conclusions, implications, and discussion.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Harold Kalter.
    Contents:
    pt.
    1. Congenital cardiovascular malformations.
    Digital Access Springer 2007
  • Digital
    by Rudolf Happle.
    Summary: Mosaicism is a powerful biologic concept, originally developed from the study of plants and animals, and is the necessary basis for the explanation of numerous human skin disorders. This lavishly illustrated book presents, for the first time, a comprehensive overview of the strikingly manifold patterns and peculiarities of mosaic skin disorders. It is structured in a straightforward, reader-friendly way that will help the dermatologist to understand the underlying molecular mechanisms of skin disorders in order to further improve the treatment outcome. The first two parts of the book are devoted to the mechanisms and patterns of cutaneous mosaicism, with explanation of genomic and epigenetic mosaicism and description of the six archetypal patterns, including the lines of Blaschko, as well as less well defined or as yet unclassifiable patterns. In the third part, the various mosaic skin disorders are examined in depth, including nevi, allelic and non-allelic didymosis, other binary genodermatoses, mosaic manifestations of autosomal dominant skin disorders, and nevoid skin disorders. The book concludes with a note on neoplastic skin lesions, examining models of tumorigenesis.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Rudolf Happle.
    Summary: This second edition offers a fully revised and updated work on a rapidly growing field of knowledge, and was prepared by two experts whose goal was to explain the molecular basis of mosaic skin disorders in a language that is accessible for practicing physicians and medical students alike. It presents a timely and comprehensive overview of the strikingly manifold patterns and peculiarities of mosaic skin disorders in a straightforward, reader-friendly way that will help physicians to further improve genetic counseling and treatment outcomes. The first two parts of the book are devoted to the mechanisms and patterns of cutaneous mosaicism, and include an explanation of genomic and epigenetic mosaicism and a description of the archetypical segmental patterns including the lines of Blaschko and the flag-like, phylloid and lateralization pattern, the non-segmental pattern of large congenital melanocytic nevi, and the sash-like arrangement as noted in a particular type of cutis tricolor. The concept of lethal mutations surviving as mosaics has now been confirmed by molecular analysis in many sporadically occurring phenotypes. The difference between monoallelic and biallelic traits has deepened our understanding of hereditary mosaics, especially of multiple benign skin tumors. Moreover, recognition of the fundamental difference between the simple segmental and the superimposed types of mosaicism is important for the purpose of genetic counseling. In the third part, the various mosaic skin disorders are examined in depth, including nevi, didymotic disorders, other binary genodermatoses, mosaic manifestations of autosomal skin disorders, and nevoid skin disorders such as phenotypes reflecting functional X-chromosome mosaicism or a superimposed mosaic manifestation of common skin diseases with a polygenic background. Reader-friendly and clearly structured, Mosaicism in Human Skin will appeal to both experienced dermatologists and residents in training, as well as to medical geneticists and pediatricians. .

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    1: Introduction
    2: Mosaicism as a Biological Concept
    2.1 Historical Beginnings
    2.2 Mosaicism in Plants
    2.3 Mosaicism in Animals
    2.4 Mosaicism in Human Skin
    2.5 Mosaicism Versus Chimerism
    2.6 Does the Coat of Zebras Reflect Mosaicism?
    References
    3: The Major Categories of Mosaicism
    3.1 Nonsegmental Versus Segmental Mosaicism of Autosomal Dominant Skin Disorders
    3.1.1 Nonsegmental Mosaicism
    3.1.2 Segmental Mosaicism
    3.2 Genomic Versus Epigenetic Mosaicism
    3.3 Genomic Mosaicism 3.3.1 Genomic Mosaicism of Autosomes
    3.3.1.1 Mosaicism Caused by Loss of Heterozygosity
    3.3.1.2 Genomic Mosaicism of Lethal Autosomal Mutations
    Mosaicism Caused by Lethal Cytogenetic Abnormalities
    Mosaicism Caused by Lethal Molecular Defects
    3.3.1.3 Genomic Mosaicism of Nonlethal Autosomal Mutations
    Simple Segmental Mosaicism of Autosomal Dominant Disorders
    Superimposed Mosaicism of Autosomal Dominant Disorders
    Monoallelic Versus Biallelic Mosaicism
    Disseminated Mosaicism of Biallelic Autosomal Dominant Disorders
    Isolated Segmental Biallelic Monoclonal Mosaicism Blue Rubber Bleb Angiomatosis ("Blue Rubber Bleb Nevus Syndrome"): A Unique Type of Postzygotic Mosaicism
    3.3.2 Autosomal Recessive Mosaicism
    3.3.3 Didymosis (Twin Spotting)
    3.3.4 Revertant Mosaicism
    3.3.5 Genomic X-Chromosome Mosaicism in Male Patients
    3.3.6 Superimposed Segmental Manifestation of Polygenic Skin Disorders
    3.4 Epigenetic Mosaicism
    3.4.1 Epigenetic Mosaicism of Autosomal Genes
    3.4.2 Epigenetic Mosaicism of X Chromosomes
    3.4.2.1 Functional X-Chromosome Mosaicism in Female Patients
    3.4.2.2 Why Do Women Live Longer? 3.4.2.3 Functional X-Chromosome Mosaicism in Male Patients
    3.4.3 X-Linked Genes Escaping Inactivation
    References
    4: Relationship Between Hypomorphic Alleles and Mosaicism of X-Linked or Autosomal Mutations
    4.1 Hypomorphic Alleles and X-Linked Dominant, Male-Lethal Cutaneous Syndromes
    4.2 Hypomorphic Alleles in Autosomal Dominant Skin Disorders
    References
    5: The Archetypical Patterns of Segmental Cutaneous Mosaicism
    5.1 Lines of Blaschko
    5.1.1 Lines of Blaschko, Narrow Bands
    5.1.2 Lines of Blaschko, Broad Bands 5.1.3 Analogy of Blaschko's Lines in Other Organs
    5.1.4 Blaschko's Lines in Animals
    5.1.5 Analogy of Blaschko's Lines in the Murine Brain
    5.2 Flag-like Pattern
    5.3 Phylloid Pattern
    5.4 Lateralization Pattern
    References
    6: Less Well-Defined or So Far Unclassifiable Patterns
    6.1 Oblique Pattern (Sash-Like Pattern)
    6.2 Pallister-Killian Pattern
    6.3 Midfacial Pattern
    References
    7: Nevi
    7.1 The Theory of Lethal Genes Surviving by Mosaicism
    7.2 Pigmentary Nevi
    7.2.1 Melanocytic Nevi
    7.2.1.1 Common Small Melanocytic Nevus
    Digital Access Springer 2023
  • Digital
    Arthur H. Jeske [editor].
    Summary: Ideal for chairside use by the entire dental team, Mosby's Dental Drug Reference, 11th Edition, provides the current, concise, dental-specific drug information you need at the point of care. More than 850 drug monographs make it easy to find indications and dosages, contraindications, interactions, side effects, serious reactions, and dental considerations. A companion website adds regular drug updates, a full-color pill atlas, printable patient education handouts, reference tables, and more. More than 850 drug monographs offer the vital dental-specific drug information you need. Drug information with relevant patient and family education guidelines in each monograph emphasize oral health, prevention, and treatment from the dental hygiene perspective. Durable and pocket sized, a succinct and organized format makes this guide ideal for chairside use. Bulleted lists provide quick and easy access to general and specific dental-related information in each monograph. .Primers on therapeutic management of common diseases and on medically compromised patients offer key foundational information relevant to the treatment of all patients. New monographs, FDA updates, a color pill atlas, images of common pathologic conditions, patient education handouts, quick-reference guides, and more are available online to help keep this guide compact and user-friendly.

    Contents:
    Front cover; Evolve page; Anesthesia Color Codes; Mosby's Dental Drug Reference; Copyright page; Drug Monograph Content Contributors and Reviewers; Preface; Table of Contents; About the Companion Website; Therapeutic Management of Common Oral Lesions: Based on Material from the American Academy of Oral Medicine (AAOM) Clinician's Guide to Treatment of Common Oral Conditions; Supportive Care; Herpes Simplex Infection; Primary Herpetic Gingivostomatitis; Etiology:; Clinical description:; Rationale for treatment:; Topical Anesthetics and Coating Agents; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx. Disp. Sig.; Systemic Antiviral Therapy; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Recurrent (Orofacial) Herpes Simplex Infection; Etiology:; Clinical description:; Rationale for treatment:; Prevention; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Topical Antiviral Agents; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Systemic Antiviral Therapy; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Herpes Zoster (Shingles); Etiology:; Clinical description:; Rationale for treatment:; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Recurrent Aphthous Stomatitis; Etiology:; Clinical description. Rationale for treatment:Topical Steroids; For Mild-to-Moderate Cases:; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Systemic Steroids and Immunosuppressants for Severe Cases; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Directions for using dexamethasone oral solution:; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; For Very Severe Cases; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Candidiasis; Etiology:; Clinical description:; Rationale for treatment:; Topical Antifungal Agents; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Systemic Antifungal Agents; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp. Sig. Systemic Antifungal Agents for Refractory Oropharyngeal Candidiasis; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Angular Cheilitis; Etiology:; Clinical description:; Rationale for treatment:; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Actinic (Solar) Cheilitis; Etiology:; Clinical description:; Rationale for treatment:; Rx; Geographic Tongue (Benign Migratory Glossitis; Erythema Migrans); Etiology:; Clinical description:; Rationale for treatment:; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig. Xerostomia (Reduced Salivary Flow and Dry Mouth)Etiology:; Clinical description:; Rationale for treatment:; Saliva Substitutes; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Saliva Stimulants; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Caries Prevention; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Lichen Planus; Etiology:; Clinical description:; Rationale for treatment:; Topical Steroids; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Systemic Steroids and Immunosuppressants for Severe Cases; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.; Rx; Disp.; Sig.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Kathleen Deska Pagana, PhD, RN ; Timothy J. Pagana, MD, FACS ; Theresa Noel Pagana, MD, FAAEM.
    Summary: With this best-selling reference, you will gain quick access to today's most important diagnostic tests and laboratory procedures. Clear, concise test entries are arranged alphabetically and reflect the latest advances in testing and research. Each test includes vital information such as alternate or abbreviated test names, a test description, contraindications, explanations of results, and guidelines to patient care before, during, and after the test. -- From publisher's description.

    Contents:
    User's guide to test preparation and procedures
    Diagnostic and laboratory tests.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2019
  • Digital
    [edited by] Susan Newton, Margaret Hickey, Jeannine M. Brant.
    Summary: "Detailed descriptions of over 50 major cancer types provide essential information on incidence, etiology and risk factors, signs and symptoms, diagnostic workup, histology, staging, treatment, prognosis, and prevention. Coverage of cancer management principles outlines a wide range of treatment and pharmacologic modalities, including surgery, chemotherapy, radiation therapy, hormonal therapy, immunotherapy, and complementary and alternative therapies. Symptom management guidelines offer in-depth coverage of pathophysiology, signs and symptoms, assessment tools, lab and diagnostic tests, differential diagnoses, interventions, patient education, follow up care, and resources for over 30 common symptoms associated with cancer and cancer treatments. Essential information on many oncologic emergencies and emergent issues prepares readers to respond quickly to structural, metabolic, and hematologic emergencies. Section on palliative care and end-of-life issues offers helpful guidelines for dealing with topics related to survivorship, palliative care, the final hours of the cancer patient, and loss, grief, and bereavement." -- Publisher.

    Contents:
    SECTION ONE: INTRODUCTION
    Cancer epidemiology: implications for prevention, early detection and treatment
    Cancer pathophysiology
    Cancer genetics
    SECTION TWO: MAJOR CANCERS
    Breast cancer
    Central nervous system cancers
    Gastrointestinal system cancers
    Genitourinary cancers
    Gynecologic cancers
    Head and neck cancers
    Leukemias
    Lung cancers
    Lymphomas
    Multiple myeloma
    Myelofibrosis
    Neuroendocrine cancers
    Sarcomas
    Skin cancers
    SECTION THREE: PRINCIPLES OF CANCER MANAGEMENT
    Surgical therapy
    Radiation therapy
    Tumor treating fields
    Hematopoietic stem cell transplantation
    Chemotherapy
    Immunotherapy
    Targeted therapy
    Hormonal therapy
    Adherence and persistence with oral therapies
    Complementary and alternative therapies
    Clinical trials
    SECTION FOUR: PRINCIPLES OF SYMPTOM MANAGEMENT
    Oncology symptoms
    SECTION FIVE: ONCOLOGIC EMERGENCIES
    Structural emergencies
    Urologic emergencies
    Metabolic emergencies
    Hematologic emergencies
    SECTION SIX: PALLIATIVE CARE AND END-OF-LIFE ISSUES
    Survivorship
    Palliative care
    Final hours
    Loss, grief, and bereavement
    SECTION SEVEN: NURSING PRACTICE CONSIDERATIONS
    Communication
    Cultural considerations
    Ethical considerations
    Quality and safety
    Evidence-based practice
    Patient navigation
    Patient education
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2017
  • Digital
    Anne Griffin Perry, Patricia A. Potter, Paul L. Desmarais.
    Summary: A concise, pocket-sized study tool and clinical reference based on the best-selling textbook Clinical Nursing Skills & Techniques, 9th Edition! This spiral-bound presents 85 key nursing skills in a convenient, A-to-Z format. Step-by-step instructions include full-color photos plus rationales explaining why and how to use specific techniques to help you troubleshoot potential problems and take appropriate actions to address them. With the latest in evidence-based practice this essential guide is a great tool to help you safely and effectively perform core nursing skills.

    Contents:
    Acapella device
    Apical-radial pulse
    Aquathermia and heating pads
    Aspiration precautions
    Assistive device ambulation (use of crutches, cane, and walker
    Automated external defibrillator
    Bladder volume measurement
    Blood administration
    Blood pressure by auscultation: upper extremities, lower extremities, palpation
    Blood glucose testing
    Blood pressure: automatic
    Cardiac monitor: applying
    Central venous access device care: central venous catheter, ports
    Chest tube care
    Cold applications
    Condom catheter
    Continuous passive motion machine
    Continuous subcutaneous infusion
    Dressings: dry and moist-to-dry
    Dressings: hydrocolloid, hydrogel, foam, or alginate
    Dressings: transparent
    Ear drop administration
    Ear irrigations
    Electrocadiogram: obtaining a 12-lead electrocardiogram
    Enemas
    Enteral nutrition via a gastrostomy or jejunostomy tube
    Enteral nutrition via a nasoenteric feeding tube
    Epidural analgesia
    Eye irrigation
    Eye medications: drops and ointment
    Fall prevention in a health care facility
    Fecal impaction: removing digitally
    Hypothermia and hyperthermia blankets
    Using incentive spirometery
    Intradermal injections
    Intramuscular injections
    Intravenous medications: intermittent infusion sets and mini-infusion pumps
    Intravenous medications: intravenous bolus
    Isolation precautions
    Mechanical lifts
    Metered-dose inhalers
    Moist heat (compress and sitz bath)
    Mouth care: unconscious or debilitated patients Nail and foot care
    Nasoenteral tube: placement and irrigation
    Nasogastric tube for gastric decompression: insertion and removal
    Negative-pressure wound therapy
    Oral medications
    Oral medications: medication administration through an external feeding tube
    Ostomy care (pouching)
    Oxygen therapy: nasal cannula, oxygen mask, T tube, or tracheostomy collar
    Parenteral medication preparation: ampules and vials
    Parenteral medications: mixing medications in one syringe
    Patient-controlled analgesia
    Peripheral intravenous care: dressing care, discontinuation
    Peripheral intravenous care: regulating intravenous flow rate, changing tubing and solution
    Peripheral intravenous insertion
    Peripherally inserted central catheter care
    Preoperative teaching
    Pressure bandages (applying)
    Pressure injury risk assessment
    Pressure injury treatment
    Pulse oximetry
    Rectal suppository insertion
    Respiration assessment
    Restraint application
    Restraint-free environment
    Seizure precautions
    Sequential compression device and elastic stockings
    Specialty beds: air-fluidized, air-suspension, and rotokinetic
    Sterile gloving
    Sterile technique: donning and removing cap, mask, and protective eyewear
    Subcutaneous injections
    Suctioning: closed (in-line)
    Suctioning: nasopharyngeal, nasotracheal, and artificial airway
    Suprapubic catheter care
    Suture and staple removal
    Topical skin applications
    Tracheostomy care
    Urinary catheter insertion
    Urinary catheter care and removal
    Urinary catheter irrigation
    Urinary diversion: pouching an incontinent urinary diversion
    Vaginal instillations
    Venipuncture: collecting blood specimens and cultures by syringe and vacutainer method
    Managing wound drainage evacuation
    Wound irrigation
    Appendix: Overview of CDC hand hygiene guidelines.
    Digital Access R2Library 2019
    Limited to 5 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    Hugh D. Allen, Robert E. Shaddy, Daniel J. Penny, Frank Cetta, Timothy F. Feltes.
    Contents:
    V. I: Sect. I: From the gene to the neonate
    Sect. II: Structure and function of the cardiovascular system
    Sect. III: Diagnostic and therapeutic methods
    Sect. IV: Electrophysiology
    Sect. V: Pediatric cardiac intensive care
    Sect. VI: Congenital cardiovascular malformations
    Pt. A: Septal defects
    Pt. B: Arterial abnormalities
    V. II: Pt. C: Venous abnormalities
    Pt. D: The right ventricle
    Pt. E: Left ventricular inflow and outflow abnormalities
    Pt. F: Abnormalities of the origin of the great arteries
    Pt. G: Complex cardiac abnormalities
    Sect. VII: Diseases of the endocardium, myocardium, and pericardium
    Sect. VIII: Pulmonary vascular disease
    Sect. IX: Unique issues regarding the young adult with congenital heart disease
    Sect. X: Other special problems and issues.
    Digital Access Ovid 2016
  • Digital
    [edited by] Robert E. Shaddy, Daniel J. Penny, Timothy F. Feltes, Frank Cetta, Seema Mita ; supplemental video editor Josh Kailin.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library (Pediatrics)
    LWW Health Library (Cardiology)
  • Digital
    Nikole Benders-Hadi, Mary E. Barber, editors.
    Summary: Despite the importance of regaining social roles during recovery from mental illness, the intersection between motherhood and serious mental illness is often overlooked. This book aims to rectify that neglect. A series of introductory chapters describing current research and services available to mothers with serious mental illness are followed by personal accounts of clients reflecting on their parenting experiences. One goal of the book is to provide clinicians with information on this seldom addressed topic, which they can then use to help patients who are struggling with questions and barriers in their attempts to parent. The inclusion of personal accounts of mothers on issues such as stigma, fears, and discrimination in the context of parenting with a mental illness is intended to promote the message of mental illness recovery to a larger audience as well. Finally, it is hoped that this handbook will help inspire more research on mothers with mental illness and the creation of more services tailored to their needs.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Katherine Chretien, editor.
    Summary: Women are entering medical school in equal numbers as men, yet still face unique challenges in a profession where, overall, male physicians outnumber female physicians 3 to 1. Women in medicine also face decisions such as when to have a child during training and often struggle with work-life balance. This book features real stories and advice from mothers in medicine at all stages of training from medical student to practicing physician and addresses the topics that shape the lives, joys, and challenges of women in medicine today. The book is based on the best posts and wisdom shared on the Mothers in Medicine blog, which was established in 2008 by the editor and has published over 1500 posts and has over 4.8 million page views to date. The book is organized by themes that are unique to the physician-mother: career decisions, having children during training, navigating life challenges, practice issues, and work-life balance. Each chapter features an excerpt from the blog followed by an honest discussion of the key considerations, guidelines, and tips as related to each topic in the conversational, personal tone of the blog. The book concludes with a chapter that features the most popular questions posted on the Mothers in Medicine blog and a summary of the responses received from the community of readers. Mothers in Medicine: Career, Practice, and Life Lessons Learned is a valuable and contemporary resource for pre-medical students, medical students, residents, and physicians.

    Contents:
    Choosing Motherhood and Medicine: The First Questions.- Having and Raising Children During Physician Training: Medical School.- Having and Raising Children During Physician Training: Residency
    Being a Mother in Medicine in Practice.- Choosing Where and How to Work
    Balancing Work and Life.- Sharing the Humor in Being a Mother in Medicine.- Embracing the Mother in Medicine’s Village of Support.- Navigating Life Challenges as a Mother in Medicine.- Negotiating for the Job You Want.- Question and Answer: The Collective Wisdom of Mothers in Medicine.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Andrea E. Cavanna.
    Summary: This book illustrates the clinical interface between neurology and psychiatry by focusing on neuropsychiatric conditions characterised by alterations at the level of both motor function and behaviour. The neuropsychiatric approach to movement disorders and epilepsy is of key importance in clinically assessing and treating these common and often disabling conditions. While addressing the clinical challenges posed by the behavioural aspects of movement disorders and epilepsy, it invites readers on a journey through the evolving discipline of neuropsychiatry / behavioural neurology - both in the past and today.

    Contents:
    Neuropsychiatry and behavioural neurology
    The neuropsychiatry of movement disorders
    The neuropsychiatry of epilepsy
    Conclusion: past, present and future.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Bettina Studer and Stefan Knecht.
    Contents:
    Section 1: Theories of motivation. Common and distinctive approaches to motivation in different disciplines / T. Strombach, S. Strang, S.Q. Park, P. Kenning
    A benefit-cost framework of motivation for a specific activity / B. Studer, S. Knecht
    Control feedback as the motivational force behind habitual behavior / O. Nafcha, E.T. Higgins, B. Eitam
    Section 2: Assessing motivation. Quantifying motivation with effort-based decision-making paradigms in health and disease / T.T.-J. Chong, V. Bonnelle, M. Husain
    Section 3: The neurobiology of motivation. Brain correlates of the intrinsic subjective cost of effort in sedentary volunteers / J. Bernacer, I. Martinez-Valbuena, M. Martinez, N. Pujol, E. Luis, D. Ramirez-Castillo, M.A. Pastor
    To work or not to work: Neural representation of cost and benefit of instrumental action / N.B. Kroemer, C. Burrasch, L. Hellrung
    Involvement of opioid signaling in food preference and motivation: Studies in laboratory animals / I. Morales, L. Font, P.J. Currie, R. Pastor
    Exploring individual differences in task switching: Persistence and other personality traits related to anterior cingulate cortex function / A. Umemoto, C.B. Holroyd
    Competition, testosterone, and adult neurobehavioral plasticity / A.B. Losecaat Vermeer, I. Riečanský, C. Eisenegger
    Fatigue with up- vs downregulated brain arousal should not be confused / U. Hegerl, C. Ulke
    Section 4: Targeting motivation: novel approaches to enhancing motivation, activity and learning in health and disease. Intrinsic motivation, curiosity, and learning: Theory and applications in educational technologies / P.-Y. Oudeyer, J. Gottlieb, M. Lopes
    Applied economics: The use of monetary incentives to modulate behavior / S. Strang, S.Q. Park, T. Strombach, P. Kenning
    Rewarding feedback promotes motor skill consolidation via striatal activity / M. Widmer, N. Ziegler, J. Held, A. Luft, K. Lutz
    How motivation and reward learning modulate selective attention / A. Bourgeois, L. Chelazzi, P. Vuilleumier
    Motivation and attention following hemispheric stroke / E. Olgiati, C. Russell, D. Soto, P. Malhotra
    Increasing self-directed training in neurorehabilitation patients through competition / B. Studer, H. Van Dijk, R. Handermann, S. Knecht
    The role of dopamine in the pathophysiology and treatment of apathy / T.T.-J. Chong, M. Husain
    Changing health behavior motivation from I-must to I-want / S. Knecht, P. Kenning
    Section 5: Conclusions. Motivation: What have we learned and what is still missing? / B. Studer, S. Knecht.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2016
  • Print
    Martha C. Piper, PhD, Johanna Darrah, PhD, Alicia Spittle, PhD.
    Contents:
    1 Theories of Motor Development
    2 Motor Assessment of the Developing Infant
    3 Alberta Infant Motor Scale: Construction of a Motor Assessment Tool for the Developing Infant
    4 Administration Guidelines
    5 Prone Subscale
    6 Supine Subscale
    7 Sit Subscale
    8 Stand Subscale
    9 Clinical Uses of the Alberta Infant Motor Scale
    10 Psychometric Properties of the AIMS
    11 Norm-Referencing of the Alberta Infant Motor Scale
    Appendix I Percentile Ranks
    AIMS Score
    Appendix II Percentile Ranks by Age Grouping
    Appendix III Normative Data
    Appendix IV Percentile Ranks
    Index.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RJ134 .P57 2022
    1
  • Digital
    Richard A. Magill, Teachers College, Columbia University, and New York University, David I. Anderson, San Francisco State University.
    Summary: "This twelfth edition primarily updates the previous edition by adding more recent research and interpretations of the concepts and theoretical views associated with those concepts that were in the eleventh edition. Similar to the previous editions this new edition continues its two most distinctive features as an introductory motor learning and control textbook: its overall approach to the study of motor learning and control and the organization of the implementation of that approach. In every edition of this book, the overall approach has been the presentation of motor learning and control "concepts" to identify the common theme of each chapter. The concepts should be viewed as generalized statements and conclusions synthesized from collections of research findings. Following the concept statement is a description of a real-world application of the concept, which is then followed by discussions of specific topics and issues associated with the concept. An important part of these discussions are summaries of research evidence, on which we base our present knowledge of each topic and issue, as well as the implications of this knowledge for practitioners. The benefit of this organizational scheme is the presentation of motor learning and control as a set of principles and guidelines for practitioners, which are based on research evidence rather than on tradition or "how things have always been done"-- Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    Unit One. Introduction to motor skills and abilities
    Unit Two. Introduction to motor control
    Unit Three. Attention and memory
    Unit Four. Introduction to motor skill learning
    Unit Five. Instruction and augmented feedback
    Unit Six. Practice conditions.
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2021
  • Print
    edited by Mark B. Bromberg, MD, PhD.
    Contents:
    Introduction to motor neuron disease
    History of the recognition of motor neuron disease
    Nomenclature & classification of motor neuron disease
    Clinical anatomy, physiology and pathology of motor neuron disease
    Clinical features of motor neuron disease
    Frontotemporal dysfunction and dementia in amyotrophic lateral sclerosis
    Laboratory tests for motor neuron disease
    Biomarkers for motor neuron disease
    Imaging in motor neuron disease
    Diagnostic criteria for motor neuron disease
    Differential diagnosis of motor neuron disease
    Motor neuron disease progression
    Epidemiology of amyotrophic lateral sclerosis
    Genetics of amyotrophic lateral sclerosis and frontotemporal dementia
    Genome-wide approaches to identify amyotrophic lateral sclerosis-associated genes
    Pathology of amyotrophic lateral sclerosis and frontotemporal lobar degeneration
    Convergence and divergence in amyotrophic lateral sclerosis syndrome: genetics, molecular pathways and molecular mechanisms:
    Immunologic aspects of amyotrophic lateral sclerosis
    Cyanobacteria, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, and the BMAA hypothesis
    Animal models of adult motor neuron disease
    Multidisciplinary clinics and practice parameters and guidelines
    Allied health and other providers
    Respiratory assessment and management
    Nutritional assessment and management
    Communication assessment and management
    Psychological and psychiatric assessment and management
    Symptoms and management
    Intimacy, sexuality and pregnancy
    Quality of life
    Caregiver issues
    End of life care
    Costs of amyotrophic lateral sclerosis care
    Clinical trial designs in amyotrophic lateral sclerosis
    Stem cell therapy for motor neuron disease.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC376.5 .M68 2015
    1
  • Digital
    Mustafa Karahan, João Espregueira-Mendes, H. Kaya Alakn, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Fundamentals of being a sport surgeon
    2. Motor learning principles for arthroscopic motor skill teaching
    3. How to teach concepts of surgical skills and strategy of designing a programme
    4. Setting up a curriculum
    5. Defining essential skills
    6. Arthroscopic skills training modalities
    7. Simulators in surgical skills training
    8. Aspects of a cource design
    9. Establishing validation methods: measuring progress (measuring teaching effectiveness)- global rating scales
    10. Certification of surgical skills
    Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Bruce E. Sands.
    Contents:
    Approach to dysphagia / Gina R. Sam
    Approach to nausea and vomiting / Aimee L. Lucas
    Approach to abdominal pain / Jonathan Z. Potack
    Approach to diarrhea / Bruce E. Sands
    Approach to constipation / Mark A. Korsten, Hanumantha R. Ancha, and Miriam Kaminski
    Approach to fecal incontinence / Sita S. Chokhavatia
    Approach to gastrointestinal bleeding / Blair S. Lewis and Christina A. Tennyson
    Approach to nutrition assessment / Laura Manning and Lauren K. Schwartz
    Approach to the pregnant patient with GI disorders / Elana A. Maser
    Gastroesophageal reflux disease / Lawrence B. Cohen
    Barrett's esophagus / Sharmila Anandasabapathy
    Eosinophilic esophagitis / Brijen J. Shah
    Esophageal motility disorders / Barry W. Jaffin
    Esophageal disorders related to medication, trauma, and infection / Stuart I. Finkel
    Management of foreign bodies of the GI tract / James George
    Functional dyspepsia / Sita S. Chokhavatia
    Peptic ulcer disease / Neville D. Bamji and Ariel A. Benson
    Helicobacter pylori treatment and eradication / Anthony A. Weiss
    Gastroparesis / Eric S. Goldstein
    GI complications of obesity surgery / Jonathan Z. Potack
    Tumors of the foregut / Michelle Kang Kim
    Short bowel syndrome and malnutrition / Lauren K. Schwartz and Benjamin L. Cohen
    Bacterial overgrowth / Peter H. Rubin
    Celiac disease / Ariel A. Benson and James Aisenberg
    Infectious enteritis and colitis; bacterial food poisoning; intestinal protozoa and helminthic infestations / Jenny Sauk
    Immunodeficiency and the GI tract / Saurabh Mehandru
    GI stromal tumors / Peter E. Legnani
    Neuroendocrine tumors / Richard R.P. Warner
    Pancreatitis (acute, chronic, autoimmune) / Jeffrey R. Lewis and Yuki Young
    Pancreatic cysts and tumors / Christopher J. DiMaio
    Disorders of the biliary tract / Ron Palmon and Kalpesh K. Patel
    GI complications of transplant / Vera Kandror Denmark
    Vascular lesions of the GI tract / Jose Romeu
    Irritable bowel syndrome / Charles D. Gerson
    Crohn's disease / Joana Torres and Jean-Frédéric Colombel
    Ulcerative colitis / Adam F. Steinlauf and Daniel H. Present
    Complications of restorative proctocolectomy with ileal pouch-anal anastomosis / Joel J. Bauer and Stephen R. Gorfine
    Radiation enterocolitis / Prashant Kedia and Adam Steinlauf
    Clostridium difficile / Gerald Friedman
    Ischemic disease of the small and large bowel / Ari Grinspan and Asher Kornbluth
    Diverticular diseases of the colon / David B. Sachar
    Adenocarcinoma of the large bowel and hereditary colon cancer syndromes / Steven H. Itzkowitz
    Colonoscopic polypectomy / Jerome D. Waye
    Surveillance for dysplasia in inflammatory bowel disease / Thomas A. Ullman
    Diseases of the anus and rectum / Alexander J. Greenstein and Sergey Khaitov
    Complications of GI endoscopy / James F. Marion.
    Digital Access Wiley 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Stuart Sealfon, Rajeev Motiwala, Charles B. Stacy.
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Asher B. Simon, Antonia S. New, Wayne K. Goodman.
    Contents:
    Introduction. DSM-5 / Evan Leibu, Michael B First
    Research Domain Criteria (RDoC) / Tobias B Halene, Vilma Gabbay
    Functional Neuroanatomy / James W Murrough, Amy R Glick, Nicholas S Stevens, Thomas P Naidich
    Translational Neuroscience in Clinical Psychiatry / Ivan Chavarria-Siles, Emily Stern, Schahram Akbarian, Pamela Sklar, Eric J Nestler
    Neuropsychological Assessment and Psychological Tests / Katherine E Burdick, Manuela Russo, Jane Martin
    Clinical Use of Laboratory Tests, Brain Imaging, and Biomarkers / Carrie L Ernst, James W Murrough
    Neuromodulation Treatments / Kyle AB Lapidus, Nigel I Kennedy, Wayne K Goodman, Charles H Kellner
    General Principles of Psychotherapy / Asher B Simon, Michael Brus
    Clinical Documentation / Amanda Focht, Gloria J Rodriguez, Brian Fuchs
    Adult Disorders. Depressive Disorders / Hiwot Woldu, James W Murrough, Dan V Iosifescu
    Bipolar Disorders / Le-Ben Wan, Joseph F Goldberg, Katherine E Burdick, Dan V Iosifescu
    Anxiety Disorders / Marc S Lener, Dennis S Charney, Adriana Feder
    Trauma- and Stressor-Related Disorders / Rachel Yehuda, Amy Lehrner, Laura C Pratchett
    Obsessive-Compulsive and Related Disorders / Dorothy E Grice, Timothy Rice, Wayne K Goodman
    Schizophrenia Spectrum and Other Psychotic Disorders / Rachel Moster, Larry J Siever, Sophia Frangou
    Substance Use and Addictive Disorders / Allison K Ungar, Anna B Konova, Alkesh Patel, Rita Z Goldstein, Yasmin L Hurd
    Personality Disorders / Antonia S New, M Mercedes Perez-Rodriguez, Jake Rosenberg
    Psychiatric Presentations of Primary Medical Illness / Adam Karz, Madeleine Fersh, Akhil Shenoy, Kim Klipstein
    Neuropsychiatric Illnesses / Silvana Riggio, Zorica Filipovic-Jewell, Devendra S Thakur
    Somatic Symptom and Related Disorders, Including Illness Anxiety, Factitious, Malingering, and Conversion Disorders / Hansel Arroyo, Kim Klipstein, Carrie L Ernst, Jennifer Finkel
    Sexual Dysfunctions, Gender Dysphoria, and Paraphilic Disorders / Stephen Snyder, William Byne, Sara Lozyniak
    Eating Disorders / Thomas B Hildebrandt, Sharon M Batista, Matthew Shear, Yadira Alonso
    Sleep-Wake Disorders / Akhil Shenoy, Rachel Fischer, Amir Garakani
    Child/Adolescent Disorders. Assessment of Child Development / Suzanne Garfinkle, Mary M LaLonde, John O'Brien
    Autism Spectrum Disorder / Benjamin N Angarita, Alexander Kolevzon
    Intellectual Developmental Disorders in Children and into Adulthood / Jesse L Costales, Asher B Simon, Katharine A Stratigos
    Child and Adolescent Anxiety Disorders / Thomas J DePrima, Vilma Gabbay
    Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder / Jeffrey H Newcorn, Laura Powers, Stacy McAllister
    Child and Adolescent Disruptive, Impulse Control, and 'Across Cultures / Daniella Loh, Olanrewaju Dokun, Sharon M Batista
    Complementary and Alternative Medicine in Psychiatry / Ellen Vora, Amy Aloysi, Rachel Zhuk
    Models for Delivery of Care / Sabina Lim, Joseph M Cerimele.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Donald McKenzie.
    Summary: This book is written for general readers with an interest in science, and offers the tools and ideas for understanding how climate change will affect mountains of the American West. A major goal of the book is to provide material that will not become quickly outdated, and it does so by conveying its topics through constants in ecological science that will remain unchanged and scientifically sound. The book is timely in its potential to be a long-term contribution, and is designed to inform the public about climate change in mountains accessibly and intelligibly. The major themes of the book include: 1) mountains of the American West as natural experiments that can distinguish the effects of climate change because they have been relatively free from human-caused changes, 2) mountains as regions with unique sensitivities that may change more rapidly than the Earth as a whole and foreshadow the nature and magnitude of change elsewhere, and 3) different interacting components of ecosystems in the face of a changing climate, including forest growth and mortality, ecological disturbance, and mountain hydrology. Readers will learn how these changes and interactions in mountains illuminate the complexity of ecological changes in other contexts around the world.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    Chapter 1: Introduction: What Persists, What Changes
    Why These Mountains?
    Where Are We Going?
    What Doesn't Change in What Changes
    Ice or Water, Snow or Rain
    Evolution
    Movement
    Interactions
    Concepts and Terms You Should Know
    Variable
    Parameter
    Correlation
    Feedback
    Gradient
    Succession
    Disturbance
    Treeline
    Rain Shadow
    Climatic Envelope
    Connectivity
    Limiting Factor
    Scale
    Uncertainty
    Stationarity
    Detection and Attribution
    Chapter 2: The Mountains How Will It Affect the Western Mountains?
    The Cascade Range and the Pacific Coast Ranges (to the Klamath and Trinity Mountains)
    The Northern Rocky Mountains
    The Sierra Nevada
    The Pacific Coast Ranges (South of the Klamath and Trinity Mountains)
    The Southern and Central Rocky Mountains
    The Sky Islands and the Basin Ranges
    Chapter 4: Water Towers of the West
    The Magic Line: Snow or Rain, Frozen or Melted
    Glaciers: A Pure Signal of a Warming Climate?
    Changes in Mountain Hydrology
    Eco-hydrological Models: How Can We Use Them for Climate-Change Projections? The Cascade Range: America's Alps
    The Sierra Nevada: The Range of Light
    The Rocky Mountains: The Continental Divide
    The Pacific Coast Ranges
    The Olympic Mountains
    Siskiyou-Klamath-Trinity Mountains
    Transverse and Peninsular Ranges
    The Basin Ranges
    The Sky Islands
    Western Mountain Vulnerabilities
    Vegetation
    Glaciers, Snowpack, and Hydrology
    Biogeochemistry
    Wildlife
    Wilderness Character
    Chapter 3: It's Getting Warm Down Here
    What Do We Know About Climate Change?
    How Do We Know It?
    How Well Do We Know It? The Pacific Coast Ranges (South of the Klamath and Trinity Mountains)
    The Southern and Central Rocky Mountains
    The Sky Islands and the Basin Ranges
    Chapter 6: Ecological Disturbance
    What Is a Disturbance?
    Fire Regimes in the Western Mountains
    Gradients of Fire Frequency and Severity at Different Scales
    Smoke and Regional Haze
    Wildfire and Climate: How We Know What We Know
    Sediment Charcoal
    Fire-Scarred Trees and Stand Reconstructions
    Native American Burning: Confounding the Inference?
    The Observational Record What Do We Expect for the Western Mountains?
    Chapter 5: Trees, Forests, and Carbon
    Forest Biology and Ecology: What Persists and What Changes
    Forest Succession
    Dispersal: Keeping Up?
    Carbon: Source or Sink?
    Feedbacks to Climate Change
    Forests on the Brink? An Example of Detection and Attribution
    Forest Models: How Can We Use Them for Climate-Change Projections?
    What Do We Expect for the Western Mountains?
    The Cascade Range and the Pacific Coast Ranges (to the Klamath and Trinity Mountains)
    The Northern Rocky Mountains
    The Sierra Nevada
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Shree Ram Singh, Vincenzo Coppola.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Robert Eferl, Emilio Casanova.
    Contents:
    Modeling cancer using genetically engineered mice / Patricia Stiedl ... [and 4 others]
    Lung adenocarcinomas : comparison between mice and men / Helmut H. Popper
    Mouse models of breast cancer / Kazuhito Sakamoto, Jeffrey W. Schmidt, and Kay-Uwe Wagner
    Genetically engineered mouse models to study prostate cancer / Elspeth A. Brzezinska ... [and 3 others]
    Practical use of advanced mouse models for lung cancer / Roghaiyeh Safari and Ralph Meuwissen
    Generation and analysis of mouse intestinal tumors and organoids harboring APC and K-Ras mutations / Johan H. van Es and Hans Clevers
    Induction of colorectal cancer in mice and histomorphometric evaluation of tumors / Ilija Crncec ... [and 3 others]
    Mouse models of liver cancer / Jorge Matias Caviglia and Robert F. Schwabe
    Current methods in mouse models of pancreatic cancer / Pawel K. Mazur ... [and 3 others]
    Mouse models of nonmelanoma skin cancer / Nicole Amberg ... [and 5 others]
    Clinicopathological characterization of mouse models of melanoma / Blake Ferguson, H. Peter Soyer, and Graeme J. Walker
    Modeling BCR/ABL-driven malignancies in the mouse / Christine Schneckenleithner, Andrea Hoelbl-Kovacic, and Veronika Sexl
    Methods to generate genetically engineered mouse models of soft tissue sarcoma / Rebecca D. Dodd ... [and 5 others]
    Characterization of mouse model-derived osteosarcoma (OS) cells in vitro and in vivo / Özge Uluçkan, Latifa Bakiri, and Erwin F. Wagner
    Genetically engineered mouse and orthotopic human tumor xenograft models of retinoblastoma / Claudia A. Benavente and Michael A. Dyer
    Tumor imaging technologies in mouse models / Michael Bouvet and Robert M. Hoffman
    Tumor angiogenesis : methods to analyze tumor vasculature and vessel normalization in mouse models of cancer / Federica Maione and Enrico Giraudo
    Transplantable mouse tumor models of breast cancer metastasis / Rumela Chakrabarti and Yibin Kang
    Methods to study primary tumor cells and residual tumor cells in mouse models of oncogene dependence / Caroline Botta ... [and 3 others]
    Generation of transgenic mouse model using PTTG as an oncogene / Sham S. Kakar and Cohin Kakar
    Modeling the study of DNA damage responses in mice / Julia Specks ... [and 3 others]
    Methods to study tumor surveillance using tumor cell transplantation into genetically engineered mice / Eva Bauer ... [and 3 others].
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Masataka Sata, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I Re-stenosis Models After Angioplasty
    Wire-mediated endovascular injury that induces rapid onset of medial cell apoptosis followed by reproducible neointimal hyperplasia
    Cuff-induced neointima formation in mouse models
    Ligation of the Mouse Common Carotid Artery
    Photochemically Induced Endothelial Injury
    Part II Thrombosis and Hemostasis Models
    Murine Models of Thrombosis and Hemostasis
    Part III Transplant-Associated Atherosclerosis
    Murine Heart Transplantation and Graft Arterial Disease
    Murine Models of Vein Grafting
    Part IV Hyperlipidemia-Induced Atherosclerosis
    Mouse Models of Atherosclerosis
    Part V Aneurysm in the Aorta
    Angiotensin II-induced Aortic Aneurysms in Mice
    Mouse model of abdominal aortic aneurysm induced by CaCl2
    Mouse models of aortic aneurysm (tentative)
    Part VI Intracranial Aneurysm Models
    Technical aspects of mouse intracranial aneurysm model
    Experimental model of cerebral aneurysms in ovariectomized rats
    Part VII Vascular Disease in Cerebral Arteries
    A model of stroke and vascular injury in the brain
    Part VIII Kawasaki Disease
    Analysis of Kawasaki disease using a mouse model, CAWS vasculitis in DBA/2 mice, induced with a water-soluble extracellular polysaccharide fraction obtained from Candida albicans.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Mark Lewandoski.
    Contents:
    In situ Hybridization Methods for Mouse Whole Mounts and Tissue Sections with and Without Additional [beta]-galactosidase Staining
    Two Color In Situ Hybridization of Whole-Mount Mouse Embryos
    Detection and Monitoring of MicroRNA Expression in Developing Mouse Brain and Fixed Brain Cryosections
    Laser Capture Microdissection of Embryonic Cells and Preparation of RNA for Microarray Assays
    EMAGE: Electronic Mouse Atlas of Gene Expression
    Real-time PCR Quantification of gene Expression in Embryonic Mouse Tissue
    Identifying Essential Genes in Mouse Development Via an ENU-based Forward Genetic Approach
    Generation of Mouse Embryos with Small Hairpin RNA-mediated Knockdown of Gene Expression
    Generation of Tissue Organoids by Compaction Reaggregation
    Ultra-Rapid Vitrification of Mouse Oocytes and Embryos
    Mammalian Preimplantation Embryo Culture
    Serum-Free Culture of Mid-Gestation Mouse Embryos: A Tool for the Study of Endoderm-Derived Organs
    Genetically Encoded Probes Provide a Window On Embryonic Arrhythmia
    Microscopic Computed Tomography-based Skeletal Phenotyping for Genetic Model Organisms
    Gene Transfer Techniques in Whole Embryo Cultured Post-Implantation Mouse Embryos
    Segmentation and Quantitative Analysis of Individual Cells in Developmental Tissues
    Protein/Peptide Transduction in Metanephric Explant Culture
    Direction of Cells Programmed to Die in Mouse Embroys
    Microscopic Computed Tomography-based ?Virtual Histology of Embryos
    Collection and Preparation of Rodent Embryonic Samples for Transcriptome Study
    The Latest Improvements in the Mouse Sperm Preservation
    Analyzing Gene Function in Whole Mouse Embryo and Fetal Organ in vitro
    Using the Textpresso Site Specific Recombinases Web Server to Identify ?Cre Expressing Mouse Strains and Floxed Alleles
    Live Imaging Mouse Embryonic Development: Seeing is Believing and Revealing
    Genetic Cell Ablation
    Essentials of Recombinase-based Genetic Fate Mapping in Mice.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Print
    by Malcolm Graeme MacNevin and Harold Stearns Vaughan.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    S305 .J84
    2
  • Digital
    Basanta Kumara Behera, Pramod Kumar Rout, Shyambhavee Behera.
    Summary: Some geographic regions around the globe that are rich in terms of modern agriculture technologies, face a dilemma when it comes to storing excess produce, such as grains and even seasonal fruits and vegetable. They are often forced to destroy the surplus agricultural products due to the constraints of poor logistic systems, food warehouses and micro-economy system management. In contrast, millions of people in extreme rural areas are suffering from hunger and poverty. This book offers suggestions to resolve the problems of food security and poverty in rural areas and ensure minimum social justice so that those in rural areas have regular access to food and shelter. It also discusses how to develop sustainable foundations in extreme rural locations using indigenous resources to tackle issues like hunger, malnutrition, and chronic health problems.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; About the Authors; Abbreviations;
    1: Move Towards Zero Hunger; 1.1 Envisioning Zero Hunger; 1.1.1 Genesis of Zero Hunger Concepts; 1.1.2 Strategic Plan for Food Security and Zero Hunger; 1.1.3 Social Inclusion for Zero Hunger; 1.1.4 Resilience-Building Approach; 1.1.4.1 Government and Governance; 1.1.4.2 Governance and Agriculture; 1.1.4.3 Governance and Food Security; 1.1.4.4 Entry Points for Food Security Initiatives; 1.1.4.5 Food Security Information System; 1.1.4.5.1 Resilience Social Habitat Approach; 1.1.5 What Causes Hunger?; 1.1.5.1 Poverty 1.1.5.2 Job Instability1.1.5.3 Food Shortages and Waste; 1.1.5.4 Food Price Volatility and Hunger; 1.1.5.5 Social Discrimination and Hunger; 1.1.6 Pillars of Food Security; 1.1.6.1 Availability; 1.1.6.2 Access; 1.1.6.3 Use and Utilisation; 1.1.6.4 Stability; 1.1.7 Challenges to Food Security; 1.1.7.1 Water Scarcity; 1.1.7.2 Land Degradation; 1.1.7.3 Climate Changes; 1.1.7.4 Agriculture Diseases; 1.1.7.5 Food Versus Biofuel; 1.1.7.6 Food Waste; References;
    2: Water, Energy and Food Security: Pillars for Zero Hunger; 2.1 Introduction; 2.1.1 Water Security for Food 2.1.1.1 Water Scarcity2.1.1.2 Supply and Demand of Freshwater; 2.1.1.3 Water Availability in Rural Areas; 2.1.1.3.1 Groundwater; 2.1.1.3.2 Harnessing Seawater for Rural Livelihood; 2.1.1.3.3 Glaciers as Water Source; 2.1.1.3.4 Rainwater Harvesting; 2.1.2 Energy Security for Food; 2.1.2.1 What Is Energy Security?; 2.1.2.2 Access to Energy; 2.1.2.2.1 Access to Electricity; 2.1.2.2.2 Access to Natural Gas; 2.1.2.2.3 Access to Renewable Energy; 2.1.2.3 Solutions to Energy Crisis in Rural Areas; 2.1.2.3.1 Move for Renewable Resources; 2.1.2.3.2 Buy Energy-Efficient Products 2.1.2.3.3 Lighting Controls2.1.2.3.4 Grid Access; 2.1.2.3.5 Energy Simulation; 2.1.2.3.6 Energy Audit; 2.1.2.3.7 Common Stand on Climate Change; 2.1.2.3.8 Biowaste Recycling for Methanol Production; 2.1.2.3.9 Use of "Flex-Fuel" in Automobiles; 2.1.3 Food Security; 2.1.3.1 Factors for Food Availability; 2.1.3.1.1 Availability; 2.1.3.1.2 Access; 2.1.3.1.3 Use and Utilisation; 2.1.3.1.4 Stability; 2.1.3.2 International Organisation for Food Security; References;
    3: Paradigm for Zero Hunger; 3.1 International Development; 3.1.1 Modernisation Theory; 3.1.2 Dependency Theory 3.1.3 World-Systems Theory3.1.4 Neoliberalism; 3.1.5 Good Governance; 3.1.6 Capability Approach; 3.2 Global Goals for Eradication of Hunger and Poverty; 3.2.1 Millennium Development Goals (MDGs); 3.2.2 Sustainable Development Goals; 3.3 Global Food System; 3.3.1 Conventional Food System; 3.3.1.1 Conceptual Development of Food System; 3.3.1.2 Conventional Farming; 3.3.1.3 Community Food System; 3.3.2 Alternative Food System; 3.3.2.1 Local Food System; 3.3.2.2 Organic Food System; 3.3.3 Cooperatives in Food System; 3.3.4 Fair Trade; 3.4 Food System Supply Chain Management
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    Steven J. Frucht, editor.
    Summary: This book logically and systematically reviews the major movement disorder emergencies. It instructs the reader on how to recognize and manage these problems. This updated new edition of Movement Disorder Emergencies consists of five comprehensive sections. It begins with chapters that relay the various practical approaches one can administer when treating a patient with a movement disorder emergency. Section two then delves into specific hyperacute movement disorder emergencies such as acute parkinsonism, serotonin syndrome, and malignant catatonia. Following this, section three examines various acute movement disorder emergencies, including tic emergencies and Sydenham’s chorea. Sections four and five explore issues that can occur during treatment, such as pitfalls in diagnosis and risks in the clinic. Written by prominent neurologists from around the world, Movement Disorder Emergencies, 3rd edition is a practical reference that achieves excellence in diagnosis and management of movement disorder emergencies.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Susanne A. Schneider, José M. Tomás Brás, editors.
    Summary: This book covers recent developments and possible pitfalls in the diagnosis of genetic movement disorders and related conditions. It is divided into three sections: technical and scientific aspects; clinical aspects with guidance towards work-up; and ethical and legal aspects of genetic testing in a clinical and research setting. The first section includes chapters on genetic analysis and counselling with critical discussion of potential problems when interpreting the results. Clinical chapters summarize genetic forms of movement disorders including parkinsonism, tics and dystonia with algorithms for hands-on daily practice. Related conditions such as RLS, ataxias and dementias are also covered. Finally, chapters on ethical and legal aspects of genetic testing are included. Movement Disorder Genetics is aimed at clinicians and scientists working in the field of movement disorders and related conditions. .

    Contents:
    Genetics of Mendelian Forms of Parkinson?s Disease
    Genetics of Parkinson?s Disease
    Genetics of Atypical Parkinsonism
    Genetics of Dementia with Lewy Bodies
    Genetics of Frontotemporal Dementia
    Genetics of Primary Tremor Disorders
    Genetics of Dystonia
    Genetic Choreas
    Genetics of Tourette Syndrome
    Genetics of Paroxysmal Dyskinesia
    Genetics of Dominant Ataxias
    Genetics of Recessive Ataxias
    Genetics of NBIA Disorders
    Genetics of Metal Disorders (Excluding NBIA)
    Genetics of Restless Legs Syndrome (RLS)
    Genetics of Hereditary Spastic Paraplegias (HSP)
    Genetics of ALS
    Genetics of Mitochondrial Disease with Focus on Movement Disorders
    Introduction to Genetics and Genetic Counseling for Clinicians
    Genetic Testing
    An Industrial Perspective
    Direct-to-Consumer DNA Genetic and Genomic Testing
    Current Ethical Issues Related to the Implementation of Whole Exome and Whole Genome Sequencing
    Implications for Health and Life Insurances and Other Legal Aspects of Genetic Testing.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Mark S. LeDoux.
    Contents:
    Section I: Scientific foundations. Taxonomy and clinical features of movement disorders
    Modeling disorders of movement
    New transgenic technologies
    Assessment of movement disorders in rodents
    Drosophila
    Use of Caenorhabditis elegans to model human movement disorders
    Zebrafish
    Techniques for motor assessment in rodents
    Induced pluripotent stem cells (iPSCs) to study and treat movement disorders
    Neurophysiologic assessment of movement disorders in humans
    Neurophysiological and optogenetic assessment of brain networks involved in motor control
    Functional imaging to study movement disorders
    Human and nonhuman primate neurophysiology to understand the pathophysiology of movement disorders
    Section II: Parkinson disease. The phenotypic spectrum of Parkinson disease
    genetics and molecular biology of Parkinson disease
    Genotype-phenotype correlations in Parkinson Disease
    From man to mouse: the MPTP model of Parkinson disease
    Rodent models of autosomal dominant Parkinson disease
    Rodent models of autosomal recessive Parkinson disease
    Drosophila models of Parkinson Disease
    Primate models of complications related to Parkinson disease treatment
    Rodent models of treatment-related complications in Parkinson disease
    Methods and models of the nonmotor symptoms of Parkinson disease
    Section III: Dystonia. Dystonia: phenotypes and genetics
    Murine models of caytaxin deficiency
    Animal models of focal dystonia
    Mouse models of dystonia
    Rodent models of autosomal dominant primary dystonia
    Modeling dystonia-parkinsonism
    Section IV: Huntington disease. Genetics of Huntington disease (HD), HD-like disorders, and other choreiform disorders
    Murine models of HD
    Use of genetically engineered mice to study the biology of huntingtin
    Modeling Huntington disease in yeast and invertebrates
    HDL2 mouse
    Analysis of nonmotor features in murine models of Huntington Disease
    Section V: Tremor. Essential tremor
    Use of the harmaline and [alpha]1 knockout models to identify molecular targets for essential tremor
    Physiological and behavioral assessment of tremor in rodents
    Mouse models of the fragile X tremor/ataxia syndrome (FXTAS) and the fragile X premutation
    Section VI: Myoclonus. Myoclonus: Classification, Clinical Features, and Genetics
    Mouse model of Unverricht-Lundborg disease
    Post-hypoxic myoclonus in rodents
    Generating mouse models of mitochondrial disease
    Secion VII: Tics. Tics and Tourette Syndrome: Phenomenology
    Genetics of Tourette syndrome
    Neural circuit abnormalities in Tourette syndrome
    Animal models of Tourette Syndrome and obsessive-compulsive disorder
    Section VIII: Paroxysmal movement disorders. Paroxysmal Movement Disorders: Clinical and Genetic Features
    Mouse models of PNKD
    Glut1 deficiency (G1D)
    Animal models of episodic ataxia type 1 (EA1)
    Mouse models of episodic ataxia type 2. Section IX: Tauopathies. Tauopathies: Classification, Clinical Features, and Genetics
    Drosophila models of tauopathy
    Tauopathy mouse models
    Tau protein: biology and pathobiology
    Section X: Other Parkinsonian syndromes: NBIA, MSA, PD + spasticity, PD + dystonia. Clinical Phenomenology and genetics of other parkinsonian syndromes associated with either dystonia or spasticity
    Animal models of multiple-system atrophy
    Modeling PKAN in mice and flies
    Mouse models of FA2H deficiency
    Mouse models of neuroaxonal dystrophy caused by PLA2G6 gene mutations
    Section XI: Ataxias. Genetics and Clinical Features of Inherited Ataxias
    Animal models of spinocerebellar ataxia type 1
    Mouse models of SCA3 and other polyglutamine repeat ataxias
    animal models of Friedreich ataxia
    Ataxia-telangiectasia and the biology of ataxia-telangiectasia mutated (ATM)
    Autosomal recessive ataxias due to defects in DNA repair
    Caenorhabditis elegans models to study the molecular biology of ataxias
    Section XII: Hereditary spastic paraplegia. Hereditary Spastic Paraplegias: Genetics and Clinical Features
    Mouse models of autosomal dominant spastic paraplegia
    Murine models of autosomal recessive hereditary spastic paraplegia
    Modeling hereditary spastic paraplegia (HSP) in zebrafish
    Drosophila models of hereditary spastic paraplegia
    Caenorhabditis elegans models of hereditary spastic paraplegia
    Use of arabidopsis to model hereditary spastic paraplegia and other movement disorders
    Section XIII: Restless legs syndrome. Clinical Phenotype and Genetics of Restless Legs Syndrome
    Combined D3 receptor/iron-deficient mouse model
    Use of Drosophila to study restless legs syndrome
    The A11 lesion/iron deprivation animal model of restless legs syndrome
    Btbd9 knockout mice as a model of restless legs syndrome.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Darius Ebrahimi-Fakhari, Phillip L. Pearl.
    Summary: Inherited metabolic movement disorders are a significant and rapidly evolving field of study, linking two subspecialty areas of childhood-onset movement disorders and inborn errors of metabolism. Increasing the chance of early recognition of inherited metabolic movement disorders can have significant therapeutic implications for patients. Containing information on new disorders of post-translational modification and autophagy and their identification and treatment, there is thorough coverage of disorders of amino acids, energy metabolism, and lysosomal storage, amongst others. This key resource explores future directions in the field including next-generation genetic sequencing and novel therapeutic approaches such as deep brain stimulation. Supplementary videos are available on Cambridge Core, accessible via the code printed inside the cover. This essential text bridges the gap in communication between experts in genetic-metabolic medicine and movement disorder neurology. With an emphasis on treatable conditions that should not be missed, this volume guides you through various disorders from a clinical, biochemical and genetic perspective.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    Cristian Falup-Pecurariu, Joaquim Ferreira, Pablo Martinez-Martin, Kallol Ray Chaudhuri, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Harvey S. Singer, Jonathan W. Mink, Donald L. Gilbert, Joseph Jankovic.
    Contents:
    Basal ganglia anatomy, biochemistry, and physiology
    Cerebellar anatomy, biochemistry, physiology, and plasticity
    Classification of movement disorders
    Diagnostic evaluation of children with movement disorders
    Motor assessments
    Transient and developmental movement disorders in children
    Tics and tourette syndrome
    Motor stereotypies
    Paroxysmal dyskinesias
    Chorea, athetosis, and ballism
    Dystonia
    Myoclonus
    Tremor
    Ataxia
    Parkinsonism
    Hereditary spastic paraplegia
    Inherited metabolic disorders with associated movement abnormalities
    Movement disorders in autoimmune diseases
    Movements that occur in sleep
    Cerebral palsy
    Movement disorders and neuropsychiatric conditions
    Drug-induced movement disorders in children
    Functional (psychogenic) movement disorders
    Appendixes. Drug appendix
    Search strategy for genetic movement disorders
    Video atlas.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2016
  • Digital
    Harvey S. Singer, Jonathan Mink, Donal Gilbert, Joseph Jankovic.
    Summary: "Movement Disorders in Childhood, Third Edition provides the most up-to-date information on the diseases and disorders that affect motor control, an important area of specialization within child neurology. In this new edition, each chapter has been fully revised to include all of the latest scientific and therapeutic advances. Updates include new insights in motor development, control, goal-directed and habitual behaviors, classifications of movements and their complex and integrated circuitry. The authors also discuss developments in pathophysiologic mechanisms, immunology and metabolic disorders. New chapters include coverage of genetics of movement disorders and movement disorders in psychiatric conditions. Appendices include an updated and revised drug index and genetic search strategy. An updated Companion website hosts selected educational videos to help diagnose movement disorders" -- publisher's description.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2022
  • Digital
    Marcelo Merello, Sergio E. Starkstein, editors.
    Summary: "This book focuses on extrapyramidal signs and symptoms of all types of dementia, and addresses the issue of the artificial boundary between dementias and Parkinsonism, which represent the two most common symptoms found in degenerative central nervous system diseases. In Movement Disorders in Dementias, movement disorder specialists from around the world write on topics generally restricted to dementia experts. Important motor issues related to either medication in demented patients (drug-induced movement disorders) or manifestations common to all forms of dementia, regardless of underlying cause (gait disorders, falls, fear of falling), is followed by analysis of the relationship between motor and cognitive symptoms, from their common pathogenesis to specific medical treatments. Movement Disorders in Dementias is aimed at general neurologists, dementia specialists, movement disorders specialists, neuropsychologists and geriatricians."--Publisher's website.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Jörg Bahm, editor.
    Summary: This book discusses the diagnosis and therapy for movement disorders of the upper extremities in children caused by brachial plexus injuries, peripheral nerve lesions or spasticity. The diagnostic procedures are presented from the perspective of pediatricians and surgeons. In addition to detailed descriptions of primary reconstructive and secondary surgical procedures, it also presents essentials of non operative treatment, such as physiotherapy, occupational therapy and orthopedic technologies. The book is rounded out with information on the management of these patients and their parents. Written by experienced clinicians, it offers valuable reading for plastic surgeons, pediatricians and surgeons who are interested in this topic.

    Contents:
    Part 1. Introduction
    1. Introduction
    2. History of Reconstructive Operations
    3. Obstetric risk factors
    Part 2. Diagnostics
    4. Diagnostics and therapy planning from the perspective of the neuropaediatrician
    5. Surgical diagnostic and measurement procedures
    6. Objective acquisition of pathological movement patterns of the upper extremity: muscular coordination and movement analysis
    7. "Invasive" diagnostic procedures: Electromyography, Neurography and Evoked Potentials
    8. Central neural plasticity
    Part 3. Conservative Treatment Methods
    9. Physiotherapy
    10. Occupational therapy for children and adolescents
    11. Orthopaedic Technology
    12. Botulinum Toxin
    13. Self-concept
    14. Inclusion
    Part 4. Primarily reconstructive interventions
    15. Reconstruction of traumatized nerves
    16. Neuroorthopaedic management of congenital joint stiffness and muscle spasticity
    17. Neurosurgical Options
    18. Rare clinical features
    19. Anaesthesia in infants and young children with birth traumatic plexus lesion
    Part 5. Secondary interventions
    20. Principles of orthopaedic correction
    21. secondary reconstructive surgery
    22. Non neural microsurgery in children
    23. Secondary Microsurgery
    Part 6. Follow-up Treatment
    24. Specific post-operative treatment
    25. Research on peripheral nerves and muscles
    Part 7. The non-medical concern
    26. Three testimonials on obstetric brachial plexus palsy
    27. At home and at school
    28. Professional life and sports
    29. Legal Benefits for the severely disabled - the process for filing an eligibility claim with the pension and benefits office
    Part 8. Forensic and legal issues
    30. Legal Issues and Forensic Problems in Obstetrical Brachial Plexus Paresis
    31. The role of the reconstructive surgeon in medico-legal practice.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Steven J. Frucht, Pichet Termsarasab.
    Summary: This book presents a comprehensive, practical approach to the evaluation of movement disorders using phenomenological basic principles, new discoveries in phenomenological research, and core values of outpatient neurology. Movement Disorders Phenomenology begins with an overview of phenomenology and common approaches to movement disorder patients. Subsequent chapters then accurately and concisely relay information on major hypokinetic disorders such as atypical Parkinsonism, idiopathic Parkinson's disease, cortical myoclonus, and complex motor tics. Expertly written text is further supplemented by patient vignettes at the beginning of select chapter that focus the reader's attention and highlight the urgency of the problem. These high quality videos aid in the astute clinical diagnosis of many movement disorders that are still largely dependent on visual pattern recognition in the clinic. The book closes with a timely discussion on the role of genetics in movement disorders. Written for the practicing physician, Movement Disorders Phenomenology is an indispensable reference for neurology residents, general neurologists, movement disorders fellows and clinicians, and to any clinician who encounters and evaluates patients in the outpatient arena.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. What Is Phenomenology and Why Should We Care?
    Chapter 2. The Approach to the Movement Disorders Patient
    Chapter 3. Typical Parkinson's Disease Phenomenology
    Chapter 4. Phenomenology of Atypical Parkinsonism
    Chapter 5. Phenomenology of Myoclonus
    Chapter 6. Phenomenology of Tics
    Chapter 7. Phenomenology of Chorea
    Chapter 8. Phenomenology of Tremor
    Chapter 9. Phenomenology of Dystonia
    Chapter 10. Phenomenology of Ataxia
    Chapter 11. The Voice in Movement Disorders
    Chapter 12. "The Eyes Have It"
    Saccades and Fixation Defects in Movement Disorders
    Chapter 13. Phenomenology of Gait and Balance
    Chapter 14. Unusual Phenomenologies
    Chapter 15. Movement Disorders Emergencies
    Chapter 16. Very Unusual Phenomenologies
    Chapter 17. Imaging in Movement Disorder Phenomenology
    Chapter 18. Genetics in Movement Disorders Phenomenology.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Hsin Fen Chien, Orlando Graziani Povoas Barsottini, editors.
    Summary: The aim of this book is to provide a comprehensive overview of the most important movement disorders and describe the rehabilitation tools available for each disease. The management of movement disorders is challenging since most of these diseases are not curable and hardly treatable. Many of the disorders are chronic or degenerative diseases, therefore patients develop motor complications that could improve with rehabilitation interventions. Movement Disorders Rehabilitation intends to serve as a practical guide on the field, attracting the interest of professionals and researchers on the fields of neurology, physical therapy, occupational therapy, speech therapy and other correlated therapies.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction
    Chapter 2. Parkinson Disease
    Chapter 3. Atypical Parkinsonism
    Chapter 4. Dystonia
    Chapter 5. Ataxia
    Chapter 6. Tremor
    Chapter 7. Chorea
    Chapter 8. Huntington Disease
    Chapter 9.Pediatrics Movement Disorders
    Chapter 10. Future Perspectives in Movement Disorders Rehabilitation.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Rafael Reyna-Hurtado, Colin A. Chapman, editors.
    Summary: This book brings a unique perspective to animal movement studies because all cases came from tropical environments where the great diversity, either biological and structurally (trees, shrubs, vines, epiphytes), presents the animal with several options to fulfill its live requirements. These conditions have forced the evolution of unique movement patterns and ecological strategies. Movement is an essential process in the life of all organisms. Animals move because they are hungry, thirsty, to avoid being eaten, or because they want to find mates. Understanding the causes and consequences of animal movement is not an easy task for behavioural ecologists. Many animals are shy, move in secretive ways and are very sensible to human presence, therefore, studying the movements of mammals in tropical environments present logistical and methodological challenges that have recently started to be solved by ecologist around the world. In this book we are compiling a set of extraordinary cases where researchers have used some of the modern technology and the strongest methodological approaches to understand movement patterns in wild tropical mammals. We hope this book will inspire and encourage young researchers to investigate wild mammal's movements in some of the amazing tropical environments of the world.

    Contents:
    1. Why movement ecology matters / Colin A. Chapman and Rafael Reyna-Hurtado
    2. The impact of Hurricane Otto on Baird's tapir movement in Nicaragua's Indio Maíz Biological Reserve / Christopher A. Jordan [and others]
    3. White-lipped peccary home-range size in the Maya Forest of Guatemala and México / José Fernando Moreira-Ramírez [and others]
    4. White-lipped peccary movement and range in agricultural lands of Central Brazil / Maria Luisa S.P. Jorge [and others]
    5. Movements of white-lipped peccary in French Guiana / Cécile Richard-Hansen [and others]
    6. Spatial ecology of a large and endangered tropical mammal : the white-lipped peccary in Darién, Panama / Ninon F.V. Meyer [and others]
    7. Movements of neotropical forest deer : what do we know? / Francisco Grotta-Neto and José Maurício Barbanti Duarte
    8. Daily traveled distances by the white-tailed deer in relation to seasonality and reproductive phenology in a tropical lowland of southeastern Mexico / Fernando M. Contreras-Moreno, Mircea G. Hidalgo-Mihart, and Wilfrido M. Contreras-Sánchez
    9. Terrestrial locomotion and other adaptive behaviors in howler monkeys (Alouatta pigra) living in forest fragments / Juan Carlos Serio-Silva [and others]
    10. Variation in space use and social cohesion within and between four groups of woolly monkeys (Lagothrix lagotricha poeppigii) in relation to fruit availability and mating opportunities at the Tiputini Biodiversity Station, Ecuador / Kelsey Ellis and Anthony Di Fiore
    11. Home range and daily traveled distances of highland Colombian woolly monkeys (Lagothrix lagothricha lugens) : comparing spatial data from GPS collars and direct follows / Leidy Carolina García-Toro [and others]
    12. Ranging responses to fruit and arthropod availability by a tufted capuchin group (Sapajus apella) in the Colombian Amazon / Carolina Gómez-Posada, Jennifer Rey-Goyeneche, and Elkin A. Tenorio
    13. Insights of the movements of the jaguar in the tropical forests of southern Mexico / J. Antonio de la Torre and Marina Rivero
    14. Movements and home range of jaguars (Panthera onca) and mountain lions (Puma concolor) in a tropical dry forest of western Mexico / Rodrigo Nuñez-Perez and Brian Miller
    15. Next moves : the future of neotropical mammal movement ecology / Rafael Reyna-Hurtado and Colin A. Chapman.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Satoshi Kuroda, editor.
    Summary: This book brings together the latest knowledge on moyamoya disease, covering diagnostic criteria, status as a disease entity, genetic aspects, pathophysiology, novel neuroradiological findings, and surgical therapy. Information is also provided on recent basic and clinical research with the aim of identifying future perspectives on the disease. Since moyamoya disease was first reported in an English language article more than 50 years ago, our understanding of it has advanced considerably. Genetic and radiological analysis has delivered novel insights, and the latest multicenter studies are changing routine diagnosis and surgical therapy. The gene encoding the ring finger protein 213 (RNF213) has been identified as a susceptibility gene for moyamoya disease. Indications and procedures for surgical revascularization have been revised, with resultant improvements in outcomes, and studies performed over the past decade have provided new knowledge on the neuroradiological findings before and after surgery. In describing these advances, this book will be an invaluable asset for all general physicians, pediatricians, neurologists, radiologists, and neurosurgeons who care for patients with moyamoya disease across the world.

    Contents:
    Part I Concept of Moyamoya Disease
    1 History of Disease Entity & Diagnosis Criteria
    2 Moyamoya Syndrome
    3 Unilateral Moyamoya Disease: A Distinct Entity?
    Part II Genetic Aspect of Moyamoya Disease
    4 RNF213 as Susceptibility Gene
    5 RNF213 and clinical feature
    6 RNF213 Variant as a Biomarker of Cerebrovascular Disease
    Part III Pathophysiology of Moyamoya Disease
    7 TIA & Headache in Pediatric Moyamoya Disease
    8 Ischemic stroke
    9 Hemorrhagic Stroke and the Japan Adult Moyamoya Trial
    10 Cognitive Function in Pediatric Moyamoya Disease
    11 Cognitive Dysfunction in Adults
    12 Asymptomatic Moyamoya Disease
    Part IV Update on Neuroradiology in Moyamoya Disease
    13 Periventricular Anastomosis
    14 Arterial Shrinkage
    15 Disease progression
    16 Postoperative hyperperfusion
    17 Postoperative FLAIR Imaging Changes
    Part V Real World of Surgical Revascularization for Moyamoya Disease
    18 Overview of Surgical Revascularization and Long-term Outcome in Japan
    19 Perioperative complications
    20 Long-term Outcome in Europe
    21 Long Term Outcomes in USA
    22 Long-term Outcome in China
    23 Long-term outcome of revascularization surgery for moyamoya disease in Korea
    24 Indirect bypass surgery for moyamoya disease
    25 Direct/combined bypass surgery
    26 Special Considerations--Infants
    27 Special Considerations
    Elderly.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] John E. Wanebo, Nadia Khan, Joseph M. Zabramski, Robert F. Spetzler.
    Summary: "This multi-authored, well-organized monograph is a must read for any physician involved in the care of patients with Mmoyamoya disease. It is moderately short and very easy to read but still provides a state-of-the-art review of the disease with updated aspects, especially in its etiology and pathogenesis, epidemiology, and long-term results"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    1. Moyamoya Disease and Moyamoya Syndrome
    2. Classification and Imaging of Moyamoya Phenomena
    3. The Natural History of Moyamoya Disease
    4. Genetics of Moyamoya Angiopathy
    5. Clinical Assessment of Cerebral Perfusion in Moyamoya Disease
    6. Worldwide Epidemiology of Moyamoya Disease
    7. Implications of Cortical Microvasculature in Adult Moyamoya Disease
    8. Neuropsychological Considerations in the Assessment of Children and Adults with Moyamoya Disease
    9. Medical Management of Childhood Moyamoya
    10. Pediatric Moyamoya
    11. Endovascular Therapy for Moyamoya Disease
    12. Indirect Revascularization Procedures for Moyamoya Disease
    13. Direct Revascularization Procedures for Moyamoya Disease
    14. Multiple Extracranial-Intracranial Bypass Surgery in Moyamoya Angiopathy
    15. Direct and Indirect Bypass Procedures for Posterior Circulation Moyamoya Disease
    16. Anesthetic and Perioperative Management of Moyamoya Disease
    17. Long-term Results after Cerebral Revascularization in Adult Moyamoya
    18. Japanese Experience: Long-term Results after Cerebral Revascularization
    19. Moyamoya Angiopathy in Korea.
  • Digital
    Akio Koizumi, Kazuhiro Nagata, Kiyohiro Houkin, Teiji Tominaga, Susumu Miyamoto, Shigeo Kure, Elizabeth Tournier-Lasserve, editors.
    Summary: This book presents the latest findings on biological, epidemiological, and clinical investigations of RNF213, which is thought to be involved in many biological processes and plays a key role in cerebro- and cardiovascular disease . By discussing the epidemiology and genetic epidemiology of the disease with a particular focus on the molecular function of RNF213, research using animal models, diagnosis, therapy and clinical management around the world, this work makes a valuable contribution to the study of the disease. Moyamoya Disease Explored Through RNF213 is an indispensable resource for both beginning and experienced researchers, pediatricians, neurologists, and neurosurgeons who are seeking comprehensive information on adult and childhood stroke.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Silvio Mazziotti, Alfredo Blandino ; in collaboration with Giorgio Ascenti, Tommaso D'Angelo.
    Summary: In recent years, there has been huge interest in developing new methods that offer improved accuracy for the detection of small bowel pathology, and in particular for the assessment of inflammatory bowel diseases (IBD). Cross-sectional imaging, such as CT and MR, has advantages over traditional barium fluoroscopic techniques in terms of direct visualization of the bowel wall and improved visualization of extraluminal findings and complications. This means a complete change in the diagnostic approach to the patient with IBD: from analysis of the bowel surface to direct evaluation of parietal alterations and assessment of peri- and extraintestinal involvement. The ideal imaging test is reproducible, well tolerated by patients and, above all, free of ionizing radiation. MR enterography, currently performed only in a few reference centers, meets these criteria and offers accurate diagnosis, particularly in respect of the wide spectrum of intra- and extraintestinal complications of IBD. This book provides a thorough overview of the indications, techniques, diagnostic advantages, and limitations of MR enterography. Particular attention is paid to patient preparation in relation to the particular study type and to the potential advantages of the most up-to-date MR studies in specific cases, e.g., allergy or renal failure. A separate chapter is devoted to MR of perianal region for the detection and staging of perianal fistula, a common complication in patients with Crohn's disease. Numerous high-quality illustrations are included and help to ensure that the book will be a valuable source of information for every radiologist involved in abdominal MR imaging.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Technique
    Normal MR Anatomy
    MR Findings in Crohn's Disease
    Extraintestinal Complications
    Perianal Complications
    Other Indications for MRE.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Silvio Mazziotti, Alfredo Blandino, Giuseppe Cicero, editors.
    Summary: This second edition is primarily dedicated to MR-Enterography, an imaging modality whose reliability for intestinal assessment in patients suffering from inflammatory bowel diseases has gained increasing consensus. The performance of this technique has been significantly enlarged over the last years, due to its undoubted advantages in terms of exhaustive evaluation of the abdominal cavity and safeness due to the lack of radiation exposure. The first part is focused on MR-Enterography standard protocol. Nevertheless, additional sequences, technical novelties and common pitfalls are reported and discussed. In the second section, the typical intestinal and extra-intestinal findings related to Crohns disease are described in detail. In this edition, more emphasis has been put on practical topics, useful in the daily clinical practice: anatomical changes after surgical procedures, structured reporting and emerging clinical applications over inflammatory bowel diseases. Another part is dedicated to Magnetic Resonance Imaging of the anal canal, including technical aspects and clinical implications. The text is largely complemented by diagnostic images. Nonetheless, at the end of the book 30 illustrated cases show different clinical scenarios evaluated with MR-Enterography and Magnetic Resonance Imaging of the anal canal.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1) Introduction
    Chapter 2) Small Bowel Imaging
    Chapter 3) MR Enterography: Technique
    Chapter 4) MR Enterography: Anatomy
    Chapter 5) MR Enterography: Intestinal Findings In Chrons Disease
    Chapter 6) Exraintestinal Complications in Crohn's Disease: MR-Enterography Findings
    Chapter 7) MR Enterography beyond Crohn's Disease
    Chapter 8) MR Enterography Pitfalls
    Chapter 9) MRI of the Anal Region in Crohn's Disease
    Chapter 10) Structured Reporting
    Chapter 11) Clinical Cases.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    R. Rajeswaran.
    Summary: This book presents the anatomy and MRI features of the normal fetus and describes the anomalies of each system in a systematic way. The normal fetal brain at different gestational ages is also extensively illustrated. It features a treasure of MR images illustrating several clinical conditions. Sonographic images, line diagrams and post-natal images are supplemented for easy learning. It also addresses the differential diagnoses and prognostic indicators of the various fetal anomalies. This book will help the consultants and postgraduates of radiology, obstetrics, fetal medicine and pediatrics in understanding various fetal anomalies and in patient counseling.

    Contents:
    Introduction general considerations, MRI indications, safety, embryology
    MRI technique
    Embryology, normal fetal central nervous system
    Midline brain anomalies I Anomalies of septum pellucidum and corpus callosum
    Midline brain anomalies II - Holoprosencephaly
    Neural tube defects
    Ventriculomegaly
    Posterior fossa anomalies
    Abnormalities of proliferation, neuronal migration and cortical organization
    Miscellaneous brain abnormalities- Haemorrhage, cyst, vascular malformation, ischemia, infections
    Face and neck anomalies Orbits, nose, lips, mouth, jaw, profile
    Fetal thoracic abnormalities
    Fetal gastrointestinal system and abdominal wall
    Fetal genito urinary system
    Fetal miscellaneous conditions - Cardiac, musculoskeletal anomalies, intra-uterine growth retardation.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    [edited by] Michael Forsting, Olav Jansen.
    Contents:
    Anatomy / A. Mueller and R. von Kummer
    Vascular diseases / M. Forsting
    Brain tumors / O. Jansen and A.C. Rohr
    Head trauma / W. Wiesmann
    Infections / S. Hoehnel
    Multiple sclerosis and related diseases / U. Ememann, B. Bender, and U. Ziemann
    Metabolic disorders / A. Pomschar and B. Ertl-Wagner
    Degenerative diseases / K. Alfke
    Malformations and developmental abnormalities / B. Ertl-Wagner and I. Koerte
    Hydrocephalus and intracranial hypotension / M. Knauth
    Spinal cord / M. Wiesmann
    Degenerative spinal and foraminal stenoses / A. Doerfler
    Spinal trauma / S. Mutze
    Tumors and tumorlike masses / M. Schlamann
    Vascular diseases / J. Linn
    Inflammations, infections, and related diseases / M. Schlamann
    Malformations and developmental abnormalities / A. Seitz and I. Harting
    Peripheral nervous system / M. Pham, P. Baeumer, and M. Bendszus.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
    Thieme MedOne Radiology
  • Digital
    Sherif A. Shazly, Nashwa Eltaweel, editors.
    Summary: This book presents a high-yield, simple and efficient source of preparation for Membership of Royal College of Obstetricians and Gynaecologists (MRCOG) part 2 examination. It is made to be very simple, extremely organized, easy to use, and focused. It will help candidates to perfectly prepare for the exam. This book is a perfect source for doctors who prepare for the exam while they are busy in their practice. In addition, it is an illustrated simple reference to obstetricians and gynaecologists to they can refer to UK-based guidelines in their practice.

    Contents:
    Part I Obstetrics: Antenatal care
    Early pregnancy
    Late pregnancy
    Infections in pregnancy
    Medical disorders in pregnancy
    Surgery and pregnancy
    Fetology
    Intrapartum management
    Postpartum care
    Part II Gynecology: General gynecology
    Gynecologic oncology
    Reproductive endocrinology
    Urogynecology
    Gynecologic surgery
    Miscellaneous topics.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Ray H. Hashemi, Christopher J. Lisanti, William G. Bradley, Jr.
    Contents:
    Part I. Basic concepts
    Part II. Fast scanning
    Part III. Advanced scan techniques
    Part IV. MR safety
    Part V. Boards-style questions.
    Digital Access Ovid 2018
  • Digital
    Werner, Brian C.
    Summary: Integrating MRI findings associated with the spectrum of problems seen in the most commonly treated joints in sports medicine with the diagnostic findings seen during arthroscopy of the same joint in the same patient, this unique text correlates this pathology and applies these findings to the clinic, the radiology reading room and the operating suite. Representing a microcosm of daily patient care, this atlas of interactive correlation is an exceedingly effective tool for education and continued learning, an impetus for interdisciplinary research collaboration, and a critical part of an approach to optimum patient care. Furthermore, this case-based correlation between MRI imaging and arthroscopic findings and treatment has been a well-received and effective method for teaching and discussion at meetings and instructional courses. The second edition of this popular case atlas is organized into five sections highlighting the major joints in which MRI and arthroscopy are most commonly used in sports medicine: knee, shoulder, elbow, hip, and a brand new section on the ankle. Chapters have been reformatted to a consistent presentation, beginning with an overview of the specific disease entity and followed by selected cases chosen by the chapter authors that best illustrate common or noteworthy disease entities or pathology, with an emphasis on the parallel MRI imaging and arthroscopic findings. Throughout the text, updated arthroscopy images reflect current surgical techniques, many of which have changed significantly since the original edition was published. Authors and section editors, many new to this edition, are nationally recognized experts, teachers and pioneers in their respective areas of sports medicine and have covered the gamut of topics in each of their sections. Taken together, this will be an invaluable resource for sports medicine specialists, orthopedic surgeons and musculoskeletal radiologists alike, promoting increasingly accurate diagnoses of pathology and advanced treatment options to aid in the optimization of patient care and recovery.

    Contents:
    MR Imaging for the Orthopedic Surgeon
    Part I. The Knee
    Diagnostic Knee Arthroscopy and Arthroscopic Anatomy
    Meniscus Tear MRI Correlation
    Chondral Lesions
    Anterior Cruciate Ligament Injury and Reconstruction
    Posterior Cruciate Ligament
    Medial Collateral Ligament Injuries of the Knee
    The Posterolateral Corner of the Knee
    Patellofemoral Disorders
    Synovial Disorders of the Knee
    Part II. The Shoulder
    Diagnostic Shoulder Arthroscopy and Arthroscopic Anatomy
    Anterior Shoulder Instability
    Posterior Instability and Labral Pathology
    Rotator Cuff Disease
    SLAP Lesions and Biceps Tendon Pathology
    MRI-Arthroscopy Correlations in the Overhead Athlete
    Frozen Shoulder
    Disorders of the AC Joint and Suprascapular Nerve Compression Syndrome
    Imaging and Arthroscopic Evaluation of the Painful or Failed Shoulder Arthroplasty
    Part III. The Elbow
    Diagnostic Elbow Arthroscopy and Arthroscopic Anatomy
    Lateral and Medial Epicondylitis
    Elbow Injuries in the Overhead Athlete: MUCL Avulsion and Tears
    OCD/Chondral Injuries of the Elbow
    Degenerative and Inflammatory Arthritis
    Elbow Trauma and Arthrofibrosis
    Other Entities: PLRI, HO, Triceps, and Plica
    Part IV. The Hip
    Diagnostic Hip Arthroscopy
    Femoroacetabular Impingement: Labrum, Articular Cartilage
    Femoroacetabular Impingement: Femoral Morphology and Correction
    Acetabular Fossa, Femoral Fovea, and the Ligamentum Teres
    Traumatic and Atraumatic Hip Instability
    Peritrochanteric Space Disorders: Anatomy and Management
    Proximal Hamstring Pathology and Endoscopic Management
    Athletic Pubalgia and Sports Hernia: Evaluation and Management
    Revision Hip Arthroscopy
    Part V. The Ankle
    Diagnostic Ankle Arthroscopy
    Ankle Arthroscopy for Ankle Instability
    Chondral Lesions of the Ankle
    Posterior Ankle Arthroscopy and Hindfoot Endoscopy
    Ankle Degenerative Conditions and Arthritis.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Julie A. Matsumoto, Cree M. Gaskin, Derek Kreitel, S. Lowell Kahn ; with programming by Bing Li.
    Contents:
    MRI of normal brain maturation in the first three years of life
    Introduction
    Subject selection
    MRI techniques
    Myelin and myelination
    Assessing myelination on MRI
    MRI of brain maturation in first three years of life
    Preterm infant
    Term infant to age 4 months
    Four months of age to 3 years.
    Digital Access Oxford [2015]
  • Print
    editors, Frank G. Shellock, Ph. D., John V. Crues, III, M.D. ; associate editor, Alexandra M. Karacozoff.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC78.7.N83 S545 2022
    1
  • Digital
    [edited by] A. Jay Khanna.
    Contents:
    Essentials of MRI physics and pulse sequences / Shivani Ahlawat, Rick W. Obray, Douglas P. Beall, John D. Reeder, John A. Carrino, and Laura M. Fayad
    Normal spine MRI anatomy / Swati Deshmukh, John A. Carrino, J. Dana Dunleavy, and A. Jay Khanna
    Common clinical and correlative pain generators of the cervical and lumbosacral spine / Josemaria Paterno, Chad M. Silverberg, A. Jay Khanna, and Aneesh K. Singla
    A systematic approach to the review of spine MRI studies / A. Jay Khanna
    The occipitocervical junction / Colin M. Haines, A. Jay Khanna, John A. Carrino, Shih-Chun David Lin, and Joseph R. O'Brien
    The cervical spine / Lukas P. Zebala, Jacob M. Buchowski, Aditya Daftary, Joseph R. O'Brien, John A. Carrino, and A. Jay Khanna
    The lumbar and thoracic spine / Gbolahan O. Okubadejo, Aditya Daftary, Jacob M. Buchowski, John A. Carrino, and A. Jay Khanna
    Tumors of the spine / Daniel M. Sciubba, Patricia L. Zadnik, Bruce A. Wasserman, and Ziya L. Gokaslan
    MRI of the pediatric spine / A. Jay Khanna, Bruce A. Wasserman, and Paul D. Sponseller
    Advanced techniques in spine MRI / Joseph P. Gjolaj and John A. Carrino
    Correlation of MRI with other imaging studies / Shivani Ahlawat, Uma Srikumaran, A. Jay Khanna, and Laura M. Fayad
    MRI safety considerations for the referring clinician / Monica D. Watkins and Bruce A. Wasserman.
  • Digital
    published by Josef Kramer and Apostolos Karantanas ; with contributions by Afonso Diana P. [and 38 others].
  • Digital
    edited by Gary Liney, Uulke van der Heide.
    Summary: This book provides, for the first time, a unified approach to the application of MRI in radiotherapy that incorporates both a physics and a clinical perspective. Readers will find detailed information and guidance on the role of MRI in all aspects of treatment, from dose planning, with or without CT, through to response assessment. Extensive coverage is devoted to the latest technological developments and emerging options. These include hybrid MRI treatment systems, such as MRI-Linac and proton-guided systems, which are ushering in an era of real-time MRI guidance. The past decade has witnessed an unprecedented rise in the use of MRI in the radiation treatment of cancer. The development of highly conformal dose delivery techniques has led to a growing need to harness advanced imaging for patient treatment. With its flexible soft tissue contrast and ability to acquire functional information, MRI offers advantages at all stages of treatment. In documenting the state of the art in the field, this book will be of value to a wide range of professionals. The authors are international experts drawn from the scientific committee of the 2017 MR in RT symposium and the faculty of the ESTRO teaching course on imaging for physicists.

    Contents:
    Part I MRI for Planning: Basics of MRI and Radiotherapy
    Patient set-up & positioning
    Guidelines for MRI acquisition
    Quality Assurance
    Clinical Sites
    Part II MRI during treatment: Functional imaging& response assessment
    Adaptive radiotherapy
    Part III MR-only Radiotherapy: Challenges & requirements
    Atlas based methods
    Direct conversion
    Part IV Real-time guidance: First clinical results
    MRI-Linac systems
    Proton therapy
    Part V MR in RT 2017: Selection of papers from 5th International MR in RT Symposium.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Donald McRobbie, Elizabeth A. Moore, Martin J. Graves.
    Summary: MR is a powerful modality. At its most advanced, it can be used not just to image anatomy and pathology, but to investigate organ function, to probe in vivo chemistry, and even to visualise the brain thinking. However, clinicians, technologists and scientists struggle with the study of the subject. The result is sometimes an obscurity of understanding, or a dilution of scientific truth, resulting in misconceptions. This is why MRI from Picture to Proton has achieved its reputation for practical clarity. MR is introduced as a tool, with coverage starting from the images, equipment and scanning protocols and traced back towards the underlying physics theory. With new content on quantitative MRI, MR safety, multi-band excitation, Dixon imaging, MR elastography and advanced pulse sequences, and with additional supportive materials available on the book's website, this new edition is completely revised and updated to reflect the best use of modern MR technology.

    Contents:
    MR : what's the attraction?
    Early daze : your first week in MR
    Seeing is believing : introduction to image contrast
    Lost in the pulse sequence jungle?
    The devil's in the detail : pixels, matrices, and slices
    What you set is what you get : basic image optimisation
    Improving your image : how to avoid artefacts
    Spaced out : spatial encoding
    Getting in tune : resonance and relaxation
    Let's talk technical : MR equipment
    Ghosts in the machine : quality control
    Acronyms anonymous I : spin echo
    Acronyms anonymous II : gradient echo
    The parallel universe : parallel imaging and novel acquisition techniques
    Go with the flow : MR angiography
    A heart to heart discussion : cardiac MRI
    It's not just squiggles : in vivo spectroscopy
    To BOLDly go : fMRI, perfusion and diffusion
    Making it count : quantitative MRI
    But is it safe? : bio-effects
    Where are we going now?
    Digital Access Cambridge 2017
  • Digital
    Catherine Westbrook, John Talbot.
    Summary: MRI in Practice continues to be the number one reference book and study guide for the registry review examination for MRI offered by the American Registry for Radiologic Technologists (ARRT). This latest edition offers in-depth chapters covering all core areas, including: basic principles, image weighting and contrast, spin and gradient echo pulse sequences, spatial encoding, k-space, protocol optimization, artefacts, instrumentation, and MRI safety. The leading MRI reference book and study guide. Now with a greater focus on the physics behind MRI. Offers, for the first time, equations and their explanations and scan tips. Brand new chapters on MRI equipment, vascular imaging and safety. Presented in full color, with additional illustrations and high-quality MRI images to aid understanding. Includes refined, updated and expanded content throughout, along with more learning tips and practical applications. Features a new glossary. MRI in Practice is an important text for radiographers, technologists, radiology residents, radiologists, and other students and professionals working within imaging, including medical physicists and nurses.

    Contents:
    Basic principles
    Image weighting and contrast
    Spin echo pulse sequences
    Gradient echo pulse sequences
    Spatial encoding
    k-space
    Protocol optimization
    Artefacts
    Instrumentation
    MRI safety.
  • Digital
    Christoph Mulert, Martha E. Shenton, editors.
    Summary: This is the first comprehensive textbook on the use of MRI in psychiatry covering imaging techniques, brain systems and a review of findings in different psychiatric disorders. The book is divided into three sections, the first of which covers in detail all the major MRI-based methodological approaches available today, including fMRI, EEG-fMRI, DTI, and MR spectroscopy. In addition, the role of MRI in imaging genetics and combined brain stimulation and imaging is carefully explained. The second section provides an overview of the different brain systems that are relevant for psychiatric disorders, including the systems for perception, emotion, cognition, and reward. The final part of the book presents the MRI findings that are obtained in all the major psychiatric disorders using the previously discussed techniques. Numerous carefully chosen images support the informative text, making this an ideal reference work for all practitioners and trainees with an interest in this flourishing field.

    Contents:
    Statistical Analysis and Modeling of Functional MRI Data
    Neurofeedback with Real-Time Functional MRI
    Modelling Effective Connectivity with Dynamic Causal Models
    EEG-fMRI
    Diffusion Tensor Imaging
    Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy
    Imaging Genetics: Unraveling the Neurogenetic Risk Architecture of Mental Illness
    Brain Stimulation and Imaging
    Imaging Perception
    Emotions
    Imaging Cognition
    fMRI Investigations of the Mesolimbic Dopaminergic Reward System in Schizophrenia
    Neuroimaging in Schizophrenia
    MR Neuroimaging of Depression
    Functional Neuroimaging of Anxiety Disorders
    The Structural and Functional Neuroanatomy of Bipolar Disorder
    Structural and Functional Brain Imaging in Borderline, Antisocial, and Narcissistic Personality Disorder
    The Use of Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI) in Eating Disorders
    Drug Addiction
    Functional and Structural MRI in Alzheimer's Disease: A Multimodal Approach.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Paola D'Aprile ; in collaboration with Alfredo Tarantino.
    Summary: This richly illustrated case-based atlas thoroughly depicts the role of MR imaging in the assessment of patients presenting with pain due to degenerative disease of the spine and will serve as an excellent guide to differential diagnosis. Importantly, generic radicular compression is the main reason for the painful symptomatology in only a limited number of cases, and this book illustrates and emphasizes how various anatomic elements of the spine can be responsible. The imaging features of a range of disorders involving both the anterior and posterior elements of the spine are described, including active inflammatory osteochondrosis, atypical herniated discs, facet joint disorders, spondylolysis, and degenerative-inflammatory changes of the spinal ligaments and posterior perispinal muscles. Each example is supported by clinical data, and a series of unusual cases are also presented. MR study protocols include T2-weighted sequences with fat saturation and contrast-enhanced T1-weighted sequences with fat saturation to allow better visualization or highlighting of various inflammatory changes in the spine. Radiologists, neuroradiologists, neurosurgeons, orthopedists, and rehabilitation physicians will all find this atlas a valuable asset in their practice.

    Contents:
    PART I Technical aspects
    Biomechanics of the Spine
    Spine Stability
    Spine Instability
    MRI in Degenerative Disease of the Spine
    Disc Degeneration
    Disc Herniation
    Canal Stenosis
    Facet joint changes
    Spondylolysis
    Spinal perispinal ligamentous degenerative-inflammatory changes
    Muscular changes
    PART II Clinical Cases.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Paola D'Aprile, Alfredo Tarantino.
    Summary: This is the second edition of an acclaimed, richly illustrated and comprehensive case-based atlas focusing on MRI of degenerative changes in the osteoarticular structures of the spine. Spinal degenerative disease is highly prevalent in the general population and its incidence increases with age. At the same time, degenerative spinal conditions are one of the most common causes of pain. The book presents a comprehensive overview of the MR findings observed in degenerative disease of spinal joints, ligaments and paravertebral muscles, and offers guidance on selecting the appropriate imaging protocol, which is critical in detecting the potentially very subtle changes. The MR study protocols presented include T2-weighted sequences with fat saturation and contrast-enhanced T1-weighted sequences with fat saturation, since these sequences permit better visualization of inflammatory changes of both anterior and posterior elements of the spine. This richly illustrated second edition highlights the inflammatory component of the degenerative pathology of the spine, which in most cases is responsible for the painful symptomatology. It also discusses in detail the use of contrast medium in MRI of spinal degenerative disease. The case-based structure of the atlas allows easy but effective consultation by radiologists, neuroradiologists, rheumatologists, orthopedists and physiatrists, as well as students.

    Contents:
    PART I) CLINICAL AND TECHNICAL ASPECTS Chapter 1) Biomechanics of the Spine
    Chapter 2) MRI in Degenerative Disease of the Spine
    Chapter 3) MRI in Postoperative Spine
    PART II) CLINICAL CASES Chapter 4) Osteochondrosis, Osteochondritis
    Chapter 5) Osteoarthritis, Facet Joint Pathology
    Chapter 6) Spondylolysis
    Chapter 7) Degeneration-Inflammation of Ligaments and Muscles
    Chapter 8) Unusual Cases
    Chapter 9) Radiculitis / Neuritis
    Chapter 10) Postoperative Spine.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Gabriele Masselli, editor.
    Summary: This comprehensive guide to MRI of the pregnant patient presenting with fetal or maternal diseases provides a practical, hands-on approach to the use of state-of-the-art MRI techniques and the optimization of sequences. It analyzes data obtained from maternal and fetal MRI examinations, reviews fast imaging techniques, details pitfalls related to fetal MRI and assesses methods for improving image resolution. Fetal pathological conditions and methods of prenatal MRI diagnosis are discussed according to organ system and the literature is reviewed. Interpretation of findings and potential artifacts are thoroughly considered with the aid of numerous high-quality illustrations. The book will be a detailed resource for radiologists, obstetricians, neonatologists and geneticists, as well as any other practitioner who wishes to gain an in-depth understanding of fetal and maternal MRI. In addition, it will serve as a reference source for technicians, researchers and students, as well as for any specialist who is planning to set up a fetal and maternal MRI service.

    Contents:
    Clinical Indications to MRI in Pregnancy
    Current Techniques and Future Directions for Fetal MRI
    Fetal MR Imaging: Protocols and Anatomy
    How to Read and to Report a Fetal MRI Examination
    MR Imaging Before Fetal and Perinatal Body Surgery: Contribution to the Management
    Part I: MR oF the Fetus
    MR of Fetal Central Nervous System
    MR of Fetal Skull, Face and Neck
    MR of Fetal Spine, Spinal Cord and Extremities
    MR of Fetal Thorax
    MR of Fetal Heart
    MR of Fetal Abdomen and Pelvis
    MR Imaging of Multiple Gestations
    MR of the Placenta
    Management and Surgery of Placenta Accreta Disorders: Impact of MR Imaging
    Part II: MR of Maternal Disease in Pregnancy
    MR of Maternal Brain Diseases in Pregnancy
    MR of Maternal Chest Diseases in Pregnancy
    MR of Cardiovascular Diseases in Pregnancy
    Magnetic Resonance Imaging of Acute Abdominal and Pelvic Pain in Pregnancy
    MR Of Obstetric Diseases In Pregnancy
    MR Of Gynecologic Diseases In Pregnancy
    MR of the Hepatic, Biliary and Pancreatic Diseases in Pregnancy
    MR of the Renal Diseases in Pregnancy
    MR of Appendicitis and Bowel Diseases in Pregnancy
    MR Imaging of Musculoskeletal Disorders Related to Pregnancy
    Imaging of Trauma in Pregnancy: Role of MR Imaging.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Paola D'Aprile ; in collaboration with Alfredo Tarantino.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    published by Reto Sutter ; with contributions from: Afonso P. Diana [and 26 others] ; ESSR Sports Imaging Subcommittee.
  • Digital
    Riccardo Manfredi, Roberto Pozzi Mucelli, editors.
    Summary: Based on the experience of two Italian referral centers, the book depicts the characteristic findings obtained when using MR imaging to study the male and female pelvis including the obstetric applications. Each chapter provides a comprehensive account of the use of the imaging technique of examination, including the most recent advances in MR imaging, the anatomy and MR possibilities in the identification, characterization and staging of the different pelvic diseases highlighting its diagnostic possibilities. The advances in fetal MRI, representing the cutting edge of pelvic MR imaging, will also be depicted. The text is complemented by numerous illustrations, as well as clinical cases that make this a very practice-oriented work, presenting the role of diagnostic imaging in every-day clinical activity. The volume will prove an invaluable guide for both residents and professionals with core interest in gynecology, obstetrics and urology.

    Contents:
    Magnetic Resonance Imaging Of Congenital Malformation Of The Uterus
    MRI of Endometrial Carcinoma
    Cervix
    Endometriosis
    Fibroids
    Neoplasms Of The Ovary
    Benign Prostatic Pathology
    Adenocarcinoma Of The Prostate
    Testis
    Inflammation
    Neoplasms
    Magnetic Resonance Urography
    Fetal MRI.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    published by Josef Kramer and Apostolos Karantanas ; with contributions from Afonso Diana P. [and 35 others].
  • Digital
    edited by Josef Kramer, Apostolos Karantanas.
  • Digital
    Nicolae V. Bolog, Gustav Andreisek, Erika J. Ulbrich.
    Summary: This book is divided into chapters that cover MRI of all structures of the knee joint in the order that is usually used in practice ? cruciate ligaments, collateral ligaments, menisci, cartilage, subchondral bone, patella, synovia, muscles and tendons, arteries, veins and bones. With the aid of numerous images, each chapter provides comprehensive descriptions of the anatomy, the normal MR appearance, pathological MR findings, and postoperative MRI appearance. A text box at the end of each chapter clearly describes how the MRI report should be compiled and identifies what should be included when reporting on specific lesions. The book will be an ideal guide for radiologists and will also be relevant for orthopaedic surgeons, rheumatologists, and physiotherapists.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Anterior cruciate ligament
    Posterior cruciate ligament
    Medial collateral ligament and medial supporting structures
    Lateral collateral ligament and posterolateral corner of the knee
    Menisci
    Cartilage
    Subchondral bone
    Patella
    Synovia
    Capsule
    Muscles and tendons.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Hans-Ulrich Kauczor, Mark Oliver Wielpütz, editors.
    Summary: "This book provides a comprehensive overview of how to use MRI for the imaging of lung disease. Special emphasis is placed on routine applications and the clinical impact of MRI in each setting. In addition, current technological developments are reviewed and information presented on dedicated applications of MRI in preclinical and translational research, clinical trials, and specialized institutions. During the past two decades, significant advances in the technology have enabled MRI to enter and mature in the clinical arena of chest imaging. Standard protocols are now readily available on MR scanners, and MRI is recommended as the first- or second-line imaging modality for a variety of lung diseases, not limited to cystic fibrosis, pulmonary hypertension, and lung cancer. The benefits and added value of MRI originate from its ability to both visualize lung structure and provide information on different aspects of lung function, such as perfusion, respiratory motion, ventilation, and gas exchange. On this basis, novel quantitative surrogates for lung function and therapy control (imaging biomarkers) are generated. The second edition of MRI of the Lung has been fully updated to take account of recent advances"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    General Requirements of MRI of the Lung and Suggested Standard Protocol
    Noncontrast and Contrast-Enhanced Pulmonary Magnetic Resonance Angiography
    MR Perfusion in the Lung
    Hyperpolarised Helium-3 (3He) MRI: Physical Methods for Imaging Human Lung Function
    Hyperpolarized 129Xenon MRI of the Lung
    Fluorinated-Gas MRI
    Proton MRI Based Ventilation Imaging: Oxygen-Enhanced Lung MRI and Alternative Approaches
    Dynamic MRI of Respiratory Mechanics and Pulmonary Motion.-Pulmonary Hypertension and Thromboembolic Disease.-Vascular Anomalies and Diseases
    Asthma
    MRI of Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease
    Magnetic Resonance Imaging of the Lung: Cystic Fibrosis
    Lung Cancer
    Mediastinal Disease
    Pulmonary Infections: Pneumonia
    Interstitial Lung Disease
    Diseases of the Pleura and the Chest Wall
    Magnetic Resonance Imaging in Animal Models of Respiratory Diseases
    Pulmonary MRI in Clinical Trials
    Challenges of Using 3 T MR Systems and Whole-Body MRI for Lung Imaging.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Martin Vahlensieck, Maximilian Reiser ; translator, Sarah Venkata.
  • Digital
    Andrew B. Rosenkrantz.
    Contents:
    Introduction to prostate cancer : clinical considerations
    Prostate cancer pathology
    Introduction to prostate MRI protocols : hardware, T2-weighted imaging, and proton spectroscopy
    Diffusion-weighted imaging of the prostate
    Dynamic contrast-enhanced MRI of the prostate
    Prostate imaging reporting and data system (PI-RADS)
    Prostate cancer staging and surgical planning
    Post-treatment follow-up and assessment for recurrence
    Pre-biopsy MRI and MRI-targeted biopsy
    MRI and active surveillance
    PET/CT and PET/MR imaging evaluation of prostate cancer
    Teaching atlas of instructional and interesting cases.
  • Digital
    Paola D'Aprile, Alfredo Tarantino.
    Summary: This richly illustrated, comprehensive case-based atlas describes several cases of spondylitis, discitis, osteoarthritis and sacroiliitis as well as shows both MR findings and a brief clinical history of the rheumatic diseases.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword to the Second Edition; Preface to the First Edition; Preface; Acknowledgements; Contents; About the Authors; Part I: Spondyloarthritis;
    1: Clinical Assessment of Spondyloarthritis; 1.1 Introduction; 1.1.1 Etiopathogenesis; 1.1.2 Clinical Aspects; 1.1.3 Imaging; 1.1.4 Classification; 1.1.5 Therapy; 1.2 Ankylosing Spondylitis; 1.2.1 Clinical Aspects; 1.2.2 Extra-Articular Manifestations; 1.3 Psoriatic Arthritis; 1.4 Reactive Arthritis (ReA); 1.5 Spondyloarthritis Associated with Inflammatory Bowel Diseases-Enteroarthritis (EA) 1.6 Undifferentiated Spondyloarthritis (U-SpA)References; Suggested Readings;
    2: MRI in Spondyloarthritis; 2.1 Vertebral Bodies; 2.2 Intervertebral Discs; 2.3 Facet Joints, Costovertebral Joints, and Costotransverse Joints; 2.4 Sacroiliac Joints; 2.5 Enthesitis; 2.6 Differential Diagnosis of Spondyloarthritis; References; Suggested Readings;
    3: Magnetic Resonance Technique; References;
    4: MR Imaging in the Follow-Up Post Therapy; References; Suggested Readings; Part II: Rheumatoid Arthritis;
    5: Rheumatoid Arthritis of the Cervical Spine; 5.1 Introduction 5.2 Anatomy of the Atlantoaxial Joint5.3 Pathological Anatomy; 5.4 Diagnosis of Rheumatoid Arthritis; 5.5 Imaging; References; Part III: Spondyloarthritis: Clinical Cases; Case
    1: Ankylosing Spondylitis; Case
    2: Ankylosing Spondylitis; Case
    3: Psoriatic Arthritis; Case
    4: Undifferentiated Spondyloarthritis; Case
    5: Psoriatic Spondylitis; Case
    6: Arthritis Associated with Inflammatory Bowel Disease; Case
    7: Juvenile Spondylitis; Case
    8: Psoriatic Arthritis; Case
    9: Psoriatic Arthritis; Case
    10: Ankylosing Spondylitis; Case
    11: Psoriatic Spondyloarthritis; Case
    12: Psoriatic Arthritis Case
    13: Ankylosing SpondylitisCase
    14: Arthritis Associated with Inflammatory Bowel Disease; Case
    15: Undifferentiated Spondylitis; Case
    16: Psoriatic Arthritis; Case
    17: Undifferentiated Spondyloarthritis; Case
    18: Ankylosing Spondylitis; Case
    19: Psoriatic Arthritis; Case
    20: Psoriatic Arthritis; Case
    21: Ankylosing Spondylitis; Case
    22: Ankylosing Spondylitis; Case
    23: Ankylosing Spondylitis; Case
    24: Ankylosing Spondylitis; Case
    25: Ankylosing Spondylitis; Case
    26: Ankylosing Spondylitis; Case
    27: Psoriatic Arthritis; Case
    28: Psoriatic Arthritis; Case
    29: Psoriatic Arthritis Case
    30: Psoriatic ArthritisCase
    31: Ankylosing Spondylitis; Case
    32: Psoriatic Arthritis; Case
    33: SAPHO Syndrome; Case
    34: Juvenile Idiopathic Arthritis; Case
    35: Psoriatic Arthritis; Case
    36: Arthritis Associated with Inflammatory Bowel Disease; Case
    37: Psoriatic Arthritis; Case
    38: Psoriatic Arthritis; Case
    39: Ankylosing Spondylitis; Case
    40: Psoriatic Arthritis; Case
    41: Psoriatic Arthritis; Case
    42: Ankylosing Spondylitis; Case
    43: Ankylosing Spondylitis; Case
    44: Psoriatic Arthritis; Case
    45: Psoriatic Arthritis; Case
    46: Differential Diagnosis; Case
    47: Differential Diagnosis
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    published by Maryam Shahabpour, Reto Sutter and Josef Kramer ; with contributions from, Agten Christoph A. [and 32 others].
  • Digital
    William B. Morrison, John A. Carrino, Adam E. Flanders, editors.
    Summary: Utilizing plentiful radiological images to illustrate each topic, this text is a comprehensive and descriptive review of magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) interpretation for the spine, emphasizing standardized nomenclature and grading schemes. The book begins with current MR imaging protocols, including indication, sequencing and advanced imaging techniques, and a review of the relevant anatomy of the spine and its anomalies. Subsequent chapters encompass topics of trauma, degenerative disease, infection, inflammatory disease, as well as neoplastic and metabolic disease. Spinal cord and dural lesions will also be presented, with additional chapters dedicated to MRI evaluation of the post-operative patient. The format is reader-friendly, utilizing an efficient presentation of the essential principles and important findings on MR images of the spine, with a wealth of high-quality figures, graphics and tables for differential diagnosis as well as tips and tricks from experts in the field. Presenting the most up-to-date protocols and suggested interpretations, MRI of the Spine will be a solid reference for orthopedic surgeons, sports medicine specialists, neurosurgeons, radiologists and all clinicians and support staff caring for the spine.

    Contents:
    MRI Protocol
    MRI in Spine Anatomy
    MRI in Spine Trauma
    MRI in Degenerative Disease of the Spine
    MRI in Spine Infection
    MRI in Non-Infectious Inflammation and Arthropathies
    MRI in Metabolic Disease
    MRI in Neoplastic Bone
    Disease and Differential Considerations
    MRI in Dural Lesions
    MRI in Cord Lesions
    Principles of Post-Operative Spine MRI
    Identification of Complications using Post-Operative Spine MRI.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Tiziana Robba, Carlotta Tanteri, Giulia Tanteri, editors.
    Summary: This book is the outcome of a fruitful, long-standing cooperation between expert radiologists and clinicians, and explains the most relevant features and technical requirements that are needed to optimally conduct and assess MR examinations for temporomandibular joint (TMJ) pathologies. TMJ conditions are increasingly gaining attention, as the underlying diseases involved can vary considerably and be difficult to diagnose. Similarly, several imaging sub-specialties (e.g. dental radiology, neuroradiology, and musculoskeletal radiology) now find themselves dealing with the temporomandibular joints. The authors provide essential information on TMJ anatomy, dynamics, function and dysfunction. Correlations between clinical aspects and MRI findings are discussed and guidance for the correct interpretation of results is offered. Special findings that are helpful for differential diagnosis (arthritis, osteochondroma, synovial chondromatosis) are also examined. Given its extensive and varied coverage, the book offers a valuable asset for radiologists, dentists, gnathologists, maxillofacial surgeons, orthodontists and other professionals seeking a thorough overview of the subject.

    Contents:
    TMJ Magnetic Resonance: Technical Considerations:Principle of Physics of Magnetic Resonance Imaging TMJ
    Coils and sequences of TMJ MRI TMJ anatomy
    Normal MRI anatomy of TMJ
    TMJ dynamics
    Most common temporo-mandibular disorders:disc displacement with and without reduction hypermobility/hypomobility
    Osteoarthritis (deviations in form)
    Arthritis (psoriasic,etc)
    Idiopathic condylar reabsorption
    Special findings.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Bethany U. Casagranda, editor.
    Summary: This book systematically discusses the anatomy and pathology of three specific regions of the upper extremity: the elbow, wrist, and hand. Divided into three sections, by body part, chapters cover anatomy and pathology. The anatomy chapters give a comprehensive view of each body part and normal variants found there. Although the primary modality emphasized will be MRI, illustrations and other modalities, including plain radiograph and CT, will be used to comprehensively discuss the anatomy of each region. Liberally illustrated, the pathology chapters then cover both traumatic and non-traumatic causes for imaging and detail how to perform and interpret each MRI. Specific examples include: osseous trauma, soft tissue trauma, and tumor imaging. Chapters are written with the deliberate intention to be of value to all levels of radiology training while remaining a reliable resource for attending radiologists.

    Contents:
    Section I: Elbow
    Elbow Anatomy
    Elbow Pathology
    Section II: Wrist
    Wrist Anatomy
    Wrist Pathology
    Section III: Hand
    Hand Anatomy
    Hand Pathology.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Bin Tian.
    Contents:
    Application and design considerations for 3'-end sequencing using click-chemistry / Madeline K. Jensen, Nathan D. Elrod, Hari Krishna Yalamanchili, Ping Ji, Ai Lin, Zhandong Liu, and Eric J. Wagner
    PAS-seq 2 : A fast and sensitive method for global profiling of polyadenylated RNAs / Yoseop Yoon, Lindsey V. Soles, and Yongsheng Shi
    TRENDseq : A highly multiplexed high throughput RNA 3' end sequencing for mapping alternative polyadenylation / Anton Ogorodnikov and Sven Danckwardt
    QPAT-seq, a rapid and deduplicatable method for quantification of poly(A) site usages / Juncheng Lin, Congting Ye, and Qingshun Q. Li
    Using TIF-Seq2 to investigate association between 5' and 3' mRNA ends / Bingnan Li, Sueli Marques, Jingwen Wang, and Vicent Pelechano
    Single-molecule polyadenylated tail sequencing (SM-PAT-Seq) to measure polyA tail lengths transcriptome-wide / Steven L. Coon, Tianwei Li, James R. Iben, Sandy Mattijssen, and Richard J. Maraia
    3' end sequencing of pA⁺ and pA⁻ RNAs / Guifen Wu, Manfred Schmid, and Torben Heick Jensen
    Comprehensive profiling of mRNA polyadenylation in specific cell types in vivo by cTag-PAPERCLIP / R. Samuel Herron and Hun-Way Hwang
    A computational pipeline to infer alternative poly-adenylation from 3' sequencing data / Hari Krishna Yalamanchili, Nathan D. Elrod, Madeline K. Jensen, Ping Ji, Ai Lin, Eric J. Wagner, and Zhandong Liu
    Systematic refinement of gene annotations by parsing mRNA 3' end sequencing datasets / Pooja Bhat, Thomas R. Burkard, Veronika A. Herzog, Andrea Pauli, and Stefan L. Ameres
    Computational analysis of alternative polyadenylation from standard RNA-seq and single-cell RNA-seq data / Yipeng Gao and Wei Li
    Quantifying alternative polyadenylation in RNAseq data with LABRAT / Austin E. Gillen, Raeann Goering, and J. Matthew Taliaferro
    Poly(A) tail dynamics : Measuring polyadenylation, deadenylation and poly(A) tail length / Michael Robert Murphy, Ahmet Doymaz, and Frida Esther Kleiman
    Reconstitution and biochemical assays of an active human histone pre-mRNA 3'-end processing machinery / Yadong Sun, Wei Shen Aik, Xiao-Cui Yang, William F. Marzluff, Zbigniew Dominski, and Liang Tong
    Comprehensive RNP profiling in cells identifies U1 snRNP complexes with cleavage and polyadenylation factors active in telescripting / Zhiqiang Cai, Byung Ran So, and Gideon Dreyfuss
    Simultaneous studies of gene expression and alternative polyadenylation in primary human immune cells / Joana Wilton, Michael Tellier, Takayuki Nojima, Angela M. Costa, Maria Jose Oliveira, and Alexandra Moreira
    RIPiT-Seq : A tandem immunoprecipitation approach to reveal global binding landscape of multisubunit ribonucleoproteins / Zhongxia Yi and Guramrit Singh
    Generation of 3'TR knockout cell lines by CRISPR/Cas9-mediated genome editing / Sibylle Mitschka, Mervin M. Fansler, and Christine Mayr
    Modulation of alternative cleavage and polyadenylation events by dCas9-mediated CRISPRpas / Jihae Shin, Ruijia Wang, and Bin Tian.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Monica Mita, Alain Mita, Eric K. Rowinsky.
    Summary: This book describes the challenges involved in developing mTOR inhibitors for cancer treatment, starting with an in-depth examination of their molecular mechanism of action, with emphasis on the class side-effects, efficacy and mechanisms of resistance, as well as on promising novel directions for their development, including novel compounds and rational combinations with other anti-neoplastic drugs. Over the last 10 years, inhibitors of mTOR have emerged as a major class of anticancer drugs. Two rapamycin analogs are currently approved for the treatment of renal cell carcinoma, and it is estimated that a variety of other tumor types could benefit from mTOR inhibition, with numerous clinical trials (including pivotal registration trials) already underway. Second-generation small-molecule inhibitors of the pathway have also shown promise in terms of their superior tolerability and efficacy and are undergoing extensive clinical evaluation, with an estimated 30+ compounds currently under evaluation.

    Contents:
    Forward
    Past
    mTOR inhibitors: a little bit of history
    Present
    The mTOR pathway
    The evolving role of mTOR inhibitors in renal cell carcinoma
    The role of mTOR inhibitors in breast cancer
    The role of mTOR inhibitors in neuroendocrine tumors
    New indications of mTOR inhibitors in rare tumors
    The role of mTOR inhibitors in the treatment of hematological malignancies
    The clinical pharmacology and toxicity profile of rapalogs
    Resistance to mTOR inhibitors
    Rational combinations of mTOR inhibitors as anticancer strategies
    Future
    Predictive biomarkers of response to mTOR inhibitors
    The potential future indication of rapamycin analogs for the treatment of other solid tumors
    mTOR inhibition beyond rapalogs
    mTOR, aging and cancer: the missing link?
    New study design for mTOR inhibitors and other biological agents
    Future directions for the development of mTOR inhibitors.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    editors, Joyce Taylor-Papadimitriou, Joy M. Burchell.
    Contents:
    Mucins and cancer / Joyce Taylor-Papadimitriou & Joy M. Burchell
    Introduction to mucins in cancer / Michael A. McGuckin
    Changes in mucin-type O-linked glycosylation in cancer / Joy M. Burchell & Joyce Taylor-Papadimitriou
    Mucins as biomarkers in cancer / Kowa Chen, Ola Blixt & Hans H. Wandall
    Signaling from membrane mucins / Tze Wei Poh & Sandra J. Gendler
    MUC4 and membrane receptors in cancer / Kermit L. Carraway & Coralie A. Carothers Carraway
    MUC16, alias CA125 and ovarian cancer / Evangelia-Ourania Fourkala, Aleksandra Gentry-Maharaj & Usha Menon
    Mucins in metastasis / Sylvain Julien
    How mucins shape antigen-presenting cells to modify immune responses / Sandra J. van Vliet & Yvette van Kooyk
    MUC1 as a therapeutic target in cancer / Jean-Marc Limacher & Bruce Acres
    Index.
    Digital Access Future Med 2013
  • Digital
    Yu-Ye Li, Kun-Hua Wang, Li He, editors.
    Summary: This book introduces a number of HIV/AIDS cases with mucocutaneous lesions. HIV/AIDS can manifest a variety of skin lesions due to immunological disorder, opportunistic infections and tumors always occur primarily with skin lesions. The cases included in this book reflect the diseases spectrum and evolution of mucocutaneous lesions at different stages before and after AIDS antiretroviral therapy (ART) as well. This book consists of nine chapters, including fungal, viral, bacterial, parasitic, neoplastic, inflammatory diseases, syphilis and ART-induced diseases, etc. More than 300 cases and 600 photos of representative and important clinical significances are selected, showing the different clinical characteristics of the same disease under different immune status. Clinical photos are combined with clear and concise medical history along with the discussion on it, by which the readers can understand why skin lesions can be used as the early diagnostic clues to HIV/AIDS infection. Moreover, every chapter summarizes the similarity and characteristics of each type of skin diseases, which outlines and explains why they are AIDS-related mucocutaneous lesions.

    Contents:
    Mycoses in HIV/AIDS
    Viral Dermatoses in HIV/AIDS Patients
    Bacterial Dermatosis in HIV/AIDS Patients
    Syphilis in HIV/AIDS Patients
    Parasitic Dermatosis in HIV/AIDS Patients
    Neoplastic Diseases in HIV/AIDS Patients
    Inflammatory Dermatosis in HIV/AIDS Patients
    ART-Releated Diseases in HIV/AIDS Patients
    Other Dermatoses in HIV/AIDS Patients.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    Pavan Muttil, Nitesh K. Kunda, editors.
    Summary: This book focuses on the application of nanotechnology to deliver drugs and biological agents by the mucosal routes of administration i.e. nasal, pulmonary, buccal, and oral routes.It provides an overview of nanotechnology in drug delivery with a description of different types of nanoparticles, methods of preparation and characterization, and functionalization for site-specific drug delivery. Mucosal Delivery of Drugs and Biologics in Nanoparticles emphasize the use of nanoparticles in treating various cancers and infectious diseases. It broadens the use of nanoparticles by including biologics, including vaccines and immunotherapies, apart from drugs. It acknowledges the concerns around the potential toxicity of nanoparticles to the host; few chapters will discuss the biodistribution of these nanoparticles when mucosal routes of administration are employed. Further, the interaction of nanoparticles with the host's immune cells is discussed. Moreover,it reviews the regulatory aspects of nanotechnology in product development, especially when delivered by the mucosal route of administration. Lastly, discusses the challenges and opportunities to manufacture nanoparticles on an industrial scale. This book will be the first of its kind to focus on the design, development and delivery of nanoparticles when administered by different mucosal routes.

    Contents:
    Section I Background
    Introduction to Nanomedicine
    Characterization of Nanoparticles
    Section II Drugs and Biologics Encapsulated in Nanoparticles
    Routes of Delivery
    Small molecule Delivery
    Peptide and Protein Delivery
    Gene Delivery (siRNA/CRISPR)
    Phage Therapy
    Section III Diseases
    Non-infectious Diseases
    Infectious Diseases
    Cancer
    Section IV Host Interactions with Nanoparticles
    Interaction of Nanoparticles with Epithelial and Immune Cells
    Toxicity of Nanoparticles to the Host
    Nanoparticle Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacodynamics
    Section V MIscellanous
    Nanoparticles as Theranostics
    Regulatory Perspectives
    Manufacturing Scale-up of Nanoparticles.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    [edited by] Justin B. Dimick, Gilbert R. Upchurch Jr, Hasan B. Alam, Timothy M. Pawlik, Mary T. Hawn, Julie Ann Sosa.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2021
  • Digital
    editors, Christopher M. Walker, Jonathan H. Chung ; associate editors, Stephen B. Hobbs, Brent P. Little, Carol C. Wu.
    Summary: "Reflecting recent major advances in the field, Müller's Imaging of the Chest, 2nd Edition, by Drs. Christopher M. Walker and Jonathan H. Chung, remains your go-to reference for all aspects of chest radiology, including the latest diagnostic modalities and interventional techniques. This exhaustive resource begins with a review of normal anatomy, progressing to expert coverage based first on how patients present in clinical practice, then on diagnosis or diagnostic category. This practical, easy-to-use format helps you effectively select and interpret the best imaging studies for the everyday challenges you face in thoracic imaging"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Section I: Normal chest. Normal chest radiography and CT
    Section II: Radiologic manifestations of lung disease. Consolidation
    Atelectasis
    Nodules and masses
    Interstitial patterns
    Decreased lung density
    Section III: Developmental lung disease. Airway and parenchymal anomalies
    Congenital malformations of the pulmonary vessels in the adults
    Section IV: Pulmonary infection. Bacterial pneumonia
    Pulmonary tuberculosis
    Nontuberculous (atypical) mycobacterial infection
    Fungal infections
    Viruses
    Parasites
    HIV infection
    Section V: Pulmonary neoplasms. Screening for lung cancer
    Lung cancer: radiologic manifestations and diagnosis
    Pulmonary carcinoma staging
    Neuroendocrine hyperplasia, pulmonary tumorlets, and carcinoid tumors
    Pulmonary hamartoma
    Inflammatory pseudotumor
    Pulmonary metastases
    Section VI: Lymphoproliferative disorders and leukemia. Pulmonary lymphoid hyperplasia and lymphoid interstitial pneumonia (lymphocytic interstitial pneumonia)
    Non-Hodgkin's lymphoma
    Hodgkin's disease
    Leukemia
    Section VII: Diffuse lung diseases. Usual interstitial pneumonia/ idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis
    Nonspecific interstitial pneumonia
    Cryptogenic organizing pneumonia (bronchiolitis obliterans organizing pneumonia)
    Acute interstitial pneumonia
    Sarcoidosis
    Hypersensitivity pneumonitis
    Pulmonary Langerhans cell histiocytosis
    Smoking-related interstitial lung disease
    Lymphangioleiomyomatosis and tuberous sclerosis
    Idiopathic pleuroparenchymal fibroelastosis
    Eosinophilic lung diseases
    Metabolic and storage lung diseases
    Section VIII: Connective tissue diseases. Rheumatoid arthritis
    Systemic sclerosis (scleroderma)
    Systemic lupus erythematosus
    Polymyositis/dermatomyositis
    Sjögren's syndrome
    Mixed connective tissue disease (MCTD)
    Interstitial pneumonia with autoimmune features
    Section IX: Vasculitis and granulomatosis. Anca-associated vasculitis
    Goodpasture syndrome (anti-basement membrane antibody disease)
    Behçet's disease
    Takayasu arteritis
    Section X: Pulmonary embolism, hypertension, and edema. Acute pulmonary embolism
    Chronic pulmonary thromboembolism
    Nonthrombotic pulmonary embolism
    Pulmonary arterial hypertension
    Hydrostatic pulmonary edema
    Permeability pulmonary edema
    Section XI: Diseases of the airways. Tracheal diseases
    Bronchiectisis and other bronchial abnormalities
    Asthma
    Bronchiolitis
    Emphysema
    Section XII: Inhalational diseases and aspiration. Asbestos-related disease
    Silicosis and coalworker's pneumoconiosis
    Uncommon pneumoconioses
    Aspiration
    Section XIII: Iatrogenic lung disease and trauma. Drug induced lung disease
    Radiation induced lung disease
    Blunt thoracic trauma
    Post-operative complications
    Chest radiography in the intensive care unit
    Non-infectious complications of lung and stem cell transplant
    Section XIV: Pleural disease. Pneumothorax
    Pleural effusion
    Benign pleural thickening
    Pleural neoplasms
    Section XV: Mediastinum. Pneumomediastinum
    Mediastinitis
    Mediastinal masses
    Section XVI: Diaphragm and chest wall. Diaphragm
    Chest wall.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    Kevin Marsh, Mireille Goetghebeur, Praveen Thokala, Rob Baltussen, editors.
    Summary: Representing the first collection on the topic, this book builds from foundations to case studies, to future prospects, providing the reader with a rich and comprehensive understanding of the use of multi-criteria decision analysis (MCDA) in healthcare. The first section of the collection presents the foundations of MCDA as it is applied to healthcare decisions, providing guidance on the ethical and theoretical underpinnings of MCDA and how to select MCDA methods appropriate to different decision settings. Section two comprises a collection of case studies spanning the decision continuum, including portfolio development, benefit-risk assessment, health technology assessment, priority setting, resource optimisation, clinical practice and shared decision making. Section three explores future directions in the application of MCDA to healthcare and identifies opportunities for further research to support these.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Xuefeng Wang, Feng Li, Suyue Pan, editors.
    Summary: This book provides practical information on applications of multi-modal EEG monitoring in patients with severely neurologically diseases. The First part systematically introduces the modern EEG techniques, and multi-modal EEG monitoring system for severe neurological illness. In the second part, identification of EEG artifacts and interpretation of common abnormal EEG patterns is presented. Accompanying more than 50 typical cases and 200 EEG records, the following chapters discusses EEG's changes and clinical significance in coma, ischemic-hypoxic encephalopathy, status epilepsy, Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease, traumatic brain injury, and other diseases in details. In addition, application of multi-modal EEG in monitoring intracranial pressure and predicting suicide risk is also included. It will be a valuable reference for professionals in neurology, neurosurgery, emergency care, psychiatry, technology specialists of EEG and senior nurses with basic EEG monitoring knowledge.

    Contents:
    Part 1 Electroencephalogram (EEG) Basis and quantitative Electroencephalogram (qEEG) Technology
    1 Basic theory of EEG
    2 qEEG monitoring system in severely ill patients
    Part 2 Interpretation and clinical significance of abnormal EEG in severely ill patients
    3 Common abnormal EEG in neurocrital ill patients
    4 Abnormal EEG background activity
    5 Patterns and clinical significance of abnormal sleep EEG
    Part 3 Application of multimodal EEG in severely ill patients
    6 Application of multimodal EEG in coma patients
    7 Application of multimodal EEG in HIE
    8 Application of multimodal EEG in SE
    9 Clinical application of multimodal EEG in acute ischemic stroke
    10 Application of multimodal EEG in TBI.-11 Application of multimodal EEG in AE
    12 Application of multimodal EEG in ICP monitoring
    13 Application of multimodal EEG in sedation and analgesia
    14 Application of multimodal EEG in predicting the risk of suicide
    15 Application of multimodal EEG in the determination of brain death
    16 Application of the BIS in the ICU
    17 Application of aEEG in severely ill patients.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Luca Saba, João Miguel Sanches, Luís Mendes Pedro, Jasjit S. Suri, editors.
    Summary: Stroke is one of the leading causes of death in the world, resulting mostly from the sudden ruptures of atherosclerosis carotid plaques. Understanding why and how plaque develops and ruptures requires a multi-disciplinary approach such as radiology, biomedical engineering, medical physics, software engineering, hardware engineering, pathological and histological imaging. Multi-Modality Atherosclerosis Imaging, Diagnosis and Treatment presents a new dimension of understanding Atherosclerosis in 2D and 3D. This book presents work on plaque stress analysis in order to provide a general framework of computational modeling with atherosclerosis plaques. New algorithms based on 3D and 4D Ultrasound are presented to assess the atherosclerotic disease as well as very recent advances in plaque multimodality image fusion analysis. The goal of Multi-Modality Atherosclerosis Imaging, Diagnosis and Treatment is to fuse information obtained from different 3D medical image modalities, such as 3D US, CT and MRI, providing the medical doctor with some sort of augmented reality information about the atherosclerotic plaque in order to improve the accuracy of the diagnosis. Analysis of the plaque dynamics along the cardiac cycle is also a valuable indicator for plaque instability assessment and therefore for risk stratification. 4D Ultrasound, a sequence of 3D reconstructions of the region of interest along the time, can be used for this dynamic analysis. Multimodality Image Fusion is a very appealing approach because it puts together the best characteristics of each modality, such as, the high temporal resolution of US and the high spatial resolutions of MRI and CT.

    Contents:
    Histology and Pathology of 3D Atherosclerosis
    Clinical MRA of the Carotid Arteries
    Quantitative MR Imaging of the Carotids
    Contrast Agents in Carotid Angiography with Magnetic Resonance
    Quantitative Magnetic Resonance Analysis in the Assessment of Cardiac Diseases
    Atherosclerosis Plaque Stress Analysis: A Review
    Carotid Plaque Stress Analysis: Issues on Patient Specific Modelling
    Noninvasive Targeting of Vulnerable Carotid Plaques for Therapeutic Interventions
    Clinical CT Imaging of Carotid Arteries
    Quantitative CT Imaging of Carotid Arteries
    Quantitative Computed Tomography Analysis in the Assessment of Coronary Artery Disease
    A Gamma Mixture Model for IVUS Imaging
    Ultrasound Profile of Carotid Plague. A New Approach Towards Stroke Prediction
    Ultrasonographic Quantification of Carotid Stenosis: A Reappraisal Using a New Gold Standard
    Histologic and Biochemical Composition of Carotid Plaque and Its Impact on Ultrasonographic Appearance
    Automated Carotid IMT Measurement and Its Validation in Low Contrast Ultrasound Database of 885 Patient Indian Population Epidemiological Study: Results of AtheroEdgeTM Software
    Carotid Artery Recognition System (CARS): A Comparison of Three Automated Paradigms for Ultrasound Images
    Atherosclerotic Carotid Plaque Segmentation in Ultrasound Imaging of the Carotid Artery
    Relationship Between Plaque Echogenicity and Atherosclerosis Biomarkers
    Hypothesis Validation of Far Wall Brightness in Carotid Artery Ultrasound for Feature-Based IMT Measurement Using a Combination of Level Set Segmentation & Registration
    Segmentation of Carotid Ultrasound Images
    Imaging Occlusive Atherosclerosis
    Imaging of Aortic Aneurysms: What Do We Need to Know and Which Techniques Should Be Chosen?
    Molecular Imaging of Inflammation and Intraplaque Veovascularization
    Carotid Angioplasty and Stenting
    New Approaches for Plaque Component Analysis in Intravascular Ultrasound (IVUS) Images
    Visualization of Atherosclerotic Coronary Plaque by Using Optical Coherence Tomography
    Image Fusion Technology
    Generalized Symptomatic vs. Asymptomatic Plaque Characterization and Classification in Carotid Ultrasound Images.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Mauren Abreu de Souza, Humberto Remigio Gamba, Helio Pedrini, editors.
    Summary: This book presents different approaches on multi-modality imaging with a focus on biomedical applications. Medical imaging can be divided into two categories: functional (related to physiological body measurements) and anatomical (structural) imaging modalities. In particular, this book covers imaging combinations coming from the usual popular modalities (such as the anatomical modalities, e.g. X-ray, CT and MRI), and it also includes some promising and new imaging modalities that are still being developed and improved (such as infrared thermography (IRT) and photoplethysmography imaging (PPGI)), implying potential approaches for innovative biomedical applications. Moreover, this book includes a variety of tools on computer vision, imaging processing, and computer graphics, which led to the generation and visualization of 3D models, making the most recent advances in this area possible. This is an ideal book for students and biomedical engineering researchers covering the biomedical imaging field.

    Contents:
    References2 Photoplethysmography Imaging and Common Optical Hybrid Imaging Modalities; 2.1 Principle of Remote PPGI Measurement and Signal Composition; 2.1.1 Genesis of the PPG/PPGI Signal Waveform; 2.1.2 First-and Second-Generation PPGI; 2.1.3 Low-Cost Cameras (Webcams and Smartphone Cameras) ; 2.2 PPGI Signal Analysis; 2.2.1 Basic Analysis; 2.2.2 Advanced Signal Analysis, Space-Resolved Mapping, and Visualization of Skin Perfusion; 2.2.2.1 Additional Analysis of Morphologic Features; 2.3 Detection and Compensation of Movement Artifacts in the PPGI Plethysmogram Intro; Preface; Contents; Contributors; 1 Infrared Thermography; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Physical Principles of Infrared Thermography; 1.2.1 Thermal Radiation; 1.2.2 Blackbody Radiation; 1.2.3 Greybody Radiation; 1.2.4 Temperature Measurement; 1.2.5 Thermal Cameras; 1.3 Medical Applications; 1.3.1 Diagnosis; 1.3.1.1 Detection of Breast Abnormalities; 1.3.1.2 Rheumatic Diseases; 1.3.1.3 Dry Eye Syndrome and Ocular Disease; 1.3.1.4 Wound Assessment; 1.3.2 Monitoring; 1.3.2.1 Respiratory Rate; 1.3.2.2 Cardiac Pulse; 1.3.2.3 Perfusion; 1.4 Recent Advances in 3D Infrared Thermography; 1.5 Summary 2.3.1 Initial Assessment of Movement Events2.3.2 Motion Tracking and Compensation Algorithms; 2.3.2.1 Block Matching Method; 2.3.2.2 Optical Flow Method; 2.3.2.3 Kanade-Lucas-Tomasi Feature Tracker; 2.3.2.4 Additional Tracking Algorithms; 2.4 Selected PPGI Results and Applications; 2.4.1 Proof of Concept Studies; 2.4.1.1 Skin Perfusion Changes After Mechanical Irritation; 2.4.1.2 Highly Distributed Skin Perfusion in Melanoma; 2.4.1.3 Comparison of Bilateral Heartbeat-Related Skin Perfusion Amplitude; 2.4.1.4 Multiwavelength Illumination PPGI Study: Towards Remote SpO2 2.4.2 First Clinical Trial: Allergic Skin Reactions Quantified by PPGI2.4.2.1 Data Acquisition and Signal Analysis; 2.4.2.2 Results; 2.4.2.3 Vascular Response Assessed by the PPGI Method; 2.4.2.4 Automatic Determination of Area Affected by Allergic Reaction; 2.5 Optical Hybrid Imaging: Combining Different Strategies; 2.6 Conclusions; References; 3 Multimodal Image Fusion for Cardiac Resynchronization Therapy Planning; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Multimodal Image Processing; 3.2.1 Segmentation of LV and Veins in CT Images 3.2.2 Characterization of the Mechanical Activation Using Speckle Tracking Echography3.2.3 Characterization of Fibrosis in LGE-MRI; 3.3 Multimodal Image Registration; 3.3.1 STE to CT Registration; 3.3.2 LGE-MRI to CT Registration; 3.4 Patient-Specific 3D Model Generation; 3.5 Results; 3.6 Conclusion; References; 4 CFD-Based Postprocessing of CT-MRI Data to Determine the Mechanics of Rupture in Abdominal Aortic Aneurysms; 4.1 Abdominal Aortic Aneurysms (AAA): Causes and Its Rupture; 4.1.1 Types of Aneurysms; 4.1.2 Causes of AAA; 4.1.3 Rupture in AAA; 4.1.4 AAA Incidence in the Asian Population
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Ruslan I. Dmitriev, editor.
    Contents:
    Current state-of-the-art 3D tissue models and their compatibility with live cell imaging
    Simultaneous Phosphorescence and Fluorescence Lifetime Imaging by Multi-Dimensional TCSPC and Multi-Pulse Excitation
    Quantitative live cell FLIM imaging in three dimensions
    Three-dimensional tissue models and available probes for multi-parametric live cell microscopy: a brief overview
    Fabrication and handling of 3D scaffolds based on polymers and decellularized tissues
    Multi-parametric imaging of hypoxia and cell cycle in intestinal organoid culture
    Imaging of intracellular pH in tumor spheroids using genetically encoded sensor SypHer2
    Application of fluorescence lifetime imaging (FLIM) to measure intracellular environments in a single cell
    Quantitative imaging of Ca2+ by 3D-FLIM in live tissues
    Live cell imaging of viscosity in 3D tumour cell models
    Live imaging of cell invasion using a multicellular spheroid model and lightsheet microscopy
    Raman imaging microscopy for quantitative analysis of biological samples.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    by Habib Ammari, Josselin Garnier, Hyeonbae Kang, Loc Hoang Nguyen, Laurent Seppecher.
    Summary: "Super-Resolution imaging refers to modern techniques of achieving resolution below conventional limits. This book gives a comprehensive overview of mathematical and computational techniques used to achieve this, providing a solid foundation on which to develop the knowledge and skills needed for practical application of techniques. Split into five parts, the first looks at the mathematical and probabilistic tools needed, before moving on to description of different types of imaging; single-wave, anomaly, multi-wave and spectroscopic and nanoparticle. As an important contribution to the understanding of super-resolution techniques in biomedical imaging, this book is a useful resource for scientists and engineers in the fields of biomedical imaging and super-resolution, and is self-contained reference for any newcomers to these fields."--Publisher's website.
    Digital Access World Scientific 2017
  • Digital
    Gianluca Tadini, Eric Legius, Hilde Brems, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Andrea Lenzi, Silvia Migliaccio, Lorenzo Maria Donini, editors.
    Summary: This book describes in detail the multidisciplinary management of obesity, providing readers with a thorough understanding of the rationale for a multidisciplinary approach and with the tools required to implement it effectively. The emphasis is on a translational approach, starting from basic concepts and fundamental mechanisms of the pathology and clinical morbidity. Experts in the field discuss the full range of relevant topics, including the significance of physical exercise, psychological issues, nutritional strategies, pharmacological options, and bariatric surgery. Put another way, the book covers all aspects from the bench to the bedside. Physicians, scientists, and postgraduate students will all find it to be invaluable in understanding the causes and optimal management of obesity, which has rapidly become a major public health problem.

    Contents:
    INTRODUCTORY CHAPTERS: Anatomy and physiology of adipose tissue
    Regulation of energy intake
    Obesity: definition and epidemiology
    METABOLISM & ENDOCRINOLOGY: Obesity and thyroid function
    Hypothalamic Growth Hormone/IGF-1 Axis
    Adrenal function and obesity
    Ovarian function and obesity: PCOS, menopause
    Obesity and osteoporosis
    Sarcopenic obesity
    Obesity and testicular function
    Obesity and Glucose metabolism
    Dyslipidemia and cardiovascular risk in obesity
    Pulmonary complications of obesity
    Sexual distress in obesity
    EVALUATION OF OBESE SUBJECTS: Clinical evaluation
    Nutritional status evaluation: energy balance and body composition
    Psychiatric and psychological evaluation
    Functional evaluation
    Impairment of quality of life in obesity
    THERAPEUTIC APPROACH: Therapeutic education and psychotherapy
    Dietary intervention and nutritional counseling
    Physical activity and training prescription
    Prescription Medications for the Treatment of Obesity
    Bariatric surgery
    Reconstructive plastic surgery
    Nutritional, metabolic and psychological rehabilitation
    Increasing adherence to diet and exercise through cognitive behavioral strategies
    Interdisciplinary approach to obesity.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Laura Briggs Drew, Bonnie Ruder, David A. Schwartz, editors.
    Summary: This book applies a multi-disciplinary lens to examine obstetric fistula, a childbirth injury that results from prolonged, obstructed labor. While obstetric fistula can be prevented with emergency obstetric care, it continues to occur primarily in resource-limited settings. In this volume, specialists in the anthropological, psychological, public health, and biomedical disciplines, as well as health policy experts and representatives of governmental and non-governmental organizations discuss a scoping overview on obstetric fistula, including prevention, treatment, and reducing stigma for survivors. This comprehensive resource is useful in understanding the risk factors, epidemiology, and social, psychological, and medical effects of obstetric fistula. Topics explored include: A Human Rights Approach Toward Eradicating Obstetric Fistula Obstetric Fistula: A Case of Miscommunication Social Experiences of Women with Obstetric Fistula Classification of Female Genital Tract Fistulas Training and Capacity-Building in the Provision of Fistula Treatment Services Designing Preventive Strategies for Obstetric Fistula Sexual Function in Women with Obstetric Fistula Social and Reproductive Health of Women After Obstetric Fistula Repair Making the Case for Holistic Fistula Care Addressing Mental Health in Obstetric Fistula Patients Physical Therapy for Women with Obstetric Fistula A Multidisciplinary Approach to Obstetric Fistula in Africa is designed for professional use by NGOs, international aid organizations, governmental and multilateral agencies, healthcare providers, public health specialists, anthropologists, and others who aim to improve maternal health across the globe. Although the books geographic focus is Africa, it may serve as a useful resource for individuals who aim to address obstetric fistula in other settings. The book may also be used as an educational tool in courses/programs that focus on Global Health, Maternal and Child Health, Epidemiology, Medical Anthropology, Gender/Women's Studies, Obstetrics, Global Medicine, Nursing, and Midwifery.

    Contents:
    Introduction to Obstetric Fistula: A Multidisciplinary Approach to a Preventable Childbirth Tragedy
    A Human Rights Approach toward Eradicating Obstetric Fistula: Expanding Data Collection, Prevention, Treatment, and Continuing Support for Women and Girls Who Have Been Neglected
    Archaeological Basis for Obstetrical Fistula: A Condition That is as Ancient as Human Themselves
    Obstetric Fistula in Context
    Co-occurrence of Obstetric Fistula and Stillbirth in Sub-Saharan Africa
    A Multidisciplinary Approach to Obstetric Fistula in Africa: Public Health, Sociological and Medical Perspectives
    Women Who Lose Their Lives While Giving Life: Exploring Obstetric Fistula As a Public Health Problem in Kenya
    Obstetric Fistula: A Case of Miscommunication. Social Experiences of Women with Obstetric Fistula
    The Experience of Childbirth and Obstetric Fistula: Perspectives of Women in Northern Ghana
    The Experiences of Women Living with Obstetric Fistula in Burkina Faso: From Delivery to Social Reinsertion
    Girls and Womens Social Experiences with Obstetric Fistula in Tanzania: A Public Health Problem
    Physical, Psychological and Social Assessments of Fistula Recovery Among Women in Nigeria and Uganda
    Socio-Economic and Healthcare Causes of Obstetric Fistula in Tanzania: Perspectives from the Affected Women
    Health Seeking Behavior Among Women with Obstetric Fistula in Ethiopia
    Classification of Female Genital Tract Fistulas
    Surgical Treatment for Obstetric Fistula: Not an Easy Option
    Obstetric Vesicovaginal Fistula: Development of a Predictive Score of FailedSurgical Repair
    Training and Capacity Building in the Provision of Fistula Treatment Services-The FIGO Fistula Surgery Training Initiative
    Medical and Surgical Challenges and Opportunities for Treatment at the Aberdeen Womens Centre in Sierra Leone
    Comparing Three Models of Fistula CareAmong FiveFacilities in Nigeria and Uganda
    Obstetric Fistula in the Democratic Republic of the Congo: Neglected Care of Young Women in Rural Areas
    Therapeutic Management of Obstetric Fistula: Learning from Implementation of Insertable Devices to Improve the Health and Well-Being of Women and Girls in Low- and Middle-Income Countries
    The Aberdeen Women's Centre - Providing Care for Girls and Women with Fistula and Other Conditions in Sierra Leone
    Height and external measurement of pelvic diameters to predict obstetric fistula in Congolese women: a case-control study
    Designing Preventive Strategies for Obstetric Fistula: Evidence from a Survey Conducted Among Rural and Urban Women in BurkinaFaso
    Sexual Function in Women with Obstetric Fistulas
    Social and Reproductive Health of Women After Obstetric Fistula Repair: Insights from Guinea
    Urinary Incontinence Following Obstetric Fistula Surgery
    A Multidisciplinary Approachto Obstetric Fistula in Northern Ghana: "Not Counted Among Women"--Making the case for holistic fistula care: Implementation ofa model reintegration program in Uganda
    Addressing Mental Health in Obstetric Fistula Patients : Filling the Void
    Physical Therapy for Women with Obstetric Fistula
    Comprehensive Pelvic Floor Health : Beyond the "Hole" in the Wall.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Andrea Lenzi, Silvia Migliaccio, editors.
    Summary: This book describes in detail the multidisciplinary management of osteoporosis, providing readers with a thorough understanding of the rationale for a multidisciplinary approach and with the tools required to implement it effectively. The emphasis is on a translational approach, starting from basic concepts and fundamental mechanisms of the pathology and clinical morbidity. Experts in the field discuss the full range of relevant topics, including the significance of physical activity, nutritional strategies, and pharmacological treatment. Put another way, the book covers all aspects from the bench to the bedside. Physicians, scientists, and postgraduate students will all find it to be invaluable in understanding the causes and optimal management of osteoporosis, the incidence of which is increasing rapidly as populations age.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    M.D. Ray, editor.
    Summary: The book covers the basic concept of surgical and oncosurgical disciplines as a whole, as well as the management of surgical patients from pre-op preparation to discharge, i.e., all the basics needed for a successful outcome for oncosurgical patients. It covers surgical safety, the consumer protection act, medico-legal aspects, the importance of documentation, research and publications, and managing complications. The respective chapters cover pre-operative, intra-operative, and ICU management of cancer patients, based on a multi-disciplinary approach. Additionally, they highlight recent advances in surgical oncology and so-called incurable cancers. Edited and written by an interdisciplinary team of experts in oncology and palliative care, the book is intended as a clinically useful guide to the overlapping topics of pain management in cancer patients and the treatment of cancer in patients with multiple co-morbidities like cardiovascular, respiratory disease, hypertension and diabetes mellitus. Given its scope, it will benefit multi-disciplinary oncologists, pain, palliative and intensive care experts, as well as students of surgical disciplines, from MBBS, MS and DNB, to MRCS, MCh and FRCS.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    editor, Robert Lim.
    Summary: Emergent general surgical diseases are the most frequent causes of in-hospital deaths and are the most costly diseases to treat. The purpose of this book is to provide clinicians with an understanding of their roles and that of other disciplines for the treatment of acute and emergent surgical diseases. It is also designed to give a clear pathway for using multiple disciplines to manage these diseases. The text details over 20 problems routinely seen in clinical practice and approaches the disease from the perspective of experts within the different specialties. It provides a comprehensive, evidenced-based overview and the most up-to-date technology available in clinical practice. An emphasis on new, less invasive techniques that may have a broader range of indications in the future is also included. Ultimately the reader will have a better understanding of these acute problems, the other specialties they work with, and when to integrate these other specialties when they encounter these urgent clinical scenarios.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital/Print
    Ellie Maghami, Allen S. Ho, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Head and neck cancer- the patient perspective
    2. Physician assistants and nurse practitioners in head and neck surgery
    3. Role of the speeh-language pathologist (SLP) in the head and neck cancer team
    4. Oral and dental health in head and neck cancer patients
    5. Imaging evaluation of the head and neck oncology patient
    6. Challenges in head and neck pathology
    7. Surgical perspectives in head and neck cancer
    8. Head and neck reconstructive surgery
    9. Radiation therapy for the head and neck patient: advances, challenges, and perspectives
    10. Perspectives in head and neck medical oncology
    11. Nutrition management for the head and neck cancer patient
    12. Physical therapy challenges in head and neck cancer
    13.Occupational therapy for the head and neck
    14. Psychosocial needs of head and neck cancer patients and the role of the clinical social worker
    15. Supportive care for the head and neck cancer patient
    16. Survivorship care planning and quality of life.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC280.H4 M858 2018
    1
  • Digital
    Makoto Hashizume, editor.
    Summary: This volume thoroughly describes the fundamentals of a new multidisciplinary field of study that aims to deepen our understanding of the human body by combining medical image processing, mathematical analysis, and artificial intelligence. Multidisciplinary Computational Anatomy (MCA) offers an advanced diagnosis and therapeutic navigation system to help detect or predict human health problems from the micro-level to macro-level using a four-dimensional, dynamic approach to human anatomy: space, time, function, and pathology. Applying this dynamic and living approach in the clinical setting will promote better planning for and more accurate, effective, and safe implementation of medical management. Multidisciplinary Computational Anatomy will appeal not only to clinicians but also to a wide readership in various scientific fields such as basic science, engineering, image processing, and biomedical engineering. All chapters were written by respected specialists and feature abundant color illustrations. Moreover, the findings presented here share new insights into unresolved issues in the diagnosis and treatment of disease, and into the healthy human body.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Jeffrey W. Hazey, Darwin L. Conwell, Gregory E. Guy, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Historical perspectives and treatments for common bile duct stones
    2. Common bile duct stones: health care problem and incidence
    3. Bile duct stones: making the radiologic diagnosis
    4. Making the diagnosis: gastroenterology
    5. Making the diagnosis: surgery, a rational approach to the patient with suspected CBD stones
    6. Percutaneous biliary access: considerations, techniques, and complications
    7. Special considerations for the gastroenterologist
    8. Special considerations for teh surgeon
    9. Percutaneous methods of common bile duct stone retrieval
    10. Gastroenterologic treatment and outcomes
    11. Surgical treatment and outcomes
    12. Surgical procedures to prevent recurrence
    13. Mangement of medical complications of gallstone disease
    14. Managment of surgical complications
    15. Special considerations: management of common bile duct strones in the bariatric patient
    16. Management of choledocholithiasis in the cirrhotic patient
    17. Nonprocedural management of common bile duct stones
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Sebastian F. Schoppmann, Martin Riegler, editors.
    Summary: This book presents a new, multi- and interdisciplinary approach to gastroesophageal reflux disease (GERD) and Barretts esophagus that reflects the latest advances in understanding of the disease. The role of each of the available diagnostic techniques, including endoscopy, histopathology, esophageal manometry, reflux monitoring, and EndoFLIP assessment, is carefully explained. The use of endoscopy for the purposes of mucosal ablation (radiofrequency ablation, cryoablation) and mucosal resection is described, and all aspects of anti-reflux surgery are covered, with detailed explanation of indications and techniques for standard fundoplication, endoscopic fundoplication, and surgical procedures using the LINX system and the EndoStim device. To assist the reader further, a novel interdisciplinary algorithm is presented for GERD diagnosis and treatment. In addition, the latest diagnostic and therapeutic approaches (including endoscopic and surgical resection and chemoradiation) are also presented for esophageal cancer and cancer palliation. A key feature of the book is its recognition of the contribution of different specialties in the management of GERD, and it will accordingly appeal to a wide range of practitioners.

    Contents:
    Pathophysiology of Lower Esophageal Sphincter Damage: A new method of diagnosis of Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease
    Esophageal function testing for Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease
    Endoscopy and endoscopic ablative therapies in GERD and Barrett's esophagus
    GERD and Barretts Esophagus: Ablative and non-ablative therapies
    Radiology of benign gastroesophageal reflux disease (GERD)
    Extraesophageal GERD and management
    Anti-Reflux Surgery I: Fundoplications
    Anti Reflux Surgery II: magnetic sphincter augmentation
    LINX
    Anti-Reflux Surgery III: Endoscopic fundoplications
    Redo fundoplication
    Diagnosis of Barrett carcinoma
    Role of diagnostic imaging
    Surgical Treatment of esophageal adenocarcinoma
    Palliation of esophageal adenocarcinoma
    Multi-disciplinary management: alternative perspectives for the management of gastroesophageal reflux disease (GERD) and Barrett's esophagus (BE)
    GERD Outlook: A gastroenterologists perspective
    Outlook for the management of gastroesophageal reflux disease (GERD): no esophagus stands alone.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Ravi A. Chandra, Ryan J. Li, editors.
    Summary: This book is a multidisciplinary guide to head and neck cancer. Head and neck cancer remains one of the most technically complex cancer subsites to manage. This field involves highly specialized collaboration amongst surgeons, radiation oncologists, medical oncologists, radiologists, pathologists, and other health disciplines. The clinical and research landscape for head and neck oncology continues to evolve at a rapid pace. This book provides the latest updates in the contemporary understanding and management of these tumors. The text incorporates updates in surgical techniques (minimally invasive and robotic techniques, reconstructive approaches), radiation medicine (new data on dose and fields, oligometastatic/oligoprogressive disease, retreatment), medical oncology (targeted, immunotherapy and molecular agents), in addition to other overarching topics such as side effects, biomarkers/nanotechnology, and epidemiology. Written by experts in their respective fields, chapters include the most up to date scientific and clinical information with perspectives from each relevant discipline. These sections are concise and accessible, yet comprehensive. Palliative medicine, pathologic and imaging principles, and health systems/economics considerations are also described. This book is an ideal resource for clinicians, trainees, and researchers dealing with, and interested in, this challenging area of cancer care.

    Contents:
    Deintensification strategies
    Novel Multidisiplinary Paradigms: Surgery/Radiation, Immunotherapy, Organ Preservation
    Advances in Surgery and Reconstruction: TORS, TLM
    Advances in Radiation: Ion therapy, advanced techniques
    Advances in Systemic Therapy
    Advances in Molecular and Advanced Imaging
    Immunotherapy
    Molecular Profiling/Epidemiology
    Nanotechnology, Biomarkers
    Radiomics/Novel Imaging Response
    Recurrent or Second Primary Head and Neck Cancer
    Dentistry
    Supportive Care, Comorbid Conditions and Survivorship
    Rare Cancers.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Xinyu Qin, Jianmin Xu, Yunshi Zhong, editors.
    Summary: This book focuses on early diagnosis and multidisciplinary treatment, which is the key to preventing the occurrence of the liver metastases in colorectal cancer, and to increasing the resection rate of the liver metastasis foci and the 5-year survival after surgery. This book is divided into five parts: the introduction, basics, diagnosis, treatment and prevention. It has 20 chapters in total, covering the latest advances in colorectal cancer liver metastases epidemiology, pathogenesis, molecular diagnostics, marker screening, imaging technology, surgery, chemotherapy and prevention, etc. It provides professionals with up-to-date and comprehensive information on colorectal liver metastases. This book is relevant for senior surgeons and physicians working in oncology, general surgery, chemotherapy, digestive medicine, liver medicine and hepatic surgery. Editors Xinyu Qin and Jianmin Xu are Professors at the Department of General Surgery, Zhongshan Hospital, Fudan University, Shanghai, China. Editor Yunshi Zhong is an Associate Professor at the same department.

    Contents:
    Present Situation and Prospect of Diagnosis and Treatment of Colorectal Cancer
    Diagnosis and treatment of liver metastases
    Molecular Mechanism of Hepatic Metastasis of Colorectal cancer.- Metastatic Liver Cancer and Microenvironment
    Screening and Identification of Molecular Marker for Metastatic Liver Cancer
    Genetic Diagnosis on Hepatic Metastasis from Colorectal Cancer
    Diagnostic Value of Ultrasound in Metastatic Liver Cancer
    The Differential Diagnosis of Hepatic Metastasis by CT and MRI
    Diagnostic Value of PET/CT in Metastatic Liver Cancer
    Surgical Treatment of Rectal Cancer
    Laparoscopic Resection for Colorectal Cancer
    New neoadjuvant Chemotherapy of Resectable Liver Metastases of Colorectal
    Surgical Techniques for Metastatic Hepatic Carcinoma
    Laparoscopic Management of Colorectal Liver Metastases
    Surgery For Non-resectable Metastatic Colorectal Cancer
    Chemotherapy in Patients with Initially Unresectable Liver Metastasis of Colorectal
    Targeted Therapy of Colorectal Cancer Liver Metastasis
    Interventional Treatment of Liver Metastasis of Colorectal Cancer
    Prevention of Postoperative Liver Metastasis by Preoperative Interventional Chemotherapy in Colorectal Cancer
    Establishment of Postoperative Follow up and Database of Colorectal Cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    J. Scott McMurray, Matthew R. Hoffman, Maia N. Braden, editors.
    Summary: This text provides a comprehensive review of the assessment and management of pediatric voice and swallowing disorders from the perspectives of both the pediatric laryngologist as well as the speech-language pathologist whose collaboration is critical to effective clinical care. All chapters are written by experts in dual fields and formatted to present a straightforward approach to diagnosing and managing each disorder, including descriptions of relevant operative interventions. Multiple intraoperative photographs and illustrations depicting how to perform each surgical procedure are also included. Multidisciplinary Management of Pediatric Voice and Swallowing Disorders will serve as a useful step-by-step guide and resource for not only otolaryngologists and speech-language pathologists, but all members of the pediatric aerodigestive team and all other providers caring for children affected by voice and swallowing disorders.

    Contents:
    Pediatric Aerodigestive Programs: Role of the Core Team Members, Speech Language Pathology, Pulmonology, Gastroenterology, Otolaryngology, and Parent/Caregiver
    Operative Evaluation of the Upper Aerodigestive Tract
    Anesthetic Considerations
    Perioperative Considerations After Pediatric Laryngeal Surgery
    Imaging Evaluation of the Upper Aerodigestive Tract
    Physiology of Voice Production
    Embryonic and Histologic Development of the Vocal Tract
    Aerodynamic Voice Assessment
    Clinical Approach to Aerodynamic Assessment
    Nonlinear Acoustic Analysis of Voice Production
    Clinical Approach to Acoustic Assessment
    Perceptual Evaluation of Voice
    Health Related Quality of Life in Pediatric Dysphonia
    Endoscopic Evaluation of the Pediatric Larynx
    Physiology of Normal Swallow
    Clinical Evaluation of Swallow
    Videofluoroscopic Evaluation of the Swallow in Infants and Children
    Pediatric Flexible Endoscopic Evaluation of Swallowing
    Manometric Evaluation of Pediatric Swallow
    Quality of Life Assessment in Children with Feeding and Swallowing Disorders
    Approach to Pediatric Voice Therapy
    Benign Mass Lesions
    Laryngopharyngeal Reflux
    Muscle Tension Dysphonia and Puberphonia
    Vocal Fold Mobility Impairment
    Laryngomalacia
    Laryngeal Cleft
    Paradoxical Fold Motion
    Vascular Anomalies
    Vocal Fold Star
    Recurrent Respiratory Papillomatosis
    Glottic Web
    Syndromes and Congential Anomalies
    Esophageal Dysmotility
    Cricopharyngeal Achalasia
    Congenital Tracheal Anomalies: Complete Tracheal Rings, Tracheomalacia, and Vascular Compression
    Eosinophilic Esophagitis
    Tracheoesophageal Fitula
    Post-itubation Glottic Abnormalities
    Dysphonia After Laryngotrachael Reconstruction
    Non-cleft Velopharyngeal Dysfunction
    The Young Aspiring Singer
    Gender Affirming Voice
    The Weird and the Wonderful.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Vincenzo Gentile, Valeria Panebianco, Alessandro Sciarra, editors.
    Summary: Prostate cancer is the most common neoplasm in men and its management is very complex, in terms of both diagnosis and treatment. In recent years the value of multidisciplinary management within a prostate cancer unit has been increasingly recognized. Such a multidisciplinary approach within a specialized unit involves a variety of specialists, including urologists, oncologists, radiotherapists, radiologists and pathologists. This book describes in detail the advantages of multidisciplinary management of prostate cancer. It opens by explaining the nature of the required multidisciplinary team and the potential benefits of the prostate cancer unit as a structure for the delivery of specialist multidisciplinary care. Epidemiological aspects favoring multidisciplinary management are described and each element of care within the context of the prostate cancer unit is then discussed; also has been described the role of advanced imaging (Multiparametric MRI) in the management of PCa. Early diagnosis, risk classification, treatment decision making, surgery, radiotherapy, medical therapies and health care support are all fully considered. This book will be informative and enlightening for all who are involved in the management of patients with prostate cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Vincenzo Valentini, Hans-Joachim Schmoll, Cornelis J.H. van de Velde, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Carl E. Noe, editor.
    Summary: This book presents multiple aspects of spine care from the perspective of different disciplines. It's organized by sections focused on non-operative care, spine injections and procedures, perioperative care, operative care, pediatric care, and special topics. Each chapter has been written by a clinician whose active practice involves the topic of their chapter. Practical and clinically relevant, this book educates any practitioner who cares for patients with back and neck pain and other spine conditions about implementing a multidisciplinary team to treat the spine.

    Contents:
    Non-Operative Care
    Prevention, Nutrition, etc
    Electrodiagnostic Studies
    Radiology
    Ankylosing Spondylitis
    Soft Tissue Back Pain
    Non-Pharmacological Treatments
    Pharmacological Treatments
    Interdisciplinary Pain Management
    Spine Injections and Procedures
    Spine Injections
    Vertebroplasty
    Advanced Spine Pain Procedures
    Perioperative Care
    Psychological Evaluation
    Perioperative Rehabilitation
    Perioperative Anesthesia
    ICU Care
    Postoperative Care
    Operative Care
    Minimally Invasive Spine Surgery
    Cervical Spine Problems
    Thoracic Spine Conditions
    Lumbar Stenosis
    Vascular Spine Disorders
    Deformity
    Spine Tumors
    Trauma
    Pediatric Spine
    Special Topics.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Javier Casillas, Joe U. Levi, Alexander O. Quiroz, Roberto Ruiz-Cordero, Monica T. Garcia-Buitrago, Danny Sleeman.
    Contents:
    General: Embryology of the pancreas
    Anatomy of the pancreas
    Histology of the pancreas
    Physiology of the pancreas.- Imagenology of the pancreas
    Cystic Masses of the Pancreas: Serous Cystadenomas
    Mucinous Cystoadenomas
    Intraductal Papillary Mucinous Neoplasm. Solid Masses of the Pancreas: Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Pancreatic adenocarcinoma
    Acinar tumor of the pancreas
    Pancreatic Lymphoma
    Unusual tumor of the pancreas
    Pancreatic metastases
    Inflammatory Conditions of the Pancreas: Acute pancreatitis
    Chronic pancreatitis
    Pancreatic pseudocyst
    Autoimmune pancreatitis
    Trauma of the Pancreas: Pancreatic Trauma
    Pancreatic Surgery: Pancreas transplant
    Surgical Procedures of the Pancreas
    Gallery of Cases.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Michelangelo Bartolo, Fabio Ferrari, editors.
    Contents:
    Health in sub-Saharan Africa : HIV, TB and malaria epidemiology
    Chronic-degenerative diseases in sub-Saharan Africa
    From DREAM to DREAM 2.0 : an African model
    The DREAM management software
    DREAM centre remote telemonitoring
    DREAM data activity
    DREAM 2.0 a replicable model
    The challenge of sustainability : the impact of DREAM programme on the social, economic and working conditions of patients with HIV/AIDS
    Multispecialist teleconsultation
    From on the field training to e-learning
    GHT activity data
    BS Innova platform : introduction, framework and technology
    The digital divide
    Plant for Africa and renewable energy.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Gunnar Baatrup, editor.
    Summary: This book is a comprehensive reference work on the multidisciplinary team (MDT) management of colorectal cancer (CRC) patients that will meet the needs of all members of CRC MDTs and those training in the field. Important, up-to-date knowledge is provided on organization of MDTs, early intervention, surgery, oncology, imaging, pathology, and palliation, with special focus on controversies. This second edition has been thoroughly revised. It includes an entirely new section on the principles of treatment of significant polyps and early cancers and a total of 14 new chapters, including one on the early integration of palliative care. Every effort has been made to ensure that each specialty-specific chapter will be approachable for all team members, thereby facilitating an effective interdisciplinary approach to teamwork. The authors are leading European doctors and scientists who have influenced the development of the MDT concept as well as other aspects of individualized treatment of CRC patients.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Gunnar Baatrup.
    Summary: This book is intended as the equivalent of the Swiss Army knife for all members of colorectal cancer (CRC) multidisciplinary teams and those training in the fields of CRC management. It describes how to organize the team and explains the basic principles within the different disciplines involved in the treatment and care of CRC patients. Important, up-to-date knowledge is provided on visualization techniques, surgery, oncological treatment, palliation, and pathology, with special focus on controversies and aspects of interest to all team members. Care has been taken to ensure that each specialty-specific chapter will be approachable for team members from other specialties or professions, thereby facilitating an effective interdisciplinary approach to teamwork. The authors include leading European doctors and scientists who have influenced the development of the multidisciplinary team concept as well as other aspects of high-quality, individualized treatment of CRC patients.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Dong-Wook Han, Suck Won Hong, editors.
    Summary: This book explains the fundamental characteristics and biofunctionality of graphene-based nanomaterials and provides up-to-date information on the full range of their biomedical applications. An introductory section gives an overview of the chemical composition and physical properties of graphene and its derivatives as well as their potential toxicity and biosafety. Detailed attention is then devoted to the potential of multifunctional graphene-based nanomaterials (MFGNs) to direct the differentiation of stem cells into specific lineages and induce tissue regeneration. Here, individual chapters address the application of MFGNs for the purposes of neurogenesis, osteo- and chrondrogenesis, myogenesis, and wound healing. Subsequent sections focus on the capability of MFGNs as agents for drug delivery, bioimaging, theranostics, and therapeutics as well as their effectiveness as biomimetic platforms for nanobiosensors, biochips, medical devices, and dental applications. The book will be essential reading for graduate students, scientists, and engineers in any of the biomedical research fields in which efforts are being made to utilize novel MFGN-incorporated composite materials and develop functional devices based on them.

    Contents:
    I. Basic Features and Potential Toxicity of Graphene Family Nanomaterials
    Principles and Biomedical Application of Graphene Family Nanomaterials
    Differential Toxicity of Graphene Family Nanomaterials Concerning Morphology
    II. Graphene-based Nanomaterials as Scaffolds for Stem Cell Fate Modulation and Tissue Regeneration
    Graphene-based Materials for Efficient Neurogenesis
    Functional Graphene Nanomaterials-based Hybrid Scaffolds for Osteogenesis and Chondrogenesis
    Role of Graphene Family Nanomaterials in Skin Wound Healing and Regeneration
    III. Graphene as Agents for Drug Delivery, Bioimaging, Theranostics, and Therapeutics
    Graphene-based Nanomaterials as Drug Delivery Carriers
    Graphene-based Nanomaterials for Biomedical Imaging
    Graphene - A Promising Theranostic Agent
    Graphene as Photo-thermal Therapeutic Agents
    IV. Graphene for Nanobiosensors, Biochips, and Antibacterial Agents
    Graphene for Nanobiosensors and Nanobiochips
    Antibacterial Activity of Graphene-based Nanomaterials
    Conclusions
    Reflections and Outlook on Multifaceted Biomedical Applications of Graphene.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Azura Amid [and 3 others], editors.
    Summary: This edited work presents useful methods in experimenting in the area of Bioprocessing and Biotechnology. The four sections cover the area of Bioprocess, Whole Cells & Isolated Biocatalyst, Characterization of Biochemical Products and Cell Isolation & Culture. Its enable researchers to choose a suitable method and plan their experiments in details. The main focus of this book is to provide step by step method to young researchers, especially in the new research areas. Among the latest areas are the isolation of novel strain or enzyme by metagenomic approaches and taming procedure in the laboratories, development of novel, the cheap and non-toxic catalyst for biodiesel production, and production of micro-fibrillated cellulose. An updated method for well-known areas such as immobilization technology, biosensor, and polymerization was also presented. The book also covers in-silico methods such as MATLAB platform to ease researchers. Not to forget, the method in animal and plant culture is also discussed in detail. The book is written by chapter authors with much expertise in their fields. They have published multiple articles in the index listed journals. The topic of this book is particularly relevant to young researchers who are struggling to fine-tune their research and do not want to waste their time in optimizing the experiment set up.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Site-Directed Mutagenesis on Plasmid Using Polymerase Chain Reaction
    Isolation of Halophilic Bacteria
    Construction of Metagenomic DNA Libraries and Enrichment Strategies
    Thermotolerant Bacteria Producing Fibrinolytic Enzyme
    Chemical Mutation Method for High CO2-Requiring?Mutants of the Cyanobacterium Synechococcus sp. PCC 7002
    Identification of Fatty Acid Methyl Ester in Palm Oil Using Gas Chromatography-Mass Spectrometer
    Procedure to Develop Binodal Curve and Phase Diagram for Aqueous Two-Phase System
    Technique to Produce Catalyst From Egg Shell and Coconut Waste for Biodiesel Production
    Carrier-free Enzyme Immobilization by Cross-Linked Enzyme Aggregates (CLEA) Technology
    Isolation of Microfibrillated Cellulose (MFC) Via Fungal Cellulases Hydrolysis Combined with Ultrasonication
    Characterization of Electrochemical Transducers for Biosensor Applications
    Polymerization Methods and Characterizations for Poly(Lactic Acid) Based Polymers
    Characterization of Conformational and Oligomeric States of Proteins
    Skim Latex Serum as an Alternative Nutrition for Microbial Growth
    Method for Isolation of Bacteria Strain from Contaminated Soil for Biodegradation of Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons (PHAs)
    Monitoring the Growth of Plant Cells in Suspension Culture
    Culturing and Maintaining Mammalian Cell Culture
    Integrated Data Analysis Model for Screening Cell Line Producer
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Jorge L. Alió, Joseph Pikkel, editors.
    Summary: This book provides the practising ophthalmologist and surgeon with up-to-date information on the use of multifocal intraocular lenses to eliminate pseudophakic presbyopia. Guidance is provided on types and models of intraocular lens, indications, selection of patients, implantation, neuroadaptation, and complications and their avoidance. A key goal is to enable the practitioner to select the best lens for the individual patient, taking into account special circumstances. In addition, the results achieved to date with different lenses are analyzed and advice is given on the management of expectations. The authors are acknowledged international experts who draw upon their own experience and the peer-reviewed literature to provide the practitioner with cutting-edge information and evidence-based guidance.

    Contents:
    The challenges
    Historical perspective
    Types and models
    Neuro adaptation
    Preoperative considerations
    Cataract surgery and lens exchange
    Surgical complications
    Multifocal intraocular lenses after refractive surgery
    Refractive surgery after multifocal intraocular lens implantation
    Special circumstances
    Results (Meta-analysis)
    Managing the expectations.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Jorge L. Alió, Joseph Pikkel.
    Summary: This comprehensive 2nd edition will build on the highly successful first edition, providing an updated global perspective of the fundamentals of multifocal intraocular lenses. The varying outcomes, limitations, and the neuroadaptation process necessary for an adequate clinical success are thoroughly discussed, along with an overview of the different types of multifocal lenses, including the recently developed extended depth of focus lenses. Multifocal Intraocular Lenses: The Art and the Practice, 2nd edition opens with an introduction that will delve into current technological offerings for the correction of pseudophakic presbyopia, as well as the opportunity for refractive lens exchange in advanced presbyopic ages and the opportunity to use these lenses. The first section will include the historical background and clinical indications, while section two addresses the varying types and models of lenses currently available, including important clinical and technological highlights. Section three and four will follow, and provide an extended look at the Zeiss and Alcon Family Multifocal IOL's. Section five will delve into extended depth of field lenses, and will contain an introduction about the concept, different models and the evidence available about their outcomes. Section six concludes the book, closely examining accommodative intraocular lenses, and a full update will be provided on these lenses, the failures of the past and the hopes for the future. Multifocal Intraocular Lenses: The Art and the Practice, 2nd edition is a thorough, resource for the practical ophthalmologist and ophthalmic surgeon interested in learning more about intraocular lenses, identifying the best technologies and lenses for the benefit of their patients.

    Contents:
    1. Multifocal Intraocular Lenses: What Do They Offer Today?
    Part 1: Historical Background and Clinical Indications
    2. Multifocal Intraocular Lenses: Historical Perspective
    3. Multifocal Intraocular Lenses: Basic Principles
    4. Multifocal Intraocular Lenses: Preoperative Considerations
    5. Multifocal Intraocular Lenses: Neuroadaptation
    6. Multifocal Intraocular Lenses-Considerations in Special Cases
    7. Multifocal Intraocular Lenses and Corneal Refractive Surgery
    8. Multifocal Intraocular Lenses: Complications
    9. Multifocal Intraocular Lenses: Post Implantation Residual Refractive Error
    10. Multifocal Intraocular Lenses: Solutions for the Unhappy Patient.-11. Multifocal Intraocular Lenses: Neuroadaptation Failure Corrected by Exchanging with a Different Multifocal Intraocular Lens
    Part 2: Multifocal Intraocular Lenses: Types and Models
    12. Different Models of Multifocal Lenses on the Market
    Part 3: The Zeiss Family Multifocal IOLs
    13. Multifocal Intraocular Lenses: AT LISA tri 839 MP
    14. Multifocal Intraocular Lenses: AT LISA tri Toric 939 M/MP
    15. Multifocal Intraocular Lenses: AT LISA 809 Diffractive Bifocal Intraocular Lens
    16. Multifocal Intraocular Lenses: The Hanita Family of Lenses
    17. Multifocal Intraocular Lenses: The Acriva Family of Lenses
    Part 4: The Alcon Family Multifocal IOLs
    18. Multifocal Intraocular Lenses: Acrysof ReSTOR(R) SN6AD2 +2.5 D Lens
    19. Multifocal Intraocular Lenses: Acrysof Restor SN6AD1 Lens
    20. Multifocal Intraocular Lenses: Acrysof IQ Panoptix Trifocal Lens
    21. Multifocal Intraocular Lenses: The Johnson and Johnson Family of Lenses
    22. Multifocal Intraocular Lenses: Finevision (PhysIOL) Lens
    23. Multifocal Intraocular Lenses: Fyodorov Gradiol
    24. Multifocal Intraocular lenses: Sector Rotational Asymmetrical Refractive Lenses
    25.Multifocal Intraocular Lenses: The Rayner Family of lenses
    Part 5: Extended Depth of Field IOLs
    26. Extended Depth of Field Intraocular Lenses
    27. Extended Depth of Field Intraocular Lenses: Mini Well Ready Lens
    Part 6: Accommodative IOLs
    28. Accommodative Intraocular Lenses
    29.Crystalens Accommodating Intraocular Lens. .
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Dipak Ghosh, Shukla Samanta, Sayantan Chakraborty.
    Summary: This book primarily focuses on the study of various neurological disorders, including Parkinson's (PD), Huntington (HD), Epilepsy, Alzheimer's and Motor Neuron Diseases (MND) from a new perspective by analyzing the physiological signals associated with them using non-linear dynamics. The development of nonlinear methods has significantly helped to study complex nonlinear systems in detail by providing accurate and reliable information. The book provides a brief introduction to the central nervous system and its various disorders, their effects on health and quality of life, and their respective courses of treatment, followed by different bioelectrical signals like those detected by Electroencephalography (EEG), Electrocardiography (ECG), and Electromyography (EMG). In turn, the book discusses a range of nonlinear techniques, fractals, multifractals, and Higuchi's Fractal Dimension (HFD), with mathematical examples and procedures. A review of studies conducted to date on neurological disorders like epilepsy, dementia, Parkinson's, Huntington, Alzheimer's, and Motor Neuron Diseases, which incorporate linear and nonlinear techniques, is also provided. The book subsequently presents new findings on neurological disorders of the central nervous system, namely Parkinson's disease and Huntington's disease, by analyzing their gait characteristics using a nonlinear fractal based technique: Multifractal Detrended Fluctuation Analysis (MFDFA). In closing, the book elaborates on several parameters that can be obtained from cross-correlation studies of ECG and blood pressure, and can be used as markers for neurological disorders.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Introduction; 1.1 Central Nervous System and Its Diseases; 1.2 Bioelectrical Signals; 1.2.1 Electroencephalography; 1.2.2 Electrocardiography; 1.2.3 Electromyography; 1.3 Linear Signal Processing Techniques; 1.3.1 Root Mean Square (RMS) Method; 1.3.2 Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) Method; 1.3.3 Short-Time Fourier Transform (STFT) Method; 1.3.4 Wavelet Transform (WT) Method; 1.3.5 Discrete Wavelet Transform (DWT) Method; 1.4 Limitations of Linear Analysis Techniques; 1.5 Non-linear Techniques 1.5.1 Fractals and Multifractals1.5.1.1 Detrended Fractal Analysis; 1.5.2 Non-linear Analysis of Biomedical Signals; 1.5.2.1 Non-linear Analysis of EEG Signals; 1.5.2.2 Non-linear Analysis of ECG Signals; 1.5.2.3 Non-linear Analysis of EMG Signals; 1.6 Review of Studies on Neurological Disorders; 1.6.1 Epilepsy; 1.6.2 Dementia (Alzheimerś Disease); 1.6.3 Parkinsonś Disease; 1.6.4 Huntingtonś Disease; 1.6.5 Motor Neuron Disease (MND); References; Chapter 2: Multifractal Study of EEG Signal of Subjects with Epilepsy and Alzheimerś; 2.1 Introduction 2.2 Neurological Disorder: Epilepsy, Alzheimerś, and EEG Data2.2.1 Epilepsy; 2.2.2 Alzheimerś Disease; 2.2.3 EEG Data; 2.3 Multifractal Detrended Fluctuation Analysis of EEG Signals; 2.4 Multifractal Detrended Cross-Correlation Analysis of EEG Signals; 2.5 Possible Application as Biomarker of Epilepsy; References; Chapter 3: Multifractal Approach for Quantification of Autonomic Deregulation Due to Epileptic Seizure with ECG Data; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Systematic Studies on Abnormalities in Cardiac Autonomic Status; 3.3 Multifractal Detrended Fluctuation Analysis of ECG Signals 3.3.1 ECG Data3.4 Results and Possible Biomarker; References; Chapter 4: Multifractal Analysis of Electromyography Data; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Motor Neuron and Musculoskeletal Disease: Neuropathy and Myopathy; 4.3 Electromyography
    A Tool to Detect Motor Neuron Disease; 4.4 Study of SEMG Signals; 4.5 Electromyography Data; 4.6 Multifractal Detrended Fluctuation Analysis of EMG Signals; 4.7 Results and Possible Advanced Level Biomarker; References; Chapter 5: Multifractal Study of Parkinsonś and Huntingtonś Diseases with Human Gait Data; 5.1 Introduction 5.2 Parkinsonś Disease and Gait Data5.2.1 Gait Data; 5.3 Multifractal and Multifractal Cross-Correlation Analysis of Parkinsonś Disease; 5.4 Huntingtonś Disease and Gait Data; 5.5 Multifractal Analysis of Huntingtonś Data; 5.6 Discussions on Possible Use of the Result for Biomarkers of Parkinsonś and Huntingtonś; References; Chapter 6: Multifractal Correlation Study Between Posture and Autonomic Deregulation Using ECG and Blood Pressure Data; 6.1 Introduction; 6.1.1 Blood Pressure; 6.1.2 Non-linear Heart Rate Variability Analysis
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Zhanhu Guo, Yuan Chen, and Na Luna Lu.
    Summary: Focusing on real applications of nanocomposites and nanotechnologies for sustainable development, this book shows how nanocomposites can help to solve energy and environmental problems, including a broad overview of energy-related applications and a unique selection of environmental topics. Clearly structured, the first part covers such energy-related applications as lithium ion batteries, solar cells, catalysis, thermoelectric waste heat harvesting and water splitting, while the second part provides unique perspectives on environmental fields, including nuclear waste management and carbon dioxide capture and storage. The result is a successful combination of fundamentals for newcomers to the field and the latest results for experienced scientists, engineers, and industry researchers.

    Contents:

    Chapter 1: Introduction;
    Chapter 2: Advanced Nanocomposites Electrodes for Lithium Ion Batteries;
    Chapter 3: Carbon Nanocomposites in Electrochemical Capacitor Applicant;
    Chapter 4: Application in Nanostructure Electrodes in Halide Perovskite Solar Cells and Electrochromic Devices;
    Chapter 5: Perovskite Solar Cell;
    Chapter 6: Nanocomposite Structures Related to Electrospun Nanofibers for Highly Efficient and Cost Effective Dye Sensitize; Chapter7: Laser Ablation Based Techniques for Solution-phase Synthesis;
    Chapter 8: Thermoelectric Nano Composite for Energy Harvesting;
    Chapter 9: Graphene Composite Catalysts for Electrochemical Energy Conversion;
    Chapter 10: Electrochromic Materials and Devices Fundamentals and Nanostructuring Approaches;
    Chapter 11: Nanocomposite Photocatalysts for Solar Fuel Production from CO2 and Water;
    Chapter 12: The Application of Nanocomposite Catalysts in Biofuels Production;
    Chapter 13: Photocatalytic Nanomaterials for Energy and Environment;
    Chapter 14: Role of Interfaces at the Nano-architectured Photocatalysts for Hydrogen Production from Water Splitting;
    Chapter 15: Nanostructures Catalysts for Small Molecule Conversion;
    Chapter 16: Rational Heterostructure Design for Photo Electrochemical Water Splitting;
    Chapter 17: Layered Doubled Hydroxides Derived NOx Storage Reduction Catalyst for Vehicle NOx Emission Control;
    Chapter 18: Applications of Nanomaterial in Nuclear Waste Management;
    Chapter 19: Electromagnetic Interference Shielding;
    Chapter 20: Mussel-inspired Nanocomposites Synthesis and Promising Applications in Environmental Fields; ;
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Mark V. Schaverien, Joseph H. Dayan, editors.
    Summary: In this concise, accessible, and comprehensive reference, world experts in the field of lymphedema detail all of the non-surgical and surgical approaches to the multidisciplinary management of patients with upper and lower extremity lymphedema. There is particular focus on the surgical treatments for lymphedema, where the reader is taken step-by-step through illustrated guides for each procedure by the leading experts in the field of lymphedema microsurgery; from patient selection, preoperative evaluation, surgical technique, and postoperative management. The book is strictly organized so that readers can quickly find content and provides readers with the necessary tools and framework to readily apply these innovative and state-of-the art techniques to their patients to optimize outcomes of surgical and non-surgical treatments for their lymphedema patients. Each chapter features a standardized content layout with full-color illustrations and clinical photographs to visually represent the content and includes key tips from experts in lymphedema, accompanied by key video contributions from the authors to demonstrate the surgical techniques. There is key emphasis on advances in our understand of the etiology of lymphedema, the most important surgical topics in lymphedema microsurgery, the current evidence available for the surgical treatment of lymphedema, and recent advances in lymphedema including new pharmacological treatments that target inflammation and fibrosis Edited by leaders in lymphedema microsurgery and contributed to by a multidisciplinary group of international experts to provide a full and comprehensive guide, Multimodal Management of Upper and Lower Extremity Lymphedema is aimed at a wide target audience that includes surgeons that perform lymphedema surgeries, other medical specialties that treat patients with cancer, lymphedema therapists, physical therapists, and occupational therapists, as well as nursing specialties and trainees.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Giovanni Maria Romano editor, in collaboration with Francesco Bianco ; forewords by Francesco Corcione, P. Ronan O'Connell.
    Contents:
    1 Follow-up Strategy of the Primary and Early Diagnosis
    2 Clinical Presentation and Classifications
    3 Imaging Modalities
    4 Role of PET-CT
    5 Role of Radiotheraphy
    6. Indications to Systemic Chemotheraphy
    7. Indications to Surgery and Surgical Techniques
    8 Mortality and Morbidity
    9. Techniques of Urological Reconstruction
    10 Techniques of Reconstruction after Major Exenterative Surgery
    11 Oncologic Outcomes
    12 Quality of Life
    13. Pain Control and Palliative Treatments.-14 Local Failure after Conservative Treatment of Rectal Cancer.-15 Italian Survey on the Surgical Treatment of Locally Recurrent Colorectal Cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Francesco Maisano, Philipp Kaufmann, Hatem Alkadhi, Michel Zuber, Alberto Pozzoli, Edwin Ho.
    Summary: This book provides a practically applicable guide to the use of multimodality imaging for managing aortic valve disorders. Details of how to successfully diagnose a range of aortic valve diseases is presented, with detailed information covered on the techniques and relevant criteria for pre-operative screening, surgical and transcatheter planning, intraprocedural imaging and related postoperative follow-up. Multimodality Imaging for Cardiac Valvular Interventions, Volume 1 Aortic Valve: From Diagnosis to Decision-Making enables the reader to develop a thorough understanding and confidence of how to make appropriate clinical decisions when confronted by a range of aortic valve diseases. It is therefore a key resource for practicing cardiac imagers, cardiologists and interventional cardiologists who encounter these patients in their day-to-day clinical practice and trainees in cardiology seeking insight on the appropriate management of these patients.

    Contents:
    Diagnosis, Indication and Timing
    Patient screening
    Planning the procedure
    Intraprocedural guidance and monitoring
    Assessment and Follow-up.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    James K. Min, Daniel S. Berman, Jonathon Leipsic, editors.
    Summary: Over the last decade, remarkable innovations in transcatheter technologies have led to the rapid development of minimally invasive therapies that have challenged conventional treatment. Amongst these, none is as remarkable as transcatheter aortic valve replacement (TAVR). An archetype of bench-to-bedside medicine, the origins of TAVR spanned the expertise and vision of clinicians, engineers, researchers and imagers. With increasing numbers of TAVR procedures and large-scale trials demonstrating an unparalleled reduction in mortality for inoperable patients with severe aortic valvular disease, the theme underpinning the foundation of TAVR that of a multidisciplinary approach to its development persists in its practice. This approach brings together a diverse group of experts to optimize patient outcomes and this extends to the convergence of different types of imaging specialists and modalities to support preparation for and performance and follow-up of TAVR. Multimodality Imaging for Transcatheter Aortic Valve Replacement assembles the very best authorities in the field to create the ultimate resource to address the imaging needs associated with TAVR. It provides the reader with a comprehensive understanding of the pathophysiology of aortic stenosis, the evidence supporting the use of TAVR, and an integrated approach to the indications, procedural aspects and pitfalls of imaging in TAVR. The reader will also gain an insight into which tests are optimal in specific situations and a step-wise method to harvest all the essential information provided with each modality. Thus, this book represents a key resource for all working in the field whether they be in training or practicing physicians, cardiac researchers, cardiac imagers, interventionalists, clinical cardiologists, cardiac surgeons, or any medical professional involved in the management of these patients.

    Contents:
    Why we need this book
    Transcatheter Aortic Valve Implantation: Review of Current Evidence
    Transcatheter Aortic Valve Replacement: Current Evidence From Large Multicenter Registries
    Transcatheter Aortic Valve Replacement: An Interventionalist's View
    Transcatheter Aortic Valve Replacement: A Surgeons View
    Transcatheter Aortic Valve Replacement (TAVR): A Clinician's Perspective Aortic Stenosis: Natural and Unnatural (Treated) History
    Transcatheter Aortic Valve Replacement: What the near-term future holds and what evidence is needed?
    Structural Design of Transcatheter Aortic Valves: General Concepts Related to Imaging
    Native and Prosthetic Valve Stenosis
    Low-Flow and Low Gradient Aortic Stenosis: Consideration in the Context of TAVR
    Pathologic Findings in Aortic Stenosis
    Echocardiographic Evaluation of Aortic Stenosis
    CT Evaluation of Aortic Stenosis
    MRI Evaluation of Aortic Stenosis
    Positron Emission Tomography Evaluation of Aortic Stenosis
    Coronary Artery Disease and Aortic Stenosis
    Common Cardiac Pathologies Associated with Aortic Stenosis
    Extravascular and Extracardiac Findings on MDCT for Transcatheter Aortic Valve Planning
    Transcatheter aortic valve replacement in patients with Chronic Kidney Disease: Pre-procedural assessment and procedural techniques to minimize risk for acute kidney injury
    Transcatheter Aortic Valve Replacement and Adverse Cerebrovascular Events
    Aortoiliofemoral assessment: MDCT
    Aortoiliofemoral assessment: MRA
    Aortoiliofemoral Angiography and IVUS
    Aortic Annular Geometry and Sizing: Echocardiography
    Aortic Annular Geometry and Sizing: CT
    Co-Axial Angle prediction for TAVR: CT
    Use of Multidetector Computed Tomography for Planning Transcatheter Aortic Valve Sizing
    Imaging for transfemoral versus transapical approaches to TAVR: What differences are important?
    Common Uses of Echocardiography for TAVR
    Angiography and rotational angiography for TAVR
    Fusion Imaging for TAVR
    Valve-in-valve for Transcatheter Aortic Valve Replacement: do imaging requirements change
    Intraprocedural Use of Echocardiography for TAVR
    Complications of TAVR
    Case-Based Examples of Complications Associated with Transcatheter Aortic Valve Replacement
    Structural and Hemodynamic Integrity of the Implanted TAVR Valve
    How can imaging pre-clinical models help us with TAVR?
    What future studies are needed for TAVR imaging?
    Digital Access Springer 2013
  • Digital
    edited by Samer Narouze.
    Summary: Multimodality Imaging Guidance for Interventional Pain Management is a comprehensive resource that covers fluoroscopy-guided procedures, ultrasound interventions, and computed tomography (CT)-guided procedures used in interventional pain management.
    Digital Access Oxford [2016]
  • Digital
    Pastora Gallego, Israel Valverde, editors.
    Summary: This book focuses on congenital heart disease (CHD) and emerging imaging technologies. It covers all clinically relevant aspects of the fascinating new cardiac imaging technologies, including a comprehensive explanation of their basic principles, practical aspects of novel clinical applications, and detailed descriptions of specific uses in the broad spectrum of clinically important adult CHD. Innovations and emerging technologies for diagnosis and therapeutics, evaluation and treatment are continually evolving, and due to these advances in non-invasive diagnosis, there has been a significant improvement in the survival rates for CHD patient. Novel approaches to trans-catheter interventions and advances in echocardiography, MRI and CT imaging are being developed and incorporated into routine clinical practice, while emerging three-dimensional printing technologies are fundamentally affecting patient care, research, trainee education, and interactions between multidisciplinary teams, patients, and caregivers. In addition, translational technologies on the horizon promise to take this nascent field even further. Exploring the applicability of these emerging technologies in improving our understanding of complex congenital cardiac defect anatomy and physiology will provide new treatment options for this unique population. Written by experts in the field who are also involved in patient care, this book discusses the practical application of innovations in advanced multimodality imaging in the daily clinical routine and offers tips and tricks for beginners.

    Contents:
    1 3D Echocardiography
    2 Ultrafast Ultrasound Imaging In Pediatric and Congenital Heart Disease
    3 MRI T1 mapping: Myocardial fibrosis
    4 MRI Lymphatic imaging of Thoracic Lymphatic Disorders
    5 MRI based catheterization laboratory
    6 Cardiac mechanics I: 3D-Speckle tracking Echocardiography
    7 Cardiac mechanics II: 2D & 3D-Tissue tracking MRI
    8 4D-flow MRI: Flow Dynamics
    9 Computational Fluid Dynamics
    10 3D printing and Holography
    11 Multimodality assessment of cardiac shunts
    12 Repaired Tetralogy of Fallot
    13 Aortic disease: Bicuspid aortic valve, Aortic coarctation, Marfan’s syndrome
    14 Multimodality Imaging Innovations In Arterial switch operation - Emerging Technologies and Novel Applications
    15 Novel applications of multimodality imaging of the systemic right ventricle
    16 Univentricular heart staged correction
    17 Imaging for electrophysiology interventional planning in ACHD patients
    18 Imaging for structural interventional planning in ACHD patients
    19 Ebstein anomaly
    20 Imaging in pulmonary hypertension.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Matthew H.G. Katz, Syed A. Ahmad, editors.
    Contents:
    Anatomic Definitions of Borderline Resectable Pancreatic Cancer
    Imaging Evaluation of Borderline Pancreatic Cancer
    Endoscopic Ultrasonography: Staging and Therapeutic Intervention
    Endoscopic and Percutaneous Biliary Drainage Procedures: Role in Preoperative Management, Diagnosis, and Palliation
    Overview of Multimodality Therapy
    Role of Systemic Therapy
    Role of Radiation Therapy
    Stereotactic Body Radiation Therapy as an Emerging Option for Localized Pancreatic Cancer
    Assessment of Response to Preoperative Therapy
    Emerging Systemic and Targeted Therapies
    Operative Principles in Managing Patients with Borderline Resectable Pancreas Cancer
    Is There a Role for Laparoscopic and/or Robotic Techniques for Borderline Resectable Tumors?. Role and Techniques Of Vascular Resection
    Artery-First Approaches to Pancreaticoduodenectomy
    Venous Shunting Procedures for Borderline Resectable Pancreatic Cancer
    The Role of the Appleby Operation and Arterial Resection in the Multimodality Management of Borderline Resectable Pancreatic Cancer
    Surgery for Borderline Resectable Pancreatic Cancer: The Japanese Experience
    The Role of Irreversible Electroporation and Other Ablative Techniques in Patients with Borderline Resectable Pancreatic Cancer
    Surgical Approach to Borderline Resectable tumors of the Left Pancreas
    Palliative Operations for Unresectable Pancreatic Cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Paolo Aseni, Antonino M. Grande, Luciano De Carlis, editors.
    Contents:
    PART 1 Expanding the donor pool and evaluation of the possible organ donor
    Ethics of organ donation
    Policies for boosting donor enlistment in the North Italy transplant program macro-area
    Preoperative evaluation and arrangements for multi-organ donation: general principles and contra-indications
    PART 2 Principles of brain death diagnosis and optimal management for organ retrieval
    Brain death diagnosis
    Spinal reflexes and movements in brain death donors
    Management of metabolic and hemodynamic derangements in heart beating donors
    Non-heart-beating donors
    Multiple organ retrieval: general principles, organ preservation, and new strategies
    PART 3 Surgical technique for thoracic organ procurement
    Thoracic and mediastinal inspection and heart procurement
    Lung and heart-lung procurement
    PART 4 Surgical technique for abdominal organ procurement
    Detailed abdominal organ inspection and early surgical steps for abdominal organ procurement
    Whole liver procurement
    Split liver: surgical technique for adult-paediatric and for two adult recipients
    Small bowel and multivisceral procurement
    Pancreas Procurement
    Kidney procurement
    Vascular Homograft Procurement
    Transplantation bench surgery of the abdominal organs
    PART 5 Surgical technique for liver and kidney living donor
    Right liver lobe hemi-hepatecomy for living donor liver transplantation
    Pure laparoscopic left lateral and full-left hepatectomy including the middle hepatic vein in living donors
    Total laparoscopic right hepatecomy for living donors
    Laparoscopic and robot-assisted nephrectomy. .
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Anna Porwit, Marie Christine Béné.
    Summary: Master implementation of the techniques of flow cytometry in diagnosing complex haematological diseases and malignancies in patients, worldwide. Featuring World Health Organization recommendations on pre-analytical steps, instrument settings and panel construction, this invaluable manual offers invaluable support for those researching, practising and analyzing the cause of hematological malignancies. Authored by leading experts, this book puts flow-cytometry into everyday context. With a focus on multicolour panels, the manual provides readers an experienced understanding of effective, implementation techniques. Practitioners of all levels are offered a background in a variety of diseases presented alongside the most current methodology. Wide-ranging and comprehensive; detailed images of healthy blood, bone marrow and lymph-nodes are illustrated throughout, allowing for effective diagnosis. Through engaging with differential diagnoses, the manual offers an understanding of similar symptoms and mimicking malignancies, avoiding inaccurate results. Featuring in-depth descriptions of chronic diseases; users can reach accurate diagnosis, first time.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    Gennady T. Sukhikh, Alexander N. Sencha, editors.
    Summary: "This richly illustrated book provides a comprehensive overview of the use of current ultrasound techniques, including contrast-enhanced ultrasound and ultrasonic elastography, in the diagnosis of breast disease. The advantages and pitfalls of the various imaging modalities are identified, and it is explained how combined use of the modalities - multiparametric ultrasound - aids diagnosis and in particular assists in the differentiation of benign and malignant disease. Readers will find detailed description and illustration of the imaging appearances of age-related features (including in children and adolescents), the most important benign diseases, different forms of breast cancer, mammary gland pathology in the contexts of pregnancy and female reproductive system disease, chest gland pathology in males, and recurrent and metastatic disease. In addition, ultrasound-guided breast interventions and imaging of breast implants are discussed. Specialists in ultrasound diagnostics, radiologists, oncologists, and surgeons will all find this topical book to be both interesting and helpful in daily clinical practice."-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    [edited by] Richard G. Barr, Giovanna Ferraioli.
    Summary: "For those who treat and diagnose liver disease, whether radiologists, emergency medical physicians, hepatologists, or sonographers, a clear understanding of the strict protocol needed to obtain accurate measurements is essential. Multiparametric Ultrasound for the Assessment of Diffuse Liver Disease offers a practical approach to liver shear wave elastography acquisition from globally recognized leaders in the field. It answers critical questions such as how to use each of the current techniques to best characterize your patients' liver disease, how to deal with the limitations of each of these techniques, and what to ask--and not to ask--of your devices and software"-- publisher's description.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2024
  • Digital
    Ken Nguyen, Xuan Guo, Yi Pan.
    Contents:
    Protein/DNA/RNA Pairwise Sequence Alignment
    Quantifying Sequence Alignments
    Sequence Clustering
    Multiple Sequences Alignment Algorithms
    Phylogeny in Multiple Sequence Alignments
    Multiple Sequence Alignment on High-Performance Computing Models
    Sequence Analysis Services
    Multiple Sequence for Next-Generation Sequences
    Multiple Sequence Alignment for Variations Detection
    Multiple Sequence Alignment for Structure Detection
    References
    Index
    Wiley Series on Bioinformatics: Computational Techniques and Engineering
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    Gregory C. Fanelli, editor.
    Summary: The Multiple Ligament Injured Knee includes the most developed knowledge needed to successfully diagnose and treat knee ligament injuries. This new edition expands upon the first to present anterior, posterior cruciate and collateral ligament anatomy, and biomechanics.

    Contents:
    Part I: Editor's experience: 1. PCL based multiple ligament knee injuries : what I have learned in 28 years / Gregory C. Fanelli. Part II: Anatomy and biomechanics: 2. Anatomy and biomechanics of the cruciate ligaments and their surgical implications / Jeffrey D. Hassebrock, David E. Hartigan, Justin L. Makovicka, and Anikar Chhabra
    3. Anatomy and biomechanics of the lateral and medial sides of the knee and the surgical implications / Mitchell I. Kennedy, Andrew G. Geeslin, and Robert F. LaPrade. Part III: Diagnosis and evaluation of the multiple ligament injured knee: 4. Initial assessment in the acute and chronic multiple-ligament-injured knee / Graeme Hoit, Ujash Sheth, and Daniel B. Whelan
    5. Classification of knee dislocations and the surgical implications / Christopher L. Shultz, Dustin L. Richter, Bryon D. Hobby, Daniel C. Wascher, and Robert C. Schenck Jr
    6. Instrumented measurement of the multiple-ligament injured knee : arthrometers, stress radiography, and laxiometer / Lucas Teske, Donald D. Johnson, and Brian R. Waterman
    7. MRI imaging in the multiple-ligament-injured knee / W. James Malone and Sean C. Hostmeyer. Part IV: Non-surgical treatment: 8. Selective surgical treatment of knee dislocations / Marc S. Haro and K. Donald Shelbourne. Part V: Surgical treatment of the multiple ligament injured knee: 9. Graft selection in multiple ligament injured knee surgery / Natalie L. Leong, Thomas J. Kremen, and David R. McAllister. Part VI: Surgical treatment of the ACL based multiple ligament injured knee: 10. Surgical treatment of combined ACL and medial-sided knee injuries : acute and chronic / Erin M. Cravez, Izuchukwu Ibe, and Michael J. Medvecky
    11. Surgical treatment of combined anterior cruciate ligament and lateral-side injuries : acute and chronic / Laura A. Vogel, Cory M. Edgar, and Robert A. Arciero
    12. Surgical treatment of combined ACL medial- and lateral-sided injuries : acute and chronic / Eric D. Wicks and Steven B. Cohen
    13. Revision ACL-based multiple ligament knee surgery / Theodore S. Wolfson, Mathew John Hamula, and Michael J. Alaia. Part VII: Surgical treatment of the PCL based multiple ligament injured knee: 14. Arthroscopic primary repair in the multiple-ligament injured knee / Anne Jonkergouw, Jelle P. Van der List, and Gregory S. DiFelice
    15. Surgical treatment of combined PCL/lateral side injuries : acute and chronic / Michaela Kopka and S. Mark Heard
    16. Surgical treatment of combined PCL medial side injuries : acute and chronic / Jeffrey M. Tuman and Mark D. Miller
    17. Surgical treatment of combined PCL medial and lateral side injuries : acute and chronic / James P. Stannard and Daniel Deasis
    18. Surgical treatment of combined ACL PCL medial side injuries : acute and chronic / Benjamin Freychet, Nicholas I. Kennedy, Bruce A. Levy, and Michael J. Stuart
    19. Surgical management of ACL, PCL, and lateral-sided injuries : acute and chronic / Peter B. MacDonald and Scott W. Mollison
    20. Surgical treatment of combined PCL-ACL medial and lateral side injuries (global laxity) : acute and chronic / Gregory C. Fanelli
    21. Revision surgery in the posterior cruciate ligament and multiple-ligament injured knee / Anthony D. Bratton, Christopher D. Harner, and Timothy L. Miller. Part VIII: Other considerations: 22. Mechanical graft tensioning in multiple ligament knee surgery / Gregory C. Fanelli
    23. Management of arterial and venous injuries in the dislocated knee / Robert P. Garvin and Matthew C. Cindric
    24. Tendon transfers for peroneal nerve injuries in the multiple-ligament-injured knee / Shannon F. Alejandro, Patrick J. Maloney, and Gerard J. Cush
    25. Direct nerve transfer for peroneal nerve injury in knee dislocations / Benjamin Freychet, Bruce A. Levy, Michael J. Stuart, Allen T. Bishop, and Alexander Y. Shin
    26. The role of osteotomy in the multiple-ligament-injured knee / Hervé Ouanezar, Sava Turcan, and Anil S. Ranawat
    27. Management of chronic fixed posterior tibial subluxation in the multiple ligament injured knee / Jonathan-James T. Eno and Thomas L. Wickiewicz
    28. Fracture dislocations of the knee / Sanjeev Anand
    29. Articular cartilage restoration in the multiple ligament injured knee / Justin O. Aflatooni, Justin W. Griffin, and Kevin F. Bonner
    30. Meniscal injuries and treatment in the multiple ligament injured knee / Michael A. Donohue, Matthew A. Posner, Adam M. Pickett, and Chad A. Haley
    31. Management of extensor mechanism disruption and patellofemoral instability in the multiple ligament injured knee / Jonathan M. Cooper and Christopher A. DeFalco 32. Multiple ligament knee injuries in the professional athlete / Joel L. Boyd and Scott Linger
    33. Internal bracing in multiple-ligament knee reconstruction / Nicholas A. Trasolini, Adam Lindsay, Joseph Cooper, and George F. “Rick” Hatch III
    34. Multiple-ligament knee injuries in the United States military active-duty population / Mark P. Pallis, Joseph T. Lanzi Jr., Estephan J. Garcia, William M. Weiss, and Andrew G. Chan
    35. Knee dislocations in the morbidly obese patient / Ian Power and Frederick M. Azar
    36. Multiple ligament knee injuries in patients 18 years of age and younger / Gregory C. Fanelli and David Fanelli
    37. Anterolateral complex reconstruction in the multiple-ligament injured knee / Ryan Wood, Robert Litchfield, and Alan Getgood. Part IX: Postoperative care: 38. Brace considerations in posterior cruciate ligament (PCL) instability and the multiple-ligament injured knee / Eileen A. Crawford and Edward M. Wojtys
    39. Postoperative rehabilitation of the multiple-ligament injured knee / Craig J. Edson and Gregory C. Fanelli. Part X: Outcomes; 40. Complications associated with the treatment of the multiple ligament injured knee / David C. Johannesmeyer, Dustin L. Richter, Robert C. Schenck Jr., and Daniel C. Wascher
    41. Results of treatment of the multiple-ligament-injured knee / Niv Marom and Robert G. Marx. Part XI: Clinical case studies: 42. Selected case studies in the treatment of multiple ligament injured knee / Gregory C. Fanelli.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Morie A. Gertz, S. Vincent Rajkumar, editors.
    Summary: This is a comprehensive, state-of-the-art guide to the diagnosis, treatment, and biology of multiple myeloma and related plasma disorders. The book addresses often overlooked topics, including the role of radiation therapy, vertebral augmentation, and supportive care.

    Contents:
    1. Criteria for Diagnosis and Response
    2. Detection of M proteins
    3. Pathology Of Multiple Myeloma
    4. Pathogenesis of Multiple Myeloma
    5. Staging of Multiple Myeloma
    6. Molecular Classification and Risk Stratification
    7. Monoclonal Gammopathies of Undetermined Significance and Smoldering Multiple Myeloma
    8. Treatment of Newly Diagnosed Multiple Myeloma
    9. Approach to Relapsed Refractory Myeloma
    10. Autologous Stem Cell Transplantation in the?Management of Multiple Myeloma
    11. Allogeneic Stem Cell Transplantation
    12. New Agents For Multiple Myeloma
    13. Biological Therapy for Multiple Myeloma
    14. Management of Treatment Complications and Supportive Care
    15. POEMS Syndrome (Takatsuki Syndrome)
    16. Solitary Plasmacytoma
    17. Myeloma Bone Disease
    18. Vertebral Augmentation
    19. The Role of Radiation Therapy in the Treatment of Multiple Myeloma, Plasmacytoma and Other Plasma Cell Disorders
    20. Neurologic Complications of Myeloma
    21. Myeloma Cast Nephropathy
    22. Amyloidosis
    23. IgM Multiple Myeloma
    24. Waldenstrom's Macroglobulinemia.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Meletios A. Dimopoulos, Thierry Facon, Evangelos Terpos, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Mowafa Househ, Elizabeth Borycki, Andre Kushniruk, editors.
    Summary: This book offers a comprehensive yet concise overview of the challenges and opportunities presented by the use of artificial intelligence in healthcare. It does so by approaching the topic from multiple perspectives, e.g. the nursing, consumer, medical practitioner, healthcare manager, and data analyst perspective. It covers human factors research, discusses patient safety issues, and addresses ethical challenges, as well as important policy issues. By reporting on cutting-edge research and hands-on experience, the book offers an insightful reference guide for health information technology professionals, healthcare managers, healthcare practitioners, and patients alike, aiding them in their decision-making processes. It will also benefit students and researchers whose work involves artificial intelligence-related research issues in healthcare.

    Contents:
    Reinforcement Learning Applications in Health Informatics
    Artificial intelligence in the fight against the COVID-19 pandemic: opportunities and challenges
    The Human Factors of AI in Healthcare: Recurrent Issues, Future Challenges and Ways Forward
    Artificial intelligence and medication management
    The Safety of AI in Healthcare: Emerging Issues and Considerations for Healthcare
    Reflections on the Clinical Acceptance of Artificial Intelligence
    Artificial Intelligence for Chatbots in Mental Health: Opportunities and Challenges
    AI and Machine Learning in Diabetes Management: Opportunity, Status, and Challenges
    Utilizing Health Analytics in Improving the Performance of Hospitals and Healthcare Services: Promises and Challenges
    Perspectives on Human-AI Interaction applied to Health and Wellness Management: Between Milestones and Hurdles.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Flavia Nelson, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Andrew Smith, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Carlos A. Perez, University of Texas, Houston.
    Summary: "Multiple sclerosis (MS) is the most prevalent non-traumatic, disabling neurologic condition among young adults worldwide. The diagnosis and management of MS is complicated, especially in the setting of a recent significant increase in the number of FDA-approved therapies, and access to neurological care, specifically to MS centers, is limited. The goal of this handbook is to present an updated and practical approach to the accurate diagnosis and effective management of MS, for both healthcare professionals and trainees, in hopes to improve patient outcomes. The material herein presented is meant to be an easily accessible resource for reference in both hospital and outpatient practice settings"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2021
  • Digital/Print
    Alexander A.A. Asea, Fabiana Geraci, Punit Kaur, editors.
    Contents:
    Extracellular vesicles in multiple sclerosis as possible biomarkers: dream or reality? / Maria Magdalena Barreca, Emanuele Aliotta, Fabiana Geraci
    Manipulation of oxygen and endoplasmic reticulum stress factors as possible interventions for treatment of multiple sclerosis: evidence for and against / Paul Eggleton, Gary R. Smerdon, Janet E. Holley, Nicholas J. Gutowski
    Heat shock proteins in multiple sclerosis / Ortan Pinar, Yildirim Akan Ozden, Erkizan Omur, Gedizlioglu Muhtesem
    Meaning of self in multiple sclerosis: implications for treatment and rehabilitation / Maciej Wilski, Tomasz Tasiemski
    Multiple sclerosis and EIF2B5: a paradox or a missing link / Insha Zahoor, Ehtishamul Haq, Ravouf Asimi
    Molecular genetic and epigenetic basis of multiple sclerosis / Zohreh Hojati
    Role of oligodendrocyte dysfunction in demyelination, remyelination and neurodegeneration in multiple sclerosis / Adriana Octaviana Dulamea
    Clinical neurophysiology of multiple sclerosis / Mario Habek, Ivan Adamec, Barbara Barun, Luka Crnošija, Tereza Gabelić, Magdalena Krbot Skorić
    Multiple sclerosis epidemiology in europe / Daiana Bezzini, Mario A. Battaglia
    Timing of future remyelination therapies and their potential to stop multiple sclerosis progression / Burcu Zeydan, Moses Rodriguez, Orhun H. Kantarci
    Neuroplasticity-based technologies and interventions for restoring motor functions in multiple sclerosis / Sofia Straudi, Nino Basaglia.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Robert Weissert.
    Contents:
    Positional gene cloning in experimental populations / Maja Jagodic and Pernilla Stridh - - Generation of transgenic rats using lentiviral vectors / Holger M. Reichard and Henrike J. Fischer
    DNA vaccination techniques / Nicolas Fissolo, Xavier Montalban, and Manuel Comabella
    Peripheral blood mononuclear cells : isolation, freezing, thawing, and culture / Christine Riedhammer, Dagmar Halbritter, and Robert Weissert
    ELISPOT techniques / Niannian Ji and Thomas G. Forsthuber
    Isolation of central nervous system (CNS) infiltrating cells / Ilgiz A. Mufazalov and Ari Waisman
    Methods for ex vivo analysis of immune cell function from the central nervous system / Darryl G. Turner ... [et al.]
    Neurofilament light chain determination from peripheral blood samples / Marguerite Limberg ... [et al.]
    Detection of autoantibodies against myelin oligodendrocyte glycoprotein in multiple sclerosis and related diseases / Melania Spadaro and Edgar Meinl
    Myelinating cultures : an in vitro tool to identify demyelinating and axopathic autoantibodies / Maren Lindner and Christopher Linington
    In vivo visualization of (auto-) immune processes in the central nervous system of rodents / Christian Schlager ... [et al.]
    Optical coherence tomography to assess neurodegeneration in multiple sclerosis / Axel Petzold
    Experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis in mice / Rachael L. Terry, Igal Ifergan, and Stephen D. Miller
    Actively induced experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis in rats / Robert Weissert
    Experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis in marmosets / S. Anwar Jagessar ... [et al.]-- Neuropathological techniques to investigate CNS pathology in experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis (EAE) / Karin Steinbach and Doron Merkler
    Neuropathological techniques to investigate central nervous system sections in multiple sclerosis / Jan Bauer and Hans Lassmann.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Lawrence M. Samkoff, Andrew D. Goodman.
    Contents:
    Etiology / Sonya U. Steele and Ellen M. Mowry
    Immunopathogenesis of multiple sclerosis / Anne H. Cross and Laura Piccio
    Diagnostic process / Dalia Rotstein and Paul O'Connor
    MRI in diagnosis and disease monitoring / Maria I. Gaitan and Daniel S. Reich
    Relapsing MS : disease staging and therapeutic algorithms / Mohsen Khoshnam and Mark Freedman
    Progressive MS treatment algorithms / Megan H. Hyland and Jeffrey A. Cohen
    Sex-determined issues in multiple sclerosis / Callene Momtazee and Barbara Giesser
    Pediatric multiple sclerosis / Robert Thompson Stone and Brenda Banwell
    Complementary and alternative medicine : risks and benefits / Allen C. Bowling
    Symptomatic management of MS / Jessica Robb, Lawrence M. Samkoff, and Andrew D. Goodman
    Invisible symptoms of MS : fatigue, depression, and cognition / Leigh Charvet, Benzi Kluzer, and Lauren B. Krupp
    Rehabilitation / Nesanet S. Mitiku, Alexius E.G. Sandoval, and George H. Kraft
    Psychosocial adaptation to multiple sclerosis / David J. Rintell
    Transverse myelitis and acute disseminated encephalomyelitis / Benjamin M. Greenberg
    Neuromyelitis optica / Marcelo Matiello and Brian Weinshenker
    Neurosarcoidosis / Thomas F. Scott
    Lyme neuroborreliosis / Erica Patrick and Eric Logigian
    Neuro-Behçet syndrome / Aksel Siva and Sabahattin Saip
    Index.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Douglas S. Goodin.
    Summary: Multiple Sclerosis (MS) is generally understood to be an inflammatory autoimmune disease of the central nervous system. While we still are not certain of the root cause of MS, research results suggest that unknown environmental factors and the presence of specific genes seem the most probable targets. MS causes an inflammatory response in the central nervous system leading to neurodegeneration, oligodendrocyte death, axonal damage, and gliosis. Over the past five years ongoing research has greatly expanded our understanding of the pathogenesis of MS, detailed insight into the epidemiology.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    [edited by] Mary Ann Picone, Rock G. Positano, Dexter Sun.
    Summary: "Due to the rapid changes that have occurred in the field of MS management over the past several years, the task of staying well informed has become increasingly challenging for general neurologists and even more so for other healthcare specialists. During the course of living with the disease, patients often present to the emergency room for acute treatment, and on a more regular basis to their internists, family medicine doctors, urologists and dermatologists for symptom evaluation and treatment. These specialists often lack information of the monitoring requirements for patients with MS, potential risks and adverse events of disease modifying or symptomatic therapies, possible drug interactions and contra indications of medications. Multiple Sclerosis for the Non-Neurologist aims to provide an up to date reference for doctors, residents, and fellows who find themselves tasked with caring for patients with MS"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Epidemilogy
    Immunology if multiple sclerosis
    Evaluation and diagnosis of the multiple sclerosis patient
    Magnetic resonance imaging in multiple sclerosis
    Internal medicine
    Internal medicine I
    Internal medicine II: disease-modifying therapies and adverse effects
    Multiple sclerosis in emergency medicine
    Visual dysfunction in multiple sclerosis
    Cutaneous disorders associated with multiple sclerosis
    Endocrine disorders in multiple sclerosis
    Obesity and multiple sclerosis
    Obesity and multiple sclerosis
    Rheumatology
    Pulmonary complications in multiple sclerosis
    Public health considerations in multiple
    Multiple sclerosis in the female patient
    Urologic issues in the multiple sclerosis patient
    Bowel and sexual dysfunction in the multiple sclerosis patient
    Cognitive function in multiple sclerosis
    Mood disorders in multiple sclerosis
    Multiple sclerosis in adolescents and children
    Dental and oral health considerations in multiple sclerosis
    Otolaryngologic manifestions of multiple sclerosis
    Orthopedic issues in the multiple sclerosis patient
    Upper extremity evaluation in patients with multiple sclerosis
    Foot and ankle manifestions of multiple sclerosis
    Common foot and ankle conditions associatied with multiple sclerosis
    Perioperative care of the lower extremity orthopedic patient with multiple sclerosis
    Pain management in multiple sclerosis
    Multiple sclerosis and general anesthetic considerations
    Neurosurgery
    Rehabilitation in multiple sclerosis
    The presence, type, and burden of walking, gait, and balance dysfunction in multiple sclerosis
    Exercise prescription in multiple sclerosis
    Comprehensive care in multiple sclerosis: the nursing profession as a linchpin
    Palliative medicine in multiple sclerosis.
    Digital Access Ovid 2020
  • Digital
    edited by David J. Russell.
    Contents:
    Dynamic programming / O. Ufuk Nalbantoglu
    Heuristic alignment methods / Osamu Gotoh
    Objective functions / Haluk Dogan and Hasan H. Otu
    Who watches the watchmen? An appraisal of benchmarks for multiple sequence alignment / Stefano Iantorno ... [et al.]
    BLAST and FASTA similarity searching for multiple sequence alignment / William R. Pearson
    Clustal omega, accurate alignment of very large numbers of sequences / Fabian Sievers and Desmond G. Higgins
    T-coffee : tree-based consistency objective function for alignment evaluation / Cedrik Magi ... [et al.]
    MAFFT : iterative refinement and additional methods / Kazutaka Katoh and Daron M. Standley
    Multiple sequence alignment using probcons and probalign / Usman Roshan
    Phylogeny-aware alignment with PRANK / Ari Loytynoja
    GramAlign : fast alignment driven by grammar-based phylogeny / David J. Russell
    Multiple sequence alignment with DIALIGN / Burkhard Morgenstern
    PicXAA : a probabilistic scheme for finding the maximum expected accuracy alignment of multiple biological sequences / Sayed Mohammad Ebrahim Sahraeian and Byung-Jun Yoon
    Multiple protein sequence alignment with MSAProbs / Yongchao Liu and Bertil Schmidt
    Large-scale multiple sequence alignment and tree estimation using SATe / Kevin Liu and Tandy Warnow
    PRALINE : a versatile multiple sequence alignment toolkit / Punto Bawono and Jaap Heringa
    PROMALS3D : multiple protein sequence alignment enhanced with evolutionary and three-dimensional structural information / Jimin Pei and Nick V. Grishin
    MSACompro : improving multiple protein sequence alignment by predicted structural features / Xin Deng and Jianlin Cheng.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Gregor Wenning, Alessandra Fanciulli, editors.
    Summary: This textbook provides a comprehensive monography on multiple system atrophy (MSA), a rare and fatal neurodegenerative disorder that presents with autonomic failure and either parkinsonism (MSA-P) or cerebellar ataxia (MSA-C).The underlying neuropathology of MSA is characterized by striatonigral degeneration (SND), olivopontocerebellar atrophy (OPCA) and unique oligodendroglial cytoplasmic alpha-synuclein inclusions. MSA is therefore classified among the alpha-synucleinopathies such as Parkinson's disease, pure autonomic failure and dementia with Lewy bodies. Over the last decade there have been important advances in early diagnosis, pathogenesis research and clinical trial activity. The monography will cover the entire spectrum ranging from molecular and genetic work to symptomatic and interventional therapies. The book is written for movement disorder clinicians and basic neuroscientists interested in degenerative movement disorders.

    Contents:
    1. Historical Review
    2. Epidemiology
    3. Neuropathology
    4. Etiopathogenesis
    5. Animal Models
    6. Clinical Presentation
    7. Clinical diagnostic Criteria
    8. Natural History
    9. Investigations
    10. Treatment.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Print
    edited by Christiane Ferran, MD, PhD, Department of Surgery, Division of Vascular and Endovascular Surgery, Center for Vascular Biology Research, and The Transplant Insitutue, Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center, Harvard Medical School, Boston, Massachusetts, USA.
    Summary: "This book is meant to provide the most current knowledge regarding the mechanisms of action of A20, if its versatile functions and their validation in animal models of human disease and its promise as a diagnostic biomarker and therapeutic target"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    A20: a bipartite ubiquitin editing enzyme with immunoregulatory potential / Ingrid Wertz and Vishva Dixit
    The biology of A20-binding inhibitors of NF- [kappa]B activation (ABINs) / Lynn Verstrepen, Isabelle Carpentier and Rudi Beyaert
    The Biology of A20-Like Molecules / Karine Enesa and Paul Evans
    Anti-viral tetris: modulation of the innate anti-viral immune response by A20 / Meztli Arguello, Suzanne Paz, Christiane Ferran, Herwig P. Moll and John Hiscott
    A20 expressing tumors and anticancer drug resistance / Cleide Gonçalves da Silva, Darlan Conterno Minussi, Christiane Ferran and Markus Bredel
    Translational studies of A20 in atherosclerosis and cardiovascular disease / Fiona C. McGillicuddy, Herwig P. Moll, Samira Farouk, Scott M. Damrauer, Christiane Ferran and Muredach P. Reilly
    A20: a biomarker of allograft outcome: a showcase in kidney transplantation / Gabor Bodonyi-Kovacs, Terry B. Strom and Prabhakar Putheti
    A20: an omnipotent protein in the liver: Prometheus myth resolved? / Cleide Gonçalves da Silva, Jesus Revuelta Cervantes, peter Studer and Christiane Ferran
    Emerging roles for A20 in islet biology and pathology / Nathan W. Zammit and Shane T. Grey
    Single nucleotide polymorphisms at the TNFAIP3/A20 locus and susceptibility/resistance to inflammatory and autoimmune diseases / Alessandra Mele, Jesus Revuelta Cervantes, Victor Chien, David Friedman and Christiane Ferran
  • Digital
    Martin Oliver Steinhauser.
    Summary: Martin Oliver Steinhauser deals with several aspects of multiscale materials modeling and simulation in applied materials research and fundamental science. He covers various multiscale modeling approaches for high-performance ceramics, biological bilayer membranes, semi-flexible polymers, and human cancer cells. He demonstrates that the physics of shock waves, i.e., the investigation of material behavior at high strain rates and of material failure, has grown to become an important interdisciplinary field of research on its own. At the same time, progress in computer hardware and software development has boosted new ideas in multiscale modeling and simulation. Hence, bridging the length and time scales in a theoretical-numerical description of materials has become a prime challenge in science and technology. Contents Definition of Shock Waves Multiscale Modeling and Simulation in Hard Matter Shock Wave Failure in Granular Materials Coarse-Grained Modeling and Simulation of Macromolecules Laser-Induced Shock Wave Failure in Human Cancer Cells The Future of Multiscale Materials Modeling Target Groups Researchers and students in the fields of (bio- )physics, computational science, materials engineering, materials science, computer science, polymer chemistry, theoretical chemistry, nanoscience Material scientists, engineers The Author Dr. Martin O. Steinhauser works as Senior Scientist and Principal Investigator at the Fraunhofer Institute for High-Speed Dynamics/Ernst-Mach-Institut (EMI) in Freiburg, Germany.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; List of Figures; List of Tables; Part I. Shock wave physics, multiscale modeling and simulation;
    1. Introduction;
    2. What are shock waves?; 2
    .1. Definition of shock waves; 2
    .2. The hydrodynamic equations; 2
    .3. Discontinuity surfaces; 2.3
    .1. Rankine-Hugoniot jump conditions; 2
    .4. Steepening of sound waves and Riemann characteristics; 2
    .5. Change of thermodynamic variables across shock waves; 2
    .6. General literature on shock waves;
    3. Multiscale modeling and simulation; 3
    .1. What is multiscale modeling?; 3
    .2. Hierarchical length and time scales. 3
    .3. Computer simulations as a research tool 3
    .4. Simulation methods for different length and time scales; 3
    .5. Computer programs and implementation details; 3.5
    .1. Reduced simulation units; 3.5
    .2. Shock wave generation; 3
    .6. Coupling the atomic and continuum domain; 3.6
    .1. Dissipative particle dynamics at constant energy; 3.6
    .2. SPH approximation of the continuum; 3.6
    .3. Macroscopic heat flow; 3
    .7. Proof of principle: SPH/MD coupling in a shock tube; 3.7
    .1. Shock tube: equilibrium properties; 3.7
    .2. Shock tube: dynamic properties; Part II. Hard matter.
    4. Shock wave failure in granular materials 4
    .1. Polyhedral cell complexes and power diagrams; 4
    .2. High-speed impact experiments in solids; 4
    .3. DEM modeling of shock wave failure in granular materials; 4.3
    .1. Interaction potentials; 4.3
    .2. Starting configurations of the DEM model; 4.3
    .3. Results and comparison with experiments; Part III. Soft matter;
    5. Coarse-grained modeling and simulation of macromolecules; 5
    .1. What is coarse-graining?; 5.1
    .1. Coarse-graining of soft matter: polymers and biomacromolecules; 5.1
    .2. Crossover scaling of linear, semiflexible polymers. 5
    .2. Coarse-graining of lipid bilayer membranes5.2
    .1. Lipid-lipid and lipid-water interactions; 5.2
    .2. Distribution of the mass density; 5.2
    .3. Phase diagram of our bilayer membrane model; 5.2
    .4. Order parameter; 5.2
    .5. Pair correlation function; 5.2
    .6. Elastic modulus;
    6. Laser-induced shock wave destruction of human tumor cells: experiments and simulations; 6
    .1. The impact of shock waves on tumor cells; 6.1
    .1. Preliminary tests of experimental setups for laser-induced shock wave generation; 6.1
    .2. Hydrophone specification. 6
    .2. Experiments on laser-induced shock wave destruction of U87 tumor cells 6.2
    .1. Cell culture of U87 glioblastoma cell line; 6
    .3. Photonic Doppler velocimetry (PDV); 6
    .4. Results: shock wave damage in U87 tumor cells; 6
    .5. Simulation of shock wave damage in coarse-grained models of membranes; 6.5
    .1. Propagation of the shock wave; 6.5
    .2. Membrane damage: membrane order parameter; 6.5
    .3. Membrane damage: effects of shock wave speed and system size;
    7. Final considerations; 7
    .1. Shock wave physics and multiscale modeling; 7
    .2. Multiscale modeling of granular matter.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Vassilis Cutsuridis, editor.
    Summary: Significant progress has been made in recent years in studying the dynamics of the diseased brain at both microscopic and macroscopic levels. Electrical recordings of the diseased brain activity show (in)-coherent dynamic phenomena at scales ranging from local networks (thousands of neurons) to entire brain regions (millions of neurons). Our understanding of these spatial and temporal scales and resolutions continues to increase as evidence suggests close relationships between local field potentials recorded in the cortex (with electroencephalography or multi-unit recordings) and blood flow signals (measured with fMRI). Application of multi-scale computational models as integrative principles that bridge the single neuron dynamics (monitored with intracellular recordings) with the dynamics of local and distant brain regions observed using human EEG, ERPs, MEG, LFPs and fMRI can further enhance our understanding of the diseased brain dynamics. The goal of this book is to provide a focused series of papers on computational models of brain disorders combining multiple levels and types of computation with multiple types of data in an effort to improve understanding, prediction and treatment of brain and mental illness. The volume aims to bring together physiologists and anatomists studying cortical circuits, cognitive neuroscientists studying brain dynamics and behaviour via EEG and functional magnetic resonance imaging (fMRI), and computational neuroscientists using neural modelling techniques to explore local and large-scale disordered brain dynamics. The thematic focus is expected to be appealing to a diverse group of investigators and have a high impact on the medical, neuroscience and computer science fields.

    Contents:
    Part I Movement Disorders
    A neuro-computational model of Pallidal vs. Subthalamic Deep Brain Stimulation Effect on synchronization at Tremor frequency in Parkinsons disease, Alekhya Mandali, Srinivasa Chakravarthy V, Ahmed A. Moustafa
    Dynamics of Basal Ganglia and Thalamus in Parkinsonian Tremor, Jan Moren, Jun Igarashi, Osamu Shouno, Junichiro Yoshimoto, and Kenji Doya
    A neural mass model for abnormal beta-rebound in schizophrenia, Aine Byrne, Stephen Coombes, and Peter F Liddle
    Basal ganglio-thalamo-cortico-spino-muscular model of Parkinsons disease bradykinesia, Vassilis Cutsuridis
    Network Models of the Basal Ganglia in Parkinsons Disease: Advances in Deep Brain Stimulation through Model-Based Optimization, Karthik Kumaravelu1, Warren M. Grill
    Neural synchronization in Parkinsons disease on different time-scales, Sungwoo Ahn, Choongseok Park, Leonid L. Rubchinsky
    Obsessive compulsive tendencies and action sequence complexity: An Information Theory Analysis, Mustafa Zeki, Fuat Balcı, Tutku Öztel, Ahmed A. Moustafa
    Part II Cognitive Disorders
    Cortical disinhibition, attractor dynamics and belief updating in schizophrenia, Rick A Adams
    Modelling cognitive processing of healthy controls and obsessive compulsive disorder subjects in the antisaccade task, Vassilis Cutsuridis
    Simulating cognitive deficits in Parkinsons disease, Sébastien Hélie and Zahra Sajedinia
    Attentional deficits in Alzheimers disease: investigating the role of acetylcholine with computational modelling, Eirini Mavritsaki, Howard Bowman, Li Su
    A computational hypothesis on how serotonin regulates catecholamines in the pathogenesis of depressive apathy, Massimo Silvetti, Gianluca Baldassarre, Daniele Caligiore
    Autism Spectrum Disorder and deep attractors in neurodynamics, Włodzisław Duch
    Part III Memory Disorders
    Alzheimers disease: rhythms, local circuits and model-experiment interaction, Frances K Skinner, Alexandra Chatzika lymniou
    Using A Neurocomputational Autobiographical Memory Model to Study Memory Loss, Di Wang, Ahmed A. Moustafa, Ah-Hwee Tan, Chunyan Miao
    Part IV Epilepsy and Consciousness Related Disorders
    How can computer modeling help understanding the dynamics of absence epilepsy?, Piotr Suffczynski, Stiliyan Kalitzin, Fernando H. Lopes da Silva
    a-driven modeling of normal and pathological oscillations in the hippocampus, Ivan Raikov, Ivan Soltesz
    Shaping brain rhythms: dynamic and control-theoretic perspectives on periodic brain stimulation for treatment of neurological disorders, John D. Griffiths, Jérémie Lefebvre
    Brain connectivity reduction reflects disturbed self-organisation of the brain: Neural disorders and General Anesthesia
    Axel Hutt. Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Adrian K.C. Lee, Mark T. Wallace, Allison B. Coffin, Arthur N. Popper, Richard R. Fay, editors.
    Summary: Auditory behavior, perception, and cognition are all shaped by information from other sensory systems. This volume examines this multi-sensory view of auditory function at levels of analysis ranging from the single neuron to neuroimaging in human clinical populations. Visual Influence on Auditory Perception Adrian K.C. Lee and Mark T. Wallace Cue Combination within a Bayesian Framework David Alais and David Burr Toward a Model of Auditory-Visual Speech Intelligibility Ken W. Grant and Joshua G.W. Bernstein An Object-based Interpretation of Audiovisual Processing Adrian K.C. Lee, Ross K. Maddox, and Jennifer K. Bizley Hearing in a "Moving" Visual World: Coordinate Transformations Along the Auditory Pathway Shawn M. Willett, Jennifer M. Groh, Ross K. Maddox Multisensory Processing in the Auditory Cortex Andrew J. King, Amy Hammond-Kenny, Fernando R. Nodal Audiovisual Integration in the Primate Prefrontal Cortex Bethany Plakke and Lizabeth M. Romanski Using Multisensory Integration to Understand Human Auditory Cortex Michael S. Beauchamp Combining Voice and Face Content in the Primate Temporal Lobe Catherine Perrodin and Christopher I. Petkov Neural Network Dynamics and Audiovisual Integration Julian Keil and Daniel Senkowski Cross-Modal Learning in the Auditory System Patrick Bruns and Brigitte Röder Multisensory Processing Differences in Individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorder Sarah H. Baum Miller, Mark T. Wallace Adrian K.C. Lee is Associate Professor in the Department of Speech & Hearing Sciences and the Institute for Learning and Brain Sciences at the University of Washington, Seattle Mark T. Wallace is the Louise B McGavock Endowed Chair and Professor in the Departments of Hearing and Speech Sciences, Psychiatry, Psychology and Director of the Vanderbilt Brain Institute at Vanderbilt University, Nashville Allison B. Coffin is Associate Professor in the Department of Integrative Physiology and Neuroscience at Washington State University, Vancouver, WA Arthur N. Popper is Professor Emeritus and research professor in the Department of Biology at the University of Maryland, College Park Richard R. Fay is Distinguished Research Professor of Psychology at Loyola University, Chicago.

    Contents:
    Intro; Acoustical Society of America; Series Preface; Springer Handbook of Auditory Research; Preface 1992; Volume Preface; Contents; Contributors;
    Chapter 1: Visual Influence on Auditory Perception; 1.1 Introduction; 1.1.1 Basic Concepts and Historical Perspectives; 1.2 Volume Roadmap; 1.3 Outlook; References;
    Chapter 2: Cue Combination Within a Bayesian Framework; 2.1 Multisensory Integration and the Problem of Cue Combination; 2.2 Cue Combination in a Bayesian Framework; 2.3 The Maximum Likelihood Estimation Model; 2.4 Maximum Likelihood Estimation: A Flexible Cue Combination Model 2.5 Maximum Likelihood Estimation Cue Combination in the Time Domain2.6 Changes in Maximum Likelihood Estimation Cue Weightings Over Development; 2.7 Cross-Modal Calibration During Development; 2.8 Cross-Modal Calibration and Sensory Deficits; 2.9 Summary; References;
    Chapter 3: Toward a Model of Auditory-Visual Speech Intelligibility; 3.1 Introduction; 3.1.1 The Importance of Signal-Based Models of Speech Intelligibility; 3.1.2 The Overlooked Problem of Auditory-Visual Speech Intelligibility; 3.1.3 Speech-Feature Complementarity and the Relative Importance of Different Spectral Regions 3.1.4 Auditory-Visual Integration Efficiency3.1.5 Auditory-Visual Asynchrony; 3.1.6 Perception of Auditory-Visual Coherence and the Enhancement of the Auditory Speech Envelope; 3.2 Modeling Auditory-Visual Speech Intelligibility; 3.3 Future Challenges; 3.3.1 Complex Auditory Backgrounds; 3.3.2 Individual Differences: Hearing Acuity, Visual Acuity, and Integration Efficiency; 3.4 Summary; References;
    Chapter 4: An Object-Based Interpretation of Audiovisual Processing; 4.1 Introduction; 4.1.1 Multisensory Cocktail Party: Disambiguating Sound Mixtures Using Visual Cues 4.1.2 Object-Based Attention4.1.3 The Auditory Perspective; 4.2 Visual, Auditory, and Auditory-Visual Objects; 4.2.1 Integration Versus Binding; 4.2.1.1 Unity Assumption; 4.2.1.2 Stimulus Factors Guiding Multisensory Integration; Spatial Colocation; Temporal Coincidence; Context Influencing Multisensory Integration; 4.2.2 Strong Test of Multisensory Binding and Multisensory Objecthood; 4.2.3 Models of Audiovisual Integration and the Role of Attention; 4.3 Reinterpreting Classic Audiovisual Illusions: Binding or Multisensory Integration?; 4.3.1 Ventriloquism; 4.3.2 Sound-Induced Flash Illusion 4.3.3 McGurk Effect4.4 Competing Objects in the Audiovisual Scene; 4.4.1 Prediction from Unisensory Object-Based Attention Theory; 4.4.2 Effect of Spatial Cues; 4.4.3 Effect of Temporal Coherence; 4.5 Summary; References;
    Chapter 5: Hearing in a "Moving" Visual World: Coordinate Transformations Along the Auditory Pathway; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 The Why and How of Linking Visual and Auditory Signals in Space; 5.3 Auditory Reference Frames in the Superior Colliculus; 5.4 Reference Frames Throughout the Brain; 5.4.1 Reference Frames in the Parietal and Frontal Cortices
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Konstantin Nikolaou, Fabian Bamberg, Andrea Laghi, Geoffrey D. Rubin, editors.
    Summary: The fourth edition of this book offers a comprehensive update on recent developments and trends in the clinical and scientific applications of multislice computed tomography. Following an initial section on the most significant current technical aspects and issues, detailed information is provided on a comprehensive range of diagnostic applications. Imaging of the head and neck, the cardiovascular system, the abdomen, and the lungs is covered in depth, describing the application of multislice CT in a variety of tumors and other pathologies. Emerging fields such as pediatric imaging and CT-guided interventions are fully addressed, and emergency CT is also covered. Radiation exposure, dual-energy imaging, contrast enhancement, image postprocessing, CT perfusion imaging, and CT angiography all receive close attention. The new edition has been comprehensively revised and complemented by contributions from highly experienced and well-known authors who offer diverse perspectives, highlighting the possibilities offered by the most modern multidetector CT systems. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Techniques
    Multislice CT: Current Technology and Future Developments
    Dynamic Volume CT with 320-Detector Rows: Technology and Clinical Applications
    3D Imaging with Flat-Detector C-Arm Systems
    Radiation Exposure and Protection in Multislice CT
    Dual-Energy CT-Technical Background
    Radiation Dose in Multislice Cardiac CT
    Radiation Risks Associated with CT Screening Procedures
    Contrast Agent Application and Protocols
    Neuro / Ear-Nose-Throat
    Cerebral Perfusion CT: Technique and Clinical Applications
    MDCT in Neuro-Vascular Imaging
    Anatomy and Pathology of the Temporal Bone
    Pathologies of the Orbit
    Dental CT: Pathologic Findings in the Teeth and Jaws
    Anatomy and Corresponding Oncological Imaging of the Neck
    Cardiovascular Imaging
    Noninvasive Coronary Artery Imaging
    Technical Innovations in Cardiac and Coronary MSCT
    Assessment of Coronary Artery Stents by Coronary CT Angiography
    Acute Chest Pain
    The Role of Cardiac Computed Tomography in Cardiac Surgery
    New Indications for Cardiac CT
    Complementary Role of Cardiac CT and MRI
    Complementary Roles of Coronary CT and Myocardial Perfusion SPECT
    CTA of the Aorta by MDCT
    CTA of the Spinal Arteries
    Lower-Extremity CTA
    Lung
    Interstitial Lung Diseases
    Pneumonia
    CT of the Airways
    Oncology
    Liver Tumors
    MDCT of Pancreatic Tumors
    Imaging of Colorectal Tumors with Multidetector Row CT
    Urogenital Tumors
    PET-CT in Oncology
    PET and PET-CT in Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Role of MDCT in Bone Tumors, Metastases, and Myeloma
    Dual Energy CT: Initial Description of Clinical Applications in the Abdomen
    Intervention
    CT-Guided Biopsy and Drainage
    Vertebroplasty
    CT-Guided Tumor Ablation
    Rotational C-Arm-Based CT in Diagnostic and Interventional Neuroradiology
    Abdominal Intervention with C-Arm CT
    Trauma Imaging / Acute Care
    CT Management of Multisystem Trauma.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Ana Patricia Ferreira, José C. Menezes, Mike Tobyn.
    Summary: Multivariate Analysis in the Pharmaceutical Industry provides industry practitioners with guidance on multivariate data methods and their applications over the lifecycle of a pharmaceutical product, from process development, to routine manufacturing, focusing on the challenges specific to each step. It includes an overview of regulatory guidance specific to the use of these methods, along with perspectives on the applications of these methods that allow for testing, monitoring and controlling products and processes. The book seeks to put multivariate analysis into a pharmaceutical context for the benefit of pharmaceutical practitioners, potential practitioners, managers and regulators. Users will find a resources that addresses an unmet need on how pharmaceutical industry professionals can extract value from data that is routinely collected on products and processes, especially as these techniques become more widely used, and ultimately, expected by regulators.

    Contents:
    Section I. Background and methodology
    Section II. Applications in pharmaceutical development and manufacturing
    Section III. Guidance documents and regulatory framework
    Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Ramakrishnan M. Nair, Roland Schafleitner, Suk-Ha Lee, editors.
    Summary: This book reports on the current global status of mungbean and its economic importance. Mungbean (Vigna radiata)--also called green gram--is an important food and cash crop in the rice-based farming systems of South and Southeast Asia, but is also grown in other parts of the world. Its short duration, low input requirement and high global demand make mungbean an ideal rotation crop for smallholder farmers. The book describes mungbean collections maintained by various organizations and their utilization, especially with regard to adapting mungbean to new environments. It provides an overview of the progress made in breeding for tolerance to biotic and abiotic stresses; nutritional quality enhancement including genomics approaches; and outlines future challenges for mungbean cultivation. In addition, genomic approaches to evaluating the evolutionary relationship between Vigna species and addressing questions concerning domestication, adaptation and genotype-phenotype relationships are also discussed.

    Contents:
    Global status and Economic Importance of Mungbean
    Genetic Resources and Utilization
    Breeding Progress and Future challenges-Biotic stresses
    Breeding Progress and Future challenges-Abiotic stresses
    Breeding Progress and Future challenges-Nutritional quality
    Molecular marker resources and their application
    Mungbean Genome and synteny with other genomes
    Resequencing mungbean
    Genomic approaches to biotic stresses
    Genomic approaches to abiotic stresses
    Future prospects and challenges.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Sabaratnam Arulkumaran, Michael Robson
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2020
  • Digital
    Nathan A. Berger, editor.
    Summary: This volume provides a transdisciplinary and translational review of many of the leading murine models used to study the mechanisms, mediators and biomarkers linking energy balance to cancer. It provides a review of murine models that should be of interest to basic, clinical and applied research investigators as well as nutrition scientists and students that work in cancer prevention, cancer control and treatment. The worldwide obesity pandemic has been extensively studied by epidemiologic and observational studies and even, in some cases, by randomized controlled trials. However, the development and control of obesity, its comorbidities and its impact on cancer usually occurs over such long periods that it is difficult, if not impossible to conduct randomized controlled trials in humans to investigate environmental contributions to obesity, energy balance and their impact on cancer. In contrast, model organisms, especially mice and rats, provide valuable assets for performing these studies under rigorously controlled conditions and in sufficient numbers to provide statistically significant results. In this volume, many of the leading and new murine models used to study the mechanisms and mediators linking cancer with obesity, sleep, exercise, their modification by environment and how they may continue to be used to further elucidate these relations as well as to explore preclinical aspects of prevention and/or therapeutic intervention are considered. This volume provides an important compilation and analysis of major experimental systems and principles for further preclinical research with translational impact on energy balance and cancer.

    Contents:
    1. Relevance of circadian rhythm in cancer
    2. Environmental manipulation and neuropeptide effects on energy balance and cancer
    3. The MRL mouse: a model of regeneration and cancer
    4. Living large: what mouse models reveal about growth hormone and obesity
    5. Mouse models to study obesity effects on hematologic malignancies
    6. Energy balance, IGF-1, and cancer: casual lessons from genetically engineered mice
    7. Mouse models to study leptin in breast cancer stem cells
    8. Mouse models used to study the effects of diabetes, insulin and IGFs on cancer
    9. Impact on energy balance on chemically induced mammary carcinogenesis in a rat
    10. Models and mechanisms of high-fat diet (HFD) promotion of pancreatic cancer
    11. Maternal energetics and the developmental origins of prostate cancer in offspring
    12. Mouse models to study the effect of natural products on obesity-associated NAFLD/NASH
    13. Mouse models to study metformin effects in carcinogenesis
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editor-in-chief, V. Courtney Broaddus ; editors, Robert J. Mason, Joel D. Ernst, Talmadge E. King Jr., Stephen C. Lazarus, John F. Murray, Jay A. Nadel, Arthur S. Slutsky ; thoracic imaging editor, Michael B. Gotway.
    Summary: Ideal for fellows and practicing pulmonologists who need an authoritative, comprehensive reference on all aspects of pulmonary medicine, Murray and Nadel's Textbook of Respiratory Medicine offers the most definitive content on basic science, diagnosis, evaluation and treatment of the full spectrum of respiratory diseases.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2016
  • Digital/Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    v. 1-3, 5-8, 1994-95, 1997-98.
    Suppl. 1-3 BOUND WITH: Muscle & nerve.
    1
  • Digital
    Gian Luigi Canata, Pieter d'Hooghe, Kenneth J. Hunt, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Junjie Xiao, editor.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Victor Dubowitz, Anders Oldfors, Caroline A. Sewry.
    Contents:
    The procedure of muscle biopsy
    Histological and histochemical stains and reactions
    Normal muscle
    Histological and histochemical changes
    Ultrastructural changes
    Immunohistochemistry and immunoblotting
    How to read a biopsy
    Classification of neuromuscular disorders
    Neurogenic disorders
    Muscular dystrophies and allied disorders I : Duchenne and Becker muscular dystrophy
    Muscular dystrophies and allied disorders II: limb-girdle muscular dystrophies
    Muscular dystrophies and allied disorders III: congenital muscular dystrophies and associated disorders
    Muscular dystrophies and allied disorders IV: Emery-Dreifuss muscular dystrophy and similar syndromes
    Muscular dystrophies and allied disorders V: facioscapulohumeral, myotonic and oculopharyngeal muscular dystrophies
    Congenital myopathies and related disorders
    Myofibrillar myopathies and other myopathies with rimmed vacuoles
    Metabolic myopathies I: glycogenoses
    Metabolic myopathies II: lipid-related disorders and mitochondrial myopathies
    Myopathies associated with systemic disorders and ageing
    Ion channel disorders
    Myasthenic syndromes
    Inflammatory myopathies
    Toxic and drug-induced myopathies
    Appendices. Glossary of genetic terms
    Useful websites.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2021
  • Digital
    Dongsheng Duan, Jerry R. Mendell, editors.
    Summary: An updated overview of muscle gene therapy is provided in this comprehensive reference. The test highlights important gene therapy applications, in addition to the potential healing capabilities in complex genetic disorders.

    Contents:
    Intro; Dedication; Preface; Disclosures; Contents; Part I: Foundations for Muscle Gene Therapy;
    Chapter 1: An Overview of Muscle Biology and Physiology for Muscle Gene Therapy; 1.1 Skeletal Muscle; 1.1.1 Skeletal Muscle Structure Overview; 1.1.2 Sarcomere Organization; 1.1.3 Sarcomere Function; 1.1.4 Twitch Contraction; 1.1.5 Tetanic Contraction; 1.1.6 Motor Units; 1.1.7 Fiber Sub-Types; 1.1.8 Modes of Contraction; 1.1.9 Length Tension Relationship; 1.1.10 Lever Action; 1.1.11 Muscular Dystrophy and Skeletal Muscle Contraction; 1.2 Cardiac Muscle; 1.2.1 Cardiac Muscle Structure Overview 1.2.2 Cardiac Muscle Function1.2.3 Muscular Dystrophy and Cardiac Muscle Contraction; References;
    Chapter 2: Molecular Basis of Muscle Disease; 2.1 Introduction; 2.1.1 Skeletal Muscle Fiber Types and Adaptation; 2.1.2 Regeneration and Satellite Cells; 2.1.3 Primary Muscle Disorders; 2.2 Congenital Myopathies; 2.2.1 Nemaline Myopathies; 2.2.1.1 Nebulin; 2.2.1.2 Kelch Proteins; 2.2.1.3 Leiomodin-3 (LMOD3); 2.2.2 Centronuclear Myopathy; 2.2.3 Core Myopathies; 2.3 Muscular Dystrophies; 2.3.1 Duchenne Muscular Dystrophy; 2.3.2 Limb-Girdle Muscular Dystrophies 2.3.2.1 LGMD Caused by Mutations in Sarcoglycans2.3.2.2 LGMD Caused by Mutations in Sarcolemmal Repair Complex; 2.3.3 Congenital Muscular Dystrophy; 2.3.4 Facioscapulohumeral Muscular Dystrophy (FSHD); 2.3.5 Myotonic Dystrophy; 2.3.6 Emery-Dreifuss Muscular Dystrophy (EDMD); 2.4 Concluding Remarks; References;
    Chapter 3: Animal Models for Muscle Disease and Muscle Gene Therapy; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Dystrophinopathies; 3.3 Limb-Girdle Muscular Dystrophies; 3.3.1 Myotilinopathies; 3.3.2 Laminopathies; 3.3.3 Caveolinopathies; 3.3.4 Calpainopathies; 3.3.5 Dysferlinopathies 3.3.6 Sarcoglycanopathies3.3.7 TRIM32 Mutations; 3.3.8 Fukutin-Related Protein Mutations; 3.4 Summary and Future Direction; References;
    Chapter 4: Muscle Stem Cell Biology and Implications in Gene Therapy; 4.1 What Is a 'Stem Cell'?; 4.2 What Is a 'Muscle Stem Cell'?; 4.3 Practical Utility of Muscle Stem Cells; 4.4 Stem Cells as Vectors of Genetic Modification; 4.5 Stem Cell Function as a Target of Genetic Therapies; 4.6 Hopes, Aspirations and Hurdles; References;
    Chapter 5: Pluripotent Stem Cells for Gene Therapy of Hereditary Muscle Disorders; 5.1 Introduction 5.2 Myogenic Adult Stem/Progenitor Cells for Muscle Regeneration5.3 ES and iPS Cells for Muscle Regeneration; 5.4 Genetic Modification of Pluripotent Stem Cells; 5.4.1 Gene Addition; 5.4.2 Gene Editing; 5.5 Concluding Remarks and Future Perspectives; References;
    Chapter 6: MicroRNAs (miRs) in Muscle Gene Therapy; 6.1 Introduction: miR Biogenesis and Delivery; 6.2 MiRs and Skeletal Myogenesis; 6.3 MiR-Based Therapy for Skeletal Muscle Diseases; 6.4 MiRs and Cardiac Myogenesis; 6.5 MiR-Based Therapy for Cardiac and Smooth Muscle Diseases; 6.6 Conclusion and Remarks; References
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Bernard Roger, Ali Guermazi, Abdalla Skaf, editors.
    Summary: This book attempts to provide a comprehensive look at all of the pathologies of muscles that are likely to be encountered in treating sports-related injuries. Its purpose is to give the practitioner a guide for identifying injuries and choosing the best therapeutic strategy. The first part presents the consensus view of current knowledge: the physiology of lesions and their prognosis as well as their anatomy as well as their anatomy, clinical imaging, and treatment. Then each of the muscles is described in turn, with a review of anatomy, clinical examination, the results of imaging, with the emphasis on which diagnostic methods are best for specific injuries and how to use diagnostic imaging to determine the most suitable therapeutic strategies. Special care has been taken to provide high-quality illustrations that clearly show how to identify the lesion of the damaged muscle. A wealth of illustrations, many in color, are included. Finally, the book concludes with some clinical cases and technical notes relevant to treatment of sports-related muscle injuries. -- from back cover.

    Contents:
    Pt. I. General principles. Muscle physiology in athletes / Charles-Yannick Guezennec and Roland Krzentowski
    Functional anatomy of the muscle / Laurent Tatu and Bernard Parratte
    Muscular responses during and following acute physical activity under heat stress / Julien D. Periard
    Epidemiology and clinical features of muscle injuries / Sheila Jean McNeill Ingham, Leonardo Addêo Ramos, Rene Jorge Abdalla, Roberta Sessa Stilhano, and Rogério Teixeira de Carvalho
    Role of clinical evaluation for the diagnosis of acute and chronic muscle injuries / Jacques Rodineau and Sylvie Besch
    Imagining semiology : ultrasound and MRI in the assessment of muscle injury / Frank W. Roemer
    Treatment of muscle injury / Sheila Jean McNeill, Roberta Sessa Stilhano, Rene Jorge Abdalla, Leonardo Addêo Ramos, and Rogério Teixeira de Carvalho
    Therapeutic alternatives : principles and results / Marc Dauty and Pierre Menu
    Pt. II. Non-traumatic muscle injury. Non traumatic muscular injury / Raphael Guillin and Pierre Rochcongar
    General considerations on muscle denervation in sports activities : shoulder entrapment syndromes and compressive neuropathies / Alain Blum, Ariane Raymond, Matthais Louis, Sabine Aptel, Sophie Lecocq-Teixeria, and Pedro Augusto Gondim Teixeira
    Pt. III. Extrinsic muscular injury. Muscle contusions : extrinsic muscle lesions / Matthieu Sailly
    Pt. IV. Intrinsic muscular injury. The protective role of cervical spinal muscle masses in sports related trauma / David Brauge, Philippe Adam, Marc Julia, Patrick Chaynes, Pierre Bernard, and Jean Christophe Sol
    Abdominal wall injuries / Lionel Pesquer and Gilles Reboul
    Adductor muscles injuries / Mohamed Jarraya, Daichi Hayashi, Bernard Roger, and Ali Guermazi
    Iliopsoas muscles injuries / Marc Bouvard, Bernard Roger, Josselin Laffond, Alain Lippa, and François Tassery
    Pathology of the rectus femoris / Mohamed Jarraya, Daichi Hayashi, Ali Guermazi, and Bernard Roger
    Posterior compartment of the thigh muscles injuries / Bruno Hassel, Pedro Henrique Martins, Silvana Mendonça, Clarissa Canella, and José Luiz Runco
    Hip short external rotator muscles injuries / Cyrille Delin, Jean-Yves Vandensteene, and Bernard Roger
    Gluteus maximus and surrounding muscles injuries / Pedro Augusto Gondim Teixeira
    Plantaris muscle injuries / Emad Almusa, Robbart Van Linschoten, and Stefano Bianchi
    Leg posterior muscle compartment injuries / Francois Delaunay, Philippe Adam, Bernard Castinel, Julien Auriol, and Bernard Roger
    Pt. V. Clinical cases. Muscular endometriosis / Benjamin Dallaudiere and Lionel Pesquer
    Post-traumatic myositis ossificans / Aston Ngai
    Posterior impingement of the ankle : "can there also be a tendinous entity?" / Peiter d'Hooghe
    Ischiofemoral impingement / Lionel Pesquer and Gilles Reboul
    Occult muscular vein thrombosis as a consequence of prior muscle strain / Lionel Pesquere and Eleonore Brunetti
    Pectoralis major injury / Abdalla Skaf, Andre Yamada, and Daniel Oliveira
    Pt. VI. Imaging specifies. Plasma rich in growth factors for the treatment of skeletal muscle injury / Mikel Sanchez, Diego Delgado, Pello Sánchez, Eduardo Anitua, and Sabino Padilla
    Advanced magnetic resonance imaging of muscles in sports medicine / Michel Daoud Crema
    Three-compartment body composition measurement by dual-energy X-ray absorptiometry : use in the prevention of cervical spine trauma and in the follow-up of muscular injuries in elite rugby union players / Philippe Adam, David Brauge, Bernard Castinel, Peter Milburn, Christophe Prat, Albert Sadacca, and Jean François Ferrie.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Piero Volpi and Gian Nicola Bisciotti.
    Summary: This volume provides a cutting-edge analysis concerning the biology and aetiology, classification, clinical assessment and conservative treatment of lower limb muscle injuries in athletes. Muscle injuries are the most common trauma both in team and individual sports and are responsible for most of the time lost both in training and in competition: in professional football (soccer), they account for 30% and in track and field for 48% of all injuries recorded. Despite the considerable interest in this topic among clinicians and researchers, there is still no consensus regarding the etiopathogenesis, classification, clinical examination and treatment of muscle lesions. Based on the first Italian Consensus Conference on guidelines for the conservative treatment of lower limb muscle injuries in athletes, which was held in April 2017 at Humanitas Clinic Institute in Milan, Italy under the auspices of the Italian Society of Arthroscopy, this comprehensive book addresses the main issues concerning muscle injuries, from biology and pathobiology to clinical evaluation and different treatment option, including the most frequently used physio-kinesitherapy therapies. It also presents a consensus classification of muscle injuries closely linked to prognostic factors. Written by international experts with diverse medical backgrounds, this book offers comprehensive practical guidance for orthopedic surgeons, sports physicians, athletic trainers, physiotherapists, sports science students, and physiatrists.

    Contents:
    1 Biology and Etiology of Muscle-Tendon Injuries
    2 Healing Processes in Muscle Tissue
    3 Healing Processes in Tendon Tissue
    4 Muscle Injuries Classifications Annex1 Annex2 Annex3
    5 Imaging in Muscle Injuries
    6 The Muscle Injuries Clinical Evaluation
    7 The Conservative Treatment of Muscle Injuries General Principles
    8 Conservative Treatment for Quadriceps Muscle Injuries
    9 Conservative Treatment for Hamstring Muscle Injuries
    10 Conservative Treatment for Adductors Muscle Injuries
    11 Conservative Treatment for Calf Muscle Injuries
    12 Muscle Injuries and Genetic Research Will this be the Future?.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Wilfred A. Nix.
    Summary: "Many patients suffer from problems in their muscles or nerves in combination with pain. This book is about the complex interplay between the causes of these problems and the puzzle they pose. Pain is the subjective experience of a psychophysical phenomenon arising from a defined area in the body. It is a cry for help and challenges the physician to ask the right questions and to carry out the right examinations. If they succeed in doing so, the patient's signs and symptoms will be translated into the present knowledge of pain concepts to initiate appropriate therapy. With this goal in mind, this book summarizes the latest scientific information on pain states and their mechanisms. It provides a deeper understanding of the different pain conditions and allows physicians to form strategies for better pain therapy. The second edition includes more graphs, tables, and illustrations. It is updated with the current and dynamically expanding knowledge on the therapy of several disease states and explains in more detail the processing of pain in the central nervous system. When puzzling symptoms of sensory, motor, and autonomic deficits are evident, an examination has to be performed systematically in order to reach the correct diagnosis. This calls for suitable anatomical knowledge. Depending on where a lesion exists within a peripheral nerve, the root or the plexus, typical patterns of paralysis can be detected. Numerous illustrations in the book help physicians to more easily understand and solve problems of peripheral nerve and root injuries and their sequelae in their daily work." -- from website publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    1 Basics of anatomy
    1.1 Motor system
    1.2 Sensory system
    1.3 Vegetative system
    1.4 Neuron
    1.5 Peripheral nerve
    1.6 Regeneration of the peripheral nerves
    1.7 Denervation and reinnervation
    1.8 Sequelae of nerve injuries on the sensory system and pain
    2 Examination process
    2.1 Motor function
    2.1.1 Muscle tests of the upper extremity
    2.1.2 Muscle tests of the lower extremity
    2.2 Reflexes
    2.2.1 Examination of reflexes
    2.3 Sensitivity
    2.3.1 Methods of sensitivity
    2.4 Vegetative nervous system
    2.4.1 Sympathetic skin innervation
    3 Electrophysiology
    4 Radicular lesions
    4.1 Segmental innervation
    4.2 Remarks on terminology
    4.3 Overuse and disc herniation
    4.4 Diagnostics
    4.5 Therapy of a herniated disc
    4.5.1 Conservative or operative therapy
    4.5.2 The "failed back syndrome"
    4.6 Cervical root syndromes
    4.6.1 Cervical myelopathy
    4.7 Lumbar root syndromes
    4.7.1 Conus/cauda lesion
    4.7.2 Spondylolisthesis
    5 Lesions of single nerves
    5.1 Trigeminal nerve
    5.1.1 Corneal reflex
    5.1.2 Sense of smell
    5.1.3 Bulbar and pseudobulbar paralysis
    5.1.4 Masseter reflex
    5.1.5 Trigeminal neuralgia
    5.2 Facial nerve
    5.2.1 Anatomy
    5.2.2 Peripheral facial nerve paresis
    5.2.3 Central facial nerve paresis
    5.2.4 Facial nerve system
    5.2.5 Therapy
    5.3 Brachial plexus
    5.3.1 Traumatic damage
    5.3.2 Damage from inflammation
    5.3.3 Entrapment syndromes
    5.3.4 Pancoast syndrome, radiation sequelae
    5.4 Shoulder nerves
    5.4.1 Long thoracic nerve
    5.4.2 Suprascapular nerve
    5.5 Axillary nerve
    5.6 Musculocutaneous nerve
    5.7 Radial nerve
    5.8 Ulnar nerve
    5.8.1 Ulnar groove and loge de Guyon
    5.9 Median nerve
    5.9.1 Carpal tunnel syndrome
    5.10 Volkmann's contracture
    5.11 Lumbosacral plexus
    5.11.1 Diabetic plexopathy
    5.11.2 Gluteal nerves, injection paralysis
    5.12 Cutaneous femoral nerve
    5.13 Femoral nerve
    5.14 Sciatic nerve
    5.15 Tibial nerve
    5.16 Peroneal nerve
    5.17 Anterior tibial nerve syndrome
    6 Acute and chronic pain
    6.1 Pain concepts over time
    6.2 Aspects of physiology and pain pathways
    6.2.1 Prespinal level
    6.2.2 Spinal level
    6.2.3 Brain level
    6.2.4 Sensitization
    6.2.5 Pain memory
    6.3 Nociceptors in muscles and joints
    6.4 Neurogenic inflammation
    6.5 Nociceptive pain
    6.6 Neuropathic pain
    6.7 Mixed pain concept
    7 Pain mechanics
    7.1 First and second neuron pathways
    7.2 Impulse propagation in the normal nerve: the diseased nerve and cross-talk
    7.3 Ectopic impulse generation and peripheral sensitization
    7.4 Central sensitization and anatomical plasticity
    7.5 Central sensitization and descending plasticity
    7.6 Sympathetic-afferent coupling
    8 Polyneuropathies
    8.1 Demyelinating neuropathies
    8.1.1 Polyneuritis and polyradiculitis
    8.2 Axoneal degeneration
    8.2.1 Sensory neuronopathies
    8.2.2 Axonopathies
    8.3 Combined axon and myelin damage
    8.4 Diabetic neuropathy
    9 Clinical aspects of painful conditions
    9.1 Complex regional pain syndrome
    9.2 Root avulsions
    9.3 Referred pain
    9.4 Myofascial syndrome
    9.5 Pain states in the trunk and extremities
    9.5.1 Cervical pain syndromes
    9.5.2 Whiplash trauma
    9.5.3 Paravertebral pain
    9.5.4 Low back pain, sciatica
    9.5.5 Intercostal neuralgia
    9.5.6 Scapulocostal syndrome
    9.5.7 Frozen shoulder
    9.5.8 Brachialgia
    9.6 Herpes zoster
    9.7 Muscle cramps
    10 General therapeutic guidelines
    10.1 Nerve-muscle interaction
    10.1.1 Electrotherapy of the muscle
    10.1.2 Electrotherapy of the regenerating nerve
    10.1.3 Physical therapy
    10.1.4 Voluntary activation
    10.1.5 Motivating the patient
    10.2 Regeneration-promoting substances
    10.3 Pain therapy
    10.3.1 Neuropathic pain treatment
    10.3.2 Non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs
    10.3.3 Anticonvulsants
    10.3.4 Antidepressants
    10.3.5 Opioids
    10.3.6 Neuroleptics
    10.3.7 Miscellaneous
    10.3.8 The mixed pain concept and its impact on pain therapy
    Subject index
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Raymond A. Huml, editor.
    Contents:
    Introduction to muscular dystrophy / Raymond A. Huml
    Muscular dystrophy : historical background and types / Raymond A. Huml
    FSHD : the most common type of muscular dystrophy? / Raymond A. Huml and Daniel P. Perez
    Duchenne and Becker muscular dystrophies : underlying genetic and molecular mechanisms / Jean K. Mah
    An overview of the other muscular dystrophies : underlying genetic and molecular mechanisms / Jean K. Mah
    Transition from childhood to adult in patients with muscular dystrophy / Elba Yesi Gerena Maldonado and Kathryn R. Wagner
    Overview of current treatments for muscular dystrophy / Zheng (Jane) Fan
    Physical therapy and orthotic devices / Laura E. Case
    Orthopedic management of the child with muscular dystrophy / Robert K. Lark and Elizabeth W. Hubbard
    Global regulatory landscape / Raymond A. Huml
    Key challenges to the approval of products to treat patients with muscular dystrophy / Raymond A. Huml
    Pharmaceutical products and non-pharmaceutical interventions as potential treatments for patients with muscular dystrophy / Raymond A. Huml
    US patient advocacy groups / Meredith L. Huml
    Global and national patient registries / Raymond A. Huml
    Summary / Raymond A. Huml.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    J. Bryan Dixon, editor.
    Summary: Taking a multidisciplinary approach to a common and often frustrating problem for athletes and those with an active lifestyle, this book is the first of its kind, addressing muscular injuries to the posterior leg using an in-depth and expansive style that is uniquely dedicated to ensuring all content is explicitly linked to the practical care of patients with calf pain. It is divided thematically into three sections. The first section covers underlying principles involved in these issues, including anatomy, physiology, pathophysiology of injury and neurophysiology of musculoskeletal pain. Clinical assessment techniques and imaging are covered in the second section. The third section on treatment is the most expansive, discussing acute, sub-acute and chronic posterior leg muscle injuries, as well as surgical management, rehabilitation techniques, complementary medicine and special populations. Overall, the book is designed to use muscular injuries of the posterior leg to as a means to understand the assessment and treatment of muscular injuries more broadly. Taken together, it is the consummate source for orthopedists, doctors in sports medicine, podiatrists, rehabilitation professionals and primary care physicians who treat muscular injuries in the posterior leg, though readers will gain a conceptual and practical framework for the assessment and treatment of muscular injuries in general.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Underlying Principles in the Assessment and Treatment of Muscular Injuries of the Posterior Leg.- Anatomy of the Leg.- Physiology of Skeletal Muscle.- Structure and Organization of Skeletal Muscle.- Pathophysiology of Skeletal Muscle Injury.- Neurophysiology of Musculoskeletal Pain
    Part Two: Assessment of Muscular Injuries in the Posterior Leg.- Clinical Assessment of the Posterior Leg.- Imaging and Tests for Posterior Lower Leg
    Part Three: Treatment of Muscular Injuries in the Posterior Leg.- Acute Injuries in the Posterior Leg.- Sub-Acute & Chronic Injuries in the Posterior Leg.- Surgical Treatment of Posterior Leg Injuries
    Rehabilitation of Injuries in the Posterior Leg.- Special Population Considerations in the Treatment of Posterior Leg Injuries.- Complementary Medicine Practices for Muscular Injuries of the Posterior Leg.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Masaaki Inaba, editor.
    Summary: The aim of this book is to review the latest findings on musculoskeletal disease associated with diabetes. It has been increasingly recognized that maintaining skeletal health is an important factor in achieving longevity in healthy subjects. Diabetes has been established as a disease independently associated with sarcopenia and increased risk of bone fracture resulting from osteoporosis; therefore, it is reasonable to maintain that musculoskeletal health is important in preserving good health. As either bone or muscle is intimately involved in the regulation of metabolic status, keeping the musculoskeletal system healthy is important for improving abnormal glucose metabolism toward normal levels and is vital, as well, for maintaining normal activities of daily living. Muscle is a target of insulin for enhancing the entry of glucose; thus it is conceivable that sarcopenia and muscle containing fat streaks causes insulin resistance in diabetic patients. Furthermore, bone is an organ that regulates Ca and Pi levels in serum by releasing or resorbing Ca and Pi to and from bone tissue. It is now known that bone is a definitive endocrine organ for regulating glucose metabolism and Pi metabolism by secreting osteocalcin and FGF-23 from osteocytes/osteoblasts. Readers will learn of the recent findings in this area, and this book will benefit physicians who deal with diabetes, particularly orthopedists and bone specialists, as well as all physical therapists.

    Contents:
    Part I. Bone Diseases
    1. Bone Disease Associated with Diabetes Mellitus: Particularly Focusing on its Contribution to the Development of Atherosclerosis
    2. Various Kinds of Bone Disease in Diabetes
    Rheumatic Conditions
    3. Fracture Risk in Diabetes
    4. Mechanism for the Development of Bone Disease in Diabetes: Abnormal Glucose Metabolism
    5. Mechanism for the Development of Bone Disease in Diabetes: Increased Oxidative Stress and Advanced Glycation end Products
    6. Mechanism for the Development of Bone Disease in Diabetes: Renal Bone Disease
    7. Impaired Parathyroid Function and Bone Formation-A Risk for Development of Adynamic Bone Disease to Enhance Vascular Calcification
    8. Bone as an Endocrine Organ: Diabetic Bone Disease as a Cause of Endocrine Disorder via Osteocalcin, FGF23 Secreted from Osteocyte/Osteoblast
    Part II. Muscle Diseases
    9. Overview
    10. Mechanism of Skeletal Muscle Contraction: Intracellular Signaling in Skeletal Muscle Contraction
    11. Mechanism of Skeletal Muscle Contraction: Role of Mechanical Muscle Contraction in Glucose Homeostasis
    12. Ectopic Fat Accumulation and Glucose Homeostasis: Ectopic Fat Accumulation in Muscle
    13. Ectopic Fat Accumulation in the Liver and Glucose Homeostasis
    14. Ectopic Fat Accumulation and Glucose Homeostasis: Role of Leptin in Glucose and Lipid Metabolism and Mass Maintenance in Skeletal Muscle
    15. Evaluation of Insulin Resistance in Diabetes: Standard Protocol for a Euglycemic-Hyperinsulinemic Clamp Using an Artificial Pancreas
    16. Sarcopenia in Diabetes Mellitus
    17. Body Temperature Regulation during Exercise Training
    18. Clinical Application of Exercise Therapy in Diabetes
    19. Clinical Application of Exercise Therapy in Diabetes with Chronic Kidney Disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Juerg Hodler, Rahel A. Kubik-Huch, Gustav K. von Schulthess, editors ; presented by the Foundation for the Advancement of Education in Medical Radiology, Zurich.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Juerg Hodler, Rahel A. Kubik-Huch, Gustav K. von Schulthess, editors.
    Summary: This open access book focuses on imaging of the musculoskeletal diseases. Over the last few years, there have been considerable advances in this area, driven by clinical as well as technological developments. The authors are all internationally renowned experts in their field. They are also excellent teachers, and provide didactically outstanding chapters. The book is disease-oriented and covers all relevant imaging modalities, with particular emphasis on magnetic resonance imaging. Important aspects of pediatric imaging are also included. IDKD books are completely re-written every four years. As a result, they offer a comprehensive review of the state of the art in imaging. The book is clearly structured with learning objectives, abstracts, subheadings, tables and take-home points, supported by design elements to help readers easily navigate through the text. As an IDKD book, it is particularly valuable for general radiologists, radiology residents, and interventional radiologists who want to update their diagnostic knowledge, and for clinicians interested in imaging as it relates to their specialty. .

    Contents:
    1. Shoulder: Instability
    2. Shoulder: Rotator Cuff
    3. Elbow Imaging with an Emphasis on MRI
    4. Wrist and Hand
    5. Imaging of the Hip
    6. Pelvis and Groin
    7. Knee
    8. Ankle and Foot
    9. Postoperative Knee and Shoulder
    10. Adult Tumors: Soft Tissue, Bone, Bone Marrow
    11. Arthritis
    12. Metabolic/ Endocrine
    13. Spine: Trauma
    14. Spine: Degeneration and Inflammation
    15. Infection
    16. Ultrasonography: Sports Injuries
    17. Muscle Imaging
    18. Peripheral Nerve Imaging
    19. Sport Related Injuries of the Pediatric Musculoskeletal System
    20. Non-Traumatic Musculoskeletal Diseases in Children.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Colleen M. Fitzgerald, Neil A. Segal, editors.
    Summary: Providing clinicians with a comprehensive, evidence-based summary of musculoskeletal health in pregnancy and postpartum, this is the first book of its kind to describe the physiologic changes, prevalence, etiology, diagnostic strategies, and effective treatments for the most common musculoskeletal clinical conditions encountered during this phase of life. Lumbopelvic pain, upper and lower extremity diagnoses, labor and delivery considerations, including the impact on the pelvic floor, and medical therapeutics will be discussed. Additionally, the importance and influence of exercise in pregnancy, the long-term implications of musculoskeletal health in pregnancy and current and future directions for research will be addressed. The childbearing period is a time of remarkable reproductive and musculoskeletal change, predisposing women to potential injury, pain, and resultant disability. Musculoskeletal Health in Pregnancy and Postpartum offers musculoskeletal medicine specialists, obstetricians and any clinicians involved in the care of pregnant or postpartum women the tools necessary to prepare for, treat and prevent these concurrent injuries during an already challenging time.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Elinor Mody, Elizabeth Matzkin, editors.
    Summary: Musculoskeletal Health in Women aims to provide fitness advice tailored to women. As women are more prone to specific injuries than men are, due to differences in hip and knee anatomy as well as hormonal differences, this book will provides a fully-illustrated and comprehensive overview of all aspects including energy availability (which is affected by eating disorders), osteoporosis, and menstrual function. Its multidisciplinary approach ensures that expertise is provided from disciplines such as psychiatry, physiatry, endocrinology, nutrition, rheumatology, orthopedics, physical therapy and radiology. Written by authors who have extensive experience working with women athletes, Musculoskeletal Health in Women addresses a full spectrum of issues related to the musculoskeletal health of women. It is of primary interest to women athletes and women embarking on a fitness regimen. Health professionals working in this area would also invariably benefit from the advice and guidance provided within these pages.

    Contents:
    1. The Female Athlete Triad
    2. Nutritional Recommendations for the Young and Aging Female
    3. Womens Bone Health: Breathing Life into the Skeleton
    4. Upper Limb Nerve Entrapment Syndromes
    5. Lower Limb Nerve Entrapment Syndromes
    6. Osteoarthritis and Gender-Specific Joint Replacement
    7. Nutraceuticals: An Alternative for Osteoarthritis Management
    8. Alternative Exercixe for Women.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    [edited by] Thomas L. Pope, Hans L. Bloem, Javier Beltran, William B. Morrison, David J. Wilson.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2015
  • Print
    editors, Paul J. Spicer, MD, Assistant Professor, Musculoskeletal and Women's Radiology, Department ofr Radiology, University of Kentucky, Lexington, Kentucky ; Francesca Beaman, MD, Assistant Professor, Division Chief, Musculoskeletal Radiology, Director, Musculoskeletal Radiology Fellowship Program, Assistant Director, Radiology Residency Program, Department of Radiology, University of Kentucky, Lexington, Kentucky ; Gustav A. Blomquist, MD, Assistant Professor, Musuloskeletal and Emergency Radiology, Department of Radiology, University of Kentucky, Lexington, Kentucky ; Justin Montgomery, MD, Assistant Professor, Muscloskeletal Radiology, Department of Radiology, University of Kentucky, Lexington, Kentucky ; Matthew E. Maxwell, MD, Fellow of Musculoskeletal Radiology, Department of Radiology, University of Kentucky, Lexington, Kentucky.
    Summary: "Musculoskeletal Imaging: A Core Review will consist of approximately 200 musculoskeletal radiology questions, in the format similar to the ABR core exam. Additionally, there will be an online database of approximately 300 questions, including an additional 100 questions. High quality radiographs, CT, MRI, and ultrasound images will be included. Answers to the questions will be discussed in a concise manner with explanations for why a particular answer choice is correct and the remaining answer choices are incorrect. Literature references will be provided for each answer explanation, so a reader will know where to go for further reading on the subject. This will be the first review book available to radiology residents preparing for the new American Board of Radiology (ABR) core exam. Key Features: 1st MSK review book geared to prep for the new ABR exam, 200 question in print + total of 300 on-line, Answers to the questions discussed in a concise manner with explanations for why a particular answer choice is correct and the remaining answer choices are incorrect, High quality radiographs, CT, MRI, and ultrasound images included"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Imaging techniques/physics/quality and safety
    Normal/normal variants
    Congenital and developmental spine/extremity anomalies and dysplasias
    Infection
    Tumors and tumor-like conditions
    Trauma
    Metabolic and hematologic disorders
    Arthropathy
    Miscellaneous.
    Print Unavailable: Checked out Recall Item
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC925.7 .M8785 2015
    1
  • Digital
    editors, Paul J. Spicer, Francesca Beaman, Gustav A. Blomquist, Justin Montgomery, Matthew E. Maxwell.
    Digital Access Ovid 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Julie Reznicek, Paul W. Perdue, Jr., Gonzalo Bearman.
    Summary: This book aims to concisely present the most common types of musculoskeletal infections and demonstrate the key components of accurate diagnosis, treatment, and management. Written by experts in both infectious diseases and orthopaedics, the text takes a reader-friendly approach that is ideal for medical professionals in training as students or as seasoned practitioners strengthening their skills. Case chapters include a color clinical image as well as radiographic images for superior visual support. They conclude with 4-6 bulleted high yield points for quick reference and reader retention. The cases presented in Musculoskeletal Infections: A Clinical Case Book provide relevant and challenging diagnostic and management issues in musculoskeletal infectious disease, with an emphasis on clinical pearls and medical-surgical collaboration.

    Contents:
    Pre surgical Staphylococcal decolonization in orthopedic surgery
    Prosthetic Joint Infection (Hip or Knee)
    Cutibacterium acnes and the Shoulder
    Initial Open Fracture Management and Antibiotics
    Local Antibiotics for Open Fracture
    Open Tibia Fracture with Progression to an Infected Nonunion
    Open Fractures: Infected Non-Union
    Diabetic Foot Ulcerations
    Wound Care Techniques
    Non-operative Management of the Diabetic Foot Infection
    Onychomycosis and Related Treatment
    Osteomyelitis of the Maxillofacial Region
    Bacterial Flexor Tenosynovitis
    Acute Paronychia and Felon
    Pediatric Septic Hip
    Chronic Recurrent Multifocal Osteomyelitis
    Antimicrobial Dosing in the Elderly Population
    Soft Tissue Infection, Necrotizing Fasciitis/Gas Gangrene
    Psoas Abscesses
    Staphylococcal aureus Skin Infections
    Vertebral Osteomyelitis and Discitis.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Kenneth L. Cameron, Brett D. Owens, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I. The spectrum of musculoskeletal injuries in the military
    The burden of musculoskeletal injuries in the military / Brett D. Owens and Kenneth L. Cameron
    Traumatic combat injuries / Andrew J. Schoenfeld and Philip J. Belmont
    The burden of deployment-related non-battle injuries (NBIs) and their impact on the musculoskeletal system / Kenneth L. Cameron
    Sports and exercise-related injuries in the military / Michael Garrison, Scott Dembowski, and Nathan Shepard
    Musculoskeletal injuries during military initial entry training / Scott D. Carow and Jennifer L. Gaddy
    Disability associated with musculoskeletal injuries / Chad A. Krueger and James R. Ficke
    Part II. The epidemiology of musculoskeletal injuries by anatomic region
    Shoulder injuries / Christopher J. Tucker and Brett D. Owens
    Elbow, wrist, and hand injuries / Danielle L. Scher, Emily H. Shin, Jennifer M. Wolf, and Leon J. Nesti
    Hip injuries / Joseph T. Lanzi and Steven J. Svoboda
    Knee injuries / Jeremy McCallum and John M. Tokish
    Lower leg, ankle, and foot injuries / Brian R. Waterman, John Dunn, and Justin D. Orr
    Thoracic and lumbar spine injuries / Jeffrey B. Knox and Joseph Orchowski
    Cervical spine and neck injuries / Scott C. Wagner and Ronald A. Lehman
    Part III. Public health strategies for injury prevention and treatment in the military
    Application of the public health model for musculoskeletal injury prevention within the military / Kenneth L. Cameron
    Successful injury prevention interventions / Sarah J. de la Motte and Robert Oh
    Overcoming barriers to injury prevention in the military / Deydre S. Teyhen, Stephen L. Goffar, Timothy L. Pendergrass, Scott W. Shaffer, and Nikki Butler.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    [edited by] Barbara J. Hoogenboom, Michael L. Voight, William E. Prentice.
    Summary: "Musculoskeletal Interventions, Third Edition, is a comprehensive guide to the system considerations, design, implementation, and progression of rehabilitation programs for musculoskeletal injuries and dysfunction."--Back cover.

    Contents:
    pt. 1, Foundations of the rehabilitation process :
    1. Introduction to the therapeutic interventions: the guide to physical therapist practice, clinical reasoning, and an algorithmic-approach to intervention / Barbara J. Hoogenboom, Michael L. Voight
    2. Understanding and managing the healing process through rehabilitation / William E. Prentice
    3. Neuromusculoskeletal scan examination / John S. Halle
    4. Impairments caused by pain / Craig R. Denegar, William E. Prentice
    5. Impaired posture and function / Phil Page. pt. 2, Treating physiologic impairments during rehabilitation :
    6. Impaired muscle performance: regaining muscular strength, endurance, and power / William E. Prentice
    7. Impaired endurance: maintaining aerobic capacity and endurance / Patrick Sells, William E. Prentice
    8. Impaired mobility: restoring range of motion and improving flexibility / William E. Prentice
    9. Impaired neuromuscular control: reactive neuromuscular training / Michael L. Voight, Gray Cook. pt. 3, The tools of rehabilitation :
    10. Plyometric exercise in rehabilitation / Michael L. Voight, Steven R. Tippett
    11. Open- versus closed-kinetic-chain exercise in rehabilitation / William E. Prentice
    12. Proprioceptive neuromuscular facilitation techniques in rehabilitation / William E. Prentice
    13. Joint mobilization and traction techniques in rehabilitation / William E. Prentice
    14. Regaining postural stability and balance / Kevin M. Guskiewicz
    15. Establishing core stability in rehabilitation / Barbara J. Hoogenboom, Jolene L. Bennett, Mark Clark
    16. Aquatic therapy in rehabilitation / Barbara J. Hoogenboom, Nancy E. Lomax
    17. Functional movement assessment / Barbara J. Hoogenboom, Michael L. Voight, Gray Cook, Greg Rose
    18. Functional exercise progression and functional testing in rehabilitation / Turner A. Blackburn, Jr., John A. Guido, Jr.
    19. Functional training and advances rehabilitation / Michael L. Voight, Barbara J. Hoogenboom, Gray Cook, Greg Rose. pt. 4, Intervention strategies for specific injuries :
    20. Rehabilitation of shoulder injuries / Joseph Myers, Terri Jo Rucinski, William E. Prentice, Rob Schneider
    21. Rehabilitation of the elbow / Todd S. Ellenbecker, Tad Pieczynski, David Carfagno
    22. Rehabilitation of the wrist, hand, and digits / Jeanine Beasley, Diana Lunsford
    23. Rehabilitation of the groin, hip, and thigh / Timothy F. Tyler, Stephanie M. Squitieri, Gregory C. Thomas
    24. Rehabilitation of the knee / Robert C. Manske, B.J. Lehecka, Mark De Carlo, Ryan McDivitt
    25. Rehabilitation of lower-leg injuries / Christopher J. Hirth
    26. Rehabilitation of the ankle and foot / Scott Miller, Stuart L. (Skip) Hunter, William E. Prentice
    27. Cervical and thoracic spine / Terry L. Grindstaff, Eric M. Magrum
    28. Rehabilitation of injuries to the lumbar and sacral spine / Daniel L. Hooker, William E. Prentice. pt. 5, Special considerations for specific patient populations ;
    29. Rehabilitation considerations for the older adult / Jolene L. Bennett, Michael Shoemaker
    30. Considerations for the pediatric patient / Steven R. Tippett
    31. Considerations for the physically active female / Barbara J. Hoogenboom, Teresa L. Schuemann, Robyn K. Smith.
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2014
  • Digital
    Barbara J. Hoogenboom, Michael L. Voight, William E. Prentice.
    Summary: "The purpose of this edition is to provide a comprehensive guide to assist practitioners with design, implementation, alterations, and progressions of rehabilitation programs for patients and clients with musculoskeletal dysfunction. Such dysfunction could occur due to injury, postoperative conditions, as well as due to disuse, or suboptimal or inefficient movement. It is intended for use in musculoskeletal courses that teach students the tenets of clinical decision-making, exercise selection/prescription, and progression in therapeutic interventions and rehabilitation programs, as well as for practicing clinicians seeking novel exercise interventions"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction to Therapeutic Interventions: The Human Movement System: The Guide to Physical Therapist Practice and Clinical Reasoning
    Understanding and Managing the Healing Process Through Rehabilitation
    Neuromuscular Scan Examination
    Impairments Caused by Pain
    Impaired Posture and Function
    Impaired Muscle Performance: Regaining Muscular Strength, Endurance, and Power
    Impaired Endurance: Maintaining Aerobic Capacity and Endurance
    Impaired Mobility: Restoring Range of Motion and Improving Flexibility
    Impaired Neuromuscular Control: Reactive Neuromuscular Training
    Plyometric Exercise in Rehabilitation
    Open vs Closed Kinetic Chain Exercise in Rehabilitation
    Proprioceptive Neuromuscular Facilitation Techniques in Rehabilitation
    Joint Mobilization and Traction Techniques in Rehabilitation
    Regaining Postural Stability and Balance
    Establishing Core Stability in Rehabilitation
    Aquatic Therapy in Rehabilitation
    Functional Movement Assessment
    Functional Exercise Progression and Functional Testing in Rehabilitation
    The Foundations of Movement: Developing Neuromuscular Control
    Rehabilitation of Shoulder Injuries
    Rehabilitation of the Elbow
    Rehabilitation of the Wrist, Hand, and Digits
    Rehabilitation of Hip, Groin, and Pelvis
    Current Concepts of Knee Rehabilitation
    Rehabilitation of Lower-Leg Injuries
    Rehabilitation of the Ankle and Foot
    Cervical and Thoracic Spine
    Rehabilitation of Injuries to the Lumbar and Sacral Spine
    Rehabilitation Considerations for the Older Adult
    Considerations for the Pediatric Patient
    Considerations for the Physically Active Female.
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2021
  • Digital
    Nancy M. Major, Mark W. Anderson, Clyde A. Helms, Phoebe A. Kaplan, Robert Dussault.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2020
  • Digital
    Tarek M. Hegazi, Jim S. Wu.
    Summary: This book teaches readers how to interpret, read, and dictate musculoskeletal (MSK) MRI studies through a series of very high yield MSK MRI cases. The amount of knowledge needed to practice radiology can be daunting. This is especially true when the radiologist has to read studies in a subspecialty outside their expertise such as MSK MRI where there are numerous disease entities and complex imaging findings to navigate. Learning how to read MSK MRI studies is often taught during a lengthy fellowship; however, many radiologists do not have this additional training but must read MSK studies during their routine clinical practice. This book fills that educational gap for practicing radiologists faced with musculoskeletal MRIs. The cases in the book focus on the conditions that radiologists encounter most frequently in their daily clinical work, making it very high yield for the amount of time needed to read it. Written by experts from Harvard Medical School, the cases are organized by joints (shoulder, elbow, wrist/hand, pelvis/hip, knee, foot/ankle). Four additional chapters discussing arthritis, infection, bone marrow and tumors are also included. Each case begins with carefully selected high quality MRI images accompanied by a brief clinical vignette. Next, a concise report (as if one is dictating an official report) describing the imaging findings, diagnosis, and recommendations for management are provided. This sample dictation offers readers direct examples of how to report their own cases. Lastly, at the end of each case, there is a brief discussion section which mimics teaching sessions that would occur between specialist trainees and faculty members at the workstation so as to enable the readers to think like a bone radiologist. This book is an ideal guide for anyone who deals with MSK MRI on a regular basis, including general radiologists who have not completed a dedicated musculoskeletal radiology fellowship, radiologists who would want to brush up on their MSK MRI reading and reporting skills, and MSK radiology fellows and residents. .

    Contents:
    Shoulder
    Elbow
    Wrist and Hand
    Hips and Pelvis
    Knee
    Foot and Ankle
    Arthritis
    Tumors
    Infections
    Marrow.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    [edited by] Gerard A. Malanga, Kenneth Mautner.
    Contents:
    Introduction : an evidence-based approach to the musculoskeletal physical examination / Gerard Malanga, Kenneth Mautner
    Reliability and validity of physical examinations / Heather R. Galgon, Larry H. Chou
    Sensory, motor, and reflex examination / Jeffrey A. Strakowski, Matthew J. Fanous, John Kincaid
    Physical examination of the cervical spine / Lisa Huynh, David J. Kennedy
    Physical examination of the shoulder / Edward McFarland, Jay E. Bowen, Amrut Borade, Gerard A. Malanga, Tutankhamen Pappoe
    Physical examination of the elbow / Kenneth Montgomery, Teo Mendez-Zfass, Andrew Willis
    Examination of the wrist and hand / Keith Bengston
    Physical examination of the lumbar spine and sacroiliac joint / David Nathan Woznica, Joel Press
    Physical examination of the pelvis and hip / Ken Mautner, J.W. Thomas Byrd, Walter Sussman, Brian Krabak
    Physical examination of the knee / Anthony Beutler, Francis G. O'Connor
    Physical examination of the foot and ankle / Maj Ross A. Schumer, Mederic M. Hall, Annunziato (Ned) Amendola.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2017
  • Digital
    Pawel Szaro.
    Summary: This book allows residents and specialists in radiology to assess knowledge about musculoskeletal radiology. Most of the book's questions, stemming from the authors experience of teaching residents in radiology at Sahlgrenska University Hospital in Gothenburg, Sweden, are very practical and often based on differential diagnosis, which is crucial in musculoskeletal radiology. Problem-based learning is useful in deep learning and allows a better understanding of pathological processes in the bones, joints, tendons, and muscles. The questions focus on clinical problems encountered during radiological examinations like MRI (the most fascinating and difficult one for residents), CT, ultrasound, or x-rays, and are intended to stimulate the daily evaluation of examinations. The book, enriched by videos as electronic supplementary material, is written for practitioners who evaluate examinations in musculoskeletal radiology. The information contained in the book is up-to-date and consistent with the results of the current scientific researches, which can be found under the answer to each question in the form of a concise summary. The current proposal will fill a gap in the radiological literature in comprehensive self-assessment of musculoskeletal radiology and can be used by residents and young specialists.

    Contents:
    Part 1. Trauma
    Upper extremity
    Lower extremity spine
    Axial skeleton
    Miscellanea
    Part 2. Non-traumatic lesions
    Tumours and tumour like lesions
    Arthritis
    Metabolic diseases
    Interventional radiology in the musculoskeletal system
    Part 3. Examinations
    Examination set 1
    Examination set 2
    Examination set 3.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Feza Korkusuz editor.
    Contents:
    Biomaterials and Biomechanics
    Imaging
    Tissues, Structures and Functions
    Basic Pathology
    Oncogenesis and Tumors
    Basic Pharmacology
    Research Principles and Thesis Preparation
    Basic Anatomy.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Stuart B. Kahn, Rachel Yinfei Xu, editors.
    Summary: Fulfilling the need for an easy-to-use resource on managing musculoskeletal disorders and sports injuries, this book provides differential diagnostic workups with recommended gold standard evaluations that lead to a simple and accurate diagnosis, followed by first-line treatment options. Organized by five sections - head and neck, upper extremity, lower extremity, abdomen/pelvis with trunk and chest, and cervical, thoracic and lumbosacral spine - chapters present a concise summary and move on to a description of the most common symptoms, etiology, epidemiology and/or common causes if traumatic in nature. The best and most accepted diagnostic tests are illustrated, along with recommended evidence-based medicine and what may be done based on community standards of care. Treatment options will be listed in order of the most conservative to the most aggressive. This complete reference will provide primary care, physiatry, and ER physicians, residents, PA's and students a simple and practical approach for clinical and academic use.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Yasser El Miedany, editor.
    Contents:
    1. Fundamentals of musculoskeletal ultrasound
    2. Pitfalls in musculoskeletal ultrasound
    3. Rheumatod arthritis
    4. Ankylosing spondylitis
    5. Psoriatic arthritis
    6. Osteoarthritis
    7. Crystal-induced arthritis
    8. Skin, nail and hair in rheumatology
    9. Pediatric musculoskeletal disorders
    10. Carpal tunnel syndrome
    11. Soft tissue rheumatism
    12. Inflammatory allied conditions
    13. Sports medicine
    14. Ultrasound-guided interventional maneuvers
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Yasser El Miedany, editor.
    Summary: The book examines recent developments in regenerative medicine and the use of musculoskeletal ultrasound. Musculoskeletal regeneration has become a prominent research topic, no doubt due to the sociological and economic pressures imposed by the current ageing population. The ever expanding role of regenerative medicine and the identification as well as characterization of stem cells have introduced a major paradigm shift in the field of musculoskeletal and sports medicine as well as orthopaedic surgery. Whereas in the past, diseased tissue was replaced with allograft material, current trends in research revolve around regenerating damaged tissue. Specifically, regenerative medicine stands in contrast to the standard treatment modalities which impair the bodys natural abilities to facilitate endogenous repair mechanisms such as anti-inflammatory drugs; or destructive modalities (e.g., radiotherapy, nerve ablation, injections of botulinum toxin) and surgical interventions that permanently alter the functioning of a joint, bone or spine. When compared to other allopathic options (including knee and hip arthroplasty with a 90-day mortality rate of 0.7%), regenerative medicine treatment modalities have a lower incidence of adverse events with a growing body of statistically significant medical literature illustrating both their safety and efficacy. Focusing on the major values of regenerative medicine, this book with its 21 chapters is expected to fill an important void in the current literature. It will take that extra step to guide you in your day to day clinical practice. Featuring contributions from a large international group of leaders in regenerative medicine and musculoskeletal ultrasonography, this book is an authoritative reference for rheumatologists, physiatrists, sonographers, radiologists, physiotherapists and orthopaedic specialists.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Minna J. Kohler, editor.
    Contents:
    Introduction: Musculoskeletal Ultrasound Indications and Fundamentals
    Basic Ultrasound Pathology
    Synovitis Evaluation
    Ultrasound of the Hand and Wrist
    Ultrasound of the Elbow
    Ultrasound of the Shoulder
    Ultrasound of the Hip
    Ultrasound of the Knee
    Ultrasound of the Ankle and Foot
    Pediatric Ultrasound
    Ultrasound-Guided Injections
    Ultrasound in Vasculitis.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Minna J. Kohler, editor.
    Contents:
    Part 1. Fundamentals of Musculoskeletal Ultrasound
    Chapter 1: Introduction: Musculoskeletal Ultrasound Indications and Fundamentals
    Chapter 2: Basic Sonopathology and Implementing Musculoskeletal Ultrasound into Clinical Practice
    Chapter 3: Ultrasound of the Hand and Wrist
    Chapter 4: Ultrasound of the Elbow
    Chapter 5: Ultrasound of the Shoulder
    Chapter 6: Ultrasound of the Hip
    Chapter 7: Ultrasound of the Knee
    Chapter 8: Ultrasound of the Ankle and Foot
    Chapter 9: Ultrasound-Guided Injections
    Chapter 10: Pediatric Musculoskeletal Ultrasonography
    Part II. Rheumatic Diseases
    Chapter 11: Ultrasound in Rheumatoid Arthritis
    Chapter 12: Use of Ultrasound in Psoriatic Arthritis
    Chapter 13: Ultrasound in Crystalline Diseases: Gout and calcium associated arthritis
    Chapter 14: Ultrasound in Osteoarthritis
    Chapter 15: Ultrasound in Systemic Sclerosis and Systemic Lupus Erythematosus
    Part III. Beyond Musculoskeletal Ultrasound
    Chapter 16: Ultrasound in Vasculitis
    Chapter 17: Salivary Gland Ultrasound for Sjogrens Syndrome
    Chapter 18: Lung Ultrasound for Rheumatic Diseases
    Chapter 19: Advanced Ultrasound Applications: Elastography and Contrast-enhanced Ultrasound.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Fabio Martino, Enzo Silvestri, Davide Orlandi, editors.
    Summary: This book presents the major advances and technological updates in diagnostic ultrasound procedures, focusing on the principal technological aspects and multiple exam procedures for the pertinent anatomy, both under basal conditions and using Doppler techniques. It offers a comprehensive and precise evaluation of the ultrasound semiotics of the musculoskeletal apparatus, with descriptions of numerous rheumatic and orthopedic disease patterns. It also discusses in detail the vital role of ultrasound in monitoring chronic inflammatory joint disease during therapy, and brand-new highly sensitive Doppler techniques. In view of the tremendous impact of ultrasound-guided interventional procedures on the management of drug delivery in a musculoskeletal setting, the book also includes a chapter on the practical aspects of performing US-guided diagnostic and therapeutic procedures. Providing outstanding diagrams, dynamic images and videos to guide readers, it is a valuable resource for radiologists and clinicians (rheumatologists, orthopedists, physiatrists and anesthesiologists) with different levels of experience ranging from physicians in training to those who already perform US examinations and US-guided procedures.

    Contents:
    1. Osseous and cartilagineous surface
    2. Synovial spaces
    3. Tendons and ligaments
    4. Muscles
    5. Peripheral nerves
    6. Dermis and Hypodermis
    7. Osteoarthritis
    8. Rheumatoid arthritis
    9. Seronegative spondyloarthritis.-10. Crystal-related arthropathies
    11. Connective tissue disorders
    12. Metabolic diseases
    13. Synovial osteochondromatosis
    14. Pigmented villonodular synovitis
    15. Shoulder calcific tendinitis
    16 Frozen shoulder
    17. Septic arthritis
    18. Hemophiliac arthropathy,- 19. Bone trauma
    20. Muscle injury
    21. Tendon
    22. Superficial interosseous ligament injury
    23. Peripheral entrapment neuropathies
    24. Bone fracture healing
    25. Tendon and muscle rupture repair
    26. Therapy efficacy evaluation in synovitis
    27. Introduction
    28. Joint and bursal infiltration
    29. Tendon infiltrative and regenerative treatments
    30. Calcific tendinitis treatment
    31. Peripheral nerve block
    32. Fluid collection evacuation.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Mari Dezawa.
    Summary: This book provides the first comprehensive account of multilineage-differentiating stress-enduring (Muse) cells, a pluripotent and non-tumorigenic subpopulation of mesenchymal stem cells (MSCs) that have the ability to detect damage signals, migrate to damaged sites, and spontaneously differentiate into cells compatible with the affected tissue, thereby enabling repair of all tissue types. The coverage encompasses everything from the basic properties of Muse cells to their tissue repair effects and potential clinical applications--for example, in acute myocardial infarction, stroke, skin injuries and ulcers, renal failure, and liver disease. An important technical chapter provides a practical and precise protocol for the isolation of Muse cells, which will enable readers to use Muse cells in their own research. In offering fascinating insights into the strategic organization of the body's reparative function and explaining how full utilization of Muse cells may significantly enhance the effectiveness of MSC treatment, the book will be of high value for Ph.D. students, postdocs, basic researchers, clinical doctors, and industrial developers.

    Contents:
    The muse cell discovery, thanks to wine and science / Mari Dezawa
    Basic characteristics of muse cells / Shohei Wakao, Yoshihiro Kushida, Mari Dezawa
    Muse cells are endogenous reparative stem cells / Yoshihiro Kushida, Shohei Wakao, Mari Dezawa
    Protocols for isolation and evaluation of muse cells / Kazuki Tatsumi, Yoshihiro Kushida, Shohei Wakao, Yasumasa Kuroda, Mari Dezawa
    Stem cells and dna repair capacity: muse stem cells are among the best performers / Tiziana Squillaro, Nicola Alessio, Giovanni Di Bernardo, Servet Özcan, Gianfranco Peluso, Umberto Galderisi
    Immunomodulatory properties and potential therapeutic benefits of muse cells administration in diabetes / Marcelo Javier Perone, María Laura Gimeno, Florencia Fuertes
    The role of the mitochondria in the evolution of stem cells, including MUSE stem cells and their biology / James E. Trosko
    Acute myocardial infarction, cardioprotection, and muse cells / Shinya Minatoguchi, Atsushi Mikami, Toshiki Tanaka, Shingo Minatoguchi, Yoshihisa Yamada
    Application of muse cell therapy to stroke / Kuniyasu Niizuma, Cesar V. Borlongan, Teiji Tominaga
    Muse cell: a new paradigm for cell therapy and regenerative homeostasis in ischemic stroke / Satoshi Kuroda, Masaki Koh, Emiko Hori, Yumiko Hayakawa, Takuya Akai
    Application of muse cell therapy for kidney diseases / Nao Uchida, Naonori Kumagai, Yoshiaki Kondo
    Liver regeneration supported by muse cells / Satoshi S. Nishizuka, Yuji Suzuki, Hirokatsu Katagiri, Yasuhiro Takikawa
    Current cell-based therapies in the chronic liver diseases / Taketo Nishina, Kyoko Tomita Hoshikawa, Yoshiyuki Ueno
    Artificial pigmented human skin created by muse cells / Takeshi Yamauchi, Kenshi Yamasaki, Kenichiro Tsuchiyama, Setsuya Aiba
    Muse cells and aortic aneurysm / Katsuhiro Hosoyama, Yoshikatsu Saiki
    Muse cells and ischemia-reperfusion lung injury / Hiroshi Yabuki, Tatsuaki Watanabe, Hisashi Oishi, Masato Katahira, Masahiko Kanehira, Yoshinori Okada
    Clinical trials of muse cells / Mari Dezawa
    Future of muse cells / Wise Young.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Jesús Pérez-Moreno [and more], editors.
    Summary: This book focuses on recent advances in our understanding of wild edible mycorrhizal fungi, truffle and mushrooms and their cultivation. In addition to providing fresh insights into various topics, e.g. taxonomy, ecology, cultivation and environmental impact, it also demonstrates the clear but fragile link between wild edible mushrooms and human societies. Comprising 17 chapters written by 41 experts from 13 countries on four continents, it enables readers to grasp the importance of protecting this unique, invaluable, renewable resource in the context of climate change and unprecedented biodiversity loss. The book inspires professionals and encourages young researchers to enter this field to develop the sustainable use of wild edible mushrooms using modern tools and approaches. It also highlights the importance of protecting forested environments, saving species from extinction and generating a significant income for local populations, while keeping alive and renewing the link between humans and wild edible mushrooms so that in the future, the sustainable farming and use of edible mycorrhizal mushrooms will play a predominant role in the management and preservation of forested lands.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Prologue
    References
    Contents
    About the Authors
    Part I: Introduction
    Chapter 1: Setting the Scene
    1.1 Believe It or Not
    1.2 Early Interactions
    1.3 The Global Interwoven Web Between Mushrooms and Humans
    References
    Part II: Biodiversity and Cultivation
    Chapter 2: Edible Ectomycorrhizal Fungi and Their Cultivation in China
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Diversity of Edible Ectomycorrhizal Mushrooms
    2.2.1 Truffles
    2.2.1.1 Black Truffles
    2.2.1.2 White Truffles
    2.2.1.3 Cuisine
    2.2.1.4 Conservation and Cultivation 2.2.2 Desert Truffles and Other Hypogeous Fungi
    2.2.2.1 Desert Truffles
    2.2.2.2 Shoro
    2.2.2.3 Choiromyces
    2.2.2.4 Yang-Yanjing (Astraeus hygrometricus)
    2.2.3 Porcini and Related Edible Mycorrhizal Mushrooms
    2.2.4 Russulaceae
    2.2.5 Shimeji
    2.2.6 Amanita
    2.2.7 Chanterelles and Craterellus
    2.2.8 Albatrellus
    2.2.9 Unique Edible Mycorrhizal Mushrooms
    References
    Chapter 3: Climate Change, Biotechnology, and Mexican Neotropical Edible Ectomycorrhizal Mushrooms
    3.1 Rationale
    3.2 Summarized Analysis
    3.3 Conclusions
    References 5.2.2.1 Planting and Irrigation
    5.2.2.2 Grass Control
    5.2.2.3 Pruning
    5.2.2.4 Fruiting Body Monitoring and Yields
    5.3 Case Study 1: Evolution of a Pinus radiata Plantation
    5.3.1 Tree Growth and Evolution of Mushroom Production for Individual Trees
    5.3.2 Saffron Milk Cap Production and the Distribution of Rainfall in 2012, 2013, and 2014
    5.3.3 Production During Two Consecutive Autumn Droughts (2015 and 2016)
    5.3.4 Overview of the Production During the First Seven Mushroom Seasons
    5.3.5 Outlook for the Future
    5.4 Case Study 2: Evolution of a Pinus sylvestris Plantation 5.4.1 Tree Growth and Onset of Fruiting
    5.4.2 Overview of the Production During the First Five Mushroom Seasons, Comparison with the Tank Site, and Outlook for the Future
    5.5 Mushroom Fruiting Observations
    5.5.1 Fruiting Distribution Around Trees
    5.5.2 Sustained Production from Fallen Trees
    5.5.3 Mushroom Yields per Tree
    5.5.4 Mushroom Size
    5.5.5 Fruiting Season Span and Unprecedented Winter Fruiting in 2016
    5.6 Cultivation Research: The Next Steps
    5.6.1 Plantation Design: Tree Composition, Plantation Layout, and Grass Cover Chapter 4: Diversity and Importance of Edible Ectomycorrhizal Fungi in Guatemala
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Natural History and Local Vegetation in Guatemala
    4.3 Fungi and Forests in Guatemala
    4.4 Fungi and Abies in Guatemala
    4.5 Fungi and Pinus in Guatemala
    4.6 Fungi and Quercus in Guatemala
    4.7 Ethnomycology
    4.8 Conclusions
    References
    Chapter 5: Advances in the Cultivation of Lactarius deliciosus (Saffron Milk Cap) in New Zealand
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Trial Plantations at PFR-Lincoln, Canterbury
    5.2.1 Establishment and Description
    5.2.2 Management
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Eckart Altenmüller, Stanley Finger, François Boller.
    Summary: Music, Neurology, and Neuroscience: Historical Connections and Perspectives provides a broad and comprehensive discussion of history and new discoveries regarding music and the brain, presenting a multidisciplinary overview on music processing, its effects on brain plasticity, and the healing power of music in neurological and psychiatric disorders. In this context, the disorders that plagued famous musicians and how they affected both performance and composition are critically discussed, as is music as medicine and its potential health hazard. Additional topics, including the way music fits into early conceptions of localization of function in the brain, its cultural roots in evolution, and its important roles in societies and educational systems are also explored.Examines music and the brain both historically and in the light of the latest research findings The largest and most comprehensive volume on "music and neurology" ever writtenWritten by a unique group of real world experts representing a variety of fields, ranging from history of science and medicine, to neurology and musicology Includes a discussion of the way music has cultural roots in evolution and its important role in societies
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2015
  • Digital
    Lars Ole Bonde, Töres Theorell, editors.
    Summary: From the Nordic countries (Denmark, Norway, Sweden and Finland) comes an exciting source of theoretical approaches, epidemiological findings, and real-life examples regarding the therapeutic and health-enhancing effects of music. Experts across fields including psychology, neurology, music therapy, medicine, and public health review research on the benefits of music in relieving physiological, psychological, and socioemotional dysfunction. Chapters link musical experiences (listening and performing, as well as involvement in movement, dance, and theatre) to a wide range of clinical and non-clinical objectives such as preventing isolation, regulating mood, reducing stress and its symptoms, and treating dementia. And the book's section on innovative music-based interventions illustrates opportunities for incorporating musical activities into public health programs. Among the topics covered are: · Associations between the use of music, cultural participation and health-related outcomes in adult Scandinavian populations · Music practice and emotion handling · How music translates itself biologically in the body · Music as a forum for social-emotional health · Participation and partnership as core concepts in music and public health · Music therapy as health promotion for mothers and children at a public health clinic Music and Public Health will gain interested readers among researchers, teachers, students, and clinicians in the fields of music education and therapy, as well as researchers and students of public health who are interested in the influence of culture and the arts. The book also will be relevant to administrators in public health services.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Olivia Swedberg Yinger.
    Summary: Get a quick, expert overview of the clinical and evidence-based use of music interventions in health care. This practical resource compiled by Dr. Olivia Swedberg Yinger provides a concise, useful overview of the profession of music therapy, including a description of each of the research-support practices that occur in the settings where music therapists most commonly work.

    Contents:
    Forward / Jayne M. Standley
    Author's preface / Olivia Swedberg Yinger
    Overview of the music therapy profession / Olivia Swedberg Yinger
    Neurologic foundations of music-based interventions / Kimberly Sena Moore
    Music therapy in educational settings / Michael R. Detmer
    Music therapy in mental health treatment / Lori F. Gooding
    Music therapy in medical treatment and rehabilitation / Darcy DeLoach
    Music therapy in hospice and palliative care / Meganne K. Masko
    Music therapy in gerontology / Olivia Swedberg Yinger
    Music therapy and wellness / Lorna E. Segall
    Current trends and future directions in music therapy / Alejandra J. Ferrer.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Print
    Bruno Colombo, editor.
    Summary: This book explores connections between music, neural activations and brain plasticity, in order to better understand its associated psychological and physiological effects. The final goal is to focus on the positive effects of music to treat neurological disorders, establishing a new co-ordination between different brain areas to improve both mental illness and wellbeing. A secondary goal is to analyse the role of music at a psycho-sociological level, to understand both the transformation of music into a cultural model and the vision of music as an innate instinct.Music is able to create both emotions and volitional processes. The application of new neuroimaging techniques allows us to explore and evaluate with accuracy what happens in our brain during the creative and artistic performance. A wide range of brain regions are recruited for creative tasks, and music has the opportunity to help in enhance and reset some brain pathological disturbances being also able to ameliorate and restore some rhythmic body activities such as sleep, movement and co-ordination. The book represents a valuable and innovative tool both for neurologists as well as healthcare professionals involved in the management of neurological disorders.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Introduction
    Music for brain pleasure
    Colored notes: physiological and pathological features
    Music and creativity: the auditory mirror system as a link between emotions and musical cognition
    The history of rhythm
    Music as sleep aid
    Music in Dementia: from impairmet in musical recognition to musical interventions
    Treating Parkinsons disease; the role of musicotherapy
    It thrills my soul to hear the song: musicolepsia
    Music and semiotic
    Flute and other musical instruments
    Neurological diseases in popular music
    Conclusions.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Ashutosh Kumar, Vasily N. Dobrovolsky, Alok Dhawan, Rishi Shanker.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Swati Palit Deb, Sumitra Deb, editor.
    Summary: This book provides the readers with an overview of research on p53, which has been shown to play a role in numerous crucial biological pathways in normal and cancer cells. Leading scientist in the field, who have all made direct contributions to the understanding of the molecular events underpinning p53 function, have been invited to contribute the various chapters, which discuss the current knowledge of the signaling cascades that are activated by mutations in p53 and overexpression of MDM2, frequently found in human cancer, and are major causes of oncogenesis. This book features chapters on the molecular basis of oncogenesis induced by gain of function mutation of p53, signaling pathways induced by MDM2 overexpression, control of mutant or wild-type p53 function by MDM2 and MDMX, p53 mutation in hereditary cancer, and structural aspects that activate mutant p53 which can be targeted by drug therapy. This book should be useful for scientists at all levels.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Barton D. Schmitt
    Contents:
    pt. 1. Fever symptoms
    pt. 2. Head or brain symptoms
    pt. 3. Eye symptoms
    pt. 4. Ear symptoms
    pt. 5. Nose symptoms
    pt. 6. Mouth or throat symptoms
    pt. 7. Lung or breathing symptoms
    pt. 8. Abdominal symptoms
    pt. 9. Genital or urinary symptoms
    pt. 10. Arm or leg symptoms
    pt. 11. Skin: Localized symptoms
    pt. 12. Skin: Widespread symptoms
    pt. 13. Bites or stings
    pt. 14. Miscellaneous symptoms
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2023
  • Digital
    Resmaa Menakem.
    Summary: "The body is where our instincts reside and where we fight, flee, or freeze, and it endures the trauma inflicted by the ills that plague society. In this groundbreaking work, therapist Resmaa Menakem examines the damage caused by racism in America from the perspective of body-centered psychology. He argues this destruction will continue until Americans learn to heal the generational anguish of white supremacy, which is deeply embedded in all our bodies. Our collective agony doesn't just affect African Americans. White Americans suffer their own secondary trauma as well. So do blue Americans -- our police. My Grandmother's Hands is a call to action for all of us to recognize that racism is not about the head, but about the body, and introduces an alternative view of what we can do to grow beyond our entrenched racialized divide."--Amazon.com.

    Contents:
    Do not cross this line
    Watch your body
    Acknowledging our ancestors
    Our bodies, our country
    Unarmed and dismembered . Your body and blood ; Black, white, blue, and you ; Body to body, generation to generation ; European trauma and the invention of whiteness ; Assaulting the black heart ; Violating the black body ; The false fragility of the white body ; White-body supremacy and the police body ; Changing the world begins with your body
    Remembering ourselves. Your soul nerve ; Settling and safeguarding your body ; The wisdom of clean pain ; Reaching out to other bodies ; Harmonizing with other bodies ; Mending the black heart and body ; Mending the white heart and body ; Mending the police heart and body
    Mending our collective body. Body-centered activism ; Creating culture ; Cultural healing for African Americans ; Whiteness without supremacy ; Reshaping police culture ; Healing is in our hands ; The reckoning
    Afterword
    Five opportunities of healing and making room for growth.
    Digital Access EBSCO 2017
  • Print
    Jocelyn Nicole Johnson.
    Summary: "An irresistibly accessible yet startlingly bold book of short stories and a novella, inspired by Black lives in America and featuring the gripping eponymous work "My Monticello.""-- Provided by publisher. Johnson's characters traverse Virginia's landscapes, still stained by some of America's most heinous acts, in pursuit of a place to call home. In each story, she reveals intimate moments within the nation's multitudes, featuring unforgettable characters who struggle beneath burdened inheritances yet manage to persist and love. -- adapted from jacket

    Contents:
    Control Negro
    Virginia is not your home
    Something sweet on our tongues
    Buying a house ahead of the apocalypse
    The king of Xandria
    My Monticello.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    PS3610.O35648 M9 2021
    1
  • Digital
    written by Narelle Mullins & Eleanor Ball ; illustrated by Paul Carter.
    Summary: "Mental health problems during pregnancy and after childbirth are common, proving a difficult time for affected mothers, but also for young children within the family and the wider family network. This reassuring workbook provides young children with ways to understand and cope at this challenging time. With a percentage of profits going to support affected mothers and their families, this interactive and engaging text provides a practical approach to mental health problems. Through beautiful illustrations and interactivity the effect on children aged three and above is explored, providing them an outlet to express their feelings and receive vital answers. Alongside family members, teachers or healthcare professionals, this topical workbook explaining the brain and feelings in a child-centric way encourages a heightened, positive awareness of a delicately complex topic"-- Provided by publisher. "We wrote this book to help young children understand the mental health problems that can happen around the time their parent has a new baby. Although it can be read as a book it may also be approached as a workbook that the young child can sit down and work through with an adult and this could be over a number of sittings. An appropriate adult could be a family member, childcare practitioner, schoolteacher or anyone else you feel appropriate. For very young children it may be best to pick out certain parts or pictures in the book relevant to what you want to help your child to understand. We made the book interactive and we hope it's fun for young children as well as getting across helpful key points. If you have any concerns about your young child, please contact a health professional. This could be your health visitor, GP or a childcare practitioner. Finally we would love your feedback if you have time so we can evolve and improve the book. Please email us at feedback@mymummyand.me"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    author: Motoo Kimura.
    Contents:
    Intro
    In Memory
    Translators ́Notes and Acknowledgments
    Preface
    Contents
    1: Diversity of Organisms and Views on Evolution
    1.1 Diversity of Organisms
    1.2 Biological Evolution as a Fact
    1.3 History of the Development of Evolutionary Theory
    1.3.1 Lamarck and Darwin
    1.3.2 Contribution of Mendel
    2: History of the Development of the Theory of Evolutionary Mechanism on the Basis of Genetics
    2.1 Troubled Beginnings
    2.2 Formation of Population Genetics
    2.3 Synthetic Theory of Evolution and Panselectionism 2.4 Studies of Molecular Evolution and the Neutral Theory
    2.5 Other Evolutionary Theories
    3: Tracing the Course of Evolution
    3.1 Outline of the History of Life
    3.2 Evolution of Vertebrates
    3.3 Evolution of Mammals
    3.4 Evolution of Primates and the Emergence of Hominins
    4: Mutation as an Evolutionary Factor
    4.1 A Genetic View of Life
    4.2 Nature and Variety of Mutations
    4.3 The Nature of Gene Mutation
    4.4 Phenotypic Effects of Gene Mutations
    5: On Natural Selection and Adaptation
    5.1 Darwin on Natural Selection 5.2 Modern Developments in the Theory of Natural Selection
    6: Introduction to Population Genetics
    6.1 What Is Population Genetics?
    6.2 Gene Frequency and Mating System
    6.3 On Genetic Equilibrium
    6.4 On Genetic Drift
    6.5 Behavior of a Mutant Gene in the Population
    7: Introduction to Molecular Evolution
    7.1 Eve of Molecular Evolutionary Studies
    7.2 Basic Knowledge for Understanding Molecular Evolution
    7.3 Estimation of the Rate of Molecular Evolution
    7.4 Characteristics of Molecular Evolution
    7.5 Accumulation Process of Mutations within a Species 8: The Neutral Theory and Molecular Evolution
    8.1 Explanation by the Neutral Theory
    8.2 Intraspecific Variation at the Molecular Level
    8.3 Molecular Evolutionary Clock and Molecular Phylogeny
    8.4 Other Topics Related to Neutral Evolution
    8.5 Bridging Molecular Evolution and Phenotypic Evolution
    9: An Evolutionary Genetic World View
    9.1 The Human as a Product of Evolution
    9.2 Thinking about the Question of Eugenics
    9.3 Positive Eugenics and the Future of Mankind
    9.4 Human Expansion into Space and Evolution
    References
    Chapter I
    Chapter II
    Chapter III Chapter IV
    Chapter V
    Chapter VI
    Chapter VII
    Chapter VIII
    Chapter IX
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    by Martin J. Schreiber with Cathy Breitenbucher ; [foreword by Mark Johnson].
    Summary: Former governor of Wisconsin Marty Schreiber has seen his beloved wife, Elaine, gradually transform from the woman who gracefully entertained in the Executive Residence to one who no longer recognizes him as her husband. In My Two Elaines, Marty candidly counsels those taking on this caregiving role.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC523 .S37 2017
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Tanya Parish and David M. Roberts.
    Contents:
    Whole-genome sequencing for comparative genomics and de novo genome assembly / Andrej Benjak, Claudia Sala, and Ruben C. Hartkoorn
    Whole-transcriptome sequencing for high-resolution transcriptomic analysis in mycobacterium tuberculosis / Andrej Benjak, Claudia Sala, and Ruben C. Hartkoorn
    RNA sequencing for transcript 5'-end mapping in mycobacteria / Scarlet S. Shell [and 3 otherst]
    Fractionation and analysis of mycobacterial proteins / Megan C. Lucas [and 6 others]
    Lipid and lipoarabinomannan isolation and characterization / Marie-Antoinette Lanéelle, Jérôme Nigou, and Mamadou Daffé
    Metabolomics of mycobacterium tuberculosis / Madhumitha Nandakumar [and 3 others]
    Electroporation of mycobacteria / Renan Goude, David M. Roberts, and Tanya Parish
    Targeted gene knockout and essentiality testing by homologous recombination / Krishnamoorthy Gopinath, Digby F. Warner, and Valerie Mizrahi
    Construction of conditional knockdown mutants in mycobacteria / Dirk Schnappinger, Kathryn M. O'Brien, and Sabine Ehrt
    Mycobacterial recombineering / Kenan C. Murphy, Kadamba Papavinasasundaram, and Christopher M. Sassetti
    In vitro models that utilize hypoxia to induce non-replicating persistence in mycobacteria / Charles D. Sohaskeyand Martin I. Voskuil
    Genetic dissection of mycobacterial biofilms / Anil K. Ojha, William R. Jacobs Jr., and Graham F. Hatfull
    Measuring efflux and permeability in mycobacteria / Liliana Rodrigues, Miguel Viveiros, and José A. Aínsa
    Single-cell analysis of mycobacteria using microfluidics and time-lapse microscopy / Neeraj Dharand and Giulia Manina
    Antimicrobial susceptibility testing for Mycobacterium sp. / Delia Blanco-Ruano [and 6 others]
    Determination of compound kill kinetics against mycobacterium tuberculosis / Julie Early and Torey Alling
    Microplate alamar blue assay (MABA) and low oxygen recovery assay (LORA) for mycobacterium tuberculosis Sanghyun Cho, Hyung Sup Lee, and Scott Franzblau
    Multi-stress model for high throughput screening against non-replicating mycobacterium tuberculosis / Ben Gold, Thulasi Warrier, and Carl Nathan
    Isolation and characterization of compound-resistant isolates of mycobacterium tuberculosis / Theresa O'Malley and Eduard Melief
    Macrophage infection models for mycobacterium tuberculosis / Benjamin K. Johnson and Robert B. Abramovitch
    Infection of human neutrophils to study virulence properties of mycobacterium tuberculosis / Tobias Dallenga, Björn Corleis, and Ulrich E. Schaible
    Isolation of bead phagosomes to study virulence function of M. tuberculosis cell wall lipids / Anna C. Geffken, Emmanuel C. Patin, and Ulrich E. Schaible
    Live imaging of mycobacterium marinum infection in dictyostelium discoideum / Caroline Barisch, Ana T. López-Jiménez, and Thierry Soldati
    Testing chemical and genetic modulators in mycobacterium tuberculosis infected cells using phenotypic assays / Vincent Delorme [and 3 others].
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Domenico Bonamonte, Gianni Angelini, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Seyed Ehtesham Hasnain, Nasreen Z. Ehtesham, Sonam Grover, editors.
    Summary: This book reviews recent advances in the molecular and infection biology, pathology, and molecular epidemiology of Mycobacterium tuberculosis, as well as the identification and validation of novel molecular drug targets for the treatment of this mycobacterial disease. Despite being completely curable, tuberculosis is still one of the leading global causes of death. M. tuberculosis, the causative organism - one of the smartest pathogens known - adopts highly intelligent strategies for survival and pathogenesis. Presenting a wealth of information on the molecular infection biology of M. tuberculosis, as well as nontuberculous mycobacteria (NTM), the book provides an overview of the functional role of the PE/PPE group of proteins, which is exclusive to the genus Mycobacteria, of host-pathogen interactions, and virulence. It also explores the pathogenesis of the infection, pathology, epidemiology, and diagnosis of NTM. Finally it discusses current and novel approaches in vaccine development against tuberculosis, including the role of nanotechnology. With state-of-the-art contributions from experts in the respective domains, this book is an informative resource for practitioners as well as medical postgraduate students and researchers.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    R. Narian, editor.
    Summary: This book provides a knowledge-based view to the dynamic capabilities in an organization. The author integrates two existing views on gaining competitive advantage: the Knowledge View which suggests that the capability of organizations to learn faster than competitors is the only source of competitiveness; and the Dynamic Capability View which speculates that a firm's competitive advantage rests on it's ability to adapt to changes in the business environment. Using the IT sector in India as a case study, this book provides and tests a new framework-Knowledge-Based Dynamic Capabilities-in the prediction of competitive advantage in organizations.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Compositional biochemistry of lignocellulosic resources and an overview of their Mycodegradation
    Basic principle and mechanism of lignocellulosic Mycodegradation
    Efficient fungal enzyme system working in mycodegradation of lingo celluloses
    Fungal biodiversity producing cellulose involved in efficient cellulolysis
    Fungal biodiversity producing laccase and peroxidase involved in efficient ligninolysis
    Fungal biodiversity producing enzymes involved in efficient xylanolysis
    Fungal cellulase system and mechanism of cellulolysis during Mycodegradation
    Fungal pectinase system and mechanism of pectinolysis during Mycodegradation
    Strategic role of lactases during mycodegradation of lignocelluloses
    Application of mycodegradation in mushroom production. Selective mycodegradation of lignin in paper and pulp industry
    Mycodegradation and bioconversion of lignocelluloses into bioactive compounds
    Fungal digestion/treatment of lignocelluloses for nutritious animal fodder
    Fungal hydrolysis and saccharification of lignocellulosic wastes for bioethanol production
    Application of mycodegradation in production of secondary metabolites
    Mycodegradation of lignocelluloses and release of common metabolites
    Multiple factors influencing the strategy of Mycodegradation
    Bioconversion of lignocelluloses into nutrient rich Agaricus mushroom
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Gordon L. Love.
    Summary: "User-friendly guide containing more than 70 full-color fungal identifications of yeasts and molds (macroscopic and microscopic) plus detailed descriptions of the most significant morphologic elements, ecology, and clinical significance."-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    Ram Prasad, S. Chandra Nayak, Ravindra Nath Kharwar, Nawal Kishor Dubey, editors.
    Summary: Volume 3 covers recent research with expanded coverage on this important area of remediation. Mycoremediation is the form of bioremediation in which fungi-based technology is used to decontaminate the environment. Fungi are among the primary saprotrophic organisms in an ecosystem, as they are efficient in the decomposition of organic matter. Wood-decay fungi, especially white rot, secretes extracellular enzymes and acids that break down lignin and cellulose. Fungi have been proven to be a very cost-effective and environmentally-friendly way for helping to remove a wide array of toxins from damaged environments or wastewater. These toxins include heavy metals, persistent organic pollutants, textile dyes, leather tanning industry chemicals and wastewater, petroleum fuels, polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbon, pharmaceuticals and personal care products, pesticides and herbicides, in land, fresh water and marine environments. Bioremediation of toxic organics by fungi is the most sustainable and green route for cleanup of contaminated sites and we discuss the multiple modes employed by fungi for detoxification of different toxic and recalcitrant compounds including prominent fungal enzymes viz., catalases, general lipase, laccases, peroxidases and sometimes intracellular enzymes, especially the cyrochrome P450 monooxygeneses. Fungi play an important role in the biogeochemical cycling of manganese and other redox-active metals, which is related to their ability to survive radiation and other oxidative challenges. This book covers recent research with more detail on the various types of fungi and associated fungal processes used to clean up wastes and wastewaters in contaminated environments, and discusses their potential for environmental applications.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Bioremediation of Toxic Pesticides in Soil Using Some Microbial Products
    Microbial Enzymes in the Bioremediation of Polutants: Emerging Potential and Challenges
    Arbuscular Mycorrhizal Fungi and Remediation Potential of Soils Contaminated by Potentially Toxic Elements
    Nanotechnology and Bioremediation
    Mycoremediation through Redox Mechanisms of Organic Pollutants
    Role of Endophytes in Plant Associated Remediation and Plant Growth Promotion: A Deep Insight
    Microbial Remediation: A Natural Approach for Environmental Pollution Management
    Microbial Biocontrol Agents for Agricultural Soil Remediation: Prospects and Application
    Soil Bioremediation: An Insight into Available Green Technology and Future Developments
    Microbial Bioformulation Technology for Applications in Bioremediation
    Endophytic Fungi Interaction with Transgenic Plants
    Mycoremediation of Plastics for Efficient Waste Management: A Review
    Biotechnology of Beneficial Bacteria and Fungi Useful in Agriculture.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Marcela C. Pagano, Mónica A. Lugo, editors.
    Summary: This new book shows the work done by researchers dedicated to the study of different mycorrhizas types, the fungal species associated and their distribution influenced by geographical and environmental factors among the different South American biogeographic regions. The exclusive biotic and abiotic characteristics delimit natural ecosystems with uniques biological communities, where mycorrhizologists have investigated plant symbioses in those ecosystems for decades, providing data from Venezuelan Great Savannah, Andes, Puna, Chaco, Caatinga, Monte, Atlantic Forest, Marginal Forest, Cerrado, Patagonia, Yungas, Rainforest, Andean-Patagonian Forests, and Antarctic section. In these environments, different mycorrhizal associations (arbuscular / ericoid / orchidoid / ectomycorrhizal / mycoheterotrophic) are present in herbaceous plants, shrubs, and trees. Mycorrhizal associations were studied from different researching points of view (biodiversity, biological invasions, biotic / abiotic disturbances, altitudinal variations, seasonal changes, land uses). The aim of this Book is to compile research on mycorrhizal fungi and their associations in environments of South America, throughout the synthesis of information from natural and anthropogenic related environments. The book focuses in different bioregions of South America from tropical areas to the southern cone, and it will be useful to those who work on plant-fungal interactions in different vegetation types and in agricultural lands from South America and worldwide.

    Contents:
    Intro; Contents; About the Editors;
    Chapter 1: Overview of the Mycorrhizal Fungi in South America; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Mycorrhizal Symbioses in South America; 1.3 The Mycorrhizal Fungal Species in South America; 1.3.1 The ECM Fungal Species in South America; 1.3.2 The AMF Species in South America; 1.4 New Insights for AMF Conservation; 1.4.1 The Mycorrhizas in Protected Areas of South America; 1.4.2 The Mycorrhizal Species in the Soil Profile; 1.5 Conclusion; References
    Chapter 2: Latitudinal Distribution of Mycorrhizal Types in Native and Alien Trees in Montane Ecosystems from Southern South America2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Data Sources; 2.3 Mycorrhizal Distribution in Native Trees of Montane Forests from Argentina; 2.4 Mycorrhizal Distribution in Alien Trees Occurring in Montane Forests from Argentina; 2.5 Mycorrhizas and Plant Invasions; 2.6 Conclusions; References;
    Chapter 3: Biodiversity of Arbuscular Mycorrhizal Fungi in South America: A Review; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Arbuscular Mycorrhizal Morphospecies; 3.3 Arbuscular Mycorrhizal Fungi in South America 3.4 South American Arbuscular Mycorrhizal Morphospecies Diversity 3.4.1 Arbuscular Mycorrhizal Fungi Morphospecies Richness in South America; 3.4.2 Arbuscular Mycorrhizal Fungi in South America: Ecological Divisions; 3.5 Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 4: Ectomycorrhizal Fungi in South America: Their Diversity in Past, Present and Future Research; 4.1 Introduction. Primary Knowledge of Ectomycorrhizal Diversity at the Regional Level; 4.2 Current Knowledge and Biogeographical Considerations of Native Ectomycorrhizal Taxa in South America 4.2.1 Ectomycorrhizal Fungi in the Tropical and Subtropical Andes 4.2.2 Ectomycorrhizal Fungi in the Neotropical Forests of Northeastern South America and the Amazon Basin; 4.2.3 Ectomycorrhizal Fungi Associated with Nothofagaceae in the Andes of Patagonia; 4.3 Physiology and Cellular Biology of Nothofagaceae Ectomycorrhizae; 4.4 Chemistry and Chemotaxonomy of Nothofagaceae Ectomycorrhizal Fungi; 4.5 Mycosociology of South American Nothofagaceae Forests; 4.6 Concluding Remarks; References
    Chapter 5: A Systematic Review of South American and European Mycorrhizal Research: Is there a Need for Scientific Symbiosis? 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Systematic Review of Mycorrhizal Literature; 5.3 South American and European Mycorrhizal Research Trends; 5.4 Geographical and Thematic Gaps on South American Mycorrhizal Research; 5.5 Suggested Directions; References;
    Chapter 6: Endo- and Ectomycorrhizas in Tropical Ecosystems of Colombia; 6.1 Introduction; 6.2 The Study of Arbuscular Mycorrhizal Associations in Colombian Ecosystems; 6.3 The Study of Ectomycorrhizal Associations in Colombian Ecosystems
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    editors, Ajit Varma and Devendra K. Choudhary.
    Summary: The present book highlights importance of mycorrhiza in soil genesis wherein it reflects mycorrhizal occurrence and diversity, various tools to characterize them and its impact on soil formation/health together with crop productivity. The edited compendium provides glimpses on the mycorrhizal fungi and their prominent role in nutrient transfer into host plants, and presenting view on application of mycorrhiza for crop biofortification. It focuses on the mechanisms involve in weathering process employed by mycorrhiza with highlighting the current and advanced molecular approaches for studying mycorrhizal diversity. Further, book emphasizes following aspects in details: significance of AMF in phytoremediation of hydrocarbon contaminated sites, the role of mycorrhiza in soil genesis using scientometric approach, the concept of mycorrhizosphere, xenobiotic metabolism, molecular approaches for detoxifying the organic xenobiotics and the role of mycorrhizosphere in stabilizing the environment in an eco-friendly way. In addition, the book will be benign to researchers that involved in mycorrhiza characterization especially by deploying metagenomics/PCR based and non PCR based molecular techniques that may be utilized to study the microbial diversity and structure within the mycorrhizosphere.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; About the Editors;
    1: Mycorrhizal Mediated Micronutrients Transportation in Food Based Plants: A Biofortification Strategy; 1 Introduction; 2 Mycorrhiza: A Natural Phosphate Transporter for Co-Partner; 3 Essential Micronutrients and Related Problems with Their Deficiency; 4 Biofortification; 4.1 Agronomic Biofortification; 4.2 Genetic and Plant Breeding Approaches for Biofortification; 4.3 Biofortification with Microorganisms; 5 Why Mycorrhiza in Biofortification of Food Based Plants/Crops?; 6 Mechanisms of Nutrients Transportation 1 Introduction2 Microorganism as Ecological Engineers; 3 Mycorrhiza: Classification and Importance; 4 Contribution of Mycorrhizal Fungi in Sustainable Agriculture Practices; 5 Attributes of Mycorrhizal Fungi Towards Heavy Metal Remediation and Restoration of Degraded Land; 6 Mycorrhiza Involvement in Rehabilitation of Degraded Land; 7 Conclusion and Future Perspective; References;
    6: A Systematic Review on the Role of Mycorrhiza in Soil Genesis Using Scientometrics Analysis; 1 Introduction; 2 Scientometric Analysis; 3 Key Works in Selected Categories 3 Biosphere and Microorganisms4 Role of Microorganisms in Chemical Transformation; 4.1 Phosphorus Transformation; 4.2 Nitrogen Transformation; 5 Soil Genesis and Function of Microorganisms; 5.1 Microorganisms in Rocks and Minerals; 5.2 Mineralization, Humification and Soil Aggregation; 5.3 Microbial Metabolism in Soil; 5.4 Microorganisms in Polluted Soil; 6 Molecular Approach in Soil Microbiology; 6.1 Marker Gene; 6.2 RNA and Intrinsic Marker; 6.3 Cloning; 6.4 Metagenomics; 6.5 PCR; 7 Conclusion; References
    3: Mycorrhizal Assisted Phytoremediation of Xenobiotics from Contaminated Soil1 Introduction; 2 Mechanisms of Biodegradation and its Metabolite; 3 Biodegradation of Polyaromatic Hydrocarbons; 4 Factors Affecting Phytoremediation; 5 Conclusions; References;
    4: Relationship Between Field Crops and Mycorrhiza; 1 Introduction; 2 The Effect of Mycorrhizas on Biotic and Abiotic Stress Factors; 3 Effect of Mycorrhizas Against Plant Diseases; 4 Effect of Mycorrhiza on the Intake of Plant Nutrients; 5 Conclusion; References;
    5: Exploring the Role of Mycorrhizae as Soil Ecosystem Engineer 6.1 Mechanism of Phosphorus Transport6.2 Nitrogen; 6.3 Iron; 6.4 Zinc Solubilization; 6.5 Reduction in pH; 6.6 Zn Chelation; 6.7 Changes in Root Architecture; 7 Steps Lead to Mycorrhiza for Biofortification of Food Based Plants; 7.1 Zn Mobilization; 7.2 Iron; 7.3 Other Micronutrients; 8 Conclusion and Future Prospects; References;
    2: Role of Microorganisms in Soil Genesis and Functions; 1 Introduction; 2 Microbial Diversity and Soil Microorganisms (Eubacteria, Archaea, Fungi and Algae); 2.1 Eubacteria; 2.2 Actinomycetes; 2.3 Archaebacteria; 2.4 Fungi; 2.5 Algae
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by K. Esser ; volume editors: Dirk Hoffmeister and Markus Gressler.
    Summary: This volume provides a detailed look at various biochemical and developmental aspects of fungal cell biology, and offers extensive information on model organisms of filamentous fungi, such as Aspergillus, and yeasts, such as Saccharomyces, while also highlighting molecular differences between ascomycetes and basidiomycetes. The book's seven chapters, prepared by experts in the fields of mycology, have been grouped into two closely connected sections: "Fungal Cell Growth" and "Signals and Development". The first section addresses bio-molecular mechanisms of fungal cell division and polarized cell growth, with a special emphasis on cell-cell connections, cell wall synthesis, and directed protein transport. In turn, the second section describes the intra- and extracellular signals that set off biochemical and conformational changes of cell type during development. Here, the authors focus on the molecular signalling pathways, including their impact on plant-fungus interactions, referred to as ectomycorrhizal symbiosis.

    Contents:
    Series Preface; Volume Preface
    The Woronin Body: A Fungal Organelle Regulating Multicellularity
    Septum Formation and Cytokinesis in Ascomycete Fungi
    The Cytoskeleton and Polarity Markers During Polarized Growth of Filamentous Fungi
    Developmental Decisions in Aspergillus nidulans
    Signals and Development; Biomechanics of Hyphal Growth
    Molecular signaling during the ectomycorrhizal symbiosis
    Calcium cation cycling and signaling pathways in fungi.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    editors, Sofia Cancela Duarte, Celeste de Matos Lino, Angelina Lopes Simões Pena.
    Contents:
    Mycotoxins and their implications in food safety / Sofia Cancela Duarte, Angelina Lopes Simões Pena & Celeste de Matos Lino
    Aflatoxins / Carlos A.F. de Oliveira & Carlos H. Corassin
    Ochratoxin / A. Sofia Cancela Duarte, Angelina Pena & Celeste de Matos Lino
    Fumonisins : human health, presence in foods and biomarkers / Liliana J.G. Silva, Celeste M. Lino & Angelina L.S. Pena
    Zearalenone / Abdellah Zinedine & Maria‑Jose Ruiz
    Emerging mycotoxins : enniatins (A, A1, B and B1) and beauvericin / Cristina Juan García & Jesús Blesa Jarque
    Key analytical features of mycotoxins / Carla Soler & Jordi Mãnes
    Index.
    Digital Access Future Med 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Kazunori Sango, Junji Yamauchi, Toru Ogata, Keiichiro Susuki, editors.
    Summary: This book presents the latest exciting advances in understanding of the structure and function of myelin in the central and peripheral nervous systems under normal and pathological conditions. Readers will find state of the art information from the perspectives of both basic neuroscience and clinical neurology and neuropathology. Detailed attention is paid to the findings and implications of recent research on the myelin-forming glial cells such as oligodendrocytes and Schwann cells. The discussion of myelin pathology encompasses a wide range of diseases and conditions, including, for example, multiple sclerosis, Pelizaeus-Merzbacher disease, traumatic brain and spinal cord injuries, brain tumors of glial cell origin, Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease, immune-mediated neuropathy, and diabetic neuropathy. The authors comprise researchers at the cutting edge of biotechnology and experts in the diseases discussed. The clearly written text is supported by numerous high-quality light and electron microscopy, CT, and MR images.

    Contents:
    Part 1. Myelination in neural development and regeneration
    1. Cellular signal-regulated Schwann cell myelination and remyelination
    2. Regulatory mechanism of peripheral nerve myelination by glutamate-induced signaling
    3. Cytoskeletal signal-regulated oligodendrocyte myelination and remyelination
    4. Activity-dependent myelination
    5. Heterogeneity of oligodendrocytes and their precursor cells
    Part 2. Specialized structures along the myelinated nerve fibers
    6. Functional domains in myelinated axons
    7. Physiology of myelinated nerve conduction and pathophysiology of demyelination
    8. Under the ECM dome: the physiological role of the perinodal extracellular matrix as an ion diffusion barrier
    9. Oligodendrocyte physiology modulating axonal excitability and nerve conduction
    10. Mitochondrial dynamics in physiology and pathology of myelinated axons
    11. The role of sulfatides in axon-glia interactions
    12. Structures and molecular composition of Schmidt-Lanterman incisures
    Part 3. Myelin pathology in the central nervous system
    13. Pelizaeus-Merzbacher disease: molecular and cellular pathologies and associated phenotypes
    14. Multiple sclerosis
    15. Visualization of myelin for the diagnosis and treatment monitoring of multiple sclerosis
    16. Roads to formation of normal myelin structure and pathological myelin structure
    17. Therapeutic strategies for oligodendrocyte-mediated remyelination
    18. Brain tumors of glial cell origin
    Part 4. Myelin pathology in the peripheral nervous system
    19. Schwann cell and the pathogenesis of Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease
    20. Guillain- Barré Syndrome
    21. Chronic inflammatory demyelinating polyneuropathy
    22. Schwann cells as crucial players in diabetic neuropathy
    23. Drug-induced demyelinating neuropathies
    24. Transthyretin amyloid neuropathy: the Schwann cell hypothesis.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Uwe Platzbecker, Pierre Fenaux, editors.
    Summary: This book reviews the standard diagnostic and therapeutic management of patients with myelodysplastic syndromes (MDS) and examines ongoing research developments in the field. The importance of appropriate prognostic stratification, taking into account recent advances in understanding of the molecular pathogenesis of MDS, is explained, and both established and novel treatment approaches are discussed in depth. The coverage includes, for example, the use of erythropoietic stimulating agents, iron chelation therapy, the immunomodulator lenalidomide, hypomethylating agents such as azacitidine, and allogeneic hematopoietic stem cell transplantation. Myelodysplastic syndromes are heterogeneous and complex hematologic disorders ranging from indolent conditions to forms approaching the aggressiveness of acute myeloid leukemia. The diversity of MDS gives rise to challenges in diagnosis and clinical decision making, and the highly variable clinical course necessitates a risk-adapted treatment strategy and the application of disease-specific therapies. Hematologists, oncologists, and other interested clinicians will find this book to be an invaluable source of information on diagnostic and prognostic evaluation and treatment selection.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Siamon Gordon, Emeritus Professor of Cellular Pathology, Sir William Dunn School of Pathology, Oxford, United Kingdom.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Benjamin Greenberg, editor.
    Summary: Disorders of the spinal cord are diverse and potentially devastating. They can present as acute, subacute and chronic disorders causing a variety of symptoms. Patients can present to pediatricians, internists, OBGYNs, emergency room physicians and neurologists requiring a diversity of clinicians to be familiar with the signs, symptoms, recommended testing and treatment options. This book comprehensively addresses myelopathies, the broad spectrum of potential pathologies. Chapters cover approaches to acute, subacute and chronic myelopathies; individual myelopathic disorders; the pathobiology, epidemiology, signs, and symptoms of the disorder; diagnostic approach, and therapeutic options. This comprehensive review is beneficial to any clinician, with special emphasis for neurologists, neurosurgeons, neuroradiologists and physiatrists.

    Contents:
    Spine and Spinal Cord Anatomy
    Spinal Cord Physiology
    Imaging of the Spinal Cord
    Trauma
    Vascular Myelopathies
    Nutritional and Metabolic Myelopathies
    Infectious Myelopathies
    Inflammatory Myelopathies
    Malignancies of the Spinal Cord
    Radiation Myelitis
    Hereditary Myelopathies
    Neuroplasticity and the Spinal Cord
    Activity Based Therapy for Spinal Cord Disorders
    Functional Electrical Stimulation.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    M. Elizabeth Oates, Vincent L. Sorrell.
    Summary: This book will serve as a comprehensive reference source and self-assessment guide for physicians and technologists who practice myocardial perfusion SPECT imaging. Readers will learn to identify a wide variety of findings apart from the left ventricle, including those in the chest, the abdomen, and the right heart. It is explained which findings are clinically relevant and related to the reason for the myocardial perfusion imaging examination and which are incidental, with or without important clinical ramifications. The coverage includes a wide variety of common and uncommon focal lesions (e.g., benign or malignant neoplasms) and organ/systemic diseases (e.g., emphysema, cirrhosis and its sequelae, cholecystitis, duodenogastric reflux/gastroparesis, end-stage renal disease) that may be detected with myocardial perfusion SPECT imaging. In addition, guidance is provided in the recognition of typical artifacts, which may appear either "hot" or "cold" on the raw (unprocessed) and processed SPECT images, and, thereby, in the avoidance of potential interpretative pitfalls.

    Contents:
    Part 1 The Fundamentals: Acquisition
    Processing
    Interpretation
    Part 2 "Hot" and "Cold" Findings: Right Heart
    1. Right atrium
    2. Right ventricle
    Chest
    1. Skeleton
    2. Chest wall
    3. Thyroid gland
    4. Parathyroid glands
    5. Breasts
    6. Mediastinum
    7. Lungs and pleura
    8. Pericardium
    9. Vascular system
    10. Lymphatic system
    Abdomen
    1. Peritoneum
    2. Liver
    3. Gallbladder
    4. Spleen
    5. Stomach
    6. Small bowel
    7. Large bowel
    8. Kidneys
    9. Vascular system
    10. Lymphatic system
    Part 3 Case Challenges (for self-assessment).
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Dennis V. Cokkinos, editor.
    Summary: This timely book reveals an integrated approach to myocardial preservation focusing on translational research and clinical applications. Chapters cover both the mechanisms of heart failure in addition to therapeutic considerations, including forms of cardiac cell death, cardiac remodelling and cardiac regeneration. Potential future research directions are also proposed, enabling the reader to gain a broad in-depth understanding of the topic. Myocardial Preservation: Translational Research and Clinical Application presents a thorough review of myocardial preservation. Its comprehensive approach provides a valuable reference for cardiology researchers and practising and trainee cardiologists seeking new insight to the topic.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Alida L.P. Caforio, editor.
    Summary: This book is an up-to-date, comprehensive, clinically oriented guide to the diagnosis and treatment of patients with myocarditis. The opening chapters address the classification, histopathology and molecular diagnosis, as well as the polymorphic clinical presentations, ranging from myocardial infarction with normal coronary arteries; arrhythmias of variable type and clinical severity and fulminant, acute, sub-acute or chronic heart failure; to life-threatening unexplained cardiogenic shock and sudden cardiac death. Including chapters from leading International experts in the field, it covers all key issues from bench to bedside. Topics presented include epidemiology, etiology, pathogenesis, clinical and diagnostic work-up, the role of endomyocardial biopsy and of non-invasive cardiac imaging, risk stratification, and cardiological and etiology-specific management and follow-up. For each topic, a comprehensive review of the current literature is provided and practical suggestions are offered for short- and long-term management. Lastly, future perspectives and gaps in the current knowledge are also addressed. The book also covers a key discovery of last the 2 decades, namely the autoimmune origin of myocarditis in a sizable proportion of patients, discussing in detail the role of immunosuppression and immunomodulation, as well as the need for a multidisciplinary approach to the disease. Mainly intended for cardiologists, general physicians, clinical immunologists and rheumatologists, it is also a valuable tool for residents in Cardiology, Internal Medicine, Clinical Immunology and Rheumatology.

    Contents:
    Preface
    1 Classification, histopathology, Immunohistology and molecular diagnosis of Myocarditis
    2 Clinical presentation of Myocarditis
    3 Endomyocardial biopsy
    4 Genetic basis: myth or reality?
    5 Viral myocarditis: from experimental models to molecular diagnosis in patients
    6 Autoimmune myocarditis: animal models
    7 Electrocardiography
    8 Standard and advanced echocardiography.-9 Cardiac Magnetic resonance imaging in Myocarditis
    10 Organ-specific autoimmune myocarditis
    11 Myocarditis in systemic immune-mediated diseases
    12 Giant cell and hypersensitivity myocarditis
    13 Myocarditis in children
    14 Immunosuppressive therapy: lessons from clinical trials and future perspectives
    15 Immunomodulation and immunoadsorption in inflammatory dilated cardiomyopathy
    16 Clinical management and follow-up of Myocarditis patients on immunosuppressive therapy
    17 Antiviral therapies, a critical reappraisal
    18 Conventional Cardiological therapy
    19 Arrhythmias in Myocarditis
    20 Mechanical assist devices and heart transplantation.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Massimo Imazio.
    Contents:
    Part I. General Evaluation of Myopericardial Diseases
    1. Essential anatomy and physiology of the pericardium for clinical practice
    2. Aetiology and classification of pericardial diseases
    3. Diagnosis: history, physical examination and ECG
    4. Multimodality imaging of pericardial/myopericardial diseases
    5. Cardiac catherization and interventional techniques
    7. Surgery for pericardial diseases
    Part II. Myopericardial Syndromes
    8. Pericardial syndromes
    9. Acute pericarditis: management overview
    10. Acute pericarditis: specific aetiologies (non-viral, non-idiopathic)
    11. Recurrent pericarditis
    12. Pericarditis associated with myocardial involvement (myopericarditis/perimyocarditis)
    13. Pericardial effusion
    14. Cardiac tamponade
    15. Constrictive pericarditis
    16. Congenital abnormalities of the pericardium and pericardial masses
    Part III. Specific populations, Guidelines, Conclusions and Perspectives
    17. Age and gender issues in the management of pericardial diseases
    18. Guidelines on the management of pericardial diseases
    19. Conclusions
    20. Perspectives and unmet needs.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Kazuhisa Sugiyama, Nagahisa Yoshimura, editors.
    Summary: This book serves as an introductory reference on clinical aspects of glaucoma and myopia, providing essential guidelines for diagnosis and monitoring of glaucoma progression in patients, especially those with high myopias. Many clinical studies are presented by leading experts in the field in an accessible style, making the content suitable not only for ophthalmologists but also for optometrists and certified orthoptists as well as for students. The relation between myopia and glaucoma has been the subject of many clinical trials and population-based studies. Most of the data has suggested that moderate to high myopia is associated with increased risk of primary open-angle glaucoma, normal tension glaucoma, and ocular hypertension. There are several factors involved in the diagnosis of glaucoma, but it is often difficult to determine the presence of glaucoma in myopic eyes. A myopic eye, especially in cases of moderate to high myopia, tends to have a thin retina and choroid and to appear thinner than normal. Even with new imaging technologies with improved sensitivity and specificity for detecting glaucoma, each technology presents some challenges when assessing myopic eyes. This book furnishes an overview of these diagnostic challenges with reference to the growing prevalence and severity of myopia in various parts of the world, providing many valuable hands-on reports and clinical studies by authoritative authors. This knowledge will help to do away with the vague area between high myopia and glaucoma faced by clinicians.

    Contents:
    1. An epidemiologic perspective
    2. Clinical features in Myopic Glaucoma
    3. Glaucoma diagnosis in myopic eyes
    4. High Myopia and Myopic Glaucoma: Findings in the Peripapillary Retina and Choroid in Highly Myopic Eyes
    5. Visual Field Damage in Myopic Glaucoma
    6. Myopic Optic Neuropathy
    7. High Myopia and Myopic Glaucoma: Anterior Segment Features
    8. Ocular Blood Flow in Myopic Glaucoma.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Lynne M. Coluccio.
    Summary: Myosins are molecular motors that use the energy from ATP hydrolysis to move and exert tension on actin filaments. Although the best-known myosin is myosin II, which powers skeletal muscle contraction, there are at least two dozen classes of myosins, and cells generally express multiple isoforms. Myosins are involved in multiple cellular activities including cell structure, cell migration, intracellular trafficking, and cell-cell contact. Importantly, loss of function and mutation are associated with diseases including myopathies, hearing impairment, glomerulosclerosis, and cancer. Written by international experts in myosin motors and the approaches used to study them, this book is expected to provide a comprehensive assessment of the current status of our understanding of the structure and molecular mechanism of myosins and their cellular roles.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Myosin Structure
    Cargo Binding by Unconventional Myosins
    Cryo-EM of Actin-Myosin Structures
    Small Molecule Effectors of Myosin Function
    Single-Molecule Biophysical Techniques to Study Actomyosin Force Transduction
    High-Speed Atomic Force Microscopy to Study Myosin Motility
    How Myosin 5 Walks Deduced from Single-Molecule Biophysical Approaches
    How Actin Tracks Affect Myosin Motors
    Myosins in the Nucleus
    Myosins in Cytokinesis
    Myosins and Disease
    Myosins and Hearing
    The Actomyosin Systems in Apicomplexa
    Approaches to Identify and Characterise MYO6-Cargo Interactions
    Class IX Myosins: Motorized RhoGAP Signaling Molecules
    Myosin X
    Myosin XVI
    Myosin XVIII
    Myosin XIX.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Masanori P. Takahashi, Tsuyoshi Matsumura, editors.
    Summary: This book provides an essential overview combining both clinical and fundamental research advances in myotonic dystrophy. The pathomechanism of myotonic dystrophy has long been unclear, but in the past decade, our understanding has shifted to a novel disease mechanism concept: "RNA disease". Parallel to these advances in elucidating the pathophysiology, translational research is also progressing rapidly. The current challenge lies in assessing the effectiveness of treatment, and as such, there is a growing interest in observational studies of the disease's various clinical symptoms. The book introduces readers to the molecular mechanisms within each organ and the resultant clinical features, which are presented together. In particular, it focuses on the central nervous system, since the pathology of the brain (central nervous system manifestation) has rarely been addressed systematically and will pose a persistent challenge, even if therapies have greatly advanced in the future. In addition, the book addresses the latest developments, such as research using patient-derived iPS cells and therapeutic research. Myotonic Dystrophy provides essential information for neurologists and researchers with an interest in muscle disease, including muscular dystrophy. Furthermore, since the disease involves various complications of the brain, heart, metabolism, etc., the book will be of great value to clinicians and researchers in the cardiovascular sciences, endocrinology, diabetes, dementia, and neuropsychology, as well as genetic specialists.

    Contents:
    Genetics of myotonic dystrophy
    Molecular mechanisms of myotonic dystrophy : RNA-mediated pathogenesis and RNA-binding proteins
    Clinical features of skeletal muscle and their underlying molecular mechanism
    Cardiac involvements in myotonic dystrophy
    Clinical features of the central nervous system
    Brain pathology in myotonic dystrophy
    Molecular defects in the DM central nervous system
    Respiratory feature in myotonic dystrophy
    Glucose intolerance in myotonic dystrophy
    Lipid metabolism in myotonic dystrophy
    Dysphagia in myotonic dystrophy
    Diasease modeling and drug development with DM1 patient-derived iPS cells
    Therapeutic development in myotonic dystrophy.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
all 1444 "M" titles

Lane Library Bookmarklet

Lane Library Bookmarklet

To install, drag this button to your browser bookmarks or tools bar.

What is it?

Lane Library Bookmarklet

Bookmark on Other Websites

Bookmark on Lane

  • To Install, Right Click this Button.
  • Select "Add to Favorites" (click “Continue” if you see a security alert)
  • From the "Create in" menu, select “Favorites Bar” (IE8, IE9) to install
  • Once installed it will look like this
  • Click "Bookmark on Lane" to bookmark any webpage
  • Your saved bookmark will appear on this page
To Install, Right Click this Button.

What is it?

Beyond Stanford

Derived from Current Medical Diagnosis & Treatment, AccessMedicine's Quick Medical Diagnosis & Treatment provides topic reviews with key diagnostic and treatment features for more than 500 diseases.

A repository of medical knowledge from internal medicine, cardiology, genetics, pharmacy, diagnosis and management, basic sciences, patient care, and more.

Continuously expanding, all databases in the repository contain the latest editions of selected medical titles.

MicroMedex: Premier pharmaceutical information source containing multiple databases and drug reference tools. Of particular value is DRUGDEX Evaluations, one of the most comprehensive drug sources available. DynaMed is a clinical information resource used to answer questions quickly at the point-of-care. Easy-to-interpret Levels of Evidence help clinicians rapidly determine the quality of the available evidence.

Biomedical and pharmacological abstracting and indexing database of published literature, by Elsevier. Embase® contains over 32 million records from over 8,500 currently published journals (1947-present) and is noteworthy for its extensive coverage of the international pharmaceutical and alternative/complementary medicine literature.

Scopus is the largest abstract and citation database of peer-reviewed literature: scientific journals, books and conference proceedings. A drug information resource containing: American Hospital Formulary System (AHFS), drug formulary for Lucile Packard Children's Hospital (LPCH) and Stanford Hospital & Clinics (SHC), Lexi-Drugs (adverse reactions, dosage and administration, mechanism of action, storage, use, and administration information), Lexi-Calc, Lexi-ID, Lexi-I.V. Compatibility (King Guide), Lexi-Interact, and Lexi-PALS. Cumulative Index to Nursing and Allied Health Literature (CINAHL) contains coverage of nursing and allied health literature. A knowledge database that provides access to topic reviews based on over 6000 clinically relevant articles. The evidence-based content, updated regularly, provides the latest practice guidelines in 59 medical specialties. Provides critical assessments of systematic reviews compiled from a variety of medical journals. Selects from the biomedical literature original studies and systematic reviews that are immediately clinically relevant and then summarizes these articles in an enhanced abstract with expert commentary.

Multidisciplinary coverage of over 10,000 high-impact journals in the sciences, social sciences, and arts and humanities, as well as international proceedings coverage for over 120,000 conferences.

Includes cited reference searching, citation maps, and an analyze tool.

Features systematic reviews that summarize the effects of interventions and makes a determination whether the intervention is efficacious or not.

Cochrane reviews are created through a strict process of compiling and analyzing data from multiple randomized control trials to ensure comprehensiveness and reliability.

Provides systematic coverage of the psychological literature from the 1800s to the present through articles, book chapters and dissertations. PIER (Physicians' Information and Education Resource) is a Web-based decision-support tool designed for rapid point-of-care delivery of up-to-date, evidence-based guidance for primary care physicians. Cochrane Central Register of Controlled Trials (CENTRAL) provides access to 300,000 controlled trials that have been identified the Cochrane Collaboration. Provides drug information targeted for patients. A continually updating drug monograph. ECRI Guidelines Trust: A comprehensive database of evidence-based clinical practice guidelines and related documents. MedlinePlus: A repository of health information from the National Library of Medicine. Links are from trusted sites. No advertising, no endorsement of commercial companies or products LPCH CareNotes via MicroMedex: Patient education handouts customized by LPCH clinical staff Micromedex Lab Advisor: Evidence based laboratory test information Provides patient handouts from the American Academy of Family Physician.

Largest, broadest eBook package; covers all sciences, as well as technology (including software), medicine, and humanities.

In addition to covering Wiley and Springer, MyiLibrary is also the only provider for Oxford and Cambridge University Press titles. No seat restrictions.

A collection of biomedical books that can be searched directly by concept, and linked to terms in PubMed abstracts.

A web-based, decision support system for infectious diseases, epidemiology, microbiology and antimicrobial chemotherapy. The database, updated weekly, currently includes 337 diseases, 224 countries, 1,147 microbial taxa and 306 antibacterial (-fungal, -parasitic, -viral) agents and vaccines.

Over 10,000 notes outline the status of specific infections within each country.

Large number of high quality software and database programming titles from O'Reilly. Other software titles are also available from Sams and Prentice Hall. Limited to 7 concurrent users. Includes peer-reviewed life science and biomedical research protocols compiled from Methods in Molecular Biology, Methods in Molecular Medicine, Methods in Biotechnology, Methods in Pharmacology and Toxicology, Neuromethods, the Biomethods Handbook, the Proteomics Handbook, and Springer Laboratory Manuals. Contains full text access to selected biomedical and nursing books.

Provides online, full-text access to Springer's journal titles as well as journals from other publishers.

Subjects include: life sciences, chemical sciences, environmental sciences, geosciences, computer science, mathematics, medicine, physics and astronomy, engineering and economics. Also includes eBooks.

Collection of over 8 thousand fulltext titles in engineering, math, and basic and applied biomedical research. Coverage is from 1967 to the present. A library of ebooks on a wide array of topics, digitized and made available online in conjunction with the original publishers.